w 


Division      ^         ^  *  ' 

Section      I  *^  ^ ' 


r:q4 


-J 

Clath's  ipeoplcs  Comnientac^ 

THE 

ACTS  OF  THE  APOSTLES 

A  POPULAR  COJOIENTARY  UPOX  A  CPvITICAL 
BASIS,  ESPECIALLY  DESIGNED  FOR  PASTORS 
AND  SUNDAY  SCHOOLS  <S>'S><S><S><J'<S>'S>^^<»<$><$><$>^ 


APR  2C  1924 
GEO.  AV.  CLARK,  D,  D.       ^^'<SiOBim  %l^ 


Author  of  "A  New  Harmony  of  the  Gospels,"  etc. 


-A.  nsTEVT"  ^ft-nsriD   pieviseid   'Etdttxcdtst 


PHILADELPHIA 

AMERICAN  BAPTIST  PUBLICATION  SOCIETY 

1701  Chestnut  Street 

1917 


Copyright  18% 
By  the  American  Baptist  Publication  Society 


INTRODUCTION. 


THE   ANTIQUITY   OF  THE   ACTS. 

The  Book  of  the  Acts  may  be  traced  back  to  the  first  century  of  the 
Christiiin  era.  It  is  found  in  the  Greek  original  in  no  less  than  about 
two  hundred  and  sixty  of  the  later  or  Cursive  manuscripts ;  and  in  eight 
or  nine  of  the  chief  Uncial  or  earlier  manuscripts.  Of  the  latter  are 
the  four  oldest,  the  Ephraim  in  the  Imperial  Librarj^  of  Paris,  and  the 
Alexandrine  in  the  British  Museum  at  London,  ))oth  written  about  the 
middle  of  the  fifth  century ;  the  Sinaitic  in  the  Imperial  Library  at  St. 
Petersburg,  and  the  ^'atican  in  the  Vatican  Library  at  Eome,  both 
written  about  the  middle  of  the  fourth  century.  Earlier  manuscripts 
than  these  are  presupposed  by  the  ancient  veisions  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment extending  further  back  over  two  centuries.  Thus  the  Acts  is 
found  in  the  Latin  version  of  Jerome  of  the  fourth  century,  the  Bash- 
muric,  an  Egyptian  version  of  the  third  century,  and,  besides  other 
earlier  versions,  in  the  Peshito  Syriac,  and  the  Old  Latin,  near  the 
beginning  of  the  second  century.  The  two  latter  implj^  an  earlier  Greek 
original  of  the  first  century.  To  this  may  be  added  the  testimony  of 
the  early  catalogues  of  the  New  Testament  books,  and  of  early  Christian 
writers.  Thus  the  book  of  the  Acts  is  named  in  the  catalogue  of 
Eusebius  (A.  D.  .315),  of  Origen  (A.  D.  2.37),  and  of  the  Peshito  version 
early  in  the  second  century,  implying  that  it  was  already  recognized  as 
a  part  of  the  New  Testament  writings.  It  is  referred  to  frequently  by 
Tertullian,  who  lived  about  A.  D.  200,  and  by  Clement  of  Alexandria, 
who  flourished  about  A.  D.  100.  It  is  mentioned  in  the  Muratorian 
fragment  written  before  A.  D.  170.  Hcgesippus,  Avho  lived  in  the  early 
part  of  the  second  century,  is  said  to  have  written  a  commentary  upon 
it.  Polycarp,  who  was  martyred  A.  D.  167,  appears  to  quote  Acts  10: 
41  in  his  P^pistle  to  the  Smyrneans,  (^3) ;  and  Ignatius,  who  died  A.  D. 
107,  seems  to  allude  to  Acts  2:  41  in  his  Papistic  to  the  Philippians,  (?1). 
All  these  imply  its  previous  existence ;  and  as  a  sequel  to  the  third  Gos- 
pel it  manifestly  appears  as  the  pi-oduct  of  the  first  century.  And  this 
accords  with  the  exact  character,  historical  contents,  and  vivid  style  of 
the  book,  as  written  at  or  near  the  time  of  the  events,  and  with  the 
voice  of  antiquity.  All  attempts  to  prove  that  it  was  written  in  the 
second  century  have  resulted  in  signal  failures. 

3 


4  INTRODUCTION. 


ITS   AUTHENTICITY. 

Of  the  truthfulness  and  con-ectness  of  the  narrative  in  the  Acts 
there  can  he  no  doubt.    This  appears : 

1.  In  its  minute  agreement  with  contemporaneous  history  and 
geography.  It  alhides  to  more  tlian  a  hundred  towns  and  cities  with- 
out a  single  error.  Its  references  to  persons,  places,  and  events  in  Pales- 
tine exhibit  remarkable  accuracy.  It  traces  more  or  less  closely  the 
journeys  of  Paul  through  Asia  ]\Iinor,  Greece,  and  to  Rome,  and  every- 
where accords  with  ancient  history  and  geography.  Its  descriptions  of 
customs,  mannere,  and  usages  correspond  with  what  we  know  of  them 
from  other  sources.  Its  allusions  to  public  officials  at  Paphos,  Philippi, 
Thes.«alonica,  Athens,  Corinth,  Ephesus,  ]Melita,  and  Rome  are  confirmed 
by  contemporaneous  writers  and  ancient  inscriptions.  And  in  all  tliis, 
the  whole  narrative,  without  any  eflTort  toward  consistency  or  any  indi- 
cation of  contrivance,  exhibits  that  simplicity  and  artlessness  which 
accompany  the  testimony  of  one  in  whom  there  is  no  guile. 

2.  In  the  agreement  of  the  speeches  and  P^pistles  of  Peter,  James, 
and  Paul,  in  style  and  thought.  Each  of  these  had  striking  peculiari- 
ties, and  their  individuality  is  marked  in  their  respective  addresses  and 
Epistles.  The  unstudietl  character  of  these  agreements,  without  the 
least  sign  of  any  attempt  at  imitation,  is  an  evidence  of  their  truthful- 
ness.      (See  notes  on  2  :  41  ;  3  :  2fi  ;  4  :  20  ;  15  :  29  ;  20  :  18, 19.  24,  32.) 

o.  In  the  many  remarkable  correspondences  between  the  narrative 
of  the  Acts  and  the  P^pistles  of  Paul.  These  have  reference  to  the  inci- 
dental and  pei-sonal  experience.^?,  and  are  such  as  could  not  have  been 
the  result  of  accident  or  design.  There  is  no  trace  of  the  use  of  the 
Epistles  in  the  Acts,  nor  of  the  use  of  the  Acts  in  the  Epistles.  Yet  the 
one  confirms  and  supplements  the  other  without  a  single  contradiction. 
These  correspondences  are  aptly  styled  by  Dr.  Paley  "  undesigned  coinci- 
dences." And  the  more  obscure  they  are  the  stronger  the  argument 
derived  from  them.  By  their  means  Dr.  Paley  in  his  Horx  Pmiliux  has 
unanswerably  demonstrated  the  truth  of  the  Acts.  These  are  presented 
to  the  eye  and  noted  upon  in  Clark's  Harmonic.  Armniyrmml  of  the  Acts. 

4.  In  standing  the  test  of  modern  criticism.  No  book  has  been 
more  thoroughly  examined,  compared,  and  sifted,  both  by  friends  and 
foes,  than  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles.  Everj-  journey  and  every  voyage 
have  been  retraced,  and  every  place  has  been  revisited  f(ir  the  purpose  of 
verifying  the  narrative.  With  it  the  results  of  modem  discovery  liave 
been  carefully  compared,  and  to  it  the  latest  scientific  investigations 
have  been  applied ;  and  in  every  instance  the  book  of  Acts  lias  stood 
the  test.  Its  minute  and  topographical  peculiarities,  and  its  hundreds 
of  incidental  allusions,  have  stood  the  sharpest  criticism,  and  have  been 
confirmed  by  the  writings  of  profane  historians,  the  coins  and  monu- 
ments of  the  apostolic  age,  and  the  researches  of  travelei-s  and  scholars. 


INTRODUCTION. 


Such  wonderful  accuracy  indicates,  not  only  the  carefulness  and  coi-rect- 
ness  of  the  writer,  but  also  his  divine  guidance  in  the  avoidance  of 
error. 

ITS   AUTHORSHIP. 

The  author  of  the  Acts  was  with  Paul  at  Philippi  (is :  10-13),  and 
afterwards  his  traveling  companion  from  thence  to  Jerusalem,  and  from 
Ciesarea  to  Home  (ciiapteis  21,  ^7,  m).  This  is  evident  from  the  use  of 
the  fii'st  person.  It  could  not  have  been  Silas  (16:19.40)  nor  Timothy 
(20:4,5),  for  these  are  spoken  of  in  the  third  person,  whereas  the 
writer  speaks  of  liimself  in  the  first  person,  and  is  thus  distinguished, 
not  only  from  them,  but  also  from  all  other  persons  named  in  the  Acts. 
The  most  natural  conclusion  is  that  it  was  Luke  who  was  with  Paul  at 
Rome  (puiiem.i4;  Col. 4:1*),  aud  is  styled  by  him,  "Luke  the  beloved  phy- 
physician"  (coi.4:i4).  This  is  confirmed  by  its  relation  to  the  third 
Gospel.  It  is  evident  that  both  books  were  written  by  the  same  author. 
Both  are  addressed  to  Theophilus,  and  a  reference  is  made  to  a  former 
treatise  in  Acts  1 :  1.  There  is  a  strong  resemblance  in  the  style  of  the 
two  books.  Dr.  Thayer  in  his  Greek  Lexicon  of  (he  New  Testament  notes 
sixty-one  words  which  are  found  only  in  the  Gospel  of  Luke  and  in  the 
Acts.  We  find  in  both  a  knowledge  of  disease  and  the  use  of 
medical  terms  such  as  we  should  expect  in  the  writing  of  a  physician. 

(Luke  4  :  38 ;  8 :  43,  44  ;  Acta  3  :  7  ;  12 :  23 ;  13  :  11 ;  28  :  8.)      The    narrative    tlirOUghout    the 

Acts  exhibits  the  same  careful  research  as  that  shown  in  Luke's 
Gospel;  and  the  style  is  everywhere  the  same,  except  Avhere  it  re- 
ports the  speeches  or  writings  of  others.  It  is  manirestly  not  the 
work  of  two  or  more  authors,  nor  a  mere  compilation,  but  the  con- 
tinuous and  harmonious  narrative  of  one  man,  that  of  Luke,  the  writer 
of  the  third  Gospel.  Such,  too,  is  the  uniform  testimony  of  early 
Christian  writers,  and  there  comes  to  us  no  dissent  from  early  tmdition. 
Very  little  is  known  of  Luke,  and  he  is  only  mentioned  three  times 
in  the  New  Testament.  See  references  above.  Paul  probably  speaks  of 
him  in  2  Cor.  8:  18,  19,  when  writing  from  Philippi,  as  "the  brother 
whose  praise  is  in  the  gospel  througliout  all  the  churches  "  (20:6).  That 
he  was  a  Gentile  appears  from  Col.  4:  11-14,  Avhere  he  is  distinguished 
from  those  of  the  circumcision,  and  from  his  name  Lucas,  an  abbrevia- 
tion of  Lucanus.  The  purity  of  his  Greek  and  his  intimate  knowledge 
of  that  language  point  also  to  his  heathen  extraction.  At  the  same 
time  his  familiarity  with  the  Jewish  religion,  ceremonies,  and  customs, 
makes  it  probable  that  in  early  life  he  had  been  at  least  a  proselyte  of 
the  gate.  Early  tradition  fixes  his  birthplace  at  Antioch.  The  tradi- 
tions regarding  his  later  life  do  no  agree.  According  to  one  he  died  a 
martyr  in  Greece  in  his  eightieth  year.  According  to  others,  perhaps 
more  trustworthy,  he  died  a  natural  death.  Jerome  in  his  life  of  Luke, 
says  that  he  died  at  the  age  of  eighty-four,  that  hia  bones  weie  trans- 


INTRODUCTION. 


ported  from  Achaia  to  Constantinople  in  the  twenty-eighth  year  of 
Constantino.    Compare  Introduction  to  Luke's  Gospel. 

TIME   AND   PLACE  OF   ITS  COMPOSITION. 

The  most  probable  date  of  Paul's  arrival  at  Eome  was  the  spring  of 
A.  D.  ()1 ;  and  the  narrative  of  the  Acts  extends  two  years  later  to  A.  D. 
63.  But  it  is  implied  throughout  that  Jeiusalem  and  the  temple  were 
standing  and  there  is  no  reference  to  their  destruction,  which  occurred 
A.  D.  70.  It  may  therefore  be  said  that  the  Acts  was  published  be- 
tween the  Spring  of  A.  D.  63  and  70.  But  its  abrupt  termination,  and 
the  absence  of  any  reference  to  Paul  afterward,  either  to  his  liberation 
or  martyrdom,  seem  to  point  to  the  close  of  the  two  years  of  Paul's  im- 
prisonment as  the  time  of  its  completion  and  publication.  And  if  this 
be  the  date,  then  it  is  most  natural  to  conclude  that  Luke  wrote  it  at 
Rome  during  these  two  years,  and  under  Paul's  direction, 

SOURCES   OF   INFORMATION. 

In  about  one-third  of  the  Acts  Luke  writes  as  an  eye  witness — 
16 :  10-40 ;  20 :  6,  to  the  end  of  the  book.  From  Paul  he  would  naturally 
get  accounts  of  his  persecution,  conversion,  and  missionary  journeys. 
From  Philip  of  Ciosarea  he  would  learn  regarding  the  appointment  of 
the  seven,  the  preaching  in  Samaria,  and  the  convei-sion  and  baptism  of 
tlie  eunuch  ;  and  in  connection  with  Paul,  of  the  speech  and  martyrdom 
of  Stephen.  From  James,  as  well  as  Paul,  he  could  obtain  all  needful 
information  regarding  the  Apostolic  Conference  at  Jerusalem,  and 
most  of  the  events  recorded  in  the  early  part  of  the  Acts.  While  Paul 
was  imprisoned  at  Cjcsarea,  Luke  was  doubtless  gathering  materials 
from  "  eye  witnesses  and  ministers  of  the  word "  and  preparing  his 
Gospel  (Luke  1:2),  and  at  the  same  time  he  would  naturally  gather 
much  material  for  the  Acts.  He  very  likely  met  with  Peter,  and  John, 
and  INLary  the  mother  of  Mark,  and  with  many  others  of  tlie  one  hun- 
dreil  and  twenty  (i ;  i'),  from  whom  lie  gatliered  accounts  of  Pentecost 
and  of  subsequent  events.  At  C;esarea  he  could  receive  corroljorative 
accounts  of  the  convei-sion  of  Cornelius  and  the  death  of  Herod. 

In  this  connection  it  is  interesting  to  notice  the  speeches  of  the 
Acts,  given  more  or  less  fully  by  Luke,  A\ith  marks  of  condensation. 
All  of  these  in  style  and  thought  indicate  their  respective  authors ;  yet 
their  setting  into  the  narrative  shows  the  hand  and  style  of  Luke. 
Alford  has  shown  from  Paul's  speech  in  Hebrew  before  the  Jewish  mob 
(22:1-21),  that  Luke  probably  translated  it  into  Greek  from  having 
heard  it  delivered.  So  probably  the  speeches  of  Peter  and  Stephen 
were  written  out  by  some  who  heard  them  ;  and  Luke,  under  the  guid- 
ance of  the  Spirit,  has  truly  presented  their  substance  or  their  very 
words,  as  the  Spirit  deemed  important. 


INTRODUCTION. 


THE   DESIGN   AND   NATURE   OK  THE   ACTS. 

The  design  of  a  writer  must  be  distinguished  from  the  objects 
accomplished  by  his  work,  or  the  providential  uses  made  of  it.  This  is 
especially  true  of  the  Acts.  As  a  sequel  to  Luke's  Gospel  it  naturally 
has  a  similar  design.  This  Luke  thus  expresses  to  Theophilus,  "That 
thou  mightest  know  the  certainty  concerning  the  things  wherein  thou 
was  instructed."  (Luke  i:  4.)  Not  that  it  was  intended  for  Theophilus 
alone,  but  he  was  selected  as  a  person  of  rank,  representing  Chris- 
tians generally,  both  Jews  and  Gentiles.  The  same  general  design  is 
manifested  in  the  Acts.  As  in  his  Gospel  Luke  tells  "  concerning  all 
things  that  Jesus  began  to  do  and  teach  "  (1  :i),  so  in  the  Acts  he  contin- 
ues to  narrate  what  Jesus,  after  his  resurrection  and  ascension,  began  to 
do  and  teach  through  his  Holy  Spirit  in  connection  with  his  disciples. 
The  doing  consisted  in  organizing  and  developing  the  church  at  Jerusa- 
lem, its  baptism  in  the  Holy  Spirit,  in  the  conversion  of  men,  and  in 
planting  churches  both  among  Jews  and  Gentiles.  The  tmchhuj  con- 
sisted in  the  guidance  of  the  Apostles  in  preaching  the  gospel,  training 
the  converts,  and  gathering  them  into  churches ;  also  in  the  apprehen- 
sion of  truth,  and  making  known  its  relations  to  both  Jews  and  Gentiles, 
and  their  relation  to  each  other.  The  book  is  emphatically  a  book  of 
heghinings,  at  Jerusalem,  in  Samaria,  throughout  Judea,  at  Antioch, 
throughout  Asia  Minor,  and  Greece  and  at  Rome.  It  consists  of  sketches 
of  the  success  of  the  early  preachers  of  the  gospel,  attended  by  the 
Holy  Spirit,  from  Jerusalem  the  capital  of  Judaism  to  Rome  the  metrop- 
olis of  the  heathen  world.  It  thus  presents  the  fulfillment  of  our  Lord's 
prediction,  "  Ye  shall  be  my  witnesses,  both  in  Jerusalem,  and  in  all 
Judea  and  Samaria,  and  unto  the  uttermost  part  of  the  earth  "  (1  ^ ») ; 
with  the  methods  and  measures  by  which  this  Avas  accomplished. 

ITS   RELATION  TO  THE   GOSPELS   AND   THE   EPISTLES. 

The  Acts  of  the  Apostles  is  the  central  book  of  the  New  Testament. 
Toward  it  the  Gospels  converge,  as  pi'eparatory ;  from  it  the  Epistles 
diverge,  as  complemental.  Tlie  Gospel  narratives  culminate  in  the  res- 
urrection of  Christ ;  the  book  of  Acts  starts  with  the  risen  and  ascended 
Saviour,  and  narrate  how  he  wrought  with  and  through  his  disciples  by 
the  Holy  Spirit.  And  each  step  in  the  progress  of  this  work  is  attributed 
with  equal  distinctness  to  the  Lord  Jesus  and  to  the  Holy  Spirit.  (1 : 2;  2 : 4, 
17,33,38;  4:  10,31;  5: 14,19.)  The  prescuce  of  Jcsus  with  his  di.sciples  for  forty 
days,  and  the  account  of  his  ascension,  connect  the  Acts  with  the  Gos- 
pels. The  baptism  of  John  (lo:  3T;  i3:24;  is:  25;  19: 4),  the  baptism  of  the 
Holy  Spirit  (i:  5, 8;  u:  16),  the  preaching  of  Jesus  and  the  re.surrection  (4:  .1, 
33;  17;  18;  24:  is),  the  appeaniuce  of  Jesus  to  Stephen  and  to  Saul  of  Tarsus 
(7: 53;  9: 17),  aiid  his  prcscncc  with  his  disciples  in  fulfillment  of  his 
last  commission,  are  connecting  links  between  the  Acts  and  the  Gos- 


8 


INTRODUCTION. 


pels.  Viewed  as  an  account  of  the  continued  work  of  our  Lord,  it  has 
been  styled  the  Fifth  Gospel ;  as  illustratin<;:  the  power  and  work  of  the 
Holy  Spirit,  the  Gospel  of  the  Spirit;  and,  as  combining  the  two,  the 
Gospel  of  the  Post- Ascension. 

No  less  vital  is  the  relation  of  the  Acts  with  the  Epistles.  The  for- 
mer in  numerous  places  are  supplemented  by  the  latter,  and  the  latter 
cannot  be  fully  understood  without  the  historical  details  of  the  former. 
As  the  Gospels  present  the  fundamental  truth.s  of  Christianity,  and  the 
Acts  its  individual  and  church  life,  so  the  Epistles  present  more  fully 
and  systematically  its  doctrines  and  piac-tical  teachings.  The  gifts 
of  the  Spirit  (Acts2an(jicor.  12),  the  benevolence,  the  authority,  and  the 
othcials  of  the  church,  the  passing  away  of  the  Old  Testament  Economy, 
the  throwing  down  of  the  middle  wall  of  paiiition  between  Jews  and 
(lentiles,  the  doctrines  of  repentance  and  justitication  by  faith,  of  the 
resurrection  and  the  final  judgment,  and  the  practices  of  baptism,  the 
Lord's  Supper,  and  the  ordination  of  the  ministry,  are  some  of  the 
many  links  connecting  the  Acts  with  the  Epistles.  The  following  par- 
allel passages,  taken  from  the  Author's  Hannonir  Arrangement  of  lite  Acts, 
exhibit  the  principal  historical  connections  of  the  two : 


ACTS. 

1:  3. 
2 :  15, 16. 
2:  •A2. 
2:  33. 
6:  1. 
9:  20-22. 
9:  25. 
9 :  2t;,  30. 
12 :  25. 
13:  14. 
14 :  5,  6. 
14:  19. 
15:  1-10, 
15:  23. 

16:  1. 

16:  3. 

16:  6. 
16:  13 

16 :  23,  24. 

17:  3. 
17:  5,6. 
17:  14,15. 


EPISTLES. 

1  Cor.  15 :  3-8. 
a  Peter  1 :  21, 
1  Cor.  15 :  6 
1  Peter  1 :  12. 

1  Tim.  5:  9,10. 
Gal.  1 :  15, 16. 

2  Cor.  11 :  32,  33. 
Gal.  1 :  18-24. 

2  Cor.  12 :  2 

2  Cor.  11 :  2fi. 

2  Tim.  3:  10,11, 

2  Cor.  11 :  25. 

Gal.  2 :  1-10. 

James  1 :  1. 

2  Tim.  1 :  5. 

2  Tim.  3 :  15. 

1  Cor.  9 :  20. 

1  Tim.  4:  14. 

Gal.  4:  13. 

Phil.  4:  2.3. 
f  Phil.  1 :  29,  30. 
\  2  Cor.  11 :  25. 
(.1  Thess.  2:  2. 

1  Thess.  1 :  5-9 

1  Thess.  2:  9,  14. 

1  Thess.  3:  1,2. 
fl  Cor.  4:  11,12. 
12  Cor.  11:  8,9. 


18:  5. 

18:  8,17. 
18:  26, 
19:  20, 
19:  21. 
19:  27. 

20:  1. 


20:  2. 


20:  4. 

20 :  34,  35. 
21 :  2:i-26. 
23:  5. 


24:  17. 


26:  20, 
28:  16, 

28 :  30,  31, 


EPISTLES, 

/2Cor.  1:  19. 
\  1  Thess.  3 :  6. 

1  Cor.  1:  1,14. 

1  Cor.  16 :  19. 

1  Cor.  16 :  8-10. 

Rom.  1 :  13. 

Eph.  2:  20,21, 
(2  Cor.  2:  12. 
\  2  Cor.  7 :  5. 
{  Rom.  15 :  19. 
f2Cor.  1:  16. 
■{  2  Cor.  12 :  14. 
(  2  Cor.  13  :  1. 
JRom.  16:  1.21.23. 
(Rom.  15:  25,26, 

1  Cor.  4:  11,12, 

1  Cor.  9 :  19-22, 

Rom.  13:  1. 
f  Rom.  15 :  25,  26. 
J  1  Cor.  16 :  3. 
1  2  Cor.  8:  1,2. 
I  2  Cor.  9:  1.2. 

Rom.  15 :  18.  19. 

Phil.  1 :  12-14. 
fEph.  6:  18-20. 
J.  Phil.  2.  23,  34. 
(Philem.  9,  22, 


QUOTATIONS   FROM   THE   OLD   TESTAMENT. 

The  relation  of  the  Acts  to  the  Old  Testament  is  seen  in  its  histori- 
cal and  incidental  allusions,  but  especially  in  its  numerous  quotations. 
There  are  ninety  places  in  the  Acts  where  quotations  are  made  from  no 
less  than  one  hundred  and  thirty  passages  of  the  Old  Testament.   The.se 


INTRODUCTION.  9 


are  found  principally  in  the  speeches  of  I'oter  and  Paul,  James  and 
h^tephen.  Of  these,  twenty-seven  are  from  the  l)ook  of  Exodus,  twenty 
from  the  Psalms,  nineteen  from  ( Jenesis,  fourteen  from  Isaiah,  eleven 
from  Deuteronomy,  six  from  Jeremiah,  three  from  Numbers,  two  from 
Joshua,  first  Kings,  and  Amos,  eai-h,  and  one  from  Leviticus,  lirst  Samuel, 
first  Chronicles,  Jeremiah,  Hosea,  and  Habakkuk,  earh.  By  " book  of 
the  prophets "  (' :  *'^),  is  meant  the  twelve  minor  prophets,  whom  the 
Jews  reckoned  in  one  collection. 

The  quotations  principally  follow  the  Greek  of  the  Septuagint  ver- 
sion, which  was  in  common  use  in  that  day,  especially  among  foreign 
Jews,  but  with  freiiuent  variations,  and  sometimes  apparent  corrections 
from  the  Hebrew,  f^uch  variations  may  be  jiartly  accounted  for  from 
the  custom  of  quoting  fiom  memory.  It  was  also  the  inner  meaning, 
the  spiritual  significance  which  was  sought  after.  Thus  Peter  and 
others  in  the  Acts  generally  used  tlie  Septuagint  as  their  guide  and 
source  of  quotation,  following  its  defects  in  unimportant  points,  but, 
under  the  guidance  of  the  promised  Spirit,  correcting  it  and  even  inter- 
preting it,  where  it  was  necessary. 

These  quotations  may  be  divided  into  five  kinds:  (1)  Complete 
quotations,  complete  both  in  sense  and  form.  That  found  in  28 :  26,  27, 
from  Isa.  6:  9,  10,  is  a  good  example.  Others  may  be  found  in  2:  25- 
28;  4:  25,  26;  13:  33.  (2)  Abridged  quotations,  from  which  words  or 
phrases  are  omitted,  generally  from  the  body  of  the  quotation.  Thus 
7:  3  is  quoted  from  Gen.  12:  1,  and  the  phrase  "and  from  thy  father's 
house"  is  omitted  after  "from  thy  kindred."  The  latter  clause,  how- 
ever, includes  the  idea  of  the  former.  In  such  abridgements  nothing  is 
generally  lost  from  the  essential  sense.  (3)  P(»r/ /<// quotations,  consisting 
of  words  and  phrases.  Thus  Stephen  {^  ■■  2)  quotes  "  God  of  Glory  " 
from  Ps.  29:  3,  and  "Turned  back  again  to  Egypt"  (7:39)  from  Num. 
14:  3.  (4)  Composite  qviotaiioTiif,  in  which  two  or  more  are  united  and 
merged  into  one.  Thus  in  3 :  22,  23,  Peter  quotes  from  Deut.  18 :  18,  19, 
and  subi5titutes  for  the  last  clause  of  verse  19,  "  I  will  require  it  of  him," 
the  last  clause  of  Lev.  23 :  29,  "  Shall  be  destroyed  from  among  his 
people."  The  latter  is  more  definite,  and  as  a  legal  formula,  defines  the 
mode  of  punishment.  Other  examples  are  found  in  2:  30  and  7:  51. 
(5)  Complex  quotations,  which  cannot  be  assigned  to  anj'^  of  the  above, 
but  combine  together  several  species.  Thus  7  :  6  is  an  indirect  quo- 
tation from  Gen.  15 :  13,  with  some  changes  in  the  order  of  the  words, 
and  is  continued  in  verse  7,  Avith  a  direct  quotation  from  Exod.  3 :  12. 
So,  also,  in  15  :  16-18,  there  is  a  peculiar  combination  of  three  quo- 
tations principally  from  Amos  9:  11,  12.  It  begins  with  "I  will  return,'' 
fromJer.  12:  15,  and  closes  with,  "Saith  the  Lord  who  maketh  these 
things  known  from  of  old  "  (Revised  version),  from  Isa.  45 :  21. 

The  design  of  these  quotations  was  fivefold:    (1)  To  note  the  ful- 


10  INTRODUCTION. 


fiUment  of  prophecy.  Twenty-two  predictions  are  quoted,  sixteen  of 
which  have  reference  to  the  Messiah.  These  Messianic  predictions  were 
given  as  a  ground  of  confidence  in  God  and  are  of  three  kinds :  First, 
those  that  have  direct  and  exclusive  reference  to  Clirist,  as  in  2 :  34,  35, 
from  Psalm  110 :  1.  Second,  those  that  are  direct,  but  are  inclu.'^ive,  having 
primary  reference  to  Christ,  but  including  others  secondarily  in  their 
fulfillment.  Thus  the  quotation  from  the  second  Psalm  (« :  25-28)  refers 
primarily  to  Christ,  but  it  may  include  also  a  secondary  reference  to 
those  who  preceded  his  advent  as  representative  of  his  divine  sover- 
eignty. Its  fulfillment  need  not  be  restricted  to  any  one  event  or  com- 
bination of  events,  but  may  be  found  all  along  the  line  of  man's  opposi- 
tion to  Christ.  TJiird,  those  wliich  refer  typically  to  Christ  as  the 
antitype.  Thus  Acts  4 :  11  probably  referred  primarily  to  Zerubbabel, 
who  was  himself  a  type  of  Christ.  (2)  To  give  emphasis  to  some  truth, 
as  in  7:  51;  13:  IS;  17:  31.  (3)  To  present  some  historical  fact.  Many 
examples  are  found  in  Stephen's  defense  and  in  Paul's  address  at 
Antioch,  in  Pisidia.  (4)  To  comfort  and  encourage.  Thus  the  Lord 
encouraged  Paul  at  Cornith,  "  Be  not  afraid,  for  I  am  with  thee,"  from 
Isa.  43:  5,  and  Jer.  8:  1,  reminding  him  of  his  presence  with  his 
prophets  of  old  and  their  faithful  obedience.  (5)  As  the  best  and  most 
appropriate  vehicle  of  expression.  The  Scriptures  were  the  classics  of 
the  Jewish  people.  In  them  the  Jewish  youths  were  taught  from  their 
earliest  j-ears.  (2  Tim.  3:15.)  It  was  natural  that  their  thoughts  should 
often  take  the  garb  of  Scripture,  especially  when  the  language  was 
familiar  for  its  beauty,  force,  or  sublimity.  Doubtless  some  of  their 
quotations  were  entirely  undesigned.  In  every  address  in  the  Acts  their 
familiarity  with  the  Scriptures  is  noticeable.  Paul's  mind  seemed  over- 
flowing with  Scripture  truth  and  phraseology,  (see  is :  10 ;  u :  15 ;  17  -.  24, 25 ;  20 : 
28  32).  While  the  Old  Testament  was  thus  freely  quoted,  no  instance  can 
be  found  in  the  Acts,  where  a  passage  is  improperly  used,  or  unbecom- 
ingly applied. 

THE   EVinEXTIAL   V.\LUE   OF  THE   ACTS. 

The  discussion  thus  far  has  shown  the  reliability  of  Luke  as  a  wit- 
ness, and  the  trustworthiness  of  his  writings.  It  is  doubtful  whether 
any  ancient  or  modern  historian  could  be  subjected  to  such  an  ordeal  as 
he  has  undergone  and  come  forth  unhurt.  No  real  error  has  been  made 
out  against  him  ;  but  such  an  exactness  has  been  discovered,  as  to  be 
suggestive  of  the  guidance  of  the  Holy  Spirit.  But  if  this  appears  to  be 
true  of  the  Acts,  it  is  natural  to  believe  tlie  same  in  regard  to  his  Gos- 
pel. The  Acts  of  the  Apostles  thus  becomes  a  strong  evidence  of  the 
truth  of  Christianity.  And  even  this  is  strengthened  when  we  consider 
particular  portions,  such  as  the  Conversion  of  Paul,  and  his  Vovage  and 
Shipwreck.    But  more  than  this.    While  it  incidentally  confirms  other 


INTRODUCTION.  11 


portions  of  the  New  Testament,  by  its  relations  to  them,  it  especially, 
by  its  relations  to  the  Old  Testament  Scrii)tnres,  gives  the  weight  of  its 
authority  to  their  historical  facts  and  to  the  books  as  they  have  come 
down  to  us.  Not  only  is  every  part  of  the  Old  Testament  quoted,  as 
p.bove  noticed,  but  the  whole  is  alluded  to  at  least  five  times  in  the 
Acts.  (i3;i5,  i7;2. 11;  18:24  2.S.)  And  tliese  are  appealed  to  as  standards 
of  authority,  as  the  word  of  God.  They  who  would  make  the  taber- 
nacle a  later  structure  and  rearrange  the  books  of  Moses,  run  not  only 
against  Peter,  Stephen,  Luke,  and  Paul,  but  ignore  their  guiding  spirit, 
and  that  historical  knowledge  within  their  reach,  but  unknown  to  us. 


INSPIRATION  OF  THE   ACTS. 

1.  The  arguments  for  the  inspiration  of  the  third  Gospel  may  be 
largely  used  for  the  inspiration  of  the  Acts,  which  is  a  sequel  to  that 
Gospel.  2.  The  proofs  of  the  authenticity  of  the  Acts  tend  also  to  prove 
its  inspiration.  3.  The  Apostles  had  been  promised  inspiration  by  the 
Spirit,  both  for  their  guidance  into  all  the  truth,  and  also  for  special 
occasions,  (joha  i6: 1315;  Matt,  lo;  19,20.)  Otlicrs  had  inspired  gifts.  Paul 
was  a  "called  Apostle"  (Rom.  1:  1),  and  recognized  special  supernatural 
guidance  both  for  himself  and  certain  co-laborers  (1  cor.  2:  e,  lo:  12: 10). 
Miraculous  gifts  of  the  Spirit  were  bestowed  upon  many  others  besides 
the  Apostles  on  the  day  of  Pentecost.  Prophets  were  common  in  the 
apostolic  age.  (11:27;  i3:i;  21 -.4,9.11 ;  icor.urir)  Stephen  and  Philip  were 
full  of  the  Spirit  and  received  special  divine  guidance,  (s  ■•  3, 5, 15 ;  s :  13, 26, 39.) 
Thus  the  Apostles  and  Christian  leaders  were  inspired  men,  and 
we  may  regard  their  deeds  and  addresses,  recoi'ded  in  the  Acts, 
as  inspired.  If  it  was  important  that  they  should  be  inspired  in 
what  they  then  did  and  said,  it  is  equally,  and  even  more  important, 
that  the  record  of  their  acts  and  addresses,  intended  for  all  ages, 
should  be  so  inspired  as  to  be  free  from  error.  Hence,  we  may 
reasonably  infer  its  inspiration.  4.  It  seems  evident  that  the  writer  of  the 
Acts  should  be  included  among  these  leaders,  though  with  the  modesty  of 
the  Apostle  John,  in  his  Gospel,  he  only  implies  himself  by  the  use  of  the 
first  person.  His  companionship  with  Paul  implies  that  he  was  a  teacher, 
and  Paul  includes  him  among  his  fellow- workers.  (Phiiem24.)  That  he 
should  have  written  the  third  Gospel  and  this  record  of  the  apostolic 
churches,  under  such  circumstances,  puts  him  in  the  rank  of  a  fellow- 
writer  as  well  as  fellow-worker.  From  the  earliest  historical  references 
to  him,  it  appears  that,  in  his  writings,  he  received  the  sanction  of  the 
Apostle  Paul.  All  these  are  evidences  of  his  inspiration.  5.  He  writes 
as  one  having  the  authority  of  the  truth,  and  with  an  unaffected  sim- 
plicity and  impartiality  which  has  no  parallel  in  historical  writings  out- 
side of  the  Holy  Scriptures.     6.  The  Acts,  also,  in  its  facts  and  doctrines 


12  INTRODUCTION. 


is  in  harmony  with  the  inspired  Scriptures  of  the  Old  Testament,  and 
Avith  tlie  writings  of  I'eter,  James,  John,  and  Paul.  7.  It  appears  to 
have  been  regarded  by  early  Christians  as  a  part  of  the  Holy  Scriptures, 
and  Mas  classed  with  the  four  Gospels  to  which  it  formed  a  sequel,  and 
was  read  in  the  churches.  8.  From  these  considerations  and  from  a 
careful  study  of  the  Acts  for  many  years,  I  have  a  settled  conviction 
that  it  is  the  inspired  word  of  God,  intended,  not  merely  for  the  early 
ages,  but  for  all  time. 

PRACTICAL  USES   OF  THE   ACTS. 

The  uses  of  this  book  are  manifold  and  can  only  be  touched  upon. 
Like  the  earth  with  its  vast  external  and  internal  treasures  from  which 
scientists  collect  and  classify,  so  the  Acts  presents  a  vast  field  from  which 
the  devout  student  of  Scripture  may  gather  and  classify  into  doctrine 
and  practice. 

1.  Church  organization  and  order.  The  church  is  first  seen  in  the 
upper  room,  the  one  hundred  and  twenty,  in  its  preparatory  and  waiting 
condition.  It  receives  its  jmljlic  divine  recognition  and  its  baptism  in 
tlie  Spirit  on  the  day  of  Pentecost.  It  is  later  equipped  with  Deacons, 
and  with  Elders  who  were  Overseers  or  Pastors.  The  Apostles  appear 
as  special  officials  of  Jesus  Christ,  whose  office  from  its  nature  and  duties 
necessarily  ceased  with  them.  The  Evangelists  appear  as  missionary 
and  traveling  preachers  Avithout  charge  of  local  congregations.  It  also 
ai>pears  from  the  Acts  that  Christ  is  the  Supreme  Head  of  the  church  ; 
that  the  Holy  Spirit  is  among  his  people,  working  in  and  through  them, 
for  Christ  and  with  Clirist;  and  that  the  Holy  Scriptures  are  the  stand- 
ard of  appeal.  The  book  also  teaches  regeneration  before  baptism,  and 
a  converted  church  membei"ship ;  the  restriction  of  the  Lord's  Supper 
to  immersed  believei-s ;  the  self-g<jverning  local  church ;  the  total  sepa- 
ration of  church  and  state ;  and  the  absolute  liberty  of  the  individual 
conscience.    See  further  on  Church  Polity  in  the  Acts. 

2.  ReriraJs  of  rclir/ion.  The  presence  and  work  of  the  Holy  Spirit 
are  emphasized  throughout  the  Acts,  (seeoni:  i.s.)  Seasons  of  refresh- 
ing are  to  come  from  the  presence  of  the  Lord,  (see  on  3 :  i9.)  Revivals 
and  consequent  ingatherings  are  noted  at  Jerusalem,  Samaria,  Lydda, 
and  Antioch ;  at  Corinth  and  Ephesus.  They  were  connected  with 
prayer,  turning  to  the  I^ord,  and  i^reaching  the  word. 

3.  MisKiouari/  methods  and  work.  The  Acts  consists  largely  of  mis- 
sionary sketches,  travels,  and  work.  The  two  great  centres  of  missionary 
activity  were  Jerusalem  and  Antioch,  the  one  among  Jews,  the  other 
among  Gentiles.  Thus  the  former  represents  home  missions ;  the  latter 
foreign  missions.  The  Apostles  and  other  missionaries  generally  went 
out  two  by  two,  as  Peter  and  John  {»■■  is),  Paul  and  Barnabas,  etc.  They 
generally  began  their  operations  at  great  centres  of  population  an  in- 


INTRODUCTION.  13 


fluence,  an  Jerusalem,  Antioch,  Corinth,  and  Epliesus,  and  from  these 
centres  worked  out  into  the  surrounding  regions.  Their  method  of 
evanghzation  was  threefold:  pul>lii-  preaching;  private  and  personal 
conveisation  and  appeals;  and  the  written  page  as  present  in  the  Old 
Testament  Scriptures  and  their  own  letters  or  a\  ritten  documents.  They 
announced  the  glad  tidings  to  unbelievers,  and  taught  inquirers  and 
converts,  (is:  35;  28: 31.)  Believers  were  baptized.  (2:  «;  s:  12;  lo:  «;  is:  8.) 
Thej^  emphasized  the  doctines  centering  in  the  risen  Lord,  and  the 
duties  of  repentance  and  faith,  and  shrank  not  from  declaring  the  whole 

counsel  of  God.       (-'0 :  20,  27 ;  24 :  25 ;  26 :  22,  23.) 

4.  Miracles  and  supernatural  gifts.  These  appear  to  be  not  so  much 
noticed  as  the  ordinary  means.  The  gift  of  tongues  is  mentioned  only 
at  Pentecost,  at  the  conversion  of  Cornelius  and  his  company,  and  with 
the  twelve  at  Ephesus,  and  is  implied  at  Samaria.  («:  i6i«.)  So,  also, 
but  few  miracles  are  described.  These  are  the  healing  of  the  lame  man 
in  the  temple,  and  ^Eneas,  a  palsied  man  at  Lydda,  and  the  raising  of 
Dorcas  at  Joppa.  The  miracles  of  Paul  were  at  Paphos,  Lystra,  Philippi, 
Troas,  and  ]\Ielita.  Besides  these,  it  is  generally  said  that  "many  signs 
and  wonders  were  wrought  through  the  Apostles"  (2:4.-,;  5:12),  that 
Stephen  "  wrought  great  wonders  and  signs"  (s: «),  that  signs  and  won- 
ders were  granted  Paul  at  Iconium  (h:  3),  also  at  Ephesus.  (19 :  n.)  In 
connection  with  these  it  should  be  noted  that  they  spake  with  tongues 
"as  the  Spirit  gave  them  utterance,"  that  miracles  were  said  to  be 
"granted"  or  "wrought  through"  Peter,  Paul,  and  others.  Thus  it 
appears  that  these  gifts  were  not  at  the  option  or  will  of  the  Apostles, 
but  were  dependent  upon  the  Spirit  and  his  promptings.  Accordingly, 
Paul  asks :  "  Are  all  workers  of  miracles  ?  Do  all  speak  with  tongues  ?  " 
(1  Cor.  12 :  29, 30 )  Miracles  and  supernatural  gifts  seem  to  have  had  their 
place  and  design  at  the  beginning  of  the  Gospel  Dispensation.  But  the 
same  condition  and  necessities  did  not  exist  in  after  ages.  Indeed,  there 
are  indications  of  their  decline  toward  the  end  of  the  apostolic  age. 
The  later  epistles  of  Paul,  Peter,  and  John,  make  no  mention  of  them, 
while  emphasizing  the  ordinary  means  of  the  ministry,  prayer,  sanctifi- 
cation  of  the  Spirit,  and  preaching  the  word. 

5.  3ffssianic  Predidions  and  Christ\?  Sirnnd  Coming.  The  Messianic 
and  other  predictions  referred  to  in  the  Acts  and  the  Gospels  were  not 
fully  understood  till  after  their  fulfillment.  Even  our  Lord's  disciples 
and  constant  attendants  had  but  dim  perception  of  the  Scriptures  which 
spake  of  him.  It  Avas  necessary  th.at  Jesus  should  breathe  upon  them, 
saying:  "Receive  ye  the  Holy  Spirit,"  and  that  he  should  "open  their 
mind  that  they  might  understand  the  Scriptures."  Yet  even  then  they 
seem  to  have  had  confused  views  of  Christ's  kingdom,  and  especially 
of  his  coming,  when  they  ask:  "Lord,  wilt  thou  at  this  time  restore 
again  the  kingdom  to  Israel?"    The  predictions  which  Peter  quotes, 


14  INTRODUCTION. 


and  explains  so  clearly  and  forcibly,  were  understood  by  him  only  after 
their  fulfillment  in  Jesus,  and  after  he  was  taught  by  him  and  the 
Spirit. 

The  same  was  true  in  regard  to  the  gospel  and  the  Gentiles.  Pro- 
phets had  foretold  that  its  blessings  would  be  enjoyed  by  the  Gentiles, 
but  the  disciples  utterly  mistook  the  manner  of  its  accomplishment. 
Neither  the  instructions  of  Jesus,  nor  the  Spirit  at  Pentecost,  had  en- 
lightened them  on  the  subject.  Peter  must  be  taught  by  vision  at  Joppa 
and  by  actual  occurrence  at  Csesarea. 

May  it  not  be  so  now  with  future  fulfillment  of  prophecy?  Much 
remains  unfulfilled  regarding  the  kingdom  of  God,  the  conversion  of 
Israel,  and  the  second  coming  of  Christ.  The  spiritual  and  the  discern- 
ing doubtless  catch  many  glimpses  of  the  mysterious  future.  But,  rea- 
soning from  the  past,  can  we  be  certain?  Surely  none  have  attained 
unto  full  knowledge.  IMust  we  not,  like  prophets  and  apostles,  wait  for 
the  events  themselves  before  Ave  fully  comprehend  the  intent  and  the 
meaning  of  the  prophetic  word  ?  The  experience  of  God's  people  in 
the  past  teaches  us  at  least  to  be  cautious  and  humble ;  ready  to  accept, 
even  joyfully,  whatever  interpretations  God's  providences  and  the 
events  themselves  may  surely  indicate. 

6.  A  hook  of  general  education.  No  other  ancient  book  of  its  size  is 
of  such  great  educational  value.  In  ecclesiastical  history  it  fills  a  place 
wbich  no  other  treatise  could  occupy.  It  is  rich  in  its  variety  of  places 
and  character  illustrative  of  the  institutions  of  the  Koman  Empire,  and 
of  the  influence  and  spread  of  the  CJreek  language.  Its  geographical 
notices  are  most  important,  and  its  field  for  archaeological  research  is 
extensive.  Classical  antiquity  and  heathen  mythcjlogy  are  l)oth  illus- 
trated, and  Greek  philosophies  and  Oriental  sorceries  are  brouglit  vividly 
into  view.  Ancient  literature  has  nowhere  presented  so  lifelike  and 
truthful  a  picture  of  Ephesus  of  Imperial  times  as  that  in  the  nineteenth 
chapter  of  the  Acts,  and  no  such  account  of  seafaring  life  aa  that  of 
Paul's  voyage  and  shipwreck. 


CHURCn   POLITY   IN   THE   ACTS. 

This  is  of  sufl^cient  importance,  to  give  a  further  separate  notice 
of  it.  AVhen  Jesus  said  (Matt. is:  n) :  "Tell  it  to  the  church,"  he  bad  in 
view  those  local  societies  which  were  to  be  organized  by  the  Apostles, 
under  the  guidance  of  the  Spirit.  And  when  he  promised  the  Apostles 
that  the  Holy  Spirit  should  teach  them  all  things,  and  guide  them  into 
all  the  truth  (John  14 :  26;  16: 13),  he  included  all  that  was  necessary  to  Chris- 
tian doctrine  and  practice.  Throughout  the  book  of  the  Acts  it  is  im- 
plied and  indicated  that  this  guidance  was  granted  them.  Churches 
were  organized,  deacons  chosen,  elders  and   pastors  appointed,  and 


INTRODUCTION.  15 


persons  were  set  apart,  by  the  laying  on  of  liands,  to  particular  offices  or 
Avork  (6: 6;  u:  23;  13;  .f)^  Under  the  superintendence  of  inspired  men.  The 
Spirit  commanded  the  Antioch  church  to  set  apart  Paul  and  Barnabas 
for  their  mission  (i':?),  and  Paul  speaks  of  the  elders  at  Ephesus  as 
having  been  made  overseers  by  the  Holy  Spirit.  (20:28.)  At  first  the 
church  organization  was  in  a  formative  state  (1:23:6:35),  but  soon  it 
appears  to  have  taken  a  permanent  form,  (is:  i;  u-.  27;  15;  3,22;  i8:27;  20:n.) 
All  this  is  confirmed  in  the  Epistles.  Peter  would  have  the  churches 
keep  his  instructions  in  remembrance.  (2  peter  1 :  1215.)  Jude  (vcr.3) 
exhorted  them  to  contend  earnestly  for  the  faith  delivered  once  for  all 
to  the  saints.  Paul  received  the  gospel  from  Christ  himself  (Gai.i:i2), 
and  directed  how  to  observe  the  Lord's  Supper  as  he  had  received  it 
from  the  Lord.  (icor.  11:23.)  He  exhorts  the  Corinthians  to  be  imita- 
tors of  him,  even  as  he  also  was  of  Christ,  and  said :  "  I  praise  you, 
brethren,  that  ye  remember  me  in  all  things  and  keep  the  ordinances," 
including,  especially,  the  usages  taught  by  him,  "as  I  delivered  them 
to  you."  (1  Cor.  n :  1, 2.)  John  indicates  fully  organized,  independent, 
local  churches,  and  also  a  completed  revelation,  (aev.  1 :?:  22:6, 7, 10, is.) 
Thus  it  seems  evident  that  a  completed  church  organization  was 
developed  by  the  Apostles,  under  divine  authority,  during  the  period 
of  the  Acts. 

The  model  as  seen  in  the  Acts,  has  the  beauty  and  excellence  of  a 
divine  simplicity.  "Among  others,  its  ministerial  parity  offers  less 
temptation  than  any  other  to  ministerial  rivalries  and  jealousies,  and  a 
carnal  ambition.  Its  elective  franchise  offers  less  opportunity  than  any 
other  to  a  priestly  lording  over  God's  heritage.  Its  congregational  form 
begets,  more  than  any  other,  a  sense  of  individual  responsibility,  an 
active  interest  in  church  matters,  and  the  exercise  of  private  judgment. 
Its  cardinal  principle  of  a  converted  church  membership  tends  more 
than  any  other  to  maintain  the  purity  of  the  church.  Its  independent 
form  guards  better  than  any  other  against  schism.  Indeed,  when  this 
independence  is  faithfully  observed,  there  cannot  be  any  schism  to 
which  a  great  confederated  church  is  liable." — William  Williams, 
Apostolical  Church  Polily,  p.  70. 

CHRONOLOGY. 

The  date  of  our  Ix)rd's  crucifixion  could  not  have  been  later  than 
A.  D.  30,  and  appears  to  have  been  on  April  seventh  of  that  year.  The 
death  of  Agrippa  Herod,  at  Cfesarea  (12:23),  occurred,  according  to 
Josephus,  A.  D.  44 ;  and  the  recall  of  Felix  and  the  coming  of  Festus, 
occurred  A.  D.  60.  Taking  these  dates  as  starting  points,  in  connection 
with  other  historical  allusions,  the  chronology  of  the  Acts  may  be  ap- 
proximately arranged,  as  in  the  following  table.  Compare,  Author'e 
Harmonic  Arrangemenl  of  tht  Acts. 


16 


INTRODUCTIOIC. 


ARRANGEMENT   OF  THE   ACTS. 


A.  D. 

EVENTS. 

ROMAN  EMPEROKS. 

30. 

31. 

35. 

The  Ascension,  May  18th. 
Pentecost,  May  2.Sth. 
Martyrdom  of  Stephen. 
Conversion  of  Saul. 

Tiberius,  a.  d.  14-37. 

38. 
39. 

Saul  visits  Jerusalem  (9  :  2G). 
Conversion  of  Cornelius. 

Caligula,  a.  d.  37-41. 

42. 

44. 

41. 

45-48. 

50. 

51-54. 

Saul  returns  to  Damascus  (11  :  26). 
Martyrdom  of  James. 
Saul  again  visits  Jerusalem. 
Paul's  First  Missionary  Jouruey. 
The  Conference  at  Jerusalem. 
Paul's  Second  Missionary  Journey. 

Claudius,  A.  D.  41-54. 
Nero,  A.  D,  54-68. 

54-57. 

5.S. 

58-60. 

60-61. 

61-63. 

Paul's  Third  Missionary  Journey. 
Paul's  last   visit  to  Jerusalem. 
Paul's  Imprisonment  at  Ca;sarea. 
Paul  at  Melita  (winter). 
Paul's  Imprisonment  at  Rome. 

SOME  OF  THE  TOPICS  BRIEFLY  DISCUSSED  IN  THE  NOTES. 


PAOK. 

The  Kingdom,  Apostles,  Church 25 

Gift  of  Tongues 28,303 

Organization  of  the  First  Church 43 

Membership  of  the  Church 44 

Young  Men  and  the  Church 83 

Laying  On  of  Hands 88,  12"> 

Stephen  and  Paul 116 

Sanhcdrin  and  Capital  Punishment 115 

Rite  of  Confirmation 12i! 

Christianity  and  Judaism 91 

ICnlightened  Heathen  and  Missions ITOf 

Elders,  Origin  and  Office 186 

Teachers 200 

Elders,  How  Chosen,  Their  Work 22'<f 

Two  Orders  of  Church  Officers 230 


PAOE. 

Apostolic  Council,  What? 233 

Circumcision  and  Christianity 2:?3,  243 

Paul's  Attitude  Toward  Circumcision...  251 

Infant  Baptism 2.i8 

Children  and  the  Church 268 

AVas  I'aul  a  Failure  at  Athens? "s.) 

Believers  and  the  Church 299 

When  was  Epistle  to  Gal.  Written? 304 

The  First  Day  of  the  Week 318 

Pluralitv  of  Elders  or  Pastors 321 

Of  a  Thi'rd  Order  in  the  Ministry ."21 

Nf>  Priestly  t'unctions  in  the  Ministry.   3'j2 

Pastors  and  Churches 3l'8 

Evangelists 332 

Paul's  Knowledge  of  His  Gentile  Work.  346 


CO^' TENTS. 


L  Chapters  1-7.  Advent  of  tlie  Holy 
Spirit,  and  growtli  of  the  Jerusalem 
church.  The  .Suveii  chosen.  l>eath 
ef  Stephen. 
II.  Ciiaptkus  8,  9.  Spread  of  the  gospel 
in  Judea,  Samaria  and  Damascus. 
Baptism  of  the  eunuch.  Conversion 
of  Saul. 

III.  Chapti:ks  10-12.    The  beginning  of 

Gentile  churches.  Conversion  of 
Cornelius.  Saul  in  Cilica.  The 
gos|)cl  at  Antioch.  Renewed  perse- 
cution at  Jerusalem. 

IV.  Chapticks  13,  14.    Paul's  first  mis- 

sionarv  journey.  Passes  through 
Cyprus.  At  Antioch  in  Pisida,  Ico- 
nium,  Lystra  and  Derbe. 


v.  CiiAPTEK  15.  The  council  or  confer- 
ence at  Jerusalem. 

VI.  CiiAi'TKKS  I.t;  40-18  :  22.  Paul's  sec- 
ond missionary  journey.  Vi.'-lls 
Phrygia  and  Galalia,  I'hili^^:■!, 
Tlie.'^salonica,  Berea,  Athens  ami 
Corintli. 
VII.  Chapters  18:  2,'5-21  :  16.  Paul's  third 
missionary  journey.  Galatia,  Phry- 
gia, Ephesus,  Macedonia,  (jreeco, 
Tioas,  Tvre  and  Cesarca. 
VIIL  CiiAPTEKS  21:  17-26:32.  Paul's  arre.H 
and  imprisonment  at  Cesarea.  Clau- 
dius Lysias,  Felix,  Feslusand  King 
Agrippa. 

IX.  Chaptkp.s  27,  28.  Paul's  voyage  and 
shipwreck.  A  winter  at  Malta.  Im- 
prisoned two  years  at  Rome, 


THE  ACTS  OF  THE  APOSTLES. 


Jnlroduclion  ;  our  Lord's  last  words  to  his  dis- 
ciples, and  his  ascension, 

1      THE  former  treatise  have  I  made,  0 
»Theophiliis,of  all  that  Jesus  begaa  both 


2  to  do  aiidteach,'>untiltheday  in  whichhe 
was  taken  up,  after  that  he,"  through  the 
Holy  Spirit,  <•  had  given  commandments 
unto  the  apostles  whom  he  had  chosen. 


•  Luke  1:1^.        >>  Mark  16  :  19 ;  Luke  24  :  51.        «  John  20  :  22,  23. 

28  :  19,  20. 


4  ch.  10  :  41,  42 ;  Matt. 


Title.  It  is  not  claimed  that  the 
title  is  apostolic.  The  book,  how- 
ever, must  have  been  very  early  desig- 
nated by  some  name,  even  if  at  first  it 
had  none.  Its  most  ancient  title,  ac- 
cordins;  to  the  oldest  manuscripts,  was 
Acts  oj  Apuafh's,  which  is  both  ap{)ro- 
priate  and  truthful.  It  does  not  con- 
tain the  acts  of  all  the  apostles,  but 
simply  the  names  of  the  eleven  and 
their  official  act  with  the  brethren  in 
the  first  chapter,  and  certain  life 
sketches  of  Peter,  John,  and  Paul  in 
the  narrative  that  follows.  It  presents 
specimens  of  a]K>stolic  work,  and  cer- 
tain acts  of  apostolic  men. 


Ch.  1 :  The  writer  begins  by  refer- 
ring to  his  former  narrative ;  speaks  of 
our  Lord's  appearances  and  instruc- 
tions during  forty  days  and  of  his  as- 
cension ;  records  the  names  of  the 
apostles,  the  number  of  tlieir  attend- 
ants, and  their  continuance  in  i)rayer ; 
and  relates  the  circumstances  of  the 
election  of  Mattliias  in  the  place  of 
Judas.  This  cha]>tcr  is  preliminary  to 
the  history  that  follows. 

1-11.  Introduction.  Our  Lord's 
Instruction  to  his  Disciples  and 

HIS  Ascension.  (see  Luke  l  :  l-4;  3  :  IR  ; 
21:50-53;  1  Cor.  15:3-8.)        lu     the     author's 

Harmonic  .•Irra^jremewf  these  and  other 
])assages  are  ]>laced  on  the  same  page, 
so  as  to  be  easily  compared. 

1.  The  former  treatise — Luke's 
Gospel,  of  which  this  was  a  continua- 
tion. This  indicates  that  Luke  was  the 
writer    of   the  Acts.     Theophilus — 


meaning  a  lover  of  God.  Not  a  fictitious 
name,  as  some  have  supposed,  a  jjcr- 
souification  of  Christian  love,  l)ut  a  per- 
son of  rank,  probably  a  Gentile  Chris- 
tian. See  author's  note  on  Luke  1 : 3. 
Both  Luke's  Gospel  and  the  Acts  were 
intended  for  general  circulation,  and 
their  dedication  to  a  person  of  influence 
would  naturally  promote  this  object. 
Of  all  that  Jesus  began — a  brief 
summary  of  Luke's  Gospel.  Notice, 
that  in  all  that  Jesus  did  he  only  began. 
The  Gospel  relates  tlie  Ijeginnings ;  the 
Acts  takes  up  the  record  and  relates 
how  Jesus  through  the  Holy  Spirit  con- 
tinues the  work.    (See  on  ver.  5;  also  10  :  36-45.) 

2.  Was  taken  up^-an  act  of  the 

Father.  (Ver.  9,  u.)  Through  the  Holy 
Spirit..  Our  Lord  in  his  human 
nature  was  dependent  on  the  Holy 
Spirit.     He    was  anointed    and    filled 

with  the  Spirit.  (Luke  4  :  1,  14,  18;  John  3  :  34.) 

Thus  under  the  influence  and  in  the 
power  of  the  Spirit  he  had  given 
commandments,  or  rather  com- 
mandment. Luke  makes  prominent 
the  day  of  our  Lord's  ascension.  Part- 
ing woi-ds  and  commissions  are  neeiiful 
and  especially  prized.  Some  of  these 
are  recorded  in  ver.  4-8,  which  imply 
the  last  commission.  (Matt.  28:  is.  19.) 
The  apostles — "a  title  which  ac- 
cords well  with  all  the  contents  of  the 
book  ;  their  discip/eship  was  now  over." 
(Bengel.)  Yet  somewhat  in  the  style 
of  Luke,  who  in  his  Gospel  si.x;  times 
applies  the  name  ajjostles  to  the  twelve. 
Matthew  and  Mark  use  the  name  but 
once  each,  while  it  appears  thirty  times 

17 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cii.  I. 


3  «To  whom  also  he  showed  himself  alive 
after  his  passion  by  many  infallible 
proofs,  being  seen  of  them  forty  days, 
and  f  speaking  of  the  things  pertaining 

4  to  the  kingdom  of  God.    «  And,  being  as- 


Bemb'ed  together  with  them,  [he]  com- 
manded them  that  they  should  not 
depart  from  Jerusalem,  but  wait  for  the 
promise  of  the  Father,  ^  which,  sailh  he, 
5  ye  have  heard  of  me;  'for  John  truly 


•  Mark  16  :  14 ;  John  20  :  in,  20,  26 ;  21  :  1-14.        '  Luke  24  :  44-48.         tE  Luke  24  ;  49.        t  Luke 
24  :  49 ;  John  14  :  16,  17,  26 ;  15  ;  26.        i  ch.  11  :  16 ;  Matt.  3  :  11. 


in  the  Acts.    They  are  no  longer  styled 
simply  disciples. 

3.  To  Avhom  also — to  his  apos- 
tles. They  were  to  be  eye-witnesses 
of  his  resurrection,  (ver.  22.)  Showed 
himself— literally,  presented  himxe/f 
a /ire,  talking,  walking,  and  eating  with 
them,  giving  them  the  clearest  proof 
that  he  was  with  them  in  reality,  in 
his  own  body,  and  not  in  appearance 

only.      (See  Luke  24  :  39,  43  ;  John  20  :  27  ;  21  :  13.) 

After  his  passion  —  after  he  had 
suffered  death.  Ten  appearances  are 
recorded  in  the  New  Testament,  seven 
of  them  to  the  apostles.  (See  author's 
Harmony  of  the  Gospels,  p.  312.)  But 
these  composed  only  a  part  of  his 
many  api)earances  from  time  to  time 
during  the  forty  days  lietween  his  res- 
urrection and  ascension.  Many  in- 
fallible proofs.  A  verj-  strong  ex- 
pres.sion.  The  juoofs  were  many  and 
convincing,  admitting  not  a  shadow  of 
doubt.  Being  seen  of  them — rather 
appearing  to  them.  Tlie  proofs  of  his 
resurrection  appealed  to  their  sight, 
their  touch,  and  their  hearing.  The 
fact  that  he  tiiught  and  declaretl  tilings 
pertaining  to  the  kingdom  of 
God,  the  Messiah's  kingdom,  was  con- 
firmatory of  his  actual  living-i)reseiice 
among  tliem  ;  for  this  was  the  substance 
of  his  teaching  before  his  suflerings. 
(Mark  1 :  15.)  For  examples  of  his  teach- 
ings, see  Luke,  ch.  24,  and  John,  ch.  21. 
There  is  no  discrepancy  between 
Luke's  account  of  the  ascension  in  his 
Gospel  and  in  the  Acts.  The  latter  is 
exj»lanatory  of  the  former,  fuller  and 
more  minute.  He  does  not  limit,  as 
some  have  asserted,  the  resurrection 
and  ascension  to  a  single  day  in  his 
Gospel.  After  speaking  of  certain  ap- 
j>earances  he  ])asses  without  note  of 
time  to  the  ascension,  which  he  notices 
very  briefly.  It  is  in  accordance  with 
Luke's  manner  to  exercise  great  brevity 
at  certain  points  and  pass  rapidly  over 
intervals  of  time.  Thus  between  verses 
17  and  18  of  the  ninth  chapter  of  Luke 


about  three  months  must  have  inter- 
vened. (Luke 9: 28.)  In  the  Same  man- 
ner he  rai)idly  clcses  his  Gosi)el.  In 
the  beginning  of  the  Acts  the  ascen- 
sion was  of  the  first  importance,  for  the 
coming  of  the  Holy  Spirit  was  depend- 
ent on  this  (John  16:7),  and  |Luke  was 
about  to  relate  the  fulfillment  of  the 
promise  of  the  Father,  (ver.  5.)  Luke 
therefore  rejieats  the  account  of  the  as- 
cension with  further  details,  and  desig- 
nates the  time  when  it  occurred.  The 
one  account  is  in  perfect  harmony  with 
the  other. 

4.  To  the  general  description  of  our 
Lord's  appearances  is  now  added  the 
account  or  two  interviews  with  his  dis- 
ciples. The  first  is  related  in  this  verse 
and  the  next.  Being  assembled 
together  with  them — on  some  occa- 
sion during  the  forty  days,  with  a  pur- 
pose, it  would  seem,  of  seeing  him  and 
hearing  more  of  tlie  things  pertaining 
to  his  kingdom.  The  Revised  Version 
gives  in  the  margin  the  reading,  eating 
vith  them,  ado))ted  by  several  of  the 
Greek  Fathers  iind  by  Jerome.  It  has 
generally  been  regarded  as  an  ancient 
explanation.  It  has  but  a  weak  manu- 
script support,  ileyer,  however,  pre- 
fers it.  Not  depart  from  Jerusa- 
lem, etc. — reminding  us  of  the  same 
charge  recorded  in  Luke  24  :  49,  re- 
ferred  to    in   the   words,    which    ye 

have     heard    of   me,       (Sec  also  John  is : 

26:  16 :  13.)  Thus  this  meeting  was  prob- 
aidy  not  the  same  as  that  in  Luke 
24  :  4!",  l)ut  subsequent  to  it.  The 
promise  of  the  Father — volun- 
tarily made,  in  the  prophecies  of  the 
Old  Testament  (Joei  2 :  28-32 ;  isa.  44 ;  3-5),  re- 
peated by  John  the  Baptist  (Matt.  3: 11), 
and  renewed  by  our  Lord.  They  were 
to  Avait  for  its  fulfillment. 

5.  Baptized — literally,  immersed. 
This  has  been  the  meaning  of  the  word 
in  the  original  in  every  stage  of  the 
Greek  language,  and  still  its  mean- 
ing in  the  modern  Greek.  With 
(rather,  in)  water.  We  have  here  what 


[Ch.  I. 


THE  ACTS. 


i;) 


baptized  with  wafer;  ^  but  ye  shall  be 
baptized  with  the  Holy  Spirit  not  many 
days  hence. 
6  When  they  therefore  were  come  to- 
gether, they  asked  of  him,  saying,  Lord, 
wilt  thou  at  this  time  '  restore  again  the 


7  kingdom  to  Israel?  And  he  said  unto 
theui,  m  It  is  not  for  you  to  know  the 
times  or  the  seasons,  which  the  Father 

8  hath  put  in  his  own  power.  ■■  But  ye 
shall  receive  power,  after  that  the  Holv 
Spirit  is  come  upon  you  ;  and  »  ye  shall 


k  ch.  2  :  1-4 ;  Joel  3  :  28.        1  Gen.  4'.t  :  10 ;  Isa.  1  :  2(1 ;  Dan.  7  :  27. 


Dent.  29  :2!):  Matt.  24  ; 


36 ;  1  Thess.  5:1,2.    "  cli.  2  :  1,  4 ;  Luke  24  :  49.        o  ch.  2  :  32 ;  John  15  :  27. 


scholars  style  the  local  dative,  defining 
place.  (See  author's  Notes  on  Luke, 
3  :  16.)  So,  also,  in  the  Holy  Spirit, 
as  the  element  of  spiritual  life.  Tliis 
was  fulfilled  on  the  day  of  Pentecost, 
when  they  were  pervaded,  stirrounded, 
and  completely  under  the  copious  in- 
fluences of  the  "Holy  Spirit.  Not  many 
days  hence — a  few,  but  how  many 
not  known ;  ten  days,  however,  after 

the  ascension.      (Ver.  9  and  u.) 

The  promise  of  the  Father,  the  l)ap- 
tism  in  the  Holy  Spirit,  is  one  of  the 
connecting  links  between  the  four  Gos- 
pels and  the  Acts.  (Matt,  3  :  II ;  Mark  1  ;  8  ; 
Luke  3:16;  John  16  :  7.)       The    prOUliuenCe 

given  to  the  Holy  Spirit  in  this  book 
should  also  be  noted.  He  is  more  fre- 
quently spoken  of  than  in  the  whole 
four  Gospels,  and  in  such  a  manner 
that  the  Acts  has  been  beautifully  and 
truly  styled  "the  Gospel  of  the  Holy 
Spirit."  This  could  be  illustrated 
tliroughout  the  whole  ))ook.  It  shows 
how  the  risen  Christ  carried  on  his 
work  through  the  Spirit  by  his  disci- 
ples. (See2;4;  4:8;  6:3,5;  8:39;  10:19,45; 
13  :  2,  9;  15:  28;  16:6.) 

6.  When  they  were  come  to- 
gether. Some  regard  this  appearance 
as  the  same  related  in  ver.  4.  It  is  l>et- 
ter  to  regard  this  as  a  different  and 
later  appearance.  It  accords  also  bet- 
ter with  Luke  24  :  49,  50,  where  the 
promise  of  the  Fatlier  and  the  com- 
mand to  tarrj'  at  Jerusalem  seem  to 
have  been  given  liefore  this  hist  meet- 
ing, when  he  led  them  out  to  the 
confines  of  Bethany,  on  the  Mount  of 
Olives.  They  asked — unitedly,  a 
question  in  which  all  were  interested, 
which  they  may  have  feared  to  ask  in- 
dividually, and  which  miglit  thus  gain 
an  easier  and  fuller  reply.  It  related 
principally  to  time,  Wilt  thou,  at  this 
time  f  His  conversation  had  interested 
them  in  the  kingdom,  (ver.  3.)  But 
the  promise  that  they  should  be  soon  j 
baptized  in  the  Sjtirit  led  them  to  con-  I 


nect  it  with  Christ's  kingdom.  While 
they  had  been  greatly  enlightened  in 
regard  to  tlie  necessity  of  Christ's  death 
and  resurrection  and  their  work  in  the 
world  (Luke  24: 44-49),  they  still  had  some 
worldly  views  concerning  the  Messianic 
kingdom,  expecting  deliverance  from 
Roman  dominion,  and  a  great  central 
power  at  Jerusalem.  Things  did  not 
then  look  very  favorable.  They  were 
in  doubt  how  soon  this  result  might  be 
brought  about  or  how  far  it  might  be 
attained  by  the  promised  baptism. 
Hence  the  question,  suggested  by  such 
passages  as  Isa,  9:7;  Jer.  23  :  5,  6 ; 
33  :  15,  17 ;  Dan.  7  :  13,  14,  27. 

7.  The  reply,  like  the  question,  re- 
lates chiefly  to  time.  Jesus  does  not  de- 
sign to  anticipate  the  illumination  and 
guidance  of  the  Spirit,  and  further  rev- 
elations regarding  the  nature  and  de- 
signs of  his  kingdom.  It  is  not  for 
you — not  your  province  or  privilege. 
The  times  or  the  seasons.  Omit 
the  article.  Times  or  occasions ;  of  longer 
or  shorter  duration,  general  periods,  or 
exact  times.  Our  Lord's  wise  and  ten- 
der answer  implies  that,  though  they 
had  a  right  to  ask,  it  was  not  their 
privilege  to  know  the  time.  The 
Father — the  liackground,  as  it  were, 
of  Deity,  distinguished  from  the  Son. 
(Matt.  24:36.)  Hath  put  in  his  own 
poAver — appointed  by  his  own  author- 
ity, in  the  exercise  of  his  .sovereign 
will.  Though  the  Son  was  no  longer 
in  humiliation,  he  guards  the  sovereign 
}>rerogatives  of  the  Father. 

8.  But  while  you  are  not  to  know 
times  and  occasions,  you  will  have  a 
work  and  be  qualified  for  it.  Secret 
things  belong  to  God,  but  things  re- 
vealed to  us.  (Deut.  29 :  29.)  Receive 
power — every  needful  qualification, 
including  the  working  of  miracles. 
(Mark  16: 17, 18.)  After  that  the  Holy 
Spirit,  etc. — pointing  to  the  source  of 
their  power  and  the  time  of  its  recep- 
tion.   (2:2-4.)    Witnesses  unto  me — 


20 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cu.  I. 


be  witnesses  unto  me  both  p  in  Jerusalem, 
and  in  all  Judaja,  and  i  iu  Samaria,  and 
'  unto  the  uttermost,  part  of  the  earth. 
9  s  And  when  he  had  spoken  these  things, 
while  they  beheld,  he  was  taken  up ;  and 
a  cloud  received  him  out  of  their  sight. 
10      And  while  they  looked  steadfastly  to- 


ward heaven  as  he  went  up,  behold,  two 
men  stood  bj  them 'in  white  apparel; 
11  which  also  said,  »  Ye  men  of  Galilee,  why 
stand  ye  gazing  up  into  heaven  7  This 
same  Jesus,  which  is  taken  up  from  you 
into  heaven,  »  shall  so  come  in  like  man- 
ner as  ye  have  seen  him  go  into  heaven. 


P  ch.  3  :  20 ;  1:5  :  40.  1  eh.  8  :  r>-2: 
24  :  51.  »  ch.  10  :  3,  30 ;  Matt.  2S  :  3 
14  :  4;  Luke  21  :  27. 


'  ch.  13  :  47 ;  Matt.  24  :  14 ;  Rom.  10  :  18.        '  Luke 
John  20  :  12.        "  ch.  2  :  7.        »  Dan.  7  :  13,  14 ;  Zech. 


according  to  the  oldest  manuscrijits, 
My  wit)iesses;  by  words,  deeds,  suffer- 
ings, and  blood.  (John  15:27.)  In  Je- 
rusalem   (Luke  24:  47,  48)   .   .   .   all    Ju- 

dea  .  .  .  Samaria  .  .  .  the  utter- 
most part  of  the  earth — the  begin- 
ning, progress,  and  extent  of  the  work. 
The  restriction  of  Matt.  10  :  5  is  taken 
away.  Tlie  narrative  of  the  Acts  fol- 
lows this  outline.      (»  :  1,  5.  27  ;  11 :  is  ;  26  :  23  ; 

Rom.  15 :  i«,  19.)  The  idea  of  the  last  com- 
mission is  included  here.  (Matt.  28 ;  19, 20 ; 
Mark  16: 15, 16.)  The  full  meaning  was 
unfolded,  as  events  demanded.  They 
must  have  now  understood  from  the 
explicit  declarations  and  commands 
given  them,  that  the  gospel  was  to  be 
extended  to  the  Gentiles ;  but  they  mis- 
took the  terms  and  method.  Thev  ex- 
pected to  reach  Gentiles  through  Juda- 
ism ;  that,  first  becoming  proselytes, 
Gentiles  would  accept  of  the  ilessiah 
of  Israel,  and  thus  jirophecy  would  be 

fulfilled.         (Isn.i  :2;  Mic.  4:  1,  2";  Amos  9:  12.) 

A  revelation  was  even  needed  to  correct 
false  views  in  Peter.     (ii):9.i6.) 

9,  Had  spoken  these  things  and 
more.  His  last  words  were  a  blessing. 
(Luke  24: 51.)  While  they  beheld.  Our 
Lord  did  not  simply  disappear  as  on 
other  occasions  (Luke  24:3i),  but  was 
taken  or  borne  up  into  the  air  and  a 
cloud  (symbol  of  the  divine  presence 
and  glory)  took  him  away  from  their 

sight.       (See  Matt.  17:5;  Luke  9  :  34.)      The  ilS- 

cension  is  thus  presented  in  two  jiarts, 
into  the  air  and  on  the  cloud  from  their 
sight  into  heaven.  It  appears  tliat  he 
ascended,  not  as  a  flash  of  lightning, 
but  slowly  with  majesty,  so  that  those 
who  saw  might  be  assured  of  the  fact. 

(M.irk  16:  19;  Luke  24  :  51.) 

In  regard  to  his  resurrection  and  his 
ascension  body,  there  has  been  much 
conjecture.  When  he  ascended  we  may 
be  assured  that  liis  body  was  glorified, 
such  a  body  as  the  risen  saints  will  have 


at  the  last  day.  (i  Cor.  15:51-54)  But 
whether  before  his  ascension  he  had 
simply  a  natural  body  such  as  were 
tho.se  of  tlie  widow's  son  and  Lazarus, 
or  a  body  gradually  transforming  into 
a  spiritual  body  during  the  forty  days, 
or  an  ethereal  body,  something  between 
body  and  sj>irit,  or  the  same  body  as 
before  but  endued  with  new  jniwers, 
properties,  and  attributes,  it  is  impossi- 
to  be  assured.  The  last  view,  however, 
agrees  best  with  the  Lord's  declara- 
tion (Luke  24:  .39),  with  his  passing  through 
closed  doors  (John  20:19, 26),  and  with  his 
vanishing  from  sight  (Luke 24: 31.). 

10.  They  looked  steadfastly — 
mere  looking  intently  into  heaven  as  he 
disa])peared  in  tiie  cloud.  Two  men 
in  white  apparel  — angels,  but  in 
a]>j)eai"ance  like  men.  (see  Mark i6:5; 
Luke  24 : 4.)  Or  possibly  Moses  and  Elijah. 

(Luke  9:  30.) 

11.  Men  of  Galilee — the  apostles 

wlio  were  (lalilcaus.  M  hy  stand  ye 
gazing  up? — in  mingled  surpri.se  and 
sadness.  It  is  useless  thus  t-o  do.  Jesus 
had  rejieatedly  told  tliem  that  he  must 
a.scend  to  the' Father  (John  6: 62;  i6:i6,28; 
20 :  17) ;  and  the  words  of  tlie  angels  ap- 
pear like  a  gentle  rebuke  for  their  sur- 
prise and  a  .solace  for  their  grief,  by  as- 
suring them  of  Ills  return  at  some  future 
time.  It  also  would  remind  tlicm  of  liis 
farewell  commands  and  promises,  and 
their  duty  to  return  to  .Jerusalem,  and 
wait  to  l>e  endued  with  power  from  on 
high  and  prepared  for  their  work. 
(Luke24:49.)  So.  ..  iu  like  manner — 
visibly,  in  the  air  and  on  the  clouds  in 
his  glorified  humanity.  (Rev.i:?.)  The 
second  coming  of  Christ,  unlike  his  first 
coming  in  obscurity  and  Inimiliation, 
will  be  in  power  and  great  glory,  with 
his  holy  angels  witli  him.     (Matt.  24:30,si ; 

(1  Thc<s.  4:  Ifi;  2  Thess.l  :7,  8.) 

12-26.  Keturn  of  the  Apostles 
TO  Jp:rusalem  and  the  Appoint- 


[Ch.  I. 


THE  ACTS. 


21 


12  yThen  returned  they  unto  Jerusalem 
from  the  mount  called  Olivet,  which  is 
from  Jerusalem  a  sabbath  day's  journey. 

13  And  when  they  were  come  in,  they  went 


up  into  an  upper  room,  where  abode  both 
Peter,  and  James,  and  John, and  Andrew, 
Philip,  and  Thomas,  Bartholomew,  and 
Matthew,  James  the  son  of  Alphajus,  and 


T  Luke  24  :  52. 


MENT  OP  AN  Apostle  in  the  Place 

OK    Judas.        (see  Uatt.  lO:  20;  27:3,  lO;   Ps. 

41;:  9;  69;'.!5:  11)9:8.)  The  author's  Jlar- 
munic  Arrangenwnl  can  be  consulted 
here  and  throughout  the  book  in  coin- 
paring  references,  the  divisions  into  sec- 
tions being  substantially  the  same  in 
both  volumes. 

12.  This  and  the  next  two  verses  form 
the  transition  between  the  first  and  la.st 
portions  of  this  chapter.  Olivet  (mean- 
ing olive-yard)  a  long  and  high  ridge  east 
of  JeriLsalem,  rising  about  two  hundred 
feet  above  the  highest  point  of  the  city. 
Olive  trees  still  grow  thereon,  but  less 
thickly  than  of  old.  The  manner  in 
which  Luke  speaks  of  it  shows  that 
Theophilus  was  not  personally  ac- 
quainted with  the  location ;  literally, 
Jroui  a  motont,  the  o)ie  called  Olivet. 
His  speaking  of  the  distance,  from, 
(rather,  near)  Jerusalem,  a  sabbath 
day's  journey,  indicates  the  same. 
This  was  a  space  of  two  thousand  cubits, 
or  about  seven  furlongs,  supposed  to  be 
the  distance  between  tlie  ark  and  the 
tents,  following  tradition.  (Josh.  3:4.) 
As  it  was  a  sabbath  duty  to  go  to  the 
ark,  this  two  thousand  cubits  was  re- 
garded as  a  lawful  sabbath  day's  jour- 
ney. Some  infer  that  the  ascension  was 
on  the  .sabbath.  Possibly,  but  not  nec- 
essarily, for  the  designation  was  a  well- 
known  and  familiar  one,  and  could  have 
been  ai)plied  to  the  distance  on  any  day. 
This  verse,  however,  shows  that  our 
Lord  ascended  from  Olivet — tradition 
says  the  summit,  but  more  probably  in 
some  retired  spot  over  the  slope  toward 
Bethany.  Luke  in  his  Gospel  (2* :  50) 
saysj  "  He  led  them  out  as  far  as" — in 
the  vicinity  of — "  Bethany,"  or,  accord- 
ing to  some  of  the  oldest  maniiscri])ts, 
toward  or  over  agaiiist  Bethany.  Yet 
Luke  does  not  really  give  the  distance 
of  the  place  of  the  ascension,  but  of 
Olivet. 

13.  Come  in — into  the  city.  An 
(rather,  the)  upper  room — the  large, 
uppermost  chamber  under  the  flat  roof, 
used  for  devotion  and  religious  assem- 


blies. (20:8;  Dan.6:io.)  The  definite 
article  points  to  a  well-known  room,  or 
one  previously  mentioned,  and  makes 
it  probable  that  it  was  the  "  large  upj)er 
room  "  where  Jesus  had  celebrated  his 
last  passover.  (Luke  22 :  12.)  It  was  natu- 
ral and  fitting  to  retain  this  room  and 
await  the  power  from  on  high.  (Luke 
24:49.)  It  would  not  have  been  in  the 
temple,  for  the  di.sciples  were  not  abid- 
ing there,  nor  would  the  Jewish  rulers 
have  allowed  it,  nor  would  such  a  place 
be  likely  styled  the  upper  room.  C'on- 
tintially  i)i  the  temple  (Luke  24 :  53)  means 
merely  that  the  discii)les  were  present 
at  all  sea.sons  or  occasions  for  worship. 
Abode — that  is,  where  they,  the  ai)08- 
tles,  were  abidiiuj,  perhai)s  their  resi- 
dence, but  not  necessarily,  for  it  may 
have  been  the  place  where  they  spent 
most  of  their  time  in  the  services  de- 
scribed below.  There  are  four  cata- 
logues of  the  apostles  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment. The  other  three  are  found  in 
Matt.  10  :  2-4 ;  Mark  3  :  16,  and  Luke 
G  :  14.  The  order  of  names  is  slightly 
varied,  but  Peter  is  always  first,  Philip 
the  fifth,  and  James  the  son  of  Alpheus 
the  ninth.  The  names  of  the  eleven  apos- 
tles are  fittingljr  given  here  at  the  begin- 
ning of  apostolic  history,  and  ju,st  before 
the  account  of  the  election  of  a  twelfth 
in  place  of  Judas  Iscariot.  Further  re- 
garding these,  see  author's  Notes  on 
Matthew.  (10:2-4.)  All  but  Peter,  James, 
and  John  appear  here  the  last  time  in 
Scripture.  Simon  Zelotes — Simoii 
the  Zealot.  From  the  times  of  the 
Maccabees  there  appears  to  have  ex- 
isted among  the  Jews  a  class  called 
Zealots,  who  rigoroush'  adhered  to  the 
Mosaic  law,  and  probal>ly  received  their 
name  from  the  dying  exhortation  of 
ilattathias  t^)  his  sons :  "  Be  ye  zealous 
for  the  law,  and  give  your  lives  for  the 
covenant  of  your  ifathers."  (1  mmc.  2 :  49-51.) 
Tlie  later  party  arose  about  the  time 
of  the  Roman  census  (a.  d.  6),  and  was 
headed  by  Judas  the  Galilean.  See 
on  ch.  5  :  37.  It  is  uncertain  whether 
Judas  was  the    brother   or  son  of 


22 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  I. 


« Simon  Zelotes,  and  »  Judas  the  brother  of 

14  James,  ^i  These  all  continued  with  one 
accord  in  prayer  and  supplication,  with 
« the  women,  and  Mary  the  mother  of 
Jesus,  and  with  '^  his  brethren. 

Appointment  of  an  apostle  in  the  place  of 
Judas. 

15  AND  in  those  days  Peter  stood  up  in 


the  midst  of  the  disciples,  and  said,  (the 
number  of  the  names  together  were  about 

16  an  hundred  and  twenty,)  Men  and  breth- 
ren, this  Scripture  must  needs  have  been 
fulfilled,  »  which  the  Holy  Spirit  by  the 
mouth  of  David  f  spake  before  concerning 
Judas,  G  which  was  guide  to  them  that 

17  took  Jesus.  For  >>  he  was  numbered  with 
us,  and  had  obtained  part  of  this  minis- 


«  Luke  6  :  15.  '  »  Matt.  10  :  3 ;  Jude  1.  *>  cli.  2  :  1,  4fi.  <=  Matt.  27  :  5.5,  56 ;  Luke  24  :  10. 
d  Matt.  13  :  55.  «  2  Sam.  23  :  2.  '  Ps.  41  :  9 ;  John  13  :  18.  i  Luke  22  :  47.  ^  Matt. 
10  :  4 ;  Luke  G  :  16. 


James.  Probably  the  former,  from 
Jude  1. 

14.  These   all  continued,  were 

persevering,  with   one  accord — one 

word  in  the  original,  found  frequently 

in  the  Acts  (2  :  l,  «  ;  a  :  •24  ;  5  :  VJ  ;  S  :  6  ;  I5  :  25), 

and  but  once  elsewhere  in  the  New 
Testament  (Rom.  15 : 6),  and  denotes  entire 
harmony  of  views  and  feelings.  In 
prayer — though  not  immediately  an- 
swered. This  continued  for  about  ten 
days  till  Pentecost.  (2:  «•)  And  sup- 
plication— not  found  in  the  best  te.\t. 
With  the  ^vonleni  wit hu'oine)i;  prob- 
ably some  of  those  who  ministered  to 
Jesus  in  Galilee  (LuiteS:  2),  and  were  at 
the  cross  (Joiinis:  25),  and  at  the  sejjul- 
chre  (Mark  16:  i),  aud  others.  Mary. 
The  last  mention  of  her  in  the  New 
Testament.  One  tradition  says  that  slie 
died  at  Jeru.salem ;  another,  that  she 
lived  to  an  advanced  age,  and  died  in 
John's  home  at  Ephesus.  His  breth- 
ren— the  younger  brothers  of  Jesus 
(Luke 2:  7),  who  at  first  did  not  believe 
on  him  (J.>hn  7;  5),  but  now  are  united 
with  the  disciples  in  obeying  Christ's 
command.  This  mention  of  them  in 
connection  with  Mary  atfords  an  argu- 
ment tliat  they  were  the  brothers,  not 
cousins,  of  our  Lord.  See  further  dis- 
cussions in  Author's  Notes  on  Mark, 
6:  3. 

15.  Here  begins  the  account  of  the 
election  of  a  new  Apostle.  In  those 
days — the  ten  days  between  the  as- 
cension and  Pentecost.  Peter  stood 
up.  He  aro.te,  imjilying  a  formal  and 
important  act.  Peter  still  takes  the 
lead  (Luke  9  : 20  ;  22: 32),  but  he  never 
claims  or  exercises  authority  over  the 
ajwstles,    or    independently   of    them. 

(Il::i, -4:    15:7;   JHet«r5:l.)        DisciplCS — 

hrethroi,  according  to  the  highest  criti- 
cal   authorities.     The   number — the 


multitude,  a  promiscuous  gathering  of 
apostles  and  brethren.  Names — equiv- 
alent to  men  or  persons.  The  word 
was  used  in  taking  a  census,  or  mak- 
ing an  enrollment.  (Rev.  3:4;  11:13.) 
Together — ^  meaning  that  they  had 
gathered  together  in  this  place  and  at 
this  time,  making  the  whole  number 
one  hundred  and  twenty.  There  was 
great  interest,  and  j)rayerfulness,  and 
expectancy.  This  in  round  numbers 
may  be  regarded  as  the  entire  disciple- 
ship  in  Jerusalen).  Many  more  were 
in  Galilee,  where  five  hundred  met  the 
Lord  at  one  time.     (1  Cor.  15 :  s.) 

16.  Men,  brethren.  A  respectful 
and  formal  address.  Besides,  all  men 
are  not  brethren,  or  fellow  Christians. 
Peter  al.so  addresses  them  as  equals,  not 
as  subordinates.  This  Scripture — 
including  the  two  quotations  in  verse  20. 
Must  needs  have  been  fulfilled — 
regarding  Judas.  The  betrayal  of  Jesus 
was  according  to  the  purpose  of  God, 
but  it  did  not  lessen  the  guilt  of  the 
betraj'er,  who  acted  freely.  (Matt.  26 :  n-, 
27:4.)'  Which  the  Holy  Spirit  .  .  . 
spake.  David  was  inspired  in  writing 
these  psalms  and  the  Holy  Sjiirit  as  the 
ultimate  author  spoke  through  him. 
Who  was  guide,  to  them  that  seized 
Jesus.  Notice  how  mildly  Peter  refers 
to  tlie  crime  of  Judas,  perhaps  i>ainfully 
recalling  his  own  denial  of  his  Lord, 
whose  intercession  (Luke  22 :  32)  only  saved 
him  from  fatal  apostasy. 

17.  This  verse  gives  a  reason  why 
this  prophecy  which  Peter  had  before 

'  his  mind  (p*.  109 :  .'-s.  8),  apj)lied  to  Judas. 

I  He  had  fulfilled  its  conditions,  aud  had 
held  the  ottice  (ver.  20)  to  which  another 
must  be  elected.  He  was  numbered 
among  the  apostles  and  received  part, 
the  (iltotinent  or  the  office  of  tliis  minis- 
try.    But  though  he  obtained  this  al- 


Ch.  L] 


THE  ACTS. 


23 


18  trv.  '  Now  this  mau  purchased  a  field 
with  I' the  reward  of  iniquity;  and  fall- 
ing headlong,  he  burst  asunder  in  the 
midst,  and  all  his  bowels  gushed   out. 

19  (And  it  was  known  unto  all  the  dwell- 


ers at  Jerusalem  ;  insomuch  as  that  field 
is  called  in  their  proper  tongue.  Acel- 
dama, that  is  to  say,  The  field  of  blood.) 
20  For  it  is  writteu  in  the  book  of  Psalms, 
'  Let  his  habitation  be  desolate,  and  let 


1  Matt.  27  :  3-10.        k  Matt.  20  :  l."). 


lotment  among  the  twelve  it  was  not 
his  true  place,  (ver.  -n.)  He  answered 
the  conditions  of  the  prophecy,  (ps.  los: 
2  5.)  He  had  the  deceitful  mouth,  the 
lying  tongue,  enmity  without  cause, 
and  rewarded  evil  for  good. 

18.  This  verse  and  the  next  are  re- 
garded by  most  critics  as  an  ex2>lana- 
tory  note  of  Luke,  and  not  a  part  of 
I'eter'a  address.  Perhaps,  but  not  nec- 
essarily ;  for  Peter  as  an  orator  might 
remind  them  of  his  terrible  end,  so  as 
to  impress  upon  their  minds  more 
deeply  the  fulfillment  of  the  divine 
threatening,  Purcliased — gave  occa- 
sion for  the  purchase.  Judas  did  not 
pay  the  money,  but  lie  furnished  it,  and 
with  it  the  priests  purchased  a  burial 
ground  for  strangers.  This  account  is 
consistent  with  Matt.  27  : 3-10,  in  which 
we  are  told  that  Judas  hanged  himself. 
^Matthew  states  how  he  came  to  his 
death ;  Peter  describes  the  frightful 
condition  in  which  his  body  was  found. 
He  probably  hung  himself  to  a  tree 
overhanging  the  valley,  and,  the  rope 
or  limb  breaking,  he  dashed  upon  the 
rocks  below.  "As  I  stood  in  the  valley 
south  of  Jerusalem,  and  looked  up  to 
the  rocky  terraces  which  hang  over  it,  I 
felt  that  the  proposed  explanation  was 
entirely  natural.  .  .  .  Trees  still  flour- 
ish quite  near  the  edge  of  these  rocks, 
and  no  doubt  in  former  times  were  still 
more  numerous  in  the  same  place.  A 
rocky  pavement  exists,  also,  at  the  bot- 
tom of  the  ledges ;  and  hence  on  that 
account,  too,  a  person  who  should  fall 
from  above  would  be  liable  to  be 
crushed  and  mangled,  as  well  as  killed. 
The  traitor  may  liave  struck,  in  his  fall, 
upon  some  pointed  rock,  which  entered 
his  body  and  caused  '  his  bowels  to  gush 
out.'"  (Dr.  Hackett,  in  Illustra- 
tions of  Scripture,  page  275.)  In  the 
midst — in  the  middle  of  his  body. 
There  is  no  intimation  in  the  passage 
that  he  fell  in  the  field  which  was  pur- 
chased with  his  thirty  pieces  of  silver. 

(Matt.  27:3.) 

19.  It    was    known  —  it    becinnr 


known.  Inasmuch — so  that  that  field 
■is  called  Aceldama.  All  this  in  rhetori- 
cal language  would  be  perfectly  natural 
in  the  mouth  of  Peter.  In  their 
proper  tongue  .  .  . that  is  to  say, 
The  field  of  blood — the  words  of 
Luke.  Meyer  well  puts  it  when  he 
says,  that  tliere  "  are  two  explanations 
inserted  by  Luke,  the  distinction  be- 
tween which  and  Peter's  own  words 
might  be  trusted  to  the  reader."  Acel- 
dama is  Aramaean,  and  Peter  spoke  in 
Aramaean,  which  was  the  language 
sjwken  by  the  Jews  after  the  Babylon- 
ish Captivity;  but  Luke,  writing 
in  Greek,  would  naturally  explain 
to  his  readers  that  the  word  meant 
'the  field  of  blood.'  "If  a  French 
orator  should  allude  to  the  origi- 
nal meaning  of  the  word  Twileries 
in  speaking  of  the  famous  palace,  an 
English  reporter  of  his  speech  could 
scarcely  fail  to  add,  '  which  in  French 
means  a  brick-kiln,'  without  dreaming 
that  the  reader  would  supjjose  these 
words  to  have  been  uttered."  (Dk.  J. 
A.  Alexander.)  Aceldama — tlie 
site  is  unknown.  It  is  now  jiointed  out 
south  of  Jerusalem,  on  the  southern 
slope  of  the  valley  of  Hinnon,  near 
the  eastern  end  of  the  valley.  (See 
author's  Notes  on  3IaUhew,  27  :  7.) 

20.  Peter  returns  to  the  fulfill- 
ment of  Scripture  spoken  of  in  ver.  ItJ. 
For  it  is  written — appealing  to 
Scripture  as  an  authoritative  standard. 
The  first  quotation  is  from  Ps.  69  :  25, 
the  second  from  Ps.  109  :  8.  The  first 
is  quoted  freely,  with  a  change  of  his 
for  their.  The  singular  is  included  in 
the  plural ;  besides,  Judas  was  the  pre- 
eminent human  foe  of  Christ.  Both  of 
these  predictions  belong  to  that  class 
of  psalms  in  which  David  was  a  type 
of  the  Messiali  and  his  enemies  a  tyj)e 
of  the  enemies  of  the  Messiah.  He 
utters  his  own  deep  experience,  but, 
animated  by  the  Holy  Spirit,  he  uncon- 
sciously utters  thoughts  and  words 
which  would  find  their  highest  fulfill- 
ment   in     Christ    and     Judas.      (See 


24 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  I, 


no  man  dwell  therein '  and '  his  bishopric 

21  let  another  take.'  Wherefore  of  these 
men  which  have  companied  with  us 
all  the  time  that  the  Lord  Jesus  went  in 

22  and  out  among  us,  i  beginning  from  the 
baptism  of  John,  unto  that  same  day 
that  he  was  taken  up  from  us,  must  one 
be  ordained  1°  to  be  a  witness  with  us  of 
his  resurrection. 


23  And  they  appointed  two,  Joseph  called 
n  Barsabas.who  was  surnanied  Justus,  and 

24  Matthias.  And  "  they  i)rayed,  and  said. 
Thou,  Lord,  p  which  knowist  the  hearts 
of  all  men,  show  whether  of  these  two 

25  thou  hast  chosen,  that  he  may  take  part 
of  this  ministry  and  apostleship,  from 
which  Judas  by  transgression  fell,  i  that 


I  Matt.  3:13.        »  ch.  4  :  33 ;  John  15  :  27 ;  1  John  1  :  1-3.         ■>  ch.  1.5  :  22.        »  ch.  13  :  2,  3. 
p  1  Chron.  28  :  9 ;  John  16  :  30 ;  Rev.  2  :  23.         q  Matt.  25  :  41,  46 ;  26  :  24 ;  John  17  :  12. 


author's  Notes  on  Matthew,  1  :  23.) 
His  bishopric — his  overseership,  or 
office.  No  argument  can  be  drawn 
from  this  that  the  early  church  was 
governed  by  diocesan  bishops.  The 
apostles  were  certainly  not  such  bishojxs. 
So  Dk.  J.  B.  LiGliTFOOT  on  The  Chris- 
tian Ministry,  Com.  on  the  Philippians, 
pp.  195,  196. 

21.  Wherefore,  according  to  pro- 
phecy, the  place  vacated  by  Judas 
must  be  filled.  Who  have  compa- 
nied with  us — who  had  been  attend- 
ants ujwn  Jesus  as  tlie  twelve  had 
been.  >^'ent  in  and  out — in  private 
and  public,  during  his  official  ministry. 
His  bishopric— office,  literally,  his 
orerseership;  his  ministry  and  apostle- 
ship.     (Ver.  25.) 

32.  Beginning  .  .  .  unto.  From 
the  time  that  John  was  baptizing  to  the 
ascension  of  Jesus.  This  is  the  time 
occui)ied  by  Mark  in  his  Gospel.  Some, 
if  not  all  of  the  twelve,  had  been  John's 
disciples  and  received  his  baptism.  It 
is  well  to  notice  here  that  the  baptism 
of  John  is  one  of  the  connecting  links 
between    the    Acts    and   the    Gospels. 

(10:37;  13  :  24  ;  18  :  2i  ;  19:4.)    Ordaiued  tO 

be  a  witness  of  his  resurrection. 

The  resurrection  was  the  crowning  act 
and  evidence  of  the  Messiahship  of 
Jesus.  "  It  proves  him  to  be  the  Son 
of  God,  the  Ju.stifier  and  Eedeemer  of 
men,  their  Sovereign  and  Judge."  (Dr. 
IIackktt.)  Hence  this  was  the  bur- 
den of  apostolic  preaching.     (2 :  31-33 ;  3 : 

15  ;  4  :  33  ;  4  :  37  ;  IT  :  1».  31.)      It  waS  nCCCSSaiy 

that  an  apostle  should  be  a  witness  to 
Christ's  resurrection.  The  ajwstles  then 
could  have  no  successors.  How  Paul 
fulfilled  this  condition,  see  1  Cor.  9:1; 
15  :  8. 

23.  They— the  whole  company  pre- 
sent. Appointed — they  put  forward 
two,  ercoguizing  in  them  the  conditions 


which  Peter  had  just  named.  They 
had  probably  been,  like  the  eleven, 
disciples  of  John,  and  early  disciples  of 
Jesus.  Barsabas — son  of  Sabba,  or 
Saba.  Justus — his  Eoman  name.  It 
was  very  common  for  Jews  to  use  a 
Gentile  name  among  Gentiles,  (is :  9.) 
He  is  not  to  be  confounded  with  Joses 
Barnabas  (4 :  36)  or  with  Judas  Barsabas. 
(15:22.)  Matthias — meaning  Gift  of 
Jehovah.  Nothing  more  is  known  of 
these  men.  Doubtless  they  were  promi- 
nent men,  and  may  have  l)elonged  to 
the  seventy.  ( Luke  lo :  i.)  Why  only  two 
were  nominated  we  can  only  surmise. 
Very  likelj-  they  were  the  only  two  of 
those  present,  outside  of  the  eleven, 
who  fulfilled  the  conditions  laid  down 
by  Peter  in  ver.  22. 

24.  Thou,  Lord.  To  whom  is 
this  prayer  addressed?  Probably  to 
the  glorified  Saviour ;  for  he  had  chosen 
the  other  eleven  (ver.:?),  and  Peter  had 
just  ai)i>lied  the  name  Lord  to  him 
(ver.  2)),  and  a  few  years  later  he  chose 
Saul  of  Tarsus  as  an  apostle.  (26;  le-is; 
G»i.  1:1.)  Prayers  were  also  afterward 
addressed  to  "Christ.  (7:59, 60.)  Peter 
also  ascribes  omniscience  to  Christ  in 
John    21  :  17,   "  Lord,  thou    knowest 

all      things."  (See    slso    John    J  :  24,  26.) 

Knowest  the  hearts.  They  could 
recognize  the  external  qualifications, 
but  the  Lord  alone  could  decide  regard- 
ing the  heart.  Whom  thou  hast 
chosen.  Neither  the  apostles  nor  the 
as.sembled  disciples  would  assume  to  fill 
the  vacancy.  That  was  the  Lord's 
work. 

25.  May  take  part.  According  to 
the  best  manuscripts.  May  take  the 
place,  the  post,  or  position  of  this  apos- 
tolic ministry  which  he  should  receive. 
By  transgression  fell  (aivay). 
That  he  might  go.  The  transgres- 
sion by  which  Judas  fell  away  from  his 


Ch.  L] 


THE  ACTS. 


25 


26  he  might  go  to  his  own  place.    And  '  they 
gave  forth  their  lots ;  and  the  lot  fell  ujtou 


Matthias  ;  and  he  was  numbered  with  the 
eleven  apostles. 


Num.  26  :  55;  Josh.  7  :  10;  Prov.  IG  :  \i\i. 


apostkship  was  the  crowniug  act  in  his 
coui-se  of  sin,  deciding  liis  doom.  His 
own  place.  He  was  "  tlie  son  of  per- 
dition" (Johu  17 : 1-'),  and  to  perdition  he 
must  go.  The  only  ol)vious  and  natu- 
ral meaning  is,  that  after  connnitting 
his  terrible  deed  of  treachery  and  add- 
ing to  it  the  sin  of  self  murder,  he  went 
to  his  own  place  among  the  lost.  All 
other  explanations  are  weak  or  mean- 
ingless. 

'Zti.  They  gave  forth  their  lots, 
rather,  according  to  the  best  reading, 
g(tre  forth  lots  for  Barsabas  and  Mat- 
tiiias.  Their  names  were  probably 
written  on  slips  of  parchment,  or  tab- 
lets, and  shaken  togetlier,  and  the  first 
drawn  decided  the  choice.  The  lot 
was  religiously  used  under  the  Old 
Dispensation,  and  divinely  directed. 
(Prov.  16: 33.)  It  was  uscd  in  detecting 
crime  (Josh.  7 :  u;  Jonah  i  :7),  in  designat- 
ing persons  for  office  (i  sam.  lu :  20,  si),  in 
choosing  men  for  an  invading  force 
(judg.  20 : 9),  iu  dividing  the  land  among 
the  tribes.  (Josh.  18 :  10.)  Peter  and  tlie 
assembled  disciples  were  still  under  the 
shadow  of  the  Old  Dispensation.  They 
used  the  lot,  but  after  the  descent  of 
the  Spirit  on  Pentecost  the  lot  was 
no  longer  needed  among  believers. 
There  is  no  instance  of  its  use  afterward 
in  the  New  Testament.  He  was  num- 
bered with — a  strong  exi)ression.  He 
was  enrolled  among  the  eleven  ai>os- 
tles,  and  henceforth  was  regarded  as 
the  twelfth.  This  alone  ought  to  settle 
the  question  that  no  mistake  was  made 
in  electing  him.  He  was  recognized  as 
a  complete  substitute  for  Judas,  Avith 
all  tlie  qualifications  of  tlie  eleven. 
That  this  was  so  is  evident  from  tlie 
fact  that  the  apostles,  after  the  <leath  of 
Judas,  are  styled  "  the  eleven  "  (Matt  m  : 

Ifi;  Mark  16  :  U  ;  Luke  «  :  9.  3a),    but   after  this 

election  "  the  twelve."  (2 :  u ;  6 : 2.)  But 
Matthias  is  not  heard  of  after  tliis ;  so 
were  not  most  of  tlie  apostles.  But 
Jesus  chose  Paul  afterward.  Yes,  as 
the  apostle  to  the  Gentiles,  but  he  is 
never  referred  tfl  as  one  of  the  twelve. 
As  by  the  division  of  Joseph  into  two 
tribes    there   were    thirteen   tril)es    in 


Israel,  so  perhai>s  we  may  see  some 
analogy  with  the  thirteen  apostles. 

The  Kingdom,  thk  Apostles, 
THE  Chukch.  In  the  four  Gospels, 
the  kitigdoin  of  God  is  spoken  of  as  ever 
present,  and  pertaining  to  this  world 
and  the  workl  to  come.  The  church 
is  mentioned  only  twice,  and  that  by 
Matthew  alone  (le-.  18;  is:  17),  and  re- 
garded as  future,  though  near  at  hand, 
and  pertaining  to  tliis  world.  The 
kingdom  is  spiritual,  having  no  earthly 
organization,  and  its  subjects  are  the 
spiritual  children  of  God.  The  church 
is  the  outward  manifestation  of  the 
kingdom,  and  is  matle  up  of  a  con- 
verted and  consecrated  membership. 
This  is  its  conception  and  ideal ;  yet 
practically,  as  it  exists  in  this  world, 
there  is  chaft'with  the  wheat,  and  there- 
fore it  can  only  be  said  to  be  composed 
of  professed  believers. 

The  church  may  be  regarded  as  hav- 
ing started  on  its  mission  on  the  day  of 
Pentecost.  Tliat  was  the  day  of  its 
manifestation  to  tlie  world,  and  its 
divine  recognition  as  an  organization, 
and  its  consecration  to  its  work.  So 
far  as  we  are  informed  in  the  Acts,  the 
upontles  were  the  only  officials  con- 
nected with  it  at  first.  Yet  these  were 
rather  the  officials  of  the  kingdom,  the 
missionaries  (for  such  is  the  meaning 
of  the  word  apostles)  of  Christ  tlie  Lonl, 
the  connecting  link  between  the  spirit- 
ual kingdom  and  the  outward  church, 
the  representatives  of  Christ  the  King 
and  Hea<l,  who  were  to  organize  the 
church.  They  had  been  chosen,  en- 
dowed with  spiritual  gifts,  and  sent 
forth  by  Christ  himself.  Somewhat 
later  the  seventy  had  been  sent  forth 
on  a  brief  and  special  mission  (Luke  lo :  1), 
and  nothing  more  is  said  of  them.  But 
the  apostles  had  special  endowments. 
They  were  inspired  men,  workers  of 
miracles,  witnesses  of  Christ's  resurrec- 
tion, and  the  organizers  of  the  first 
Christian  churches.  As  such,  they  offi- 
cially stand  alone.  As  the  church 
could  be  originally  organized  but  once, 
and  as  none  of  succeeding  generations 
could  be  eye  witnesses  of  Christ's  resur- 


26 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  II. 


rection,  they  could  have  no  successors. 
Haviug  performed  their  work,  they 
were  no  longer  needed.  With  them 
the  office  ceased. 


Practical  Keuarks. 

1.  One  design  of  the  Acts  is  individual  in- 
struction.    (Ver.  1 ;  Luke  1 :  3.) 

2.  As  Christ  did  not  discharge  his  official 
duties  independent  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  and 
as  he  still  works  among  his  people  through 
the  .Spirit,  so  we  should  constantly  seek  the 
Spirit's  guidance,  (Ver.  2;  10:38;  Heb. 
9  :  14 ;  John  14  :  20.) 

3.  The  fundamental  facts  of  Christianity 
rest  on  no  uncertain  basis.  (Ver.  3 ;  1  Cor. 
15  : 3-8.) 

4.  There  are  times  for  waiting,  rather  than 
working,  but  they  should  be  seasons  of 
prayerful ness.    (Ver  4 ;  Lam.  3  :  2.t,  26.) 

.">.  As  the  new-boru  disciple  is  to  be  bap- 
tized in  water,  so  the  new-boru  church  is  to 
be  baptized  in  the  Holy  Spirit.  (Ver.  5  ;  2 : 2.) 

6.  Erroneous  opinions,  especially  of  long 
standing,  are  hard  to  be  overcome.   (Ver.  6.) 

7.  By  our  not  knowing  times  and  seasons, 
God  excites  in  us  watchfulness,  and  gives 
opportunity  for  the  exercise  of  human 
agency.    (Ver.  7  ;  3  :  17, 18  ;  Luke  12  :  3.')-37.) 

8.  Better  than  to  know  the  future,  is  to  do 
our  part  in  spreading  that  kingdom  which 
will  be  the  glory  of  the  eternal  future.  (Ver. 
8 ;  Ps.  2  :  7,  8  ;  Ezek.  21 :  27  ;  Dan.  4  :  3.) 

9.  The  cloud  of  our  Lord's  ascension  points 
forward  to  the  clouds  of  his  second  coming. 
(Ver.  9;  Matt.  24:30;  2G  :  64  ;  Rev.  1:7; 
Dan.  7  :  13.) 

10.  We  may  not  gaze  toward  heaven  after 
Jesus,  but  we  should  look  up  to  him  as  our 
Intercessor,  our  Lord  and  .Saviour.  (Vers. 
10 :  11 ;  .i :  31 ;  Heb.  7  :  25.) 

11.  Since  Jesus  died  for  us,  and  now  in- 
tercedes for  us  on  high,  we  should  antici- 
pate his  coming  with  confidence  and  joy. 
(Ver.  11 ;  Rev.  22  :  20.) 

12.  From  the  mount  of  blessing  the  dis- 
ciple should  return  to  the  scene  of  his  earthly 
duty.     (Ver.  12  ;  Luke  9  :37,) 

13.  If  we  would  enjoy  times  of  great  re- 
freshing we  must  observe  seasons  of  united 
prayer.     (Ver.  13, 14 ;  Ezek.  36  :  37.) 

14.  Mary  was  just  as  dependent  as  all 
others  for  salvation  on  the  rich  grace  of  God 
in  Christ.     (Ver.  14  ;  Luke  1 :  47.) 

15.  Even  the  apostles  did  not  transact  busi- 


ness pertaining  to  the  church  independent 
of  the  assembled  discipleship  (Ver.  15  ;  6:2; 
15:22.) 

16.  The  Scriptures  must  be  fulfilled  be- 
cause they  express  the  divine  will.  (Ver. 
16 ;  2  :  22-25.) 

17.  Even  Judas  is  a  silent  witness  for 
Jesus.  Having  enjoyed  opportunity  of 
knowing  his  life,  he  could  say  nothing 
against  him.    (Ver.  17 ;  Matt.  27  :  4.) 

18.  The  price  of  wickedness  often  leaves 
its  impress  and  monument  in  this  world. 
(Ver.  18;  2  Peter  2  :  15, 16.) 

19.  The  deeds  and  punishment  of  men 
who  plot  in  secret  will  in  due  time  be  made 
manifest.    (Ver.  19 ;  2  Tim.  3:9.) 

20.  Christ  may  for  a  time  employ  wicked 
men  in  important  places.  But  how  great 
will  be  their  fall !  (Ver.  20 ;  Matt.  7  :  22,  23, 
27.) 

21.  How  terrible  the  results  of  avarice ! 
Through  it  Judas  becomes  a  traitor  and 
Jesus  is  betrayed.  (Ver.  18-20 ;  Josh.  7  :  20, 
21;  1  Tim.  6:10.) 

22.  How  rich  the  experiences  of  compan- 
ionship with  Je.sus !  But  in  place  of  it  we 
can  enjoy  his  spiritual  presence.  (Ver.  21 ; 
Matt.  28  :  20.) 

23.  Apostles  were  for  the  first  gospel  age. 
They  were  missionaries  for  the  introduction 
of  Christianity  and  the  full  organization  of 
the  church  (Ver.  21-23;  Eph.  2:20;  John 
16:13.) 

24.  Jesus  was  an  object  of  worship,  hence 
divine.  (Ver.  24;  John  5:  23:  Heb.  1:6; 
Phil.  2  :  10, 11.) 

25.  All  at  last  go  to  their  own  place— that 
for  which  their  charactsrs  fit  them  and  to- 
ward which  are  the  inward  tendencies  of 
their  natures.     (Ver.  25 ;  Rom.  2  :  7-9.) 

26.  It  is  an  honor  to  be  numbered  among 
our  Lord's  ministers  and  be  truly  called  by 
him.    (Ver.  26 ;  1  Tim.  1 :  12 ;  3  : 1.) 

Ch.  2  :  In  this  cha)>ter  Luke  records 
the  l)ai>tism  of  the  Holy  Si>irit  and  the 
eft'ect  upon  the  foreign  Jews  who  wit- 
nessed the  gift  of  tongues ;  the  address 
of  Peter  in  which  he  points  to  the  ful- 
tilhuent  of  ancient  prophecy  and 
preaches  to  them  Jesus,  the  risen  Lord 
and  Christ,  who  luid  sent  forth  tlie 
Spirit.  Then  follows  the  eflect  of  Peter's 
discourse  and  the  consequent  addition 
of  three  thousand  to  the  church  ;  clos- 
ing with  a  descrijitiun  of  their  stead- 


Ch.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


27 


The  gij'l  of  the  Hulij  Siiirital  Pentecost ;  Peter's 
address,  and  its  results. 

3      AND  when  the  day  of  Pentecost  was 
fully  come,  sihuy  were  all  with  one  accord 


2  in  one  place.  And  suddenly  there  came 
a  sound  from  heaven  'as  of  a  rushing 
mighty  wind,  and  "it  filled  all  the  house 

3  where  they  were  sitting.  And  there 
appeared  unto  them  cloven  tongues  like  as 


1  ch.  1  :  li.        '1  Kings  19  :  11, 12.        «  ch.  4  :  31. 


fastness,  social  state,  growth  in  popu- 
larity, and  number. 

1-13.  Descent  of  the  Holy 
Spirit  at  Pentecost,  (see  Matt,  lo  ■.  20 ; 
Mark  16: 17.)  Probably  Sunday,  May 
28th,  A.  D.  30. 

1.  When  the  day  of  Pentecost 
was  fully  come — when  the  interval 
before  the  feast  was  completed  and  the 
day  had  arrived.  Pentecost,  meaning 
fiftieth,  came  to  be  used  as  a  noun  and 
was  api)lied  to  the  festival  which  oc- 
curred fifty  days  after  the  Passover 
sabbath.  (Lev.  23: 1012.)  It  was  also 
called /«<*'<  of  weeks  (Deut.  16: 10),  because 
seven  weeks  from  the  Passover;  and 
the  feast  of  harvest  (Exod.  23;i6),  and  the 
feast  of  first  fruits  (Num.  28  :  26),  because 
it  was  a  ifeast  of  thanksgiving  and  the 
day  for  the  offering  the  first  fruits  of 
the  wheat  harvest  unto  God.  Accord- 
ing to  certain  Jewish  tradition,  it  also 
commemorated  the  giving  of  the  law 
from  Mount  Sinai,  which  occurred  on 
the  fiftieth  day  after  the  departure  of 
Israel  from  Egypt.  It  may  be  regarded 
as  a  striking  coincidence  that  the  or- 
ganization of  the  Christian  Church  was 
divinely  recognized  on  the  anniversary 
of  the  giving  of  the  law  to  Israel.  (See 
note  at  the  end  of  ch.  1.)  On  the  man- 
ner of  its  observance,  see  Lev.  23  :  17-20. 

The  day  of  tlie  week  on  which  the 
coming  of  the  Spirit  occurred  has  been 
much  discussed,  many  calculating  the 
time  in  such  a  manner  as  to  make  this 
Pentecost  fall  on  Saturday,  the  Jewish 
sabbath.  But  the  earliest  Christian 
traditions,  and  the  Christian  commem- 
orations of  the  day,  as  far  back  as  it  can 
be  traced,  point  uniformly  to  Sunday  as 
the  day.  Pentecost  occurred  on  "  the 
morrow  after  the  seventh  sabbath  "  (Lev. 
23 :  u),  and  if  this  was  a  weekly  sabbath, 
then  it  must  fall  on  Sunday.  Or,  as 
the  fifty  days  were  reckoned  from  the 
second  day  of  the  Passover,  the  16th  of 
Nisan,  which  in  A.  D.  30  came  on  Sat- 
urday, April  8,  therefore  Pentecost 
came  on  Sunday,  May  28.     (See  further 


discussion  in  author's  Harmonic  Ar- 
rangement of  the  Acts,  pp.  149-153.) 

This  day  was  appropriate  for  the 
manifestation  of  the  Spirit,  because  of 
the  great  number  of  native  and  foreign 
Jews  who  had  assembled  for  worshij). 
Thus  perhaps  a  larger  multitude  wit- 
nessed the  proof  of  our  Lord's  exalta- 
tion and  glory  than  witnessed  his  deep- 
est humiliation.  All — all  of  the  dis- 
ciples in  Jeru.salem  at  that  time  (1 :  is.) 
One  accord.  (seei:ii.)  One  place 
— probably  "the  upper  room."     (i:i3.) 

2.  Suddenly — without  any  pre- 
vious iutiuiation.  The  disciples  were 
expecting  the  fulfillment  of  Christ's 
promise  (1 :  *,  5, 8),  but  did  not  know  how 
it  would  be  fulfilled.  A  sound  from 
(out  of)  heaven — indicating  its  heav- 
enly origin  as  coming  from  God  him- 
self. As  of  a  rushing  mighty 
Avind — the  wind  was  a  symbol  of  the 

Holy   Spirit.       (Ezek.  37  :  9  ;  John  3:8;  20  :  22.) 

The  coming  of  the  Spirit  was  fittingly 
revealed  to  the  ear  by  a  wind-like 
sound.  It  filled  all  the  house — tlie 
sound,  symbolic  of  the  presence  of  the 
all-pervading  Spirit,  filled  all  the  house 
in  which  they  were  accustomed  to  as- 
semble. (1 :  13.)  "  For  as  he,  who  sinks 
down  in  the  waters  and  is  baptized,  and 
is  surrounded  on  all  sides  by  the  waters, 
so  also  they  were  completely  baptized 
by  the  Spirit."  (Cyril  of  Jerusalem, 
Instruction,  viii.,  on  the  Holy  Spirit, 
ii.,  14.)  Sitting — in  the  morning 
(ver.  15) ;  waiting  and  longing  for  the 
fulfillment  of  their  Lord's  promise. 

3.  Unto  them — to  all  present.  As 
the  Spirit  appeared  in  fitting  visible 
form  at  the  baptism  of  Jesus  (Luke  3 :  22), 
so  here  to  the  assembled  discijjles. 
Cloven  tongues  as  of  fire — rather, 
tongues  distributing  fhemsefaes  among 
them  as  of  fire,  and  it — a  tongue — sat 
upon  each  of  them — the  twelve,  tlie 
brethren  and  the  women,  (i  =  "•)  We 
may  perhaps  conceive  of  this  manifes- 
tation as  a  tongue-shaped  flame  divid- 
ing so  that  a  like  flame  sat  on  each. 


28                                               THE  ACTS.                                     [Ch.  IL 

of  fire,  'and  it  sat  upon  each  of  them. 

4  And  J  they  were  all  filled  with  the  Holy 

Spirit,  and  began  ^to  speak  with  other 

tongues,  >as  the  Spirit  gave  them  utter- 
ance. 

X  Matt.  3:11.        y  ch.  1:5;  John  14  :  26.        »  ch.  10  :  40 ;  19  :  C ;  Mark  10  :  17.        »  Exod.  4  : 
11,  12;  Jer.  1  :  7-'J;  Micah  3:8;  Matt.  10  :  19,  20. 

Fire  was  a  symbol  of  the  divine  pres- 
ence (Kxod.  a :  z;  19:18;  Ezek.  1  :  4  ;  Rev.  1  :  14); 
and  also  of  prophetic  power,  (isa.  6: 
6,7.)  Here  the  tongues  as  of  fire  were 
also  symbolical  of  the  gift  of  tongues 
and  the  fiery  zeal  which  attended  the 
coming  of  the  Spirit.  This  was  need- 
ful to  complete  the  baptism  in  tlie  Holy 
Spirit  and  fire,  foretold  by  John  the 
Bapti.st.  (See  author's  Notes  uii  Mat- 
theic,  3  :  11  for  a  further  discussion.) 

4.  Having  described  that  which  was 
external,  Luke  proceeds  to  the  internal 
power  from  on  high  with  which  they 
were  endued.  (Luke  ■.!4 ; «.)  They  were 
all,  including  both  sexes  and  various 
ages.  (ver.  n.)  Filled  Avith  the  Holy 
Spirit.  The  Spirit  came,  not  in  part 
or  by  measure,  but  in  his  fullness  (Johu 
3 :  31),  pervading  tlieir  whole  being  and 
imparting  extraordinary  j^owers  in  ad- 
dition to  his  ordinary  intluence.  (6;  s; 
10: 44-46;  11 :  la.  16.)  Uiidcr  the  Old  Dispen- 
sation the  Spirit  of  Gotl  was  specially 
given  to  prophets,  inspired  leadei-s  of 
the  people,  and  certain  skilled  work- 
men (Eiod.  31:2,3;   Deut.  34:9;    Neh.  9:30;    2 

Peter  1 :  21) ;  and  Elisabeth,  Zachariali, 
and  John  the  Bai>tist  were  filled  with 
the  Holy  Spirit  (Lukei  :i3, 4i,  67) ;  but 
the  influence  was  more  or  less  occa- 
sional and  transient.  Under  the  New 
Dispensation  the  Holy  Spirit  has  come 
to  be  permanently  with  (jod's  peo])le  ; 
his  abiding  presence  is  tlie  privilege 

of  all    believers.      (Rom.  8:14;   l  Cor.  3:16; 

John  14: 16, 17.)  The  Apostles  had  pre- 
viou.sly  enjoyed  the  ordinary  infiuences 
of  the  Spirit  (John  20:22);  and  Ciod's 
people  in  former  ages  had  felt  his  in- 
fluences on  the  heart  (ps.  51 :  10,  11 :  isa. 
6:i :  10),  and  men  had  resisted  the  Holy 
Spirit  as  his  power  attended  the  pro- 
pliets  and  their  teachings.  (7: 51.)  But 
now  the  wish  of  Moses  is  fulfilled,  that 
the  Lord  would  put  his  Sjnrit  upon  all 
his  people.  (Num.  11 :  29.)  Began— im- 
plying that  this  had  never  occurred 
before,  and  that  it  contiiined  afterward. 
Other  tongues — besides  their  own, 
and  of  course  new  to  them.    (Mark  16 :  17.) 


Many  attempts  have  vainly  been  made 
to  explain  away,  or  modify  the  great- 
ness of  this  miracle.  The  language  is 
decisive,  and  the  narrative  that  follows 
shows  that  they  actually  spoke  in  dif- 
ferent tongues.  The  miracle  was  not 
a  change  in  the  hearing  of  the  multi- 
tude who  assembled,  for  the  use  of 
other  tongues  preceded  their  coming 
together.  (Ver.  6.)  Nor  did  the  disci- 
ples merely  speak  in  the  different  dia- 
lects of  tlie  Greek  language,  for  each  of 
the  multitude  heard  in  his  own  native 
tongue.  (Ver.  8.)  Pentecost  and  its 
many  tongues,  reaching  the  representa- 
tives of  the  known  world,  stand  op- 
posed to  Babel  and  its  confusion  of 
tongues.  While  this  miracle  was 
adajited  t«  teach  that  the  gosj>el  was 
for  all  people,  it  was  especially  an  evi- 
dence of  the  reality,  power,  and  pres- 
ence of  the  Holy  Spirit  among  believ- 
ers. It  was  also  an  attestation  to  the 
truth  of  tlie  gos])el,  and  to  the  charac- 
ter of  the  apo.stolic  preachers  as  divinely 
autliorized  messengers.  It  was  a  sign 
to  unbelievers  (1  cor.  14 :  22),  and  it  minis- 
tered to  the  progress  of  the  gospel  on 
this  occasion  (ver.  12),  and  doubtless  at 
many  other  times.  Whether  the  apos- 
tles afterward  used  the  endowment  of 
tongues  in  preaching  the  gosi)el  we  are 
not  informed.  It  was  not  really  neces- 
sary within  the  Eonian  Empire,  where 
the  Greek  language  was  in  verj'  general 
use.  It  seems  to  be  unknown  in  mod- 
ern times.  Having  served  its  purpose 
as  an  evidence  of  the  reality  and  ])re.s- 
ence  of  the  Holy  Spirit  and  the  truth 
of  the  gospel,  it  has  passed  away.  The 
Spirit  remains,  but  its  miraculous  man- 
ifestation is  no  longer  needed.  "  While 
it  is  true  that  now  the  Holy  Spirit  does 
not  confer  the  power  of  speaking  in 
new  languages,  it  is  yet  true  that  a 
baptism  in  the  Holy  Spirit  does  confer 
the  power  of  new  and  other  speech. 
When  now  a  man  has  opened  his  heart 
for  a  baptism  in  the  Holy  Spirit ;  when 
he  liegins  to  know,  by  secret  and  won- 
derful consciousness  that  that  Spirit  is 


Cu.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


29 


5  And  there  were  dwelling  at  Jerusalem 
Jews,  devout  men,  out  of  every  nation 

6  under  heaven.   Now  when  this  was  noised 
abroad,  the  multitude  came  together ;  and 


[they]    were   coiifoundeJ,    because    that 

every  man  heard  them  .speak  in  his  own 

7  language.  And  they  were  all  amazed  and 

marvelled,  saying  one  to  another,  Behold 


in  him ;  when  the  grand  liberty  of  the 
sons  of  God  has  broken  the  shackles 
from  his  soul,  tlien  does  he  not  begin  to 
speak  with  new  and  other  tongues,  with 
the  tongue  of  a  deep  personal  exper-  ! 
ience,  with  the  tongue  of  Joy,  with  the 
tongue  of  victory?  Surely,  in  this 
sense  even  the  gift  of  tongues  remains." 
(Wayland  Hoyt,  D.  D.)  As  the 
Spirit  gave  them  utterance — to 
make  address.  They  did  not  speak 
what  they  chose ;  neitlier  did  they  sim- 
ply recall  what  they  had  heard.  Tlius 
through  the  Spirit  they  were  fully  pre- 
pared to  be  witnesses  of  Jesus  to  all 
people.  (1:8)  Further  on  the  gift  of 
tongues,  see  10  :  46  ;  19  :  6 ;  Mark  16  : 
17  ;  1  Cor.  12  :  10,  28. 

5.  Dwelling — permanent  residents, 
sojourners,  and  pilgrims.  Some  aged 
persons  were  spending  their  last  days 
at  Jerusalem ;  others,  who  were  look- 
ing for  the  Messiah,  wished  to  be  at 
Jerusalem  at  the  time  of  his  coming; 
and  others  still  had  come  to  stop  awhile 
and  be  at  the  feast.  Devout  men — 
God-fearing.  The  word  is  applied  to 
Simeon  (Liike2:25),  and  to  the  men  who 
buried  Stephen.  (s :  2.)  They  were 
Jews  and  proselytes,  (ver.  10.)  The 
most  ])ions  of  the  scattered  Jews  would 
most  naturally  return  to  Jerusalem  and 
be  at  the  feast.  They  were  thus  com- 
petent and  trustworthy  witnesses  of  the 
])ower  of  the  Spirit.  Out  of  every 
nation  under  heaven.  A  strong 
popular  expression  meaning  from  many 
and  distant  lands.  From  the  time  of 
the  Babylonish  Captivity  the  Jews  had 
become  extensively  dispersed,  Avhere 
they  had  come  to  speak  the  language  of 
the  peojjle  among  whom  they  lived. 
They  had,  however,  retained  their  faitli, 
establishing  everywhere  their  syna- 
gogues and  their  worship.  They  were 
very  numerous  in  Alexandria  in  Egypt, 
at  Antioch  in  Syria,  at  Ephesus  and 
tliroughout  Asia  Elinor.  Many  also 
were  living  at  Corinth,  Rome,  and  other 
distant  cities  throughout  the  Koman 
Empire.  As  the  Greek  language  was 
generally  ditfused,  the  Septuagint,  the 
Greek  Version  of  the  Old  Testament, 


was  generally  used  by  the  dispersed 
Jews. 

G.  When  this  was  noised 
abroad — literally,  this  noise  haviug 
Ofciinrd,  that  is,  when  this  sound  was 
heard,  referring  to  the  noise  of  ver.  2. 
Some  suppose  it  to  mean  the  rumor  of 
this  whole  phenomenon  having  spread 
abroad ;  but  this  does  not  agree  well 
with  the  original  Greek.  Others  sup- 
pose it  to  refer  to  the  new  tongues  in 
which  the  disciples  spoke  so  loud  as  to 
be  heard  throughout  the  neighI)orhood, 
perhaps  the  city.  But  this  word  is  sin- 
gular, a  voice  or  sound,  but  the  tongues 
were  many,  and  those  who  adopt  this 
view  have  to  regard  voice  as  a  collective 
term.  We  regard  tlie  first  view  as  the 
most  natural.  The  loud  sound  from 
heaven,  like  the  rushing  noise  of  a 
mighty  wind,  was  heard  throughout  the 
city,  passing  in  its  circuit  or  course 
toward  the  house  where  the  disciples 
were  congregated,  and  ending  there, 
thus  attracting  tlie  people  to  that  spot. 
The  house  may  have  been  situated  on 
a  thoroughfare,  along  which  the  people 
were  going  to  the  temple,  or  near  an 
open  sj)ace  where  the  people  could 
assem))le,  and  where  Peter  and  others 
addressed  them.  It  is  possible  also 
that  when  the  disciples  began  to  speak 
with  tongues,  they  went  outside  and 
continued  to  sjwak  as  the  multitude 
came  together.  Were  confounded — 
were  confused  and  greatly  perplexed  in 
their  minds.  Heard  them  speak — 
not  all  in  each  langmige,  but  some  in 
one  and  some  in  another.  In  his  own 
language.  Oum  is  emphatic,  his  own 
jiarticular  tongue,  (ver.  8.)  The  mira- 
cle was  not  in  the  ears  of  the  hearers, 
but  in  the  lijis  of  the  speakers. 

7.  All  should  be  omitted  accord- 
ing to  the  highest  critical  authorities. 
Amazed  and  marvelled— were 
filled  with  intense  wonder,  which  they 
expressed  in  various  ejaculations, 
amounting  substantially  to  the  ex- 
clamatory questions  that  follow.  To 
one  another  is  omitted  in  many  of 
the  oldest  manuscripts.  Alford  ex- 
I^lains  it  as  "an  explanatory  gloss" 


30 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  II. 


are  not  all  these  which  speak  <>  Galileeans  7 

8  And  how  hear  we  every  man  in  our  own 

9  tongue,  wherein  we  were  born ;  Parthi- 


ans,  and  Medes,  and  Elamites,  and  the 
dwellers  in  Mesopotamia,  and  in  Judsea, 
and  <:  Cappadocia,  in  ^  Pontus,  and  Asia, 


d  ch.  18 


added  by  some  copyist.  Galileans. 
They  were  all  Jews  of  Palestine,  but 
the  apostles  and  leading  persons  were 
Galileans  and  the  rest  were  snpj)Osed  to 
be  so.  It  was  fjenerally  known  at  Je- 
rusalem that  Jesus  and  his  disciples 
were  princij)ally  from  Galilee  (Luke  m  : 
5-7;  John  7 :  n) ;  and  eveu  strangers  i-esid- 
ing  a  short  time  at  Jerusalem  could  not 
remain  ignorant  of  the  fact,  when  we 
consider  the  wonderful  phenomenon 
attending  our  Lord'.s  death  and  resur- 
rection. Besides,  Galileans  would  be 
quite  easily  recognized  by  travelling 
strangers,  since  Galilee  had  a  mixed 
population,  a  peculiar  dialect,  and  was 
a  thoroughfare  to  travelers  of  various 
nations  to  the  north  and  east. 

8.  And  how — how  then,  since  they 
are  all  Galileans,  do  we  hear  them 
sjieak  our  own  languages?  The  sen- 
tence ends  with  ver.  11.  Notice  also 
how  strong  and  accumulative  the  ex- 
pression. Not  only  do  they  repeat  our 
own  tongne  of  ver.  6,  but  add  in 
which  W'G  Avere  born,  our  mother 
tongue.  Thus  it  is  evident  that  the 
disciples  were  not  using  unmeaning 
expressions  in  a  state  of  ecstacy,  l)ut 
were  speaking  in  foreign  tongues  which 
were  understood  by  their  hearci"s. 

9.  A  list  of  names  is  given,  follow- 
ing a  geograpliical  order  of  most  of  the 
countries  in  whicl\  tlie  Jews  were  dis- 
persed, beginning  witli  the  northeast 
and  proceeding  to  the  west  and  south. 
The  persons  described  are  Jews  born  in 
foreign  countries  or  jiroselytes  from 
heathenism  to  the  JcAvish  foith.  (ver.  lo.) 
This  list  agrees  with  Philo's  survey  of 
the  Jewish  dispersion.  (Legat.  ad 
Cai'tim,  36.)  Tlie  Jews  outside  of  Pal- 
estine prolnibly  outnumbered  the  popu- 
lation of  Palestine  itself.  Parthians— 
mentioned  only  here  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment. Parthia  was  a  somewhat  ill- 
defined  country  in  the  extreme  north- 
east and  east,  lying  soutli  of  the  Cas- 
pian Sea  and  east  of  Media.  It  became 
independent  about  B.  c.  250,  and  was 
still  powerful  in  New  Testament  times, 
and  coutiuued  till  A.  D.  226.    Medes. 


Media  lay  midway  between  the  south 
end  of  the  Caspian  and  the  head  of  the 
Persian  Gulf.  In  the  seventh  century 
B.  c.  it  was  a  great  Oriental  mon- 
archy, l)ut  it  fell  into  tlie  hands  of  the 
Parthians  in  the  second  century  B.  C, 
and  was  subjift  to  them  at  this  time. 
Elamites.  Elam  was  an  ill-defined 
district  east  of  the  Tigris  and  south  of 
Media.  It  was  originally  inhabited  by 
the  descendants  of  Shem  (Geu.  lo  :  22), 
and  a])2>ears  to  have  been  a  province 
of  Babylon  in  the  days  of  Daniel. 
(Dan,  8:1, 2.)  Ca])tives  from  Israel  were 
located  there.  (isa.  11 :  11.)  Sura  or 
Shushan,  its  chief  city,  became  the 
Persian  cajiital,  and  Daniel,  Esther, 
Mordecai,  and  many  other  Jews  re- 
sided there.  (Esther*  "15, 16.)  MesOpO> 
tamia,  meaning  between  the  rivers, 
was  the  jdain  country  lying  between 
the  Tigi-iS  and  the  Eujdi  rates,  from 
whence  Abraham  was  called  and  Ba- 
laam   came.       (Gen.  24:10;  Deut.  23;4.)      In 

New  Testament  times  it  belonged  to 
the  Partliians.  Possibly  converts  from 
Pentecost  carried  back  the  gospel  to 
their  own  country  and  founded  the 
church  in  Babylon.  (1  Petei  5:i:).)  Ju- 
dea.  Why  is  Judea  mentioned,  as  if 
it  was  strange  that  the  disciples  should 
speak  in  the  language  there?  But 
they  were  enumerating  the  languages  in 
which  they  heard  the  disciples  speak, 
and  the  Arama;an  of  Judea  was  one  of 
them.  Besides,  in  passing  from  Meso- 
potamia to  Asia  Minor,  Luke  Avould 
naturally  introduce  Judea,  which  lay 
between  them.  The  dialect  of  Galilee 
was  also  ditferent  from  that  of  Judea, 
and  native  Jews  must  have  composed  a 
part  of  the  audience.  Cappadocia — 
the  most  easterly  Roman  province  of 
Asia  Minor,  south  of  the  Black  Sea 
and  west  of  Armenia.  Its  inhabitants 
seem  to  have  been  of  Syrian  origin, 
and  Plolemy  places  the  cities  of  Ico- 
nium  antl  Derl)e  within  its  limits, 
where  the  peo])le  used  "  the  speech  of 
Lycaonia."  (i4:ii.)  Peter  addressed 
his  first  epistle  to  Jewish  Chris- 
tians of  Pontus,  Galatia,  Cappadocia, 


Ch.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


31 


10  •  Phrygia,  and  '  Pamphylia,  in  Egypt,  and 
in  the  parts  of  Libya  about  e  Cyrene,  and 
•'strangers  of   Rome,  Jews  and  'prose- 

11  lytes,  ^  Cretes  and  '  Arabians— we  do  bear 


them  speak  iu  our  tongues  the  wonderful 

12  works    of    God?      And    they    were    a!l 
amazed,  and  were  in  doubt,  saying  one 

13  to  another,  What  meaneth  this?    Others 


•ch.  IG  :C;  18  :23.        '  ch.  1:5 :  13;  U  :  24.        g  ch.  11  :  20.        >■  ch.  18  :  2.        ich.  6:5;13: 


43. 


k  Titus  1  :  5. 


I  Gal.  1  :  17. 


Asia,  and  Bithynia,  all  provinces 
in  Asia  Minor.  Poiitus — nortii  of 
Cappadocia,  and  having  tiie  Black  Sea 
as  its  northern  boundary.  Large  num- 
bers  of  .Jews  dwelt  there.      (18:2;  l  Peter 

11.)  Its  language  seems  to  have  been 
the  Persian,  witli  a  mingling  of  the 
Greek.  Asia — the  Roman  province 
of  that  name  iu  Asia  Minor,  its  limits 
varying  from  time  to  time,  witli  Ephe- 

SUS  as  its  principal  city.  (6:9;  Rom.  16  :  5; 
Rev.  1  :  4,  U.) 

10.  Phrygia  occupied  the  western 
part  of  the  table  lands  of  Asia  Minor. 
It  was  not  a  separate  province,  but 
belonged  largely  to  the  province  of  Asia. 
It  is  mentioned  l>ecause  it  represented 
a  distinct  people  and  a  diflerent  lan- 
guage or  dialect.  Its  inhabitants  emi- 
grated from  Armenia  and  were  an  Indo- 
Germanic  race.  Iconium  of  Lycaonia 
and  Colosse  of  Asia  were  Phrygian 
towns,  and  Jews  resided  in  them  (i*:  i, 
19;  Col.  2:  8-M),  and  the  church  in  the 
latter  place  may  have  been  founded  by 
the  Pentecostal  converts.  Pamphylia 
was  a  Roman  province  on  the  south 
coast  of  Asia  Minor,  of  which  Perga 
was  an  important  city,  where  there  was 
proI)ably  a  synagogue,  (i*;^-)  In 
Egypt.  Having  given  tlie  principal 
provinces  of  Asia  Minor,  they  cross 
tlie  Mediterranean  to  Africa.  Egypt 
became  a  Roman  province  in  B.  c.  30. 
Vast  numbers  of  the  Jews  resided 
there,  especially  at  Alexandria,  where 
the  Hebrew  Scriptures  were  translated 
by  the  seventy  into  Greek  about  B.  c. 
'2<0.  Libya.  All  the  then  known 
portion  of  Africa  outside  of  Egypt  was 
called  Libya,  here  applied  especially 
to  that  region  west  of  Egypt.  One 
of  its  principal  cities  was  Cyrene, 
a  Greek  colony  and  a  seaport.  It  was 
nearly  soutli  of  the  west  extremity  of 
Crete.  Many  Jews  resided  there,  and 
a  synagogue  of  Cyrenians  existed  at 
Jerusalem.  (H.9.  Seealsoch.ll  :  19,20.)  It 
might  be  noted  that  the  first  Latin  ver- 
sion of  tlie  Bible  was  made  especially 
for    North    Africa.      Strangers    of 


Rome — sojourners  from  Royne,  who 
had  come  to  reside  temporarily  at 
Jerusalem.  Rome  was  the  capital  of 
tlie  whole  western  world,  situate  on  the 
Tiber,  and  having  over  two  millions  of 
inhabitants,  including  many  Jews. 
Tiberius  was  then  emperor.  JeAVS 
and  proselytes— referring  to  the  en- 
tire class  described,  embracing  Jews 
born  in  those  countries  and  using  their 
languages,  and  proselytes,  Gentiles  who 
had  emijraced  the  Jewish  faitli. 

11.  Passing  toward  the  south  we 
come  to  Crete,  now  Candia,  a  large 
island  in  the  Mediterranean,  south  of 
the  yEgeau  Sea.  (27 :  s  is ;  xitus  1 : 5, 12.) 
Arabians— from  Arabia  Petrea,  south 
of  Palestine.  This  list  of  various  peo- 
]>les,  each  representing  a  language  or 
dialect,  is  followed  by  the  conclusion 
of  the  sentence,  begun  in  ver.  8.  The 
leading  verb,  we  do  hear,  is  repeated ; 
and  tliat  the  miracle  was  not  in  their 
hearing,  but  in  the  actual  utterances  of 
the  disciples,  is  further  evident  from 
their  renewed  declaration,  them  speak 
in  our  tongues.  These  tongues  con- 
sisted of  dialects  of  Aramiean,  Arabic, 
Latin,  Greek,  and  other  native  lan- 
guages, fifteen  mentioned  above.  As 
this  was  a  general  survey,  it  may  not 
include  all  the  languages  and  dia- 
lects spoken  at  that  time.  The  theme 
of  these  utterances  was  the  wonder- 
ful {the  majestic)  works  of  God, 
which  he  had  done  through  Christ  for 
the  salvation  of  men.  The  discijdes, 
filled  and  enlightened  by  the  Holy 
Spirit  break  forth  in  praise  ■  and 
thanksgiving  to  God  for  the  gift  of 
Christ  and  the  glories  of  his  salvation. 
They  view  the  life,  death,  resurrection, 
and  work  of  Christ  as  never  before. 

12.  The  more  serious  ones  can  find 
no  satisfactory  explanation.  All  are 
astonished  and  perjtlexed.  They  are 
convinced  that  there  is  something  real 
in  this.  Assuming  that  it  must  mean 
something,  they  ask,  What  meaneth 
this,  What  may  this  be  f 

13.  Others.      The    scoffing   party, 


32 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  II. 


mocking  said,  These  men  are  full  of  new 
wine. 
14      But  Pet«r,  standing  up  with  the  eleven, 
lifted  up  his  voice,  and  said  unto  them. 
Ye  men  of  Judsea,  and  all  ye  that  dwell 


at  Jerusalem,  be  this  known  unto  you, 

15  and  hearken  to  my  words.    For  these  ar« 
not  drunken,  as  ye  suppose,  "seeing  it  is 

16  but  the  third  hour  of  the  aay.    But  this 
is  that  which  was  spoken  by  the  prophet 


1  Thess.  5  :  7. 


probably  very  largely  natives  of  Jeru- 
salem and  Judea,  who,  not  understand- 
ing the  foreign  languages  spoken,  in 
their  prejudices  regarded  the  unknown 
tongues  as  so  much  babble  and  unin- 
telligible jargon.  Mocking — deriding 
(jreally,  scoliing.  "  The  world  begins 
with  i-idicule ;  thence  it  proceeds  to 
queMioniufj  {i:i);  to  threats  (*:");  to 
iuiprisonings  (» :  \») ;  to  stripes  (5  :  w) ; 
to  murder."  (7:58-)  (Bengel.)  New 
wine— rather,  sweet  wine.  It  was  now 
the  28th  of  ilay  (ver.  i) ;  the  first  vin- 
tage occurred  in  August;  it  would 
not  therefore  have  been  new  wine. 
Some  regard  it  as  the  nnfermented 
juice  of  the  grape,  which  had  been 
preserved  in  air-tight  jars;  and  tliey 
suppose  these  deriders  sjioke  in  irony. 
But  if  they  did  not  mean  to  charge 
these  disciples  with  drunkenness,  why 
did  Peter  rei)ly,  "  These  men  are  not 
drunken,  as  ye  suppose."  And  if  he 
knew  that  the  sweet  wine  would  not 
intoxicate,  why  did  he  not  tell  them  so  ? 
Peter  evidently  saw  that  they  meant 
what  they  said.  To  their  prejudiced 
minds  the  disciples  doubtless  appeared 
and  sounded  like  drunken  men.  A 
sweet  wine,  very  intoxicating,  was 
made  from  grapes  dried  in  the  sun  and 
soaked  in  old  wine.  To  ))e  fulf  of  such 
sweet  wi)ie  was  to  be  verj^  drunk. 

14-.3(5.  Peter's  Address  to  the 
Multitude.    ( Joei  2 ;  28-s2 ;  fs.  le :  8-11 ;  H9 ; 

3.4;   110:1;   Dan.  9:26;    1  Peter  1  :  10-12.)      The 

three  appellations  applied  to  his  hear- 
ers at  the  l>eginuing  of  vcr.  14,  22, 
and  29  divide  his  speech  into  three 
parts.  In  the  _first,  Peter  defends  the 
disciples  and  explains  the  miracle ;  in 
the  second,  he  j)roclaiins  Jesus  as  rai.sed 
from  the  dead  according  to  the  predic- 
tion of  David ;  and  in  the  third,  dwell- 
ing still  further  on  David's  prediction, 
lie  affirms  that  he  and  his  brethren  are 
Avitnesses  of  the  resurrection  of  Jesus, 
who  is  proved  thereby  to  be  the  true 
Messiah. 

14.  With  the  eleven — Peter  being 
the  twelfth.   (i:'.'6)   The  apostles  proba- 


bly came  forward  from  the  company  of 
believers,  and  Peter  sjjoke  in  the  name 
of  all.  As  the  multitude  was  very 
great  the  others  may  also  have  spoken 
to  different  companies  of  persons.  Ye 
men  of  Judea,  etc. — Jewish  men,  and 
all  inhabiting  Jerusalem,  permanently 
or  temporarily.  It  does  not  ajtpiar  . 
that  the  disciples  were  now  speaking  * 
in  new  tongues.  That  had  been  occur- 
ring in  the  hearing  of  the  multitude. 
Now  explanations  are  made  of  the  won- 
derful miracle,  and  Chri.st  is  preached. 
Peter  especially  addresses  the  men  of 
Judea,  and  doubtless  speaks  in  the 
Aranucan,  the  common  language  of  the 
country.  His  lifting  up  his  voice  and 
the  formal  beginning  of  his  addre-ss, 
indicate  that  he  sjwke  loudly,  dis- 
tinctly, and  solemnly.  Hearken — to 
what  may  be  unexpected  and  unwel- 
come. 

15.  Peter  first  of  all  denies  the 
charge  of  drunkenness.  As  ye  sup- 
pose— as  ye  have  taken  up,  or  scof- 
&y\^\y  assumed.  But  the  third  hour 
of  the  day — between  eight  and  nine 
o'clock  in  the  morning,  the  first  of  the 
three    stated   hours    of  prayer.      (See 

Ps.  55  :  17  ;  Dan.   6  :  10,  13  ;  ch.  3  : 1 ;  10  :  9.)      The 

Jewish  principle  was  well-known,  that 
no  Jew  should  taste  anything  before 
this  hour  had  expired  on  the  Sabbath 
and  other  feast  days.  The  supposition 
was  unreasonalile  that  there  could  be  a 
drunken  assembly  at  so  early  an  lioiir, 
and  that  too  on  a  feast  day.  Lowest 
revellers  only  would  be  drunken  so 
early,  (isa.  5:ii.)  Observe  the  self-jios- 
session  and  calmness  of  Peter.  He 
heeds  not  their  mockery  and  insult,  but 
prudently  shows  how  groundless  is 
their  charge. 

16.  But.  Passing  by  the  charge  of 
drunkenness  as  absurd  and  groundless, 
Peter  proceeds  to  explain  what  the 
multitude  had  seen  and  heard.  It  is  a 
fulfillment  of  prophecy  spoken  by 
God  speaking  through  the  prophet 
Joel.  The  passage  (Joei  2 :  28-32)  is  quoted 
from  the  Hebrew  Avith  several  varia- 


Cn.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


33 


17  Joel ;  '  Ami  it  shall  come  to  pass  » in  the 
last  days,  saith  God, » 1  will  pour  out  my 
Spirit  upon  all  flesh  :  and  your  sons  and 
pyour  daughters  shall  prophesy,  and  your 
young  men  shall  see  visions,  and  your  old 

■>  Isa.  2  :  2 ;  Heb.  1  :  2 ;  2  Peter  3:3.        «  ch.  10  :  45 ;  Isa.  44  :  3 ;  Ezek.  11  :  10 ;  36  :  27 ;  Zech. 
12  :  10.        P  ch.  21  :  9.        q  1  Cor.  12  :  10,  2S ;  14  :  1,  etc. 


18  men  shall  dream  dreams.  And  on  my 
servants  and  on  my  handmaidens  I  will 
pour  out  in  those  days  of  my  Spirit ;  q  and 

19  they  shall  prophesy.  And  1  will  show 
wonders  in  heaven  above,  and  signs  in 


tioiis,  very  nearly  in  the  words  of  the 
Septuagint,  or  Greek  Version.  JSoiue 
sui)pose,  with  consideral)le  reason,  that 
it  formed  a  i)art  of  the  Scri])tural  read- 
ing in  the  synagogues  in  the  Pente- 
costal service.  Joel  prophesied  about 
15.  c.  800. 

17.  In  the  last  days.  In  the 
Hebrew  aftenrard.  As  afterward  refers 
to  the  times  of  the  Messiah,  Peter  uses 
the  familiar  prophetic  phrase,  "  the  last 
days,"  which  was  ai>i)lied  to  tlie  Messi- 
anic age.  (Isa.  2:2;Micah4:  1 ;  2 Tim.  3:1 ,  Heb.  1 : 
2  ;  James  5  :  3  ;   2  Peter  3:3;  1  John  2  :  18  ;  Jude  18.) 

Saith  God  is  introduced  very  natur- 
ally by  Peter  at  the  beginning  of  the 
quotation.  It  is  found  a  little  before 
in  Joel  2  :  22,  and  also  at  the  end  of 
the  quotation  in  ver.  32.  I  will 
pour,  etc. — pour  forth  of  my  Spirit, 
signifying  the  abundance  of  gifts  and 
influences.  "  Not  in  drojis,  as  under 
the  Old  Covenant,  but  in  streams." 
(Titus  3: 6.)  The  Hebrew  in  Joel  has 
simply  my  Spirit,  but  here  of  my 
Spirit,  showing  that  while  the  Spirit 
himself  came  forth  abundantly,  there 
was  an  exhaustless  reserve  witli  God. 
(jiai.  2:15.)  All  flesh — all  mankind. 
(Gen.  6:12.)  So  that  the  Spirit  can  be 
resisted,  grieved,  quenched,  (t  :  5i ;  Eph. 
4 :30;  1  Th«s3. 5 :  13.)  Its  powcr  is  to  be 
enjoyed  by  both  sexes,  old  and  young, 
and  in  various  conditions.  Prophesy— 
meaning  not  merely  the  predicting 
future  events,  but  also  in  general  tlie 
uttering  of  religious  truth  under  divine 
guidance.  (i  cor.  u:  i-s.)  Notice  that 
daur/hlers  and  hanilmaids  (next  verse) 
are  among  those  who  sliould  ]n'ophesy. 
The  women  enjoyed  the  gifts  of  the 
Spirit  at  Pentecost,  and  they  have  their 
work  in  the  church.  The  manner  in 
which  they  shall  exercise  their  gifts 
must  be  decided   by  tlie  word  of  God. 

(18:2S;    21:9;    Gnl.   3:28;    Phil.  4  :  3.)        Peter 

places  young  men  first,  but  .Joel 
places  old  men  first.  Perhaps  the 
apostles  and  most  of  the  disci2iles  were 
comparatively  young  men,  and  he 
C 


would  make  the  fact  i^rominent.  Vis- 
ions— an  appearance  seen  in  a  wak- 
ing, conscious  state.  Dreams — vis- 
ions seen  in  sleep.  "  The  visions  com- 
spond  to  the  lively  feelings  of  yoxt/i  ; 
dreams  to  the  lesser  excitability  of  //(<//■/■ 
advanced  age,  yet  the  two  are  to  be 
taken  not  as  mutually  exclusive." 
(Meyer.)  For  exam])les  of  visions, 
see  10  :  10,  .30 ;  16  :  9  ;  18  :  9.  Dreams 
make  up  an  inferior  form  of  divine  reve- 
lation, and  are  not  mentioned  in  apos- 
tolic times.  Josei)h  the  husband  of  Mary 
was  instructed  and  warned  of  God  in 
dreams.  (Matt,  i  :20;  2 :  13, 19, 22.)  Paul  had 
"  visions  and  revelations  "  (2  Cor.  12 : 1) ; 
the  latter  may  have  included  dreams. 
His  vision  of  an  angel  by  night  in  his 
shipwreck  (27 :  23)  may  have  been  in  a 
dream.  Dreams  and  visions  in  a  dark 
age  supplemented  a  deficient  revelation. 
They  are  no  longer  needed  by  those 
enjoying  the  clear  light  of  a  com- 
pleted revelation. 

18.  And — and  even  upon  the  lowest 
walks  in  life,  viale  and  female  slaves. 
My.  "Servants  according  to  the  flesh 
are  meant,  diflerent  from  the  children 
(ver.  17),  but  at  the  same  time  the  ser- 
vants of  God."  (Bengel.)  They 
should  enjoy  the  gifts  of  the  Spirit,  no't 
only  of  tongues,  but  also  of  prophecy. 
Among  such  the  go.s2jel  early  had  many 

trOJlllieS.       (1  Cor.  1  :  26-28;  Phil.  4  :  22;  Philcm. 

10-16.)  Doubtless  the  fulfillment  of  this 
projAecy  extends  throu'^liout  "tlie  last 
days,"  the  Gosjjel  DisjH'usation,  y.-t 
the  miraculous  gifts  a)>pear  to  lia\  e 
been  limited  to  the  a})o.stolic  age. 

19.  "Thelastdays"  were  to  be  noted, 
not  only  by  the  coming  of  the  Spirit, 
but  also  by  terrible  visitations  preced- 
ing the  second  coming  of  Christ.  Proph- 
ecies of  such  dreadful  events  would 
arouse  the  fears  of  the  multitude,  an  1 
indicate  what  their  doom  would  be  if 
they  rejected  Clirist.  And— after  tlte 
outpouring  of  the  S])irit.  The  predie- 
tion  finds  its  si)ecial  fulfillment  at  the 
end  of  the  dispensation,  when  Christ 


34 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cii.II. 


the  earth  beneath;  blood,  and  fire,  aud 

20  vapour  of  smoke :  '  the  sun  shall  be  turned 
into  darkness,  and  the  moon  into  blood, 
before  that  great  and  notable  day  of  the 

21  Lord  come.    And  it  shall  come  to  pass, 


that '  whosoever  shall  call  on  the  name  of 
the  Lord  shall  be  saved  ' 
22      Ye  men  of  Israel,  hear  these  words; 
Jesus  of  Nazareth,  a  man  approved  of 
God  among  you  '  by  miracles  and  wonders 


'  Mark  13  :  24;  Luke  21  :  25.        '  Rom.  10  :  13 


t  Matt.  11  :  2-6 ;  .lolin  3:2;  6  :  14. 


comes  to  judgment,      (i  Thess.  4 ;  is-n ;  2 

Thcss.  4:7;  1  Cor.  15:52.)  A  tvpical  ful- 
fillment may  douhtless  be  fouuil  in  the 
destruction  of  Jerusalem.  (Compare 
author'.s  Notes  0)i  Matthew,  ch.  24.) 
Similar  language  in  Matt.  24 :  29,  30, 
Jesus  used  iu  regard  to  the  time  just 
j)receding  his  second  coming.  Peter 
quotes  the  language,  not  knowing  but 
that  these  terriljle  things  miglit  be  near 
at  hand,  and  imder  the  power  of  the 
8}>irit  the  peoi)le  would  feel  that  they 
were  inevital>le  and  close  upon  them. 
Wonders  in  heaven  ...  in  the 
earth — prodigies,  terrific  plienomena 
foretokening  calamities  and  judgments. 
In  explanation,  and  to  make  it  more 
impressive  l)y  contrast,  Pettr  adds, 
above,  si§;ns,  and  beneath.  The 
wonders  would  be  evidences  of  divine 
power  aud  of  Christ's  coming,  (.\iatt. 
21 :  33.)  They  will  consist  in  blood  and 
lire  and  vapor  of  smoke,  in  sui)er- 
natural  bloody  and  fiery  api)earances 
and  dense  columns  of  smoke.  Some 
take  the  language,  symbolically,  to 
mean  ware,  bloodshed,  and  conflagra- 
tion. But  since  the  day  of  the  Lord 
and  the  coming  of  Christ  are  to  be  taken 
here  literally,  it  .seems  best  to  take  tlie 
language  literally.  Besides  tliese  are 
the  signs  and  wonders,  the  miracles, 
preceding  the  great  day  of  the  Lord. 
Josephus  sj)eaks  of  some  remarkable 
portents  preceding  the  destruction  of 
.Terii.salem  (JeiriKh  War,  vi.,  .5  :  3),  and 
if  such  preceded  the  ty})e  we  may  nat- 
urally expect  similar  iihenomena  ]ire- 
<';iling  the  antitype,  Christ's  second 
coming. 

20.  The  sun  .  .  .  the  moon.  The 
sun  shall  become  dark,  the  heavens 
Mack,  aud  the  moon  appear  bloody. 
Compare  the  darkness  of  the  crucifixion 
(Mult,  27 :  45)  aud  iu  the  plague  of  Egypt. 
(Kxod.  10: 23, 23.)  Great  and  notable 
day  of  the  Lord — (//tc//,  decisive,  and 
vuniifest  before  all  the  world  (Rev. 
6:  }:>,iii),  i/histn'otts  as  a  day  of  justice 
and  of  divine  retribution. 

31.  The  quotation  closes  with  a  cheer- 


ing assurance  and  promise.  A  nd  it  shall 
be,  iu  these  times  of  the  Spirit's  presence 
up  to  that  great  day.  Whosoever 
sJjall  call — shall  have  called  in  re- 
pentance and  faith.  (  Ver.  S8,  44,  46,  47  :  le  :  SI.) 

Xame  of  the  Lord— that  is,  of  Christ. 
This  is  a  strong  proof  of  his  divinity. 
(Rev.  22 :9.)  Comjjare  the  account  of  the 
dying  thief  in  Luke  23 :  42,  43.  Shall 
be  saved — from  the  doom  coming 
upon  the  wicked,  and  shall  be  per- 
mitted to  share  tlie  joys  and  glories  of 
his  kingdom.  Salvation  has  two  sides : 
from  sin  and  its  consequences  into  holi- 
ness and  its  results.     (Matt.  1 :  21 ;  24 :  46.) 

22.  Here  begins  a  new  division  in 
Peter's  address,  and  he  uses  an  appella- 
tion again:  Men  of  Israel,  that  is, 
Israelites.  This  is  broader  than  "  Men 
of  Judea"  (ver.  14),  representing  them 
as  the  representatives  of  the  chosen 
l>eople,  the  Israel  of  God.  Jews  were 
Israelites,  and  after  tlie  Babylonish 
captivity  and  in  the  New  Testament, 
tlie  two  terms  were  generally  synony- 
mous. But  in  verse  14,  "  Men  of  Judea," 
while  it  might  be  taken  by  the  audience 
as  a  general  <lesiguation,  would  be  of 
local  aj>plication,  especially  to  those 
Jews  who  had  derided  tlie  disci])les  as 
drunken,  (ver.  is.)  Having  denied  the 
charge  of  drunkenness  as  absurd,  and 
explained  the  wonderful  )>henomena  as 
the  fulfillment  of  Joel's  i)roj)lii.'cy,  Peter 
proceeds  to  jircach  Jesus  to  tlieni  as  the 
Messiah,  and  in  doing  tliis  lie  uses  tlie 
honorable  and  conciliatoiy  a])i>ellation, 
"  Men  of  Israel."  Hear  these  words. 
Calling  special  attention  and  giving 
emphasis  to  the  unexjiccted  trutli  he 
was  about  to  utter,  the  pioof  of  which 
was  the  niira(de  of  tongues  they  had 
witnessed  and  the  jjrophecy  wliich  was 
then  being  fulfilled.  Jesus  of  Naza- 
reth— rather,  (he  Nazarene  (Matt.  2  :  23) 
whom  many  of  you  knew  and  desjiised. 
A  man  approved — proved  to  yon  from 
God.  No  mere  adventurer,  but  one 
whose  authority  from  God  was  well  at- 
tested by  what  he  did.  Miracles^re- 
garded  as  the  manifestation  of  divine 


Ch.  IL] 


THE  ACTS. 


35 


and  signs,  "which  God  did  by  him  in  the 
midst  of  you,  as  ye  yourselves  also  know  : 

23  him,  » Iieing  delivered  by  the  determinate 
counsel  and  foreknowledge  of  God,  ye 
have  taken  and  by  wicked  hands  have 

24  crucified  and  slain  :  J  whom  God  hath 
raised  up,  having  loosed  the  pains  of 


death:  because'it  was  not  possible  that 

25  he  should  be  holden  of  it.  For  David 
speakelh  concerning  him,  '  I  foresaw  the 
Lord  always  before  my  face,  for  he  is  on 
my   right   hand,   tliat   1   should   not    be 

26  moved.  Therefore  did  my  heart  rejoice, 
and  my  tongue  was  glad  ;  moreover  also 


1  Matt.  12  :  28.  »  Dan.  9  :  24r-27  ;  Luke  22  :  22 ;  24  :  44  ;  1  Peter  1  :  20.  y  .li.  4  : 1(1 :  l:!  : 
30,  :i4;  Horn.  6  :  4;  1  Cor.  15  :  15 ;  2  Cor.  4  :  14;  Gal.  1:1;  Col.  2  :  12;  1  Peter  1  :  21.  '  John 
1  :  4 ;  f)  :  26 ;  10  :  18. 


power.  Wonders — extraordinary  phe- 
iiouK'na  exciting  astonishment  or  terror. 
.Siijns^evidences  of  his  divine  mis- 
sion. (.iohu2:ii.)  See  furtlier  on  mira- 
cles in  author's  JVotes  on  Matilieir,  ch. 
8,  introductory  remarks.  Which  God 
did  by  him.  Peter  is  speaking  of 
"Jcsns  the  Nazarene,  a  man,"  etc.,  the 

man     C'lirist    Jesus  (l  Tim.  2:5;  John  U:  10), 

in  the  days  of  his  humiliation.  As 
Mediator  lie  is  subordinate  to  the 
Fatlier.  Peter  also  appeals  to  them  as 
having  witnessed  tliese  evidences,  as 
ye  yourselves  know.  The  best  au- 
thorities omit  also. 

23.  Him  being  delivered  up  to 
you  by  Judas.  Some  refer  this  to  tiie 
divine  act  of  giving  Christ  over  to  the 
world  to  suffer.  But  this  is  not  as  nat- 
ural and  faitliful  to  the  original  as  the 
preceding  vieM'.  By  the  determinate 
coun.sel — according  to  the  fixed  coun- 
sel. Not  Ijecause  Jesus  was  heljiless, 
but  hecau.se  it  was  God's  purpose.  (4 :  2s; 
Luke  22 : -.'2.)  And  forclf Howledge. 
God's  jjurposes  and  foreknowledge  are 
harmonious  and  co-e.xistent,  and  neither 
one  independent  of  the  other,  (i  Peter 
1:2,20.)  Ye  have  taken  sliould  be 
omitted  according  to  the  oldest  and  best 
manuscrij)ts.  By  wicked  hands,  etc. 
— rather,  ye  sleiv,  having  imiled  him  to 
the  cross,  hi/  the  hand  of  kiw/esf^  men. 
The  death  of  Jesus  was  publicly  de- 
manded by  the  Jewish  people,  and  ju- 
•  lit'ially  resolved  upon  and  accom- 
jdish^d  by  the  Sanhedrin  in  the  name 

of  the  nation.       (Jobn  19  :  6-16;  Luke  23  :  1.  21.) 

Tlie  instigators  were  the  most  guilty. 
Notice  that  Peter  does  not  say,  but  im- 
j)lies,  crucifixion,  by  stating  a  charac- 
teristic act  in  that  cruel  mode  of  ]iutting 
to  death,  having  fastened.,  tliat  is,  Ity 
nails  to  tlie  cross.  77ie  (aw/c.s.-^  oiie.s 
were  Gentiles,  Pilate,  and  the  Itouian 
soldiers.  The  trial  of  the  Sanhedrin 
was  in  violatiou  of  their  own  law  (Matt. 


27 :  18, 24) ;  and  Pilate  pronounced  Jesus 
innocent,  but,  yielding  to  the  infuriated 
cries  of  the  .Jews,  delivered  him  to  be 
crucified.  (John  I9:i2-i6.)  The  whole  pro- 
cedure was  the  act  and  the  outcome  of  a 
lawless  mob. 

24.  In  contrast  with  their  treatment 
God  raised-  him  np  from  the  dead. 
(ver.32.)  Having  loosed  the  pains 
of  death — having  delivered  him  from 
tlie  results  of  the  i)angs  of  death,  that 
is  from  lieiiig  held  in  the  grave  and 
from  corrni)tion.  Many  derive  pains 
of  death  from  the  Septuagint  rendering 
of  Ps.  18  :  4;  116  :  3,  where  the  He- 
brcAv  has  "  bands  of  death."  Peter, 
perhajis  almost  unconsciously,  used 
this  familiar  phrase.  Because  it 
Avas  not  possible  that,  contrary  to 
God's  purpose,  Jesus  should  be  held  by 
death,  as  shown  Ijy  the  quotations 
which  follow. 

25.  Peter  (piotes  from  Ps.  16  :  8-11, 
wliieh  indicated  (Jod's  ])lans  regarding 
the  ^Messiah,  that  lie  must  be  raised 
from  the  dead.  The  quotation  is  from 
the  Se])tuagiut  version.  It  is  quoted 
by  Paul  (13:36),  and  by  him  also  ap- 
plied to  Christ.  The  whole  psalm  is  a 
unit,  and  Messianic.  "  We  have  in  it 
but  one  s]K'aker  from  commencement  to 
end,  and  in  other  resj^ects  such  a 
marked  unity  of  thouglit  and  structure, 
that  it  would  be  an  arlntrary  procedure 
to  assign  one  ]>art  to  David  and  another 

to  Chri.st."      (HA(nvETT.)      (Seeon  »er.  an.) 

Concerning  him — in  reference  to 
him,  impersonating  him.  I  foresaAV 
— rather,  I  saw  the  Lord  before  me 
alwai/s,  having  reference  not  to  time, 
but  to  place.  On  my  right  hand — 
as  a  i)rotection  and  defence.  That  I 
should  not  be  moved  or  disturbed 
in  labors  and  suiferings.  Constant  fel- 
lowship with  God  gave  assurance  and 
stability. 

26.  Therefore— on  account  of  this 


36 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  II. 


27  my  flesh  shall  rest  in  hope :  because  thou 
wilt  not  leave  my  soul  in  hell,  neither  wilt 
thou   suffer  thine  Holy   One  to  see  cor- 

28  ruption.  Thou  hast  made  knowu  to  me 
the  ways  of  life ;  thou  shalt  make  me  full 
of  joy  with  thy  countenance.' 


29  Men  and  brethren,  let  me  freely  speak 
unto  you  of  the  patriarch  David,  that  he 
is  both  dead  and  buried,  and  his  sepulchre 

30  is  with  us  unto  this  day.  Therefore 
a  being  a  prophet,  i"  and  knowing  that  God 
had  sworn  with  an  oath  to  him,  that  of 


»  ch.  1  :  IG.         l>  Ps.  72 ;  Luke  1  :  31-33,  GU ;  ,Tuhn  18  :  36,  37. 


confidence  in  his  Divine  Protector. 
Heart — the  seat  of  the  moral  emotions 
and  of  the  will.  My  tongue.  In  the 
Hcl)rew  my  glory,  representing  tlic  soul, 
tlie  noblest  part  and  glory  of  man. 
The  tongne  was  regardeil  as  an  instru- 
ment of  praise  and  the  glory  of  man, 
and  thus  the  meaning  in  the  Hebrew 
and  the  Greek  is  substantially  the 
same.  Ilis  spiritual  being  rejoiced  and 
exulted.  Moreover  also — not  this 
alone,  but  more.  My  flesh — my  body, 
distinguished  from  the  soul.  Shall 
rest — literally,  slutll  tabernac/e,  shall 
sojourn  in  tbe  grave  ill  hope,  in 
security  and  confidence  of  a  speedy  res- 
toration to  life.  His  body  in  the  grave 
shall  be  as  one  who  pitches  his  tent  for  a 
short  season. 

27.  Because — introducing  the 
ground  of  the  confidence  expressed  in 
the  preceding  verse.  Thou  wilt  not 
leave  my  soul  in  hell — thou  iri/t 
not  uhamlon  my  soul  in  Hades,  the  vni- 
seen  world,  the  place  of  dejjartcd  .spir- 
its. He//  here  is  not  Gehrnuu,  the 
abode  of  the  lost  (Matt.  5  :  n),  but  J/adrs, 
corresponding  to  S/ieol  in  the  Hebrew, 
the  world  of  departed  spirits.  Into 
this  abode  tlie  soul  of  Chri,st  entered, 
that  portion  of  which,  where  he  was, 
he  himself  called  paradise.  (Luke  23 : 4.i.) 
Further  di.scussion,  see  author's  Notes 
oil  iMatt/ieir,  ch.  11  :  23  and  Kotcs  on 
Ijike,  ch.  23  :  43.  Thine  Holy  one. 
In  the  Hebrew  thy  favored  or  beloved, 
meaning  the  Messiah.  Here  Christ's 
holiness  is  made  ])rominent.  (Heh.  7:20.) 
To  sec  corruption — experience  dis- 
solution, referrim,'  to  iiis  body,  sutler 
l)utrefaction.  He  would  not  allow  his 
l)ody  to  decay  and  return  to  dust.  The 
idea  of  extinction  of  being  or  annihila- 
tion is  not  in  the  word. 

28.  Thou  hast  made,  etc.  Thou 
didst  miike  kiioiru  those  ways  that  lead 
to  life,  referring  to  Christ's  resurrec- 
tion. Full  of  joy,  etc.— /«//  of  ylad- 
iicss  with  t/iy  j^resence,  in  the  presence 
of   God,   referring    to   Christ's    ascen- 


sion to  heaven.  To  the  same  effect  is 
the  la.'^t  clause  of  the  Psalm,  "  Pleasures 
at  thy  right  hand  for  evermore,"  which 
Peter  omits  as  unnecessary  and  familiar, 
and  easjl)'  supplied  from  memory.  In 
the  Hel)rew  there  is  but  one  verb  in 
this  verse,  "Thou  wilt  show  me  the 
path  of  life,  fullness  of  joy  in  thy 
presence,"  etc.  (Dr.  Conant,  Bible 
Union  IVr.) 

29.  Men,  brethren  omitting  and. 
Peter    had    addressed    them    as    Jews 
(ver.  14),  as  belonging  to  the  chosen  peo- 
]ile  of  God  (ver. 22),  and  now  he  uses  the 
familiar,  the  conciliatoiy,  and  the  more 
endearing     a])])ellation     of      brethren. 
,  This  ojjens   the  third  pail  of  Peter's 
s])eech,  though  closely  connected  with 
j  the  j)receding.     He  ai)plies  the  Script- 
ure ju.st  quoted,  fir.«t  negatively  in  this 
I  verse,  and  positively  to  Christ  in  the 
I  next    two    verses.     Let    me    freely 
I  speak.     Rather,  /  may  be  allowed  to 
I  spea/:  freely  and  frankly  without  seem- 
ing  to  be  lacking  in  respect  for  the 
patriarch    David,    the    fatlier    and 
I  founder  of  the  royal  family.     See  7:8; 
1  Heb.  7  :  4,  where  the  .^ame  title  is  ap- 
t  plied  to  the  sons  of  Jacob,  as  the  fath- 
ers of  tiie  tribes,  and  to  Abraham  tbe 
j  father  of  the  nation.     Is  both  dead 
'•  and  buried — rather,  he  buth  died  and 
;  iras  buried  and  his  sepulchre  is  among 
us,  etc.,  in  that  part  of  the  city  known 
as  the  city  of  David  or  Mount  Zion. 

(1  Kings  2  :  10  ;  Neli.  3  :  16.)  It  WaS  tllUS  evi- 
dent that  David's  lueiliction  did  not 
apply  to  himself.  Josepbus  says  tliat 
the  toml)  was  ojiened  successively,  by 
Hyrcanus  and  King  Herod,  in  order  to 
rifle  it  of  its  sui>posed  treasures. 
{Anti(j.  xii.  15.  ;>.)  It  was  still  known 
in  the  reign  of  Adrian  and  probably 
in  the  days  of  Jerome  in  the  fourth 
century.  The  mosque  covering  the 
sujjposed  site  on  the  southern  brow  of 
Mount  Zion  is  probably  not  far  from  the 
actual  one. 

30.  Therefore,  since  David  could 
not  have  meant  himself,  he  must  as  a 


Cn.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


37 


the  fruit  of  hi.s  loins,  iiccordiiig  to  the 
flesh,  he  would  raise  up  Clirist  to  sit  on 

31  his  throne;  he,  seeing  this  before,  spake 
of  the  resurrection  of  I'hrist,  that  his  soul 
was  not  left  in  hell,  neither  his  flesh  did 

32  see  corruption.  This  Jesus  hath  God 
raised  up,  "  whereof  We  all  are  witnesses. 


33  Therefore  <!  being  by  the  right  hand  of 
God  exalted,  and  <■  having  received  of 
the  Father  the  promise  of  the  Holy  Spirit, 
hofhath  shod  forth  this,  which  ye  now 

34  see  and  hear.  Kor  David  is  not  ascended 
into  the  heavens:  but  he  saith  himself, 
e '  The  Lord  said  unto  my  herd,  Sit  thou 


i  Eph.  1  :  20-23 ;  Phil.  2  :  i». 
f  eh.  10  :  45. 


0  eh.  1:4;  Luke  24  :  40 ;  .lolin  14  :  IG,  20;  1.') 
B  Ueb.  1  :  13 ;  12  :  2. 


prophet  have  meant  the  Messiah. 
tinowing  that  liod  had  sworn 
\vith  an  oath.  The  prophet  Nuthan 
had    foretold   this   to  David.     (viSam.T: 

I-.'IK:  1  Chn.u.  17:  17;  Ps.  89  : :),  4 ;  i:S2  :  U.)      Tlte 

words,  "  aeeordina;  to  the  flesh,  he  would 
raise  u])  Christ,"  are  not  in  the  oldest  i 
niamiscripts    and    are   omitted    by   the  [ 
hi'^hest  eiitieal  authorities.     The  i)rom-  [ 
Ise  implied  an  interrupted  line  of  male  ] 
descent    from    David   to   the   one  who 
n/iou/d  sit  on  his  throne.    The  .lews  held 
that  the    ilessiah   would   dseend  from 
David,  and  Peter  here  makes  jirominent 
his   kinifly  office,  wliich  he  applies  to 

Jesus.       (Ver.  :h6.) 

31.  Seeing  this  before — David  as 
a  prophet  knew and/orr.fff (r  this  throiiifh 
the  promises  and  revelations  from  (iod. 
It  need  not  l)e  understood  tiiat  David 
had  a  full  knowledge  of  this,  hut  that 
he  had  caught  i)rophetic  glimpses, 
(i  Pete.-  1  :  1012.)  Christ — rather,  the. 
Christ,  not  a  proper  name,  but  the  offi- 
cial title,  referring  to  Jesus,  whom  he 
mentions  in  the  next  verse.  Peter  re- 
fers to  the  prediction  again,  and  applies 
it  to  the  Ciirist,  as  foreseen  by  David. 
His  soul  is  omitted  by  the  best  criti- 
cal authorities.  Instead,  read  he,  tliat  is, 
the  Christ  who  was  not  left  in  a  disem- 
bodied state,  and  whose  flesh,  though 
he  died,  was  not  corrupted. 

3;i.  This  Jesus— whom  Peter  had 
introduced  in  ver.  22,  and  whose  resur- 
rection he  affirmed  in  ver.  24.  Only 
one  thing  now  was  needed  to  complete 
Peter's  argument — the  i)roof  of  Jesus' 
resurrection.  This  he  now  gives : 
whereof  we  are  all  witnesses, 
consisting  of  the  apostles  who  were 
specially  chosen  to  testify  to  that  event 
(1:8,22)  and  many  others,  (icor,  i5:6.) 
Whereof^o/  which  fact,  his  resurrec- 
tion. 

33.  Therefore — in  consequence  of 
his  resurrection,  of  which  his  exalta- 
tion was  a  necessary  result.    By  or  to 


the  right  hand.  Eitlier  is  gram- 
matically and  theologically  correct. 
He  M'as  exalted  hj  God's  power  and  to 

God's       right      hand.         (l    Peter  .1  :  22;  Kpli. 

1;  20-22.)  The  latter  rendering  is  prefer- 
able, being  more  in  accord  with  the 
next  two  verses  and  the  ])arallel  pas- 
sage.       (5:»I.     See  Col.  3  :  1  ;  Heb.  1  :  3;   10:12.) 

Having  received  of  the  Father 
the  jiroinise,  etc. — the  bestowment 
of  the  Holy  Spirit  in  fulfillment  of 
the  promise  of  the  Father  (1 : 4),  made 
in  such  passages  as  Joel  2 :  28-32, 
quoted  by  Peter,  ver.  17  f.  He,  Jesus, 
liath  shed  forth  just  now.  Jesus 
had  promised  that  he  would  do  this. 
(jniin  15:  :ii;;  16: 7.)  See  and  hear.  The 
phenomena  connected  with  the  coming 
of  the  Holy  Spirit  were  both  seen  and 
heard,  (ver.  7,  s.  11.)  The  whole  company 
engaged  in  praising  God,  and  all  speak- 
ing in  unknown  tongues. 

34,  35.  For,  in  proof  of  the  .state- 
ment that  Jesus  had  ascended  to  the 
right  hand  of  God,  Peter  adduces  the 
prediction  of  David  Iiim.self,  found  in 
Ps.  110:1.  This  Psalm  was  regarded 
as  messianic,  and  was  so  recognized  by 
Christ  himself.  (Matt.  22 :  4i-46.)  The  argu- 
ment is :  David  did  not  ascend  into 
heaven,  but  he  called  him  who  is  to 
ascend  my  Lord,  thus  distinguishing 
him  from  liimself.  David's  Lord  was 
Chri.st  who  was  thus  to  be  exalted. 
The  Lord  said,  etc.  In  the  Hebrew, 
Jehovah  said  to  my  Lord,  that  is,  to  the 
Messiah,  as  Peter's  hearers  would 
readily  acknowledge,  according  to  the 
common  interpretation  of  the  Jews. 
Sit  thou  on  my  right  hand — not 
merely  as  a  position  of  honor,  but  as  a 
partner  of  my  sovereignty  and  power. 
Till  I  make,  etc. — till  t  make  thy  foe^s 
the  footstool  of  my  feet,  implying  utter 
defeat  and  abject  submis.sion.  The 
figure  is  borrowed  from  the  usage  of 
ancient  warfare.  (Josh.  10 :  24 ;  2  sam.  22 :  41.) 
(See  author's  JVotes  on  Matthew  22  :  43, 


38 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  II. 


35  ou  my  right  hand,  ^  imtil  I  make  thy  foes 
86  thy  footstool.  [Hsa.  ex.  1,  /iepr.]  There- 
fore let  all  the  house  of  Israel  know  as- 
suredly, that  God  hath  made  that  same 
Jesus,  whom  ye  have  crucified,  both  Lord 
and  Christ 


37  Now  when  they  heard  this, '  they  were 
pricked  in  their  heart,  and  said  iiiitu 
Peter  and  to  the  rest  of  the  apostles,  Meu 
Kitd  brethren,  *  what  shall  we  do? 

38  Then  Peter  said  unto  them,  '  Repent, 
and™ be  baptized  every  one  of  you  "in 


h  Eph.  1 


■  Zocli.  VI  :  U);  .John  If,  :  8,  9.        k  ch.  0:5,  6;  Luke  3  :  10.        1  ch.  3  :  19; 


Liiko  24  :  47. 


'ch.  22:  Ki;  Matt.  28  :  19. 


Rom.  6 


44.)     It  is  as  Mediator  that  Christ  is  I 
spoken  of  as  at  the  right  hand  of  God. 

(Rom.  8  :  3+ ;  Eph.  1  :  2tf-2:) ;  I  Cor.  15  :  23-28.)  | 

36.  Therefore  .  .  .  assuredly —  i 

au  emphatic  conclusion  from  Avhich  \ 
there  couUI  be  no  appeal.  Be  it  i 
knoAvn  —  from  all  the  evidence  ad- 
duced. Conci.sely  and  imj)ressively, 
Peter  sums  uj)  his  discourse  in  a  sintijle 
sentence.  God  .  .  .  ye.  A  .strong  ] 
contra.st.  God  hath  made — hath  di- 
mnely  constituted  him  both  Lord  and 
Christ,  (vcr.  21,. SI.)  Jesus  is  luYiught 
to  view,  as  in  the  jn-eceding  verso  in 
his  Mediatorial  character.  Tlie  en<l  of 
the  sentence  and  of  tlie  discourse  in  tlie 
original  is  very  pointed — this  Jesus 
'whom  ye  crucijied.  It  wasfittetl  to  ji re- 
duce conviction  in  his  hearers,  as  indi- 
viihials  and  representatives  of  the 
Jewish  nation,  for  having  disowned 
and  crucified  tlie  Messiah.  "The  sting 
at  the  end."     (BicxOEL.) 

This  discourse  of  Peter  is  one  of  great 
force  and  lieaiity.     It  is  a  model  as  a  \ 
siniph'  ]>re.seMtation  of  tlie  truth.     It  is  i 
foundeii   on  the  word  of  God  and  ap- 
)>lied  to  those  facts  which  were  known 
to  tlie   hearers,  and  to  otlier  facts   at- 
tested liy  tile  apostles  and  their  bretliren 
from  tlieir  personal  knowledge.     It  was 
evidenced  by  prophecy,  miracles,  and 
the   presence   of  the   Holy  Sjiirit,  and 
eminently  suited  to  ])rodiice  conviction  ' 
and  a  sense  of  sin.     "The  apostle  de- 
mands of  the  house  of  Israel  that  they 
acknowledge  him,  who  a  few  weeks  he- 
fore  was  crucified,  as  their  Lord  and 
Christ.     And  t/iei/  bf/ieiv !     A  stronger 
proof  cannot   well   he   imagined    than 
this,  that  it  was  the  power  of  the  Holy 
Spirit  which   made  the  words  of  the  j 
preacher  move  the  hearts  of  the  hearers  ! 
To  all  .lews  the  cross  of  Christ  was  a  j 
stumbling-block,  yet  they  recognize,  on  I 
the  word  of  a   private  individual,  the  j 
crucified  and  deeply  abased  Jesus  as  [ 
their  Saviour."  j 

37-47.  The  Effect    of   Peter',s  I 


Address.  Conviction,  conversion,  and 
baptism.  Steadfastness,  benevolence, 
joy,  and  daily  increase  of  disciple- 
ship. 

37,  They  Avere  jfriclied—2rierced 
to  the  heart — with  pungent  sorrow  and 
alarm  by  the  truth  that  they  had  re- 
jected and  crucifie<l  the  Messiah. 
They — not  necessarily  all  the  multi- 
tude, but  large  numbers  of  them.  This 
effect  upon  them  sliows  the  Holy 
Spirit's  power  in  ])roducing  conviction 
(j«imiC:K),  as  well  as  in  the  gift  of 
tongues.  Men,  brethren — the  same 
appellation  tliat  Peter  used  (vcr.  29), 
showing,  not  merely  a  return  of  the 
comj)linieiit,  but  a  mellowing  of  their 
hearts.  M  hat  shall  we  do?  We 
have  jnit  tlie  Me.';siah  to  death  and  have 
incurred  the  most  dreadful  guilt ;  we 
cannot  undo  the  deed :  what  shall  we 
do  to  enjoy  the  divine  favor  and  escape 
the  consequences  of  our  great  folly  and 
guilt.  Their  conversion  began  with 
this  anxious  inquiry. 

38.  Repent.  The  word  expresses 
an  inward  change  of  views  and  feel- 
ings, implies  a  sorrow  for  sin  and  a  re- 
formation of  life  as  the  fruits.  I  See  Mmt. 
3: 2.  note.)  Be  baptized — literally  im- 
mej-sed.  (See  Matt.  :i:  6,  uoie.)  Bai>tism  fol- 
lows repentance,  and  is  a  symbol  of  the 
thorough  change  denoted  and  im])lied 
by  repentance.  Every  one  of  yon. 
Bajitisiu  is  a  personal  act  which  imist 
be  intelligently  received  by  each  candi- 
date. In — rather,  vpon — the  name 
of  Jesus  Christ,  as  the  only  Saviour, 
and  relying  upon  him,  accepting  all 
that  his  name  implies.  Their  ba])tism 
was  to  be  received  in  faith,  and  by  it 
they  professed  their  faith  in  Jesus 
Christ.  Comj)are  our  Lord's  early 
preaching  in  Galilee,  "  Repent  and 
believe  the  gospel,"  here  to  be  i>cr- 
formed  both  in  act  and  symbol.  (M»ik  i 
15,  note.)  For — rather,  unto — the  re- 
mission of  sins,  as  the  beneficent 
end  of  repentance  and  faith  in  the  Lord 


Ch.  II.] 


THE  ACrS. 


39 


the  name  of  Jesus  Christ  for  tlie  rciuis- 
sion  of  sins,  "and  ye  shall  receive  the  gift 
39  of  the  Holy  LSpirit.  Kor  I'the  promise  is 
unto  you,  ami  'i  to  your  children,  and  ■'to 
all  that  are  afar  oil',  creii '  as  many  as  the 

0  ch.  8  :  1.5-17.        P  Gen.  12  :  1-3 ;  17  :  7,  8 ;  Jer.  32  :  30,  40.        q  Isa.  44  :  3 ;  Joel  2  :  28.        '  ch 
10  :  4.-) ;  Zech.  6  :  U  ■  Eph.  2  :  13-22.         »  Heh.  3  :  1 ;  2  Peter  1  :  10.         '2  Cor.  «  :  17. 


40  Lord  our  (iod  shall  call.  And  with  many 
other  words  did  he  testify  and  exhort, 
saying,  <Save  yourselves  from  this  un- 
toward generation. 


Jesus  Christ,  as  clo.sely  united  to  and 
expressed  in  their  baj)tisui.  Kepentanee 
and  its  first  fruits,  obedience,  are  iu- 
separaido ;  an<l  iienee  thougli  forgive- 
ness of  sins  is  ))roniised  on  repentance 

and    faith     (-l  ;  la  ;  «  :  22  ;  10  ;  43  ;  11  :  18  ;  13  :  39  ; 

16 :  31 ;  Horn.  3 :  26),  yet  as  Clirist  had  com- 
manded baptism,  by  whicli  tliey  should 
Erofess  their  re])entance  and  faitli  in 
im,  there  would  have  lieen  wanting 
sufficient  evidence  of  tlieir  inward 
change  and  outward  reformation,  if 
tliis  precept  were  not  obeyed.  "And 
ill  the  circumstances  of  titat  day  a  will- 
ingness to  be  baptized  was  no  slight 
evidence  of  a  new  heart."  (i)R. 
HOVEY,  in  Dr.  Ilackett's  (JoniiurtUavy, 

the      Acts.)      (See  Mark  16:  17,  Doic.  and  Remark 

17.)  The  sins  forgiven  included  not 
only  that  of  crucifying  the  Messiah, 
but  all  other  sins.  \n  addition,  tlhc  c/ift 
of  the  Holy  Spirit  is  promised,  whose 
wondrous  power  they  saw  and  felt. 
They  should  enjoy,  not  only  the  ordi- 
nary sanctifying  power  of  the  Spirit, 
but  the  extraordinary  gifts  which  were 
displayed  on  that  occasion  aird  enjoyed 
by  the  apostles  and  other  disciples.  (10 : 
45;  11:17.)  Water  baptism  is  enjoined; 
jiartaking  in  the  Spirit's  baptism  prom- 
ised. 

39.  For  introduces  the  explanation 
or  reason  for  what  he  had  just  stated. 
The  promise — of  the  Spirit  referred 
to  in  the  preceding  verse  and  verses 

17,  18.    (See  1:4;  Eph.  1  :  13.)     UlltO  yOU — 

emphatic,  to  you  Jews  (u),  Israelites 
(22),  both  native  and  foreign  (s-ii).  To 
your  children  may  mean  either 
children  (21 : 5),  or  descendants  (i3:33), 
the  latter  agreeing  better  with  the  con- 
text, which  is  far-reaching.  Tlie  pi'om- 
ise  is  to  such  as  are  capable  of  exercis- 
ing repentance  (ver.  ;w),  and  who  may 
see  visions  and  prophe.sy  (ver.  17).  To 
all  that  are  afar  off— not  to  the 
foreign  Jews,  for  they  are  included  in 
iinto  you  (above),  but  to  the  Gentiles  who 
were  regarded  as  afar  off.  (Kph.  2 :  11,  i.t,  17 ; 

Isa.  4a  :  1  ;  57  :  19;  Zech.  6  ;  15.)       SoiUe    objCCt, 


that  Peter  was  not  aware  that  the  gos- 
pel was  to  l>e  preached  to  the  Gentiles. 
(11:18.)  But  pious  Jews  expected  tliat 
the  reign  of  the  Messiaii  wouUI  be  uni- 
versal. Prophets  had  foretold  the  con- 
version of  the  Gentiles  (Geu.  49:iO;  Ps.  2; 

8;  72  :  11  ;    Isa.  45  :  22;    60  :  3,   11,  16;   62  :  2  ;    61:1; 

66 :  19 ;  Dau.  7 :  u) ;  and  Christ  had  in- 
cluded Gentiles  in  his  last  commands. 

(Matt.  28:19;    Mark   16:15;    Luke  24  :  47.)    Peter 

and  the  rest  expected  through  Judaism, 
to  reach  Gentiles  who  would  become 
Jewish  pro.selytes  before  being  admitted 

to  full    gospel    privileges.       (see  1  :  8,  note.) 

As  many  as  the  Lord  our  God 
shall  call — s/uill  hare  called  by  the 
invitations  botii  of  the  Old  Testament 
and  of  the  gospel  message.  Others 
translate  with  the  lievised  Version, 
shall  call  tinto  himself,  by  the  jireaching 
of  the  gosjiel.  While  effectual  calling 
by  the  Sjjirit  is  taught  in  other  passages 

(Rom.  8  :  30 ;  Kph.  4  :  4 ;  2  Tim.  1  :  9),  it  doeS  not 

seem  to  be  distinctively  referred  to  here. 
The  invitations  of  the  gospel  are  at- 
tended    with    promises    (3:19;  Rev.22:17), 

which  become  effectual  in  those  who 
believe.  It  was  within  the  divine  pur- 
pose that  there  should  be  general  calls 
of  the  gospel  and  effectuar  calls  of  the 
Spirit  in  individual  hearts,  and  that  the 
promises  should  be  held  up  before  all 
those  to  whom  these  invitations  came. 
It  should  be  noted  that  this  is  a  free 
quotation  from  Joel  2  :  32,  or  it  may 
have  been  suggested  by  that  passage.  " 
40.  With  many  other  words. 
From  this  it  appears  that  we  have  only 
the  substance  of  what  Peter  said.  The 
character  of  the  preaching  is  indicated 
by  the  two  words  testify  and  exhort. 
The  first  exiiresses  argument  and  wit- 
ness for  the  truth,  illustrated  in  ver.  14 
and  36 ;  the  second  relates  the  practi- 
cal part,  urging  to  immediate  accept- 
ance, illustrated  in  ver.  38,  39, 
and  by  the  solemn  advice  that  fol- 
lows. Save  yourselves,  or  he  ye 
saved — in  separating  yourselves  by  re- 
pentance, and  evidencing  your  foi'th  in 


40 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  II. 


41      Then  they  that  ghiJly  received  his  word 
were  baptized:  and  the  same  day  there 


were  "  added  unio  l/iem  about  three  thou- 
sand souls. 


Christ  by  baptism.  Either  the  uiiddle 
or  passive  sense  is  allowable  here,  and 
iu  harmony  with  other  KScripture.  (Kzek. 

3:1:  11;    1   Tim.   4:16;    Eph.  2  :  8.9;    Titus  3  :  5.) 

From   this    untoward,    crooked  or 
perverse  generation — from  their  evil  ' 
and  contaminating  inliueiiee  and  from 
their  guilt  and  doom.     (2  Cor.  6  :  n ;  pwi.  ^ 

2  :  13;  Deut.  32  ;  5.) 

41.  Then— (herrfore.  They— re-  \ 
ferring  to  the  penitents  mentioned  in 
ver.  37.  Gladly,  exjnesses  a  true 
idea,  but  is  a  later  addition,  and  is 
omitted  in  the  oldest  and  l)est  manu- 
scripts. Received  the  word — /(«(•- 
ing  received  the  gosi)el  message.  It 
seems  from  this  verse  and  ver.  .S7  that 
the  larger  i)art  of  the  multitude  ac- 
cepted the  testimony  of  the  ai)0stles 
and  acted  upon  tlieir  exliortation. 
Were  baptized — immediately  fol- 
lowing repentance  and  acceptance  of 
Jesus  Christ  as  a  Saviour.  If  this 
clause  is  joined  closely  to  that  datj  in 
the  next  clause,  according  to  some 
editors,  then  the  natural  inference  is 
that  about  three  thousand  were  bap- 
tized some  time  durinu  the  day.  But 
if,  with  other  editors,  the  two  clauses 
are  separated  by  a  colon,  then  the  bap- 
tisms could  have  occurred  at  sucli  times 
and  places  as  were  most  convenient  to 
all  concerned.  There  need  be,  how- 
ever, no  hesitancy  in  accepting  the 
view  that  tlie  whole  number  were  bap- 
tized on  that  day.  For  there  were  a 
large  number  of  administrators — tlie 
twelve  apostles,  many  of  the  seventy, 
and  others  whom  the  ajiostlcs  could 
invite  to  assist.  .Jerusalem  was  also 
abundantly  supjdied  witli  water,  and 
the  rite  of  immersion  could  be  adminis- 
tered in  many  places,  ])ublic  and  })ri- 
vate.  The  city  was  almost  encom- 
passed l>y  a  circle  of  artitieial  lakes. 
The  lower  and  ujjper  Pools  of  Gihon, 
iu  the  Valley  of  Hiniiom,  were  two 
large  reservoirs,  the  former  about  six 
hundred  feet  by  two  hundred  and  tifty, 
tlie  latter  about  two-thirds  this  size. 
The  Pool  of  Bethesda  was  three  hun- 
dred and  sixty  feet  by  one  liuudred  and 
thirtv.     There  were  also  the   Pool   of 


Ilezekiah  and  tlie  Pool  of  Siloam,  be- 
sides other  public  and  private  pools, 
tlie  ruins  of  which  in  i)art  remain. 
There  was,  therefore,  "  mueli  water," 
and  the  customs  of  the  East  would  not 
forbid  or  hinder  such  a  use.  The  awe 
that  came  upon  the  people  (ver.  «)  re- 
strained any  opjiosition.  Added  unto 
them — vuto  them  is  an  addition  of  the 
translators,  to  till  out  wliat  they  sup- 
posed to  be  the  sense.  Otliers  would 
supply  the  church,  as  in  ver.  47.  Were 
added,  however,  is  absolute ;  no  words 
need  be  sup)>lied.  The  meaning  is  that 
about  tliree  tliousand  were  added  to  the 
company  of  disciples.  Souls — per- 
sons, according  to  the  usage  of  the 
Hebrew  and  many  other  languages. 

Tliis  verse  may  lie  said  to  close  the 
account    of   Pentecost.     Peter   is   the 
leader  and  spokesman,  though  doubt- 
less others  did  tlieir  part  by  word  and 
deed.      It    is   interesting   to    compare 
Peter  with  liimself.     In  his  Pentecostal 
discourse    he    (juotes    the    prophecy, 
"  Whosoever  shall  call  on  the  name  of 
the  Loi-d  sliall  be  saved"  (ver.  21)  pre- 
sents Jesus  as  "liotli  Lord  and  Christ," 
and   promises  "  tlie   gift   of  the   Holy 
Sjiirit."     A  little  later  he  presents  liim 
as  "  the  Prince  of  Life  "  (•) ;  lo),  and  de- 
clares, "  neither  is  there  salvation  in  any 
other"  (4:12),  and  later  still  he  holds 
him  up  as  "a  Prince  and  a  Saviour,  to 
give   repentance   unto    Israel   and   the 
1  forgiveness  of  sins."      Thirty  or  more 
'  years  after  this,  Peter,  with  ripe  exjie- 
rience,  writes  his  first  epistle,  in  style 
resembling  his  speeches,  the  .same  tire 
and  energy,  somewhat  tempered  by  age. 
He    refers    to   "the   Holy   Sj>irit  sent 
t  down  from  heaven  " ;  to  liaving  been 
\  "  begotten  unto  a  living  hojie  by  the 
j  resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ";  to  the 
I  death  of  Christ  as  a  fulfillment  of  juo- 
■  phecy ;  to  "  salvation,"  a  favorite  word, 
the  object  and  result  of  fsiith  ;  and  to  a 
risen  Saviour,  the  object  of  love,  tiie 
i  source  of  joy,  and  the  ground  of  faith 

and  hope.       (1  Peter  1  :3-10.) 

I  42.  The  following  verses,  to  the  end 
of  the  chapter,  describe  the  condition 
of  the  church  immediately  after  Peute- 


Cm.  II.] 


THE  ACTR. 


41 


Iieitccu/('iicc,Jny,  and  increase  of  disciples, 

42  AND  they  continued  steadfastly  in  the 
apostles'  doctrine  and  fellowship,  and  »in 

43  breaking  of  bread,  and  in  prayers.    And 


:  Luke  22  :  19 ;  1  Cor.  10  :  10. 


ych.  5  :  12;  Mark  16  :  17. 
9:6-15.        •cli.4  :34-37. 


fear  came  upon  every  soul.     And  .'many 
wonders   and    signs    were   done   by  the 

44  apostles.     And  all  that  believed  were  to- 

45  gether,  and  ''  had  all  things  common  ;  and 
"sold  their  possessions  and  goods,  and 


'  ch.  4  :  32,  34;  2  Cor.  8  :  14,  15 ; 


cost.  How  long  a  time  this  account 
covers  is  not  indicated,  but  probably  a 
few  months  of  j>eacefiil  ijrowth  between 
the  day  of  Pentecost  and  the  Feast  of 
Tabernacles.  They — the  young  con- 
verts. Continued  steadfastly  in 
the  apostles'  doctrine — pcrsever- 
iii(//i/  atlnidincj  upon  the  teaching  of 
the  (i/wxt/cx,  sought  their  instruction 
regarding  Christ  and  their  new  faith. 
FellOAVship — a  second  item.  The 
word  in  the  original  means  «  sharing 
in  common,  and  may  be  applied  to 
social  or  sjiiritual  fellon'ship,  to  distri- 
bution of  charities,  or  to  mutual  par- 
ticipation of  goods.  Later  than  this  it 
was  applied  to  cominunion,  as  of  the 
Lord's  Supper,  but  not  here.  The 
Lord's  Supper  seems  to  be  indicated  by 
the  next  phrase.  The  word  seems  to 
denote  some  act  connected  with  wor- 
ship, as  do  the  three  other  items  men- 
tioned. To  translate  fellowship  is  too 
general,  for  there  is  fellowship  in  all 
acts  of  social  worship,  in  prayer,  praise, 
contributions,  and  in  the  Lord's  Sup- 
per. It  is,  therefore,  best  to  render  the 
distribution,  underlying  which,  of 
course,  wouhl  l)e  the  feeling  of  brother- 
hood and  fellowship  in  sharing  the 
necessities  of  needy  brethren.  It  was  a 
fraternal  distribution  of  goods.  This 
.sense  of  the  word  is  confirmed  by  Rom. 
15  :  2(5 ;  2  Cor.  9  :  i;5,  where  it  means  a 
contribution,  and  by  Heb.  13  :  2(3,  where 
it  has  t!ie  kiudred  idea,  to  communicate. 
Breaking  of  bread.  The  Jews  be- 
gan a  meal  by  giving  thanks  and 
breaking  a  loaf,  {n  ■■  35 ;  Luke  24 ;  :i5. )  The 
phrase  here  has  a  religious  setting  with 
tiie  three  other  acts,  and  can  hardly 
mean  merely  a  common  meal.  As  the 
breaking  of  bread  was  the  leading  fea- 
ture of  the  Lord's  Supper,  it  came  to 
denote  the  ordinance  itself.  (21):  7,11;  1 
Cor.  10:16.)  As  the  institution  of  the 
ordinance  followed  the  Paschal  Sui)per 
(Luke22:u,  lii),  so  doubtless  it  often  fol- 
lowed the  ordinary  meal.  (ver.  46:  1  cor. 
11:20  22.)     The    prayers — not  merely 


individual  prayer,  but  the  service  of 
praj'^er  and  various  kinds  of  prayer  at 
their  religious  gatherings. 

43.  This  verse  describes  the  impres- 
sion made  upon  those  outside  of  the 
discipleship  by  the  wonderful  events  of 
Pentecost,  and  the  miracles  ■wrought 
through  the  apostles.  Fear — religious 
awe  and  reverence.  Every  soul — 
every  one  who  witnessed  or  heard  of 
the  gift  of  tongues  and  the  conversion 
of  the  multitude.  The  miracles  wrought 
through  the  ajjostles  are  described  as 
Avonders  and  signs,  (see  ver.  22.)  Thus 
God  wrought  through  them  for  their 
preservation  (4:.to;  15 :  12),  and  for  per- 
mitting the  developmeut  of  the  church 
life. 

44.  The  social  condition  of  the  dis- 
cijileship  is  described  in  this  verse  and 
the  next.  All  that  believed — in 
Jesus  as  the  Christ.  One  of  the  names 
early  given  to  them  was  believers. 
(5 :  14.)  Were  together— daily  in  the 
temple,  and  in  their  private  gather- 
ings. Mauy  of  the  three  thousand 
were  pilgrims,  and,  after  receiving 
needed  instructions,  returned  to  their 
homes,  and  by  so  many  lessened  tlie 
number  of  believers  at  Jerusalem.  This 
helps  to  relieve  the  difficulty  of  their 
assembling  often  in  one  place,  as  well 
as  daily  in  the  temjjle.  Had  all 
things  in  common — regarding  their 
possessions,  not  as  their  own,  but  as  a 
trust  for  the  benefit  of  those  that  had 
need.  (i:32.)  Their  supreme  love  to 
Christ,  their  consecration  of  their  all  to 
him,  and  the  needs  of  converted  pil- 
grims while  remaining  at  Jerusalem 
and  of  poor  converts,  led  those  believers, 
who  had  property,  to  share  with  them 
ill  daily  sustenance. 

45.  What  they  did  in  carrying  out 
this  beneficent  purpose  is  now  related. 
They  sold  their  jn'operty,  real  and  jier- 
sonal.  Possessions — proj)erty  ac- 
quired ;  some  regard  the  word  as  refer- 
ring to  houses  and  lands.  Goods — that 
which  belongs  to  any  one ;  regarded  by 


42                                            THE  ACTS.                                    [Ch.  II. 

1"  parted  them  to  all  men,  as  every  man 
46  had  need.     And  they,  continuing  daily 

with  one  accord  «in    the   temple,   and 
breaking  bread  from  house  to  house,  did 

b  Prov.  11  :  24,  25 ;  lea.  58  :  7 ;  1  Julin  3  :  17.        «  ch.  5  :  42 ;  Luko  24  :  53. 

some  as  movable  posf5essions,  personal 
property.  Parted  tliem — the  proceeds 
of  sales,  to  all — not  to  all  men,  but  to 
all  of  the  cliscii)leship  as  any  one  had 
need.  Thus  the  sales  and  the  dis- 
tribution were  regulated  by  the  in- 
dividual necessities  of  the  disciples. 

From  tliis  j)assai;e,  and  from  4  :  32-37  : 
6  :  1,  it  is  evident :  (1)  That  tliere  was 
a  community  of  goods  in  the  cliurch  at 
Jerusalem.  It  was  the  carrying  out 
the  command  (Luke  12: 33),  in  reference  to 
the  whol(-  cliurch,  and  the  continuation 
and  eidari,'(iiniit  of  tlie  plan,  pursued 
by  Jesus  and  the  twelve,  by  which  their 
expenses  were  defrayed  from  a  common 
purse.  (2)  While  it  was  entered  into 
by  all  it  was  carried  on  by  the  vo/ioi- 
tary  principal.  No  one  was  compelled 
to  sell ;  and  after  the  sale  it  was  left 
free  to  give  little  or  much.  (5:  *•)  Thus 
Mary  the  mother  of  Mark  owned  a 
house  several  years  later.  (12 :  i^)  There 
was  no  breaking  up  of  tlie  fiimily  rela- 
tion, (ver.  46.)  (3)  It  Avas  conjincd  to 
the  church  at  Jerusalem.  There  is  no 
trace  of  it  found  elsewhere,  in  any  of 
the  early  churclies,  but  on  the  contrary 
there  is  evidence  that  it  did  not  exist 
in  them,  and  that  tiie  rich  and  poor 
lived  side  by  side.   (2  Cor.  8 :  13,  is ;  9:6,  7 ; 

1  Tim.  6;  S,  17-19;  James  2:  1-5;  4:13.)        It    WaS 

a  temporary  ex])edient  adapted  to  .Jeru- 
salem, where  the  ajjostles  and  other 
devoted  discijdes  continued  to  retride, 
and  where  many  of  the  ])ilgrims  com- 
ing to  the  feast,  would  be  converted, 
and  afterward  might  continue  for  a 
time  for  instruction,  and  perluips  for 
residence.  80  doul)tless  many  devout 
Jews,  wlio  were  spending  their  last 
days  in  the  Holy  City,  believed  in 
Jesus,  and  needed  help  from  their 
brethren.  Doubtless,  the  large  liber- 
ality displayed  by  the  Jerusalem  dis- 
ciple-ship  helps  to  ex]>lain  tlieir  general 
poverty  somewhat  later.  (Rom.  io:'.'6.) 
We  are  not,  however,  to  regard  it  as  a 
mistake,  but  a  wise  expedient  for  the 
time  and  ]ilace,  and  an  eminent  exhi- 
bition of  zeal,  consecration,  and  benefi- 
cence. Not  only  were  the  early  disci- 
ples  looking   for  the   coming  of  their 


Lord,  but  they  were  living  in  that 
city  which,  by  their  Lord's  own  predic- 
tion, had  l)eeii  devoted  to  terrible  judg- 
ments anil  utter  de.stiuction.  Why 
then  should  they  amass  jiroperty  there  ? 
AVhat  better  than  to  use  their  posses- 
sions in  Chri.st's  service  while  the  city 
still  remained  ?  The  a])ostles  and  the 
brethren  made  no  mistake  in  devoting 
to  beneticence  things  which  might  be 
destroyed  or  desolated,  and  thus  en- 
tirely lost  to  the  good  of  Christ's  king- 
dom. And  we  may  l)elicve  that  they 
were  guided  by  tlie  Sjiirit.  The  same 
conditions  j)revailed  nowliere  el.se,  and 
hence  no  other  diurch  adopted  the 
plan. 

4G.  Their  habits  and  religious  spirit. 
Continuing,  perfcverinff  day  by  Jay 
with  one  mind.  On  the  meaning  of 
the  phra.se,  see  1  :  14.  In  the  temple 
— at  the  appointed  hours  of  prayer. 
(3:1.)  Their  daily  presence  would  show 
that  they  were  not  opposed  to  the  law, 
and  that  they  entered  heartily  into  the 
public  worshij)  of  Go<l.  It  gave  them 
oi)poitunity  also  to  l)ear  witness  to 
Jesus,  and  instruct  imiuirers.  (3:ii-2»; 
5:21.)  It  ap])ears  that  for  a  considera- 
ble time  they  continued  to  observe  the 
Mosaic  laws  and  worship  (21:20),  and 
also  the  rites  of  the  new  feitb.  The 
Old  Dispensation  .strictly  ended  with 
the  di'ath  of  Clirist,  yet  it  was  not  at 
once  outwardly  sui>planted  by  the  New. 
The  services  of  the  temj)le  and  of  the 
■synagogue  gave  tlie  very  best  o])])ortii- 
nity  for  dis.seininating  the  doctrines  of 
Jesus.  The  transition  from  the  Old 
into  the  New  was  made  Mithout  that 
violent  sliock  wliich  would  otherwise 
have  been  experienced.  Coini)are  how 
the  ministry  of  tlie  Baptist  and  the 
ministry  of  (."lirist  overlajiped.  (John3: 
22,  23.)  Jewish  believers  were  gradually 
prepared  for  entering  uiioii  the  full 
liberty  of  the  gospel.  In  contrast  to 
their  jiublic  worship  in  the  temple  were 
their  private  gatherings,  breaking: 
bread,  observing  the  Lord's  Supper 
(seeoDver.  42.)  from  house  to  housc, 
rather,  at  home  or  in  private.  Either 
translation    is    allowable,  though    the 


Ch.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


43 


cat  theii-  meat  with  gladness  and  ''singlc- 

47  ness  of  heart,  praising  (4od,  and  =  having 

favour   with  all  the  people.    And   '  the 


Lord  added  to  the  church  daily  such  as 
should  be  saved. 


d  Matt.  6  :  22 ;  Kom.  12  :  8,  Gr. ;  2  Cor.  1:12;  Col.  :i  :  22.      «  Koni.  14  :  IS.      f  ch.  5  :  14 ;  11  :  24. 


latter  is  preferable.  Both,  however, 
contain  truth.  Tliey  met  in  private  in 
ditierent  phices,  doubtless  going  from 
house  to  house.  Tlie  expression  does 
not  neeessarily  mean  that  they  all  met 
in  one  place  ;  nor  tliat  the  Lord's  Sup- 
per was  observed  daily.  Did  eat 
their  meat — their  ordinary  meals. 
With  gladness — with  Joyous  exulta- 
tion ;  the  result  of  their  fiiith,  tin;  fruit 
of  tlxe  Spirit.  Singleness— simjilicity 
of  heart  towai'd  God  and  one  aaothei', 
without  deceit,  jealousy,  or  envy  on  the 
part  of  any. 

47.  Closely  connecteil  with  wliat 
precedes,  the  writer  adds,  praising 
God,  not  merely  giving  tlianks  at 
meals,  but  at  all  times  and  everywiiere 
praising  and  glorifying  God.  Having 
lavor  with,  receiving  the  general  aj)- 
probation  of  all  the  people— of  all 
classes.  This  does  not  probably  include 
the  Jewish  leaders  (^ :  i ),  who  were  awed 
into  comparative  silence  by  the  won- 
derful events  of  the  resurrection  (Mau. 
28 :  11-15)  and  of  Pentecost.  The  Lord — 
Christ  the  Head  of  the  church  added, 
through  the  Spirit  and  the  preaching 
of  the  truth.  (i6;u.)  To  the  church. 
This  is  omitted  by  tlie  oldest  manu- 
scripts and  versions.  Some  snp])ose 
that  it  was  omitted  l)y  copyists  to  make 
it  conform  to  ver.  41.  The  meaning, 
however,  is  substantially  the  same, 
whether  it  is  said  the  Lord  added  to 
the  cliurch,  to  them,  or  to  himself. 
The  high  critical  authorities  that  maive 
this  omission  join  to  this  verse  to- 
gether from  the  beginning  of  the  next 
chapter,  translating  the  Lord  added  to- 
gether daily,  that  is,  added  to  them, 
through  the  Holy  Spirit  and  in  fellow- 
ship, one  with  another.  On  the  word 
church,  see  note  on  5  :  11.  Such  as 
should  he  saved— rather,  the  saved 
ones.  Tliose  who  believed  were  re- 
garded as  already  saved,  having  ob- 
tained acceptance  with  God  through 
Christ,  and  were  spoken  of  as  "  de- 
livered from  the  power  of  darkness 
and  transhited  into  the  kingdom  of 
God's  dear  Son."     (coi,  i :  is.) 


The  Organization  of  thk  First 
Christian  Church  is  generally  re- 
ferred to  the  day  of  Pentecost.  Per- 
hajis  it  would  be  more  correct  to  say 
that  it  was  then  publicly  and  divinely 
recognized.  During  the  forty  days  be- 
fore our  Lord's  ascension  he  ai)i)ears, 
not  only  to  have  taught  the  diseiiilcs 
the  things  of  the  kingdom,  but  also  to 
have  treated  them  as  a  missionary  body 
for  proclaiming  the  gospel  throughout 

the  world.       (Matt.  28  :    1«'20;    Maik    16  :  1518; 

Luke  24: 48,  iS".)  Aiul  immediately  after 
his  ascension  they  continued  together 
in  worship  and  transacted  business  as 
an  organized  company,     (i ;  u,  is,  2.s 'ie,) 

The  young  church,  however,  received 
its  ))aptism  and  was  manifested  to  the 
world  on  Pentecost,  and  then  began  to 
fulfill  its  mission.  It  did  not,  however, 
at  once  recognize  the  greatness  of  its 
work,  nor  its  relation  to  Judaism  and 
the  world.  Instead  of  comj)rehending 
that  Christianity  was  to  sujiersede 
Judaism,  the  early  disciples  appear  to 
have  thought  that  it  was  merely  to  sup- 
])lement  it  by  faith  in  Jesus  as  the  Mes- 
siah. Their  attachment  to  the  Mosaic 
law  was,  therefore,  unabated,  and  they 
worshiped  in  the  tem])le  like  other 
Jews.  But  in  addition  they  held  their 
own  meetings  in  private  houses  and 
convenient  places,  as  believers  in  Jesus, 
for  the  breaking  of  bread  and  other  re- 
ligious observances. 

They  were  consequently  slow  in  ex- 
tending the  gospel  outside  of  .lerusalem 
and  in  organizing  churches  elsewhere. 
Jesus  had  ministered  to  the  entire 
discipleshi])  of  Palestine,  and  why 
might  not  they  do  the  same.  So  for  a 
long  time  the  church  at  .lerusalem 
seems  to  have  Iteeii  the  only  church 
embracing  believei-s  in  all  parts  of  Pal- 
estine. (9:31.)  At  the  same  time  these 
believers  would  hold  their  religious  as- 
semblies where  they  lived  (»:3-),  which 
might  sometimes  be  very  naturally 
called  their  synagogue,  and  is  so  styled 
in  .Tames  2  :  2.  Other  local  churches 
did  not  probably  exi.st  much  before  the 
conversion  of  Cornelius,  perhaps  not 


44 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  II. 


till  after  that  event.  It  was?  about  that 
time  when,  accor(lin!>;  to  Gal.  1:22, 
churches  apix'ar  to  have  existed  iu 
Juilea. 

Membek.ship  of  the  Church. — 
From  tills  cliapter  it  appears  that  the 
Jerusalem  churcli  consisted  of  persons 
who  professed  conversion,  and  who  were 
first  baptized  as  believers  in  Jesus  as 
the  Christ.  And  this  seems  to  have 
been  the  uniform  case  with  this  and  all 
other  cliurches  mentioned  in  the  Acts. 

(8:12,  as ;  9  :18;  10:48;  16:  15,3:1,40.)  This  prac- 
tice is  also  confirmed  throughout  the 
epistles.  The  churclies  and  their  mem- 
bers are  addressed  as  "saiuts,"  fol- 
lowers of  the  Lord,"  "  faitiifiil  breth- 
ren," "the  children  of  Uod,"  "sancti- 
fied in  Christ  Jesus,"  "  the  elect  of  God 
and  sucli  as  love  tlie  Lord,"  and  are 
"new  creatures  in  (!iirist  Jesus."  (i  c,„r- 
1 : 1,  2;  Eph.  1 : 1.)  Everywhere  it  is  im- 
plied that  only  such  were  members  as 
were  caj)able  of  i)ersonal  devotion  to 
Christ  and   faith    in    him.     (5;U;9:3i; 

11  :  21,  24,  26.) 


Practical  Remarks. 

1.  It  is  fitting  that  God's  people  should  be 
together  with  one  mind  on  days  appointed 
for  religious  service.  (Ver.  1 ;  20  -.  7  ;  Heb. 
10  :  25.) 

2.  They  usually  receive  the  most  signal 
blessings,  who  assemble  and  are  waiting  in 
united  prayer.  (Ver.  1,  2;  4  :  ?,1  ;  12:12, 
Matt.  18  :  19.) 

3.  The  special  influences  of  the  Holy 
Spirit  is  the  privilege  of  the  individual 
believer.     (Ver.  rs ;  1  .Tchn  2  :  20.) 

4.  When  the  heart  is  filled  with  the  Spirit 
the  tongue  will  be  unloo.sed  to  witness  for 
'"bri.st  and  speak  his  praise.  (Ver.  4;  4  :  8, 
31 ;  6  :  10.) 

5.  God  prepares  a  way  for  his  coming  and 
hearts  to  receive  him.   (Ver.  5;  Luke  1  :  17  ) 

G.  The  outpouring  of  the  Spirit  will 
always  be  noi.seil  abroad,  and  call  the  people 
together.     (Ver.  6  ;  8  :  18  ;  3  :  10.) 

7.  The  displays  of  divine  grace  will  always 
excite  the  wonder  of  those  who  know  not  its 
power      (Ver.  7,  8;  3  :  10;  8:  18.) 

8.  God  often  u'>es  the  humblest  instrumen- 
talities to  accomplish  his  work.  The  fisher- 
men of  Galilee,  whose  speech  was  somewhat 
Uucouth,  are  the  leaders  iu  the  Pentecostal 


work.    (Ver.  7,  8 ;   1  Cor.  1  :  26,  27 ;  2  Cor. 
4:7) 

9.  The  grandeur  of  Christ's  work  through 
the  Holy  Spirit  is  too  great  for  any  one  lan- 
guage of  earth  to  describe.  (Ver.  9-11; 
1  Cor.  2  :  9,  10.) 

10.  The  Pentecostal  tongues  foreshadow 
the  preaching  of  the  go.spel  in  all  tongues 
and  among  all  nations.  (Ver.  9-11;  Watt. 
28  :  19;   Rev.  14  :  0,7.) 

11.  The  works  of  God  had  been  sung  at 
creation  (Job  38  :  7),  but  new  strains  of  won- 
derful works  of  grace  were  added  at  Pente- 
cost, to  be  continued  and  perfected  in  the 
kingdom  of  glory.     (Ver.  11 ;  Rev.  5  .  9-13  ) 

12.  Revivals  of  religion  call  out  honest 
inquirers  and  profane  deriders.  (Ver.  12,  13  ; 
13     7-12,41,42,4.5,48.) 

13.  Many  are  skeptics,  not  for  want  of  evi- 
dences to  the  truth  of  religion,  but  for  a 
want  of  disposition  to  investigate.  (Ver.  13; 
17  :32;  John  5:  40.) 

14.  The  Gospel  appeals  to  our  reason  and 
commends  itself  to  the  judgment.  (Ver.  14, 
15  ;  Isa.  1  :  18 ;  1  Peter  3  :  15,  16.) 

15.  We  should  answer  opposers  and  slan- 
derers of  God's  work  with  calmness,  kind- 
ness, and  self-possession.  (Ver.  14, 15;  Prov. 
15  :  1 ;  1  Peter  2  :  15  ) 

16.  The  Old  Testament  is  the  word  of  God 
and  the  prophets  were  inspired  to  write 
what  they  did.  (Ver  16 ;  2  Peter  1  :  21 ;  2 
Tim.  3  :  16.) 

17.  Scripture  is  often  interpreted  by  Script- 
ure. From  its  interpretations  of  prophecy 
we  may  learn  much  how  to  interpret  those 
predictions  which  are  yet  unfulfilled.  (Ver. 
17-21  ;  2  Peter  1  :  19,  20 ;  1  Peter  1  :  10-12.) 

18.  Revivals  of  religion  are  a  part  of  the 
Spirit's  work  iu  the  world.  All  the  objec- 
tions, which  are  made  against  them,  might 
have  been  urged  against  the  Pentecostal 
season.    (17-21.) 

19.  The  Spirit  gives  all  believers  something 
to  do;  but  to  each  his  own  work  and  gift. 
(Ver.  17, 18;  1  Cor.  12  :  4-9.) 

20.  In  preaching  the  gospel  its  warnings 
and  threatenings,  as  well  as  its  invitations 
and  promises,  should  be  used.  (Ver.  19,  20; 
Rom.  2:4;  11  :  21,  22 ;  2  Cor.  5    11.) 

21.  How  easy  to  be  saved  !  How  plain  and 
simple  the  way  !  Salvation  is  to  be  had  for 
the  asking.  (Ver.  21;  Isa.  45:  22;  55  :  7; 
Luke  23  :  42.) 

22.  Even  iu  his  humiliation  Jesua  gare 


Ch.  II.] 


THE  ACTS. 


45 


abuudaul  proof  that  be  was  the  Christ,  the 
Saviour  of  the  world.  (Ver.  22 ;  10  :  38 ; 
John  3:2;  15  :  24.) 

23.  The  purposes  of  God  are  in  harmony 
with  the  free  agency  of  luau.  Men  act  freely 
in  accomplishing  what  (jod  has  determined 
to  bring  to  pass,  and  hence  may  be  very 
guilty.     (Ver.  23 ;  4  :  27,  28 ;  Gen.  .50  :  20.) 

24.  As  death  could  not  hold  the  Prince  of 
life,  so  it  shall  not  be  able  to  hold  the  bodies 
of  his  saints  at  the  last  trump.  (Ver.  24;  1 
Cor.  1.5  :  52 ;  1  Thess  4  :  16.) 

2.")  The  prophecies  of  the  Old  Testament 
com  re  in  Jesus.  David  was  both  the  type 
of  Christ,  and  he  spake  of  Christ.  (Ver.  25- 
28;  Rev.  19:  10.) 

26.  Jesus  approached  death  with  the  full 
expectation  of  overcoming  it,  and  rising 
from  the  grave.  (Ver.  25-28  ;  Luke  18  :  33 ; 
Heb.  12  :  2.) 

27.  Conflicts  add  to  the  joy  of  the  victor, 
and  to  ihe  glory  of  his  crown.  (Ver.  2.5-28  ; 
2  Tim.  4  :  6-8.) 

28.  The  example  of  Jesus  should  stimulate 
us  to  look  to  him  and  overcome,  and  share 
with  him  in  his  glory.  (Ver.  28;  2  Tim. 
2:  12;  Rev.  3  :  21.) 

29.  The  death  and  burial  of  David,  and 
the  death  and  resurrection  of  Christ  are 
equally  facts  of  history.    (Ver.  29-o2.) 

30.  Death  puts  an  end  to  earthly  glory ; 
but  Christ's  glory  and  the  Christian's  glory 
are  beyond  death  and  the  grave.  (Ver.  30, 
31 ;  Phil.  2  :  9  ;  1  Cor.  15  :  ,55,  .56.) 

31.  The  Father,  Son,  ami  Holy  Spirit,  the 
triune  God,  are  engaged  in  the  great  work 
of  redemption.    (Ver.  ;t! ;  John  15  :  1,  26.) 

32.  David's  Lord  will  reign  supreme  over  all 
his  foes.   (Ver.  34,35 ;  Kph.  1  ;  20  ;  Heb.  1  :  13.) 

33.  The  presence  of  the  Holy  Spirit  is  an 
evidence  of  a  crucified,  risen,  and  exalted 
Jesus.     (Ver,  33,  36  :  1  IMer  1  :  12.) 

34.  In  Peter's  sermon,  we  have  a  model  of 
gospel  preaching.  Scriptural,  simple,  direct, 
embarrassed  by  no  metaphysical  or  abstruse 
teaching,  it  sought  immediate  results,  con- 
viction of  sin  and  conversion  to  Christ.  It 
was  an  argument  from  facts  and  the  word 
of  God,  adapted  to  convince  his  hearers  that 
they  had  rejected  their  Messiah,  the  Saviour. 
(Ver.  14-26.) 

35.  Gospel  truth  may  convince  the  intel- 
lect, but  the  Holy  Spirit  must  take  it  to  the 
heart.  The  word  of  God  becomes  the  sword 
of  the  Spirit.    (Ver.  37 ;  Heb.  4  :  12.) 


36.  Conviction  of  sin  is  essential  to  repent- 
ance, but  is  not  repentance.  Peter  exhorts 
his  convicted  hearers  to  repent.  (Ver.  38 ; 
John  16  :  9-11.) 

37.  "  Baptism  is  the  divinely  appointed 
method  of  making  an  open  confession  of 
repentance  and  faith.  It  draws  the  lines 
between  the  professed  friends  of  Christ  and 
his  enemies.  It  is  the  only  act  which  the 
believer  in  Jesus  is  required  to  perform  but 
once."  (Pendleton.)    (Ver.  38 ;  Gal.  3  :  27.) 

38  How  full  and  free  the  gospel  message! 
How  it  should  stimulate  believers  to  send  it 
speedily  to  all  nations  !  (Ver.  39  ;  Rev.  22  : 
17.) 

39.  It  is  the  duty  of  sinners  to  yield  and 
be  saved  from  eternal  ruin,  by  repenting  of 
their  sins,  believing  on  Christ,  and  confess- 
ing him  before  men.    (Ver.  40;  3  :  19.) 

40.  The  glad  reception  of  the  word,  fol- 
lowed by  prompt  obedience,  is  an  evidence 
of  true  repentance.   (Ver.  41 ;  1  Thess.  1 :  4-6.) 

41.  Repentance,  faith,  and  baptism  are  but 
the  beginnings  of  the  Christian  life.  Study- 
ing the  word;  private,  social,  and  public 
worship ;  and  benevolence  enter  into  the 
warp  and  woof  of  holy  living.  (Ver.  42 ;  1 
Cor.  15  :  58 ;  1  Thess.  5  ;  14-22.) 

42.  The  Lord's  Supper  never  came  before 
baptism,  but  always  after  it,  in  apostolic 
churches,    (Ver,  42 ;  20  :  7  ;  1  Cor.  11  :  18-22.) 

43.  Great  seriousness  and  solemnity  is 
generally  the  result  of  an  extensive  work  of 
grace  in  a  community.  (Ver.  43  ;  18  :  8-H  ; 
19  :  10.) 

44.  While  a  community  of  goods  did  not 
exist  in  any  othrr  church  than  [that  at 
Jerusalem,  and  it  is  not  practicable  nor  de- 
sirable among  professing  Christians  gen- 
erally, yet  the  spirit  of  brotherly  love  and 
sympathy  underlying  it  is  no  less  a  duty 
now  than  it  was  then.  The  opitosite  spirit 
is  of  the  world  and  not  of  Christ.  (Ver. 
45,  46  ;  1  John  3:17;  James  2  :  15 ;  5  :  1-6.) 

45.  Religion  brings  joy  to  the  private  an  \ 
public  worship,  to  family  and  social  life,  to 
the  body  and  the  soul.      (Ver.  46,  47  ;  8  :  8.) 

46.  Consistent  Christian  living  will  com- 
mand the  respect  of  men.  (Ver.  47  ;  27  : 
4;!.) 

47.  A  spiritually  minded  church,  earnest 
in  the  cause  of  Christ,  and  united  in  love 
and  effort,  will  continually  increase  in  num- 
bers from  those  who  are  saved.  (Ver.  47 ; 
11:21,24,26.) 


46 


THE  ACTS. 


LCii.  III. 


Healing  of  a  lame  man;  Peter's  address  io  the 

people, 
3      NOW  Peter  and  John  went  up  together 


into  the  temple  at  the  hour  of  prayer, 

2  8  tieing  the  ninth  hour     And  ^  a  certain 

man  lame  from  his  mother's  womb  was 

carried,  whom  they  laid  daily  at  the  gate 


i  Dan.  9  :  21.        ^  ch.  14  :  8. 


Ch.  3  :  In  this  chapter  and  the  uext 
Luke  records  the  first  opjiositiou  and 
jH'rsfcution  endured  by  tlie  first  church. 
("Iiristianity  was  not  to  be  national  or 
local,  but  universal.  Pressure  from 
w  itiiout  and  an  impelling  force  within 
were  needful  to  scatter  the  disciples 
and  send  them  forth  to  preach  the  word 
and  plant  churches  elsewhere.  The 
minor  hostilities  recorded  till  the  gen- 
eral persecution  ui)on  tlie  death  of  Ste- 
j)!ien,  were  the  providential  steps  to  a 
wider  dissemination  of  the  gospel. 
Luke  records  the  miraculous  healing  of 
a  lame  man  by  Peter  and  John,  which 
astonishes  the  sj)ectators,  and  calls  forth 
an  address  from  Peter,  in  wliich  he 
ascribes  the  miracle  to  the  power  of 
Jesus,  and  urges  the  peojde  to  repent- 
ance. 

1-11.  Healing  of  the  Lame  M.\n 
r.Y  Pr;ter  axd  John.  This  was  one 
of  many  miracles  (•-:«),  given  because 
it  was  tlie  occasion  of  another  telling 
discourse  of  Peter,  and  of  the  first  hos- 
tile movement  against  the  church.  The 
time  is  not  stated,  but  a  break  is  im- 
plied in  the  peaceful  growth  following 
Pentecost.  Some  place  it  a  year  lati-r ; 
others  think  the  feast  of  Pentecost  had 
not  yet  ended,  because  of  the  number 
of  priests  present  in  the  temple.  (■« :  i-) 
The  latter  view  gives  too  little  time  for 
the  development  of  cluirch  life  recorded 
in  2  :  42-47,  and  the  former  allows 
more  than  is  necessary.  It  is  better  to 
)iiit  it  between  four  and  five  months 
biter,  at  the  Feast  of  Tabernacles, 
wliich  occurred  early  in  October,  A.  D. 

1.  Peter  and  John.  Leaders 
a';io!ig  the  ajiostles,  as  well  as  chjse 
])''rsonal  friends.  Their  nnitnal  friend- 
siiijt  may  be  traced  in  tiieir  history. 
Tliey  were  jiartners  in  fishing  (Lukes :  in), 
went  together  to  jirepare  the  last  Pass- 
over (Luke  22  :s),  were  together  at  the 
trial  of  Jesus  (John  18 :  15. 16),  at  the  sepul- 
chre, and  at  the  Sea  of  Galilee  after  the 
resurrection.  (John  20 : 2 ;  21 : 7. 21.)  They 
were  among  the  more  intimate  com- 


panions of  our  Lord.  (Luke9:2S.)  Went 
up — were  going  up.  True  to  life ;  the 
temple  was  on  Mount  Moriah,  and  they 
were  on  their  way,  when  they  reached 
the  gate  Beautiful,  (vcr.2.)  Together 
should  be  connected  with  the  last  verse 
of  the  preceding  chapter,  according  to 
high  critical  authorities,  (see  2 :  47.)  At 
the  honr  of  prayer,  the  ninth 
hour — al)out  three  o'clock  in  the 
afternoon,  being  also  the  hour  of  eve- 
ning sacrifice.  There  were  three 
liours  of  prayer,  9  A.  M.,  noon,  and  3 

P.    M.       (Ps.  55:  17;  Dan.  6:  in.)       The    apOS- 

tles  were  going  up  to  the  temple  to 
worship.  They  did  not  fully  under- 
stand tlie  relation  of  the  gospel  to  tiie 
Mosaic  law  nor  enter  into  the  full 
meaning  of  Christ's  teacliing  concern- 
iTig  spiritual  worship,  and  tluit  time  and 
j)lace  were  unimportant.  (John 4: 21-21.) 
"  From  the  Jewish  synagogues,  on  the 
contrary,  they  must  have  separated  at 
once,  as  soon  as  tlieir  distinctive  views 
became  known.  It  was  impossible  to 
avow  the  Christian  faith  and  remain 
connected    with    those    communities." 

(IlAt'KETT.)        (Speoii2:+fi.)        TllCy     had 

assemblies  of  their  oM'n.     (2 :  42, 46.) 

2.  The  miracle  here  related  was  one 
of  the  wonders  and  signs  wrought  by 
the  apostles.  (2:4.1.)  It  was  liy  no 
means  the  first,  but  probably  the  most 
remarkable  up  to  that  time.  Its  im- 
portance was  enhanced  by  the  ])ul>licity 
given  and  the  results  which  followed. 
The  man  upon  whom  the  miracle  was 
])erformed  had  been  lame  from  his 
birth,  and  he  was  now  over  forty  years 
old  (4:22),  anil  was  laid  daily  at  the 
gate  of  the  temple.  He  was  thus  well 
known  ;  his  lameness  was  of  the  most 
serious  nature ;  there  could  be  no  doubt 
about  the  miracle.  Was  carried — 
just  at  the  time  when  Peter  and  John 
arrived.  >\  horn  they  laid — vhom 
thfy,  his  friends,  icere  voni  to  kn/  daily 
in  that  public  spot.  "Tlie  j>ractice  of 
jilacing  objects  of  charity  at  the  en- 
trances of  tem]des,  both  on  account  of 
the  great  concourse  and  the  supposed 


Ch.  III.] 


THE  ACTS. 


47 


of  the  ♦eniple  wliicli  is  called  Beautiful, 
'to  ask  alms  of  tlii'in  ihat  entered  iuto  the 

3  temple,  who  seeing  I'tter  UDtlJohD  about 

4  to  go  into  the  temple  asked  an  alms.  And 
Peter,  fastening  his  eyes  upon  him  with 


5  John,  said,  Look  on  us.  And  he  gave  heed 
unto  thein,  expecting  to  receive  some- 
thing of  them. 

6  1  hen  Peter  said,  ^  Silver  and  gold  have 
I  none;  but  such  as  1  have  give  1  thee; 


1  John  9:8.         k  2  Cor.  6  :  10. 


tendency  of  devotional  feeling!?  to  pro- 
mote those  of  a  charitable  kind,  was 
coniiuon  among  Jews  and  Gentiles,  and 
is  still  ke])t  up  in  some  parts  of  the 
Christian  world,"  (Dr.  J.  A.  Alex- 
i)!iK,)  Tlic  gate  .  .  .  called  Beau- 
tiful—  which  gate  is  not  certainly 
known.  It  j)rohal)ly  took  this  popular 
a))jH'llation  from  its  magnificence,  and 
very  likely  was  the  great  eastern  gate 
thus  described  by  Josej)hus  (Jewish 
War,  V.  5,  3):  "But  there  was  one 
gate  that  was  without  [the  inner  court] 
of  the  holy  house,  which  was  of  Cor- 
intliiaii  brass,  and  greatly  excelled 
those  which  were  only  co\'ered  over 
with  silver  and  gold.  .  .  .  Now  the 
mairnitudes  of  the  other  gates  were 
equal  to  one  another,  but  that  over  the 
Corinthian  gate,  which  opened  on  the 
east  over  against  the  gate  of  the  holy 
house  itself,  was  much  larger,  for  it,s 
height  was  fifty  cubits,  ancl  its  doors 
were  forty  cubits,  and  it  was  adorned 
after  a  most  costly  manner,  as  having 
mueii  richer  and  thicker  |ilates  of  silver 
and  gold  upon  them  than  the  other.  .  .  . 
Now  there  were  fifteen  steps  which  led 
from  the  wall  of  the  court  of  the  women 
to  this  greater  gate."  Again  (Anticj., 
XV.,  11,  .5)  he  says,  doubtless  referring 
to  the  same  gate :  "  But  on  the  east 
quarter,  toward  the  siinrising,  there 
was  ou(;  large  gate,  through  which  such 
as  were  jiure  came  in,  together  with 
their  wives;  but  the  temj)le  farther  in- 
ward in  that  gate  was  not  allowed  to 
the  M'omen  ;  but  still  more  inward  was 
tiiere  the  third  [court  of  the]  temjjle, 
wiiereunto  it  was  not  lawful  for  any 
but  the  priests  alone  to  enter."  From 
tiiis  it  would  appearthat  this  great  [rate 
was  situated  between  the  court  of  the 
Gentiles  and  the  court  of  the  women. 
The  sacred  narrative  implies  that  it 
was  the  most  frequented  entrance  to 
the  tem]ile,  and  on  this  account  was 
selected  for  the  cripjile  as  the  best  place 
for  his  daily  solicitations.  Ask  alms 
— a  donation  to  the  poor.  There  were 
no  almshouses  then.    It  does  not  follow 


that  cripples  should  be  placed  now  at 
church  doors  seeking  aiil,  as  in  some 
countries. 

3.  About  to  go.  The  two  apostles 
were  detained,  just  at  this  ])oint,  by  tiie 
one  addressing  them.  Asked  an 
alms.  The  expression  is  full,  askfd  to 
receive  a  donation.  He  was  seeking 
not  mere  pity  or  kind  words,  nor  was 
he  expecting  deliverance  from  his  life- 
long ills.  His  heart  was  bent  on  re- 
ceiving some  needful  gift. 

4.  Fastening  his  eyes— ZooAZ/u/ 
intently,  the  same  verb  used  in  1  :  10. 
Both  Peter  and  John  were  deeply 
moved  by  the  Spirit  toward  this  man, 
by  which  it  became  evident  to  them 
that  a  miracle  was  to  be  wrought 
through  them.  Both  may  have  spoken, 
but  more  probably  Peter  spoke  for 
both.  Look  on  us — in  order  to  gain 
his  attention  and  arouse  his  expecta- 
tion. "  When  thou  see.st  misery  in  thy 
brother's  face,   let  him   see  mercy  in 

thine  eye."  (QUARLES.)  (SeeNum.  al  :8j 
Isa,  45:2-J  ) 

5.  This  verse  shows  that  Peter  and 
.John  had  aroused  both  the  attention 
and  expectation  of  the  lame  man.  He 
gave  heed — gave  attention,  fixing  his 
eyes  and  his  mind  on  them.  Expect- 
ing something — not  a  miracle,  but 
some  material  gift,  as  is  evident  from 
the  next  verse. 

6.  Silver  and  gold  have  I  none 
— what  the  lame  man  was  asking  for 
and  expecting.  Silver  and  gold  are  j>ut 
for  money.  But  such  as,  etc. — bat 
what  I  have  in  my  j)ower  /  give  thee 
herewith.  Yet  he  does  not  arrogate 
independent  power,  but  at  once  adds. 
In  the  name,  by  the  authority  and  as 
a  representative,  of  Jesus  Christ  of 
Nazareth,  a  name  now  generally 
known  in  Jerusalem  and  doubtless 
know.'i  to  this  cripple.  Notice  it  is  not 
merely  Jesus,  but  also  C'hrint,  the 
Messiah.  Thus  Jesus  C!hrist  is  brought 
to  this  man's  heart,  by  whose  power  he 
is  commanded  to  walk.  The  original 
has  the  Nazarene  as  iu  2  :  22,  which  is 


4S 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cii.lll 


'  In  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Nazareth 
7  rise  up  and  wallc.  And  he  took  him  by 
the  right  hand,  and  lifted  Aim  up:  and 
immediately  his  feet  and  ancle  bones 
S  received  strength.  And  ho  ""leaping  up 
stood,  and  walked,  and  entered  with  thera 
into  the  temple,  walking,  and  leai)iug, 
and  praii-ing  God. 


9      And  all  the  people  saw  him  walkings 

10  and  praising  God  :  and  they  knew  that 
it  was  he  which  sat  for  alms  at  the  Beau- 
tiful gate  of  the  temple:  and  they  were 
tilled  with  wonder  and  amazement  at  that 

11  which  had  happened  unto  him.  And  as 
the  lame  man  which  was  healed  held 
Peter  and  John,  all  the  people  ran  together 


1  ch.  4  :  7,  10;  Matt.  7  :  22;  Mark  16  :  17. 


Isa.  -.io  :  36. 


equivalent  to  from  Nazareth,  with  an 
allusion  to  the  coutem2)tuous  usage  of 
the  name,  (see  Jiutt.  -i  -.  w,  note.)  He  would 
share  the  reproach  of  his  Lord.  Notice 
that  while  Jesus  performed  miracles  by 
his  own  authority  (Matt.  8: :;),  often  with  [ 
au  "I  say  unto  thee"  (Luke 5: 2+),  the! 
ai>ostles  performed  them  in  the  name 

of     Christ.        (9:34;    16:18;    Mark   16:17,   18.) 

Rise  up  and  Avalk — walk  about, 
something  which  he  was  to  do  and  con- 
timie  to  do.  Several  of  tlie  oldest 
manuscripts,  and  the  late.st  critical 
authority,  omit  rise  up  and.  If  they 
originally  belonged  to  the  text,  they 
may  have  been  omitted  by  cojjyists, 
because  in  the  ne.\t  verse  Peter  is  said 
to  have  raised  uj)  the  lame  man. 

7.  And  he  took  him — rather,  and 
seiziu'j  him  by  tite  right  hand.  The 
act  was  instantaneous,  accompanying 
the  command  to  walk.  This  he  did  to 
encourage  and  .«trengtlien  his  faith. 
The  miracles  of  Jesus  were  often  at- 
tended with  .some  outward  act.     (.vatt. t>: 

15;    U  :  31;    Mark  7  :  :j;i ;    w  :  ■11.)         Lifted — • 

rained  him  up.  "The  lame  man  had 
merely  to  yield  himself  to  the  2>ower 
that  came  upon  hini."  (Bekgel.) 
Imniediatly — liis  feet  and  ankle 
joints  were  strengtliened.  He  had  been 
a  cripple  from  weakness  in  the  muscles 
and  liu'ametits  of  tlie  feet  and  ankles. 
The  ]iartieularity  of  this  description  of 
the  disease  and  cure  is  characteristic  of 
Luke  as  a  jiliysician. 

8.  The  cure  is  manifested  by  leap- 
ing up  or  forward  from  tlie  jdace 
wiiere  he  was  sitting  (ver  ^n)^  then  by 
standing,  and  then  by  walking  al)Out, 
as  if  to  make  trial  of  his  strength  ;  a 
natural  gradation.  In  doing  that 
which  he  had  never  learned  to  do  we 
recognize  a  wonderful  feature  of  this 
miracle.  (Seeon  ver.  11.)  His  natural, 
and  religious  joy  and  gratitude  were 
indicated  in  that  he  entered  with 
them  into  the  temple,  walking 


about,  and  leaping  and  praising 
God.  He  enters  into  the  court  of 
Israel  (ver.  2)  with  the  apostles,  perhaps 
taking  hold  of  their  hands  (ver.  ii), 
leaps  for  joy,  and  ascribes  his  cure  to 
the  almighty  power  of  God.  We  may 
assume  tliat  he  recognizes  Jesus  as  the 
Christ,  and  his  divine  power  exerted  in 
his  behalf,      (see  ou  ver.  ifi.) 

9.  This  vense  adds  the  fact,  tliat  the 
miracle  was  public  and  widely  known. 
All  the  people — all  those  who  had 
come  to  the  temjile  to  i)ray.  Tliere 
must  have  l)een  a  great  multitude  of 
witnesses,  esi)ecially  if  it  was  at  tlie 
Feast  of  Tabernacles,  as  we  have  suj)- 
posed.  The  healed  man  keeps  near  the 
apostles,  ascribing  tliauksgiving  and 
praise  to  God.  Li  thus  doing  he  not 
only  acknowledges  that  the  apostles 
are'  servants  of  God,  but  that  Jesus  is 
the  Chvi.^t  of  God. 

10.  Luke  luings  to  view  the  certain 
identity  of  the  lame  man,  and  the 
great  astonishment  of  the  people. 
They  kneAV,  or  recognized  him  to  be 
the  lame  beggar  who  liad  been  accus- 
tomed to  lie  helpless,  close  to  the  beau- 
tiful gate  of  the  temple.  There  would 
be  no  doubt  about  either  the  num,  or 
the  cure.  Filled  with  Avoi'.der — 
with  feelings  of  surj)rise,  mingled  with 
awe.  Amazement — transported  as  it 
were  out  of  themselves  by  sudilcn 
emotions  of  astonishment.  At  that 
Avhich  had  happened  unto  liini. 
His  weak  feet  and  ankles  made  strong  ; 
a  crijijde  from  birth  walking  about, 
leaping  for  joy,  and  loudly  ju'aising 
God.  Such  a  sudden,  uiifxi)eetetl,  and 
unheard-of  sight  was  fitted  to  arouse 
astonishment  to  the  highest  degree. 

11.  According  to  the  most  ajtproved 
reading  this  verse  begins,  A)id  holding 
fast  to  J'etrr  and  John  ;  which  the  lame 
man  had  been  doing  and  was  still 
doing.     C)lshausen  and  some  others  re- 

1  fer  tills  to  a  siiiritual  holding  fast,  au 


Ch.  III.] 


THE  ACTS. 


49 


unto  them  in  the  porch  "that  is  called         marvel  ye  at  this?    Or  why  look  ye  so 

Solomon's,  greatly  wondering.  earnestly  on  us,  » as  though  by  our  own 

And  when  Peter  saw  it,  he  answered         power  or  holiness  we  had  made  this  man 

unto  the  people.  Ye  men  of  Israel,  why  I  13  to  walk?    The  God  of  Abraham,  and  of 


■ch.  5  :12:  John  10  :  23. 


>ch.  14  :  11-15;  Gen.  41  :  16. 


inward  attachment,  a  cleaving  of  the 
mind  to  Peter  and  John.  But  there  is 
not  siilhcient  reason  for  this  view.  Tlie 
former  view  is  the  more  natural  and 
agrees  better  with  the  context.  But 
why  did  he  liokl  fast  to  tliem  ?  Doubt- 
less excited  gratitude  would  lead  liini  to 
seize  hold  of  them.  But  would  this  ex- 
})lain  his  continuing  to  do  this  while 
they  enter  the  temjjle  and  return  to 
Solomon's  porch?  Would  not  kee])iug 
near  them  suffice  ?  It  is  to  be  noted 
that  Peter  first  took  him  by  the  hand 
(ver. 7)j  that  the  lame  man  went  with 
the  ajiostles  into  the  temjjle  (ver.  8),  and 
a  little  afterward  was  continuiug  to 
hold  fast  to  them  in  Solomon's  porch. 
Is  it  not  natural  to  suppose  that  during 
all  this  time  he  was  holding  fast  to 
their  hands  or  otherwise,  with  perhaps 
sliglit  intermissions?  In  his  new  ex- 
perience he  would  naturally  feel  the 
need  of  guidance  into  that  portion  of 
the  temjjle  where  he  had  never  been ; 
of  help  and  direction  in  walking  till  he 
gained  full  command  of  every  muscle 
and  full  conlidenee  in  his  power  to  con- 
trol himself.  His  leajiing  (ver.  s)  seems 
to  indicate  that  liis  movements  at  first 
were  somewhat  irregular ;  and  thus  he 
needed  the  steadying  and  guiding 
liands  of  tlie  apostles.  We  must  neither 
add  to  nor  take  away  from  the  great- 
ness of  the  miracle.  It  was  marvelous 
indeed,  though  he  was  guided  at  first 
by  Peter  and  John.  The  porch  that 
is  called  Solomon's — imj)lyingthat 
tliere  were  other  porticoes  and  that 
tins  was  much  noted.  It  is  also  men- 
tioned in  ch.  5  :  12  and  John  10  :  23.  It 
was  a  portico  or  hall  ujKni  the  eastern 
side,  in  the  court  of  the  Gentiles,  and 
|)robably  where  Solomon  had  erected 
the  entrance  i)orch  to  the  first  temple. 
Joseplius  (Antiq.,  xx.,  9,  7)  regarded  it 
as  that  built  by  Solomon  himself,  which 
had  been  left  uninjured  in  the  destruc- 
tion of  the  temple  by  the  Babylonians. 
12-2t).  Peter's    Address  to   the 

People.       (Oen   22:1.m;    Ex.3:6;    Lev.  17  :  2!) ; 
Deut.    15  ;  18,  19  ;    1  Peter  \:20,2\;     2  Peier  3  :  12.) 

D 


This  address  is  similar  to  the  Pente- 
costal one,  in  that  it  presents  Jesus  as 
the  Messiah  and  a]>j)eals  to  the  Old  Tes- 
tament Scriptures  and  enforces  repent- 
ance. It  goes  a  stei>  beyond  it  in  the 
motives  derived  from  the  future  bless- 
ings of  Christ's  kingdom  and  his  second 
coming.  It  must  be  liorne  in  mind 
that  Peter  was  addressing  many  devout 
Israelites,  who  were  looking  for  the 
Messiah,  and  were  ready  to  acce])t  of 
Jesus  as  the  Christ  as  soon  as  con- 
vinced. (♦:■!•)  This  helps  to  exj)lain 
the  diilerence  of  direction  (ver.  19-21)  from 
that  of  Pentecost  (2 :  38)  and  from  that  to 
the  jailer.     (ifi:3i.) 

12.  When  Peter  saw  it — the  hasty 
and  excited  concourse  of  the  people  and 
their  exhibitions  of  amazement.  An- 
swered— not  to  any  question,  but  to 
the  wish  for  information  implied  in 
their  looks  and  wonderings.  Addresses 
are  often  introduced  in  tliis  way  in  the 
New  Testament.  (Matt.  11 :2.5,  nc.te.)  Men 
of  Israel— an  honorable  designation, 
fitting  to  the  jjeople  who  had  come  to 
the  temple  for  worship  and  were  repre- 
sentatives of  the  Jewish  nation.  (2 :  22.) 
Why  marvel  at  this  thing  which  had 
occurred  (ver.  10),  or  at  this  man  \\\\o 
has  been  cured  (ver.  11.  le) — either  con- 
struction Ijeing  allowable,  but  the  latter 
pei'haps  somewhat  prefera))le.  They 
had  cause  for  wonder,  but  they  failed 
to  see  til  rough  whose  power  this  great 
miracle  had  been  done.  Their  wonder- 
dering  was  fundamentally  wrong. 
Why  look  ye  so  earnestly  on  us  ? 
Why  on  us  fasten  ye  yinn-  eyrsf  Us  is 
emphatic.  Peter  would  make  Christ 
emphatic  and  turn  their  interest  to 
him.  As  though  by  our  own 
power  or  holiness,  (jodliness,  piety. 
The  cure  had  not  been  effected  by  their 
own  indej)endent  power,  nor  as  a  re- 
ward of  piety,  as  some  of  them  miglit 
suppose. 

13.  In  contrast  he  points  to  the  author 
of  the  cure,  the  God  of  the  patriarchs, 
whom  he  reverently  named  according  to 
their  customary  formula.     (7:32;Kio(1. 


60 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  III. 


Isaac,  and  of  Jacob,  the  God  of  our 
fathers,  p  bath  glorified  his  Son  Jesus ; 
whom  ye  delivered  up,  and  i  denied  him 
in  the  presence  of  Pilate,  ■when  he  was 


14  determined  to  let  him  go.    But  ye  denied 
the  Holy  One  and  the  Just,  and  ^  desired  a 

15  murderer  to  be  granted  unto  you ;  and 
killed  the  Prince  of  life,  whom  God  hath 


p  John  12  :  IC;  17  :  1.        i  Matt.  27  :  20. 


■  Luke  23  :  18,  19. 


3 :  16)    He  also  says,  the  God  of  our 

fathers  (ver.  asaiso) — ranking  himself 
with  his  hearers  as  an  Israelite  and  a 
worshiper  of  the  same  God.  Thus  he 
carefully  and  wisely  selects  his  words, 
that  he  might  not  only  at  the  beginning 
favorably  impress  his  hearers,  but  also 
remind  them  that  the  new  religion  was 
not  inconsistent  with  the  old,  that  in 
fiict  it  emanated  from  the  God  of  Israel. 
Ilath  glorified— in  a  state  of  glory 

in    heaven.        (Luke  24  :  26  ;  John  7  :  .".9  ;     12  :  16; 

17 : 1, 5.)  This  miracle,  and  all  of  Christ's 
miracles,  his  resurrection  and  ascension 
and  the  sending  and  the  workings  of 
the  Holy  Spirit,  were  manifestations 
and  evidences  of  his  glory.  (2:22,:w.) 
Meyer  limits  it  to  the  honor  conferred 
at  this  time  upon  Jesus  by  this  mira- 
cle, which  is  too  narrow  a  view. 
Peter  exj)laius  the  miracle  (vcr.  is) ;  but 
here  the  glorified  and  exalted  Messiah 
accords  better  with  the  Holy  and  Right- 
eous one  (ver.  u)  and  the  Prince  of  life 
(ver.is),  and  with  what  is  said  elsewhere 
of  God  glorifying  the  Son.  (J"im  13 :  :ii.  k-) 
See  also  references  above.  His  Son, 
ratlier,  /lis  xenntnt,  Jrsiis.  Aiiotlier 
word  is  used  where  Jesus  is  sixtkeii  of 
as  Son  of  God.  The  word  scrnoit, 
literally,  a  boy,  was  used  of  a  servant  of 
any  age  and,  in  imitation  of  the  iJe- 
biew,  came  to  be  used  of  a  devout  wor- 
shiper of  God,  oue  who  fulfills  God's 
will  (4:23:  Lukei:6H),  and  was  ju'oplieti- 
cally  applied  to  the  Messiah,  (isa.  4; :  1 ; 
52 :  13 ;  S3 :  u.  See  Matt.  12 :  18. )  Jesus  was  per- 
sonally a  son,  but  officially  a  scrvaiif, 
and  is  so  styled  here  and  in  ver.  2(3 
ami  4  :  27,  oO.  Peter  thus  at  once  jn-e- 
sents  Jesus  with  a  Messianic  appella- 
tion whom  God  had  glorified.  This 
word  reiideied  servant  is  never  applied 
to  the  apojstles  or  the  disci])les,  hut  a 
less  tender  and  stronger  word  is  fre- 
quently applied  to  them,  meaning  bond- 
servant or  slave.     (Kom.  1  :  1  ;  Col.  4  :  12  ;  Kph. 

6:6)  The  hearers  of  Peter  doubtless  per- 
ceived the  i>rophetic  use  of  the  term,  as 
ai>i>lied  to  Jesus.  Whom  ye  de- 
livered up,  through  your  leaders  and 
rulers,  to  Pilate,  the  Roman  governor. 


And  denied  him  as  your  Messiah. 
(Luke23:2.)  In  the  presence  of  Pi- 
late, literally,  to  the  face   of  Pilate, 

before  his  eyes.      (John  19.  15.    See  Gal.  2:11.) 

Was  determined,  etc — ivlien  he  de- 
cided to  release  him.  (Matt.  27 :  24;  Luke 
23 :  14-16.)  As  a  judge,  Pilate  had  decided 
to  release  Jesus,  but  he  retracted  his 
decision  and  yielded  to  the  clamor  of 
the  people  ancl  the  threats  of  the  rulers. 

14.  But  ye — in  emphatic  contrast  to 
Pilate.  Peter  repeats  the  terrible 
charge  that  they  liad  denied  the 
Messiah,  wliom  he  here  styles  the  Mo/)/ 
and  Hiffhteous  One,  a  fitting  title  of 
the  sercfoi^  of  Jehovah,  (ver.  13.)  Jesus 
was  not  merely  the  Hu/i/  One  morally, 
but  officially,  the  one  set  aj^art  and  con- 
secrated, the  Messiah,  the  Son  of  God. 

(Luke  4  :  .■!»;  John  6  :  69.)      He  WaS  the  Jiif^ht- 

eons  or  Jnst  One,  not  merely  as  inno- 
cent as  adjudged  by  Pilate,  Init  posi- 
tively upright  in  his  external  life.  (John 
16:10;  1  John  2:1.)  As  ail  epithet  of  the 
Messiah,  see  also  7  :  52  ;  22  :  14.  In  em- 
phatic contrast  Peter  mentions  Barab- 
i>as,  a  murderer — literally,  a  man,  a 
m  t(rderc):  Tliat  they  should  have  as/ced 
not  merely  a  man,  but  a  imirderer,  to 
be  gracious/)/  delivered  to  them,  that  he 
might  go  free,  was  indeed  infiuiious  in 
itself,  l)ut  more  so  in  contrast  to  their 
denying  the  Messiah  (this  verse),  and  to 
killing  liim  (next  verse). 

15.  And  killed — tlirough  Pilate 
and  the  Roman  tribunal,  the  only  way 
tliey  could  judicially  put  him  to  death. 
The  Prince  or  Author  of  life  (as  in 
Heb.  12:2).      Jesus  was  tlic    Author  of 

eternal      life    (JuhuS:  I6;  10:2S;  2Tim.  1 :10), 

of  all  life  (Johui:;t,  4),  and  the  first 
fruits  of  those  that  rise  from  the  dead. 
(1  Cor.  15:23.)  The  fiict  that  they  I'i lied 
him,  and  that  he  through  the  apostles 
had  brought  increased  vitality  and 
strength  to  the  feet  and  ankles  of  a 
cripple  (ver.  16),  leads  us  to  include 
physical  as  well  as  sjiiritual  life.  How 
great  the  aggravation  of  their  sin  and 
guilt  in  taking  the  life  of  liim  from 
whom  all  life  proceeds.  But  God 
raised,  awakened  and  recalled  him 


Cii.  III.] 


THE  ACTS. 


51 


raised  from  the  dead ;  '  whereof  we  are 
16  witnesses.  Aud  his  name  'through  faith 
in  his  name  hath  made  this  man  strong, 
whom  ye  see  and  liuow :  yea,  the  faith 
which  is  hy  him  hath  given  him  this  per- 


fect soundness  in  the  presence  of  you  all. 

17  And  now,  brethren,  1 "  wot  that  through 
ignorance  ye  did   ('',  as  did    al.so    your 

18  rulers     But  those  things,  which  Uod  be- 
fore had  showed  ^  by  the  mouth  of  all  his 


ich.  1  :22;2  :  32. 


«  ch.  14  : !» ;  Matt.  9  :  22 ;  John  14  :  12.        »  Gen.  21 
50  :  6 ;  53  :  5,  etc. ;  Dan.  9  :  26 ;  1  Peter  1  :  10, 11. 


26. 


I  Ps.  22 ;  Isa 


from  among  the  dead.  Notice  how 
Peter  dwells  upon  their  great  sin  in 
rejecting  and  killing  their  Messiah, 
showing  step  by  step,  and  hy  successive 
contrasts,  their  crime  and  guilt.  Ills 
words  were  eminently  fitted  to  produce 
conviction  of  sin. 

16.  Having  held  up  the  slain,  the 
risen  and  the    glorified    Jesus,    Peter 
presents  him  as  the  cause  of  the  cure,  j 
And  his  name,  etc.    Upo)i  (he  faith  j 
in  his   name,   whose  character  as  the 
Messiah   has  been  presented,   has  his 
name  made  this  man  strong,  whom  ye  j 
see  healed,   and    know  as    formerly  a  ' 
cripple  ;  even  the  faith  whieh  is  throuc/h 
him,  who  is  the  Author  and  the  end  of  j 
faith  (Heb.  12:2),  gave   him  this  perfect  \ 
soundness,   this  unimpaired   condition  [ 
of  the  body,  all  of  the  members  being  i 
healthy  and  fit  for  use,  in  the  presence  j 
of  yon  all.      Notice  what  prominence  j 
Peter  gives  to  the  name  of  Jesus  and  | 
to  the  faith,  by  mentioning  each  of  j 
them  twice.     Name  is  used   for  every  ' 
thing  which  the  name  covers,  fin-  all  j 
that   is   recognized    and    jjrofessed    in 
Jesus,  and  especially  those  things  which  j 
Peter  had  just  declared  concerning  him,  ! 
as  the  Messiah,  the  Holy  and  Rigiiteous  I 
One  and  the  Author  of  "life.    The  faith 
of  course  was  exercised  hy  the  apostles, 
but  does  it  not  also  include  faith  as 
exercised  by  the  man  him.self  ?     There 
is  nothing  to  exclude  the  supposition. 
In  Matthew  17  :  20,  and  Murk  9  :  2.3, 
24,  faith  in  the  agent  and  sui)ject  are 
both  presented  as  necessary  to  the  work- 
ing of  a  miracle.     It  is  natural  to  sup- 
pose that  the  lame  man  had  heard  of 
Jesus  and  his  miracles  and  of  the  large 
increase  of  his  disciples,  and  tiiat  the 
words  of  Peter,  inspired  by  the  Si)irit, 
and  the  name   of  Jesus,  came  to  his 
heart,  with  quickening  power,  encour- 
aging him  to  attempted  obedience  to 
the  command  to  walk.     His  faith  also 
manifested  itself  in  praising  God,    (see 

on  ver.  7.  S.) 

17.  Having  faithfully  reproved  them 


for  rejecting  and  killing  him  who  was 
evidenced  as  the  ilessiah,  by  his  resur- 
rection aud  l)y  this  miracle  in  thei.i 
very  presence,  he  softens  his  tone  and 
prepares  in  fraternal  kindness  to  lead 
them  to  repentance.  And  now — as  the 
matter  stands.  Brethren — intimating 
his  fellow  feeling  and  love  for  them. 
More  conciliatory  than  in  ver.  12.  (.see 
2;  22, 29.)  I  wot,  etc. — J  know  ye  acted 
in  ignorance,  Peter  concedes  this,  not 
as  an  excuse  for  their  sin,  but  as  a  pal- 
liation of  their  guilt,  (i  Cor.  2 :  s.)  Jesus 
made  the  same  concession  in  his  prayer 
for  his  murderers.  (Luke  n  -.-m.)  As  "the 
sin  was  committed  in  ignorance  there 
was  hope  that  it  might  be  forgiven,  and 
an  encouragement  to  I'epent.  Compare 
Paul's  declaration  concerning  himself. 
(iTiiu.  1 :  13-16.)  The  siii  of  ignorance 
was  recognized  in  the  Old  Testament, 
and  a  sin  offering  provided  for  it.  (Num. 
15:27,28.)  There  were  different  degrees 
of  ignorance,  and  hence  different 
degrees  of  guilt.  Their  ignorance,  how- 
ever, resulted  from  unbelief,  and  existed 
notwith.standing  the  light  that  shone 
from  Christ's  cliaracter  and  life,  aud 
from  his  words  and  works.  These  they 
ought  to  have  examined  and  })elieved. 
(johui:;  :.-i8  40.)  Paul  was  the  chief  of 
sinners  notwithstanding  his  ignorance 
(iTiin.  i:in);  and  they  were  guilty  of 
most  heinous  sin.     (2 .  23.) 

18.  Continuing  in  the  same  strain  of 
kindness,  Peter  says,  But,  what  was  a 
crime  on  your  part,  was  an  accomplish- 
ment of  a  divine  purjiose.  This  fact 
was  a  ground  of  hope  for  repentance, 
but  did  not  lessen  their  guilt.  They 
acted  freely.  (2.23.)  God's  sovereignty 
and  human  freedom  and  responsibility 
may  be  illustrated  by  the  case  of  Josepli. 

(Gea.  45:8,  50:20.)      All  hlS  {the)  proph- 

ets,  viewed  as  a  whole,  (ver.  21, 23.  see 
Luke  24:  27. 44.)  The  drift  of  prophecy 
had  pointed  toward  Christ,  his  suffer- 
ings and  death.  That  Christ — rather, 
according  to  tlie  most  ajtproved  read- 
ing, his  Christ,  his  anointed.     Should 


62 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  III. 


prophets,  that  Christ  should  suflfer,  he 
19  hath  so  fulfilled.    Repent  ye  therefore, 


and  be  converted,  y  that  your  sins  may  be 
blotted  out,  when  the  '  times  of  refresh- 


J  Isa.  43  :  25. 


■  I's.  72  :  6-17 ;  Isa.  61  :  1-3,  10  ;  Slatt.  11  :  28,  29  ;  2  Thess.  1  :  7,  10. 


suffer — death  on  the  cross.  So  ful- 
filled— God  has  thus  accomplished,  as 
related  in  verses  14,  15,  17. 

19.  Therefore,  since  your  crime  is 
not  unpardonable,  and  the  Messianic  j 
redemption,  foretold  by  the  prophets,  i 
has  been  realized  in  the  sufferings  of  i 
Jesus.  Repent,  (see  on  2  :m.)  Be  I 
converted — rather,  turn,  that  is,  to  j 
God.  (Matt.  13 :  15.)  The  preceding  word 
refers  to  the  inner  change  of  mind ; 
this  to  the  positive  results,  the  corre- 
sponding change  of  life.  In  turning  to 
God,  faitli  is  implied,  which  had  been 
mentioned  in  ver.  l(i.  That  your 
sins  may  be  blotted  out — that  the 
guilt  of  your  sins  may  be  totally 
erased.  Instead  of  forgiveness  (2:38), 
Peter  here  uses  the  stronger  figure  of 
erasure,  as  of  a  handwriting,  (coi.  2 :  u.) 
The  same  figure  is  found  in  the  Old 
Testament,  (isa. « :  25 ;  Ps.  51 : 9.)  When 
the  times,  etc.  This  translation  is 
not  grammatically  sustained.  Rather, 
In  order  that  times,  or  seasons,  of  re- 
freshing may  eonie.  The  original  word 
for  refreshing,  according  to  its  deriva- 
tion, means  literally  a  cooling,  or  relief 
from  the  effects  of  heat,  hence  a  reviv- 
ing, a  refreshing.  It  may  here  be  ap- 
plied either  to  the  consolations  of 
religion  and  the  spiritual  blessing  at- 
tending and  following  turning  to  the 
Lord,  or  to  the  Messianic  joy  and  bless- 
edness to  be  ushered  in  by  the  return 
of  Christ  from  heaven.  Commentators 
are  divided  on  these  views.  The  for- 
mer view  seems  the  most  natural,  if 
this  verse  be  taken  by  itself.  The  word 
tines  is  in  the  plural  and  without  the 
article,  and  thus  rather  indicates  re- 
peated occasions,  instead  of  one  occa- 
sion. It  also  accords  with  rei)entance, 
as  a  condition,  and  the  results  of  re- 
pentance, as    elsewhere    presented   in 

the    Bible.       (2:  38;  8.  4.  8:  JohuS  :  IS;  7:38; 

Rom,  8 :  12 ;  Ps.  51 : 8-15.)  On  the  Other  hand 
the  next  verse  appears  to  refer  to  the 
second  coming  of  Christ,  and  this  verse 
is  closely  connected  with  it,  and  the 
two  verbs,  may  come  and  shall  send, 
may  very  naturally  be  referred  to  the 
same  pei'iod  of  time.    An  interpreta- 


tion which  touches  both  of  these  sides, 
bearing  a  relation  to  present  influences 
of  the  Spirit  and  to  Christ's  second 
coming  would  have  much  to  commend 
itself  as  the  true  one.  Such  an  inter- 
pretation may  be  found  in  the  blessings 
of  the  Gospel  Dispensation  with  special 
reference  to  the  Jewish  peo])le.  The 
early  Christians  were  not  only  looking 
for  the  second  coming  of  Christ,  but 
for  the  reception  of  the  gospel  by  the 
people  of  Israel.  Prophets  had  fore- 
told three  blessings  (isa.  32 : 1-3, 15-18;  65,:  17- 
25 ;  5!i :  2i>.  21 ;  jer.31 :  33),  and  Paul,  who  later 
doubtless  understood  God's  designs 
toward  his  ancient  chosen  jjeople  better 
than  Peter  now  did,  foretells  the  fulfill- 
ment of  such  predictions  in  the  restora- 
tion of  Israel.  (Rom.  u :  26,27.)  The 
times  of  refreshing  may  thus  refer  to 
all  those  seasons  of  revival,  either 
among  Jews  or  Gentiles,  which  pre])are 
the  way,  or  bring  about  this  happy  re- 
sult to  the  Jewish  nation.  These  bless- 
ings and  the  return  of  Christ  are  to  be 
connected  with  and  to  follow  repent- 
ance, reformation  of  life,  and  prayer. 
God  has  seen  fit  to  connect  these  as  the 
means  and  the  end  or  as  the  antecedent 
and  consequent,  so  that  in  his  plan  the 
one  is  necessary  to  the  other.     (Kzek.  .3fi: 

37  ;  Zech.  13  :  9.    See  Mark  6.5:  Heb.  4  :  16  ;  2  Peter 

3 :  12.)     Both  John  and  Jesus  had  made 

the  coming  kingdom  a  reason  for  re- 

Ijentance  (Matt.  3 : 2. 17),  and  the  blessing 

of  that  Dispensation,  especially  to  the 

Jewish  people,  were  a  strong  motive  to 

Peter's  hearers  to  exercise  repentance. 

Neitlier   could    they   expect  to    enjoy 

tliem  and  see  those  glorious  seasons  fol- 

;  low,   except  they  repented  of  having 

I  rejected  the  Messiah,  turning  to   him, 

j  and   heartily   receiving   liim   as  tlieir 

Saviour,   and    the    jjiomised    One   of 

Israel.     When  such  seasons  might   be 

enjoyed,  or  how  soon  the  Lord  might 

I  return  were  unknown  to  the  discijiles. 

(1:7.  II.)     Thej'  were  longing  for  it,  and 

expecting  it,  and  laboring  to  be  pre- 

I)ared     for     it.     (2  veters :  11. 12.)      They 

j  were  to  be  witnesses  to  the  Jewish  peo- 

!  pie,  and  as  they  then  thought,  through 

I  them  to  all  nations.     (1:8;  Luke  a  -.  47.) 


Ch.  III.] 


THE  ACTS. 


53 


Ing  shall  coiue  from  the  presence  of  the 

20  Lord;    and   he  shall  send  Jesus  Christ, 
which   before  was   preached    unto   you: 

21  whom  the  heaven  must  receive  until  the 
times  of  "restitution  of  all  things,  which 


(iod  hath  spoken  by  the  mouth  of  all  bis 
holy  projihets  since  the  world  began. 

For  Moses  truly  said  unto  the  fathers, 
'■'A  Prophet  shall  tin;  Lord  your  God 
raise  up  unto  you  of  your  brethren,  like 


■  Isa.  1  :  26,  27 ;  Mai.  3  :  3,  4  ;  Matt.  17  :  11 ;  Rom.  8  :  18-25.        i"  Deut.  18  :  15, 18, 19. 


They  had  not  leavneil  yet  God's  plaus 
of  work  auioiiEf  Jews  and  Gentiles,  and 
how  far  distant  was  Christ's  second 
com  i  III,'. 

20.  Motives  for  repentance  are  still 
pressed.  And  he  shall  send- 
rather,  And  that  he  may  send  the  Christ 
appointed  fur  yoit,  Jesns.  (i  Peter  i  :  ?o.) 
Peter  here  leturns  to  Jesiis  the  Messiah, 
■\vliom  lie  presented  at  the  beginning  of 
his  address,  (ver  is )  He  was  chosen  and 
appointed  for  their  salvation.  The 
Common  Version,  Which  before  was 
preached, is  not  in  accordance  with  the 
best  niamiscripts.  Tiie  most  natural  ref- 
erence in  this  verse  is,  not  to  Christ's  first 
coming,  nor  to  his  spiritual  presence 
in  the  hearts  of  his  disciples  (Matt.  28 :  20), 
bnt  to  iiis  visiljle  return,  which  had 
been  promised.  (1  r  n.)  To  be  prepared 
for  tins,  and  to  share  in  the  I)lessing  of 
the  Messiah's  coming,  and  of  the  restora- 
tion of  all  things  (ver  21),  they  needed 
repentance  and  reformation,   (hos.  H:  1 1., 

Zech   12  :  10.) 

21.  Whom  the  heaven  must  re- 
ceive— his  presence  there  being  a 
present  and  fixed  fact,  until  the 
times  of  restitution,  the  restoration 
of  all  things,  not  only  of  the  true 
theocracy,  but  also  of  that  more  ))erfect 
state  of  order,  purity,  and  happiness 
wliicii  existed  before  the  fjill.  The 
Jews  expected  a  golden  age  of  jiurity 
and  blessedness  under  the  Messiah, 
when  all  evils  would  be  set  right, 
(i :  fi.)  Peter's  hearers  were  thus  pre- 
pared to  understand  somewhat  his  lan- 
guage. Doubtless  he  himself  afterward 
understood  it  better  than  he  did  then. 
The  times  of  refreshing  (ver.  19)  and  the 
times  of  restoration  are  not  the  same, 
thougli  doubtless  they  overlap  each 
other.  The  former  is  prejiaratory,  and 
runs  into  the  latter.  Tlie  restoration 
of  all  things  will  take  place  after  the 
second  coming  of  Christ,  and  is  referreil 
to  in  Matt.  19  :  28  as  the  renovution  or 
new  birth  of  all  things.  There  will  be 
"  new  heavens  and  a  new  eartli,  wherein 
dwelleth     righteousness  "     (2  Peter  s :  13), 


and  the  deliverance  of  the  whole  crea- 
tion from  the  bondage  of  cori-uption. 

(Rom  8  •  19  23.      See  Rev.  21  :  1-5:    1  Cor   15  ;  24  28.) 

SVhich  refers  not  to  "things,"  but  to 
"times."     All  his  holy  prophets — 

All  should  lie  omitted,  according  to  the 
highest  critical  authorities.  Since 
the  world  began— //-om  the  begin- 
ning of  prophetic  revelatiou.  This 
verse  met  any  doubt  regarding  prom- 
ised blessings  growing  out  of  Christ's 
ascension  into  heaven.  Peter  intimates 
that  this  is  not  a  final  withdrawal,  but 
a  temjiorary  absence  till  tlie  time  of 
that  gloi-ious  era  of  restoration  toward 
which  all  jirophecy  ])ointed.     (see  isa  ii: 

6  9;   Dau.  2  :  44  ;  7  :  14  ;    Mie.  4  :  3.  4  ;    Z.ich.  14  :  20  ) 

Heaven — where  God  dwells,  without 
any  definite  regard  to  its  locality. 
Times — in  general  with  an  idea  of 
continuance;  times,  in  ver.  19,  is  an- 
other word,  witli  an  idea  of  a  limited 
period,  seasons.  Both  words  are  used 
in  1  :  7. 

22.  Peter  adduces  some  passages 
from  the  Old  Testament  in  confirma- 
tion of  what  he  had  said,  and  which 
might  lead  them  to  heed  his  admoni- 
tion to  repentance.  (Ver.  19.)  For  and 
unto  the  fathers  are  not  found  in 
the  oldest  and  best  manuscripts.  Mo- 
ses truly — Moses  indeed  said,  as  well 
as  all  the  prophets  (ver.  24)  who  agree 
with  him  and  corroborate  his  state- 
ments. Peter  naturally  and  fittingly 
begins  with  Moses,  their  first  and  great- 
est prophet.  (Num.  12:6,7.)  The  passagc 
quoted  is  from  Deut.  18  :  15,  19.  It  is 
partly  taken  from  the  Septuagint  ver- 
sion and  partly  a  new  translation  from 
the  Hebrew.  Stejihen  cites  this  passage 
in  7  :  37,  with  the  same  application 
to  Christ.  A  like  reference  of  this  pas- 
sage to  Christ  is  imi)lied  in  John  4  :  25 ; 
1  :  25  ;  6  :  14,  15  ;  7  :  40,  41.  See  notes 
on  these  passages.  This  appears  to 
have  been  the  interpretation  among  the 
Jews.  Like  unto  me — as  projiliet, 
lawgiver,  but  especially  as  mediator. 
Moses  had  acted  as  mediator  at  Horeb, 
so  God  would  send  them  another  medi- 


54 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cir.  III. 


unto  me;  him  shall  ye  hear  in  all  things 

23  whatsoever  he  shall  say  unto  you.  And 
it  shall  come  to  pass,  that  every  soul, 
which  will  not  hear  that  prophet,  shall 
be  destroyed  from  among  the   people.' 

24  Yea,  and  all  the  projihets  from  ■^  Samuel 


and  those  that  follow  after,  as  many  as 
have  spoken,  have  likewise  foretold  of 
25  these  days.  *  Ye  are  the  children  of  the 
prophets,  and  of  the  covenant  which  God 
made  with  oui-  fathers,  saying  unto  Abra- 
ham, '  And  in  thy  seed  shall  all  the  kin- 


:  ch.  13  :  20 ;  1  Sam.  3  :  20 ;  2  Sam.  7  :  16.         d  ch.  2  :  39  ;  Kom.  9  :  4,  5,  8. 


ator.  (Deut.  18: 16-18.)  Christ  both  re- 
sembled Moses  and  excelled  him.  (Hcb. 
3:2-6;  8: 6.)  The  less  may  be  compared 
with  the  greater  and  the  greater  witli 
the  less.  (Matt.  5: 48.)  But  uiauy  with 
margin  of  the  Revised  Version  and  the 
Improved  Bihle  Union  Version,  would 
translate  here  and  in  7  :  37,  As  he. 
did  me — that  is,  in  the  same  manner  as 
he  raised  up  me.  Inferentially,  these 
words  thus  translated,  as  well  as  the 
Avhole  quotation,  imi)ly  a  likeness  of 
that  prophet  to  !Moses.  Him  shall 
you  hear,  etc.  You  shall  be  able  to 
liear  him  and  it  Mill  be  your  duty 
to  obey  him.  Tliis  finds  its  fultillnient 
throughout  the  whole  Gospel  Dispensa- 
tion, esiwcially  when  Israel  shall  re- 
ceive the  gOS])ol.      (Ver.  19.) 

23.  Evciy  soul  wliich  Avill  not 
hear,  so  as  to  obey  that  propliot. 
Shall  be  utterly  destroyed  from 
among  the  people.  The  pas.sage  in 
Duet.  18:  19  is  "I  will  recjuire  it  of 
him,"  which  is  fall  of  meaning.  Tlie 
Septuagint's  translation,  "  I  will  take 
vengeance,"  brings  out  the  implied 
meaning  positively.  Peter  emphasi  zes 
it  bv  using  the  words  found  in  Lev. 
23:29,  "shall  be  utterly  destroyed," 
etc.,  thus  pointing  to  the  highest 
kind  of  punishment.  Tliey  shall  be 
deprived  of  all  their  ])rivileges  and 
visited  with  utter  destruction.  The 
expression  was  of  frequent  occurrence 

(Gen.  17  :  14  ;  Exod.  12  :  15.  19),       and       deilOteS 

capital  punishment.  As  ajijdied  to  the 
soul  under  the  gospel,  it  means  exclu- 
sion from  tlie  kingdom  of  God,  and 
death,  which  is  the  wages  of  sin.  (John 
3 :  18 ;  8 :  24 :  M:nt.  io :  46.)  We  havc  here  an 
example  of  a  composite  quotatiou ;  tliat 
is,  where  two  or  more  quotations  are 
merged  into  one. 

24.  Samuel  is  named  here,  and 
also  in  Ps.  99  :  fi,  as  he  was  the  next 
great  prophet  after  Moses  and  the  first 
in  a  long  line  of  ]u-ophets  who  foretold 
the  coming  of  the  Messiah  and  his 
kiuiidom.     This  line  continued,  with 


scarcely  any  interruption,  to  the  daj-s 
of  Malachi,  about  seven  hundred  and 
fifty  years.  In  Heb.  1  :  5,  a  quotation 
from  2  Sam.  7  :  14,  "  I  will  be  to  him 
a  Father,  and  he  shall  be  to  me  a 
Son,"  is  applied  to  Christ.  And 
those  that  follow  after,  or  even 
those  hi  order,  succeeding  one  an- 
other through  a  long  i)eriod.  Have 
foretold — rather,  haie  also  told.  Of 
these  days — of  which  he  had  been 
speaking,  and  of  which  Moses  liad 
foretold,  (ver.  2H.)  Not  merely  the  days 
of  restoration  (ver.  21),  but  rather  the 
days  then  present  as  connected  with 
and  leading  on  to  the  .sea.sons  of  refresh- 
ing (ver.  19),  and  to  the  times  of  restora- 
tion of  all  things. 

25.  Peter  makes  an  em]iliatic  and  clos- 
ing appeal  to  his  hearers.  Ve  are  the 
children  (sons)  of  the  prophets  and 
of  the  covenant — a  Hebrew  mode  of 
speech,  meaning  those  to  whom  the 
l>ro})Iietic  promi.ses  and  covenant 
belong.  (Roiu.  9 : 4.)  See  a  similar  use 
of  tht^word  son  in  Matt.  8  :  12;  13  :  38. 
Tliey  were  the  participators — the  in- 
heritors of  the  blessings  which  the 
pro])liets  foretold  ami  of  covenanted 
mercies.  Hence  IVtcr  enforces  their 
duty  to  accej)t  the  i)romised  bless- 
ings, and  therefore  the  go.spel  is  first 
preached  to  them.  (ver.  26.)  He  specifies 
the  covenant,  the  arnni(je)nent  and 
promise  which  God  made  with  Al)ra- 
ham,  centering  in  the  one  great  des- 
cendant in  whom  all  families  of  the 
earth  should  be  blessed.  Tliis  promise 
wa.s  made  three  times  to  Abraliam.  (oeu. 
12:3;  18: 18;  22 :  18.)  It  was  repeated  to 
Isaac  and  Jacob.    (Gen.  26 : 4;  28 :  14.)    (see 

Rom.  4:13-16;  Gal.  3  :  7-9, 14.  29.)     In  thy  Seed 

— thy  deseendant,  the  Messiah  (as  in 
Gal  1 :  16).  He  was  the  seed  of  Abraham 
toward  whom  all  proj)hecy  centered, 
and  from  whom  salvation  and  all 
spiritual  blessings  have  come  to  men. 
Kindreds— families  in  the  wider  sense 
of  nations,  peoples. 
2G,  IJuto  you  first — as  heirs  of  the 


Cii.  III.] 


THE  ACTS. 


55 


26  dreds  of  the  earth  be  blessed.'     eUnto 
you  iirst,  God,  having  raised  up  his  8on 


Jesus,  sent  him  to  bless  you,  fin  turning 
away  every  one  of  you  from  his  iniquities. 


«  ch.  13  :  4G  ;  Luke  24,  47.        '  Isa.  .59  :  20  ;  Matt.  1 :  21 ;  Titus  2  :  11-14. 


covenant — arraugenient — and  belong- 
ing to  that  people  whom  God  had 
chosen  and  to  wliora  he  had  given 
special  promises.  Panl  as  well  as  Peter 
i-ecognized  that  the  gospel  was  first  to 
be  preached  to  the  Jews.  (i3:4fi;R~.m. 
1 :  1H-)  Peter  here  implies  that  the  bles.s- 
ings  of  the  Messiah  shonld  also  be  ex- 
tended to  Gentiles.  This  was  also  in- 
cluded in  the  covenant-promise  to 
Abraham,  (ver.25.)  Peter  expected  that 
tlie  Gentiles  would  first  embrace  Juda- 
ism and  througli  it  the  gosjiel.  (see  2 :  ;!9, 
note.)  Having  raised  up  his  Son, 
rather,  Servuid.  (seeonvor.  13.)  Haised 
up,  accoi-ding  to  the  }u-ediction  of 
Moses,  (ver.22.)  The  refei-ence  is  not 
to  Christ's  resurrection,  but  to  his  ap- 
pearance as  the  promised  Messiah. 
Jesus  should  be  omitted  according  to 
the  highest  critical  authorities.  Sent 
him  to  bless  you — that  thus  the 
promise,  "be  blessed"  (ver. 25),  might 
first  be  fulfilled  in  them.  In  turning 
away  every  one — showing  how  they 
were  to  be  blcs.sed.  Not  collectively, 
but  individually ;  not  merely  )»ai"don- 
ing  the  sins  that  are  i>ast,  but  saving 
them  from  sins  that  are  future  ;  not  i)i 
their  sins,  but  from  their  sins.  Thus 
Peter  excludes  the  idea  that  his  Jewish 
hearers  could  enjoy  the  promised  Iiless- 
ings  of  the  Messiah  without  repentance 
and  reformation.  A  fitting  close  of 
such  an  address,  containing  a  strong 
reason  why  they  should  repent,  (ver.  19.) 
Though  the  priests  came  upon  them 
siuklenly  (4:i),  Peter  had  reached  a 
good  stopping  place. 

In  comparing  this  address,  as  well  as 
the  one  in  tlie  preceding  ehai>ter  (see 
closing  uote  on  2 :  41)  with  Petcr's  cpistles, 
we  see  striking  resemblances,  tempered 
by  age  and  a  richer  experience,  and  by 
the  fact  that  in  the  former  he  is  address- 
ing the  unconverted,  while  in  the  latter 
he  is  writing  to  Christians.  In  both  he 
recognizes  the  fulfillment  of  prophecy 
in  Christ  and  his  gospel  (ver.  is;  1  Peter 
1 :  10) ;  in  both  he  is  a  witness  of  the  suf- 
ferings and  resurrection  of  Christ  (ver.  13 ; 
1  Peter  5:1);  lu  both  he  presents  the  glory 
of  Christ  and  the  power  of  faith,     (ver. 


13,  16;  1  Peter  1  :  21.)      In    vei".    13     JeSUS     is 

Jehovah's  servant,  and  in  1  Peter  2  : 
21-23  his  obedient  and  submissive  servi- 
tude is  held  up  to  view.  Here  are  fore- 
told the  seasons  of  refreshing  and  the 
times  of  the  restoration  of  all  things; 
in  2  Peter  3  :  10,  the  day  of  the  Lord, 
and  the  new  heavens  and  earth.  In  the 
former  Peter  seems  to  regard  it  as  near 
at  hand ;  but  in  the  latter,  after  years 
of  exiJerience  and  growth  in  knowledge, 
he  views  it  as  jjerhajjs  far  distant.  In 
connection  with  !)oth  he  speaks  of  re- 
pentance and  derives  from  the  last  days 
a    motive    for    reformation  and    holy 

living.      (Ver.  19,  26  ;  2  I'eter  3  ;  11.) 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  Christians  should  love  and  honor  the 
place  and  hour  of  prayer.  Christian  fellow- 
ship is  especially  fitting  such  seasons. 
Ver.  1 ;  16  :  13 ;  Dan.  6  :  10 ;  Isa.  56  :  7  ;  Ps. 
55  :  14.) 

2.  The  cripple  from  birth,  carried  to  the 
temple  gate,  illustrates  the  inability  of  the 
sinner.  (Ver.  2,  3  ;  Mark  2,  3,  4 ;  Jer.  18  :  23 ; 
Matt.  7  :  18  ;  Rom  8  :  7.) 

3.  We  must  first  arrest  the  attention  of  the 
needy  if  we  would  do  them  good.  (Ver.  4,  5; 
8:6;"l6:28.) 

4.  The  child  of  God  should  be  kind  and 
compassionate,  ready  to  do  good  as  he  has 
opportunity.  The  poor  awakened  and  hun- 
gry soul  should  not  expect  in  vain.  (Ver. 
4,5;  Gal.  6:9,  10:  Luke  6:30.) 

5.  The  servants  of  Christ  have  the  true 
riches,  which  they  ofter  to  poor  and  perish- 
ing souls.     (Ver.  6 ;  2  Cor.  5  :  20  ;  6  :  10.) 

6.  The  seeking  sin-sick  soul,  needs  not 
only  our  directing  and  encouraging  words, 
but  often  our  helping  hands.  (Ver.  7 ; 
9 :  17.) 

7.  How  many  forget  to  thank  God  for 
bodil.v  recovery  ;  but  such  as  are  spiritually 
healed  remember  God  and  his  people,  (Ver, 
8 ;  Luke  17  :  15-19  ) 

8  As  the  cripple  was  widely  known,  so 
God  sometimes  converts  notoriously  wicked 
men,  in  order  to  manifest  widely  the  power 
of  his  grace,     (Ver.  9,  10 ;  1  Tim.  1 :  15,  16) 

9.  Note  the  account  of  the  miracle.  Its 


56 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IV. 


simplicity,  sincerity,  honesty ,  and  evident  ! 
truthfulness.  The  man,  lame  from  his  birth  ' 
and  well-known  ;  he  could  not  have  been  an  | 
impostor.  Friends  and  foes  of  Jesus,  all  ! 
were  convinced  of  the  reality  of  the  cure. 
(Ver.  9-11 ;  4 :  16.) 

10.  The  work  of  God  generally  excites  won- 
der, calls  together  the  people,  and  gives  op- 
portunity to  preach  the  gospel.  (Ver.  10,  11 ; 
2:6,7;  8:5-13.) 

11.  Whatever  success  attends  the  minister 
of  the  gospel  or  however  great  his  talents  or  : 
personal  piety,  he  should    ascribe  all   the  j 
glory  to  Jesus  Christ,  since  it  is  only  through 
him  that  sinners  can   be  saved.     (Ver.  12; 
4:12;  2  Cor.  3:3:5,  6.)  1 

12.  God  of  the  Old  Dispensation  is  God  of 
the  New     The  Messiah  was  promised  and  j 
foreshadowed  in  the  One  and  manifested  and  ! 
glorified  in  the  Other.  (Ver.  13  ;  2  Cor.  1 :  20 ; 
Rev.  19 :  10.)  ' 

13.  How  great  the  guilt  of  those  who  know-  \ 
ingly  reject  the  Holy  and  Righteous  One  and 
the  Prince  of  life.     ;  Ver.  14-17  ;  Heb.  10 ;  29.) 

14.  The  resurrection  of  Jesus,  the  miracles 
performed  by  him  and  his  disciples,  are  evi- 
dences that  he  is  the  Author  of  life.    (Ver.  | 
16 ;  Heb.  5  :  8,  9  )  i 

15.  The  highest  success  is  only  attained 
through  faith  in  Christ  by  both  preacher 
and  hearer.    (Ver.  16  ;  1  Thess.  2  10-12.)  j 

16.  Ignorance  may  mitigate,  but  not  ex- 
cuse crime.  (Ver.  17  ;  Luke  23   ;^4  ;  Hos.  4   6.)  ] 

17.  Wicked  men  may  fulfill  God's  designs, 
and  God  may  make  the  wrath  of  man  to 
praise  him,  but  this  does  not  excuse  them 
since  their  own  wicked  purposes  and  deeds 
are  voluntary.    (Ver.  18  ;  Ps.  76  .  10  ) 

18.  The  purposes  of  God,  the  sufferings  of 
Christ,  and  even  the  ignorance  of  men,  may 
afford  reasons  for  repentance.  (Ver.  17-19 ; 
Kom.  2:4.) 

19.  Repentance  and  pardon  of  sin  precede 
spiritual  refreshment.  (Ver.  19,  Isa.  57  .  15 
-18.) 

20.  We  may,  as  it  were,  hasten  the  coming 
of  our  Lord  by  the  exercise  of  repentance 
and  faith,  and  by  prayer  and  efforts.  (Ver. 
19,20;  2Peter3:  12;  .Matt.6:  10;  Rev.  22  ;  20.) 

21.  Revivals  of  religion  are  especially  char- 
acteristic of  the  present  Dispensation  If 
not  enjoyed,  the  fault  is  ours,  not  Christ's. 
(Ver.  19,20;  Isa.  61    1-3.) 

22.  While  our  Lord  is  absent  we  should  be 
diligent  in  seeking  the  salvation  of  souls, 
thus  Increasing    the  vast  multitudes  who 


shall  welcome  his  return.     (Ver.  21 ;  Matt. 
24  :  14 :  1  Cor.  55 :  58.) 

23.  The  second  coming  of  Christ  will  re- 
sult in  the  restoration  of  all  things  to  the 
order  and  harmony  of  universal  holiness. 
(Ver.  21;  Isa.  11:  1-9.) 

24.  Jesus  the  Prophet  brings  salvation  to 
all  who  hear  him,  but  destruction  to  all  who 
reject  him.     (Ver.  22,  24 ;  Mark  16  :  16.) 

25.  There  is  a  unity  in  all  of  God's  revela- 
tions. Christ  is  the  great  center.  (Ver.  24 ; 
Eph.  1 : 4-14.) 

26.  It  is  a  great  blessing  to  have  a  godly 
parentage  and  early  to  hear  the  gospel ;  but 
a  greater  blessing  to  be  turned  from  sin  and 
saved  from  it.  (Ver.  25,26;  Luke  10:20; 
11:28,) 

Ch.  4  :  la  the  preceding  chapter  Luke 
gives  the  occasion  of  the  lirst  assault  up- 
on the  church  ;  in  this  cliapter  he  des- 
crihes  the  assault  itself,  led  on  by  the 
Sadducean  party.  Peter  and  John  are 
imprisoned,  arraigned  before  the  San- 
hedrin,  and  released.  Many  believe; 
the  church  is  united  and  i)rosperous; 
and  a  spirit  of  generous  lil)erality  pre- 
vails, a  noted  instance  in  the  case  of 
Barnabas  being  given. 

1-22.  The  Arkest,  Arraignment, 
Defense,  and  Release  of  Peter 

AND   John.      (l  Peter2:  4  8:  Ps.  118:22.) 

1.  As  they  spake — while  theyioere 
speftking.  They  were  interrui)ted, 
though  Peter  had  reached  a  fitting 
close  in  his  address,  (see  on  3: 26.)  Came 
upon  them,  with  the  idea  of  sud- 
denness.     (See  the  same  woni  1116  .  12,    12  .  T  ; 

Luke  10:  40.)  A  favoritc  word  with  Luke, 
but  used  only  three  times  by  Paul,  and 
by  no  other  writer  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment. The  priests — those  on  duty  in 
the  temple ;  who  also  acted  as  the 
guard  or  police  force.  See  Luke  1  :  9, 
in  reference  to  their  tcmjile  service. 
According  to  some  ancient  authorities 
it  should  read  chie/  priests,  comprising 
the  high  priest,  and  those  who  had  been 
deposed  from  the  highest  priesthood, 
and  the  merai)ers  of  the  families  from 
whom  the  high  priest  was  selected. 
(Ver.  6.)  It  has  been  common  to  include 
the  heads  of  the  twenty-four  classes 
into  which  the  priesthood  was  divided. 
(See  on  ver.  2x.)  Peter  was  addressing 
the  peoj)le  in  the  temple,  and  if  it  was 
at  the  time  of  one  of  their  feasts,  a 


Ch.  IV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


57 


Ptler  iiiul  Jdhv  imprisoned.    Their  defence  be- 
fore l/i€  Hdit/iedriii.     Their  release. 
4      And  as  I  hey  spake  unto  (he  peoitle,  the 
I)riests,    and  the  g captain  of  the  temple, 


and    the    Saddiicees,    came   iijion  them, 

2  h  heing  grieved  thai  tliey  taught  the  peo- 
ple, and  preached  llirough  Jesus  the  res- 

3  urreclion  from  the  dead.    And  they  laid 
bands  on  them,  and  put  them  in   hold 


s  ch.  5  :  24 ;  LuUe  22  :  4.        ^  ch.  23  :  8 ;  Matt.  22  :  23. 


greater  niiniher  of  priests  would  be  on 
duty.  See  note  on  introductory  remarks 
on  section.  (3  iii.)  Captain  of  the 
temple— tlie  most  important  personage 
connected  witli  the  temple,  next  to  the 
iugh  priest.  He  had  under  him  a  body 
of  J^evites,  and  was  probably  himself  a 
priest,  and  kept  guard  in  and  around 
the  temple,  and  was  responsible  for  its 
safety,  as  well  as  for  the  moneys  and 
other  treasures  it  contained.  Josephus 
sjieaks  of  an  ofticer  of  the  same  name. 
{Jewish  War,  vi.  5,  3;  ii.  17,  2.)  In 
tiie  A]ioerypha  the  Prefecf  or  Guardian, 
of  the  temple  is  mentioned  (2 Mace  3:4), 
also  governors  of  the  temple.  (Esdras 
i;8)  The  same  or  a  similar  olhce 
seems  to  have  existed   from  an  early 

date.      {'■   Chri.u  9  :   11;  2  Kings  12:9;  25:  IS;   2 

Chion.  31 .  13;  jer.  20:1 )  There  maj''  have 
been  several  similar  officers,  and  hence 
the  plural  in  Luke  22  :  4,  52,  who 
served  at  the  temple  in  turn,  or  who 
commanded  ditl'erent  bands  or  guards. 
(.Seei'a  134  1.)  The  Sadducecs — a 
sect  of  Jews  who  rightly  rejected  all 
tradition,  but  denied  many  important 
truths,  such  as  the  resurrection  of  the 
body  (i.uke  20 :  27),  the  existence  of  angels 
and  spirits  (23:8),  and  the  immortality 
of  the  soul  and  future  retribution. 
(JosKPHUS,  Jewish  War,  ii.  8,  14.) 
They  recognized  the  authority  of  the 
Old  Testament  alone,  especially  the 
Law,  in  matters  of  faith  and  morals. 
Josephus  says  (vIh//^.  xviii.  1,  4)  that 
their  doctrine  is  received  but  by  a  few, 
yet  by  those  still  of  the  greatest 
dignity.  Tliey  were  mostly  men  dis- 
tinguished by  birth,  wealth,  and  official 
]iosition,  and  not  averse  to  the  favor  of 
the  Herod  family  and  the  Romans.  (Murk 
3-6, note)  The  word  Sadducee  is  of 
doubtful  origin.  Some  trace  it  to  a 
Hebrew  word  meaning  righteous,  de- 
noting their  content  to  be  simply  right- 
eous people  ;  but  others,  to  Zadoc,  who 
was  high  ]n-iest  in  the  time  of  David, 
and  exhibited  great  fidelity  to  the  king 
and  his  house  (1  Kings  1 :  32 1.) ;  and  hence 
his  descendants  and  adherents  appear 


to  have  been  called  Zadokites,  or  Sad- 

ducees.       (see  5:  17.) 

2.  The  motive  of  their  attack  upon 
Peter  and  John  is  given.  Beiii§: 
grieved — being  stirred  up,  indigiiaiht, 
at  the  frequent  repetition  and  continu- 
ance of  the  cause  assigned.  The  Revi.«ed 
Version  renders,  being  sore  troubled. 
This  word  is  also  found  in  Ki  :  18.  A 
questiou  arises  whether  this  clause  de- 
scribes the  Sadducees  only,  or  the  priests 
and  the  cajttain  also.  The  Sadducees 
probably  instigated  the  arrest.  The 
priests  and  ca]itain  of  the  temple  may 
also  have  been  Sadducees  or  sympathiz- 
ers with  them.  (5:  n.)  It  may  also  be 
added  that  the  apostles  were  teaching 
without  official  authority,  and  by  ini- 
})licatiou  they  taught  the  resurrection 
through  the  resurrection  of  Jesus. 
Thus  while  the  latter  was  pre-emi- 
ently  the  instigating  cause,  the  priests 
who  were  not  of  the  Sadducean  party 
would  naturally  be  displeased  that  such 
men  as  Peter  and  John  should  teach 
the  people  at  all,  especially  that  Jesus, 
whom  they  themselves  had  crucified, 
had  arisen,  and  was  the  Messiah. 
(5:28.)  The  captain  of  the  temple 
would  also  be  desirous  of  preventing 
any  disturbance  within  the  sacred  in- 
closure.  Preached  through,  rather, 
in,  Jesus  the  resurrection,  etc. — in 
his  case  they  proclaimed  a  resurrection 
from  the  dead,  and  thus  incidentally 
and  l)y  inference  they  taught  a  general 
resurrection.  (Seei7:3i)  The  fact  that 
Christ  had  risen  was  fatal  to  a  leading 
doctrine  of  the  Sadducees.  (23:6-8.) 
Here  we  may  see  one  reason  why  the 
Phai'isees  were  no  passive  in  their 
treatment  of  the  disciples,  and  the  Sad- 
ducees their  most  violent  persecutors 

(See  Malt   Ti  ■  34  ;  Luke  20  :  .39.) 

3.  Laid  hands  on  them — with  an 
idea  of  some  violence  in  the  arrest. 
In  hold — Mi  custody — in  a  guard 
house  or  prison.  Eventide — evening. 
It  was  3  P.  M.  when  the  miracle 
was  performed,  which  was  the  begin- 
ning of  the  first  evening,  the  decline 


58 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IV. 


unto  the  next  day  :  for  it  was  now  even- 
tide. 
4      ■  Ilowbeit  many  of  them  which  heard 
the  word  believed ;  and  the  number  of 
the  men  was  about  five  thousand. 


5  And  it  came  to  pass  on  the  morrow, 
(hat  their  rulers,  and  elders,  and  scribes, 

6  and  "t  Annas  the  high  priest,  and  Caia- 
phas,  and  John,  and  Alexander,  and  as 
many  as  were  of  the  kindred  of  the  high 


i  Phil.  1  :  12-14.        k  Luke  3:2;  John  11  :  49  ;  18  :  13, 14. 


of  day.  Then  Peter  and  the  others 
entered  the  temple,  and  leturned  to 
Solomon'.s  porch.  His  address  was 
doubtless  imich  longer  than  the  re2>ort 
given  in  the  ])receding  chapter,  so  that 
erening  here  would  seem  to  refer  to  the 
second  evening,  or  close  of  day.  The 
time  is  given  as  a  reason  for  putting 
them  in  prison  till  the  next  day.  Prob- 
ably the  Sanhedriu  could  not  be  as- 
sembled that  night  at  so  short  a  notice. 

4.  Howbcit — but  notwithstanding 
all  tliis,  and  in  contrast  to  the  con- 
duct of  tlieir  ojjposers.  The  word — 
a  common  term  denoting  the  gospel 
message  concerning  .Jesus  as  the  risen 
Saviour.  (6:4;  8:4.)  Bclieved — re- 
ceived it  as  true  and  accei>ted  Jesus  as 
the  Christ.  This  is  one  of  the  Scrip- 
tural expressions  for  conversion,  (s  :  12; 
13:48;  18:8.)  Nuiiiber  of  the  men. 
Some  sujipose  that  both  sexes  are  in- 
cluded ;  but  the  word  rendered  men 
here  generally  refers  to  males.  As  in 
modern  missions,  the  first  converts  were 
largely  among  men.  It  was  also  more 
common  to  number  the  men.  (Matt,  u  :  21.) 
Was,  rather,  become,  about  five 
thousand.  Not  five  thousand  new 
converts,  but  the  numberof  l)elieversat 
Jerusalem.  This  was  probably  the 
resident  membership,  for  doubtless 
some  foreign  Jews,  converted  at  Pente- 
cost, liad  returned  to  their  homes. 

5.  On  the  morrow  —  the  next 
morning.  (Luke  10  :3d.)  The  Sanhedrin 
usually  met  aft^rthe  morning  sacrifice. 
Possibly  an  early  meeting  had  been 
arranged.  Their  rulers — of  the  peo- 
ple, tiie  Jews.  Eulers  here  designated 
the  Sanhedrin,  the  highest  civil  and 
ecclesiastical  court  of  the  Jews.  Two 
of  the  cla.sses  composing  it  are  named, 
the  elders,  the  heads  of  families,  men 
of  rank  and  influence,  and  the 
scribes,  learned  men,  whose  duty  it 
was  to  preserve,  copy,  and  expound  the 
Scriptures  and  the  traditions ;  called 
also  doctors  (Luke5:n)  and  lawyers. 
(Matt.  2-2 :  35.)     The  chief  pricsts  formed 


the  third  class,  and  are  referred  to 
in  the  next  verse  and  in  ver.  1.  The 
Sanhedrin  took  its  ri.se  after  the  Baby- 
lonish captivity  and  consisted  of  sev- 
enty-one persons,  who  are  said  to  have 
been  divided  as  follows :  twenty-four 
priests,  twenty-four  elders,  and  twenty- 
two  scribes,  presided  over  liy  a  i)resi- 
dent,  the  high  priest,  if  he  were  a  suit- 
al)le  jierson.  They  were  to  be  )iersons 
morally  blameless  and  sound  physi- 
cally ;  middle  aged,  good  looking, 
vealthy,  and  learned,  married  and 
having  children.  This  verse  closes  at 
this  point  in  the  Common  Version.  It 
is  better,  with  the  Revised  Version,  to 
insert  here  (from  the  end  of  ver.  6, 
Common  Version)  were  gathered  to- 
gether at  Jernsalein.  There  was  a 
meeting  of  the  Sanhedrin.  vSome  an- 
cient manuscripts  read  into  Jerusalem, 
implying  that  some  of  the  Sanhedriu 
lived  out  of  the  city.  But  the  greater 
weight  of  critical  authority  favors  in 
Jeru.salem.  The  Sanhedrin  generally 
held  its  meetings  in  one  of  the  halls  of 
the  temple-court,  on  the  south  side  or 
the  east  side.  Tlie  members  of  the  city 
assembled. 

6.  Annas  the  high  priest.  He 
was  appointed  high  priest,  a.  d.  7,  and 
was  removed  by  tlie  Roman  jirocurator, 
A.  D.  14.  "  He  had  five  sons  M-ho  had  all 
performed  the  oflice  of  high  priest  to 
God,  and  he  had  himself  enjoyed  that 
dignity  a  long  time  formerly."  (Jo- 
SEPHrs,  Ant.,  XX.,  9,  1.)  His  son-in- 
law,  Joseph  Caiaphas,  was  now  the 
acting  high  priest,  holding  the  oflBce 
from  A.  D.  25  to  A.  D.  3G.  The.se  facts 
help  to  explain  the  gre.at  influence  of 
Annas  through  a  long  period.  The  high 
priesthood,  according  to  the  Mosaic 
law,  was  for  life,  and  hence,  though  de- 
posed, Annas  would  still  be  regarded 
by  the  Jews  as  the  legitimate  high 
priest.  Luke  (s :  2)  mentions  the  high 
priesthood  of  both  Annas  and  Caia- 
phas, doubtless  because  the  former  was 
regarded  iu  some  sense  as  sharing  the 


Ch.  IV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


59 


piipst,  were  t,'alliero(i  together  at  Jerusa- 

7  leiii.  And  when  they  had  set  them  in 
the  midst,  tliey  asked,  '  Ky  what  power, 
or  by  what  name,  have  ye  done  this? 

8  °>  Then  Peter,  tilled  with  the  Holy  Spirit, 
said  unto  them,  Ye  rulers  of  the  people,  | 


9  and  elders  of  Israel,  if  we  this  day  be  ex- 
amined of  the  good  deed  done  to  the  im- 
potent man,  by  what  means  he  is  made 
10  whole  ;  be  it  known  unto  you  all,  and  to 
all  the  people  of  Israel,  ■>  that  by  tlie 
name  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Nazareth,  whom 


1  Matt.  21  :  23  ;  Luke  20  :  2. 


Luke  12  :  11,  12. 


'  ch.  3  :  6,  16. 


office  with  the  latter.  Some  regard 
Caiaphas  as  the  actual  high  priest  and 
Aiiiuis  as  the  president  of  the  Sanhe- 
driu  ;  others  thiuli  that  Annas  acted  as 
tleputyof  ("aiaphas.  (Jouais  :)3.)  John 
and  Alexander.  Nothing  is  linowu 
of  tliese  persous  beyond  the  fact  that 
tiiey  were  priests.  The  kindred  of 
the  high  priest — the  high-priestly 
family.  It  would  appear  from  5  :  17 
that  tliey  were  Sadducees.  Thus 
this  meeting  of  the  Saiihedrin  was  a 
I):icked  one,  the  Saddueean  party  being 
out  in  full  force,     (ver.  i.) 

7.  The  )>risoners  formally  arraigned. 
Had  set  them — caused  them  to  stand 
— in  the  midst,  where  all  could  see 
them.  It  is  said  tliat  tlie  Sanliedrin  sat 
in  a  circle,  or  a  semi-circle.  By  Avhat 
power — in  the  exercise  of  what  sort  of 
i)Ower  ?  Physical  strength  or  eihcacy 
IS  meant.  ]\Iedical  or  magical  power, 
or  do  you  pretend  to  some  superltumau 
strength  ?  Imvhat  sort  of  name — Jewish 
exorcists  and  enchanters  used  the  name 
of  God  and  other  names  in  their  arts — 
Have  ye,  or,  did  yon  do  this  miracle? 
Vou  is  emphatic  and  used  somewhat 
contemptuously.  They  do  not  ask  for 
information,  for  they  knew  that  Peter 
had  affirmed  that  they  had  performed 
the  cure  in  tlie  name  of  Jesus,  (sie,  i6; 
i-'i.)  A  judicial  examination  would 
naturally  go  hack  to  tlie  very  beginning. 
They  doubtless  hoped  to  catch  hold  of 
the  words  of  their  confession,  so  as  to 
make  some  charge  of  heresj^  or  blas- 
))hemy,  or  rebellion,  or  treason.  Or 
failing  in  these,  they  may  have  hoped 
to  frighten  the  apostlos  to  retract  or 
modify  their  claim. 

8.  Through  the  aid  of  the  Holy  Spirit 
Peter  so  answers  the  Jewish  rulers  as  to 
frustrate  their  designs.  Filled  with, 
etc.  Tlie  Holy  Spirit  comes  upon  him 
with  special  power,  and  Christ's  prom- 
ise is  fulfilled  in  him.  (Lute  12 :  n,  12.) 
Ye  rnlers,  etc.  He  gives  due  honor 
to  them  and  their  office.  Of  Israel 
if  wanting  in  several  of  the  oldest  and 


best  manuscripts.     Rulers  and  elders 
here  describe  the  Sanhedriu  as  a  whole. 

(Ver.  5;  3  :  17.) 

9.  The  reply  of  Peter  shows  tact, 
wisdom,  and  courage.  To  his  faith  he 
added  vigor.  (2  Peier  1 :  5.)  If,  in  jjoint 
of  meaning,  is  equivalent  to  since,  but 
the  sentence  is  rhetorical,  and  its  force 
does  not  come  at  once  into  view.  If  it 
be  true,  and  confessedly  it  is  true.  We 
is  emphatic.  Meyer  calls  it  the  empha- 
sis of  surprise.  Tiiis  day  adds  to  the 
force  of  tliought,  such  a  day  as  this, 
when  we  are  to  l)e  judicially  exam- 
ined— called  to  an  account,  concerning 
a  good  deed  to  an  impotent  man.  Surely 
the  law  is  for  the  wicked,  and  courts  of 
justice  are  not  to  try  deeds  of  kindness. 
(Rom.  13:3.)  Wc  are  reminded  of  our 
Lord's  reply,  "  Many  good  works  have 
I  showed  you  from  my  Father ;  for 
which  of  those  works  do  ye  stone  me  ?" 
(John  10: 32.)  By  what  m'eans — in  the 
exercise  of  whctt  power  or  in  what 
name.  (ver.  7, 10.)  He — this  one,  the 
man  upon  wliom  the  miracle  had  been 
performed  was  present,  (ver.  h.)  He  had 
been  eitlier  detained,  or  summoned,  as 
necessary  to  make  the  investigation  com- 
plete. Is — has  been — made  whole. 
The  word  in  its  widest  sense  means 
saved  from  all  evil,  spiritual  as  well  as 
natural.  The  preceding  narrative  and 
the  connection  limit  it  here  to  the  cure 
effected  on  the  lame  man.  "  Bodily 
health  is,  as  it  were,  a  type  and  mirror 
of  spiritual  health."  (Bengel.)  The 
sentence  is  completed  in  the  ne.xt  verse. 

10.  Peter  increases  in  boldness,  and 
states  the  truth  witli  great  ])ungency. 
Unto  you  all,  and  to  all  the  peo- 
ple. He  recognizes  them  as  the  repre- 
sentatives of  Israel,  and  tlirough  them 
would  s])eak  to  the  whole  people  of 
that  whioh  was  of  great  national  con- 
cern. He  introiku'.es  it  solemnly  and 
formally,  Be  it  known — a  favorite 
expression  with  Luke.  (2:U;i3:38; 
28:2«.)  By,  in,  the  name— iu  the 
power  of  him  whom  the  name  repre- 


60 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cn.  IV 


ye  ctucilied,  whom  God  raised  from  the 
(load,  ei'en  by  him  doth  this  man  stand 
11  here  liefore  yoii  whole.  "This  is  '  the  stone 
whioh  was  set  at  nought  of  you  builders, 
which  is  become  p  the  liead  of  the  corner ' 


12  (Ps.  118  ;  22.)  q  Neither  is  their  salvation 
in  any  other:  for  there  is  none  other  name 
under  lieavcn  given  among  men,  whereby 
we  must  be  saved. 


0  Isa  28  .  16 :  Luke  20  :  17. 


P  Eph.  2  :  20-22.         q  Matt.  1  :  21;  John  14  :  6 ;  1  Cor.  3  :  11 ;  1 
Tim.  2  :  5,  6 ;  Ileb.  2,  3. 


.sents.  Notice  how  fully  he  gives  the 
name  :  Jesus  —the  Saviour — Christ— 
the   Messiah — of  Nazareth,  or    the 

Nazarene,  the  desj)ised.  (»-6)  He 
atlds  descriptive  epithets :  crucified  by 
them,  but  raised  from  the  dead  by  God. 
(n :  23,  24;  3  :14, 15.)  Peter  thus  reminds 
them  of  their  crime,  and  of  the  high 
dignity  of  Jesus.  By  him— )«  this 
name,  or  rather  ;'/(  tJiin  one,  in  the  ex- 
ercise of  his  j)Ovver.  Doth  tliis  man — 
who  had  been  a  crij)ple  from  birth — ■ 
Stand  here  before  you,  a  monument 
and  witness  of  superhuman  ])()wer. 
Whole — sound  and  in  full  health,  as 
they  themselves  could  see.  Thus  he 
arraigns  his  accusers,  proclaims  the 
Messiahship  of  Jesus,  attested  l)y  a  mira- 
cle which  they  could  not  deny,  and  in 
accordance  with  prophecy  (next  verse). 
Like  Jesus,  he  makes  l)odily  healing  a 
text  for  ])roelaiming  the  gospel  salva- 
tion.     (Malt.  9:  6.) 

11.  This — he  is  the  stone,  Jesus 
Christ,  tlie  leading  sul)ject  of  the  dis- 
course. Tlie  words  used  are  from  Ps. 
118  :  22.  It  appears  like  a  proverbial 
expression.  The  stone  points  to  some- 
thing well  known,  naturally  to  the 
prophecy.  Jesus  quoted  it  and  ap- 
plied it  to  himself.    (Malt.  21  :  43  ;  Luke  20:  17.) 

Compare  note  on  latter  passage.  Set 
at  nought — despising  it  and  making 
no  account  of  it,  it  was  rejected,  cast 
aside.  Of  you  the  builders — a])i)liod 
to  the  Jewish  rulers,  who  had  been  offi- 
cially the  regularly  constituted  builders 
of  tlie  spiritual  house  of  God.  Is  be- 
come— was  made,  liy  God's  purposes, 
and  through  the  death,  resurrection, 
and  ascension  of  Chri.^t.  (2: 83-36; 5: 29-31.) 
The  head  of  the  corner — the  corner 
stone,  which  lies  at  the  foundation  of 
the  building,  where  the  two  walls  come 
together,  binding  them  firmly,  and  giv- 
ing support  and  strength.  Thus  Jesus, 
whom  the  Jewish  rulers  had  despised 
and  rejected,  God  had  made  the  corner- 
stone of  his  si)iritual  tem})le,  the  great 
foundation  of  eternal  life.     (Rom.  9 ;  33 ;  1 


Cor.  3 :  11 :  Eph.  2  :  20-22.)  Peter  tlius  shows 
that  both  Christ's  rejection  hv  them 
and  his  exaltation  were  in  fulfillment 
of  prophecy.  In  his  first  Epistle  (2:  b) 
Peter  applies  substantially  the  same 
figure  to  Christ,  "  the  chief  corner 
stone,"  quoting  from  Isa.  28  :  16. 

12.  Peter  now  droi)s  the  figure,  and 
gives  a  practical  conclusion.  Salva> 
tion — rather,  the  salvation,  which 
comes  through  the  Messiah  and  which 
the  gospel  brings.  The  definite  article 
points  to  the  salvation  as  known  to  his 
hearers,  and  ])romised  tli rough  the 
]\Iessiali,  who  had  been  mentioned  in 
tl\e  ]irecetling  verses,  (is  ;  26, 47 ;  isa.  9 : 6.) 
The  reference  cannot  be  limited  to  the 
cure  of  the  lame  man.  Both  what  pre- 
cedes and  what  follows  show  that  it  is  the 
Messianic  salvation  among  men,  which 
Jesus  himself  proclaimed  and  the 
apostles  ])reached.  (ueb.  2:3.)  Neither 
...  in  any  other  person.  Peter  had 
proclaimed  Jesus  as  the  Christ  through 
whom  the  lame  man  had  lieen  made 
whole.  Having  passed  to  the  general 
^Messianic  character  of  Jesus,  he  now 
adds  that  there  is  no  salvation  outside 
of  him.  For  introduces  the  reason — 
no  other  Saviour  had  been  provided. 
None  other  name  (ver.  10)  under 
heaven — in  all  the  earth.  Given — 
by  God,  from  whom  alone  salvation 
must  come.  Among  men — among 
whom  the  saving  benefits  are  to  be 
known  and  enjoyed.  Notice  Peter  does 
not  limit  it  to  the  Jews.  Whereby — 
in  which  name,  believing,  confessing, 
and  through  the  exerci.se  of  his  power. 
We  must  be  saved.  Peter  puts  hiin- 
.self  with  the  crucifiers  of  the  Lord,  as 
fellow-.sinners,  needing  salvation,  and 
only  saved  through  Jesus  Christ. 
Must  indicates  necessity  according 
to  the  divine  purpose  in  providing 
the  way  of  salvation.  They  must  be 
saved  through  Christ,  if  .saved  at  all. 
See  1  Peter  2  :  4-10,  where  the  same 
truths,  as  in  these  verses,  are  taught 
more  fully  :   Believers  on  the  one  hand 


Ch.  IV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


61 


13  Now  when  they  saw  the  Imldiiess  of 
Peter  and  John,  ''and  perceived  that  they 
were  unlcarnea  and  ignorant  men,  they 
marveled  ;  and  they  took  knowledge  of 
them,   that   they   had   been   with   .lesus. 

14  And  beholding  the  man  which  was  healed 


standing  with  them,  they  could  say  noth- 

15  ing  against  it.  But 'when  they  had  com- 
manded them  to  go  aside  out  of  the  coun- 
cil,  they   conferred    among    themselves, 

16  saying, '  What  shall  we  do  to  these  men  ? 
for  that  indeed  a  notable  miracle  hath 


r  Matt.  11  :  25  ;  1  Cor.  1  :  27.        »  ch.  26  :  31.      t  John  11 :  47. 


are  admitted  to  the  hitjhest  blessing 
tliroiigh  their  union  with  C'lirist;  but 
all  rejecters  of  the  gospel  are  given  over 
by  (jiod's  appointment  to  ruiu.  ( JoUn  :i : 
is--'i;  iThess.  1  :H.)  Salvatiou  begins  in 
this  life  and  is  perfected  in  the  next. 
It  is  sometimes  spoken  of  as  a  present 
possession  (JohoiO:3),  and  sometimes  as 
yet  future.  (Rom.  5:  lo.)  Peter  here,  in 
addressing  the  unregenerate,  speaks  of  a 
salvatiou  which  they  might  enjoy  now, 
and  which  consists  in  a  change  of  heart, 
j)ardon  of  sin,  and  reconciliation  with 
God.  In  his  Epistles,  in  writing  to  his 
brethren  who  had  sutl'ered  persecutions 
and  various  trials,  while  not  overlook- 
ing salvation  as  a  present  })ossessiou, 
lie  especially  views  it  as  a  crowning 
blessing  at  the  end  of  their  conflict. 

(I  Peter  1  :  S;  2  :  ■-' ;  5:4.) 

13.  The  etTect  on  the  Sanhedrin. 
They  wonder  and  are  perplexed,  (sce 
13:41.)  They  saw — they  beheld — 
implying  attention  and  consideration. 
The  boldness — the  freedom,  of 
speech.  They  did  not  have  that  hesi- 
tation in  speaking  which  indieatetl 
timidity,  but  that  courageous  freedom 
which  was  ))orn  of  trust  in  God.  It 
would  appear  that  John  also  freely 
uttered  words  of  assent  to  wliat  Peter 
liad  said.  Perceived — taking  note, 
now  and  before,  of  their  manner,  lan- 
guage, and  pronunciation.  Un- 
learned— illiterate.  The  epistles  of 
Peter  and  John  show  that  they  could 
read  and  write.  The  meaning  is  that 
they  were  unversed  in  the  learning  of 
the  Jewish  schools.  They  were  not  of 
the  educated  class.  Ignorant — pri- 
vate or  obscure  men  of  the  common 
people,  (i  Cor.  1 :  27.)  They  were  of  low 
social  po.sition.  They  marvelled — 
so  they  did  at  Je.sus.  (John  7 : 1.5.)  They 
took  knowledge — thei/  recognized 
who  they  were,  that  they  ivere  accus- 
tomed to  ))e  n'ith  Jei^us.  Some  of  the 
council  would  probably  recollect  the 
features  of  tlie  apostles.  Their  Galilean 
speech  also  might  indicate  them.  John 


also  had  been  known  to  the  high 
priest.  (Johui8:i5.)  Their  freedom, 
courage,  and  boldness  of  speech  re- 
minded them  of  their  great  teacher, 
under  whose  instruction  they  had  been. 
"  Their  astonishment  sharpened  now 
their  recollection."  (Meykr.)  What 
a  contrast  in  Peter?  At  the  trial  of 
Je.sus,  he  cowardly  denied  his  Lord 
l)efore  a  maid  ;  now  he  glories  in  Jesus 
before  the  highest  Jewish  tribunal. 

14.  While  all  engaged  in  consider- 
ing Peter  and  .loliu,  turning  their  eyes, 
they  see  (a  momentary  act)  the  man 
that  had  been  healed  standing  with 
the  a|)Ostles,  erect  like  other  men,  an 
evidence  to  tlie  miraculous  cure.  It 
would  seem  that  the  healed  man  had 
been  arrested  with  the  two  apostles, 
and  brought  with  them.  The  w'ratli  of 
tlie  rulers  may  liave  been  upon  him, 
just  as  upon  Lazarus  whom  they 
l)lanned  to  put  to  death.  (John  12 ;  10.) 
They  could  say  nothing  against 
it — to  what  Peter  and  John  had  said 
and  to  the  reality  of  the  miracle.  In- 
deed, they  jjrivately  acknowledge  the 
miracle,     (ver.  le.) 

15.  Commanded  them  to  go 
aside — so  as  not  to  hear  their  discus- 
sions. So  Gamaliel,  at  a  later  trial, 
commanded  to  jiut  forth  the  ajtostles  a 
little  while,  when  he  wislied  to  advise 
and  caution  the  Sanhedrin.  (5 :  34.) 
This  was  no  disrespect  to  the  prisoners, 
but  an  expedient  for  free  discussion 
and  making  up  a  verdict.  On  coun- 
cil, see  on  5  ;  21.  They  conferred 
among  themselves — comi»ared  o]>in- 
ions,  and  di.scusseil  the  matter.  The 
substance  of  their  deliberations  is 
given  in  the  next  two  verses.  Tlie 
court  sat  with  open  doors,  so  that  it 
could  be  known  what  was  said.  Saul 
of  Tarsus  may  have  been  present. 
Afterward  a  great  com])any  of  the 
priests,  some  of  whom  were  doubtless 
present,  were  obedient  to  the  faith. 
(6.7.) 

16.  What  shall  we  do  to  these 


62 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IV. 


been  done  hy  them  is  "mauifest  to  all 
them  that  dwell  in  Jerusalem ;  and  we 

17  cannot  deny  it.  But  that  it  spread  no 
further  among  the  people,  let  us  straitly 
threaten  them,  that  they  speak  henceforth 

18  to  no  man  in  this  name.  »And  they 
called  them,  and  commanded  them  not 


to  speak  at  all  nor  teach  in  the  name  of 
Jesus. 

19  But  Peter  and  John  answered,  and 
said  unto  them,  y  Whether  it  be  right  in 
the  sight  of  God  to  hearken  unto  you 

20  more  than  unto  God,  Judge  ye.     ^'For  we 


"  ch.  3  :  9, 10. 


ch.  5  :  40. 


J  ch.  6  :  29 ;  Dan.  3  :  18  ;  6  :  10,  11. 
Num.  22  :  38 :  1  Kings  22  :  14. 


'ch.  17  :  16,  17;  18:5; 


men,  to  restrain  them  and  stop  the 
progress  of  the  cause  of  Jesus.  The 
leaders  of  Judaism  !<re  at  a  loss  how 
to  deal  with  two  tisiiermen  about  the 
healing  of  a  poor  cripi)le  !  The  trouble 
is:  A  well-known  miracle  lias  ))een 
performed  by  these  men,  all  Jerusalem 
was  aware  of  it,  and  they  could  not 
deny  it.  Miracle,  etc. — sign  has 
been  done  by  (through)  them. 
They  concede  evidence  of  wonderful 
power  through  them.  (See  joUn  2  :  ii, 
note.)  We  cannot  deny  it — though 
they  would,  if  they  could  oidy  have 
explained   it  at  all   jdausibly    to  the 

people.      (M:.It.  28:12-15.) 

17.  But  that  it — the  report  of  the 
miracle,  and  as  a  result  the  teaching 
and  doctrines  of  which  it  was  a  sign  or 
evidence.  Tlie  rulers  feared  lest  they 
lose  their  spiritual  authority  over  the 
people,  and  they  suftier  for  their  murder 
of  Je-sus.  (5:-'s.)  atraitly  or  strict/)/ 
is  wanting  in  the  oldest  manuscripts, 
and  omitted  by  tlie  highest  critical 
authorities.  That  they  speak 
henceforth  to  no  man,  etc.  The 
prohibition  is  al)Solute  and  universal. 
They  were  never  to  speak  to  auy  one 
in  or  111)011  the  name  of  Jesus,  makiug 
him  the  subject  or  basis  of  discourse. 

18.  They  called  them,  who  were 
waiting  for  the  decision  of  the  f^anlie- 
drin,  not  knowing  whether  it  would  l>e 
imprisonment,  scourging,  or  lil)ertv. 
Now  ends  tlieir  suspense.  Com- 
manded them.  Notice  that  the 
charge  is  in  some  res|)ccts  fuller  tliau 
ill  the  ])receding  verse:  not  to  speak  at 
all,  nor  to  teach  in,  or  njmn  the  name 
of  Jesus,  They  were  not  in  their 
public  speaking  and  instructions  to 
introduce  the  name  of  Jesus,  ajipeal  to 
his  authority  or  commands. 

19.  The  answer  of  Peter  and 
John  was  manly,  heroic.  Christlike. 
Whether  it  be  right.  It  was  with 
them  a  matter  of  conscience  and  duty. 


In  the  sight  of  God,  who  seeth  not 
as  man  seeth,  and  wlio  judgeth  right- 
eously.       (1  S:im.  16  :  7;   Ji  r.  11  :  20-)        To 

hearken — to  hear,  consider,  and  obey. 
More  than — rather  than  to  God.  One 
or  the  other  must  be  disobeyed.  Judge 
ye,  for  yourselves.  We  ought  to  do  as 
we  have  been  doing,  "  even  our  enemies 
themselves  being  judges."  P^ven  the 
enlightened  heathen  recognized  the 
truthfulness  of  the  ijrincijile  underly- 
ing tlie  jiosition  taken  by  Peter  and 
John.  Parallels  have  been  cited  from 
Herodotus  and  Livy.  The  finest  is  in 
the  ajiology  of  Socrates  as  recorded  by 
Plato :  "  O  ye  Athenians,  I  embrace 
and  love  you ;  but  I  will  obey  God 
rather  than  you  ;  and  if  you  would 
dismiss  me,  and  sjiare  my  life,  on  con- 
dition that  I  should  cease  to  teach  my 
fellow  citizens,  I  would  rather  die  a 
thousand  times  tlian  aecei)t  the  pro- 
posal." In  2  Mace.  ch.  7,  is  recorded 
tile  cruel  death  of  seven  sons  for  their 
heroic  fidelity  to  Ciod's  law.  One  of 
them  expresses  the  feedings  of  the  rest, 
saying:  "  We  are  ready  to  die  rather 
than  to  transgress  tiie  laws  of  our 
fathers."  Inspiration  has  given  us  the 
!  nolde  example  of  the  tiiree  young 
j  Hebrews,  who,  threatened  with  the 
!  burning  fiery  furnance,  answered,  "  Be 
]  it  known  unto  thee,  O  king,  that  we 
will  not  serve  thy  gods,  nor  worship 
the  golden  image  which  thou  hast  set 
I  up."  (Dan.  3 :  18.)  Surcly  the  Sanhe- 
j  drin  must  have  felt  that  the  apo.stles 
placed  themselves  on  a  principle 
wiiicli  was  sustained  by  reason,  con- 
science, and  the  example  of  their 
fathers. 

20.  AVliatever  the  decision  of  the 
Saulu'drin,  Peter  and  John  must  follow 
tiieir  convietioiis.  The  reason  is  given. 
For  we  cannot,  etc. — for  it  is  morally 
impossible  for  ns  not  to  Rpeah  the  thinus 
ii'hic'i  ve  saw  find  heard,  the  deeds  and 
works  of  Jesus.    Jeremiah  (20 : 9)  felt 


Cii.  IV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


63 


cannot  V)ut  speak  the  things  which  » we 
have  seen  and  heard. 

So  when  they  had  further  threatened 
them,  they  let  ihem  go,  finding  nothing 
bow  they  might  punishithem,  ''because of 
the  people:  for  all  men  glorified  (jod  for 


22  that  which  was  done.  For  the  man  was 
above  forty  years  old, on  whom  this  mira- 
cle of  healing  was  sliowed. 

23  And  being  let  go,  "they  went  to  their 
own  company,  and  reported  all  that  the 
chief  priests  and  elders  had  said  unto 


'  1  John  1:1,3.        1>  ch.  b  :  2(i ;  Mutt.  21  :  26 ;  Luke  20  :  6,  19 ;  22  :  2.        «  ch.  12  :  12. 


the  same  constraining  power:  "There 
is  iu  my  heart  as  it  were  a  Inirning  fire 
shut  tip  ill  my  bones,  and  I  am  weary 
with  forbearing,  and  I  cannot  contain." 
In  his  second  epistle  (i :  ■«  is),  Peter 
refers  to  their  being  "eye  witnesses  of 
bis  majesty,"  and  hearing  a  voice  from 
"  the  majestic  glory."  John  also  in  his 
tirst  epistle  (i  :i)  speaks  of  that  which 
we  have  heard,  that  which  we  have 
seen  with  our  eyes,  that  which  we  be- 
held and  our  hands  have  handled  con- 
cerning the  Word  of  life."  Peter  dis-  j 
jdays  the  same  courage,  mellowed  by 
age  and   trial,  in   his   epistles,     (i  Peter  [ 

3  ;  15  ;  i  :  19  ;  5:9;  2  Peter  2  :  •i-.!2  )      John  is  the  i 

same  sou  of  thunder  which  he  luul  been, 
and  which  he  continued  to  be  to  the 
end.  (Luketf ; 54;  1  Johu2 ; 4 )  The  Con- 
duct of  the  apostles  is  consistent  with 
Peter's  exhortation  :  "  Submit  your- 
selves to  every  ordinance  of  man," 
every  human  institution  connected  with 
human  government,  "  for  the  Lord's 
sake."  (iPeter2:i:i)  With  Paul,  Peter 
regarded  civil  government  as  of  divine 
appointment.  (Rom.  is  :i  7.)  But  he  also 
recognized  duty  to  God  as  well :  "  Honor 
all  men,  love  the  brotherhood;  fear 
God;  honor  the  king."  (iPeter2:i7) 
Hence  when  government  left  its  legiti- 
mai-e  work  of  punishing  evil-doers  and 
praising  those  that  did  well  (i  Peter :? :  h), 
and  infringed  upon  the  rights  of  con- 
science, he  recognized  a  higher  law  and 
affirmed  :  "We  ought  to  ol)ey  God 
rather  than  men,"  and  patiently  suf- 
fered the  coiise<iuences.  "  For  this  is 
acceptable,  if  a  man  for  conscience  to- 
ward God  endure  grief,  su fieri ng  wrong- 
fully."     (l  Peter  2:  19.   See  1  Pfter  3  :  14-17.) 

21.  Further  threatened  them— 

having  added  l/irca/fiiin;/s  to  tliose  pro- 
po.sed  in  ver.  17,  and  doubtless  given 
with  the  command  in  ver.  IS.  Find- 
ing nothing  how — finding  no  way  to 
punish  them  without  stirring  up  "the 
people.  (See  2 147)  For  all  glorified 
God,  etc.  They  saw  the  power  of  God 
iu  the  miracle  and  they  were  praising 


God  for  it.  To  them  it  was  a  sign  of  a 
risen  Jesus,  and  of  the  good  news 
jjieached  by  the  apostles.  "  Often  the 
]jeo|)le  are  more  reasonable  than  their 
rulers."  (Bengel.) 

"i'Z.  For  introduces  the  special  rea- 
son why  the  people  were  glorifying  God  ; 
the  healing  was  performed  upon  a  man 
over  forty  years  old.  It  was  an  in- 
veterate infirmity,  Incurable  by  human 
means  and  widely  known.  (3:2)  This 
miracle,  etc. — this  sign  of  (he  heaiiiuj. 
Notice  how  the  evidential  character  of 
the  miracle  is  kej>t  in  view.  Like  the 
blind  man  iu  John  9,  the  name  of  this 
mail  is  not  given.  But  the  purpo.se 
was  not  to  immortalize  a  luiman  name, 
but  to  witness  to  and  glorify  the  name 
of  Jesus. 

23-31.  The  Release  of  the  Apos- 
tles AND  THE  United  Praise  and 
Prayer  of  the  Church,  (ps.  2:1.2 
146 :  6  )  Their  release  occasions  renewed 
prai.se  to  God  among  the  disciples 
(ver.  2:i  24),  who  perceive  the  prediction 
of  David  (Ps.  2:1,2)  fulfilled  by  the  ene- 
mies of  Christ  (ver.  25-28),  and  are  encour- 
aged to  pray  for  greater  courage  and 
greater  power  iu  working  miraculous 
signs  (ver.  29, 30) ;  which  prayer  was  at 
once  granted.     (Ver.  31.) 

23.  They  went  to  their  own 
company,  or  friends.  The  expression 
is  general,  and  is  not  necessarily  limited 
to  their  fellow  apostles,  or  to"  the  be- 
lievers Avho  resided  with  them,  nor  ex- 
tended to  the  whole  body  of  believers, 
who  were  doubtless  too  many  to  be  as- 
sembled in  any  one  place.  They  went 
to  tlieir  brethren,  either  calling  them 
together,  so  far  as  convenient,  and  re- 
ported to  them  ;  or,  more  probably,  they 
were  gathered  together  in  some  place, 
a  com])any  of  disci])les,  praying  for 
them,  as  in  12:12.  (Seeon  ver.  ;ii-)  The 
account  that  follows  most  naturally  im- 
plies that  the  report  was  made  to  an  as- 
sembly of  believers,  who  united  in 
praise  and  prayer.  The  Sanhedrin  is 
here    indicated    by  chief  priests    and 


64 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IV. 


24  them.  And  when  they  heard  that,  ^  they 
lifted  up  their  voice  to  God  with  one 
accord,  and  said,  Lord,  « thou  art  God, 
which  hath  made  heaven,  and  earth,  and 


25  the  sea,  and  all  that  in  them  is:  who  liy 
the  mouth  of  thy  servant  David  hast 
said,  f '  Why  did  the  heathen  rage,  and 

26  the  people  imagine  vain  things?     The 


<iPs.  ri-A  :5-8:  Jer.  20:13. 


•■  2  Kings  19  :  15.        '  I's.  2  : 1-G. 


elders,  (ver.  i.)  Chief  priests — in  the 
original  the  ])lural  of  high  priest;  tbe 
word  has  been  variously  applied  to  the 
heads  of  the  twenty-four  classes  of  the 
priesthood,  as  divided  hy  David  (i  chrou. 
M :  i-i'j),  or  priests  appointed  over  cer- 
tain parts  of  the  teni])le  service,  or  to 
tlie  several  high  priests  who  were  then 
living.  Recent  examinations  go  to  show 
that  neither  in  the  Old  Testament  (8ep- 
tnagiut  Version)  nor  in  Josephus  is  the 
word  chief  ])riests  ever  a]jj)lied  to  the 
heads  of  the  twenty-four  classes,  but  that 
it  is  limited  in  its  ai)plicati()n  to  those 
who  were  high  ])rie.sts,  or  had  been,  to- 
gether with  tiie  inHuential  members  of 
families  from  which  the  high  priests 
still  continued  to  l)e  selected.  (Thay- 
EK'S  Greek  Lex.  of  N.  T.) 

*24.  They  lifted  up  their  voice 
to  God.  This  could  be  said  of  them, 
if  one  led  aloud,  the  others  following  in 
their  hearts  and  giving  audible  assent. 
(i  Cor.  14 :  16  )  The  language  was  largely 
from  the  Old  Testament,  and  was  doubt- 
less so  familiar  to  them  that  many  could 
witli  ease  join  aloud.  Moreover,  the 
Spirit  may  have  especially  im])ressed 
the  minds  of  the  wliole  company  with 
these  Scri])tures  so  fitting  tiie  occasion, 
autl  so  suited  to  their  ])resent  ]nir]>ose 
in  prayer.  With  one  accord — witli 
one  mind,  witli  a  union  of  hearts. 
(i:U;2:4e.)  This  is  the  tir.st  recorded 
prayer  of  believers  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment. Some  have  su]i]iosed,  but  with- 
out sufficient  reason,  that  this  wns  a 
form  of  prayer  already  introduceil  into 
the  early  church  and  the  beginning  of  a 
lituriry.  But  there  is  no  evidence  in 
the  New  Testament  that  tliis  or  any 
otluT  form  of  prnyer  was  used  by  the 
early  chtirches.  There  is  no  intimation 
even  of  the  use  of  the  Lord's  Prayer. 
Neither  does  history  record  any  liturgy 
in  the  apostolic  church.  The  ]n-ayer  is 
given  as  an  outlmrst  of  hearts  imbued 
with  the  Holy  Spirit,  lifted  to  and  grow- 
ing out  of  this  very  occasion.  Lord — 
Ma.<iter,  Soi-ereiqn ;  not  the  usual  word 
translated  Lord,  but  a  word  from  which 


is  derived  our  English  word  despot.  It 
was  the  correlative  of  slave,  and  de- 
noted absolute  ownershij)  and  uncon- 
trolled power.  It  is  applied  twice  to 
Christ  ('i  Peter  2.1;  jude  t.)  It  is  here  ap- 
plied to  God  by  those  who  address  him 
as  servants,  (ver.  29.)  Thou  art  God, 
etc.  According  to  the  most  aiijiroved 
text,  l^hou.  that  didst  male  hear  en,  etc. 
The  words  are  found  in  Exod.  20  :  11  ; 
Ps.  146:6,  and  tliey  indicate  how  the 
minds  of  the  early  disciples  were  filled 
M"ith  Scripture.  Paul  quotes  the  same 
words  to  the  Lycaonians  (u  i5),  which 
suggest  that  it  was  one  of  the  familiar 
jiassages  often  used  fi'om  the  sacred 
writings.  The  discijdcs  adore  God  as 
the  Almighty  Creator,  who  Avould  pro- 
tect, against  whom  all  ojijiositiou  of  his 
creatures  must  be  unsuccessful.  (SeeNeh. 

»  :  6;  Jer.  32  :  17  ;  Rev.  14  ;  7.) 

25.  By  the  mouth,  etc.  The 
Greek  text  here  is  somewhat  uncertain. 
The  Revi.sed  Version  prefers.  Who  by 
the  Holy  Spirit,  through  the  mouth  oj 
our  father  David,  thy  servant,  didst 
say.  (P^-  2 : 1. 2.)  The  ((notation  is  from 
the  Se])tuagint  version.  The  second 
Psalm  j)resent.s  the  exaltation  of  Christ 
and  the  j)rogressof  liis  kingdom  against 
all  o])]iosition.  It  was  then  l)eiiig  ful- 
filled, and  its  fulfillment  is  still  in  pro- 
gress. The  Psalm  is  without  a  title, 
but  it  is  here  ascribed  to  David  and  ap- 
plied to  Christ.  Its  Jlessianic  charac- 
ter is  recognized  by  other  quotations  in 
the  NcM'  Testament,  (is :  « ;  Heb.  1  : 5;  5 : 5.) 
Servant.  See  on  3  :  18,  where  tliis 
word  is  translated  son  in  our  Common 
Version.  Thelieathen — tlie  nations, 
the  Gentiles.  Rape — used  ])riniarily 
of  the  neiijliiug  and  snortintj  of  horses; 
here  of  tumultuous,  noisy  o]»]>osition. 
The  people,  or  people.i — the  tribes, 
]wrha])S  includint;  other  nations  besides 
the  tribes  of  Israel.  Imagine  a  vain 
thing— devise  that  which  is  eni])ty  and 
worthless  and  which  will  surely  be 
frustrated. 

26.  The  quotation  from  the  second 
i  Psalm  continues.     Stood   up — ready 


Oh.  IV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


65 


kings  of  the  earth  stoofl  up,  and  the  rul- 
ers were  gathered  together  against  the 
Lord,  and  against  his  Christ'  (Ps.  2  :  1,  2, 

27  Sept.)  For  ?of  a  truth  against  ''  thy  holy 
child  Jesus,  ■  whom  thou  hast  anointed 
both  Herod  and  Pontius  Pilate,  with  the 
(ientiles,  and  the  people  of  Israel,  were 

28  gathered  together,  for  to  do  whatsoever 
thy  hand   and   thy   counsel   determined 

29  before  to  he  done.  And  now.  Lord,  be- 
hold their  threatenings:  and  grant  unto 


thy  servants,  ^  that  with  all  boldness  they 

30  may  speak  thy  word,  by  stretching  forth 
thine  hand  to  heal ;  and  that  signs  and 
wonders  maybe  done  'by  the  name  of 
thy  holy  child  Jesus. 

31  And  when  they  had  prayed,  "the  place 
was  shaken  where  they  were  assembled 
together;  and  they  were  all  filled  with 
the  Holy  Spirit,  and  they  spake  the  word 
of  God  with  boldness. 


(  Matt   20  :  3  ;  Luke  22  :  2.        ^  ch.  3  :  14  ;  Luke  1  :  35.        i  Ps.  2  :  2,  6  ;  John  10  :  36.        k  ch. 
13  :  46  ;  19  :  8,  26  .  26;  28  :  31 ;  Eph.  6  :  19.        '  ch.  3  ;  6,  16.        >"  ch.  2  :  2,  4;  16  :  26. 


for  assault.  Were  gathered  to- 
gether—with hostile  design,  for  com- 
bined resistance,  and  answers  to  Took 
coitnse/  together  in  Ps.  2  :  2,  which 
would  be  connected  with,  and  result 
from,  their  gathering  together.  His 
Christ— /(/-sff/^o/?;/'*/,  for  so  the  word 

means.      (Matt,  l  ?  I    note  ) 

27.  For  of  a  truth— /or  in  fact, 
ju.stifying  this  use  of  the  i)roj)hccy,  and 
illustrating  its  application  to  the  cir- 
cumstances. According  to  the  oldest 
manuscripts  and  versions  the  words  in 
this  city,  should  be  here  suj>plied. 
Thy  holy  child,  rather,  servant,  the 
word  being  the  same  as  that  a])]ilied  to 
David  in  ver.  25.  (seeS:  i3  oote.)  Holy, 
in  character,  and  set  apart  and  conse- 
crated to  his  holy  office  and  work. 
(jobuio:M.)  Hast  anointed,  didst 
anoint,  by  the  Holy  S])irit,  especially 
at  his  baptism,  (lu  ".-h;  i.uken  -n-i^-.  i  -.  is"; 
isa  61 : 1  )  Both  Herod  and  Pon- 
tius Pilate.  Herod  Antipas  is  meant, 
a  sou  of  Herod  the  Great,  tetrarch  of 
Galilee  and  Perea.  (see Luke 2:!:  112.) 
People.  The  |dur;d  is  used,  peophs  of 
Israel,  pi'olnibly  referring  to  tlie  tribes. 
(Ver  ib  ]  "  Tiie  present  prayer  of  the 
disciples  clearly  answers  to  the  second 
psalm,  as  a  comparison  shows;  the 
kings  answers  to  Herod,  the  rulers  to 
Pontius  Pilate,  the  heathen  to  the  Gen- 
tiles, the  peo])les  to  the  peoples  of 
Israel."     (P>enc;kl.) 

28.  For  to  do — not  their  intention, 
for  their  purpose  was  malicious  anil 
destructive.  They  were  unconsciously 
carrying  out  God's  plan  for  the  salva- 
tion of  men.  God's  sovereignty  and 
mau's  accountability  are  a.ssumed.  (Sne 
Gen.  50;  20)  Thy  hand — syml)ol  of 
power.  Counsel — purpose,  (see  on 
J; 23.)    The  disciples    regarded   them- 


selves as  inseparably  connected  with 
Christ  and  his  cause. 

29.  And  now — respecting  present 
matters.  Lord— God.  (ver.  24.)  Be- 
hold— look  upon  their  threatenings, 
that  they  be  not  accomplished.  Thy 
servants — literally,  slaves,  or  bonds- 
men, those  sustaining  permanent  ser- 
vile relations  to  another  (not  the  word 
translated  servant  in  ver.  25),  correla- 
tive of  Lord  in  ver.  24.  Lord  there  and 
servants  are  used  in  a  strong,  good 
sense,  without  any  idea  of  op2))"ession 
on  the  one  hand  or  of  degradation  on 
the  other.  (i6:i7;  2Peter  i  :i.)  The  apos- 
tles  and  others  who  preached  the  word 
are  meant.  With  all  boldness — with 
utmost  freedom,  implying  fearless  con- 
fidence, as  in  4  :  13. 

30.  By  stretching  forth  thy 
hand — exerting  thy  power  in  healing, 
thus  rendering  them  courageous.  But 
some,  with  the  Revised  Version,  trans- 
late. While  Ikon  stretchcst  forth  thy 
hand  to  heal,  confirming  their  coura- 
geous preaching  by  attendant  miracles. 
By,  through,  Iiy  means  of  the  name. 
Holy  child,  or  servant,  Jesus.     (See 

on  ver   27.)       SlgUS  and  AVOndors.      (See 

on  2: 22.)  There  was  n<'e<l  of  these  to 
prove  the  truth  of  ajHistolic  ])reaciiiiig 
and  the  resurrection  of  .lesus. 

31.  The  answer  to  their  prayer  comes 
speedily.  The  place  was  shaken 
— as  with  an  earthquake  (K\o<3.  iic  it<; 
psfis:8),  where  they  Avere  assem- 
bled, showing  that  there  was  a  gath- 
ering of  the  discij>les  (ver.  23)  in  some 
customary  place,  pei-haps  in  the  up])er 
room.  (Tn.)  Filled  Avith  the  Holy 
Spirit.  The  Holy  Sj)irit  had  come  on 
the  day  of  Pentecost.  It  is  not  a  new 
coming ;  but  this  presence  and  jmwer 
are  manifested  iu  them  in  large  meas- 


r>6 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cn.  IV. 


The  united  and  mutual  love  of  the  disciples, 
and  the  Uberality  of  Barnabas  and  others. 

•62  And  the  multitude  of  them  that  be- 
lieved o  were  of  one  heart  and  of  one 
soul:  "neither  said  any  of  Ihem  that 
aught  of  the  things  which  he  possessed 
was  his   own ;    but  they  had  all  things 

33  common.  And  with  p  great  power  gave 
the  apostles  witness  of  the  resurrection  of 


the  Lord   Jesus;   and  i  great   grace  was 

34  upon  them  all.  Neither  was  there  any 
among  them  that  lacked:  for  as  many  as 
were  possessors  of  lands  or  houses  sold 
them,   and    brought    the    prices    of   the 

35  things  that  were  sold,  'and  laid  thfm 
down  at  the  apostles'  feet :  sand  distribu- 
tion was  made  unto  every  man  according 
a.s  he  had  need. 


n  Ezek.  11  :  19;  Rom.  15  :  5,  6  ;  2  Our.  13  :  11 ;  Eph.  4  :  2-6:  Phil.  1  :  27  ;  2  :  2  ;  1  Peter  3  :  8. 
och.  2:44,  45.        P  1  Thess.  1  :  5.        q  ch.  2  :  47.        '  ch.  5  :  2.        »  ch.  2  :  45;  6  r  1. 


ure.  They  receive  spiritual  power  for 
their  work,  and  they  are  enabled  to 
s))eak  the  word  of  tJod  freely  aud  cour- 
a<<eous]y.  Not  the  apostles  alone,  but 
all  enjoy  this  Idessing. 

It  may  be  worthy  of  note  that  Des- 
poll's,  .Vaster  (ver  2i),  is  used,  aside  from  j 

Paul    (1  Tim  fi  ;  1 ;  '2  Tim.  2  :  21  ;  Tit.  2  :  !l),  only  ' 

by  Luke  {2 :  29),  Peter,  and  Jude. 
(2Peter2- 1;  Judei.)  The  cxhortatiou  of 
the  latter  is  of  interest  here  (Ju'ic  -'>) : 
"  But  ye,  beloved,  buildins;  up  your- 
selves on  your  most  holy  faith,  jiraying 
in  the  Holy  Spirit,  keep  yourselves  in 
the  love  of  God,  looking  for  the  mercy 
of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ  unto  eternal 
life."  James  lays  special  stress  on 
prayer.  (Jaities  1 : 5;  5 :  i:i-i8.)  Both  James 
and  Jude  may  iiave  been  i)resent  at 
this  time  and  learned  new  lessons  on 
unity  and  jiraycr. 

32-37.  The  United  and  Peosper- 
OTJS  Condition  oFTHECirrRCH,  and 

THE  LllJEKALITY  OF  the  AVeaLTHIER 

Brethren. 

These  verses  should  be  compared 
with  2  :  42-47.  As  after  tlie  great  Pen- 
tecostal ingatheiiiig  the  s])iritna!  and 
social  ehurcli  life  is  described,  so  liere, 
after  another  great  increase  of  di.scijiles 
and  a  signal  victory  over  the  iSanhe- 
drin,  a  siinilar  stiitc  of  thiuLTS  is  dc- 
sciibed.  The  latter  s'idws  some  advance 
on  tlie  former,  lioth  descriptions  to- 
gether )>rescnt  the  cotulition  of  the 
(•h'.irch  at  Jerusalem  up  to  tlie  arrest 
anil  martyrdom  of  Stt'phen.  Tliis  also 
[irejiares  the  way  for  the  account  of  the 
liberality  of  Barnabas  and  tlie  lying 
covetousness  of  Ananias  and  Sapphira. 

32.  The  niiiltitiide  of  thf>iii 
that  believed — not  merely  the  new 
eon  verts,  but  the  church  at  large. 
S\  ere  of  one  heart  and  of  one 
soul — in  sympathy,  affection,  fellow- 


ship, and  spiritual  interest.  The  mind 
that  was  in  Christ  was  in  them.  This 
union  of  hearts  simwcd  itself  j>racti- 
cally.  Neither  said  any  of  them, 
etc.  Not  one  was  disposed  to  speak  of 
his  possessions  as  his  own,  but  treated 
them  as  if  they  belonged  to  the  church 
at  large,  (sce  Rom  12: 9^13.)  They  had 
all  things  common.  They ^wwwsvsrci 
])roperty  and  did  not  renounce  it.  but 
used  it  in  common  for  the  good  of  the 
brethren,  especially  of  those  who  had 
need.  (ver.  :!5.)  They  were  inspired 
with  their  oneness  in  Christ  and 
witli  their  consequent  oneness  in  inter- 
ests.     (See  Udie  on  2  :  4,1.) 

33.  Witli  unity  of  love,  fervency  of 
]>rayer,  and  gcneroti.s  liberality,  their 
preaching  was  effective,  and  tlie  favor 
of  God  largely  attended  tiiem.  Mith 
great  poAver^a  result  of  tlie  Holy 
Sjiirit  (ver.  ai)  manifested  in  jniwerful 
]n-caching  and  in  attendant  miracles. 
Gave  the  apostles  witnes.s — by 
testifying  that  they  had  seen  the  risen 
Lord,  by  quoting  the  projihets,  and  by 
signs  evidencing  the  tiiithfiiliiess  of 
their  preaching.  To  the  resurrec- 
tion of  the  Lord  Jesus.  The  great 
tlieme  of  their  ])reaching.  They  did 
not  wait  for  Easter  Sunday,  but  daily 
])roclaimed  the  fact.   (2 :  2^,  :i2 ;  3 :  .!6 ;  10 :  .ra, 

40;  13::tO-.17;  17::U.:i2;  2(i:  2:!.)  Great  graCC. 

Some  regard  it  as  the  faror  of  the  jieo- 
)de  as  in  2  :  47.  It  is  more  natural  in 
this  connection  to  understand  it  as  the 
foror  of  God.  And  in  thus  jircaching 
effectually  they  would  also  enjoy  much 
favor  from  men.  (Luke 2  ,•  52.)  l^pon 
them^with  the  idea  of  resting  upon 
them  as  the  dove  rested  on  Jesus.  All 
— not  the  ajiostles  only,  but  all  the  be- 
lievers. 

34,  35.  These  two  verses  form  one 
sentence.     Neither  ...  For — iutro- 


Cu.  IV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


67 


Sfi      And  Joses,  who  by  the  apostles  was  Levite,  and  of  the  country  of  Cyprus, 

suruaiued  'Barnabas,  (which  is,    being    37  "having  land,  sold  it,  and  brought  the 
interpreted.  The  son  of  consolation,)  a  j       money,  and  laid  it  at  the  apostles'  feet. 

'  ch.  11  ;  22-2"),  30 ;  13  ;  1 ;  Gal.  2:9.        »  Matt.  19  ;  20. 


ducing  the  proof  of  grace  resting  ujion 
all.  The  favor  of  God  and  the  conse- 
quent favor  of  men  were  shown  hy  the 
practical  exhibition  of  heneticence,  so 
tiiat  (here  was  no  one  (inionf/  them  Ihut 
Inched.  There  was  not  a  poor  or  desti- 
tute person.  Lands  or  fielih,  jjrohably 
ill  the  eountry.  The  same  word  in  1  : 
IS.  Houses— perhaps  in  the  cit}'. 
!Sold  them.  This  describes  wliat  they 
were  wont  to  do.  It  implies  that  tliey 
had  jiossessions,  but  not  that  they  sold 
all  tliey  had.  Laid  them  at  the 
ai>ostles'  feet — placing  their  offering 
at  the  disposal  of  the  apostles.  "  They 
intnnated  that  the  apo.stles,  under  the 
guidance  of  divine  wisdom,  should  have 
all  tlie  control  over  their  i)roperty." 
(Bengel.)  The  amount  received  for 
jiroperty  sold  was  brought  and  placed 
at  the  feet  of  the  aj)ostles,  as  they  sat 
teaching,  or  as  teachers.  (Matt.  5:  i.)  At 
the  beginning  of  this  common  distribu- 
tion nothing  is  said  of  the  ajjostles  tak- 
ing part  in  the  work  ('2:42);  it  was 
]>robably  done  by  volunteers,  but  as  the 
disciples  increased,  and  the  work  grew, 
it  appears  that  the  apostles  found  it 
necessary  to  take  charge  of  the  matter. 
(6 :2-t.)  Distribution  ...  as  each 
had  need.  There  was  not  a  general 
and  miscellaneous  distrilmtion,  but  a 
liberal  supply  to  those  who  needed  it. 

(2:«.) 

36.  The  self-sacrifice  and  nuitual 
liberality  of  the  disciples  are  illustrated 
l>y  a  noted  exainjile,  followed  by  one  of 
an  o])i)osite  character  in  the  ne.xt  chap- 
ter. And — in  accordance  with  what 
had  been  just  stated  of  believers  in 
genei-al.  Joses — l)etter  Joseph.  By 
the  apostles  was  siirnamed — be- 
cause of  certain  ability  and  spiritual 
]>ower.  Barnabas — a  son  of  exhorta- 
tion, one  gifted  in  teaching,  admonish- 
ing,   and   consoling.        (Rom    12:  H;   1  Xhess. 

2  ■  3.)  He  was  a  distinguished  Christian 
teacher,  and  afterward  became  the  com- 
panion and  colleague  of  Paul.     (9  .  27 . 

11  :  22,  :?0  ;  12  :  23  ;  13-15  ;  1  Cor  a  :  6  ;  Gal.  2:1,9   13  ; 

Col.  4 :  10)  A  Levite — though  probably 
not  a  priest,  or  descendaut  of  Aaron. 


I  Cyprus — a   large  and   fertile  island, 

I  situated  in  the  nortlieast  corner  of  the 

>Ie<literranean  Sea.     It  was  settled  by 

I  Kittim   the  son  of  .lavan.     (Gen.io:*.) 

It  was  one  of  tiie  many  countries  into 

wliich  the  Jews  were  scattered. 

37.  Having   land.     The  tribe  of 
[  Levi  did  not  share  in  the  original  dis- 
:  triljutiou  of    the   land.      (Num.  is :  20-24; 
Josh.  i»;7.)     But  this  did   not  seem    to 
I  exclude  them  from  ownership  in  the 
[  forty-eight  cities  and  suburbs  allotted 
i  to  them.     (Josh. 21  :.i  r )     And  later,  indi- 
'  vidual   Levites   could    hold    inoperty. 
j  Jeremiah,  the  son  of  a  priest,  purchased 
a  field  as  private  property,  according  to 
1  the  forms  of  law.     ( Jer.  1 :"  1 ;  32 : 9.)     This 
I  instance    of    Barnal)as    is    mentioned, 
j  probably  l)ecause  of  his  eminent  use- 
fulness;    the    important    position    he 
occupies  in  the  book  of  Acts;  and  as 
contrasting    strikingly   with    Ananias 
and  Sapphira.     (3:1.)     It  also  tends  to 
show    that    such    acts  of  benevolence 
were  voluntary.      Some  suppose  that 
the  land  sold  was  in  Cyprus.     It  is  a 
wonderful  example  of  a  wealthy  Levite 
giving  up  his  property  to  tiie  dispo.sal 
of  j)oor  men.      How  unwilling  a  .Jew 
was  to  sell  liis  inheritance  may  be  .seen 
in   the   case  of  Naboth.     (1  Kings  21 : 1-3.) 
By  this  act  Barnabas  evinced  his  entire 
consecration  to  God,  and  that  "  he  was 
a  good  man,  and  full  of  the  Holy  Spirit 
and  of  faith."     (11 :  24.) 


Practical  Remarks. 

1.  If  trials  and  opposition  must  come,  let 
theui  find  us  in  the  path  of  duty.  (Ver.  1 ; 
1  Peter  4  :  15-19.) 

2.  Grief  because  the  gospel  is  preached  in- 
dicates a  depraved  heart.  (Ver.  2  ;  Ps.  112 : 
10.) 

3.  Preaching  the  gospel  in  face  of  oppo- 
sition evinces  sincerity,  and  generally 
reaches  the  heart.  (Ver.  3,  4 ;  Jer.  20  :  8,  9, 
11.) 

4.  "  Men  may  bind  the  preacher,  but  the 
word  cannot  be  bound."  (Ver.  4;  2  Tim. 
2:9.) 

5.  Persecution  generally  reveals  its  own 


68 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IV. 


wickedness,  and  in  the  end  advances  the  i 
truth.     (Ver.  4;  Ps.  76:  10.) 

6.  The  opposers  of  Christ  will  leave  no 
means  untried  to  injure  his  cause.  (Ver.  5, 
6 ;  Rev.  12  :  12.)  j 

7.  None  are  so  blind  as  those  who  will  not  | 
see.     Notwithstanding  the  miracle  and  the 
presence  of   the   man    healed,  the  Jewish  i 
rulers  ask  the  apostles  their  authority.  (Ver.  ' 
7;  2  Thess.  3:2.) 

8.  Men  who  are  in  the  right  can  afford  to 
be  respectful  and  give  to  every  man  his  due. 
(Ver.  8;  1  Peter  2  ;  1:^-16.)  | 

9.  The  once  vacillating  and  denying  Simon 
is    now    the    l)old    and    courageous    Peter. 
Nothing  but  tlie  presence  of  the  Spirit,  aud  j 
a  consciousness  of  a  living  Christ  could  have  I 
accomplished  this.     (Ver.  10  ) 

10.  There  are   many  builders,  yet   none  | 
build  aright  but  tbose  who  build  on  Jesus 
Christ.     (Ver.  11  ;  ch.  10  :  42,  43.) 

11.  Salvation  in  none  other!  Unbelievers 
need  to  tremble  aud  believers  rejoice.  Surely 
Jesus  should  be  proclaimed  to  all  nations. 
(Ver.  12;  10:  42,43.) 

12.  Successful  preaching  depends  more 
upon  a  deep  experience  and  honest  convic- 
tions of  the  truth,  than  upon  natural  enaow- 
ments,  learning,  aud  arts  of  eloquence.  (Ver. 
13;  1  Cor.  1  :  2:5,  24.) 

13.  Opposers  to  Christ  are  often  silenced, 
but  not  always  convinced.  (Ver.  14  ;  19  : 
3G-41.) 

14.  Let  us  be  so  acquainted  with  Jesus 
that  his  Spirit  shall  be  manifested  in  our 
whole  deportment.     (Ver.  14  ;  1  Cor.  14  :  2.5.) 

l.i.  Darkness  cannot  stand  the  light,  nor 
falsehood  before  the  truth.  (Ver.  15 ;  John 
3  :  20,  21.) 

IG.  Wicked  men  continue  to  oppose  the 
gospel,  even  when  aware  that  the  evidences 
arc  .^ll  against  them.     (Ver.  16  ;  13  :  8.) 

17.  What  they  cannot  deny  or  destroy, 
they  endeavor  to  hinder.    (Ver.  17,  13;  18: 

18  Every  one  has  the  right  of  private 
judgment  aud  the  liberty  of  conscience, 
subject  only  to  God.  (Ver.  19,  20;  Rom 
14  :  3.) 

19.  We  are  under  no  obligation  to  obey 
human  laws  which  require  us  to  disobty 
God  (Ver.  19,  20  ;  5  :  29  ;  Dan.  3  :  18 ;  Matt. 
10  :  37,  38.) 


20.  The  miracles  of  the  New  Testament 
were  strongly  attested,  and  acknowledged  by 
all  classes.     (Ver.  21,  22 ;  John  11  :  47-52.) 

21.  Christians  naturally  seek  their  own 
brethren,  and  among  them  find  comfort  and 
encouragement  in  trials.  (Ver.  23 ;  Phil.  1  : 
7  ;  1  Thess.  3  :  6,  7.) 

22.  Trials  teach  the  Clirisiian  both  to 
praise  and  pray.     (Ver.  24 ;  .5  :  41  ;  16  :  25.) 

23.  We  should  pli-ad  the  word  and  prom- 
ises of  God  in  prayer.  (Ver.  25  ;  Dan.  9  : 
2,3.) 

24.  He  that  opposes  Christ  opposes  God. 
(Ver.  26 ;  I.uke  10  :  16  ;  Heb.  1  :  3.) 

25.  Christianity  has  been  opposed  by  the 
wicked  of  all  ages,  and  that  it  still  survives 
is  an  evidence  of  its  divine  origin.  (Ver.  27  ; 
Ps.  2  :  8,  9.) 

26.  For  the  wisest  and  best  of  reasons 
God  suffers  the  wicked  to  oppose  aud  obstruct 
his  cause,  which  he  overrules  for  the  highest 
good  of  his  people.  (Ver.  28 ;  Rom.  8 : 
28.) 

27.  God's  sovereignty  and  man's  freedom 
and  responsibility  are  great  truths  taught  in 
life  and  by  Scripture.  (Ver.  28 ;  Dan.  4  :  34, 
35;Prov.  9:  12.) 

28.  Preachers  of  the  gospel  need  wisdom, 
faithfulness,  and  boldness  in  proclaiming 
the  truth.     (Ver.  29  ;  Eph.  6  :  19.) 

29.  We  should  be  more  anxious  for  the 
presence  and  power  of  Christ  with  his  word, 
than  for  our  own  personal  safety.  (Ver.  30 ; 
20  :  22-24.) 

30.  The  path  of  duty  is  ultimately  the 
path  of  safety.  God  will  take  care  of  those 
who  commit  themselves  to  him.    {\er.  31 ; 

1  Ps.  46  :  1.) 

I     31.  The  true  unity  of  the  church  is  in  love 

!  and  in  the  truth.    (Ver.  32;  John  17  :  17,  20, 

21.) 
j      32.  Great  blessings  rest  upon  those  who 

are   united    in   Christ's   service   and    work. 

(Ver.  33 ;  Matt.  18  :  20.) 
1      33.  Love   to   Christ    and   to   the  brethren 

will  be  manifested,  not   iti   words  only,  but 

also  in  deeds.     (Ver.  34  ;  Gal.  6  :  10  ;  1   John 

3  :  18.) 
34.  Every  Christian,  like  Barnabas,  should 

be  a  son   of  consolation   to   the  inquiring 

sinner,   to  the   poor,  aud  to  the  sorrowing 
:  saint.    (Ver.  35-37  ;  Isa.  40  :  1  ;  2  Cor.  1  :  4.) 


Cii.  v.] 


THE  ACTS. 


69 


The  sin  of  Ananias  and  Sajiphira.    Great  in- 
crease of  the  church. 

a      But  a  ciTtaiii   man    named    Ananias, 
with  Sapphiia  his  wife,  sold  a  possession, 


2  and  'kept  back  part  of  the  price,  his  wife 
also  being  privy  to  it,  J  and  brought  a 
certain  part,  and  laid   it  at  the  apostles' 

o  feet.  I  But  Peter  said,  Ananias,  why  hath 
"  Satan  filled  thine  heart  ">  to  lie  to  the 


1  Tim.  6  :  10.      J  Matt.  «  :  2,  3.       »  Num.  30 
John  8  :  44. 


2 ;  Di'ut.  23  :  21  j  Eccl.  5:4.       »  Luke  22  ;  3  : 
b  vor.  y. 


Ch.  5 :  1-16.  The  Covetousnkss 

AND    FaI.SKHOOD    OF   AXANIAS    AND 

S.vpi'iiiuA.  God'.s  .Judgment  upon 
Tiiic.M.  Great  Ixckease  of  the 
CiiiiU'll.  Tlie  time  of  these  occur- 
rciie>'s  was  most  prolciWy  A.  D.  .'52. 
'I'lu'  prosperous  eoiiditiou  of  the  church 
<lfscribc(l  in  4  :  'V2-35  most  likely  cou- 
tiiuic.I  several  mouths,  jjcrhaps  a  year 
or  two. 

1.  But  introduces  a  contrast  to  the 
dosiuif  incident  of  tiie  preceding  chap- 
ter. The  division  of  tlie  chapters  are 
here  infelicitous,  and  many  readers 
theretiy  fail  to  discover  the  connection. 
The  lirst  recorded  shadow  falls  uj)on 
tiie  early  church-life.  What  at  first  was 
tiie  voluntary  impulse  of  glowing  love 
to  Christ  and  tiie  brethren,  is  made  an 
occasion  of  hypocritical  imitation. 
Ananias — meaning  Jehovah  is  gra- 
ciuus.  >\'ith  indicates  tliat  tlieir  action 
was  preconcerted  as  expressed  in  the 
next  verse.  Sappliira — meaning,  ac- 
cording to  the  Aramaean,  beautiful,  or 
according  to  Greek,  Sapphire.  "  Their 
names  were  favorable  and  beautiful ; 
their  principles  bad."  (Bengel.)  A 
possession — defined  as  a  laitd  or 
/ie/d  in  ver.  3.  It  is  not  .stated 
wliether  this  was  all  of  his  property  or 
only  a  part. 

2.  Kept  back,  etc. — purloined,  em- 
bezzled from  the  price.  So  used  in 
Titus  2  :  10,  tl»e  only  instance  in  the 
New  Testament,  outside  of  this  passage, 
where  the  word  is  found.  In  the  Sep- 
tuagint  the  word  is  used  in  the  case  of 
Achan.  (jos1i.7:1.)  It  was  not  a  mere 
keeping  back,  but  it  was  a  keeping 
back  with  the  intent  to  conceal,  and  to 
deliberately  act  out  a  lie.  His  wife 
also  being  privy  to  it — beinrf  aware 
of  it,  thus  consenting  and  in  collusion 
with  him.  The  sin  was  deliberate  and 
planned  ;  and  was  thus  the  more  aggra- 
vated. Brought  a  certain  part — 
pretending  that  it  was  tlie  wliole. 
Bengel  thinks  that  he  brought  the 
larger  part ;  but  J,  A.  Alexander  lays 


stress  on  a  more  exact  rendering,  some 
■part,  and  suggests  that  lie  reserved 
tiie  larger  part  for  himself,  wliicli  i)er- 
haps  is  the  more  probable.  Tlie  char- 
acter of  the  moral  act  was  tlie  same  in 
either  case.  It  is  very  probal)le  that 
Ananias  intended  to  give  tiie  whole 
when  he  sold  tlie  land,  l)ut  that  when 
he  saw  the  money  tlie  love  of  it  led 
him  to  reserve  a  portion  for  his  own 
use.  (1  Tim.  6: 10.)  lie  wisiied,  Iiowevcr, 
to  appear  to  tlie  apostles  and  to  the 
whole  church,  as  disinterested  and  .self- 
denying  as  Barnabas  and  others.  In 
him  avarice,  hypocrisy,  and  lying 
unite.  At  the  apostles'  feet.  It 
would  seem  tliat  this  was  done  at  a 
religious  service  (ver.  a.  ii)  and  as  a  reli- 
gious offering.  This  was  the  notoriety 
Ananias  desired.  It  was  not  only 
hyjmcrisy  before  men,  l)ut  a  lie  to  the 
Holy  Spirit.  (Vei. :).)  It  was  a  sin 
which,  if  permitted,  would  result  in 
spiritual  disaster  to  the  church,  and 
was  especially  heinous  to  God.  The 
punishment  must  be  immediate  and 
effectual.  (See  the  case  of  Achan, 
Josh.  (3  :  17-19  ;  7  :  1,  1.5.) 

3.  Peter  speaks  in  behalf  of  the 
ajiostles  at  whose  feet  the  gift  had  lieen 
placed.  (Ver.  ■>.)  His  inspiration  is  in- 
tlicated  in  his  address,  and  his  power 
of  discerning  of  .spirits,  (i  Cor.  12 :  lo;  1 
johu4:i.)  Satan  means  adversary, 
and  is  used  as  a  proper  name  of  the 
prince  of  fallen  angels.  (,iob  1 : 7;  Rev. 
12:!),  in.)     He  is  also  the  great  temjiter 

of     men.         (Mink  h  :  :«  ;  2  Cor.  11  : 2.)        The 

form  of  tlie  question,  Why,  implies 
freedom  of  action,  and  tliat  Ananias 
ought  to  have  resisted  the  temptation. 
"  Wliy  did  you  permit  Satan,"  etc. 
(See  James  4: 7.)  Filled  thine  heart — 
so  as  to  take  full  possession  of  it.  Why 
did  Satan  po.sxess  thy  lieart  ?  "  Satanic 
fullness  of  heart  is  the  highest  grade  of 
wickedness."  (Bkngei..)  To  lie  to 
the  Holy  Spirit.  The  word  fie  here 
means  to  play  false,  to  deceire  by  acting 
out  or  uttering  a  falsehood.    Ananias 


70 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


Holy  Spirit,  and  to  keep  back  pari  of  the 

4  price  of  the  laud?    Whiles  it  remained, 

was  it  not  thine  own?    And  after  it  was 

sold,  was  it  not  in  thine  own  power?  Why 


hast  thou  conceived  this  thing  in  thine 

heart?    «Thou  hast  not  lied  unto  meu, 

5  '*  but  unto  God.    And  Ananias  hearing 


«  Exod.  16  :  8 ;  see  refs.  Luke  10  :  16.        d  See  ver.  3. 


acted  a  lie,  thou<?]i  it  docs  not  certainly 
appear  that  he  littered  one.     He  is  said  i 
to  have  lii-<l  to  the  Holy  Si>irit,  hecause 
the  a|)osties  were  inspired  hy,  and  pos-  i 
sessed  witli,  the  gifts  and  jiowers  of  tlie 
Spirit;    l)ecause   tlie   ehuieli    was    tlie  ' 
tenii)le  of   God,  tilled  witii   the   Holy  [ 
Spirit ;  and  l)ecaiise  lie  professed  to  ha 
moved  hy  the  Spirit  to  do  an  act  of 
self-sacrifice,  when   he  only  wished  tfl 
"  make    a    fair    show    in    tlie    fiesli." 
The  Spirit  may  have  moved  him  to  a 
course   of    lieneticence   in    response   to 
whicli  lie  sold  and  devoted  tlie  i)roj)erty, 
and  then  i)roved  false  liy  seei-etly  witli- 
holding  a  part,  and  liypocritieally  pre-  | 
tending  to  give  tiie  whole.     To   keep  ' 
back — to  purloin,  the  same  as  in  ver. 
2.    "  Possession  "  (ver.  i)  is  here  specified 
as  land,  a  Jicid  or   piece  of  grouml, 
prohalily  in  the  coniitry.     ( i :  :'«■) 

4.  Hhile  it  reinaiiied,  etc.,  when 
it  iriiKiiucd  did  it  not  remain  t/iinef 
The  form  of  tlie  question  is  one  whicii 
would  l)e  followed  hy  an  affirmative 
answer.  >*  as  it  not  in  tliy  own 
power — at  tiiy  discretion  to  tin  with 
the  money  as  it  pleaseil  tiiee  ?  Ananias 
acted  freely  aiul  was  not  under  obliga- 
tion to  do  it.  God  lia<l  not  commanded 
it,  nor  had  the  apostles  (hMiiandcd  it. 
It  is  evident  that  tlie  community  of 
goods  was  not  compulsory  ;  neither  was 
it  universal  among  tiie  disciples,  nor 
ahsolnti'.  The  natural  inference  from 
tile  lariiruage  also  is,  tiiat  lie  had  not 
devoted  the  land  to  tiod  liefore  he  sold 
it,  nor  the  whole  price  of  it  till  after  he 
had  received  it.  Why  hast  thou — 
how  is  if  thiit  thou  didsl  jmt  this  thintj 
in  tinj  hnirt.  Anania.s  did  it  delii)er- 
ntely.  lie  was  not  responsil)le  for  tlie 
suggestion  of  Satan  (M.itt. 4::i,  6. 9),  but 
for  taking  hold  of  the  suggestion,  har- 
boring it  in  his  heart  and  acting  upon 
it.  Thou  hast  not  lied,  etc.  Peter 
does  not  deny  that  Anania.s  had  lied  to 
men,  but  he  emphasizes  the  sin  a.s 
against  God  (.^eePs.  si  :  4.)  His  lying 
to  God  was  so  heinous  that  his  lying  to 
Peter  and  the  apostles  was  hardly  to  be 


tliought  of,  or  mentioned,  at  the  same 
time.  Notice  that  the  Holij  Spirit  and 
irod  are  used  iiiterchangably,  a  .strong 
proof  of  tlie  divinity  of  "tlie  Holy 
Spirit.  It  is  also  imi)iied  that  Peter's 
knowledge  of  Ananias'  heart  and  the 
nature  of  his  sin  was  not  from  any  in- 
formation obtained  from  others,"  but 
tliroiigh  the  iiisj)iration  of  the  Sjiirit. 
"  These  modern  sins  of  our  }dansil)le 
Giiristian  society, — protits  made,  for- 
tunes realized,  reputation  inflated,  by 
means  that  will  not  bear  scrutiny,— all 
having  tlieir  cankered  root  in  tlie  desire 
to  seem  rather  than  to  he,  to  seem  right- 
eous in  the  world's  eye, — is  it  not  well 
for  us  to  see  them  in  the  burning  light 
of  an  apostle's  indignation  ?"  (J.  P. 
NoHKi.s,  D.  D.) 

5.  Ananias  hearing  .  .  .  fell 
down  and  gave  np  the  ghost — liter- 
ally, breathed  out  his  soul  or  life.  This 
was  evidently  a  direct  judgment  from 
God.  There  is  nothing  to  indicate  that 
Ananias  died  from  the  sudden  shock 
jiroduced  by  Peter's  rebuke.  Pxith 
Simon  Magus  (8 :  20-24)  and  Elymas  tlie 
.sorcerer  (i.t:9-ii)  w'ere  more  fearfully 
rebuked  without  physical  injury  ;  for 
no  one  would  say  the  rebuke  of  Paul 
blinded  Elymas.  Peter  pronounced  no 
.sentence  upon  Ananias,  and  there  is  no 
evidence  tlutt  he  ex})ected  his  deatli. 
He  foret(dd  the  death  of  Sai>phira,  but 
he  did  tliis  by  inspiration,  after  he  saw 
what  the  purpose  of  God  was  in  pun- 
ishing the  sin.  Yet  it  is  entirely  con- 
sistent with  superhuman  power,  that 
(>od  acted  through  the  senses  and  the 
mind.  It  was  ujion  heorituj  liis  terrible 
sill  tiiat  Ananias  fell  down  and  died. 
The  punishment  was  deserved.  Tlie 
wages  of  sin  is  death,  temporal  and 
eternal.  Lying  to  the  Holy  Spirit  is 
the  most  aggravated  of  all  lying.  (Sie 
M:iit.  12  :.-.i,s2.)  And  this  sin  was  com- 
])licated  with  avarice,  pride,  .selfishness, 
and  hypocrisy.  The  punishment  too 
was  necessary,  at  the  beginning  of  the 
Christian  Dispensation,  to  deter  others 
from   repeating    the    offence.      Severe 


Ch.  v.] 


THE  ACTS. 


71 


these  words  e  fell  down,  and  gave  uj)  tlio 

ghost.    And  great  fear  came  on  all  them 

6  that  beard  these  things.    And  the  young 


men  aro.se, 'wound  liini  up,  and  carried 
hii4i.  out,  and  buried  him. 
7      And  it  was  about  the  space  of  three 

t  John  lU  :  40. 


pimishment  upon  first  transgressors  acts 
as  a  solemn  and  mi'reiful  warning  to 
others.  So  it  was  under  tlu;  Old  Dis- 
pensation. Thus  God  signally  punished 
Cain  (oeu.  * ;  11-15),  the  profaner  of  the 
Sabbath  (Num.  15  :.V2-:i6),  Korah  and  his 
company    (Num.  le  :  :ii-:t5),    Nadab    and 

Abihtt  (Lev.  10  :  1,  z),    and    Uzzah  (2  Sam.  6  : 

6. 7).  The  same  princii)le  holds  true  in 
human  government.  At  one  time  many 
hundreds  were  lost  yearly  by  duels  in 
France.  Richelieu  revived  an  old  law 
and  gave  notice  that  the  2>ractice  -would 
be  punished  with  death.  Two  noljle- 
men  fought;  he  haiige<l  both;  and  a 
stop  was  put  to  duelling  while  he  lived. 
Thus  by  the  death  of  two  men  he  saved 
many  thousands  to  France.  Great 
fear — terror  and  awe  at  the  majesty  of 
God,  and  a  terrible  sense  of  the  danger 
of  offending  him.  Sudden  death  in 
connection  with  crime  is  esjiecially 
fitted  to  affect  the  mind.  How  much 
more  so  when  death  comes  manifestly 
as  a  divine  judgment.  This  was  espe- 
cially true  of  Ananias'  death,  as  it 
was  sudden,  and  the  first  infliction 
from  God  in  the  church. 

6.  The  young  men — literally,  the 
younger,  equivalent  to  attendants,  ser- 
vants. See  Luke  22  :  20,  where  younger 
is  used  in  opposition  to  greater,  "  he 
that  is  greater  among  yon,  let  him 
become  as  the  younger."  The  younger 
are  regarded  as  inferior  to  the  older. 
The  latter  are  rather  to  be  waited  on, 
the  former  should  rather  serve.  There 
is  no  evidence  that  the  word  here  is 
used  to  designate  an  official  title  of 
church  officers.  The  younger  men  are 
conceived  of,  as  the  ones  who  did  vari- 
ous needful  things  in  connection  with 
numerous  meetings.  "  It  devolved  on 
them  naturally  to  perform  this  service, 
both  on  account  of  their  greater  activ- 
ity and  out  of  respect  to  their  superiors 
in  age."  (Hackett.)  And  even  more, 
this  was  regarded  as  their  appropriate 
work.  They  were  ready  as  helpers  and 
for  service.  See  further  on  ver.  10. 
Wound  him  up,  wrapt  him  up  in 
grave  clothes,  or  more  probably,   on 


account  of  the  haste  with  which  the 
burial  was  performed,  in  bis  own  gar- 
ments. "  It  was  customary  among  the 
Jews  to  bury  the  Ixidy  in  the  same  gar- 
ment used  in  life,  or  in  one  n  sem))iing 
it."  (AiiUOTT.)  The  Jews  used  no 
eofiins.  Carried  him  out,  not 
merely  from  the  house,  but  out  of  tlie 

city.        (Luke  7  :  12;  John  U  :  31-JK.)         Kings, 

proi)hets,  and  distinguished  persons 
alone  were  buried  within  towns. 
Buried  him.  It  was  customaiy 
among  the  Jews  to  bury  soon  after 
death,  generally  the  same  day.  This 
was  necessary  because  in  ralestine 
decomposition  takes  place  very  rai)idly 
after  death.  The  extraordinary  manner 
of  Ananias'  death  doubtless  hastened 
the  burial.  The  Jews  used  vaults, 
graves  dug  in  the  earth,  lateral  excava- 
tions in  the  hillside,  or  caverns.  At 
the  present  day  at  Jeru.salem  burial  is 
not  generally  deferred  more  than  three 
or  four  hours.  The  funeral  processions 
move  very  rapidly.  The  three  hours 
mentioned  in  the  next  verse  was  suffi- 
ciently long  for  the  young  men  to  attend 
to  the  burial.  "  I  stood  on  the  Mount 
of  Olives  and  watched  a  funeral  i)ro- 
cession.  The  procession  was  entirely 
of  men,  mostly  under  thirty-five  years, 
and  moved  at  an  astonishing,  almost 
a  breathless  speed.  The  whole  time 
occupied,  from  the  Jews'  quarter  in 
Jerusalem  to  the  burying-grouud  and 
back,  including  the  sepulchre,  could 
not  have  been  much  more  than  three- 
quarters  of  an  hour."  (Rev.  T.  A.  T. 
Hanna.) 

7.  About  the  space  of  three 
hours  after  .  .  .  came.  Itisnio.«t 
natural  from  this  language,  to  supjiose 
that  the  exercises  of  the  Christian 
assembly  had  continued  during  this 
wliole  interval.  Many,  however,  tliiuk 
that  Ananias  came  at  one  hour  of 
prayer,  and  Sapphira  at  the  next, 
which  would  occur  three  hours  later. 
His  Avife  not  knoAviiig  what  Avas 
done— what  had  occurred  in  regard  to 
her  husband.  It  is  vain  to  conjecture 
how  she  bad  remained  ignorant.      It 


72 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


hours  after,  when  his  wife,  not  knowing 

8  what  was  done,  came  in.  And  Peter  an- 
swered unto  her.  Tell  me  wht'thcr  ye  sold 
the  land  for  so  much?   And  she  said, Yea, 

9  for  so  much.  Then  I'eter  said  unio  her, 
How  is  it  that  f  ye  have  agrcLiI  together 
^  to  tempt  the  Spirit  of  the  Lord  ?  IJeliold, 
the  feet  of  them  which   have  buried  thy 


husband  a/r  at  the  door,  and  shall  carry 
10  thee  out.  'Then  fell  she  down  straight- 
way at  his  feet,  and  yielded  up  the  ghost. 
And  the  young  men  came  in  aud  found 
her  dead,  and,  carrying  her  forth,  buried 
U  /ifi-  by  her  husband.  ^And  great  fear 
came  upon  all  the  church,  and  upon  as 
many  as  heard  these  things. 


K  Prov.  11  :  21.        *>  Exod.  17  :  2 ;  Matt.  4:7.        »  ver.  5.        k  ch.  2  :  43 ;  19  :  17. 


was  of  the  Lord  that  she  was  uot 
told. 

8.  AnsAvered — ^perhaps  to  her  sahi- 
tatiou,  or  more  prol)abIy  to  her  thoiiglits 
or  looks.  (See4:ia.)  For  so  much — 
prol)al)ly  naming  the  sum,  aud  perhaps 
P'ointiiig  to  tlie  money.  8he  is  given 
an  opportunity  to  retraee  and  sj^eak 
the  tnitli  witfi  penitence.  Yea,  for 
so  luuch.  8ite  neglects  her  opportu- 
nity for  mercy  ;  liardeiis  her  iieart,  aud 
not  only  acts  out,  hut  tells  a  lie. 

y.  liow  is  it—  \V/i)/  is  it  f  Agreed 
together — showing    tiiat    tiiey     had  I 
formed  tlieir  plans  (leliherately.    Hence  | 
tlieir  sin  was  tlie  greater.     It  was  not 
connnitted  hastily  nor  ignorantly,  Imt 
l)resumi)tuously.     To  tempt—////  the 
Spirit  wlio  was  in  the  apostles,  as  if  he 
might  not  detect  or  punish  tlie  fniud.  I 
"  The  sin  itself  is  liere  deserilied  ah  that 
of  tempting  God,  tliat  is,  trying  his  pa-  ! 
tience,    or    putting    to    the    test,   and  ; 
thereby    imi)iously    questioning,    not  \ 
merely  his  omniscience,  but  liis  veracity  ; 
aud  Ills  power  to  ])unish.     The  term  is  : 
repeatedly   applied   to   God    (ueut.  6:i6; 

M:iit.  4  ;  7  ;  Luke  4  :  12  ;  Heb.  3  :  8,  9)  and  Once  to 

Christ  (1  Cor.  10 :  9) ;  but  here  to  the  Spirit 
of  the  Lord,  that  is,  of  God,  or  accord- 
ing to  the  prevalent  New  Testament 
usage,  of  Christ  himself.  Paul  says, 
'  (Jod  hath  sent  forth  the  Sj>irit  of  his 
Son.'  (Oui.  4:0.)  See  also  John  14  :  2i3 ; 
1.)  :  :2(i,  where  tlie  Spirit  is  said  to  he 
sent,  not  only  in  the  Son's  name  liy  tlie 
Father,  but  from  the  Father  by  the  Son 
himself.  .  .  .  Ananias  and  Sai)phira 
had  eonsi>ired  to  tempt  tlie  omniscient 
Sj)irit  by  agreeing  to  practice  a  decej)- 
tion  on  the  men  in  wliom  he  manifestly 
dwelt  in  an  extraordinary  manner,  and 
tlirough  whom  he  now  spoke  and  acted 
as  the  ruler  and  guardian  of  his  infant 
church."  (Alexaxdek.)  Behold 
usually  introduces  something  unex- 
pected or  surprising,  here  calls  atten- 
tion to  the  approaching  footsteps.    The 


feet  of  them  ....  at  the  door. 

Who  had  returned  from  burying  her 
husband,  aud  were  about  entering  the 
place  of  meeting.  IWt  is  aj)2jlied  to 
persons  or  messengers  going   on   foot. 

(Isa.  52  :  7;   Nahuiu  t  :  15 ;  Kom.  10:  15.)  Shall 

carry  thee  out.  Peter  does  not  pro- 
nounce sentence  as  a  jmlge,  but  he  fore- 
tells as  an  inspired  apostle,     (see  i  Kings 

14:  5,  fi.) 

10.  straightway.  Her  death  was 
instantaneous,  i in  mediately  upon  Pe- 
ter's declaration.  At  his  feet.  The 
money  had  been  laid  there  (ver.  2),  and 
now  she  dies  there.  Yielded  up,  etc. 
— expired,  the  same  word  as  in  ver.  5. 
Tlie  young  meu — a  ditferent  word 
from  that  in  ver.  6,  meaning  yout/ix, 
and  in  colloquial  language  may  be  used 
of  attendcDits  or  serrant.'i,  very  much 
like  our  colloquial  "boys."  (See  on  ver. «.) 
Found  her  dead.  God  arranged 
tbat  the  young  men  should  return  at 
the  right  moment.  Buried  her  by 
her  husband.  In  life  in  sin  united, 
in  death  not  divided.  Botli  may  have 
been  laid  in  a  family  tomb,  which  Ana- 
nias, its  a  man  of  projierty,  may  have 
owned. 

11.  Great  fear — great  religious  awe 
and  dread  of  God's  displea.sure  and 
judgment.  The  same  as  in  ver.  o,  and 
extending  not  only  to  the  whole  church, 
or  cotujreyntioa  of  believers,  but  also  to 
those  outside,  who  heard  tliese  things. 
This  was  doubtless  one  of  the  things 
whicli  God  intended  to  accomplish  by 
the  death  of  Ananias  and  Sapphira. 
Tile  Cireek  word  ccrleaia,  which  is  trans- 
lated church,  means  literallj'  the  called 
out,  an  assembly,  co)igref/atio)i.  In  the 
New  Testament  it  is  used  twice  for  a 
lawful  assembly  for  business.  (Acts 
19 : :!».)  It  is  twice  a])) died  to  a  tumul- 
tuous assembly.  (Actsi9:S2,«.)  It  oc- 
curs twice  in  the  Jewish  sense  of  a  con- 
gregation convened  for  sacred  purposes. 
(7 :  38;  Heb.  2 :  12.)     In  all  othcr  cascs  it  if 


Cir.  v.] 


TTIE  ACTR. 


12      And  '  t>y  tlio  hands  of  the  apostles  were 
tuauy  signs  and  woudera  wrought  among 


t  lie  peopli'.     "1  And  they  were  all  with  one 
accord  in  .Solomon's  porch.    And  »  ol'  the 


>ch.  14  :  3;  Mark  10  :  17,  18;  Hum.  15  :  lit;  2  Cor.  12  :  12;  Hob.  2  :  4. 
n  John  12  :42;  19  :  38. 


ch.  2  :  42,  46;  3  :  11. 


api)lied,  First,  to  the  local  cliurch,  a 
congregation  of  belifvers,  organizetl  for 
M'orship,  ohsin-ving  the  ordinances  and 
ni:unt;uning   discipline   among    tliem- 

SelveS.      (n  :  -n  -,  l  Cor.  +  :  17  ;  6:  1  ;  U  :  18  ;  2  Cor. 

8:  ID.)  Second,  The  collective  body  of 
discipleship,  wherever  found.     (20:2s; 

G:il.  1  :  l.i ;  Kph.  1  :  22 ;  Col.  1  :  18,  21 ;  1   Tim.  3  :  15.) 

In  Heh.  12  :  23,  church  appears  to  be 
applied  to  the  whole  body  of  believers 
registered  in  heaven.  Tiie  word  is 
never  applied  in  tlie  New  Testament  to 
a  nation,  a  family,  the  eldershij),  a 
council,  hierarchy,  or  to  a  hou.se  of 
worship.  (See  author's  Xofcs  on  Mat- 
thew, 16  :  18.     But  see  also  on  9  :  81.) 

In  regard  to  tlie  suddenness  of  tlie 
punishment  of  Ananias  and  Sappliira, 
Dr.  J.  A.  Alexander  well  remarks, 
"  that  no  man  thinks  it  needful  tlius  to 
'  vindicate  the  ways  of  God  to  man,'  in 
reference  to  the  multitude  of  cases,  in 
wliich  unconverted  siimers  are  continu- 
ally swejit  into  eternity  witiiout  imme- 
diate warning  and  without  repent- 
ance." Rev.  Lymau  Abbott  remarks 
that  "  the  punisliment  of  Ananias  and 
Sa]>i>hira  contrasts,  but  does  not  con- 
flict, witli  Luke  9  :  53-^6 ;  for  there  the 
di.scijtles  ])roi)osed  to  destroy  a  village 
which,  ignorant  of  Chri.st's  true  charac- 
ter, refused  hiiu  hospitality  ])ecause  he 
was  a  Jew ;  here  Gotl  struck  dead  pro- 
fessed disciples  who  did  tlieir  worlts  to 
be  seen  of  men.  He  has  infinite  pa- 
tience with  ignorance  and  prejudice, 
l)ut  not  with  deliberate  hypocrisy  and 
false  jn-etence." 

In  comparing  this  incident  with  Pe- 
ter's epistles  we  note  that  he  speaks  of 
])utting  away  all  hypocrisies  (i  Peter2  :  i), 
and  exhorts  the  younger  to  be  subject 
to  the  elder,  (i  I'eters :  5.)  He  ap])ears 
as  the  .same  rel)uker  of  sin,  and  ])ro])liet. 
He  speaks  of  Judgment  beginning  at  tlie 
house  of  God  (i  Peteri:  n) ;  of  those 
"  having  a  heart  exercised  unto  covet- 
ousness;  children  of  cursing;  forsaking 
the  right  way,  they  went  astray,  having 
followed  the  way  of  Balaam,  the  son  of 
Beor,  Avho  loved  the  hire  of  wrong- 
doing."    (2  Pecer  2  :  H,  15.) 


12.  As  the  account  of  the  Pentecostal 

outpouring  of  the  Si)irit  and  that  of 
the  first  open  opjiositiou  to  tlie  churcli 
are  followed  by  brief  descrii)tions  of  its 
peaceful    jn-ogress    (2  :  4:)-47 ;  4  :  31-35.),    so 
here   are  added  similar  statements  of 
the  prosperity  that  followed  the  signal 
judgments  upon  Ananias  and  Sapjiliira. 
The  results  of  the  divine  iliscipline  of 
the  church  :    The  Spirit  manifests  his 
l)Ower  through  the  a2)0.stles  in  signs 
and  wonders  (2:22);  meeting  undis- 
[  turbed  in  Solomon's  porch  (3:u); 
believers   more   distinct    (ver.  in) ;    and 
;  large  numl)ers  added  to  tiie  Lord  (ver. 
I  u).     Wrouglit — were    wrought   from 
;  time  to  time.     They  were  all  with 
i  one  accord  from  day  to  day.     Hack- 
'  ett,  Alford,  and  some  otiiers  refer  this 
'  to  the  apostles,  while  Meyer,  Alexan- 
!  der,  Lange  (Lechler),  and  others  refer 
it  to  tlie  congregation  of  believers.     On 
tlie  one  hand,  "  apostles  "  is  tiie  subject 
I  of  the  preceding  sentence,  and  woul.l 
natui-ally  appear  to  be  the  grammatical 
I  antecedent ;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  the 
j  expression  seems  to  partake  of  a  loose, 
popular  form  with   "  they  all,"   con- 
j  trasted  with   "the   rest"    (ver.  i.',),  the 
!  peoijle  outside  of  the  com]>any  of  be- 
lievers.    An  intermediate  view  may  be 
I  suggested  which   really  condiines"  the 
two:   They  —  the  apostles  —  and  those 
with  them — that  is,  the  company  of 
believers  tcere  frequently  all  'with  o)ie 
accord  (see  on  I  :  1.1)  in  Solomon's  jnrrch, 
which  was  sufficiently  large  to  accom- 
modate them  ni  their  more  public  re- 
ligious services.    That  they  were  thus 
jiermitted  to  hold  meetings  undisturbed 
shows  how  great  was  the  effect  of  the 
signal  judfjment  of  God  and  the  mira- 
cles tliat  followed. 

13.  Of  the  rest — those  outside  of 
the  apostles  and  their  com])any  ;  "  the 
people "  who  were  still  unbelievers. 
Durst  no  man  (no  one)  join  him- 
self to  them — to  tlie  aposth-s  and  the 
believers  witli  tliem,  hohling  religious 
gatherings  in  Solomon's  porch.  The 
word  ren<lered  ji>in  himself  is  a  strong 
word,  meaning  to  enter  into  the  closesl; 


74 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


rest  durst  no  man  join  himself  to  them  : 

14  "but  the  people  magnified  them.    (And 

believers  were   the  more  added  to    the 

Lord,  multitudes  lK)th  of  men  and  women.) 


15  Insomuch  that  they  brought  fortL  the 
sick  into  the  streets,  and  laid  them  on  beds 
and  couches,  v  that  at  the  least  the  shadow 
of  Peter  passing  might  overshadow  some 


■  ch.  2  :  47 ;  4  :  21.        P  Matt.  14  :  .30 ;  John  14  :  12. 


relation  as  an  associate,  or  a  member 
of  a  company.  (9 :  26 ;  in :  28 ;  n  :  u.)  Un- 
believers were  deterred  from  hypocritic- 
ally joining  themselves  to  the  brother- 
hood and  from  mingling  freely  with 
them.  The  discipleshi]}  became  more 
distinct,  and  they  were  left  alone  more 
than  formerly  in  their  religions  assem- 
blies. Alford's  interpretation,  that  all 
believers  and  unbelievers  were  insjjired 
with  great  awe  Ijy  the  apostles  and  dared 
not  join  them,  but  kept  aloof  from 
them,  is  far-fetched,  and  inconsistent 
with  the  social  relations  of  tlie  early 
churcli.  (2 :42*7:  I :  :!2,  :i3.)  "  Such  a  vicw 
is  inconsistent  with  the  whole  cliaracter 
of  the  life  of  the  churili,  as  it  is  de- 
scribed in  The  Acts."  (Lechler,  in 
Lange.)  Mas;iii(ied  them — regarded 
them  with  wonder  and  praised  them. 

14.  And  believers — and  those  be- 
lieving from  among  the  peo]>le — were 
still  more  added  to  the  Lord 
(n  :  24),  and  lunce  added  to  the  church. 
Hypocrites  were  repelled,  unbelievers 
were  ke])t  in  awe,  and  believers  were 
attracted.  Notice  the  different  expres- 
sions :  the  three  thousand  were  "added," 
"added  to  them,"  or  to  the  church 
(2 :  41, 47),  and  here  "  added  to  the  Lord," 
which  they  .should  he,  if  they  united 
with  the  church.  A  church,  according 
to  the  apostolic  idea,  consisted  of  a  con- 
verted nunibershii).  Multitudes — 
indefinitely  larire  numbers.  Luke  had 
spoken  of  tlie  "  three  thousand  "  and 
the  "  five  thousand  "  (2 :  4i :  4  : 4),  but  the 
stream  flows  on  so  continuously  and  so 
freely  that  lie  eea.ses  to  number  them. 
And  these  both  of  men  and  women. 
Doubtless  at  first  the  converts  hat!  liee.n 
most  largi-ly  from  among  the  men,  as 
has  been  the  case  at  fii"st  in  modern 
mis.sions.  But  from  the  fii-st,  women 
had  been  among  the  di.scipleship  (1 :  u), 
and  doubtless  were  rei)resentt'd  among 
the  converts.  Yet  the  mention  of 
tt'omen  here  is  significant.  It  would 
seem  that  the  death  of  Sai>i)liira  was 
specially  blessed  in  a  great  work  among 
the  women.    They  are  also  presented 


as  equal  iu  privileges  with  the  other 
sex  (Gal.  3:28),  a  thing  somewhat  new 
both  to  Jew  and  Gentile. 

15.  Insomuch  that — so  that;  con- 
nected with  the  preceding  verse.  Many, 
especially  the  older  expositors,  make  a 
parenthesis,  some  beginning  with  the 
middle  of  ver.  12,  Ami  they  qrere 
all  with  one  accord,  etc.,  and  ending 
with  ver.  14;  others  include  only 
ver.  14.  The  tendency  among  recent 
critics  has  been  to  assume  no  jiarenthe- 
sis  at  all.  Indeed,  tliere  seems  to  be  no 
necessity  for  one.  For  Mliat  more 
natural  than  that  the  great  accession  of 
converts  should  attract  the  people  for 
the  healing  of  various  diseases.  "  The 
words,  so  that  along  the  streefg  they 
brought  forth  the  sich,  etc.,  are  very 
aptly  connected  with  ver.  14 ;  the  two 
facts,  that  tlie  people  held  the  a2iostles 
in  high  estimation,  and  that  the  num- 
ber of  believers  increased  rapidly,  ex- 
plain why  the  sick  were  brought  out 
into  the  streets.  The  words,  indeed, 
connect  themselves  with  ver  14  far 
more  neatly  than  with  ver.  12.  Are 
we  to  understand  by  many  signs  and 
vonders  vrought  among  the  people, 
merely  the  jncceding  events,  the  effect 
of  which  was  so  that  they  brought  forth, 
etc.?  To  a.ssume  this  would  be  to  sacri- 
fice the  ])ersi)icuity  of  the  narrative. 
For  what  else  could  these  many  signs 
have  l)een  but  miracles  of  healing? 
Thus  in  the  words  so  that  along,  etc., 
wiiat  had  been  only  briefly  indicated 
in  ver.  12,  recurs  in  another  connec- 
tion to  be  nariated  more  in  detail. 
(Ver.  15  f.)  Accordingly,  I  cannot  bring 
myself  to  make  ver.  14  a  parenthesis." 
(Winer,  Grammar  of  i\\  7'.,  An- 
dover,  1809  p.  nCA.)  They  brought 
forth.  The  meaning  is,  that  the  sick 
vere  brought  forth  by  any  of  the  peo- 
ple, such  as  friends,  those  who  had 
them  in  charire  or  weie  interested  in 
them.  Streets,  or  broad  ways.  See 
Luke  14:  21,  where  the  word  is  con- 
tra.sted  with  lanes.  Beds — according 
to  the  best  Greek  text,  little  couches — 


Cri.  v.] 


THE  ACTS. 


75 


16  of  them.  There  came  also  a  niullitude 
out  of  the  cities  round  about  unto  Jerusa- 
lem, bringing  m  siclc  folks  aiiJ  them 
which  were  vexed  with  unclean  spLi-its  ; 
and  they  were  healed  every  one. 


The  imprisonment,  and  viiraculoiis  deliverance 
of  tlie,  ajiost'r.i :  their  bold  confession  be- 
fore the  Sdiihedrin,  and  release, 

17      'THION  the  high  priest  rose  up,  and 
all  they  that  were  with  him,  (which  is 


q  Mark  IG  :  17,  18. 


■  eh.  4  : 1,  2,  G. 


such  as  could  ))e  easily  liancUed. 
Couches — a  du-ap  lis,'lit  inattrc-ss,  or 
caini)-l)f(l,  capable  of  holding  only  one 
person,  and  used  l>y  tlie  poorer  people. 
Thus  all  classes,  tiie  rich  and  poor, 
were  represented.  That  at  tlie  least 
the  shadow  of  Peter,  etc.  This 
graphically  describes  the  excitement, 
enthusiasm,  and  faith  of  the  people 
bringing  their  sick.  Whether  they 
were  healed  is  not  stated ;  tlie  j)rol)a- 
bilities  are  that  they  were.  Not  an  in- 
stance is  recordcMJ  in  tlie  New  Testa- 
ment wliere  any  one  who  came  was  not 
healed.  Why  should  there  be  an  ex- 
ception here?  Tlie  great  crowd  seek- 
ing the  shadow  of  Peter  sliowed  great 
earnestness  and  childlike  faith,  (la  :  12; 
Mark  6: 56.)  A  sliadow  might  counect 
the  recipient  with  the  instrument  of 
God's  blessings,  as  well  as  a  look  (Num. 
vi  :8),  a  fringe  of  a  garment,  (M.itt.  9: 20), 
a  word  (M^tt.  8  :  10-13),  or  a  touch. 

10.  There  came  also.  In  addi- 
tion to  all  this  whicli  had  occurred  at 
Jerusalem,  there  came  the  multitude 
out  of,  rather,  of  the  cities  round 
about  JerusoJeni.  The  mass  of  the 
people  of  tlie  surrounding  country 
brouglit  their  sick.  Many  cities  were 
within  ten  miles  of  Jerusaleni,  such  as 
Bethany,  Rethphag'.^  Dethleliem,  Em- 
maus,  and  Bethel.  Vexed.  Tlie  word 
tlius  translated  is  used  in  the  New  Tes- 
tament only  by  Luke  (here  and  in  Ivuke 
C  :  IS),  but  often  used  liy  medical  wri- 
ters. Unclean  spirits — called  un- 
clean because  of  their  moral  vileness. 
Ou  demons  and  demoniacal  ]>ossessioiis, 
see  Author's  Notn^  on  Matthcir.  (4: 21.) 
Were  healed  every  one — a  strong 
expression,  meaning  all  without  excep- 
tion were  healed. 

17-42.  The  Impimsonment  .\nd 
Miraculous  Escape  op  the  Apos- 
tles ;  THEIR  BOLD  (\lXFESS10N  AND 

Release.    Pro])ably  about  a.  d.  38. 

17.  Here  arises  the  second  attempt 
at  persecution,  the  first  bi>ing  tliat 
recorded  in  4  :  1-22,     Then — not  the 


adverb  of  time,  but  the  conjunction 
tntd,  or  but,  denoting  that  this  hostile 
movement  was  the  result  of  the  great 
intiuence  of  tiie  apostles  and  the  jiros- 
perity  of  tlie  church.  The  high 
priest.  (Seeon4:6.)  Thought  by 
some  to  l)e  I'aiaplias,  l)ut  i)robably 
Annas,  who  acted  as  high  ))ricst  iu 
the  former  movement,  prol)ably  several 
months  before.  (+:6)  By  what  fid- 
lows,  it  is  most  natural  to  infer  tiiat 
Annas  was  a  Sadducee.  Some  liave 
supposed  that  Caiaphas  was  a  Pharisee, 
which  is  certainly  possible,  as  only  the 
high  priest  is  mentioned  here.  Rose 
up — proceeded  to  enii)loy  active  meas- 
ures. All  they  that  were  with  him 
— in  sym])athy  aud  opinion ;  namely, 
the  Sadducees,  as  ex])laine<l  in  the  next 
clause.  Sect — from  the  Greek  word 
comes  the  English  term  heresy.  It 
here  means //if  y;rtr/y,  the  same  as  the 
Pharisees  are  spoken  of  in  15:5;  26  :  5. 
Christians  are  so  named  (24 : 5,  u;  28 .-  22), 
witli  a  suggestion  of  reproach.  See 
Gal.  5  :  20';"  1  Cor.  11  :  19,  where  the 
word  means  parties  or  factions  and  2 
Peter  2:1,  where  it  is  used  of  heresy, 
or  perhaps  rather  factions,  holding 
heretical  views.  The  Pliarisees  and 
Sailducees  were  not  two  sects,  in  the 
modern  sense  of  the  word,  indeiiendent 
of  eacii  other  like  two  denominations, 
but  two  religious  parties  in  the  Jewish 
community,  or  body  politic,  holding 
distinct  and  oj)posing  views,  (sw  ou  4 : 1 .) 
They  denied  the  existence  of  angels 
and  spirits,  as  well  as  the  resurrection 
of  tlie  body.  (23 :8;  Luke20: 27.)  lleuce 
their  opposition  and  indignation  at 
the  apostles  and  their  j)reaching.  Ac- 
cording to  Josephus,  tlicy  di'iiied  the 
immortality  of  the  soiil  and  future 
retribution;  and  niaintaiiu'd  man's 
freedom  in  opposition  to  the  doctrine 
of  divine  predestination.  (Autiq.  IS: 
1,  4  ;  Jew.  War,  2  :  H,  14.)  The  indig- 
nation here  spoken  of,  seems  from  the 
original  word  as  used  here  and  in  l.S  :  45 
to  be  a  maliguant  jealously,  resulting  in 


76 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


the  sect  of   the  »8ailducees,)  and  were    20  Go,  stand  and  speak  in  the  temple  to  the 


18  lillcd  with  iiidiguation,  'and  laid  their 
hands  on  the  apostles,  and  put  them  in  j 

19  the  common  prison.  But  "  the  angel  of 
the  Lord  by  night  opened  the  prison 
doors,  and  brought  them  forth,  and  said,  | 


21  people  I  all  the  words  of  this  life.    And 

when  they  heard  that,  they  entered  into 

the  temple  early  in  the  morning,  and 

taught. 

But  the  high  priest  came,  and  they  that 


»  ch.  23  :  8. 


t  ch.  4  :  3 ;  Luke  21  :  12.         »  ch.  12  :  7-11 ;  16  :  20 ;  Pb.  2  :  4 ;  :J4  :  7  ;  Prov.  21 
30.        »  ch.  11  :  14;  John  G  :  68;  17  :  3;  1  John  5  :  11,  12. 


iiuligiiation.  The  Sadducees  saw  in 
the  jjreachiiig  of  Christ's  resurrection 
a  refutation  of  their  system,  and  were 
jealously  indignant  at  seeing  the  thou- 
sands following  the  preaching  of  Jesus. 
There  was  an  outburst  of  party  feeling. 
18.  Laid  their  hands — luid  /icnidK, 
seized,  arrested,  the  a])ostles  through 
the  temi)le  ])i>lice  or  otiicers.  Mark 
the  ])rogress  in  i)ersecution  :  previously 
they  had  seized  only  Peter  and  John 
(4 : 3) ;  now  all  the  apostles.  Put  them 
into  the  common  prison — rather 
the  pub/ic  pri.-ioti,  or  irard,  Avhere  they 
were  kei>t  for  security,  until  the  nuiru- 
int;  wlien  the  Sanhedrlu  would  convene 
for  the  trial.  It  seems  to  have  l)eeu 
some  i^rison  or  guard-house  outside  of 
the  temple,     (ver.  •.•!.) 

19.  The  angel — not  the  angel  of 
the  Lord,  used  in  the  Old  Testament  of 
the  Son  of  Ood,  but  on  (un/cl.  "It  is 
a  thing  to  be  remarked,  how  often  the 
angels  were  employed  in  tlie  New  Dis- 
])ensation.  Tliey  were  sent  generally 
for  one  or  other  of  these  two  jnirpo.ses  : 
either  to  announce  sonu'thing  wliich 
the  hearer  would  iu>t  credit  if  spoken 
merely  of  a  hunuin  being,  or  to  do 
some  act  wliieh  was  beyond  the  power 
of  God's  human  .servants  to  do.  Ex- 
amples of  the  former  are  the  messages 
to  Zachariah,  Mary,  and  Joseph.  (Matt. 
1:13,19;  i.iike  1:  ii,2fi".) ;  also  to  Paul  be- 
fore the  slilpwrcck.  ('-'7:23.)  Exam]des 
of  the  latter  are  tlie  rolling  away  tlie 
stone  at  the  resurrection,  the  deliver- 
ance of  Peter,  and  the  case  before  us." 

(Matt.  W:  2:  Acts  12:  7.)        (REV.     T.     A.     T. 

Haxx.\,  Kiin/s  intit  Apostles.)  This 
miraculous  interposition  would  encour- 
age the  ai>ostlcs,  and  tend  to  make 
tlieir  ]iersecutors  hesitate.  It  is  not 
unlikely  tliat  it  heljied  Gamaliel  to  de- 
cide as  to  his  lenient  course.  (Ver.  si-sa.) 
By  nis^ht — probably  toward  the  morn- 
ing hour.  (Ver. 20.)"  Opened  the 
prison  doors — brought  out  the  apos- 


tles and  shut  the  doors  (ver.  23)  either 
so  quietly  that  the  keepers  did  not  hear 
uor  see  them,  or  else  their  senses  were 
restrained  by  divine  power. 

20.  Go,  stand  and  speak — pro- 
ceed on  your  way  to  the  temple,  and 
having  taken  your  stand  there,  pro- 
claim the  gospel  to  the  people.  Preach- 
ing is  the  work  of  men,  not  of  angels. 
All  the  words  of  this  life — which 
they  preached  and  was  becoming  known 
by  their  preaeliing— the  sj)iritual,  the 
eternal  life  which  C'lirist  brought  to 
liglit  through  the  gosi>el.  (2Tim.  i:io.) 
8ee  "  tlie  word  of  this  salvation  "  (i3  : 2«), 
and  "  the  words  of  eternal  life."  (John 
6 :  6f.)  They  were  to  preach  in  the  same 
)dace,  to  the  same  people,  and  the  same 
truths,  not  withholding  anything  con- 
cerning   Jesus   and    the    resurrection. 

(4:  2,  .33.) 

21.  M  hen  they  heard,  etc.,—  /(w/- 

ing  it  they  went.  They  needed  but  to 
hear  to  obey  implicitly,  going  into  the 
temple  eagerly  and  i)Uiictually,  early 
in  the  moxviiw^,  at  Jnybreok  oi- earl ij 
Jaioi,  for  such  is  the  meaning  of  the 
word  in  Greek.  Into  the  temple — 
the  sacred  enclosure,  douI)tle.ss  in  Solo- 
mon's j)orch,  where  they  had  been  ac- 
customed to  teach.  (Vir.i2.)  The  j)oo- 
ple  in  the  East  are  accustomed  to  rise 
early  and  begin  their  work,  giving  ii]) 
midday  as  far  as  po.^siljle  to  rest.  Dr. 
Hackett,  Jl/nstratiuiis  of  Scripture,  p. 
129,  says :  "  Men  and  women  may  be 
seen  going  forth  to  their  labor  in  the 
fields,  or  starting  on  journeys,  at  the 
earliest  break  of  day  .  .  .  Being 
anxious  at  Jerusalem  to  attend  the  ser- 
vices of  a  Jewish  synagogue,  I  was 
summoned  to  rise  for  that  pur])Ose  l)e- 
fore  it  was  light.  In  one  instance  I 
went  thither  at  an  early  hour  as  we 
should  call  it,  but  found  myself  too 
late  ;  the  service  was  ended,  the  pcojde 
gone,  and  the  svnagogue  closed  for  the 
day." 


Ch.  v.] 


THE  ACTS. 


77 


were  with  him,  aiiJ  called  the  council  to- 
gether, and  all  the  senate  of  the  children 
of  Israel,  and  sent   to  the  prison  to  have 

2'2  them  brought.  Hut  when  the  officers 
eanie,  and  found  theiu  not  in  the  prison, 

23  they  returned,  and  told,  saying.  The 
l>ris(]n  truly  found  we  shut  with  all  safety, 
and  the  keepers  standing  without  before 
the  doors :  but  when  we  had  opened,  we 


found  no  man  within.  Now  when  the 
high  priest  and  J  the  captain  of  the  tein- 
}ile  and  the  ^ chief  priests  heard  these 
things,  they  doubted  of  them  whereuiito 
this  would  grow.  Then  came  one  and 
told  them, saying,  Heboid,  the  men  whom 
ye  put  in  prison  are  standing  in  the  tem- 
ple, and  teaching  the  j)eople. 
Then  went  the  captain  with  the  officers, 


y  ch.  4:1;  Luke  22  :  4.        •  Matt.  2  :  4. 


The  high  priest    .    .     .    and 
they  .   .   .    with  him.     (see  oq  ver.  n) 

The  high  jirie.st  came,  being  pirseiit, 
oil  hand,  at  the  teiiipk-,  prohably  iu 
tluit  i>()rtioii  wliere  the  Saiihedrin  held 
their  meetings.  He  and  tho.se  with 
hiin  called  the  council,  the  Sauhe- 
driii.  This  was  the  highest  court  of 
the  Jews,  (see  on  4:5.)  The  more  im- 
portant cases  were  brought  liefore  this 
council.  They  could  pronounce  the 
peualt}'  of  death,  but  it  was  not  valid 
unless  confirmed  by  the  Roman  gov- 
ernor or  procurator.  The  .Jews  trace  its 
origin  to  Num.  11  :  16.  All  the  sen- 
ate, or  eldcrs/n'/).  Tlie  word  in  the  orig- 
inal occurs  only  liere  iu  the  New  Testa- 
ment. Tlie  Se))tuagint  version  uses  it 
for  elders  of  the  whole  people,  or  of 
any  particular  place.  In  the  Ai)ocry- 
pha  (1  Mace.  12 : 6)  and  Josejjlius  it  is  used 
of  tlie  Sanhedrin.  Some  think  that 
the  elders  of  the  nation  are  here  meant, 
who  were  called  in  to  give  their  advice. 
But  the  larger  miinlier  regard  it  as 
rather  emphasizing  a  full  meeting  of 
the  Sanhedrin:  and  indeed  all  the 
senate,  or  Sanhedrin,  that  is,  all  the 
eldeivhip  connected  with  that  body. 
The  word  translated  prison  is  not  the 
one  used  in  ver.  18,  but  tlie  one  in 
ver.  23  and  16  :  26 — a  place  of  bondage, 
a  jail. 

22.  The  officers,  or  servaiits  of 
the  Sanhedrin.  Found  them  not. 
(See  12:  19-)  "The  Lord's  messenger 
(angel)  was  earlier  at  work  than  tlie 
officers  of  either  Annas  or  Herod." 
(Rkv.  T.  a.  T.  JIanna.)  Prison  (the 
same  word  used  in  ver.  19,  but  differ- 
ent from  those  used  iu  ver  18  and  21) — 
a  place  of  custody,  where  prisoners 
were  kept  and  guarded. 

23.  Shut  Avith  all  safely — closed 
and  securely  fastened.  Keepers 
standing  without  before,  or  at, 
according  to  the  best  manuscripts.  The 


guard  were  standing  at  the  doors,  totally 
uncon.scious  of  what  had  occurred 
during  the  night.  When  we  liad 
opened.  The  keys  were  not  in  the 
hands  of  the  keepers,  liut  of  the  chief 
l)riests.  It  would  seem  that  the  apos- 
tles were  the  only  prisoners,  as  no  one 
was  found  Mithin. 

24.  High  priest — not  in  the  origi- 
nal. Some  maiiuscrij)ts  have  the  priest, 
by  way  of  pre-eminence  tlie  high 
priest.  But  the  oldest  manuscripts  and 
versions  omit  it,  as  does  also  the 
Revised  Version.  Alford  and  Meyer 
would  retain  it,  on  the  ground  that  the 
great  variety  of  readings,  intended  as 
corrections,  indicate  that  it  was  origi- 
nally present.  The  captain  of  the 
temple,  (see on  4  :i.)  Chief  pricsts. 
(See  ou  4 : 2.1.)  They  doubted  of  them, 
etc.  Thei/  were  at  a  lotis,  or  perplexed 
concerning  them,  the  apostles,  irhat  this 
ironld  become,  what  would  occur  next, 
unless  somehow  prevented  ;  and  what 
would  be  the  influence  and  the  result 
of  this. 

25.  While  the  Sanhedrin  were  in 
this  i:)erplexity  there  came  one,  wlio 
announces  the  surprising  fact,  that  the 
apo.stles  were  teaching  puldicly  iu  the 
temple.  Notice  how  implicitly  they 
obey  the  command  of  the  angel,  Go, 
stand  and  speal:.     (ver.20.) 

26.  Then,  in  consequence  of  this 
announcement,  the  captain  of  the 
temjile  (4: 1)  and  the  officers  (ver.  22) 
went  and  brought  them  Avithout  vio- 
lence, showing  that  the  apostles 
offered  no  resistance.  For  they 
feared  the  people — indicating  the 
influence  and  ])rogress  of  the  gospel 
among  the  common  peojde.  (See  4: 21.) 
Some  would  put  this  in  parenthesis, 
and  translate  what  follows,  that  they 
might  not  be  stoned ;  any  violence  done 
to  the  apostles  might  result  in  stoning. 
Others,  according  to  many  of  the  best 


78 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


aii(i  l)r()Ught  them  without  violence:  *for 
they  feared  the  people,  lest  they  should 

27  have  been  stoned.  And  when  they  had 
brought  them,  >>  they  set //ie»i  before  the 
council :  and  the  high  priest  asked  them, 

28  saying,  »Did  not  we  straitly  command 


.  Matt.  21  :  21!. 


b  Mark  1:5  :  9.        <=  oh 
2;}  :  35 ;  27 


you  that  ye  should  not  teach  in  this 
name?  And,  behold,  ye  have  filled  Jeru- 
salem with  your  doctrine, '^  and  intend  to 
bring  this  man's  « blood  upon  us. 

Then  Peter  and  the  other  apostles  an- 
swered and  said, '  We  ought  to  obey  God 


Matt. 


4:18.        ich.  2  :  23,  3G;4  :  10,  11;  ' 
:2.3.         fch.  4:1'J,  20. 


;52. 


manuscripts,  make  uo  parentheses  and 
om\i  that,  and  render,  ks(  they  should  he 
stoned.  So  the  Kevised  Version.  "The 
stoiiin:,',  so  often  mentioned  in  the  New 
Tcstiuiient,  is  not  mere  pelting,  as  an 
act  of  pojiuhir  violence,  bnt  au  ancient 
ttieocratii-al  exjjrcssion  of  abhorrence 
for  some  act  of  )>hispltemy  or  treason  to 
Jehovali.  This  form  of  capital  pun- 
ishment, for  such  it  was,  liad  been  i)re- 
ferred  to  others  in  the  hiw,  because  it 
made  the  death  of  tiie  otiender,  not  the 
act  of  a  hated  executioner,  but  that  of 
all  the  peo])le  who  were  present,  and 
es]>ecially  of  those  who  had  acted  as 
informers  and  witnesses.  From  this 
arose  the  ]ie<uliar  Jewish  custom  of 
taking  np  stones  to  stone  one,  as  a  sort 
of  testimony  against  him.  (John  s  :  o; 
10::il-:i:i;  u  :  t.)  .  .  .  Sucli  was  the  jtojiu- 
lar  regard  for  the  apostles,  tliat  the  men 
sent  ito  arrest  them  were  afraid,  not 
merely  of  bodily  injury,  but  of  being 
denounced,  and  disowned  by  the 
jieople,  as  untrue  to  the  theocracy  and 
law  of  Moses."  (Dr.  J.  A.  Alexan- 
der.) 

'Z7.  They  set  them  before  the 
council.  The  only  time  when  all  tiu^ 
apostles  were  on  trial  together.  In  con- 
lU'ctiou  with  ver.  4(1,  there  was  a  fulfill- 
ment of  Christ's  words  in  ^lark  13  :  9. 
Tlie  higli  priest  as  president  of  the 
Sanhcdriu  and  the  theocratic  head  of 
(he  nation  asked  them,  expostuhiting 
A\  ith  them. 

3S.  Did  Ave  not  straitly,  etc. 
Xot  is  omitted  according  to  the  higlu-st 
ciitical  authorities,  which  reject  the 
interrogative  form  and  read.  We  iftrict/i/ 
enniiKi iided  you  not  to /each,  etc.  In, 
or  H/>o)i,  this  name,  the  ground  of 
their  jireaching,  })ut  the  name  Jesus 
the  high  priest  refrains  to  mention, 
either  from  luitred  or  from  a  secret  con- 
sciousness of  guilt.  This  j)rohibition 
shows  what  a  power  the  name  of  Jesus 
wiis  having  upou  the  j>eople.  Behold 
introduces    the    surprising     fact    that 


these  preachers  had  filled  Jerusalem 
with  their  doctrine,  rather  teaching, 
A  testimony  to  their  faithfulness  as 
preachers.  To  bring  this  man's 
blood  upon  us — to  fix  ui)on  us  the 
crime  of  putting  to  death  an  innocent 
person.  (2 :  23 ; 's :  i4 ;  4 :  10.)  They  had 
said,  "  His  blood  be  upon  us  and  u]ion 
our  children."  (Matt  27: 25.)  Now  they 
began  to  feel  it  was  coming.  Here  we 
see  the  principal  cause  and  animus  of 
their  hostility.      "  This    uian    is    not 

itself  contemptuous,    (sec  I.uke  23  :  47  ;   Jiilin 

7 : 4(1),  but  could  have  tliat  turn  given  to 
it  by  the  voice,  and  was  so  uttered 
probably  at  this  time."     (llACKETT.) 

29.  In  their  answer  the  a])Ostles 
declare  tiiat  their  paramount  allegiance 
was  to  tiod  wherever  there  was  a  con- 
flict between  human  and  divine  law  ; 
they  <lo  not  relieve  tlie  Jewish  rulers  of 
the  crime  of  shedding  innocent  Idood, 
but  so  far  from  designing  to  luring  jmn- 
isliment  upon  tliem,  they  proclaim 
Jesus  as  a  Prince  and  a  Saviour  to  give 
rei)cntance  and  forgiveness  of  sins  to 
Israel,  of  which  these  very  rulers 
formed  a  part.  Peter  acts  as  spokes- 
man, the  other  apostles  assenting  and 
speaking  tlirf>ugli  him.  Me  oujjht  to, 
or  mKut,  obey  God  rather  than 
men.  A  principle  that  commends 
itself  to  every  man's  conscience.  See 
exami)les  in  notes  on  4  :  !!>,  20,  where 
the  same  i)rinciple  is  presented  more 
pointedly.  Notice  that  the  apostles 
claimed  tiie  riglit  to  judge  for  them- 
selves wlutt  was  right  or  wrong  regani- 
ing  religiims  and  civil  duties  ;  and  to 
disobey  a  human  law  which  opi)Osed 
obedience  to  a  divine  requirement.  In 
practice  they  cheerfully  submitted  to 
the  penalties  enforced  against  them 
(ver.  41),  fled  persecution  (2  cor.  11  ::i2,  .13) 
and  never  forcibly  resisted  the  public 
authorities.  In  their  teaching  tbey 
enforced  tlie  general  principles  of 
obedience  to  human  law  as  a  duty  to 
the  Divine  Originator  of  all  law  (Rom. 


Ch.  v.] 


THE  ACTS. 


79 


30  ralbor  than  luen.  eThe  God  of  our  fath- 
ers raised  up  Josus,  whom  ye  slew  aud 

31  ''  hanged  on  a  tree,  '  Him  hath  God  ex- 
ulted with  his  right  hand  to  be '^  a.  Prince 
aud  '  a  Saviour,  ■"  for  to  give  repentance 


32  to  Israel,  and  ■■  forgiveness  of  sius.  And 
"we  are  his  witnesses  of  these  things; 
and  so  is  also  theHoly  Spirit,?  whom  Goii 
hath  given  to  them  that  obey  him. 


8  ch.  3  :  13,  15.  ^  ch.  10  :  39 ;  Deut.  21  :  23 ;  1  I'eter  2  :  21.  i  Ps.  110  :  1,  2 ;  Phil.  2:9; 
Ilel).  12  :  2.  k  pg.  2  :  6-12;  Dan.  9  :  2.'),  2G.  i  Matt.  1  :  21;  Luke  2  :  11.  m  ch.  3  :  2«; 
Ezck.  3G  :  2.V27 ;  Zech.  12  :  10.  "  ch.  1:!  :  38  ;  Blark.  2  :  7,  10;  Eph.  1:7.  »  ch.  1:8;  John 
15  :  20,  27 ;  Heb.  2:4.        P  ch.  2  :  4,  38,  39 ;  John  7  :  39. 


13:1,2),  to  whom  they  should  commit 
themselves  wheu  ■wrongfully  treated  by 
legal  tribunals,     (i  Peter  ■-• :  t2,  23.) 

30.  The  God  of  our  fathers— 
a  eovenant-keeping  God,  Avho  had 
watched  over  their  natiou,  giving  them 
a  godly  ancestry,  prophets,  aud  prom- 
ises. (3:24,25.)  They  speak  as  Jews 
and  as  worshiping  the  same  God  with 
their  rulers.  Raised  up  Jesus,  in 
whom  God's  covenants  and  promises 
are  ful tilled.  (3:26.)  This  means  raised, 
either  from  the  dead,  or  as  one  sent  of 
God  into  tlie  world.  The  latter  suits 
tlie  connection  best.  See  13  :  22,  where 
tile  word  has  a  similar  use.  "  Meyer, 
wlio  adopts  the  view  of  Erasmus  and 
otliers,  supposes  that  the  phra.se  :  God 
raised  up  jesns  refers  to  the  resurrec- 
tion of  Jesus  from  the  dead  ;  hut  when 
rdi-sed  up  has  this  sense  in  the  Acts  it 
is  always  connected  with  from  the  dead 
(:i:  15;  4:10;  13:30)  or  the  coutcxt  indi- 
cates the  seiise.  (10:40;  13:37.)  Besides, 
the  secjueiice  of  the  clauses  beginning 
with  raised  up — ye  sfrw — exalted,  indi- 
cates that  the  succession  of  events,  in 
tlie  order  in  which  they  really  occurred, 
was  intended  to  be  set  forth.  Hence 
raised  up  cannot  refer  to  any  other 
event  than  the  public  ajipearauce  of 
Jesus  as  the  messenger  of  God.  In 
accordance  with  this  interpretation 
'exalted'  in  ver.  31  includes  both  I 
the  resurrection  and  ascension."  ! 
(LucHi.ER,  Lange  Cum.)  With  this 
treatment  of  God  toward  Jesus  their 
treatment  of  him  is  contrasted :  Whom 
yc  slew,  etc.  Observe  a  similar  con- 
trast in  2  :  23,  24 ;  3  :  13,  15;  4  :  10. 
Slew— the  word  thus  translated  occurs 
in  the  New  Testament  only  here  and  in 
26  :  21,  and  means  to  lay  hands  upon, 
despatch,  shty  by  laying  iiands  upon. 
Hanged  on  a  tree — rather,  hanging 
him  on  the  tree,  or  the  wood,  a  Hebrais- 
tic and  softened  May  of  referring  to  the 
cross.    (13 : 2».)     For  the  origin  of  the 


expression,  see  Deut.  21 :  22.  The  idea 
here  is,  sleiv  by  hanging  on,  the  tree,  ))y 
crucifixion.  (See  Peter's  use  of  tlie 
word  tree  in  10  :  39 ;  1  Peter  1 :  24.) 

31.  Him  hath  God  exalted,  etc. 
Rather,  Jlim  a  Prince,  who  is  a  Prince 
and  Saviour,  hath  God  exalted.  The 
two  functions  of  the  Messiah  are  here 
brought  to  view,  the  princely  or  kingly 
and  the  i-edemj»tive,  indicating  his  au- 
thority and  his  saving  power,    (isa.  9 : « ; 

19:  20;  Dan.  8  :  25  ;  9:25;  Ueb.2:  10;  5  :9.)       Tlie 

word  prince  is  tlie  same  as  in  3  :  15, 
and  here  means  chief  leader,  eai>taiii, 
prince.  With,  rather  to,  his  right 
hand — to  sliare  in  the  honor  and 
2>ower  of  that  position.  (2 :  23.  See  un 
2:33.)  To  give  repentance.  Jesus 
not  merely  gives  a  time  or  place  or 
opportunity,  but  also  the  disposition  of 
repentance  itself.  A  soul  dead  in  tres- 
j)asses  and  sins  can  no  more  quicken 
it.self  to  repentance  than  it  can  give  to 

itself  spiritual  life.        (See  U  :  la  :  Rom.  2:4; 

2  Cor.  2:25  Joim  10: 7,  8.)  Excuses  of  Un- 
renewed ])ersons,  such  as  they  cannot 
repent,  and  they  luive  no  proper  sense 
of  sin,  are  vain,  for  C'lu-ist  is  exalted 
for  tlie  very  purpose  of  giving  to  sin- 
ners such  penitent  feelings  as  they 
need.  On  repentance,  see  note  on  2  :  38. 
Forgiveness  of  sius.  The  same  as 
rendered  remission,  of  sins  in  2  :  38, 
on  wliicli  see  note.  Forgiveness  is 
pardon  to  let  sins  go  as  if  never  com- 
mitted, and  to  remit  the  ])enalty.  In  re- 
pentance and  forgiveness  of  sins  a  change 
of  heart,  life,  and  purpose  is  imjjlied. 

(3:19;  26:20;  Matt.  3:8.)    TO  Israel.    This 

does  not  restrict  it  to  them,  but  this 
was  all  the  ai)0.stles  needed  then  to 
preacli.  (3:26.)  The  time  for  ottering 
the  gospel  to  tlie  Gentiles  had  not  yet 
come. 

33.  We  are  his  Avitnesses — as 
foretold  in  1:8;  and  as  appointed  by 
Christ  himself.  (Luke  24: 47-49.)  Com- 
pare the  latter  passage  with  this,  and 


80 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


33  1  When  they  heard  thai,  they  were  cut 
to  the   hmrt,  and   took    counsel    to  slay 

34  them.    Then  stood  there  up  one  in  the 


council,  a  Pharisee,  named  Gamaliel,  a 
doctor  of  the  law,  had  in  reputation 
among  all  the  people,  and  commanded  to 


q  ch.  2  :  37  ;  7  :  54. 


notice  their  similarity,  an  incidental 
evidence  of  the  truthfulness  of  the  two 
accounts.  Of  these  things,  or  say- 
ings, which  are  the  sul)Jcct-matter  of 
this  discourse.  The  word  translated 
things  means  literally  words,  sayings, 
and  hence  is  sometimes  used  for  tlie 
suliject-niatter  of  a  narration  or  dis- 
course. {See  10  :  37  ;  Luke  1  :  65  :  2  :  15,  19.)  Alld 

SO  is  also  the  Holy  Spirit — l)y  his 

special  gifts  conferred  upon  them  on 
the  day  of  Pentecost  (2:4;  io:4t-»(i;  i9:6; 
Mark  IK :  20),  such  as  Speaking  witli  tongues 
and  working  miracles ;  also  by  tlie  in- 
ward witness  atibrded  believers.   (Rom.  8 : 

16;  Oal.  4:6:1  John  3  :  24.)      "  SiuCC  the  Holy 

S)>irit  testified  to  the  gospel  in  both 
ways,  and  since  the  remark  here  is 
niKlualified,  we  have  no  reason  to  con- 
sider the  expression  less  e.xtt-nsive  than 
the  facts  in  the  ca.se."  (II.vckett.) 
Whom  God  hath  given  to  them 
that  obey  him — hence,  those  who  be- 
lieve on  Jesus  and  follow  him.  The 
Spirit  had  been  promised  them  (i:5) 
tliat  tiiey  might  testify  as  Christ's  wit- 
nesses. (JoUu  15 :  26. 27.)  "They  were  obey- 
ing God  (ver.  29)  in  testifying  concerning 
Jesus,  and  the  Spirit  through  theui  and 
with  tliem  corroborated  their  testinionv. 
33.  Theeffectof  this  address.  The'y 
were  cut  to  the  heart— literally, 
T/iey  were  saini  asunder,  that  is,  men- 
tally. They  were  greatly  irritated,  ex- 
asj)erated,  convulsed  with  rage.  The 
truth  nierces  the  lieart  with  what  difter- 
eiit  ettects.  On  tlie  day  of  Pentecost  it 
produced  sorrow  for  sin  (2  :  :!7) ;  here  it 
awakened  revengeful  wrath,  mingled 
j'crhaps  with  conscious  guilt.  Took 
counsel — were  taking  eoiinsel  how 
they  could  slay  them.  However 
much  they  might  jmrpose  to  slay,  to  do 
it  needed  "deliberation  ;  for  what  charge 
could  they  bring  against  them  ?  Not 
blasphemy,  for  the  apostles  had  spoken 
reverently.  Besides,  the  Roniau  gov- 
ernor aloiie  could  inflict  capital  punish- 
ment, and  neither  treason  nor  insurrec- 
ti(m  could  be  charged  against  any  of 
the  disciples.  The  Jewish  rulers  would 
also  dread  to  run  counter  to  public 


opinion,  which  was  strongly  in  favor 
of  the  apostles  (ver.  13, 26),  even  though 
their  rage  might  prompt  them  to  slay 
without  law. 

34.  "While  these  things  were  going 
on,  Gamaliel  interposed  couciliatoiy 
words.  He  was  a  Pharisee,  and  in 
symi)athy  with  the  doctrine  of  the  res- 
urrection preached  by  the  apo.stles,  and 
in  a  measure  not  in  sympathy  with  tlie 
Sadducees,  the  leaders  of  tliis  ])ersecu- 
tiou.  (See  note  on  4 : 1.)  The  Pliarisees 
originated  about  one  hundretl  and  fifty 
years  before  Christ,  aiul  were  noted 
for  their  rigid  observance  of  the  letter 
of  the  law  and  their  traditions.  Gama- 
liel was  also  a  doctor — teacher  and 
interpreter — of  the  laAV  of  Moses,  and 
of  the  traditions  or  oral  law.  The  same 
word  is  found  in  Luke  5  :  17 ;  1  Tim. 
1  :  7.  Had  in  reputation — honored 
— by  all  the  people  for  his  learning 
and  influence.  He  may  be  regarded  as 
the  people's  leader  and  reju-esentative 
in  the  Sanhedrin,  in  opjiosition  to  the 
persecuting  party.  Tlius  <iod  had  the 
man  to  helj)  the  apostles  at  tlie  rigiit 
time  and  jilace,  for  they  were  yet  to  be 
witnes.'ses  in  Judea,  Samaria,  and  to  the 
ends  of  tlie  earth.  (i:8)  Gamaliel  is 
said  to  have  been  of  the  rojal  line  of 
David  and  grandson  of  the  eminent 
Hillel,  of  whose  school  he  was  the  most 
distinguished  exponent.  "  From  the 
fragments  which  have  his  name  at- 
tached to  them,  we  see  that  (inmaliel 
was  endowed  with  great  intelkctual 
jiowers,  a  fondness  for  study  and  for 
definitely  settling  every  j)oint  of  diffi- 
culty, refined  taste,  and  good  judgment ; 
that  he  was  humane,  anxious  to  amelio- 
rate the  condition  of  the  li('li>]iss,  a 
.strict  Pharisee,  yet  liberal  minded,  and 
averse  to  persecute  those  who  diHered 
from  him.  .  .  .  His  mental  jiowi'is, 
ta.stes,  and  liberal-mindedness  may  be 
seen  from  the  fact  that  he  extended  his 
studies  to  Greek  literature,  and  infused 
into  the  minds  of  his  disciples  a  taste 
for  the  Greek  poets,  (n :  28 ;  i  cor.  is :  ss; 
Titus  1 :  12.)"  {Alexander's  Kitfo's  Cyelo- 
jpicdiu.)    He  was  the  teacher  of  Paul 


Cu.  v.] 


THE  ACTS. 


81 


35  put  the  apostles  forth  a  little  space ;  and 
said  unto  them,  Ye  men  of  Israel,  take 
heed  to  yourselves  what  ye  intend  to  do 

36  as  touching  these  men.    For  before  these 


(21:3),  and  was  tlie  first  one  to  whom 
the  title  "  Rahbaii,"  "our  ^faster,"  was 
given.  Tradition  makes  him  a  secret 
disciple  of  Jesus,  and  afterward  openly 
baptized  by  Peter  and  Paul ;  Init  of  tliis 
there  is  no  evidence,  and  it  appears 
improbable.  He  lived  about  ei,i,diteen 
years  after  this,  and  died  A.  D.  52.  He 
IS  to  be  distinguislied  from  his  grand.son 
of  the  same  name.  Commanded — 
an  authoritative  exhortation.  The  word 
thus  translated  here  and  in  4  :  15  usu- 
ally designates  verbal  orders,  commonly 
from  a  superior.  The  time  and  manner 
olf  giving  it  and  the  way  it  was  obeyed 
sliow  the  influence  of  Gamaliel  with 
the  Sanhedrin.  Peter  and  John  had 
had  the  same  experience  before,  (i :  i5.) 
A  little  space — rather,  a  little  ivhile. 

35.  And  said  unto  them.  Here 
follows  the  outline  of  his  speech.  Af- 
ter a  note  of  warning  of  i:)ossible  error 
and  danger  to  themselves,  addressed  to 
their  fears,  he  cites  two  historical  ex- 
amjjles  (rer.  36,37),  and  then  states  and 
applies  the  principle  of  action  to  the 
case  before  them.  The  speech  illustrates 
the  prudence  and  shrewdness  of  Gama- 
liel, and  is  in  this  respect  worthy  of  his 
reputation.  He  Itegins  by  ranking  the 
apostles  with  certain  impostors,  but 
ends  by  sviggestiug  that  their  work  may 
be  of  God.  What  ye  intend — tchat 
ye  are  about  to  do. 

36.  For  before  these  days  in- 
troduces a  reason  for  the  warning.  It 
was  not  a  new  tiling  for  impostors, 
fanatics,  and  seditionists  to  appear. 
For  there  rose  up  Theiidas.  This 
is  not  the  one  mentioned  by  Josephus 
(Antiq.,  20  :  5,  1),  and  beheaded  a.  d. 
45,  eleven  or  twelve  years  after  this ; 
for  the  Theudas  of  Gamaliel  had  com- 
l)aratively  few  adlierents,  wliile  the  one 
mentioned  by  Josephus  had  a  great 
"  company  of  people."  "  Since  Luke 
represents  Theudas  as  having  preceded 
Judas  the  Galilean,  it  is  certain  that  he 
could  not  have  apj^eared  later,  at  all 
events,  than  in  the  later  years  of  Herod 
the  Great.  The  very  year  of  that  mon- 
arch's death  was  remarkably  turbu- 
lent ;  the  land  was  overrun  with  bellig- 


days  rose  up  Theudas,  boasting  himself 
to  be  somebody  ;  to  whom  a  numlier  of 
men,  about  four  hundred,  joined  them- 
selves :  who  was  slain  ;  and  all,  as  many 


erent  parties,  nnder  the  direction  of 
insurrectionary  chiefs  or  fanatics.  Jo- 
sephus mentions  but  tbree  of  these  dis- 
turl^ers  by  name;  lie  jiasses  over  the 
others  with  a  general  allusion."  (Dk. 
Hackett,  Smith's  7>/f<(o?i«r!/.)  Theu- 
das may  have  been  among  these.  A 
person  of  little  note  and  small  follow- 
ing might  well  be  passed  over  at  such 
times.  The  name  Theudas  was  not  an 
uncommon  one,  and  it  is  not  strange  if 
two  insurgents  of  that  name  appeared 
within  a  space  of  tifty  years.  Josejiiius 
mentions  four  named  Simon  within 
forty  years,  and  three  named  Jndas 
within  ten  years,  who  were  all  leaders 
of  rebellion.  (See  Smith's  Dictionary 
for  this  and  other  ways  of  harmonizing 
Luke  and  Josephus.)  Boasting — j^ro- 
claiming  himself  to  be  somebody,  some 
important  one.  (See  the  fuller  expres- 
sion in  8:9.)  But  in  opposition  to 
this,  he  was  slain,  his  followers  were 
scattered  and  came  to  nothing. 

37.  After  Theudas,  Judas  of  Gal- 
ilee appeared.  Josephus  calls  him 
the  Gaulonite,  a  native  of  the  town  of 
Gamala,  and  also  styles  him  a  Galilean, 
his  education  or  his  usual  residence  be- 
ing in  Galilee.  At  the  time  of  the 
taxing,  or,  rather,  the  registering,  un- 
dertaken by  Cyrenius  (the  Greek  form 
of  Quirinus),  Judas  headed  an  insurrec- 
tion against  the  Roman  supremacy, 
calling  upon  his  countrymen  not  to 
submit  to  human  des])0tism,  and  claim- 
ing that  God  was  their  only  ruler  and 
Lord.  Large  numliers  flocked  to  his 
standard.  The  rebellion  was  suppressed, 
many  captured  and  crucified  by  the  Ro- 
mans. The  spirit  of  Jndas,  however, 
continued  to  manifest  itself  in  the  Zeal- 
ots and  Sicarii,  from  his  time  down  to 
the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  and  tlie 
scattering  of  the  Jewish  race.  (soe..u 
1:13.)  Luke  tells  us  that  Judas  per- 
ished ;  and  that  while  the  attempt  of 
Theudas  came  to  nothing,  the  followers 
of  Judas  were  only  dispersed,  an  inci- 
dental evidence  of  the  accuracy  of 
Luke's  record.  According  to  Josephus, 
after  the  banishment  of  Archelaus,  A.  D. 
6,  Cyreuius  became  governor  of  Syria, 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


ns    oJieyi^rl     him,    were     scattered,    and 

37  brought  to  nought.  After  this  man  rose 
up  .ludas  of  Galilee  in  the  days  of  the 
taxing,  and  drew  away  much  people  after 
him :  he  also  perished  ;  and  all,  eren.  as 
many   as    obeyed    him,   wei'e  aispersed. 

38  And  now  I  say  unto  you,  Uefraiu  from 
these  men,  and  let  them   alone:  ^ for  if 


this   counsel   or  this  work  he  of  men  it 

39  will  come  to  nought :  =  but  if  it  be  of  Godj 
ye  cannot  overthrow  it ;  lest  haply  ye  be 
found  even  Mo  tight  against  God. 

40  And  to  him  they  agreed;  and  when 
they  had  called  the  apostles,  "  and  beaten 
them,  they  commanded  that  they  should 
not  speak  in  the  name  of  Jesus,  and  let 


'  Prov.  21  :  30;  Isa.  7:5-7;  8  :  9,  10;  Lam.  3  :  37.        »  Job  34  :  29;  Isa.  43  :  13  ;  Luke  21 :  15. 
'  ch.  23  :  9 ;  Isa.  45  :  !(.        ^  Matt.  23  :  34 ;  Mark  13  :  9. 


Jinlca  was  converted  into  a  Roman 
province  witli  a  view  of  taxation,  and 
the  enrollment  which  excited  the  oppo- 
sition here  related  was  undertaken  or 
comi)leted.  (Josei)hus'  Ant.,  18  :  1,6; 
20  :  o,  2;  Jewish  War,  2:8,  1.)  This 
enrollment  is  to  be  distinguished  from 
that  mentioned  in  Luke  2  :  2,  on  which 
see  Author's  note. 

38.  And  now — as  respects  the  case 
in  liand.  Gamaliel  proceeds  to  apply 
the  principle  deduced  from  the  two  ex- 
amples given.  Refrain  from  these 
men — attempt  not  to  slay  them,  as  you 
propose.  For  introduces  the  reason 
for  such  advice.  If  this  counsel, 
or  ]>urpo)ie,  and  the  execution  ofit, 
should  be  of  men,  without  regard  to 
God  and  in  defiance  of  liim,  it  Avill 
come  to  nou§;ht — literally,  it  will 
ilii^so/re,  like  many  fanatical  niove- 
nients  in  the  p;ist,  without  any  inter- 
ference on  your  part.  "  The  ex])ression 
is  peculiarly  ap])ro]>riate  to  that  inter- 
nal dissolution  which,  even  in  the  ab- 
sence of  all  outward  force,  awaits  every 
system  of  religious  faith  which  lias  a 
merely  human  origin."  (Di;.  J.  A. 
Alexander.)  Gamaliel  is  not  sj)eak- 
ing  of  all  enterprises  in  general,  many 
of  which  should  be  stopped  by  law  ;  Init 
of  religious  movements,  and  this  in 
particular,  wliieh  was  either  of  men  or 
of  God,  which  must  eventually  either 
stanil  or  fall. 

31).  But  if  it  be,  etc. — but  if  it  is 
of  Ooil,  a  case  which  I  a.ssume,  ye 
cannot,  rather,  according  to  the  most 
approved  text,  yc  will  not  be  able,  by 
anything  that  ye  may  do  to  these 
men  or  to  their  followers,  to  over- 
throw it,  and  indeed  ye  ought  not  to 
attempt  it,  lest  haply  ye  be  found 
even  to  be  JightiiKj  against  God,  and 
thus  guilty  of  rebellion  against  him. 
Neauder  reuuirks  that  Gamaliel  "on 
the  one  hand  had  a  clear  conception  of 


the  fact  that  fanatical  movements  are 
generally  rendered  more  violent  by  op- 
position, and  tluit  what  is  insignificant 
is  often  raised  into  importance  by  for- 
cible attempts  to  supjiress  it.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  nianne)'  in  which  tlie 
a])ostles  spoke  and  acted  must  have 
made  some  impression  on  a  man  not 
wholly  prejudiced  ;  while  their  exact 
observance  of  the  law,  and  their  hostile 
attitude  toward  Sadduceeism,  must 
have  disposed  him  more  t<trongly  in 
their  favor,  and  hence  the  thought 
might  have  arisen  in  his  mind  that, 
after  all,  there  was  something  divine  in 
the  cause  they  advocated."  {Planting 
and  Training,  p.  46.)  It  has  l)eeu  said 
that  the  i-easoning  of  Gamaliel  was  fal- 
lacious and  temporizing.  But  it  fitted 
his  audience  and  tlie  occasion  and  ac- 
complislied  tlie  end  lie  bad  in  view.  And 
it  is  true  that  ultinuitely  God's  cause 
shall  ])revail  over  all  ojiposition,  and 
that  every  false  system  of  religious  be- 
lief will  come  to  nought,  ilohammed- 
aism  nijiy  thrive,  and  religious  errors 
may  fioiirish,  but  their  end  draweth 
nigh,  (i  Peter  2 :  i-:i.)  Thcv  will  be  over- 
come, not  by  physical  force,  or  the  power 
of  civil  laws,  but  liy  the  power  of  truth, 
and  the  glory  of  Christ. 

40.  To  him  they  astrced — rather, 
tlteji  were  persuaded  by  him.  They 
yielded  so  far  as  not  to  kill  tlie  ai)ostles. 
The  great  power  of  Gamaliel's  influ- 
ence and  persuasiveness  is  seen  in  the 
fact  that  Sadducean  Iciidership  and 
murderous  rage  should  yield  to  a  Phar- 
isee counselling  forbearance.  Notwith- 
standing, the  rulers  determined  to 
j)uiiish,  in  some  way,  the  disobedience 
of  the  apostles  (ver.  ax),  iuul  thus  carry 
out  their  previous  tlireats.  (4: 17.21.) 
Beaten  them.  Tlie  Greek  verb 
originally  meant  to  flay,  in  which  sense 
it  is  never  used  in  the  New  Testament, 
where  it  meaus  to  beat,  smite,  scourge. 


Ch.  v.] 


THE  ACTS. 


83 


41  them  go.  And  they  departed  from  the 
presence  of  the  council,  »  rejoicing  that 
they  were  counted  worthy  to  suflTer  shame 


42  for  his  name.  And  daily  in  the  temple, 
and  in  every  house,  y  they  ceased  not  to 
teach  and  preach  Jesus  Christ. 


»  ch.  IG  :  23-25 ;  Matt.  5  :  10-1-2 ;  2  Cor.  12  :  10 ;  Heb.  10  :  34 ;  1  Peter  4  :  13-lG.        J  ch.  9  :  20; 

29 ;  17  :  3. 


Its  use  may  be  seen  in  the  following 

passa^'es  :  (^6  -.  37  ;  T>  -.  19,  Luke  Vi  :  47  ;  20  :  10  ; 
i-l :  m  ;    John   18  :  21! ;    2   Cor.    11  ;  20  ;    Mark    13  :  «.) 

The  apostles  probal)ly  received  the 
Jewish  scourge,  and  not  the  more 
cruel  Roman  scourge  which  was  in- 
flicted on  Jesus.  See  Matt.  27  :  26, 
Mark  15  :  Ij,  where  a  different  word  is 
used,  and  Luke  18  :  33  where  still 
an  other  word  is  employed,  found  also 
in  Acts  22  :  25.  Beating  w-ds  a  common 
])unishment  among  the  Jews.  It  was 
very  likely  borrowed  from  the  Egypt- 
ians, who  used  the  bastinado  either  on 
the  feet  or  back.  The  Jewish  scourg- 
ing consisted  of  blows  upon  the  back 
with  a  rod  or  whip.  "  It  was  limited 
to  forty  stripes — a  number  which  the 
Jews  in  later  times  were  so  careful  not 
to  exceed,  that  they  inflicted  only  thirty- 
nine.  (-'Cof.  11 :  24.)  It  was  to  be  in- 
flicted on  the  ofiender  lying  on  the 
ground,  in  the  presence  of  a  judge. 
(Deut.  22 :  w ;  25 : 2, 3.)  Wc  havc  al)undant 
evidence  that  it  was  an  ancient  Egypt- 
ian punishment."  (Alexander's  Kitto's 
Cyclopedia.)      Commanded      them 

not,  etc.       (See  on  4:  17,  IH.)        ThisSeCOlul 

command  was  to  prove  as  vain  as  the 
first,  and  the  Sanhedrin  was  placed  in 
an  unenviable  light. 

41.  Rejoicing.  Remembering  the 
teaching  of  their  Lord :  "  Hai)i)y  are 
ye,  when  they  shall  revile  and  persecute 
you."  (Matt.  5 :  10-12.)  Joy  was  a  promi- 
nent characteristic  of  the  early   dis-  i 

Ciples.         (2   :  46;  .4  :  24,  :;i.)         COUUted 

worthy  to  sufler  shame.  A  choice 
union  of  words  of  opposite  meaning,  a 
wonderful  paradox — the  honor  of 
being  dishonored !  We  catch  here  tlie 
first  view  of  the  martyr  spirit  in  tlie 
early  church,  esteeming  it  a  privilege 
to  suffer  for  Christ,  (pmi.  i  :  29.)  No  one 
can  attentively  read  tlie  first  epistle  of 
Peter  and  compare  it  with  this  passage 
without  recognizing  the  subdued  yet 
hopeful  and  rejoicing  spirit  of  one  who 
had  experienced  the  sorrows  and  joys 
of  the  fiery  trials  through  whicli  he 

had  passed.      (See  1  Peter  3  :  1318;   4  :  I,  2, 


12-19.)  For  his  name — rather, /or  the 
name,  which  they  had  been  forbidden 
to  teach,  which  to  them  was  more  than 
all  other  names,  the  name  by  which 
they  wrouglit  miracles  and  by  which 
alone  men  could  be  saved,  the  name 
aliove  every  name  that  is  named.    (1  tii 

2  ;  9,  10  ,  Epb.  1  :  21  ;  Heb.  1:4.)        ScC    1    Pctef 

4  :  IG,  Avhere  the  ajiostle  speaks  alxmt 
suffering  as  a  Christian. 

43.  They  do  that  which  they  were 
commanded  not  to  do.  (v,r.  4i;  4:  i8.) 
Daily  in  the  temple  and  in  every 
house— //■(>/;(,  house  to  hoinse,  or  at 
home.  (See  note  on  tliese  words  in  2  : 
46.)  They  labored  publicly,  privately, 
personally,  and  perseveringly.  Wliat 
they  did :  teaching  and  preaching. 
The  two  methods  are  here  distin- 
guished. By  the  one  they  addressed 
the  understanding,  expounding  and 
instructing  concerning  the  great  truths 
of  .lesus  as  the  Messiah,  (is :  ii ;  -a  -.  si ; 
15:35.)  By  the  other,  events,  facts,  and 
truths  are  procluinied  as  good  news  and 
of  public  importance.  They  preached 
Jesus  Christ,  the  good  news  of  Jesus 
the  Christ.  Preaching  here  in  the 
original  is  a  joyous  word,  and  a  favor- 
ite one  with  Liikeaud  Paul,  ))eing  used 
only  six  times  by  the  other  writers  of 
the  New  Testament.     (.Matt,  n  :5,  i  Peter 

1  :  12,  25  :  4  :  6  ;  Rev.  10  :  7  ;  U  :  6.)     FrOUl    it  are 

derived  our  words  evangelize,  evangel- 
ists.     (See  Luke  2  :  10 ;  4  :  18  ;  9  :  6 ;  Kom.  10  :"  15.) 

xVnother  word  translated  preach  or 
herald,  is  used  in  8  :  5,  and  fretiuently 
throughout  the  New  Testament.  It  is 
used  in  the  last  commi.ssion  (Mark  ifi  :  16", 
with  gospel,  or  the  good  news,  being 
tlie  noun  of  the  A'erb  above,  wliile  in 
tlie  commission  in  Matt.  28  :  20  teaching 
is  found.  The  latter  being  u.sed  espe- 
cially of  the  instruction  of  believers. 

Young  men  and  the  chukch. 
Young  people  want  work,  and  pastors 
and  churches  should  give  them  some- 
thing to  do.  Otherwise  they  will  throw 
their  energies  into  other  enterjjrises 
and  outside  channels.  The  apostles 
and  the  church  at  Jerusalem  had  their 


84 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  V. 


young  men  ready  for  service,  (s :  6,  lo.) 
Paul  sought  out  Timothy  at  Lystra, 
aud  selected  him  as  an  atteudaut, 
(i6:i-;i.)  Jesus  too  chose  the  twelve 
from  young  men.  And  the  beloved 
disciple,  near  the  close  of  his  life,  said, 
"  I  have  written  unto  you,  young  men, 
because  ye  are  strong."  (iJohu'2:i4.) 
Christianity  is  hopeful  and  cheerful 
and  is  thus  especially  adapted  to  youth. 
It  gives  opportunity,  and  the  young 
can  find  no  where  else  work  so  noble 
and  so  glorious  in  results  There 
siiould  be  a  mutual  co-ojieration  and 
helpfulness  between  the  older  and 
younger  members  of  our  churches. 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  What  a  contrast  was  Ananias  to  Barna.- 
bas!  "Where  there  is  light  there -will  also 
be  a  shadow.  Where  God  builds  a  church 
the  devil  builds  a  chapel  by  its  side." 
(Lechler.)  (Ver.  1 ;  John  6 :  70 ;  Matt.  13 : 
24-30.) 

2.  There  are  those  who  still  "  keep  back 
part  of  the  price  "  They  profess  to  give  up 
all  to  Christ,  yet  live  unmindful  of  their 
vows.    (Ver.  2 ;  Mai.  3  :  8-10.) 

3.  Lying  and  hypocrisy  will  sooner  or 
later  be  detected.  (Ver.  3;  .Ter.  17:10;  1 
Chron.  28  :  9 ;  Rev.  2 :  2:j ;  21:8.) 

4.  Satan  may  tempt  men  to  sin,  yet  the 
sin  is  their  own.  lie  cannot  enter  and  take 
possession  of  their  hearts  without  their  per- 
mission. (Ver.  ,?,  4;  John  8:44;  13:27; 
James  4 :  7 ;  1  Peter  5 :  9.) 

5.  Beneficence  should  be  exercised  volun- 
tarily and  cheerfully,  as  unto  God.  (Ver.  4; 
Ps.  ^0 :  10-14  ;  2  Cor.  9  :  7.) 

6.  Sinners  may  well  tremble  before  God, 
in  whose  hands  are  their  lives  and  breaths. 
(Ver.  5,  10 ;  Deut.  4 :  24 ;  Gal.  6  :  7  ;  2  Peter 
2:3.) 

7.  It  is  not  upon  the  dead  body,  but  upon 
the  living  soul  that  punishment  is  to  be 
executed.    (Ver.  6,  7  ;  Ezek.  18  :  4, 18.) 

8.  A  sin  under  the  excitement  of  the 
moment  is  bad  enough ;  but  deliberately 
planned  transgression  is  greatly  more  aggra- 
vated.    (Ver.  8,  9  ;  Micah  2:1.) 

9.  Marriage  is  perverted  when  it  contrilv 
ntes  to  partnership  in  sin.  (Ver.  9 ;  Deut.  7  : 
3,4;  Heb.  13:4.) 

10.  "As  Cain  stands  at  the  very  threshold 
of  human  history,  as  a  warning  against  un- 


der-valuing man's  life,  so  Anaui.-is  stands  at 
the  threshold  of  the  Christian  Church,  as  a 
warning  against  insincerity  toward  God, 
and  undervaluing  his  holiness."  (Dr. 
ScH*FK.)    (Ver.  10 ;  Gen.  3  :  9-1.5.) 

11.  God's  judgments  should  awaken  a  holy 
fear,  and  lead  to  watchfulness  and  search- 
ings  of  heart.    (Ver.  11 ;  Heb.  12 :  25-29.) 

12.  Though  God  brings  judgments  upon 
the  ungodly,  he  will  not  turn  away  from  the 
cry  of  the  needy.  (Ver.  12 ;  Ps.  72  :  12 ;  Hab. 
3:2.) 

13.  The  judgments  of  God  are  used  by  the 
Spirit  both  for  deterring  hypocrites  and 
multiplying  true  converts.  Proper  discipline 
tends  to  healthfulness  and  increase  of  the 
church.  (Ver.  13,  14 ,  ch.  13:12;  Ps.  55 : 
22,23.) 

14.  Christianity  has  elevated  woman  to 
her  projjer  place  and  sphere  by  the  side  of 
man.  "  The  present  childish  seclusion  of 
women,  their  complete  separation  from  all 
public  society  in  the  East,  is  a  fair  represen- 
tation of  the  existence  which  they  led  in  all 
the  Oriental  kingdoms  before  the  days  of 
Christ."  (Dr.  J.  S.  HowsON.)  (Ver.  14; 
21  :  9 ;  Phil.  4  :  3.) 

15.  God  often  accomplishes  his  work  by 
the  weakest  means,— as  by  "  the  shadow  of 
Peter."  (Ver.  15  ;  1  Cor.  1 :  26-29 ;  Matt.  9  : 
21,  22.) 

16.  In  Christ  and  his  gospel  there  is  a  full 
supply  for  all  who  seek  bis  saving  power. 
(Ver.  16 ;  John  6  :  37  ;  James  5:14,  15.) 

17.  It  is  better  for  God's  people  that  bless- 
ings and  trials  alternate.  Thereby  humility 
faith,  patience,  and  purity  are  the  better  de- 
veloped. (Ver.  17,  18  ;  Rom  5 : 3-5 ;  2  Cor. 
4  :  17  ;  1  Peter  4  :  12.) 

IS.  When  Christ  wills,  prison  bolts  are  aa 
nothing  before  him.  (Ver  18, 19  ;  John  20  : 
19  :  26.) 

19.  A  divine  "  but "  often  disconcerts  the 
plans  of  men,  and  brings  to  nought  the 
devices  of  Satan.  (Ver.  19,  22,  34;  Gen. 
50 :  20.) 

20.  Duty  performed  in  danger  is  better 
than  safety  with  duty  neglected.  (Ver.  20, 
21;  John  3:  2,  3.) 

21.  God  sometimes  delivers  us  from  one 
danger,  in  order  to  prepare  and  strengthen 
us  for  another.  (Ver.  19-26 ;  1  Kings  19  : 
13-18.) 

22.  Wicked  men  dread  the  light  of  truth. 
The  Jewish  rulers  do  not  ask  the  apostlee 


Ch.  VI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


85 


Appointment   of  Alms-Distributers ;   growing 

prosperity. 

6      AND  In  those  days,  when  the  number 


of  the  disciples  was  multiplied,  there 
arose  a  murmuring  of  the  'Grecians 
against  the  Hebrews  because  their  wid- 
ows were  neglected  "in  the  daily  ministra/- 


:ch.  9  :  29;  11  :  20. 

how  they  escaped.  They  wish  no  more  tes- 
timony of  miraculous  deliverances.  (Ver. 
22-24;  John  3: 19,  20.) 

2.3.  Sinners  need  not  be  in  doubt  or  per- 
plexed regarding  the  truth.  Both  external 
and  internal  evidence  accompany  "  the 
words  of  this  life."  (Ver.  20-25 ;  John  7:17; 
14:11,12.) 

24.  Christianity  recognizes  civil  authority, 
and  enjoins  obedience  to  all  just  laws  and 
respect  for  all  in  authority.  (Ver.  26,  'SI ;  25 : 
11;  Rom.  13:  1-7.) 

25.  Godliness  makes  heroes ;  wickedness 
makes  cowards.    (Ver.  26 ;  Prov.  28  : 1.) 

26.  The  motives  of  good  men  are  often 
misjudged.  The  apostles  wished  the  salva- 
tion of  the  Jewish  rulers,  not  their  destruc- 
tion.    (Ver.  28,  31 ;  21 :  28.) 

27.  "  Moral  heroism  reached  its  climax 
when  Peter  and  his  fellow  apostles  said  : '  We 
ought  to  obey  God  rather  than  men.'  "  (Dr. 
J.  M.  Pendleton.)     (Ver.  29 ;  Matt.  10:  28.) 

28.  Jesus  is  sent  from  God  and  should  be 
welcomed  to  our  hearts.  (Ver.  30;  John  3  : 
2 ;  Rev.  3  :  20.) 

29.  Jesus  is  Prince  and  Saviour.  We 
should  therefore  honor  and  obey  him.  (Ver. 
31 ;  Rom.  6  :  16,  17  :  Heb.  9  :  9.) 

30.  Human  and  divine  agency  unite  in  the 
work  of  salvation.  Repentance  and  faith  are 
both  gifts  of  God,  yet  human  acts.  (Ver. 
31 ;  Phil.  2  ;  12, 13.) 

31.  The  Holy  Spirit  bears  witness  to  the 
hearts  and  consciences  of  men  for  Christ  and 
his  salvation.  (Ver.  32 ;  John  16  :  8-10 ;  Rom. 
8:  16;  Heb.  10:15,16.) 

32.  Gospel  preaching  awakens  repentance 
and  leads  to  forgiveness,  or  awakens  opposi- 
tion, remorse,  or  anger,  and  leads  to  increased 
guilt.    (Ver.  33;  2  Cor.  2:16.) 

33.  When  God  has  a  work  to  be  done  he 
has  some  one  to  do  it.  (Ver.  34 ;  Judg.  2  :  16 ; 
3 :  9,  15.) 

34.  Contrast  the  false  prophet  with  the 
true.  The  one  rises  up  of  himself,  the  other 
is  raised  up  of  God  (3  :  22) ;  that  one  "  boasts 
himself  to  be  some  one,"  this  one  ascribes 
the  honor  to  the  Lord  (3  :  12-16) ;  the  former 
"  draws  much  people  "  after  himself,  the  lat- 
ter leads  men  to  God  (ver.  31) ;  these  perish 


'ch.  2  :45;  4  :  S.'i. 


with  their  own  delusions  (Jude  13),  those  live 
to  shine  as  the  stars  forever.  (Ver.  36,  37  ; 
Dan.  12:3.) 

35.  It  is  impossible  to  be  neutral  in 
Christ's  cause.     (Ver.  38-40 ;  Matt.  12  :  30.) 

36.  If  the  opinion  of  Gamaliel  is  just,  then 
surely  Christianity  is  from  God,  for  it  has 
stood  the  test  of  eighteen  centuries,  living 
without  arms  or  human  power,  overcoming 
external  opposition  and  persecution,  and  in- 
fernal treachery  and  secret  foes,  and  increas- 
ing in  spite  of  all  the  devices  of  Satan  and 
wicked  men.    (Ver.  39.) 

37.  To  fight  against  God  is  an  act  of  su- 
preme folly  and  wickedness.  (Ver.  39 ;  Neh. 
1 : 3,  6.) 

38.  The  wicked  will  oppo.se  the  gospel  just 
so  far  as  their  selfish  interests  and  circum- 
stances will  permit.     (Ver.  40 ;  Jer.  3  :  5.) 

39.  Faithfulness  to  Christ  often  requires 
'  resistance  unto  blood,'  but  its  reward  is  the 
crown  of  life.    (Ver.  41,42;  Rev.  2:9-11.) 

40.  It  is  an  honor  to  be  partners  of  Jesus 
whether  in  suffering  or  in  glory.  (Ver.  41 ;  1 
Peter  4 :  14-16.) 

41.  The  apostles  are  an  example,  who  for- 
got themselves  and  their  sufferings,  and  con- 
stantly preached  Jesus,  the  Christ.  (Ver. 
42 ;  2  Cor.  4 :  5.) 

Ch.  6  :  During  thi.s  period  of  pros- 
perity a  difference  arises  in  the  church, 
in  consequence  of  which  seven  men  are 
chosen  to  attend  to  tlie  distrihution  of 
alms.  Stephen,  one  of  the  seven,  dis- 
tinguishes himself  in  his  work,  and  be- 
comes involved  in  a  controversy  with 
certain  foreign  Jews,  who  bring  him 
before  the  Sanhedrin  with  the  charge 
of  blasphemy.  The  time  of  these  occur- 
rences may  be  put  down  as  near  the 
end  of  A.  D.  .S3  or  early  in  a.  d.  34. 

1-7.  The  Appointment  op  Alms 
distribptors  in  the  church  at 
Jerusalem,    (see  i  Tim.  3 :  s-is ;  4 :  u-ie ;  5 

9,  10.) 

1.  In  those  days.  In  these  days 
of  faithful  labor  just  recorded  (ri : «), 
the  disciples — a  favorite  term  in  The 
Acts  for  those  who  confessed  that  Jesus 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VI. 


2  lion.  Then  the  twelve  called  the  multi- 
tude of  the  disciples  unlo  them,  and  said, 
>>  It  la  not  reason  that  we  should  leave 


the     word    of   God    and    serve    tables. 

3  Wherefore,  brethren, « look  ye  out  aLoong 

you  seven  men  of  honest  report,  lull  of 


»>  Neh.  6  :  3 ;  1  Tim.  4  :  14-lf) ;  ^  Tim.  2  :  4. 


'  Duut.  1  :  13 ;  1  Tim.  3  :  7-10. 


was  the  Christ  (ver.  2, 7 ;  9 : 1), — having 
multiplied,  numbered  ])robably  not  less 
than  ten  thousand.  (4:-t;5:if.)  The 
events  here  recorded  are  closely  con- 
nected with  the  history  of  Stephen,  and 
must  have  covered  a  short  period,  of  a 
few  weeks  or  months,  before  his  death. 
There  arose  a  murmuring,  imply- 
ing that  it  was  a  new  tiling ;  a  iiiutttr- 
ing,  a  suppressed  dissatisfaction  ajid 
discontent  which  were  making  them- 
selves felt  in  words  and  acts.  Of  the 
Grecians  against  the  HebrcAvs. 
The  former  were  the  converts  from  the 
foreign  or  Grecian  Jews,  called  Hellen- 
ists, who  spoke  the  Greek  language  and 
used  the  Septuagint,  tlie  (jreek  version 
of  the  Old  Testament.  They  were  also 
called  the  Disjiersion.  ( John  7  ■.  .'ss ;  jamos 
1 : 1;  1  Peter  1 : 1.)  The  Jlihrev's  werc  na- 
tives of  Palestine  and  others  who  used 
the  Hebrew  Scriptures  and  spoke  the 
Aramten,  the  dialect  of  the  Hebrew 
then  current.  This  difiereuce,  not  of 
race,  but  of  language,  ap])ears  to  have 
given  rise  to  jealousy  and  party  spirit, 
though  not  thus  early  to  a  difference  of 
faith  and  practice  in  tlie  cluirch.  Some 
among  the  Hebrews  became  tlie  .Tuda- 
izers  a  few  years  later,  (ij :  1.)  From 
the  fact  that  "  Nicolas,  a  proselyte  of 
Aiitioch,"  was  chosen  as  one  of  the 
seven  (ver.  r,)^  it  may  be  inferred  that 
some  ])rosolytes  were  jiopularly  in- 
cluded among  those  here  styled  Grecian 
Jews.  Widows  under  tlie  Mosaic  law 
were  not  provided  for,  but  were  de- 
pendent upon  relatives,  and  especially 
upon  the  eldest  son,  ytt  they  were 
special  objects  of  compassion.     (Exod.  22 : 

22;  Deut.  10:  In  ;   Ua.  1  :  17  ;   Ji-r.  7  :  «  ;  Zech.  7  :  10.) 

The  early  Christian  Church  made  cer- 
tain provision  for  widows,  esjiecially 
for  those  who  had  been  faithful  to  one 
husband  and  had  devoted  their  better 
days  to  family  duties  and  good  works, 
and  had  reached  the  age  of  sixty. 
(1  Tim.  5:3-5, 9. 10.)  Were  neglected— 
not  intentionally,  but  probaldy  from 
the  fact  that  these  women  were  less 
known  and  had  no  relatives  to  report 
their  necessities.    The  language  implies 


that  it  was  common.  In  the  daily 
ministration — in  the  distrilmtion  of 
food,  and  perhaps  souietiuies  of  money, 
which  was  daily  made  from  the  com- 
mon supply.  (4 :  ,)5.)  Tlie  apostles  had 
superintended  this,  and  probably  had 
called  others  to  aid  them  as  it  might  be 
necessaiy,  and  this  also  may  in  part 
account  for  the  partial  manner  in  which 
the  work  was  done. 

2.  The  tAvelve— the  apostles,  in- 
cluding Matthias,  showing  that  the 
choice  of  the  latter  to  the  apostleship 
was  valid,  (.seeoni :  26.)  Called  the 
multitude  of  the  disciples — the 
whole  body  of  believers.  All  were  in- 
vited, but  it  is  not  necessary  to  suppose 
that  all  came.  Many  would  be  kept  at 
home,  and  many  foreign  Jews  had  left 
the  city.  It  was  a  i)ul)lic  meeting  of 
the  church,  and  all  could  eome  who  de- 
sired. It  would  seem  tliat  the  church 
did  not  regularly  meet  as  a  wliole,  but, 
being  large,  had  several  meeting-places 
at  the  same  time.  Yet  when  a  matter 
was  to  be  decided  every  one  had  a  right 
to  take  part  in  the  decision.  The  apos- 
tles prescribe  the  mode  of  action,  as  in 
the  election  of  Matthias  (1 -.  i.vifi),  and 
refer  the  matter  to  the  body  of  believers 
for  their  determination.  It  is  not 
reason,  etc. — literally,  Forsdking  the 
vord  of  God  to  serve  tables  is  vot  p/eas- 
ing  to  vs.  It  was  not  pleasing  to  them, 
nor  to  God,  that  they  should  aliaiidon 
the  ])reachiiig  of  the  gospel,  in  order 
to  minister  at  tables,  taking  care  of  and 
distrilmting  the  things  neces.saiy  to  sus- 

!  tain  life.  (Luke8:3;  le  :34.)  From  the 
Greek  verb  to  serve,  our  word  deacon  is 
derived.  The  apostles,  here  and  in  the 
next  two  verses,  contrast  the  higher 
work  of  feeding  and  taking  s])iritual 
charge  of  souls  witli  furnishing  food  for 
tlie  i)ody  and  sujiplying  the  ijhysical 
wants  of  the  poor. 

3.  Brethren,  of  the  church,  look 
ye  out  from  among  you.  The  choice 
was  to  be  made  by  the  members  of  the 
church,  and  from  among  themselves. 
Seven  men  of  honest  report — seven 
approved  men,  of  attested   character. 


Cir.  VL] 


THE  ACTS. 


87 


the  Holy  Spirit  and  wisdom,  whom  we 
4  may  appoint  over  this  husincss.    But  we 
<"  will  givfe  ourselves  continually  to  prayer, 
and  to  the  ministry  of  the  word. 


5  And  the  saying  pleased  the  whole 
multitude:  and  tney  chose  Stephen,  a 
man  full  of  faith  and  of  the  Holy  .Spirit, 
aud    « Philip,    and    I'rochorus,   and   Ki- 


ii  ch.  2  :  42 ;  1  Tim.  4  :  13 ;  2  Tim.  4:2.        •  ch.  8  :  rt-Vi,  20-40 ;  21  :  8. 


Why  scveyi  were  chosen  is  unknown. 
Different  reasons  have  been  assigned, 
such  as  that  the  church  was  divided 
into  seven  congregations,  or  that  seven 
nations  were  represented  in  it.  Prob- 
ably it  was  because  as  many  as  seven 
were  needed  for  tlie  work ;  and  seven, 
also,  was  a  number  having  sacred  asso- 
ciations. It  is  worthy  olf  notice  that 
the  early  churches,  for  two  or  three  cent- 
uries, observed  the  number  sfroi  in  the 
selection  of  deacons,  thus  following  as 
their  model  the  account  here  given. 
Full  of  the  Holy  Spirit.  Ho/i/  is 
omitted  by  the  higlu^st  critical  authori- 
ties. Literally,  fit//  of  Spirit,  impreg- 
nated, as  it  were,  witii  the  Spirit.  They 
were  to  be  under  the  iiilUien(^e  aud  en- 
joy the  personal  abiding  of  tiie  Spirit 
of  God,  such  as  they  needed  for  the  dis- 
charge of  the  special  duties  of  the  oflice, 
perha]is  also  his  extraordinary  super- 
natural endowments.  Wisdom^abil- 
ity  to  act  discreetly  in  all  emergencies. 
They  would  need  to  be  "  wise  as  ser- 
pents." Whom  we  may  appoint — 
or,  set,  over ;  the  apostles  will  confirm 
the  choice  of  the  church.  This 
business — or,  this  necessity  which 
had  arisen  in  the  church.  A  similar 
necessity  was  to  continue  in  the  Chris- 
tian church,  though  under  different 
circumstances,  and  hence  what  here 
seemed  to  be  a  local  and  perhaps  tem- 
porary expedient,  became  a  permanent 
ottice,  that  of  deacon,  in  the  churches. 
(Phil.  1 : 1 ;  1  Tim.  :i :  8.)  These  ofiiccrs  of 
the  Jerusalem  chiii-ch  appear  to  have  j 
been  styled,  "The  Seven"  by  way  of  j 
pre-eminence  and  with  reference  to 
their  original  number.  (■-'i:t.)  The 
office  in  other  churches,  which  this  first 
appointment  appears  to  have  originated, 
was  called  Deacon,  from  tlie  word  de- 
noting their  service.  Their  qualifica- 
tions, mentioned  by  Paul  (l  Tim.:t  :8i:)), 
are  similar  to  those  here  given.  In 
hierarchical  churches  deacons  constitute 
tlie  third  order  of  clerical  officers,  and 
are  empowered  to  preach  and  bajitize. 
But  "  the  seven  "  were  choseu  to  the 


service  of  tables  in  distinction  from 
preaching  the  word.  And  in  the  quali- 
fications prescribed  by  Paul  "  aptness 
to  teach  "  is  omitted,  and  those  quali- 
ties are  euij)hasized  which  esjjecially  fit 
for  secular  duties.  Philij),  it  is  true, 
preached  and  baptized,  but  it  cannot 
be  shown  tliat  he  did  this  as  a  deacon, 
for  he  was  an  evangelist,  (a :  4-40 ;  21 :  n.) 
Deaconesses  appear  also  to  have  ex- 
isted in  some  churches.  (Rom.  I6  :  1 ;  1  Tim. 
3:  u;  Phil. 4:3.)  While  the  church  was 
in  a  certain  sense  a  growth,  it  was  a 
growtli  under  divine  direction.  The 
a])ostles  were  iusi)ired  to  develop  the 
order  and  the  organization  of  the 
church  (John  i«:  13),  and  the  Acts  and 
the  ejiistles  make  it  ])lain  that  it  and 
its  ordinances  had  a  m  cll-defined  form 

and  order.  (U  :  23  ;  15  :  «  r. ;  Uom.  1;  :3  ;  1  Cor. 
U  :  2,  20-34;  1  Tim.  3  :I  f. ;  Titus  1  :  5.) 

4.  But  we,  on  our  part,  Avill  give 
ourselves  continually,  that  is,  give 

constant  attention  to  prayer,  public, 
and  especially  private.  Peter's  long 
continued  prayer  on  the  roof  at  Jop])a 
is  a  commentary  on  this.  (10 : 9, 10.)  See 
Paul's  reference  in  his  epistles  to  his 
almost  ceaseless  prayers  in  behalf  f)f 
his  brethren  in  dif}"erent  churches.  ( Rom. 

10:  9;  1  Cor.l  :  4-8;    Eph.lilC;   Phil. 1:3;    Col.  1: 

3 ;  1  Thess.  1 :  2.)  In  Pcter's  two  cpistlcs 
we  have  an  example  of  his  ministry, 
or  service,  of  the  word,  rather  than 
of  prayer.  As  the  seven  were  to  be 
7n/inisters,  or  deacons,  at  the  tables,  so 
they,  the  apostles,  wouLl  be  ^ninistcrs 
or  deacons  of  the  word,  j)reaching  pub- 
licly and  from  house  to  house.  (20 :  20, 21 . ) 

5.  And  the  saying,  tlie  speech 
proposing  the  plan,  pleased  the 
whole  multitude,  was  unanimously 
adopted  by  tlie  church.  Stephen 
means  a  crown,  especially  of  a  con- 
queror, a  fitting  name  for  the  first 
Christian  martyr.  It  has  been  inferred 
from  the  fact  that  all  the  seven  have 
Greek  names  that  they  all  belonged  to 
the  Hellenist  or  Grecian  Jewish  party, 
but  this,  though  very  probable,  is  un- 
certain.   After  the  time  of  Alexander 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  TI. 


canor,  and  Timon,  and  Parmenas,  and 
6  Nicolas  a  proselyte  of  Antioch ;  whom 
they  set  before  the  apostles  ;  and  f  when 
they  had  prayed,  s  they  laid  their  hauds 
on  them. 


7  And  •>  the  word  of  God  increased  ;  and 
the  number  of  the  disciples  uiultiplied  in 
Jerusalem  greatly  ;  and  a  great  company 
'of  the  priests  were  obedient  to  the  faith. 


»ch.l:21.        Bch.  8  :17;9:  17;  13  :3;lTim.4:14;5  :  22.        i>  ch.  12  :  24.       i  John  12 :  42. 


Greek  names  among  the  Jews    were  [ 
common,  and  were  Ijorne  l)y  two  of  the 
apostles.     Stephen  and  Philip  are  the 
only    members    of    the    seven    again  I 
mentioned  in  the  New  Testament,  and  [ 
of  the  others  nothing  further  is  known. 
Full  ol'laith  and  the  Holy  Spirit. 
See  on  ver.  3,  where  instead  oi  faith  is 
wisdom.     But    faith    is  a  foundation 
grace,  and  wisdom  or  spiritual  i^rudeuce 

is    a   fruit   of  faith.        (Seever.  H,  lO;  11:2I.) 

Stephen  is  mentioned  first  and  des- 
cribed more  fully,  because  he  soon 
became  the  leading  character  in  the 
discussions  held  with  foreign  Jews,  and 
the  principal  object  of  hate  and  perse- 
cution. One  objeet  of  this  chajjter  is 
to  introduce  Stephen  preparatory  to  liis 
defence  and  martyrdom.  I'hilip, 
lover  of  horses,  tnay  be  mentioned 
second,  because  after  Ste])})cn  his  work 
as  an  evangelist  is  to  be  notice<l. 
Prochorus,  meaning  lemhr  of  the 
choral  danre.  Nicaiior  means  c<ni- 
queror.  Timon — honorable.  Parnio- 
nas — steoilfast.  Nicolas,  comjueror 
of  the  j)eople,  a  proselyte  of  Anti- 
och. He  was  a  Gentile  who  had  em- 
l)raced  Judaism,  and  had  been  con- 
verted to  Christ.  (See  2: 11.)  A  tra<lition 
connects  with  his  name  that  of  the 
Nicolaitans  so  severely  denounced  in 
Rev.  2  :  6,  1.5,  Imt  this  is  unjiroved,  and 
generally  discredited  by  .scholars. 
Antioch  was  doulitless  the  capital  of 
Syria,  a  city  of  more  than  five  hundred 
thousand  inhabitants,  situated  on  tlu? 
river  Orontes,  fifteen  miles  from  its 
mouth,  and  about  three  hundred  miles 
north  of  Jerusalem.  Nicolas  may  have 
gone  tliere,  when  the  di.sciples  were 
seattereil  abroad,     (see  ii  ;  i:>-ti,  26.) 

6.  Whom  they,  the  multitude  of 
believers,  having  chosen  them  from 
their  own  numljer  (ver. 5),  set  before 
the  apostles  both  for  their  approval 
and  their  confirmation.  When  they 
had  prayed — or, praying — they  laid 
their  hands  on  them — the  two  acts 
probably  being  performed  at  once. 
They  prayed,  recognizing  their  depend- 


ence on  God,  and  invoking  his  sanction 
and  blessing  and  the  bestowment  of 
those  gifts  necessaiy  for  jjcrforming  the 
duties  of  their  office.  They  laid  their 
hands  on  them,  not  to  communicate  the 
Holy  Spirit  (s :  i7),  for  they  were  already 
full  of  the  Spirit,  but  to  sanction  the 
choice  of  the  church,  recognizing  them 
as  suitable  persons  for  the  office,  and 
thus  solemnly  setting  them  ajiart  for 
their  work.  Two  instances  besides 
this  of  setting  ajiart  to  a  church 
service,  and  commonly  styled  ordina- 
tion, are  found  iu  the  New  Testa- 
ment, that  of  Barnabas  and  Saul 
(13:1-1),  and  that  of  Timothy  (iTim. 
1 :  11).  Added  to  tliese  is  the  injunction 
of  Taul  to  Timothy  (i  Tim.  a  :'.'2),  "Lay 
hands  suddenly  on  no  man."  From  an 
examination  of  these  it  will  ajjpcar 
that  ordination  confers  no  new  grace  or 
j>ower;  for  the  ordained  person  was 
selected  because  the  church  saAv  in  him 
the  qualifications  requisite  for  the 
office  ;  and  a  solemn  public  sanction 
and  recognition  for  the  office  was  made 
l)y  the  laying  on  of  the  hands,  with 
prayer,  invoking  God's  blessing  and 
consecrating  him  to  the  work.  Dr. 
Ilackett  finely  remarks :  "  It  was  of 
the  nature  of  a  prayer  that  God  would 
bestow  the  necessary  gifts,  rather  than 
a  pledge  that  they  were  actually  con- 
ferred." 

7.  Peace  and  harmony  in  the  church 
is  followed  by  great  prosperity.  The 
two  departments  of  church  work  are 
now  attended  to  thoroughly.  Renewed 
zeal  and  activity  prevail,  and  the 
word  of  God  increased — the  gospel 
was  spreading  among  the  people,  and 
gaining  strength  as  a  system  of  doc- 
trine. The  disciples  multiplied — 
■were  increasing  in  Jei'^isalem  exceed- 
ingly. The  progress  was  not  limited  to 
a  few  days,  but  was  continuous.  A  sur- 
jirising  evidence  of  tbis  internal  and 
external  growth  was,  that  a  great 
company,  or  multitude,  of  the 
priests  Avere  obedient  to  the 
faith.    Obedience  includes  repentance. 


Uir.  VI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


89 


Stephen's   seal ;  his  violent  apprehension. 
8      AND  Stephen,  full  of  faith  and  power, 


did  great  wonders  and  miracles  among 
the  people. 


faith,   aud  submission   to  Christ's   re- 

quiremeutS.     (l  r^ler  l  :  2,  22  ;  4  :  n  ■,  Rom.6  :  17.) 

This  new  aud  large  accession  to  the 
church  was  wonderful,  because  the 
priests  had  been  especially  opposed  to 

the  gospel  (1  :  1 :  Luke  23  :  4,  5,  %\ ;  Mark  15  :  3l), 

and  after  this  were  among  its  active 
persecutors.  (9 :  u  ;  22  :  30 ;  2ii :  10.)  The 
Spirit,  however,  is  al)le  to  overcome  the 
greatest  obstacles.  The  rending  of  the 
vail  of  the  temple,  the  report  of  the 
guard  to  the  truth  of  the  resurrection 
of  Jesus,  the  conciliatory  conduct  of 
Gamaliel,  and  the  miraculous  gifts  and 
powers  of  the  apostles  doul)tless  all  con- 
tributed somewhat  to  this  end.  The 
large  number  converted  is  not  at  all  in- 
credible. Four  thousand,  two  hundred 
and  eighty-nine  priests  returned  from 
the  captivity  with  Ezra  (Ezra2 :  36-:i9),  and 
at  this  time  the  number  must  have  been 
very  largely  increased.  A  great  multi- 
tude of  them  might  be  converteil,  yet 
multitudes  be  left  behind.  "  The 
faith— faith  system — that  is,  the  gos- 
pel.     (See  Rom.  1:5;  Gal.  1  :  23.)     Tllis  lUode 

of  epitomizing  the  plan  of  salvation 
confirms  the  Protestant  view  of  it,  in 
opposition  to  that  of  the  Roman  Catho- 
lics. (See  Rom.  11 :  6.)  "  (  DR.  HaCKETT.) 
This  appears  to  have  been  the  highest 
jioint  of  popularity  attained  by  the 
church  at  .Jeru.salem.  The  Sadducean 
attempts  at  persecution  had  been 
checked ;  the  people  were  accepting 
the  gospel  in  large  numbers ;  the  priest 
were  being  won  to  the  faith,  and  the 
conversion  of  Israel  seemed  more  and 
more  promising.  But  the  development 
of  gospel  truth  in  the  testimony  of 
Ste)>lien  aroused  tlie  bitter  hostility  of 
the  foreign  Jews  and  the  opposition  of 
the  Pharisees,  culminating  in  the  death 
of  Stephen,  the  cruel  persecution  that 
followed,  and  the  scattering  abroad  of 
believers  from  .Terusalein. 

8-15.  The  Zeal  and  Violent  Ap- 
prehension OF  Stephen.  It  is  in- 
teresting to  trace  the  events  whicli 
culminated  in  the  a]iprehension  and 
death  of  Ste})hen.  Only  an  outline  can 
here  be  given.  There  were  two  at- 
tempts at  persecution  before  that  which 
arose  upon  Stephen :  (1)  The  one  after 


the  liealing  of  the  lame  man  l)y  Peter 
and  John,  i>robably  a  few  inontlis  after 
Pentecost,  in  the  autumn  of  A.  D.  30. 
(2)  Tlie  other  after  the  great  increase 
of  the  church  following  tlie  death  of 
Ananias  and  Sai>])hira,  about  A.  i>.  32 
or  33.  Both  of  these  ju-oved  failures, 
because  (1)  They  were  started  by  the 
less  influential  sect  of  tlie  Saddncees. 
(2)  The  more  influential  Pharisees  stood 
aloof.  (3)  The  power  of  the  Lord  was 
with  the  disciples.  (4)  Tliey  were  popu- 
lar with  the  people.  The  things  which 
tended  to  bring  about  a  general  perse- 
cution were:  (1)  Tlie  di.sciples  became 
more  distinct  in  their  organization  and 
more  separate  in  their  gatherings.  (2) 
They  advanced  in  doctrine ;  and  thus 
came  into  direct  conflict  with  Pharisees 
as  well  as  Sadducees.  Stephen  appears 
to  have  proclaimed  these  doctrines  most 
distinctly,  and  that  too  to  the  strictest 
of  the  sect.  Hence  his  arrest,  trial, 
and  death.  See  note  at  the  end  of  the 
preceding  verse,  and  the  notes  that 
follow. 

8.  Stephen  becomes  now  the  cen- 
tral figure;  a  leader  among  the  Seven, 
as  Peter  had  been  among  tiie  Twelve. 
Full  of  faith— rather,  according  to 
the  best  manuscripts,  of  grace,  the 
blessed  influences  of  the  Holy  Spirit, 
including  the  fruits  of  the  Spirit  (Oai. 
5:22);  and  outwardly  manifested  in 
power,  supernatural  gifts,  including 
the  working  of  miracles.  Compare 
what  is  said  of  Jesus,  "full  of  grace 
and  truth."  (JotmirU.)  Stephen  was 
eminently  Christ-like.  Did,  rather, 
was  doing,  great  Avonders  and  mir- 
acles, or  signs,  among  the  people. 
These  were  not  performed  at  one  time, 
but  repeatedly,  as  he  went  about  dis- 
charging the  duties  of  his  office.  Doubt- 
less among  the  sick  and  suffering  as  be 
ministered  to  the  jioor.  This  is  the  first 
instance  of  miracles  performed  by  any 
Christian  outside  of  the  apostles.  It 
was  also  an  early  fulfillment  of  Christ's 
promise  in  Mark  16  :  17,  18. 

9.  Then  there  arose — but  there 
started  up,  the  words  bringing  to  view 
a  somewhat  sudden  and  unexpected 
arising.   Synagogue — an  assembly  for 


90 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VI. 


9      Then  there  arose  certain  of  the  syna- 
gogue which  is  called  the  synagogue  of  the 


Libertines,  and  k  Cyrenians,  and  Alex- 
andrians, and  of  them  of  Cilicia  and  of 


k  ch.  2  :  10. 


offering  prayers  and  for  reading  and 
expounding  the  Scriptures,  held  every 
Sabbath  and  feast-day,  and  also  on  the 
second  and  fifth  days  of  every  week. 
Synagogues  seem  to  date  their  origin 
from  the  Babylonish  exile.  In  the  time 
of  Christ  and  the  apostles  every  town, 
not  only  in  Palestine,  but  wherever 
there  was  a  considerable  number  of 
Jewish  inhabitants,  bad  at  least  one 
synagogue,  and  the  larger  towns  several 
or  even  many.  In  Jerusalem,  accord- 
ing to  the  rabbins,  there  were  four  hun- 
dred and  eighty  synagogues  to  accom- 
modate foreigu  Jews  who  visited  the 
tejnple.  In  view  of  the  two  and  a  half 
millions  of  Jews  who  came  to  Jerusalem, 
from  all  countries  to  celebrate  tiie  pass- 
over  {Josepbiis  Antiq.  vi.  1>,  3),  this 
number  will  not  seem  too  large;  though 
all  of  them  may  not  have  been  formally 
organized  for  holding  trials  am  inflict- 
ing punishment.  (9:  'i;  Matu  lO:  n.) 
They  appear  to  have  been  independent 
of  each  other.  Libertines — frceilmen, 
Jews  whose  fathers  were  carried  cap- 
tive to  Rome  by  Pompey  about  B.  C.  58, 
afterward  freed  by  their  mastei-s,  and 
allowed  to  retain  their  religion,  and 
while  living  at  Rome  may  have  had 
their  synagogue  at  Jerusalem.  These 
Jewish  freedmen  were  expelled  from 
Italy,  on  account  of  their  religion,  by 
Tiberius,  A.  D.  19.  It  is  very  probable 
that  j)art  of  these  exiles  returned  to 
Jerusalem,  and  were  the  more  watch- 
ful against  any  innovations  upon  the 
religion  for  which  they  had  suffered. 
Some  have  maintained  that  Libertines 
were  Jews  from  a  ])lace  in  Africa, 
called  Libertum,  but  of  this  tliere  is  no 
proof,  and  tlie  existence  of  such  a  town 
IS  uncertain.  The  explanation,  which 
was  cnWeA^  or  so-called,  Dr.  Ilackett 
suggests  is  inserted  here  because  this 
was  an  umisual  designation. 

How  many  synagogues  are  here  men- 
tioned has  been  a  suViject  of  discussion. 
Some  suppose  but  one,  comjiosed  of 
freedmen  from  Cyreue,  Alexandria, 
Cilicia,  and  Asia  ;  others  sui)pose  two, 
one  including  the  first  three  names,  the 
otliers,  the  last  two.     But  the  simpler 


and  more  natural  interpretation  sup- 
poses five.  Cyrenians — from  Cyrene, 
a  large  city  in  North  Africa,  a  fourth 
jiart  of  whose  inhabitants,  according  to 
Josephus,  were  Jews.  Simon  who  car- 
ried the  cross  of  Jesus  was  from  Cyrene. 
(Matt.  27 :  32.)  Jews  froui  parts  about 
Cyrene  were  present  at  Pentecost. 
(2: 10.)  Cyrenian  Jews  are  mentioned 
in  11:20;  13:1.  Alexandrians— 
from  Alexandria,  the  great  city  of 
Egy])t,  and  at  that  time  the  second 
city  of  the  Roman  Empire,  where 
about  one  hundred  thousand  Jews  re- 
sided, having  their  own  quarter,  their 
own  governor  and  laws.  Cilicia — a 
Roman  province  in  the  soutli-eastern 
corner  of  Asia  Minor.  The  great  higli- 
way  of  travel  between  Euro])e,  western 
Asia  Minor,  and  Syria  ran  through  this 
province  and  gave  it  imi)ortance. 
Through  the  Cilician  gates,  a  gap  in 
the  Taurus  range,  the  armies  of  the 
younger  Cyrus,  of  Alexander,  and  of 
the  Romans  passed ;  and  through  it 
also  runs  the  modern  caravan  road  be- 
tween Tarsus  and  the  west.  Among 
the  Cilicians  who  disputed  with  Stephen 
was  probably  Saul  of  Tarsus.  (21:39.) 
Asia — the  Roman  province,  having 
Ephesus  as  its  capital,     (see 2:  9.) 

Disputing  with  Stephen — imply- 
ing that  these  foreign  Jews  began  the 
debate,  questioning  him  perhaps  at  first, 
discussing  the  matter,  and  ending,  on 
their  part,  in  a  heated  disputation.  He 
very  likely  met  them  as  friends  and 
acquaintances  of  the  Grecian  Jews 
among  whom  he  ministered.  Begin- 
ning privately,  it  at  length  became 
public.  He  doubtless  at  times  spoke  in 
synagogues  and  public  assemblies.  We 
would  infer  this  from  the  descrijition 
of  him  in  ver.  5.  Before  his  choice 
among  the  seven,  he  may  have  been 
what  is  sometimes  called  in  these  days 
a  lay  preacher.  And  after  entering 
upon  his  ofiice,  like  Philip,  he  may 
have  become  also  an  evangelist.  The 
fact  that  strong  nationality  had  brought 
these  foreign  Jews  to  Jerusalem,  to 
reside  there,  explains  how  they  would 
be  the  strongest  adherents  to  Judaism, 


Cii.  VL] 


THE  ACTS. 


91 


10  Asia,  disputing  with  Stephen.  'And 
they  were  not  al)le  to  resist  the  wisdom 
and   "  ttie   spirit    by    which    he   spake. 


11  "Then  they  suborned  men,  which  said, 
We  have  heard  him  speak  blasphemous 
words    agaiust    Moses,  and  against  God. 


>ch. 


:  39 ;  Matt.  10  :  19,  20 ;  Luke  21  :  15 ;  see  Exod.  4  :  12 ;  Isa.  54  :  17. 
n  1  Kings  21  :  10-13. 


1  Cor.  2  :  4. 


and  to  the  strictest  sect,  the  Pharisees, 
and  thus  the  foremost  iu  resisting 
Stephen,  concerning  the  superiority  of 
the  New  over  the  Old  Dispensation. 
Foreign  influences  may  have  had  an 
opposite  eii'ect  on  Stephen,  or,  lilce  Saul 
of  Tarsus,  enlightened  by  the  Spirit,  he 
may,  like  a  pendulum,  have  swung 
toward  the  other  extreme. 

At  this  point  began  the  open  and 
organized  opposition  of  the  Pharisees 
to  Christians.  Previous  to  this,  Christi- 
anity had  appeared  as  a  sort  of  reformed 
Judaism.  There  ap])eared  but  a  single 
change  in  the  Jewisli  faith.  Instead  of 
a  Messiah  yet  to  come,  was  substituted 
a  Messiah  already  come,  who  had  lived, 
died,  and  risen  again.  Two  rites  had 
been  addeil, — baptism  and  the  Lord's 
Su])i)er.  The  disciples  met  on  the  first 
day  of  the  week  to  celebrate  the  resur- 
rection of  Jesus.  But  they  still  observed 
the  Jewish  Sabbath.  Thej'  circumcised 
their  children,  were  daily  in  the  temple, 
and  o1)served  the  Jewish  ritual.  They 
were  still  Jews  in  faith  and  practice, 
though  theirs  was  a  glorified  Judaism 
by  their  faith  in  a  ri.sen  and  exalted 
Saviour.  Jesus  had  indeed  taught  the 
coming  of  a  universal  religion  (John  i ., 
23, 24.),  but  this  the  apostles  had  very 
imperfectly  comprehended.  They  doubt- 
less expected  that  the  blessings  of  the 
gospel  would  be  extended  to  men  of  all 
nations,  but  only  through  the  gate  of 
prosi-lytism.  There  was  a  providence 
in  this  very  short-sightedness.  A  too 
early  proclamation  of  the  spiritual  and 
universal  character  of  Christianity 
would,  no  doubt,  have  brought  upon 
the  church  persecution  before  it  had 
gathered  strength  to  meet  it.  But  the 
time  had  now  come  for  a  fuller  procla- 
mation of  these  great  truths  and  for  the 
fiery  ordeal.  In  botli  of  these  Stephen 
is  the  leader. 

10.  The  wisdom  and  the  spirit 
— a  variation  of  the  phrases  in  ver.  3, 
5,  8.  The  Holy  Spirit  is  here  meant, 
and  the  wisdom  is  that  which  the  Spirit 
imparted  to   Stephen.     The  words  of 


Jesus  were  fiilfilled  (Lake  21 :  15) :  "  I  will 
give  you  a  mouth  and  wisdom  which 
all  your  adversaries  shall  not  be  able 
to  gainsay  or  resist."  Calvin  says: 
"Thus  iu  our  own  age  the  Spirit  has 
been  so  miglity  in  the  mouth  of  the 
martyrs  who  were  liurried  to  tlie  tor- 
turing flame,  and  down  to  this  hour 
afibrds  such  force  that,  even  when  they 
were  uneducated  men,  tliey,  liy  their 
simple  speech  left  tlie  highest  theolo- 
gians of  the  Papacy  dumb,  as  if  thun- 
derstruck." Compare  Paul  at  Antioch, 
in  Pisidia,  where  the  Jews,  unable  to 
answer  Paul,  could  do  nothing  but  con- 
tradict and  blaspheme.     (13 :  45.) 

11.  Then — at  that  time,  just  after 
what  had  occurred.  Suborned— 
privately  instructed,  instigated,  men, 
as  to  what  they  should  do  and  say.  It 
is  not  necessary  to  suppose  that  bribes 
were  used,  though  such  may  have  been 
the  case.  We  have  heard  him 
speak  blasphemous  words.  What 
these  M'ords  were  are  told  in  ver.  14. 
And  so  was  Jesus  accused.  (itarit2:7; 
Matt.  26 :  fia.)  Blasphemy  was  speaking 
against,  reviling,  or  railing  against  God 
and  divine  things.  It  was  regarded 
under  Jewish  law  as  an  attempt  to 
turn  away  the  people  from  their  alle- 
giance to  the  one  true  God,  and  hence  as 
treason,  and  was  punishable  with 
death  by  stoning.  (Lev.  24 :  1123 ;  oeut.  is : 
6-10.)  Against  3Ioses— against  the 
laws  given  l)y  him,  not  only  tho.se  con- 
tained in  the  five  books,  but  also  the 
traditions  which  they  maintained  were 
handed  down  from  Moses.  And  to 
speak  against  Moses  was  to  s])eak 
against  God,  for  God  spake  through 
Moses.  The  charge  indicates  his 
teaching — that  he  had  announced  the 
tran.sitory  nature  of  the  Jewish  laws, 
temple,  and  worship,  and  the  intro- 
duction of  a  new  and  better  covenant, 
and  thus  in  a  striking  manner  antici- 
pated what  was  more  fully  proclaimed 
by  the  apostle  Paul. 

12.  The  foreign  Jews,  unable  to 
meet  Stephen  iu  argument,  resorted  to 


92 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cn.  VI. 


t2  And  they  stirred  up  the  people,  and  the 
elders,  and  the  scribes,  and  came  upon 
him,  and   caught  him,  and  brought  Iiitit 

13  to  the  council,  and  set  up  false  witnesses, 
which  said,  This  man  ceaseth  not  to 
speak  blasphemous    words   against    this 

14  holy    place,  and  the  law :  for  we  have 


heard  him  say,  that  this  Jesus  of  Naz- 
areth shall  "destroy  this  place,  and  shall 
change  the  customs  which  Moses  de- 
15  livered  us.  And  all  that  satin  the  coun- 
cil, looking  steadfastly  on  him,  saw  his 
face  P  as  it  had  been  the  face  of  an  angel. 


o  Dan.  9  :  26.        p  Exod.  34  :  29,  30. 


foul  means,  and  stirred  up,  aroused 
with   excitement,    the    people,   who 

before  this  had  treated  believers  with 
favor  (2 :  47 ;  4 :  17;  5 :  26),  and  with  them 
the  elders  and  the  scribes  (see  on 
4:5)  and  coming  upon  him  suddenly, 
seized  him  violently,  and  brought 
him  into  the  very  midst  of  the 
council,  or  Sanhedrin.  We  may 
suppose  the  Sanhedrin  just  conveninsr. 
The  charge  of  blasphemy  was  well 
fitted  to  predjudice  the  jieople  against 
Stephen.  It  was  imjiortant  for  the 
rulers  to  have  them  on  their  side.  A 
change  in  public  opinion  occurred  in 
the  last  week  of  our  Saviour's  life,  the 
people  welcoming  him  with  Ilosannas, 
and  soon  after  crying,  "  (."rucify  him." 
"  The  people — powerful  in  numbers. 
The  elders — powerful  in  authority. 
The  scribes — powerful  in  learning." 
(Bkxgel.) 

13.  Set  up  false  witnesses — 
perhaps  some  of  the  suborned  men,  or 
those  under  their  influence.  They  were 
false  witnesses  in  that  they  unfairly 
and  perversely  reported  what  Stephen 
had  said,  thereby  giving  a  wrong  mean- 
ing and  producing  a  false  impression. 
Blasphemous  is  not  found  in  the 
oldest  manuscripts  and  slioukl  be 
omitted.  The  idea  of  l)Iasphemy,  how- 
ever, is  implied  (Luke  12: 10.)  Instead  of 
Moses  and  God  (ver.  11)  we  have  now 
the  words  this  holy  place,  the 
temple,  in  which  they  were  now  as- 
sembled, the  centre  of  the  worship  and 
tlie  glory  of  the  Jew,  and  of  the 
law  of  Moses,  -which  came  from  God. 
To  speak  against  these  was  indeed  to 
speak  against  God  and  holy  things ; 
and  this  Stephen  was  represented  as 
doing      continuously.       This      man 

ceaseth    not    to    speak.       (see  John  11 : 

48-52  ) 

14.  Now  for  the  proof  of  the  terrible 
charge :  For  we  have  heard  him 
say,  professing  to  be  ear-witnesses, 
that     this     Jesus,    the     Nazarene, 


uttered  contemptuously,  shall  de- 
stroy this  place,  this  temple  and 
city,  and  shall  change  the  cus- 
toms, the  usages  and  rites  prescrilied 
by  law,  which  Moses  delivered  to 
us,  in  his  writings  and  tluough  oral 
traditions.  "  Every  slander,"  Bengel 
says,  "lays  hold  of  some  portion  of 
truth."  Stephen  taught  that  the  New 
Dispensation  was  superior  to  the  Old 
and  was  designed  to  supersede  it,  not 
that  they  were  antagonistic,  but  rather 
one  preparatory  to  the  other.  Sound- 
ing a  note  of  warning  against  the  un- 
belief and  ojiposition  of  the  rulers, 
he  may  have  used  words  fiom  the 
discourse  of  Jesus  regarding  the  des- 
truction of  Jerusalem  and  the  end  of 
the  world.  Such  words  could  easily  be 
perverted  and  distorted  l)y  the  enemies 
of  Stephen.  So  the  false  Mitnesses 
against  Jesus  charged  that  he  said  :  "  I 
will  destroy  tiiis  temple  that  is  made 
with  hands,  and  within  three  days  I 
will  build  another  made  without 
hands  "  (Mark  14  :  58 ;  John  2 :  19),  a  misquo- 
tation, a  misapi)lication  of  his  lan- 
guage and  a  misapprehension  of  his 
meaning.  In  Stei)hen's  ease  the  truth, 
such  as  in  7  :  48-50,  probably  gave  rise 
to  the  accusation.  His  accusers  may 
have  used  his  words,  but  slightly  mis- 
quoting them,  taking  them  out  of  their 
connection  and  falsifying  their  spirit. 
A  half  truth  became  a  whole  lie.  Com- 
pare the  charges  against  Paul  (21 :  21. 28; 
24 :  5, 6;  25 : 7, 8),  indicating  tlie  similarity 
of  the  teachings  of  Stephen  and  Paul, 
15.  All  that  sat,  or  sitting,  in 
the  council — high-priests  and  chief 
priests,  elders  and  scribes,  Pharisees 
and  Sadducees,  members  of  the  Sanhe- 
drin, besides  Stephen's  accusers,  the 
false  witnesses  and  perhaps  sjiectators. 
Looking  steadfastly,  or  intently — 
a  strong  emphatic  exj»ression,  the  same 
as  usetl  in  1  :  10 ;  7  :  5.5.  Stephen  was 
the  jirincipal  object  of  every  one's  gaze, 
because  he  was  about  to  answer  the 


Ch.  Vl.J 


THE  ACTS. 


?S 


charges    i)referred    agaiust  him ;    and 
also   there   was    something    about  his  I 
manner  and  pei'sou  that  increasingly  j 
attraeted  their  attention.      Saw   his 
face  as  it  had  been  the  face  of 
an  angel.     There  was  a  supernatural 
glow  and  brightness  upon  his  couute-  ! 
nance,  like  the  shining  face  of  Moses  I 
when  he  came  down  from  the  mount.  ' 

(Exod.  :U:  35.    See  Luke  »:  29.)        "The      COm- 

])arison  was  an  unusual  one,  and  the 
Jews  supjjosed  the  visible  ap])earance  ! 
of  angels  to  corresi>ond  witli  their  super-  j 

human  rank.      (see  l:  lO;    Matt.  M:  3;    Luke  i 
■it:    4;    Ri'v.   18:    1,  etc.)"       (DR.  HACKETT.)  | 

The  meaning  is  that  tliere  was  some-  : 
thing  superhuman  and  celestial  about  j 
his  ai)pearance.   The  Holy  Spirit  shone,  I 
as  it  were,  through  him,  attesting  him 
a.s  a  true   witness  of  Christ  and  the 
New   Covenant   (i  Peter  i:  la.u),   and   as 
truly    God's    servant    as    was    Moses. 
"Moses'    face    shone    with    the    law; 
Stephen's  with  the  Gospel.     Moses  was 
brigiit  when  he  came  down  from  earthly 
Sinai.     Stephen  was  bright  ere  he  as- 
cended   to    the    heavenly   Zion.   .  .  . 
The  eyes  of  the  council  were  turned 
Stephenward,  and  the  eyes  of  Stephen 
were  turned  Christward.     The  glory  of 
the  tlirone  beamed  from  his  eyes  as  the 
splendor  of  the  sun  shines  back  from 
rolling  ])lanets  through  a  sky  of  dark- 
ness."    (T.  A.  T.  Hanna.) 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  Church  troubles  arise  from  human  im- 
perfections, and  can  be  best  overcome  by  a 
calm,  gentle,  just,  and  generous  treatment. 
(Ver.  1-3;  Rom.  15  :  1 ;  1  Cor.  8:9;  Gal. 
6:1.) 

2.  Gospel  preachers  should  devote  them- 
selves to  the  word,  and  ought  not  to  be  im- 
peded by  the  secular  cares  of  the  church,  or 
by  pecuniary  anxiety.  (Ver.  2 ;  1  Tim.  4  :  15 ; 
1  Cor.  2  :  1-5.) 

3.  The  special  duty  of  deacons  is  to  care 
for  the  secular  all'airs  of  the  church.  As 
deacons  they  are  not  ajjpointed  to  preach  or 
administer  the  ordinances.     (Ver.  3.) 

4.  If  the  preacher  would  be  in  the  highest 
degree  successiul,  he  must  devote  himself 
much  and  earnestly  to  prayer.  Luther  some- 
times would  say,  "  I  shall  have  so  much  to 


do,  that  I  cannot  do  with  less  than  three 
hours  of  prayer."    (Ver.  4  ;  1  Tim.  2:1.) 

5.  The  Scriptural  form  of  church  govern- 
ment is  congregational.  Under  Christ  the 
authoritative  power  is  with  the  membership. 
(Ver.  4, 5  ;  Matt.  18:17;  1  Cor.  5  :  1-5  ;  2  Cor. 
2:6,7;  1  Cor.  14  :  40  :  16  :  3.) 

6  Jesus  did  not  at  once  give  a  fully  organ- 
ized and  complete  church.  The  di.scipleship 
were  not  prepared  for  it.  He  empowered 
his  inspired  apostles  to  complete  its  organiz- 
ation, as  the  Spirit  and  providence  might 
direct.    (Ver.  6 ;  John  16  :  12.  13.) 

j  7.  The  gospel  is  adapted  to  ail  classes  and 
conditions  of  men.    (Ver.  7;   Rom.  1  :  16 ; 

!  Col.  3  :  11.) 

I  8.  United  and  earnest  labor  in  all  depart- 
ments of  church  work  will  generally  be  fol- 
lowed by  prosperity,  and  the  increase  of  dis- 
ciples.    (Ver.  7 ;  15  :  .30 ;  16  :  5.) 

9.  He  who  is  faithful  in  whatever  the  Lord 
gives  him  to  do  will  receive  enlargement  and 
more  important  trusts.  (Ver.  S ,  Luke  16  : 
10 ;  1  Tim.  3  :  13.) 

10.  They  who  are  most  bitter  in   contro- 
!  versy  are  generally  the  least  qualified  for  it, 

mentally,  rcligiou.sly,  or  in  their  knowledge 
of  the  subject.    (Ver.  9;  1  Tim.  3  :  4.) 

11.  The  seven  were  appointed  to  oversee 
i  temporal  matters.    But  God  called  some  of 

them  to  higher  spiritual  work";  Philip  to  be 
an  evangelist  (21  :  8) ;  Stephen  to  take  a  step 
beyond  Peter  in  unfolding  the  prophecies 
and  the  plan  of  salvation,  and  to  be  the  first 

'  martyr.    (Ver.  10;  ch.  7.) 

I  12.  Hatred  and  prejudice  against  the  truth 
will  lead  men  to  prevert  it  and  to  use  the 
foulest  means  against  it.  (Ver.  11-13 ;  13  : 
45  ;  17  :  5,  13.) 

13.  Stephen  formed  the  connecting  link 
between  Peter  and  Paul.  He  taught  that  a 
New  Dispensation  had  come,  and  that  Jew- 
ish rites  were  to  give  way  to  a  more  spiritual 
worship.     (Ver.  13,  14;  ch.  7.) 

14.  Christianity  is  from  God.  No  array 
of  numbers,  talents,  or  learning  can  refute 
its  claims,  or  meet  its  arguments.  (Ver.  10- 
14 ;  Titus  1:9;  1  Cor.  1  :  25.) 

15.  Stephen  with  his  angelic  countenance 
was  himself  an  evidence  to  the  power  of 
the  Holy  Spirit,  and  to  the  spirituality  and 
glory  of  that  religion  he  proclaimed.  (Ver. 
15 ;  2  Cor.  3:2,3, 18.) 


94 


THE  ACTS. 


LCu.  VII. 


Ch.  7 :  The  Speech  of  Stephen 
has  giveu  rise  to  much  discussion  and 
ijiiich  misunderstanding.  To  the  super- 
ticial  reader  it  may  appear  rambling 
and  lacking  point,  but  to  the  close  ob- 
server and  prayerful  student  a  thread 
of  truth  underlies  the  whole,  upon 
which  is  strung  a  skillfully  arranged 
historic  argument.  The  uiithenticitij 
of  the  speech  appears  from  its  nature 
and  contents.  Wliowouhi  have  thought 
to  j)ut  such  a  defence  into  8tephcn's 
mouth?  Tradition  would  have  made 
it  more  }K»inted  and  argumentative 
throughout,  and  more  directly  related 
to  the  charges  in  ch.  G,  and  the  question 
in  ver.  1.  The  rcjiort  of  the  speech 
seems  to  have  come  from  an  ear-witness, 
possibly  from  some  silent  friend  of 
Jesus,  as  Nicodemus,  or  more  probably 
fiom  Saul  of  Tarsus,  upon  whom 
Stephen  seems  to  have  made  a  life-long 
imi)ression.  (2^:20.)  The  pccnliuriliets 
of  tlie  speech:  (1)  It  is  unfinished, 
having  been  broken  off  suddenly.  (2) 
It  is  historic  in  form  and  in  argument. 
Thus  he  gained  the  attention  of  his 
hearers,  softened  their  jn-ciudices, 
showed  that  he  was  a  full  believer  in 
the  Scrii>tures,  and  reverenced  the  God 
of  Israel.  At  the  same  time  he  brought 
to  view  great  fundamental  truths  in 
God's  dealings  with  men,  and  prejiared 
the  way  for  anMouucing  Jesus  as  the 
Messiah  aiul  ai)]>lyiiig  his  address  to 
his  hearers,  (.i)  It  was  a  i)reseiitation 
of  positive  trutlis,  a  vindication  not  so 
much  of  himself  as  of  the  great  doc- 
trines which  he  had  maintained.  (4) 
He  weaves  into  his  Scriptural  address 
certainthingsfromJt'wish  tradition.  In 
this  he  followed  the  i>o])uhuly-nceivcd 
liistory  of  his  time  as  is  shown  from 
Philo  and  Josephus,  who  in  some  in- 
stances accord  with  him.  Tluse  a]>par- 
ent  discrepancies  Mill  be  noticed  in  tlie 
verses  where  they  belong.  With  these 
compare  Author's  Harmonic  Ada,  'i  VI, 
notes.  {r>)  In  ])as.sing  rapidly  over  the 
history,  Stej^hen  leaves  much  to  l)e 
supplied,  and  he  so  presents  his  facts 
as  to  allow  his  hearers  to  silently  infer 
and  make  the  ap]>lication.  We  would 
need  to  put  ourselves  in  the  exact  situa- 
tion, modes  of  thouirht  and  surrouud- 
ings  of  both  sj)eaker  and  hearers,  in 
order  to  appreciate  the  force  of   the 


speech  as  a  part  and  a  whole.  (6)  The 
Sjiirit  element  of  the  speech  must  not 
be  overlooked  Stephen  was  full  of 
the  Spirit  and  under  his  direction,  and 
therefore  his  address  must  have  been 
modified  and  somewhat  shaped  thereby. 
This  with  the  fact  that  it  is  recorded 
and  handed  down  to  us,  indicates  that 
it  fills  an  imjjortant  place  in  the  pro- 
gressive revelation  of  truth,  and  de- 
serves our  uu)St  careful  study. 

The  Spkix'II  It.self.    Its  structure 
and  i)ur]»ose  have  been  hinted  above. 
The    teaching   of    Stei)hen    had    been 
assailed,  anil  he  had  been  charged  with 
blasphemy    against    the    temjjle     and 
2>Ioses.      (6:ia,  14.)     His  S]>eech  was    a 
defence  by  showing  what  lie  did  tcac/i. 
He  seems  to  have  caught  above    all 
others  the  meaning  of  our  Lord's  words, 
"  The  hour  cometh,  and  now  is,  wheu 
the  true  worsliippers  shall  worship  the 
Father  in  sjiiritaud  in  truth :  for  such  the 
Father  seeks  to  woi"ship  him.    (>od  is  a 
Si)irit,  and  they  thatworshij)  him  must 
worship  in  sjtirit  and  in  truth."  (John  4: 
21-24.)     Thus  he  so  presents  the  facts  re- 
garding the  patriarchs,  Moses,  the  tab- 
ernacle, and  the  temple  as  to  show  his 
innocence  of  the  charge  of  Idasphemj^, 
and  at  the  same  time  intiicate  that  in 
every   age    God    had    recognized    the 
spiritual  worshiper  and  retpiired  spir- 
itual wor.ship,  and  that  this  was  not 
liniited  to  any  time  or  j)lace.   Abraham 
was  called  before  the  rite  of  circum- 
cision was  given,  and  the  i)atriarchs  unto 
Mo.ses  worshiped  God  before  the  taber- 
nacle and  the  giving  of  the  law.     The 
I  tabernacle  was  a  movable   tent   going 
i  with  the  children  of  Israel,  and    was 
[  nevvr     designed     to     be     permanent. 
I  After  hundreds  of  years  God  granted 
1  the  earnest  request  of  David,  and  per- 
mitted Solomon  to  build  him  a  house. 
I  r>ut  in  allowing  this  God  did  not  ignore 
!  the  great  truth   that  his  wor.ship  could 
I  not  l)e  limited   to  a  single  place,  that 
heaven  vas  his  throne,  that  any  where 
j  on  tlic  ( artli  the  true  worshiper  could 
;  api>roach    him,   and    that    indeed   the 
j  huuii>le  lieait  was  a  temjile  in  which 
I  God  coiuiesceiided  to  dwell.     All  these 
I  wore  ]>arts  of  that  progressive  revela- 
tion of   trutli   jtrejiaratorj'  to  the  full 
revelation  l)y  liim  whom  Moses  fore- 
I  told ;  and  the  tabernacle  and  the  tern- 


Cu.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


95 


Stephen's  defence  be/ore  the  Sanhedrin,  and 
his  death. 
7     THEN  said  the  high  priest,  Are  these 
things  so? 


2  And  he  said,  iMen,  brethren,  and 
fathers,  hearkeu  ;  The  God  of  glory  '  ap- 
peared unto  our  father  Abraham,  when 
he  was  in  Mesopotamia,  before  he   dwelt 


q  ch.  22  :  1.        '  Gen.  12  :  1. 


pie  were  but  a  repeated  tyi^e  of  the 
grander  temple  of  God's  universal  wor- 
ship under  the  Messiah. 

At  the  same  time  Stephen  had  shown 
tlie  perversity  of  their  fathers.  Joseph 
had  been  evil  entreated  and  sold  by  his 
brethren  ;  Moses  had  been  rejected  in 
in  Egypt  and  afterward  forsaken  in  the 
wilderness  by  Israel  when  they  made  a 
ealf.  Turning  from  the  law,  their 
fathers  had  gone  into  idolatr)'.  Thus 
Steplien  showed,  on  the  one  hand,  that 
so  far  from  blaspheming  the  temple  and 
Moses,  he  was  teaching  the  great  spir- 
itual trutlis  recognized  by  God  in  all 
ages,  foretold  by  Jloses,  and  typified  by 
the  tabernacle  and  the  temple.  And 
on  the  other  hand  that  his  accusers 
were  only  following  in  the  footsteps  of 
the  fathers  who  rejected  God's  mes- 
sengers and  forsook  his  law.  Here 
Stephen  hastens  to  his  appliaition, 
caused  perhaj^s  by  the  looks  of  his 
judges.  Had  he  goue  on,  he  would 
very  likelj'  have  shown  how  the 
predictions  of  the  pi'ophets  were  ful- 
filled iu  Jesus,  and  presented  him  as  a 
Saviour  able  to  save  his  crucifiers  and 
murderers.  But  he  sees  his  hearers 
are  incorrigible ;  and  with  a  sudden  burst 
of  righteous  indignation  he  charges 
tliem  with  resisting  the  Holy  Sjjn-it 
even  as  their  fathers  did ;  and  as  their 
fathers  had  murdered  the  prophets  so 
they  had  murdered  the  Righteous  One 
of  whom  the  prophets  had  spoken. 

This  address  has  been  compared  with 
tliat  in  Luke  4  :  24-29,  in  which  Jesus 
hinted  at  the  universality  of  the  gospel, 
with  like  efl'ect  upon  his  audience. 
The  indications  are  that  Stephen  spoke 
iu  Greek.  He  is  generally  regarded  as 
a  Hellenist,  or  Grecian  Jew,  and  his 
quotations  from  the  Old  Testament  geii- 
erally  agree  with  the  Greek  version. 
The  prevalence  of  the  Greek  language 
was  so  general  in  Palestine,  and  espe- 
ciallj''  in  Jerusalem,  at  that  time,  that 
he  could  have  lieen  easily  understood 
by  the  Sanhedrin. 

1.   Then,  rather,  And,  connecting 


this  verse  closely  to  the  preceding  chap- 
ter. The  high  priest,  the  president 
of  the  Sanhedrin,  questions  the  pris- 
oner. So  he  had  done  to  Jesus.  (Matt. 
26 :  02.)  While  the  Sanhech'in  are  gazing 
upon  the  brightened  countenance  of 
Stephen,  the  high  priest  breaks  tlie 
silence  by  asking,  Are  these  things, 
alleged  by  his  accusers  (6;ii-u),  so? 
Under  Jewish  law  the  accused  had  a 
right  to  be  heard  in  his  own  defence. 
Pleadere  were  unknown  to  the  Jewish 
courts.  Comj^are  Paul  i)efore  the  San- 
hedrin (23:1),  and  alsc  l)efore  a  Roman 
tribunal.  (25. s.)  The  following  dis- 
course is  in  answer  to  this  question,  and 
must  contain  a  refutation  of  this  cliarge. 
In  order  to  apprehend  its  parts  more 
clearly,  it  will  be  divided  into  sections. 
2-16.  The  Patriarchal  Age,  in 
which  were  foretold  bondage 
AND  Deliverance.  God  with  Abra- 
ham before  circumcision  and  with  his 
descendants   before  the  giving  of  the 

law.  (Gen.  12  :  1  ;  15  :  1316;  37  :  II  ;39  :2;  42  :  2 ; 
45:  1-4;  Josh.  24:  32.) 

2.  Men,  addressing  all,  both  breth- 
ren, the  spectators,  and  fathers,  the 

members  of  the  Sanhedrin.  Thus  Ste- 
phen begins  with  conciliatory  terms  of 
respect  and  reverence.  See  the  same 
beginning  l)y  Paul  in  22  : 1.  Hearken 
— attentively  and  patiently.  (i3:i6; 
22:1.)  The'  Ciod  of  glory — a  fitting 
beginning  of  one  wliose  soul  was  filled 
with  the  Spirit,  and  upon  wliose  coun- 
tenance was  reflected  gleams  of  the 
divine  glory.  Literally,  The  God  of  the 
fjfori/,  that  whicii  was  peculiar  to  him, 
the  visible  splendor,  the  cloud  of  glory, 
symbol  of  his  presence,  in  which  he 
a]ii)eared  unto  his  people  (Exod.  40: 34;  Lev. 

9  :  H ;  Ezek.  1  :  28 ;  Heh.  9:5),  and  wllO  dwells, 

as  Paul  says,  "  in  the  light  which  no 
man  can  approach  unto."  (iTim. 6:i6.) 
By  this  reverential  reference  to  God, 
Stephen  at  once  begins  to  counteract 
the  reiiort  that  he  had  spoken  blas- 
phemous words  against  God.  (6:ii.) 
His  mind,  too,  is  filled  with  the  views 
of  that    majesty  and    glorious  sover- 


96 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cn.  VII. 


3  "in  Charran,  and  said  unto  him,  'Get 
thee  out.  of  thy  country,  and  from  thy 
kindred,  and  come  iuto  the  land  which  I 

4  shall  show  thee.'  Then  «  came  he  out  of 
the  land  of  the  Chaldeans,  and  dwelt  in 


Charran ;  and  from  thence,  when  his 
father  was  dead,  he  removed  him  into 
5  this  land,  wherein  ye  now  dwell.  "And 
he  gave  him  none  inheritance  in  it,  no, 
not  so  Trmch  as  to  set  his  foot  on  :  ^  yet  he 


'Gen.  11:31.      t  Gen.  12  :  4,  5.     "  Gen.  23  :  4.      »  Gen.  12  :  7;  13  :  1-5;  IS  :  13,18;  17  :  8;  26  :  3. 


eignty  which  God  had  exercised  in 
appearing  to  his  peojjle,  fi'oni  the  days 
of  Abraham  to  Christ,  the  most  glorious 
manifestation  of  himself.  (Heb.  i:i,a; 
John  1 :  14.)  Appeared,  revealing  some 
of  his  splendor  and  majesty  to  Abra- 
ham as  the  Grod  of  glory.  Notice  that 
Stephen  says  our  lather  Abraham, 
thus  giving  honor  and  recognizing  rela- 
tionship to  the  founder  of  their  race. 
So  far  from  blas])heiniug,  he  virtually 
says,  I  honor  the  fathers  and  acknowl- 
edge God's  glory  revealed  to  them. 
3Iesopotamia — meaning  between  the 
rirers,  t!ie  region  between  the  Tigris 
and  Eui)hrates.  Abraham  first  resided 
at  Ur,  of  the  Chaldees  (Gen.  u  :  zs)^  jn-ob- 
ably  the  modern  Miigheir,  about  six 
miles  west  of  the  present  channel  of 
the  Euphrates,  and  one  hundred  and 
twenty-five  miles  from  its  mouth. 
Charran — Hanni  (r,eo.  u  ::n),  in  the 
northwestern  part  of  Slesopotamia,  on 
the  bank  of  a  small  tributary  of  the 
Euphrates,  the  river  Belik. 

3.  And  said  unto  him,  Get  thee 
out,  etc.  Quoted  from  Gen.  12  :  1, 
Avhere  the  call  in  Haran  is  meant.  But 
Stephen  here  .speaks  of  a  previous  call 
of  Abraham,  "  before  he  dwelt  in  Ha- 
ran." But  the  discrepancy  is  only  ap- 
parent. An  earlier  call  at  Ur  is  im- 
jdied  in  Gen.  1-^:7;  Neh.  9  :  7.  The 
object  and  import  of  both  calls  were  the 
same,  and  the  words  of  these  calls 
would  be  sul)stantially  alike.  Notice 
the  words  "  from  thy  father's  house  " 
(Gen.  1-2;  I)  are  omitted  here.  When 
Abrain  removed  from  Ur  his  father 
went  with  him,  but  when  he  left  Haran 
he  left  his  brother  Nahor  and  his 
father's  house.  (Josh.  24 ;  2.)  This  is  in 
harmony  with  Gen.  11  :  31,  where  it  is 
related  that  Abram  starts  from  Ur  to  go 
into  the  land  of  Canaan,  but  was  de- 
layed at  Haran.  With  this,  also,  Philo 
agrees,  who  speaks  of  these  two  calls. 
"  A  beautiful  comment  is  aflbrded  by 
the  last  clause  of  the  parallel  passage 
in  Heb.  11 :  8, '  he  went  out,  not  know- 


ing whither  he  went.'"  (J.  A.  Alex- 
ander.) 

4.  The  land  of  the  Chaldeans— 

the  southern  portion  of  MesojKJtamia, 
including  a  ]iart  of  tlie  low  country 
west  of  the  Euphrates.  It  is  imjdiecl 
here  that  Chaldea  did  not  tlien  ex- 
tend so  far  north  as  to  include  Haran. 
When  his  father  was  dead.  But 
his  father  Terah  died  at  the  age  of  two 
hundred  and  five  (Gen.  11 :  .s-.-j,  and  in 
Gen.  11  :  26  it  is  said  that  "Terah 
lived  seventy  years  and  begat  Abram, 
Nahor,  and  Haran,"  and  in  Gen.  12  :  4 
that  Abram  was  seventy-five  when  he 
came  forth  from  Haran.  This  would 
make  Abraham's  dej)ai'ture  to  have 
been  sixty  years  before  Terali's  death. 
This  diificulty  is  readily  removed  liy 
supposing  tliat  Abram  was  not  the  old- 
est son,  but  the  youngest,  and  named 
first  because  of  his  importance  in 
Hebrew  historj'.  Such  is  the  view  of 
some  Jewish  writers.  Similarly  Shem 
is  mentioned  first  among  Noah's  sons, 
(Gen.  5  :.T-'),  yet  Japlieth  was  the  old- 
est. (Gen.  10:21;  9;  24.)  Tliis  exi)lanation 
would  make  Terah  one  hundred  and 
thirty  years  old  when  Abram  was  born. 
This  agrees  well  with  the  Jewish  tradi- 
tion that  Sarah,  Abram's  wife,  ten 
years  younger  than  he,  M'as  his  niece, 
the  daughter  of  Haran  ;  and  also  with 
the  marriage  of  Lsaac  Avith  Rebecca, 
Nahor's  granddaughter,  through  Beth- 
uel,  the  eighth  son  of  Nahor.  (Gen.  ti:%\.) 
He  removed  him.  //c,  tliat  is,  God, 
cnuseil  him  to  remove  into  this  hind  by 
renewing  tlie  command.  Thus  Stephen 
continues  to  recognize  the  God  of  glory 
(ver.  1)  as  behind  Abram,  directing  him. 

5.  None  inheritance  .  .  .  not  so 
much  as  to  set  his  foot  on — not  even 
afoot  breadth.  How  does  this  agree 
with  his  purchase  of  the  field  and  cave 
of  Machpelah  at  Hebron  ?  Jleyer  ex- 
plains that  this  "  refers  only  to  the  fir.st 
period  of  Abraham's  residence  in 
Palestine  before  the  instittition  of  cir- 
cumcision (ver.  8)   while  the  purchase  of 


b 


Vll. 


TIIK  ACTS. 


97 


promised  that,  he  would  give  it  to  him 
for  a  possession,  itnd  to  his  seed  after  him 
6  when  uj  yeMie  had  uo  child.  And  God 
spake  on  this  wise,  '  That  his  seed  should 
sojourn  in  a  strauge  land  ;  and  that  they 
should  bring  them  into  bondage,  and 
entreat  l/iem   evil  7  four  hundred  years. 


jExod.  12:40;  GaJ.  ;J  :  1" 
17 


7  And  '  the  nation  to  whom  they  shall  be 
in  bondage  will  I  judge,  said  (Jod  ;  and 
after  that  shall   they   come  forth'    and 

8  "'  serve  me  in  this  jilacc.'  i"  And  he  gave 
him  the  covenant  of  circumcision  ;  "and 
so  Abriiham  begat  Isaac,  and  circumcised 
him  the  eightn    day;   <>  and    Isaac  beynt 


^  Geu. 


.       'E.\od.  ch.  7  toch.  14;  Ps.  l:50:  10-15.       •  Exod.  3  : 
'J-14.        "  Gen.  21  :  2-i.        *  Gen.  25  :  21-26. 


the  field  falls  luucli  later."  Al)raham, 
however,  received  no  inheritance  and 
he  purchased  none,  but  only  a  liurial 
place.  (Gen.  23:20.)  Yet  God  proiniscd 
the  land  to  him  and  his  descendants 
when  he  had  no  child.  Ishmael  was 
not  l)oni,  and  Isaac  till  after  Abrani 
had  sojourned  in  Palestine  twenty-five 
years,  (oen.  n  :  i,  2.-) ;  n  ■.  s.)  Thus  the 
strong  faith  of  Ahrani,  Iwth  for  the 
child  and  the  iuiieritance  is  implied, 
and  that  both  of  these  were  the  free 
gift  of  God.  And  this  great  promise 
and  this  great  faitli  were  while  Abram 
was  yet  uncircumcised.  (See  Paul's 
reasoning  in  Rom.  4  :  9-12 ;  Gal.  3  : 
15-19.) 

6.  God  spake  on  this  Avise.  To 
Abram  (gcu.  i5:i3,  u)  and  to  ilo.ses — 
last  clause  in  next  verse  (E.\oa.:i :  n), 
q^uoted  freely  from  the  Septuagint  Ver- 
sion. Stephen's  language  implies  that 
he  does  not  quote  exactly.  Four 
hundred  years— a  round  number, 
about  that  time.  From  tlie  liirth  of 
Isaac  to  the  departure  of  the  cliildren 
of  Israel  from  Egypt  was  four  hundred 
and  five  years.  In  Exod.  12  :  40,  tlie 
.sojourning  of  Israel  in  Egypt  is  saiii  to 
have  been  four  hundred  and  tliirty 
years,  and  Paul,  in  Gal.  3  :  17,  makes 
the  entire  ijcriod  between  the  arrival 
of  Abram  in  Canaan  to  the  giving  of 
the  law,  in  round  numbei-s,  to  l)e  four 
hundred  and  thirty  years.  A  very  old 
solution  regarils  tlie  four  hundred  and 
thirty  years  in  Exod.  12  :  40  as  includ- 
ing the  previous  residence  in  Canaan  as 
well  as  that  in  Egyj)!,  as  follows : 
from  the  promise  to  the  l)irtli  of  Isaac, 
twenty-five  years  ;  from  the  birth  of 
Isaac  to  that  of  Jacob,  sixty  years. 
(Geu.  25:26.)  .lacob  was  One  hundred 
and  thirty  years  old  wlien  he  Ment 
down  into  Egyi>t.  The  time  in  Egyjjt, 
two  hundred  and  fifteen  years,  making  a 
total  of  four  hundred  and  tliirty  years. 
So  Josephus  in  Anliq.  ii.  15  ;  2.    The 


Septuagint  Version  and  the  Samaritan 
text  follow  the  same  comi)utatiou. 
Josephus  in  another  ])lace  (Aiitiij.  ii. 
9  :  1)  speaks  of  the  Israelites  spending 
four  hundred  years  in  Egyi)t,  wliicli 
would  seem  to  imply  that  there  weie 
two  ways  of  stating  the  time,  and  tliat 
Jo.sephus  did  not  regard  one  incon- 
sistent witli  the  other. 

7.  To  the  (luotation  from  Gen.  1,">  : 
14,  Stephen  adds,  and  serve  me  in 
this  place — which  is  implied  in  tlie 
promise,  that  Abraham's  descendants 
would  on  tlieir  return  to  jiossess  the 
land  serve  God  who  gave  it  to  them. 
Tlie  language,  however,  is  a  free  (juota- 
tion  and  application  of  Exod.  3  :  12, 
"  Ye  shall  serve  God  n])on  tliis  mount- 
ain," referring  to  the  worshij)  which 
should  l)e  offered  in  the  vicinity  of 
ilount  Iloreb.  But  Steplien  looks 
beyond  Ilorcb  and  views  the  worship 
and  service  of  God  in  the  returned 
Israelites  in  Canaan,  wliieh  could  l)e 
traced  back  to  llorelj  where  it  liad  been 
renewed  and  enhanced.  To  Stejilien's 
audience,  mIio  were  well  acquainted 
with  these  facts,  various  thoughts  would 
be  suggested,  such  as  the  strong  faith  of 
Abraliam  npoii  a  promise  which  was  to 
be  fulfilled  under  such  circumstances, 
and  so  many  hundred  years  after;  the 
vservice  of  God  not  confined  to  any  one 
place  since  Abraham  and  liis  descend- 
ants were  sojourners;  and  not  exclu- 
sive, since  Abraham  had  been  called 
from  among  idolaters  (J«sh.  2i:  2),  and  as 
yet  was  uncircumcised. 

8.  Stej>hen  pa.'iscs  over  fifteen  years 
of  Abraham's  liistory,  during  wiiicli 
time  Ishmael  had  been  born,  and  liad 
grown  to  a  lad  of  tliirteen  years.  And 
after  this  long  walk  of  faitli,  twenty- 
four  years  since  Al)rahani  eanu-  to 
Canaan,  (iod  gave  liim — iieiiig  an 
act  of  free  grace  on  God's  part — th.e 
covenant  of  circumcision — the  In- 
stUution    or    arranyemcnt    of    which 


OS 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cu.  Ml 


Jacob ;  and  •  Jacob  begat  the  twelve  patri- 
archs. 
9  f  And  the  patriarchs,  moved  with  envy, 
sold  Joseph  into  Egypt;  ebut  God  was 
10  with  him,  and  delivered  him  out  of  all 
his   afflictions,  •>  and  gave    him    favour 

«  Gen.  29  :  31,  etc. ;  30  :  5,  etc.  ;  3.'>  :  18,  23-20.       '  Gen.  .37  :  4,  11,  18-20,  28 ;  I's.  100  :  17.       e  Gun. 


and  wisdom  in  the  sight  of  Pharaoh, 
king  of  Egyi>t  ;  and  he  made  him  gov- 
ernor over  i^gypt  and  all  his  house. 
'  Mow  there  came  a  dearth  over  all  the 
lauil  of  Egypt  and  Chanaan,  and  great 
affliction ;    and   our   fathers    found    no 


39  :  2,  21,  23.         >>  Gen.  41  :  37-46  ;  42  :  G. 


'  Gen.  41  :  54-57. 


circumcision  was  the  sign.  (Gen.  i7:io, 
11;  Rom.  4:  u.)  Aiid  SO — ill  accordance 
with  tlie  covenant  God  gave  a  son  to 
Abraham,  even  Isaac,  and  Abraham 
conii)lied  with  the  covenant  which  was 
obligatory  ujiou  him,  and  circum- 
cised Isaac  the  eighth  day.  (oen. 
21 : 4.)  In  the  covenant  tiod  promised 
to  make  Abraham  the  father  of  many 
nations,  and  required  of  Al)raham  and 
his  descemhints  the  observance  of  the 
rite  of  circumcision.  And  Isaac 
begat  Jacob,  etc.  Literally,  ^Ind 
Jmac,  Jacob,  and  Jacob  the  twelve 
patriarchs,  meaning.  And  Isaac  begat 
and  circumcised  Jacob,  and  Jacob  begat 
and  circumcised  the  twelve  patriarchs. 
The  covenant  of  circumcision  is  the 
prominent  thought  and  circinnci.fed  the 
emphatic  word.  Thus  !Stei)hen  notices 
the  change  that  God  made  in  tlie  out- 
ward condition  of  his  chosen  people,  in 
which  they  continued  for  hundreds  of 
years  before  the  giving  of  the  law,  in- 
dicating also  that  the  jiromise  and  the 
rite  were  not  dependent  on  the  law. 
(G«i.  3:15-18.)  Thus  also,  .so  far  ficmi 
blaspheming,  Steplicn  reverently  recog- 
nizes this  divinely  ai>pointed  rite. 

9.  Stephen  pas.ses  to  the  next  import- 
ant change  in  the  condition  of  the 
chosen  peoj)le,  their  going  into  Egypt, 
resulting  from  the  sale  of  Jose))h 
thither.  (Geo.  .i7 :28.)  Moved  with 
envy — an  euvicnis  jealon.sy.  This  is 
tlie  first  sin  noticed  by  Stephen,  .sug- 
gestive of  the  many  sins  of  Israel  that 
followed.  But,  rather  ami,  running 
)i:iniilel  « itli  the  envy  aud  hatred  of 
ti'.e  [latriarchs,  his  bretliren  —  God 
v»  as  with  him— as  his  protector  and 
jiicscrver.  Here  begins  a  parallel  be- 
t.veen  faithful  leaders  and  unfaithful 
ji'.'ople.  Stephen  has  in  view  tlie  sinii- 
l.:ir  malicious  treatment  of  Jesus,  the 
Inimaniiel,  God  with  as  (M.iit.  i :  w) ;  and 
i:i  tilt'  ill-used  Josejih  and  the  rejected 
,M<),;cs,  both  of  whom  enjoyed  tiie  favor 
and  presence  of  God  and  became  the 


deliverers  of  the  people,  he  sees  types 
of  Christ.  This  best  explains  why  he 
devotes  so  much  space  to  them. 

10.  Tliis  verse  explains  how  God 
was  with  Jo-seph.  The  account  is  given 
in  the  forty-first  chajiter  of  Genesis. 
Gave  him  favor  and  Avisdom  in 
the  sight  of  Pharaoh — through  his 
power  in  interjireting  dreams  and  man- 
aging the  aft'airs  and  finances  of  Egypt. 
Pharaoh  said  to  .Joseph,  "  There  is  none 
so  discreet  and  wise  as  thou  art."  (Gen. 
41:39.)  Pharaoh — a  common  title  of 
the  ancient  sovereigns  of  Egyjit,  signi- 
fying the  k-i)i(j,  similar  to  the  "  C'tesars  " 
of  Ivome  or  "the  Czar"  of  Kussia. 
Governor  over  Egypt — viceroy  or 
prime  minister.  And  all  his  house, 
lord  chamberlain,  holding  the  second 
position  in  tlie  royal  household.  Thus 
in  civil  all'airs  and  the  family  he  was 
second  only  to  Pharaoh,  and  practi- 
cally the  ruler  of  the  land.  What  a 
foi'shaddwing  did  Stephen  doubtless  .see 
of  the  exaltation  of  Jesus  at  the  right 
hand  of  the  Eather! 

11.  How  Joseph  became  the  means 
of  bringing  his  whole  family  to  Etjypt. 
A  dearth — still  common  in  the  I'^ast. 
Eor  famines  in  Canaan,  see  Gen.  12  :  10 : 
21  :  (5.  These  were  owing  to  failures  in 
the  autumn  and  spring  rains.  In 
P>gyi)t  famines  are  generally  owing  to 
a  deficiency  in  the  rise  of  the  Nile  and 
to  drying  winds.  All  of  these  causes 
probably  united  in  Canaan  and  Egyjit 
in  the  days  of  Joseph.  (Gen. 41 .54-37.) 
In  A.  D.  ld(i4-lU71  there  was  a  seven 
years'  famine  in  Egyi>t  of  terrible 
severity.  (Compare  Stanley's  Jewish 
Church,  Lecture  IV.)  Our  "fathers — 
Stej)lien  thus  recognizes  with  his  hear- 
ers relationship  and  sympathy.  Sus- 
tenance— literally,  fodders  in  the 
plural,  here  doubtless  meaning  the 
various  kinds  of  necessary  food  for 
botli  beast  aud  men.  "A  scarcity  of 
fodder,  to  which  especially  belong  the 
want  of  cereal    fodder,    is    the    most 


Ch.  VI  I.J 


THE  ACTS. 


99 


12  susfon;ince.  *  But  when  Jacob  heard 
that   I  here  was  corn   in   Kgypt,  he  sent 

13  out  our  fathers  first.  '  And  at  the  second 
time  Joseph  vas  made  known  to  his 
brethren  ;  and  Joseph's  kindred  was  made 


14  known  unto  Pharaoh.  "Then  sent  .Jo- 
seph, and  called  hi.s  father  Jacob  to  /dm, 
anit  "  all  his  kindred,  three-score  and  fif- 

15  teen  souls.     "So  Jacob  went  down  into 

16  Egypt,  p  and  died,  he,  and  our  fathers,  and 


*  Gen.  ch.  42  to  ch.  4.=> 


'  Gen.  45  :  4,  IG. 


'  Gou.  40  :  .5.        P  Gen.  4!t  :  33  ;  Exod.  1 :  0. 


i  Gen.  4.5  :  9,  27.        "  Gi'n.  4C  :  27 ;  Deut.  10  :  22. 


urnt'nt  difficulty,  in  the  failure  of  crops, 
to  the  jios.sc.^sors  of  large  herd.s  of  cat- 
tle."    (Mkyek.) 

12.  Heard  that  there  was  corn 
— rather  ijraiii,  doul)tle.ss  referrinj,'  par- 
ticiilaily  to  wlieat  for  which  Egyjit 
was  uoted  in  tiie  ancient  world.  It 
was  the  ]>rincipal  granary  of  Ivonie  in 
ajiostolic  days.  (« :  6.  ^8;  28 :  II.)  First 
visit,  recorded  in  Gen.  42  :  1  f. 

i:i.  Joseph  was  made  known — 
WHS  rrroifttized  by  his  hrcthrcti — upon 
Ins  saying,  "  I  am  Joseph."  (Otn  is  :  s.) 
Joseph's  kindred.  His  name  is 
repeated  Avith  perhaps  patriotic  pride, 
and  also  eniphasizing  him  as  the  chief 
among  his  hrethren,  on  whom  they 
were  dependent.  Instead  of  kindred 
some  would  translate  race,  as  in  ver. 
19  ;  4  :  30.  Untfainilij  seems  hetter  as 
in  4  :  6  ;  18  :  2().  (See"  Thayer's  Lex.  of 
N.  T.)  Made  known  to  Pharaoh. 
His  race  was  already  known  to  Pha- 
raoh. (Gen.  H:  12.)  His  jjarticular  fam- 
ily now  became  known  to  him,  his 
brethren  with  Joseph,  and  his  father 
still  alive  in  Canaan.  (Gen. «  :  ig-jo.) 
No  one  of  the  hretiiren  was  presented 
to  Pharai)!i  till  afterward,     (cou.  -t? :  ■>.) 

14.  His  kindred — his  relations 
collectively  and  personally.  Three- 
score and  fifteen  souls — seventy- 
five.  According  to  the  Hebrew  text  of 
Gen.  40  :  27  ;  Exod.  1  :  .5  ;  Deut.  ](» :  22, 
the  number  is  .seventy.  But  in  all  of 
these  places  the  Sejituagint  Version 
has  seventy-five.  In  tlic  latter  version 
(ten.  40  :  27  has  the  iMter])o]ation, 
"  And  tlie  sons  of  J()s<'ph  l)orn  to  him 
in  the  Uuid  of  Egypt  were  !iin(- souls," 
which  may  include  t'oe  live  .sons  of 
Ephraim  and  Maoasst-h  afterward  born 
to  them.  (Sum.  •-'R:2>-;;7.)  These  nine 
added  to  tlie  .sixty-six  of  .Taeol)'s 
household  that  came  down  into  Egypt 
(Gen.  4fi;26)  make  .seventy -live.  Ste- 
phen's statement  accords  with  the 
tireek  Version  of  tlie  Old  Testament  of 
this  day  ,aud  doubtless  with  the  popular 
understanding  of  the  narrative  at  that 


time.  We  need  not  regard  his  state" 
ment  as  an  error.  It  does  not  contra" 
diet  the  Hebrew  text,  but  simply  adds 
certain  members  of  Joseph's  family 
not  included  in  the  original  reckoning. 
Another  way  of  harmonizing  the  two 
statements  is  to  regard  the  seventy-five 
to  be  the  number  of  persons  actually 
sent  fur.  Stephen  may  have  included 
the  wives  that  came  down  into  Egyj)t. 
In  that  case  Joseph  and  his  family 
would  not  be  included,  and  Judah's 
wife  was  dead  ;  and  probably  Simeon's 
wife  al.so,  for  his  youngest  son  was 
born  of  a  t'anaanitish  woman.  Tlitis 
the  nine  wives  added  to  tlie  sixty-si.x 
descendants  of  Jacob  would  give  the 
nundier  recpiircd. 

15,  16.  So,  etc.,  rather,  And  Jacob, 
connecting  t'lis  verse  with  the  preced- 
ing in  a  continuative  narrative.  And 
Avere  carried  over,  etc. — and  were 
7'emnved  to  SJiec/iein,  a  city  of  great 
antiiinity,  locateilin  the  valley  between 
Mounts  Ebal  and  Gerizim,  about  seven 
miles  south  of  Samaria.  The  Old 
Testament  records  that  Jacob  was 
buried  at  Machpelah  (Gen.  50  :  114)  and 
that  Joseph's  l)0(iy  was  cndialnied  and 
carried  out  of  Egypt  and  buried  at 
Shcehem.  (kx.>.).  13  fio:  josh.24 : .«.)  Noth- 
ing is  said  of  the  burial  of  the  otlier 
sons  of  Jacoli.  (Kxod.  i;6.)  Stephen's 
account  may  be  regarded  as  supple- 
mental. Joseph  us  says  the  sons  of 
Jacob  were  buried  at  Hebron ;  but 
Kabbinical  traditions  say  that  they 
were  buried  in  Shcehem.  Jeiome,  who 
died  at  IJetblehem,  A.  n.  420,  says  that 
the  tombs  of  the  twelve  patriarchs 
were  to  be  seen  at  Shcehem  in  his  day. 
Jacob  and  his  sons  may  all  have  been 
buried  at  first  at  Hebron,  and  after- 
ward removed  to  Shechem.  Or  were 
carried  over  may  refer  only  to  the  sons 
of  Jacob  who  were  buried  in  Shechem. 
The  Revised  Version  renders.  They 
were  carried  over,  etc.  The  mention  of 
the  burial  of  the  patriarchs  in  hated 
Samaria  was  suggestive  of  the  fact  that 


100 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VII. 


<i  were  carried  over  into  Sychem,  and  laid 
ill  '  tlie  sepulchre  that  Abraham  bought 
for  a  sum  of  money  of  the  sons  of  Em- 
mor  (he  father  of  Sychem. 


17  But  when  "the  time  of  the  promise 
drew  nigh,  which  God  had  sworn  to 
Abraham, 'the  people   grew   and   multi- 

18  plied  in  Egypt,   till   another  kiug  arose, 


«  Exod.  13  :  19;  Josh.  24  :  32. 


'  Gen.  22  :  9-20;  33  :  19.     b  Gen.  15  :  13. 
Vs..  105  :  24,  25. 


♦Exod.  1:  7-12: 


God's  people  in  their  burial  are  not 
limited  to  any  particular  place,  aud 
that  Samaria  had  lieeu  aud  might  lie 
the  abode  of  God's  children. 

The  sepulchre  that  Abraham 
bought,  etc.  The  rest  of  tliis  verse 
has  given  much  difficulty.  Here  it  is 
stated  that  Abraham  bought  the  tomb 
of  the  sous  of  llaiuor  in  Sliechem,  but 
in  Gen.  2.S  :  15,  it  is  said  that  Al)rahaiu 
bought  the  cave  of  Machpelah  at 
Hebron  of  Ephron  the  Hittite,  and  in 
Geu.  .33  :  19,  it  is  said  that  Jacol) 
liouglit  the  field  at  Shecliem,  which 
afterward  became  a  Ijuryiug  place. 
(jo>h.  v!i:  -.yi-)  Some  think  that  an  error 
had  cre}>t  into  some  early  mauuscrijit, 
aud  thiit  tlie  nanu^  Abraham  in  some 
way  had  been  substituted  for  that  of 
Jacob.  Or,  that  neitliei'  name  was  in 
the  original  nuiuuserijit,  aud  that  it 
read,  "  in  the  tomb  tluit  one  bought," 
etc.,  and  some  officious  transcriber, 
\thinking  the  verb  needed  a  nominative 
case,  i)ut  in  the  luime  Abraliam.  Othi'rs. 
however,  Ijelieve  that  Abraham  jmr- 
cha.sed  or  acquired  a  piece  of  ground 
at  Shechem,  on  which  he  built  an  altar. 
((;cn.  12:6, 7.)  TIlis  for  many  years  Mas 
occupied  liy  otliers,  1)ut  was  recovered 
liy  Jacot>,  ])erhaps  by  force  (Gen.  4r :•.'•_>), 
and  more  land  ])urchased  aud  an  altar 
built.  (Gen.  .-ia  :  iH.)  Tluit  tile  sons  of 
Hamor  apjiear  in  both  j)urcliases  afi'ords 
no  serious  difficulty,  since  five  hundred 
years  later  we  find  tlie  same  name  con- 
nected witli  Sliechem.  (Juiig.  9  :  is.) 
Eitlier  of  the  above  suppositions  ex- 
]>laiiis  the  difficulty.  We  cannot  suji- 
i)i>sc  that  Slci>bcn,  Luke,  or  Paul  could 
nave  been  ignorant  of  the  facts  in  tlu' 
case.  Stci>hen  passeil  ra]>idly  over 
liistory  familiar  to  his  hearers,  leaving 
much  to  be  snj)i)lied  in  their  own 
iriinds.  To  us  who  know  so  little  of 
these  events,  it  is  not  strange  that 
tliere  are  tilings  hard  for  us  (o  explain. 
The  troulde  is  in  our  ignorance,  not  in 
Ste])hen  or  those  who  heard  him. 
Thus  far  Stepheu  has  shown  great 


adroitness  in  his  answer  to  the  high 
jiriest's  question.  Tracing  the  early 
history  of  their  race,  and  using  almos"t 
tiie  exact  words  of  the  Scrijjtures,  he 
indicates  his  reverence  for  God,  his 
brotherhood  witli  the  Jewisli  people, 
and  his  regard  for  their  institutions. 
His  words  also  are  suggestive  of  the 
spirituality  and  universality  of  tlie 
worship  of  God,  and  of  the  changing 
forms  aud  circumstances  in  which  at 
difl'erent  times  and  places  it  may  be 
otfered. 

17-43.  How    THE     Projiise    was 

FrLEII.I.ED       UNDER      jMo.SES  ;       THE 

Tkkat.ment  HE  Received.    (Exod.  i  : 

7.  8.  -n  :  2  :  11. U  ;  3  ;  2-10;  7  :  8,  4.)  God  faith- 
fully fulfills  his  promise,  though  the 
Ijcojilc  arc  slow  to  believe  him.  The 
rejected  one  l)ecanie  the  leader  and  the 
(hdiveier  of  Israel.  God  protected  Moses 
in  infancy,  and,  after  years  of  jirovi- 
<]eiitial  guidance  and  training,  aj)i)ears 
to  him  in  the  wilderness,  commissions 
him  as  a  ruler  aud  redeemer,  aud  for 
forty  years  gives  liim  success  in  his 
leailership.  Yet  Israel  was  di.sobe- 
dient  to  Closes  aud  God. 

17.  Stephen  ])asses  from  the  times  of 
Jo.sepli  to  tlio.se  of  Moses.  As  in  tlie 
)(ast,  (iod  is  not  confined  to  outward 
forms,  or  times,  or  places  of  worship. 
But  when,  etc..  But  ac  or  in  propor- 
lion  (i.-i  llir  time  of  the  promise  drew 
)ie(ir,  iniiilyiug  a  progressive  increase 
of  the  peojtle,  in  numbers  and  influence, 
and  consequently  in  power.  They 
increased  more  and  more  rajiidlv. 
»  Iiich  God  had  sAVorn — aceordiiiu' 
to  the  oldest  and  best  manuscripts, 
irhir/i  God  hod  declared  to  Ahridunn. 
(Gen.  15:  13.) 

18.  The  sentence  of  preceding  verse  i.' 
completed  ill  this.  Till.  The  Isiai'liti  s 
were  coutinniug  to  increase  when  this 
king  arose,  and  when  he  endeavored  to 
put  a  stop  to  it.  Another  king— 
another  kind  of  kinei,  another  dynasty. 
Josejihus  says  that  "  the  crown  had  now 
come  into  another  family,"  aud  that  the 


Ch.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


101 


19  which  knew  not  Joseph.  The  same 
dealt  suhtilly  with  our  kiiiilred,  and  evil 
entreated  our  fathers,  "so  thai  they  cast 
out  their  young  children,  to  the  end  they 
might  not  live. 

20  » In  which  lime  Moses  was  horn,  and 
J  was  exceeding  fair,  and  nourished  up  in 


21  his  father's  house  three  months:  and 
I  when  he  was  cast  out,  Pharaoh's  daugh- 
ter took  him  up,  and  nourished  him  "  for 

22  her  own  son.  And  Moses  was  learned  in 
all  the  wisdom  of  the  lCgy)jtians,  and  was 
b  mighty  in  words  and  in  deeds. 

23  "And  when   he  was  full  forty  years 


Exod.  1  :  22. 


Exod.  2:2.       J  Heb.  11  :  23. 
24  ■  19.         "  Exod.  2  ; 


'  Exod.  2  :  3-10. 
11-15;  Heb.  11  ;  25. 


Il.b.  11  :  24.      b  Luke 


Ei^yptians  had  "  forgotten  the  benefits 
tlifV  IukI  receiveil  from  Joseph." 
(Aiitiij.  ii.  9,  1.)  Westcottuiiil  llort,  fol- 
k)\viiig  some  of  the  oldest  maiiuseripts, 
read,  another  king  ocer  Egypt.  Knew 
not  Joseph — wlio  had  never  seen  or 
known  Joseph,  and  was  partially  or 
wiioUy  ii^norant  of  the  threat  benefit  of 
his  ])uMic  services.  This  might  arise 
from  the  change  of  dynasty,  the  length 
of  time  that  had  intervened  since 
Josejih,  and  the  indifference  of  this  king 
to  those  of  a  former  dynasty.  (Ktmi.  i :  8.) 
Olshaiisen,  Hacliett,  and  some  others, 
however,  take  a  llel>raistic  meaning  of 
the  word,  and  i-ender  n'ho  did  nut  regard 
the  merit  of  Joseph,  was  indifferent  to 
his  memory  and  services,     (i  Thesa.  4:1-.!; 

Sept.  Gen.  39:  fi.) 

19.  Dealt  subtilely,  craftily  «'(7A 
our  race,  by  enslaving  them  and  de- 
stroying the  male  children  through  the 
midwives  and  the  Egyjitians.  (Kxod. 
i.s--'2.)  Evil-entreated,  oppressed 
our  fathers  so  that,  rather,  that  they 
might  cast  out  or  expose  their  infants, 
in  order  that  these  might  not  be  pre- 
served alive.  The  king  of  Egypt  hoped 
by  bitter  oppressions  to  cause  the  Israel 
ites  to  destroy  their  own  children.  But 
in  this  he  failed ;  and  hence  he  com- 
mandeil  that  all  the  Hebrew  juale  chil- 
dren should  be  destroyed  at  I)irth,  or 
cast  into  the  Nile;  and  this  was  to  be 
executed  by  his  Egyptian  subjects. 
(15x0(1.1:22.)  The  rendering  so  that  is 
le.ss  accordant  with  the  Greek  and  with 
history.  There  is  no  evidence  that  the 
Israelites  voluntarily  destroyed  their 
own  children.  If  so,  why  the  com- 
mand of  the  king  to  murder  them  ? 

(Kxod.  1  ;  16.) 

20.  In  which  time,  or  season,  of 
oppression,  very  probably  when  at  its 
height.  Was  exceeding  fair — liter- 
ally, fair  to  God,  God  Ijeing  judge. 
This  is  a  form  of  a  Hebrew  superlative. 
Thus    iu    Hebrew    we    read    of   "  the 


mountains  of  God,''  and  "the cedars  of 
God,"  indicative  of  lofty  mountains 
and  towering  cedars.  The  Sei)tnagiiit 
(Joiiau:i  :2.)  calls  Niueveli  a  city  "great 
unto  God,"  that  is,  an  exceeding  great 
city.  Both  Josephus  and  Philo  relate 
tlie  traditions  regarding  tlie  sui)erlative 
beautv  of  the  child  Moses.  {A)iti<j.  ii. 
9,  7,  and  Philo,  Vit.  3Ios.  i.  }..  G04.) 

21.  When  he  was  cast  out,  or 
e.rposed.  Took  hiiu  up — took  him  up 
for  herself  as  her  own,  implying  that 
she  adopted  him,  an  idea  brought  fully 
out  in  the  next  clause:  and  iwiirishe'd 
him  for  herself  as  a  son. 

22.  And  Moses  was  learned — 
rather,  was  instructed.  It  is  not  Moses' 
proficiency,  but  his  education,  tiiat  is 
here  mentioned.  Stephen  does  not  de- 
rive this  from  the  Old  Testament,  but 
from  trailition.  Tlie  adopted  son  of 
Pharaoh's  <laugliter  would  surely  be 
educateil  in  tlie  learning  of  the  country. 
Concerning  the  wistiom  of  Egvpt,  see 
1^  Kings  4  :  30  ;  Isa.  19  :  ll-il  The 
Egyptians  cultivated  mathematics,  na- 
tural philosoithy,  and  medicine,  gave 
attention  to  astronomy,  chemistry,  ge- 
ometry, anatomy,  and  surgery,'  and 
were  skilled  in  manufactures,  architec- 
ture, sculpture,  painting  and  music. 
Mighty  in  word— rather,  according 
to  tlie  l)est  reading,  mighty  in  his  words 
(tnd  deeds.  Moses  was  indeed  inferior 
to  Aaron  in  mere  fluency,  and  he  dis- 
trusted his  own  ability,  but  he  excelled 
in  thought  and  matter,  as  his  recorded 
discourses  show.  (See  Dent.,  especially 
ch.  27-33.)  Tradition  makes  Closes  an 
inventor  of  boats,  and  engines  for  Ijuild- 
ing,  and  instruments  of  war.  Josephus 
relates  that  when  the  Ethiopians  in- 
vaded Egyj)t,  Moses  was  tlie  general  of 
the  army  which  defeated  them.  {Antiq. 
ii.  10.) 

23.  When  he  was  full  forty 
years  old.  His  age  is  not  given  in 
Exod,  2  ;  11.    The  Old  Testament  sim- 


102 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch-.  VII. 


old,  it  came  into  his   heart   to  visit  his  ; 

24  brethren  the  children  of  Israel.  And  j 
seeing  one  oj  Ihem  suffer  wrong,  he  de-  I 
fended   fiim,  and  avenged  him  that  was  j 

25  oppressed,  and  smote  the   Egyptian  :  for  j 
he  supposed  his  brethren  would  have  un-  | 
derstood    how    that    God    by  his   hand 
would  deliver  them  :  but  they  understood 


26  not.  4  And  the  next  day  he  showed  liim- 
self  unto  them  as  they  strove,  aud  would 
have  set  them  at  one  again,  saying,  .Sirs, 
«  ye  are  brethren  ;  why  do  ye   wrong  one 

27  to  another?  But  he  that  did  his  neigh- 
bour wrong 'thrust  him  away,  saying, 
s  Who  made  thee  a  ruler  and  a  judge  over 
us?  wilt  thou  kill  me,  as  thou  didst  the 


*  Exod.  2  :  13. 


>  Gen.  13  :  8.        »  Prov.  9:7.        e  Luke  12  .  14. 


ply  states  that  he  was  eighty  years  old 
wheu  he  stood  l>efore  Pharaoh  (Exod.  7:7), 
and  one  iuindred  aud  twenty  when  he 
died.  (Dent.  :m:7.)  Stephen  divides  the 
life  of  Moses  into  tliree  equal  periods  of 
forty  years  (ver.  so,  36),  which  agrees  with 
Jewish  tradition  and  current  belief. 
It  came  into  his  heart,     (see the ix 

pression  in  Jer.  3  :  16  ;    32  :  35.)        "  It     might 

seem  to  have  come  casuallj'  into  Closes' 
mind,    aud    yet    Moses    was    divinely 

impelled."      (BENGEL.)      (See  HcI..  ii :  24.) 

To  visit  his  brethren — to  loitk  after 
them,  iu  order  to  sympathize  witli  and 
help  them.  The  verb  liere  iise<l  is  a 
very  expressive  one.     (la:  u;  mkei  i?**; 

Mau.  25:36;  James  1  :  27.)       "  Com})aring   the 

language  here  with  that  of  Luke  1  :  ti.S 
and  Heb.  2  :  6,  we  may  see  how  ]\I<)ses 
was  a  type  of  Christ  aud  how  Christ 
was  a  prophet  like  unto  Moses  (3:22), 
like  him  leaving  a  royal  court  and 
going  out  to  look  after  and  to  redeem 
those  whom  he  was  not  ashamed  to  call 
brethren.      (Heb.  2:11.)"     (AliUOTT.) 

24.  Wronged — unjustly  treated 
with  blows.  (E,N0(i.2:  ii.)  "Avenged 
the  wrong,  vindicated  the  right.  Him 
that  was  oppressed,  being  over- 
come and  wearied  out  (2  eter2:7),  and 
almost  ready  to  die ;  very  probably  suf- 
fering, according  to  an  old  o])inion, 
from  one  of  Pharaoli's  taskmasters. 
Smote  the  Egyptian  so  that  he 
killed  him.  (Exud.  2:  !••.)  Mo-ses  deter- 
mined boldly  to  espouse  the  cause  of 
God's  people,  renouncing  tlie  advan- 
tages of  his  rank  among  the  P^gyi)tians. 
(Heb.  11 :  25. 26.)  He  had  doubtless  been 
taught  his  descent  and  about  Israel's 
God  by  his  mother.     (  kxoj.  2 :  ii,  10.) 

25.  For  he  supposed,  etc — ra- 
ther, And  he  was  thiukiiKj  that  his 
brethren  understood  that  God,  bjj  his 
hand,  vas  (jrvinfj  safvalion,  or  deliver- 
ance to  them,  this  very  act  l)eing  the 
l)eginning  of  it.  But  why  did  Moses 
thus  think?     Probably  (1)  because  the 


time  of  deliverance  i)romised  to  Abra- 
ham and  predicted  l)y  Jacob  and  .Tosej)h 
drew  nigh.  These  prouii.><es  liad  doubt- 
less been  handed  down  from  generation 
to  generation.  (2)  Because  of  his  provi- 
dential deliverances  and  guithmce  thus 
far.  His  own  convictions  were  so  deep 
and  clear  that  he  was  to  ]>v  tlieir  deliv- 
erer that  lie  thinks  it  iiuist  be  clear  to 
tlieni.  (3)  Because  of  liis  rank  aud  jK)- 
sition  at  the  royal  court,  which  gave 
hiin  sj)eeial  advantages,  and  might  re- 
mind them  of  Joseph.  But  notwith- 
standing the  many  circumstances  and 
j)rovidences])oiutingto  Moses  as  Israel's 
deliverer,  Stephen  adiis,  But  they 
understood  not.  So  the  Jews  un- 
derstood not  that  Jesus  was  the  Clirist 
when  he  came,  notwith.standiiig  tlie 
many  things  that  proved  him  to  be  the 
Saviour  foretold  by  the  projihets.  (.i-im 
1:10.11.)  Notice  how  Stei)lien  uses  the 
word  salvation,  suggestive  of  tlic  .'ialva- 
tion  whicli  he  preaclied  tlirotigli  .Ii-sus. 
20.  Nor  was  this  all ;  but  ilo.^es  was 
rejected  the  following  day,  when  he 
showed  himself  suddenly,  iu  the 
character  of  a  leader  aud  deliverer, 
to  them  as  they  strove,  qiiarr(iin(j. 
Two  Israelites.  (Exod.  2:13.)  Stephen  is 
brief,  since  the  circum.'^tances  were  fa- 
miliar to  all.  Would  have  set  them 
at  one  again,  constrained  them  by 
e,\liortation,  inv/^^  them  to  he  (tt  peace. 
Moses  ajipears  to  have  stojjjied  their 
strife,  at  least  momentarily.  Sirs,  or 
men,  ye  are  brethren ;  hence  ye 
should  not  fight;  your  relationship 
makes  it  a  greater  wrong  and  more  un- 
seemly  than  if  you  were  of  difterei.t 

nationalities.       (see  Gen.  13 :  8.) 

27.  But  he  that  did  his  neigh- 
bor wrong — he  who  icas  wronejiiKj  his 
neighbor,  showing  that  he  was  not 
reconciled,  and  that  the  other  was  act- 
ing on  the  defensive.  Neighbor,  one 
by  race  a  brother.  Thrust  him,  that 
is,  Moses,  away,  repelling  and  rei»u- 


Ch.  vir.] 


THE  ACT? 


10.". 


29  Kgyptiati  yesterday  ?  '■'I'tien  Heil  Muses 
at  this  snyiiig,  ami  was  a  stranger  in  llio 
land  of  Madiau,  where  he  begat  two  sons. 


'  And  when  forty  years  were  expired, 
tlicru  appeared  to  liiiu  in  the  wilderi.ess 
of  mount  8iua  au  angel  of  the   Lord  in  a 


i>  Exod.  2  :  15,  22 ;  4  :  20  ;  18  •  3,  4. 


Exod.  :! :  1-10. 


(Hating  him  as  oue  liaviug  no  right  or 
authority  to  interfere.  Who  made, 
appointed,  thee  a  ruler  in  general,  or 
a  jiidsfe  in  particular  over  us?  The 
question  deniaiuls  a  negative  answer, 
and  was  thus  au  euiiihatic  rejection  of 
the  claims  of  Closes.  Tiiis  appears  to 
represent  the  general  feelings  of  the 
Israelites  toward  him.  They  understood 
his  claims,  but  not  God's  intention  con- 
cerning him,  and  rejected  him.  So 
the  Jew  understood  not,  and  rejected 
Christ's  authority.     (:i  •  it  ;  va  -.  w.)  " 

28.  Wilt  thou,  etc.  Thoii,  will 
not  surelji  put  me  out  of  the  way  like 
as  thou  diJ.st,  etc. — insinuating  his 
knowledge  of  what  Closes  had  done 
and  perhaps  his  secret  manner  of 
doing  it.  (Kxod.  2: 12.)  So  far  from 
acknowledging  the  authority  of  Jloses, 
this  Israelite  accuses  Moses  of  lawless 
violence  and  murder.  So  Jesus  was 
counted  among  transgressors.  (laa.  53-. 
8,9.)  Thus  Ste])hen  is  i)rej)aring  the 
way  for  showing  that  in  their  rejection 
of  Christ  they  were  but  following  the 
steps  of  their  fathers,  always  resisting 
the  Holy  Spirit.     (Ver.  si.) 

29.  Then  tied  Moses  at  this 
saying — tiuding  that  his  own  people 
did  not  accept  him  as  their  leader,  and 
that  the  facts  had  come  to  Pharaoh's 
ears,  who  sought  to  slay  him.  (Exod. 
2 :  19.)  "  Pharaoh's  cotirt  was,  of  course, 
no  longer  a  home  for  the  patriot,  who 
loved  his  own  oppressed  jieople  better 
than  the  splendid  future  of  an  l'^gy])t- 
ian  prince.  (Heb.  ii;25)"  (Dr.  J.  S. 
HowsoN.)  His  expectations  of  leader- 
ship were  blasted,  and  during  an  exile 
for  forty  years,  enduring  the  hardshijjs 
of  a  humble  shepherd,  the  early  con- 
viction that  he  was  to  l»e  the  ajipointed 
deliverer  of  his  peo]>le  faded  (piite  away 
from  his  mind.  But  his  youthful  aui- 
bition  and  self-confidence  were  checked, 
and  he  was  taught  that  meekness  which 
was  ever  afterward  his  marked  charac- 
teristic. (Num.  12 :  ,1.)  At  the  first  Moses 
undertook  to  deliver  (Exoa.  2 :  12)  and  he 
expected  the  Israelites  to  receive  him 
with  gratitude.      But  afterward   God 


declares  himself  to  l)e  the  deliverer, 
and  M<ises  his  agent  (Kx.hI.  3 :  *<iii),  wiio 
undertakes  it  with  humility  and  .self- 
di.strust.  And  was  a  stranger — 
became  a  nojonrner,  like  tiie  patriarelis, 
without  a  jiermanent  home  or  country. 
The  land  of  Midian — named  after 
one  of  the  sons  of  Abraham  by  Ketnrah 
(Geii.  25:1-4),  )iy  whose  descendants  it 
was  inhabited.  They  were  a  wandering 
jieople  inhabiting  tlie  Sinaitic  {)euiii- 
sula,  reaching  from  the  wilderness  of 
Sinai  on  one  side  to  the  territory  of 
Moab  on  the  other.  Begat  two  sous 
— Gershom  and  Eliezer.     (Exod.  3 :  22;  4  : 

25,  2«;   18  :  2-t.) 

30.  Forty  years  having  passed, 
according  to  the  current  tradition  of 
the  Jews.  (SeeoDver  2.i.)  In  the  Avil- 
derness,or  desert,  of  mount  Sinai. 

He  "  came  unto  the  mountain  of  God 
unto  Horeb."  (ixod. 3:i.)  In  the  Old 
Testament  l)f)th  names  are  used  of  the 
same  locality;  in  the  New  Testament 
only  Sinai  occurs.  Horeb  appears  to 
designate  the  whole  mountain  range ; 
Sinai,  the  particular  mountain  from 
which  God  gave  the  law.  An  angel 
of  the  Lord.  The  highest  critical 
authorities  omit  of  the  Lord.  In  Exod. 
3:2,  it  is  "  the  angel  of  Jehovah,"  a 
manifestation  of  God  himself,  espe- 
cially of  the  second  person,  the  Loijos. 
He  is  also  called  "  the  angel  of  his 
presence  "  (isa.  63 : 9),  "  the  angel  of  tlie 
covenant"  (Mai. .tii)^  and  he  speaks  as 
God  himself  (ver.  31;  Exod.  3 :  fi).  Com- 
pare Exod.  13  :  21  with  14  :  19.  In  his 
great  brevity  Stephen  simply  says  un 
angel,  but  .since  he  ap])ropriates  t!ie 
titles  of  God  (ver.  32),  he  mu.st  l)e  no  less 
than  "  the  Son  of  God,"  since  God  will 
not  give  his  glory  to  another."  (isa.  42 : 
H;  iM  ;  II.)  In  a  flame  of  fire,  or  fiery 
fiame,  symbol  of  the  divine  presence. 
It  was  not  natural  fire,  for  it  did  not 
consume  the  bush,  but  the  supernat- 
ural light  of  God's  glory.  (Exod.  19  :  1H; 
Isa.  6:4;    Ezi-k.   1:4;    Rev.    1:14.)         In    of    a 

bush — a  thorn  or  bramble  hush,  out  of 
the  mid.st  of  it.  The  whole  phrase  is 
equivalent  to  a  fiaminy  burniny  bush. 


104 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VII. 


31  flame  of  fire  in  a  bush.  When  Mosi>s  saw 
//,  he  wondered  at  the  sight ;  and  as  he 
drew  near  to  behold  i7,  the   voice  of  the 

32  Lord  came  unto  him,  .s(i(/(/i.'/,  ^'lam  the 
God  of  thy  fathers,  the  God  of  Abraham, 
and  the  God  of  Isaac,  and  the  (iod  of 
.iacob.'  Then  Moses  '  trembled,  and  durst 

3;!  not  behold.  "  Then  said  the  Lord  to 
him,  Put  off  thy  shoes  from  thy  feet :  for 
the  place  where  thou  staudest  is  holy 


34  ground.  I  have  seen,  I  have  seen  the 
altliition  of  my  people  which  is  in  Egy|)t, 
and  1  have  heard  their  tiroaTung,  and 
"am  come  down  to  delivci  them.  And 
now  come,  I  will  send  thee  iuto  Egypt. 

35  This  Moses  whom  they  refused,  saying, 
'Who  made  thee  a  ruler  and  a  judge?' 
the  same  did  (iod  send  /o  he  a  ruler  and 
a  deliverer  "by  the  hand  of  the  angel 
which    appeared    to    him    in  the    bush. 


k  Matt.  22  :  32  ;  Heb.  11 :  10. 

03 


1  .ludg.  0  :  22;  13  :  22;  Isa.  6  :  5. 
I.        »  Exod.  14  :  19  ;  Num.  20  :  10. 


'  Josh. 


■>  Isa. 


31.  To  behold.  Moses  drew  near 
to  oltnerre  more  closely  the  sight,  what 
it  2(mlil  be.    The  voice  of  the  Lord 

— of  Jehovah.  (Kxod.  3 :  s,  4.)  From  this 
ami  tlie  deelaration  in  the  next  verse  it 
is  evident  tliat  it  was  the  angel  of 
.lehovah,  the  divine  Son,  the  Jtevealer 
under  l)oth  the  Old  and  the  New  Dis- 
]>ensations. 

32.  Home  of  the  oldest  manuscripts 
omit  God  liefore  Isaac  and  Jacob, 
making  tlie  form  the  same  as  in  ;5  :  i;i. 
Christ  dethices  the  doctrine  of  a  future 
life  from  these  words  (Matt.  21  r  ai'),  indi- 
cating that  tlie  ]>atriarehs  were  still 
living,  one  (U»y  to  l)e  reunited  with 
their  bodies.  Then  Moses  trembled 
and  durst  not  behvJld,  ohscrrc,  con- 
temjtlate  it,  which  he  was  ))roj>osing  to 
do.  (ver.  31.)  Ilenee  the  lni]>roved 
Bible  Union  Version  translates,  Jhircd 
vot  coiwhler  it.  "And  .Moses  hid  his 
face,  for  he  was  afraifl  to  look  upon 

God."       (Exnrt.  :!:«.) 

33.  In  the  account  iji  Exodus  tliis 
verse  is  brought  in  liefon'  tlie  j)receding 
one.  In  his  hasty  survey  Sti-phen 
simply  adds  this  command  al.'io.  Not 
Tlieii,  but  Att'i  the  Lord  said  nnto 
him  :  Put  oil",  etc.  Loam-  tin'  xim- 
la Is  from  off  thi/frct — a  mark  of  rever- 
ence in  tiu'  East  in  the  ])resciiee  of  a 
sujierior.  The  jiriests  offieiateii  liare- 
foot  in  the  tabernacle  and  the  temple. 
Mohammedans  always  enter  their 
mos(|iu'S  with  naked  feet.  Founded 
probably  on  the  idea  of  i>utting  otl'  all 
impurity,  to  which  the  feet  are  peculi- 
arly exposed  in  walking.  (Josh.  5;  15.) 
Is  holy  ground — because  of  the  jires- 
ence  of  Jehovah.  This  was  five  hun- 
dred years  before  the  temjile  was  built, 
and  the  fact  shows  that  God  was  not 
confined  to  place  in  the  nuuiifestation 
of  bis  presence.    Thus  Ste}>hen  grad- 


[  iially  and  incidentally  brings  to  view 

1  the  great  doctrine  of  spiritual  worshij). 
34.  In  this  verse  Ste])hen  comjiletes 

1  his  account  of  God's  call  and  commis- 
sion of  Closes.     It  is  a  ]iartial  (|Uotation 

\  of  Exod.  :i  :  7-10.     1  have  seen,  etc.— 

j  literally,  Seiinij  I  s(ni\  an  em]ihatic 
expression,  aurely  I  saw,  so  also  1  heard. 

I  .  .  .  I  came  down.  God  is  presented, 
after  the  manner  of  men,  as  having 
come  down  from   lieavan  to  attend  to 

'  the  matter.  From  his  throne  he  saw 
the  oppression  of  his  ])eo]>le,  and  heard 
their  (jroanuujs  and  siijhimj  for  relief, 
and  he  came  down  to  see  as  it  were  for 
himself,  his  presence  being  manifested 
in  the  burning  bush,  and  his  jiuri)Ose 

j  was  to  deliver  his  people  from  their 
0]ij>ressors,  and  lead  them  to  the  land 
of  promise.     Four  hundred  years  had 

i  passed,  and  the  time  of  fulfillment  of 
God's  word  was  at  hand.     He  comniis- 

I  sions  Closes  and  sends  him  into  Egy])t. 

I  35.  With  this  verse  8tei>]ien  begins 
an  apiilieation  witli  reference  to  Jloses, 
as  a  type  and  jiredictor  of  the  Messiah. 
Two  jjarallels  become  more  ap])arent: 
that  between  Closes  and  Jesus,  with  a 

'  careful  withholding  of  the  name  of  the 
latter;  and  that  between  disobedient 
Israel  of  Moses'  day  and  of  Stejdien's 
day.     This  Moses.    The  demonstra- 

i  tive  pronoun  this  is  very  emphatically 

I  used  four  times  at  the  lieginning  of  this 

!  and   the   next  three  verses.      Whom 

j  they  refused — rejected ;  the  one  man's 
act  rejiresenting  the  sjiirit  of  the  nation. 

■  He  who  was  rejected  as  a  ruler  and 
judge  is  commiss:ioved  liy  God  as  a 
ruler  and  a  deliverer— «.  redeemer. 
The  last  word  is  carefully  chosen,  sug- 
gestive of  Jesus  as  the  ransomer.     This 

[  noun  is  only  found  here  ;  but  the  verb, 
to  redeem,  from  whicli  it  is  derived,  is 

I  found  in  Luke  24  :  21 ;  Titus  2  :  14 ;  1 


Cii.  VTL] 


THE  ACTS. 


10.' 


M  V  Il<;  brought  them  out,  after  that  lie  had 
'i  shewed  woikUts  and  sii^iis  in  the  land 
of  Egypt,   and    in  the  Red   Sea,  ■■  and   in 

37  the  wilderness  forty  years  This  is  that 
Moses,  which  said  unto  the  children  of 
Israel,  '  A  Prophet  shall  the  Lord  your 


P  Exotl.  33  :  1.         <1  Exod.  eh.  7  to  <h.  14. 


<iod  raise  up  unto  you  of  your  brethren, 
38  like  unto  me  ;  him  shall  ye  hear.'  'This 
is  he,  that  was  in  the  church  in  the  wil- 
derness with  'the  angel  which  spake  to 
him  in  the  mount  Siua,  and  with  our 
fathers :  "  who  received  the  lively  ^  oracles 


'  Exod.  ch.  19. 


Exod.  10:  1,  3o;  Nfh.  9:  12. 


t  Gal.  3  :  19  ;  Heb. 


<■  Deut.  5  :  27,  31. 


Kom.  3:2;  9:4. 


Peter  1  :  IS,  and  its  allied  noun  redemp- 1 
tioi,  in  Luke  1  :  68 ;  2  :  38 ;  Heb.  9  :  12. 
By,  with,  the  hand  of  the  angel— 
with  the  guidance  and  helping  power 
of  the  unereated  ani^el,  the  Son,  who 
appeared  to  him  in  the  bush. 
Musi'.'^  l)ecauie  a  reseuer  of  a  nation 
from  a  nation,  and  through  the  giving 
of  the  law,  with  its  tyi)es,  .sliadows,  and 
prece])ts,  lie  brought  to  them  a  personal 
salvation  (ver.  25)  through  iiim,of  whom 
he  himself  and  his  teachings  were  a 
t3'pe  and  a  prophecy. 

3G.  He  brought  them  out  — 
rather,  2'his  same  one  did  briny  them 
OKt.  Thus  lie  executed  the  commission 
which  he  had  received  of  God.  After 
that  he  had  shewed — better,  having 
ivnn(<jht  wonders  and  signs  (-' :  22)  both 
before  and  after  going  forth  out  of 
Ilgypt.  Dr.  Hackett  notes  "  that  the 
participle  here  expresses  an  accouijiany- 
ing  act,  .  .  .  since  the  leading  forth 
formed  a  general  epoch  with  which  the 
associated  events,  whether  historically 
prior  or  subsequent,  could  be  viewed 
as  coincident  in  point  of  time."  The 
language  was  suggestive  to  Stephen's 
hearers,  that  there  had  been  lately  one 
who  had  done  many  mighty  works 
among  them,  by  whose  power  also  the 
apostles,  and  he  himself,  had  wrought 
miracles.  (6:«.)  The  Red  Sea— the 
Indian  Ocean  with  its  two  gulfs,  tlie 
Persian  anil  the  Arabian.  In  the  New 
Testament  (only  here  and  in  Heb.  11  : 
29)  it  is  applied  to  the  Arabian  gulf 
lying  east  of  Egypt  and  Nul^ia,  about 
fourteen  liundred  miles  long  and  two 
hundred  miles  wide  at  its  widest  point. 
Through  its  northern  extremity  the 
Israelites  passed.  (Kxod.  u:  21, 22.)  The 
forty  years  of  the.se  wonders  and 
leadership  would  also  suggest  the  dis- 
obedience and  hardness  of  heart  of  the 
children  of  Israel. 

37.  This  was  that  Moses — who 
was  not  only  a  type,  but  also  a  predictor 
of   the   Messiah.     A   prophet   shall 


the  Lord  your  God  raise  up.     (see 

on  3: 22;  Deut.  IK:  I.).)  Stephen  aud  his 
hearers  were  agreed  in  referring  this 
proi)hecy  to  the  Messiah,  and  they 
knew  that  he  and  the  discii>les  held 
that  it  was  fulfilled  in  Jesus.  Stejihen 
leaves  much  unsaid,  here  and  all 
tlirougli  his  speech,  making  silent  ap- 
jilications  to  be  drawn  by  his  hearers 
from  the  facts  presented  and  his  man- 
ner of  putting  them.  They  could  not 
accuse  him  of  blaspheming  Moses  since 
he  revered  Closes  and  followed  him 
whom  iloses  foretold ;  but  they  them- 
selves in  rejecting  Jesus  were  dishonor- 
ing Moses.  (Johira  ;4«,  47.)  Him  shall 
ye  hear — the  omission  of  this  by  the 
highest  critical  authorities  is  in  har- 
mony with  Steiilien's  brevity,  which 
could  easily  be  supplied  l)y  his  hearers. 
And  perhaps  the  very  omi.ssion  of  this 
clause  was  suggestive  to  them  that  they 
were  not  the  hearers,  but  the  rejectors 
of  him  who,  like  Closes,  w'as  a  prophet, 
lawgiver,  mediator,  and  founder  of  a 
new  order  of  things. 

38.  This  is  he  who  was  signally 
favored  of  God  l)y  intimate  intercourse 
and  association,  the  receiver  and  giVer 
of  the  law.  The  high  position  and 
dignity  of  Moses  is  })resented  in  this 
verse  in  contrast  with  the  disobedience 
of  the  peojjle  in  the  next  verse.  In  the 
church,  in  the  eongregutiou,  in  the 
wilderness — not  a  church  in  the 
New  Testament  sense,  but  the  congre- 
gation of  the  Israelites  gathered  for  a 
sacred  purjK)se,  here  referring  espe- 
cially to  the  gathering  of  the  people  be- 
fore Blount  Sinai  when  they  received 
the  law.  (E.Tod. lit:  17.)  See  Heb.  2  :  12, 
and  the  Septuagint,  Deut.  .SI :  30 ;  .losh. 
8  :  35;  Judg.  21  :  8;  1  Chron.  29  :  1, 
where  ecclesia  is  found,  (see on  5: 11.) 
With  the  angel  of  the  covenant 
(ver.  :io)  on  the  one  hand,  and  Avith  our 
fathers  on  the  other  hand,  between 
which  parties  Moses  acted  as  mediator, 
receiving  and  giving  God's  communi- 


106 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VH. 


39  to  give  unto  us.  yTo  -whom  our  fathers 
would  not  obey,  but  thrust  him  from 
theni,  I  and  in   their  hearts  turn    back 

40  again  into  Kgypt,  saying  unto  Aaron, 
'  JMake  us  gods  to  go  before  us  :  for  us  for 
this  Moses,  which  brought  us  out  of  the 


land  of  Egypt,  we  wot  not  what  is  bo- 

41  come  of  him.'  "And  thi-y  made  a  calf  in 
those  days,  andoftered  sacrifice  unto  the 
idol,  and  rejoiced  in  the  works  of  their 

42  own  hands.  Then  ^God  turned,  and 
gave  them  up  to   worship"^ the  host  of 


J  Neh.  9  :  IG;  Ps.  lOli  :  1(>.         ^  K.vod.  14  :  11,  V>.         »  K.vod.  32  :  2-S.         >>  Ps.  81  :  11,  12;  Kom. 
1  :  28.        0  Dfut.  17  :  3;  2  Kings  17  :  10;  21  :  3. 


cations  to  them.     (Xam.  12  :  7,  8 ;  Deul.  34  :  111 ; 

Gal.  3 :  19.)  And  thi.s  would  suggest  that 
Stephen  liad  uttered  no  l)lasj)heiny 
against  (iod  or  Moses  hy  holding  up 
Jesus  Christ  as  the  mediator  hetweeu 
God  and  men  ;  for  it  accorded  with  the 
divine  arrangement  in  the  i)ast,  and 
■with  Moses  as  the  type  of  the  Messiah. 
The  living  oracles — uotdead  words, 
but  the  lifitifj  Ktteritiicfs,  tlie  divine 
words^  posse.ssing  a  divine  force  and  ef- 
ficacy.      (HlI).  4  :  1:!.    See   Dent.  3'2  :  4B,  47 ;   Joliu 

6 : 51 ;  1  Peter  1 ; i,  Si.)  The  law  is  holy,  just 
and  good  and  given  for  life  (itom. 
7 :  1214),  and  the  reason  why  we  do  not 
have  life  thereby  arises  from  the  cor- 
ruption of  human  nature.     (Luke  lO:  28.) 

39.  The  treatment  of  Jlo.ses  here 
contrasted  with  the  high  honor  con- 
ferred on  him  by  God.  To  whom 
our  father.s  Avould  not  obey,  be 
obedient.  They  were  not  willing  to 
obey  him  and  submit  to  his  guidance; 
but  thrust  him  from  them  (ver.  2-), 
as  the  unjust  Israelites  had  done  forty 
yeai-s  before.  Ste])hen  seems  to  take 
special  pains  to  show  that  a  disobedient 
and  rebellious  spirit  against  God  was 
no  new  thing  in  Israel.  As  the  media- 
tion of  Moses  had  been  contemi)tuously 
refused  in  a  quarrel,  so  tiie  people  re- 
jected his  mediation  between  them  and 
God.  Turned  back  again  into 
Egypt  does  not  refer  to  any  attempt  to 
retrace  their  stejis,  but  rather  in  their 
hearts  abandoned  God,  longing  for 
the   mode    of  life   and  the   idolatrous 

WOrshij)    of    Egyi)t.      (Kxo.I.  32  :1,  i;    Neh. 

9:  IS.)  They  grew  weary  of  the  de- 
mands, restraints,  and  tests  of  the  wor- 
ship of  Jehovah,  ami  lonu;ed  for  the 
license  j>ermitt*'d  by  idolatry.  (Kxod.  ni : 
3;  17:3;  Num.  11  : 4.)  "  Tlicir  wish  to  re- 
turn to  Egvjit  was  not  till  later,     (xum. 

U:«.) 

40.  This  verse  shows  how  the  Israel- 
ites returned  back  into  Egypt  in  their 
hearts :  By  saying  unto  Aaron  make 
US  gods,  etc.     Yet  Aaron  made  but 


one  calf.  This  is  best  explained  by  re- 
garding it  as  an  example  of  the  Hebrew 
plural  of  e.xcellenee  for  the  singular,  ap- 
jilied  to  God.  The  phrase  make  nn  gods 
is  a  literal  translation  of  Exod.  32  :  1. 
(See  Exo.i.  r.2  :  8.)  This  IS  Confirmed  by 
Neh.  9  :  18.  Yea,  when  they  had 
made  a  molten  calf,  and  said  :  "  This 
is  thy  God  that  brouglit  thee  up  out  of 
Egypt."  They  wislied  an  image  rep- 
resenting the  Lord  to  go  before  them, 
as  Jehovah  had  gone  hefore  them  in  a 
pillar  of  cloud,  (kjcou.  i:i  :zi.)  For  in- 
troduces the  reason:  This  Moses 
(spoken  contemptuously),  our  leader, 
has  disappeared,  and  we  need  another 
rciiresenting  God  to  guide  us.  We 
wot — ice  k)wn' — not  what  is  be- 
come of  him — showing  their  unbe- 
lief and  loss  of  confidence  in  Moses  and 
God. 

}  41.  And  they  made  the  image  of 
i  a  call',  or  bullock ;  one  full  grown,  but 
!  not  put  into  the  yoke,  in  imitation  of 
I  the  bull  Apis,  worshiped  at  ^Iein})his, 
j  or  the  bull  Miievis,  worshiped  at  He- 
lioi)olis,  in  Lower  Egypt.  Mummies 
of  the  sacred  bulls  are  still  found 
in  the  catacombs.  The  Israelites  were 
tenacious  of  this  symbol  of  idolatry. 
Jeroljoam  set  nj)  a  golden  calf  both  at 
Bethel  and  Dan.  (i  Kings  12  :  28;  2  Kingi 
10 : 2!i.)  In  all  these  cases  Jehovah 
seems  to  have  been  represented,  but 
under  a  forbidden  form.  (Kxod. 20:4,5 ; 
32 : 4.)  Rejoiced — made  merry,  as  part 
of  their  idolatrous  service.  (E.\od.  32:6; 
1  Cor.  10:7/)  lu  the  worlis  of  thtir 
own  hands — of  the  calf  and  what 
might  ajipertain  to  it,  as  the  result  of 
their  joint  labors.  (Ex..d.32  :6)  All  re- 
ligious self-glorification  and  rejoicing 
is  of  the  nature  of  idolatry. 

42.  And  God  turned — withdrew 
his  favor,  and  in  retribution  gave 
them  up  from  time  to  time  until  the 
days  of  Amos  and  afterward.     (Josh.  24  •. 

10;'  Isa.  «;i:10;    Rom.   1  :  2k  ;    Acts   14:1(1.)       TO 

worship  the  host  of  heaven.    The 


Cri.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


107 


bcavoii ;  as  it  is  written  in  tlie  hook  of 
the  I'rophcts,  'O  ye  houso  of  Israel,  have 
ye  ottered  lue  slain  beasts  and  sacrifites 
bi/  Ihn  sjxice  of  forty  years  in  the  wildcr- 
43  ness  ?  Yea,  ye  took  up  the  tabernacle  of 


Moloch,  and  the  star  of  your  god,  Icom- 
phau,  fignrt's  which  ye  made  lo  worship 
them  :  and  1  will  carry  you  away  beyond 
Babylon. 


sun,  moon,  and  stars  are  so  called  on 
account  of  their  number  and  order 
Tills  form  of  idolatry  is  called  Sal)a?ism 
from  the  Hebrew  Word  mcaiiin!^  host; 
and  was  common  in  Chaldca  and  Phoe- 
nicia, as  well  as  iu  Egyi>t.  (Deut.  4  :  19;  2 
Kings   17:18;    Isa.  .H  :  4  :    t  Chrou.  X)  :  :t,  5.)      To 

sustain  liis  assertion  Stephen  appeals 
to  Amos  5  :  'liy-'Il,  ipioted  mostly  from 
the  Septuai,'int  Version.  In  the  book 
of  the  Prophets — the  twelve  minor 
prophets,  of  which  Amos  was  one, 
reckoned  by  tlie  .Jews  as  a  sinijle  vol- 
ume. Have  ye  ottered  to  me,  etc. 
The  question  in  the  original  requires  a 
negative  answer,  Did  ije  (i{ft:r,  etc.  Ye 
cannot  maintain  tliat  ye  offered  to  me 
slain  beasts  and  sacrifici-s  forty  years  in 
the  wilderness.  Professing  to  serve 
God,  they  approached  him  witii  wrong 
motives  and  a  wrong  spirit,  and  so 
vitiated  their  offerings  by  idolatry  as 
to  render  their  otferings  unacceptable 

to  God.       (Lev.  17  :  7  ;    Deut.  S2  :  17  ;    Lev.  10  :  1 ; 

Num.  16 ;  1  f. )  "  This  accusatiou  of  Amos 
was  no  contradiction  of  the  story  of 
the  Pentateuch,  which  indeed  speaks 
of  the  ordinary  daily  sacrifices  daring 
the  desert  wanderings,  but  wliat  counted 
iu  God's  eyes  the  formal  rites  and  sacri- 
fices performed  by  priests  under  the 
immediate  influence  of  Moses,  com- 
pared to  the  spontaneous  offerings 
made,  and  to  the  service  done  to  the 
golden  calves,  and  to  tlie  host  of 
heaven  ?"     (Dr.  J.  S.  HowsoN.) 

43.  Yea,  rather  And,  ye  took  up 
the  tabernacle  of  Moloch.  The 
most  natural  meaning  is  that  they 
carried  in  procession  this  tabernacle 
similar  to  that  consecratt^d  to  Jehovah. 
But  we  cannot  sujipose  that  Moses 
would  have  allowed  idolatrous  proces- 
sions in  the  wilderness.  Others  sxip- 
pose  a  reference  to  small  slirines  simi- 
lar to  those  of  the  Ephesian  Diana 
(19: 24),  which  the  people  secretly  car- 
ried about  with  them  and  worshiped. 
Yet  it  may  be  asked,  ^V()uld  (iod,  who 
punished  the  sin  of  Aehau,  have  i)assed 
over  such  a  secret  idohitry  among  his 
people  ?     Besides,  there  is  no  mention 


I  of  anything  of  the  kind  in  the  Penta- 
teuch. It  would  seem  that  tlie  prophet 
refers  to  the  idolatries  which  from  age 
to  age  had  been  developed  from  that 
begun  in  the  wilderness  by  the  worship 
of  the  golden  calf  and  i>ther  associated 
and  closely  consequent  false  worshij). 
(Deut.  32;  17.)  And  this  view  seems  to 
receive  confirmation  from  the  hist 
clause  of  this  verse,  for  we  can  hardly 
suppose  that  the  sin  in  the  wilderness 
was  the  cause  of  the  captivity  eiglit 
hundred  years  later,  though  in  connec- 
tion with  other  sins  in  succeeding  ages 
God  might  rememlier  that.  (Exod.  32 :  :n.) 
Moloch  was  the  name  of  the  idol-god  of 
tlie  Amiiiouites.  Its  image  was  a  hol- 
low brazen  figure,  with  the  head  of  an 
ox  and  outstretched  human  arms.  It 
was  heated  from  within  and  little  ones 
were  jilaccd  on  its  arms  to  be  slowly 
burned,  while  the  priests  beat  drums  to 
prevent  the  parents  from  hearing  the 
dying  cries  of  their  children.  Hence 
the  image  was  called  Tophet  from 
tophi  in,  dvwms.  (jer.  7:3i.)  Its  worslup 
was  forbidden  by  Moses  (Lev.  19  :  21 ;  20  : 2), 
but  afterward  practiced.  (1  Kings  11 ;  7; 
Jer.  32::i5.)  The  Star  of  yout  god — 
the  star  image,  the  image  resembling 
a  star  of  the  god  Remphan,  or 
Rephan,  the  Coptic  name  for  Saturn, 
who  was  worshiped  by  tlie  Arabians, 
Phffiiiicians,  and  Egyptians.  The  child 
sacrifices  which  were  offered  at  Car- 
thage to  Saturn,  as  described  by  Dio- 
dorus  Siculus,  were  similar  to  those 
offered  to  Moloch.  Figures  or  imaries 
which  ye  made  to  worship.  Thus  ifar 
this  verse  follows  the  Sejituagint  Version 
of  Amos  5  :  26.  The  Hebrew  varies 
somewhat  and  has  different  readings. 
See  margin  of  the  Revised  Version. 
The  Septuagint  may  represent  an 
ancient  and  essentialiv  true  text.  A 
tablet  lately  discovered  in  Ei^ypt  repre- 
sents a  group  of  gods,  two  liearing  the 
names  of  Rempjiu  and  Keu.  The 
Hebrew  in  Amos  has  the  name  Chiun, 
and  the  Septuagint  Raephan  ;  therefore 
Stephen,  for  unknown  rea.sons,  substi- 
tutes the  name  Remppu  or  Remphan, 


108 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VII. 


44  Our  fathers  had  Jthe  tabernacle  of  wit- 
ness in  the  wilderuess,  as  he  had  ap- 
pointed, speaking  ^unto  Moses,  °  that  he 


should  make  it  according  to  the  fashion 

45  that  he    had    seen.     'Which    also   our 

fathers  that  came  after  brought  in  with 


d  Exod.  :J8  :  21. 


Exod.  2(i :  30 ;  Heb.  8:5.        '  Josh.  3  :  11-17 ;  4  :  10, 11. 


But  Dr.  Hackett  has  well  said,  "  It  was 
unnecessary  for  Stepheu  to  correct  the 
current  version ;  for  he  adduced  the 
pas.sane  merely  to  establish  the  cliarge 
of  idolatry,  not  to  ilecide  what  ])articu- 
lar  i<lol  was  worsliipeil."  Both  tlie 
Hebrew  and  the  Septuagint  end  the 
verse  with  beyond  Damascus.  Stephen 
naturally  substitutes  the  actual  place 
of  exile,  beyond  Babylon.  It  was 
a  Baliliiuical  custoiu  thus  to  modify  and 
extend  according  to  historical  facts  and 
actiuil  fultillment.  (Meyer.)  Besides 
beyond  the  remoter  place  was  also 
beyond  the  nearer ;  beyond  Babylon 
was  beyond  Damascus. 

Thus  in  regard  to  Moses,  Steplien 
sliows  that  so  far  from  blaspheming 
him  and  tlie  law,  he  held  him  in  the 
highest  honor  as  a  lawgiver,  type,  and 
predictor  of  Christ. 

44-53.  The  tabernacle,  the  temple, 
and  the  prophets.  Tlie  tabernacle  was 
not  confined  to  any  place,  was  temj)oi'a  ry 
and  typical  of  a  heavenly  and  spiritual 
worsliip.  The  tem})le  was  of  like 
nature,  and  was  not  intended  to  limit 
tlie  presence  of  Ood.  Tiie  prophets 
had  been  pei'secuted  by  their  fatliei's, 
whose  spirit  his  hearers  manifested  in 
slaying  the  Righteous  One,  resisting 
the"  truth  and  disolieying  the  law. 

44.  Stejdien  begins  a  new  section  in 
his  historical  argument,  that  of  the 
tabernacle  and  temple,  in  connection 
with  whicli  there  were  changes  and 
modifications  of  worship.  As  he  had 
lieen  aeoused  of  blas))heining  the  tem- 
ple, he  wisely  shows  bis  iiigh  reverence 
for  the  Siicred  jilaces  as  ai>pointed  by 
God,  and  at  the  same  time  corrects  any 
false  conceptions  of  them  which  the 
Jews  miglit  entertain.  Our  fathers 
had,  etc.  Literally,  the  tabernacle  of 
iritnrss,  or  tent  of  tcsNmony  was  to  our 
fathers  in  the  u'i/deniess.  It  was  for 
Iheni  especially  suggestive  of  its  tem- 
porary nature;  for  the  instruction  of 
the  nation,  es))ecially  suited  to  their 
migratory  condition  ;  and  this  the  j»eo- 

fle  carried  over  into  the  promised  land, 
t  was  more  commonly  called  the  tent 


!  of  meeting  (Num.  is :  is),  because  it  was 

the  place  of  meeting  l>etwecn   Israel  or 

I  their  representative  and  Jehovah.     It 

I  was   also  called  the  tent   of  testimony 

j  (Exud.  38 :  12  ;   Num.  1  :  .i(t ;  17.  l^),     bccaUSe     it 

I  contained    the    ark    of  testimony,    in 

which  were  the  two  tallies  of  the  law, 

I  (Exod. 2,1:  Hi.)     It  was  a  movable  struct- 

1  lire  forty-five  feet  long,  fifteen  feet  wide 

and  fifteen  feet  high.     It  was  divided 

j  by  a  curtain  into  two  rooms,  the  Holy 

,  Place  and  the  Holy  of  Holies.     In  tiie 

first  was  the  talde  of  shew-bread,  the 

j  golden  candlestick,   and    the   altar   of 

j  incense;  in  the  second  was  the  ark  of 

i  the  covenant  with  tlie  mercy-seat  aliove 

!  tlie   ark,    and    the  cheruliim  of  glory 

!  overshadowing   the   mercy-seat.     (F.xoi. 

•-•6 :  -i",.)     As  he  appointed — as  he  who 

spoke  to  3/oses  commanded,  on  Mount 

j  Sinai.  (Exod.  24 :  i^-is.)  That  he  should 

make   it  according  to  the  fash- 

j  ion,  the  palter)!,  he  had  seen.    (Exod. 

25  :  40:   Heb.  ^  :  5.)        Tllis  WOuld  give  JH'CU- 

llar  sanctity  to  the  tabernacle,  the 
:  image  of  the  heavenly  pattern ;  but 
Solomoii's  temi)le,  the  second  temjile, 
and  Herod's  temple  were  patternecl 
after  the  tabernacle.  At  the  same  time 
tllis  would  suggest  the  transitory  nature 
and  suboidinate  value  of  the  taliernaele 
and  temple  worship,  which  must  in 
due  time  give  way  to  the  si)iritual  wor- 
ship under  the  New  Covenant  of  the 
Messiah.  See  this  thought  develojjed 
in  the  eighth  and  ninth  chapters  of  the 
epistles  to  tlie  Hebrews. 

45.  This  ver.se  is  diflicult  to  trans- 
late so  as  to  bring  out  the  main  idea, 
tliat  the  tabernacle  which  was  brought 
in  with  Joshua  continned  unto  the  days 
of  David.  With  David  the  epoch  of 
the  temple  worship  began  to  dawn. 
The  following  rendering  brings  out  the 
leading  thought:  Which  tabernacle 
oar  fathers  receiced  in  succession  tinto 
the  days  of  David,  havincj  brought  it  in 
with  Joshua  into  the  territory  possessed 
by  the  heathen,  irhom  God  drove  out 
before  our  fathers.  Some  have  thought 
that  Stephen  by  the  words,  unto  the 
days  ol'  David,  indicates  the  gradual 


Ch.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


109 


«  Jesus  iuto  the  possession  of  the  Gen  tiles  • 
ii  whom  God  drave  out  before  the  face  of  i 
our  fathers,  unto   the    days  of    David ; 
46  >  who  found  favour  before  God,  and  ^  de- 


sired to  find  a  tabernacle  for  the  (iod  of 

Jacob. 
47      '  But    Solomon   built    him   an    house. 


t  Jos.  3  :  fi,  7,  Joshua ;  Heb.  4:8.         •>  Nell.  9  :  24  ;  Ps.  44  :  2. 
10  :  1.        k  2  Sam.  7  :  1-13;  1  Kings  8  :  17 ;  1  Chrun.  22  :  7. 


ich.  i:i  :  22;  1  Sam.  15  :  28; 
1 1  Kings  ch.  5;  cli.  0. 


expulsion  of  the  Canaanites  until  the 
reii^n  of  David.  "  But  this,  although 
historically  true,  would  not  have  been 
expressed  hy  the  aorist  (drove  out), 
which  denotes  an  act  performed  once 
for  all.  Nor  is  it  relevant  to  Stephen's 
purpose  to  relate  how  tlie  Canaanites 
were  driven  out,  hut  ratlier  to  describe 
the  condition  of  the  .sanctuary  during 
that  long  interval.  From  .Josliua  to 
David,  God  abode  aiuong  liis  j)eo[de  in 
a  movable  tent,  which  was  often 
sliifted  from  place  to  place,  antl  handed 
down  from  one  generation  to  another." 
(Alexander.)  Similar,  Meyer,  and 
ilackett,  who  adds  that  "  it  exalts  the 
Kul)ordiuate  clause  (whom  God  drove 
out  before  our  fathers)  aljove  the  prin- 
cii>al  one."  Jesus,  the  Cireek  name  of 
tlie  Hebrew  Joshua.  So  also  in  lleh. 
4 : 8.  The  tabernacle  passed  over 
Jordan  with  Josliua  and  was  set  up  by 
him  at  Shiloh,  about  twenty  miles 
north  of  Jerusalem  (josh,  is  :i),  where 
it  remained  during  the  Judges.  After- 
ward it  was  removed  to  Git>eon,  a1)0ut 
five  miles  northwest  of  Jerusalem 
(i  chron.  21 :29) ;  but  David  ])repared  a 
new  tent,  probably  similar  to  tliat  of 
Moses,  near  his  own  residence  on  Mount 
Zion,  for  the  reception  of  the  ark.  (2  Sam. 
6: 17;  1  ohioii.if. :  1.)  It  appears  from  1 
Chron.  (i :  31-48  ;  16  :  4-(),  37-42,  that 
David  arranged  a  service  of  worship  in 
connection  with  this  tabernacle,  so  as 
not  to  interfere  with  the  duties  of  the 
j)riests  and  the  sacrifices  at  the  altar. 
Asaph  and  other  Levites  were  ap- 
j)ointed  over  this  service,  which  con- 
sisted chiefly  of  prayer  and  praise. 

46.  Tlie  dawn  of  the  temple  period 
l)egins  with  the  words  Who  found 
favor  before  God.  It  was  thifi  furor 
with  God  that  gave  David  confidence 
to  ask  permission  to  l>uild  him  a  house. 
It  was  a  further  favor  and  condescen- 
sion on  God's  part  to  grant  the  request 
(2  Sam.  7 :  5-u.)  Israel,  since  the  days  of 
iloses,  had  been  constantly  going 
astray.    The  tabernacle  had  failed  to 


unite  and  concentrate  the  worship  of 
God.  If  tliere  could  be  only  a  per- 
manent central  place  and  a  splendid 
temple,  Daviil  may  iiave  thought,  tlien 
the  worship  of  Jehovah  would  beconic 
establislied  and  universal  throughout 
Israel.  The  granting  of  the  temjde 
was  thus  a  concession  and  an  adai)ta- 
tion  to  human  weakness.  And  de- 
sired— (Dtd  asked  Jor  himself  as  a 
favor.  The  prayer  is  not  given,  but  it 
is  implied  in  2  Sam.  7  :  2  ;  1  Kings  8  : 
17  ;  1  Chron.  22  :  7.  The  sjiirit  and 
frame  of  mind  begetting  sucli  a  request 
are  beautifully  indicated  in  Ps.  132. 
To  find,  etc.  To  express  David's  re- 
quest, Stephen  uses  the  language  of  Ps. 
132  :  5  from  the  Septuagint.  Notice 
the  rejx'tition  of  the  verb  find.  First 
David  found  favor  with  God ;  tlien  lie 
asked  tliat  he  might  "find  a  jjlace  for 
Jehovah,  dwellings  for  the  ^Mighty  One 
of  Jacob."  (Ps.  i.)2 : 5,  Hebrew.)  There 
may  be  some  allusion,  as  Alexander  re- 
marks, to  the  di.scovery  of  the  place 
wliere  the  temple  was  to  be  built,  which 
was  made  known  by  revelation  to 
David.  (1  chroa.  21 :  22, 2K;  22 : 1.)  A  tab- 
ernacle.  The  Greek  word  is  not  the 
same  as  that  rendered  tabernacle  in 
the  ]ireceding  verses.  It  means  a 
habitation,  ivferring  to  tlie  temple  as 
the  habitation  of  God.  Instead  of  the 
movable  tabernacle  David  asked  for  a 
more  permanent  dwelling  place  for 
Jehovah.  For  the  God  of  Jacob — 
as  the  God  of  his  clioseii  |)eople.  Herein 
"  lies  the  holy  national  motive  for  the 
request  of  David."     (  Mkykk.) 

47.  But— though  David  asked  for 
himself  the  privilege,  it  was  denied 
him,  and  Solomon  built  him  a 
house,  that  is,  a  temple.  David  in- 
.><tead  had  the  greater  promise,  that  he 
should  have  a  hou.se  and  kingdom  for- 
ever, pointing  to  the  Messiah  who 
should  descend  from  him.  (2  Sam.  7  -. 
11, 16.)  David  also  holds  a  higher  jdaee 
than  Solomon  in  the  Scri])tures :  yet 
the  former  all  his  days  worshijted  with 


110 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VII. 


43  Ilowheit  ■»  the  Most  High  dwelleth  not  in 
icm^iles  made  with  hands  ;  aa  saith  the 

49  jiriiphet,  " '  Heaven  is  my  throne,  and 
earth  is  my  footstool :  what  house  will  ye 


build  me?  saith  the  Lord,  or  what  isihe 
50  place  of  my  rest?    Hath  not  my  hand 
made  all  these  things  ? ' 


'  ch.  17  :  24 :  2  Chron.  6  :  IS. 


Matt.  5  :  3-1,  35. 


the  tabernacle,  the  latter  builds  a 
temple.  Thus  the  inferior  to  David, 
and  also  to  Moses  the  builder  of  the 
tabernacle,  builds  a  temple.  It  was 
not  necessary  to  tlie  piety  of  David,  nor 
essrjitial  to  aeeeptal>le  worship.  By 
iini)lication  also  Stephen  answers  the 
eliar!j;e  of  Masphemy.  If  he  had  said 
of  tile  temple,  that  it  wouhl  not  endure 
forever,  was  it  blasphemy,  wlien  David, 
tbe  man  after  God's  own  lieart,  did  not 
build  it,  but  worshij)ed  in  the  taber- 
nacle, sis  well  as  Moses,  Josluia,  and 
Samuel,  and  the  people  of  God  for 
hundreds  of  years  ?  And  if  the  taber- 
nacle desiicned  upon  the  model  (ver.  ♦*) 
received  from  God  himself,  of  whicli 
the  temjile  wa.s  a  copy,  did  not  endure 
forever,  was  it  blas])hemy  to  speak  of 
the  tenii)le  as  preparat^try  and  transi- 
tory in  its  nature?  TIius  wlsile  Stephen 
treats  the  temple  with  reverence  as  the 
liouseofGod,  he  at  the  same  time  in- 
dicates that  whatever  he  had  taught 
regarding  it.s  transitory  nature,  or  even 
said  of  its  destruction,  was  in  harmony 
with  its  sacred  history. 

48.  Si»iritual  worsliip,  not  confined 
to  time  or  place,  which  had  V>een  im- 
plied throughout  the  speech,  Stephen 
now  brings  more  clearly  into  view,  by 
summai^izing  Solomon's  own  language 
at  the  dedication  of  the  temple  (i  Kiug< 
»■■■■!-,):  Howbeit  the  3Iost  High 
dwelleth  not  iu  temples  made 
with  hands.  The  best  manuscri]>ts 
omit  templfs,  and  rea<l  dirclleth  not  in. 
Iliat  made  hi/  the  hnnd,  that  is,  by  tlie 
skill  of  man.  What  a  contrast  betwien 
fh<-  Most  Ilinh  wliom  he  liad  styled 
"  the  (iod  of  glory  "  (vcr. '^j  aiid  hand- 
made dwellings,  such  as  houses  and 
t^'raples !  Surely  Solomon  did  not 
think  Muit  God  could  be  confined  to  one 
place :  "  But  will  God  indeed  dwell  with 
men  on  tlie  earth  ?  Behold,  heaven, 
and  the  heaven  of  heavens  cannot 
contain  thee  ;  liow  much  less  this  house 
which  I  have  built."  (2  ohron.  6  :  it(.) 
Stephen  would  guard  against  a  super- 
stitious reverence  of  the  temple  and 
agaiust  robbing  God  of  the  gloiy  ofhis 


omnipresence.  And  to  further  confirm 
and  bring  out  the  great  jirineiitle  of  sjdr- 
itual  worship  he  quotes  from  their  great 
evangelical  prophet,  Isaiah.  "  His 
eye  was  already  sweeping  across  the 
long  interval  to  the  advent  of  Jesus, 
and  the  quotation  from  the  prophet 
Isaiah  would  tend  to  give  more  em- 
jihasis  to  Ids  main  thought  than  one 
from  Solomon  would  liave  done."  (Dk. 
S('II.\FF,  in  Internativnul  JRcvision 
j  Commentary.) 

49.  The  quotation  is  from  Isa.  66  : 
1,  2,  deviating  l)ut  slightly  from  the 
Sei>tnagint.  It  is  from  the  last  cliapter, 
the  winding  up,  of  his  proi)Iiecies,  that 
Isaiah  foretells  the  coming  of  the  new 
sidritual  economy,  when  Jehovah  will 
no  longer  dwell  in  material  temples, 
but  in  human  hearts.  The  ])rophecy 
was  jiecnliarly  appropriate  to  Stephen's 
j)urpose,  ]iointing  to  tiie  great  spiritual 
truth  underlying  all  dis])ensations,  and 
to  the  changes  which  were  then  going 
on  in  the  sui>erseding  of  the  Old  Dis- 
j>ensation  by  the  Mew.  Heaven  is 
my  throne.  The  meaning  is:  I  per- 
vade all  space  ;  heaven  and  earth  are 
filled    with    my    all-ruling    presence: 

li7/<(/  manner  of  hou.^e  then  uill  yebiiild 
me,  or  what  is  the  place  of  my 
rest — my  permanent  ))laee  or  exclu- 
sive abode  ?  (Compare  Paul  at  Athens, 
17  :  24.) 

50.  Continuing  the  quotation  from 
the  last  verse,  but  substituting  an  in- 
terrogation for  an  affirmation  in  the 
original  jnophecy.  The  meaning  is 
the  same,  since  tlie  question  requires  an 
affirmative  answer.  Hath  not  my 
handmade  all  these  things?  Is 
not  tlie  universe  the  dwelling  place  and 
tiie  tenipli'  of  it.s  great  Architect,  and 
may  I  not  be  worshiped  anywhere 
within  its  bounds  by  the  true  and  hum- 
ble sni>))lieants?  Stephen  does  not 
conqilite  the  quotation,  but  the  passage 
was  doubtless  familiar  to  Stephen's 
hearei-s  ;uid  would  suggest  its  conclu- 
sion :  "  To  this  man  will  I  look,  even  to 
him  that  is  jioor  and  of  a  contrite 
spirit,  and  that  trembleth  at  my  word." 


Cu.  VlJ.l 


TiiE  ACTS. 


Ill 


61  Ye  0  stiffnecked  and  P  uncircumcised  in 
heart  ;ind  ears,  ye  do  always  resist  the 
Uoly  Spirit :  as  your  fathers  <lid,  so  do  ye. 


52  I  Which  of  the  prophets  have  not  your 
fathers  persecuted  ?  And  they  have  slaiu 
them  which  showed  before  of  the  coming  of 


'Exod.  32  :  9;  Isa.  48  :  4. 
.U'f.  2:  30; 


P  Lev.  26  :  41 ;  Ezek.  44  :  9  ;  Eom.  2  :  2^',  20. 
Matt.  23  ;  31-3G :  Luke  13  :  31-;i5;  1  Tlicss.  2 


q  2  Chron.  36  :  16 ; 


Thus  is  broujjht  into  view  the  nobler 
temple    of   the   renewed   and   contrite 

lieart.        (Isa.  57:15;    P3.  .14:18;    138:0;    2  Cor. 
6:  Ifi.) 

51.  One  line  of  Stephen's  argument 
was  really  now  complete.  lie  had 
siiowii  tluit  the  Mosaic  law  was  only  a 
j)ait  of  a  i>rogressive  revelation,  which 
began  before  there  was  any  temple,  tab- 
enuR'le,  or  rite  of  circumcision;  that 
all  these  were  preparatory  and  types 
and  shadows  of  a  better  covenant;  aiitl 
that  according  to  their  own  prophetic 
Scriptures  the  temple  was  only  a  type 
of  that  grander  temple  of  God's  uni- 
versal worship,  wiile  as  the  world  ami 
lofty  as  the  heaven.  The  argument 
skillfully  arranged  mu.st  have  burst 
with  overwhelming  force  upon  the 
minds  of  his  hearers.  He  suddenly 
changes  his  manner  of  utterance.  Per- 
haps he  saw  the  disturbed,  confounded, 
and  angry  looks  of  his  judges,  indicat- 
ing hardness  and  .stubbornness  of  heart, 
witii  impatience  on  tlie  one  hand  and  a 
determination  to  condemn  on  the  other. 
He  saw  there  was  no  further  need  of 
historic  argument,  no  readiness  to  listen 
to  rea.soning.  To  show  tliat  tlie  Mes- 
sianic prophecies  were  fulfilled  in 
Jesus,  and  to  hold  him  up  as  a  Saviour, 
were  worse  than  useless,  casting  as  it 
were  ))carls  l)efore  swine.  He  turns  at 
once  to  the  other  line  of  thought,  Mliicli 
lie  had  been  liringing  to  view  in  his 
liisturic  argument,  tliat  the  Jews  had 
always  lieeii  uiifaitliful  to  (iod,  and  he 
applied  it  to  his  hearers  in  a  burst  of 
rigliteous  denunciation.  Tliey  are  not 
the  words  of  auger,  but  those  of  lioly 
rebuke,  uttered  under  the  power  of  tlie 
Spirit,  the  stern  ajiplication  of  truth  to 
tile  hearts  and  conscience.  See  the 
words  of  John  tlie  r>ai)tist  (i.Hke.i :  v-fl) 
and  of  .Jesus  in  tlie  twenty-third  chap- 
br  of  :Matthew. 

Ye  stitfiiecked — stubborn,  head- 
strong,    obstinate.         (Fxo.t.  .Si  :  »  ;    SS  :  a,  ft.) 

Uncircumcised  in  heart  and  ears 

—with  souls  and  senses  closed  to  di- 


vine   admonitions.        ( Jer.  6  :  lO ;  9  :  2fi  ;  Lev. 

•2G:4i.)  Ye  arc.  heathenhh,  a  terrible 
indictment  to  a  Jew.  Tliey  were  like 
the  stubljoru  ox  that  refuses  to  receive 
the  yoke  (Neh.  a  :  c),  and  their  hearts  and 
ears  were  like  those  of  the  heathen 
without  spiritual  renewal,  and  not 
open  to  the  iiiiluences  of  the  Divine 
S])irit.  (Deut.  10:  ifi.)  Ye  do  always 
— in  the  past  and  up  to  the  present 
time — resist  the  Holy  Spirit — re- 
sisting and  oi)})osing  the  ministers  of 
Ciod  M'ho  spoke  under  the  guidance  of 
the  Sj)irit.  As  your  fathers  did, 
so  do  ye.  In  resisting  the  ju-ojdiets 
who  s])oke  as  they  were  moved  l)y  tlie 
Holy  Spirit.  (isa.R!:io.)  That  tl'iis  is 
the  meaning  is  very  evident  from  the 
following  vei"se. 

53.  Stephen  indicates  the  facts  in 
support  of  what  he  had  charged  against 
them  and  their  fiithers.  Which  of 
the  prophets  have  not  your  fath- 
ers persecuted  ?  This  is  descriptive 
of  tlieir  general  spirit  and  conduct. 
The  question  does  not  refpiire  that  all 
were  ]ierseentfd,  yet  most  of  them  in 
fact  sutilrrd  ill  usage,  (i  Kingsig:  lo;  2 
Chion. .)(; :  10. )  Notice  that  it  is  now  not  on  r 
but  t/onr  fathers.  The  guilt  of  their 
fatliers  was  deeji'iied  in  that  they  had 
slain  the  i)roi)hetswlio/i'*(vy«AZ  the  com- 
ing of  t'le  Just,  or  Ritjhtcoits,  One- 
Jesus    Clirist    being     absolutely    just, 

witilOUt   sin  (3  :  14  ;  1  I'eter  2  :  22)  ;    aud  wllO 

v.oiild  "justify  many."  (isa. 33: 11.)  Li 
llalfbiiiieal  literature  the  Jlessiah  is 
designated  "  Tlie  Just  One."  Tlie  cli- 
max Mas  their  own  guilt,  in  that  they 
were  the  betrayers  and  murder- 
ers, two  of  tlie  blackest  crimes  which 
tliey  could  commit  against  a  fellow 
man,  but  even  these  they  had  com- 
mitted against  the  Messiah.  (James 5:6; 
Matt.  2.1: 2;!-:'.(i.)  Ye  and  now  are  em- 
])hatic  and  in  contrast  to  their  fathei-s 
of  ancient  times.  They  were  the  be- 
trayers through  .Tudas  whom  they  em- 
ployed, and  the  mnnJii-irs  by  con- 
demuiug  Jesus  aud  deliveriug  him  to 


112 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VII. 


'  the  Just  One  of  whom  ye  have  now  heen 
the  betrayers  and  murderers  : ;» who  have  | 


received   the  law  by  the  disposition  of 
angels,  <  and  have  not  kept  it. 


■  ch.  3  :  14 ;  22  :  14. 


I  Gal.  3  :  19  ;  Heb.  2:2.         i  John  7  :  19. 


Pilat*  for  rli-ath,  and  demanding  his  ' 

crucifixion.    (Matt.  26:  U,  IS;  J- :  l.  2,  ai-iK.) 

53.  Who  have  received  the  law 
by  the  disposition  of  angels — ye 

v'/io  rea'irril  the  /air  «.<  orJhiinices  of 
auf/eh;  infiiR^nced  by  tlu'ir  authority 
to  receive  it  and  uu(Ut  ohlii,'ation  to 
accej)t  tiuit  which  was  enjoined  by 
angelic  agency.  Sec  Gal.  3  :  19,  where 
Paul  speaks  of  the  law  as  "  onUiined 
through  angels,"  the  verb  being  used 
from  which  the  noun  ordinaiicix  is 
derived  ;  and  Heb.  2:2,  "  The  word 
spoken  through  angels."  It  is  not  ex- 
})ressly  stated  in  the  Old  Testament 
that  angels  were  employed  in  giving 
the  law  (Exod.  19:  n-19),  but  it  may  be 
fairly  implied.  In  Deut.  .33  :  2,  it  is 
said  (Revised  Version)  "  lie  came  from 
the  ten  tliousands  of  his  holy  ones," 
from  amidst  countless  angels  who  attend 
liim;  "at  liis  right  hand  was  a  fiery 
law  unto  thi'in."  For  the  latter  clause 
the  Sejjtuagint  lias,  "  On  his  riglit  liand 
were  angels  with  liim."  So  also  Ps. 
68  :  17,  "The  diariots  of  God  are 
twenty  tliousaiul,  even  thousands  upon 
thousands :  the  Lovd  is  among  them 
as  in  Sinai,  in  his  sanctuary."  The 
Jews  held  that  angels  acted  as  am- 
bassadors or  interpreters  between  (lod 
and  Mo.ses.  Philo  and  Josephiis  both 
bring  out  this  belief.  "  For  we  our- 
selves have  learned  what  is  most  beauti- 
ful and  holy  in  our  doctrines  and  laws 
from  God  tlirougli  tlie  medium  of 
angels."  {Antit/.  xv.  .">  :  3.)  On  tlie 
one  hand  tlie  angelic  connection  with 
the  giving  of  the  law  cniiol>led  it  in  tlie 
eye  of  the  Jew,  but  on  the  otlicr  liand 
it  also  indicated  its  inferiority  to  the 
gospel.  (Heh.  2:3-1.)  Tlie  plural  onli- 
vanres  is  used  with  reference  to  the 
single  acts  coin|»osing  tlie  law.  The 
intervention  of  angels  at  the  giving  of 
the  law  is  clearly  reveale<l,  but  the 
exact  part  they  did  is  not  so  certain. 
Meyer  regards  them  as  tlie  arrantrers  of 
the  divine  acts,  like  arrangers  of  a  fes- 
tival, in  the  )>roiinilgation  of  the  law.  : 
Olshausen  regards  them  as  the  jiowers 
mediating  between  God  and  man.  Dod- 
dridge infers  from  Heb.  2  :  2  and  Gal. 
3  :  19, "  that  God  made  use  of  aujjels  as  ' 


instruments  of  forming  the  voice  heard 
from  Blount  Sinai."  Alexander  re- 
gards them  "  as  messengers  or  heralds 
tiirough  whom  the  divine  communica- 
tions ]«issed  as  a  military  word  of  com- 
mand does  from  rank  to  rank,  or  from 
orticer  to  otKcer  until  it  reaches  the 
whole  corjts  or  army."  One  of  the 
Bible  Union  translators  says,  "To  me 
it  would  seem,  as  if  the  tables  were 
handed  down  through  ranks  of  angels, 
as  to  ])crsons  standing  on  the  rounds  of 
a  ladder,  one  below  another  in  a  line 
reaching  from  the  threshold  of  heaven 
down  to  Closes."  Amid  so  many  o])iii- 
ioiis,  in  allof  Avhich  tiiere  may  be  some 
truth,  it  will  be  safe  to  say  with  the 
careful  and  cautious  Hackett,  tliat  the 
angels  were  not  tlie  authors,  but  the 
medium  through  wliom  God  communi- 
cated the  law.  And  have  not  kept 
it — but  violated  its  commands,  and 
rejected  the  Messiah.  The  fact  tiiat 
tlie  law  was  given  by  God  through  tiie 
grandeur  of  angelic  agency  to  Moses, 
enhances  the  guilt  of  tlie  ]>eo})le  whose 
disobedience  found  its  climax  in  the 
murder  of  the  Messiah.  See  the  same 
argument  expanded  bv  Paul  in  Kom. 
2  :  17-23.  Thus  Stei>hen  turns  tlie 
tables  coni])letely  ujion  his  judges.  80 
far  from  blas])li('iiiing  Moses  ami  (iod, 
the  temple  and  tlie  law,  he  is  proclaim- 
ing the  great  truths  of  (iod,  underlying 
all  his  disjieusatioiis,  and  in  so  doing 
he  gives  glory  to  tiod,  and  all  ]>ioper 
honor  to  all  liis  institutions  and  ser- 
vants; but  tliev  liy  tlie  transgression  of 
the  law  <lishoMori'd  (iod,  and  in  l»etray- 
ing  and  murdering  the  Messiah  were 
even  worse  tlian  blasphemers.  The 
S)>eech  ends  suddenly,  but  ]>f>iiitedly, 
with  elo(jnence  and  jwiwcr.  Further 
concerning  the  speech  and  the  relation 
of  Stephen  to  Paul,  see  end  of  the 
chajiter. 

54-60.  The  Death  of  Stephen. 
A  wonderful  contrast  is  liere  presented 
between  the  infuriated  lu'arers  turning,' 
into  a  murderous  mob,  and  Stephen, 
calm,  full  of  faith  and  the  Spirit  with  a 
vision  of  heavenly  glory,  liolding  no 
resentment,  praying,  and  dying  as  one 
who  falls  asleep ! 


Uii.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


113 


54  "  When  they  heard  these  things  they 
were  cut  to  the  heart,  and  they  gnashed 

55  on  him  with  their  teeth.  But  he,  ^  being 
full  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  looked  up  stead- 
fastly into  heaven,  J  and  saw  the  glory  of 


Goil,  and  .lesus  standing  on  the  right  hand 

56  of  God,  and  said.  Behold,  '  I  see  the  heav- 
ens openetl,  and  the  'Sou  of  man  stand- 

57  ing  on  the  right  hand  of  God.  Then  iliey 
cried  out  with  a  loud  voice,  and  stopped 


u  oh.  5  :  33. 


;  ch.  6  : 


y  Isa.  6  :  l-:5.        «  Ezok.  1 ;  1 ;  Matt.  3  :  16         »  Dan.  7  :  13. 


54.  When,  i-ather,  And  heaving 
these  things,  the  terrible  rebukes  of 
ver.  51-53.  Tlie  present  tense  har- 
monizes with  the  al)ni]it  terminatiou 
of  the  speech.  They  were  cut  to 
the  heart — their  hearts  were  deeply 
penetrated  and  conviihsed  with  rage. 
See  on  5  :  33,  where  the  same  verb  is 
used.  Gnashed  on  him  with  their 
teeth — as  if  ready  to  devour  iiim 
alive :  an  expression  used  in  the  Old 
Testament     to     signify    furious    rage. 

(Job   16  :a;   Ps.  35:16;   Al  ;  Vi.)         There       WaS 

probably  an  audible  outburst  of  irre- 
pressible anger,  whicli  found  full  vent 
soon  after,     (ver.  57.) 

55.  But    he — in    contrast — being 
full  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  as  had  been 
manifest  in  his  very  countenance  before 
the  beginning  of   his  speech.     (6:i5.) 
With  no  concern  about  himself  or  his 
judges,  he  looked  up   steadfastly 
— intently — into    heaven,     (see  on  6: 
15.)      His    thoughts    are    on    heaven 
and  the  Lord  .Jesus.     The  vision  may 
have  been  a  mental  one,  but  the  more 
natural  implication   is  that  the  San- 
hedrin  was    convened    in  some  room 
where  the  heavens  were  visil)le,  i)er- 
haps  in  one  of  tlu'  open  courts  of  the 
temple,  or   j)ossihly   the   courtyard   of| 
the    high    priest's    palace.      Compare ! 
Matt.  2(3  :  3,  58  ;  on  which  see  Author's  ■ 
note.    Saw  the  glory  of  God — that  \ 
unapproachable    light,    in    which    he 
dwclleth.    (1  Tim.  6 :  16.)    Aiid  sec  on  ver.  j 
2.     He  began  his  address  with  "  the  I 
God  of  glory,"  and  now  he  sees  the  Son 
of  man  partaking  of  that  glory.    Jesus 
standing — not  sitting — the  posture  in 
which   he  is  on  other  occasions  pre- 
sented.     ( Matt.  -if.  :  24  ;   Kph.  1  :  iO  :  Col.  3  :  1  ;  Ps. 

110:1.)  He  has  risen  from  his  throne 
in  sympathy,  interest,  and  approval, 
ready  to  receive  his  faithful  servant. 
On  the  right  hand  of  God — the 
place  of  honor  and  co-e(iual  power, 
(.seeonu  ;33, 3i.)  Vcrv  likely  Stephen 
was  one  of  the  one  hundred  and  twenty, 
or  one  of  the  live  hundred  who  had 


seen  the  risen  Lord,  and  he  now 
instantly  recognizes  him. 

56.  Behold — calling  attention  to 
something  unexj)ected  and  surprising. 
1  see  the  heavens — the  plural  indi- 
cating he  saw  into  the  third  heaven 
(2  Cor.  12: 2),  the  immediate  ]>re.sence  of 
God.  Opened — by  dividing  asunder, 
such  being  the  literal  meaning  of  the 
verb.  The  Son  of  man — the  title 
which  Jesus  frequently  aj)plied  to  him- 
self, but  wliich  our  Lord's  disciples  do 
not  elsewhere  apply  to  him.  It  is  the 
designation  of  the  Messiah  according 
to  Dan.  7  :  13.  See  Author's  note  on 
Matt.  8  :  20.  Stephen  thus  styles  Jesns 
of  the  last  verse,  because  he  saw  his 
glorified  humanity,  and  probably  also 
to  remind  many  of  those  present  that 
his  prediction  to  Caiaphas  had  begun 
to  be  fulfilled  :  "  Henceforth  ye  shall 
see  the  Son  of  man  sitting  at  the  right 
hand  of  power,  and  coming  on  the 
clouds  of  heaven."  (M.Ttt.  2r,:f,(.)  The 
appearance  of  the  glorified  human 
Christ  would  also  till  his  soul  with  joy 
and  courage,  as  he  beheld  that  nature 
in  which  he  suffered  clothed  in  glory. 
Thus  Stei)hen  stands  before  the  saiue 
tribunal  at  which  Jesus  stood,  and 
charged  with  the  same  crime,  of  blas- 
phemy ;  and  there  gets  a  view  of  his 
victorious  Lord.  These  concluding 
words  of  Stephen,  like  those  of  our 
Lord  (Miitt.  2H:r,f,.  69)  gave  color  to  the 
charge  of  blasjihemy,  and  exasiierated 
his  hearers  to  the  utinost. 

57.  Then  they  cried  out  with  a 
loud  voice.  Prolnibly  beginning 
with  the  Sanhedrin,  and  extending  to 
all  the  others  present  (6:9,12);  some 
ciying  out  one  thing  and  some  anotb.er  ; 
.some  doubtless  shouting,  blasjjhemy  ; 
others,  telling  him  to  be  silent ;  aiid 
.still  others,  "stone  liim,  stone  him  ;  he 

is  worthy  of  death."       (See  19:  32  :  .John  19:  0, 

15.)  Stopped  their  ears  with  their 
hands,  indicating  their  utter  abhor- 
rence, and  that  they  might  not  hear 
his  supposed  blasphemies.    Ran  upon 


114                                             THE  ACTS.                                  [Ch.  VII. 

their  ears,  and  ran  upon  him  with  one 
58  accord,  and  >>  cast  Mm  out  of  the  cily  and 

stoned  him  :    and   «  the  witnesseB  laid 
down  their  clothes  at  a  young  man's  feet, 

b  Lev.  24  :  14 ;  1  Kings  21  :  13  ;  Luke  4  ;  29.        «  ch.  22  :  20  ;  Deut.  17  :  7. 

him  with  one  accord — rushed  upon 
him  in  a  body.  Thfir  judicial  pro- 
cetdings  were  turned  into  a  mob.  It 
does  not  appear  tliat  tbere  was  any 
formal  vote  or  any  judicial  sentence. 
Yet  by  tlieir  actions  tlie  Sanhedrin  con- 
demned him  to  death.  "  The  tumultu- 
ous excitement  here  described  may 
seem  incredible  in  a  grave  national 
assembly,  and  especially  in  one  of  a 
religious  character.  But  it  is  perfectly 
in  keeping  with  the  treatment  of  Paul 
and  of  our  Lord  himself,  before  tlie 
same  tribunal.  (2^:2;  johni8:J2.)  It  also 
agrees  with  wluit  we  know,  from  other 
sources,  of  the  growing  fanaticism  of 
the  zealots,  which  precipitated,  if  it  did 
not  cause,  the  final  downfall  of  Jeru- 
salem, and  with  it  the  destruction  of 
the  Hebrew  state."     (ALEXANDER.) 

58.  And  cast  him  out  of  the 
city — so  that  the  city,  regarded  as 
holy,  miglit  not  be  defiled  with  blood. 
Thus  the  blasphemer  in  the  wilderness 
was  stoned  without  the  camji.  (Lev. 
J4: 14.)  So  ako  Nalioth  was  stoned  out- 
side the  city  of  Samaria.  (1  Kings 21 :  13.) 
See  14  :  19,  where  the  Jews  did  not  have 
the  same  .sacred  regard  for  tlie  heathen 
city,  Iconiuni.  Stoned  him — the 
severest  Jewish  punishment.  Blas- 
])hemers,  idolaters,  and  flagrant  moral 
transgres.sors  were  thus  executed.   (Exod. 

19:13;  Dcut.  17  :  5;  Josh.  7  :  25.)     The  ([Ucstlon 

arises,  How  could  Ste])hen  liave  l)een 
stoned,  when  it  was  not  lawful  for  the 
Jews  to  put  any  man  to  death  ?  (John 
18 :  31.)  According  to  the  Talmud  tlie 
Romans  took  away  the  power  of  life 
and  deatli  from  the  Sanhedrin  forty 
years  before  the  destruction  of  the  tem- 
]de,  probably  in  the  last  year  of  our 
Lord's  life.  The  act  is  best  explained 
as  an  illegal  tumultuous  outbreak,  such 
as  the  Roman  governor,  desirous  of 
tlie  favor  of  the  Jews,  sometimes  con- 
nived at,  provided  tlie  Roman  interest 
suffered  no  detriment.  During  the  last 
years  of  his  procuratorship,  Pilate 
wished  the  favor  of  the  Jews  with  the 
emperor,  and  they  in  turn  may  have 
taken  unusual  lil)eities.  The  place  of 
Stephen's  death  is  uncertain.     Tradi- 


tion puts  it  at  "  The  place  of  stoning,'' 
a  little  outside  of  the  Damascus  gate, 
near  Jeremiah's  Grotto,  on  the  road 
leading  north.  "The  site  of  Jermiah's 
Grotto  is  peculiarly  fitted  tor  a  place  of 
execution  iu  consequence  of  its  com- 
manding position.  From  the  summit 
the  eye  roams  above  the  city  walls  over 
the  greater  part  of  Jerusalem,  while 
on  the  west  the  ground  rises  beyond 
the  intervening  valley  like  a  theatre. 
There  is  hardly  another  sjiotnear  Jeru- 
salem so  fitted  to  be  the  central  point 
for  any  public  spectacle."  (Captain 
Condor,  Twenty-One  Years  in  the 
Holy  Land,  ji.  18S.)  The  Avitnesses 
— those  who  had  borne  false  witness 
(6 :  13),  who  were  to  begin  the  execution. 
(Deut.  17 : 7.)  There  were  to  be  at  least 
two  witnesses,  and  the  Rabl)inical 
writers  say  that  the  first  stone  was  to 
be  cast  by  one  of  them  ujion  the  breast, 
and  if  this  failed  to  cause  death,  the 
bystanders  were  to  complete  the  execu- 
tion. Laid  down  their  clothes — 
/AfM' loose  outer  (jarments,  so  as  to  have 
the  free  use  of  their  arms.  The  .stones 
first  east  are  said  to  have  been  large. 
At  a  youne:  man's  feet  whose 
name  Avas  Saul.  Saul  of  Tansus 
a])i)ears  for  the  fir.st  time  in  .sacred 
history.  The  act  implies,  not  only  tiiat 
the  garments  were  de])osited  for  .safe- 
keeping, but  also  that  Saul  was  a  zeal- 
ous opposer  of  Jesus,  and  a  leader  in 
the  persecution  of  Stejihen.  (s :  i ;  22 ;  20.) 
Tarsus  was  the  capital  of  Cilicia,  and 
Saul  was  doubtless  a  member  of  the 
Ciliciaii  Synagogue  (fi:  9),  and  had  dis- 
jdited  with  Stephen.  The  ex])ression 
young  man  is  ijuite  indefinite.  Philo 
makes  it  embrace  from  twenty-one  to 
twenty-eight  years  of  age.  Varro  .says 
a  mail  is  young  at  forty-five  and  aged 
at  sixty.  Dio  Cassius  calls  Cresar  a 
young  man  when  he  was  forty.  The 
"  young  man  "  Absalom  must  have  been 
over  thirty  when  he  was  killed.  Saul 
was  2>robably  thirty  or  more,  since  the 
Sanhedrin  shortly  after  employed  him 
as  a  chief  agent  on  an  important  mis- 
sion to  Damascus,  which  they  could 
hardly  have  entrusted  to  a  mere  jouth. 


Ch.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


115 


69  whose  name  was  4  Saul.  And  tbey  stoned 
Stephen  calling  upon   God,  aud  saying, 

60  Lord  Jesus,  'receive  uiy  spirit.  And  he 
kneeled  down,  and    cried   with  a  loud  | 


voice,  '  Lord,  lay  not  this  sin  to  their 
charge.  And  wheu  he  had  said  this  s  he 
fell  asleep.  And  •>  Saul  was  consenting 
unto  his  death. 


4  ch.  9  : 1-13  ;  13  :  9.        •  Ps.  31  :  5  ;  Luke  23  •  46.        '  Matt.  5  :  44  ;  Luke  23  :  34.        g  John 


11  ;11. 


i>  ch.  7  :  58. 


An  ancient  tradition  put  the  birth  of 
Saul  at  Tarsus  in  A.  D.  2,  which  cannot 
be  very  far  out  of  the  way.  (  See 
Autlior's  Harmonic  Arruyujemcnt  of 
the  Acts,  §  13,  Notes.) 

Dr.  Norris,  in  his  Key  to  the.  Acts  (pp. 
145-9),  and  some  before  hiiu,  have  at- 
tempted to  prove  that  the  Sanhedrin 
had  not  lost  the  power  of  Uiflicting 
capital  punishmoit,  and  that  the  death 
of  Stephen  was  an  orderly  judicial  pro- 
cedure. Their  arguments,  however,  are 
not  decisive,  while  the  .lewish  authori- 
ties (John  18:31)  distinctly  aud  unquali- 
fiedly state,  "  It  is  not  lawful  for  us  to 
put  any  man  to  dcatli."  To  suppose 
that  they  merely  meant,  "  It  is  not  law- 
ful at  this  holy  festival  to  do  this,"  is 
unnatural  and  improbable.  Besides, 
according  to  the  Talmud,  as  quoted  by 
Selden  and  Lightfoot,  this  power  was 
taken  away  forty  years  before  the 
destruction  of  tlie  temjtle  by  Titus. 
The  passages  quoted  to  jDrove  that  they 

still  had  this  power  (John  5  :  is  ;  7  :  25.  32,  51 ; 
8  :  5,  7,  59  ;  11  :  5:!  ;  1.! :  10  ;  Acts  2+  :  6;  -.'6  :  31)  Only 

show  that  the  Roman  governors  some- 
times winked  at  acts  of  violence.  The 
speech  of  Titus  (.Josephus,  War,  vi. 
2  :  4)  in  which  he  reminds  the  Jews  of 
the  indulgence  of  the  emperors  toward 
them  in  allowing  them  to  put  to  death 
any  foreigner,  even  a  Roman,  who 
might  pass  beyond  the  partition-wall  of 
the  temple,  separating  Jews  from  Gen- 
tiles, at  the  most  only  shows  that  an 
exception  in  an  extreme  case  was  made 
to  general  rule.  But  even  in  this 
the  Roman  governor  may  liave  given 
or  confirmed  the  sentence  and  directed 
the  execution.  See  note  at  the  begin- 
ning of  this  verse. 

59.  And  they  stoned  Stephen — 
botli  the  witnesses  aud  the  people  gen- 
erally. The  repetition  adds  vividness 
to  tlie  narrative,  and  opens  the  way  to 
the  particulars  connected  with  Ste- 
phen's death.  Calling  upon  God 
and  saying — invoking  and  saying, 
Lord  Jesns.  God  should  be  omitted, 
not  being  in  the  original.    It  was  upon 


Jesus  that  he  called.  (John  22 :  20.)  Re- 
ceive my  spirit.  Imitating  one  of 
the  prayers  of  Jesus  on  the  cross  (Luke 
23 :  46),  Stephen  sliows  the  same  confi- 
dence in  the  Lord  Jesus  as  Jesus 
showed  in  the  Father.  On  prayers  to 
Christ,  see  1  :  L'4 ;  9  :  14,  21  ;  22  :  16. 

60.  With  a  loud  voice — like  our 
Saviour,  and  in  imitation  of  his  prayer. 
(Luke  23: 46,  :n.)  "  Tlic  last  expenditure 
of  his  strengtli  of  love,  the  fervor  of 
which  discloses  itself  in  the  kneeling." 
(Meyer.)  Not  only  an  expression  of 
religious  feeling,  but  perhaps  of  ex- 
hausted strength.  Having  no  further 
concern  regarding  himself,  his  thoughts 
are  taken  up  in  com])assion  for  liis 
murderers.  liOrd — this  term  here  and 
in  the  preceding  verse  apj)lied  to  Clirist, 
is  used  most  frequently  in  tlie  New 
Testament  as  a  designation  for  God, 
the  Supreme  Ruler  of  the  universe,  or 
to  Jesus  Christ,  exalted  to  tiie  Media- 
torial throne  and  Head  over  all  things 

to  the  church.  (Acts  10  :  36;  Rom.  14  :  8;  1 
Cor.  8:  6;  Phil.  2  :  911  )        Lay    UOt,    etC. — 

Weigh  not  out  to  them  this  sin,  do  not 
reckon  to  them  or  call  them  to  account 
for,  this  sin.  "  No  parallel  to  this 
prayer  of  Stephen  can  ))e  found  out  of 
Christian  history."  (H.vckett.)  It 
was  answered  in  the  case  of  Paul.  "  If 
Stephen  had  not  prayed,  the  church 
would  not  have  had  Paul."  (Araus- 
TINE.)  With  the  two  prayers  of  Ste- 
phen compare  Paul's  declaration  "  He 
IS  sxhle  to  keep  that  which  I  have  com 
mittedtohimuntothatday  "(2Tini.i :  12), 
and  his  prayer,  "  Maj^  it  not  be  laid 
to  their  charge."  (2  Tim.  4 :  is.)  He  fell 
asleep.  A  peculiar  and  beautiful  Chris- 
tian expression  for  death.  What  a 
contrast  to  the  outward  circumstances 
of  his  death !  The  righteous  of  the 
Old  Testament  "  lay  down  with  their 
fathers "  or  "  were  gathered  to  their 
fathers"  (Judg.  2  :  10;  1  Kings  2  :  10, 
Dr.  Conant's  translation) ;  but  to  the 
Christians  of  the  New  Testament  death, 
roljl>ed  of  its  terrors  and  peaceful,  is 

but  as  a  sleep.      (13  :  36;  John  U  :  11 ;  1  Cor.  1 ; 


116 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VII. 


39  ;    11  :  30 ;    15  :  6,  51  ;    2  Peter  3:4.)         Cemetery 

from  the  word  translated  sleep  was  first 
used  by  Christians  of  a  place  where 
the  body  sleeps  iii  hope  of  resurrection. 
The  first  sentence  of  the  next  chapter 
concludes  the  account  of  Steiiheii's 
death.  Saul  was  consenting  with  the 
others  to  his  death. 

Stephen  and  Paul.  Stephen  ap- 
pears to  have  made  a  deep  and  life- 
long impression  on  Paul,  in  his  discus- 
sions (6 : 8-10),  in  his  defence,  and  in  his 
death.  lie  appears  as  a  connecting 
link  between  Peter  and  Paul,  having 
clearer  views  of  the  Gospel  Dispensa- 
tion than  the  former,  and  within  a  step 
of  the  developed  views  of  the  latter. 
He  has  been  very  justly  styled  the  fore- 
runner of  the  Apostle  Paul.  This  ap- 
pears: First,  from  the  similarity  of 
ciiarges  made  against  them  (6:ii,i3,  h; 
21 :  21 ;  24 : 5-9 ;  25 : 8),  Indicating  similarity 
of  views  and  teaching.  Second,  from 
similarity  of  methods.  Both  employ 
the  historical  argument.  Paul's  ad- 
dress at  Antioch  of  Pisidia  (3:i6-4i) 
seeuis  born  of  Stephen's  speech  at  Jeru- 
salem. He  briefly  traces  the  history  of 
tiie  chosen  people  from  Egypt  to  David, 
notices  that  the  law  proved  unavailing 
for  justification  (is :  39),  and  his  closing 
appeal  (is :  40. 41 )  reminds  us  of  Stephen's 
final  upbraiding  words.  Third,  from 
verbal  and  logical  coincidences.  Tlius 
Stephen  speaks  of  the  fathers  "  who 
received  the  living  oracles"  (ver. ss); 
and  Paul  (Rom.  3 : 2)  says,  "  They  were 
entrusted  with  tlie  oracles  of  God." 
Stephen  again  (ver.51),  "  uncircumcised 
in  heart;"  and  Paul  (Rom. 2:29),  "cir- 
cumcision is  that  of  the  heart."  See 
also  the  idea  concerning  circumcision 
ill  ver.  8,  exjmiuled  in  Rom.  4  :  11  f. 
Again  Stephen  says  (ver.  53)  that  the 
law  "  was  ordained  by  angels ;"  Paul 
(Gal.  3 :  19),  that  it "  was  ordained  through 

angels."       (see  ver.  3S;    Heb.  2  i  2;    Gal.  4:  14,) 

Further  Stephen  as  well  as  Paul  ex- 
hibits the  Cliri.stian  Dispensation  as 
superior  to  that  of  Moses  (vcr.  ,i2)  and 
thatit  was  to  supersede  Judaism  (ver.  37). 
See  the  Epistles  to  the  Pi,omans  and  the 
Galatians ;  com])are  also  the  Hebrews. 
Fourth,  from  their  agreement  regard- 
ing the  sinrituality  and  universality  of 
true  worship.  Here  was  an  important 
source  of  Stephen's  ofl'ending.    "  The 


God  of  glory"  (ver. 2)  surely  could  not 
be  confined  to  human  temples  or  any 
one  i»lace  (n  :  24,25, 29),;and  for  hundreds 
of  years  was  with  the  patriarch  and 
their  descendants  without  any  earthly 
dwelling  place.  Tlie  tabernacle  and 
temple  Avere  both  tempoiary  and  were 
recognized  as  such  by  Solonion  and  the 
prophets.  (ver.47-.w.)  He  brings  into 
view  the  nobler  temjjle  of  the  renewed 
heart  (see  note  on  ver.  50)  and  tlius  fore- 
shadowed Paul  (1  Cor.  3  :  16)  ;  "  KllOW  yC 
not  that  ye  are  the  temple  of  God,  and 
that  the  Spirit  of  God  dwelleth  in 
you?"  (See  also 2  Cor. 6: 16.)  Tlius Stephen 
was  the  first  to  meet  boldly  and  com- 
prehensively the  great  question  con- 
cerning the  relation  of  the  gospel  to 
the  law,  of  the  New  Dispensation  to 
the  Old.  He  was  tlie  first  to  break  the 
bonds  of  Judaism ;  and  it  was  left  for 
Paul  to  develop  tiie  teachings,  and 
carry  on  the  work,  which  seemed  to  be 
overwhelmed  in  ruin  when  the  stones 
mangled  and  crushed  the  body  of 
Stephen.    See  also  note  on  ver.  60. 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  We  are  to  treat  with  respect,  and  honor 
those  in  authority  though  opposed  to  reHg- 
ion.  (Ver.  1,  2;  Rom.  13:7,8;  1  Peter  2: 
17.) 

2.  God  is  glorious  in  himself,  in  his  attri- 
butes, providence,  and  in  all  his  dispensa- 
tions to  men.  (Ver.  2;  Fxod- 1.5  :  11 ;  Ps.  145: 
5  ;  Isa.  63  :  1 ;  2  Cor.  :!  :  7-10.) 

3.  God's  plan  is  one  both  in  revelation  and 
providence.  The  entire  course  of  events 
under  the  Old  Dispensation  was  preparatory 
to  the  coming  of  Christ  and  the  Gospel  Dis- 
pensation.    (Ver.  2-50;  Gal.  3  :  2:},  24:  4  :  4.) 

4.  Scripture  is  a  mighty  weapon  in  tlie 
hands  of  God's  people,  and  should  be  ready 
for  use  in  giving  a  reason  of  the  hope  that  is 
in  them.     (Ver.  2-50;  17  :  2,  11 ;  )«  :  24,  2.5.) 

6.  Faith  in  every  age  has  been  the  taking 
of  God  at  his  word.  (Ver.  2-8 ;  Heb.  11 :  1, 
8-18.) 

6.  Grod's  promises,  though  slow,  are  sure. 
(Ver.  2-7 ;  2  Peter  3:9.) 

7.  The  promises  of  God  are  both  an  en- 
couragement and  a  test  of  our  faith.  (Ver.  6, 
7 :  Rom.  8  :  18, 19,  23-25.) 

8.  In  the  father  of  the  faithful  we  see  the 
nature  and  effects  of  justifying  faith  exer- 
cised in  uncircumcision,  and  the  lack  of  ite 


Cn.  VII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


117 


fruits  in  the  patriarchs  who  sold  Joseph  into 
ICgypt.     (Ver.  4-9 ;  Rom.  4  :  3-12.) 

9.  The  godly  have  ever  been  followed  by 
the  hatred  and  envy  of  the  world.  (Ver.  9 ; 
Matt.  10  :  36.) 

10.  Because  God  sees  fit  to  bring  good  out 
of  evil  is  no  reason  why  any  should  "  do 
evil  that  good  may  come."   (Ver.  9-15  ;  Rom. 

3  :  8.) 

11.  In  the  humiliation  and  exaltation  of 
Joseph  we  see  a  type  of  Jesus.  (Ver.  9-14; 
Phil.  -i. :  o-lG.) 

12.  Israel  in  Egypt  a  type  of  God's  people 
in  this  world.    (Ver.  15, 16;  Rev.  11  :  8;  Gal. 

4  :  24,  25.) 

13.  God  is  faithful  to  fulfill  his  word  in  its 
time.     (Ver.  17 ;  Gal.  4:4:  Eph.  1  :  10.) 

14.  God  directs  his  providences  so  as  to 
secure  the  accomplishment  of  his  designs. 
(Ver.  17-21 ;  Hab.  2  :  3.) 

15.  How  soon  are  benefits  receiyed  forgot- 
ten !     (Ver.  18 ;  Gen.  40  :  23.) 

16.  "  God  so  protects  his  people  that  even 
enemies  become  their  servants."  (Ver.  21 ; 
28  :  17-21.) 

17.  God  often  makes  human  learning  sub- 
servient to  his  cause,  and  uses  it  in  his  ser- 
vice.    (Ver.  22;  22:3.) 

18.  Moses  was  a  striking  type  of  Christ. 
(Ver.  23-28,  35-37  ;  Heb.  2  :  12.) 

19.  We  see  in  Moses  the  power  and  triumph 
of  faith,  in  visiting  his  kindred  and  making 
their  case  his  own.  (Ver.  2:J-27 ;  Heb.  11  : 
24,  25.) 

20.  Learn  concerning  God's  dealings  with 
men.  For  forty  years  God  is  preparing 
Moses  to  take  charge  of  his  chosen  people, 
while  they  justly  continue  in  bondage,  and 
learn  not  to  spurn  God's  deliverer.  (Ver. 
27-30.) 

21.  In  the  burning  bush  which  was  not 
consumed,  we  see  an  emblem  of  God's  people 
preserved  in  this  world  amid  E'cry  persecu- 
tions.   (Ver.  30 ;  Dan.  3  :  25-27  ;  Matt.  16  :  18.) 

22.  The  words  of  God  from  the  bush  were 
evidences,  not  only  of  his  presence,  but  also 
of  a  future  state  of  existence.  (Ver.  32; 
Matt.  22  :  32.) 

23.  God  is  not  confined  to  time  or  place. 
He  manifested  himself  in  Mesopotamia,  in 
Egypt,  and  in  the  wilderness  as  well  as  at 
Jerusalem.     (Ver.  33 ;  John  4  :  21.) 

24.  God  exercises  a  fatherly  care  over  his 
people.    (Ver.  34;  Ps.  103  :  13.) 

85.  GoU  oftea  brings  deUveraoce   to  his 


doubting  and  rebellious  people  through  un- 
exjiectcd  means  and  instrumentalitiea.  (Ver. 
35,  36;  Luke  24  :  21.) 

26.  Miracles  will  not  always  convince  men 
of  the  authority  of  God's  messengers.  (Ver. 
36  ;  Luke  16  :  31.) 

27.  Moses  and  the  prophets  all  pointed 
toward  Christ  as  superior  to  themselves. 
(Ver.  37  ;  John  1  :  17 ;  Rev.  19  :  10.) 

28.  Happy  .are  they  to  whom  God  entrusts 
his  living  word.  (Ver.  38 ;  John  17  :  14,  17  ; 
Rom.  3  :  2.) 

29.  In  the  mission  of  Moses  and  the  treat- 
ment he  received  of  Israel,  we  have  a  strik- 
ing illustration  of  the  grace  of  God  and  the 
ingratitude  of  men.    (Ver.  35-41.) 

30.  How  many  professed  Christians  have 
in  their  hearts  turned  back  to  Egypt,  and 
been  guilty  of  jiractices  as  opposite  to 
Christ's  commands  as  the  idolatry  of  the 
golden  calf  was  to  those  of  Moses.  (Ver. 
39-41 ;  Rev.  2  :  14,  15.) 

31.  Jesus  Christ,  the  Revealer  of  the 
Father,  is  the  only  image  of  God.  (Ver.  41- 
44 ;  Col.  1  :  15 ;  Heb.  1  :  3.) 

32.  It  is  a  terrible  punishment  when  God 
abandons  men  to  themselves.  (Ver.  42; 
Rom.  1  :  28.) 

33.  In  all  our  services  God  demands  the 
homage  of  the  heart.  (Ver.  42 ;  Ps.  51:17; 
Isa.  66  :  2.) 

34.  God  may  long  delay  punishment,  but 
it  will  surely  come  upon  the  sinner.  (Ver. 
43 ;  Num.  32  :  23 ;  2  Peter  2  :  3.) 

35.  God  adapts  his  revelations  to  the  con- 
di:ions  of  men.  The  tabernacle  (or  tent)  was 
specially  suited  to  Israel  in  the  wilderness. 
(Ver.  44 ;  John  16  :  12.) 

36.  Tlie  earthly  is  but  the  shadow  of  the 
heavenly.  Material  ordinances  are  the  types 
and  patterns  of  the  spiritual.  (Ver.  45; 
Heb.  10  :  1.) 

37.  God  often  yields  to  the  desires  of  his 
children,  and  accommodates  himself  to  their 
infirmities.    (Ver.  46,  47  ;  1  Sam.  8  :  6,  7,  22.) 

38.  Temples  and  outward  observances 
have  their  place,  but  may  be  abused  and 
become  idols,  and  hindrances  to  true  wor- 
ship.    (Ver.  47,  48 ;  Mark.  7  :  3-7.) 

39.  The  abandonment  of  the  tabernacle 
and  the  destruction  of  the  temple  have  not 
atfected  God's  presence  with  his  people.  The 
universe  is  God's  dwelling  place,  and  re- 
newed hearts  the  temples  in  which  Uod 
delights.    (Ver.  49-51 ;  John  14  :  23.) 


118 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cii.  VIII. 


40.  "When  the  heart  is  uncircumcised, 
the  ears  are  in  the  same  condition."  ( Ver. 
51 ;  8  :  21.) 

41.  Kesisting  the  Holy  Spirit  indicates 
great  depravity  of  heart.  (Ver.  51 ;  Isa.  63  : 
10.) 

42.  The  Scriptures  may  be  entrusted  to  us,  ! 
and  yet,  giving  attention  only  to  the  letter, 
and  not  discerning  the  Spirit,  we  may  fail 
to  understand  them.     (Ver.  52 ;  2  Cor.  B  :  6.) 

43.  Rejecting  one  truth  leads  to  the  re- 
jection of  others.  Rejection  of  the  propheis 
culminated  in  rejecting  the  Messiah.  (Yer. 
52,  5;J.) 

44.  The  evidences  and  glory  of  divine 
revelation  aggravate  the  guilt  of  those  who 
reject  it.     (Ver.  53 ;  Luke  12  :  47.) 

45.  The  unrenewed  heart  hales  the  truth, 
and  so  wicked  men  often  treat  despitefully 
those  who  desire  to  save  their  souls.  (Ver. 
54;  John  4:  19,  20.) 

46.  A  view  of  Jesus  is  a  foretaste  of 
heaven,  and  the  best  preparation  for  afflic- 
tions and  death.    (Ver.  55 ;  Phil.  1  :  23.) 

47.  The  human  and  divine  Christ  is  the 
channel  of  communication  between  earth 
and  heaven  to  either  the  living  or  dying 
believer.  (Ver.  56  ;  John  1  :  51 ;  Rev.  5  : 
6,9.) 

48.  Prejudice  and  malice  blunt  the  moral 
sense,  distort  the  mental  vision,  and  lead  to 
the  disregarding  of  all  forms  of  law  and  to 
the  most  atrocious  crimes.  (Ver.  57,  58 ;  Ps. 
10  :  4-10.) 

49.  "  They  stone  one  witness,  but  God  is 
preparing  another  to  take  his  place. ' 
(Stakke.)    (Ver.  58.) 

50.  Jesus  is  divine.  We  have  an  inspired 
example  and  warrant  to  pray  to  him.  (Ver. 
59 ;  John  20  :  2S.) 

51.  If  we  comraH  our  all  to  Jesus  in  life, 
we  shall  be  prei)ared  to  commit  our  souls  to 
him  in  de.ith.    (Ver.  50.) 

52.  To  forgive  our  enemies  and  to  pray  for 
them  are  evidences  of  the  divine  love  shed 
abroad  in  our  hearts.  (Ver.  60 ;  Rom.  5:5; 
12  :  19-21.) 

.53.  The  death  of  the  Christian  is  but  as  a 
sleep,  through  the  hope  of  a  resurrection 
and  a  glorified  life.  (Ver.  60;  1  Cor.  15: 
55-57.) 

54.  Stephen  (meaning  crmrn)  was  crowned 
in  life  with  grace,  crowned  at  death  as  a 
martyr,  and  in  heaven  crowned  with  glory. 
(Ver.  60 ;  Rev.  2 :  10.) 


Ch.  8  :  With  this  chapter  begins  a 
new  era  in  the  history  of  the  Christian 
church.  Christianity  is  no  longer  con- 
fined to  the  mother  church  of  Jerusa- 
lem, but  it  spreads  abroad  among  Jews 
and  i)roselytes,  and  churches  are 
formed  in  Judea,  Samaria  and  Damas- 
cus. The  account  of  tliis  extension  of 
tlie  gosjjel  is  given  in  tliis  cliajiter  and 
the  next,  covering  a  j^eriod  of  perhaps 
four  or  five  years.  In  the  death  of 
Jesus  the  Jewish  nation  throtigh  their 
ecclesiastical  rulers  had  rejected  him, 
and  now  the  same  authorities,  repre- 
senting especially  Jerusalem,  reject  the 
Holy  Spirit  and  the  gospel.  (7:ai.) 
Because  of  the  presence  of  the  Sj)irit 
and  the  greater  light  given,  the  later 
sin  was  greater  than  the  former.  This 
may  be  regarded  as  ending  the  Mes- 
sianic week  foretold  by  Daniel  (9 :  25-27), 
in  the  midst  of  which  the  Messiah  was 
cut  off.  If  this  week  of  seven  years 
began  with  the  jmblic  ministry  of 
Jesus,  which  ministry  lasted  a  little 
over  three  years,  than  the  apostles  had 
bean  carrying  on  the  work  at  Jerusalem 
three  and  a  half,  or  nearly  four  years. 
According  to  this  theory  the  death  of 
Stephen  occurred  the  latter  part  of  A.  D. 
33,  or  early  in  a.  r>.  34.  From  this 
time  began  the  emancii)ation  of  tlie 
disciples  from  the  temple  worship,  with 
which  they  had  thus  far  been  out- 
wardly connected.  Thereafter  we  hear 
no  more  any  special  increase  of  the 
church  at  Jerusalem.  The  gospel  is 
now  preached  to  the  Jews  outside  of 
the  cajiital  city,  in  Judea  and  Samaria, 
for  a  like  period  of  time,  after  which  it 
is  through  Peter  extended  to  the  Gen- 
tiles.    (10;  1.) 

1-3.  The  Bukial  of  Stephen— 
The  Persecution  and  Scattering 
OF  THE  DisclPLE.s.  This  forms  a  fit- 
ting close  of  the  last  chapter.    (22 :  is.  20.) 

1.  And  Saul  was,  etc.  Closely 
connected  with  the  last  chajfter  anil 
forming  a  connecting  link  between  the 
death  of  Stephen  and  the  persecution 
that  ensued.  Consenting — approv- 
ing ivith  those  who  accomplished  the 
vmrdn-  of  Ste]ihen,  implying  that  he 
was  pleased  at  Steplien's  death.  Ac- 
cordingly, the  Improved  Bible  Union 
version  translates :  "And  Saul  was 
well   pleased    with   his    death."     The 


Ch.  VIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


im 


Persecution  and  scattering  of  the  disciples; 

PkUip  in   Saiuaria ;  followed  by  Peter  and 

John, 

8  AND  at  that  time  there  was  a  great  per- 

secutiiin  against  tbe  church  wliich  was  at 

Jerusalem ;  aud  '  they  were  all  scattered 


abroad  tlirougliout  the  region  of  Jud%a 
and  Saiuaria,  except  the  apostles. 

2  Aud  devout  men  carried  Stephen  to  his 
burial,  and  i'  made  great  lamentation  over 

3  him.    As  for  Saul  'he  made  havoc  of  the 
church,  entering  into  every  house,  aud 


«ch.  11  :  19-21.        k  Gen.  50:10.        1  ch.  9  : 1-13,  21 ;  22  :  4 ;  Gal.  1  :  i:5. 


same  word  is  used  in  Luke  11  :  48, 
"  Ye  allow,"  api)rove  witli  satisfaction, 
"  the  deeds  of  your  fathers."  (See  22  -.  20.) 
Thus  Saul  shared  their  t;uilt  (Rum.  1 :  32), 
which  Paul  doubtless  often  confessed 
(22.20),  and  no  doubt  in  the  hearing  of 
J^uke.  Some  have  supposed  that  Saul 
was  a  member  of  the  Sanhedrin.  But 
the  language  here  rather  iuij>lies  that 
he  was  not  one  of  them,  but  that  he  was 
pleased  to  act  in  concert  witli  them  in 
thus  hastily  and  suninuirily  killing  one 
whom  he  regarded  as  guilty  of  a  most 
heinous  crime.  Some  infer  from  2(3  :  10 
tliat  lie  soon  after  became  a  member  of 
that  body. 

At  that  time — on  that  day  of 
Stephen's  death  and  burial,  and  as  an 
immediate  consequence  there  arose  a 
great  persecution.  (u:i9.)  This 
violent  and  sudden  outbreak  spread 
against  the  discipleshi])  generally. 
The  Pharisees  and  the  tickle  populace 
now  unite  with  the  Sadducees. 
Against  the  church — or  congrega- 
tion of  believers,  (seeoi.  s:  11.)  All 
were  scattered  abroad.  All  used 
in  a  popular  sense,  meaning  a  general 
dispersion.  Thus  we  say,  "  It  is  known 
to  all,"  when  we  mean  it  is  generally 
known.  The  Christian  assemblages 
and  the  arrangement  of  alms-distrib- 
utors were  broken  up,  and  the  body 
that  gathered  in  daily  worship  was 
scattered.  Many,  doubtless,  afterward 
returned.  Judea  and  Samaria — 
all  of  Palestine  south  of  Galilee.  Why 
Galilee  is  omitted  is  uncertain,  as  some- 
what later  churches  were  there.  (» •  si) 
Pehaps  that  region,  where  many  of  the 
five  hundred  disciples  resided  (1  Cor. 
15 : 6),  did  not  so  much  need  these  evan- 
gelists. Except  the  apostles. 
They  doubtless  remained  under  the 
general  influence  and  direction  of  the 
Holy  Spirit.  As  the  divinely  appointed 
leaders,  they  seem  to  have  felt  it  their 
duty  to  stay  and  watch  over  the  inter- 
est of  the  church  at  the  centre  of  Jew- 


ish Christianity.  A  divine  providence 
appears  to  have  protected  them.  "  It 
is  not  unlikely  tliat  tlie  ]>ersecution 
was  principally  directed  against  those 
who  symi)atlazed  with  Stej)hen,  and 
boldly  avowed  their  belief  in  a  change 
of  the  customs  of  Moses.  There  is 
nothing  in  Peter's  speeches  to  show 
that  he  had  gone  as  far  as  Stephen. 
lie  was  more  conservative;  and  it  may 
be  that  he  and  the  other  aj)Ostles  for 
this  cause  escaped  awliile."  (Dk.  P. 
ScHAFF,  iu  International  Jlec.  Corn- 
men  tar  >/.) 

2.  And— carrying  back  the  mind  to 
the  expiring  Stephen.  (V:60.)  De- 
vout men — pious  Jews,  who  did  not 
approve  of  ]»utting  Stei>heii  to  death, 
and  in  this  way  showed  their  belief  in 
his  innocence.  (2:5.)  The  Idind  fury 
of  persecution  would  not  have  allowed 
Christians  to  formally  bury  him. 
Notice  that  they  are  not  called  be- 
lievers (5 :  14),  or  disciples.  (6;1;9:1.) 
Stephen  must  be  buried  according  to 
Jewish  custom,  but  the  fact  stated  is 
that  it  was  done  by  devout  men,  a 
phrase  never  used  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment to  describe  Christians.  Ch.  22 :  12 
is  no  exception,  for  Paul  is  describing 
Ananias  to  a  Jewish  audience  accord- 
ing to  a  Jewish  standard.  Carried — 
jointly  bore  away,  or  buried  Stephen. 
They  united  in  giving  him  a  religions 
burial.  Made  great  lamentation — 
with  beating  of  the  breaat,  as  a  sign  of 
grief,  according  to  the  Jewish  custom. 
Over  him — over  his  body,  as  they 
stood  around  his  bier.  (See  Author's 
Notes  on  Matt.  9  :  22.) 

3.  As  for  Saul — but  Saul,  in  con- 
trast to  the  devout  .Tews  who  mourned 
over  Stejihen  and  gave  him  rites  of 
burial.  He  ignored  the  conservative 
advice  of  his  teacher,  Gamaliel.  (5 :  34.) 
The  persecution  at  first  was  doubtless 
severe  and  fitful,  but  Saul  enters  into  it 
systematically  and  perseveriiii^ly.  He 
made  havoc — wasted  or  ravaged  the 


120 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VIII. 


haling  men  and  women,  committed  them 
to  prison. 
4      Therefore  "they   that  were  scattered 


abroml  «eiit  every  where  preaching  th« 

5  word.      'J  Lien  Philip   went  down  to  the 

city  of  Samaria,  and  preached  Christ  unto 


'  ch.  11 :  19. 


church,  like  a  fierce  wild  beast.  This 
is  confirmed  by  Paul's  description  of 

himself.       (26:9,  lO;  l  Tim.  1:13.)      llow     he 

devastated  the  church  is  told  in  tlie 
rest  of  tlie  verse.  Entering  into 
every  house — liouse  after  house.  His 
intense  zeal  sliowed  itself  iu  not  stoj)- 
ping  witli  ])u]jlic  places  and  gatherings, 
liut  iu  searcliing  privately  for  disciples, 
and  in  haling — druf/ying  both  men 
and  women.  His  violent  seizure  of 
tpomen  indicates  his  severe  cruelty,  and 
is  mentioned  twice  after  tliis.  (9:2; 
22:4.)  Committed  them  to  prison 
— for  trial  (':■•))  and  sometimes  as  a 
punishment.  ('j6;Io.)  Our  Lord  fore- 
told this  form  of  persecution.  (Luke  21 ; 
12.)  Tlius  he  pei"secuted  "  beyond  meas- 
ure "  (Gal.  1 :  i:i),  put  some  to  death  (22 : 4 ; 
26:10),  and  used  every  effort  to  mal^e 
Christians  blasi)hcme  the  holy  name  of 
Jesus.  (26:11.)  He  appears  to  have 
continued  this  for  several  months,  and 
his  fame  as  a  persecutor  spread  far  and 
wide,  even  into  foreign  cities.  Thus 
Ananias  at  Damascus  had  lieard  of  him. 

(9:13,  21;  Phil.  .1:6;  1  Cor.  15:9.)        He     acted 

under  the  authority  of  tlie  Sanhedrin 
(9:2),  and  iu  the  meantime  may  have 
become  a  member  of  that  l)od}'. 

4-25.  The  Gospel  Preached  in 
Samaria,  by  Philip,  Peter,  and 
John.  The  false  conversion  of  Simon 
tlie  Sorcerer.     (Ps.  78: 37.) 

4.  They  therefore — resuming  the 
thought  of  ver.  1,  and  introducing  the 
results  of  the  persecution,  the  rapi(l  dif- 
fusion of  tlie  gospel.  Thus  what  ap- 
])eared  to  be  a  terrible  calamity  is  over- 
ruled for  good  in  fulfilling  our  Lord's 
words,  "  Ye  shall  lie  my  witnesses,  both 
in  Jerusalem  and  in  all  Judea  and 
Samaria."  (1  ■■».)  "We  have  here  the 
first  exemiilificiition  of  Tertiillian's 
noted  saying:  "The  blood  of  tlie  mar- 
tyrs is  the  seed  of  the  church."  Went 
everywhere — or  through  the  towns 
and  villages  of  Palestine.  As  they  con- 
tinued their  missionary  labors  their 
circuit  was  greatly  extended,  going  as 
far  as  Phoenicia,  and  Cyprus,  and  An- 
tioeh,    (u ;  19.)   Preaching,  wmQunC' 


ing,  the  Avord  as  glad  tidings  respect- 
ing Christ  and  his  salvation.  The  dis- 
ci])les  geiieially  thus  liecame  the  pro- 
claiujcrs  of  tiie  go.sjiel,  some  more 
formally  than  others,  but  all  joyfully 
and  sjiontaiKOiisly.  Here  it  would 
seem  that  evangelists  among  the  minis- 
try arose.  (21 : 8;  ei,ii.4  :  11.)  It  is  also  to 
be  noted  that  they  were  not  appointed 
by  the  aito.-ths,  but  entered  upon  their 
ministry  under  the  direction  of  God's 
providence  ami  Spirit. 

5.  The  general  statement  of  the  pre- 
ceding vei-se  is  illustrated  by  a  single 
exami>le,  si  leeted  not  only  because  it 
was  one  of  the  first  remarkable  suc- 
cesses of  the  gospel,  but  also  because  it 
fulfilled  our  Saviour's  words  (i:8)  in 
extending  the  tnith  into  a  race  that 
held  an  intermediate  j'hice  between 
Jews  and  Gentiles.  Then,  rather, 
And,  simply  continuing  the  narrative. 
Philii> — one  of  the  seven.  (6:7.)  Not 
the  apostle,  for  he  remained  at  Jerusa- 
lem. (Ver.  I.)  The  persecution  would 
naturally  be  hottest  among  the  foreign 
Jews,  since  it  began  among  them  (s :  s-ii), 
and  Saul  of  Tarsus  was  their  leader. 
Philip  is  called  "  the  evangelist "  (21 :  a), 
indicating  that  he  had  well  earned  that 
title,  and  his  ministry  as  an  evangelist 
probably  now  began.  There  is  no  evi- 
dence that  he  preached,  because  he  was 
a  deacon.  Indeed,  the  persecution  must 
have  interfered  with  the  distribution  of 
goods.  And  with  the  scattering  of  the 
discijiles  the  alms  distributors  must 
have  had  comparatively  little  to  do. 
Pbili]>  was  no  longer  needed  at  Jeru.sa- 
lein  as  a  deacon.  Under  the  direction 
and  call  of  the  Spirit,  he  enters  upon 
the  work  of  an  evangelist.  (See  closing 
note  on  jireceding  verse.)  The  city  of 
Samaria,  ilany  manuscripts  read  a 
city,  etc.  Hence  some  suppose  Sychar, 
or  the  ancient  Shechem,  to  be  meant. 
(John  4:5.)  But  Wcstcott  and  Hort,  fol- 
lowing the  most  ancient  authorities, 
read  the  city  of  Samaria,  the  royal  capi- 
tal of  the  kingdom  of  Israel  for  two 
hundred  years,  founded  by  Omri,  B.  C. 
y25,  about  thirty-eight  mijes  worth  of 


Ch.  VIIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


121 


6  them.  And  tlie  jieojjle  with  oue  accord 
gave  heed  unlo  those  things  wliich  I'liilip 
spake,  hearing  and   seeing  the  luiraclis 

7  which  he  did.  For  •>  unclean  spirits,  cry- 
ing with  loud  voice,  came  out  of  many.thai 


were  possessed  u-illi  th-  m  :  and  many  taken 
with  jialsies,  and  that  were  lame,   were 
8  healed.    Aud  there  was  great  joy  in  that 
city. 


■>  ch.  5  :  IG  ;  Mark  10  :  17. 


Jerusalem.  It  was  more  than  once 
destroyed,  but  was  restoreil  aiul  rebuilt 
by  Herod  the  Great,  and  called  Sebaste, 
the  Greek  eciuivaleiit  of  Augusta,  in 
honor  of  Augustus  Giesar.  It  was  still 
often  called  Samaria.  In  regard  to 
tiie  Samaritan,  see  2  Kings  17  :  24-41 ; 
Ezra  4  :  1-3  ;  John  4  :  9.  Preached 
Christ  to  them — was  procUiiming  to 
thcnt  the  Christ,  that  he  had  come,  and 
that  Jesus  of  Nazareth  was  he.  The 
Samaritans  were  expecting  the  Messiah. 
( jiihn  4 :  ib. )  The  Verb  translated  preached, 
means  to  make  proclaination  as  a  pub- 
lie  herald.  This  appears  to  have  been 
the  iirst  public  preaching  of  the  gosjiel 
outside  of  the  Jewish  nation.  Jesus 
had  visited  Sychar  on  his  way  from 
Jerusalem  to  Galilee,  and  had  con- 
versed with  the  woman  at  tlie  well 
aud  with  the  inhabitants  of  the  city 
regarding  himself,  but  there  is  no 
record  of  his  preaching  publicly  there. 
(John  4: 27-43.)  And  wheu  he  sent  forth 
his  apostles,  two  by  two,  he  exjiressly 
charged  them,  "  Go  not  into  the  way 
of  the  Gentiles,  and  into  a  city  of  Sa- 
maritans enter  not."    (Matt,  lo ;  5.) 

It  was  a  bold  step  of  faith  in  Pliilip 
to  preach  the  gospel  to  the  half- 
heathen  Samaritans.  It  was  the 
first  step  in  overcoming  the  barriers  of 
prejudice  that  surrounded  the  Jewish 
nation.  (JohQ4:9.)  "  He  who  eats  the 
bread  of  a  Samaritan,"  said  the  Jewish 
doctor,  "  is  as  one  who  eats  swine's 
flesh."  "  No  Samaritan  shall  ever  be 
made  a  proselyte.  They  have  no  share  in 
tlie  resurrection  of  the  dead.  To  be  a 
Samaritan  was  to  have  a  devil  in  the 
eyes  of  a  rigid  Jew."  (John  8 :  «.)  (Dr. 
J.  B.  LiGHTFOOT,  Com.  011  Gal.,  p. 
299.)  Yet  Jesus  had  prepared  the  way 
at  Sychar.     (Joha  4 : 5-42.) 

6.  And  the  people — the  multitude 
— gave  heed.  They  trere  unanimouali/ 
attentive  to  Philip's  preaching.  (16 ;  14 ; 
Heb.  2 : 1.)  Hearing  and  seeing — the 
occasion  of  their  favorable  interest. 
Whm  they  h^ard  the  message  which 


was  welcome  to  them,  and  saw  the 
si(jns  irhieh  he  did,  being  evidences  of 
the  truth  he  uttered  and  of  his  own 
commission  from  the  Lord.  (2 :  22 ;  6 :  a.) 
The  visit  of  Jesus,  a  few  years  before, 
doubtless  contributed  to  Fliilip's  suc- 
cess. The  announcement  of  the  Mes- 
siah was  pleasing  to  the  Samaritans, 
and   also  that  God  was  no    respecter 

of    persons.       (JoUu  4  :  25-42:  see  ver.  8.)      The 

miracles  of  Philip  also  were  most  im- 
portant, since  Simon  Magus  had  de- 
luded the  i>eople  with  his  lying  won- 
ders.     (Ver.  9-11.) 

7.  The  signs  are  here  given.  The 
demoniacal  jiossessions  are  expressly 
distinguished  from  the  natural  diseases. 
For  unclean  spirits.  The  oldest 
manuscrijits  read :  For  many  of  those 
■who  had  unclean  spirits.  Not  all  of 
them.  Crying  with  a  loud  voice. 
Confessing,     perhaps,    the     power    of 

Christ.      (See  ilarkS  :  11  ;  Luke  4  :  41  )     On  lin- 

clean  spirits  and  their  possession  of 
men,  see  note  on  Mark  1  :  23.  The 
three  maladies  here  mentioned  were 
probably  the  worst  of  those  healed. 
"  It  is  worthy  of  note,  tliat  Luke  in  tlie 
Acts,  in  speaking  of  those  possessed, 
never  uses  the  term  demons  {daimonia), 
which  he  himself  in  the  gospel  has 
nevertheless  employed  oftener  than  the 
other  Evangelists.  From  which  one 
may  infer  that  the  power  of  possession 
was  feebler  after  Christ's  death.     (1  Joim 

3:8;  Col.  2:15;  Heb.  2:14.)  "    (BENGEL.)       It 

may  also  be  noted  that  no  possession  of 
an  Israelite  is  recorded  m  the  Acts, 
but  among  those  only  where  Chri.'it's 
power  had  not  come  in  direct  contliet 
with  evil  spirits,  such  as  Samaritans 
aud  Gentiles,     (is :  le-is ;  19 :  ii-iti.) 

8.  There  Avas  great,  or  much, 
joy  in  that  city.  The  great  joy  arose 
from  the  general  interest  of  all  the  peo- 
ple, from  the  wonderful  cures  effected, 
and  from  the  welcome  tidings  of  par- 
don and  salvation.  (See  on  ver  K.)  It  "  is 
to  be  restricted,  neither  to  the  natural 
eujoyweut  ot"  lecovereiJ  health,  io  o»e's 


122 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cii.  VIII. 


9  But  there  was  a  certain  man,  called 
Simon,  which  beforetimes  in  the  same  city 
0  used  sorcery,  and  bewitched  the  people  of 


Samaria,    giving   out  that  himself  was 

10  some   great  one:  to  whom  they  all  gave 

heed,  from  the  least  to  the  greatest,  say- 


'  ch.  13  :  6. 


own  person  and  in  that  of  others,  nor 
to  the  intellectual  pleasure  of  acquiring 
knowledge  and  discovering  trutli,  nor 
to  the  spiritual  happiness  arising  from 
conversion  and  assurance  of  forgive- 
ness, but  must  be  understood  as  com- 
prehending all  these  elements,  and 
therefore  justly  called  (/rent  joy." 
(Alexander.) 

9.  With  this  verse  begins  an  account 
of  the  first  conllict  of  Christianity  with 
one  of  the  impostures  of  the  outside 
world.  The  logical  statement  is,  that 
the  field  was  already  occupied  Avhen 
Philip  entered  it.  Simon  was  a  native 
of  Gitton  of  Samaria,  according  to 
Justin  Martyr,  who  was  himself  a 
Samaritan.  Josephus,  who  would  be 
less  likely  to  know  regarding  tins, 
speaks  of  a  Simon  Magus,  a  native  of 
Cyprus,  a  dependent  of  Felix  and  a 
minister  of  his  vices.  Neander  regards 
the  two  as  the  same  person.  The  name 
Simon  was,  however,  a  common  one. 
Magicians  were  not  uncommon  in  the 
Apostolic  age.  In  13  :  8  we  have  an 
account  of  another  one,  Elymas.  (i9:  is.) 
Concerning  the  earlier  and  better 
class  of  the  JIagicians,  see  note  on 
Matt.  2  :  1.  Simon  is  an  important 
character  in  Ecclesiastical  History,  but 
much  concerning  him  is  legendary. 
He  is  spoken  of  as  the  father  of  the 
Gnostics,  and  the  founder  of  a  heretical 
sect  called  Simonians,  "whose  tenets 
were  a  mixture  of  Oriental,  Jewish, 
Samaritan,  and  Grecian  religious  ele- 
ments. The  germ  of  their  principles 
may  be  plainly  traced  back  to  this 
Simon,  though  we  cannot  attribute  to 
him  the  complete  system  of  this  sect,  as 
it  existed  in  the  second  century." 
(Neander,  Planting  and  Training,  p. 
64.)  Used  Sorcery — practicing  magi- 
cal arts.  His  power  derived,  ])erhaps, 
partly  from  an  a<lvanced  knowledge  of 
natural  philosophy,  especially  chemis- 
try, and  partly  from  the  arts  of  con- 
juration and  jugglery.  Bewitched. 
A  strong  word  in  the  original,  to  throw 
into  wonderment;  they  were  carried 
away  with  astoaishmeut.   The  people 


— the  nation  of  Samaria,  showing  how 
widespread  his  influence  had  become 
throughout  the  whole  j)rovince  of  Sa- 
maria. This  may  imply,  as  Alexander 
remarks,  that  he  was  an  itinerant  magi- 
cian (i9:i3),  who  reached  the  city  a 
little  I)efore  Philip's  arrival,  although 
previously  known  to  the  inhabitants, 
as  mentioned  in  ver.  11.  Giving 
out — declaring  himself  to  be,  boast- 
ing that  he  was,  some  great  one 
- — some  extraordinary  person.  The  ex- 
pression is  stronger  than  that  in  5  : 
36.  Perhajjs  not  asserting,  but  leaving 
the  impression  that  he  was  superhuman, 
that,  according  to  the  Oriental  philoso- 
phy, one  of  the  eons,  or  emanations  of 
Divinity  had  now  appeared  in  his  per- 
son. According  to  Justin  Martyr  he 
pretended  that  he  was  God.  Jerome 
relates  that  he  said,  "  I  am  the  Son  of 
God,"  "the  Paraclete,"  "the  Al- 
mighty," etc.  But  these  bold  asser- 
tions, if  made  by  him,  were  pro])ably 
uttered  after  this,  when  his  opposition 
to  Peter  and  Christianity  became  fixed 
and  intense. 

10.  AH  .  .  .  from  the  least  to  the 
greatest — The  people  generally,  both 
young  and  old.  The  Samaritans  were 
peculiarly  susceptible  to  such  deluding 
influences.  "  In  limes  of  vague  and 
earnest  inquiry,  various  kinds  of  ex- 
travagance are  likely  to  prevail.  This 
Mas  the  case  with  the  Samaritans.  As 
at  that  time  in  other  parts  of  the  East, 
a  similar  indefinite  longing  after  a  new 
communication  from  heaven — an  om- 
inous restlessness  in  the  minds  of  men, 
such  as  generally  precedes  great 
changes  in  the  history  of  mankind, 
was  spread  abroad  ;  so  there  were  not 
wanting  persons  to  misdirect  and  de- 
ceive this  longing,  while  they  falsely 
promised  it  .satisfaction."  (Neander, 
Planting  and  Training,  p.  58.)  The 
estimate  of  the  peojjle  concerning 
Simon  is  now  given :  This  man  is 
the  great  power  of  God,  or  accord- 
ing to  the  oldest  and  best  manuscripts, 
This  man  is  that  power  of  God  which 
is  called  great,  he  is  the  great  one,  a 


Ch.  VIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


123 


ing.  This  niaa  is  the  great  pow»  r  of  God. 

11  And   to    hiiu    they    had  regard,  because 
that  of  long  liiue  he  had  p  bewitched  theui 

12  with  sorceries.    But  when  they  believed 
Philip  preaching  the  things  i  conuerniDg 


the  kingdom  of  God,  and  the  name  of 
Jesus  Christ,  they  were  baptized,  both 
13  men  and  women.  Then  'Simon  himself 
believed  also :  and  when  he  was  ba]>tized, 
he  continued  with  hhilip,  and  wondered, 


P  2  Thess.  2  :  10.        i  ch.  1:3.        '  ver.  21 ;  Ps.  78  :  3G,  37. 


kind  of  emanation  from  the  Invisible 
God,  manifested  in  his  person.  And 
he  was  doubtless  willing  to  be  so  ac- 
counted. To  whom  they  gave 
heed — the  same  verb  as  in  ver.  6. 
"  To  Philip  they  gave  heed  because  of 
his  doctrine  and  his  miracles  of  be- 
neficent healing  ;  to  Simon,  because  of 
their  astonishment  at  his  works  of 
witchcraft.  Mere  wonder-worlcing  is 
never  a  sound  basis  for  a  religious 
belief,  a  truth  which  tlie  modern  spirit- 
ists would  do  well  to  bear  in  mind." 
(Abbott.) 

11.  To  him  they  had  regard- 
rather,  they  gave  heed — the  same  word 
so  rendered  in  ver.  6  and  10.  The  rea- 
son of  this  attentive  following  is  given  : 
Because  for  a  long  time  he  had  be- 
witched, rather,  amazed  them  with  his 
sorceries.  (See  on  ver.  9-)  This  was  no 
new  thing,  for  Simon  had  continued  a 
long  or  considerable  time  (for  the  note 
of  time  is  quite  indefinite),  carrying 
away  the  people  with  his  enchant- 
ments. Whetlier  Simon  Magus  did 
perform  wonders  through  Satanic  in- 
nuence,  or  only  imposed  on  the  people, 
is  not  definitely  settled  by  the  narra- 
tive. Witchcraft  was  practiced  in  Old 
Testament  times,  and  at  the  present  day 
frauds  are  practiced  in  the  East  by 
Mohammedan  astrologers.  But  whether 
frauds  or  only  partly  so,  Satan  was  at 
the  bottom,  who  is  "  the  prince  of  the 
power  of  the  air,"  and  works  "  in  the 
children  of  disobedience."  (Eph.  2 : 2.) 

12.  The  Samaritans  had  been  held 
spellbound  under  the  power  of  Simon, 
the  sorcerer,  but  the  charm  was  broken 
by  the  power  of  the  gospel.  But 
wheu  they  believed— the  peojile 
generally.  Preaching  the  things, 
etc. — rather,  Announcing  the  good  news 
concerning  the  kingdom  of  God — its 
history,  doctrines,  prospects,  and  re- 
quirements. (See  1:3.)  And  the  name 
of  Jesus — proclaiming  him  as  tlie 
Saviour.  (Mati.  1 :  21.)  Christ  —  tlie 
Messiah,  the  Anointed  prophet,  priest, 


and  king,  (see  on  3 :  ic ;  4 :  10, 12.)  Notice 
Philip  preaches  not  himself,  but  Jesus 
Christ;  but  Simon  Magus  exhibits 
himself  and  his  jjowers.  They  were 
baptized,  professing  their  belief  in 
what  they  had  heard  of  Christ  and  his 
kingdom  and  their  allegiance  to  him 
and  their  union  with  him.  Both  men 
and  women — showing  that  the  gos])el 
was  prevailing  greatly  in  Samaria, 
even  as  it  had  some  time  before  at 
Jerusalem.  (0  :  u.)  It  should  be  no- 
ticed that  Philip  in  Samaria  began 
to  carry  into  practice  the  doctrine 
which  Steplien  preached,  and  to  fulfill 
the  prediction  of  Jesus  just  before  his 
ascension.  (i:8.)  He  was  the  founder 
of  a  semi-Jewish  or  semi-Gentile 
church.  Tlie  Jewish  Christians  could 
assent  to  this,  since  the  Samaritans 
were  circumcised  and  held  to  the  law 
of  Moses. 

13.  The   miraculous  signs  wrought 
by  Philip  not  only  overcame  the  influ- 
ence of  the  sorceries  of  Simon,  Imt  also 
convinced    Simon     himself     of   their 
reality.      He    himself    believed — 
that   what   Philip  preached  was  true, 
tiiat    Jesus    was  the   ilessiah,  but  he 
failed   to   appropriate  him,  by  a  per- 
sojial,  saving  faith,  as  his  Saviour.  His 
faith  was  only  historical  and  intellect- 
ual, with  no  change  of  his  inner  life, 
as  is  shown  by   his  after  conduct  and 
Peter's   rebuke,      (ver.  17-21.)      We  need 
not  regard  his  professed  conversion  and 
his  baptism  as  acts  of  deceit,  but  as  a 
desire   to   reform  and  as  a  temporary 
improvement.     "  He  was  overcome  at 
the  moment  liy  the  heavenly  power  of 
1  the  truth,  and  he  surrendered  himself  to 
it  for  a  time,  and  to  a  certain  degree. 
But  it  was  only  to  a  certain  degree !  He 
allowed  not  the  light  to  penetrate  into 
'.  the  concealed  dei>tlis  of  his  heart ;  there 
i  was    no    thorough   humiliation  of  the 
man."      (Olshausen.)       He    con- 
!  tinned — he  irns  adhering  to  Philip. 
1  He    was    a    constant    attendant  upon 
J  Philip,  apparently  proffering  his  ser- 


124 


THE  ACTS. 


LCh.  VIII. 


beholding  the  miiaclcs  aud  signs  which 
were  doue. 
14      8  Now  »hen  tho  apost'es  which  were  at 
Jerusalem  heard  thai  Samaria  had  n.  cei  ved 


the  word  of  God,  t  hi  y  sent  iibto  ihem  Peter 

15  and  John:  who,  wliuii   they  were    come 
down,  prayed  for  Ihem  'that  they  might 

16  receive  the  Holy  t^pirit :  for  "  as  yet  he  was 


I  ch.  11  :  22.        t  ch.  2  :  38 ;  John  20  :  22.        »  ch.  19  :  2. 


vices  as  an  assistant.  Tlras  be  could 
watch  and  study  tiie  uiiratlcs.  The 
bi.story  of  Simon  ilagus  refutes  the 
doynia  of  l>aptisuial  regeneration. 
Wondered — the  same  Avord  rendered 
"  bewitehetl "  in  ver.  9,  11.  lie  who 
liiid  otiiazed  others  is  himself  amazed. 
I>chGlding  the  miracles  and 
si^ns.  ilanuscript  autliority  appears 
to  preponderate  for  the  reading :  siri)ts 
and  great  VI irac/<s.  (see on  2: 22.)  Simon 
■was  astonished  ;  for  be  liad  never  seen 
nor  done  the  like.  His  religion  was 
not  that  of  faith  in  ("lirist,  or  of  su- 
preme love  to  God  ;  Init  of  wonder  at  a 
power  which  be  coveted,  the  reality  of 
which  he  could  not  doulit. 

14.  When  the  apostles  Avhich 
were  at  Jerusalem — they  were  re- 
maining there,  (ver.  1.)  Heard  that 
Samaria — the  country  of  Sanutria, 
represented  by  its  capital  city,  (vcr.s.) 
Received  the  Avord  of  God — ac- 
cepted by  faith  the  gosj)el  as  a  revela- 
tion from  Goil.  This  was  piobaldy  a 
suri)rise  to  the  apostles,  since  the  Sa- 
maritans were  a  mixed  (Jewish  and 
Gentile)  race,  and  Jews  and  Samar- 
itans mutually    detested    each    otlur. 

(John  4:9;  b  :  ix;  Luke  D  :  5;;,  5.1.)     JeSUS,  bow- 

ever,  bad  prepared  the  way  in  counter- 
acting their  prejudices  by  bis  personal 
labors  among  them  (Joimch.  4),  and  by 
bis  prediction  that  the  gosjx'l  should 
be  preached  to  them.  (1  :8.)  The  bar- 
riers of  religious  prejudice  gave  way 
when  the  apostles  sent  to  them, 
the  Samaritans.  Peter  and  John — 
closely  attached  friends,  perhaps  the 
more  so  by  their  dissimilarity  of 
character.  Tb.e  narrative  sliows  that 
they  acted  jointly  and  equal  in  author- 
ity. (.See  on 3:1.)  They  go  together  ac- 
cording as  Jesus  sent  out  two  by  two. 
(Mark  6: 7.)  Such  appears  to  have  been 
the  practice  of  the  early  missionaries. 
Thus  Paul  and  Barnabas  (13:2),  Paul 
and  Silas  (i:'':2),  and  Barnabas  and 
Mark  (15:37),  labored  in  pairs.  John, 
wbo  would  call  dowu  fire  from  heavea 


on  a  Samaritan  village  because  it  re- 
jected Jesus  (Luke9:5t),  lio'w  gOeS  to  the 

believing  Samaritans  on  a  gospel  mis- 
sion. This  is  tlie  last  mention  of  Jolin 
in  the  Acts  as  connected  with  active 
work.  He  is  incidentally  named  as 
tlie  brother  of  James  in  12  :  2,  and 
from  (a.l  2  :  9,  it  appears  that  be  was 
at  the  conference  at  Jerusalem.  (i5:4) 
Tlie  object  of  this  mission  of  Peter  and 
John  was  of  a  varied  and  general  char- 
acter. To  learn  the  state  of  things,  aid 
Philip  in  bis  work,  .supply  what  might 
be  wanting,  extend  sympathy  and  the 
band  of  fellowship  to  believers  in 
Samaria. 

15.  Who  .    .    .  prayed  for  them 
that  they  might  receive  the  Holy 
!  Sjiirit — and  thus  be  put   on  a  level 
I  with  the  believing  Jews,  and  be  openly 
owned  as  Christ's  followers.     It  is  im- 
plied that  the  Spirit  came,  in  this  in- 
stance, in  answer  to  the  prayer  of  the 
i  a}  ostles.     But  in  the  case  of  Cornelius 
A\  ilbout  either  the  prayer  or  the  laying 
on  of  bands.     (lO:  44.) 
I      10.  For  as  yet  he — not  if,  as  in 
:  the  Pevised  Version.    The  Holy  Spirit 
I  is  a  Divine  Person,  and  should  be  re- 
j  ferred   to   by   the  masculine  pronoun. 
Jesus,   the   great   teacher,  makes   this 
I  distinction,   "  Ilowbeit  when     he,  the 
1  Spirit  of  truth,  iscome,  he  will  guide 
you  into  all  truth."  (John  16 :  13-15.)    Had 
\  "fallen — implying    something   sudden 
and  extraordinary,     (see  10  ;44:  ii:i5i  13: 

I  11;  19:  17;  Kzek.  11:5.)       I'pOU      DOUB     of 

!  them.  The  miraculous  gifts  of  the 
Spirit  had  not  come  upon  them.  Tliey 
bad  believed  and  received  the  regener- 
ating influence  of  the  Spirit  (John 3. 5), 
but  thev  bad  not  received  the  power 
from  on"bigh.  (s.ei:8.)  It  is  evident 
from  ver.  18  that  the  gift  of  the  Spirit 
here  meant  was  attended  with  outward 
and  visilde  pb.enomena,  such  as  speak- 
ing witli  tongues.  Only,  as  believers, 
they  had  been  baptized  in,  or  into, 
the  name  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  into 

I  a  professed  union  ^vith  bim  and  6ub* 


Ch.  vni.] 


THE  ACTS. 


125 


fallen  upon  noue  of  them  :  only  itheynere     17  Then  J  laid  they  f/ic/r  hands  on  tliem,  and 
baptized  in  the  uame  of  the  Lord  Je.sns.  they  received  the  Holy  Ghost. 

»  ch.  10  :  48  ;  Matt.  28  :  19.        T  ch.  19  :  6;  2  Tim.  1  :  6. 


jection  to  him  without  receiving  those 
sii|)enialural  gifts  of  th«  Spirit,  which 
ha<l  been  so  coinmoii  in  the  clmrcli  at 
Jerusalem.  Compare  "  upon  the 
uaine"  ('^ :"•'<),  and  "in  the  name" 
(io:4«),  and  also  note  on  Matt.  28  :  19. 
Some  object  to  the  rendering  "  I'vi  the 
uame  "  as  misleatliug,  and  to  "into  the 
uame  "  as  not  good  English,  though  the 
literal  form  of  the  Greek  ;  and  prefer 
"  unto  the  name,"  with  reference  to  tlie 
name  and  all  the  obligations  im- 
plied, here  signifying  allegiance  and 
subjection  to  the  Lord  Jesus.  (See  Dk. 
Broadus,  Commentary,  Matt.  28  :  19.) 
There  is  no  discrepancy  between 
Matthew  (28: 19)  and  Luke  (here  and  19 :  ;,■) 
The  commission  "  into  the  name  of  the 
Father  and  of  the  Son  and  of  the  Holy 
Spirit "  includes  the  name  of  the  Lord 
Jesus,  and  "  into  the  name  of  the 
Lord  Jesus "  does  not  exclude  the 
Father  and  the  Holy  Spirit  from  the 
baptismal  formula.  The  apostolic 
preaching  and  profession  ';entered  in 
Jesus.  God  the  Father  and  the  Holy 
Spirit  Avere  accepted  by  the  Jews,  so 
far  as  they  understood.  To  accept 
Jesus  as  Lord  and  Christ  was  to  ac- 
knowledge that  he  came  from  the 
Father,  and  that  lie  had  sent  the  Holy 
Spirit  into  tiie  world.  To  be  baptized 
into  the  name  of  the  Lord  Jesus  was  a 
brief  cotnpreliensive  expression,  hing- 
ing upon  tlie  central  person  of  the 
Godhead.  It  makes  no  pretension  to 
being  a  baptismal  formula,  but  only  a 
statement  of  a  fact  which  implies,  not 
merely  allegiance  to  the  Son,  but  also 
to  the  two  other  persons  of  the  Triune 
God.  The  question,  "  Into  what  then 
were  ye  baptized?  "  (i9:3)  shoM^s  Paul's 
surprise  that  any  could  be  baptized 
into  the  name  of  i lie  Lord  Jesus  with- 
out hearing  of  tlie  Holy  Sjiirit,  and 
implies  that  the  name  of  the  Holy 
Spirit  was    connected    with    baptism. 

(See  on  19 :  3  f.) 

17.  Prayer  is  answered  in  the  gifts 
of  the  Spirit.  Tlie  Spirit  who  was 
about  to  come  upon  the  Samaritan  be- 
lievers doubtless  moved  Peter  and  John 
to  lay  oil  hands ;  aud  thus  he  honored 


them  as  Christ's  apostles.  Then  they 
laid  their  hands  on  them  and 
they  received.  The  imperfect  tense 
describes  the  action  as  continuing  and 
in  progress:  t/iey  were  laying  on  their 
hands,  and  they  were  receiving.  The 
jjrayer  appears  to  have  been  made  once 
for  all,  aud  afterward  the  imposition  of 
hands  upon  the  converts  iu  succession, 
taking  considerable  time.  It  would 
also  seem  from  the  next  verse  that 
Simon  was  witnessing  this  manifesta- 
tion of  the  Spirit  on  one  after  another. 
The  natural  inference  is  that  hands 
were  laid  u]>on  all  who  had  been  baji- 
tizcd.  This,  however,  was  not  neces- 
sarily the  case.  TheyAvere  not  laid  on 
Simon  (next  verse),  and  perliaps  not 
upon  some  others.  The  laying  on  of 
hands  was  a  common  practice  in  Old 
Testament  times.  Jacob  laid  his  hands 
on  Joseph's  sons,  in  connection  with 
his  benediction.  (Gen.  48: 14-20.)  Aaron 
and  his  sons  laid  their  hands  on  certain 
animals  for  sacrifice.  (Exod.  29  :io,  15, 19.) 
Closes  laid  his  hands  on  Joshua,  at  the 
command  of  Jehovah,  designating  him 
as  an  a.ssociate  with  himself  (Num,  27: 
18-2.1),  and  attended  by  the  bestowment 
of  the  spirit  of  wisdom  upon  him. 
(Dent. 34:9.)  In  the  New  Testament  we 
have  Jesus  putting  his  hands  on  chil- 
dren and  blessing  them  (Mark  10 :  le) ;  the 
apostles  laying  their  hands  on  the 
Seven  with  prayer,  at  their  election  to 
office  (6:6),  on  which  see  note;  on  the 
Samaritan  converts  (this  verse)  ;  Paul 
on  the  twelve  at  Ephesus,  who  there- 
upon receive  the  miraculous  gift  of  the 
Spirit  (19:  e) ;  Ananias  on  Saul  of  Tar- 
sus, who  receives  his  sight  and  is  filled 
with  the  Spirit.  (9:i7.)  Besides  these,  the 
church  at  Antioch  set  apart  Barnalias 
and  Saul  for  tlieir  missionary  work 
with  prayer  and  laying  on  of  hands. 
(13 :3.)  Timotliyalso  received  the  super- 
natural gifts  of  the  Spi  rit  when  the  hands 
of  the  eldershi])  (iTim.4:i4),  including 
the  apo.stle  Paul  (2Tiin.  i:6),  were  laid 
upon  him  at  his  ordination  to  the  min- 
istry. From  these  exami)les  it  apjiears 
that  the  bestowment  of  the  miraculous 
gifts  of  the  Spirit  in  connection  with 


126 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VIII. 


18  And  when  Simon  saw  that  through  lay- 
ing on  of  the  apostles'  hands  the  Holy 
Spirit  was  given,  he  otfered  them  money, 

19  saying,  Give  me  also  this  power,  that  on 


whomsoever  I  lay  hands,  he  may  receive 
20  the  Holy  Spirit,.     But  Peter  said  unto 
him,  I  Thy  money  perish  with  thee,  be- 
cause » thou  hast  thought  that  i>  the  gift 


»  2  Kings  ->  :  2(>,  27 ;  Dan.  5  :  17. 


'  Matt.  10  :  8  ;  2  Kings  5  :  16.         i>  eh.  10  :  45  ;  11  :  17. 


the  laying  on  of  hands  was  confined  to 
the  apostles.  The  layiuj^  on  of  hands 
was  a  symbolical  act  connected  with 
prayer  that  God  would  bestow  the  gifts 
of  the  Sjtirit.  The  case  of  Ananias,  in 
relation  to  Paul,  seems  to  be  excep- 
tional, lie  was  specially  commissioned 
of  the  Lord  to  minister  to  Paul ;  and  it 
does  not  certainly  appear  that  the  gifts 
of  tlie  Spirit  were  bestowed  tlirough  tlie 
laying  on  of  the  hands  of  Ananias. 
(SL-eou!*:  17.)  If  this  powcf  was  con- 
fined to  tlie  ai)ostles,  who  had  no  suc- 
cessors in  the  church  (see  on  i :  2'.'),  tlien 
with  them  must  have  ceased  this  power 
of  conferring  the  ability  to  exercise 
sui)ernatural  gifts. 

This  j)assage  and  19  :  5,  6,  are  the 
chief  authorities  for  the  rite  of  con- 
firmation, as  practice<l  by  tlie  Episco- 
pal and  Roman  Catholic  churches,  in 
receiving  persons  into  full  membership 
of  the  church.  But  in  neither  of  these 
cases  does  it  apjiear  that  liands  were 
laid  upon  them  for  the  jiuri)Ose  of  re- 
ceiving them  into  church  member- 
ship, but  for  the  bestowment  of  su- 
pernatural gifts  of  the  Spirit.  They 
entered  tlie  cliurcji  l)y  ba])tism.  (ver. 
12,  38,39:  1:4?.)  Other'  passaices  cited, 
such  as  Heb.  C>  :  2  ;  2  <'or.  1  :  21 ;  Eph. 
1:13,  14;  2  Tim.  2  :  i:i,  afford  no 
Scriptural  ground  for  the  rite  of  con- 
firmation, nor  proof  that  Christ  or  liis 
apostles  instituted  it.  It  was  fittiui,' 
that  miracles  .should  attend  the  first  jvro- 
mulgation  of  the  gosju-l,  and  that  mi- 
raculous gift.s  of  tlie  S]>irif  sliould  at- 
tend the  first  coming  of  the  Holy  Spirit 
among  the  Jews,  the  Samaritans,  an<l 
the  Gentiles.  (iO:44.)  It  was  fittim; 
also  that  the  a]iostles,  the  introdii.'ers 
of  Christianity,  and  the  organizers  ami 
ins]>ired  teacliers  of  the  cliurch,  sliould 
be  accredited  by  the  miracles  of  the 
Holy  S])irit. 

18.  When  Simon  saw  that 
through  layins;  on  of  the  apos- 
tles' hands,  etc.  From  this  it  is 
evident  that  the  outward  and  sensible 
efl'ects  of  the  Holy  Spirit  were  uiaui- 


!  fested,  such  as  sjieakiug  with  tongues ; 
I  and    that   this   attended   and   followed 
I  the  laying  on  of  hands  by  the  apostles. 
I  It  is  also  implied  tliat  hands  had  not 
I  yet  been  laid  on  Simon.     And  Simon 
'  geeiiif/  this  power  conferred  on  others, 
selfishly  desired  to  receive  the  same  gift 
j  himself.      Had   the   Sjiirit  come  upon 
him,  he  could  not  so  soon   liave  iiuule 
the  oiler  of   money.     "His  impatient 
desire  waits  not  even  for  his  own  ex- 
perience .  .  .  and  before  it  came  to  his 
turn  to  receive  the  imposition  of  hands, 
he  makes  his  proposal,  perhaps  even 
as  a  condition  of  allowing  the  hands  to 
belaidu})onhim."  (MEYER.)  OtTered 
them  money — brought  moneij  to  them, 
as  if  to  bribe  them,  or  to  purchase  the 
jiower.    Simon  thus  ranks  this  apostolic 
)>ower  with  that  of  the  magicians,  who 
were  accustomed  to  sell  the  knowledge 
of  their  arts.     From  this  man  and  this 
act  the  name  si)no)iy  has  been  given  to 
the  crime  of  buying  or  selling  ecclesi- 
astical otKces  or  lienefits  in  the  church. 
i      19.  The  comjiletion  of  the  sentence 
I  l)egun  in  the   last   verse.      Give    me 
;  also — as  well  as  yourselves.     He  was 
j  ambitious   to   be   on  a  level  with  tlie 
:  apostles.     He  saw   that  the  possession 
I  of  such    power    would    be     of    great 
worldly  advantage  to  him  in  iiicrt'asing 
'  liis  influence  ami  amassing  wealth.  The 
ort'er,   the    thought,   and    the    jiurjiose 
sliowed  that  he  wa«   a  stranger  to   tlie 
inner  ]iower  and  renewintr  of  the   Holy 
S|)irit.   Holy  Spirit  is  without  the  arti- 
cle.  Simon   verj- jirobably  had  no  con- 
ception of  him  as  a  personal  agent,and 
very  little  iilea  of  his   s])iritual  jiower 
and  iiilluenee,  beyond  the  name  wliich 
he  had  heard. 
I      20.  Thus   for   in   the  narrative  the 
two  apostles  ajipear  strictly  associated  ; 
j  but  now    Peter  steps  forth  in  his  per- 
I  sonal,  positive,  and   imjuilsive  charac- 
ter, and  as  the  sj'okesman  of  the  two. 
Thy  money  perish  with  thee — thy 
I  silrtr  6<'  irilh    tlirc    unto   destruction  ! 
j  An   outburst  of  holy  indignation  and 
horror,  at  the  thought  and  proposal  of 


Cu.  VIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


127 


of  God  may  be  purchased  with  money. 

21  <:Thou  hast  neither  part  nor  lot  in  this 
matter:  for  ''thy  heart  is  not  right  in  the 

22  sight  of  God.    « Repent  therefore  of  this 


thy  wickedness,  and  pray  God,  if  perliiips 

the  thought  of  thine  heart  may  be  f'or- 

23  giveu  thee.    For  1  perceive  that  thou  art 

in   the  gall  of   bitterness,  and  in  'the 


0  Enek.  li  :  3.        *  Ilab.  2:4;  Matt.  6  :  22-24.        •  2  Tim.  2  :  25,  26.        '  Prov.  5  :  22 ;  John 
8  :  34 ;  2  Peter  2  :  19. 


making  religion  the  means  of  worldly- 
gain.  This  i.s  not  a  curse  nor  a  deliber- 
ate wish,  for  Peter  exhorts  him  to  re- 
pentance in  ver.  22.  Because  thou 
didat  think  to  obtain,  or  acquire,  the 
gift  of  God  toith  money.  The  sin  con- 
sisted in  tlie  thought  and  purpose  of 
bribing  God,  and  obtaining  with  money 
tlie  divine  gift.  Tlie  thought  and  the 
attempt  were  insulting  to  the  Spirit  of 
God.  To  Peter  gold  and  silver,  like  all 
things  earthly,  were  corruptible  and 
perishable,     (i  P'ter i : n, is.) 

21.  Peter  plainly  declares  to  Simon 
his  spiritually  lost  condition,  whicli 
was  not  only  evident  from  his  conduct, 
but  also  doubtless  known  to  Peter 
through  the  Holy  Spirit.  Neither 
part  nor  lot — two  words  almost 
equivalent,  tlie  first  used  literally,  the 
second  tigurativelj',  making  a  very 
strong  and  emphatic  expression.  Thou 
hast  neither  share  nor  allotted  portion 
in  this  matter,  this  thing  spoken  of, 
literally,  this  word.  This  has  been 
variously  referred,  to  the  gift  of  the 
Spirit,  to  the  power  or  authority  to 
communicate  the  Sjiirit,  or  to  tlie  gos- 
pel word  which  had  been  preached. 
The  latter  seems  to  accord  better  with 
the  usage  of  the  word  and  with  the 
description  which  follows  of  Simon's 
utterly  graceless  state.  He  had  no 
share  in  the  gospel  word  (ver.  u)  of 
present  and  eternal  salvation,  and  hence 
no  interest  in  the  ordinary  or  extraor- 
dinary benefits  of  the  Spirit.  Simon 
was  entirely  separated  in  character, 
interest,  and  destiny  from  all  that  the 
word  of  the  gospel  proffered  tQ  men.  (See 

2  Sam.  JO  :  1  ;  Deut.  10  :  9)    For^illtroducing 

the  reason,  with  such  a  heart  thou  canst 
have  no  portion  of  gospel  blessings  and 
intiuence.  Not  right — literally,  not 
straight,  not  upright,  l)ut  crooked  and 
perverse.  In  the  sight  of,  or  before, 
God,  who  looketh  upon  the  heart. 
(4  :i9.)  His  perversity  must  have  been 
evident  to  Peter  or  to  any  spiritually 
minded  person,  from  his  base  proposal. 
How  much  more  then  to  God  ? 


22.  Repent  therefore — your  case 
is  not  entirely  hoj)eless ;  your  only  hope 
of  salvation  is  in  immediate  repentance 
and  entreaty  of  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ. 
(See  on  2: 38.)  Of  this  thy  wicked- 
ness,  rather, /rowi.,  etc.  See  "  repent- 
ance from  dead  works."  (Hell.  6:1.)  He 
must  not  only  confess  and  sorrow  for 
sin,  but  forsake  and  turn  from  it.  This 
wickedness,  a  general  expression  includ- 
ing the  act  and  purpose  with  the  un- 
derlying depravity  (next  verse).  And 
pray  God — according  to  the  highest 
critical  authorities,  the  Lord,  that  is, 
Jesus  Christ.  If  perhaps.  The  case 
was  doubtful,  so  aggravated  was  his 
sin.  The  words  were  fitted  to  give 
Simon  hope,  and  at  the  same  time  to 
arouse  him  and  awaken  a  sense  of 
guilt.  Peter  may  have  thought  of  the 
sin  against  the  Holy  Spirit.  (.Matt. 
12:31.)  The  thought — the  purpose, 
project  of  thine  heart  in  planning 
self-aggrandizement  by  imparting  the 
Holy  Spirit.  Notice  how  Peter  all 
along  dwells  upon  the  thought,  pur- 
pose, and  state  of  the  heart.  May  be 
forgiven  thee.  The  matter  of  for- 
giveness belonged  to  God.  "  This  verse 
is  important,  taken  in  connection  with 
John  20  :  2,;,  '  Whosesoever  sins  ye  for- 
give, they  are  forgiven  them,'  etc.,  as 
showing  how  com])letely  the  apostles 
themselves  referred  the  forgiveness  of 
sins  to,  and  left  it  in  the  sovereign 
power  of  God,  and  not  to  any  power  of 
absolution  delegated  to  them."  (Al- 
FORD.) 

23.  For  introduces  the  reason  why 
he  should  rej)ent.  Tills  verse  shows 
tliat  he  needed,  not  only  to  repent  of  a 
sin^rle  sin,  but  of  tlie  whole  course  and 
habit  of  heart  and  life.  It  imj)lies  tiiat 
he  had  never  exercised  repentance.  I 
perceive,  (seeon  v^-r.  .n.)  In,  literally, 
into  the  gall  of  bitterness,  or  bitter 
gull.  The  poison  of  the  serpent  was 
supposed  to  be  in  the  gall  (Job  20  :  u;  Rom. 
3  :  13),  which  figuratively  denotes  the 
malignity  of  sin  ;  and  the  expression 
bitter  gall,  hostile,  malignant  dei^rav- 


128 


THE  ACTS. 


LCh.VIII. 


24  bond  of  iniquity.  Then  answered  Simon, 
and  said,  s  tray  ye  to  the  Lord  tor  me, 
that  none  of  these  things  which  ye  have 
spoken  come  upon  me. 

25  And  ihey,  when  they  had  testified  and 


Jerusalem,  and  preached  the  gospel  in 
many  villages  of  the  Samaritans. 

Philip  instracls  and  baptizes  a  devout  EthiO' 
plan  :  his  subsequent  labors. 


preached  the  word  of  the  Lord,  returned  to    26      AND  the  angel  of  the  Lord  spake  unto 
K  Gen.  20  :  7, 17  ;  Num.  21  :  7;  1  Kings  13  :  6;  Job  42  :  8. 


ity.  Bond  of  iniquity — 1)ouih1  in 
the  fetters  of  wickedness,  showin.t;  that 
he  was  confirmed  in  the  haliits  of  sin. 
Peter  did  not  doul)t  the  grace  of  the 
gospel,  or  the  jwwer  of  God  to  forgive, 
but  he  saw  that  Simon's  condition  was 
most  desjjcrate,  liotli  in  heart  and  life. 
His  subsequent  life  seems  to  have  veri- 
fied Peter's  fears. 

24.  Simon  appears  to  have  been 
overawed  by  tlie  stern  rebuke  of  Peter, 
and  alarmed  at  impending  punislimeut. 
Pray  ye.  Vc  is  emphatic.  Instead 
of  praying  himself,  as  Pet<;r  had  ex- 
horted, lie  asks  the  ai)ostles  to  pray  for 
him,  thus  showing  a  want  of  a  sense 
of  guilt  and  penitence.  A  sense  of 
sin  would  have  led    him   to  cry  for 

mercy.         (a:  37;   9:.i,  ll;    Luke  is  :  13.)         So 

Piiaraoh  asked  Closes  to  pray  for  him 
( Exoii.  8 :  ffl ;  9 :  '28 ;  10 :  17),  and  afterward 
hardened  his  heart.  See  King  Saul, 
1  Sam.  15  :  30.  Simon  also  shows  a  su- 
perstitious dependence  on  their  prayers, 
as  if  these  could  prevail  without  turn- 
ing himself  with  penitence,  confession, 
and  faith  to  the  Lord.  Tlie  end 
which  he  souglit  indicates  his  im})eni- 
tent  heart :  that  none  of  those 
things — referring  to  tlie  destruction 
and  all  its  terrible  result  imj)]ied  in 
ver.  20,  28,  which  ye  have  spoken 
come  upon  me.  Thus  there  is  no 
seeking  for  forgiveness  of  sin,  or  salva- 
tion from  sin.  The  language  is  not  of 
contrition,  but  of  fear,  and  of  anxiety 
to  escape  punishment.  Had  this  reliiike 
resulted  in  reiieutancc  and  conversion 
to  tlie  faith,  I.uke  would  hardly  have 
omitted  it.  The  traditions,  though 
somewhat  confused  and  contradictory, 
testify  against  any  such  good  result. 
This  IS  tiie  last  meiition  of  him  in  the 
New  Testament.  He  is  said  afterward 
to  have  removed  to  Rome,  where  he 
was  worshi]>ed  as  a  god,  and  had  a 
column  dedicated  to  him.     ( Soc  on  ver.  s.) 

25.  The  apostles  having  aecom- 
plished  their  mission  iu  the   city  of 


Samaria,  on  their  way  back  to  Jerusa- 
lem, preached  iu  many  of  the  smaller 
towns  of  Samaria.  They — Peter  and 
John.  Philip  was  probably  left  to 
look  after  the  work.  Had  testified 
and  preached — rather,  having  festi- 
Jied  and  spoken  the  word  of  the  Lord. 
It  was  not  their  words,  but  Christ's, 
whose  ministers  they  were.  (i3:t8;  is: 
35;  1  Cor.  2:2-5.)  Also  frequently  Styled 
the  word  of  God,  as  its  author.  (*:3i; 
6:1);  see  on  ver.  14.  Returned,  etc. 
— were  retiorning  to  Jerusalem  and 
preaching  or  evangelizing  the  villages. 
They  were  bringing  the  good  news  of 
salvation  to  the  villages,  and  it  was  be- 
ing accepted  by  the  people.  Thus  they 
found  the  field  already  white  unto 
harvest.  (John  4: 35.)  It  was  while  the 
two  apostles  were  thus  engaged  that 
Philip  I'eceived   his  new  commission. 

(Ver  26.) 

26-40.  Conversion  and  Baptism 
OF  THE  Ethiopian  Eunuch. 
(isa.  53: 7, 8.)  The  false  conversion  of 
the  last  section  is  followed  by  a  true 
conversion  iu  this.  Philip's  special 
mission  and  subsequent  labors  were 
throughout  the  border  cities  of  Pales- 
tine, where  the  population  was  largely 
Gentile.  Thus  the  gospel  was  gradu- 
ally extending  beyond  the  bounds  of 
Juilaism.  The  conversion  of  a  descend- 
ant of  the  race  of  Ham  (Amos  9 : 7.)  and 
of  one  shut  out  of  the  congregation  by 
physical  defect  (Dcut.  23: 1),  was  another 
step  toward  breaking  down  entirely 
the  barrier  between  believing  Jews  and 
Gentiles. 

26.  Philip  was  still  in  Samaria,  and 
Peter  and  John  were  returning  to  Jeru 
salem.  (ver.  25.)  The  anget^rathe! 
an  angel,  of  the  Lord.  How  he  ap- 
peared to  Pliilip  we  are  not  toM, 
whether  l)y  dream  or  vision.  Tlie  more 
]>robable  and  natural  meaning  is,  that 
he  apjieared  visibly  and  spake  in  an 
audible  voice.  For  other  instances  of 
angelic  miuisteriug  iu  apostolic  days, 


0"'.  VIII.] 


THK  ACTS. 


iL'f) 


riiilij),  saying,  Arise,  and  go  toward  the 
souilv  unto  the  way  lliat  goeth  down  from 
Jerusalem  unto  hGaza;  which  is  desert. 


27  And  he  arose  and  went.  And,  behold,  'a 
man  of  Ethiopia,  an  eunuch  of  great 
authority  under  Candace  queen  of  the 


h  Gen.  10  :  19 ;  Josh,  l.j  :  47.         l  Ps.  63  :  31 ;  Zeph.  3  :  10. 


see  1  :  10 ;    5  :  19 ;    10  :  ;i  ;    12  :  7  ;    27  :  ! 
2:i.    Arise,  and  go.     Nothing  is  im- 
plied   regarding   his    posture,   whether 
sitting  or  lying  down.     It  is  rather  a 
comniaud  :  Prepare  tliyself,  make  iraiJi/  i 
ami  journey  toward  the  south  unto  1 
the    way  from    Jerusalem    unto  [ 
Gaza.     In  obeying  this  command  it  is 
not  certain  tliat  Philip  passed  through 
Jeni.salem,  since  he  may  liave  left  Jeni- 
salem  to  the  left.     Gaza,  nearly  si.xty 
miles    southwest    of    Jerusalem    and  ' 
nearly  a  hundred  miles  from  the  city  ! 
of  Samaria,  was  one  of  the  oldest  (oen.  l 
10  :  19)  and  the  southernmost  city  of  Pal- 
estine, on  the  route  between  Syria  and  ! 
Egy^^t.     it  was  the  chief  city  of  the  j 
Philistines,  altliough  formally  assigned 
to  Judah  (Josb,  15  :47),  and  the  scene  ofi 
one  of  Samson's  exhibitions  of  strength,  j 
(judg.  16:3.)     At  one  time   it  seems  to  j 
have  been  under  the  power  of  Egypt. 
(jer.  47:1.)     Alexander  the   Great  cap- j 
tured  it  after  a  siege  of  five  montlis. 
It  was  afterward  destroyed  l^y  the  Jew- 
isli  king,  Alexander  Janna'us,  15.  ('.  ft(i ; 
but  it  was  re))uilt  by  the  Roman   Gen- 
eral Gabinius,  and  in  due  time  was  at- 
tached  to   tlie   inoviuce   of  Syria.     It 
was  again  laid  in  ruins  by  tlie  .lews, 
about,  A.  D.  tj.j  ;  t>ut  it  recovered  again 
in  the  reigns  of  Titus  and  Adrian,  and 
Constantine   restored   it   to  its  ancient 
splendor.      It    still    exists    under    tlie 
tiame  of  Ghuz/.eh,  and  contains  about 
fifteen  thousand  inhabitants.     Which 
is  desert — /he   name   is  desert,  refer- 
ring to  the  way,  through  a  desolate  and 
thinly  inhabited  country.     Some  refer 
desert  to  the  city  Gaza  after  it  was  de- 
stroyed about  A.  I).  ()."),  a  date  later  than 
the     probable    writing    of   the     Acts. 
Others   refer   it  to  the  site  of  the  old 
city  destroyed  by  Alexander  .Janiueus, 
affirming  that  tlie  new  city  stood  on  a 
changed  site.     But  all  attempts  to  refer 
it  to  the  city  liave  l)een  ([uite  unsatis- 
factory.    Some  refer  the  words  to  the 
angel,  and  others,  as  Ilackett,  regard  it 
as    a    parenthetic    remark    by    Luke. 
But  in  either  case  it  should  be  regarded 
as  descriptive  of  the  road  and  region 


through  which  it  pa.ssed.  There  were 
and  are  still  .several  roads  from  Jenisa- 
h'ln  to  Gaza,  and  some  portion  in  each 
route  migiit  be  styled  desert,  or  solitary 
and  tliinly  peopled.  One  by  tlie  way 
of  Bethlehem  and  IIel)ron,  jiasses 
through  the  .southern  part  of  Judea, 
calletl  "the  desert"  in  Luke  1:  SO. 
The  desert  way  gave  opportunity  for 
reading  the  Scriptures,  meditation,  and 
conver.sation,  and  baptism.  (.'omj)aie 
Christ's  conversation  with  Nicodemus 
alone  by  night  and  Avith  the  woman 
alone  at  Jacob's  well. 

27.  He  arose  and  went  —  the 
same  words  as  in  the  command,  (ver.  26.) 
His  obedience  was  exact  and  immedi- 
ate. He  gets  ready  and  journeys  with- 
out knowing  why,  or  for  what.  While 
traveling  on  foot,  the  second  or  third 
day,  behold,  unexpectedly,  he  sees  in 
that  lonely  way,  a  person  of  more  than 
ordinary  importance,  a  man  of  Eth- 
iopia, an  Ethiopian.  The  name  Eth- 
io|)ia  was  applied  to  the  country  south 
of  Egypt,  whicli  is  now  called  Nubia 
and  Abyssinia.  Its  inlialtitants  were 
large  in  stature  and  black  in  color.  A 
eunuch.  The  <  Jreek  means,  literally, 
a  t)ed  l.-eeper,a\M\  was  aj)}>lied  to  a  class 
of  persons  in  Oriental  countries,  who, 
by  a  cruel  and  unnatural  mutilation, 
were  unfitted  to  marry  antl  were  em- 
jiloycfl  as  kee]>ers  of  Oriental  liarems, 
and  were  appointed  to  high  offices  in 
I'iastern  courts.  (Dnn.i::!.)  The  Mord 
is  liere  used  in  tliis  strict  sense  of  the 
term,  and  not  in  its  secondary  and  of- 
ficial sense,  as  denoting  a  high  officer 
of  State.  "  The  very  fact  that  he  was 
an  officer  of  the  first  rank  in  tlie  court 
of  a  (pieen,  makes  it  most  probable  that 
he  was  actually  a  eumieh."  (Mkyki;. 
So  also  Hackktt.)  Of  great  autlior 
ity — nn  officer  of  Stale,  who,  in  this 
ca.sc,  acted  as  chief  treasurer,  having' 
charge  of  all  her  treasure.  Al- 
ford  suggests  a  h'sson  from  this  account 
as  showing  that  the  restriction  in  Dent. 
28  :  1,  forbidding  such  persons  from  en- 
tering the  congregation  of  the  Lord, 
was  iienceforth  done  away,  as  were  the 


130 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VIll. 


Ethiopians,  who   had    Ibt;  charge  of  all 
her  trtasure,  aiidt  bad  come  lo  Jerusalem 
28  for  to  worhhip,  was  returning,  and  sitting 
in  his  chariot  read  Esaias  the  prophet. 


29  Then  Mhe  Spirit  said  unto  Philip,  Go 
near,  and  join  thyself  to  this  chariot. 

30  And  Philip  ran  thither  to  him,  and  heard 
him  read  the  prophet  Esaias ;  and  said. 


k  Ps.  68  :  29 ;  Jolin  12  :  20.        '  ch.  16  :  6,  7. 


barriers  against  the  Samaritans  and 
tlie  Gentiles,  and  "  thus  the  way  paved 
for  the  great  and  as  yet  incomprehen- 
sible truth  of  Gal.  8  :  28."  Candace— 
a  name  common  to  the  queens  of  the 
northern  portion  of  Ethiopia,  whose 
capital  was  Napata,  just  as  the  name 
Pharaoh  was  common  to  Egyptian 
kings  and  Ctesar  to  the  Koman  emper- 
ors. Had  come  to  Jerusalem  for 
to  worship — showing  that  he  was  a 
believer  in  the  God  of  Israel,  and  ac- 
eei)ted  the  Hebrew  religion.  As  the 
law  of  Moses  did  not  permit  eunuchs  in 
the  congregation  of  the  Lord  (see  above) 
he  would  not  have  been  a  fully  ad- 
mitted proselyte,  but  only  a  ])roselyte 

of  the  gate.       (Seenmcon  John  12  ;20. )      The 

prophets  recognized  that  eunuchs  were 
not    excluded    from    the    mercy    and 

grace  of  God.  (Isa.  56  :  5-8 ;  Jer.  38 :  7  f ;  39  : 
1618.) 

•-iS.  The  sentence  of  the  preceding 
verse  is  concluded  in  tliis.  Was  re- 
turning— to  his  own  country  by  the 
way  of  Egypt  and  thus  was  on  the  road 
to  Gaza.  He  had  probably  been  at- 
tending one  of  the  great  feasts.  As  he 
had  come  many  hundred  miles,  he 
would  more  likely  have  attended  the 
feast  of  Pentecost,  than  the  Passover, 
which  was  rather  early  in  the  year,  or 
the  feast  of  Tabernacles,  wliich  would 
make  his  return  quite  late.  (See 
Author's  Harmonic  Artt<,  note  on  ?  l.l.) 
In  his  chariot — suited  to  his  liigh 
rank,  and  doubtless  with  one  or  more 

ilttendailts.         (Ver.    38.        See  on   next  Terse.) 

Jtcad — mis  rrndhifi  alou<l  (for.  30)^  as 
is  still  customary  with  tiie  Orientals, 
tiiougli  reading  to  tbomselves.  The 
proiihet  Ksaias — without  doubt  from 
the  .Septnagint,  whicli  was  well  known 
ami  mo,><tly  used  outside  of  Palestine, 
lie  is  reading  the  evangelistic  propliet 
of  the  Old  Testament,  and  that  chapter 
which  gives  the  clearest  revelation  of 
tlie  sufterings  of  Christ.  The  Lord  who 
s<Mit  Philip  on  his  mission  is  directing 
tile  mind  of  the  eunuch  in  his  search 
after  truth.     It  is  very  likely  that  he 


had  heard  at  Jerusalem  discussions 
concerning  Jesus  and  the  predictions  of 
the  prophets,  especially  this  passage 
which  had  uniformly  been  applied  by 
the  Jews  to  the  Messiah,  but  which  now 
was  interpreted  dift'erently  by  those 
who  opposed  the  claims  of  Jesus.  He 
is  in  a  receptive  state  of  mind,  as  the 
sequel  shows,  and  lie  apjiears  to  have 
been  examining  the  Messianic  prophe- 
cies to  ascertain  the  truth  in  the  matter. 
And  he  may  have  taken  this  desert 
road  in  preference  to  the  others  for  this 
very  purpose. 

29.  Then,  and,  the  Spirit  said 
unto  Philip.  He  inwardly  appre- 
hended the  voice  of  the  Holy  ISpirit, 
who  was  Avith  him.  How  this  divine 
impulse  came  u])on  him  we  are  not 
told.  It  was  probably  the  same  in 
kind  as  those  special  impulses  enjoyed 
by  all  Christian  workers,  but  doubtless 
greater  in  degree.  (See  10  :  19 ;  u:  2;  i6: 
6:7.)  Notice  that  the  divine  communi- 
cation is  noAV  more  direct  and  of  a 
higher  kind  than  at  the  first,  (ver.  26.:) 
There  is  also  a  progression  in  the  reve- 
lation of  liis  work.  First  an  angel 
sends  him  into  a  desert  way  ;  then  he 
sees  a  chariot ;  now  the  Spirit  com- 
mands, Go  near,  and  join  thyself 
to  this  chariot — attach  thyself,  unite 
thyself  to  it.  The  idea  is,  form  in- 
timate connections,  enter  into  the  clos- 
est relations  with  it.  This  would  seem 
forward  and  almost  ]ire])osterous  in 
this  humble  evangelist  on  foot.  But 
God  had  prejiared  the  way,  and  he 
obeys,  and  easily  succeeds.  Chariot 
— commonly  a  two-wheel  veliide,  used 
most  frequently  in  war,  sometimes,  as 
in  this  instance,  for  peaceable  purposes. 
Commonly  two  persons,  sometimes 
three,  one  a  driver  and  the  other  to 
carry    the    State     umbrella.      (1  King« 

2  ;  34.' ) 

30.  Philip  seeing  the  work  com- 
mitted to  him  hastens  to  discharge  it. 
Ran  thitherto  him— it  was  not  the 
chariot,  but  the  eunuch  he  was  seeking. 
And  heard  him  read,  etc.  Just  what 


Ch.  Mil.] 


THE  ACTS. 


131 


Understaodest  thou  what  thon  readest? 
Aud  he  said,  "•  How  can  I,  except  some 
man  should  guide  tue?  Aud  he  desired 
Philip  tliat  he  would  come  up  and  sit 
with  him. 
The  place  of  the  Scripture  which  be 


read  was  this,  'He  was  led  as  a  nlieep  to  the 
slaughter;  and  like  a  lamb  dumb  before 
his  shearer,  so  opened  he  not  his  mouth. 
3o  In  his  humiliation  his  judgment  was 
taken  away :  and  who  shall  declare  his 
generation  ?    For  his  life  is  taken  from 


Philip  wished  to  talk  about,  and  what  [ 
the  eunuch  needed  to  have  e.xplainetl. 
I'iiderstandest  thou  what  thou 
readest?  lu  the  original  a  question 
eomiuoidy  receiving  a  negative  an.«wer, 
Ih,.it  Ih'in  III  all'  kiioir.  As  Philip 
(iouUtless  spoke  in  Greek  the  two  verbs 
Were  alnio.st  alike,  giving;  peculiar  jioint 
to  the  (piestion — tiie  verb  translated 
read  being  a  compound  of  that  trans- 
lated kiioic.  Paul  u.ses  a  .similar  com- 
bination in  2  Cor.  .5  :  2,  known  and 
read  of  all  men.  "A  .strange  address 
to  an  unknown  and  great  man.  In  holy 
conversation  we  shonlil  cr>me  at  once  to 
the  truth  itself.  Philip  did  not  begin, 
as  Ls  common,  with  tlie  weather,  the 
news,"  etc.  (BEX<iEL.)  We  may  learn 
tiie  value  of  questions  in  religious  con- 
versation.     (See  John  4:7.) 

31.  The  eunuch's  reply  indicates 
earnestness,  humility,  and  a  teachable 
si)irit.  HoAV  can  I,  etc.  ?  For  how 
could  If — as  the  matter  stands,  with  a 
l)assage  so  difficult  and  mysterious.  He 
candidly  and  modestly  owns  his  inabil- 
ity to  understand  it,  and  his  need  of 
instruction.  But  he  sees  the  possibility 
of  understaniling  it  under  suitable 
guidance.  Should  guide  me — shall 
in.struct  me.  The  same  word  is  used 
by  Jesus  of  blind  guides  (Luke6::«), 
and  of  the  guidance  of  the  Ilidy  Spirit. 
(John  16: 1.-!.)  And  he  desired — en- 
trratrd  him  ;  showing  that  he  was  eager 
to  leivrn,  and  imj)lying  tliat  he  suspected, 
|>"rhaps  believed,  that  Philip  was  the 
one  who  could  instruct  him.  Sit 
with  him — the  travel-worn  preacher 
of  the  desi)ised  Xazerene  now  sits  amid 
royal  honors,  and  becomes  the  in- 
structor of  a  royal  mini.ster  ! 

3'J.  The  place,  the  pa.^smj-  of 
Scripture  w^hich  he  was  reudhuj 
was  this — from  Isa.  .53  :  7,  S,  and 
quoted  from  the  Septuagint,  with  slight 
variations.  It  was  utteretl  seven  cen- 
turies before  our  Lord's  crucifixion, 
which  it  so  minutely  deserilK'S,  and  its 
meaning  was  contrary  to  the  prevailing 


ideas  at  that  time  resjiecting  the  Mes- 
siah. Its  fulfillment  in  Jesus  has  ever 
since  been  a  source  of  trouble  to  infi- 
dels and  Jews.  Bolingbroke  even 
aliirme<l  that  Jesus  brought  about  his 
own  crucifi.\ion,  so  as  to  enable  his  dis- 
ciples to  ai>peal  to  this  prophecy  in 
proof  of  his  Messiahship.  He  was 
led  as  a  Iamb,  etc.  The  subject  or 
I)erson  here  presented  is  the  Messiah. 
The  question  which  perplexed  the 
eunuch's  mind,  and  which  he  wished 
answered,  was  respecting  this  i>erson, 
who  he  was.  (ver.  3i.)  The  words  here 
were  fulfilled  in  Jesus,  yielding  him- 
self up  to  his  enemies  (Matt.  ::i) :  52.  ij), 
submitting  i)atiently  to  indignities  (Matt. 
if>  :r,7.  fv-;  27 :  2T-:ji)  aud  maintaining  silcnce 
before  Pilate  and  Hero<l.  (Matt.  27  :i2i»; 
Luke 2:i : ».)  His  inuoceuce  and  vicarious 
suftering  are  also  implied. 

33.  A  difficult  and  obscure  j)assage, 
arising  in  part  from  the  variations  of 
the  Greek  version  from  the  Hetu-ew. 
Amid  dirtereiit  interpretations  we  may 
well  nuike  the  answer  of  the  eunuch 
our  own.  May  the  Holy  Spirit  lead  to 
the  right  understanding.  The  Revised 
Vei-sion  (American  reading)  renders 
Isa.  53  :  8  :  "  By  oppression  and  judg- 
ment he  was  taken  away,  and  as  for 
his  generation  who  [among  them]  con- 
sidered that  he  was  cut  off  out  of 
the  land  of  the  living  for  the  transgres- 
sion of  my  people  to  whom  the  stroke 
[was  due]."  The  true  interpretation  is 
iioubtless  that  which  fits  l)oth  the 
Hebrew  and  the  Greek.  In  his 
humiliation — in  the  contempt,  vio- 
lence, and  ojipression  which  he  suffered. 
His  judgment — in  that  he  was  inno- 
cently couilemned  and  punished,  aud 
his  rights  to  justice  and  liumanity  were 
taken  aAvay.  And  who  shall  de- 
scribe the  wickedness  and  blindness  of 
his  sreueration  in  their  treatment  of 
him,  neitlier  understanding  who  he 
was,  ni>r  the  design  of  his  sufferings. 
For  his  life  is  taken  by  a  bloody 
death  from  the  earth.    Had  the  quo- 


132 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VIII. 


34  the  earth.  And  the  euniich  answered 
Philip,  and  said,  1  praj^  ihoe,  of  whom 
speakelh  the  jirophet  this:  of  himself  or 

35  of  some  otlierman  ?    Then  Philip  opened 


his    mouth,  » and    began    at    the   same 

Scripture,  and  preached  unto  him  Jesu8. 

36      And   aj  they  went  on  tlwir  way,  they 

came    unto    a    certain    water :   and  the 


nch.  17  :3;  Luke  Z*  :  -27. 


tation  continued  the  vicarious  nature  i 
of  bis  death  would  have  been  at  once  I 
brought    into    view.       But    tiu>    main  \ 
question  which  the  eunucii  ^^•ished   to  \ 
kiu)w  was,   Who  was  the  person  thus  j' 
suffering    and     dying,    of   wliom    the 
I)roi)het  spolve?     His   vicarious  sutier- 
ings  are  niucli  spolien  of  in  tlu-  tifty- 
third  chapter  of  Isaiah,  and  tins  Philip 
would  emphasize  when  he  showed   that 
i\\e  prophecy  was   fulfilled   in   Jesus.  | 
Wiiile  this  seems  to  l)etliemost  natural  { 
and  true  view,  yet  another,   thus  pre-  | 
sented  by  Meyer,  is  worthy  of  considera- 
tion :    "In   his  humilkititjii    /liis  jiidij-', 
■mcut  is  taken  incay ;  that  is,  when  he 
had  so  hundjlcd  himself  to  the  bloodj' 
death  (see  Phil.  V! :  8),  the  judicial  fate  im-  ; 
jrosed  })y  (Jod  was  taken  from  him,  so 
that  now  the  culmination  and  crisis  of 
his  destiny  set  in.     (SeePhii.  2:  u.)     But  ^ 
h is  offspring  loho  shal I  describe  f  tliatis,  ' 
liow  indescribably  great  is  the  uiulti-_ 
tude   of    those   belonging  to    him,    of 
whom  he  will  now  l)e  tiie  family  bead  ! 
(Phil.  2  :  10.)  For,  the  ground  of  the  origin 
of  this  innumerable  progeny,  /lis  life  is 
taken  away  from  the  earth,  so  tliat  lie 
enters  upon  his  heavenly  work  relievetl 
from  tlie  trammels  of  earth.  .  .  .  Ac- 
cording to  the  above  explanation,  his 
life  teas  taken  from  the  earth,  stands  in 
thoughtful  and  significant  correlation 
to  his  juJtpnent  was  taken  away.     In 
tlicse  correlations  lies  the  righteousness 
of  the  Humbled  One."     (J-i...  is:  10.) 

34.  Then — ami,  the  eunuch  an- 
swered— suggested  i>y  the  question  in 
ver.  30.  Tins  verse  is  closely  comiected 
with  ver.  ol,  the  (luotation  from  Isaiah 
being  thrown  in  f(u-  tiie  inforinatioii  of 
the  reader.  Of  Avhom  speakelh 
the  prophet  this,  of  himself? 
Very  likely  the  eunuch  beard  tliis 
(|uestion  discussed  at  Jerusalem  :  Some 
atHrming  the  common  view  tliat  it  re- 
ferred to  tlie  Messiali ;  and  others, 
wisiiing  to  avoiil  the  concdusion  tliat  it 
was  fulfilled  in  Jesus,  said  tliat  Isaiali 
spoke  of  himself,  who,  according  to  a 
Jewish  tradition,  suHered  martyrdom, 


in  the  reign  of  Manasseh,  by  being 
sawn  asunder.  Or  of  some  other 
man — some  })rophet  or  righteous  man 
who  bad  been  disowned  and  put  to 
death.  Thus  the  later  Jewish  Avriters 
refer  it  to  Jeremiali  or  Josiah,  or  to 
tiie  suffering  which  have  been  inflicted 
on  the  Jewish  nation.  But  all  such 
e.xiilanations  fail  to  meet  the  demands 
of  the  chapter,  and  probalilj'  would 
not  have  been  seriously  put  forth,  had 
they  not  become  necessary  as  a  means 
of  combatting  the  claims  of  Jesus.  All 
the  early  Jewish  commentators  refer 
the  ])assage  to  the  Messiah ;  and  this 
was  the  common  view  in  our  Saviour's 
day. 

35.  Then — and,  Philip  opened 
his  mouth — an  Oriental  expression 
ordinarily  occurring  before  solemn 
and  weighty  words.  (10  -.-u;  Matt.  5:2; 
Job  3:1.)  Began — a  somewhat  con- 
tinued and  formal  discourse,  at,  rather 
from  this  Scripture,  or  pa.ssage,  tak- 
ing the  other  jiassages  in  connection 
with  it.  A  better  text  he  could  not 
iiave  selected  than  that  iirovideiitially 
afforded  him.  Preached  unto  him 
— made  kuoirn  to  him  the  (jood  news  oj 
Jesus,  whose  very  name  meant  Saviour. 
i  (.Miitt.  1 :2i.)  The  theme,  s])irit,  and 
method  of  his  discourse  are  suggested. 
Doubtless  first  of  all  he  showed  how 
minutely  this  passage  was  fulfilled  iu 
the  sulferings  and  deatii  of  Jesus,  cor- 
rotiorating  it  by  other  Scripture,  which 
also  foretold  his  resurrection.  He  an- 
nounced liim  as  a  Saviour,  indicating 
his  person  and  work,  the  terms  of  sal- 
vation and  liis  commands,  including 
tliat  of  baj'tisin.     (Ver.  .v,.) 

30.  Pliili]i  was  all  intent  in  unfold- 
ing the  gospel  and  the  eunuch  was 
absorbed  in  hearing  the  trutla,  till  the 
attention  of  tlie  latter  was  arrested,  as 
they  went  along  tlie  desert  way,  by  a 
certain  water.  Where  this  was  can- 
not be  decided,  since  the  road  Avhich 
they  took  is  not  certainly  known. 
Euscbius  and  Jerome  point  to  a  foun- 
tain   near    Betbzur,    uow   the  village 


Cii.  VIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


133 


eunuch  said,  See,  here    is  water;  "what 
37  doth  hiuder  me  to   be  baptized?    And 


Philip  said,  p  if  thou  believest  with  all 
thiue  heart,  thou  mayest.      And  he  au- 


P  Matt.  28  ;  19  ;  Mark  10  :  16. 


Betlu'oraii,  not  fivr  from  Hebron,  twenty 
iiiile-s  south  of  Jerusalem.  "  Tlie  water 
tlierc  at  jtresent  issues  from  a  j)ert'iinial 
souree,  a  i)art  of  wliieli  runs  to  waste 
in  tlie  iici'4lil)orin,:;-  (ielils,  and  a  jiart 
colK'i'teil  into  a  ihinkinti-trout^li  on  one 
side  of  tlie  load,  and  into  two  small 
tanks  on  the  other  si<le.  it  was  formerly 
ohjeitid  tliat  no  ehariot  could  have 
])assed  here,  on  aeeount  of  the  broken 
nature  of  the  iiiound,  but  travelers 
liave  now  diseovered  traces  of  a  paved 
road  and  the  marks  of  wheels  on  the 
stones."  (J)k.  Hackktt.)  Dr.  Eolnn- 
son  [llib.  Jics.  ii.,  p.  515)  with  much 
assurance  places  it  on  the  most  southern 
)'oad  from  Jerusalem,  neaicr  Ciaza,  be- 
low Tidl  el  Ilasy.  Here  he  saw  the  water 
standing  along  the  ad  a 'cut  valley,  in 
a  country  at  present  ''desert,"  there 
l)eing  now  no  other  similar  water  on 
tluit  road.  But  as  Pliilip  received  the 
command  from  the  angel  at  .Samaria 
(ver.  26),  he  very  likely  went  directly  to 
another  road  fiom  Jerusalem  to  Ciaza, 
without  passing  tluough  Jerusalem. 
"  If  the  eunuch  came  down  Waily  Al)y 
from  Jerusalem,  he  wonUl  follow  lu'arly 
the  same  track  from  Latron  that  I  once 
took,  and  this  is  now  regarded  as  the 
easiest  and  safest  way."  Coming  di- 
rectly from  the  city  of  Samaria,  Philip 
"  would  then  have  met  the  chariot 
somewhere  southwest  of  Latron.  There 
is  a  line  stream  of  water,  called  !Murub- 
bah,  deep  enough  even  in  June  to 
satisfy  the  utmost  wishes  of  our  Ba])tist 
friends.  This  ^[urubljah  is  merely  a 
local  name  for  the  great  Wada  Surar, 
given  on  account  of  copious  fountains 
wliich  supply  it  with  water  during 
summer."  (Di;.  Thomson.  Land  (ind 
i/oo/i-,  Vol.  II,  p.  310.)  They  came, 
etc.  IIow  tinexpectedly  and  suddenly 
is  vividly  brought  out :  They  crnnc  npun 
a  certaUi  water ;  a)id  the,  cininch  said, 
Behold,  water.  The  journey  and  the 
circumstances  were  arranged  liy  the 
Lord.  What  doth  hinder — He  was 
eager  to  fultill  the  divine  re(|uirement 
at  the  first  opportunity.  "  F((i/h  within, 
and  vcaYpr  witliout,  were  ready."  (Bkx- 

GEL.)     To  he  baptized.      (Seeon2:H8,) 


Very  likely  the  eunuch  had  heard  of 
John's  baj)tism.  But  i)roselyte  bai)tism 
as  a  Jewisli  practice  luid  not  yet  been 
inti'oduced.  "The  most  obvious  and 
natural  solution  is,  tiiat  I'hiliji's  aruu- 
mentative  discourse  imduded  aM<l  jn-i- 
haps  wound  uj)  with  an  exjdii'it  state- 
ment of  the  way  in  which  new  converts 
must  profess  their  faith  and  be  received 
into  the  church,  and  tiutt  tlie  eunuch, 
as  the  strongest  possible  e.\()re.ssion  of 
assent,  jiroposetl  to  do  what  he  had  just 
been  told  he  must  do,  and  for  which 
the  outward  means  were  providentially 
presented,  at  the  very  moment  mIicu 
they  could  be  used."  (Alkx,\xder.) 
37.  This  verse  is  not  found  in  the 
oldest  Greek  nianuscri])ts,  except  one, 
nor  in  the  oldest  cojiies  of  tlie  Latin 
Vulgate,  the  Syriac  Vulgate,  and  the 
lOgyptian  versions.  The  best  critics 
regard  it  as  an  interpolation  from  an 
ancient  baptisnial  liturgy,  or  service. 
If  so,  it  must  have  occurred  very  early, 
since  Irenieus  (died  A.  D.  202)  i]Uotes  it, 
as  also  does  Cyprian  of  the  third  cen- 
tury, indicating  the  jiractice  of  their 
period, — instruction  and  examination 
before  baptism.  See  Teaching  of  the 
Twelve  Apostfes  (vii) :  "And  touch- 
ing baptism,  thus  lja])tize :  having  de- 
clared all  these  things,"  that  is,  the 
precepts  and  instructions  of  the  jireced- 
ing  six  chapters.  "  Before  baptism 
let  the  baptizcr  and  baptized  fast,  and 
any  others  Mdio  can ;  but  thou  shalt 
bid  the  baptized  to  fost  one  or  two  days 
before."  Hackett  hesitates  about  re- 
taining the  jiassage,  but  says,  "Augus- 
tine in  the  fourth  century,  though  he 
objected  to  a  certain  misuse  of  the  text, 
did  not  ])ronounce  it  spurious."  Dr.  J. 
Alexander,  who  regards  the  external 
evidence  for  and  against  the  passage  as 
very  nearly  balanced,  says  :  "  It  may  be 
argued  that  the  verse,  though  genuine, 
was  aftei-ward  omitted  as  unfriendly  to 
the  ])ractice  of  delaying  baptism,  which 
had  become  common,  if  not  prevalent, 
before  the  end  of  the  third  century." 
So  also  it  might  have  been  omitted  by 
some  as  unfriendly  to  infiint  bapti.sm, 
which  began  to  be  practiced  about  the 


134 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  VIII. 


swered   and  said,  il   believe  that  Jesus 

38  Christ  is  the  Son  of  God.  And  he  com- 
manded the  "chariot  to  stand  still :  and 
they  went  down  both  into  the  water,  both 
Philip  and  the  eunuch  ;  and  he  baptized 

39  him.  And  when  they  were  come  up  out  of 


the  water,  '  the  Spirit  of  the  Lord  caught 
away  Philip,  that  the  eunuch  saw  him  iio 
more:  and  he  went  on  his  way  rejoicing. 
■10  But  Philip  was  found  at  Azotus:  and 
passing  through  be  preached  in  all  the 
cities,  till  he  came  to  C^esarea. 


<i  Matt.  16  :  10 ;  John  6  :  69 ;  9  :  35,  3S ;  11  :  27  ; 
16:  Kzek. 


1  John  4  :  15. 
a  :  12,  14. 


1  Kings  is  :  12 ;  2  Kings  2  : 


beginning  of  the  third  century,  and  be- 
came common  among  tlie  African 
ciiurchcs  l>cfore  its  close.  The  re])ly  of 
Pliili])  and  the  confession  of  the  eunuch, 
as  liere  given,  are  perfectly  natural  and 
in  harmony  with  the  teaching  and  prac- 
tice of  the  apostolic  church,     (ver.  12,  n ; 

lliirkl6:16;  Acts  2  :  38  ;  16:31-33.) 

38.  And  he — the  eunuch.  Com- 
manded the  chariot,  etc.  Com- 
manded the  driver  that  the  chariot 
should  stop.  Here  is  evidence  that  he 
had  at  least  one  or  more  attendants. 
Some  suj)])ose  that  he  was  atti'uded  by 
a  pricely  retinue  ;  but  of  tliis  we  have 
no  evidence.  The  conimaiul  of  tlie 
eunuch  inij)lies  tliat  Philip  had  assented 
to  Ids  ))aptism,  and  tliat  the  eunuch 
aceejited  of  Jesus  as  tlie  Christ.  They 
Avent  down  both  into  the  water — 
not  to  but  into  the  water ;  for  it  is 
stated  in  the  next  verse  that  they  came 
up  out  of  the  water.  (See  Mark  1 :  a,  10.) 
Tills  was  not  the  baptism,  Imt  jtrepara- 
toiy  to  tlie  Itaptism.  It  was  necessary 
for  botli  to  go  down  into  the  water,  in 
order  tliat  Piiilij*  might  liaptize — that  is, 
iumtcrsc  the  eunuch.  Tlie  positive  j)roof 
of  immersion  is  in  the  meaning  of  the 
Avoid  baptize.  The  connecting  circum- 
stances confirm  it. 

39.  The  Spirit  of  the  Lord— 
the  Holy  Spirit.  Caught  away 
Philip — taking  liini  suddenly,  mar- 
velously  and  swiftly  from  him.  Com- 
pare what  Obadiah  said  of  Elijah, 
1  Kings  18  :  11  ;  and  the  use  of  the 
word  in  28  :  10 ;  1  Thess.  4  :  17  ;  Eev. 
12  :  f) ;  2  Cor.  12  :  2,  4.  Tiiis  wonder- 
ful taking  away  of  Philip  would  help 
to  confirm  the  eunuch's  faith.  That 
the  eunnoh — rather,  Aint  the  eiiuuch 
saw  him  no  more,  merely  narrating  an 
additional  fact,  not  imjdying  tliat  be- 
cause Philij)  was  miracuously  snatched 
away  therefore  the  eunuch  saw  him  no 
more.  The  reason  is  .stated  in  the  next 
clause:  And— rather,  for — he  went 
on  his  way  homeward.    Philip  was 


hurried  from  him  by  a  divine  im]>ulse, 
like  one  of  the  old  prophets  under  the 

power   of  the    Spirit    (1  Kings  is  ;4f.,  or  Kzek. 

3:12-14);  while  the  eunuch  recognized 
the  fact,  but  was  all  aln'^orbed  in  the 
revelation  of  truth  and  of  Cliri.st  to  his 
soul.  Rejoicing — tliat  lie  luid  found 
Christ,  professed  him,  and  was  now 
numbered  among  his  followers.  "  "SVe 
do  not  read  of  the  laying  on  of  hands 
on  the  euniieli."  (Bengkl.)  Here 
the  Scriptures  leave  him.  A  tradition 
says  his  name  was  Indich,  that  he 
preached  the  gospel  on  his  return  home 
with  great  success,  and  that  his  royal 
mistress  was  among  his  converts.  In 
his  conversion,  and  whatever  ii-sults 
there  may  have  been  in  Ethio]iia,  we 
recognize  a  fulfillment  of  Isa.  56  :  .'i-t.! ; 
Ps.  08  :  31. 

40.  But  Philip  was  found  at 
Azotus — imidying  that  his  going 
thither  had  been  extraordinary,  and 
that  it  was  the  next  jdace  where  he  was 
seen  after  leaving  the  desert.  Azotus, 
the  ancient  Ashdod,  a  city  of  the  Phil- 
istines (Josh.  13  :  3  ;  15  :  47  ;  1  Sum.  15  :  6,  4),  was 

near  the  Mediterranean,  aWiit  half 
way  from  Gaza  to  Jopjia.  It  was  never 
tluiroughly  subdued  by  the  .Tews.  It  is 
only  mentioned  here  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment, but  a  Christian  church  early  ex- 
isted tlure.  It  is  now  a  small  village 
calle<l  Esdud ;  and  some  ruins  of  a 
mound,  pottery,  and  marble  indicate 
the  former  city.  And  passing 
through,  on  foot.  He  preached  in 
all  the  cities — he  wade  knou-n  the 
(jood  veirx  to  all  the  cities  between 
Azotus  and  Cwsarea,  such  as  Ekron, 
Lydda,  Jo]ipa,  and  AjioUonia,  ancl 
largely  under  Gentile  influence.  Casa- 
rea — ^^sometimes  called  Ca'sarea  Pales- 
tina,  to  distinguish  it  from  Ctesaiia 
Philip]>i  in  the  north  of  Palestine. 
(M:iit.  iH :  13.)  It  was  about  sixty  miles 
noithwe.'Jt  of  Jerusalem,  on  the  ^h-di- 
terranean,  .south  of  Carmel.  It  was 
built  by  Herod  the   Great  in  honor  of 


Ch.  VIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


1.35 


Augustus,  ador^'d  with  marble  jjalaces, 
an(i  provided  with  a  uiagniticeiit  luir- 
bor.  It  was  tlie  residcuce  of  tlu' 
Ilerodian  family  and  of  the  lloiiiaii 
governors.  It  was  the  scene  of  Peter's 
visit  to  Cormlius  (10,11),  of  Herod 
Agrippa's  death  (12:19-2:1),  aud  of  Paul's 
imprisonment  and  trial  (•it-^e).  Ca'sa- 
rea  became  Pliiliji's  home,  and  the 
centre  of  his  lai)or's,  and  here,  after 
over  twenty  years,  he  entertains  Paul 
and  Luke.  (21:8.)  It  was  mostly  a 
Gentile  city.  A  few  fishers'  huts  aud 
ruius  now  occujty  its  site. 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  The  sovereign  direction  and  oversight 
of  Christ  is  shown  both  in  the  calamities 
and  successes  of  his  cause.  The  centraliza- 
tion, the  class  and  race  tendency  of  the  first 
church  was  weakened  by  persecution,  aud 
the  way  opened  for  the  universal  promulga- 
tion of  the  gospel.  (Ver.  1,  4;  Phil.  1  :  12  ; 
Prov.  11  :  24.) 

2.  The  death  of  good  men  will  call  forth 
our  sorrow,  and  should  at  the  same  time 
arouse  us  to  greater  activity  and  faithful- 
ness. (Ver  1,  2, 4 ;  1  Thess.  4  :  13  :  Rom.  13  : 
12, 13.) 

3.  A  learned-ignorant  man,  learned  in 
many  respects,  but  ignorant  of  the  grace  of 
God,  may  sincerely  become  a  very  danger- 
ous character.  (Ver.  3 ;  26  :  9 :  1  Tim.  1  :  13  : 
Gal.  1  :  3.) 

4.  To  make  known  the  glad  tidings  of  sal- 
vation is  a  common  work  of  all  who  love 
Christ.    (Ver.  4 ;  Phil.  2  :  15, 13  ) 

5.  God  calls  evangelists  to  the  work  of  the 
ministry.  When  one  dies  the  Lord  has  an- 
other to  take  his  place.  (Ver.  5 ;  Rom.  15  : 
19.) 

6.  It  is  not  the  workers  of  miracles, 'ut 
the  preaching  of  the  word  that  results  in  the 
conversion  of  men.  Miracles  attest,  but  the 
word  enters  the  heart.  (Ver.  6,  7  ;  16  :  14  ; 
Heb.  4  :  12.) 

7.  Miracles  were  fitting  at  the  first  plant- 
ing of  the  church  in  Samaria,  at  the  begin- 
ning of  Philip's  ministry  as  an  evangelist, 
and  in  opposing  the  lying  wonders  of  Simon. 
(Ver.  7 ;  6  :  8.) 

8  The  coming  of  Christ  to  a  human  soul, 
or  to  a  community,  brings  joy.  (Ver.  8 ; 
13  :  52  ;  John  4  :  42.) 

9.  Philip   preached   Christ;    Simon    pro- 


claimed himself.  Thus  is  presented  a 
marked  difterence  between  a  true  Clir  stian 
and  a  shrewd  worldling,  between  a  true  and 
a  false  minister.  (Ver  5,  9 ;  2  Cor.  4:5; 
Phil.  1  :  15,  16.) 

10  Note  a  contrast  also  between  Simon 
Magus  and  Saul  of  Tarsus.  One  a  man  of 
selfish  policy,  the  other  of  underlying  prin- 
ciples and  deep  convictions.  One  becoming 
an  apostate  professor,  the  other  a  fervent 
and  fearless  preacher.  (Ver.  1, 10-13 ;  20  : 
22-24.) 

11.  The  faithful  preaching  of  the  gospel 
attended  with  the  Holy  Spirit  will  overcome 
the  wiles  of  the  devil  aud  bring  men  to 
Christ.     (Ver.  12;  19  :  18-20.) 

12.  A  mere  intellectual  faith,  without  a 
hearty  trust  in  Christ,  is  a  dead  faith  ;  and 
a  baptism  without  a  confession  of  the  heart 
is  a  dead  baptism.  (Ver.  l;i;  Matt.  i:i  :  20, 
21  ;  James  2  :  18,  19  ;  1  Peter  3  :  21.) 

13.  The  gospel  destroys  national  pre- 
judices and  breaks  down  the  partition  that 
separates  Jews  and  Gentiles.  (Ver.  14-17 ; 
10  :  34 ;  Eph.  2  :  14,  15  ) 

14.  The  apostles  were  the  first  to  sanction 
missionary  work.  They  themselves  were 
missionaries  and  The  Acts  is  a  book  of  mis- 
sion sketches.    (Ver.  14 ;  13:2;  15  :  22-29  ) 

15.  The  apostles  had  power  over  the  .Spirit 
only  as  they  prayed  for  the  Spirit.  (Ver. 
15;  4:31.) 

16.  The  apostolic  office  was  temporary,  like 
that  of  Moses  and  Joshua.having  for  its  object 
the  introduction  of  Christianity  and  the 
full  organization  of  the  church.  (Ver.  14- 
17;  2:42;  5:2;  6:  2;  9:  32;  11  :  1,18;  15: 
6  ;  John  16  :  13.) 

17.  The  laying  on  of  hands  for  the  be- 
stowment  of  the  Holy  Spirit  was  apostolic 
and  temporary,  and  not  a  rite  of  confirma- 
tion.   (Ver.  17, 18.) 

18.  The  gifts  and  calling  of  God  cannot 
be  bought  with  money.  (Ver.  18-20 ;  1 
Peter  1  :  18, 19.) 

19.  Simon,  though  a  professed  Christian, 
was  an  unconverted  sinner.  (Ver.  21,  23;  2 
Peter  2  :  14, 15.) 

20.  Repentance,  with  faith  in  Christ,  is 
the  first  step  in  conversion,  the  first  duty  of 
the  sinner.     (Ver.  22  ;  2  :  38;  3  :  19.) 

21.  Prayer  will  not  be  heard  or  accepted 
unless  the  sinner  comes  repenting  and  be- 
lieving.    (Ver.  22 ;  Matt.  3:4;  Isa.  1  :  15.) 

22.  A  single  sin  may  indicate  a  person's 


136 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  TX. 


character  and  show  an  entire  want  of  true 
piety.     (Ver.  23  ;  Heb.  12  :  16,  17.) 

■.'."!  Sinners  sometimes  quiet  their  fears 
and  relieve  their  consciences  by  asking  the 
prayers  of  God's  people,  while  they  do  not 
purpose  to  renounce  their  sins.  (Ver.  24; 
Eiod.  8  :  8.) 

24.  Ministers  and  all  Christians  should 
imitate  the  apostles  and  speak  of  Jesus  and 
the  gosjiel  as  they  travel  from  place  to  place. 
(Ver.  25,  4  ;  18  :  24,  28.) 

2.').  It  is  not  permitted  to  angels,  but  to 
Christian  men  to  preach  the  gospel  to  sin- 
ners. An  angel  may  direct  Philip  as  lo  a 
preaching  tour,  but  Philip  must  do  the 
preaching.    (Ver.  2G ;  2  Cor.  5  :  18.) 

2(>.  If  the  Lord  commands,  we  should  not 
shrink  from  going  to  the  most  barren  and 
unpromising  fields;  nor  think  lightly  of 
small  congregations.    (Ver.  26,  27  ;  21  :  i:!.) 

27.  Blessings  attend  the  service  and  wor- 
ship of  (iod.  In  seeking  light  we  get  light. 
(Ver.  27,  28 ;  Matt.  13  :  12 ;  Ps.  ^6  :  9.) 

28.  Reading  the  Bible  is  a  means  of  grace 
and  people  of  all  classes  and  ages  should 
carefully  peruse  it.    (Ver.  28;  John  5  i  39.) 

29.  The  devout  and  judicious  interpreter 
may  greatly  help  others  to  understand  the 
word  of  God,  (Ver.  30,  31 ;  18  :  26 ;  Eoni. 
10 :  14.) 

30.  A  humble  and  prayerful  state  of  mind 
and  a  teachable  spirit  are  essential  to  the 
proper  study  of  Scripture.  (Ver.  31 ;  Ps. 
25  :  9.) 

31.  The  Spirit  uses  two  instrumentalities 
in  the  conversion  of  men,  the  word  and  the 
preacher.  (Ver.  31 ;  James  1  :  IS ;  1  Cor. 
1:21.) 

32.  Christ  is  the  fultiller  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment, and  the  sum  of  the  New,  the  Revealer 
and  substance  of  the  Scriptures.  (Ver.  33- 
3."> ;  2  Cor.  1  :  20;  Rev.  19  :  in  ;  John  1 :  1-10.) 

.".3.  The  word  is  often  an  enigma,  misused 
by  some,  but  repaying  richly  the  prayerful 
study  of  others,  (Ver.  34;  2  Peter  3  :  15, 
16, 18.) 

34.  Gospel  preaching  takes  in  the  suffer- 
ings, death,  and  resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ 
as  its  centre,  and  includes  the  whole  circle 
of  Christian  faith  and  practice.  (Ver.  3.> ; 
Rom.  11 :  33 ;  Eph.  3  :  18,  19  ;  1  Cor.  2  :  2.) 

35.  One  evidence  of  conversion  is  a  desire 
and  a  readiness  to  obey  Christ.  (Ver.  35 ; 
John  14  :  15.) 

36.  The  believing  eunuch  was  a  fit  subject 


for  baptism  ;  Simon  Magus,  wanting  in  faith 
from  the  heart,  was  an  until  subject.  (Ver. 
37,38,  13;  Mark  16  -.16.) 

37.  Neither  the  going  down  into  the 
water,  nor  the  coming  up  out  of  the  water, 
constituted  the  eunuch's  bapti.sm,  but  were 
the  necessary  adjuncts  to  his  immersion. 
(Ver.  38 ;  Mark  1  :  10.) 

38.  The  ol)edieut  convert  may  well  rejoice 
in  the  Lord.    (Ver.  39  ;  Phil.  4  :  4.) 

39.  Ministers  should  consider  themselves 
under  the  direction  of  Christ.  When  they 
have  accomplished  their  work  in  one  lield 
the  Lord  has  other  places  for  them  to  oc- 
cupy.   (Ver.  40;  16  :  6-9.) 

Ch.  9 :  This  chapter  records  the 
continuation  of  the  cruel  per.seeutiou 
under  Saul  of  Tarsus  ;  his  conversion 
and  baptism  at  Damascus ;  his  visit  at 
.Jerusalem,  and  his  withdrawal  to  Tar- 
.sus.  A  season  'of  peace  ensues  to  the 
churches,  and  Peter  visits  the  saints  in 
the  district  of  Judea  west  of  .Jerusalem. 
The  narrative  ])resents  the  diftusion  of 
the  jfospel  among  Jews  and  pro.selyte.s", 
and  belongs  to  the  transition  period 
prei)aratory  to  offering  the  gosj>el  to 
the  Gentile  world.  From  about  A.  D. 
34  to  A.  D.  38. 

1-22.  SAT'L'S  rONVERSION  and  BAP- 
TISM. PKEACHES  ATDAAIASCUS.  (ri:2- 
Ifi;    26:4-20;    Gal.  l:13-lfi:    1  Cor.  15  :  8-10  ;  1  Tim. 

1 :  12-17.)  The  structure  of  the  narrative 
indicates  that  sometime  had  intervened 
since  the  martyrdom  of  Stej)hen.  (.''ee 
on  ver.  1.)  If  six  months  or  even  a  year 
had  elapsed,  as  .seems  very  ]>robahle, 
the  conversion  of  Saul  may  be  iixed 
some  time  in  A.  D.  35.  This  accords  also 
with  the  time  when  Aretas,  king  of 
Arabia,  ai)i>ears  to  have  exercised 
authority  over  Damascus.  (2  Cor.  n  : 
32, :«.)  See  introductory  note  to  ch.  8. 
(Tomjiarc  Harmonic  Arranganent  of 
the  Acts,  Notes  on  §16,  §17.) 

The  conversion  of  Saul  was  the  most 
im])ortant  event  related  in  the  Acts 
after  Pentecost,  failed  as  an  apostle 
to  the  Gentiles,  his  influence  has  lieen 
most  directly  felt  by  all  nations.  The 
writer  of  thirteen  or  fourteen  Epistles, 
as  well  as  the  guide  of  Luke  the  evan- 
gelist and  hi.storian,  his  impress  upon 
Christian  theologj^  has  been  greater 
than  tliat  of  anv  other  man.    The  im- 


Ch.  IX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


137 


portiiiice  of  his  couversiou  is  also  indi- 
cated by  tlie  in'omiaeuce  giveu  to  it  in 
tlie  Acts,  lioiii;,'  reliitt'd  three  times, 
once  by  Luke  as  the  historian,  and 
twice  by  Paul  in  defense  of  himself, 
but  under  v'ery  diti'erent  circumstances. 
He  has  also  given  an  account  of  his 
conversion  and  C'liristiaii  experience  in 
his  Episth's.  A  comjiarison  of  these 
four  statements  illustrates  their  inde- 


pendence and  diversity  without  contra- 
diction, and  tlius  confinns  the  trutliful- 
ness  of  the  narrative.  Tlie  accounts 
also  supplement  one  anotlier,  and  ex- 
hibit different  sides  in  the  beginning 
and  growth  of  Paul's  religious  lifv. 
The  following  table  is  given  for  cmi- 
venient  com])arison,  and  extends  some- 
what beyond  liis  eonveision. 


LUKE. 
Chapter  9  :  l-:!0. 


Fiercely   persecutes 
the  disciples. 


Asked  letters  of  the 
high  priest  to  Da- 
mascus, to  bring 
men  and  woiueu 
to  Jerusalem. 


Near  Dama'scus  a 
light  suddenly 
flashed  about  him. 


He  fell  to  the  earth. 


''Saul,  Saul,  why 
persecutest  thou 
me  V" 


'Who  art  thou , 
Lord?" 


I  am  Jesus  whom 
thou  persecutest." 


His  companions 
stand  speecliless, 
hearing  a  voice, 
but  sefehitj  no  one. 


PAUL. 
Chapter  22  :  2-21. 


His  birth  and  edu- 
cation. 


Persecutes  this  way 
unto  imprison- 
ment and  death. 


Received  letters  of 
the  higli  priest 
aud  elders  to 
bring  those  that 
wi'i-e  bound  to 
■Turusalem  to  h^ 
punished. 


About  noon  near 
Damascus  a  great 
light  .suddenly 
Hushed  about  him. 


He    fell    to    the 
ground. 

"Saul,  Saul,  why?" 
etc. 


"Who  art  thou, 
Lord  ?" 


"  I  am  Jesus  the 
Nazarene  whom 
thou  persecutest." 

His  companions  saw 
the  light  and  are 
afraid,  but  heard 
not  the  voice  that 
spake  to  him, 


P.\UL. 
Chapter  2G  :  4-23. 


In  sincerity  and  as 
a  duty  persecuted 
the  saints. 


Received  authority 
from  the  chief 
priests,  punishing 
in  ihe synagogues^. 
Exceedingly  mad 
against  the  saints ; 
persecuted  unto 
foreign  cities. 

At  mid-day  a  light 
above  the  bright- 
ness of  the  sun 
shining  about 
him. 

All  having  fallen  to 
the  earth. 

Saying  in  the 
Hebrew  tongue, 
"  Saul,  Saul,wliy?" 
etc.  "  It  is  hard 
for  thee  to  kick 
against  the  goads" 

"Who  art  thou, 
Lord  ?" 


"  I  am  .Tesus  whom 
thou  persecutest." 


PAUL. 
Epistles. 


A  Hebrew,  a  Benja- 
minite  and  a 
Pharisee.  (Phil.H: 
5,  6;  2  Cor.  11:22; 
Gal.  1  :  14.) 

A  persecutor  and 
blasphemer  in  ig- 
norance and  unbe- 
lief  (1  Tim.  1  :  13, 

14.) 

Persecuted  the 
church  of  God.  (1 
Cor.  15  :  9.) 


"  Have  I  not  seen 
Je.«us  Christ  our 
Lord?"  (1  Cor. 
9:1.) 

"  Last  of  all  he  ap- 
peared to  me."  (1 
Cor.  1.1  :  8;  Acts 
9  :  17;  22  :  14;  26: 
16.     Also    9:27.) 


138 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IX. 


LUKE. 
Cbapter9  :  1-30. 


Directed  to  ro  into 
the  city  for  in- 
struction. 

Blinded,  lie  is  led 
into  Daiuaseii.s  by 
the  hand. 


Continues    three 
days  fasting 


Ananias,  a  certain 
disciple,  sent  to 
him. 


Opens  his  eyes,  and 
baptizes  him. 

The  Lord  to  Ana- 
nias: Saul  to  he  :i 
witness  Ix'fore 
Gentiles,  etc. 


Saul  preached  Clirist 
at  Damaseus. 


Escapes  for  his  life. 


At  Jerusalem. 


Is  sent  by  the  breth- 
ren to  Tarsus. 


PAUL. 

Chapter  22 :  2-21. 


PAUL. 

Chapter  26  :  4-23. 


PAUL. 

Epiitles. 


"What  shall  I  do. 
Lord  ?" 

Directed  to  go  into 
Damascus  for  in- 
struction. 

Blinded  by  the  light, 
and  being  led  by 
the  hand,  he  came 
into  Damascus. 

He  prays. 


Aiuinias,  a  devout 
man  according  to 
the  law,  and  hav- 
ing a  good  report 
from  all  the  Jews, 
came  to  hiiu. 

n|iRn.<  his  eyes,  and 
ba|itizi's  liiui. 

Ananias  to  Saul: 
"Tliou  Shalt  be  a 
witness  for  hiia  to 
all  men." 


Returns  to  Jerusa- 
lem. 


In  a  trance  the  Lord 
says,  "  I  will  send 
thee  far  hence  to 
the  Gentiles." 


Gives  him  his  com- 
mission as  a  mis- 
sionary and  an 
apostle  to  the  Gen- 
tiles. 


(See  above.] 


Set  apart  from  birth, 
called  through 
grace,  cnl  rusted 
with  the  gospel  of 
the  uneircunici- 
sion.  (<ial.  1  :  lo  ; 
2:7;  Eph.  3  :  8.) 
An  apostle  not  of 
man.    (Gal.  1 :  1.) 


Obtained  mercy,  be- 
cause he  did  it 
ignorantly;  and 
that  he  might  be  a 
pattern.  (1  Tim. 
1  :  13-lG.) 


"The  least  of  all 
saints."  (Eph.  3  : 
8.)  The  least  of 
the  apostles  ;  all  of 
grace.  (1  Cor.  l.")  : 
9,  10.) 


Preached  to  those  in  Went    into    Arabia 

Damascus,  and    return  c  d 

I  again    to    Danias- 

I  cus     (Gal.  1  :  17.) 

;  P^scajtes   through   a 

I  window  in  a  bas- 

I  Vet.  (2  Cor.  11: 32.) 

in    Jemsalem,    and  From      Jerusalem 

unto  all  the  region    ■■  unto      Ulyricum 

of  Judea,   and  to  jireaching  thegos- 

the  Gentiles.  pel.  (Rom.  15:19.) 


Ch.  IX.] 


IHE  ACTS. 


l:{9 


Conversion    of  Saul :  preiu Ins  at  Damascus 
and  at  Jerusalem,  Jlces  tu  Tarsus. 
9  AND  *  Saul,  yet  breathing  out  threateii- 


ings  aud  slaughter  against  the  disciincs  of 

2  the  Lord,  M-ent  unto  the  high  pries-t,  and 

desired  of  him  letters  to  Damascus  to  the 


8  ch.  8  :  :i;  Gill.  1  :  13;  1  Tim.  1  :  13. 


It  should  be  noticed  tliat  Luke  iu 
this  chapter  writes  us  a  historian.  As 
a  pliysician,  it  was  natural  that  he 
should  observe  syiiiptoiii5,  and  so  he 
mentions  "the  falling,  as  it  were, 
of  scales"  from  Saul's  eyes.  Inch.  22, 
Paul  is  spealving  iu  his  own  defense 
before  an  angry  Jewish  mob  iu  the 
Temple  Court.  He  is  therefore  .very 
conciliatory,  speaking  in  the  Hebrew 
tongue,  presenting  tlie  Jewish  side  of 
his  religious  life  and  experience,  and 
keeping  back  as  long  as  possible  any 
reference  to  the  Gentiles,  wliich  would 
be  offensive  to  the  Jews.  In  ch.  26 
Paul  again  speaks  in  his  defense,  but 
to  a  more  distinguished  and  to  a  less 
impassioned  audience,  in  the  auditor- 
ium of  the  Roman  governor  at  Ctesarea. 
Speaking  in  the  Greek  language,  he 
notices  that  Jesus  on  the  Damascus 
road  spoke  to  him  "in  the  Hebrew 
tongue."  He  dwells  more  largely  upon 
doctrine  and  the  divine  authority  of 
his  mission  and  message.  His  address 
is  marked  by  persuasive  power  aud  a 
Gentile  coloring.  The  experience  of 
Paul  as  gathered  from  his  epistles  is 
such  as  he  woukl  naturally  give  to  his 
Christian  brethren,  who  could  sym- 
pathize with  him,  and  understand 
spiritual  truth.  He  s|)ecially  displays 
great  humility  and  inagnities  tlie  grace 
of  God.  The  few  apparent  discrejtan- 
cies  are  easily  explained,  (see  uotes  on 
Ter.  1,  i,  6, 7,  9.)  Comi>are  also  notes  on 
the  defences  in  ch.  22  and  2(j. 

1.  And — ratlier,  Jiat,  contrasting 
with  Philip's  missionary  zeal  Saul's 
persecuting  spirit.  Yet  takes  the 
mind  back  to  the  brief  record  of  Saul's 
persecution  in  8  : 3,  and  imjilies  that 
some  time  had  elajjsed,  probably 
several  months,  ]>erhai)S  a  year.  The 
most  natural  inference  from  the  whole 
narrative  is  tliat  the  incidents  related 
in  the  preceding  cha])ter  were  taking 
place  while  Saul  was  continuing  the 
persecution  witli  increasing  intensity, 
and  that  his  pushing  on  to  Damascus 
followed  the  Samaiitan  revival  and  the 
conversion  of  the  eunuch,    lireathiiig 


out  threatenings  and  slaughter. 

Omit  out.  Jirt'tii/ihii/  t/ireolniiny  uiid 
murder     against     the     disciples. 

Strong  language,  representing  intense 
bitterness  and  activity.  He  was  "ex- 
ceedingly mad  against  them,"  and  must 
have  been  connected  with  other  mar- 
tyrdoms than  that  of  Stephen.  (-'•>: 
10, 11.)  Here  is  a  decided  advance  uixui 
the  description  in  8  :  o.  He  is  now  like 
one  panting  with  rage.  He  is  full  of 
violent  hatred  against  Christians.  He 
has  pursued  the  course  so  long  and  so 
earnestly  that  a  fanatical  aud  des- 
tructive fury  has  become  as  it  were  a 
part  of  himself.  Of  the  Lord — the 
exalted  and  glorified  Jesus,  {irn,  s :  si ; 
Phil.  2 : 9,  u.)  Went — of  his  own  accord 
to  the  high  priest,  probably  Caia- 
phas,  who  continued  as  acting  high 
priest  till  the  passover  of  A.  D.  36.  (See 
on  4: 6.)  It  is  implied  tliat  the  high 
priest,  as  President  of  the  Sanhedrin, 
and  in  its  behalf,  gave  Saul  letters  of 
authority,  (vei-.  u.)  In  22  :  5  it  is  said 
that  he  received  his  commission  from 
"all  the  estate  of  the  ehlers,"  and  iu 
26  :  10,  "  from  the  chief  priests,"  which 
are  different  forms  of  representing  the 
Sanhedrin.  Thus  the  three  statements 
of  the  same  fact  are  harmonious.     (See 

*:2..) 

2.  And  desired — asked  for  himself, 
indicating  his  forwardness  and  zeal  in 
instigating  persecution  at  Damascus. 
Letters  —  official  documents,  com- 
mending him  and  clothing  him  with 
authority  to  execute  his  pur]>ose.  Com- 
pare Nehemiah  receiving  letters  from 
the  king  to  the  governors  of  Palestine. 
(Neh.  2 : 7, 8.)  The  Jcws  everywhere  rec- 
ognized tiie  Sanhedrin  as  tlieir  liighest 
ecclesiastical  tril)unal,  and  it  seems  to 
have  been  accorded  as  such  by  the 
Roman  authorities.  Julius  Ca'sar,  B.  C. 
47,  decreed  that  "  Hyrcanus  and  his 
children  do  retain  all  the  rights  of  high 
priest,  whether  established  by  law  or 
accorded  by  courtesy ;  an<l  if  hereafter 
any  ([uestion  arise  touching  the  Jewish 
polity,  I  desire  that  the  determination 
thereof  be  referred  to  him."     This  wa» 


140 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cii.  XI. 


synagogues,  that  if  he  found  any  <  of  this 
way,  whether  they  were  men  or  women,  he 
might  bring  them  bound  unto  Jerusalem. 


3  And  "  as  he  journeyed, he  came  near  Da- 
mascus :  and  suddenly  there  shined  round 

4  about  him  a  light  from  heayen :  and  he  fi  U 


« ch.  19  :  9,  23.        «  eh.  22  :  6-16;  26  ;  11-20. 


coufirmed  by  Augustus,  and  tluis  the 
Sauliedrin  could  act  through  the  high 
prifst,  their  President  aud  rei>resenta- 
tive.  Besides,  the  Kouiau  rulers  of 
Pulestiue  recognized  tlie  Sanhodrin  as 
the  higliest  Jewish  court,  and  its  eccles- 
iastical autliority  api)cars  to  have  beeu 
regarded  by  lioman  governors  else- 
where. Regardiug  synagogues,  here 
the  ecclesiastical  orgauizatious,  see  on 
G:7.  In  2(5:11,  Paul  says,  "I  perse- 
cuted them  unto  strange"  or  "foreign 
cities,"  from  which  we  may  infer  tiiat 
Saul  had  pursued  the  discijjles  into 
otiier  cities  outside  of  Palestine,  before 
going  to  Damascus,  and  jirobably  before 
receiving  letters  thitlier. 

Damascus — probably  tlie  oldest 
city  in  the  world;  according  to  Jo- 
sephus  built  by  Uz,  the  great  grandson 
of  Noali.    It  is  mentioned  iu  the  history 

of  .\braham.      (Oen.  I4:  15;  16:  2.)      It   Was 

sidxkied  by  David  (2  Sam.  8 :  c),  and  after- 
ward  became   tlie   seat  of  tlie   Syrian 

kingdom    (1  Kings  11  :  23-23;   15:20),    but    at 

length  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  Assy- 
rians. (2  Kings  16:9.)  The  citv,  howcvei", 
continued  with  varying  fortunes,  and 
is  flourishing  to  tliis  day,  having  a 
poj)ulatiou  of  about  one  huiulred  and 
fifty  thousand.  It  is  situated  al)Out  one 
hundred  and  forty  miles  northeast  of 
Jerusalem  in  the  centre  of  a  large 
fertile  i)lain,  at  the  eastern  liase  of  Anti- 
Lebanon,  wiiere  several  great  caravan 
routes  come  together.  It  is  watered  by 
tlie  rivers  Barada  and  Awaj,  the 
ancient  A1)ana  and  Pharpar.  (2  Kings 
5: 12.)  The  Jewish  poj>ulation  of  Da- 
mascus was  very  large,  estimated  at 
fifty  thousand.  Josephus  says  that  ten 
tlioiisand  Jews  were  massacred  there 
at  one  time  under  Nero.  It  had  doubt- 
less many  si/niu/df/iirx,  and  Saul's  Ict/crs 
to  them  may  iiave  ineliideil  several 
documents  addressed  to  tlie  leading 
ones.  The  rulers  of  tlie  synagogues 
"formed  a  college  whose  province  it 
was,  among  other  duties,  to  punish 
those  wlio  deserted  the  Jewish  faith. 
(De  Wette,  Ht'h.  Avelxrul.  244.)" 
(IIackktt.)    If  he  found  any— im- 


plying that  he  would  find  them.  Of 
this,  literally,  the  way,  the  well- 
known  taitli  and  manner  of  life  con- 
nected with  tlie  religion  of  Jesus.  This 
was  a  common   designation   used    by 

Luke.        (19:9,  23;  22:4;  24:  14,  22.)        Ill  It)  : 

17,  it  is  more  fully  exjirossed  as  "tlie 
way  of  salvation,"  aiul  in  18  :  2"),  "  tiie 
way  of  the  Lord."  Thus  this  desitina- 
tion  Seems  to  have  been  a  common  one 
among  the  early  Christians,  suggested, 
perliaps,  ))y  '  the  narrow  way '  (Mau. 
7  :i4),  which  alone  leads  to  heaven,  and 
"tlie  way"  which  Jesus  applied  to 
liimself.  (John  14:6.)  The  Christians  at 
Damascus  may  have  been  converts  on 
the  day  of  Pentecost,  who  had  come 
hither;  or  fugitives  from  persecution 
at  Jerusalem,  or  both  of  these  class,  s 
and  their  converts.  Men  or  women 
— showing  how  severe  aud  thorough 
this  i)erseeution  was  to  be.  Iiciii;d. 
unto  Jeru.salem — for  trial  before  the 
Sauhedrin,  which,  alone  under  Jewisli 
law,  could  pronounce  the  sentence  of 
death.  "  This  commission  seems  to 
imj)ly  the  connivance  of  the  Bonian 
government,  so  tliat  the  same  con- 
sj)iracy  of  Jews  and  Gentiles  wliieli 
])ut  Christ  to  deatli  (+:27)  pursued  his 
followers  even  into  foreign  jiarts." 
(.Vi.EXAXUKR.)  The  civil'authorities 
at  least  were  not  dis])0.sed  to  ort'er  op])0- 
sition  to  things  pertaining  to  the  relig- 
ious affairs  of  the  Jews. 

3.  As  he  journeyed — pushing  on 
and  glad  to  lie  nearing  his  destination. 
"  Usually  travelers  are  not  easily  siis- 
ceptilile  to  apjiaritions,  because  of  the 
motion  and  noise."  (Bkxgkl.)  Be- 
ing surrounded  with  companions  was 
not  favorable  to  an  imaginarj'  vision. 
The  journey  from  Jerusalem  to  Damas- 
cus would  require  about  five  days. 
What  route  he  took  can  only  be  con- 
jectured. Tlie  most  probable  .supj)osi- 
tion  is  that  he  went  by  way  of  Bethel 
to  Sychar  (John  4: 5),  and  then  either 
crossing  the  Jordan  south  of  the  Sea 
of  Galilee  near  Scythopolis,  pro- 
ceeded to  Gatlara  and  thence  to  Da- 
mascus; or  from  Sychar  going  uorth- 


Ch.  IX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


141 


toiheeaillj,aiiU  litard  a  voictsayiug,uuto  I       him   Saul,  Saul,  »  why  persecutes t  thou 


*  Isa.  63  :  0 ;  Matt.  25  :  40,  etc. 


wanl  and  crossiui^  the  Jordan  a  little 
aiiove  the  sea  l)y  Jacob's  Bridge,  he 
passeil  throiigli  the  desert  country  on 
the  east  of  xVnti-Lehaiion.  He  came 
near  Damascus.  A  loeal  tradition 
lixes  the  s])ot  "  not  half  a  niih'  from  tlie 
eastern  gate  of  the  town,  in  tlie  midst 
of  an  uninehjsed  eemetery.  Tlie  pres- 
ent road  is  here  purposely  diverted 
from  the  direct  course  for  a  few  yards, 
h-aving  apart  tlie  space  wliich  is  the 
alleged  scene  of  the  conversion.  The 
spot  thus  respected  is  evidently  a  por- 
tion of  the  ancient  road,  and  con- 
sists entirely  of  small  tirinly  bedded 
])el)l)les.  llavi  ng  never  been  broken  up, 
it  stands  alone  like  a  fragment  of  an 
elevated  causeway.  I  do  not  see  why 
this  is  not  likely  the  trni'  site.  But  be 
tliis  as  it  may,  the  features  of  the  land- 
scape are  the  same  that  Paul  saw  :  Ou 
the  left  Hermon  in  all  its  majesty,  the 
long  rang«  of  Anti-Lebanon,  gray  and 
bleak,  stretching  eastward,  the  broad 
plain  on  either  hand  with  its  many- 
tinted  foliage,  all  around  villages  em- 
bowered in  l)looniing  orehards,  and 
just  before  the  bright  buildings  nf  the 
city."  (Fish's  JJih/e  Latn/a  IllnMrdted, 
pp".  598-600.)  It  has  l>een  (.bserved 
that  Saul  was  arrested  in  the  height  of 
his  fury  and  near  the  end  of  his  journey 
and  the  eousunimation  of  his  purpose. 
So  God  often  deals  with  transgressors. 
For  example,  Pharaoh  (Exod.  U:26) ; 
Abimelech  (Judi,-.  ;t:d3),  Absalom  (zsam. 
i»  :  9),  Scnnnacherib  (n  Kiuga  19: 33)  and 
Haman  (Esth.-:  lo.) 

Suddenly  there  shined  —  there 
flashed.  In  suddenness  and  splendor 
like  lightning.  Around  him — 
specially  encircling  him,  and  not  his  at- 
tendants. From — according  to  the 
most  approved  reailiiig,  out  f*/ heaven 
— as  it  were  from  the  divine  ])resence. 
It  was  at  noon,  and  the  heavenly  light 
outdazzled  the  brightness  of  the  sun. 
{fi :  6 ;  2fi  ;  VI,  i.i. )  It  was  the  glory  of  the 
Lord,  the  Hhekinah,  so  often  spoken  of 
in  the  Old  Testament  (k.xoj.  m  :  ik  ;  40:  3+, 
35 ;  1  Kings  8  :  u ;  Isa.  f, :  .1. 4)  and  manifested 
ou  the  Mount  of  Transtigu ration  (Mark 
9:'^.  3),  and  to  John  on  Patinos  (Rev,  i: 
15-17).     While  this  glorious  light  about 


Saul  was  as  instantaneous  as  lightning, 
it  is  not  implied  that  it  was  as  brief. 
Yet  it  must  have  been  of  short  duration. 
It  ai)i)ears  that  in  that  light  Saul  saw 
the  Lord  Jesus.  So  Ananias  says : 
"Jesus,  who  ajipeared  unto  thee  in 
the  way  "  (ver.  i?) ;  and  Barnai)as  de- 
elai'es  that  Saul  "  had  seen  the  Lord  in 
the  way  "  (ver.  2-) ;  and  I'aul  frequently 
affirms  that  he  had  seen  .lesus,  and  was 
thus  a  witness   of  his   resurret'tion  (■-'-': 

U;  26:  16  ;  1  Cor.  9:  1  ;  lo  :  h).        Saul's     blilld- 

ness  for  three  days  resulted  from  this 
dazzling  light  (ver.  9;  22  :  11 ),  from  which 
he  proltably  never  fully  recovered. 
Dimness  of  sight  may  have  been  the 
"  thorn  in  the  llesh"  against  which  he 
fervently  ]jrayed  (2  dr.  12 : 7),  and  may 
account  for  his  failure  to  recognize  the 
high  2)rie.st  whom  he  reproved  in  the 
council.  (2:1:5.)  It  seems  also  to  throw 
light  on  (lal.  4  :  l.l,  where  Paul  says, 
"  Ye  wouM  have  ])lucked  out  your  own 
eyes  and  given  them  to  me,"  and  on 
txal.  t)  :  11  when  he  siteaks  of  "  the 
large  letters  I  wrote  to  yon  with  my 
own  liaml." 

4.  Filled  with  awe  and  reverence, 
and  in  great  astonishment,  Sanlisover- 
jyowered  and  falls  to,  rather  upon  the 
earth,  doubtless  from  the  animal  he 
was  riding.  (So«22:7.)  "I  fell  unto 
the  ground,"  implying  more  than  one 
merely  falling  while  walking.  And 
heard  a  voice — not  merely  a  sound, 
but  an  utterance,  sayinjr  to  him,  in- 
tended for  him  alone.  Yet  it  was  not 
spoken  in  Saul's  soul,  but  audibly, 
for  his  companions  also  heard  the 
sound  of  the  voice,  (ver. :.)  Saul, 
Saul — repeated  for  cmjihasis.  (seLuke 
10 : 4;  22 :3i.)  The  words  were  sjioken  in 
Hebrew  (26:  u) — that  is,  the  Aramtean, 
the  common  dialect  among  the  Jews  of 
that  da}'.  Accordingly,  the  shorter  He- 
brew form  of  his  uanie  is  used  here,  as 
well  as  in  ver.  17  ;  22  :  7, 13,  and  2(3 :  14, 
wdiile  the  longer  Greci.sed  form  is  found 
elsewliere  in  the  Acts.  Why  perse- 
cutest  thou  me?  Jesus  identifies 
himself  with  his  disciples  (Matt.  25: 40), 
and  makes  a  personal  appeal  to  Saul's 
conscience.  What  motive  have  you  ? 
What  wrong  have  I  done  you?    The 


142 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cu.  IX. 


5  me?  And  he  said,  Who  art  thou,  Lord? 
Aud  the  Lord  said,  I  am  Jesus  whom  thou 
persecutest.    lit  w  hard  for  thee  to  kick 

6  iigaiust  ihe  pricks.  And  he  trembling  and 


astonished  said,  Lord,  » what  wilt  thou 
have  me  to  do?  Aud  the  Lord  said  unto 
him,  » Arise,  and  go  into  the  city  and  it 
shall  be  told  thee  what  thou  must  do. 


Jch.  5:39;  Job  9:  4.        '  ch.  2  :  37;  16  :  30;  Luke  3  :  10.        «  Gal.  1  :  11-16. 


q^ufstion  was  fitted  to  arouse  convic- 
tion of  the  enormous  .sin  he  was  perpe- 
trating. It  is  also  tlie  utterance  of  one 
sutfcring  wrongfully,  implying  that 
Saul's  conduct  was  without  excuse,  and 
)»»sitively  wicked.  "  In  what  thing, 
great  or  small,  hast  thou  been  wronged 
by  nie,  tliat  thou  doest  these  things?  " 
(('HKYSOSTOM.)  "Saul  .strikes  in  Da- 
mascus ;  Christ  sutlers  in  heaven." 
(Hall.) 

5.  Who  art  thou,  Lord?  Rev- 
erential language.  Saul  may  have 
tliought  it  was  an  angel,  or,  perhaps, 
God  himself.  But  with  his  doubt  tliere 
may  have  come  a  .suspicion  of  the 
truth.  "  Conscience  would  readily  say, 
'It  is  Jesus.'"  (Bexgel.)  1  am 
Jesus  Avhoni  thou  persecutest. 
Again  he  identifies  himself  with  his 
disciples,  not  only  collectively,  but  also 
individually.  He  presses  home  upon 
Saul's  conscience,  tliat  he  is  a  i>erse- 
cutor  of  the  risen,  exalted,  and  glori- 
fied Jesus,  the  Lord  and  Saviour.  No- 
tice he  does  not  style  him.self  theSon  of 
God,  but  JesHS  (meaning  Sariitnr),  or 
"  Jesus  the  Nazareue"  (ti  -.  s)^  the  title 
by  wliich  he  was  generally  known,  and 
which  Saul  doulitless  had  often  used  in 
contem]>t.  How  the  truth  pierced  his 
inmost  soul,  that  he  was  "  a  blasphemer 
and  ]>ersecutor  aud  injurious."  (i  Tim. 
i:".)  It  is  hard  for  thee  to  kick 
ai^ainst  the  pricks — thcgomh.  These 
words  are  found  here  only  in  a  single 
Greek  manuscrij)t  and  in  some  ver- 
sions aud  belong  to  2tJ  :  14,  wliicli 
see.  Tiiey  were  probably  transferred 
to  this  passage  by  some  copyist.  "  Tin- 
chiuse  Itself  is  a  proverbial  one  of  fre- 
(pient  occurrence  in  the  Greek  and 
Latin  classics,  lieing  found  in  Pindar, 
ylvschylus,  Euripides,  Plantus  and  Ter- 
ence.'"'    (Alexander.) 

6.  And  he  trembling  and  as- 
tonished said.  These  words  are 
found  in  neither  of  the  three  accounts 
and  in  no  Greek  manuscrijit.  Lord, 
what  wilt  thou  have  me  to 
do  I    And   the    Lord    said    unto 


him.  Xo  Greek  manuscript  has  tliese 
words  in  this  place.  But  similar  words 
are  found  in  22  :  10.  The  whole  pas- 
.sage,  beginning  with  "It  is  hard" 
(ver,  5)and  continuing  to  this  j)oint,  is 
found  in  several  ancient  versions,  in- 
cluding the  Latin  Vulgate  and  the 
Syriac.  Erasmus  adojitcd  it  into  the 
Greek  text.  It  is  jiossihlc  that  these 
early  versions  may  rcjucscnt  (ireek 
manuscripts  older  than  any  extant,  but 
textual  critics  regard  it  as  an  interjio- 
latiou  originating  in  some  ancient 
copyist  filling  out  tlic  jiassage  from 
parallel  accounts.  It  is,  however,  ap- 
propriate and  in  accordance  with  wliat 
we  miglit  expect,  and  doulitless  ]>re- 
sents  what  is  substantially  true.  Arise 
and  go  into  the  city— a  test  of  faith 
and  obedience.  Tlie  question,  \\  hat 
shall  I  do,  Lord  ?  (■-'■! :  n>)  imjdicd  a 
recognition  of  Jesus  as  a  Divine  Master, 
and  a  subndssion  to  him.  Atthis  point 
we  may  regard  rcgoicration  as  liaving 
taken  place.  But  the  coniidetiiig  of 
the  ex])erience  in  conversion,  as  a  man- 
ifest fact  to  liimself  and  to  others,  took 
phiee  later  in  Damascus  under  the  min- 
istry of  Ananias.  (\er.  n.)  Even  tiie 
glorified  Jesus  did  not  undertake  to  in- 
struct a  penitent  inquirer  independent 
of  his  disciples.  How  differentlv  was 
Saul  to  enter  the  city  from  what  he  ex- 
ju'Cted.  Not  as  a  j>roud  rejiresentative 
of  the  Sanliedrin,  but  as  a  lunnble  dis- 
ci])le  of  the  desj)ised  Nazareue,  to  be 
instructed  by  one  of  those  whom  he 
had  expected  to  bring  bound  to  Jeru- 
salem. It  shall  be  told  thee  what 
thou  must  do — as  stated  and  implied 
in  ver.  17,  18.  It  appears  from  26  :  Ih- 
lf>  that  the  Lord  here  made  known  to 
Saul  Ids  mission  as  a  minister  and  an 
ajwstle.  (Gal.  1:1.)  It  was  reaflSrmed 
by  Ananias  (22 :  14. 15),  and  farther  con- 
finned  liy  our  Lord  to  Saul  in  a  trance 
in  the  temjde.  (22.17-22.)  This  seems 
the  most  natural  way  to  harmonize  the 
three  narratives.  The  account  of  Luke 
in  this  chapter  would  naturally  be  the 
shortest;    that  before  King  Agrippa 


Cii.  IX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


143 


7  Aiulbihe  men   wliiili  jiiuriie>ed  wilh 
him  stood  speechless,  heariii;;  a  voice,  hut 

8  seeing  no  man     And  Saul  arose  from  the 
earth ;  and  when  his  eyes  were  opened,  he 


saw   no  man :  but  they  led  him  hy  the 
liand,  and  brotigiit  him  into  Damascus. 
9  And  he  was  tliree  ilays   without  sight, 
and  neitlier  did  eat  nor  drink. 


b  ch.  irl  :  9  ;  Dan.  10  :  7. 


the  most  iuteuse,  and  tliat  Ix-fore  the 
.Jewish  niol)  tlie  more  jKiiticnlar  re- 
j;anlin;j;  the  wonls  of  Ananias,  "  a  de- 
vout man  aeeording  to  the  law."     (see 

ou  -ll  :  14  anil  26:  16.) 

7.  The  men  W;o  journeyed  with 

him — those  wiio  Mere  to  aid  Saul  in 
executiii;;  his  eouiiiiission,  perliaps 
soldiers  or  ottieers  of  justiee.  (Johu  7 :  .12.) 
Stood  speechless — or  iirre  standitKj 
speerhlexn,  amazed  and  powerless — tlie 
l>liiperfect  being  here  used  in  tiie  orig- 
inal, in  tlie  sense  of  the  imperfect.  But 
in  '2ii  :  14  Paul  says,  irhen  ire  were  all 
J'nllcn.  to  the  earth.  In  explanation  of 
tliis  seeming  discrepancy  it  may  be 
said  that  the  verb  utood  is  used  here 
not  as  opposed  to  falling  prostrate,  but 
to  going  forward.  In  a  general  Avay  it 
descril)es  the  etfect  of  their  a.'stonisli- 
ment,  in  overpowering  tliem  an<l  fixing 
them    to    the     S2)ot,    immovable    and 

SpeeellleSS.      (8:38;  Lukes  :  2.)       Biit    iu    a 

moment,  and  moments  would  seem 
long  at  such  a  time,  they  fall  to  the 
earth  as  Saul  had  done  under  tlie 
grejiter  revelation  he  received.  They 
may  have  fallen  just  as  they  began  to 
hear  the  voice.  Tlie  words  "  vr/(<'/(  we 
were,"  etc.,  are  in  harmony,  if  tliey  do 
not  imply  just  such  an  exjilanation  as 
this.  So  Dr.  Hackett  and  others.  A 
less  natural  explanation  is  given  liy 
Bengel  and  some  others :  That  all  fell 
to  the  earth  at  first,  Init  had  risen  be- 
fore Saul  of  their  own  accord.  Hear- 
ing a — rather,  hearing  indeed  the 
voice.  An  apparent  tliscrepancy  is 
found  in  22  :  0.  "  They  heard  not  the 
voice  that  spake  to  me,"  which  natur- 
ally means  they  understood  not  tli<' 
voice  that  spake  to  me  ]iersonally.  For 
examples  of  this  use  of  the  word  hear, 
see  Mark  4 :  33 ;  1  Cor.  14:2;  .Tohn  (j :  (JO ; 
Gal.  4  :  2tt,  21.  Saul's  comiianions  heard 
indeed  a  voice,  but  did  not  so  hear  as  to 
know  what  it  said.  We  often  say  that 
we  do  not  hear  a  public  sjieaker  when 
we  mean  that  though  we  hear  his  voice, 
yet  from  indi.stinct  or  low  utteranceB, 
we  fail  to  understand  him.    So  Saul  re- 


ceived a  clear  imiiression  of  what  was 
said  to  him,  while  iiis  comiianions  re- 
ceived an  indefinite  one.  lie  heard 
au<l  understood  the  words,  which  to 
them  were  only  as  a  .sotind.  See  John 
12  :  28,  20,  where  are  recordeil  the 
words  that  came  to  .Jesus,  but  the  mul- 
titude understood  them  not,  liut 
thought  it  thundered.  But  seeing 
no  man — seeming  to  imply  that  Saul 
had  seen,  or  did  see,  at  this  time,  Jesus 
the  Christ. 

8.  And  Saul  arose — or,  more 
strictly,  was  aroimed  or  rained.  For 
a  time  he  lay  upon  the  ground  over- 
powered Avith  the  glory  of  the  divine 
presence.  His  companions  rise  from 
their  prostrate  position.  Tiiey  are 
ready  to  help  him  ;  he  finds  anefibrt  nec- 
es.sary  to  break  the  spell  that  holds  him, 
and  to  rise  upon  his  feet.  Hisobediciu-i,' 
is  partially  passive,  btit  not  entirely  so, 
for  there  was  the  actof  the  will,  and  an 
efibrt  in  rising,  .standing,  opening  the 
eyes,  and  walking  into  the  city.  And 
this  obedience  is  the  first  indication  of 
an  inward  cliange.  When  his  eyes 
Were  opened — implying  that  they 
were  closed  while  lying  upon  the 
ground.  He  saw  no  man — being 
blind.  The  highest  critical  authorities, 
however,  prefer  here  the  stronger  read- 
ing. Ife  saw  nothinij,  totally  blind, 
and  hence  the  greater  necessity  of  l>eing 
led  by  the  hand.  They  brought — 
conducted  him  into  Damascus.  Not 
going,  as  he  had  exjiected,  as  a  leader, 
to  seize  and  imprison,  but  led  by  the 
hands  of  others,  blind,  trembling,  and 
helidess,  through  the  gateway  of  the 
city  and  the  street  called  Straight,  to 
lodge  alone  in  the    house  of   Judas. 

(Ver.  n.) 

9.  Three  days — probably  that  day, 
the  next,  and  the  day  following.  (See 
Matt.  12 :  .w,  id.)  Accordiug  to  .Jewish  reck- 
oning it  may  have  heen  either  one 
whole  day  ami  jiortions  of  two  others, 
or  three  whole  days.  Without  sight — 
not  seein.f/,  the  expression  implying 
that  the  blindness  was  not  necessarily 


144 


THE  ACTS. 


IX. 


10  And  there  was  a  certain  disciple  at 
Damascus  "named  Ananias  ;  and  to  him 
said  the  Lord  in  a  vision,  Ananias.    And 

11  he  said,  Behold,  I  am  here.  Lord.    And 


the  Lord  snid  unto  him,  Arise,  and  go 
into  the  street  which  is  called  Straight, 
and  inquire  in  the  house  of  Judas  for 
one.  called  Saul,  ^of  Tarsus.    For,  behold, 


•  ch.  22  :  12.        ^  eh.  21 :  39  ;  22  :  3. 


permanent ;  yet  it  did  not  pass  away  of 
itself,  as  we  learn  from  ver.  17,  18. 
Neither  did  eat  nordiiiik.  He  fasts 
and  j)rays  (»r.  ii)  alone.  Christians  are 
afraid  oi"  liim  ;  he  eannot  eon.snlt  them. 
.Jews  eannot  symj)athize  with  him. 
Tlie  rememliranee  of  Stephen  anil  tiie 
diseiples  wliom  he  had  persecuted  fills 
him  with  shame  :  his  oj)position  to  and 
hatred  of  .lesns  tills  him  with  j)enitenee. 
The  words  of  Jesus,  "  Why  jierseeutest 
thou  me?  "  must  have  runi,'  in  liis  ears  ; 
while  Christ's  directing  and  ])rophetie 
Avord.s  aroused  his  hopes.  Ilis  whole 
being  is  absorbed  in  agonizing  jirayer 
and  longing  expectation.  The  lessons 
he  now  learned  are  told  us  in  Rom.  7  : 
7-12. 

10.  Ananias — nothing  is  known 
of  him  l)eyond  what  is  said  in  the  Acts. 
He  is  here  s])oken  of  by  the  historian 
as  a  certain  disciple,  but  not  tiie 
only  one  in  Damascus,  (ver.  ist.)  Paul 
in  his  conciliatory  aildress  beft>re  the 
Jewish  mol)  very  natui'ally  onuts  tliis 
designation,  and  sj)eaks  of  him  as  "a 
devout  man  according  to  the  law,  well 
reported  by  all  the  .lews  that  dwelt 
there."  (-n -.  v..)  Before  Agri]>i>a,  Paul 
had  no  occasion  to  mention  him.  The 
Lord — Christ  as  in  ver.  5-17.  A 
vision — the  word  thus  tran.slated  is 
found  here,  in  ver.  12  ;  7  :  31  ;  10  : 
3,  17,  19;  11  :  5;  12  :  !1 ;  16  :  9,  10; 
18  :  9;  Matt.  17  :  9,  but  not  elsewhere 
in  the  New  Testament.  It  does  not 
mean  something  unreal,  but  a  sitrht 
divinely  given  and  actually  seen.  "  By 
vision  in  the  Bible  is  generally  meant 
an  experience  in  wliicli  the  jierson 
retains  his  consciousness,  in  which  re- 
spect it  differs  from  a  trance,  anil  the 
object  shown  to  him  ]>o.ssesses  a  real 
existence,  in  which  res]>ect  it  differs 
from  a  dream."  (Abuott.)  {See  in 
Old  Testament  1  Sam.  3  :  1.3  ;  Dan.  2  : 
19;  7  :  2;  8  :  1.) 

11.  Arise  and  go — implying  a 
change  of  position  and  also  motion  ;  but 
the  words  <lo  not  determine  the  jiositiou 
of  Auauias,  whether  he  was  lying  down 


or  sitting  up.  Into,  %ipun  the  street, 
strictly  an  aUry  or  lane.  (Luke  u:  21-) 
Called  Straight — ^perhaps  in  distinc- 
tion from  some  which  were  crooked. 
There  is  at  present  in  Damascus  a  long 
straight  street  running  from  the  eastern 
to  the  western  gate.  In  a|)Ostolic  times 
it  was  a  noble  thoroughfare,  one  hun- 
dred feet  wide,  divided  by  Corinthian 
colonna<les  into  thi-ee  avenues,  the  cen- 
tral one  for  foot  ])assnigcrs,  the  side 
pas.sages  for  vehicles  and  horsemen. 
Ilemains  of  the  colonnades  arc  said 
still  to  be  seen,  though  the  street  is 
contracted  into  a  narrow  cue.  The 
guides  call  it  Straight ;  the  natives 
Street  of  Bazaars  ;  otiiers  know  it  as 
(^ueen  Street.  Tradition  places  the 
house  of  Judas  in  tliis  street.  It  is 
doubtful  whether  such  a  tlioroughfare 
wouhl  have  been  styled  l>y  such  a  word 
as  (til in/.  Besides,  the  manner  of  the 
direction,  "  the  street  called  Straight," 
would  naturally  suggest  a  less  import- 
ant street  than  the  princi])al  thorough- 
fare of  the  city.  Jiidaswasa  common 
name  among  Jews,  i)ut  nothing  more  is 
known  of  tliis  one.  For  one  called 
Saul — implying  that  Ananias  was  not 
ac<iuainted  with  him,  though  he  had 
heard  of  him.  (ver.  i:i.)  Of  Tarsus — 
the  city  where  he  was  born.  (.!2:3.) 
This  was  "no  mean  city  "  (21 : -is),  but 
the  chief  city  and  ea])ital  of  Cilicia  in 
Asia  Minor,  and  built  on  both  sides  of 
the  river  Cydnus.  Xenophon  describes 
it  as  a  great  and  flourishing  city,  and 
Strabo  praises  it  as  a  seat  of  science  and 
learning.  It  was  the  rival  of  Athens 
and  Alexandria,  and  many  distin- 
guished nu'n  were  educated  there.  It 
still  exi.st.s  under  tlie  name  of  Tofoox, 
and  contains  about  thirty  thousand  in- 
habitants. Behold,  he  prayeth — 
has  been  and  is  now  praying.  Not  as 
formerly  as  a  Pharisee  (i.uke  is  :  u),  but 
as  a  penitent,  seeking  pardon  and  di- 
rection. His  former  supplications  were 
unwortiiy  the  name  of  i)rayer.  His 
praying  and  the  answer  given  (ver.  12) 
indicate  an  inner  change.    The  fact  is 


Ch.  IX] 


THE  ACTS. 


145 


12  lie  prayeth,  aud  hath  seen  in  a  vision  a 
man  named  Ananias  cuiuing  in,  aud  put- 
ting his  hand  on  liiiu,  tliat  he  might  re- 

I'i  ccive  his  sight.    Then  Ananias  answered, 

Lord.l  have  lieard  by  many  of  this  man, 

« liow  much  evil  he  hath  done  to  thy  saints 

«  ch.  8  :  :J.  '1  (Jur.  1  :  2 ;  2  Tim.  2  :  22.  i  ch.  l:i  :  2 ;  Jer.  1:5;  R.im.  1:1;  Gal.  1  :  l.->, 
10 ;  Eph.  3  :  7,  8  ;  2  Tim.  1:11.  ^  Kom.  11  :  13 ;  Gal.  2  :  7,  8.  '  ch.  25  :  22,  23 ;  26  ;  27  :  24. 
k  ch.  13  :  4t; ;  2H  :  17-23. 


14  at  Jerusalem  :  and  here  he  hath  authority 
from  the  cliief  priests  to  bind  all  'that 

15  call  on  thy  name.  But  the  Lord  said 
unto  him,  Uo  thy  way:  for  she  is  a 
chosen  vessel  unto  me,  to  bear  my  name 
b.i'fore  •'the  Gentiles,  and  'kings,  ^  and 


stated  to  a.ssure  Ananias  that  Saul  was 
a  fit  subject  to  visit,  aud  needed  his 
attention  aud  ministry. 

12.  Hath  seen — or  saw,  a  man. 
Saul  received  his  vision  first.  The  two 
visions  confirmed  each  other,  as  in  tlie 
case  of  Cornelius  and  Peter,  (lo :  3, 17.) 
Tlie  word  vision  is  omitted  by  several 
of  the  oldest  manuscripts,  but  whether 
omitted  or  retained,  tlie  meaning  is  the 
same.  A  man  named  Ananias— 
this  indicates  that  Ananias  was  a  stran- 
ger to  Saul,  and  now  is  first  made 
known  to  him  by  name.  Putting  his 
hand,  or  hands,  on  him — to  encour- 
age his  faith,  and  as  a  symbol  of  au- 
thority aud  of  power  in  restoring  Saul's 
sight.  (Seeou  ver.  17.)  It  is  iioted  l)y 
Ciirysostom  that  this  commission  is  en- 
trusted to  an  unknown  disciple,  that  it 
might  not  be  said  that  Paul's  apostle- 
ship  depended  on  any  human  teaching. 

13.  Ananias  ansAvered,  etc.  He 
hesitates,  and  states  his  misgivings 
with  great  frankness  and  simplicity. 
Such  instances  of  hesitation  and  un- 
willingness are  common  in  Scripture. 
Very  marked  were  those  of  Moses  (Exod. 
s :  111,-!),  and  Jeremiah.  (Jer.  i :  6.)  "  The 
objections  of  Ananias  and  tlie  removal 
of  them  by  the  Lord  display  in  a  very 
touching  manner  the  childlike  relation 
of  a  believing  soul  to  its  Redeemer. 
Ananias  speaks  witli  him  as  a  man  does 
to  his  friend."  (Olshauskn.)  Lord, 
I  have  heard,  etc.  Can  it  be  possible 
tliat  I  am  sent  on  such  an  errand  to 
Saul  of  Tarsus!  Tlie  answer  sliows 
that  Saul  had  attained  great  notoriety, 
and  that  some  time  had  elapseil  since 
lie  began  his  ])ersecution.  Disciples 
may  have  fled  from  Jerusalem  to  Da- 
mascus ;  letters  also  had  doubtless  been 
received  from  the  persecuted  brethren. 
The  unbelieving  Jews  also  would  hear 
of  Saul's  terrible  work.  (22  ;j9.)  He 
hath  done — rather.  He  did  to  thy 
saints— the  first   time   that  the  fol- 


lowers  of  Christ  are  called  saints,  styled 
before  this  "disciples"  (6;i)  or  "be- 
lievers." (.t:U.)  By  this  designation 
Christians  are  indicated  as  tho.se  whom 
(jrod  has  chosen  out  from  the  world  (JoUn 
17 :  u,  16),  separated  and  consecrated  to 
his  service,  and  by  the  Holy  Spirit 
made    partakers    of   salvation    in  the 

kingdom  of  God.        (1  Peter  2:9;  Rom.  1:7.) 

14.  Ananias'  great  surprise  may 
have  been  coupled  with  a  fear,  least 
"  even  now  only  evil  to  the  cause  of 
Christ  was  to  be  dreaded  after  his 
contemplated  restoration  to  sight." 
(Meyer.)  And  here  he  hath  au- 
thority, etc.  How  he  learned  this  can- 
not be  known.  Saul  may  have  visite<l 
other  cities  on  his  way  (26: 11),  the  news 
of  his  coming  preceded  him,  or  his 
companions  may  have  made  known  his 
mi.ssion  to  Damascus,  or  perhaps  letters 
had  been  received  by  the  disciples  from 
brethren  in  Jeru.salem,  warning  them 
of  his  coming.  All  that  call  on — in 
their  own  behalf,  or  all  who  invoke 
thy  name.  (2:21 ;  7 :59.)  It  is  evident 
that  Ananias  was  speaking  to  Christ ; 
and  that  apostolic  Christians  were  ac- 
customed to  pray  to  him.  It  was  char- 
acteristic ;  tliey  were  the  callers  upon 

Christ.  (Ver.  21;  22:16;  1  Cor.  1  :  2  ;  2  Tim- 
2:22.) 

15.  The  Lord  repeats  the  simple 
command,  Go.  Omit  thy  way,  not 
being  needed  in  tlie  translation.  At  the 
same  time  the  Lord  adds  a  reason  for 
going,  which  would  also  allay  any 
fears :  For  he  is  a  chosen  vessel 
unto  me — an  instrument  selected  and 
elected  by  God  for  a  great  work   in  my 

kingdom.         (Kom.  1  :  1 ;  1  C.ir.  1:1;  Gal.  1  :  1.) 

It  is  a  Hebraistic  idea,  as  of  an  imjile- 
ment  moulded  and  i)repared  in  the 
hands  of  the  potter.     (is».  45 : 9,  u ;  jer.  i« : 

4:    Rom.  9:21-23;    2   Cor.  4:7;    2  Tim.  2:20,  21.) 

The  purpose  for  which  he  is  chosen : 
To  bear  my  name— proclaiming  me 
as   the   Messiah   and    the   Eedeemer. 


146 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IX. 


lii  the  children  of  Isiael:  'for  I  will  show 
him  how  great  things  he  must  butfer  for 
my  name's  sake. 

17  ""And  Ananiiis  went  his  way,  and  en- 
tered into  the  house;  and  putting  his 
hands  on  him  said,  Brother   Saul,  the 


Lord,  even  Jesiis,  that  appeared  unto  thee 
in  the  way  as  thou  earnest,  hath  sent  me, 
that  thou  mightest  receive  thy  sight,  and 
18  "  be  tilled  with  the  Holy  .Spirit.  And  im- 
mediately there  fell  from  his  eyes  as  it 
had  been  scales:  and  he  received  sight 


1  ch.  21 :  11 ;  2  Cor.  11  :  23-27. 


'  ch.  22  :  12, 1:J.        "  ch.  8  :  17. 


Before — publicly.  By  implication, 
holding  lip  my  5lessiauic  name  as  a 
banner.  The  Gentiles — omit  the 
article:  Gentiles,  and  kim/s,  and  sons 
of  Israel.  Ue  was  the  apostle  to  the 
Gentiles  (Gai.  2: 7,  s),  but  at  the  same 
time  he  preached  to  the  Jews  when- 
ever he  had  opportunity.  (13:4«i.)  lie 
also  witnessed  before  kings,  such  as 
Agrippa  at  C;esarea  (20:1,13),  and  the 
Emperor  Nero  at  Kome  (2  Tim.  4 ;  v.i),  and 
before  Roman  governors  as  Sergius 
Paulus,  Gallio,  Felix,  and  Festus.    (i»: 

«  ;  24  :  25;  25  :  23  ;  26  :  32.)        JeSUS     tllUS     aU- 

uounces  to  Ananias  the  coinmission  of 
Saul,  and  Ananias  apj)eais  to  have  de- 
clared its  substance  to  >^aul  (22;  is), 
although  it  is  not  here  directly  affirmed. 
Jesus  seems  to  have  previously  an- 
nounced it  to  Saul  (26: 16-1^.),  and  after- 
ward repeated  it  when  he  was  about  to 
actually  engage  in  his  work.     (22 :  23.) 

IG.  JE-'or — introducing  a  reason  why 
and  how  Saul  would  l)e  a  chosen  vessel : 
For  in  this  capacity  and  work  I  will 
show  him — in  his  experience,  and 
indicate  to  him  by  my  providence,  and 
by  prophetic  intimations,  what  suffer- 
ings he  must  endure,  in  i>rofessing  and 
proclaiming  my  name.  In  hearing  my 
name  he  mu.st  sutfer  as  well  as  do.  "  / 
will  shov  him  is  in  Greek  a  most  ex- 
pressive phrase,  meaning:  Iwilli)artly 
show  him,  or  begin  to  sliow  him,  I  am 
giving  hint  a  glimpse  of  what  he  is  to 
suffer.  Tlie  pronoun  has  more  emj)hasis 
ill  the  original,  and  may  perhaps  mean, 
I  and  not  thou  ;  that  is,  do  thy  )>art  as 
it  has  been  assigned  to  thee,  and  I  will 
do  mine,  by  disclosing  to  him  what  he 
is  to  suffer."  (Alexander.)  In  20  : 
23;  21  :  11-13,  we  may  see  how  these 
sufferings  were  made  known  to  him 
from  time  to  time.  See  2  Cor.  11  : 
23-28  for  a  list  of  his  sufferings.     (See 

John  16:3.1;  1  Cor.  4  :  9-13.) 

17.  Ananias  at  once  obeys,  goes  and 
finds  the  house  of  Judas  (ver.  11)  and 
Saul.     Putting    his   hands    upon 


him.      (Seeonver.  11,  andS:  17.)      Brother 

Saul — not  merely  as  a  Jew,  but  as  one 
of  the  household  of  faith.  Ananias 
recognizes  Saul's  new  spiritual  relation- 
ship. The  Lord,  even  Jesus,  that 
appeared  unto  thee — the  one  seen 
by  thee,  in  the  way.  In  after  days 
Paul  declares  that,  as  a  mark  of  his 
apo.stleship,  he  had  seen  the  Lord. 
(1  Cor. 9:1;  15:  8.)  Hath  Sent  me — 
The  Lord  had  sent  Ananias  to  minister 
to  Saul  that  he  might  l)e  healed  of  his 
blindness,  and  be  brought  out  into  the 
glorious  liberty  of  the  gos])el.  The 
substance  of  what  Anauias  further  said 
to  him  is  recorded  in  22  :  14-lti,  regard- 
ing his  great  work  as  a  preacher  of  the 
gospel  and  his  immediate  duty  of  bap- 
tism. In  all  this  it  does  not  ajipear 
that  the  putting  on  of  hands  had  any 
reference  to  Saul's  ordination,  or  to  a 
rite  of  confirmation. 

18.  There  fell  from  his  eyes — 
implying  something  real ;  not  a  mere 
sensation,  as  if  something  fell.  As  it 
had  been  scales— resembling  scales. 
Luke's  minute  description  betrays  the 
physician.  Hippocrates,  the  prince 
and  father  of  real  medical  science, 
a]iplies  the  name  "scales"  to  a  certain 
di.sease  of  the  eyes.  In  the  Aj)ocrvpha 
(Tobit  11  :  8,  13,  16)  a  "  whiteness  "  or 
incrustration  is  mentioned  as  peeling 
off  the  eyes  of  Tobit,  and  he  receives 
his  siglit.  The  dazzling  splendor  of 
the  divine  light  had  produced  a  kind 
of  film  over  the  sight  (22:11),  which 
suddenly  ami  hence  miracuously  fell 
off,  tlirough  the  ]>ower  of  the  Lord 
Jesus  (ver.  17),  while  Ananias  was  speak- 
ing to  him.  And  he  received 
sight — looked  up,  which  to  him  was  a 
token  of  the  divine  favor,  and  a  con- 
firmation of  the  truth  and  reality  of 
what  he  had  seen,  felt,  and  heard. 
Forthwith  is  not  found  in  the  best 
manuscripts,  and  is  not  necessarj'  in 
this  connection.  Nothing  is  here  said 
of  his  receiving  the  Holy  Sj)irit ;  but 


Ch.  IX.J 


THE  ACTS. 


H7 


forthwith,  and  arose,  and  was  baptized. 
19  And  when  he  had  received  meat,  he  was 
strengthened. 


"Then  was  Saul  certain  days  with  the 

20  disciples  which  were  at  Damascus.    And 

p  straightway  he  preached  Christ  in  the 


0  ch.  26  :  '20. 


from  ver.  17  it  is  reasonable  to  couclude 
that  the  gifts  of  the  Spirit  were  con- 
ferred on  him,  either  now,  or  after  his 
baptism.  It  is  not  necessary  in  this  in- 
stance to  suppose  this  connected  with 
laying  on  of  hands,  but  may  have 
occurred  similar  to  the  bestowmeut 
upon  Cornelius  and  his  comjiany. 
(10:44.)  The  fact  that  the  gifts  of  the 
Spirit,  of  which  he  enjoyed  great 
abundance  (i  Cor.  u :  is),  is  not  here  men- 
tioned seems  significant.  This,  witli 
the  o!)scurity  of  Ananias,  may  be 
among  those  things  that  point  to  Paul  as 
independent  of  human  authority,  "au 
apostle,  not  of  men,  neither  through 
man,  but  through  Jesus  Clirist,  and 
God  the  Father."  (g..i.  i :  i.)  And 
arose — showing  that  he  accepted 
Christ  and  proposed  to  enter  actively 
upon  his  service.  And  was  bap- 
tized— in  compliance  with  the  Lord's 
command,  and  the  exhortation  of  Ana- 
nias (2'i:i6),  perhaps  in  one  of  the 
rivers  of  Damascus  (-'  Kiugs  5 :  12),  or  very 
likely  in  the  reservoir  in  the  court  of 
the  house  of  Judas,  such  as  those  with 
which  the  better  class  of  houses  were 
supplied.  That  he  became  a  member 
of  the  chui-cli  of  Damascus  is  implied 
in  the  next  verse. 

19.  His  fast  now  ended.  Had 
taken  meat — haoiiuj  taken  food — he 
Avas  strengthened.  He  had  been 
weakened,  not  only  by  the  three  days 
fasting,  but  also  through  the  overwhelm- 
ing divine  influence,  and  his  intense 
mental  suffering  and  activity.  At  this 
point  the  account  of  his  conversion 
properly  ends. 

Luke  now  very  briefly  records  Saul's 
residence  at  Damascus,  during  which 
time  he  "  went  into  Arabia  and  returned 
again  unto  Damascus."  (Gui.  1 :  n.)  The 
wliole  time  thus  occupied  was  three 
years  (Gal.  1 :  18),  which  may  be  taken, 
according  to  Jewish  reckoning,  either 
for  three  complete  years,  or  for  one 
whole  year  and  portions  of  two  other 
years.  The  certain  days  of  this 
verse,  probably  several  weeks,  and  "  the 
many  days  "  of  ver.  23,  with  the  inter- 


vening time,  embrace  the  three  years 
from  Saul's  conversion  to  his  first  visit 
to  Jerusalem  after  that  event.  His  lan- 
guage in  Gal.  1  :  17,  naturally  implies 
that  he  went  into  Arabia  soon  after  his 
conversion ;  and  his  object  in  going 
there  appears  to  have  been,  not  to 
preach  the  gospel,  but  for  the  study  of 
the  Scrijitures  and  for  meditation  and 
prayer.  (See o. ver. 26.)  This  may  sug- 
gest the  reason  why  Luke  passes  over 
this  sojourn  in  Arabia,  since  it  belonged 
to  his  inner  and  private  life,  and  con- 
tained nothing  of  interest  and  instruc- 
tion for  Christians  of  after  ages.  Nor 
is  it  strange  that  Luke,  in  a  brief  sketch 
of  Paul's  conversion  and  early  life, 
should  pass  over  this  event.  Paul  does 
it  himself  in  his  rapid  narrative  in  22 : 
1(3  :  17.  The  exact  i)oint  of  this  visit 
to  Arabia  may  be  fixeil  immediately 
after  the  "certaiii  dai/a"  of  this  verse. 
Arabia  was  the  well-known  |>eninsula, 
l)ounded  by  Egypt,  Palestine,  Syria, 
Mesopotamia,  Babylonia,  the  Persian 
Gulf,  the  Red  Sea,  and  tlie  Ocean.  It 
was  often  used  generally  and  indefi- 
nitely. Some  suppose  that  it  may  have 
included  in  this  instance  Damascus, 
and  that  Saul's  residence  there  Mas  his 
sojourn  in  Arabia.  But  this  is  incon- 
sistent with  Gal.  1  :  17,  18,  whcn-e  Paul 
says  he  "  returned  again  to  Damascus." 
Then  Saul,  etc.  Omit  Saitf,  and 
read.  And  he  was,  or  more  exactly,  /le 
became  with  the  disciples — he  was 
with  them  as  one  of  them,  not  onlj' 
socially,  but  a  member  of  the  company 
of  lielievers  at  Damascus.  The  lan- 
guage implies  more  tlian  that  he  was  a 
visitor  with  tiiein.  His  character  liad 
undergone  a  change,  and  a  consequent 
change  of  relationsliip  to  the  disciples 
is  recognized  by  them,  and  acted  upon 
by  himself. 

20.  And  straightAvay — immedi- 
ately after  he  was  strengthened  and  be- 
came one  of  the  Christian  brotherhood 
(ver.  i»),  during  the  "  certain  days." 
He  preached  Christ — rather,  accord- 
ing to  the  highest  critical  authorities, 
Jems,  the  one  he  had  met  in  the  way. 


148 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IX- 


synagogues,  <i  that  he  is  the  Son  of  God. 
21  But  all  that  heard  him  were  amazed,  and 
said,  ^Is  not  Ibis  he  that  destroyed  tliem 
which  called  on  this  name  in  Jerusalem, 
and  came  hither  for  that  intent,  that  he 
might  bring  them  bound  unto  the  chief 


22  priests?  But  Saul  ^ increased  the  more 
in  strength,  'and  confounded  the  Jews 
which  dwelt  at  Damascus,  proving  that 
this  is  very  Christ. 

23  And  after  that  many  days  were  ful- 
filled, » the  Jews  took  counsel  to  kill  him : 


q  1  John  4  :  14.        '  Gal.  1  :  13,  23.        •  Job  17  ; 


t  ch.  18  :  28.        "  ch.  23  :  12  ;  25  :  3. 


Jfe proc/aimcd  Jesus,  that  he  is  the 
Son  of  God,  a  divine  being,  sharing 
the  divine  glory  and  worthy  of  divine 
honor.  "  The  Son  of  God  "  was  one  of 
tlie  Jewish  titles  of  the  Messiah.  So 
Nathanael  and  Peter  addressed  Jesus. 
(John  1 :  49 ;  Malt  16 :  16.)  But  Saul  had  met 
tlie  glorified  Jesus  and  had  received 
juore  than  the  Jewish  conception.  He 
accepted  his  Pivine  Sonship,  and  pro- 
claimed it,  which  included  his  Mes- 
sialiship.  Afterward  we  are  told  (ver.  22) 
he  gave  special  attention  to  the  latter, 
"  proving  that  this  is  the  Christ."  In 
the  synagogues — which  to  a  large 
extent  were  the  meeting  places  and 
jmlpits  of  the  early  Christians,     (istu; 

17:1;    18  :   4.    See  ou  ch.  6:9.)         It     WaS      a 

marked  design  of  Providence  that  the 
synagogues  should  thus  facilitate  the 
spread  of  the  gospel. 

21.  All  that  heard  him  Avere 
amazed — that  is,  the  Jesvs.  The  dis- 
ciples in  Damascus  had  heard  of  his 
conversion.  (ver.  19.)  Said — within 
them.selves  and  to  one  another.  De- 
stroyed— put  to  death.  Paul  uses  the 
same  word  in  CJal.  1  :  13,  23.  The 
Jews  put  it  strongly.  It  was  indeed  a 
cause  for  astonishment  to  them  ;  a  mir- 
acle of  the  gracious  Spirit,  that  such 
an  one  should  be  so  changed,  and  that 
too  in  a  day !  That  called  on  this 
name — of  Jesus.  This  characteristic 
of  the  early  disciples  again  comes  into 
view.  (See  on  ver.  u.)  Unto  the  chief 
priests — representing  the  Sanhedrin, 
as  its  leading  members,     (see  on  ver.  1.) 

22.  But  Saul  increased,  etc. — 
was  strengthened  still  more  in  faith, 
purpose  and  knowledge  and  in  appre- 
hending and  forcibly  and  powerfully 
l)resenting  the  truth.  (See  1  hii.4: 1.3 ;  Eph. 
3:1619.)  He  became  stronger  in  his 
s))iritual  life  and  as  a  preacher.  This 
seems  to  be  a  general  statement,  true 
not  only  of  his  early  days  at  Damascus, 
l)iit  also  of  tlie  "many  days  "  (ver.  2.1) 
after  his  return  from  Arabia.    Con- 


founded— confused  and  greatly  per- 
plexed the  Jews.  His  arguments 
threw  them  into  a  state  of  bewilder- 
ment. (2:6.)  Proving — hy  briiiff))ig to- 
(jether  the  words  of  the  prophets  and 
the  life  and  work  of  Jesus,  and  show- 
ing their  agreement,  or  deinoustrathuj 
that  this  is  very  Christ,  by  showing 
the  fulfillment  of  the  Messianic  i)re- 
dictions  in  the  life,  death,  and  resur- 
rection of  Jesus.  Thus  the  Jews  were 
put  to  silence,  and  their  perplexity  and 
chagrin  ripen  at  length  into  bitter 
hatred  and  persecution,     (vcr.  23.) 

23-30.  Saul's  Flight  from  Da- 
MAScuTs,  Return  to  Jerusalem,  and 
Withdrawal  to  Tarsus.    (22 :  n.21 ; 

26  :  20 ;  2  Cor.  11  :  22,  32,  33 ;  Gal.  1  ;  18-24 ;  Eph.  3  :  »; 

Phil.  3:5. 6.)  The  period  embraced  in 
these  verses  occupied  several  months, 
perhaps  a  year;  probably  during 
parts  of  A.  D.  37  and  38.  Saul  had  re- 
turned from  Arabia,  where  he  may 
have  spent  a  year  or  more  in  the  vicin- 
ity of  Petra,  amid  the  rocks  of  Edom, 
and  in  the  great  desert  of  Mount  Siuai 
(Gill.  4 :  25),  in  retirement,  meditation,  and 
study.  (See  on  ver.  19.)  He  had  grown 
in  sjiiritual  life  and  as  a  jtreacher, 
and  was  becoming  at  Damascus 
what  Stephen  had  been  at  Jerusalem. 
(6 :  10.  See  on  ver.  22.)  Compai'c  Havmonic 
Arrangement  on  i;  17. 

23.  Many  days  were  fulfilled — 
completed.  A  considerable  time  is 
meant,  (ver.  43 ;  18 :  If.)  It  may  indicate 
an  indefinitely  longer  or  shorter  ])eriod. 
Thus  in  Paul's  voyage  to  Komc,  when 
dreary  days  seemeil  like  weeks  and 
montlis,  it  is  said,  sailed  sloirh/  m<in;i 
daijs  (2":'),  meaning  jirobably  about 
twelve  days.  Ou  the  other  luiud,  ina 
brief  narrative  it  may  .stand  for  two  or 
three  years.  See  1  Kings  2  :  38,  39, 
wlieie  "  many  days "  were  "  three 
years."  Tlius  the  phrase  here  may  in- 
clude Saul's  sojourn  in  Arabia  and  his 
subsequent  residence  at  Damascus ;  or 
it   may  be  limited  to  the  latter.    In 


Ch.  IX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


149 


24  but  tlie'ir  laying  wait  was  known  of  SaiU. 
And   tliey   watched  tlie  gates    day   and 

25  night  to  kill  him.     Ihen  the  disciples 


took  him  by  night,  and  "let  hvm  down 
by  the  wall  in  a  basket. 


'  Josh.  2  :  15  ;  1  Sam.  19  :  12. 


either  case,  we  may  suppose  that  the 
larijer  part  of  the  three  years  before  re- 
turniiii;  to  Jerusalem  was  spent  in 
Araliia.  {Oiii.  i :  i7,  is.)  This  may  ac- 
count for  tiie  comparative  ignorance  of 
tlie  disciples  at  Jerusalem  concerning 
him.  (Ver.  2ti.)  This  second  residence 
at  Damascus,  however,  must  have  been 
longer  than  the  first  (ver.  is),  j)rol)ably 
from  tliree  to  six  montlis.  This  would 
be  sutKeient  time  for  the  beginning  and 
growtli  of  the  organized  opposition 
against  him.  The  Jews  took  coun- 
sel— i)lotted  together  deliberately  to 
kill  him.  At  tirst  they  were  amazed 
that  the  most  violent  persecutor  of  the 
Nazarenes  luid  himsi'lf  become  an 
ardent  disciple.  Then  they  attempted 
to  meet  him  in  argument,  but  were  put 
to  silence.  Then  followed  hatred,  bit- 
terness, organized  opposition,  and  per- 
secution. The  Jews  at  Damascus  had 
no  legal  right  to  kill  hhti,  but  througU 
the  governor  (called  the  Ethnarch) 
under  Aretas,  the  king,  they  might  ac- 
comj>lish  it.  (2Cor.  n:M.)  It  appears 
that  Aretas,  king  of  Arabia,  who  was 
father-in-law  to  llerod  Antipas,  got  pos- 
session of  Damascus  upon  the  death  of 
the  Emperor  Tiberius,  A.  D.  37,  and 
held  it  for  a  year  oi'  more. 

24.  But  their  laying  wait,  fheir 
plot,  was  known,  became  known  to 
Sditl,  probably  by  rejwrt.  (See23:i6-) 
They  watched,  were  watchiny  all 
the  time,  day  and  night,  while  Saul 
made  his  escape.  In  2  Cor.  11  :  32, 
Paul  says  that  at  this  time  "  the  gov- 
ernor under  Aretas,  the  king,  kept 
guard  over  the  city  of  the  Damascenes." 
It  thus  ajjpears  that  the  guard  con- 
sisted of  these  Jews  or  that  the  Jews 
were  watching  in  connection  with  the 
soldiers  who  guarded  the  gates.  The 
two  accounts  are  perfectly  consistent 
with  each  other;  they  throw  light  uj>on 
and  confirm  each  other.  Luke  in  the 
Acts  shows  who  were  the  instigators  of 
this  plot,  namely,  the  Jews ;  Paul  to 
the  Corinthians  tells  us  the  military  or 
the  legal  jxiwer  by  which  it  was  to  be 
carried  out. 


25.  Both  Luke  and  Paul  (2  Cor.  11 :  33) 
relate  the  manner  of  his  escai)e,  "  by 
the  wall  in  a  basket."  Luke  tells  the 
persons  by  trhoin,  namely,  the  dis- 
ciples, some  of  them  doubtless  his 
own  converts,  and  the  time,  by  night. 
Paul  adds,  "through  a  window,"  and 
that  he  "  escaped  his  hands,"  that  is, 
of  the  governor  of  Damascus,  who  had 
been  induced  by  the  Jews  to  assist  them 
in  their  jdot  and  to  accomplisli  in  some 
way,  legally  or  illegally,  the  death  of 
Saul.  Let  him  down  by — rather, 
throufjh  the  Avail.  The  spies  at 
Jericho  (Josh.  2:15)  and  David  (1  sam. 
19: 12)  escaped  in  a  similar  way.  "  The 
common  view  is  that  the  house  where 
Paul  was  secreted  was  built  on  the  wall 
of  the  city,  with  a  window  projecting 
over  it ;  and  hence  it  could  be  said,  ac- 
cording to  Luke's  narrative  in  the  Acts, 
that  Paul  Mas  '  let  down  through  the 
wall,'  without  any  reference  to  the 
house ;  or,  as  in  the  epistle  to  tlie  Cor- 
inthians, that  he  was  '  letdown  through 
a  window  tlirough  the  wall.'  .  .  I  saw 
houses  built  on  the  walls,  with  over- 
hanging windows,  in  several  of  the 
Eastern  cities.  .  .  .  Possibly  another 
explanation  may  be  the  correct  one.  A 
few  steps  to  theleft  of  Bab-es-Shurkeb, 
the  gate  on  the  east  side  of  Damascus, 
I  observed  two  or  three  windows  in  the 
external  face  of  the  wall,  opening  into 
houses  on  the  inside  of  the  city.  If 
Saul  was  let  down  through  such  a  win- 
dow (which  belongs  equally  to  the 
house  and  the  wall),  it  would  be  still 
more  exact  to  interchange  the  two  ex- 
pressions." (Dr.  Hackett,  Ilhist ra- 
tions of  Scripture,  pp.  76, 77.)  In  a  bas- 
ket, the  same  word  used  in  Matt.  \n : 
37,  rt  p/aitcd  grain  or  provision  basket. 
Another  word  is  used  in  2  Cor.  11  :  33, 
meaning  a  basket  made  of  ropes.  The 
two  words  might  be  used  interchang- 
ably  in  speaking  of  the  same  event. 
"As  I  stood  with  a  friend,  who  resided 
at  Damascus,  ...  a  cou])le  of  men  canie 
to  tlie  top  of  the  wall  with  a  round, 
shallow  basket,  full  of  rubl)ish,  wliicli 
they  emptied  over  the  wall.     '  Such  a 


150 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.IX. 


26  And  J  when  Saul  was  come  to  Jerusa- 
lem, he  assayed  to  join  himself  to  the  dis- 
ciples: but  they  were  all  afraid  of  him, 
and  believed  not  that  he  was  a  disciple. 


27  » But  Barnabas  took  him,  and  brought  Awn. 
to  "the  apostles,  and  declared  unto  them 
how  he  had  seen  the  Lord  in  the  way, 
and  that  he  had  spoken  to  him,  and  how 


y  Gal.  1  :  17, 18.        «  ch.  4  :  36;  13  :  2.        »  Gal.  1 :  18,  19. 


basket,'  said  my  friend,  'the  people  use 
h(  IV  for  almost  every  sort  of  thing.  If 
they  are  digging  a  well,  and  wish  to 
send  a  man  down  into  it,  they  put  him 
into  such  a  basket;  and  that  those  who 
aided  Paul's  escape  should  have  used 
such  a  basket  for  the  jnirpose  was 
entirely  natural,  according  to  the  pres- 
ent customs  of  the  country.'  .  .  .  Pil- 
grims are  admitted  into  the  monastery 
at  Mount  Sinai  in  a  similar  manner." 
(Dr.  Hackktt,  Illustrations  of  Script- 
ure, p.  77.) 

26.  Aud  Avhen  Saul  was  come 
to  Jerusalem.  Instead  of  Saul  read 
he,  according  to  the  best  manuscrijjts. 
The  object  of  Saul's  coming  was  to 
make  the  acquaintance  of  Peter  (not  to 
receive  authority  from  him),  whom  he 
knew  to  he  a  prominent  leader  and 
pillar  in  the  church.  (Gai.  i :  i8;  2  ;9.) 
Being  driven  from  Damascus,  it  was 
natural  tliat  he  should  seek  tlie  mother 
church  at  Jerusalem ;  and  tliat  his 
Christian  impulse  should  lead  him  to 
preach  Jesus  in  the  very  j)lace  where 
he  had  most  violently  jiersecuted  his 
disciples.  (22:  i!P.  20.)  "lie  had  left 
Jerusalem  armed  witli  full  jwwer  to 
root  up  the  heresy  spread  by  the  fol- 
lowers of  Jesus.  He  returned  to  tlie 
caj)it;il  poor,  desjjised,  a  proscribed 
outlaw,  his  brilliant  earthly  prosjiects 
l)lasted,  only  burning  to  i)reacli  the 
Name  of  tlie  Crucified,  whose  devoted 
followers  he  had  once  j)ersecuted  so  re- 
lentlessly." (IIOWSON  AND  SrEXCE.) 
Assayed — he  was  ottriuptiug,  Imt 
failed  in  his  attempt.  To  join  him- 
self to  the  disciples,  including  the 
apostles  (vpr.  27),  not  merely  socially, 
but  to  them  as  a  company  of  believers, 
as  a  church.  They  were  aM  afraid 
of  him— they  were  distrusting  him  ; 
and  though  they  may  have  lieard  of 
his  conversion,  yet  that  was  three  years 
ago  (Gall :  18),  aiid  they  did  not  really 
heiiere  him  to  he  a  disciple,  but  thought 
he  was  trying  to  attach  himself  to  tliem 
from  improper  motives,  perhaps  to 
persecute  them  and  seize  their  leaders. 


His  reported  conversion  seemed  iucred- 
ilde ;  they  were  prejudiced  against 
him.  "  The  sudden  appearance  of  Vol- 
taire in  a  circle  of  Christians,  claiming 
to  be  one  of  them,  would  have  been 
something  like  this  return  of  Saul  to 
Jerusalem  as  a  professed  discij)le." 
(Hackett.)  All  this  implies  that  Saul 
had  lived  mostly  a  retired  life  since  his 
conversion ;  that  the  large  part  of  the 
time  had  been  spent  in  Arabia,  and 
that  too  probably  not  in  public  labors, 
but  in  the  study  of  the  Scriptures  and 
in  comnninion  with  God  ;  in  order  that 
he  might  not  confer  with  flesh  aud 
blood  "(Gal.  1 :  16),  but  with  the  Lord 
through  prayer  and  the  Spirit,  and 
thus  gain  the  needed  preparation  for 
the  great  work  to  which  tie  had  been 
called  at  his  conversion.  The  news  of 
his  recent  preaching  and  peril  in  Da- 
mascus, doubtless  had  not  reached 
tliem ;  aud  this  might  be  the  more 
probable,  in  tliese  troublous  times, 
while  Damascus  was  under  the  power 
of  King  Aretas. 

27.  This  embarrassing  situation  of 
Saul  was  relieved  by  Barnabas  who 
ai)pears  to  have  been  previously  ac- 
quainted with  him.  Barnabas  (*■■*) 
took  him,  as  one  friend  takes  another 
to  introduce  him.  "Tradition  a.'jserts 
that  Joseph  [Barnabas]  had  been  a 
scholar  of  Gamaliel,  and  the  same 
feeling  which  led  him  to  join  a  school 
of  which  one  peculiarity  was  its  ]>er- 
mission  of  Greek  learning,  might  have 
led  him  earlier  to  take  a  few"  hours' 
sail  from  Cyjirus  to  see  wliat  could  be 
learnt  in  tlie  University  of  Tarsus.  If 
so,  he  would  naturally  have  come  into 
contact  with  tlie  family  of  Saul,  and 
the  friendship  thus  commenced  would 
be  continued  at  Jerusalem.  It  luul 
been  broken  by  the  conversion  of  Bar- 
nabas, it  is  now  renewed  by  the  conver- 
sion of  Saul."  (Faera'r,  Life  and 
Work  of  St.  Paul,  pp.  1.32,  13.3.)  Saul, 
upon  coming  to  Jerusalem,  had  proba- 
bly stopped  first  with  his  sister  or  some 
relative.    (23 :  16.)     Brought  him    to 


Ch.  IX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


ir>i 


be  had  preached  boldly  at  Damascus  in 

28  Ihe  name  of  .Icsiis.     And   lie   wits  with 
thtnu  coming  in  and  k"'">j  ""'  <•♦  Jerusa- 

29  lem.     And  lie  spaUe  lioldly  in  tbc  name 
of  ihe  Lord  Jesus,  and  disputed  against 


the  bGrceiaus.    <=  But  they  went  about  to 
30  slay    him.      Which    when    the   brethren 
knew,  they  brought  him  down  to  Cacsarea, 
and  sent  him  forth  to  •^  Tarsus. 


b  ch.  6  :  1 ;  11  :  20.        •  ver.  23 ;  2  Cor.  11  :  26.        d  Gal.  1  :  21. 


the  apostles — Peter  and  James  (g»i. 
1 :  18  19)  being  the  only  two  present  at 
Jerusalem,  the  other  apostles  being 
probably  away  preaching.  LJeclared 
—re /a ted  fully  to  them  how  iSartl  saw 
the  Lord  in  the  way,  the  manner 
and  circumstances, time  and  place;  and 
that  the  Lord  had  spoken,  talked  to 
Saul,  giving  him  instructions.  He 
whom  the  Lord  had  called  and  in- 
structed, the  apostles  should  receive. 
Barnabas  shows  that  Saul,  as  a  witness 
of  tlie  resurrection  of  tlie  Lord,  and  as 
one  commissioned  by  him,  stood  on  a 
level  with  them.  And  more,  for  Saul 
bad  proved  his  trustworthiness  by  his 
obedience,  in  preaching  boldly  at 
Damascus,  whither  he  had  gone  to 
persecute.  In  the  name  of  Jesus — 
as  his  disciple  confessing  and  proclaim- 
ing him  as  the  Messiah,  his  sovereign 
Lord. 

28.  The  kind  offices  of  Barnabas 
proved  successful.  Saul  is  received 
into  the  friendship  and  fellowship  of 
the  disciples.  He  was  with  them — 
as  a  brother  and  preacher,  for  fifteen 
days.  (Gal.  1:18.)  Coming  in  and 
going  out — associated  with  them  pri- 
vately, publicly,  and  officially.  How 
far  they  recognized  his  ministry,  and 
whether  they  at  all  regarded  his  apos- 
tleshij),  cannot  be  certainly  decided..  It 
was  not  till  fourteen  years  later  that  he 
received  from  Peter,  John,  and  James 
the  right  hand  of  fellowship  as  an 
apostle  to  the  Gentiles.     (Gai.  -i  -.  i,  9.) 

^9.  As  he  had  done  at  Damascus,  so 
here  at  Jerusalem  Saul  spake  boldly 
and  freely  in  the  name  of  the  Lord. 
Thus  far  the  passage  is  closely  connected 
with  the  preceding  verse,  giving  a  gen- 
eral view  of  what  he  did  in  this  brief 
visit  at  Jerusalem.  And  disputed, 
etc.  According  to  the  highest  critical 
authorities  this  should  read  :  And  was 
speaking  and  disputing  against  the 
Grecian  Jews.  He  not  only  talked,  in 
an  instructive  way,  but  he  reasoned  and 
discussed  the  subject  with  the  Hellen- 


ists or  foreign  Jews.  Saul  was  one  of 
this  class,  and  was  familiar  with  the 
Greek,  and  had  doubtless  associated 
with  some  of  tliem  in  former  years. 
Thus  he  enters  into  Stephen's  labors, 
possibly  arguing  with  some  of  them 
who  contended  with  Stephen,  and  w  ith 
like  results.  {«  ;8.io.)  Battled  with  Saul's 
arguments,  they  propose  to  resort  to 
force,  they  went  about — that  is,  they 
were  seeking  the  means  and  oppor- 
tunity, not  as  yet  openly,  but  under- 
handedly,  to  slay  him.  The  same 
verb  is  used  as  in  ver.  23.  Some  have 
thought  that  one  of  tlie  festivals  was 
now  going  on,  to  which  these  foreign 
Jews,  being  very  jealous  for  the  law, 
had  come. 

30.  Which  when  the  brethren 
knew — And  the  brethreii  learning,  or 
discovering  it.  This  sliows  that  these 
foreign  Jews  were  working  in  secret 
and  ])lotting,  very  much  as  they  had 
done  with  Stephen,  only  their  i)lans 
were  not  developed  as  yet.  Notice  that 
it  is  now  said,  the  brethren,  they  being 
no  longer  afraid  of  Saul,  but  one  with 
him.  And  as  brethren  tiuy  act  together 
and  promptly.  This  is  the  tiist  time 
the  disciples  are  distinctively  termed 
brethren,  in  the  Acts,  though  they  are 
thus  addressed  in  6  :  3.  They  are  fre- 
quently thus  styled  after  tliis.  (n  :  i,29; 
12:17.)'  They  are  as  those  who  consti- 
tute one  family.  Saul  acts  on  their 
advice  and  departs,  although  at  first  he 
is  unwilling  to  go  (22 :  n-21),  l>ut  desired 
to  remain  and  preach,  taking  up  Ste- 
jihen's  work  where  it  was  broken  off. 
He  felt  he  was  peculiarly  fitted  for  it 
by  experience.  But  in  a  trance  the 
Lord  assures  him  that  tlie  Jews  will 
not  hear  him  and  commands  him : 
"  Dejiart,  for  I  will  send  thee  far  hence 
unto  the  Gentiles."  It  is  very  probable 
that  Saul  would  not  have  now  left  .Jeru- 
salem, liad  it  not  been  for  this  revela- 
tion. Thus  ))oth  accounts  are  in  perfect 
harmony.  Luke  gives  the  external 
historical  cause,  begun  and    cousum- 


152 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IX. 


Prosperity  of  the  church ;  Peler  visits  Lydda 
and  Joppa. 

31      THEN  had  the  churches  rest  through- 


out all  Judaea  and  Galilee  and  Samaria, 
and  were  editied  ;  and  'walking  in  the 
fear  of  the  Lord,  'and  in  the  comfort  of 
the  Holy  Spirit,  were  mulliplit'd. 


•  Neh.  5:9.        f  John  U  :  10-18 ;  16  :  7-15 ;  Com.  8  :  15-17,  26 ;  Gal.  5  :  22. 


mated  by  the  brethren ;  Paul  iE;i  ves  the  in- 
tenial  and  divine  reason,  wliich  h'd  him 
to  fall  in  with  the  jdaiisof  liis  brethren. 
About  eighteen  years  after  tliis  Paul 
appeals  to  the  brevity  of  this  visit,  and 
other  circumstances  connected  with  it, 
as  an  evidence  that  he  did  not  dejjcnd 
on  the  church  at  Jerusalem  or  the  apos- 
tles, for  his  apostolic  commission.  (Gai. 
1 ;  i»<-24.)  They  brought  him — co»- 
dncted  him  to  Ca'.sarea,  about  sixty 
miles  nortiiwest  of  Jerusalem,  (seeou 
3:40.)  And  sent  him  forth— proba- 
bly by  ship  to  Tarsus — his  native 
city,  and  the  cai>ital  of  Cilicia.  (see  ou 
ver.  11.)  In  reference  to  this  visit  to  his 
native  country  Paul  says  (Gai.  i  :2i),  "  J 
came  into  the  regions  of  Syria  and 
Cilicia."  He  may  have  sailed  to 
Seleucia,  the  port  of  Antioch,  and  then 
passed  northward  tlirough  .Syria  and 
westward  into  Cilicia  to  Tarsus.  Mr. 
Lewin  (Life  and  J'.pist/cs  of  St.  Paul, 
i.  77)  .suggests  tliat  JSaul  may  have  un- 
dergone one  of  the  sliipwrecks,  of 
which  he  speaks  (2  Cor.  ii :  2.5),  and  thus 
his  course  was  determined.  lie  ai>i)cais 
to  have  made  Tarsus  and  its  vicinity 
his  headquarters,  until  .sought  out  about 
four  years  later  by  Barnabas.  (ii:-'5.) 
During  this  j)eriod  he  probaV)ly  planted 
cliurches  in  Syria  and  Cilicia,  wliicli 
lie  visited  011  his  second  missionary 
journey.     (i5:4i.) 

31-43.  Peace  axp  Pkosperity  of 
THE  CHrR("H.  Peter  Yi.'^iTs  Lydd.v 
AND  Joppa.  The  healing  of  ^Eneas, 
the  sickness,  death,  and  raising  to  life 
of  Dorcas.  Large  ingatlierings  at  Lydda, 
Sharon,  and  Joi>pa.  These  events  must 
liave  occu])ied  many  months,  ju-obably 
a  year  or  two,  about  A.  D.,  38  and  3i5. 
This  section  prepares  the  way  for  the 
conversion  of  Cornelius. 

31.  Then  .  .  .  rest.  Eather, 
Therefore  .  .  .  peace.  The  Christian 
community  throughout  Palestine,  here 
designated  by  its  tliree  divisions,  Judea 
and  Galilee  and  Samaria,  were  in 
a  state  of  tranquillity,  beintr  free  from 
persecution,  as  a  consequence  of  the 


events  just  related.  The  persecution 
wouhl  cease  in  foreign  cities  with  the 
conversion  of  Saul ;  but  it  must  have 
continued  in  Judea,  for  Saul  was  not 
tlie  only  persecutor,  (ver.  29;  b  :  9.)  His 
rej)orted  conversion,  regarded  as  treacli- 
eiy  to  the  cause,  would  probably  in- 
crease tile  blind  rage  of  iiersecution  for 
a  time.  It  had  tloulitless  subsided  lie- 
fore  Saul's  visit  to  Jerusalem  ;  but  his 
l>reseiice  gave  it  a  new  impetus  for  a  few- 
days,  and  after  his  departure  it  ceased 
entirely.  It  is  unnecessary  to  suppose 
witli  .some  tiiat  the  attemjit  of  the  Km- 
))eror  Caligula  to  profane  the  temple  at 
Jerusalem  (a.  D.,  39,  4U)  diverted  the 
minds  of  tlie  Jews  from  the  Christians, 
and  was  thus  tlie  cause  of  the  persecu- 
tion ceasing.  The  persecution  had  spent 
its  force.  Besides,  Caligula's  attempt 
jirobably  occurred  a  little  later  than 
tliis  visit  of  Saul,  and  in  its  time  may 
have  had  some  of  the  eft'ects  supposed. 
The  churches — this  is  the  reading 
of  some  good  manuscripts,  but  the 
oldest  and  best  have  the  singular, 
(■/((ur/i,  which  reading  is  preferred  l>y 
tlie  liii(he.';t  critical  authorities.  I)i'. 
liroadus  limits  the  word  here  to  "  the 
original  churcli  at  Jerusalem,  who.xc 
members  were  by  the  persecution  widely 
scattered  throughout  Judea  and  Sama- 
ria and  Galilee,  and  held  meetings 
wlierever  they  were,  but  still  belonged 
to  the  one  original  organization.  When 
Paul  wrote  to  the  Gahitians,  nearly 
twenty  years  later,  the.se  sej)aiate  meet- 
ings had  been  organized  into  distinct 
churches;  and  so  he  speaks  (Gai.  1:22), 
in  reference  to  tliat  same  period,  of 
'  the  churches  in  Judea  which  were  in 
Christ.'"  (Com.  on  Matt.  16  :  18.)  If, 
however,  distinct  churches  had  been 
organized  in  Samaria  and  elsewhere  in 
Palestine,  then  the  word  would  natu- 
rally ai>ply  to  the  collective  member- 
shij)  of  those  cliurches,  who  were  bound 
together  by  a  common  brotherhood  to 
Christ,  their  head,  and  by  one  Si>irit.  Or 
jiossibly  the  word  church  might  here  be 
used  ideally  and  abstractly,  meaning  the 


Cn.  IX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


153 


32      And  it  came  to  pass,  as  Peter  passed         also  to  the  saints  which  dwelt  at  Lydda. 
B throughout  all  quailcr^,  he  came  down    33  And  there  he  found  a  certain  man  named 


8  ch.  8  :  14. 


local  church,  wherever  found  in  that 
re,i?ion,  suul  hence  true  of  nil  those 
cliiuches— that  they  enjoyed  peace  and 
prosperity.  But  whichever  view  is  pre- 
ferred, there  is  no  ground  here  or  else- 
where in  the  New  Testament  for  api)ly- 
ing  the  word  church  to  an  association 
or  confederation  of  churciies.  The  local 
church  is  the  only  one  s|)olven  of,  as  an 
external  organization,  ha  \  ing  functions, 
such  as  asseniMiii;;  to^fthcr,  exercising 
disciidine,  appointing  otiicers,  etc.  In- 
deed, wliat  may  be  styled  the  church 
general  is  nowhere  spoken  of  or  im- 
plied in  the  New  Testament  as  an  or- 
ganization. (See  on  a :  u. )  On  the  import 
of  the  word,  and  on  the  general  subject, 
able  discussions  are  found  in  The  Chris- 
tian Review.  (Vol.  22,  pp.  593-620; 
vol.  20,  p.  430  f.;  vol.  11,  p.  64  f.) 
Kdified — bwilt  up  spiritually,  in  in- 
ternal growth,  faith,  and  piety      (i  Cor. 

8  :  I  ;  U  ;  +,  n  ;  1   Thess.  5:11.)      Walking — 

conducting  themselves  and  advancing 
in  Christian  life  and  activity.  The 
fear  of  the  Lord — a  devout  and  rev- 
erential practice  of  true  religion.  In 
the  comfort,  or  by  the  consolation 
and  helpful  presence  of  the  Holy 
Spirit,  were  multiplied,  increased 
in  numbers.  The  Holy  Spirit  was  pres- 
ent, giving  power  to  believers,  and  by 
liis  awakening  influence  leading  men  to 
hear  and  receive  the  gospel.  The  Greek 
word  translated  comfort  is  closely  allied 
to  the  title  given  to  the  Holy  Spirit, 
"  the  Comforter  "  or  Helper.  ( John  u  :  16- ) 
33.  From  Saul  tlie  narrative  turns  to 
Peter,  who  is  last  mentioned  in  connec- 
tion with  the  work  in  Samaria,  (s :  i4, 25.) 
The  j)eaceful  condition  of  affairs  (ver.  31) 
is  improved  by  Peter  in  visiting  the 
discipieshi])  outside  of  Jerusalem.  As 
Peter  passed  throughout  all 
quarters — passed  through  or  among 
tliem  all.  There  is  no  word  in  tlie 
original  standing  for  quarters.  Hence 
some  supply  places  (is :  sb;  26 :  20) ;  others 

supply    saints.        (20:  20;  21  .- 28;  Eom.  IS:  28.) 

More  strictly  the  word  all  refers  to  the 
saints  whom  Peter  was  visiting,  and  is 
implied  by  what  follows.  As  he  came 
down  also  to  the  saints  at  Lydda, 


so  he  had  been  visiting  the  saints  else- 
where. Of  course,  he  visited  all  the 
places  where  believers  were  in  any 
numbers,  or  held  religious  gatherings. 
The  fact  that  the  word  saints,  and  not 
church  or  chnrclies  is  used,  deserves 
attention.  Things  may  have  been  in  a 
formative  state.  Believers  throughout 
the  country  may  liave  ))een  regarded 
as  connected  with  tlie  churcli  at  Jeru- 
salem, and  holding  meetings,  or,  ac- 
cording to  modern  phraseology,  holding 
missions,  and  not  separated  into  inde- 
pendent churches.  Peter's  visitation 
among  tiiem  may  have  had  reference 
to  both  their  spiritual  state  and  to  ques- 
tions of  organization  and  eiiicieut 
work.  As  a  result  churches  may  have 
been  organized  in  many  places.  (See  on 
ver.  31.)  Notice  also  the  four  names  by 
whicli  the  followers  of  Jesus  were 
called  before  they  were  named  Chris- 
tians— disciples  (1 :  is),  believers  {''■**), 
saints  (9:13),  brethren.  (9:3o.)  Lydda, 
Lod  of  the  Old  Testament,  a  Benjamite 
town.  (1  Chron.  8  :  12.)  It  is  situated  in 
the  plain  of  Sharon,  on  the  roa<l  from 
Jerusalem  to  Joppa,  about  twenty- 
seven  miles  northwest  from  the  former, 
and  eleven  miles  from  the  latter.  It 
was  a  city  of  considerable  size,  and  a 
seat  of  a  famous  Jewisli  school.  It  was 
ruined  in  the  Jewish  war  and  after- 
ward rebuilt  by  the  Romans,  and  called 
Diospolis,  "  Jove's  City."  It  now  bears 
its  ancient  name  Ludd  or  Lydd,  and  is 
a  village  of  about  two  thousand  inhal)it- 
ants,  witli  some  ruins,  and  surrounded 
by  gardens  and  orchards.  It  is  not 
mentioned  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment. 

33.  A  certain  man  named 
.iEneas.  This  name  is  not  exactly 
identical  with  the  Trojan  name  Eneas. 
The  former  is  accented  in  English  on 
the  first  syllable,  the  latter  on  tlie 
second.  From  his  Grecian  name  it  is 
inferred  that  lie  was  probably  a  Grecian 
Jew.  He  was  not  probably  a  professed 
disciple,  as  he  is  styled  a  certain  man. 
But  it  is  also  probable  that  he  became 
a  believer  at  or  about  the  time  of  his 
cure,  since  "  faith  was  usually  required 


154 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  IX. 


^Jneas,  which   had   kept   his    bed  eight 

34  years,  aud  was  sick  ot  the  palsy.  Aud 
I'eter  said  unto  him,  ^Kiieas,  ^  Jesus  Christ 
niaketh  ihec  whole:  'arise,  aud  make  thy 

35  bed.    Aud  he  arose  immediately.    Aud 


all  that  dwelt  at  Lydda  and  '^  Saron  saw 
him,  and  'turned  to  the  Lord. 
36      Now  there  was  at  ™  Joppa  a  certain  dis- 
ciple named  Tabitha,  which  by  interpre- 
tation is  called  Dorcas.    This  woman  was 


>>  ch.  3  :  6, 16 ;  4  :  10. 


i  Matt.  9:6;  Mark  2  :  9,  11 ;  John  5  :  8-12.       k  1  Chron.  5  :  16. 
11 :  21  ;  1  Thess.  1  :  9, 10.        »>  Jonah  1:3. 


ich. 


of  those  who  received  the  benefits  of  the 
gospel."  (Hackett.)  Had  kept  his 
bed — had  lain  upon  a  pallet.  {■>■■  i5.) 
Of  the  palsy — of  paralysis.  (»;:.) 
The  severity  of  the  case  is  inferred  from 
its  long  continuance,  eight  years. 

34.  Peter  said  unto  him.  Hav- 
ing a  conviction  aud  au  assurance  witliiu 
liimself  that  the  power  of  the  Lord 
would  be  exerted  in  the  recovery  of 
t!ie  paralytic.  Peter  addresses  him  by 
name  to  secure  his  attention  and  arouse 
his  faith.  He  saj's  nothing  of  himself, 
but  presents  Jesus  Christ  or  Jesus 
the  Christ  as  the  healer.  (See  3:6.) 
Many  authorities  place  the  article  before 
Christ.  Westcott  and  Hort  omit  it. 
Maketh  thee  whole — now  at  this 
moment.  Arise,  stand  u]),  and  make 
thy  bed — spread  for  thyself,  thy  couch 
and  whatever  is  needful.  The  word 
bed  is  not  in  the  original,  liut  is  implied 
in  thethouglit.  The  command  requires 
immediate  action.  "  Perform  immedi- 
ately, in  token  of  thy  cure,  the  same 
work  whicli  hitherto  others  have  had 
to  do  for  thee."  (JlEYKR.)  Standingup 
showed  that  his  feet,  ankles,  and  lower 
muscles  were  restored  to  strength ; 
spreading  of  the  bed  indicated  recovered 
use  of  hands  and  arms.  The  cure  aud 
the  obedience  were  immediate.  He 
arose  immediately. 

35.  As  a  result  of  the  miracle  there 
was  a  general  turning  to  the  Lord.  AH 
the  people  generally,  that  dwelt  at 
Lydda  and  Saron — literally,  and  the 
plain,  for  so  Sharon  means,  a  beautiful 
and  fertile  jdain  along  the  coast  of 
Palestine  of  some  thirty  miles  between 
Joppa  and  Csesarea.  It  was  famous  for 
it-s  pasturage  (i  oiiron.  27 :  29),  its  fertility 
aud  beauty  comj>ared  with  Carmel,  (isu. 
S5 : 2 ;  S5 :  10) ;  and  Solouiou  in  his  Song  of 
Songs  (2 : 1)  sings  of  the  rose  of  Sharon. 
It  was  emphatically  //;f  plain  of  Judea. 
Saw  him — after  his  cure,  not  all  at 
once,  but  from  time  to  time  as  each  had 
opportunity.  And  they  turned  to  the 


liOrd — Jesus  the  Christ,  descriptive  of 
Jewish  converts.  Gentiles  are  spoken 
of  as  "  turning  to  God."  (u  :  ii ;  i5 :  la.) 
The  meaning  of  the  passage  is  that  at 
Lydda  and  in  the  jdain  adjacent  to  it 
there  was  a  general  turning  to  the  new 
religion,  and  a  general  acknowledg- 
ment that  Jesus  was  the  Christ.  "  This 
is,  no  doubt,  a  reason  for  this  one  case 
being  singled  out  from  niany  of  the 
same  kind  and  particularly  stated,  not 
because  it  was  intrinsically  more  im- 
portant, but  because  it  was  connected 
with  tliis  progress  of  the  truth,  and  with 
other  great  events  about  to  be  recorded." 
(-\lexander.) 

36.  Another  miracle  is  related 
which  brings  Peter  to  Joppa  and 
results  in  a  great  in-gathering  there. 
Joppa,  meaning  beauty,  was  a  city  on 
the  Mediterranean  about  thirty-nine 
miles  northwest  of  Jerusalem,  lying  on 
the  border  of  the  tribes  of  Dan  and 
Ephraim.  (Josh.  i9 :  46.)  It  had  a  cele- 
brated and  dangerous  port,  but  the  best 
upon  the  coast,  until  Herod  the  Great 
made  an  artificial  port  at  Ca'sarea.  It 
l)ecame  the  port  of  Jeru.sjilem  when  the 
latter  became  the  capital  of  the  king- 
dom. It  is  mentioned  only  in  this  nar- 
rative in  the  New  Testament.  It  is  now 
Yafa,  and  "  has  no  jx)rt ;  and  the  land- 
ing, when  possible,  is  made  in  small 
boats.  The  appearance  of  the  city  from 
the  water,  beautifully  situated  ujion  a 
rounded  hill,  encompassed  by  orchards 
of  oranges,  lemons,  citrons,  and  apri- 
cots, is  attractive  and  animating.  A 
wall  surrounds  it  on  the  landward  side, 
with  a  few  old  guns  upon  it.  .  .  .  Tlie 
city  is  irregularly  built  of  chalk-look- 
ing, square,  flat-roofed  houses,  and  is 
made  up  of  a  mixed  mass  of  fifteen 
thousand  people."  (Dk.  Fish,  L'ibl. 
Land  Illustrated,  p.  137.)  Tabitha, 
in  Aramean  and  Dorcas,  in  Greek, 
both  mean  a  female  gazelle,  which  in 
the  East  was  regarded  as  a  standard  of 
beauty.     It  was  often   employed  as  a 


Ch.  IX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


155 


full  "of  good  works  and  alms-deeds  which 

37  Blie  did.  And  it  came  to  pass  iu  those 
days,  lliat  she  was  sick,  and  died  :  wliom 
when  they  had  waslied,  they  laid  lif.r  In 

38  an  upner  chamber.  And  forasmuch  as 
Lydda  was  nigh  to  Joppa,  and  the  disci- 
ples had  heard  that  Peter  was  there,  they 


sent  unto  him  two  men,  desiring  Mm 
that  he  would  not  delay  to  come  to  them. 
Then  Peter  arose  and  went  with  them. 
When  he  was  come,  they  brought  hiui 
into  the  upper  chamber:  "and  all  the 
widows  stood  by  him  weeping,  and  show- 
ing the  coats  and  garments  which  Dorcas 


»  1  Tim.  2  :  10 ;  Titus  3  :  8. 


'  Prov.  10  :  7. 


common  name  of  females.  As  the 
Hebrew  ( Aramean)  and  Greek  were  both 
used  at  Joppa  it  is  probable  that  both 
names  were  applied  to  this  woman.  It 
was  also  a  eustom  of  the  age  and  coun- 
try to  have  two  names,  (i: 23;  4:36.) 
Unlike  Eneas,  she  is  at  once  introduced 
as  a  disciple  and  her  benevolent  dis- 
position and  beneficent  deeds  are 
mentioned.  Full  of  good  works — 
abounding  in  them.  "  The  e.\pression 
'  full  of  is  a  favorite  one  with  Luke : 
'full  of  leprosy'  (Lukeo:  li)  ;  'full  of 
faith'  (Acts  6: 5, 8),  etc."  (Dr.  P. 
ScH.\.FF,  in  International  Revision 
Com.)  And  almsdeeds — and  in  par- 
ticular of  deeds  of  mercy,  gifts  to  the 
poor.  (3:2,3.)  VVhich  she  did,  was 
doing;  showing  that  this  was  her 
habit. 

37.  Iu  those  days— while  Peter 
abode  at  Lydda.  Having  sickened,  she 
died,  and,  having  washed  or  bathed 
her,  they  placed  her  in  an  upper  room. 
Perhaps  a  room  on  the  second  story, 
but  more  probably  the  upper  room  used 
by  Orientals,  in  which  to  sup,  meditate, 
and  pray,  sometimes  built  on  the  flat 

roof    of    the    house.      (l  ■■  l-t :  i  Kings  23  :  12.) 

It  is  spoken  of  more  definitely  in  ver. 
39,  as  "  the  upper  room."  It  was  cus- 
tomary among  the  Jews  for  women  to 
wasli  or  bathe  the  dead,  washing  the 
whole  body.  Luke  uses  general  terms 
without  reference  to  j)ersons,  employ- 
ing a  masculine  of  the  participle  equiv- 
alent to  the  indefinite  "they":  they 
washed  and  laid,  etc.  (Winer,  Gram, 
of  iV.  T.,  p  178,  and  Hackktt.) 

38.  As  Lydda  was  nigh  to 
Joppa — a  little  over  eleven  miles 
southeast,  across  the  plain,  on  the  road 
to  Jerusalem,  and  in  sight  of  each 
other.  The  disciples,  etc. — the  dis- 
ciples having  heard  that  Peter  was 
there,  at  Lydda.  They  act  conjointly  ; 
the  report  of  the  healing  of  Eneas  had 
reached  them,  and  they  also  may  have 
heard  that  Pet.T  was  i:till  there.     They 


send  two  men  desiring,  ratlier  entreat- 
ing him  to  come  to  them.  The  wliole 
congregation  at  Joppa  seem  to  have 
been  deeply  affected  with  their  lo.ss, 
and  they  earnestly  desire  the  presence 
of  Peter  for  sympathy  and  encourage- 
ment, and  perha])s  with  a  vague  ho2>e 
that  he  would  help  them,  and  that 
Dorcas  would  be  restored  to  them.  In- 
stead of  that  he  would  not  delay, 
etc.,  the  oldest  manuscripts  read,  Delay 
iiot  to  come  to  us,  which  is  now  pre- 
ferred by  the  best  authorities.  "  Thou 
mayest  not  hesitate  to  come  to  us." 
(Meyer.)  They  feel  that  he  cannot 
but  grant  their  request.  "  Death,  the 
followers  of  Jesus  had  now  learned  to 
regard  with  greater  calmness.  See 
Paul's  reproof  of  immoderate  grief  for 
the  dead  in  his  earliest  epistle,    (i  Thess. 

*  :  13-18.)  "      (HOWSOX   AND  SPENCE.) 

39.  Peter  at  once  resjwnds  to  tlieir 
earnest  eutreaty  and  goes  to  .To]>pa,  and 
is  there  conducted  by  the  disciples  to 
the  upper  chamber  in  which  the 
body  of  Dorcas  lay,  where  also  it  would 
be  kept  according  to  custom  if  the 
burial  was  delayed.  The  widows  who 
had  enjoyed  her  benefactions  stood  by 
him  weeping,  thus  manifesting  their 
great  sorrow.  What  a  coutra.st  with 
the  outward  show  of  the  professional 
performers,  which  Jesus  rebuked  at  the 
raising  of  Jairus'  daughter.  (Matt.  9: 22, 
23;  Marks :  39.)  Thus  "it  belioovcd  a 
Christian  company.  ShoAVing  the 
coats — rather,  shounng  tunics  and 
mantles  (without  the  "article),  these 
being  specimens  of  lier  works  and  gifts. 
The  tunics  were  undergarments  worn 
next  to  the  skin  and  extending  to  the 
knees.  The  mantles  were  outer  gar- 
ments, or  cloaks,  which  were  also  used 
as  a  covering  by  night.  (See  Notes  on 
Matthew,  5  :  40.)  All  which  Dorcas 
made — which  she  was  accustomed  to 
make  when  alive.  Her  gifts  were  the 
work  of  her  own  hands,  and  so  much 
the  more  precious.    They  were  memor- 


156 


THE  ACTS. 


tCii.IX. 


40  luade  wliile.  slie   w;ui   wilh    them.      But 
I'eierP  put  thoiu  all  forth,  aud  kneeled  ] 
down,  and  prayed;  and  turning  lihii.  to  i 
the  body  isaid,  Xabitha,  arise.    Aud  she 
opened  her  eyes:  and  when  she  saw  Peter, 

41  she  sat  up.    And  he  gave  her  his  hand, 


and  lifted  her  up :  and  when  he  had  called 
the  saints  and  widows,  [hej  presented  her 

42  alive.    And  it  was  known  throughout  all 
Joppa;  'and  many  believed  in  the  Lord. 

43  And  it  came  to  pass,  that  he  tarried  many 
days  in  Joppa  with  one  » Simon  a  tanner 


p  1  Kings  17  :  19-23 :  2  Kings  4  :  32-30  ;  Matt.  9  : 
11  :  45  ;  12  :  11. 


2.'>.      q  Mark  5  :  41, 42 ;  John  11  :  43.       '  John 
'  eh.  10  :  6. 


ials  of  her  devotion  to  her  charitable 
work.  She  is  fittingly  called  Dorca.s 
in  a  Greek  narrative,  and  this  indicates 
tliat  she  was  known  by  both  her  He- 
brew anil  her  Greek  name. 

•lU.  But  Peter  put  them  all 
fortli — not  violently,  but  constrained 
them  to  retire.  How  natural  to  imitate 
his  Saviour  (Mark  5  :  40),  and  whose  ex- 
ample could  he  better  follow  ?  (Jobn 
10 : 4.)  Like  Elijah  (i  Kings  i- :  iM,  .iO)^  and 
Elislia  (.iKings4;a3),  lie  would  be  alone 
with  God  in  prayer.  (Man. 6:6.)  He 
could  unburden  Ins  soul  only  in  secret ; 
none  but  the  divine  ear  must  hear  the 
jdeading  and  agony.  Having  obtaine<l 
assurance  of  answered  prayer,  and  that 
the  power  of  the  Lord  Jesus  was  about 
to  be  exerted  through  him,  Peter  turned 
to  the  dead  body,  and  in  faith  uttered 
the  command,  Tabitha,  arise — rise, 
stand  up  f  It  was  natural  that  Peter, 
being  a  Jew,  should  use  her  Aranu'an 
name,  tliat  being  the  colhxiuial  lan- 
guage of  tlie  country.  Peter  speaks  to 
tiie  i)ody,  as  to  a  living  jierson,  beiui; 
assured  of  returning  life,  with  expecta- 
tion of  being  obeyed.  Notice  the  pro- 
cess of  ot)edience  :  first  she  opened  her 
eyes,  an  evidence  of  restored  life,  then 
seeing  Peter,  she  sat  up — then  Peter 
gives  her  his  helping  hand  of  welcome 
and  congratulation  and  raises  her  uj). 
(Next  verse.)  AVith  what  truthful  sim- 
jdicity  and  how  graphically  is  the 
scene  described ! 

41.  Gave  her  his  hand — "  Im- 
plyini;  that  she  took  it  and  was  not  al- 
together passive."  (Alkxander.) 
lie  lifted  —  rather,  raised  her  up; 
courteously  helped  her  to  her  feet,  in 
order  tliat  he  might  present  her  to 
her  friends,  not  a  dead  body  as  she  was 
just  before,  but  liring,  having  all  the 
active  siarns  of  life.  Notice  the  two 
terms,  saints  and  widows,  probably 
indicating  that  some  of  the  widows 
were  not  professed  disciples. 

4*2.  Luke   records  the    effect  of  the 


miracle :     It  was  knoAvn — rather,  it 

becuiiie  known — the  tidings  spread 
through  the  whole  city— that  the  well- 
known  Dorcas,  who  had  been  sick,  had 
died  and  remained  dead  for  a  time  till 
Peter  came,  and  that  in  the  name  of 
Jesus  Christ  he  had  raised  lu*r  to  life. 
So  undeniable  were  these  facts  and  so 
deejdy  did  they  impress  the  jieople 
that  many  beiieved  in — rather,  on 
the  Lord  Jesus  (ver.  35),  as  the  ground 
of  their  faith,  whose  Massiahship  had 
been  thus  signally  attested.  "A  wonder 
when  we  look  at  Peter,  the  human  in- 
strument, but  no  wonder  at  all  when 
we  think  of  Jesus  Christ,  the  Divine 
Agent.  It  is  divine  power  that  works 
in  daily  order,  and  divine  choice  can 
alter  that  order  in  an  individual  in- 
stance. Hence,  let  but  the  Deitv  of 
Jesus  Christ  be  granted  and  the  whole 
matter  is  explained."  (Dr.  W.  M. 
Taylor.) 

43.  Luke  shows  both  how  Peter 
came  to  Joppa  and  how  he  was  there 
when  Cornelius  sent  for  him.  (10 :  5.) 
When  he  first  came  there  on  an  errand 
of  mercy  he  doubtless  expected  a  short 
stay,  but  the  wonderful  miracle 
wrought  through  him,  the  reception  of 
the  gos])el  by  the  peojtleand  the  oppor- 
tunity aft'orded  for  preaching  in  a  large 
.s(a])ort  town,  with  other  rea.sons  un- 
known to  us,  led  him  to  remain  many 
days — a  note  of  time  ai)plied  to  a 
period  ranging  from  a  few  weeks  to 
three  years.  (see  on  rer.  2.-!.)  It  would 
seem  n])on  coming  to  Jopj>a  that  he 
was  entertained  by  the  disciples.  But 
after  a  little  when  he  determined  to 
remain  for  a  considerable  time  he 
lodged  with  one  Simon,  a  tanner, 
(10:6.)  This  Simon  was  probably  a 
disciple,  either  a  previous  or  recent 
convert.  He  may  have  had  some 
possessions,  so  that  Peter  enjoyed  his 
hosj)itality.  He  is  only  mentioned  in 
tills  and  the  next  chapter.  His  house 
was    by  the   seaside.    Its    traditional 


Ch.  IX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


site  is  still  pointed  out.  (see on lo: 6) 
His  occupation  was  in  ill-repute  among 
ancient  nations,  especially  the  Jews, 
'riie  latter  considered  concealment  of 
it  before  marriage,  or  entering  into  it 
after  marriage  a  ground  of  divorce  and 
forhade  any  tanner  becoming  high 
jH-iest  or  king.  Tanners  were  required 
to  live  or  at  least  carry  on  their  business 
outside  the  city.  Their  houses  were 
considered  by  "Rabbinical  Jews  like 
tliose  of  the  heathen.  The  residence  of 
Peter  with  Simon  seems  to  indicate  that 
Peter  was  less  scrui)ulous  than  most 
Jews  and  perhaps  also  that  the  dis- 
ciples were  held  in  slight  esteem  in 
Joppa.  The  minuteness  oif  the  narrative 
also  should  be  noted,  showing  the  pains- 
taking carefulness  of  Luke. 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  As  a  briar  in  the  flesh,  so  the  life  and 
words  of  Stephen  festered  in  the  heart  of 
Saul.     (Ver.  1 ;  6  :  10  ;  7  :  58  ;  8  :  1,  3.) 

2.  In  Saul  we  have  an  illustration  of  the 
influence  of  hatred,  prejudice,  and  ignorant 
zeal  for  God,  in  a  man  of  learning  and  supe- 
rior ability.  (Ver.  2 ;  Rom.  10  :  2 ;  1  Tim. 
1 :  13.) 

3.  God  often  permits  the  wicked  to  carry 
on  their  designs  even  to  the  verge  of  accom- 
plishment, when  he  suddenly  stops  them  in 
judgment  or  mercy.     (Ver.  3;  12  :  23.) 

4.  Christ  and  his  people  are  one ;  and  what 
is  done  to  them  is  done  to  him.  (Ver.  4 ; 
John  15  :  5 ;  Heb.  2  :  11 ;  1  Sam.  25  :  29  ;  Zach. 
2:8.) 

5.  No  one  can  resist  God  and  his  own  con- 
science and  be  happy.  (Ver.  5 ;  26  :  14 ;  I'rov. 
13  :  15.) 

6.  They  shall  be  taught  their  duty,  who 
sincerely  ask  it  of  the  Lord,  and  wait  pa- 
tiently and  prayerfully  for  instruction. 
(Ver.  6;  10  :  4,  5;  James  1  :  5.) 

7.  It  is  not  enough  to  hear  the  gospel  with 
the  ear,  it  must  be  understood  and  received 
into  the  heart.     (Ver.  7 ;  28  :  26,  27.) 

8.  God  sometimes  deviates  from  the  ordi- 
nary means  of  grace,  but  not  ignoring  them, 
ill  the  conversion  of  men.  Thus  he  used 
miraculous  means  to  awaken  and  convict 
Saul ;  but  his  yielding  to  Christ  was  his  own 
personal  act,  and  he  was  brought  fully  to  the 
light  by  the  instruction  of  Ananias.  (Ver. 
8-17 ;  Rom.  10  ;  12-14.) 


9.  Christ  may  delay  to  manifest  himself  to 
some  longer  than  to  others.  This  is  not 
necessarily  a  proof  of  unanswered  prayer. 
(Ver.  9 ;  Dan.  9  :  23.) 

10.  It  is  not  so  much  distinguished  ability 
as  faithfulness  that  the  Lord  blesses  in  the 
ministry.  Not  an  apostle,  but  an  obscure 
"disciple"  must  minister  to  Saul.  The 
learned  Pharisee  must  sit  at  the  feet  of  an 
unlearned  Christian.  (Ver.  10-17;  1  Cor. 
4:2.) 

11.  True  prayer  is  a  mark  of  a  true  con- 
vert. A  spirit  of  devotion  cannot  reside 
with  a  spirit  of  pride,  hypocrisy,  injustice, 
and  cruelty.    (Ver.  11 ;  Luke  18  :  13.) 

12.  The  most  precious  revelations  are  to 
the  soul  alone  with  God.  Thus  it  pleased 
God  "  to  reveal  his  Sou "  in  Saul,  as  the 
Messiah  and  Saviour.  (Ver.  12 ;  22  :  17  ; 
Gal.  1  :  16  ;  2  Cor.  12  :  2  f.) 

13.  When  Christ  commands  no  apprehen- 
sion of  danger  should  interfere  wilh  obedi- 
ence.    (Ver.  13-16 ;  Matt.  10  :  28.) 

14.  The  early  disciples  recognized  the  di- 
vinity of  Jesus  Christ,  in  calling  on  his 
name.     (Ver.  14 ;  1  :  24  ;  7  :  59.) 

15.  Behold  God's  sovereignty  and  the  won- 
ders of  his  grace  in  the  conversion  and  apos- 
tleship  of  Saul !  ' '  How  unsearchable  are 
his  judgments  and  his  ways  are  past  finding 
out."     (Ver.  15  ;  Rom.   11  :  33-.36.) 

16.  Trials  and  suflTerings  often  correspond 
with  the  abundance  of  grace  given.  (Ver. 
16  ;  Deut.  33  :  23;  2  Cor.  12  :  9.) 

17.  Both  Jesus  and  the  Holy  Spirit  honor 
the  ministry  of  the  word.  (Ver.  17  ;  10  :  36, 
44.) 

[  18.  Baptism  should  be  administered 
promptly  to  those  prepared  to  receive  it. 
(Ver.  18 ;  2  :  44  ;  8  :  12,  36-38.) 

19.  The  conversion  of  Saul  is  a  strong  evi- 
dence to  the  truth  of  Christianity.  He  could 
not  have  been  an  impostor  ;  but  while  im- 
postors seek  selfish  ends,  Saul's  after-life  was 
a  striking  example  of  unselfishness  and 
sacrifice.  Neither  could  he  have  been  mad, 
or  a  fanatic,  for  his  writings  and  his  after-life 
show  that  he  was  not  visionary  and  given 
to  change,  but  a  man  of  learning,  sound 
judgment,  strong  intellectual  powers,  steady 
principle,  and  strict  integrity.  What  he  says 
therefore  demands  credence.  What  he  saw 
and  experienced  we  must  accept  as  realities. 
No  other  explanation  than  that  he  saw  Jesus, 
the  Sou  of  God,  and  eiperienced  the  power 


158 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.X. 


of  the  gospel,  can  account  for  so  great  and 
sudiien  a  change.  And  Saul's  example  is 
pre-eujincnt,  but  not  alone.  Huudreils  and 
thousands  of  enemies  and  persecutors  have 
been  changed,  aud  have  become  liviug  wit-  ; 
ncsses  to  the  power  and  truth  of  the  Chris-  ; 
tian  religion.  (Ver.  3-20  ;  23  :  1 ;  26  :  25 ;  2 
Tim.  2  :  12.)  \ 

20.  Such  a  conversion  evidently  requires  ! 
divine  interposition.  The  furious  Saul  was 
not  in  a  condition  to  listen  to  argumeut,  or  | 
impartially  investigate  the  subject.  The  ' 
sudden  conversion  of  such  a  man  needed  ihe 
miraculous  means  described  in  this  chapter. 
(Ver.  3-20  ;  1  Tim.  12  :  16.) 

21.  He  who  has  found  Christ  will  desire  to 
honor  him  and  speak  of  him  to  others.  (Ver. 
23,  24.) 

22.  Growth  in  grace  and  usefulness  gener- 
ally go  together.    (Ver.  22  ;  Matt.  13  :  12.) 

23.  A  retributive  Providence  sometimes 
permits  persecutors  in  becoming  Christians 
to  taste  the  bitterness  of  the  cup  they  had 
mixed  for  others.    (Ver.  23,  24.) 

24.  We  must  not  expect  extraordinary  aid 
from  God,  when  means  within  our  reach 
will  accomplish  our  puqiose.     (Ver.  24.) 

2-5.  Christ  does  not  require  us  to  sacrifice 
our  lives,  except  when  we  lannot  avoid  it 
without  renouncing  him  and  his  cause. 
(Ver.  2n.) 

26.  Christians  are  often  reminded  of  their 
former  sinful  lives.  Such  reminders  may  be 
painful  iind  humiliating,  yet  salutary.  (Ver. 
26;  Isa..51  :  1.) 

27.  A  Christian  brother  may  prove  to 
another  who  is  undrr  suspicion,  a  true 
Barnabas,  "  a  sou  of  consolation."  (Ver.  27 ; 
Philera.  10-16.) 

28.  The  Christian  should  manifest  his  con- 
Tersion  in  word  and  deed,  in  the  church  and 
in  the  world.     (Ver.  28,  29  ;  Matt.  .3  :  16.) 

29.  It  becomes  the  good  soldier  of  Jesus 
Christ  to  serve  faithfully,  endure  patiently, 
and  retire  from  posts  of  labor  olx'dicnlly. 
(Ver.  29,  30  ;  22  :  21 ;  2  Kings  2  :  3.) 

30.  Times  of  peace  should  be  used  in  active 
work  and  diligent  preparation  for  new 
conquests  in  Christ's  kingdom.  (Ver.  31 ; 
6:7.) 

31.  Churches  need  pastoral  watchcare  in 
times  of  peace  as  well  as  in  seasons  of  con- 
flict.    (Ver.  31,  32 ;  1  Peter  .5:8) 

32.  Seasons  of  tranquillity  should  be  im- 
proved by  pastors  in  looking  after  everything 


connected  with  their  work.  (Ver.  32  ;  1  Peter 
5  :  2,  3.) 

33.  Whoever  lives  for  Jesus  Christ,  conse- 
crating himself  to  him,  is  a  saint.  (Ver.  32 ; 
1  Cor.  1  :  2.) 

34.  Miracles  confirmed  the  authority  of  the 
apostles,  and  contributed  to  the  success  of  the 
gospel.    (Ver.  33,  35,  42 ;  13  :  9-11.) 

35.  We  are  to  i)ray  for  the  sick,  looking  for 
(jod's  blessing,  and  restoration  if  it  is  God's 
will.     (Ver.  34 ;  James  5  :  14,  15.) 

36.  Christianity  has  elevated  woman  and 
given  her  a  prominent  place  in  the  beneficent 
work  of  the  church  from  its  beginning.  (Ver. 
36,  39  ;  16  :  15  ;  IS  :  25  ;  Phil.  4  :  3.) 

37.  Good  works  and  labors  of  love  are  a 
great  blessing  to  others,  but  do  not  protect 
from  death  aud  sickness.    (Ver.  37-39.) 

38.  The  death  of  saints  often  reveals  their 
work  more  than  their  lives.  (Ver.  39 ;  Kev. 
14  :  13.) 

39.  Our  aim  should  be  not  only  to  save  the 
soul,  but  also  to  benefit  the  body ;  to  make 
men  good  here  as  well  as  happy  hereafter. 
(Ver.  34,  40  ;  Titus  2  :  11-14.) 

40.  Great  blessings  are  to  be  obtained 
through  private  prayer.  (Ver.  40;  Mark 
9:29.) 

41.  When  the  Lord  opens  a  door  of  useful- 
ness to  a  pastor  he  should  remain  and  take 
advantage  of  it.     (Ver.  42,  43 ;  18  :  11.) 

42.  The  house  of  Simon  the  tanner  may 
have  been  despised  among  the  Jews,  but  it 
was  regarded  by  the  Lord  and  by  angels  in 
heaven.    (Ver.  43 ;  10  :  6  f.) 

Ch.  10  :  This  chapter  and  the  two 
that  follow  cover  the  period  of  transi- 
tion of  the  gospel  to  the  heathen.  A 
new  era  ojiens.     Converted  Gentiles  are 

'  received  into  tlie  church  without  j)ass- 
inj,'  throu,t,'li  Judaism.     This  chapter  is 

I  devoted  to  tlie  conversion  and  baptism 
of  the  uncireumcised. 

,     1-22.    CorxELirs,   Divinely   Di- 

;  KKfTKH,  SEXD.S    FOR    PETER,  AVHO   IS 

Likewise  Directed  to  go  to  him. 
The   conversion  of  Cornelius   forms  a 
eoiincctiin,'   link    between  Jewish   and 
•  CJeiitilf    Christianity,  between   Jerusa- 
lem and  Antioeh.     Its  importance  may 
be  inferred   from  the  prominence  given 
I  it  in  t!u'  Acts,  aud  from  the  fact  that 
!  tlie  visions  of  Cornelius  and  Peter  are 
j  related  twice  (ver.  :w-33;  n  ;  i-12),  as  well 
I  as  the  conversion  of  Cornelius  and  his 


Ch.  X.] 


THE  ACTS. 


150 


Cornelius  is  d- reeled  by  an  angel  to  send /or 

I'eler,    Peter's  vision. 
10.    THERE  was  a  certain  niau  in  Csesarea 


called  Cornelius,  a  centurion  of  the  baud 

2  called  the  Italian  band,  '■a  devout  man, 

and  one  that  "feared  God  with  all  his 


t  ch.  8  :  2 ;  22  :  12.        «  ver.  3.t  ;  Gen.  18  :  10. 


company.  (ver.2s-«8;  n  :  12-17.)  The  time 
is  uncertain,  but  probably  about  A.  n. 
38  or  39.  The  gospel  had  l)een  fully 
preached  to  the  Jews  in  Jerusalem  and 
throughout  Palestine.  The  time  had 
come  for  it  to  be  proclaimed  to  those 
who  were"  aliens  to  the  commonwealth 
of  Israel."  To  execute  this,  extraordi- 
nary measures  were  adopted,  and  a  new 
revelation  given  to  Peter,  who  was  to 
open  the  door  of  the  kingdom  to  the 
Gentiles. 

1.  There  Avas  a  certain  man, 
etc.  .-1  certain  man  is  the  subject  of 
saw  in  ver.  3.  The  narrative  is  closely 
connected  with  the  last  chapter.  It 
was  while  Peter  was  with  Simon  the 
tanner  that  this  conversion  occurred. 
(10;  43.)  During  the  seven  to  ten  years 
since  the  resurrection  of  our  Lord  a 
preparation  had  been  going  on  for 
preaching  the  gospel  to  the  Gentiles. 
The  couvei-sion  of  proselytes  (2 :  lo;  6 : 5), 
of  the  half-heathen  and  hated  Samari- 
tans (8:5-8),  of  the  eunuch  18:39),  of  Saul 
of  Tarsus,  his  call  to  the  apostleship, 
and  the  intimations  of  his  Gentile 
work  (9 :  15 ;  22 :  21),  the  deeper  views  and 
the  spiritual  preaching  of  Stephen 
(fi :  10;  7:4-53),  and  the  contact  more  or 
less  of  the  disciples  and  esj)ecially  of 
Peter  with  the  Gentiles  throughout 
Palestine  in  their  preaching  to  the 
Jews  (8: 4;  9: 32), — Were  all  steps  pre- 
paratory to  preaching  the  gospel  to  the 
uncircumcised.  This  event  was  very 
naturally  followed  by  Saul  preaching 
to  Gentiles  as  well  as  Jews  in  Cilicia, 
the  gathering  of  churches  (15:23,43),  and 
tiie  conversion  of  Gentiles  at  Antioch. 
( n  :  20, 21.)  The  conversion  of  Cornelius 
and  his  company  may  thus  be  said  to 
have  been  in  the  very  nick  of  time. 
(See  Author's  Harmonic  Arrangement, 
note  on  §  19.) 

Cacsarea.  (see  on h: 40.)  It  was  a 
fitting  place  for  the  first  Gentile  con- 
verts. It  was  in  some  respects  the 
most  important  city  of  Palestine,  being 
at  that  time  the  Roman  capital  of  the 
country.  Here  was  Herod's  palace 
(23:35),  the  residence  of  the  Herods  and 


the  Roman  governors,  and  the  head- 
quarters of  the  trooi)S  that  kept  the 
land  in  subjection.  It  was  the  most 
largely  Gentile  city  in  Palestine. 
Through  it  ran  the  great  Roman  road 
along  the  coast.  It  had  the  finest  har- 
bor of  that  whole  region,  likened  by 
Josephus  to  that  of  the  Pirieus  at 
Athens  ;  and  from  it  could  go  forth 
ships  to  all  parts  of  Europe,  Asia,  and 
Africa,  along  the  Mediterranean  coast. 
(27  :i.)  Compare  Josephus,  Anliq.  xv. 
9:6. 

Cornelius  was  the  name  of  a  large 
Roman  clan,  with  which  were  con- 
nected several  nol)le  and  distinguished 
families.  The  officer  here  spoken  of 
had  the  great  honor  of  belonging  to 
the  Italian  band,  or  cohort,  answer- 
ing to  our  regiment,  consisting  of 
troops  raised  in  Italy,  rather  than  of 
those  raised  from  the  nations  of  Pales- 
tine. An  old  inscription  mentions  "a 
cohort  of  Italian  volunteers"  who 
served  in  Syria,  which  some  regard  as 
identical  with  this  one.  It  was  fitting 
and  important  that  the  governor  should 
have  a  liody  of  faithful  trooi>s  on  whom 
he  could  rely.  Cornelius  was  a  cen- 
turion, strictly  a  commander  of  a 
hun<lred  men,  though  the  title  was  also 
apjdied  with  some  latitude  to  those  who 
led  a  larger  or  a  smaller  number. 

2.  Cornelius  not  only  bore  a  distin- 
guished name  and  held  an  honorable 
jK)sition,  but  he  also  had  a  sterling 
character,  and  a  good  reputation.  He 
was  a  devout  man,  one  that  feared 
God— exercising  a  genuine  and  devout 
reverence  of  the  true  God,  implying  an 
ol)edient  state  of  mind  and  a  willing 

allegiance   to    God.       (Luke  1  :  50  ;  is  :  2  ,  Rct. 

19:5.)  His  religion  Avas  so  sincere  and 
real  that  it  had  efficacicmsly  influenced 
all  his  house — his  kinsmen  and  near 
friends.  (ver.-'4.)  He  also  showed  his 
tender  and  loving  spirit  by  giving 
much  alms  to  the  people — to  Gen- 
tiles indeed,  but  especially  to  the  Jews, 
for  he  was  "  of  good  report  among  all 
the  nations  of  the  Jews."  (ver.  22.) 
He  was  not  like  many  Roman  officials 


160 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  X. 


house;   which   gave  much   alms   to  the 
3  people,  and  prayed  to  God  ^alway.    J  He 


saw    in    a   \ision    evidently,  about   the 
ninth  hour  of  the  day,  an  angel  of  God 


Luke  18  :  a  ;  Kom.  12  :  12.         J  ver.  30  ;  ch.  11  :  13. 


who  oppressed  and  plundered  the  peo- 
ple of  the  provinces.  We  are  reminded 
of  the  centurion  who  came  to  Jesus,  to 
whom  the  Jews  bore  testimony,  "  He 
loveth  our  nation  and  hath  built  us  a 
synago;.;ue."  (Luke  7: 5.)  Compare  also 
the  centurion  at  the  crucifixion,  who 
confessed,  "  Truly   this    man  was    the 

Son      of     God."         (Mark  15  :  :t9;  Luke  23  :  47.) 

Prayed  to  God  always — habitual 
in  his  devotions,  in  s])irit  and  in  ax^t, 
for  general  bli'ssings  and  for  particular 
guidance.  Such  a  man  with  such  a 
position,  such  a  character,  and  such 
deeds,  must  have  been  a  favorite,  and 
influential  both  with  Jews  and  (ientiles. 
Such  was  the  first  Gentile  convert. 
While  God  often  calls  his  peojde  from 
among  the  poor  and  lowly  (i  Cor.  i :  26 -is), 
he  also  calls  from  the  more  influential. 
Thus  the  Apostle  John  (Joho  is  :  15),  Saul 
of  Tarsus  (22 :  .1),  and  Cornelius.  From 
tins  account  it  appears  tliat  Cornelius 
had  become  dissatisfied  with  his  pagan 
religion  and  had  renounced  i<lolatry, 
and  through  divine  grace  had  become 
a  true  worshiper  of  the  only  and  true 
God.  He  had  been  thus  prepared  to 
receive  Jesus,  the  Messiah,  as  soon  as 
clearly  presented  to  him.  He  was  in 
some  respects  in  a  condition  similar  to 
the  pious  Jew  in  Old  Testament  times, 
and  to  tliose  who  were  "  waiting  for  the 
consolation  of  Israel."  We  must  not, 
however,  regard  him  as  a  proselyte,  not 
even  of  the  gate,  for  the  wliolc  narra- 
tive i«ij)lies  that,  legally  and  socially,  he 
was  to  be  regarded  as  a  lieathen.  (vcr. 
2!<;  11: 1;  15;  7.)  The  language  of  tiiis 
verse,  though  applicable  to  i)roselytes, 
is  not  a  technical  descri|)tion  of  one. 
Yet  some  able  expositors  have  sni)j)osed 
him  a  proselyte  of  the  gate.  "  But  this 
is  at  variance  with  ver.  28,  34,  3.5;  11  : 
1,  18;  15  :  17,  where  he  is  simply  put 
into  the  class  of  the  Gentiles, — a  cir- 
cumstance which  cannot  be  referred 
merely  to  the  want  of  circumcision,  as 
the  proselytes  of  the  gate  also  belonged 
to  the  communion  of  the  theocracy, 
and  had  cea.sed  to  be  non-Jews  like 
absolute  foreigners.  And  all  the  great 
importance  which  this  event  has  in  a 


connected  view  of  the  books  of  the 
Acts,  has  as  its  basis  the  very  circum- 
stance that  Cornelius  was  a  Gentile." 
(Meyer.) 

3.  According  to  the  best  critical  au- 
thorities the  first  three  verses  make  one 
long  sentence,  saw  agreeing  with  man 
in  ver.  1 :  A  certain  viaii  .  .  .  de- 
vvitt  and  feariny  (iod  .  .  .  saw.  In 
a  vision — a  sight  while  awake  and 
engaged  in  jirayer.  (ver.  30.  s«oa9:io.) 
Evidently — tliat  is,  he  saw  distinct/y 
in  a  vision,  which  was  addressed,  not 
merely  to  the  mind,  but  to  the  senses. 
About  the  ninth  hour — three  o'clock 
in  the  afternoon,  being  one  of  the  Jew- 
ish hours  of  prayer,  i^-i.)  The  fact 
tJiat  Cornelius  was  praying  at  that 
time  (ver.  30)  shows  that  he  had  adopted 
some  of  the  Jewish  regiilations  of 
prayer.  His  contact  with  the  Jewish 
people  dou))tless  had  something  to  do 
with  his  religious  views  and  practices. 
He  had  proliably  seen  and  read  some- 
wliat  the  Jewish  Scriptures  as  trans- 
lated in  the  Sei)tuagint.  That  he  was 
not  Pharisaic  in  his  notions,  nor  a 
moralist,  trusting  in  his  morality,  is 
evident  from  the  fact  that  he  accepted 
the  Saviour  as  soon  as  presented.  He 
appears  to  have  l)een  conscious  that  he 
was  a  sinner,  and  he  had  a  longing  for 
something  which  he  had  not  attained. 
(11:14)  He  had  heard  of  a  jierson 
called  Jesus  (ver.  s7),  and  ]>erhaps 
Philip  was  now  at  Ctesarea,  or  had 
been  there  (8: 40),  having  but  small  suc- 
cess among  some  obscure  persons  of  flic 
comparatively  small  Jewish  ])opula- 
tion  of  that  city.  But  Cornelius  ha<l 
no  clear  view  of  Jesus  and  the  ^lessiah. 
He  may  have  known  something  of 
Hebrew  j>ropliccies  regarding  a  prom- 
ised One,  but  like  the  eunuch  may 
have  been  in  doubt  and  confused  about 
their  meaning.  (8:31,34.)  The  burden 
of  his  prayer  very  probably  was  in  this 
direction,  seeking  light  and  an  assur- 
ance of  salvation  and  acceptance  with 
God.  (Ver.  22.)  Under  such  circum- 
stances how  fitting  the  vision  and  as- 
surance of  answered  prayer,  (ver.  4,) 
An  angel  of  God— one  appearing  in 


Oh.  X.] 


THE  ACTS. 


1.61 


coming  uuto  him,  and  saying  unto  liim, 

4  Cornelius.  And  when  he  looked  on  him, 
he  Wius  afraid,  and  .said,  Wliat  is  it.  Lord? 
And  h<3  said  uuto  him.  Thy  prayers  and 
tliine  alm.s  «are  coiue  up  "for  a  memorial 

5  before  God.    And  now  send  men  to  Joppa, 


and  call  for  one.  ''Simon,  whose  surname 
6  is  I'eter:  he  lodgeth  with  one  <=.Simon  a 
tanner,  whose  house  is  hy  the  sea  side: 
J  he  shall  tell  thee  what  thou  oughtest  to 
do. 


■■  Rev.  8  :  4. 


>  ver.  :J1.        i>  Mark  3  :  16.        «  ch.  9  :  43.        ■>  ch.  11  :  14. 


human  form  (ver.  so)^  coming  to  him 

iu  the  very  place  where  he  was  jiray- 
iiig  and  addressing  him  by  name,  as  in 
tlie  ca.<es  of  Samuel  (i  Sam.  3  :  lO),  and 
Saul.  (»■.♦.)  Au  angelic  appearance 
would  have  not  only  an  assuring  effect 
on  Cornelius,  but  also  great  weight 
with  Peter  (ver.  -12)  and  the  apostles  and 
bretliren  at  .Jerusalem.     (11 : 1,  is.) 

4.  When  Cornelius  fixed  his  eyes 
npou  the  heavenly  messeuger  in  bright 
apparel  (ver.  30)  he  was  awe-struck  ami 
fearful.  He  addressed  him  as  Lord, 
not  in  M-orship,  but  in  i-everence,  as  to 
one  perhaps  from  the  unseen  world. 
What  is  it?  What  hast  thou  to  say, 
and  what  is  the  occasion  of  thy  com- 
ing? Thy  prayers  and  thine  alms 
— the  two  kinds  of  worship  and  service 
mentioned  iu  ver.  2,  both  of  which 
Cornelius  had  aecei)tably  offered. 
Have  come  up,  like  the  smoke  and 
the  vapor  from  ancient  sacrifices.  (Lev. 
2, 9, 16;  5;  12.)  For  a  memorial  —  a 
reminder  of  God,  as  it  were,  of  what 
Cornelius  desired  and  needed.  Before 
God — in  heaven.  (Heb.  1:1 ;  16.)  His 
prayers  had  been  heard;  (Jod  remem- 
bered them,  and  was  al)Out  to  help  him. 
All  this  would  indicate  that  Cornelius 
was  a  true  worshiper,  and  accepted 
through  that  infinite  grace  in  Christ, 
which  was  about  to  lie  made  known  to 
liiiu  througii  tlie  preaching  of  I'eter  and 
the  descent  of  the  Spirit.  "  Intrinsic 
merit  or  efiicacy  is  no  more  ascribed 
in  these  words  to  tlie  good  works  of 
Cornelius  than  to  tlie  oblations  from 
which  the  figure  or  comparison  is 
taken."     (Alexandkk.) 

5.  Having  received  assurance  of  di- 
vine favor,  Cornelius  is  directed  as  to 
what  to  do.  Send  men  to  Joppa — 
about    thirty  mih'S  south  of  Ca;sarea. 

(Seeon9:34.)        Call     fOT,    OT   fetck     One 

Simon,  Avhose  surname  is  Peter. 

One,  or  a  certain  Simon  is  uow  ac- 
cei)ted  as  the  true  reading.  Both  the 
name  and  the  place  of  abode  (ver.  6) 


are  minutely  described  so  as  to  pre- 
vent mistake.  Notice  also  that  tlie 
exact  phrase,  descriptive  of  Peter,  is 
meutioneil  four  times.  (ver.  is,  .12 ; 
11 : 1:1.)     Compare  our  Lord's  naming  of 

Peter.         (John  1  :  42  ;  >I:itt.  16  :  18,  i;>.)         ( 'or- 

nelius  must  be  brought  to  the  know  1- 
edge  of  Christ,  not  by  an  angel,  l)ut  by 
a  man.  But  why  did  not  the  angel  di- 
rect him  to  Philip,  who  was  probably 
then  at  Caesarea  ?  [e-.to-,  21 :  r.)  Because 
the  apostles  were  the  organizers  of  the 
Christian  church,  and  to  Peter  had 
been  given  "the  keys  of  the  kingdom 

of  heaven  "  (Uatt.  is  ;  is,  on   which  see  Authors 

note),  the  power  of  admitting  (n  :i7)  or 
denying  admission.  (8:21.)  Thus  in 
the  exercise  of  this  authority  as  the 
leader  on  the  day  of  Pentecost  he 
o]jencd,  as  it  were,  the  door  of  the 
kingdom  to  the  Jews,  and  now  he  is 
about  to  open  it  to  the  Gentile  world. 
(i5:T.)  Having  accomplished  this  his 
work  was  done,  so  far  as  the  Gentiles 
were  concerned,  for  he  was  an  ajwstle 
to  the  circumcision.  (Gai.  2 : 7, 8.)  Paul 
was  chosen  to  carry  on  that  work  as 
the  ajjostle  of  the  uncircumcision. 

6.  With  one,  or  a  crrtain  Simon, 
a  tanner,  with  whom  Peter  was  l>oard- 
ing,  or  perhaps  whose  hospitality  he 
was  enjoying,  (see on  9 :  w.)  Whose 
house  is"  by  the  seaside— the  Med- 
iterranean. The  seaside  was  conveni- 
ent for  his  occuiiation  and  for  trade. 
It  may  have  l)een  outside  of  the  city, 
on  account  of  the  ceremonial  iinclfan- 
ness  of  his  enii)loyment.  Tlic  .lewish 
oral  law  required  that  sepulclircs  and 
tan-yards  be  at  least  fifty  cubits  from 
the  city.  "  The  only  anti(juity  to  ile- 
tain  tiie  traveler  a  single  iiour  [in 
Joppa]  is  the  traditional  house  of 
Simon.  Like  all  ICastern  dwellings,  it 
is  constructed  of  stone,  square  in  form, 
with  a  fiat  roof,  and  may  have  .stood  for 
centuries,  as,  without  violence,  it  will 
endure  for  hundreds  of  years  to  come. 
Standing  uoar  the  .seaside,  hot li  its  lo- 


162 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  X 


7  And  when  the  angel  which  spake  unto 
Cornelius  was  dt'paried,  he  called  two  of 
hib  household  servants,  and  a  deyout  sol- 


dier of  I  hem  that  waited  on  biiu  continu- 

8  ally  ;  and  when  he  had  declared  all  these 

things  unto  them,  he  sent  them  to  Joppa. 


eatiou  and  the  structure  of  the  build- 
ing are  iu  harinouy  with  the  inspired 
narrative,  and  a  venerable  tradition 
points  to  it  as  once  the  residence  of  a 
tanner.  The  entrance  is  through  a 
low  gallery,  before  which  the  servants 
of  Cornelius  stood  inquiring  for  Peter. 
Witiiin  a  small  court-yard,  containing 
a  well  of  excellent  water,  and  from  the 
court  a  stone  staircase  leads  to  the  roof, 
from  which  I  enjoyed  a  commanding 
view  of  the  sea,  over  mIiosc  blue  waters 
hail  glanced  the  apostolic  eye  as  Peter 
sat  beneath  those  clear  exj)anded  heav- 
ens from  whicli  descended  the  symbolic 
sheet,  oi)ening  to  his  Jewish  under- 
standing the  purposes  of  the  divine 
mind."  (DR.  J.  P.  Newman,  From 
Jhinto  Becrsheba,  p.  275.)  Simon's  tan- 
nery may  have  been  some  distance 
from  his  dwelling.  He  shall  tell 
thee  what  thou  oughtest  to  do. 
These  words  are  not  found  in  the  oldest 
manuscripts  and  versions  and  are  omit- 
ted by  the  highest  critical  authori- 
ties. They  express  the  object  of  the 
mission  to  Peter  (ver.  22),  which  is 
clearly  expressed  in  11  :  14,  and  show 
tliat  the  great  desire  of  Cornelius  was 
to  know  the  way  of  salvation,  and  his 
own  personal  interest  in  it. 

7.  Cornelius  put  the  command  of 
the  angel  ijito  immediate  execution. 
On  that  very  day,  though  so  far  ad- 
vanced, he  sent  away  three  messengers 
to  Jopi)a.  (Ver.  a. ;«. )  Two  of  his 
household  servants — domestics  of 
his  household,  wlio,  lielonging  to  his 
house,  feared  Cod.  (v.r.2.)  A  devout 
soldier  from  his  persoiuil  attendants, 
also  a  man  of  j)ii'ty.  (ver.  2.)  He  chooses 
men  of  kindred  spirit  to  go  for  him  on 
so  important  a  mission. 

8.  \^  hcu  he  had  declared,  or 
fully  related  all  things  that  he  had 
seen  and  that  had  been  commanded 
liim.  This  would  also  indicate  tliat 
tiiese  men  were  of  kindred  religious 
reelings,  to  wliom  such  an  embassy 
could  be  entrusted.  His  sending  nu'S- 
s -Uirers  at  once  was  an  evidence  of  his 
liiith,  and  his  recounting  the  vision  to 
them  was  adapted  to  arouse  their  ex- 


pectation, and  prepare  them  for  the 
confirmation  of  tlieir  faith. 

9.  Peter  is  prei)ared  for  the  coming 
of  the  centurion's  messengers  by  a 
vision.  He  had  been  passing  through 
an  experience  as  well  as  Cornelius. 
Doubtless  the  conversion  of  the  Gen- 
tiles had  often  been  in  his  thouglit. 
Jesus  had  tauglit  that  the  bles.sings  of 
his  kingdom  would  be  world-wide. 
(Matt.  8  :  II,  12  ;  13  ::w),  and  iu  his  last  com- 
mission had  commanded  his  disciples 
to  teach,  or  disciple,  ail  nations,  preach- 
ing the  gospel  to  eveiy  creature  (Matt.  ?» -. 
i9;Mark  16:  i.s),  and  had  told  them  that 
they  sliouldl)e  his  witnesses  even  to  the 
utmost  i>art*  of  the  earth,  (iic)  The 
ancient  j)roi>hecies  also  had  foretold  the 
conversion  of  the  (ientiles,  which  Peter 
in  his  dis(<ourses  had  quoted,  (ch.  n :  3 
2.'>.)  But  how  was  this  to  be  accom- 
plished. Peter  with  the  first  disciples 
geneially  aiijiear  to  have  expected  that 
Gentiles  would  finst  become  proselytes 
to  Judaism,  anil  then  converts  to 
Christianity.  Even  after  the  conver- 
sion of  (.'oriu-lius  some  still  lield  to  at 
least  a  similar  view,  maintaining  that 
(ientiles  must  be  circumcised.  (i»:i.) 
Peter  must  have  had  many  thoughts  on 
this  subject  and  protiably  underwent 
some  modification  of  views.  The  ad- 
vanceii  views  and  jueacliing  of  Stephen, 
the  conversion  of  tlie  half-lieathen 
Samaritans,  and  tlie  Holy  Spirit  com- 
ing ui)on  them,  the  conversion  of  Saul 
of  Tarsus,  Jind  what  he  iieard  from  his 
own  lips  during  liis  visit  at  Jerusalem 

(9:2«;22:21;    Gal.  1:  18),      mUst       all       haVC 

made  a  deej*  impression  on  him.  His 
visits  throughout  Palestine  brought  him 
into  certain  contact  Avith  Gentiles,  and 
natuially  would  arouse  his  solicitude 
for  them.  And  his  residence  with 
Simon  the  tanner,  wlio  was  regarded  by 
the  Jews  as  ceremonially  unclean,  in- 
dicates that  Judaism  was  loosening  its 
hold  u])on  liiiii.  Under  all  these  influ- 
ences Peter  might  well  wonder  whether 
he  fully  understood  God's  method  of 
reaching  the  Gentiles. 

On  the  morroAV.  The  messen- 
gers of  Cornelius,  setting  out  late  iu  the 


Ch.  X.1 


THE  ACTS. 


163 


9  On  the  morrow,  as  they  went  on  their 
journoy,  aud  drew  nigh  unto  the  city, 
'  I'ettr  went  u]>  upou  the  nousetop  to  pruy 

10  about  the  sixth  hour.  And  bo  boeam*' 
very  hungry,  and  would  have  eaten :  but 
while  they  made  ready,  he  'fell  into  a 


'Num.  2i 
«  ch.  7  :  oU ; 


0  ch.  11  :  5,  etc. ;  Matt.  G  :  ii,  G. 


11  trance,  aud  esaw  heaven  opened,  and  a 
certain  vessel  descending  unto  him,  as  it 
had  Iteen  a  great  sheet  knit  at  the  four 

12  corners,  and  let  downjto  the  earth  :wheri'in 
were  all  manner  of  fourfooted  beasts  of 
the  earth,  aud  wild  beasts,  and  creeping 

:  4  ;  Ezok.  «  :  l-o;  2  Cor.  12  :  2-4 ;  Rev.  1  :  10- 
Kcv.  19  :  11. 


day  and  traveling  somewhat  by  night, 
according  to  the  custom  of  tlie  country 
(Luke  11 : 5  «),  would  rcuch  .Joi)j)a  about 
the  middle  of  the  next  day.  While 
tliey  arc  apiu'oaching  the  city,  Peter 
went  up  upon  the  housetop  to 
pray.  The  roofs  of  tlie  houses  of  the 
Orientals  lieing  Hat  and  surrounded 
witli  a  balustrade  three  or  four  feet 
high,  were  frecjuented,  not  only  for 
walking,  hut  also   for   meditation  aud 

prayer.  (Zi-pli.l;  o;  Dem'.  22:  8;  2  KiugsM  :r2; 
J.'r.  is:  l:l;  Lukes  :19.)         "At        .JattU,        the 

ancient  Jopiia,  I  observed  houses 
furnished  with  a  wall  aliont  the  roof, 
within  which  a  person  could  sit  or 
kneel,  without  any  exjtosure  to  the 
view  of  others,  whether  on  the  adjacent 
houses  or  in  the  streets.  At  Jerusalem 
I  entered  the  liouse  of  a  Jew  early  one 
morning  and  found  a  nieni!)er  of  the 
family  sitting  secluiled  and  alone  011  one 
of  the  lower  roofs  eiigagi'd  in  reading 
tlie  Scriptures  and  oOVring  Ids  jjrayers." 
(Dlt:  H.VCKETT,  Illnslnitiinis  of  Script- 
ure, ]).  81.)  This  was  a  titting  ]dace  for 
Peter  to  obey  his  Lord's  command  re- 
garding secret  prayer.  (Mait6:ti)  ]t 
was  about  the  sivth  hour,  aliout 
noou,  one  of  the  stated  Jewish  seasons 
for  prayer.  We  may  easily  believe  that 
one  burden  of  Peter's  prayer  was  the 
conversion  of  the  Gentile  world,  lie 
had  seen  how  slow  was  the  progress  of 
the  gospel  among  tiie  Iieatheu,and  how 
comparatively  few  of  thein  embraced 
Judaism.  He  could  well  cry  out,  "  O 
Lord,  how  long?"  Ashe  looked  out 
from  that  housetop  upon  the  Mediter- 
ranean, whose  waters  washed  three  con- 
tinents, and  thought  of  the  millions 
who,  according  to  proithecy,  were  to  be 
blessed  in  the  Messiaii,  Ins  jn-ayers 
would  naturally  go  out  in  their  helialf. 
As  he  recalled  how  Jonah  went  forth 
from  this  very  port  and  preached  suc- 
cessfully to  the  Ninevites  (Jouaii  3:4,  s), 
he  might  well  crave  like  success. 

10.  While  thus  engaged  iu  medita- 


tion an<l  prayer  he  became  very  hun- 
gry and  disircd  to  eat,  or  taste  uf 
food,  a  condition  prejiaratory  to  the 
vision  tliat  ensued.  In  his  defence  at 
Jernsaleni  Peter  did  not  refer  to  tliis, 
but  he  distinctly  says  that  he  was  pra}'- 
ing.  (ii:fl.)  15ut  while  the  jieojde  of 
the  house  were  preparing  dinner  Peter 
I'ell  into  a  trance,  an  ecslas!/  or  a 
rapture  came  upon  him,  whereby  lie 
was  transj)orted  as  it  were  out  of  him- 
self, and  losing  consciousness  of  outer 
objects,  although  awake,  he  sees  in  his 
mind,  as  with  his  bodily  eyes  and  cars, 
things  siiown  him  by  God.  The  trance 
is  mentioned  only  three  times  in  the 
New  Testament,  here  in  11 :  5  aud  22: 
17.  (Sec .IU 9: 10.)  The  exi)erience  was 
similar  to  that  of  John  on  Patnios  when 
"in  the  sjiirit."  (Rev.  1 :  lo;  4;  1, 2.)  He 
saw   visions  picturing  forth    things  to 

come.      (Sre2Cor.  12:2.) 

11.  Saw  heaven  opened.      The  lan- 
guage is  very  vivid  as  if  the  scene  were 
I  present.     A  certain  vessel — a   can- 
:  vas,  so   shaped    ami    suspended   by  its 
four  corners,  that  it  appeared  like  a 
vessel.      It  was    like    a   great   linoi 
I  sheet   tied  at   its  four   corners    with 
cords  reaching  into  the  heavens  above. 
;  It  was  descendius;  from  heaven,  siig- 
[  gestiug  that  all  things  had  their  origin 
'  in  God,  and  are  cleansed  by  him.     (ver. 
15;  Oen.  1:25.)     ^fany  of  the  oldest  mann- 
scrii)ts  omit  hi  it,  and  read  let  down  hi/  its 
four  corners.   The  great  sheet  naturally 
I  rejiresents  the  wide  world,  and  the  four 
I  corners  the  four  i)arts  of  the  earth,  the 
north,  the  south,  the  cast,  and  the  west, 
from   which  men  should  come  into  the 
kingdom  of  God.     (Matt.  8:11.) 
I      12.  The  contents  were  as  surprising 
to  Peter  witli  his  Jewish  ideas  as  tlie 
vessel  itself.      All  manner  of  four- 
footed  beasts,  etc. — eml)racing  lioth 
the  clean  and  the  unclean.     (Lfv.  u  ;  1  r.) 
The  whole  creation  of  living  land  ani- 
mals   seemed     before     Peter's     mind, 
Fis/ies  are  not  included,  aud  wild  beasts 


164 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cu.  X. 


13  things,  and  fowls  of  the  air.    And  there 
came  a  voice  to  him,  Rise,  Peter ;  kill  and 

14  eat.    But  Peter  said,  Not  so.  Lord ;  "^  for 


I  have  never  eaten  anything  that  is  com- 

15  mon  or  unclean.    And  the  voice  spake 

unto  him  again  the  second  time, 'What 


h  Lev.  20  :  25,  26;  Deut.  14  :  3,  7  ;  Ezek.  4  :  14.        i  ver.  28 ;  oh.  15  :  9  ;  llom.  14  :  14, 17,  20  •  Gal 
3  :  28 ;  1  Tim.  4:3-5;  Titus  1  :  15. 


are  wanting  iu  the  best  manuscripts, 
but  are  found  in  11 :  6. 

13.  More  surprising  still  to  Peter 
was  the  command :  Kise,  Peter, — 
perhaps  he  was  kneeling  or  prostrate  in 
prayer, — kill  and  eat,  any  of  these 
animals  clean  and  unclean.  All  lines 
of  ceremonial  uncleanness  are  ignored. 
The  word  kill,  in  the  original,  is  the 
verb  u.sed  for  slaying  for  sacrifice  (u; 
13, 18),  though  not  limited  to  that  use. 
(Luke  15  :  23. 27,  30.)  The  visiou,  however, 
is  shaped  to  Peter's  bodily  condition  of 
e.xtreme  hunger.  This  was  the  first 
thing,  even  though  the  sacrificial  use 
of  tliese  animals  be  suggested.  With 
this  undenstanding  we  can  with  Alex- 
ander refer  the  command  "  not  merely 
to  the  satisfaction  of  the  ai)i)etite,  but 
to  those  ceremonial  restrictions,  under 
which  the  law  of  Moses  placed  the 
Jews,  both  iu  their  Avorship  and  in 
their  daily  use  of  their  necessaiy  food. 
As  if  the  voice  had  said,  '  From  among 
these  animals  select  thy  oSerings  or 
thy  food  without  regard  to  the  di.stinc- 
tion  of  clean  and  unclean.'  "  There 
came  a  voice  (seen: 7) — wliich  indi- 
cates an  audible  voice. 

14.  Peter  shrinks  back  from  a  com- 
mand so  repugnant  to  his  Jewish  ideas 
and  feelings.     Notwithstanding  his  ex- 
treme  hunger  and  the  clean  aniiuals 
mingled  with  the  unclean,  yet  tlie  ])res- 
ence  of  the  unclean  seemed  to  defile  the 
whole   slieet.     Not   so — htj  no  means, 
fliis  must  not  be.     Lord  is  a  reveren- 
tial  title   aildressed    to    the   unknown 
author   of   the  voice,      (see  on  9:  5.)      It 
was  just  like  Peter,  who,    when  Jesus  { 
foretold  his  sufferings,  exclaimed,  "lie 
it  far  from  thee,  Lord  "  (Matt.  I6:  22),  and 
at  the  washing  of  the  disciples'  feet,  he  ' 
declared,  "  Thou  shalt  never  wash  my  j 
feet."      (John  13: 8.)      Peter,    too,     may 
have  regarded  this  as  a  test  in  respect  ; 
to  tlie  law.     Having  always  lived  as  a 
strict  Jew,  he  adds,  /  never  ate  aiiy- 
tbiug:  common   or  unclean.     The 
highest  critical  authorities  ]>nfer  «»(/ j 
instead  of  or.    Commou— that  which  I 


is  profime,  unhallowed,  not  set  apart  or 
consecrated  according  to  tlie  Levitical 
law.  (Ez,  k.  At :  20.)  To  fill  out  his  idea 
of  the  profane  and  unholy  Peter  adds, 
and  unclean.  The  separation  between 
Jews  and  CJeutiles  was  effected,  not  only 
by  circumcision,  but  also  by  their  laws 
respecting  meats.  (Lev.  20 :  24-26.)  Noth- 
ing Mas  more  repulsive  to  a  Hebrew 
than  to  eat  unclean  meats.  In  2  ilacca- 
bees  t>  :  18 ;  7  :  1,  it  is  related  that  cer- 
tain Jews  submitted  to  death  ratlier 
than  eat  swine's  tiesh.  The  stricter 
Jews,  at  this  day,  to  avoid  all  unclean 
meats,  purchase  only  of  their  own 
butchers.  The  distinction  between 
clean  and  unclean  animals  dates  back 
to  before  the  flood  (Gee.  7:2);  and  was 
recognized  in  the  laws  of  heathen 
nations  as  well  as  in  tho.'^e  of  the  Jews. 
The  Gentile  laws,  however,  had  refer- 
ence rather  to  the  i)riestly  classes, 
wliile  the  Jewish  law  a})plied  to  all  the 
people.  Tlie  discrimination  proliably 
originated  with  reference  to  sacrifices, 
and  then  afterwards  was  applied  to 
food. 

15.  A  fact  and  a  principle  are  now 
stated.  The  Old  Testament  distinction 
between  the  clean  and  unclean  is  abol- 
ished. All  things  are  clean  to  those 
who  receive  them  in  faith  and  thanks- 
giving.     (1  Tim.  4:4,5;   Rom.  14  :  U-IT  ;   1  Cor. 

10:25, 2r..)  And  redemption  extends 
alike  to  men  without  distinction  of  race 
or  nation.  (Coi. 3: 11;  1 :20.)  And  the 
A'oice,  etc.  Eather,  And  a  voice  again, 
the  sjieaker  being  unseen,  a  second  time 
came  to  him.  The  minuteness  and  viv- 
idness of  the  narrative  reminds  us  of 
Mark's  Ciosjiel,  written  under  the  di- 
rection of  Peter.  What  God  hath 
cleansed — more  exactly.  What  (rod 
c/eansed,  declared  to  be  clean,  symbol- 
ically by  their  descending  from  heaven 
and  the  command  to  slay  and  eat.  "For 
only  what  is  clean  is  let  down  from 
heaven.  Peter  continued  to  remember 
w-ll  this  verb.  (i5:9.)"  (Bengel.) 
Thou — in  contrast  to  God.  Make  not 
thou,  who  art  infinitely  less  than  God, 


Cii.  X.] 


THE  ACTS. 


165 


God  hath  cleansed,  that  call  not  thou  com- 

16  nion.  This  was  done  thrice:  and  the  ves- 
sel was  received  up  again  into  heaven. 

17  Now  while  Tott  r  doubted  in  himself 
what  this  vision  which  he  had  seen  should 
mean,  liehold,  the  men  which  were  sent 
from  Cornelius  had  made  inquiry  for 
Simon's  house,  and  stood  before  the  gate, 


and  called,  and  asked  whether  Simon., 
which  was  surnamed  Peter,  were  lodged 
tliere. 

While  Peter  thought  on  the  vision, 
•^the  Spirit  said  uuto  him,  Behold,  three 
men  seek  thee.  'Arise  therefore,  and  get 
thee  down,  and  go  with  them,  doubting 
nothing:  for  1  have  sent  them. 


k  ch.  11  :  12;  Isa.  30  :  21 ;  John  IC  :  13.        »  ch.  15  :  7. 


common,  unhallowed  and  unclean. 
How  IVtcr  must  have  remembered  the 
words  of  Jesus,  "  There  is  nothing  from 
without  a  man,  that  entering  into  him 
can  (letilc  him"  (Mark  7;  is);  and  may 
We  not  see  tlie  iini)ress  of  Peter  in  Mark 
7  :  I'J,  Revised  Version,  "  This  he  said, 
making  all  meats  clean."  Thus  as  our 
Lord's  visit  to  Sychar  (John  4:5  f.)  was 
preparatory  to  the  preaching  of  Philip 
in  Samaria,  so  our  Lord's  discourse  on 
defiled  liands  was  paving  the  way  for 
the  fuller  revelation  to  Peter  at  Joppa. 
Here  also  we  see  one  of  the  contacts  of 
the  Acts  with  the  Gospels.  It  was  very 
probably  in  Peter's  house  at  Caper- 
naum where  Jesus  exj)lained  his  words 
to  the  disciples  (M.irk  7 :  n) ;  and  it  was 
Peter  himself  wlio  asked  the  explana- 
tion. (Matt.  Id  :  lo.)  Other  contacts  with 
the  Gospels  in  this  account  of  Corne- 
lius may  be  seen  in  ver.  38 ;  11  :  16.  (See 

also  Luke  11  :  41,  and  Dote.) 

10,  This  Avas  done  thrice.    The 

words  were  spoken  three  times,  to  ren- 
der the  communication  more  emphatic, 
and  to  imjiress  Peter  that  what  he  had 
seen  was  a  divine  reality.  Again — or 
iiiimediately,  according  to  the  oldest 
and  best  manuscripts :  And  imme- 
diately the  vessel  was  received  up  i)ito 
heaven,  in  contrast  to  its  gradual  and 
slow  descent,  (ver.  ii.)  The  object  of 
all  this  was  symbolically  to  show  that 
the  distinction  hitherto  existing  be- 
tween Jews  and  Gentiles  was  to  cease, 
and  that  Christianity  was  for  all  men. 
(Ver.  u,3i.)  And  SO  Jew  and  Gentile  are 
to  compose  that  host,  whose  robes  are 
made  white  in  the  blood  of  the  lamb. 

(Rev.  7:14.) 

17.  While  Peter  doubted,  was  per- 
plexed, and  at  a  loss  to  know  what  the 
vision  might  signify.  How  the  matter 
was  growing  in  liis  mind  is  told  in  ver. 
19.  He  was  no  longer  in  a  raptured 
state,  but  had  come  to  himself  and 
was  pondering  the  new  revelation  tliat 


was  gleaming  in  his  soul.  Its  full 
meaning,  its  design  and  its  application, 
was  ))Ut  dimly  seen  ;  l)ut  at  once  must 
have  been  suggested  to  his  mind,  when 
he  heard  tliat  messengers  from  Cor- 
nelius were  at  his  door.  Notice  how 
the  Lord  had  arranged  the  time  of  cor- 
responding incidents.  While  the  mes- 
sengers were  drawing  nigh  the  city  the 
trance  of  Peter  began  (^er.y),  and  new 
while  jjerplexed  about  its  meaning  the 
messengers  are  at  the  gate  inquiring 
for  him.  The  gate  was  the  j)orch  or 
entrance  to  the  open  courtyard  around 
which   Jewish   houses  were  generally 

built.       (Sceon  ver.  6.) 

18.  And  called — a  substitute  for 
knocking.  They  call  to  the  porter,  or 
to  any  one  wlio  miglit  have  charge  of 
the  gate.  Asked,  or  were  aitlciixj, 
while  Peter  was  in  a  state  of  per- 
l)lexity.     (vcr.  17.)     "V^Iiether  Simon, 

etc.       (Nee  on  ver.  5.) 

19.  While  Peter   thought   on — 

7v  IS  earnestly  considering  the  vision 
— revolving  carefully  all  the  things  he 
had  seen  and  heard,  and  trying  to  learn 
the  lesson  intended,  and  doubtless  pray- 
ing for  guidance,  the  Holy  Spirit  in- 
forms him  of  the  mes.sengers  from  Cor- 
nelius and  directs  him  to  go  with  them. 
Behold  three  men,  etc.  This  was 
doubtless  the  first  intimation  that  Peter 
liaii  of  tlieir  presence.  Several  import- 
ant manuscripts  omit  three.  Its  place 
in  11  :  11  is,  however,  undisputed. 

20.  IJotli  Cornelius  and  Peter  must 
eacli  do  liis  part,  and  thereby  they 
sliow  their  faith.  Get  thee  down. 
Two  stairs  usually  conducted  from  the 
roof  of  Oriental  houses,  one  inside  the 
house,  the  other  external  to  the  street. 
Peter  would  probably  descend  the  lat- 
ter and  meet  the  men  at  the  gate. 
Nothing  doubting — without  any 
hesitation  as  to  whether  it  be  lawful  or 
not.  For  I  have  sent  them — the 
Holy   Spirit    through  the  angels  and 


166 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  X. 


21  Then  Peter  went  down  to  the  men 
which  were  sent  unto  hhn  from  (Doruc- 
liu3 ;  and  said,  Behold,  I  am  he  whom  ye 
seek :  what  is  the  cause  wherefore  ye  are 

22  conie?  And  they  said,  m Cornelius  the 
ceuturion,  a  just  man,  and  one  that  fear- 


™  ver.  1,  2,  etc. 


eth  God,  and  "of  good  report  among  all 
the  nation  of  the  Jews,  was  warned  fioni 
(iod  by  au  holy  augel  to  send  fur  line 
into  his  house,  and  to  hear  words  of  thee. 
23  Then  called  he  them  in,  and  lodged  ttum. 


'  ch.  22  :  12. 


Cornelius.  Cornelius  was  under  the 
power  of  the  Spirit  when  he  saw  the 
vii^ion,  and  through  his  iuHuence  he 
sent  the  messengers.  The  Holy  8i)irit 
is  honored  throughout  the  Acts,  and 
liis    personal    directing    is    frequently 

recognized.  (See  S  -.  ao  ;  13  :  2  ;  16  ;  6,  7.)    Peter 

himself  makes  special  mention  of  this 
command  of  the  Spirit  in  his  defense  at 
Jerusalem.     (11:12.) 

21.  Then  Peter  went  down  to 
the  men — heartily  obedient  to  the 
command  of  tlie  Spirit,  and  eager  to 
know  from  these  ia[iidly  occurring  in- 
cidents tlie  mind  of  the  Lord,  and  the 
full  nuaning  of  the  vision.  The  words, 
Which  were  sent  unto  him  from 
Cornelius,  are  wanting  in  the  best 
iiianuscii]>ts.  IVter  had  learned  a  ju'e- 
paratory  ol)ject  lesson  fiom  the  trance, 
and  also  tliat  the  Spirit  had  sent  the 
men,  hut  he  was  entirely  ignorant  of 
all  the  rest.  Hence  he  at  once  declares 
tt)  tlie  messengers,  I  am  he  whom  ye 
seek,  and  asks  the  cause  of  their 
coming.  His  manner  and  his  words 
must  have  had  au  assuring  effect  upon 
them. 

22.  Cornelius  the,  rather  «,  cen- 
turion, there  being  numy  such  in 
Palestine,  and  Cornelius  being  yet  un- 
known to  Peter.  A  just,  or  righteous 
man,  in.«tead  of  "  devout  man,"  as  in 
ver.  2.  This  was  a  trait  of  character 
which  these  messengers  had  had  oppor- 
tunity to  witness,  both  in  his  private 
affairs  and  in  his  public  administration. 
or  good  report  among  all  the 
nation  of  the  Jcavs — by  the  Jews 
generally,  at  Ca'sarea  and  elsewhere, 
wherever  he  was  known.  Compare 
tills  description  M'ith  that  in  ver.  2,  and 
with  the  divine  requirement  in  Micah 
6  :  8.  Warned  from  God — diiineh/ 
instructed.  (Matt.  2: 12,'on  whicii  com- 
pare note  ;  Heb.  8  : 5 ;  11  :  7.)  The  Greek 
word  denotes  a  divine  resjjonse  and 
commonly  imjilies  a  previous  j)rayer. 
la  this  case  Cornelius  had  been  directed 


in  answer  to  prayer,  (ver.  <.)  From 
God  is  not  in  the  original,  but  the 
verb  is  constuntly  used  of  divine  mes- 
sages. Conijiare  the  instructive  warn- 
ings given  to  Joseph  (wait. 2 :  12, 22)  and 
to  Noah  (iieij.  11:7),  the  revelation  to 
Simeon  (i.uke2:26)  and  the  divine  in- 
struction to  Moses  (Heb.  8:5),  where  this 
verse  occurs.  To  send  for  thee^ 
This  corroborates  the  Spirit's  command 
to  Peter,  "  For  I  have  sent  them." 
(ver  2(1.)  It  also  affords  an  explanation 
why  Cornelius  had  not  come  himself. 
To  hear  words  of  thee — regarding 
salvation.  (11  :U.)  For  this  he  had 
been  praying  and  this  was  tlie  express 
object  in  sending  for  Peter.  There  could 
be  no  doubt  aliout  the  Lord's  will  in 
Peter's  mind  regarding  these  men  and 
their  mission.  It  was  confirmed  on  all 
sides.  What  a  new  revelation  is  burst- 
ing in  upon  Peter's  soul.  Yet  he  must 
go  to  Cavsarea,  and  witness  tiicre  .to  un- 
derstand fully.  So  he  calls  the  mes- 
sengei-s  in  and  lodges  them.     (ver.  23.) 

23^8.  Peter  goes  to  Cj:sakka, 
Preaches  the  Gospel  to  Gen- 
tiles,   WHO     Believe    and     ark 

B A  PTIZED.  (11  :  12-11 ;  Deut-  10:17;  Isa.  61 : 1  j 
Luke  1 :  18.) 

23.  And     lodged      them— f?j^«»- 

tainnl  litem,  although  strangcre  and 
Gentiles.  On  the  morrow.  It  was 
well  on  into  the  afternoon  (ver.  9),  and 
the  men  were  doubtless  weary.  Cer- 
tain brethren  from  Joppa  accom- 
panied him.  There  were  six  of  them. 
(11:12.)  They  appeared  to  have  gone 
voluntarily.  Peter's  vision  had  natur- 
ally awakened  their  interest  and  a 
desire  to  know  the  issue  of  the  matter. 
It  was  also  a  wise  precaution.  They 
liecame  witnesses  to  the  convi'ision  of 
Gentiles,  and  not  only  assented  to  their 
bai)tism,  but  some  of  them  also  prol-a- 
lily  performed  the  act.  Peter  thiLS  had 
them  in  full  accord  with  what  was 
done,  and  they  proved  of  great  advan- 
tage to  him  in  his  defence  at  Jerusalem. 


Cii.  X.] 


THE  ACTS. 


167 


Peter  preaches  to  Corneltus  and  receives  be'iev- 
ing  Goitiles  into  the  church. 

AND  on  the  morrow  Peter  went  away 
with  them,  "and  certain  brethren   from 

24  joppa  accompauied  liim.  And  the  mor- 
row after  they  entered  into  Ciesarea.  And 
Cornelius  waited  for  them  and  had  called 
together  his  kinsmen  and  near  friends. 

2')  And  as  Peter  was  coming  in,  Cornelius 


met  him,  and  fell  down  at  his  feet,  and 

26  worshipped  him.  Bui  Peter  took  hini  up, 
saying,  PStand  up;    I  myself  also   am  a 

27  man.  And  as  he  talked  with  him,  he 
went  in,  and  found  many  that  were  come 
together. 

28  And  he  said  unto  them,  Ye  know  how 
qthat  it  is  an  unlawful  thing  for  a  man 
that  is  a  Jew  to  keep  company,  or  come 
unto  one  of  another  nation;  but  '(iod 


•  ver.  45  ;  ch.  11  :  12. 


P  ch.  14  :  14, 15;  Rev.  19  ;  10  ;  22  :  9.        q  ch.  11  :  2,  IS ;  John  4  ;  9;  Gal. 
2  :  12-14.         '  ch.  15  :  8,  9  ;  Eph.  3  ;  6. 


(11:12.)  The  minuteness  of  detail  in 
the  whole  aecount  indicates  that  Luke 
received  it  from  an  eye-witness,  while 
at  Csesarea  (-'T:!),  pos-sibly  from  Peter, 
or  one  of  these  six  brethren. 

24.  On  the  morioAV  they  en- 
tered Cffpsarea.  A  single  day  was 
too  short  for  this  comi)any  of  ten  to  go. 
It  was  now  the  fourth  day  since  tlie 
messengers  left  Ctesarea,  prol)ahly  a 
little  after  noon,  (ver.8,  y.)  Corne- 
lius waited  for  them — )cas  e.cpect- 
ing  them.  He  could  calculate  the  time 
it  would  take,  and  was  eagerly  antici- 
pating the  coming  and  the  message  of 
Peter.  Had  called  together  his 
kinsmen — those  wlio  were  related  by 
blood,  and  near  friends  wlio  wore 
such  by  sympathy  and  follow  feelings. 
They  were  a  large  number  (ver.  27)  and 
had  felt  tlie  pious  influence  of  Corne- 
lius. God  had  been  working  through 
him  in  bringing  these  Gentiles  into  a 
preparatory  state  for  receiving  the  gos- 
pel. 

25.  As  Peter  was  coming  in, 
Cornelius  met  him — at  the  door, 
where  salutations  took  place).  "Tliis 
first  meeting  of  Cornelius  and  Peter  is 
one  of  the  great  incidents  of  history." 
(HowsoN  AND  Spkxck.)  Fell  down 
at  his  feet  and  worshipped  him 
— did  reverence  or  /loiiinf/''.  Notice  how 
delicately  this  is  referreil  to  witliout 
mentioning  him.,  wliich  is  not  in  the 
Original.  Cornelius  deeply  revered  the 
man  wliose  coming  was  t!i rough  angelic 
direction.  He  honors  liim  as  an  am- 
bassador of  the  Lord,  (^ompare  the 
reverence  paid  to  Jesus  by  .Jairus  (Matt. 
9 :  18),  on  which  see  note.  "  Since  Cor- 
nelius acknowledged  Jehovah  as  the 
true  God,  and  must  have  regarded  him 
as  the  only  proper  object  of  worship,  it 
is  difficult  to  believe  that  he  intended 


this  as  an  act  of  religious  homage." 
(Hackett.) 

26.  Peter  took  him — )-fiised  him 
up  from  liis  prostrate  position,  by  the 
command,  Stand  up,  and  the  accom- 
panying helping  hand.  I  also  am  a 
man.  He  would  not  receive  any  un- 
due reverence,  nor  any  appearance  of 
religious  liomage ;  nor  anything  that 
might  encourage  it.  And  as  to  how 
miich  Cornelius  meant  i)y  his  act, 
Peter  might  be  in  doubt.  See  cases 
where  religious  homage  was  intended. 

(U  :lo;  Kev.  22:8,  9.)        HoW    Uulike    Pctcr 

are  the  popes  of  Rome  who  claim  to  be 
Peter's  successors,  yet  have  received 
the  humble  homage  of  kings  and  peo- 
l)le  !  It  has  often  been  noteil  that  Jesus 
never  refu.sed  similar  homage,  which 
can  only  be  explained  by  his  conscious- 
ness of  his  own  divinity,     (muu.  8:2;9: 

8;  U  :33;  15  :  25.) 

27.  As  he  talked  with  him — con- 
versed familiarly,  and  on  equal  terms, 
enjoying  his  hospitality.  It  was  now 
becoming  easy  for  Peter  to  talk  with  a 
Gentile.  He  went  in — entered  the 
room  where  the  company  was  awaiting 
his  arrival,  perhaps  an  upper  room. 
(1:13.)  And  found  many — a  com- 
paratively large  company.  Doubtless 
a  matter  of  satisfaction  and  surprise  to 
Peter.  Well  might  he  be  reminded  of 
the  first-fruits  of  Samaritans  in  our 
Lord's  day, — a  field  already  white  unto 
the  harvest.     (Joiini:35.) 

28.  Coming  tints  suddenly  into  a 
company  of  Gentiles,  who  knew  of  his 
arrival,  Peter  feels  that  some  explana- 
tion is  needful.  Ye  know.  He  ap- 
peals to  them  as  well  aware  of  the  hin- 
drances preventing  Jews  from  having 
social  intercourse  with  Gentiles.  The 
word  translated  unlawful  is  used  only 
by  Peter  in  the  New  Testament,  here 


168 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  X. 


hath  showed  me  that  I  should  not  call 
29  any  man  common  or  uncloan.  Therefore 
came  I  iinio  yuii  without  ),'ainsaying,  as 
soon  as  I  was  sent  for:  I  ask  therefore  for 
what  intent  ye  have  sent  for  me? 

B  cli.  1  :  10.       «  Matt.  28  :  3  ;  Mark  IC.  :  ', ;  Luke  24  ;  4.       "  ver.  4,  etc. ;  Dan.  10  :  12  ;  Hiwiea  6  :  3. 


30  And  Cornelius  said,  Four  days  ago  I 
was  fasting  until  this  hour;  and  at  the 
ninth  hour  I  jirayed  in  my  house,  arid, 
behold,  s  a  man  stood  before  me*  in  bright 

31  clothing,  and  said,  Cornelius,  "thy  prayer 


and  in  1  Peter  4  :  3,  and  denotes  that 
which  is  not  allotved,  being  oi)i)Osed  to 
and  offensive  to  venerable  eustoni.  To 
keep  company,  to  join  /liuise/f  to  or 
come  unto  one  of  another  nation. 
Notice  Peter  uses  a  softened  expression, 
and  does  not  say  a  heathen.  Peter's 
bearers  understood  liis  meaning,  as  not 
referring  to  all  intercourse,  Init  to 
social ;  for  commercial  dealings  were 
permitted.  The  law  against  unclean 
meats,  and  against  alliances  and  mar- 
riages between  Jews  and  Gentiles  (Lev. 
11  :i  f. ;  oeut.  7: 1-8)  hud  coiiie  to  bc  Un- 
derstood as  forbidding  all  social  in- 
terc(nir.se  with  them.  It  seems  tliat  the 
matter  of  eating  and  tlie  conse<iuent 
defilement  formed  in  tliiscase  tlie  prin- 
cipal ground  of  offence,  "Thou  wentest 
in  to  men  uncircumcised,  and  didst  eat 
with  tlicin."  (ii:s.)  It  is  not  unlikely 
that  T'cter  and  bis  company,  being 
weary  and  hunirry  on  their  arrival, 
had  just  partaken  of  refreshments.  In 
this  and  in  other  res]>ects  they  had  put 
themselves  on  social  equality  with 
Gentiles.  The  declaration  of  contem- 
porary writers  accords  with  what  Peter 
here  says.  Thus  Josephus  (font.  Ap. 
11:28):  "Those  foreitjners  who  come 
to  us,  without  submitting  to  our  laws, 
Moses  permitted  not  to  have  any  inti- 
mate connection  with  them."  And 
Juvenal  (.SV(/.  xiv.  103)  says  extrava- 
gantly that  "  .Tews  would  not  show  the 
way,  excejitto  tiieir  fellow-religionists; 
nor  guide  any  liut  a  circumcised  ])erson 
to  a  fountain  of  which  he  was  in 
search";  and  Tacitus  with  prcdjudice 
(ITist.  v.  .5) :  "They  cherished  against 
all  mankind  the  hatred  of  eiifmics  ; 
they  were  sejiarate  in  board  and  bed." 
Bnt  <^od  hath  shoAved  me — in  the 
vision  and  tbrough  the  Sinrit.  (vcr.  i.i, 
19.2(1.)  Me  is  in  emjihatic  coidrast  to 
Ye  above.  Ye  know,  yet  God  showed 
me.  Man  is  also  emi)hatic.  God 
shewed  that  I  should  not  call  any 
man  common  or  unclean. 

29.    Therefore — because    he    had 
been  thus  divinelj'  corrected  regarding 


social  intercourse  with  Gentiles. 
Came     I    without    gainsaying — 

without  objecting,  and  hence  without 
delay  :  "  Contrast  Peter's  promptness 
witli  the  hesitation  of  Closes  (Exod.  4  : 
10, 13),  and  of  Jeremiah  (Jer.  i  :t>),and  his 
gladness  with  the  moroseness  of  Jonah 
{jonaU4:i)."  (AjuiOTT.)  I  ask  there- 
fore for  what  intent,  etc.  \Vhile 
Peter  knew  already  the  rcaaon,  he  de- 
sired a  fuller  statement  from  Cornelius 
liimself,  for  the  good  of  all  concerned, 
and  as  preparatory  to  what  lie  himself 
should  say.  Peter  had  indeetl  had  a 
continual  revelation  of  trutli,  from  the 
trance  on  the  housetoji  until  this  hour. 
The  great  lesson  was  contirmed  by 
every  successive  incident.  It  really 
ended  only  as  the  Holy  Sjiirit  fell 
upon  the  believing  Gentiles.    (Ver.  44-47.) 

30.  Cornelius  in  rejily  relates  his 
vision,  what  he  had  done,  and  his  read- 
iness to  hear  the  word  of  (iod.  (Ver. 
30-34;  seen;:  13,  u.)  Four  days  ago — 
when  the  angel  ap]>eared  to  him, 
allowing  two  days  for  the  journey 
of  the  messengers  of  Cornelius,  and 
two  for  Peter's  journey.  (See  on  ver.  24.) 
I  was  fasting  until  this  hour 
— from  the  morning  until  about  the 
iiintli  hour.  This  is  tlie  most  nat- 
ural meaning.  Some  ancient  nianu- 
scrijtts  omit  fiisfinr/  and  read,  accord- 
ing to  the  Revised  Version,  I  was  keep- 
in*)  the  ninth  hour  of  prayer,  which 
woulil  show  at  least  the  true  s])irit  of 
fasting.  But  other  old  manuscripts 
contain  sultstantially  the  reading  of  the 
text.  8ome  supjiose  tliat  /(istiny  was 
omitted  by  some  cojiyist  because  it  is 
not  mentioned  in  ver.  2.  In  my 
house — in  retirement  at  .secret  prayer. 
A  man  ...  in  bright  clothing. 
Here  lie  descrilies  him  according  to  his 
a]>]>earaiice  ;  in  11  :  13,  Peter  speaks  of 
him  as  be  really  was,  an  anf/e/.  (see 
1 :  10;  i.uke  -'4 : 4.)  Augels  in  the  Bible  are 
never  described  with  wings.  Cherubim 
(Eiek.io:5)  and  Scrapliim  are  alone  so 
described,     (isa.  6:2.) 

31,  Cornelius,  thy  prayer  is, 


Ch.  X.l 


THE  ACTS. 


1G9 


is  heard,  'and  tliy  alms  are  had  in  re- 
32  membrance  iu  the  sijjht  of  Uod.  Send 
therefore  to  Joppa,  and  call  hither  Simon, 
whose  surname  is  Peter ;  he  is  lodged  in 
the  house  of  one  Simon  a  tanner  Ly  the 
sea  side:    who,  when  he   cometh,  shall 


33  speak  unto  thee.  Immediately  therefore 
1  sent  to  thee;  and  thou  hast  well  done 
that  thou  art  come.  Now  therefore  are 
we  all  here  present  before  God,  to  hear  all 
things  that  are  commanded  thee  of  (jod. 

'oi      Then  Peter  opened  his  mouth,  and  said, 


»  Heb.  6  :  10. 


rather  ions,   heard.     Notice  that  the  i 
sin.s^ular  is  used  instead  of  the  jdiiral,  i 
"])fayers"  in  ver.  4  pointing douhtless  i 
to  some  sj>ecial  prayer  or  petition  which 
he  had  offered,  for  enligliteiiuieut  and 
clearer  views,  and  assurances  concern- 
ing salvation.     But  as  this  was  largely 
the  burden  of  all  his  prayers,  the  plural 
could  also  be  used.  Thine  alms  are, 
rather,  were  remeinhered,  at    the  time 
when  given,  in  the  right  spirit.     See  in 
ver.  4,  where  prayer  and  alms  are  not 
separated  as  here. 

32.  Compare  with  ver.  .5,  6,  and  note 
the  slight  variation  and  sul)stantial 
agreement.  Therefore  instead  of 
"  and  now  ;  "  call  hither — send  for 
Simon.  When  he  cometh  shall 
speak  unto  thee — concerning  the 
absorbing  theme  of  his  thoughts,  salva- 
tion, its  method,  and  his  personal  inter- 
est in  it.  (See on  ver. -ii.)  These  words 
are  not  found  in  some  of  the  oldest 
mainiserij)ts ;  but  others  have  tliein,  i 
and  some  suj)pose  them  to  have  been  : 
omitted  because  wanting  in  ver.  6. 

33.  Immediately — the  same  after- 1 
noon    of   the    vision,     (ver.  7.)     Thou  : 
hast    well     done,     in     coming    so 
promptly   (ver.  as.)  and  when  so  much 
needed.    The  i)hrase  is  a  common  and  , 
courteous  one,  expressive  of  gratifica-  i 

tion  and  approval.       (See  Mark   7  :  :i7  ;   Phil.  | 
4  :  U ;  James  2  :  S  ;  2  Peter  1  :  19 ;  ,•!  John  6.)     No  W  ! 

therefore— since  in  my  sending  and 
in  your  coming  we  have  been  divinely  ! 
directed,  are  Ave  all  here  present  ! 

before    God,  as  in   the   presence  ofi 
Jehovah,  who  lias  been  preparing  our 
hearts  for  this  very  occasion.     Notice  ' 
that   Cornelius   includes   his    kinsmen  { 
and  near  friends  wlio  were  present.    He  ! 
had   been  diligent  in   making   known 
the  truth  so  far  as  he  understood  it,  and 
in  relating  the  wonderful  revelation  he 
had  received.     And   not  only  tliis,  but 
he  had  found  out  the  feelings  of  the 
company,  and  knew  they  were  in  sym- 
pathy with  himself  and  anxious  regard-  j 


ing  their  spiritual  interests.  To  hear 
all  things — reverently  and  obediently 
without  any  disposition  to  take  excej>- 
tion  to  any  requirement  that  might  be 
made.  Cornelius  was  ignorant  of  what 
Cod  might  command.  He  regarded 
Peter  as  a  messenger  from  God,  and 
this  he  had  a  right  to  do,  since  the 
angel  had  directed  him  to  send  for  him, 
and  Peter's  own  vision  and  words  con- 
firmed it.  So  it  was  not  Peter's  words, 
but  the  commands  of  Cod  through  him 
that  Cornelius  and  his  comjiany  desired 
to  know.  Commanded  thee  of 
God,  or  acconling  to  the  oldest  maiut- 
scripts,  from  the  Lord,  in  which  case 
they  had  come  to  recognize  Peter  as  an 
embassador  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  and  now 
they  desire  to  know  fully  what  he  re- 
quired. 

34.  Peter  opened  his  mouth^ 
imlicating  the  beginning  of  a  regular 
and  important  discourse.  The  same 
phrase  is  used  of  Jesus  at  the  beginning 
of  the  Sermon  on  the  Mount.  (Matt. »:  2.) 
After  the  statement  that  no  distinction 
of  race  or  nation  can  form  any  barrier 
to  acceptance  with  God,  Peter  ]>resents 
a  summary  of  the  life  and  work  of 
.k'sus,  the  Lord  of  all,  the  Judge  of  the 
living  and  the  dead,  and  the  Saviour 
from  sin  of  all  who  believe  on  him. 

Tliis  verse  and  the  next  eml)ody  the 
lesson  whiclt  Peter  had  learned,  the 
culmination  of  the  narrative  thus  far. 
As  Peter  takes  into  view  the  wliole 
case,  Cornelius'  vision  and  exi>erieuce 
in  wonderful  harmony  with  his  own, 
and  the  large  com))any  before  him,  rev- 
erent and  anxiously  waiting  to  hear  tiie 
word  of  God,  every  remaining  doul)t 
disappears,  and  he  exclaims,  Of  a 
truth — it  is  a  fact!  I  perceive — I 
comjjrehend  it  now — that  God  is  no 
respecter  of  persons.  Peter  uses  a 
word  found  in  no  earlier  Greek  writer, 
and  only  here  in  the  New  Testament, 
meaning  literally  «n  accepter  of  faces 
or  appearances,  and  answers  \veli  to  our 


170 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  X. 


y  Of  a  truth  I  perceive  that  God  is  no         he  » that  feareth  him,  and  *  worketh  right- 
35  respecter  of  persona :  but » iu  every  nation    36  eousness,  "is  accepted  with  him.     The 


y  Dent.  10  :  17  ;  2  Chron.  19:7;  Job  Ai  :  19 ;  Kcjui.  2  :  11  ;  1  Peter  1  :  17.  »  ch.  15  ;  9 ; 

1  Cor.  12  :  13  ;  Gal.  3  :  28  ;  Col.  1  :  6 ;  3  :  11.        •  I'a.  85  :  9.        •>  Ezek.  18  :  27.      J:  Gen.  4:7; 
Ueb.  11  :  4-0. 


phrase,  respecter  of  persons.  It  has 
reference  to  external  conditions,  such 
as  rank,  race,  or  other  grounds  of  ex- 
ternal superiority.  Got]  is  not  partial 
on  these  accounts.  Another  word, 
having  the  .^anie  formation,  is  found 
four  times  in  the  New  Testament  (Kom. 

2  :  11  ;  Col.  .S  :  25  ;  E|>h.  B  :  !) ;  James  2  :  l)^  luivillg 

the  same  idea  of  j>artiality  ou  account 
of  outward  circumstances,  and  not  on 
account  of  intrinsic  merit  or  moral 
worth.  The  trutli  was  not  new,  for  it  is 
a.s.serted  in  the  Old  Testament,  "The 
Great  God  .  .  .  who  regardetii  not  per- 
sons."     (  Deiu.  1(1 :  17  ;  1  S:ira.  16  :  7  :  Lev.  I'J  :  I.i.) 

But  such  words  were  largely  limited  hy 
the  Jews  to  tlieir  own  j>eo]>le,  and  were 
regarded  as  consistent  witli  a  divine 
partiality  for  Israel.  Peter  uses  the 
Avord  with  a  l)roader  apjdication.  Tlie 
words  "  In  every  nation  "  (next  verse), 
sliow  tluit  lie  means  that  7-ace  and 
tuition  are  among  the  outward  circum- 
stances which  do  not  affect  tlie  divine 
judgment.  And  as  he  liad  ex])ccted 
that  Cientiles  wouhl  receive  Cliristianity 

thrOUgll    Judaism    (seeou  ver.  l  aud9),  lie  is 

now  convinced  that  uncirciimcision  is 
no  longer  any  harrier,  tiiat  Gentilesand 
Jews  stood  on  an  ecpiality  hefore  God. 
The  truth,  liowever,  in  this  verse,  is 
put  negatively  ;  in  the  next  verse  juisi- 
tively. 

35.  But  in  every  nation — em- 
phatic. "Wlietiier  (Jod's  chosen  race  of 
tlie  Jews  or  not.  He  that  feareth 
hiin — exercising  a  genuine  and  devout 
reverence  toward  tiod,  iiuj)lying  an 
obedient  state  of  mind.     (i.uk.-  i  •.  oO;  i 

Peter  2  :  17.     See  on  v.r.  2.)    >Vorketh  fight- 

eousness — lives  niirif/lilly.  A  phrase 
applied  to  those  who  truly  serve  God. 
(Heb.  11 :  33.)  Tile  similar  iihrast-  "  to  do 
righteousness "  is  found  in  1  John  2  : 
29  ;  3  :  7  ;  3  :  10.  Comi>arf  Matt.  tS  :  1, 
where  rif/hteousncss  (Revised  Version) 
includes  alms,  fasting,  and  jn-ayer,  all 
of  which  Cornelius  api>eais  truly  to 
have  observed.  Is  accepted  with 
him— rather,  is acceptahletu  li im.  Such 
persons    as   above   described   are  in   a 


condition  to  be  received  and  approved 
by  God.  But  how  ?  Surely  not  in- 
dependently of  Christ ;  for  Peter's  ob- 
ject in  coming  was  to  preach  Jesus  the 
Christ,  and  the  burden  of  his  di.scourse 
was  .salvation  through  him.  (Ver.w.) 
Cornelius  was  not  a  moralist,  depend- 
ing on  his  morality,  for  he  ivceived 
Christ  as  soon  as  ])resented  by  Peter. 
God  had  been  leading  Cornelius  and 
preparing  Peter,  anil  his  design  was 
"  to  take  out  of  the  Gentiles  a  i>eople 
for  his  name  "  ('5:  u),  not  to  save  them 
without  Christ,  but  to  introduce  them 
into  the  kingdom  of  Christ.  Cornelius 
.seems  to  have  been  in  much  the  same 
condition  as  the  ]>ions  Jew  before 
Christ — a  worshiper  of  the  true  God, 
feeling  the  need  of  more  light,  and  per- 
liai)s,  like  the  eunuch  (s:  2h),  a  reader 
of  the  Old  Testament  .Scriptures,  and  a 
searcher  after  the  Promised  One.  lie 
seems  to  have  been  in  a  state  accept- 
able to  God  through  him  who  was  to 
come.  He  needed  Peter,  in  order  to 
know  the  fact  of  his  per.sonal  salvation 
and  the  method  of  salvation  through 
Jesus  Christ. 

But  Peter  appears  to  imply  that  .some 
outside  of  Cornelius  and  his  company, 
among  all  nations  might  be  in  a  sav- 
able  state.  Since  Chri.st  is  tlie  "Word 
and  the  Truth  and  the  Revealer  of 
these  to  men,  all  revelations  may  be 
traced  l)ack  to  him.  If  any  one  by  this 
light  is  led  to  see  his  fallen  and  lieli>less 
condition  and  cry  out,  "  God  l)e  merci- 
ful to  me,  a  sinner,"  ready  to  accejtt  of 
Christ,  so  soon  as  ottered,  and  shall 
manifest  his  sincerity  in  a  prayerful 
life  and  devout  conduct,  may  he  not 
be  ignotantly  but  truly  a  worshiper  of 
God  and  of  him  who  is  the  only  Ke- 
vialer  of  God  to  men  ?  And  this  ac- 
cords with  the  words  of  our  Saviour, 
"  JIany  shall  come  from  the  east  and 
the  west,"  etc.  (Matt.  8  :  ii,  12.)  "  And 
other  sheep  I  have  which  are  not  of 
this  fold,"  etc.     (Jotm  10 :  le.) 

Certain  facts  confirm  such  a  vievr. 
In  1S20,  when  the  American  mission- 


Ch.  X.]                                    THE  ACTS. 

171 

word  which  God  sent  unto  the  children  |       of   Israel, 

*  preaching    peace   by    Jesu> 

d  Eph.  2  :  1:J-18  ;  Col.  1  :  20. 

arics  first  visited  the  Sandwich  Islands 
they  found  that  the  inhabitants  had 
thrown  away  their  iduls  and  they 
seemed  to  he  waiting  for  the  gospel, 
among  whom  it  had  great  success.  The 
Karens  of  Burmali  had  traditions  of  tlie 
coming  of  the  wiiite  foreigners  who 
would  restore  the  true  religion,  and 
many  appeared  ready  for  tlie  reception 
of  the  gospel  wheJi  tiie  missionaries 
came  among  them.  Godet  tells  of  the 
*'  Chinese  Hermit  who  accepted  Christ, 
saying,  '  This  is  the  only  Buddha  men 
ought  to  worship.'  "  The  British  and 
Foreign  Bible  Society  pul)lish  a  state- 
ment, on  the  authority  of  Sir  Bartle 
Frere,  that  he  met  "  with  au  instance 
which  was  carefully  investigated,  in 
which  all  the  inhabitants  of  a  remote 
village  in  the  Deccan  had  aljjured 
idolatry  and  caste,  removed  from  their 
temples  the  idols  which  had  been  wor- 
shii)ed  there  time  out  of  mind,  and 
agreed  to  profess  a  form  of  Christian- 
ity wliich  they  had  deduced  for  them- 
selves from  a  careful  perusal  of  a  single 
gospel  and  a  few  tracts."  {Judson's 
Lije,  by  his  son,  p.  84.)  President  Ed- 
wards, in  his  Life  of  David  Brainard, 
pp.  173-175,  tells  of  "a  devout  and 
zealous  reformer,  or  rather  restoi'er,  of 
■what  he  supposed  was  tlie  ancient  re- 
ligion of  the  Indians."  After  a  period 
of  distress  he  says  that  God  "  comforted 
his  heart  and  showed  him  what  he 
should  do,  and  since  that  time  he  ha<l 
known  (Jod  and  tried  to  serve  him,  and 
loved  all  men,  l)e they  v.lio  they  would, 
60  as  he  never  did  b'.-fore."  Such  ex- 
amples appear  as  illustrations  of  a 
work  among  the  heatlieii,  possibly  a 
very  few,  wlio  tluougli  the  guiding 
Spirit  of  (jod  have  been  led  to  fear  him 
and  work  righteousiii'ss  ami  liave  thus 
been  prepared  to  be  acceptable  to  (iod, 
through  Christ,  whom  not  knowing 
they  substantially  worship. 

But  what  bearing  has  this  on  Chris- 
tian missions  to  the  heathen  ?  Why 
then  send  missionaries?  We  answer': 
1.  To  make  known  .lesns  Christ  to 
those  who  may  be  cravins^  and  looking 
for  a  Saviour,   2,  To  arouse  anddee^jeu 


this  feeling  of  need  and  longing  in  any 
others  who  may  be  seeking  after  God. 
3.  To  announce  Christ  to  the  millions 
wlio  live  on  a  lower  plane  of  enlight- 
ment  than  Cornelius  and  persons  of 
similar  experiences.  4.  The  fact  that 
cases  like  Cornelius'  are  sometimes 
found  aftbrds  encouragement  to  j)usli 
missionary  work.  The  Lord  is  j»re- 
paring  the  way,  showing  us  our  duty 
and  opportunity.  We  should  at  once 
heed  the  call,  "Come  over  and  hel])  us," 
and  the  encouragement,  as  the  voice  of 
God,  saying,  "  Be  not  afraid,  but  speak 
and  hold  not  thy  jieace  ;  for  I  am  with 
thee  .  .  .  for  I  have  much  people  in 
this  city."     (is :  9,10.) 

36.  The  grammatical  construction  of 
this  verse  and  the  two  following  is  diffi- 
cult. Olshausen  and  some  others  connect 
this  closely  with  the  preceding  verse 
thus  :  "  He  is  acceptable  to  him  in  re- 
spect to  or  according  to  the  word  which 
God  sent,"  etc.  While  this  expresses 
a  truth  it  is  not  the  simplest,  nor  the 
most  natural  construction.  Better  is 
it  to  make  the  word  an  object  of  a 
proposition  understood.  As  to  the  tcord. 
which  he  sent,  etc.  Or  better  still  with 
Meyer  and  Ilaekett,  to  make  the  word 
an  ol>ject  of  the  word  know  (ver.  37),  as 
in  our  English  version.  The  same  idea 
is  expressed  by  the  reading  of  some  of 
the  oldest  manuscripts  and  i>referred 
by  Westcott  and  Hort :  He  sent  the 
word  unto  the  children  of  Israel.  The 
word — the  message  which  was  sent 
from  God,  preaching  peace,  rather, 
jiroclainiing  the  glad  tidings  of  peace, 
of  reconciliation  through  Jesus  Christ. 

(Luke  1:79;    2:14;    MaU.  11  :  29.)         ConieliuS 

and  many  of  the  company  must  have 
heard  of  this  message  among  the  Jews. 
See  next  verse.  He  is  Lord  of  all 
—not  of  the  Jews  oidv,  but  of  tlie 
Gentiles  also.  Peter  tiiiows  into  his 
sentence  the  idea  of  tlie  universal  Lord- 
ship of  Christ,  as  one  of  the  thoughts 
uppermost  in  his  mind.     (Rom.  3  •  29,  so. 

See  Ps.  2;    72:8-11;    Isa.  55 : 4.   .S;    D»n.  2:44;    7: 

13. 14.)  This  great  truth  he  now  under- 
stood better  than  ever  before. 

37.  That  word,  or  thing,  includ< 


172 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch,  X. 


37  Christ  (-^ he  is  Lord  of  all):  that  word,  7 
say,  ye  fknow,  which  was  published 
throughout  all  Judiea,  and  k  began  from 
lialilee,   after  the   baptism   which   John 

38  preached ;  how  God  ''  anointed  Jesus  of 
Nazareth  with  the  Holy  Spirit  and  with 


power :  who  went  about  doing  good,  and 
healing  all  that  were  oppressed  of  the 
39  devil  ;  '  for  Hod  was  with  hiiu.  And  ^  we 
are  witnesses  of  all  things  which  he  did 
both  in  the  land  of  the  Jews,  and  in  Je- 
rusalem. '  Whom  they  slew  and  hanged  on 


«  Matt.  28  :  18 ;  John  5  :  22,  23  ;  Kum.  10  :  12 ;  Phil.  2  :  9-11 ;  Col.  1  :  10-18  ;  1  Petir  3  :  22 ; 
Rev.  19  :  16.  'oh.  8  :  40  ;  Luke  4  :  14,  37 ;  7  :  17.  e  ch.  1  :  22.  ^  Luke  3  :  22 ;  4  :  18. 
i  John  3:2:  16  :  32.         k  Juhu  lo  :  27.         '  ch.  5  :  30  ;  1  Peter  2  :  24. 


iiig  the  subject  matter  of  the  message  I 
(vei.  ;j6),  the  circumstances  attemiing  it,  | 
and  tlie  facts  ujion  which  it  rested,  and  j 
fiutlicr   cxphiincd   in   tlie   ne.xt   verse.  ! 
Ye  know.   Tlic  ministry  of  John  and  j 
of  Jtsus  must  have  been   well-known 
throu;,du)iit   Palestine,  not  only  among  i 
Jews,  Imt  also  Gentiles  (Mark  7 :  -h),  espe- 
cially  those  who  were  drawn  towards 
the  Jewisli   religion.     Philip  had  also  | 
preached  tlie  gospel  at  Cuisarea.     (»  :  4t>-) 
Soldii-rs     also    moving    into    dift'erent 
])arts  would   hear  more  or  less  of  these 
things.     Some    have   conjectured    that 
Cornelius  was   the  centurion  who  had 
charge    of    Christ's    crucili.xion     (Luke 
2a: +7);  but   this   is  not  very  probahle. 
Possil)ly  the   latter  nuiy  have  related 
sonu'  of  the  facts  of  the  crucifixion  to 
Cornelius.     Which  was  published, 
better,   ir/iich  tras  done  or   happened 
throughout   all    Judea,   of   which 
Ca'sarca  was  the  Roman  cai)ital.    And 
began  from  Galilee,  from  wlience 
the  fame  of  Jesus  first  sjiread  abroad. 
(Luke  4 :  u,  :i7.)  Several  months  of  Christ's 
earliest  ministry  were  spent  in  Judea 
in  ([uiet  work.     (Johu:) :  i-is.)    Yet  before 
this,  immediately  after  his  temi)tation, 
Jesus    gains    his    first  disci})les    from 
among  Calileaus,  and  visits  Caua  and 

CapernaU)M.      ( Jolm  l  :  35-45;  2  :  M2,)     Tluis 

Jesus  began  from  Galilee.  At  the  same 
time  he  did  not  enter  fully  into  liis 
ministry,  until  after  the  baptism 
which  John  preached — that  is,  until 
John  iiad  coni])leted  his  ministry  anil 
was  imj>risoned,  immediately  after 
wliich  Jesus  began  to  preach  in  Galilee 
the  good  news  of  the  kingdom.    (Mmk  1 : 

14,15.) 

38.  Having  spoken  of  the  gospel- 
message  and  the  gospel-history,  Peter 
turns  to  the  person  who  was  the  an- 
nouncer of  this  message  and  the  central 
fitcure  of  this  history.  How  God 
anointed,  etc.  Kather,  even  Jesus  of 
Nazareth    (,3:6),    how     God     anointed 


him;  with  the  Holy  Spirit  and 
AVith  power.  The  Holy  S]>irit  de- 
scended upon  Jesus  at  his  liajitisin. 
(.Mark  1 :  10.)  Thus  he  was  the  diviiuly 
Anointed  One,  the  Christ  (which 
nwiins  anointed).  (Luke4:i8-2i.)  Power, 
accompanying  the  unction  of  the  Holy 
yjiirit,  has  special  reference  to  the 
miracles,  which  are  imme<liately  spoken 
of,  and  which  were  evidences  of  his 
divine  mission.  So  truth,  life,  faith, 
joy,  and  wisdom  are  elsewhere  asso- 
ciated with  the  Spirit.  ( John  4  :  23  ;  6  :  63  ; 
Ai;U6:2,  5;  13  :.52.)       U  hO    WCUt    abOUt, 

etc.  A  most  beautiful  summary  of  our 
Lord's  ministry,  putting  si>ecial  enij)ha- 
sis  on  our  Lord's  works,  thus  remind- 
ing us  of  Mark's  gospel,  which  jtresents 
Jesus  as  the  Mighty  Worker,  and  is 
supposed  to  have  been  written  under 
Peter's  direction.  Doing  §rood.  Deeds 
of  lieneficence  and  works  of  mercy 
were  characteristic  of  Christ's  life. 
Healing  all  that  were  oppressed 
of  the  devil.  Peter  selects  this  class 
of  miracles,  as  among  the  greatest  and 
most  widely  known.  Devil  means  slan- 
derer or  false  accuser,  and  is  a  name 
ajiplied  to  Satan,  the  great  adversary 
of  God,  of  the  Messiah,  and  of  our 
race.  (Luke  8 :  12 ;  johu  13 : 2.)  Compare 
Peter's  description  of  him  walking 
about  "  as  a  roaring  lion."  (1  Peter  5 :  s.) 
While  specially  referring  to  casting 
out  demons  (see  on  Matt.  4 :  24),  the  oppress- 
ings  of  the  devil  also  included  various 
mental  and  bodily  disorders,  which 
were  regarded  as  resulting  from  Satanic 
agency.  Comjiare  J^uke  13  :  IG,  where 
the  woman  who  had  "  a  spirit  of  infir- 
mity "  is  said  to  have  been  "  bound  t;y 
Satan."  For  God  was  with  him— 
the  secret  of  Christ's  power ;  evidenced 
by  his  miracles.  So  Nicodemus  saw 
and  confessed.     (John  3  :  2.) 

39.  C'ornelius  and  his  company  had 
only  heard  of  Jesus,  his  preaching  and 
Lis  wonderful  works;    but  now  Peter 


Ch.  X.J 


THE  ACTS. 


173 


40  a  tree.    Hiiii  God  raised  up  the  third  day, 

41  aud  shewed  him  opeuly, '"  not  to  all  the 
people,  but  unto  witnesses  chosen  before 
of  God,  even  to  us,  ■>  who  did  eat  and  drink 


with  him,  after  he  rose   from  the  (lend. 

42  And  »  he  commanded  us  to  preach  unto  iho 

people,  and  to  testify  Pthat  it  is  he  which 

was  ordained  of  God  to  be  the  Judge  iiof 


'ch.  13:31. 


"  Luke  24  :  30,  41-4;! ;  Jolin  21  :  13.        o  Matt.  28  :  ]  :i,  lid. 
5  :  22-29.        1  Horn.  14  :  9,  10 ;  2  Tim.  4  :  1 ;  1  I'.tcr  4  : 


5. 


P  ch.  17  :  31 ;  John 


affirms  their  truthfulness  as  an  eye-wit- 
ness. We  is  emphatic.  As  au  apostle 
it  was  Peter's  mission  and  work  to  be  a 
witness,  and  s[)eaking  as  an  apostle,  he 
incdudes  tlie  other  apostles.  Some  or 
even  all  of  the  six  bretliren  who  came 
M'ith  him  may  have  been  witnesses  of 
many  of  these  things,  but  not  in  the 
sense  of  having  been  chosen  by  God 
for  that  pur{)ose.  (ver.  ii  ;a  :3-'.)  Whom 
they  slew  and  hanged — l)y  hanging, 
him  on  a  tree.  Peter  states  strongly 
the  humiliating  and  shameful  death  of 
Jesus.  So  also  he  did  to  the  Jewish 
rulers,  (s :  so.)  But  when  preaching  to 
au  attentive  Jewish  audience,  striving 
to  persuade  aud  convict,  he  carefully 
guards  his  language.     ('^ :  ^s ;  s  ■.  u.) 

40.  In  contrast  to  the  cruel  treat- 
ment of  the  Jews,  God  raised  np  .lesus 
to  life.  Shewed  him  openly — 
caused  him  to  be  made  vwnifest.  lie 
was  distinctly  seen  and  known.  The 
resurrection  of  Jesu.s,  as  in  all  the  dis- 
courses of  tlie  Acts,  is  here  the  eulnii- 
natiug  point  of  which  the  apostles 
testified.     (2:32;  3:  is ;  13::;i.) 

41.  The  last  clause  of  the  preceding 
verse,  this  verse,  and  the  next,  have 
reference  to  the  forty  days  between 
Christ's  resurrection  and  his  a.scension. 
Not  to  all  the  people  of  the  Jews. 
It  is  not  recorded  that  he  appeared  to 
any  but  to  his  disciples  or  frieiuls.  As 
Jesus  would  not  work  niiraeles  to  sat- 
isfy the  demands  of  the  censorious  and 
self-righteous  Pharisees  (Matu  12  :  .58, 39), 
so  he  would  not  entrust  the  evidences 
of  his  resurrection  to  his  enemies,  or 
make  his  appearances  to  his  rejectors 
and  crucifiurs.  The  wonderful  phe- 
nomena during  the  crucifixion,  the 
earthquake  at  tlie  resurrection,  and 
testimony  of  the  giuird  (M.ttt.  28  :  11 ),  were 
suliieient  evidences  for  them,  (i.ukeui: 
31;  John  12: 37.)  It  was  fitting  that  he 
should  limit  his  ai)pearances  to  his  fol- 
lowers, to  tliose  who  would  ajipreeiate 
and  properly  use  the  evidence  ;  and  it 
was  becoming  to  a  religion  of  faith. 


Such  evidences  from  eye-witnesses  were 
sufficient,  and  at  tlie  .^ame  time  would 
exercise  the  faith  of  true  believers. 
Paley  argues  hei'e  the  truthfulness  of 
the  naiTative.  A  forgery  would  natur- 
ally have  represented  our  Lord's  ap- 
pearances to  both  friends  and  foes ;  at 
least  would  not  have  limited  them  on 
all  occasions  to  his  friends.  Tiie  fact  of 
such  limitation  shows  the  candor  of  the 
historian.  Bnt  unto  witnesses 
chosen  before  of  God,  even  to 
us — the  apostles.  Notice  that  the 
apostles  were  chosen  by  Christ  (i :  2;  Luke 
6: 13;  JohD  15:  Hi),  and  also  by  God  and 
given  to  Christ.  {.John  17:6.)  Who 
did  eat  and  drink  Avith  him  at 
the  same  table,  enjoying  such  intimate 
com])anioiiship  as  to  afford  tangible 
evidence  of  his  resurrection.  The 
three  recorded  in.stanccs  of  this  kind 
are  in  Luke  L'4  :  ;!0,  42  ;  John  21  :  12-1.5. 
4:1.  Commanded  us  to  preach 
unto  the  people— iu  the  last  com- 
mission,   to    go    into    all    the    world 

preaching   (Matt.  2s  :  1<»;  Mark  IG:  15),  and    to 

be  witnesses  unto  the  uttermost  ])art  of 
the  eartli.  (1 :  8  )  Peter  had  first  lim- 
ited tliis  to  Jews  and  proselytes  from 
all  nations.  But  now  he  begins  to 
understand  that  the  gosjiel  is  to  be 
pro(daimed  to  all  of  every  iiatiou.  (ver. 
35.)  They  were  not  only  to  announce 
the  good  news,  but  also  t<»  testify,  as 
witnesses,  to  S})eak  the  truth,  the  whole 
truth,  and  nothing  but  the  truth  :  That 
this  is  he  who  was  ordained,  ap- 
pointed btj  (,W,  the  judge  of  quick, 
or  living,    and    dead.      (John  5:22;  1 

Thess.  4  :  18,  17:  1  Cor.  15  :  51,  52.)      Some  WOUld 

take  this  in  a  spiritual  sense,  meaning 
saints  and  sinners.  Tlie  literal  sense  is 
the  most  natural  here  referring  to  all 
1,'eiierations,  jmst,  j)resent,  and  future. 
This  is  tlie  first  time  that  Christ  is  pre- 
sented as  jutlge  in  the  Acts.  The  fact 
that  tliis  is  made  j)roniinent  here  and 
in  Paul's  address  to  his  heathen  audi- 
ence at  Athens  (12 :  31),  shows  that  this 
truth    should    be  made  prominent  to 


174 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  X. 


ti  quick  auft  dead.  'To  hiru  give  all  the 
priijihets  witness,  that  e  through  his  name 
I  whosoever  oelievcth  in  him  shall  receive 
reiiiis>ion  of  sins. 

44  While  Peter  yet  spake  these  words, 
"the  Holy  Spirit  fell  on  all  them  which 

45  heard  the  word.     »And  they  of  the  cir- 


cumcision which  believed  were  aston- 
ished, as  many  as  came  with  Peter,  "  be- 
cause that  on  the  Gentiles  al^o  was  jioured 
46  out  the  gift  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  tor  they 
heard  them  '  speak  with  tongues,  and 
magnify  God. 


»  Isa.  53  :  11 ;  Dan.  9  :  24 ;  Zech.  13  :  1;  Luke  24  :  44-47.        •  ch.  3  :  16. 
3:10.      ""Ch.  4  :31;  8  :  15-17.      »  ver.  23.      y  ch.  11 :  18  ;  Gal.  3  :  14. 


«eh.  26  :18;  John 
»  ch.  2  :  4,  11. 


such  audiences  as  might  fail  to  under- 
stand fully  this  side  of  Christ's  char- 
acter. 

43.  First  the  law,  then  the  gospel. 
(Gal.  .1  ;24.)  Co-cxtcnsive  with  his  au- 
tliority  as  Judge  was  his  power  as  a 
Savioiir.  To  him  give  all  the 
prophets  witness — this  was  the  gen- 
eral drift  of  prophecy.  Christ  as  a 
Saviour  is  the  central  theme  of  the 
words  and  symbols  of  the  prophetic 
Scriptures.  (Rev. i9:  10.)  Peter  takes 
for  granted  that  Cornelius  and  his  com- 
j>any  had  some  knowledge  of  the  Old 
Testament.  That  through  his 
name.  (Sec  on2:'a;  sue.)  >Vhoso- 
ever  believeth  on  him,  trusting  and 
relying  on  liim,  shall  receive  re- 
mission, forfjivetiess,  of  sins  —  in- 
cluding the  reiuittiug  of  the  jienalty. 
Thus  Peter  announces  justification  by 
faitli :     1.  Tlirough  the  namt' of  Jesus. 

2.  The   condition.      BeUevctli    in    fiini. 

3.  Tiie  universality  of  the  oiler.  W'lw- 
soever,  implying  tliat  all  men  need  for- 
giveness. 4.  Implying  a  salvation 
from  sin  and  its  consequences.  The 
gospel  to  the  guilty  and  perishing  is 
brought  to  view  in  a  single  sentence. 

44.  While  Peter  "yet  spake — 
showing  that  he  had  not  finislied  what 
he  intended  to  say.  In  his  sub.secjuent 
defence  (n  :  li)  he  .says,  "As  I  began  to 
speak."  Thus  he  was  intending  to 
speak  at  nnich  greater  length,  and  was 
iiiterru|>ted  suddenly  and  uncxpect- 
<'(lly.  Words  and  word  refer  to  the 
words  of  truth  he  had  just  present*-*! 
ro'^xai'ding  Jesus  Christ.  Notice  that 
tin-  Spirit  came  upon  them  just  as  lie 
had  announced  remission  of  sins 
through  faith.  Cornelius  and  tlie  com- 
])any  at  once  believed  on  the  name  of 
Jesus.  The  descent  of  the  Spirit  is 
i)oth  a  testimony  to  the  truth  of  Peter's 
jireaching  and  an  evidence  of  Clirist 
havinir  been  received  by  faith  l)y  these 
Gentile  hearers.     The   Holy   Spirit 


fell — suddenly  and  from  above,  imply- 
ing divine  origin.  On  ail  them  Avhich 
heard  the  word— tlie  Gentiles  to 
whom  Peter  was  speaking.  The  Spirit 
had  been  leading  their  hearts  into 
the  way  of  truth ;  but  now  he  comes 
ujion  them  with  external  manifesta- 
tions of  ])ower,  and  .'ijieaking  with 
tongues,  as  lie  did  at  first  uj)on  the 
church  at  Jerusalem,  (ver.  45-47.)  It 
was  tlie  Pentecost  of  Gentiles.  It  sliould 
be  noted  that  the  Holy  Spirit  came 
upon  them  before  their  baptism  and 
without  the  laying  on  of  hands.  While 
this  sliows  tliat  salvation  is  not  de- 
pendent on  outward  rites,  it  was  in- 
tended as  an  emphatic  lesson  to  Peter 
and  his  com]iaiiy,  that  "neither  circum- 
cision availetli  aiiytliing,  but  faith  tiiat 
worketh  througii  love,"  and  that  the 
es.sential  thing  in  the  individual  is  "a 
new  creature."     (<5ai.  6  :  «;  6: 16.) 

45.  They  of  the  circumcision. 
The  Jewisli  believers  who  came 
with  Peter.  Astonished.  The  word 
is  emphatic.  They  were  filled  with 
wonder  and  surprise.  This  sliows 
liow  unexpected  this  descent  of  the 
Spirit  upon  Gentiles  was  to  tliem,  and 
liow  needful  were  all  the  supernatural 
occurrences  connected  with  this  first 
nii.ssion  to  (ientiles,  and  how  imjiort- 
ant  tliat  tiic^c  six  Jewisli  Cliri.stiaiis 
sliould  witness  this  culminating  evi- 
(k'lice  of  the  reccjition  of  the  gospel  by 
tlie  uneircumcised.  (ii:i2.)  On  the 
(ientiles — on  the  heathen  generally, 
all  whom  Cornelius  and  his  company 
represented.  Thus  this  single  case  was 
regariled  as  establi.shing  a  general 
principle.  No  distinction  is  to  be 
made  butween  Jews  and  Gentiles. 

46.  For — they  conclude  from  the 
effect.  It  is  not  .said,  as  in  2  :  4,  that 
they  spake  in  other  tongues.  This, 
however,  is  a  briefer  description ;  be- 
side.s,  to  speak  with  tongues  means 
with   new  tongues,   in   languages  and 


Ch.  X.] 


THE  ACTS. 


175 


47  'Phtni  answered  Peter,  Can  any  man 
forbid  water,  tbat  these  should  not  be 
baptized  which  liave  received  the  Holy 

48  Spirit  'as  well  as  we?     And  he   coni- 


niauded  them  to  be  baptized  ^  in  the  name 
of  the  Lord.  Then  prayed  they  him  to 
tarry  certain  days. 


•  ch.  11  :  17  ;  15  :  8,  9;  Bom.  10  :  12.        <>  ch.  2  :  38  ;  8  :  10. 


dialects  besides  their  own.  Instead  of 
"the  wonderful  works  of  God"  (i:!!), 
here  are  the  words,  magnify  God, 
setting  forth  his  greatness. 

47.  Peter  also  recognizes  the  descent 
of  the  Spirit  upon  the  Gentile  converts 
as  tlie  ha]>tisni  of  the  Spirit,  similar  to 
tliat  of  the  Jewish  di.sciples  at  Pente- 
cost, (n  :  16;  1 : 4, 5.)  Call  any  man 
forbid  water  i  The  water,  the  ele- 
ment into  which  they  were  to  he  ba])- 
tized  for  an  entrance  into  the  visible 
church,  in  contrast  with  the  Holy  Spirit, 
the  element  in  whicli  tliey  had  received 
Spirit  baptism.  "Alford's  deduction 
from  the  form  of  expression  here,  the 
water,  that  '  the  practice  was  to  bring 
tlie  wat^-r  to  the  candidates,  not  the 
candidates  to  the  water,'  appears  to  me 
far-fetched."  (Abisott.)  "The  water 
is  in  this  animated  language  conceived 
as  the  element  offering  itself  for  tlie 
bai)tism."  (.Mrykr.)  Such  pojnilar 
and  animated  idioms  are  not  uncom- 
mon. "  Wlio  shall  forbid  the  house, 
tlie  school,  or  the  city  to  this  or  that 
one?"  would  never  be  taken  to  mean 
that  either  the  house,  school,  or  city  was 
to  l)e  Ijrought  to  them  ;  but  rather  that 
they  should  be  permitted  to  enter  and 
enjoy  them.  Peter,  by  his  question,  recog- 
nizes the  divine  approval  of  these  Gen- 
tiles, as  members  of  the  kingdom  of 
God,  and  hence  as  fit  sul^Jects  of  t)ap- 
tism.  And  not  only  that  it  was  the 
duty  of  these  Gentiles  to  be  baptized, 
but  also  their  duty  to  baptize  them. 
lie  does  not  say,  "  They  now  have  the 
Spirit  baptism,  therefore,  tliey  can  do 
without  water  baptism,"  but  he  rather 
makes  the  former  the  strong  argument 
for  the  latter.  (s-eon  Ter.44.)  The 
Koly  Spirit  as  Avell  as  we.  It  was 
just  the  reason  needed  for  the  occasion. 
"No  ordinary  attestation  would  Itave 
sufficed  to  make  the  divine  will  per- 
fectly clear,  that  tlie  Gentiles  were  to 
be  admitted  at  once,  and  on  equal 
terms  with  the  .Tews,  to  the  blessings  of 
Christianity."  (HowsON  and  Spence.) 

48.  He  commanded  them  to  be 


baptized— by  the  brethren  who  came 
with  him.  Peter's  practice  seems  in 
harmony  with  Paul's,  (i  Cor.  i ;  u,  u.) 
In  the' name  of  the  Lord — or  ac- 
cording to  some  of  the  oldest  manu- 
scripts, in  the  name  of  Jesas  Christ. 
This  does  not  indicate  the  formula 
(Matt.  28: 19)),  hut  tlic  fact  that  these 
believers  were  in  Christ  (-'  Cor  .5  -.  n),  and 
that  only  in  him  could  their  Christian 
baptism  be  complete.  Out  of  Clirist 
even  immersion  is  not  Christian  l)ap- 
tism.  "  As  the  name  of  Jesus  Clirist  is 
tlie  spiritual  basis  of  baptism  (i :  hn)  aiid 
the  end  to  which  it  refers  (i»  :  5),  so  it  is 
also  conceived  as  the  entire  holy  sj>here 
"in  which  it  is  accomplished,  and  out 
of  which  it  cannot  take  place." 
(Meyer.)  To  tarry  certain  days. 
It  is  implied  that  Peter  remained  a  few 
days,  enjoying  the  hosjiitality  of  Cor- 
nelius, and  giving  needed  instruction. 
These  were  days  of  great  importance  to 
them  and  to  him.  Whether  these  (Jen- 
tile  converts  were  baptized  into  the  fel- 
lowship of  the  church  at  Jerusalem,  or 
under  divine  influence  and  direction  a 
church  was  at  once  formed  at  Ca-sarea, 
we  are  not  told.  However  this  may  be, 
it  is  natural  to  suppose  that  diiring 
"  the  certain  days  "  and  before  Peter 
left,  the  first  Gentile  church  at  Cajsarea 
was  duly  organized. 

Pr.\cticai.  Remarks. 

1.  Service  for  one's  country  as  a  soldier 
is  compatible  with  true  service  of  God. 
(Ver.  1 ;  Rom.  l;i  :  1-4 ;  Matt.  8  :  10.) 

2.  True  piety  will  always  exert  a  salutary 
influence  on  thehome.    (Ver.  2;  Gen.  18  :  19.) 

3.  "  Hours  of  prayer  are  truly  hours  of 
grace,  when  the  angels  of  God  are  most  of  all 
prompt  in  coming."  (Karl  Gkrok).  (Ver. 
3 ;  12  :  .5-7  ;  Heb.  1  :  14.) 

4.  The  prayer  of  faith  ascends  to  God,  like 
sweet  incense,  acceptable  to  him.  (Ver.  4; 
Rev.  5 :  8.) 

5.  God  has  committed  the  great  work  of 
preaching  the  gospel,  not  to  angeb,  but  to 
men.    (Ver.  5 ;  1  Peter  1  :  12.) 


176 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  X. 


fi.  Peter  the  apostle,  and  not  Philip  the 
evangelist,  must  announce  the  gospel  Urstto 
Gentiles.     (Ver.  6;  15  :  7.) 

7.  In  Cornelius  and  his  household  we  see 
a  beautiful  example  of  family  religion.  (Ver. 
7,  8,  22,  24.) 

8.  The  prompt  obedience  of  Cornelius 
showed  that  he  believed  God.  (Ver.  8  ;  James 
2:  17,18;  Heb.  11  :  8.) 

9.  Ministers  of  the  gospel  should  be  spe- 
cially men  of  prayer.   (Ver.  9  ;  Rom.  1-5  :  30.) 

10.  Our  spiritual  exercises  are  often  closely 
connected  with  our  physical  condition.  (Ver. 
10  ;  Matt.  4  :  2,  3.) 

11.  Whatever  is  of  heavenly  origin  is  pure, 
and  whatever  is  sanctified  is  to  be  accepted 
with  thanksgiving.  (Ver.  11-13;  1  Tim. 
4  :  4,  5  ;  James  3  :  17.) 

12.  Customs  and  ceremonies  are  nothing 
against  the  direct  commands  of  God.  (Ver. 
14-16;  11  :  17.) 

13.  We  should  strive  after  spiritual  purity. 
(Ver.  14-16;  1  Cor.  6  :  17-7  :  1.) 

14.  Through  Christ  the  ceremonial  law  wa.'s 
done  away,  and  the  distinction  between  Jew 
and  Gentile  abolished.  (Ver.  14-16 ;  Kph. 
2  :  14,  1.5.) 

15.  Redemption  through  Jesus  Christ  in 
its  scope  and  power  has  relation  to  the  whole 
physical  universe.  (Ver.  14-10 ;  Eph.  1:10; 
Rom.  8  :  19-22.) 

16.  The  knowledge  of  the  apostles,  though 
inspired  men,  was  progressive.  (Ver.  16-20, 
46,  47.) 

17.  God  suits  the  events  of  his  providence 
to  our  lives  and  work.     (Ver.  17  ;  27  :  9,  16.) 

18.  Wc  should  also  seek  and  follow  the  di- 
rections of  the  Spirit  in  matters  of  religious 
duty.    (Ver.  19,  20 ;  8  :  29 ;  16  :  7 ;  18  :  5.) 

19.  The  prejudicc.«i,  or  the  reluctance  of 
man,  cannot  defeat  the  purposes  of  God. 
(Ver.  19,  20 ;  15  :  24-29.) 

20.  The  messengers  of  Cornelius  illustrate 
the  search  of  tlic  Gentile  world  after  the 
wisdom  of  God.  (Ver.  19-22 ;  Matt.  2  :  1-12.) 

21.  It  is  fitting  to  seek  the  advice  and  in- 
struction of  those  whom  God  has  appointed 
to  minister  in  holy  things.  (Ver.  22 ;  8  : 
34.) 

22.  On  important  missions  the  pastor  or 
missionary  should  be  attended  with  judi- 
cious brethren.  (Ver.  23,  4."^ ;  11  :  12 ;  Mark 
6:7.) 

23.  Like  Cornelius,  wc  should  invite  our 
friends  to  hear  the  gospel.    (Ver.  24.) 


24.  The  apostles  were  disinterested  and 
unseltish  meu.     (Ver.  2-5,  26 ;  14  :  11-18.) 

25.  Christianity  teaches  us  to  worship  God 
alone.    (Ver.  25  ;  Rev.  22  :  9.) 

2i;.  Ministers  of  the  gospel  should  not  en- 
tertain exaggerated  views  of  their  office,  nor 
accept  undue  applause  of  men.     (Ver.  25-27  ; 

1  Tim.  3:2-6;  Rom.  1  :  25.) 

27.  The  submission  of  faith  is  to  do  what- 
ever God  commands  without  hesitation. 
(Ver.  28,  29;  Heb.  U  :  17,  24.) 

28.  Like  a  skillful  physician,  the  pastor 
should  inquire  into  the  spiritual  condition 
of  those  to  whom  he  would  do  good.  (Ver. 
29.) 

29.  God  blesses  and  reveals  himself  to  those 
who  are  in  the  path  of  duty.    (Ver.  30,  32 ; 

2  :  1,  2,  Luke  3  :  21,22.) 

30.  A  devout  and  obedient  spirit  is  becom- 
ing the  house  of  God.     (Ver.  33.) 

31.  The  blessings  of  the  gospel  are  given 
without  regard  to  nationality,  wealth,  or 
other  external  circumstances.  (Ver.  34;  Luke 

2  :  10,  32 ;  Gal.  5:6:  Col.  3  :  11  ;  Rev.  5  :  8.) 

32.  The  power  of  the  gospel  is  shown  in 
overcoming  the  prejudices  of  men.  (Ver. 
34  ;  20  :  5  f.) 

33.  Religion  is  not  a  matter  of  indifference. 
If  it  were  so,  Peter  would  not  have  been  sent 
to  preach  Jesus  to  Cornelius.    (Ver.  34,  35 ; 

3  :  12.) 

34.  The  works  of  Cornelius  were  not  the 
meritorious  ground  of  his  acceptance  with 
God,  hut  an  evidence  of  true  piety.  (Ver. 
34  :  Rom.  3  :  20.) 

35.  Such  examples  as  that  of  Cornelius  are 
an  encouragement  for  missionary  work  and 
for  men  to  u.se  tln'  light  they  have.   (Ver.  35.) 

36.  The  Lordship  of  Christ  should  not  he 
overlooked  in  religious  instruction.  (Ver. 
36  ;  Matt.  2S  :  IS  ;  John  17  :  2  ;  Eph.  1 :  20,  22.) 

37.  "  Who  went  about  doing  good"  is  a 
beautiful  description  of  Christ's  life,  and  a 
fitting  examnle  for  his  followers.    (Ver.  38.) 

38.  Peter's  discourse  is  a  model  for  evan- 
gelical prf  aching.     (Ver.  36-43.) 

39.  Men,  however  moral  and  religious, 
must  be  saved  by  the  cross.     (Ver.  38-43.) 

40.  Christ  is  to  bepresented  asourprojihet, 
our  priest,  and  our  king.     (Ver.  38-43.) 

41.  The  resurrection  of  Christ  is  substan- 
tiated by  many  infallible  proofs.  (Ver.  40, 
41  ;  1  Cor.  15  :  4-9.) 

42.  The  piety  of  Cornelius,  who  at  once 
accepted  Christ,  is  opposed  to  the  so-called 


Ch.  XI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


177 


Peler^s  conduct  criticised  at  Jerusalem;   his 

successful  defence. 
11.    AND  the  apostles  and  brethren  that 


were  in  Judsea  heard  =  that  the  Gentiles 

2  had  also  receiTed  the  word  of  God.    And 

when  Peter  was  come  up  to  Jerusalem, 


'  ch.  10  :  34-48. 


morality  of  those  in  Christian  lands  who 
reject  him.    (Ver.  4:!,  44.) 

43.  The  gift  of  the  Holy  Spirit  is  so  associ- 
ated with  bapti-siii,  as  to  show  that  the  latter 
is  not  a  saying  ordinance.    (Ver.  44-47.) 

44.  The  baptism  of  the  Holy  Spirit  does 
not  take  the  place  of  water  baptism,  nor  do 
away  with  it.     (Ver.  44-47  ;  19  :  2-5.) 

Ch.  11  :  This  chapter  opens  with  Pe- 
ter's defence  before  the  apostles  and 
brethren  at  Jerusalem.  Luke  then  re- 
turns to  tlie  general  narrative,  and 
notices  the  connection  of  the  dispersion 
of  Jewish  lielievers  through  the  perse- 
cution at  the  death  of  Stej)lu'n,  and  the 
preaching  of  tlie  gospel  at  Antioeh, 
first  to  Jews,  and  then  to  Gentiles  ;  and 
relates  how  Barnabas  and  Saul  became 
associated  in  labors  there.  The  cliai»ter 
closes  with  tlie  pro])hecy  of  Agabus, 
and  the  mi.ssion  of  relief  by  Barnabas 
and  Saul  to  Jerusalem.  The  chapter 
covers  a  period  of  several  years,  from 
alDout  A.  D.  38  to  A.  D.  44. 

1-18.  Pkter  Defends  Himself  AT 
Jerusalem  for  His  Visit  to  Cor- 
nelius. It  is  interesting  to  comj)are 
this  with  the  account  in  the  preceding 
chapter.  Peter's  defence  was  modified 
by  the  circumstances  surrounding  him 
and  the  nature  of  his  audience.  He 
was  apologetic  in  language,  yet  truth- 
ful as  to  facts,  and  in  argument  j>ur- 
suasive  and  invincilile.  Certain  things 
he  omits  as  UMim|)ortaiit  to  liis  pur- 
pose, such  as  the  housetop,  the  hour  of  the 
liay,  his  hunger,  tlie  prei)aration  of  the 
meal,  the  homage  of  Cornelius,  his  re- 
ply, his  inquiry  and  address.  But  he 
adds,  that  the  great  slieet  moved  toward 
him  and  came  near  liim,  upon  which 
he  looked  intently  and  deliberately ; 
that  the  voice  came  from  heaven ;  that 
six  brethren  accompanied  him,  and 
that  he  rememl)ered  the  word  of  tlie 
Lord  (yer.  16),  when  the  Holy  Spirit  de- 
scended. He  lays  special  stress  upon 
his  prayinrj  when  the  vision  came,  the 
providential  coincidence  of  time  and 
circumstances  in  this  wonderful  exper- 
M 


ience,  the  command  of  the  Holy  Spirit, 
and  the  promised  baptism  of  tlie  Spirit. 
And  while  he  omits  the  name  Corne- 
lius, and  his  oflice,  as  perhaps  offensive 
to  the  stricter  Jews,  he  speaks  emj)liat- 
ically  of  the  aufjel  that  apj)eared  to 
him.  (ver.  i:!.)  Such  a  comi)arison  of 
tile  two  accounts  gives  strong  proof  of 
the  artless  simplicity,  naturalness,  and 
perfect  truthfulness  of  the  wiiole  nar- 
rative. (Compare  Author's  Hariaonic 
Arrangement,  \  19,  20,  21.) 

1.  This  chapter  is  closely  connected 
with  the  preceding.  Peter  apjiears  to 
have  returned  to  Jojipa,  from  whence 
he  soon  after  went  up  to  Jerusalem, 
taking  Avith  him  the  brethren  who  ac- 
companied him  to  Caisarea.  (ver.  v.-.) 
The  apostles  and  brethren  that 
were  in,  rather,  throufjhoat  Judea. 
Some  were  in  Jerusalem  and  others  in 
various  parts  of  the  province  of  Judea ; 
and  some  ]>robably  going  here  and 
there,  like  Peter,  jireaching  the  gospel. 
Heard  that  the  Gentiles,  or  hea- 
then, had  received  the  word  of 
God — as  contained  in  the  gospel.  It  is 
implied  that  they  had  both  embraced  it 
and  professed  it.  The  news  was  st^irt- 
ling,  and  jiroduced  a  profound  sensa- 
tion ;  and  must  have  spread  rapidly,  as 
the  event  occurred  in  the  capital  of  the 
province.  Naturally  the  apostles  and 
brethren  would  rejoice  in  hearing  of 
the  conversion  of  others.  But  the 
blessings  of  the  gospel  had  reached 
Gentiles  who  had  not  first  become 
Jews,  and  here  was  the  ground  of  sur- 
prise and  misapprehension. 

2.  When  Peter  was  come  to 
Jerusalem.  He  was  hastened,  it 
would  seem,  by  the  exciting  reports  of 
ids  receiving  the  uncircumcised  into 
the  church.  That  he  went  uj)  ])repared 
to  meet  objections  and  discussions  ap- 
pears from  his  taking  the  six  brethren 
with  him.  (ver.  12.)  They  of  the 
circumcision — eitlier  the  Jewish  be- 
lievers as  in  10  :  4.'),  who  were  charac- 
terized for  the  tenacity  with  which 
they  held  to  the  necessity  of  circumcis- 
ion, or  those  whose  zeal  for  the  law 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XI. 


^they  that  were  of  the  circunicision  con- 

3  tended  with  him,  saying,  "Thou  wmtest 
in  to  men  uncircumtised,  and  didst  eat 
with  them. 

4  But  Peter  rehearsed  the  matter  from  the 
beginning,  and  expounded  it  fby  order 

5  unto  them,  saying,  el  was  in  the  city  of 
Jop{>a  praying :  and  in  a  trance  I  saw  a 
vision,  A  certain  vessel  descend,  as  it  had 
been  a  great  sheet,  let  down  from  heaven 
by  four  corners ;  and  it  came  even  to  nu- ; 

6  upon  the  which  when  I  had  fasientd 
mine  eyes,  I  considered  and  saw  lour- 


footed   beasts   of   the   earth,    and    wild 
beasts,  and  creeping  things,  and  lowls  of 

7  the  air.    And  I  heard  a  voice  saying  unto 

8  me,  Arise,  Peter;  slay,  and  eat.  But  I 
said,  Kot  so, Lord :  ''for  nothing  common 
or  unclean  hath  at  any  time  entered  into 

9  my  mouth.  But  the  voice  answered  me 
again  from  heaven,  What  Goil  hath 
cleansed,    that    call    not    thou    common. 

10  And  this  was  done  three  times :  and  all 

11  were  drawn  up  again  into  heaven.  And, 
behold,  immediately  there  were  three 
men  already  come  unto  the  house  where 


d  ch.  10  :  45  ;  Gal.  2  :  12. 


I  ch.  10  :  2:J,  28.       f  Luke  1:3.       b  ch.  10  :  9-18.       h  Kom.  14  :  14. 


shortly  after  originated  a    Judaizing 

party.      (IS:  1,24;  Gal.  S  :l-6,  12;  6:  12.)      The 

tirst  view  best  sustained  by  critical  au- 
thorities. And  when  Peter,  etc.,  rather 
favors  tlie  latter  view.  While  the 
ajiostlcs  and  brethren  generally  were 
surprised  and  puzzled  by  the  wondrous 
displays  of  divine  grace,  those  who 
were  the  greatest  sticklers  and  most 
zealous  for  the  law,  were  doubtless  the 
leaders  in  contending  with  Peter. 

3.  The  substance  of  the  charges 
against  Peter.  Thou  wentcst  into, 
the  society  of  men  uncircumcised, 
putting  yourself  on  an  equality  witli 
them.  Men  uncircumciscd  is  an 
expression  often  used  in  indignation 
and  contempt.  (1  ph.  2 :  n  )  And  didst 
eat  Avith  them.  This  familiar  and 
social  fellowshif)  was  the  leading 
offence,  and  involved  all  the  rest.  (See 
on  10: 28.)  They  do  not  condemn  Peter 
for  preaching  the  gospel  to  Gentiles, 
for  Jesus  had  commanded  tliat  it  should 
be  preached  to  all  nations,  but  for 
doing  it  in  such  a  way  as  to  shock  their 
cherished  ideas  of  what  was  pure  and 
lawful. 

4.  Peter  replies  calmly,  simply  re- 
lating his  experience  in  the  matter, 
showing  tliat  the  tiling  was  evidently 
from  God.  His  experience  speaks  for 
itself.  The  superhuman  manifestations 
left  no  doul>t  concerning  the  divine 
will.  The  repetition  also  shows  the 
importance  attached  to  these  facts  in 
the  conflict  of  the  gospel  with  Juda- 
izing tendencies.  From  the  begin- 
ning— it  was  of  great  importance  that 
Peter  should  set  forth  all  the  facts  in 
the  order  of  their  occurrence.    (See  3 :  24 , 

18  :  23;  Luke  1  :  3.) 

5.  It  was  necessary  therefore  that 
Peter  should  state  the  place  Joppa 


(9: 36),  and  the  fact  that  he  was  pray- 
ing, when  he  had  this  remarkable  ex- 
j)erience.  In  a  trance  I  saw  a 
vision — language  which  would  com- 
mend itself  to  tlie  Jewish  mind,  in  ac- 
cordance with  their  ideas  of  divine 
manifestations.  It  came  even  to  me 
— an  important  addition  to  his  previous 
account,  showing  that  the  vision  was 
not  distant,  nor  indistinct,  (see  ou  10 : 
9-n.) 

6.  Upon  the  which  when  I  had 
fastened  mine  eyes — into  ichich 
descending  vessel,  1  (jazcd,  intently, 
and  considered  Avhat  there  was  therein. 
Another  important  addition,  showing 
that  he  saw  everything  distinctly,  and 
there  could  have  been  no  mi.stake. 
Then  follows  tlie  description  of  10  :  12. 

7.  I  heard  a  voice — indicating 
that  it  was  audible. 

8.  The  answer  varies  in  form  from 
10  :  14,  but  is  the  same  in  substance. 
A  good  illustration  of  how  the  same 
idea  may  be  variously  and  truthfully 
stated. 

9.  Answered — more  vivid  than  the 
form  of  expression  in  10  :  15.  From 
heaven.  Peter  adds  this  fact,  thus 
giving  emphasis  to  the  divine  origin 
of  the  voice. 

10.  Instead  of  "  received  up  "  (10 :  is) 
Peter  u.ses  the  ]>]irase  drawn  up 
again,  as  by  cords  into  heaven. 
(w:  11.)  Peter  describes  it  as  he  actually 
saw  it. 

11.  Without  referring  to  his  perplex- 
ity regarding  the  vision,  or  to  the  in- 
quiries of  the  messengers  for  the  house 
of  Simon  the  tanner  (10 :  is,  19),  Peter 
briefly  and  vividly  calls  attention  to 
the  remarkable  coincidence  of  the  arri- 
val, Behold  immediately  there 
were   three    men    already   come 


Cn.XJ  J 


THE  ACTS. 


179 


12  I  was,  sent  from  Caesarea  unto  me.  And 
'  the  Spirit  bade  me  go  with  them,  nothing 
doubling.  Moreover  ^  these  six  brethren 
accompanied  me;   and  we  entered   into 

13  the  nian'.s  house-  'and  he  showed  us  how 
he  had  seen  ">  an  angel  in  his  house, 
which  stood  and  said  unto  him,  Send  men 


to  Joppa,  and  call  for  Simon,  whose  sur- 

14  name  is  Feter;  who  shall  tell  thee  words, 
whereby  thou  and  all  thy  house  shall  be 

15  saved.     And  as  I  began  to  speak,  the 
Holy  Spirit  fell  on  them,  "  as  on  us  at  the 

16  beginning.    Then  remembered  I  the  word 
of  the  Lord,  how  that  he  said,  "John 


eh.  10  .  19,  20;  15:  7;  John  16  ;  13.        k  ch.  10  :  23.        ich.l0:30.        m  Heb.  1  :  14.        nob. 
2  :  4  ;  10  :  44.        <>  ch.  1  :  5 ;  19  :  4;  Matt.  3  :  11 ;  John  1  :  2U,  33, 


unto    the    house   Avhere    I    Avas, 

showing  the  provideutial  liand  of  God. 
Every  clatise  of  this  narrative  is  au 
argument. 

12.  (See  on  10 :  JO, '.'3.)  Nothing  doubt- 
ing— making  no  scruph, ;  or,  according 
to  another  reading,  preferred  by  West- 
cott  and  Ilort,  making  no  diiifinction 
between  Jews  and  Gentiles.  These 
six  brethren  accompanied  nie — 
two  facts  acUlitional  to  ])revious  narra- 
tive are  stated  :  That  the  brethren  who 
went  with  him  to  Cicsarea  were  six  in 
number,  and  that  they  came  with  him 
to  Jerusalem,  perhaps  as  witnej^ses  and 
to  verify  his  statements.  Notice  also 
how  Peter  omits  everything  not  neces- 
sary to  his  j)urpose,  and  briefly  says, 
Ave  entered  into  the  man's  house, 
the  justification  of  tlie  act  lieing  found 
in  what  he  had  just  said,  and  confirmed 
by  what  follows,  lie  also  simply  terms 
Cornelius  the  innn,  without  mentioning 
his  Roman  name  or  his  military  rank. 
These  would  have  weakened  the  per- 
suasive power  of  his  S])eech. 

13.  (seeouio  3i)-:;2.)  And  he  showed 
us,  to/d  us,  how  he  had  seen  an 
angel.  Instead  of  tlie  indefinite  an 
there  should  be  the  definite  expression, 
the  angel,  not  only  known  to  the  reader 
(w  -ii)  ;  but  implying  tiiat  Peter's  ears, 
had  heard  the  story  of  the  angelic  ai)pear- 
ance  to  Cornelius.  In  his  house — 
the  very  house  Peter  entered.  Suggest- 
ing, that  if  an  angel  had  entered  the 
house  of  a  (Jentile  on  an  errand  of 
grace,  surely  Peter  should  not  hesitate 
to  follow.  Merely,  send  to  Joppa, 
men  being  omitted  according  to  the 
best  critical  authorities. 

14.  This  is  fuller  than  10  :  22,  and 
shows  more  clearly  the  nature  of  the  in- 
formation which  Cornelius  desired. 
His  longing  was  to  be  saved,  and  to 
know  hoHK  (See  on  10- 35.)  He  needed 
that  peace  and  restftil  assurance  which 
the    gospel    only    can    give.      "  Peter 


declares,  not  that  Cornelitis  was  not  a 
sinner,  but  that  God  had  accepted  him 
through  Christ ;  Cornelius  was  already 
justified,  but  he  needed  to  know  (1) 
that  he  was  saved,  and  (2)  Iww  he  was 
saved  ;  and  Peter  was  sent  to  tell  him 
of  the  fact,  and  of  the  method,  of  his 
salvation  in  Christ."  (Dr.  A.  H. 
Strong,  Systeviatic  Theology,  p.  296.) 
And  all  thy  house — for  tliey  also  had 
shared  in  the  religious  convictions  and 
desires  of  Cornelius.  There  is  no 
foundation  here  for  salvation  of  chil- 
dren on  the  faith  of  parents,  for  iu  10  : 
2,  it  is  said  that  all  his  house  feared 
God. 

15.  And  as  I  began  to  speak — 
showing  that  he  intended  to  say  more 
tlian  in  10  :  35-44,  but  was  suddenly  in- 
terrupted by  the  descent  of  the  lloly 
Si)irit.  As  on  us  at  the  beginning 
— with  like  manifestations  of  power. 
(ill :  46.)  Peter  regarded  Pentecost  as  a 
starting  point,  the  time  of  the  organi- 
zation of  the  visible  church.  It  is  a 
fair  inference  that  no  such  dis])lay  of 
the  Spirit  had  been  given  since  Pente- 
cost, else  Peter  would  not  have  gone  so 
far  back.  We  may  al.so  infer  that  we 
are  not  to  expect  a  re))etition  of  such  a 
miraculous  display  of  the  Spirit.  The 
Spirit  now  is  given  to  believers  to  dwell 
in  their  hearts  as  a  Sanctifier,  and  as 
a  Comforter,  or  Helper.     (Rom.  s ;  s,  u.) 

16.  Then  remembered  I  the 
word  of  the  Lord.  IIow  natural 
and  life-like,  for  Peter  to  refer  to  tliis 
process  of  his  o\vn  mind,  when  the 
words  of  the  Lord  (i  :  o)  came  to  him 
with  an  enlarged  meaning  and  a]>plica- 
tion.  The  promise,  "  Ye  shall  be  bap- 
tized with  the  Holy  Spirit,  not  many 
days  hence,"  he  had  been  accustomed 
to  limit  to  Pentecost  and  the  organiza- 
tion of  the  church  at  Jerusalem.  Now 
he  sees  that  it  has  a  broader  applica- 
tion,— that  Gentiles  are  to  share  equally 
with    the     Jews,    and    that    Gentile 


180 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cit.  XL 


indeed  baptized  with  water ;  but  rye  shall 

17  \k  baptized  with  the  Holy  Spirit.  i  For- 
asmuch then  as  God  gave  theiu  the  like 
gift  as  /le  did  unto  us,  who  believed  on  llie 
]x)rd  Jesus  Christ ;  '  what  was  I,  that  I 
could  withstand  God? 

18  When  they  heard  these  tliiug?:,  they 
held  their  peace,  and  glorified  God,  say- 


ing, "Then  hath  God  also  to  the  Gentiles 
granted  repentance  unto  life. 

The  gospel  alAnfioch;  minia'ry  of  Barnahns 
and  iSua'  in  iliat  city. 

19  'NOW  they  which  were  scattered  abroad 
upon  the  persecution  that  arose  about 
Stephen  travelled  as  far  as  "Phenice,  and 


P  Isa.  44  :  3  ;  Joel  2  :  28.  q  ch.  15  :  8,  9.         '  ch.  10  :  47.         =  Kom.  10  :  12,  l;j;  15  :  9,  IG. 

'  oh.  8  : 1-4;  see  Matt.  10  :  23.        "  ch.  21  :  2. 


churches  are  to  be  organized,  on  equal 
footing  with  the  Jerusalem  church,  and 
not  dependent  on  it.  Moreover,  may 
we  not  infer  that  the  baptism  iu  the 
Holy  Spirit  was  attended  by  such 
miraculous  manifestations  as  those  of 
Pentecost  and  at  Ciesarea,  since  Peter 
limits  it  to  those  two  occasions  ?  And 
that  the  promise  was  fulfilled  and  lim- 
ited to  tho.se  two  events?  Notice  also 
tluit  Peter  omits  his  own  discourse  at 
Ciesarea.  It  was  of  little  importance 
what  he  had  there  said,  but  it  was  of 
the  fir-st  moment,  what  God  did. 

17.  Forasmuch  then,  etc.  If 
therefore  Hod  gave  the  equal,  or  the 
same  gift.  Peter  now  makes  his  api)li- 
cation  and  clinches  the  argument. 
Unto  us — unto  us  having  believed 
upon  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  that  is,  as 
believers.  The  same  gift  indicated  the 
same  faith  in  them  as  in  us.  Notice 
how  Peter  also  had  laid  stress  on  faitli 
in  his  address  at  Cwsarea.  (io:43.) 
What  Avas  I  that  I  could  with- 
stand, or  0]ipose  God.  Tlie  argument 
is:  as  God  himself  had  determined  the 
matter,  o])position  would  have  been 
both  futile  and  presumptuous.  Dr. 
Alexander  thus  sums  uji  the  case : 
"  Since  then  it  is  evident  from  what  I 
have  related,  that  the  question  was 
determined  by  divine  authority,  and 
wliolly  independent  of  me,  nay,  iu 
total  o]>position  to  my  previous  opinions 
and  desires,  I  leave  it  to  yourselves 
wlu'ther  I  could  have  done  otherwise, 
ami  whether  I  am  justly  liable  to  cen- 
sure." 

18.  The  effect  of  Peter's  defence  was 
instantaneous  and  complete.  They 
held  their  peace — a  solemn  silence 
ensues,  but  it  is  soon  followed  with 
prai.se,  giving  glory  to  God.  Then, 
unlikely  as  it  .seems  to  us,  hath  God 
also  to  the  Gentiles,  the  heathen, 
granted     repentance    uuto    life, 


which  is  necessary  to  salvation  and 
which  secures  eternal  life.  (2  Cor.  7 :  10.) 
See  on  2  :  38,  where  repentance  is  com- 
manded, and  5  :  31,  where  as  here  it  is 
represented  as  a  divine  gift,  the  dispo- 
sition to  re]K'nt  being  awakened  by 
the  Holy  Spirit. 

The  change  of  views  in  the  Jerusalem 
church  in  regard  to  Gentiles  seemed 
complete.  Yet  a  few  years  after  tins, 
])erliaps  from  bretlireu  not  present  at 
this  conference,  at  Jerusalem,  arose  a 
Jadaizing  faction,  laying  special  stress 
on  circumcision,  and  even  claiming  the 
necessity  of  it  to  salvation.  (i5:i.)  And 
even  Peter,  though  he  Avas  the  first  one 
to  extend  fellowship  to  Gentiles  on 
equal  terms  with  Jews,  yielded  for  a 
short  time  and  to  a  certain  extent  to 
these  false  teachers.  (Gai.  2:ii-u.)  How 
important  was  it  then  that  God  should 
have  at  the  very  first  converted  Ptter, 
the  strong  Jew,  and  the  apostle  to  tiic 
circumcision,  to  the  great  truth  tliat 
God  is  no  respecter  of  persons,     (lo:  i".) 

19-30.  The  Gospel  at  Antioch. 
The  Mixistky  of  Bakxauas  and 
Savl  in  that  city.  Briefly  tracing 
events  from  the  death  of  Stephen  to 
the  charitiible  mission  of  Barnabas 
and  Saul  to  Jeru.salem,  a  period  of 
ab(Uit  nine  years. 

19.  Luke  now  returns  to  bis  genenil 
narrative  of  the  early  progress  of  ti  <• 
gospel.  Going  back  to  the  death  (  f 
Stephen  as  a  starting  ]>oint,  be  bast<  ns 
toward  the  introiluction  of  the  go.'^j'i  I 
into  Antioeli,  which  was  to  bee()nie 
illustrious  as  the  great  centre  of  nis- 
sionary  ojierations  in  the  Gentile 
world.  Already  he  had  noticed  tlie 
extension  of  the  gospel  into  Sanuiria 
('':4f)  as  a  result  of  tlie  scattering  of 
the  disciples  by  the  persecution,  or 
tribulation  tliat  arose  on  account  of 
Stephen.  We  have  also  intimations  of 
the  progress  of  the  gospel  in  Judea, 


Ch.  XI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


181 


Cyprus,  and  Antioch,  preaching  the  word 
20  to  none  but  unto  ihe  Jews  only.    And 


some  of  them  were  iiieu  of  Cyprus  and 
Cyrene,  which,  when    they  were   come 


outside  of  Jerusalem.  (9: 31,32.)  These 
persecuted  disciples  pushed  tlieir  mis- 
sionary labors  outside  of  Judeaup  to 
the  time  of  the  conversion  of  Corne- 
lius, preaching  to  the  Jews  only.  Their 
course  is  traced  northward,  taking  in 
Ph(£nicia,  Cyprus,  and  Antiocli.  Phe- 
nice,  or  Phtenieia  was  an  inijiortant 
commercial  country  along  the  Mediter- 
ranean, about  twenty  miles  wide  and 
one  hundred  and  twenty  miles  long, 
the  princijial  cities  of  which  were 
Tyre  and  Sidon.  It  was  ouce  visited 
by  our  Lord.  (Matt.  15 ;  21-28.)  Its  limits 
varied  at  different  times.  Cyprus  was 
a  large  island  in  the  Mediterranean, 
about  sixty  miles  from  the  coast  of 
Palestine.  (seoii4;36.)  It  was  the 
birthplace  of  Barnabas.  Antioch 
stood  near  the  angle  formed  by  the 
coast  of  Syria  and  Asia  Minor,  on  the 
river  Orontes,  about  fifteen  miles  from 
its  mouth,  and  about  three  hundred 
miles  from  Jerusalem.  It  was  the  third 
in  rank  among  the  cities  of  the  Roman 
world,  containing  probably  a  popula- 
tion of  five  hundred  thousand,  the  cap- 
ital of  the  Roman  province  of  Syria, 
and  the  residence  of  the  Pro-consul  of 
the  province.  It  was  illustrious  for 
men  of  great  learning ;  and  the  poet 
Archias  owed  his  birth  and  education 
to  this  city.  "  It  was  famous  for  the 
beauty  of  its  position  and  the  S})k'ndor 
of  its  buildings,  and  infamous  for  the 
profligacy  and  fraud,  sorcery  and  ef- 
feminacy of  its  people."  It  contained 
a  mixed  population — the  Greeks,  the 
more  wealthy  ;  the  Latins,  the  olBcials, 
civil  and  military ;  the  Syrians,  the 
working  classes  and  slaves ;  antl  the 
Jews,  in  large  numbers,  who  occupied 
a  separate  quarter  under  their  own 
governor.  The  Roman  road  along  the 
coast  of  the  Mediterranean  made  Anti- 
och easy  of  access  from  Judea.    (see  fur 

ther  on  6    5.) 

20.  The  preaching  at  Antioch  and 
in  other  places  thither,  related  in  the 

E receding  verse,  may  be  regarded  as 
aving  occurred  before  the  conversion 
of  Cornelius,  for  the  missionaries 
preached  according  to  their  custom,  to 
the  Jews  only.    The  preaching  to  Gen- 


tiles at  Antioch,  related  in  this  verse, 
must  have  taken  place  after  Cornelius' 
conversion,  for  Peter  was  the  one  who 
formally  ojjcned  the  kingdom  of  God 
to  Gentiles.  (i5:7.)  Men  of  Cyprus 
— Jews  or  proselytes  who  were  natives 
of  Cyprus.  (2i:"i6.)  And  Cyrene — a 
city  of  Libya  on  the  north  coast  of 
Africa,  west  of  Egypt,  where  the  Jews 
were  very  numerous.  The  Cyrenians 
had  a  synagogue  in  Jerusalem  (6:9), 
some  of  tliem  were  in  Jerusalem  at 
Pentecost  (2 :  10),  and  one  at  least  at  the 
passover  immediately  preceding.  (Luke 
23 :  26.)  Cyprus  and  Cyrene  were  united 
in  one  province  about  this  time.  Spake 
unto  the  Grecians — the  Ilellemsts, 
or  foreign  Jews ;  but  the  text  should 
rather  be.  Spake  to  the  Greeks,  that  is, 
to  the  Gentiles.  We  meet  here  the 
most  important  textual  difliculty  in  the 
Acts  of  the  Apostles.  The  majority  of 
manuscripts  read  Hellenists,  and  it  is 
adopted  by  Westcott  and  Hort.  A  few 
manuscripts  and  some  versions  read 
Greeks,  which  is  sup])orted  by  internal 
evidence.  For  this  reading  alone 
brings  out  the  sharp  contrast  between 
those  who  had  now  received  the  gospel 
and  those  who  received  it  previously. 
"  It  would  have  been  nothing  new  to 
have  preached  at  this  time  to  the  Greek- 
speaking  Jews."  (Hackett.)  This 
reading  therefore  is  adopted  by  the 
majority  of  commentators  and  textual 
critics. "  Those  who  ado])t  the  other 
reading  make  the  contrast  between 
Hellenists  of  this  verse  and  resident 
Jews  of  the  preceding  verse.  Thus 
Alexander  :  "  But  why  may  he  not  be 
simply  understood  as  saying  that  when 
the  refugees  arrived  at  Antioch,  such 
of  their  number  as  were  Hellenists,  or 
foreign  Jews,  preached  to  the  Jews  of 
their  own  class  whom  they  found  there, 
as  the  Hebrew  or  native  exiles  had 
done  on  the  way  to  their  own  country- 
men ?  "  But  tills  verse  not  only  pre- 
sents something  in  contrast  to  that 
stated  in  ver.  19,  but  also  something 
additional  and  new.  And  the  preach- 
ing of  the  gospel  to  Jews  who  spoke 
Greek,  or  to  proselytes  could  not  be 
spoken  of  as  a  new  thing,  for  that  had 


]82 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XI. 


to  AiitioL-h,  spake  uuto  »the  Grecians, 

21  preachiug  the  Lord  Jesus.  And  J  the 
hand  of  the  Lord  was  with  them  :  and  a 
great  number  believed,  and  ^  turned  uuto 
the  Lord. 

22  Then  tidings  of  these  things  came  unto 


the  ears  of  the  church  which  was  in  Jeru- 
salem :  and  they  sent  forth  » Barnabas, 
that  he  should  go  as  far  as  Antioch. 
23  Who,  when  he  came,  and  had  seen  tlie 
grace  of  God,  was  glad,  and  •>  exhorted 
them  all,  that  with  =  purpose  of  heart 


;  ch.  6  :  1  ;  II  :  29.        J  ch.  2  :  47 ;  Lukt^  1  :  G(i. 


ch.  9  :  3.5  ;  1  Thess.  1 


U  :  27.        >>  ch.  13  :  43 ;  14  :  22 ;  Dent.  10  :  20  ;  1  Cor.  15  :  5». 


»  ch.  4  :  36,  37 


Dan.  1  :  8. 


taken  place  at  Pentecost.  Indeed,  the 
only  thing  that  fully  meets  Luke's  dis- 
tinction as  to  the  two  cla.sses  of 
preachers,  is,  that  the  Greeks  addressed 
at  Antioch  were  heathen,  and  not 
merely  proselytes,  for  the  latter  had  be- 
come incorporated  into  Judai.sm  by 
circumcision.  Another  serious  objec- 
tion to  this  reading  is,  that  then  this 
passage  contains  no  mention  of  the  ex- 
tension of  the  gospel  among  the  Gen- 
tiles of  Antioch,  which  afterward  be- 
came the  seat  of  Gentile  Christianity. 
Preaching  the  Lord  Jesus — as 
Lord  of  all  (lo.se)  and  Jesuit,  the  Sav- 
iour. (Matt.  1:21)  Appropriate  preach- 
ing to  Gentiles. 

21.  The  hand  of  the  Lord— the 
hand  is  a  symbol  of  power.  (Luke  i :  6«; 
John  12: 38.)  '  AVas  witli  them — giving 
tokens  of  his  approval,  perhaps  with 
miraculous  manifestations,  as  of  heal- 
ing, as  in  4  :  30.  The  princii)al  idea, 
however,  is  that  of  spiritual  i)0wer  in 
connection  with  the  jiroclamation  of 
the  truth,  in  conviction  and  conver- 
sion. Hence  a  sjreat  number  be- 
lieved— or,  he/irrl)uj  the  jireaching, 
tiirned  from  their  fulse  faith  and 
heathen  j)racticts  unto  the  Lord, 
unto  Christ  as  their  Lord.  That  these 
were  uncircumeised  Gentiles  is  evident. 
But  whether  they  were  idolaters,  or 
seekers  after  the  true  God  is  uncertain. 
Many  Gentiles  during  this  jjcriod  were 
proselytes  and  many,  like  Cornelius 
and  his  friends,  were  more  or  less  con- 
vinced that  Jehovah  was  the  true  God. 
From  such  the  early  Gentile  converts 
were  probably  gathered  for  the  most 
part.  ( u :  1 ;  18 :  * ;  Job">  12 :  20.)  The  con- 
version of  these  Gentiles  at  Antioch 
was  probablv  almost  simultaneous  with 
that  of  Cornelius.  The  Christian  com- 
munity formetl  rapidly,  and  while  that 
of  Ctesarea  was  doubtless  first  in  time, 
this  at  Antioch  soon  became  first  in 
importance. 

'Z'Z,  The  conversion  of  Cornelius  and 


this  work  among  Gentiles  at  Antioch 
were  providentially  fitted  to  teach  the 
church  at  Jerusalem  the  full  meaning 
of  our  Lord's  commission  in  Matt.  28  : 
19  and  Acts  1  :  8.  Then  tidings  of 
these  things — rather,  and  the  report 
of  them,  of  the  Gentile  converts  and 
their  teachers.  The  local  church  in 
Jerusalem  continued  to  be  the  great 
center  of  influence  and  of  missionary 
operations.  Its  importance  arose  very 
largely  from  the  fact  that  it  was  the  first 
Christian  church,  and  that  it  included 
the  apostles,  who  were  inspired  teach- 
ers and  organizers.  In  this  case  they 
send  not  an  apostle  as  to  the  Samaritans 
(8:U),  but  a  teacher  who,  from  his 
character  and  his  nation,  w  as  peculiarly 
fitted  for  the  mission  of  looking  after 
the  work  at  Antioch  and  correcting 
any  error.  Barnabas,  being  "a  son 
of  exhortation  "  (* :  36),  having  rare  gifts 
of  speech  and  exhortation,  a  man  of 
great  benevolence  and  a  native  of 
Cyprus,  was  well  fitted  for  a  mission 
requiring  careful  management,  where 
also  fellow  Cyprians  were  laboring. 
Being  also  a  friend  of  Paul  (9:27),  he 
would  likely  be  in  sympathy  w  ith  the 
work  among  Gentiles.  He  was  thus 
selected,  not  on  ofiicial,  but  on  personal 
grounds.  That  he  should  go  as 
far  as  Antioch — visiting  the  breth- 
ren on  the  way. 

23.  Had  seen  the  grace  of  Ciod 
— toward  Gentiles  in  their  conversion. 
Some  surprise  seems  to  be  indicated  by 
the  language.  However  this  may  be, 
he  found  nothing  to  censure  or  correct. 
He  saw  no  reason  to  doubt  the  work  as 
of  God,  and  therefore  he  rejoiced. 
And  exhorted  them  all  who  had 
believed  (ver.  21),  whether  Jew  or  Gen- 
tile, without  any  reference  to  circum- 
cision or  uncircumcision.  He  showed  a 
broad  and  loving  spirit,  and  did  his 
work  thoroughly.  He  also  distin- 
guished himself  as  "  a  son  of  exhorta- 
tion."    (4: '6)     With    purpose     of 


Ch.  XI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


183 


24  they  would  cleave  unto  the  Lord.  For  he 
Wrts  a  good  uian,  and  "Tall  of  the  Holy 
Spirit  and  of  faith.  'And  niuuh  people 
was  added  unto  tlie  Lord. 

25  Then  departed  Barnabas  to  'Tarsus,  for 


26  to  seek  Saul:  and  when  he  bad  found 
hiui,  he  brought  biin  unto  Antioch.  And 
it  laine  to  pas.s,  that  a  whole  year  they 
assembled  themselves  with  the  church, 
and  taught  much  people.    And  the  disci- 


d  ch.  6:5;  Gal.  5  :  22,  23.        •  ch.  5  :  14.        f  ch.  9  :  30. 


heart— with  sincere  and  earnest  de- 
termination. They  Avould  cleave 
unto  the  Lord— continue  to  he  stead- 
fastly devoted  to  the  Lord,  lie  has  no 
new  doctrines  to  pro)>ound,  no  new 
(hities  to  enforce.  He  .<,'ives  the  work 
liis  unqualitied  apiiroval. 

24.  For  introduces  the  reason,  not 
why  Barnahas  had  been  sent  to  An- 
tioch, but  why  he  had  exhorted  the  con- 
verts to  perseverance  and  progress.  He 
was  a  good  man — an  excellent  man, 
of  kind  and  noble  disposition,  aI)ove 
envy  and  censoriousness,  and  read}'  for 
every  good  work.  Full  of  the  Holy 
Spirit  and  faith — similar  to  what  is 
said  of  Stephen  (6:5),  an  earnest  and 
deeply  spiritually-minded  man,  im- 
bued with  the  Spirit,  and  exercising 
strong  faith.  As  a  consequence  he  was 
an  efficient  worker,  and  through  the 
blessing  of  the  Lord,  many  new  con- 
verts were  added. 

25.  The  work  became  so  great  that 
Barnabas  saw  that  he  needed  a  helper. 
He  who  had  sent  Saul  away  to  the  Gen- 
tiles (22:21),  doubtless  now  directed  the 
mind  of  Barnabas  to  him.  Barnal)as 
very  likely  knew  something  of  this 
vision  of  Saul.  About  four  years  had 
passed  since  Saul  went  to  Tarsus.  (» :  m.) 
This  period  of  his  life  is  passed  over  in 
silence.  But  he  could  not  have  been 
idle.  It  is  probable  that  he  organized 
those  churches  in  Cilicia,  mentioned 
in  15  :  41,  and  that  about  the  time  of 
the  conversion  of  Cornelius  he  himself 
began  to  preach  the  gospel  to  the  un- 
circumcised.  At  first  he  may  have 
given  special  attention  to  proselytes, 
till  under  providential  and  divine  di- 
rection he  preached  the  gospel  to  the 
heathen.  Paul's  general  summary  of 
his  work  in  Rom.  1.5  :  19,  20,  and  of 
the  perils  and  persecutions  through 
which  he  had  passed  (■!  Cor.  ii :  2:^-27)  may 
be  referred  partly  to  this  period. 
Tarsus,  (seeonn:  I'l.)  Tlils  is  the  last 
mention  of  Saul  at  Tarsus  in  the  New 
Testament.     He   may    afterward   have 


visited  the  city,  when  he  went  through 
Syria  and  Cilicia,  confirming  the 
churches  (is :  41 ),  or  possibly  again  when 
returning  to  Ephesus  from  Antioch,  on 
his  third  missionary  journey.  (i8:2:i; 
19:1.)  To  seek  Saul — not  knowing 
where  he  might  find  him. 

2G.  And  when  he  had  found 
him — implying  a  search  for  him  on 
the  part  of  Barnabas.  He  would  natu- 
rally go  to  Tarsus  first.  Quite  likely 
Barnabas  found  Saul  working  quietly 
and  faitlifully  for  the  Lord  in  one  of  the 
citiesof  Cilicia,  with  an  organized  baud 
of  brethren  around  him.  And  brought 
him  to  Antioch — imidymg  a  per- 
.suasive  influence  of  Barnabas  upon 
Saul,  to  which  the  latter  yielded.  From 
this  point  Saul  rises  into  prominence  in 
the  Acts,  as  an  apostle.  How  much  he 
owed  to  Barnabas,  both  in  his  introduc- 
tion to  the  disciples  at  Jerusalem 
(9 :  27),  and  at  Antioch  !  "  The  character 
of  Barnabas  is  set  before  us  in  a  most 
attractive  light  in  that  he  brought  out 
of  retirement  one  whose  eminence  was 
sure  to  supersede  and  eclipse  his  own. 
This  is  forcibly  noted  by  Calvin." 
(HowsoN  AND  Spence.)  His  great 
worth  and  influence  in  the  early  church 
has  been  too  much  overlooked.  Two 
facts  have  thus  far  been  stated  as  re- 
sults of  Barnabas  going  to  Antioch,  a 
great  ingathering  and  the  inducing 
Saul  to  come  to  the  work.  It  was  fitting 
that  two  should  thus  be  associated,  ami 
it  was  conducive  to  greater  success.  Our 
Lord  sent  out  disci])les,  two  ))y  two. 
(MMk 6: 7;  Luke  10:1.)  The  apostles  Sent 
two  to  Samaria.     (« :  u.) 

Two  additional  facts  are  .stated,  as  the 
result  of  the  joint  lal>ors  of  Barnabas 
and  Saul :  Large  congregations  with 
increased  success,  and  the  church 
coming  into  such  prominence  as  a  dis- 
tinct community  as  to  receive  the  dis- 
tinctive name  of  Christian.  This  work 
went  on  for  a  whole  year,  and  during 
this  time  the  dif^ciTples  first  received 
the  name  of  Christians.     The  Ian- 


184 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XI. 


pies  swere  called  Christians  first  in  Anti- 
och. 

Famine  in  Judcea.    Help  sentjrom  Antiorh. 
27      AND  in    these  days   came  •>  prophets 


28  from  Jerusalem  untoAntioch.  And  there 
stood  up  one  of  them  named  >  Agabus,  add 
signified  by  the  Spirit  that  there  should 
be  great  dearth  throughout  all  the  world: 
which  came  to  pass  in  the  days  of  Claud- 


I  ch.  20  :  2G  ;  Eph.  3  :  15 ;  1  Peter  4  :  14,  16.        i>  ch. 
12  :  10,  28 ;  Eph.  4  :  11. 


13  : 1 ;  15  :  32 ;  21  :  9 ;  Rom.  12  :  6 :  1  Cor. 
i  ch.  21 :  10. 


guage  implies  that  they  did  not  assume 
the  name,  nor  was  it  divinely  given, 
for  then  it  would  have  been  used  more 
frequently,  whereas  it  is  a  faet  that  the 
name  occurs  only  in  two  other  passages 
in  the  New  Testament  i-'e :  2k  ;  i  Peier  i  -.  is), 
and  is  applied  to  them  by  others.  (See 
James  2 : 7.)  Luke's  allusion  to  the  origin 
of  the  name,  however,  implied  that, 
when  he  wrote,  it  had  ol)tained  consid- 
erable currency.  It  could  not  have  been 
given  by  Jews,  for  they  called  the  disci- 
ples Nazarenes  (24:5),  and  they  would 
not  have  bestowed  upon  them  a  title 
which  implied  that  they  were  followers 
of  the  Messiah.  Its  form,  like  Hero- 
diaus,  seems  to  indicate  a  Latin  origin. 
Hence  some  suppose  that  the  public 
authorities  at  Antioch  gave  the  name 
to  this  growing  community,  which  was 
bound  together  by  allegiance  to  one 
"  Christus."  Po.^sibly,  as  others  sup- 
pose, it  was  at  fir.«t  a  name  of  derision, 
for  the  inhabitants  of  Antioch  are  said 
to  have  been  noted  for  thus  employing 
names  derisively.  Otliers  still  regard 
it  as  a  term  of  oj»j)robrium.  "The 
name  was  first  given  to  the  worshipers 
of  Jesus  by  the  Gentiles,  but  from  the 
second  century  onward,  a(ce])ted  by 
them  as  a  title  of  honor."  (Thayer, 
Greek  Lex.)  This  new  name  indicates 
a  considerable  community,  and  the  ex- 
istence of  a  ehurcli  of  Clirist  indejiend- 
ent  of  Judaism.  Ilencefortli  the  church 
at  Antioch  becomes  in  apostolic  histoiy 
the  mother  cliurch  of  Gentile,  as  Jeiu- 
salem  was  of  Jewish  Christendom.  Yet 
not  in  antagonism,  but  as  allies  and 
hel]>ers  of  eadi  other,  (ver.  27 :  so;  is :  i  f.) 
27.  The  incident  related  in  this  and 
the  three  following  verses  is  introduc- 
tory to  what  follows,  and  also  forms  a 
eojinecting  link  between  the  two  chap- 
ters. And  in  these  days — wliile 
Barnabas  and  Saul  were  teaching  at 
Antioch.  (Ver.  25,  st;.)  Came  prophets 
tVoni  Jerusalem  nnto  Antioch. 
Whether  they  were  sent,  or  came  of 


their  owo  accord,  is  not  told  us.  Piob- 
ably  led  thither  under  the  guidance  of 
the  Spirit.  Agabus — a  prophet — that 
is,  one  who  speaks  forth — a  sjiokesman 
for  God.  He  was  an  inspired  teacher, 
whose  duties  were  by  no  means  limited 
to  foretelling  future  events,  but  included 
messages  of  instruction,  w'arning,  and 
direction  regarding  the  cause  and  king- 
dom of  God  and  human  salvation. 
(15:32.)  While  those  who  spoke  with 
tongues  rose  into  a  state  of  excitement 
and  ecstasy,  often  so  far  losing  their  in- 
tellectual consciousness  as  to  need  an 
interpreter  (1  Cor.  12 :  lO;  u :  13),  the  prophet 
with  less  excitement,  and  conscious 
of  all  his  mental  exercises,  but  filled 
with  the  Sjiirit,  sjioke  by  God's  author- 
ity and  command,  and  needed  no  one 
to  interpret.  (1  cor.  u :  4, 19.)  Sometimes 
women  were  i>roi)hets.     (21 :9;  see 2:  17. 

IS;  2  Kings  22  :  14.) 

28.  Agabus  is  mentioned  only  here, 
and  in  21  :  Kl.  Nothing  more  is  known 
of  him.  Signified  by  the  Spirit — 
made  knotrn  tliroiigh  the  aid  and  illumi- 
nation of  the  Holv  Sjjirit.  Compare  in 
the  life  of  Paul,  "16  :  (J,  7  ;  20  :  22,  23. 
A  great  dearth,  scarcity  of  harvei«ts, 
famive.  Throughout  all  the  world 
^upon  all  thevnliahited  earth,  a  phrase 
rather  vaguely  used  of  the  whole  Eoman 
P'mpirc.  (Luke 2:1.)  It  seems  to  liave 
been  used  sometimes  in  a  restricted 
sense,  meaning  the  land  of  Palestine 
and  adjacent  countries,  (isa.  lo:  2:1.)  But 
it  need  not  be  thus  restricted  here. 
Which  came  to  pass  in  the  days 
of  Claudius  Caesar.  Ccrsar  is  not 
found  in  many  important  mantiscripts 
and  versions,  and  Mas  ])robal»ly  added 
as  an  exjdaiiatioii  by  some  transcril)er. 
The  P"ni]»eror  Claudius  reigned  from 
A.  D.  41-54.  During  his  reign  different 
))artsof  theenijiiie  suffered  successively 
from  severe  famines.  There  had  been 
a  scarcity  of  provisions  at  Eome  in  the 
first  and  .second  year  of  his  reign. 
According  to  Eusebius  a  great  famine 


Ch.  XI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


185 


29  ius  Ciesar.  Then  the  disciples,  ^  every 
man  according  lo  his  ability,  determined 
to  send  '  relief  unto  the  brethren  which 


30  dwelt  in  Jud*a:  which  also  thry  did, 
and  sent  it  to  ™  the  elders  by  the  hands 
of  Barnabas  and  Saul. 


k  2  Cor.  8  :  2-4, 12-U. 


I  Rom.  15  :  25-27 ;  1  Cor.  IG  :  1. 

Jameij  5  :  14;  1  Peter  5:1. 


■  ch.  16  :  4  ;  20  :  17 ;  Titus  1:5; 


prevailed  in  Greece  iu  the  ninth  year 
of  his  reign  ;  and  in  the  eleventh  year 
famine  was  felt  at  Rome,  according  to 
Tacitus  and  Suetonius.  One  that 
seriously  affected  Judea  and  Jerusalem 
began  about  A.  D.  44,  and  continued 
three  or  four  years.  According  to 
Josephus  this  "  great  famine  occurred 
wlien  Cuspius  Fadus  and  Tiberius 
Alexander  were  procurators.  During 
which  Queen  Helena  of  Actiabene,  a 
Jewish  proselyte,  came  to  Jerusalem, 
wliicli  proved  of  great  advantage. 
"For  whereas  a  famine  did  oi)press 
them  at  that  time,  and  many  people 
died  for  want  of  what  was  necessary 
to  procure  food  withal.  Queen  Helena 
sent  some  of  her  servants  to  Alexan- 
dria with  money  to  buy  a  great  quan- 
tity of  grain,  and  others  of  them  to 
Cyprus,  to  bring  a  cargo  of  dried  figs. 
And  as  soon  as  they  were  come  back, 
and  had  brought  those  provisions, 
which  was  done  very  quickly,  she  dis- 
tributed food  to  those  who  were  in  want 
of  it,  and  left  a  most  excellent  memor- 
ial behind  of  her  benefaction,  which 
she  bestowed  on  the  whole  nation." 
(Aiitiq.  XX.  2  :  5.)  These  various 
local  famines  occurring  one  after  the 
other  in  different  parts  of  the  Roman 
Empire  may  very  justly  be  viewed  by 
the  eye  of  prophecy  as  a  great  famine 
coming  upon  all  the  earth. 

29."  The  effect  of  the  prediction  upon 
the  church  at  Antioch  is  now  given, 
sliowing  the  fraternal  relation  exi.stiug 
between  the  churches.  The  disci- 
ples— a  common  designation  of  Cliris- 
tians  throughout  the  Acts.  (6  •.  i ;  9 :  i ; 
15:10.)  It  is  not  here  stated  whether 
they  immediately  sent  their  gifts,  or 
waited  until  they  heard  that  the  famine 
had  actually  begun.  The  latter  view 
is  the  most  proliable,  for  Agabiis  did 
not  specify  when  the  famine  would 
reach  Judea,  and  from  the  next  chap- 
ter it  would  appear  that  the  offerings 
were  sent  to  Jerusalem  in  the  last  year 
of  Herod,  a.  d.  44.  Scarcity  may  have 
been  felt  early  in  the  year  through  the 


failure  of  crops ;  and  the  delegation 
with  their  contributions  would  then 
naturally  come  later,  after  the  martyr- 
dom of  James,  and  the  miraculous 
deliverance  of  Peter,  (i'-!:^.)  Every 
man — every  one.  The  first  element 
in  Christian  giving.  Each  one  gave 
freely.  According  to  his  ability — 
according  as  he  was  prospered.  The 
second  element  in  Christian  benevo- 
lence. The  contributions  were  entirely 
voluntary,  and  each  one  for  himself 
determined  conscientiously  his  own 
share.  The  principle  acted  upon  was 
that  afterward  practiced  and  inculcated 

by    Paul.       (1  Cor.  16:2;  2  Cor.  8:  12.)      UntO 

the  brethren — another  designation  of 
Christians  used  frequently  in  the  Acts. 
(9 :  30 ;  n :  10 ;  28  :  14, 15.)  A  fitting  appella- 
tion here.  It  was  fitting  tliat  the  more 
prosperous  should  thus  help  their  suf- 
fering brethren.  In  Judea— not  only 
at  Jerusalem,  but  in  places  outside, 
since  the  famine  was  general.  Antioch 
was  a  wealthy  commercial  city,  and  it 
is  implied  that  the  disci])les  were  in  a 
prosperous  condition.  In  Jerusalem 
the  Sadducean  and  Pharisaic  parties 
formed  the  wealthy  and  prosjierous 
classes.  The  Christians  of  Jerusalem 
and  Judea  bad  given  largely  in  the 
community  of  goods,  and  had  suffered 
by  jiersecution,  and  originally  may 
have  been  gathered  largely  from  the 
humbler  classes.  The  Christians  at 
Antioch  showed,  not  only  a  brotherly 
feeling,  but  also  a  sense  of  filial  obliga- 
tion to  the  mother  church  at  Jerusalem. 
This  benevolent  home  work  was  pre- 
paring the  Antioch  church  for  her  later 
foreign  missionary  work. 

30.  Which  also  they  did — they 
executed  their  determination  at  the 
proper  and  needed  time,  by  the 
hands,  through  the  agency  of  Bar- 
nabas and  Saul.  This  shows  how 
highly  these  two  men  were  regarded  by 
the  church  at  Antioch.  How  fitting 
that  the  "son  of  consolation "  i*--^) 
should  return  with  gifts;  and  that  Saul 
should  thus  minister  to  those  whom,  by 


186 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XI. 


persecution,  he  had  helped  to  impover- 
ish. Sent  it  to  the  elders — who 
could  forward  the  supplies  to  the  dea- 
cons aud  brethren  in  difierent  places 
for  distribution,  as  necessity  required. 

This  is  the  first  mention  of  elders 
connected  witli  the  churches.  While 
the  origin  of  deacons  can  be  traced  to 
the  clioosing  of  the  Seven  (6:  if.),  no 
account  is  given  of  the  origin  of  elders. 
Some  suppose  that  by  elders  here  are 
meant  honorable  and  elderly  men,  in- 
cluding the  officials  or  deacons  of  the 
churches  in  Judea,  and  that  out  of 
those,  as  circumstances  required,  grew 
the  office  of  elder  in  distinction  from 
that  of  deacon.  Others  regard  the 
church  at  Jerusalem  as  modeled  after 
the  .Jewisli  synagogue.  To  this  it  may 
be  ol)jected  :  (1)  That  the  model  is  not 
exact.  There  was  nothing  in  the  syna- 
gogue to  correspond  exactly  with  dea- 
cons; and  the  "Chief  of  the  syna- 
gogue "  has  no  corresponding  office  in 
the  church,  mentioned  in  the  New  Tes- 
tament. (2)  The  apostles,  being  in- 
spired men,  to  whom  was  entrusted  the 
organization  of  the  early  church,  would 
not  be  likely  to  confine  themselves  to 
the  Jewish  synagogue  as  a  model. 
Without  doubt  the  synagogue  exeru-d 
an  influence.  When  "the  office  of  elder 
first  arose  in  the  church,  it  being  simi- 
lar in  the  main  to  that  in  the  syna- 
gogue, it  was  natural  that  the  accus- 
tomed term  for  such  an  office  should  be 
used.  The  terms  elder,  or  presl)yter ; 
and  bishoji,  overseer  or  pastor,  are  used 
interchangeably  in  the  New  Testament. 
Thus  Paul  designates  the  elders  of 
Ephesus  overseers  or  bishops,  (m  :  i'. 
2f<.)  In  giving  charge  to  Titus  concern- 
ing the  ordination  of  this  class,  he  calls 
them  interchangeably  elders  and  l)ish- 
ops.  (Titus  1 : 5-7.)  And  Peter  exhorts 
elders  to  act  as  bishops  or  pastors  of 
the  flock,  (i  Peters :  1-3.)  The  qualifica- 
tions required  of  them  were  Identical. 

(1   Tim.  3  ;  1-7;    Titus  1   :  5.)  OrdinatioU, 

wliich  Episcopacy  claims  as  the  pre- 
rogative of  a  third  and  higher  class  of 
church  officer,  the  post-apo.stolic  bish- 
op, was  conferred  by  elders ;  for  Timo- 
thy was  ordained  by  the  presbytery,  or 
eldership,  (i  Tim.  i  -.  u.)  The  term  elder 
was  used  more  generally  by  Jewish 
Christians,  and  pointed  to  the  dignity 


and  authority  of  the  office  ;  while  Gen- 
tile believers  employed  oftener  the  term 
bishop  or  overseer,  indicating  rather  the 
character  of  the  work.  But  however 
styled,  they  were  entrusted  with  the 
oversight  and  guidance  of  the  flock, 
which  are  plainly  the  work  of  the  pas- 
tor. See  fuller  discussions  on  14  :  23 ; 
20 :  17. 

This  visit  of  Saul  to  Jerusalem  was 
the  second  after  his  conversion.  In  his 
Epistle  to  the  Galatiaus  he  omits  this, 
and  speaks  only  of  the  first  and  third 
journeys  to  Jerusalem.  (Gni.  i :  i?.- 2:1.) 
But  Paul's  object  did  not  there  require 
him  to  mention  all  his  journey.  "  In 
the  first  chapter  there  he  would  prove 
that  as  an  apostle  he  was  independent 
of  all  human  authority ;  and  in  the 
second  chapter,  that  the  other  apostles 
had  conceded  to  him  that  independ- 
ence. He  had  no  occasion,  therefore, 
to  recapitulate  his  entire  history." 
(Hackett.)  There  is  thus  no  contra- 
diction between  Luke  and  Paul.  At 
the  same  time  we  see  reasons  for  its 
omission  :  It  was  not  neces.saiy  to  speak 
of  it.  Besides,  the  mention  of  this 
visit  would  have  been  extraneous,  and 
really  weakening  to  his  subject.  In 
this  Barnabas  is  rather  the  leader,  but 
in  his  first  and  third  visits  Paul's 
apo.stolic  character  is  recognized,  (a  :  ao ; 

2  :  21;  15  :  2;  Gal.  2  :  7.) 

Chronological  Note.  Paul  was 
converted  in  the  latter  part  of  the 
reign  of  the  Emperor  Tiberius,  who 
died  early  in  A.  D.  37.  In  the  year  36, 
Pontius  Pilate  was  dismissed  by  Vitel- 
lius,  the  Legate  or  Governor  of  Syria, 
and  Warcellus  was  sent  to  l>e  Procura- 
tor in  his  stead.  The  same  year  Caia- 
phas  was  deposed  by  Roman  authority, 
and  succeeded  by  Jonathan.  The  year 
after  Marcellus  made  way  for  Marnl- 
lus ;  and  Theophilus  was  made  high 
priest  in  place  of  his  brother  Jonathan. 
Caligula  succeeded  Tiberius  as  Em- 
peror, A.  D.  37;  Vitelliuswas  recalled 
from  Syria,  and  Petroneus  took  his 
place  at  Antioch.  But  during  the  year 
37,  it  appears  that  Aretas,  king  of  Ara- 
bia, got  jiossession  of  Damascus  and 
held  it  for  a  year  or  more.  (2  Cor.  11 :  32.) 
In  A.  D.  39  and  40,  Caligula  attempted 
to  force  the  Jews  to  worship  him  as 
God,  and  commanded  his  statue  to  be 


Ch.  XI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


187 


placed  ill  the  temple  at  Jerusalem. 
Tlie  feeling  of  liorror  aroused  by  tliis 
among  the  .Jews  doulitless  turned  their 
miuds  from  the  growing  conmuinities 
of  Christians  throughout  Palestine, 
and  coutriljuted  to  the  rest  they  en- 
joyed. But  the  murder  of  Caligula, 
January  24th,  A.  D.  41,  put  a  stop  to 
his  infamous  plans.  He  was  succeeded 
by  Claudius,  Vibuis  Marsus  is  made 
Governor  of  Syria  at  Antioch ;  and 
Herod  Agrippa  I.  rules  over  the  whole 
territory  which  had  been  governed  by 
his  grandfather,  Herod  the  Great.  (See 
oa  12 : 1.)  lu  A.  D.  44,  Hcrod  dies,  and 
Cuspius  Fadus  succeeds  him  as  Procur- 
ator of  Judea.  It  was  about  this  time 
that  Barnabas  and  Saul  visited  Jeru- 
salem  with  their  contributions.      (12 : 

•U,  25.) 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  Peter  recognized  the  authority  of  the 
local  church,  and  the  right,  not  only  of  the 
apostles,  but  also  of  other  brethren,  to  ques- 
tion his  conduct.  He  certainly  claimed  no 
papal  authority.  (Ver.  1-4;  15  :  4;  1  Peter 
5:1.) 

2  The  apostles  and  early  Christians  had 
many  things  to  learn.  So  now,  though  rev- 
elation is  complete,  the  Spirit  may  guide  us 
from  time  to  time  to  the  better  understand- 
ing of  the  truth.  (Ver.  1-4 ;  John  16  :  12, 13.) 

3.  The  way  to  meet  and  disanu  prejudice 
is  by  a  calm  and  simple  statement  of  facts. 
(Ver.  4 ;  26  :  24-26.) 

4.  The  servant  of  Christ  should  not  re- 
fuse to  explain  kindly  and  frankly  to  his 
brethren  any  conduct  or  principle,  which 
may  seem  to  them  to  be  erroneous,  and  such 
explanation  should  be  received  and  con- 
sidered in  a  similar  spirit.  (Ver.  4-17 ;  1 
Cor.  10:32,33;  11:16.) 

5.  Peter  gives  a  beautiful  example  of  hu- 
mility both  at  Csesarea  and  Jerusalem.  (Ver. 
4-17  ;  1  Peter  3  :  15,  16.) 

6.  We  should  seek  and  highly  esteem  the 
■pproval  of  brethren  of  good  judgment  and 
acknowledged  integrity.  (Ver.  12;  1  Cor. 
16 :  3.) 

7.  We  should  prayerfully  seek  and  follow 
the  guidance  of  the  Spirit  and  providence  in 
our  work.     (Ver.  12  ;  1  Peter  4  :  6.) 

8.  God  has  appointed  the  preaching  of 
the  gospel  as  a  means  unto  salvation.  (Ver. 
14 ;  Rom.  10  :  14  ;  1  Cor   1  :  18.) 


9.  The  presence  and  enjoyment  of  the 
Holy  Spirit  is  an  evidence  .of  a  new  life. 
(Ver.  15-17:  1  Cor.  3  :  16.) 

10.  As  the  newly  born  believer  is  to  receive 
j  water  baptism  so  the  newly  born  church  re- 
ceived the  baptism  in  the  Spirit.    (Ver.  16  ; 
3:4;  10 :  44-46.) 

11.  It  is  our  privilege  to  enjoy  the  blessing 
resulting  from  the  Spirit  baptism  of  the 
early  church.  (Ver.  15,  10 ;  Rom.  8  : 9-11 ; 
John  14  :  16.) 

12.  If  any  one  gives  evidence  of  accept- 
ance with  God  he  is  a  proper  subject  of  bap- 
tism.   (Ver.  2  :  41 ;  Matt  3  :  8.) 

13.  Our  theories  should  be  subordinate  to 
the  teachings  of  God's  word,  Spirit,  and 
providence.    (Ver.  18;  1  Cor.  2  :  12, 13.) 

14.  Nothing  is  of  more  importance,  or  the 
cause  of  greater  gratitude,  than  the  receiv- 
ing of  the  word  of  God.    (Ver.  1, 18.) 

15.  Any  other  repentance  than  that  which 
is  unto  life  is  worthless.  (Ver.  18 ;  2  Cor. 
7 :  10.) 

16.  Persecution,  so  far  from  taking  away 
Christian  courage,  rather  develops  it.  (Ver. 
19 ;  2  Cor.  4  :  8-10.) 

17.  "  God's  dispensations  can  only  be  read 
in  the  light  of  after  developments."  (Dr. 
ScHAFF.)  The  martyrdom  of  Stephen  and 
the  persecution  that  followed  resulted  in 
multiplying  churches,  and  in  the  formation 
of  second  a  centre  of  early  Christianity  at 
Antioch.    (Ver.  19-21 ;  Phil.  1 :  12-14.) 

18.  The  power  of  God  must  attend  the 
preaching  of  the  gospel  to  make  it  success- 
ful.   (Ver.  21 ;  1  Cor.  3  :  7,  8 ;   1  Thess.  1  :  5.) 

19.  Great  care  should  be  taken  in  sending 
the  right  persons  into  mission  fields.  (Ver. 
22-24  ;  Phil.  2  :  20-22.) 

20.  We  should  rejoice  when  many  are 
added  to  the  Lord,  even  though  the  men  and 
measures  accord  not  exactly  with  our  views. 
(Ver.  23 ;  Phil  1  :  18.) 

21.  The  Christian  from  the  very  beginning 
of  his  spiritual  life  should  be  fully  de- 
termined, steadfa.st,  and  devoted  to  the 
Lord.     (Ver.  23  ;  1  Cor.  15  :  58  ) 

22.  Barnabas  alone  in  the  New  Testament 
is  styled  "  a  good  man."  Gospel  workers 
should  be  full  of  the  Spirit,  full  of  faith  in 
God  and  his  message.  (Ver.  24  ;  2  Tim.  2  : 1- 
3,  15,  2>-25.) 

23.  Good  men  must  be  sought  after,  who 
are  fitted  for  and  called  to  God's  work.  (Ver. 
24 ;  2  Cor.  2  :  12,  13 ;  7  :  6.) 


188 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIT. 


21.  Pieachtrs  of  Ibe  gospel  when  latiDiiug  | 
togtl-ljei'  should  make  the  glory  of  God  and  1 
his  cause  uppermost.     (Ver.  26 ;  1  Cor.  2:2; 
3:9,21.)  j 

25.  The  noblest  name  that  we  can  bear  on  i 
earth  is  thai  of  Christian.  May  we  indeed  | 
share  in  Christ's  anointing  (1  John  2  :  20),  | 
and  at  last  the  greater  honor  of  receiving  i 
his  "  new  name  !   '     (Ver.  2G  ;  Rev.  o  :  12.) 

26.  Like  miracles  and  the  gift  of  tongues, 
the  gift  of  prophecy  was  a  becoming  attend-  1 
ant  and  evidence  of  the  New  Dispensation. 
(Ver.  27,  28  ;  la  :  1 ;  1  Cor.  12  :  28.)  i 

27.  The  relief  sent  from  the  Christians  at  I 
Antioch  to  their  suttering  brethren  in  Judea  ] 
is  one  of  the  most  beautiful  incidents  of  the  ■ 
apostolic  age.    (Ver.  29,  30.)  j 

28.  True  faith  shows  itself  in  works  of 
love.     (Ver.  29,  30 ;  Gal.  5  :  6.) 

29.  Let  us  learn  the  duty,  the  Spirit,  and 
the  principle  of  Christian  beneficence.  (Ver. 
29,30;  1  Cor.l6:l,2.) 

30.  Great  care  should  be  taken  in  selecting 
trustworthy  and  experienced  men  in  man- 
aging and  distributing  our  beneficence. 
(Ver.  30 ;  6  :  3.) 

Ch.  12  :  Thi.s  chapter  closes  the  first 
general  division  of  the  Acts,  the  ac- 
count of  the  Jerusalem  churcli,  and  the 
lui.ssiouary  oj)eratioiis  of  which  it  was 
the  centre.  Al)0ut  the  time  of  sending; 
the  contrihutions  from  Antioch  to  tlie 
hrethren  in  Judea,  a  new  persecution 
arose  under  Herod  Agrippa  1.  The 
Apostle  James  is  slain ;  Peter  is  im- 
jirisoned,  hut  is  delivered  hy  an  angel. 
Then  follow  Herod's  negotiations  with 
the  Tyrians  and  Sidonians,  his  impious 
vanity,  and  his  loathsome  death  hy  the 
hand  of  an  angel;  after  whicli  the 
mother  church  disappears  from  the  in- 
spired history,  increasing  and  pros- 
])erous. 

1-19.  The  Second  PERSEcrTiON 
AT  Jkri'salem.  Death  of  James, 
AND  ^rniAcuLous  Deliveeance  of 
Petkk;  a.  d.  44.  The  disciples  had 
enjoyed  jieace,  and  rest  from  persecu- 
tion for  live  or  six  years.  (9:3i.)  Ca- 
ligula's infamous  conduct  toward  the 
Jews  doul)tless  contributed  to  this. 
(See  note  at  end  of  ch.  11.) 

1.  This  chapter  is  closely  connected 
with  the  preceding  by  the  words.  And 
about  that  time.   Having  mentioned 


the   mission   of  I5arnal)as  and   Saul  to 
Jerusalem,  Luke  i)roceeds  to  describe 
tlie  condition  of  tlie   cliurch   there  at 
tiiat  time.     From  ver.  25  it  is  evident 
that  some  of  the  events  related  in  ver. 
1-24  occurred  during  this  visit.     Some 
suppose  that  they  arrived  at  Jerusalem 
at  the  Passover,  after  the  martyrdom 
of  James,  and  before  the  deliverance 
of    Peter.      But  there   is   no  evidence 
that  tliey  came  at  once  to  Jerusalem. 
(^ii:i'9.)     The   first  part  of   April  was 
probably  too  early  for  the  famine  to  be 
felt  much.     Their  coming  to  Jerusalem 
was  more  likely  after  Herod  had   re- 
moved to  C'lesarea.     (Ver.  19.)     The  feast 
of  Pentecost  was  the  most  highly  prized 
of  any  of  the  Jewish  feasts  by  the  early 
Christians ;    and    Barnabas    and   Saul 
would  be  more  likely  to  come  to  that, 
than  to  the  Passover.     The  feast  of  the 
I  Tabernacles,   occurring  after    Herod's 
death,  would  seem  to  be  too  late  for 
j  their  arrival.     We  may  therefore  place 
their  coming  into  Judea,  sometime  be- 
tween the  Passover  and  Herod's  death, 
that  is,  between  April  1st  and  the  first 
of     August.       Herod     the     king. 
Agrippa  I.,  the  grandson  of  Herod  the 
Great,  the  great  grandson  of  Hyrcanus 
the  high  priest,  and  father  of  Agrippa 
II.  mentioned  in  chapters  2,5  and  26. 
After  the  murder  of  his  father  Aristo- 
bulus,  he  was  sent  to  Rome  to  be  edu- 
cated, and  was  the  companion  of  the 
princes,   Caligula   and    Claudius.     He 
fell    into   disgrace   with   the   Enijieror 
Tiberius,  and  was  imprisoned  toward 
the  end  of  his  reign,  but  was  released 
by  Caligula  on  his  accession  (A.  D.  37), 
anil   made   king  of  the  tetrarchies  of 
Pliiliji    and    Lysanias.      Subsequently 
the  tetrarchy  of  Herod  Antii>as  ((Jali- 
lee  and  Pera-a)  was  added  to  his  domin- 
ions.    In  A.   D.  41   Claudius  extended 
his  kingdom  over  Judea  and  Samaria, 
so  that  his  entire  dominions  equalled 
tliat  of  his  grandfather.     His  revenues, 
according  to  .Tosephus,  were  large,  esti- 
mated as  equal  to  two  millions  of  dol- 
lars.    He  was  an  observer  of  the  law, 
and  adopted  a  policy  to  win  the  favor 
of  the  Jews.     At  the  same  time  he  was 
luxurious  in  his  tastes,  and  delighted 
in    theatres,   games,   and    gladiatorial 
shows.     He  was  crafty,  selfish,  extrava- 
gant, vainglorious,  and  licentious.   His 


Ch.  XII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


189 


Renewvd  penecatwn  at  Jerusalem.    Death  of 
James;  iitiraculoiis  deliverance  of  Peter. 

la.    NOW  about  that  time  Herod  the  king 
stretched  forth  his  hands  to  vex  certaiu 


2  of  the  church.  And  he  killed  James  "  the 
brother  of  John  with  the  sword. 

3  And  bccausi!  he  saw  »  it  pleased  the  Jews, 
he  proceeded  further  to  take  JPeter  also. 
(Then    were   Pihe   days   of   unleavened 


n  Matt.  10  :  2. 


'  ch.  24  :  27  ;  25  :  9.        P  Exod.  14-20 ;  23  :  15. 


two-sided  character  appears  in  this 
uainitis'e :  His  readiness  to  conciliate 
tiie  Jews  by  persecuting  Christians,  and 
to  accept  the  prolfcred  deification  of 
himself  by  the  heathen  uuiltitude. 
After  his  death  Palestine  was  again 
reduced  to  a  Roman  province ;  and 
never  again  were  tlie  rulers  in  Jerusa- 
lem able  to  organize  a  general  persecu- 
tion against  tlie  Christians.  To  vex — 
to  maitreut,  persecute  certain  of  the 
church  at  Jerusalem.  He  was  anxious 
to  please  the  Jews.  (ver.  3.)  This  ac- 
cords with  Josephus  {Anti<^.  xix.  7  :  3). 
"  He  took  delight  in  giving,  and  re- 
joiced in  living  with  good  reputation. 
He  was  not  at  all  like  that  Herod,  who 
reigned  before  him  ;  for  that  Herod  was 
ill-natured  .  .  .  and  every  one  per- 
ceived that  he  was  more  friendly  to  the 
Greeks  than  to  the  Jews."  But  Agrippa 
"  loved  to  live  continually  at  Jerusalem, 
and  was  exactly  careful  in  the  obser- 
vance of  the  laws  of  his  country.  He 
therefore  kept  himself  entirely  pure  ; 
nor  did  any  day  pass  over  his  head 
witliout  its  appointed  sacrifice." 

2.  James  the  brother  of  John — 
sons  of  Zebedee.  (ii^itt.  4 :  21 ;  20 :  -lo-n.) 
They  are  always  mentioned  togetlier  iu 
the  gospels  ;  and  with  Peter  formed  the 
the  tliree  favorite  disciples,  who  were 
permitted  to  witness  the  raising  of  the 
daughter  of  Jairus  (Mark  5 :  37),  the  Trans- 
figuration (Matt.  17:1)  and  the  agony  in 
Getlisemane.  (Matt.  26 :  37.)  This  James 
must  not  be  confounded  with  James, 
the  Lord's  brother,  (vcr.  17.)  He  was 
the  first  of  the  apostles  to  drink  the 
cup  that  Christ  drank  and  to  undergo 
his  baptism  of  sutfe rings;  and  John 
ap[)ears  to  have  survived  all  the  rest. 
The  fact  tliat  James  was  chosen  as  the 
first  victim  of  this  persecution  indicates 
that  he  was  indeed  "  a  son  of  thunder  " 
(Mark  3: 17),  and  a  prominent  leader  in 
the  church  at  Jerusalem.  It  seems  to 
have  been  the  design  of  Herod  to 
destroy  the  leaders,  believing  that  their 
followers   would  be  disorganized   and 


scattered.  With  the  sword — behead- 
ing him.  This  was  regarded  as  a  dis- 
graceful mode  of  punishment  among 
the  Jews.  Herod  had  tlie  i)Ower  of 
life  and  death  since  he  ruled  under  the 
authority  of  the  Romans,  it  has  Iteen 
often  noticed  how  briefiy  Luke  describes 
the  death  of  James  iu  contrast  with  that 
of  Stephen.  (::d5-oo.)  This  has  been 
variously  explained  ;  but  the  reasons 
do  not  appear.  It  would  seem  that 
James  met  his  end  calmly  and  silently  ; 
but  it  was  not  the  will  of  the  Spirit 
that  the  account  of  it  should  be  handed 
down  to  God's  people.  Tlie  traditions 
regarding  the  event  are  worthless. 
Paley  has  noted  the  accuracy  of  Luke 
in  the  words,  "  Herod  the  king,"  there 
being  no  time  for  thirty  years  before  or 
afterward,  when  tliere  was  a  king  at 
Jerusalem,  except  the  last  tliree  years 
of  Herod's  life.  Agrippa  II.  (25 :  13)  did 
not  reign  over  Judea. 

3.  When  he  saw  that  it  pleased 
the  Jews.  By  this  we  get  a  glimpse 
of  Herod's  character.  lie  was  crafty, 
and  acted  from  State  policy.  That 'it 
was  not  from  his  conscientious  regard 
for  the  law,  is  evident  from  his  readiness 
soon  after  to  receive  divine  honors. 
(Ver.  23.)  The  Jews  here  incliule  not 
the  rulers  only,  but  the  jieojile  gener- 
ally (ver.  11.),  "  jjeople  of  the  Jews." 
This  indicates  tlie  popular  feeling  at 
that  time.  A  great  change  had  taken 
place  in  tliis  respect  since  the  days  suc- 
ceeding Pentecost  (2  :47),  and  the  great 
revivals  that  followed.  (5  ;  13, 2s,  42.)  The 
church  had  Ijcen  scattered  and  weak- 
ened through  persecution,  so  that  its 
following  in  Jerusalem  was  small  iu 
comparison  to  the  ))ojiulation.  He 
proceeded  further  to  take.  Liter- 
ally, He  added,  he  icrnt  on  to  seize  Peter 
also.  This  is  in  imitation  of  a  Hebrew 
idiom,  which  has  led  some  to  suppose 
that  the  account  was  written  originally 
in  Hebrew.  Luke  may  have  received 
such  an  account  from  Peter  himself. 
The  days  of  unleavened  bread — 


190 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XII. 


4  hrf-ad.)  And  when  he  had  apprehended 
hiiu,  he  put  him  in  prison,  and  delivered 
him  to  four  quarteruious  of  soldiers  to 
keep   him ;    i  intending   after  Easter  tu 

5  bring  him  forth  to  the  people.  Peter 
therefore  was  kept  in  prison  :  but '  prayer 

q  Prov.  19  :  21 ;  27  :  1 ;  Lam.  3  :  37 ;  Matt.  2G  :  5. 
Cor.  1 :  11 ;  Eph.  0  :  18  ;  1  Thess.  5  :  17. 


was  made  without  ceasing  of  the  church 
unto  God  for  him. 
6  And  when  Herod  would  have  brought 
him  forth,  the  same  night  Peter  "was 
sleeping  between  two  soldiers,  bound 
with  two  chains  :  and  the  keepers  before 

'  ver.  12  ;  Matt.  18  :  19 ;  1  Cor.  12  :  26  ;  2 
"  I's.  4  :  8 ;  Isa.  26  :  3,  4 ;  Heb.  13  :  6. 


the  festival  week  of  the  Passover,  during 
which  time  no  leaven  was  allowed  in 

Jewisll  hoUSOS.    (Mau.  H  :  1,  12  ;  D.ut.  16  :  U,  K.) 

This  festival  began  on  the  fourteenth 
dayofNi.san,  and  in  A.  D.  4-1  corres- 
ponded with  the  first  week  of  April. 

4.  When  lie  had,  etc. — whom  hav- 
iiKj  alao  arnalid.  Herod  takes  every 
precaution  to  secure  aud  hold  fast  his 
victim.  Peter  Itad  been  delivered  once 
before  (5:23) ;  Herod  now  intends  to 
make  it  sure.  He  not  only  confined 
him  in  prison,  but  also  put  him  in 
charge  of  four  quartcruions  of  sol- 
diers, four  squads  consisting  of  four 
each,  making  sixteen  soldiers  in  all. 
According  to  the  Iloman  custom  the 
night  was  divided  into  four  watches, 
and  each  ijuarternion  took  one  watch. 
Two  armed  men  in  tbe  prison,  and  two 
before  the  gate,  to  keep,  giKinl,  one 
unarmed  prisoner.  Intending  after 
Easter — aftrr  the  Pas^sorrr,  tlie  last 
day  of  tlie  festival.  There  is  no  refer- 
ence here  to  any  services  of  tlie  cliurch. 
Indeed,  Easter,  as  an  ecclesiastical 
church  service,  was  then  unknown. 
The  stricter  .lews,  according  to  tlie 
Talmud,  held  it  unlawful  and  a  pro- 
fanation to  ))Ut  a  jierson  to  death  (hir- 
ing the  solemn  feasts;  and  Herod 
wished  to  be  regarded  as  a  strict  o)i- 
server  of  the  law.  (see  johu  i.- :  ■.'«.)  'jpo 
bring  him  forth  or  up  to  the  peo- 
ple— for  trial  and  execution,  in  tlieir 
))resence  as  spectators.  (Joim  is:  i:t.)  The 
prison  is  conceived  of  as  in  a  lower 
])lace.  Herotl  intends  not  to  amuse 
the  people  (.iu.is.  is :  25),  l)ut  rather  to 
display   liis  zeal  for  Judaism  and  the 

law.      "(2  Kiugs  10:  1«.) 

5.  Mas  kept.  A  contrast  is  here  pre- 
sented. "While  Peter  ^rascln•ffu//>/  kept, 
the  church  was  earnestly  praying. 
Without  ceasing — rather,  earnrgthj. 
Some  manuscripts  have  the  adjective 
earnest,  others  the  adverb  eaniestlt/. 
The  greater  weight  of  critical  evidence 
is  with  the  latter.   It  implies  intensity, 


and  hence  persistency  of  supi)lication. 
It  is  used  of  our  Lord's  praying  in 
Getiisemane  (Luke  22 :  44),  and  by  Peter 
of  brotherly  love,  "fervently."  (1  Peter 
1:22.)  The  fact  here  mentioned  sug- 
gests, tliat  wliat  followed  in  the  deliver 
ance  of  Peter  Mas  in  answer  to  ])rayer. 
For  him,  or  concerniiKj  him.  That  he 
might  be  delivered  from  prison  or  from 
the  hand  of  Herod,  or  if  that  was  not 
the  will  of  the  Lord,  that  divine  grace 
might  sustain  him.  He  had  been  once 
delivered  from  prison  (5 :  19),  and  this 
fact  would  encourage  them  to  hojie  for 
a  like  deliverance.  But  as  sucli  help 
did  not  come,  and  the  night  before  the 
trial  had  arrived,  they  ai>i)ear  to  have 
concluded  (ver.  15. 16)  that  Peter  would 
probably  follow  James  in  martyrdom. 
"  Why  had  they  not  also  prayed  for 
James  ?  Because  he  had  been  speedily 
slain."     (Bengel.) 

6.  The  same  night — l)efore  the 
day  fixed  for  his  execution.  Peter 
was  sleeping  between  two  sol- 
diers, bound  with  tAVO  ciiains. 
According  to  the  Koman  custom  a 
cliain  was  fastened  to  the  left  wrist  of 
the  soldier,  and  to  tlie  right  wrist  of 
tlie  jirisoner.  Sometimes,  as  in  this 
case,  for  the  greater  security  of  an  im- 
l)ortant  prisoner,  two  soldiers  were 
eliained  to  him  one  on  each  side  of 
liim.  Compare  Paul  bound  with  two 
cluiins.  (21:33.)  If  tliese  belonged  to 
one  of  tlie  quarternions  of  soldiers, 
tlien  it  must  have  been  the  last  watch 
of  the  night,  between  three  and  six 
o'clock,  when  tlie  angel  entered  the 
])risoii.  For  Peter  was  not  missed  till 
morning  (ver.  is),  showing  that  no 
change  of  guards  hail  taken  place  after 
his  (ieliverance.  And  the  keepers 
before  the  door  kept  the  prison. 
According  to  one  view,  two  at  the 
doors  of  the  prison  formed  tlie  first 
and  .second  guards  (tci-.  10),  the  two 
cliaine<l  to  the  prisoner  made  up  the 
four.    According  to  another  view,  two 


Ch.  XII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


101 


7  the  door  kept  the  prison.  And,  behold, 
'the  angel  of  the  Lord  came  upon  him, 
and  "  a  light  shined  in  the  prison :  and 
he  smote  Peter  on  the  side,  and  raised 
him  up,  saying,  Arise  up  quickly.    And 

8  his  chains  fell  otf  from  his  hands.  And 
the  angel  said  unto  him, "  Gird  thyself, 
and  bind  on  thy  sandals.    And  so  he  did. 


9  And  hesaitli  unto  him,  C'a,st  thygarnu'iit 
about  thee,  and  follow  me.  .\nd  Le  went 
out,  and  followed  him ;  and  » wist  not 
that  it  was  true  which  was  done  by  the 
angel;  but  thought  J  he  saw  a  vision. 
10  When  they  were  past  the  first  and  the 
second  ward,  ihey  came  unto  the  iron 
gate  that  leadeth  unto  the  city ;  «  which 


«ch.  5  ;19;Ps.  34:  7. 

»  Luke  2  :  9  ;  24  :  4. 
17  ;  11  :  5. 

'  Luke  12  :  :J5. 
»  ch.  IG  :  2(5. 

»  Ps.  126  :  1. 

J  ch.  10  :  3, 

at  one  station,  and  two  at  another  were 
guarding  the  prison,  while  the  two 
chained  to  Peter  were  with  him  for  the 

night.       (See  on  ver.  10.) 

7.  Behold  the  angel,  rather,  an 
anijcl  of  the  Lord.  (seeou5:i9.)  The 
same  language  is  used  here  as  in  Luke 
2  :  9,  where  an  angel  is  described  as 
appearing  to  the  shepherds  at  our 
Saviour's  hirth.  This  is  an  instructive 
chapter  on  angels,  (ver.  is,  2.1.)  On  an- 
gels in  their  relation  to  God's  people, 
see  Gen.  19:1;  1  Kings  19 :  .5-7 ;  2 
Kings  6  :  17  ;  Ps.  91  :  11,12  ;  Dan.  .3  : 
25,  27  ;  6  :  22  ;  9  :  21 ;  Acts  10:3;  27  : 
23.  A  light  shined  in  the  prison 
— in  the  chamber  or  cell,  in  which 
Peter  was  sleeping.  Not  the  same  word 
as  that  translated  prison  above.  And 
smote  him,  with  considerable  force 
on  his  side,  in  order  to  rouse  him 
from  sleep.  And  raised  him  up, 
awaking  him.  "  This  and  the  direction 
to  gird  himself,  in  the  next  verse, 
was  to  arouse  Peter,  to  convince  him 
that  it  was  not  a  dream,  and  to  leave 
in  his  recollection  a  testimony  of  the 
reality  of  the  angelic  appearance.  So 
Christ  bade  his  disciples  to  touch  him, 
to  satisfy  themselves  that  he  was  really 
in  bodily  presence  with  them.  (Luke  24: 
39;  .j..im20:20, 27.)  "  (Abbott.)  Peter, 
sleej)ing  in  expectation  of  witnessing 
for  his  Lord  when  the  day  dawned, 
would  naturally  mistake  the  angel's 
voice  for  the  summons  to  execution. 
No  wonder,  as  matters  proceeded  that  it 
seemed  to  him  like  a  dream. 

8.  The  angel  had  commanded  him  to 
arise  quickly  (ver.  7)  ;  but  now  to  dress 
himself  freely  and  deliberately,  atteiul- 
ing  to  each  particular.  "  Hesitation 
in  arising  would  have  argued  unbeliev- 
ing doubts ;  unilue  haste  in  departure, 
unbelieving  fears."  (Alexander.) 
Gird  thyself^tighten  the  girdle  of 
the  tunic,  which  he   had   unloosed  for 


sleeping.  Bind  on — strap  on  the 
sandal,  soles  of  wood  or  leather  under- 
neath the  feet,  which  he  had  laid  aside 
before  he  slept.  Cast  thy  garment 
about  thee — thy  outer  garment,  a 
kind  of  shawl  used  as  a  cloak  by  day 
and  a  covering  by  ni^ht.  He  would 
need  this  as  a  protection  against  the 
chilly  air  of  an  early  spring  morning. 
Thus  freed  from  chains  and  all 
equipped,  he  was  to  follow  the  angel, 
leaving  no  article  of  attire  behind. 

9.  Wist  not.  117s/,  is  an  old  En- 
glish word  meaning  knew.  His  lii)era- 
tion  was  so  sudden,  unexpected,  and 
miraculous,  that  he  was  in  a  maze  and 
bewildered.  His  sudden  awakening 
from  sleep  naturally  helped  toward  this 
result.  It  seemed  to  him  more  like  a 
dream  than  a  reality.  He  really 
thought  he  saw  a  vision — such  as 
he  had  seen  at  Joppa.  (10 :  11. 12 ;  see  on 
ver.  11.)  This  rei)ort  of  his  thoughts 
must  have  come  from  himself 

10.  When  they  Avere  past  the 
first,  etc.  More  exactly,  and  hamng 
passed  thronqh  the  first  and  the  second 
watch.  Dr.  Hackett  remarks  that "  ^rtc- 
ing  jnissed  throtnih"  suggests  a  plural 
sense  of  watch  and  must  be  said  looselv, 
if  applied  to  a  single  person.  Accord- 
ing to  this  view  tlicy  pass  thromrh  or 
between  the  two  soldiers  stationed  at 
Peter's  door  and  thenthrougli  the  other 
two  stationed  at  tlie  gate  which  led 
into  the  city,  (seeon  ver.e.)  But  ac- 
cording to  the  more  common  view  they 
passed  by  one  guard,  or  soldier,  at  the 
door  of  Peter's  cell,  and  another  at  the 
outer  gate  of  the  prison.  The  iron 
gate  that  leadeth  unto  the  city. 
Nothing  can,  with  certaintv,  be  inferred 
in  regard  to  the  ])osition  of  the 
prison  ;  for  tlie  iron  sate  may  have  led 
from  the  inside  of  the  pri.son,  and  not 
necessarily  from  without  tlie  walls  of 
the    city.      "  De  Wette,    after  Light- 


192 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XII. 


opened  to  them  of  his  own  accord:  and 
they  went  out,  and  passed  on  through 
one  street ;  and  forthwith  the  augel  de- 
parted from  him. 
11  And  when  I'eter  was  come  to  himself, 
he  said,  Now  I  know  of  a  surety,  that 


Ps.  a*  :  7 ;  Dan.  3  :  2.S ;  6  :  22 ;  Heb.  1  :  14. 

I'fter  2:9.        ":  ver.  3.        *  ver.  2o  ; 


»the  Lord  hath  sent  his  angel,  and  ''hath 
delivered  me  out  of  the  hand  of  Heicd, 
« and  from  all  the  expectation  of  the 
12  people  of  the  Jews.  And  when  he  had 
considered  ttt«  thing,  he  came  to  the  hou.'^e 
of  Mary  the  mother  of  *  John,  whose  sur- 


b  Ps.  33  ;  18,  19 ;  41  :  2  ;  97  :  10 ;  2  Cor.  1  :  10 ;  2 
ch.  l.T  ;  37 ;  Col.  4  :  10  ;  2  Tim.  4  :  11. 


foot,  Walch  and  others,  thinks  that  the 
prison  was  a  tower  l)etween  the  two 
walls  of  the  city,  and  that  this  was  the 
outer  gate  of  the  tower."  (Hackett.) 
In  Bible.  Lamls,  p.  4.50,  Dr.  Van 
Lennep  thus  deseril)es  the  gates  of  an 
eastern  city  :  "  Tliey  are  large,  massive 
and  two-leaved,  built  of  heavj'  timber, 
plated  with  iron.  A  strong  iron  bar, 
hooked  at  one  end,  hangs  from  a  heavy 
riugof  the  same  metal,  made  fast  in  a 
strong  post  built  into  the  wall  behind 
each  fold  of  the  gate.  When  the  gate 
is  closed,  the  hooks  are  set  into  other 
iron  rings  on  the  back  of  its  folds,  en- 
abling the  gate  to  resist  a  very  heavy 
pressure  from  without.  The  lock  is 
massive  !ind  of  wrought  iron,  and  the 
long-handled,  ponderous  key  is  carried 
by  the  keeper  of  the  gate  in  his  belt,  or 
hung  from  a  nail  in  his  little  room  close 
by."  That  the  gate  opened  of  its  own 
accord,  without  any  visil)le  cause, 
added  to  the  wonder  of  the  miracle. 
When  they  had  passed  on  through 
one  street  and  were  about  to  enter 
another  the  angel  disappeared  as 
quickly  as  he  had  ai)peared  to  him, 
and  as  silently  as  he  had  conducted 
him  into  this  freedom. 

11.  When  Peter  was  come  to 
himself.  Conscious  where  he  was  and 
that  he  had  passed  through  an  actual 
experience.  Before  this  he  had  been 
in  a  dreamy  state,  exercising  his  will 
under  the"  leadersliij)  of  the  angel, 
rather  than  independently.  NoAV  I 
know  of  a  surety.  As  he  stands 
alone  in  the  city  and  notes  the  sur- 
roundings and  sees  that  he  is  actually 
there  and  no  longer  in  prison  or  chains, 
he  is  convinced  of  the  reality  of  his  de- 
liverance, through  the  interposition  of 
an  angel  sent/or//i  from  heaven.  He 
views  his  deliverance  as  twofoM : 
From  the  hand  of  Herod,  who, 
having  the  civil  authority  and  power, 
intended  to  kill  him ;  aiui  from  all 
the  expectation  of  the  people  ol 


the  JeAVS,  who,  notwithstanding  all 
the  miracles  he  had  done  among  them, 
were  Imilding  high  hopes  upon  his  de- 
struction, and  the  con.sequent  disaster 
to  Christians.  Tlie  first  persecution 
had  greatly  scattered  and  weakened 
the  ciiurch  ;  the  second  one  might  de- 
stroy it.  But  the  time  had  not  yet 
come  for  Peter  to  ilie  (John  21 :  ik,  ih),  and 
Christianity  was  to  live  notwithstand- 
ing all  its  foes.  (Matt,  is :  If.)  Eationalis- 
tic  interpreters  have  done  their  best  to 
explain  away  the  supernatural  in  this 
account.  Butthesimjilicity  and  fresh- 
ness of  the  narrative  commend  it  to 
the  reader  as  honest  and  accurate. 
There  is  no  attenii)t  to  overdo,  but 
rather  to  state  circumstances  exactly 
as  they  were.  "  The  event  is  indeed 
most  gra]ihically  described,  and  ex- 
hibits no  features  that  can  embarra.ss 
any  one  who  believes  in  the  interposi- 
tion of  the  living  God  in  the  real  world, 
and  who  admit.s  the  actual  existence 
and  operations  of  the  angels."  (Lech- 
LER  in  La»ge.) 

12.  When  he  had  considered 
the  thing,  or  better,  ^9)rf  becoming 
fully  conseiuus  uf  it,  of  the  state  of  the 
case,  and  the  actual  circumstances. 
This  accords  better  with  the  use  of  the 
word  in  14  :  6  ;  5:2;  1  Cor.  4 :  4. 
Luke  implies  in  the  narrative  that 
Peter  acted  with  deliberation  ;  and  so, 
doubtless,  he  noM^  gave  some  thought, 
as  to  what  had  occurred  and  wluit  lie 
should  do.  Mary,  tlic  mother  <»( 
John,  etc.  Slie  is  mentioned  only 
here.  She  was  aunt  of  Bariiahas.  (ci. 
4:10.)  It  is  said  that  Peter  came  to 
her  house,  whieli  would  seem  to  inijily 
that  it  wa.s  not  from  design,  l>ut  that  it 
was  in  the  way  that  he  was  going.  Her 
house  was  one  of  the  meeting  jilaees  for 
worship.  Tradition  fixes  its  site  on  the 
u])]ier  slo})e  of  Zion,  and  affirms  that  it 
was  saved  from  tlie  destruction  of  Jer- 
usalem, A.  D.  70,  and  was  used  as  a 
church  in  the  fourth  century.    She  is 


Oh.  XIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


1«)3 


name  was  Mark  ;  where  many  were  gatli- 
l.i  (.'red    together  '"  praying.     And   as   Peter 

kuoukea  at  the  door'of  the  gate,  a  damsel 
14  came  to   hearken,   named   Rhoda.     And 

when  she  knew  Peter's  voice,  she  opened 


not  the  gate  for  gladness,  hut  ran  in  and 
told  how  Peter  stood  hefore  the  gate. 
15  And  they  said  unto  her,  Ihou  art  mad. 
But  she  constantly  affirmed  that  it  was 
even  so.    Then  said  they, '  It  is  his  angi;!. 


•  ver.  5 ;  Isa.  6.".  -.24;  1  John  5  :  14,  15.        f  Matt.  14  ;  2G  ;  18  :  10 ;  Mark  6  :  49. 


<listiiij,'iiislR-d  from  other  Marys  by 
being  styled  the  mother  of  John;  and 
it  was  the  cu.stoin,  as  it  still  i.s  among 
the  Arabs,  to  call  a  father  or  mother 
after  their  son,  especially  after  the 
ehlest    son.     Thus    Zeruiah    is    called 

Joab's     mother.        ('^  Sam.  n  :  25  ;  John  2  :  1.) 

John,  Avho^e  surname  Ava.s  Mark 

— the  former  ))eing  his  Hebrew  name 
(13 ;  5, 1:1),  and  the  latter  his  Latin  name. 
(15 :  .f9.)  He  was  converted  through  the 
instrumentality  of  Peter  (i  1  eters  :  i.i), 
and  was  a  cousin  of  Barnabas,  (coi. +: 
in.)  He  was  doubtless  the  writer  of 
Mark's  gosjxd,  which  was  regarded  by 
early  Christians  as  the  go.spel  of  Peter, 
Mark  simply  writing  under  the  direc- 
tion of  Peter.  Where  many  were 
gathered  together  praying — for 
Peter,  (ver.  5.)  That  they  were  still  at 
prayer  showed  their  perseverance  and 
importunity.  It  was  more  convenient 
to  hold  their  assemblies  at  night,  and 
jierbaps  there  was  greater  .safety.  (Joha 
■JO:  19.)  "These  nocturnal  assemblies 
of  Cliristians  for  prayer  were  continued 
in  many  places  in  more  quiet  times, 
partly  owing  to  the  solemnity  which 
belongs  to  the  hours  of  the  night,  partly 
owing  to  the  deep-rooted  persuasion 
tiiat  tlie  Lord  would  come  again  during 
the  night."  (HowsoN  and  Spexce.) 
13.  At  the  door  of  the  gate — 
the  wicket  or  small  door  in  tlie  large 
heavy  gate.  The  house  seems  to  have  been 
of  some  size,  aiul  was  built  after  the 
usual  ])lan  of  .Jewish  houses,  around  an 
open  (rourt  yard.  A  damsel  or  maid 
nrrruiit  named  llhoda,  or  Rose,  for  so 
tlie  name  means.  It  was  not  uncom- 
mon for  tlie  Jews  to  give  their  daugh- 
ters the  names  of  ]ilants  and  tlowers. 
Thus  Hadassah  (Esther)  means  a  myr- 
tle; Susannah,  a  lily;  and  Tamer,  a 
]talm.  To  hearken — to  listen,  who  is 
tiiere  ;  hence  the  word  was  used  of  an- 
swering a  knock  or  a  call  at  the  door, 
and  so  the  Reviseil  Version  translates, 
"  a  maid  came  to  answer,"  and  ask  his 
uame. 


14.  When  she  knew  Peter's 
voice.  Peter  not  only  knocked  l»ut 
called  for  entrance.  He  had  doubtless 
been  a  frequent  guest  at  the  house  of 
Mary  ;  and  the  maid  had  doubtless  oftt  11 
heard  him  talk  and  pray.  She  opened 
not  the  gate  for  gladness — slie  was 
probably  a  Christian  girl,  and  had 
shared  the  interest  and  aii.xiety  of  tbe 
disciples,  and  now  wished  them  to  Ite 
])artakers  of  her  joy.  We  see  how 
Peter  was  loved  by  all  classes.  His 
sympathy  for  servants,  and  his  ap]>re- 
ciation  of  their  trials  mav  be  learned 
from  1  Peter  2  :  18-20.  Told  hoAV, 
that  Peter  stood,  etc.  Note  her 
simple  faith,  while  all  others  are  doubt- 
ing. 

15.  Thou  art  mad — you  are  not 
in  your  right  mind.  (-'6  :  24;  John  10 : -'o.) 
Constantly,  conjideiit/y,  affirmed. 
No  words  of  theirs  eouhl  shake  lier  be- 
lief that  Peter  was  really  at  the  door. 
It  is  his  angel — his  guardian  angel; 
for  this  accorded  with  the  Jewish  be- 
lief. It  seems  that  these  believers 
thought  that  Peter  had  just  been  put  to 
death,  and  that  his  angel  was  present 
at  the  door,  assuming  his  voice.  Some 
would  translate  messenffer ;  but  the 
word  is  rarely  used  in  this  sense  in  the 
New  Testament  (iiarkiti);  and  if  so 
used  here  it  would  have  been  said,  a 
■messenf/er  from  him,  rather  than  his 
messenger.  Neither  can  we  render  tlie 
words,  his  ghost,  or  spirit,  for  tlie  word 
angel  is  never  used  in  that  sense  in  tln' 
New  Testament.  Luke  simj)ly  narnit's 
what  these  brethren  thought,  but  ex- 
presses no  opinion  ui)on  the  doetriiif, 
neither  affirming  nor  denying.  Haiiiel 
and  Zechariah  speak  of  the  aiig<l  of  a 
particular  country  or  nation,  as  of  IVi'- 
sia,  of  Greece,  or  of  the  Jews.     (n.^".  m  : 

13,20.  21;  Zech.  5  :  5,  8.)      The    JcWS    ap]ili'il 

the  idea  of  guardian  angel  to  indiviiin- 
als,  as  is  illustrated  in  tlie  storv  of 
Tobit.  The  Christian  Fathers  also  lieM 
to  guardian  angels.  But  while  tiie 
Scriptures  are    uot    against  such    a, 


194 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XII. 


16  But.  Peter  contiuued  knocking:  and  when 
tliey  had  opened  IIk  iloor,  and  saw  hira, 

17  thuy  were  astonished.  But  be,  s  beckon- 
ing unto  them  with  the  baud  to  hold 
their  peace,  declared  unto  them  bow  •'  the 


lyord  had  brought  him  out  of  the  prison. 
And  he  said,  Co  shew  these  things  unto 
'  James,  and  to  the  brethren.  And  he 
departed,  and  went  into  another  place. 


8  ch.  13  :  16 ;  19  :  33 ;  21  :  40.        h  Ps.  102  :  19,  20.        i  ch.  15  :  13 ;  James  1  :  1. 


doctrine,  thej^  fail  to  prove  it.  Aiifrt'ls 
have  much  to  do  as  ministering  spirits 
iu  reference  to  our  salvation  (Heb.  i :  ii) ; 
in  protectinj,'  us  from  danger  (ps.  yi:ii; 
sintt.  4:6),  in  being  j)resent  at  our  wor- 
sliip  (iCor.  u  :  10),  aud  at  last  in  sejjarat- 
ing  the  righteous  from  the  wicked.  ( Matt. 
24r3i.)  Our  Lord's  words  (Mntt.  is :  lo), 
"  1  sav  unto  you,  tliat  in  heaven  their 
a  niseis  do  always  behold  the  face  of  my 
Fatlior  who  is  in  heaven,"  has  been 
thouglit  to  teach  that  each  individual 
has  his  angel ;  but  the  passage  only 
teaches  the  general  fact  that  lielievers 
as  a  class,  and  not  necessarily  as  indi- 
viduals, liave  angels  as  attendants  and 

guardians.      (Seenoteon  M;itt.  18  :  10.) 

16.  When  they  had  opened  the 
door — indicating  that  the  company,  or 
or  at  least  several  of  them,  had  become 
so  interested  in  the  n)atter  as  to  go  to 
the  gate,  and  open  it.  They  were 
astonished.  If  they  were  praying 
for  his  deliverance,  then  tlieir  faitli  was 
weak.  At  lea.st  tliey  were  not  expect- 
ing it  in  this  way,  and  now.     (See  on 

Ter.  5.) 

17.  Beckoning:  unto  them  Avith 
the  hand — rai)idly  sliaking  or  waving 
tlie  hand  with  a  downward  movement. 
In  the  New  Testament  tliis  verb  is  only 
found  in  the  Acts,  and  is  always  used 
of  a  gesture  to  secure  attention,  (is :  i6; 
■2\ :  40;  19 :  3.1.)  The  brethren  Mere  boister- 
ous with  joy,  congratulations,  and 
«|ii('stions.  Peter  wished  silence,  in 
order  to  be  beard.  The  narrative  in 
this  verse  indicates  haste.  Perhai)S 
without  entering  into  the  room  where 
t!;,'V  were  -^'atliered,  jjerhajis  in  the 
l^orcli  whither  the  eomj)aiiy  had  mostly 
<  line,  Peter  makes  known  his  deliver- 
a:!ce,  the  command  of  the  angel,  and 
tlien  retires.  Declared  unto  them — 
ascribing  his  deliverance  to  the  Lord 
Jfsus  Christ,  through  the  angel.  Shew, 
fr//  these  things  unto  Janies,  yet 
lii't  to  him  alone,  but  also  to  the 
brethren — to  the  pastor  and  church  at 
Jerusalem.      None    of     the    ai)ostles 


a))pear  to  have  been  there.  This  James 
could  not  have  l)een  tlieson  of  Zebedee. 
wlio  liad  been  slain  by  Herod  (ver.i'), 
nor  does  he  appear  to  be  the  son  of 
Ali)lieus,  l)ut  rather  the  Lord's  brother 
(Gal.  1:19),  who  was  a  leader  in  the 
church  at  Jerusalem,  and  its  pastor 
after  the  death  of  James,  perhaps  from 
this  time  when  Peter  thus  reported  to 

him,  and  them,     (is  :!.•!;  21:18;  Gal.  2:9,  I?) 

He  was  a  real  brother  of  our  Lord 
(Mark  (i  :  3,  on  which  see  note,  also  1  : 
14;  1  Cor.  i>  :  .">),  and  seems  not  to  have 
believed  on  Christ  until  after  tlie  resur- 
rection, when  Jesus  ai)peared  to  him. 
( Juhii  7 :  5 ;  1  Cor.  15  :  5.)  His  close  relation 
to  Christ,  his  conservative  Jewisli  views 
and  his  observance  of  the  law,  maile 
him  a  fit  man  for  the  foremost  place  in 
the  church  at  Jerusalem.  His  f]])istle 
resembles  the  addresses  of  Jolm  tlie 
Pa])tist,  and  the  Sermon  on  the  ilouiit. 
He  contra.sts  the  gospel  with  the  Law  of 
Closes,  calling  it  "the  perfect  Itiv  of 
liberty"  (Jiinie.'ii:  25),  raising  it  thus 
aliove  the  imi)erfeet  law  of  boiKhu/r. 
In  after  times  he  was  called  "  thi'  Just  " 
with  reference  to  liis  conservative  Jew- 
isli  views.  "The  mission  of  Janies  was 
evidently  to  stand  in  the  brcacli  be 
tween  the  synagogue  and  the  church, 
aud  to  lead  the  disciples  of  Moses 
gently  to  Christ.  He  was  the  onlv  man 
that  could  do  it  in  that  critical  time  of 
approaching  judgment  of  the  holy  city. 
As  long  as  there  was  any  hojie  of  a  con- 
version of  the  Jews  as  a  luition,  he 
prayed  for  it  and  made  the  transition  as 
ea.^y  as  possible.  "When  the  hoi>e  van- 
ished his  mission  was  fulfilled."  (Dr. 
SciiAVFyChnrcIilJisiori/,  Vol.  I,  ]).  2ti7.) 
According  to  Josephus  he  was  ])ut  to 
death  by  stoning,  at  the  instigation  of 
Ananus  the  high  priest,  of  the  sect  of 
the  Sadducees,  A.  I>.  0.3,  between  the 
procuratorship  of  Festus  (-'a :  i)  and  that 
of  Alluiius.  This  caused  great  indig- 
nation among  the  Pliarisees  and  re- 
sulted in  the  deposing  of  Ananus. 
(Josephus,  Antiq.  xx.  9:1.)     A  later 


Cir.  Xlf.J 


THE  ACTfi. 


105 


18  Now  as  soou  as  it  was  day,  there  was 
IK)  .small  stir  among  the  soldiers,  what 

19  was  bt'coiiie  of  Peter.     And  when  Herod 
had  sought  for  him,  and  found  him  not,  he 


k  examined  the  keepers,  and  commanded 
that  tliHu  .should  be  put  to  death.  And  he 
went  down  from  Juda;a  to  Ciesarea,  and 
there  abode. 


kch.  4:9;  Luke  23  :  14. 


account  of  the  death  of  Jaines  is  not  so 
reliable. 

Went  into  another  place.    The 

expression  is  iiuletiuite,  and  may  mean 
that  Peter  went  to  sonic  place  of  safety 
cither  in  the  city  or  out  of  it.  To  have 
mentioned  the  place  at  the  time  of 
Janice's  writing,  ini.i^ht  liave  exposed 
certain  ones  to  danger.  But  it  might 
have  been  unknown  to  Luke,  as  it  was 
not  tl\e  design  of  the  Spirit  that  lie 
should  narrate  further  Peter's  personal 
history.  He  ])robably  left  the  city 
then,  or  soon  after,  as  vigorous  efforts 
would  l)e  made  to  capture  and  destroy 
him.  \Ve  find  liim  again  in  the  city 
at  the  time  of  the  council,  about  six 
years  later  (i5 :  -),  and  a  little  later  at 
Antioch.  (Oiii.  2 :  ii-u.)  He  may  also 
liave  preached  tlie  gos]>el  in  Greece  as 
far  as  Corinth  (1  dr.  i :  12),  accompanied 
by  his  wife.  (icor.  !»:5.)  He  also 
j>rcachcd  in  the  East,  going  as  far  as 
Pabylon.  (i  Peter  .t  :  is.)  I'onian  Catho- 
lic writers  and  .some  others  suppose 
that  Peter  went  from  Jerusalem  at  this 
time  to  Rome,  as  an  apostle  to  the  cir- 
cumcision. But  this  is  without  histor- 
ical evidence.  "  It  is  entirely  adverse 
to  this  view  that  Paul  makes  no  allu- 
sion to  Peter  in  his  Ejnstle  to  the 
llomans,  but  writes  with  a  tone  of  au- 
thority whieli  Ins  avowed  policy,  his 
sjiirit  of  independence  {2  Cor.  io:i6), 
would  not  liave  suffered  him  to  emjjloy 
had  it  l)elonged  more  |))operly  to  some 
otiier  apostle  to  instruct  and  guide  the 
Pvomaii  cluirch."  (Hackett.)  It  is 
not  certain  thnt  Peter  ever  visited 
llomr.  It  is  related  that  he  was  cruci- 
fied with  his  head  downward,  at  his 
own  request,  feeling  tiiat  lie  was  un- 
worthy to  die  in  tlie  posture  of  his 
L(n-d  whom  lie  ha<l  denied.  Tradition 
associates  his  martyrdoin  with  that  of 
Paul,  al)()ut  .\.  D.  ()7.  But  see  closing 
note  oil  2.S  :  31. 

18.  As  soon  as  it  was  day — be- 
tween five  and  six  o'clock  of  an  April 
morning.  Tiien  Peter  iniist  have  been 
delivered  after  three  o'clock,  if  the  sol- 


diers to  -whom  he  was  bound  was 
changed  at  tlie  cn<l  of  each  watch.  If 
they  Were  not  changed  then  hisikdiv- 
crance  may  lie  assigned  to  about  mid- 
night (ik  :2.i),  and  more  time  could  be 
allowed  for  his  visit  at  the  house  of 
Mary  au<i  liis  dejiarture  to  another 
jilace  ;  and  in  tlie  light  of  this  verse 
the  latter  seems  the  more  j»lausible 
view,  (seeouver.fi.)  No  Small  stir — 
no  small  cominofion  (19  :  a:!),  excitement 
bordering  on  consternation.  Tlie  sol- 
diers were  responsible  for  the  pi'isoner, 
and  feared  the  vengeance  of  the  king ; 
for  they  were  liable  to  suffer  the  ))un- 
isliment  wliicli  he  was  to  receive. 
VVhatAvas  become  of  Peter.  They 
could  give  no  solution  of  his  escape,  or 
of  whtre  he  was,  and  no  plausible 
excuse  for  themselves. 

19.  The  first  thing  Herod  does  upon 
hearing  of  Peter's  escape,  is  to  make 
diligent  search  for  him,  in  the  city  and 
in  those  jilaces  where  he  might  be 
found,  Init  witli  no  results.  Then  he 
examined  the  keepers,  tlie  f/nanls 
— he  subjected  tliem  to  trial,  ascertain- 
ing the  proliaMe  time  of  Peter's  escape, 
and  what  soldiers  were  then  in  cliargc. 
It  is  tluis  not  necessary  to  suppose  that 
all  the  sixteen  soldiers  were  jint  to 
death,  unless  lie  thought  all  guilty  of 
conniving  at  Peter's  escape.  Com- 
manded that  they  shonid  be  put 
to  death — or  led  amiy  to  esrcution. 
This  was  in  accordance  with  Eoman 
law.  It  was  doubtless  evident  that  tlie 
guard  were  asleep,  a  capital  offence,  in 
Roman  .soldiers,  (ifi:  27:  M.ut.  •-'«:  14.)  Yiwt 
while  the  fierce  anger  of  Hcroil  was 
appeased  in  the  death  of  the  soldiers, 
his  bitter  disappointment  in  lieinjr  un- 
aiile  to  meet  the  expectation  of  the 
Jews  was  not  sntisfied.  He  had  liecn 
residing  aliout  tliree  years  at  Jerusa- 
lem, but  in  chagrin  he  leaves  Judea 
and  goes  down  to  Civsarea  (":*'), 
which  became  his  residence  till  his 
death  not  long  after.  Josephus  says 
that  he  went  tiiitiier  for  the  purpose  of 
celebrating  games    in    honor    of    the 


196 


THE  ACTS. 


tcn.  xn. 


Death  of  Herod  Agrippa. 
20      AND  Herod  was  highly  displea        /ith 
them  of  Tyre  and  Sidon  :  but '  they  came 


with  one  accord  to  him,  and,  having 
made  Blastus  the  king's  chamberlain  their 
friend,    detired    peace ;    because   ™  their 


1  Prov.  17  :  14  ;  Eccl.  10  :  4. 


'  1  Kings  5  :  9-11 ;  Ezra  3:7;  Ezek.  27  :  2, 17. 


Emperor,  Claudius  Casar.  (Josepluis 
Antiq.  xix.  8,  2.)  This  is  entirely  con- 
sistent with  Luke's  account.  Herod, 
ashamed  of  his  failure  in  reference  to 
Peter,  was  glad  of  a  pretext  to  go  to 
Csesarea,  and  when  there  he  was  Will- 
iug  to  remain. 

20-25.  Death  of  Herod  Agrip- 
pa I.    Barnabas  and  Saul  reti-rn 
TO  Antioch.    {-i  Cor.  12 : 2-1.)    The  death 
of  Herod  is  one  of  the  most  imjiortant 
chronological  events  recorded   in   the 
Acts,  because  the  time  of  its  occur- 
rence can  be  fixed    very   accurately.  I 
According    to  Josephus   {Antiq.   xix.  i 
5,  1),  Herod  received  of  Claudius,  on 
his  accession  (January  a.  ^d.  41),  the  I 
addition  of  Judea  and  Samaria  to  his 
kingdom ;    and    at    the    time    of   his  ! 
death  he  had  completed  three  years  1 
after  this  increase    of  power.      This  i 
fixes  his  death  in  A.  d.  44,  sometime  | 
after  the  passover.  Various  conjectures  \ 
have  been  made  regarding  the  festival 
which  Josephus  says    Herod  went  to 
Casarea    to    celebrate.       (Seeon  ver.  iit.)  ; 
Some  suppose   it  was  in  honor  of  the 
Emperor's  safe    return  from   Britain, 
which  was  early  iu  A.  D.  44 ;  and  as  it  , 
would  take  some  little    time  for  the  j 
news  to  reach  Jerusalem,  such  a  cele- [ 
bration  could  have  taken  place  early  or  j 
late  iu  May,  before  or  after  the  Pente-  I 
cost.     Others  think  it  in  honor  of  tlie 
birthday  of    Claudius,    August    first,  i 
Wieseler  shows  that  quite  iirobal)ly  it 
was  the  festival  of  the  QuiiKiuennalia, 
observed  on  the  same  day  of  the  same 
month   in   honor  of  Augustus,   whose 
name  the  month  had  received.     This 
settles  at  least  the  year  of  tlie  martyr- 
dom of  James,  the  deliverance  of  Peter, 
and    the    return   of    Paul   to   Antiocli 
from  his    second   visit    to   JeriL^alem. 
(Compare  Harmoii'ic  Arrangcmcttt  of 
the  Acts,  note  on  ^  24.) 

20.  Luke  proceeds  to  show  how 
God  defeated  the  purpose  of  Herod,  he 
dying  ignomiuiously,  while  the  church 
continues  to  i)rosper.  Highly  dis- 
pleased, exasperated,  exceedingly 
hostile.    The  original  might  mean  that 


Herod  was  engaged  in  actual  hostil- 
ities. But  this  could  not  liave  been 
the  case,  for  Tyre  and  Sidon  were  in 
the  Roman  Empire,  and  the  Pomans 
did  not  permit  open  war  between  de- 
pendents. Hostile  feelings  arose  A-ery 
probably  out  of  the  commercial  rivalry 
which  existed  Itetween  tliese  PhoMiician 
l)orts  and  the  newly  l)uilt  harljor  of 
Ca-sarea.  Nothing  more  is  known  of 
this  quarrel  since  secular  history  makes 
no  mention  of  it.  Them  of  Tyre 
and  Sidon — the  Ti/riiDis  aixl  Si'lon- 
ians.  Tyre  and  Sidon  were  tlu'  two 
great  cities  of  Phconicia,  noted  for  tlu'ir 
commerce,  and  especially  dejiendenton 
Palestine  for  tlieir  suji))lies,  witli  wliieli 
mutual  relations  a])])ear  to  have  ex- 
isted from  tlie  tinn- of  Solomon,  (i  Kings 

,i  :  n  :  K7.ra.:i  ;7:  Kzek.  27  :  1.  8.  17.     Sec  on   11:19.) 

Blnstns,  the  kinsr's  chamberlain 

— tlie  oiiicer  who  iras  over  the  khig's 
bed-chamber.  As  the  name  imjdies,  he 
had  cliarge  of  his  master's  sleeping 
a]>artuient.'J,  and  bore  a  verj'  close  re- 
lation to  liis  person.  Originally  the 
office  was  held  by  slaves,  but  in  later 
times  often  by  jiersous  of  rank.  He 
introduced  visitors  to  the  king,  and 
was  a  confidential  adviser.  Tlie  name 
Ji/aslKs  indicates  tliat  lie  was  not  a 
Jew,  but  rather  a  Greek  or  Poinan. 
Herod  had  resided  at  Rome,  and  hence 
he  may  liave  chosen  Romans  for  the 
])rincipal  positions  of  his  court.  Hav- 
ing made  Blastus  their  friend, 
having  pereuaded  him  to  be,  these 
Phoenicians  could  easily  reacli  tlie 
heart  of  Herod.  Proliably  their  ])er- 
suasions  were  mostly  by  arguments 
and  perha])s  ))aitly  by  briherv.  De- 
sired l>eace — nsl:c<l  peace  Jor  thein- 
selve.'!,  as  a  favor  or  gift.  The  original 
word  signifies  to  ask  for  something  to 
be  fju-cn,  niakini,'  jiroiiiinent  the  thing 
asked.  (Thaykr,  Lex.)  AVhat  they 
wanted  was  peace,  and  this  not  as  a 
reward,  or  a  purchase,  but  as  a.  gift, 
which  he  could  graciously  grant.  Be- 
cause introduces  the  reason  why  they 
thus  anxiously  sought  peace  at  the 
hand  of  Herod.    Their  country  was 


Ch.  XII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


107 


country    was    nourished   by  the   king's 

21  cunnlri/.  And  upon  a  set  day  Herod, 
arrayed  in  royal  apjjurel,  sat  upon  his 
throne,  and  made  an  oration  unto  them. 

22  And  the  people  gave  a  shout,  saying,  "  II 


is  the  voice  of  a  god,  and  not  of  a  man. 
23  And  immediately  the  angel  of  the  Lord 
"smote  him,  because  Phe  gave  not  God 
the  glory  :  and  'i  lie  was  eaten  of  worms, 
and  gave  up  the  ghost. 


'  Dan.  6:7.        »  1  Sam.  25  :  38  ;  2  Sam.  24  :  17.        P  I's.  115  :  1.        Q  2  Chron.  21  :  18, 19. 


nourished  by  the  kings— supplied 
with  grain  and  food  in  exchange  for 
their  merchandise.  Herod  could  for- 
bid all  trade  l)et\veen  the  countries  and 
could  make  Civsarea  the  great  port  for 
merchandise.  Perhaps  he  had  done  it 
or  was  ahout  to  do  it.  Probably,  also, 
tlie  great  famine  predicted  in  11  :  28 
was  beginning  to  be  felt  in  Phceuicia 
and  Palestine. 

21.  Ifpoii  a  set  day — appointed 
for  the  ])urpose  of  making  pul)lic 
answer  in  regard  to  his  favor  to  the 
Tyriansand  Sidonians.  According  to 
Josephus  it  was  the  second  day  of  the 
public  games,  in  honor  to  the  Emj)eror 
Claudius,  probably  August  first.  (See 
above.)  Arrayed  in  royal  apparel 
— not  a  single  garment,  but  the  whole 
costume.  Tliis  is  in  harmony  with 
Herod's  known  vanity  and  fondness  for 
display.  Josephus  describes  it  as  a  mag- 
niiicent  dress  of  silver  tissue,  which 
glistened  in  tlie  sun  and  dazzled  the 
eyes  of  beholders.  Sat  upon  his 
throne — his  tribunal,  which  was  a 
platform,  or  throne-like  seat  in  the 
theatre  at  Cissarea,  where  Josejihus 
says  that  the  meeting  here  described 
was  belli.  Made  an  oration—spoke 
piiWtiy  to  them,  to  the  Phoenicians, 
in  the  hearing  of  the  people.  While 
the  speecU  was  to  the  former,  Herod  in- 
tended it  should  be  heard  by  the  latter. 

22.  The  people— the  "  word  thus 
translated  is  found  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment only  in  the  Acts.  In  classic 
(xreek  it  denotes  the  people  as  organ- 
ized into  a  body  jjolitic,  but  in  its  Bib- 
lical use  it  refers  rather  to  the  people 
of  a  lieathen  city,  (n :  5 ;  19 :  so ,  33.)  An- 
other word  is  used  for  the  chosen  people 
of  Israel,  (ver.  ^,  u.)  The  voice  of 
a  God  and  not  of  a  man.  The  as- 
sembled people  were  mostly  Gentiles 
and  idolaters,  for  Ciesarea  was  largely 
a  Gentile  city,  and  the  heathen  games 
would  not  be  much  attended  by  Jews. 
The  Greeks  and  Romans  had  deified 
many  of  their  dead  heroes,  but  in  these 


days  the  people  had  so  degenerated  as 
to  deify  the  living.  Caligula  had 
claimed  and  received  honors  as  a  god. 
Notice  that  Peter  at  Ca?sarea  refuses  to 
receive  the  homage  of  Cornelius  (10 :  zc), 
but  later  Herod  at  Ca'sarea  approvingly 
receives  deification  from  the  multitude. 
Gave  a  shout — «/;o((^('(?  from  all  parts 
again  and  again.  It  may  have  been 
started  by  the  Phccnician  ambassadors, 
upon  their  receiving  a  favorable  rejtly 
to  their  request,  and  cauglit  up  )iy  tlie 
people.  Josejihus'  account  is  feebler 
and  omits  all  reference  to  the  address, 
which  is  perfectly  natural,  since  In; 
omits  reference  to  the  quarrel  between 
Herod  and  the  Phrenicians.  Josejihus 
states  that  the  people  cried  out :  "  lie 
propitious!  For  althougli  we  have 
hitherto  reverenced  tliee  only  as  a  ma)i, 
yet  henceforth  we  acknowledge  tiiee  as 
sui)erior  to  mortal  nature."  And  alsc 
says  that  the  king  neither  rebuked  nor 
rejeetetl  their  impious  (lattery.  The 
two  accounts  do  not  contradict,  but 
rather  supplement  each  other. 

23.  At  once  the  angel  of  the 
Lord  smote  him — invisibly,  inflict- 
ing upon  him  the  divine  judgment. 
Some  regard  this  jihrase  as  equivalent 
to  "a  stroke  of  Providence,"  or  as  a 
Jewish  phrase  (ps.  78 :  49)  signifying  that 
he  was  suddenly  seized  withthis  dis- 
order. But  it  seems  that  we  are  told 
here,  what  we  could  not  have  known 
except  by  divine  insj)iration,  of  tlie 
real,  though  invisible  agency  of  a  ce- 
lestial sjiirit;  and  tliat  it  was  inflicted 
upon  him  at  tliis  time,  because  he 
gave  not  God  the  glory.  Angels 
are  indicated  as  ministers  of  God's  judir- 
nu-nts  in  Gen.  3  :  24 ;  2  Sam.  24  :  Iti  ; 
2  Kings  19  :  35  ;  Ptcv.  8  :  6  f .  And  he 
was  eaten  of  worms.  It  is  implied 
that  his  death  was  not  immediate,  but 
tlirough  the  disease  which  was  devel- 
o|)ed  at  that  time.  Josephus  states 
tliat  it  began  in  liis  bowels  and  after 
five  days  of  intense  suffering,  he  died, 
iu  the   fifty-fourth  year  of  his  age,  iu 


198 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cn.  XII. 


24  But '  the  word  of  God  grew  and  multi- 

25  plied.    And  Barnabas  and  Saul  returned 
from  Jerusalem,  when  they  had  fulfilled  1 


their   'ministry,  and   'took  with  them 
John,  whose  surname  was  Mark. 


r  ch.  6  :  7 ;  19  :  20 ;  Isa.  o  J  :  11 ;  Col.  1  :  6  ;  2  Thcss.  3  :  1. 

15  :  37. 


•  ch.  11  :  29,  30.        t  ch.  13  :  5,  13  ; 


the  seventh  year  of  his  reign,  which  l 
was  tlie  finutli  year  of  his  reign  over 
the  whole  of  Palestine.  His  malady 
was  siniilar  to  Tric/titiiuais,  a  disease 
produced  by  the  presence  of  minute 
worms  iu  tlie  muscles,  introduced  by 
the  eating  of  meat  insufficiently  cooked 
containing  their  germs.  It  is  marked 
by  fever,  great  pain,  and  typhoid  symp- 
toms. These  worms  multiply  into 
millions,  generally  producing  death. 
It  is  useless  to  theorise  as  to  liow  the 
disease  at  tliis  time  was  produced  and  de- 
veloj)ed.  It  is  enough  to  know  tliat  both 
Luke  and  Josephus  are  in  accord  in  re- 
gard to  the  general  facts.  Tlic  diticrence 
between  .Josephus  and  Luke  is  mucli  in 
favor  of  the  latter.  Josephus  relates  an 
incident  of  a  hcatheiiisli  and  super.sti- 
tious  source,  that  tlie  king  saw  an  owl 
Bitting  on  a  rope  al)ove  liis  head,  and 
regarded  it,  according  to  a  prediction 
formerly  received  at  llome  from  a  Ger- 
man, as'  a  herald  of  death,  whereui>on 
tlie  severe  pains  followed.  Luke,  hav- 
ing tiaced  tilings  accurately,  omits  all 
that  is  fabuhius,  and  states  the  time, 
occasion,  cause,  and  nature  of  the  dis- 
ease. Josephus,  wishing,  doubtless,  to 
sjtare  the  memory  of  Herod  and  the 
feelings  of  his  cliildren  or  friends,  re- 
lates the  incidents  in  a  softened  and 
general  way ;  while  Luke,  with  the 
carefnlness  of  a  pliysician,  and  for  the 
good  of  (iod's  peo]de,  for  the  honor  of 
truth  and  the  glory  of  God,  briefly,  biit 
strikingly,  records  the  matter  just  as  it 
was.  A  similar  death  is  .said  to  have 
befallen  Antiochus  Epiphaues,  a  bitter 
persecutor  of  the  Jews ;  Herod,  the 
Great ;  Pheretima,  Queen  of  Gyrene, 
notorious  for  her  cruelty  ;  the  Emperor 
(Jalerius,  the  persecutor  of  Christians  ; 
and  Philip  II.,  king  of  Spain. 

24.  But  notwithstanding  the  perse- 
cution of  Christians,  and  iu  contrast  to 
the  terrible  death  of  the  persecutor,  the 
AVOrd  of  God,  or  according  to  some  of 
the  oldest  manuscrijits,  of  the  Lord 
grew,  in  extent  and  power,  and  mul- 
tiplied by  the  addition  of  converts. 


Tliis  verse  covers  the  intervening  time 
between  the  slaying  of  Janu's  (vir.  i,l) 
and  the  return  of  Barnabas  and  Saul 
to  Antioch.  These bnthrtn  contriliutrd 
uuich  by  their  syinjjathy,  gifts,  and 
personal  labors  to  the  strengthening  and 
growth  of  the  church.  I'ersecutions 
also  drove  tlie  disciples  to  God  in 
])rayer,  and  resulted  in  the  increase  of 
their  faitli  and  thiir  allegiance  to 
Christ.  The  miraculous  deliverance  of 
Peter  from  prison,  and  the  striking 
judgment  of  God  upon  the  blasjihenious 
Herod  tended  to  stimulate  their  courage. 
All  these  events  occurring  within  a 
sjiace  of  three  or  four  mouths  resulted, 
in  connection  with  the  preachiiig  of  the 
gosjtel  and  the  ))resence  of  the  H(dy 
Spirit,  in  increasing  the  piety  and  ac- 
tivities of  believers  and  the  number  of 
the  -saved. 

25.  Having  stated  the  condition  of 
the  Jerusalem  church,  and  the  judg- 
ment of  God  upon  the  persecutors,  Luke 
resumes  the  narrative  of  11  :  30,  and 
completes  the  account  of  the  benevolent 
mission  of  Paul  and  Barnabas.  With 
this  verse  ends  the  first  great  division 
of  the  Acts,  containing  the  organizinL--, 
growth,  and  missionary  operations  of  tlie 
church  at  Jeru.;aleni,  residting  in  ex- 
tending the  gospel  among  Jews  l)otli  iu 
and  out  of  Palestine,  in  beginning  the 
work  among  Gentiles,  and  in  organizing 
at  Antioch,  a  second  great  centre  of 
evangelization,  especially  among  the 
heathen. 

Returned  from  Jern.xalem — 
many  ancient  authorities  read  to  Jiru- 
sii/ri)i.  This  is  a  perplexing  variation. 
"Westcott  and  Hort  ])refer  the  latter 
reading,  which  makes  the  construction 
difticuit.  But  some  copyist  might  liave 
introduced  it,  desiring  to  make  the  fact 
clear  that  Barnabas  and  Saul  did  actu- 
ally visit  Jerusalem  at  this  time.  But 
with  either  reading  there  can  be  no 
doubt  of  this.  For  if  they  returned 
from  Jerusalem  they  must  have'bt-en 
there  previously.  If  they  returned  to 
Jerusalem  from  Antioch,  then  Luke 


Ch.  XII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


199 


states  the  accomplishnieut  of  tlieir 
journey  thither,  iin|>lie(i  in  11  :  30.  Or 
if  we  render  rather  freely  :  "  Harnahas 
and  Saul  returned,  having  fulli lied  their 
ministration  in  Jerusalem,"  the  idea  of 
place  is  the  same.  From  the  narrative 
it  is  evident  that  they  visited  other 
places  in  Judea,  and  came  to  .Jerusalem 
before  going  home  ;  hut  whether  it  was 
the  last  point  of  dei>arture  is  unct'rtain. 
Fulfilled  theirminislry — pcrfunned 
the  service,  thedi.stril)ution  of  gifts  com- 
mitted to  them.  Notice  that  Luke  still 
names  Barnabas  first ;  Saul  was  not  yet 
famous,  and  publicly  and  divinely  rec- 
ognized as  an  apostle  to  the  Gentiles. 
(»:9, 10.)  Took  with  them  John, 
whose  surname  was  Mark,  (.see  on 
ver.  12.)  The  implication  is  that  Bar- 
nahas  and  Saul  had  been  guests  at  the 
house  of  ilary,  and  had  met  the 
brethren,  in  tlieir  gatherings  for  wor- 
ship. It  is  also  implied  that  their  visit 
to  Jerusalem  was  about  the  time  of 
Herod's  death,  and  it  seems  natural  to 
fix  their  return  to  Antiocli  a  little  after 
that  event.  It  is  not  needful  to  suppose 
that  they  stayed  long  at  Jerusalem,  or 
that  they  spent  much  time  in  visiting 
other  places  in  Judea.  We  may  there- 
fore place  this  return  to  Antioch  in  the 
latter  part  of  a.  d.  44.  This  was  Saul's 
second  visit  to  Jerusalem  after  his  con- 
version. (.See  on  u  :  30.)  It  is  probaWc 
that  during  this  visit  he  experienced 
that  wouderful  rapture  or  trance  re- 
corded in  2  Cor.  12  :  1-4.  The  date  of 
the  second  epistle  to  the  Corinthians  is 
fixed  at  A.  D.  .57.  Counting  backward 
"  fourteen  years,"  according  to  the  Jew- 
i.sh  mode  of  reckoning  we  have  A.  D. 
44,  as  the  year  of  its  occurrence.  Per- 
haps it  was  in  the  temple  like  an  earlier 
vision.  (22:17.)  It  was  fitting,  just  be- 
fore the  enlarging  of  his  sphere  of  use- 
fulness, and  his  going  forth  on  his  mis- 
sion to  the  Gentiles. 

Practical  Rkmarks. 

1.  This  chapter  illustrates  the  final  tri- 
umph of  the  righteous,  and  the  sure  and 
final  overthrow  of  the  wicked.  (Ver.  1-25  ; 
Prov.  10:  2.5;  Isa.  3  :  10,  11.) 

2.  The  death  of  .Tames  teaches  us  that  the 
true  test  of  disciplesbip  is  found,  not  in  the 
manner  of  their  death,  but  in  the  spirit  of 
their  life.    (Ver.  1 ;  John  21  :  22.) 


3.  The  enmity  of  the  human  heart  to  truth 
and  holiness  will  show  itself  sooner  or  later. 
(Ver.  1,  2  ;  Honi.  8:7;  2  Tim.  3  :  12.) 

4  Expcdiciu-y  rather  than  truth  has  gen- 
erally regulated  uuiuau  govurniueuts  in  their 
treatment  of  religion.  (Ver.  3;  24:23,26, 
27  ;  Matt.  2  :  7,  8.) 

5.  Note  the  providence  of  (iod  in  regard 
to  Peter.  He  is  not  slain  at  once,  but  ia 
kept  for  a  public  trial  and  execution,  and 
thus  time  is  aflbrded  for  prayer  and  his  rt;- 
lease.    (Ver.  4.) 

6.  The  prayer  of  faith  is  effectual,  and 
stronger  than  kings  and  soldiers.  (Ver.  .5-y ; 
1  Kings  18  :  36-40  ;  James  5  :  17,  18. | 

7.  If  a  man  has  the  testimony  of  a  good 
conscience, and  a  lively  hopeof  immortality, 
hecan  calmly  face  the  rack  and  flames.  (Ver. 
6 ;  21  :  13  ;  2  Tim.  4  :  6.) 

8.  God  can  with  the  utmost  ease  touch  the 
hidden  springs  of  human  affairs,  and  rescue 
his  people.    (Ver.  7;  16  :  20.) 

9.  They  who  follow  the  light  of  Christ  will 
find  that  obstacles,  darkness,  and  every  diffi- 
culty, will  disappear  before  them.  (Ver.  8,  il ; 
John  8  :  12 ;  Ps.  36  :  9.) 

10.  We  are  not  to  expect  God  to  do  for  us 
that  which  we  can  do  for  ourselves.  Special 
divine  assistance  will  continue  no  longer 
than  necessary.  (Ver.  10;  27  :  23,  24,  38,  43, 
44.) 

11.  The  interpositions  of  Providence  often 
seem  like  a  dream,  and  divine  deliverance 
appears  real  only  after  it  has  occurred.  (Ver. 
9,  11 ;  Ps.  126  :  1.) 

12.  As  long  as  there  is  life  we  can  hope 
and  pray ;  aud  even  where  human  hope  fails, 
God  may  interpose  in  answer  to  prayer. 
(Ver.  12 ;  2  Sam.  12  :  22,  23.) 

13.  Rhoda  filled  her  place  faithfully  doing 
what  she  could,  and  her  name  with  that  ol 
Peter  is  handed  down  to  future  generations. 
(Ver.  12,  13 ;  Ps.  84  :  10.)  "  They  also  serve 
who  only  stand  and  wait."    (Milt.  ;>'.) 

14.  How  our  weak  faith  contrasts  with  the 
greatness  of  God's  blessing,  and  his  readi- 
ness to  deliver.     (Ver.  15,  16  ;  Mark  9  :  24.) 

15.  Angels  have  a  ministry  of  ble.ssing  in 
reference  to  God's  people.  (Ver.  7,  15 ;  Ps 
34  :  7  ;  2  Kings  6  :  17.) 

16.  Christians  are  often  astonished  to  sea 
how  abundantly  God  answers  prayer.  (Ver. 
16  ;  Eph.  3  :  20.) 

17.  Our  first  thought  after  deliverances 
should  be  to  ascribe  praise  to  God  for  his 


200 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIII. 


Barnabas  and  Saul  sent  as  mi.isionaries  to  the 

heathen.     Their  work  in  Cyprus. 
13    NOW  there  were  "in  the  church  that 


was  at  Antioch  certain  prophets  and 
tearhers;  as  ^Barnabas  and  Simeon  that 
was  called  Niger,  and  J  Lucius  ot  t'yrene, 


"  ch.  11  :  27  ;  l.'i  :  35. 


ch.  4  :3():  11 


glory  and  the  good  of  others.    (Ver.  17 ;  Ps. 

66  :  16.) 

18.  When  Christians  rejoice  their  enemies 
are  troubled.     (Ver.  18,  19 ;  4  :  13,  21,  24.) 

19.  How  often  does  the  path  of  worldly 
p!ea,sure  and  ambition  end  suddenly  in 
humiliation  and  death !  Herod  goes  to 
Ciesarea,  not  merely  for  games  but  for  death. 
(Ver.  19;  Dan.  5  :  23,  30.) 

20.  Sinners  will  employ  becoming  means 
for  food  and  worldly  comforts,  which  they 
are  unwilling  to  use  for  (iod  and  salyation. 
(Ver.  20.) 

21.  An  individual  may  think  he  is  ascend- 
ing a  throne  when  he  is  mounting  ascatfold. 
(Ver.  21 ;  1  Sam.  4:18;  Esth.  7  :  10.) 

22.  God  is  especially  jealous  of  his  glory. 
(Ver.  22,  23 ;  Isa.  42  :  8.) 

23.  Angels  are  not  merely  agents  of  bles.s- 
ing,  but  also  ministers  of  (iod's  judgments. 
(Ver.  23 ;  Ps.  35  :  (!.) 

24.  God  will  make  incjuiry  after  blood, and 
will  bring  swift  judgment  upon  the  incorri- 
gible.    (Ver.  2,  23 ;  Gen.  4  :  10 ;  Ps.  9  :  12. 

25.  Though  the  leaders  of  God's  people  fall 
or  retire,  others  are  raised  up,  and  the  work 
of  God  goes  on.    (Ver.  24,  25.) 

Ch.  13  :  Tlie  first  sreat  inoveinent, 
especially  among  the  .Tews,  at  .lenisaleiii 
and  outward  a,>;faras  Antioch, undrrtlie 
leadership  of  Peter  and  tlie  a|>ostles,  is 
recorded  in  the  previous  twelve  ehaj)- 
ters.  With  this  chapter  be<riiis  the 
second  i^reat  ilivision  of  the  l>ook,  ex- 
tendini;  to  its  close,  in  which  is  nar- 
rated the  great  missionary  movcTnent 
tVom  Antioch  among  Cientiles,  under 
the  leadership  of  Paul,  till  he  is  left  a 
prisoner,  preacliingat  Rome.  This  and 
the  ne.xt  chai)ter  relate  his  first  mis- 
sionary Journey  to  Cyprus,  Pisidia, 
and  Lycaonia. 

1-12.  B.VKNABAS  AND  S.M'I.  SENT 
TO  PRK.\C'II  TO  THE  HEATHEN.    Til  El  R 

LA150KS  IN  Cyprus.  The  last  verse 
of  the  previous  chapter  forms  a  con- 
necting link  between  that  chapter  and 
this.  We  may  therefore  place  this 
mission,  not  long  after  the  return  of 
Barnabas    and  Saul    to  Antioch,  but 


probably  in  the  si)riug,  A.  D.  45.    (See  on 

li:2o.) 

1.  Now,  etc.  And  there  vere  at 
Antioch — implying  a  previous  ac- 
count, yet  beginning  a  new  account. 
On  Antioch,  see  on  11  :  19.  In  the 
church,  etc.  In  the  church  that  ex- 
isted there;  showing  that  tiiere  was  a 
regular  organized  chureli  at  Antioch, 
and  implying  ■with  the  previous  narra- 
tive and  with  what  follows,  that  it  had 
attained  a  large  meml)ershii)  and  also 
great  importance.  The  word  certain 
should  be  omitted  according  to  tlie 
hijrhest  critical  authorities.  Isot  a  part 
but  all  the  i>roi>hcts  and  teachers  in  the 
Antioch  ciiureli  are  given :  Bar- 
nabas, etc.,  omitting  as.  Proph- 
ets— inspired  teachers.  (Seeon  u  :27.) 
Teachers — instrvctont.  All  proj)liets 
were  teachers,  but  all  teachers  were 
not  prophets.  Both  clai<scs  are  men- 
tioned in  Eph.  4  :  11  ;  1  Cor.  12  :  28; 
Rom.  12  :  6-8.  In  the  a])ostolic  churches 
certain  persons  were  endowed  with 
suj)ernatural  gifts.  See  1  Cor.  12  :  4- 
11,  27-31,  where  Paul  speaks  of  them 
at  length.  But  after  apostolic  days, 
when  Christianity  was  grounded  in  all 
needful  evidence,  these  su])ernatural 
jiowers  ap))ear  to  have  ceased.  This  is 
the  only  j)lace  in  the  Acts  where  teach- 
ers are  mentioned.  It  does  not  ai)pear, 
either  here  or  elsewhere  in  the  New 
Testament,  that  this  name  designated 
a  distinct  cliurch  office,  but  rather  that 
it  was  indicative  of  tlie  work  which 
individual  believers  performed,  who  in 
religiotis  assemblies  of  Christians  un- 
dertook tiie  work  of  instruction.  (Jamea 
3 : 1.)  See  Scri]iture  references  aliove. 
Who  were  prophets  and  who  teachers, 
among  the  persons  named,  cannot  be 
definitely  ascertained.  In  the  original, 
the  names  are  arranged  somewhat 
thus:  Both  Barnabas  and  Simeon  and 
I.,ucius  ;  also  JIan;en  and  Saul ;  hence 
Meyer  infers  that  tlie  first  three  were 
l)rophets,  and  the  la.st  two  teachers. 
But  this  is  not  certain.  For  the  three 
first  may  refer  to  those  who  had  been 
longer  iii  the  work  at  Antioch  ;  and  the 


Ch.  XIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


201 


and  Manaen,  which  had  heen  brought  up 
2  with  » Herod  the  tetrarch,  and  »Saul.   As  | 


they  ministered  to  the  l>ord,  ""and  fasted, 
the  Holy  Spirit  said,  *  Separate  me  Bar- 


«  Matt.  14  :  1-10. 


»  ch.  11  :  25,  2(i.        •>  Dan.  9  :  3 ;  1  Cor.  7  :  5  ;  9  :  27. 
Num.  8  :  11-14 ;  Kom.  1:1;  Gal.  2  :  8,  9. 


>»  ch.  9  :  15  ;  22  :  21 ; 


two  last  to  those  who  had  heen  there  a 
shorter  time  ;  which  view  answers  well 
to  Barnabas  and  Saul  respectively. 
Barnabas  having  been  long  at  Antioch 
may  have  acted  as  pastor  of  the  churcli ; 
anei  some,  or  all  of  tlie  others,  may 
liave  lal>ored  witli  him  as  co-pastors, 
in  reality  though  not  in  name.  See 
20  :  17,  where  we  learn  that  the  church 
at  Ephesus  had  a  plurality  of  pastors. 
The  prophets  who  came  from  Jerusa- 
It'm  '11 :  27)  were  probably  not  the  ones 
mentioned  here,  since  those  very  likely 
returned  to  Jerusalem,  but  tliese  were 
more  permanently  at  Antioch. 

Barnabas.       "(S'^e  on  4  :  36  and  11  :  22.) 

Simeon  that  was  called  Niger— 

to  distinguish  him  perhaps  from  Simon 
Peter,  Simon  and  Simeon  being  the 
same  name.  (i5:i4.)  Niger  means 
black,  and  it  is  possible  that  he  was  an 
African  convert,  perhaps  Simeon  of 
Cyrene.  (Matt. 27:32.)  Yet  Niger  was 
a  familiar  Roman  name,  and  an  infer- 
ence cannot  be  certainly  drawn  from 
its  meaning.  Lucius  of  Cyrene — 
Nothing  further  is  known  of  this  one, 
e.xcept  that  he  may  l)e  the  ]»er.son  men- 
tioned by  Paul  as  Iiis  kinsman.  (Rom. 
16: 21.)  He  was  not  Luke,  the  writer  of 
the  Gospel  and  tlie  Acts,  for  though  the 
names  are  similar,  they  are  not  the 
same.  Cyrene,  a  province  and  seaport 
of  Northern  Africa.  (see  on  2  :  lo-) 
Manaen— thesameas  Menahem.  (2Kings 
15:14.)  Which  had  been  brought 
up  with  Herod — nurtured  witli  him 
from  infancy,  as  his  foster-brother. 
From  this  it  would  appear,  that  the 
mother  of  Manaen  was  the  nurse  of 
Jlerod  Antipas,  who  put  John  the  Bap- 
tist to  death.  It  was  also  the  custom  of 
persons  of  liigli  rank  to  associate  other 
children  with  their  own  in  iiastimes 
and  studies.  According  to  .Josei)lius 
{Antiq.  1.5.  10,  5)  an  Es.sene,  named 
Manaen  saluted  the  boy  who  afterward 
became  Herod  the  Great;  as  the  future 
king  of  the  .Tews.  This  Herod  when 
he  became  king  remembered,  and  held 
Manaen  and  the  Essenes  in  high  honor. 
Possibly  he  transferred  hi§  favor  to  his  j 


son  or  grandson  who  was  nursed  and 
educated  with  the  king's  son.  Saul — 
mentioned  last,  i)erhai)s  l)ecause  lie  was 
the  last  of  tliese  j)rophets  and  teacliers 
to  come  to  Antioch.  His  apostolic 
character  too  was  probal)ly  not  yet 
made  known  to  the  cliureh.  In  his 
humility,  on  account  of  his  former  per- 
secutions of  the  church,  he  may  too, 
have  preferred  a  retired  and  undistin- 
guished place  among  his  fellow  labor- 
ers.     (Eph.3:S.) 

2.  As  they  ministered.  In  classic 
Greek  the  verb  is  used  of  public  and 
official  services,  such  as  at  festivals  and 
games,  and  religious  emltassies  to  the 
oracles.  In  the  Septuagint  it  is  used  of 
.services  of  the  jjriests  and  Levites  in 
the  tabernacle  and  temple  (k.toii.  2S::io; 
Joel  1 :  9),  which  is  its  use  in  Heb.  10  :  11. 
In  Rom.  15  :  27  it  is  used  of  beneficent 
service  in  tenijwial  things.  Here  it 
plainly  refers  to  the  general  religious 
services  of  prayer,  exhortation,  praise, 
and  song,  including  the  breaking  of 
bread,  or  the  Lord's  Supper.  "Tliey 
were  performing  service  to  the  Lord; 
not  the  five  prophets  and  teachers  alone, 
but  also  the  church  with  them.  In  con- 
nection with  this  service  tliev  trere  fast- 
ing, not  as  a  stated  service,  but  as  an 
aid  to  prayer  (io:3n;  u:2s),  with  special 
reference  no  doubt  to  the  spread  of  the 
gos{)el,  perlia])s  iilsoto  missionary  work 
in  other  regions.  No  argument  can 
here  be  deduced  for  the  mass,  or  for  lit- 
urgical services,  because  our  word  lit- 
urgi/  is  derived  from  the  Greek  word 
here  translated  ministere<l.  There  is 
no  trace  of  a  liturgv  in  ajtostolic  davs. 
The  Holy  Spirit  said— to  the 
church,  inchidiiii,'  the  above  jiropliets 
and  teachers.  Tliis  may  be  inferred 
from  the  fact  that  the  believers  were 
worsliiping  and  fasting,  and  that  Paul 
and  Barnabas  on  their  return  from  their 
missionary  work  report  to  tlie  churcli. 
(14:26,27.)  This  accords  also  witli  the 
previous  custom  of  the  church  in  clioos- 
ing  an  apostle  (1  ;23),  and  the  seven  dea- 
cons. (6  : 5.)  The  Holy  Spirit  said^ 
probably  through  one  of  the  prophets, 


202                                             THE  ACTS.                                [Ch.  XIIL 

nabas  and  Saul  for  the  work  « whereimto 
3  I  have  called  them.  And  '  when  they  had 

fasted  and  prayed,  and  laid  their  hands 
on  them,  they  sent  them  away. 

«  Kom.  10  :  1'. ;  Eph.  .".  :  7,  S  ;  1  Tim.  2:7;  Heb.  5:4.         '  ch.  6  :  6. 

or  in  a  voice  audible  to  all.  Separ- 
ate. The  verb  means  to  set  apart,  to  a 
special  work  or  service.  Paul  uses  it 
in  reference  to  himself  and  his  work 
in  Rom.  1:1,  and  (Jal.  1  :  15.  Me— 
for  me,  for  my  service.  Here  we  have 
a  proof  of  the  divinity  of  tlie  Holy 
Spirit.  "  He  does  not  say,  Sejjarate 
Barnabas  and  Saul  to  the  Loril,  but  to 
me,  for  tlie  ministry  to  whicli  1  liave 
called  them,  showing  that  he  is  co-ecpial 
with  God."  (CiiRYSOSTOM.)  I  Jiave 
called  them — injplyin^  that  they  had 
had  a  previous  call.  Saul  had  been 
called  at  his  conversion  and  later  at 
Jerusalem  to  tlie  Gentile  work  (smd; 
2?;  21);  and  Barnal)as  liad  been  led  by 
tlie  providence  of  God  and  the  Spirit  to 
this  work  at  Antioch.  (ii:3:i.)  The 
discussions,  the  last  sjieech,  and  the 
death  of  Steplien  had  left  their  undyintr 
impress  on  Saul's  mind  (6 :  lo ;  ' :  5s) ;  and 
taking  up  iiis  enlarging  spiritual  con- 
ci'ptions  of  truth,  he  must  have  gotten 
fresh  views  of  his  own  indiviihial  duty 
and  of  these  jirophecies  wliich  relate  to 

tlie  Gentile  world.  (Z-pli.  2:  ll  ;  Geo.  12  :3: 
Isa.  52  :  10;  till :  'A.  V. )       Tile  (  'llUrch  doubtlcSS 

knew  something  of  these  exjierienees 
and  the  eoMsetiuent  feelings  of  duty, 
but  juobaldy  did  not  eomiueliend  the 
apostleshi])  of  Paul,  and  the  greatness 
of  liis  work.  St'c  the  jireceding  verse. 
3.  When  they  had  fasted  and 
prayed — not  the  fasting  of  the  jireced- 
ing verse,  but  another  with  special  ref- 
erence to  setting  apart  and  sending 
away  Barnabas  and  Saul  to  their  mis- 
sionary work.  F'asting  was  an  aid  to 
prayer  in  seeking  divine  guidance  in 
this  iiiijiortant  service.  It  seems  to 
have  been  spontaneous  on  their  part, 
and  was  therefore  ai)iiropriate.  Jesus 
fa.sted  before  hi.s  teni])tation  in  tlie  wil- 
derness, and  foretold  that  liis  discijiles 
should  fast.  (juu.  9:i.v)  That  lie  com- 
manded it  is  doubtful,  for  Matt.  17  :  21 
and  the  words  "and  fasting"  in  Mark 
9  :  29,  are  omitted  as  glosses  by  the 
latest  textual  critics ;  as  also  is  "  fast- 
ing" in  Paul's  injunction  in  1  Cor.  7  : 
5.  Jesus,  however,  gave  direction  as  to 
the  proper  manner  of  fasting  iu  Matt,  6  : 


16-18.  Laid  their  hands  upon 
them — the  three  other  prophets  and 
teachers,  perhaps  others,  as  representa- 
tives of  the  church  and  of  Christ  its 
Head,  laid  their  hands  upon  Barnabas 
and  Saul.  In  thus  doing  they  conferred 
no  new  grace  or  power,  but  recognized 
publicly  their  call  to  their  work,  giving 
it  their  sanction,  approval,  and  jirayers. 
Notice  that  the  laying  on  of  hands  was 
generally  connected  with  prayer.  (See 
on  K:  17.)  But  why  did  they  lay  on  their 
hands?  Not  to  ordain  them  to  the  min- 
istry ;  for  both  Barnabas  and  Saul  liad 
been  successful  preachers  for  several 
years.  Nor  was  it  to  set  them  apart 
and  elevate  them  to  the  apostolic  onice, 
for  they  had  no  authority  to  do  this ; 
and  besides,  Paul  asserts  that  his  ajios- 
tleship  was  not  from  men,  nor  through 
man,  and  that  he  received  it  from  Christ 
himself  at  his  conversion.  (Oai.  1 : 1  f.;  1 
Cor,  15: 810.)  There  is  no  evidence  that 
any  of  the  apostles  were  ordained  by 
the  imiK)sitiou  of  hands.  (i;26.)  Besides, 
Barnabas  is  never  called  an  apostle 
alone,  and  only  twice  when  associated 
with  Paul  (u:Vu)very  probably  for 
the  sake  of  brevity.  The  narrative 
that  follows  affords  the  true  answer. 
Tliey  were  set  apart  as  missionaries  to 
the  Gentiles,  or  heathen.  This  was  the 
work  to  which  the  Holy  Spirit  called 
them.  They  sent  them  away — 
that  is,  the  church,  and  the  brethren  in 
general,  who  commended  them  to  the 
jgrace  of  God.  (i4:2fi;  15:40.)  As  Peter 
and  John  had  been  sent  by  the  church 
at  Jerusalem  to  Samaria  (s:i*),  and  as 
Peter  and  the  disciples  had  gone  forth 
preaching  the  gospel  to  Jews,  so  now, 
under  divine  direction,  the  churcli  at 
Antioch  sent  forth  two  missionaries  to 
the  heathen. 

4.  So  then— they  themselves  there- 
fore being  sent  forth  by  the  Holy  Spirit, 
specially  and  authoritatively  as  alxive 
descrilied ;  although  approved,  and 
commended  by  their  associates  and 
brethren  of  the  church,  who  could  be 
said  to  send  them  forth  only  in  a  subor- 
dinate sense.  Departed — camedonm 
from   Antioch    upto    Seleucia,  the 


Ce.  XIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


202 


4  So  they,  being  sent  forth  by  the  Holy 
Spirit,  departed  unto  Seleucia  ;  and  from 

5  thence  they  sailed  to  s  Cyprus.  And  when 


8  ch.  4  :  SO.         ^  ver.  46. 


seaport  of  that  city  fifteen  miles  awaj', 
oil  the  Mediterranean,  near  tlie  mouth 
of  the  river  Orontes.  Tlius  westward 
began  the  fir.st  great  missionary  tour  of 
the  Apostle  Paul,  probably,  A.  U.  45. 
"Next  to  the  lahors  of  our  Lord,  no 
movements  have  lieen  so  important  for 
the  race  as  tliat  of  Abraham  westward 
from  Ur  of  the  ("haldees  carrying  the 
revelation  of  the  One  God  and  the 
promise  of  Israel,  and  that  of  Paul, 
also  westward,  carrying  the  revelation 
of  Christ."  (IIOWHON  Axn  Spence.) 
From  thence  they  sailed  to  Cy- 
prus— a  beautiful  island  about  one 
hundred  and  fifty  miles  long  and  fifty 
miles  wide,  and  al)out  .sixty  miles  from 
Seleucia.  It  became  a  Roman  pi-ovince 
in  B.  C.  58 ;  and  contained  a  number  of 
populous  and  wealthy  cities.  It  was 
very  natural  for  Barnabas  and  Saul  to 
make  Cyprus  tlieir  first  field  of  mis- 
sionary labor.  It  was  the  first  country 
they  would  reach  ;  its  mountains  could 
be  .seen  from  Seleucia  and  the  Syrian 
coast;  it  was  the  native  land  of  Barna- 
bas and  perhajts  of  .John  Mark  (next 
verse) ;  and  about  half  of  its  i)Opulation 
consisted  of  Jews,  wlujse  synagogues 
would  afford  them  a  channel  for  reach- 
ing tlie  Gentiles.  They  might  have 
gone  to  Tarsus,  but  Saul  had  already 
preached  in  Cilicia.  But  most  of  ail 
we  must  believe,  that  those  who  were 
thus  sent  forth  by  the  Si>irit  were  also 
directed  by  the  Spirit,  to  enter  upon 
this  field. 

5.  >Vhen  they  ^vere  at  Salamis 
— the  chief  commercial  city,  on  the  east- 
ern side  of  the  island,  and  the  nearest 
port  to  Seleucia,  having  a  good  harbor. 
It  was  afterward  ruined  by  an  earth- 
quake under  Constantine,  and  rel)uilt 
and  called  Coustantia.  The  modern 
Tamagousta  is  near  its  ruins.  Syna- 
gogues— assemblies,  also  applied  to 
the  building  where  these  solemn  .lewish 
assemblies  were  lield.  (see ..n  k  :  a.)  That 
there  were  a  nunilier  of  synagogues  in- 
dicates that  the  .lews  were  numerous  at 
Salamis.  Tiiis  accords  with  ancient 
testimony,  that  the  numbers  of  Jews 


they  were  at  Salamis,  •>  they  preached  the 
word  of  God  in  ihe  .synagogues  of  the 
Jews.     And  they  had  also 'John  to  (heir 

i  ch.  12  :  25  ;  15  :  37. 

were  so  great  in  Cyprus,  that  in  the 
reign  of  Trajan  (x.  \).  110),  they  rose 
and  nuissacretl  two  hundred  and  forty 
thousand  of  the  native  inhabitants.  On 
accountof  this,  Hadrian  either  destroyed 
or  expelled  the  whole  Jewish  jiojmla- 
tion  from  tlie  island.  They  preached 
.  .  .  in  the  synagogues — this  was 
their  custom  wherever  they  went ;  first 
to  the  Jews,  and  upon  their  rejection  ot 
the  gospel,  then  to  the  Gentiles,     (ver. 

46;  17  :  2;  IS:  4;  Rom.  1  :  16.)       In      tile      apOS- 

tolic  age  the  Jews  had  their  synagogue 
wherever  they  settled,  or  at  least  a  place 
of  prayer  in  a  private  house,  or  in  the 
open  air,  usually  near  a  river  or  the 
seashore  on  account  of  ceremonial  ab- 
lutions. (16: 13;  15: 21.)  Their  advantage 
to  early  Christianity  can  hardly  be 
overestimated.  Wherever  the  early 
preachers  went  tliey  found  in  them  "  a 
pulpit  and  an  audience."  They  were 
evidently  one  of  the  preparations  of 
Providence  for  the  spread  of  the  gospel. 
John  to— for — their  minister,  or 
assistant.  This  was  John  Mark,  the 
writer  of  the  second  Go.spel.  (See  on  12:12.) 
The  word  translated  minister,  with  ref- 
erence to  religious  service  in  the  New 
Testament,  is  used  of  the  attendant  or 
subordinate  officers  of  the  synagogue 
(Luke  *:20),  and  three  times  of  the  min- 
isters or  servants  of  Chri.st.  (Luke  1 : 2 ;  acu 
26 :  16;  1  Cor.  4:1.)  Elsewhere  in  the  New 
Testament  it  is  used  of  servants  or  sul>or- 
dinate  officers  of  the  hi^h  priests,  whose 
duties  were  rather  civil  than  religious. 
(5:22;  Matt.  26:58.)  Expositors  are  not 
agreed  as  to  the  peculiar  Unties  of  Mark: 
He  evidently  held  a  subordinate  posi- 
tion. Some  supposed  that  he  performed 
external  service,  having  care  of  the 
party,  thus  giving  Barnabas  and  Saul 
more  time  to  preacl;.  Dr.  Hackett 
thinks  it  most  natural  to  sui)pose  that 
he  assisted  them  in  preaching  the  word. 
Why  may  he  not  have  aided  them  gen- 
erally, both  in  external  duties  and  re- 
ligious services,  and  also  sometimes  as 
their  amanuensis?  He  may  also  have 
baptized  converts,  a  rite  which  Paul 
seldom  administered.   (1  cor.  1 ;  14.]   How 


204 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIII. 


6  k  minister.    And  when    they  had    gone 
through  the  isle  unto  Paphos,they  found 

'  a  certain  sorcerer,  a  false  prophet,  a  Jew,  1 

7  wliose  name   was  Bar-jesus :    which  was 


with  the  deputy  of  the  country,  Sergius 

Paulus,  a  prudent  man ;  who  called  for 

Barnabas  and  Saul,  and  desii'ed  to  hear 

8  the  word  of  God.    But  ™  Klymas  the  sor- 


k  Exod.  24  :  13.        i  ch.  8  :  9  ;  Deut.  18  :  10. 


'  Kxod.  7  :  11 ;  2  Tim.  3  :  8. 


long  they  remained  at  Salamis,  and  [ 
with  what  results,  we  are  not  told.   The 
largeues.s  of  the  city  and  the  opportu-  i 
nitie.s  of  preaching  the  gospel  in   the 
several  synagogues,  lead  us  to  suppose 
that  they  spent  some  time  there. 

G.  When  they  had  gone  through 
the  isle — according  to  the  oldest  and 
best  uianuscrii)ts,  through  the  whole 
island,  indicating,  not  only  tliat  they 
traveled  the  wliole  length  from  Salamis 
to  I'aphos,  but  also  tluit  they  preaclied 
cpiite  extensively,  occupying  not  im- 
probaldy  several  inontiis.  There  had 
been  Christians  in  Cyprus  before  this 
(11 :  i».  20),  and  other  congregations  were 
now  without  doubt  gathered.  So  large 
and  important  was  the  field  that  when 
Paul  and  Barnabas  separated,  the  latter 
chose  Cyprus,  taking  with  him  Mark. 
(15 :  36-39.)  Paphos  was  on  the  western 
coast  of  the  island,  one  hundred  miles 
from  Salamis,  with  which  it  was  con- 
nected by  a  road.  New  Paphos  is  here 
intended";  it  was  then  the  lloman  capi- 
tal of  the  j)rovince,  and  the  residence  of 
the  governor,  who  m'us  called  the  pro- 
consul. Old  Paphos,  where  the  famous 
temple  of  Venus  stood,  was  a  few  miles 
south,  and  noted  for  its  licentious  wor- 
ship. A  certain  sorcerer,  who  prac- 
ticed magic  arts.      (See  on  ver.  S;  «  :  9.)     He 

was  not  like  Simon  ^ilagus,  a  heathen 
magician,  but  a  Jew,  a  false 
prophet,  a  soothsayer  and  fortune 
teller,  who  pretented  to  be  inspired  of 
God.  He  had  a  Hel)re\v  name,  Bar- 
jesus,  which  means.  Son  of  Joshua. 
His  professional  name  was  Eh/mas 
(ver.  H)^  one  wise  or  powerful  in  secret 
wisdom.  The  statement  that  he  was 
apparently  residing  with  the  governor, 
and  esteemed  by  him,  is  in  harmony 
with  the  scej>tical  and  su]>erstitious 
character  of  the  times.  "  All  the  Greek 
and  lloman  literature  of  the  empire 
from  Horace  to  Lucian,  abounds  in 
proof  of  the  prevalent  credulity  of  this 
sceptical  jieriod.  .  .  .  The  faith  of 
educated  Romans  was  utterly  gone. 
.  .  .  The  imagination  of  both  the  popu- 


lace and  the  aristocracy  of  Eome  be- 
came fanatically  excited,  and  they 
greedilj-  welcomed  the  most  aljsurd  and 
(U'grading  suiH-rstitions.  Not  only  was 
the  metropolis  of  the  empire  crowded 
with  'lumgry  Greeks,'  but  Syrian  for- 
tune tellers  Jiocked  into  all  the  iiaiiiits 
of  i>ul)lic  amusement."  (Conyhkake 
AND  IlOWSON,  St.  Paul,  Vol.  1.  pp. 
145,  14(j.) 

7.  Who  Avas  Avith,  not  occasionally 
merely,  but  habitually,  residing  with 
liim  or  in  his  service.  The  deputy 
of  the  country — literally,  Proeonsul 
— Sergius  Paulus.  There  were  two 
classes  of  provincial  governments  in  the 
Konian  Emjiire,  imperial  and  senato- 
rial. An  imperial  i)rovince  was  gov- 
erned by  a  proprator,  or  Injute, 
a})pointed  l^y  the  emi)eror  ;  a  senatorial 
province  by  a  procoisul,  apj>ointi'tl  by 
the  senate.  Cyprus  was  at  first  placed 
in  the  former  class  by  the  Kuijieror 
Augustus,  who  died  A.  b.  14,  but  after- 
ward was  made  by  him  a  senatorial 
province,  in  exchange  of  Dalmatia. 
Ltike  shows  his  accuracy  by  desig- 
nating Sergius  Paulus  by  his  ])ro])er 
official  title.  And  this  accuracy  is  con- 
firmed by  an  inscription,  discovered  l)y 
General  di  Cesnola,  at  Soli,  Cyprus, 
which  reads,  "  In  the  proconsulship  of 
Paulus,"  probably  the  identical  Sergius 
Paulus  of  the  Acts.  A  prudent  man 
— an  infellif/eiit,  thouz/htful  viav.  This 
very  characteristic  doubtless  led  him  to 
seek  at  first  the  aid  and  counsel  of 
Elymas,  being  dissatisfied  with  heathen- 
ism. He  also  showed  his  intelligence 
and  understanding  in  not  accepting  all 
that  this  magician  said,  and  in  sending 
for  Barnabas  and  Saul.  And  desired, 
souijht,  to  hear  the  word  of  God 
— the  gosjud,  tlms  described  as  a  reve- 
lation from  God.  (s :  25.)  M  ho  called 
for  Barnabas  and  Saul — to  his 
house,  having  probably  heard  of  their 
preaching  in  the  synagogue,  and  ap])a- 
rently  not  fi'om  a  mere  curiosity,  but 
from  a  sincere  desire  to  know  what 
their  teaching  was. 


Ch.  XJII.] 


THE  ACT8. 


205 


cerer  (.for  so  is  his  name  by  interpreta- 
tion)  withstood  them,  seeking  to   turn 
9  away  the  deputy  from  the  faith.    Then 


Saul  (who  also  U  called  t'aui),"  filled  with 

the  Holy  Spirit,  set  his  eyes  on  him,  and 

10  said,  "O  full  of  all  subtilty  and  all  mis- 


8.  Elymas — generally  regarded  as 
an  Arabic  name,  meaning  wise,  whieh 
Bar-jesus  had  adopted  for  himself, 
thereby  indicating  that  he  was  the 
channel  of  Arabian  wisdom.  Dr.  De- 
litzsch,  liowever,  derives  it  from  an 
Aramaic  word  meaning  powerful,  in- 
dicating that  this  deceiver,  like  Simon 
Magus,  pretended  to  be  "some  great 
one,"  and  having  "  the  great  power  of 
God."  Bnt  wliatever  its  derivation, 
Luke  gives  its  general  popular  mean- 
ing, as  understood  at  that  time,  the 
sorcerer,  or  niKf/iridii.  Tlie  name  is 
of  Persian  or  Bal>ylonish  origin,  and 
was  tirst  applied  in  a  good  sense  to 
priests,  philosophers,  astrologers,  and 
men  of  science  (see  ou  Matt,  i-.i),  but  after- 
ward was  applied  in  a  lower  and  bad 
sense  to  wizards,  false  i)rophets  and  to 
the  practicers  of  the  black  arts.  With- 
stood them.  Ein|)liatie.  He  resisted 
them,  not  only  by  his  ])rivate  and  per- 
sonal iufluenee,  l)ut  also  i)ublicly,  by 
arguments,  denunciations,  and  contra- 
dictious. Seeking,  actively,  to  turn 
away,  to  corrupt  and  thus  turn  aside 
the  proeonnul  from  the  faith,  from 
accej)ting  and  believing  the  new  doc- 
trines Avhich  Barnal)as  and  Saul 
preached ;  for  then  his  influence  would 
be  at  an  end. 

1).  Then  Saul  (who  also  is 
called  Paul)  —  and  henceforth 
throughout  this  book,  and  also  always 
thus  styled  by  Paul  liimself  in  his 
i^pistles,  and  by  Peter  late  in  life. 
(2 Peters:  15.)  There  must  be  some  liis- 
torical  ])ur|)ose  and  reason  for  this 
change  of  name  at  this  time.  Various 
explanations  have  been  given.  An  old 
hypothesis,  suggested  by  Jerome  and 
held  by  many  moderns,  is  that  the 
name  of  this  distinguished  convert, 
Sergius  Paulus,  was  adopted  by  him. 
But  this  is  inconsistent  witli  Paul's 
well-knowii  independence  and  humil- 
ity of  character,  and  contrary  to  tlu* 
impartiality  of  the  gospel.  (Jumes  2 : 1-4.) 
Besides,  as  Hackett  remarks,  "  Had 
the  writer  connected  the  name  with  tliat 
event,    he    would  have  introduced  it 


more  naturally  after  ver.  12."  Some 
have  thought  that  instead  of  Saul  {the 
an/ced  for  or  the  longed  for)  he  adopted 
the  name  of  Paul  (meaning  little)  from 
a  sense  of  humility,  as  the  least  of  the 
apostles  (1  Cor.  15 :  9),  but  this  does  not 
explain  why  the  name  was  changed  ((t 
thin  time  and  it  savors  too  much  of 
making  a  show  of  his  humility.  Tlie 
best  explanation  is  that  Siinl  was  his 
Hebrew  name  and  Paul  his  Roman 
name,  which,  being  free-born  (-m  :  28),  he 
received  from  infancy  ;  that  the  former 
be  bore  among  the  Jews,  the  latter 
among  the  Gentiles  ;  that  now  for  the 
first  time  is  given  a  miracle  or  sign  of 
his  apostleship  among  the  Gentiles  (2  Cor. 
12 :  12)  and  tlie  words  of  apostolic  author- 
ity. In  spirit,  in  power,  in  words,  in 
signally  overcoming  this  "  sou  of  the 
devil,"  and  in  the  consequent  conver- 
sion of  this  Roman  official,  we  have 
the  first  manifestation  (iit  least  the  first 
that  Luke  gives  us)  of  the  great  apostle 
to  tlie  Gentiles.  Hence  from  this  time 
forth  he  is  presented  as  the  leader  in 
Gentile  missionary  work  and  appro- 
priately with  his  Roman  name.  Be- 
fore tliis  it  was  Barnabas  iuid  Saul; 
henceforth  it  is  Paul  and  Barnabas. 
Filled  with  the  Holy  Spirit— not 
for  the  first  time  (9:n),  but  ins]>ired 
and  specially  im])elled  to  utter  words 
of  righteous  indignation,  and  declare 
the  judgment  of  the  Lord.  Set  his 
eyes  on  him — fixing  his  gaze  upon 
him,  as  one  under  divine  authority, 
and  who  tlirougli  the  S])irit  could  see 
into  the  character  and  motives  of  his 
opponent,  thus  arresting  the  attention 
and  awe  of  all  jiresent.  (Sec  a :  4 ;  u :  ;i.) 
Also  comj)are  the  words  that  follow 
with  the  address  of  Peter  to    Simon 

Magus.       (8:  20- 2.-!.) 

10.  Full  of  all    subtilty— rf^mf, 

which  he  was  accustomed  to  practice 
in  his  occupation,  wliich  manifested 
itself  in  every  word  and  act  in  his  pres- 
ent opposition.  All  mischief— itri- 
srrupulousness,  knavery,  villiany,  in 
which  he  was  an  adept.  Thou  child, 
so)i,  of  the   devil — partaker  of  his 


206 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIII. 


cbitf,  >'  Ihiju  child  of  the  devil, ///o(/ eueiiiy 
ol  all  righleuusuess,  wilt  thou  not  ceiUit- 
1  lO  i)wvert  the  right  ways  of  the  Lord? 
11  And  now,  behold,  'the  haud  of  the  Lord 
**  upou  thee,  ■'  and  thou  shalt  be  blind, 


not  seeing  the  sun  for  a  season.  And  im- 
mediately there  fell  on  him  a  uiist  aud  a 
darkness;  and  he  wi-nl  about  seeking 
12  some  to  lead  him  by  the  haud.  Then  ihe 
deputy,  when  he  saw  what  was  done,  be- 


P  Matt.  13  :  38;  John  8  :  44;  1  John  3:8.         i  Jer.  28  :  15. 

•  Gen.  19  :  11. 


Exoil.  9  :  3  ;   1   Saiu.  5  :  6. 


nature  and  resembling  him  in  his 
C'iiaracter  and  disjjosition.  Especially 
liki"  liim  in  jtcrverting  and  falsifying 
tlic  trutli  ;  for  the  devil  is  a  liar  and 
the  father  of  it.  (JohD8:«.)  Devil. 
(seooii  10:. IS.)  Meyer  also  sees  here  "  an 
indignant  contrast  to  the  name  Bar- 
jisus."  Enemy  to  all  righteous- 
ness— hostile  to  all  that  is  right  and 
good,  to  purity  of  life,  uprightness  of 
conduct,  and  to  all  that  is  acce^)taV)le 
and  pleasing  to  God.  From  this  de- 
scription of  Elymas  it  is  prohalde  tliat 
he  sliowed  liimself  tricky  and  malig- 
nant in  disputing  with  Paul,  wresting 
the  Scriptures  and  giving  false  mean- 
ings to  tiie  ju'opliecies  concerning  the 
coming  and  kingdom  of  tiie  ilessiah  ; 
denying  or  jierhaps  ridiculing  the  doc- 
trine of  the  resurrection.  » ill  thou 
notecase?  Tlie  interrou'ative  form 
gives  emphasis  and  strengtli  to  the  ex- 
pression. To  pervert  the  right  or 
straight  ways  of  the  L.ord  ?  To 
distort  and  render  crooked  (i^i.  5  :  20)  tlie 
mcthoils  and  conditions  of  salvation  as 
maile  known  l)y  the  Lord,  such  as  re- 
pentiince  toward  God,  faith  in  Clirist 
and  ohedience  to  him.  It  was  from 
tliese  that  Elymas  would  turn  Sergius 
Paulus  away.  lie  may  have  gone 
further  and  claimed  supernatural  in- 
fluence in  o]>position  to  the  gospel. 
Hence  Abbott's  remark  deserves  notice 
in  ])assing.  "The  doctrine  that  the 
Holy  Spirit  liolds  communion  with 
Tiirn,  and  that  angels  are  ministering 
spirits  of  the  Most  Higli  to  man,  anti 
tliat  evil  spirits  are  among  man's  s])ir- 

itnal    foes  (J..lin  11  ;  17;  Eph.R:  |-J  ;  Hel>.  I  :  h), 

i-"lyinas  in  common  with  all  sorcerers 
of  liis  day  and  ours,  j)erverted  into  a 
doctrine  of  spiritism,  and  a  practice  of 
pretended  communication  with  spir- 
its." 

II.  And  noAV — in  view  of  your 
cliaracter  and  your  bitter  opposition. 
The  hand  of  the  Lord — a  phrase 
often   used  in  the  Old  Testament  ex- 


pressing the  power  of  God,  manifested 
in  mercy  or  judgment,  (exoii.  v.-.i;  i  s.im. 
5: 11:  Neh.  2 ;  s.)  Vpou  tliec^iii  pun- 
ishment. For  its  exercise  in  mercy 
see  11  :  21  ;  4  :  30.  Blind,  not 
seeing  the  sun — the  jiositive  and 
the  negative  siiU^ ;  not  l)eing  able  to 
see  the  sun  indicated  total  blindness. 
Tims  oculi.sts  test  tlie  character  and  ex- 
tent of  the  disease  by  diieetiiig  tlie 
eyes  toward  a  strong  light.  1' or  a 
season — the  l)lindness  was  to  l)e 
temjwrary,  but  how  long  is  unknown. 
Paul  suffered  a  similar  iiiHiction  with 
the  ba]ii>iest  results,  (a:!)!-:.)  Some 
siipj)Ose  and  tradition  relates  similar 
results  to  Elymas,  and  that  he  accom- 
l)anied  Paul  to  Sjiaiii ;  but  such  tradi- 
tion cannot  be  relied  ujion.  The  inflic- 
tion was  immediate.  There  fell  on 
liini — language  in  harmony  with  the 
idea  that  it  came  from  above,  from 
God.  (10:10,11.)  A  mist  and  a  dark- 
ness— rt  dimness  and  a  b/iiidmsf,  de- 
scriptive of  the  successive  stages  of  the 
blindness  which  came  quickly  ujK)n 
him.  '*  Mist,  a  poetical  Greek  word, 
aiiplied  by  Homer  to  the  failure  of 
sight  at  death  or  in  a  swoon  .  .  .As 
the  word  mi)<t  is  also  used  by  Galen, 
the  Greek  medical  writer,  some  regard 
it  as  a  trace  of  Luke's  jirofe.ssion." 
(Alexandkk.)  His  miserable  condi- 
tion is  vividly  brougiit  to  view.  lie 
went  about,  etc. — rather,  and  i/ohi;/ 
tilniiit  he  souijht  jx-rsons  to  lead  liim  by 
tlie  hand.  The  litness  of  the  punish- 
ment lias  been  noted :  That  he  who 
deceived  and  blinded  others  should 
him.self  be  made  blind  and  dependeid 
on  leaders.  Also  that  Peter  and  Paul 
each,  at  least  in  one  instance,  wrought 
a  miratde  of  righteous  wrath,  that  upon 
Ananias  and  this  upon  Elymas. 

12.  Then, when  this  blindncse  came 
at  once  uj)oii  Elymas,  the  proconsul  see- 
ing what  was  doneheMexeA  on  Christ, 
and  the  doctrines  proclaimed  by  Paul. 
That  he  was  tnily  converted  to  Christ 


Ch.XIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


207 


lirved,  being  astonished  at  the  doctrine 
of  the  Lord. 
13      Now    when    Paul    and    his    company 


loosed  from  Paphos,  they  came  to  Perga 
iu  Pamphylia.  And  «.Iohu  departing 
from  them  returned  to  Jerusalem. 


is  the  natural  inference,  and  accords 
with  the  general  use  of  the  word  believe 
in  the  xU'ts.  (See 4;  4;  n  :  21.)  Thecase 
of  8iiuon  Magus  (s  :  13)  is  the  only  ex- 
ct'ption,  and  he  professed  conversion. 
Tluit  Sergius  Paulus  was  baptized  is  a 
imtural  inference.  Being  aston- 
i;shed — struck  with  wonder.  The  word 
is  also  used  of  g/ad  amazement.     (Mark 

7  ;  n-  ;  11  :  18  ;  Luke  4  :  32  ;  9  :  4.1.)       It    is    proh- 

a!»ly  the  meaning  Iiere ;  for  the  fact 
tliat  Sergius  Paulus  believed  implies  a 
lirarty  and  glad  welcome  of  the  truth. 
Wiiile  lie  was  astonished  he  must  have 
lieen  glad  to  have  been  thus  extricated 
from  the  deceptive  devices  of  Elymas, 
and  to  see  such  clear  evidence  as  to 
what  was  the  truth.  At  the  doc- 
trine, tlie  teachhuf,  of  the  Lord — 
not  only  the  new  an<l  wonderful  teach- 
ing concerning  Christ,  but  also  the  way 
in  wliich  it  was  taught,  so  clearly, 
powerfully,  and  autiioritatively,  and 
confii'nied  by  a  miracle.  (Mark  i : -'7.) 
Tiie  parallel  between  this  conflict  of 
Paul  with  Elymas  and  that  of  Moses 
with  the  magicians  of  Egypt  is  worthy 
of  notice.  (i:xod.  ch.  v.s)  In  both  the 
victory  is  on  the  side  of  the  Lord. 

This  conipletes  the  In-ief  account  of 
the  mission  of  Paul  and  Barnabas  in 
Cyjirus.  No  attempt  is  made  to  relate 
what  was  done ;  it  is  only  implied  that 
they  jireaclied  the  gosjjel  in  the  syna- 
gogues from  place  to  place  (^er.  5, 6),  and 
it    is    probable    that    churches    were 

l>hlMt<'d.       (Secon  ver.6.)       IIoW    lougthev 

contiiiueil  at  Paphos  is  not  told.  It  is 
rcasonal)lc  to  suppose  a  church  organ- 
ized tiiere.  In  view  of  all  these  reason- 
al>le  inferences  from  the  narrative,  it 
seems  that  too  short  a  time  is  generally 
allowed  for  the  work  of  these  niission- 
a)-ies  ui)on  the  island ;  and  that  they 
proI)al)ly  spent  there  about  a  year. 
13-52.    Paul    and    Barnabas  at 

AnTIOCH  TX  PISIDIA.  (2  Cor.  11  :  26;  John 
1:  19-27;  Dent.  1  .  :a  ;  7:1;  1  Sam.  13:  U;  Ps.  2  :  7 ; 
16  :  10;  89  :  20;  Is:i.  49  :  6 :  55  :  3 ;  Hah.  1  :  5.)  Be- 
fore this,  under  Barnabas  as  leader, 
they  went  to  his  native  Cyprus  ;  now, 
with  Paul  as  leader,  they  go  into  his 


own  native  Asia  Elinor.  They  pursue 
a  kind  of  half  circle  tiirough  the  dis- 
tricts of  Pam])liylia,  Pisidia,  and  Ly- 
caonia,  west  and  north  of  Cilieia,  Paul's 
native  province.  Ho  if  Paul  had  evan- 
gelized Cilieia  already,  he  was  only  ex- 
tending his  labors  to  the  nearest  sur- 
rounding regions.  Probably  the  .s])ring 
and  early  summer,  x.  1).  4(i. 

13.  Paul  and  hi.s  company — 
Barnabas,  Mark,  and  other  attendants. 
Henceforth  Paul  is  the  header,  and  the 
chief  speaker.  (ii:i-'.)  In  the  conver- 
sion of  Sergius  Paulus  and  tiie  imnish- 
nient  of  Elymas,  the  signs  of  I'aul's 
apostleship  are  recognized  ;  and  Barna- 
bas api>ears  at  once  to  concede  to  bini 
the  first  jdace.  Loosed,  or  se/  sni/ 
from.  Paphos.  Then  going  a  little  west 
of  north,  about  one  hundred  and  fifty 
miles,  they  came  to  Perga  in  Pam- 
phylia. They  do  not  go  throngli 
Cilieia,  Paul's  native  jjrovince,  where 
he  had  already  laboreil  (:i :  so:  u  ?.',), 
!)ut  enter  Pamphylia,  a  province  Just 
west  of  Cilieia.  Its  cajiital,  Perga,  was 
a  large  and  floui-ishing  city,  eelel)rated 
for  the  temjde  and  worshijy  of  tiie  g<)d- 
dess  Diana,  and  situated  on  the  river 
Cestus,  seven  miles  from  its  mouth. 
There  are  still  extensive  ruins  to  be 
seen.  A  bar  now  ob.'jtructs  the  month 
of  the  river  Cestus ;  but  it  was  then 
navigable  to  Perga.  It  ap]>ears  tliat 
Paul  makes  but  a  brief  stop  at  Perga ; 
he  preaches  there  on  his  return.  (i4  :2:..) 
Perhaps  the  apjnoaching  summer, 
when  multitudes  moved  from  the  plains 
to  the  mountains,  may  have  led  him  to 
go  at  once  to  the  regions  beyon<l.  That 
too  would  be  the  best  season  for  travel- 
ing into  the  mountainous  district. 
His  residence  at  Tarsus  in  Cilieia  must 
have  made  him  acquainted  with  many 
of  the  features  of  these  adjoining 
regions. 

An  event  now  occurred,  which  had  a 
marked  etfect  on  the  future  work  of 
these  missionaries  :  John  departing 
from  them  returned  to  Jerusa- 
lem. Why,  we  are  not  told.  From 
16  :  38,  we  infer  that  Paul  thought 


208 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cu.  XIII. 


Paul  and  Barnabas  at  A  nlioch  in  Pi^idia. 
14      BUT  wheu  they  departed  from  Perga, 
tUey  came  to  Antioch  in  Pisidia.    And 
[they]  "  went  into  the  synagogue  on  the 


15  sabbath  day,  and  sat  down.  And  » after 
the  reading  of  the  J^aw  and  the  Prophets, 
the  rulers  of  the  synagogue  sent  unto 
them,  saying,  I'e  men  and  brethren,  if  ye 


'  cli.  10  :  13  ;  17  :  2 ;  18  :  4.        ^  ver.  27  ;  Neh.  8:1;  Luke  4  :  10-10. 


5Iark  worthy  of  blame,  and  that  he 
showed  weakness,  a  want  of  persever- 
ance, or  a  hvek  of  faith.  Various  rea- 
sons have  been  siii,'gested  :  Slirinking 
from  the  (hmgers  of  a  hazardous  jour- 
ney into  the  interior  of  Asia  Minor  ; 
an  unwillingness  to  give  himself  up 
fully  to  the  Gentile  work ;  a  dissatis- 
faction with  the  transfer  of  leadership 
from  Barnabas  to  Paul ;  an  anxiety  for 
his  mother  and  home  at  Jerusalem.  A 
variety  of  reasons  ])rol)al)ly  actuated 
him.  But  years  later  Paul's  feelings 
changed  toward  him  ;  for  Mark  became 
his  fellow  worker  (Coi  t  -.  lu),  and  is  com- 
mended by  him  as  useful  in  the  minis- 
try.     (2rim.  4:  II.) 

14.  But  they — Paul  and  Barnabas 
go  on  together,  John  Mark  liaving  left 
them.  Passing  through  the  country 
from  Perga,  they  came  to  Anti- 
och in  Pisidia — a  distance  of  alwut 
one  hundred  and  lifteen  miles.  They 
may  have  stopj)ed  at  different  settle- 
ments and  ])laces  on  the  way.  The 
road  from  Perga  to  Antioch  pa.ssed 
through  a  rugged  and  romantic  region 
of  the  Taurus  Mountains,  where  water- 
floods  were  frctiueut,  and  the  inhabit- 
ants notorious  for  tlieir  lawlessness. 
J'isiJiit  was  tlie  next  province  north  of 
Panij>hylia.  Its  tribes  had  rulers  of 
their  own,  and  in  their  motintain  fast- 
nesscss,  were  but  partially  subdued  by 
the  Romans.  The  ])asses  from  the  sea- 
coast  to  tlie  interior  are  dittienlt  and 
Inive  always  beeu  dangerous.  It  is  a 
reasonable  supposition  that  on  this  and 
other  journeys  in  Pisidia,  Paul  was  ex- 
posed to  tile  "perils  of  rivers"  and 
"the  perils  of  robl)ers,"  described  in  2 
Cor.  11  :  26.  Antiocli  was  a  city  of 
con.siderable  imjRirtance  and  a  Roman 
colony,  and  situated  near  the  bonlers 
of  Pisidia  and  Phrygia,  on  the  high 
centre  tablelands  of  Asia  Minor.  Like 
the  Syrian  city,  Antioch,  it  was  founded 
by  Selencus  Nicator,  and  named  after 
liis  father,  Antiochus.  Strabo,  the 
Greek  geographer,  described  it  as  a 
Roman  colony  and  situated  on  an  emi- 


nence. Its  site  and  vast  ruins,  con- 
sisting of  temples,  churches,  besides  a 
theatre  and  a  magnificent  aqueduct, 
were  discovered  by  ilr.  Arunilell,  of 
England,  in  1S33.  Also  a  number  of 
inscriptions  were  found,  one  of  which 
included  the  name  of  thi'  city.  »  ent 
into  the  synagojfuc— the  religious 
assembly  of  the  Jews.  From  this  we 
learn  the  custom  of  Paul  and  Barnabas 
on  similar  occasions.  (Vcr.o)  Thcsi' 
two  strangers  had,  doubtless,  duiiiig 
the  week,  entered  the  city  (puetly  and 
unnoticed;  had  obtained  lodgings,  and 
work  at  their  trade  as  tent  makers,  and 
now  with  other  Jews  they  enter  the 
synagogue.  Sat  down — some  sup- 
j)ose  ou  the  place  occn})ied  by  the  rab- 
bins ;  but  more  ])robably,  on  a  seat 
near   the  entrance,    as   listeners.      See 

next  verse.       (see  uote  on  Luke  4  ;  IB.) 

15.  The  law — the   first  five  books 
of  the  Old  Testament.    The  prophets 

— including  besides  the  regular  ])r()ph- 
ets  the  books  of  Joshua,  Judges,  iSaui- 
uel,  and  Kings.  Some  think  the  lessons 
of  the  day  were  from  Dent.  ]  and  Isa.  1. 
"  The  beginning  of  the  discourse  (ver.  n, 
18,  ly)  has  three  Greek  verlis,  which  are 
rare,  and  altogether  jieculiar  to  the 
Scriptures,  exaltfd,  sujff'cird  tlnir  man- 
ners, and  divided  by  lot ;  of  which  tiie 
first  occurs  in  Isa.  1  :  2,  the  second  and 
third  in  Dent.  1  :  31,  38.  Jloreover, 
these  two  chajiters,  Deut.  1  and  Isa.  1, 
are  to  this  day  read  on  one  t^abliiitii ; 
whence  it  is  quite  certain  tliat  both 
were  read  on  that  veiy  Sabbath,  and  in 
Greek,  and  that  Paul  referred  esj)ccially 
to  that  reading  of  Moses  and  of  the 
prophets  mentioned  in  ver.  l.^i.  For 
even  the  mention  of  the  Judges  (vi-r.  l-o) 
accords  with  the  les.son  (isa.  i  ;  en),  ami 
the  Jews  are  wont  to  take  their  dis- 
courses, or  their  beginnings,  from  the 
Sabbath  lesson  in  the  synagogue." 
(Bkngkl.)  But  if  this  lie  so,  nothing 
can  be  inferred  as  to  the  sea.^oii  of  the 
year,  becau.se  of  the  changes  that  have 
since  been  made  in  the  synagogue  ser- 
vices.   Rulers  of  the  synagogue. 


Cm.  xm.j 


THE  ACTS. 


209 


have  y  any  word  of  exhortation  for  the 
people,  say  on. 
10      Thun  Paul  stood  up,  and  ^beckoning 
with  /lis  liaud,  said.  Men  of  Israel,  and 


17  »ye  that  fear  God,  give  audienc  >.  The 
God  of  this  people  of  Israel  •'chose  our 
fathers,  and  exalted  the  people  «  when 
they  dwelt  as  strangers  iu  the  land  of 


J  Ueb.  13  :  22.        «  ch.  12 


17.         •  ver.  20,  42,  43.         »>  Dent.  4  :  37  ; 
Exod.  1  :  1,  7-9  ;  I's.  105  :  23,  24. 


7:6,7.         «ch.  7:  17; 


Each  synagogue  had  its  president,  or 
ruler  (m :  s,  ii :  Lnue  8 :  49)  and  elders  (Luke 
7 : 3-5),  who  might  chastise  (22 :  is;  26  :  11 ; 
9:2),  or  expel  an  offender.  (John 9;  34.) 
In  this  verse  and  in  Mark  5  :  22,  rulers 
and  elders  appear  to  be  spoken  of  indis- 
criminately as  rulers.  It  is  not  known, 
however,  liow  perfect  was  the  organiza- 
tion of  the  synagogue  at  this  time.  It 
was  probably  changed  and  developed 
after  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  by 
the  Romans.  Sent  unto  them — they 
were  thus  sitting  iu  the  congregation, 
perhaps  near  the  entrance,  and  not 
among  the  public  speakers.  They  had 
probably  been  in  Antioch  a  day  or  two 
and  were  becoming  known  as  teachers. 
"  Paul  had  received  a  regular  theologi- 
cal education  at  Jerusalem  from  Gama- 
liel, and  thus  occupied  in  Jewish  eyes 
the  position  of  an  ordained  minister  in 
our  own  times."  (AliBOTT.)  If  ye 
have  any  word  of  exhortation — 
in  application  of  the  law  and  jirophets, 
and  in  encouragement  of  their  obser- 
vance, say  on.  It  was  customary  for 
the  rulers  of  the  synagogue  to  invite 
devout  strangers  and  teachers  present 
to  expound  the  Scriptures,  read,  or  ex- 
hort. This  gave  an  excellent  opportu- 
nity for  the  early  preachers  to  make 
known  the  truths  of  the  gospel. 

16.  Then  Paul  stood  up.  Now 
and  onward  Paul  appears  as  the  chief 
speaker,  Barnal>as  giving  him  the  pre- 
cedence. The  Jews  and  Jesus  wei-e  ac- 
customed to  speak  sitting ;  but  Paul 
and  the  apostles  appear  to  have  spoken 
standing.  (1 :  15 ;  11 :28;  i5:7.)  Beckon- 
ing  with  his  hand— to  secure  atten- 
tion.     (See  on  12:  17.) 

In  this  address  Paul  first  reviews  the 
goodness  of  God  to  the  Jewish  peojde 
until  the  days  of  David  (ver.  16-22) ;  an- 
nounces Jesus  a  descendant  of  David, 
vvho  was  witnessed  by  John  the  Bap- 
tist (23-25) ;  proved  to  be  the  Messiah  by 
prophecy  (26.37);  upon  all  which  he 
founds  an  offer  of  salvation  through 
faith,  and  a  solemn  warning  against  re- 
O 


jecting  the  gospel.  This  is  the  first 
recorded  address  of  Paul,  and  may 
serve  as  a  specimen  of  his  addresses  at 
this  time.  The  similarity  to  portions 
of  Stephen's  address  has  often  been 
noted.  The  impress  of  Stephen  on 
Paul's  mind  must  have  been  deep  and 
lasting.  Paul  develops  more  clearly 
the  great  doctrine  of  justification  by 
faith.  (Ver.  38,  .39.)  See  note  on  >)>tephni 
and  Fcml  at  the  close  of  note  on  7  :  (iO. 
Like  Peter,  Paul  cites  Ps.  Iti  :  10  (2 :  27), 
and  emphasizes  the  resurrection  of 
Christ,  showing  that  it  was  the  grestt 
central  doctrine  of  early  Christian 
preaching.  Men  of  Israel— Jews  by 
i)irth.  Ye  that  fear  God — devout 
Gentiles,  both  those  who  were  prose- 
lytes, having  embraced  Judaism  and  had 
been  circumcised,  and  also  those  who 
were  worshipers  of  Jeliovah  through 
uncircumcised  (10:2),  who  had  their 
particular  seats  in  the  synagogue,    (ver. 

43,  48;  16:  14:  17  :  4.) 

17.  The  God  of  this  people  of 
Israel.  Paul  is  addressing  all  of  those 
whom  he  calls  God-fearing  (ver.  le),  and 
here  singles  out  with  emphasis  and 
honor,  the  Israelites  who  were  j^resent. 
Though  now  an  ajtostle  to  the  Gentiles, 
he  would  not  take  from  tlie  Jews  the 
first  and  honorable  jiosition  whicli  they 
occupied.  (Rom.  i:i6.)  Chose  our 
fathers— his  as  well  as  tlieirs.  The 
word  fathers  most  naturally  refers  to 
the  patriarchs,  Abraham,  Isaac,  Jacob, 
etc.  (Kom.9:5-i3;  11  :i.)  Exaltcd  the 
people — to  dignity  and  honor,  not 
merely  by  increasing  tlieir  numbers, 
but  by  the  mighty  works  wrouglit  by 
Moses  in  their  behalf  This  "clause 
refers  to  tlie  time  previous  to  their 
departure  from  Egypt;  the  last  clause 
of  this  verse  describes  that  departure. 
As  strangers — in  their  Mijoxrn.  They 
were  but  sojourners.  (Ofu.  47 : 4,9.  seei 
leter  1 :  17.)  With  a  high  arm — an  rtp- 
lifted  arm — with  signal  ])0wer.  The 
arm  of  God  is  spoken  of  in  a  Hebrew 
figure  as  the  might,  the  power  of  God 


no 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cn.  XIII. 


l'">;y  pt.  '^  aii'I  with  an  high  anu  brought  he 

18  t  eiu  oui  of  it.    And 'about  the  time  of 
forty  ye-ars  suffered  he  their  manners  in 

19  thu  wilderness.     And  when  'he  had  di- 
stroyed  seven    nations    in  the    land  of 


Chanaan,  e  he  divided  their  land  to  them  by 

20  lot.  And  after  that  hhega>e  vnio  them 
judges  about  the  space  of  four  hundred 
and  fifty  years, '  until  Samuel  the  prophet. 

21  It  And  afterward  they  desired  a  king:  and 


«  Exod.  6:6;  13  :  14,  16;  ch.  14.        '  Exod.  16  :  3.J  ;  Isa.  G3  :  0.        f  Deut.  7:1;  Josh.  24  ;  11. 
8  Josh.  14  :  1,  2.        t  Judg.  2  :  16.        i  1  Sam.  3  :  20.        k  1  Sam.  8  :  5-22 ;  10  :  1. 


(Lukei  :5i),  and  correspoiids  here  with 
Exod.  (3:6,"  with  a  stretched  out  arm." 
The  tigtire  may  have  heen  origiually 
suggested  to  Closes  and  the  Hebrews, 
by  the  familiar  hieroglyphic  which 
represents  might  by  two  outstretched 
anus. 

18.  This  verse  treats  of  God's  good- 
ness and  forbearance  with  Israel  in  the 
wilderness.  Suffered  he  their  man- 
ners— their  character  and  conduct. 
He  bore  with  tlieui,  endured  them. 
This  reading  is  sujjported  by  the  major- 
ity of  the  best  manuscripts,  and  is 
adoj)ted  by  Westcott  and  Hort.  By 
the  change  of  a  single  letter  in  the 
Greek  word  it  would  mean,  Jle  hare 
them  as  a  iiursing  father,  with  prol)able 
reference  to  Deut.  1  :  31 ;  he  cherished 
and  nourished  them,  (i  Thcss.  2: 7.)  This 
is  supported  by  many  ancient  authori- 
ties and  some  internal  evidence,  and  is 
preferred  by  Tiscliendorf,  Hackett, 
Meyer,  and  by  the  American  CommitttL* 
on  the  Revised  New  Testament.  Hack- 
ett says,  "  The  apostle  would  bring  to 
view  liere,  not  so  much  the  forbearance 
of  God  toward  his  people  as  his  inter- 
position, his  direct  efforts,  in  their 
behalf."  It  is  a  singular  fact  that  the 
same  tcxual  variation  occurs  in  tlie 
Septiiagint  version  of  Deut.  1  :  31. 
Both  statements  are  true,  and  either 
fits  in  with  Paul's  speech,  but  the  latter 
reading  .suits  better  with  his  preseuta- 
tion  of  God's  gracious  dealings. 

19  Destroyed  seven  nations- 
mentioned  in  Deut.  7:1;  Josh.  3  :  10; 
24  :  11,  namely:  The  Ilittites,  Girgas- 
hites,  Anu)rites,  Canaanites,  Perizzites, 
Ilivites,  and  Jebusites.  They  were 
descendants  of  Canaan,  taking  their 
names  for  the  most  ])art  from  his  cliil- 
dren.  (Gen.  10 :  1519.)  Tlieir  nationality 
was  destroyed,  though  the  i)eo])le  not 
utterly,  fragments  remaining  even  in 
the  days  of  Solomon,  (i  King<9:20.) 
Through  the  Israelites  God  subdued, 
'  cast  them  out.'     (Deut.  7: 1.)    So  in  the 


providence  of  God  many  nations  have 
been  destroyed  liefore  other  nations — 
for  exam})le,  many  of  tlie  tribes  of 
American  Indians.  Divided  their 
land  to  them  by  lot — according  to 
the  best  manuscrij)ts  and  liighest  au- 
thorities, He  gave  them  their  lam!  as  an 
inheritaiur,  or  possession.  He  caused 
them  to  inlierit  and  possess  tlie  land. 
The  gracious  dealings  of  God  in  giving 
the  Israelites  a  home  is  described. 

20.  Abowt  the  space  of  four 
hundred  and  fifty  years.  This  is 
connected  with  the  ])receding  verse 
and  ends  tlie  sentence,  according  to  the 
best  manuscripts.  It  thus  nt'vrs  to  the 
period  between  the  call  of  the  lathers 
(ver.  17)  and  the  entrance  of  tlie  Israelites 
into  their  possession,  (ver.  ih.)  If  Paul, 
like  Stephen  (7 :«),  starts  with  tiie  four 
hundred  years  of  sojourn  an<l  opj)res- 
sioii,  and  then  adds  the  forty  years 
wandering  in  the  wilderness,  and  seven 
years  to  the  division  of  the  land  under 
■Toshua,  we  have  four  hun<hed  and 
forty-seven  years.  Or  staiting  with 
the  birth  of  Isaac,  who  was  si.xty  years 
old  at  the  birth  of  .Jacob  (Oen.  2*5: -.'g), 
and  Jacob  a  hundred  and  thirty  on 
going  to  Egypt  (Gen.47:<i);  and  the 
sojourn  there  two  hundred  and  fifteen 
years,  and  thence  forty-seven  years  to 
the  settlement  of  the  tril)es,  and  we 
have  four  hundred  and  fifty-two  years. 
In  eitiier  reckoning  it  is  in  round  num- 
bers, "about  four  hundred  and  fifty 
years."     (See  7;  6.) 

The  rest  of  this  verse  forms  another 
sentence,  and  should  read:  And  after 
these  things  he  gave  judges  until 
Siunuel  the  prophet.  Sanitiel  was  the 
next  man  of  great  eminence  after  Moses 
and  Joshua,  and  was  the  last  of  tJie 
judges,  as  Avell  as  the  first  of  a  long 
line  of  prophets,  that  continued  down 
through  the  captivity.  This  shows 
further  God's  gracious  care  over  his 
people. 

21.  And  afterward  they  desired 


Cii.  XIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


211 


Go.i  gave  unto  tlieui  Saul  the  si)u  of  Cis, 
a  man  of  the  tribe  of  Hcnjaiiiiu,  by  the 
22  space  of  forty  years.  And  '  wlieu  he  had 
removed  him,  "^  he  raised  tip  unto  them 
David  to  be  their  king  ;  to  whom  also  he 
gave  testimony,  aud  said,  '1  have  found 
David  the  son  of  Jesse,  a  man  after  mine 


own  heart,  which  shall  fulfill  a!l  my  will." 

2;«  1  Of  this  man's  seed  halh  God  according 

"to   his  promise  raised   unto    Israel   I'a 

24  Saviour,  Jesus:  i  when  John  had  first 
preached  before  his  coming  the  baptism 
ol  repentance  to  all  the  people  of  Israel. 

25  And  as  John  fulfilled  his  course,  he  said, 


1  1  Sam.  15  :  23,  2G,  2» ;  10  :  1.  ml  Sam.  Hi  ;  i:t ;  2  Sam.  2  :  4  ;  .">  :  3.  ■>  Luke  1  :  32,  (i'l  ; 
Kom.  1:3.  o  ch.  2  :  30-3(3 ;  2  Sam.  7:12;  I's.  132  :  11.  p  Matt.  1  :  21 ;  Rom.  11  :  26.  i  Matt. 
3:1:  Luke  3  :  3. 


— rather,  they  asked  for  themselves  a 
king,  to  gratify  their  own  desires,  in 
order thatthey  might  be  li ke  the  lieathen 
nations  about  them,  being  dissatistied 
with  the  theocratic  government  wliich 
God  had  appointed,  (i  Sam.  8:  d-22.)  But 
thougli  this  was  of  the  nature  of  a  re- 
jection and  apostasy  from  Jehovah,  as 
their  king,  yet  God  did  not  reject  them, 
but  gave  them  Saul,  the  son  of  Kish 
for  forty  years.  The  Scriptures  give 
no  account  of  the  length  of  his  reign ; 
but  Josephus  [Antiq.  vi.  14,  9)  probably 
following  public  records  or  tradition, 
states  that  Saul  reigned  eighteen  years 
before  Samuel's  death,  and  twenty-two 
years  after  it. 

32.  Removed  him — deposed  him, 
from  his  kingly  office.  This  is  the 
natural  application  of  the  verb.  (Luke 
16:4.)  (Compare  Septnagint,  2  Kings 
17  :  23  ;  Dan.  2  :  21.)  Occasionally  the 
expression  in  Greek  is  found,  "  re- 
moved from  life."  God  rejected  Saul 
(1  S;im.  15 :  11, 23),  and  David  was  anointed 
soon  after,  (i  Sam.  16  :  12-u,)  But  this 
rejection  was  not  publicly  and  finally 
accomplished  for  twenty-five  or  more 
years,  till  at  the  end  of  the  forty  years 
(ver.  21),  Saul  was  slain  on  Mount  Gilboa 
(1  Sam.  .TO :  8) ;  and  then  David  was  recog- 
nized as  king.  (2Sam.  2:+.)  I  have 
found  David,  etc.  This  is  a  com- 
pound quotation,  made  up  of  two  pas- 
sages, given  freely,  and  contains  tlie 
substance  of  what  God  had  said  on  dif- 
ferent occa.sions.  "  I  liave  found  David 
my  servant."  (ps,  ss  ;  20.)  "  The  Lord 
has  souglit  him  a  man  after  his  own 
heart."  (1  Sam.  i.3:  u.)  He  was  a  man 
after  God's  heart,  in  that,  in  contrast  to 
Saul,  he  made  God's  will  his  ruling 
l)rinciple,  hohling  the  people  to  the 
faithful  worship  of  God,  and  putting 
down  and  disallowing  idolatry  and  all 
the  abominations  attending  idol-wor- 
ship. This  refers  specially  to  the  gen- 
eral administration  of  affairs  according 


to  the  divine  will,  and  implies  a  re- 
newed heart,  but  does  not  include  all 
tlie  acts  of  his  private  and  domestic  life. 
In  his  personal  religious  experience  he 
shows  longings  after  a  purer  life,  and 
bitter  repentance  over  sin.  (p.-.  oi,  tic.) 
All  my  Avill — plural,  (t/i  iny  wishes, 
regarding  Israel  and  the  enemies  of 
God. 

23.  From  David  Paul  passes  at  once 
to  the  Messiah,  who  according  to  the 
belief  of  tlie  Jew  would  be  of  the  seed 
of  David.  (Matt.  22 :  42.)  According:  to 
his  promise.  Many  of  these,  for  ex- 
ample: 2  Sam.  7  :  12;  Ps.  89  :  ;!.>-37  ; 
132  :  11 ;  Isa.  11  :  1-10;  Jer.  23  :  .3,  (i ; 
33  :  15,  16.  Raised — rather,  accord- 
ing to  the  best  manuscripts,  Brouijlit 
unto  Israel;  as  the  chosen  people, 
among  whom  he  was  to  exercise  his 
ministry,  and  to  whom  lie  was  first  to 
be  preached.  A  Saviour,  which  is  the 
meaning  of  the  name,  Jesus.  (Matt. 
1 :  21.)  That  Jesus  was  a  descendant  of 
David  is  witnessed  by  the  genealogical 
tables  in  Matthew  and  Luke.  Also  by 
such  passages  as  Luke  1  :  27,  32,  (59"; 
Matt.  9  :  27  ;  1.5  :  22  ;  21  :  9  ;  Pvom.  1  :  3. 

24.  Paul  adduces  the  testimony  of 
John  tlie  Bapti.st,  wtiom  the  ])eople 
generally  regarded  as  a  prophet.  When 
John,  etc. ;  .John  having  first  preaclicd 
the  baptism  of  repentance,  imply- 
ing, enjoining,  and  syml)oliziug  repent- 
ance, to  all  the  people  of  Israel, 
to  the  body  of  the  nation  as  such,  who 

came  to   hear   him.      (Matt.  3:  5;  Lukes  :  3.) 

Before  his  coming — better,  his  en- 
trance, that  is,  the  entrance  of  Jesus  on 
his  work.  Jesus  was  manifested  at  liis 
baptism,  but  did  not  enter  upon  liis 
work  till  after  the  temptation.  (Joha 
1 :  28-34.)  His  early  ministry  was  in 
Judea,  where  John  fir.st  preached. 
(John  3  : 1, 22.)  After  John's  im])rison- 
ment,  Jesus  goes  northward  through 
Samaria  into  Galilee,  whose  inhabit- 
ants had  probably  come  into  special 


212 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  Xlll. 


'  Whom  think  ye  that  I  am  ?  1  am  not 
he.  But,  behold,  there  cometh  one  after 
me,  whose  shoes  of  his  feet  I  am  not 
worthy  to  loose. 

26  Men  and  brethren,  children  of  the  stock 
of  Abraham,  and  whosoerer  among  you 
feareth  God,  '  iO  you  is  the  word  of  this 

27  salvation  sent.  For  they  that  dwell  at 
Jerusalem,  and  their  rulers, '  because  thev 
knew  him  not,  nor  yet  the  voices  of  the 


prophets  "  which  are  read  every  sabbnth 
day,  Uliey   have  fulfilled   them  in   con- 

28  deiuuing  Au/i.  J  And  though  the>  found 
uo   cause  of  death    in  him,  yet   desired 

29  they  Imitate  that  he  should  lie  slaiu  '  And 
when  they  had  fulfilled  al!  that  was  writ- 
ten of  him,  they  took  him  down  from  the 

30  tree,  and  laid  him  in  a  sepulchre.    ^  But 

31  God  raised  him  from  the  dead:  and  ^he 
was  seen  many  days  of  them  which  came 

I  John  1  :  20-27.  s  ch.  2  :  39;  Luke  24  :  47.         '  ch.  3  :  17  ;  Luke  23  •  34  ;  1  Cor.  2  :  8. 

»ch.  15:  21.        X  Luke  24  :  20,  26,  27,  44.        J  Mark  15  :  13,  14;  John  19  :  6,  15.        'John  19; 
28,  30,  36,  37.        »  ch.  2  :  24 ;  Matt.  28  :  6.        l>  ch.  1  :  3  ;  1  Cor.  15  :  5-7. 


contact  with  John  during  his  closing 

mijlistry.       (John  3  :  23  ;  4:1-3;  Mark  1  :  14,  15,) 

25.  And  as  John  fulfilled  his 
course,  etc.  Eather,  And  as  John 
was  completing  his  course,  his  official 
life,  or  public  ministry.  Compare 
Paul's  expression,  "  I  have  finished 
my  course."  (i  Tim  4: 7.)  He  said — 
lie  habitually  said  this.  See  an  in- 
stance in  John  1  :  19-23,  when  a  depu- 
tation of  the  Jewish  Sanhedriu  visits 
liini.  I  am  not  he — the  promised 
one,  the  Saviour,  (ver.  2:!.)  Behold 
there  cometh  one  after  me,  etc. 

(M.irk  1  :  :  :  Luke  3  ;  16  ;  see  on  Matt.  3  :  It.) 

20.  Paul  makes  the  first  applica- 
tion of  his  discourse  to  his  hearers,  by 
offering  this  salvation,  Avhich  is  fur- 
titer  enforced  in  ver.  32.  Further  ap- 
l)l'cations  are  made  in  ver.  38,  40. 
Men,  also  brethren — addressing  them 
in  a  most  affectionate  manner.  Chil- 
dren of  the  stock  of  Abraham,  re- 
minding them  of  their  election  as  the 
chosen  people  of  God,  of  their  hopes, 
and  the  promises  to  them.  (Kom.  9  :  3-5.) 
Whosoever  among  you  feareth 
God — among  the  devout  Gentiles 
present.  (Sceonver.  te.)  To  you — in- 
cluding both  Jews  and  pro.selytes. 
( to :  jfi. )  Or,  according  to  several  of  the 
oldest  manuscripts.  To  us,  who  have 
received  him.  Is  the  word  of  this 
salvation,  effected  through  the 
Saviour,  Jesus,  (ver.  23.)  Sent — rather, 
teas  sent  forth,  from  God  to  be  an- 
nounced to  you.  Paul  shows  his 
familiaritv  witii  Scripture  in  using 
here  part  of  Ps.  107  :  20. 

27.  For  introduces  a  confirmatory 
evidence  of  "  His  salvation  "  (vi^r.  2b), 
attd  reason  why  it  was  sent  forth. 
Pro]>hecy  regarding  the  Messiah  was 
ftilfilled  in  the  death  and  resurrection 
of  Jesus.      Isot  only  the  mass  of  the 


people  at  Jerusalem,  but  also  their 
rulers,  who  were  their  s])iritual 
guides,  fulfilled  the  Scriptures  in  con- 
demning him  (-!:23),  because  they 
knew  him  not,  as  the  Messiah  of 
projthecy,  nor  yet  the  voices,  t/ie 
predictions,  of  the  prophets,  though 
they  were  read  every  Sabbath  day. 
Peter  speaks  of  this  ignorance  (■*  '7), 
and  Jesus  in  his  first  prayer  at  the  cru- 
cifixion, "  Father,  forgive  them,  for 
they  know  not  what  they  do."  (Luke 
23:34.)  To  us  who  now  review  .Jewish 
history,  how  strange  appears  their  ig- 
norance, and  how  wild  their  folly  ! 

28.  Not  only  were  they  totally  ig- 
norant of  their  own  Messiah,  but  they 
were  thoroughly  bent  on  his  death. 
Though  they  "found,  after  all  their 
searchings,  no  cause  of  death  (Luke 
23 ;  22),  accusing  Jesus  of  l)lasphemy 
and  sedition ;  but,  unable  to  )>rove 
either  charge,  suborned  false  witnesses 
(Matt.  26:60),  and  desired,  rather  de- 
manded that  he  should  be  slain. 

(Luke  23  :  20-25.) 

29.  Fulfilled  all  that  was  writ- 
ten of  him,  in  his  Itetrayal,  arrest, 
sufferings,    and    death.       (p-s.  22 ;  is.-..  53 ; 

Zech.  11  :  12,  13;    12:   10:    13:  7.)         And     laid 

him   in   a    sepulchre.     It  was   not 

necessary  for  Paul  in  his  rajiid  sum- 
mary to  distinguisli  between  the  vari- 
ous agents  in  those  transactions.  The 
frienilly  hands  of  Nicodenius  and 
Joseph  of  Arimathea  took  tlie  boiiy 
'  from  the  cross  and  buried  it;  yet  I'oth 
of  them  were  rulers;  so  Paul's  state- 
ment is  true  to  the  letter.     (John  la  :  3.--40.) 

30.  But  in  contrast  with  such  ex- 

1  treme  and  unritrhteous  rejection  of 
j  Jesus  by  the  Jews,  God  raised  him 
j  from  the  dead,  to  be  a  Saviour 
I  (ver.  32,  38),  his  resurrcction  being  the 
'  great  sign  or  evideuee  of  his  mission 


Ch.  XJII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


213 


up  Willi  him  from  Galilee  to  Jerusalem, 
"who  are  his  wituesses  unto  the  peojile. 

32  And  we  declare  unto  you  glad  tidings,  how 
that*  the  promise  which  was  made  unto 

as  ihe  fathers,  God  hath  fulfilled  the  same 


unto  us  their  children,  in  that  he  hath 
raised  up  Jesus  again  ;  as  it  is  also  writ- 
ten in  the  second  Psalm, «'  Thou  art  uiy 
34  .Sou,  this  day  have  1  begotten  thee.'  And 
as  concerning  that  he  raised  him  up  from 


•  ch.  1 :  8  ;  5  :  33. 


d  Gen.  3  :  15  ;  12  :  3  ;  22  :  18  ;  Kom.  4  :  13. 
5  ;  Kev.  1  :  5. 


Eom.  1:4;  Heh.  1:5;  5: 


and  authority  as  the  Messiah.  (ScePcter'a 

words  2  ;  3i-:i6 ;    ;i  :  H,  15,   26;    1  Cur.  15::!-2S.) 

31.  And  he  was  seeu  many 
days — Forty  days,  (i  :  s.)  Of  them 
which  came  up  with  him  from 
Galilee  to  Jerusalem — specially 
tliose  disciples  that  came  with  hiiu  on 
his  last  journey  to  Jerusalem.  There 
were  over  five  hundred  eye-witnesses 
of  his  resurrection,  (icor.  i5t6.)  Who 
are,  etc.,  or  according  to  the  most  ap- 
proved text,  Who  are  noio  his  witnesses. 
Doubtless  the  majority  of  them  were 
still  living.  To  the  people  of  Israel 
(ver.  2i)  as  the  chosen  jieople.  Thus  tlie 
resurrection  rested  ou  no  tradition,  hut 
on  the  testimony  of  many  living  men, 
who  had  known  Jesus  well,  who  saw, 
touched,  and  talked  with  him  after  he 
had  risen  from  the  dead.     (See  Rom.  i ;  -i.) 

33.  We  and  you  are  emphatic.  In 
view  of  sucli  evidences  of  salvation  and 
of  a  risen  Saviour,  what  these  compan- 
ions of  Jesus  witness  elsewhere,  we, 
though  not  among  those  who  saw  him 
during  those  forty  days,  now  declare 
unto  you  at  Antioch,  namely,  the 
glad  tidings  that  the  promise 
which  was  made  to  the  fathers 
concerning  the  Messiah. 

33.  Contiiuiation  of  the  sentence  be- 
gun in  the  last  verse  :  God  hath  ful- 
filled the  same  unto  us,  their 
children,  or,  according  to  many  man- 
uscripts, to  our  children.  The  text  is 
uncertain,  but  the  general  meaning  is 
]ilain.  This  fjlfillment  had  taken  place 
during  their  day,  and  was  for  the  bene- 
fit of  them  and  their  descendants.  In 
that  he  hath  raised  up  Jesus 
again.  Omit  again.  Some  take  this 
expression  to  mean  that  God  raised  up, 
or  bronght  forward  .lesus,  sending  him 
into  the  world  as  the  Messiah.  Com- 
pare this  use  of  the  verb  in  3  :  22  ;  7  : 
37.  In  support  of  this  view  i"  urged  the 
quotation  from  Ps.  2  :  7,  Thou  art 
my  Son  ;  this  day  have  I  begot- 
ten thee,  which  is  thought  to  refer 


to  Christ's  incarnation.  (Heh.5:5.)  It 
is,  however,  more  in  keeping  witli  the 
context  to  refer  the  verb  raised  wp 
to  Christ's  resurrection,  for  that  is  tlie 
special  topic  of  this  part  of  the  dis- 
course. The  verb  is  frequently  used 
witliout  the  addition  "from  tlie  dead," 
with    reference     to    the    restirrection. 

(Mark 8:  31  ;  16:9;  Luke  9:  8,  19;  24:  7.)       Christ 

was  the  Son  of  God  from  all  eternity. 
At  his  incarnation  he  was  indeed  be- 
gotten, but  by  his  resurrection  he  was 
openly  declared  to  be  so.  (Kom.  i:4.) 
The  resurrection  might  indeed  l)e 
styled  the  birthday  of  his  reign.  (Rev. 
1:5.)  The  following  from  Dr.  Hackett 
is  worth  pondering  over  :  "  The  origi- 
nal passage  [ps.  2 : 7]  refers  not  to  the 
incarnation  of  the  Messiah,  but  to  his 
inauguration  or  public  acknowledg- 
ment on  the  part  of  God  as  the  rightful 
sovereign  of  men.  To  no  moment  in 
the  history  of  Chri.st  would  such  a  pre- 
diction apply  with  such  significance  as 
to  that  of  his  triumphant  resurrection 
from  the  dead.  The  progression  of  the 
argument  in  the  next  verse  demands 
this  interpretation.  To  the  assertion 
here  that  God  had  raised  Jesus  to  life 
again,  the  apostle  adds  there  that  tliis 
life  is  one  which  death  would  invade 
no  more."  In  the  second  Psalm. 
Some  manuscripts  read  first  Psalm.  It 
was  called  first  or  second  according  to 
circumstances.  The  first  and  second 
Psalms  were  sometimes  written  to- 
gether, and  are  still  so  found  in  some 
manuscripts.  Besides,  some  in  ancient 
times  regarded  the  first  Psalm  as  in- 
troductory to  the  collection,  and  hence 
the  second  as  the  first.  "  The  second 
Psalm  "  is  the  reading  of  the  majority 
of  manuscripts. 

34.  And  as  concerning  that, 
etc.  And  that  he  raised  him  up  from 
the  dead.  Paul  j)roceeds  further  to 
prove  from  prophecy  the  resurrection 
of  Christ,  and  everlasting  life  connected 
with  it.    No  more  to  return  to  cor- 


214 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIII. 


the  dead,  now  'no  more  to  returu  to  cor- 
ruption, he  said  on  this  wise, '  I  will  give 

35  you  lln- sureimrcies  of  Duvid.'  Wherefore 
he  saith  also  in  another  Pj,iiljn,  i'Thmi 
shall  not  suffer  thine   Holy  One   to    see 

36  corruption.'  For  David,  after  he  haii 
served  his  own  generation  by  the  will  of 


God,  ''fell  on  sleep,  and  was  laid  unto 
37  his  fatliers,  and  saw  corruption:  'liut 
he,  whom  God  raised  again,  saw  no  cor- 
ruption: 
'■'S  Be  it  known  unto  you  therefore,  men 
and  brethren,  that  ^ through  this  .man  is 
preached  unto  you  the  forgiveness  of  sins . 


f  Ilom.  6:9;  Isa.  55  :  3  ;  Ps.  89  :  28 ;  2  Sam.  7  :  13.        g  ch.  2  :  31.         !■  ch.  7  :  60 ;  1  Kings  2  :  10 
i  ver.  30 ;  1  Cor.  15  :  20.        k  di.  5  :  31 ;  Dan.  9  :  24 ;  Luke  24  :  47  ;  1  John  2  ;  12. 


ruption — that  destruction  which  is 
ellected  by  the  decay  of  the  body  after 
death,  and  hence  no  more  to  die.  Com- 
pare Paul's  laiiguaLre  in  Rom.  6  :  9, 
"  Knowing  that  Christ  being  raised 
from  the  dead  dieth  no  more ;  deatli 
hath  no  more  dominion  over  him."  (See 

al<o  Kom.  5  :  10  ;  John  U  :  ly  ;  Heb.  J  :  Ja.  j  To  Sub- 
stantiate tliis  he  quotes  from  Isa.  55  :  3, 
varying  somewhat  from  botli  the 
Hebrew  and  the  Septuagint  text,  but 
giving  the  sense  substantially.  The 
promise  :  "  I  will  make  an  everlasting 
covenant  with  you,  even  the  sure  mer- 
cies of  David,"  Paul  takes  and  uses 
that  which  has  special  reference  to 
David  and  to  Christ.  I  uili  give 
you  the  sure  mercies,  rather,  the 
holy  thiii(/s  of  God,  the  tuirepromiiies  of 
David— that  is,  the  Messianic  blessings. 
One  of  these  promises  was  a  successor 
from  his  house,  the  throne  of  whose 
kingdom  God  would  establish  forever. 

(2  Sam.  7:   l:!,  16;    I  Clirnn.  17  :  ll-U  ;    Ps.  »9:3,  4.) 

This  was  fulfilled  in  Christ  (i>».»:  s,'; 
Luke  1 :32, :«),  and  iiicludes  not  only  a 
resurrection,  but  also  an  enilless  im- 
mortality. 

35.  Wherefore,  or  because,  he 
saith  also,  showing  that  Clirist  was 
to  l)e  exempted  from  the  dissolution  of 
tlie  body  and  hence  was  to  have  an  end- 
less life,  according  to  a  prophetic  prom- 
ise. The  quotation  is  from  Ps.  Ki  :  10, 
and  was  presented  l)y  Peter  in  his  Pen- 
tecostal discourse,  which  he  treats  in 
the  same  way,  showing  that  they  could 
not  apply  to  David,  but  that  they  did 
a])ply  to  Christ,  (see  o.i  2 :  27,  so.)  The  two 
apostles  were  in  exact  agreement  in 
the  interpretation  of  this  J^fessianic 
prophecy.  The  independence  of  the 
two  iliscourses  is  seen,  in  that  Paul 
quotes  only  a  part  of  a  verse  from  Ps. 
IR,  and  links  it  with  a  passage  from 
Isaiah,  not  alluded  to  by  Peter,  while 
the  latter  quotes  four  verses  from   Ps. 


16,  and  joins  it  with  a  passage  from  Ps. 
110.  For  further  independence  com- 
pare the  language  of  the  two  ajio.stles 
in  their  applications  as  found  in  the 
next  two  verses  and  2  :  lit)-31. 

36.  David  could  not  have  been  the 
subject  of  that  jnophecy,  for  he  died 
and  his  body  went  into  decay.  After 
he  had  served  his  own  genera- 
tion, or  after  he  had,  in  his  own,  gener- 
ation, served  ihe  counsel  of  God.  Either 
translation  is  admissible.  But  the  first 
is  preferable  as  the  more  natural  con- 
struction. In  serving  his  own  genera- 
tion, he  did  it,  by,  or  according  to  the 
will,  the  jyurpose  of  God.  Like 
other  men,  David  was  useful  to  his  gen- 
eration, performing  his  allotted  work 
according  to  God's  purjjose,  and  then 
died.  Fell  on  sleep,  rather,  fell 
asleep  ;  quoted  from  1  Kings  2  :  10.  (see 
ou7:6o.)  Was  laid  unto,  rather,  was 
added  to,  his  fathers.  This  does  not 
refer  to  his  burial,  but  to  his  disem- 
bodied spirit  being  added  to  those  of 
his  fathers  in  the  regions  of  the  departed. 
This  is  a  well-known  Hebrew  expres- 
sion, used  in  distinction  from  death 

and  burial.    (Oen.  35  :  n-.  2  Kings  22  :  20.)    The 

existence  of  the  soul  after  death  in  its 
separation  from  the  body  is  recognized. 
And  saw  corruption — dissolution  as 

to  his  body.       ( Seo  on  2  :  29.) 

37.  The  prediction  must  therefore 
refer  to  Jesus  who  was  raised  and  in 
his  body  experienced  no  decay.     (See  on 

2:  31.) 

38.  Paul  now  comes  to  the  general 
application  of  his  address,  that  the 
Messianic  blessings  of  forgiveness  and 
justification  only  come  from  and 
through  Jesus.  Be  it  known  unto 
you  therefore — in  view  of  the  fact, 
that  the  prophecies  concerning  the 
Messiah  are  fulfilled  in  Jesus  the  Cru- 
cified and  Risen  one.  Peter  uses  this 
emphatic  formula  at  the  beginning  of 


Ch.  XIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


215 


39  and 'by  him  all  tliiit  believe  are  justified  !  41  "Behold    ye  despisers,  and  woiidtr,  and 
from  all  Ihiugs,  ">  from  which  \f  could  perish:  for  I  work  a  work  in  your  days, 


40  not  be  justified  by  the  law  of  Moses.  Be- 
ware therefore,  lest  that  conic  upon  you, 
which  is  spoken  of  iheni  in  the  Projihets ; 


a  work  which  ye  shall  in  no  wise  believe, 
though  a  man  declare  it  unto  you.' 


ilsa.  53  :  U  ;  Rom.  3  :  28 ;  Gal.  2  :  16 ;  3  :  8-11. 


Rom.  3  :  19,  20. 


his  discourses  (2 :  u ;  + :  is) ;  Paul  here  at 
the  eud.  Through  this  man,  rather 
this  one — Jesus.  /6'  proclaimed  unto 
you  the  forgiveness,  the  remission 
of  sins,  the  remitting  of  the  penalty 
of  sius.  This  is  announced  to  you  for 
your  acceptance.  Peter  hail  proclaimed 
the  same  great  truth.  (2 :  ::ts;  5  :  :ii ;  10  :  43.) 
39.  Not  only  will  tlie  penalty  of  sin 
be  remitted,  but  its  guilt  will  be  re- 
moved ;  not  only  remission,  but  justifi- 
cation is  ofl'ered.  We  luive  here  the 
first  announcement  by  Paul  of  the 
doctrine  of  justification  l)y  faitli  alone, 
which  is  the  great  central  trutli  of  liis 
epistles.  And  by  him  all  that 
believe,  etc.  Literally,  And  that 
from  all  things,  from  which  ye  icere 
not  able  in  the  law  of  Moses  to  be  justi- 
Jied,  in  this  one  every  one  believing  is 
justified.  Paul  briefly  announces  a 
full  justification  tlirough  Christ,  and 
the  total  inability  of  the  law  to  justify 
the  sinner.  From  all  things — from  all 
sins.  From  which  ye  were  not  able  in, 
under  and  through,  the  laiv  of  3foses 
to  be  justified — in  other  words,  the  law 
was  not  able  to  justify  from  any  sin. 
As  Paul  aiiirms  justification  tlirough 
Christ  from  all  sins,  so  to  the  same  ex- 
tent he  affirms  the  insufficiency  of  the 
law.  We  cannot  suppose,  with  Meyer 
and  Alford,  that  Paul  makes  only  a 
partial  statement  here,  that  Christ  will 
do  all  that  the  law  cannot  do,  leaving 
it  for  inference  on  further  instruction, 
that  the  law  could  absolutely  do  noth- 
ing toward  justification.  Paul's  lan- 
guage is  brief,  but  empliatic,  both  in 
regard  to  the  law  and  to  Ciirist.  It  is 
unfair  both  to  him  and  his  language  to 
infer  that  Christ  justifies  only  from 
some  things.  The  meaning  rather  is, 
that  he  justifies  from  all  sins,  and  the 
law  from  none.  Anything  less  than 
this  would  be  inconsistent  with  Paul's 
teaching  elsewhere,  and  to  the  New 
Testament  doctrine  of  salvation  through 

Christ    alone.       (R-m.  3  :  •iO-26 ;  5  :  1  ;  8  :  1  ;  10  : 

4;  Gal.  3:  u,  22)      Paul    .spoke    from   his 
own  experience.     (Rom.  7 : 5, 6.) 


40.  Paul  closes  with  a  solemn  warn- 
ing against  rejecting  tlie  gospel.  There 
is  a  similarity  to  the  pointed  ending  of 
Stephen's  speech.  (7 :  51.)  Paul  very 
probably  saw  signs  of  opjiosition  in 
some  and  wonder  and  incredulity  in 
others ;  arising  ]>erhaps  from  liis  doc- 
trine of  justification  through  Christ 
alone,  and  not  by  the  law,  and  his  free 
offer  of  salvation  to  all  that  believe. 
Therefore — since  you  are  guilty  and 
exposed,  and  salvation  cannot  come  by 
the  law,  but  only  through  Christ.  Be- 
Avare — see  to  it,  take  heed.  An  ex- 
pression nowhere  else  employed  in  this 
book,  but  of  frequent  occuneiice  in  the 
writings  of   the  apostle   wlio  is   here 

speaking.  (1  Cor.  3  :  10  ;  8  :  »  ;  10  :  12  ;  Gal.  3: 
15  ;  Eph.  5  :  15 :  Phil.  3:2;  Col.  2  :  8  ;  4  :  17. )     This 

coincidence  is  slight,  yet  a  striking 
illustration  of  the  strict  accuracy  of 
Luke.  In  the  prophets— in  that 
part  of  the  Old  Testament  so  named  by 
the  Jews.     (ver.  15.) 

41.  The  quotation  is  from  Hab.  1  :  5, 
and  follows  the  Septuagint,  but  gives 
the  essential  sense  of  tlie  Hebrew. 
Despisers  and  perish  are  not  in  the 
Hebrew.  The  former  is  regarded  as  a 
translation  of  a  similar  Hebrew  word, 
(Meyer  and  others) ;  and  the  idea  of 
perish  may  be  evolved  from  the 
Hebrew  te.xt.  Paul  quotes  from  the 
version  familiar  to  his  hearers,  and 
makes  no  correction,  since  the  differ- 
ences in  the  Septuagint  from  the  origi- 
nal Hebrew,  did  not  affect  the  applica- 
tion which  he  was  about  to  make  to  the 
Jews  of  his  day.  The  passage  in 
Habakkuk  refers  to  the  judgments  to 
be  inflicted  on  the  Jewish  nation  by 
the  Chaldean  armies,  aiul  Paul  sees  in 
it  not  a  fulfillment,  but  an  illustration 
and  a  striking  description  of  the  right- 
eous judgments  coming  upon  the  reject- 
ers of  Christ  in  his  day.  Bengel  sug- 
gests that  these  words  were  then  used 
among  the  pious  as  a  general  proverb 
against  all  unbelievers.  Paul  warns 
the  Jews  against  the  deliberate  rejec- 
tion of  the  long-promised  Messiah  ;  and 


216 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIII. 


42.  And  when  the  Jews  were  gone  out  of 
thesynagogue,  the  Gentiles  besought  that 
these  words  might  be  preached  to  them 

43  the  next  sabbath.  Now  when  the  con- 
gregation was  broken  up,  many  of  the 
Jews  and  religious  "proselytes  followed 
Paul  and  Barnabas:  who,  speaking  to 


them,  "persuaded  them  to  continue  in 
f  the  grace  of  God. 

44  And  the  next  sabbath  day  came  almost 
the  whole  city  togellicr  to  hear  the  word 

45  of  (iod.  But  when  the  Jews  saw  the 
multitudes,  they  were  tilled  with  envy, 
and  4  spake  against  those  things  which 


»  ch.  2  :  10.        0  ch.  11  :  23  ;  14  :  22  ;  2  Cor.  6:1;  Heb.  G  :  11,  12 ;  12  :  15. 
Pet.  5  :  12.        q  ch.  18  :  6 ;  1  Thess.  2  :  14-16 ;  Jnde  10. 


pCoI.  1:6,  23;  1 


a  few  years  later  his  words  were  veri- 
fied in  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  and 
the  coniplete  breaking  up  and  scatter- 
ing of  the  Jewish  nation. 

42.  And  when  the  Jcavs  were 
gone  out  of  the  synagogue,  the 
Gentiles,  etc.  The  most  approved 
reading  is:  And  as  they,  Paul  and 
Barnal)as,  were  going  out  they,  the  peo- 
ple, whether  Jews  or  Gentiles,  besought 
that  these  worih,  etc.  It  is  supposed 
that  an  ancient  lesson,  read  in  public 
worship,  began  with  this  verse,  and  tliat 
some  copyist  inserted  the  words,  in 
order  that  the  verse  might  be  the  more 
clearly  understood,  and  to  make  it  con- 
sistent with  the  hostility  of  the  Jews  in 
ver.  45.  It  is  not  probable  that  all  the 
Jews  united  in  this  request.  The 
next  sahbath — literally,  the  sabbath 
or  week  between,  which  would  mean  on 
one  of  the  week-day  services,  held  on 
^fonday  and  Thursday.  But  according 
to  the  later  Greek  the  phrase  means  the 
Sahbath  after,  or  next  Sabbath,  and 
this  is  preferred  by  the  best  critics,  and 
ajipears  to  be  the  meaning  demanded 
by  ver.  44. 

43.  When  the  congregation 
was  broken  up,  or  when  the  syna- 
gogue was  dismissed.  It  is  not  implied 
tliat  there  was  any  confusion  in  the 
iissemV)ly.  It  would  seem  that  Paul 
and  Barnabas  were  going  out  before 
tlu'  general  dispersion  of  the  people, 
and  were  requested  by  the  rulers  or 
otliers  to  repeat  the  discourse  the  next 
S;ibbath.  The  asseml)ly  then  was  dis- 
missed, and  when  most  had  gone, 
many  Jews  and  religious,  devout, 
God-fearing,  proselytes  follOAved 
Paul  and  Barnabas  to  express  their 
assent  to  what  they  had  heard,  and  to 
seek  further  instruction.  Who  refers 
to  Paul  and  Barnabas,  not  to  the  Jews 
and  proselytes.  Persuaded — by  mov- 
ing representations  induced  them  to 
continue  in  the  grace  of  God,  in 


the  favor  of  God  through  the  gospel. 
It  would  seem  that  some  had  believed. 
Compare  a  similar  exhortation  by  Bar- 
nabas to  the  believers  at  Antioch  in 
Syria.     (11:23.) 

44.  The  next  sabbath.  During 
the  intervening  week  Paul  and  Barna- 
bas had  doubtless  been  active  in  pri- 
vate circles,  especially  among  inquir- 
ers and  those  interested  in  the  new  doe- 
trine.  So  deep  was  the  impression 
made,  and  so  much  interest  aroused 
among  all  classes,  especially  among 
the  Gentile  population,  that  almost 
the  whole  city,  both  Jews  and  Gen- 
tiles, came  together,  doubtless  at 
the  synagogue  where  thev  were  the 
previous  Sabbath.  The  building  must 
have  been  crowded,  and  every  avenue 
filled  with  people,  and  many  not  able 

to  enter.       (See  Mark  2:2.) 

45.  Notice  that  the  Jews  only  are 
named  here ;  the  proselytes  are  not 
mentioned.  The  latter  naturally  would 
not  sliare  these  feelings.  The  multi> 
tudes  are  those  outside  of  the  Jews, 
including  both  devout  and  Pagan  Gen- 
tiles. They  were^^/(e  Jeivs — filled 
with  envy — with  an  indignant  and 
contentious  jealousy.  (See  on  5:  u.)  Their 
Isiaelitish  pride  was  touched ;  their 
angry  zeal  was  stirred  ;  and  their  jeal- 
ousy aroused,  at  such  results.  "  They 
could  not  endure  the  notion  of  others 
being  freely  admitted  to  the  same  relig- 
ious privileges  with  themselves.  This 
was  always  the  sin  of  the  Jewish  peo- 

I  jde.  Instead  of  realizing  their  position 
i  in  the  world  as  the  prophetic  nation 
I  for  the  good  of  the  whole  earth,  they 
i  indulged  the  self-exalting  opinion,  that 
[  God's  highest  blessings  were  only  for 
[  themselves."  (Conybeake  and  How- 
son,  Vol.  I,  p.  179.)  Paul  appears  as 
j  the  principal  speaker.  Spake  against 
and  contradicting  are  in  the  orig- 
•  inal  different  forms  of  the  same  verb, 
I  giving  emphasis  and  fullness  to  the  ex- 


Ch.  XIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


217 


were  spoken  by  Paul,  contradicting  ami 
4G  blaspheming.  'I'hcu  Paul  and  Barnabas 
waxed  bold,  and  said, ''It  was  necessary 
that  the  word  of  God  should  first  have 
been  spoken  to  you  :  but  'seeing  ye  put  it 
from  you,  and  judge  yourselves  'un- 
worthy of  everlasting  life,  lo,  "we  turn 


47  to  the  Gentiles.  For  so  bath  the  Lord 
commanded  us,  saying, ' '  1  have  set  thee 
to  be  a  light  of  the  Gentiles  that  thou 
shouldest  be  for  salvation  unto  the  ends 

I       of  the  earth.' 

48  And  when  the  Gentiles  heard  this,  they 
I       were  glad,  and  glorified  the  word  of  the 


'  Ver.  26 ;  ch.  1  :  8 ;  Matt.  10  :  6 ;  Rom.  1  :  16.  '  ch.  7  :  51  ;  Deut.  32  :  21 ;  JIatt.  21  :  43  ; 
Rom.  10  :  19.  '  Matt.  10  :  37,  38  ;  22  :  8.  »  ch.  18  :  6  ;  28  :  28  ;  Kom.  11  :  11.  »  Isa.  42  : 
1,  6  ;  Luke  2  :  32. 


pression.  The  Jews  not  only  opposed 
by  arti;ument ;  but  denied  the  applica- 
tion of  the  prophecies  which  Paul  liad 
made.  And  at  the  .same  time  blas- 
phemins^,  or  reviling — heaping  abuse 
upon  Paul  and  Barnabas  as  false  teach- 
ers and  heretics,  and  probably  blas- 
pheming Jesus,  whose  death  and  resur- 
rection formed  the  central  point  of 
go.spel  preaching.  The  verb  translated 
blaspheme  means  to  revile,  and  is 
equivalent  to  our  word  blaspheme  when 
used  of  contemptuous  speech  uttered 
against  God,  or  sacred  things.     (Rom.  i  ■. 

•2i;  3:8;  Mark  15  ;  29  ;  James  2:7.) 

46.  Then  Paul  and  Barnabas, 

seeing  the  bitter  opposition,  and  hearing 
the  reviling  words  of  the  Jews,  which 
were  not  shared  in  by  either  the  devout 
or  Pagan  Gentiles,  unite  in  stemming 
the  current.  Waxed  bold — spoke  bold- 
ly, plainly,  with  assurance.  It  was 
necessary  that  the  word  of  God 
should  first  haye  been  spoken 
to  you.  This  was  the  divine  purpose 
(Luke  24: 47),  and  was  SO  commanded  by 
their  risen  Lord(i:8),  and  had  been 
prophetically  announced  to  the  Mes- 
siah, (ver.  47.)  The  principle  here  in- 
volved was  followed  by  the  apostles 
when  first  announcing  the  gospel  in 
every  Gentile  city,  (ti :  i9 ;  n  :  i,  u ;  is : 
5,j.)  Ye  put  it  from  you — scorn- 
fully reject  it.  (see  7 :  27, 39.)  And  judge 
yourselves  unworthy  of  ever- 
lasting life — which  they  preached 
and  offered  through  Jesus  Christ.  It 
was  thus  these  Jews  by  their  con- 
duct condemned  themselves.  They 
proved  themselves  unworthy  by  re- 
jecting their  own  Messiah.  Lo,  we 
turn  to  the  Gentiles — including 
the  heathen — of  that  place.  Before 
this  they  had  been  specially  addressing 
the  Jews  at  Antioch  including  j^rose- 
lytes  and  devout  Gentiles ;  from  this 
time  at  Antioch  they  would  give  their 
whole  attention  to   Gentiles.       Their 


public  decision  was  a  representative 
one,  perhaps  the  first  that  they  had 
been  compelled  to  make  in  such  a  pul»- 
lic  manner.  It  illustrates  their  custom 
elsewhere.  How  wonderful  the  grace 
of  God,  that  Paul,  the  once  haughty 
and  fastidious  Pharisee,  should  be  im- 
bued with  this  liberal  spirit,  and  recog- 
nize that  the  wall  of  partition  between 
Jew  and  Gentile  had  been  broken  down, 
and  that  in  Christ  all  are  one.    (Epu.  2 : 

14,15.) 

47.  Paul  and  Barnabas  base  their 
act  on  the  prophetic  word  of  God,  and 
not  upon  any  momentary  impulse.  The 
Scripture  quoted  is  Isa.  49  :  6.  The 
Messiah  is  addressed.  For  so  hath 
the  Lord  commanded— to  preach 
the  gospel  to  the  Gentiles,  as  they 
had  done  and  proposed  to  do.  I  have 
set,  or  appointed,  thee  to  be  a  light 
of  the  Gentiles,  revealing  the  way 
of  life  to  them  that  sit  in  darkness ; 
in  order  that  thou  shouldest  be 
for  salvation,  not  merely  to  the 
Jews,  but  to  the  Gentiles  both  in  the 
land  of  Israel,  and  to  the  ends  of 
the  earth.  This  prophecy  showed 
that  the  mission  of  Christ  was  by  no 
means  to  be  confined  to  the  Jews,  and 
that  in  preaching  to  the  Gentiles,  Paul 
and  Barnabas,  as  the  representatives  of 
Christ,  and  the  heralds  of  his  gosj)el, 
were  acting  in  obedience  to  this  divine 
commission.  So  the  aged  Simeon  saw 
the  same  truth,  quoting  Isa.  42 : 6.    (See 

Luke  2  ;  32.     Conip:uc  K.im.  9  :  25  ;  Isa.  U  :  1,  10.) 

48.  The  effect  on  the  Gentiles. 
They  rejoiced  that  the  same  privileges 
and  blessings  were  offered  them  as 
to  the  Jews,  and  they  praise  and 
honor  the  word  of  the  Lord,  the 
gospel  of  Christ,  as  it  had  been  preached 
to  them.  While  the  Gentiles  generally 
were  ready  to  applaud  the  step  that 
Paul  and  Barnabas  liad  taken,  and  to 
honor  tlie  truth,  yet  all  did  not  savingly 
believe.    As    many    as    were    or- 


218 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cn.  XIIL 


Lord  :  J  and  as  many  as  were  ordained  to 
eternal  life  believed. 

49  And  the  word  of  the  lyord  was   pub- 

50  lisbed   throughout   all   the  region.     But 


the  Jews  stirred  up  the  devout  and  hon- 
ourable women,  and  the  chief  men  of  the 
city,  and  ^raised  persecution  against  Paul 
and  Barnabas,  and  »  expelled  them  out  of 


J  ch.  2  :  47  i  John  10  :  10,  20,  27  ; 


Kum.  8  :  30  ;  11  :  2 ;  2  Thess.  2 
»  comp.  Am.  7  :  12. 


13,  14.«     2  Tim.  3  :  11. 


dained,  or  appointed  unto  eternal 

life — an  endless  blessed  existence — 
believed.  Thus  accepted  the  truth 
and  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ  as  their  only 
Saviour.  Many  attempts  have  been 
made  to  soften  the  teachings  of  this 
clause  by  unnatural  constructions,  or 
by  giving  the  verb  ordained  some 
other  rendering,  such  as,  disposed  in 
their  minds.  But  this  verb  is  not  used 
to  denote  a  mere  disposition  of  the  mind, 
but  always  the  exercise  of  power  and 
authority,  either  human  or  divine. 
(n  :  26 ;  n  ;  10 ;  15  :  2  :  28  23,  etc.)  In  the  pas- 
sive form  as  here,  it  cannot  denote  a  self- 
determination,  but  a  previous  divine 
determination  respecting  those  who  be- 
lieved. They  were  ordained  or  ap- 
pointed unto  eternal  life,  according  to 
some  plan  or  arrangement  of  God.  Com- 
pare Rom.  13  :  1,  "  The  powers  that  be 
are  ordained  of  God."  Luke's  object  was 
not  to  state  a  doctrine,  but  a  historical 
fact.  Yet  a  great  princij)le  or  truth  in 
the  divine  plan  of  salvation  is  implied. 
Hence  this  doctrine  must  he  learned 
more  fully  from  other  passages.     (Rum. 

8  :  28-30  ;K  ph.  1  :   4-11 ;  2  Thess.  2  :  1.3  ;   2  Tim.  1:9; 

1  Peter  1 : 2.)  While  On  the  one  hand 
these  believing  Gentiles  were  the  sub- 
jects of  a  divine  choice,  on  the  other 
hand  it  is  implied  in  the  word  be- 
lieved that  they  exercised  not  a  mere 
mechanical,  but  a  free  act.  Both  God's 
sovereignty  and  man's  freedom  are 
clearly  taught  in  the  Scriptures,  and 
neither  one  excludes  the  other.  With 
our  limited  knowledge  of  the  divine 
modes  of  working,  and  our  finite  con- 
ceptions of  the  relations  of  tlie  Infinite 
to  the  finite,  we  may  not  be  able  to 
fully  explain  or  harmonize  these  doc- 
trines ;  but  it  becomes  us  to  bow  before 
infinite  wisdom,  and  accept  both  as 
true,  and  act  accordingly.  (Phii.  2 :  22,  i3-) 
49.  Antioch  in  Pi.sielia  becomes  the 
centre  of  missionary  work  in  tliat  re- 
gion. And,  in  continuation  and  as  a 
result  of  this  work  among  Gentiles, 
the  word  of  the  Lord  was  pub- 
lished, was  spread  abroad,  through- 


out all  the  region,  the  vicinity  of 
Antioch.  It  is  probable  that  this  was 
done  principally  by  the  new  converts ; 
yet  Paul  and  Barnabas  may  have  vis- 
ited some  of  the  nearer  villages.  This 
would  seem  to  indicate  that  they  were 
several  weeks  in  Antioch  and  its 
vicinity. 

50.  But  while  this  work  was  going 
on  the  opposing  Jews  adroitly  con- 
trived to  drive  Paul  and  Barnabas  from 
the  city.  Devout  women — Gentile 
women,  who  were  worshipers  of  Je- 
hovah, and  had  probably  embraced 
Judaism.  Their  hostility  could  easily 
be  excited  against  doctrines  repre- 
sented as  opposed  to  their  new  faith. 
Josephus  says  (  War.  ii.  20,  2),  that  at 
Damascus  almost  all  of  the  married 
women  were  "  addicted  to  the  Jewish 
religion."  Doubtless  many  of  the  Gen- 
tile women  at  Antioch  were  either 
proselytes  or  favorable  to  the  Jewish 
faith.  These  women  were  also  honor- 
able in  their  social  position  (i7 :  12), 
being  married  to  men  of  rank  and  high 
standing,  very  probably  to  these  chief 
men  of  the  city.  It  was  through 
these  women  that  the  crafty  Jews 
reached  their  Gentile  husbands. 
"  Strabo,  who  was  intimately  ac- 
quainted with  the  social  position  of  the 
female  sex  in  the  towns  of  Western 
Asia,  speaks  in  strong  terms  of  the 
power  which  they  possessed  and  exer- 
cised in  controlling  and  modifying  the 
religious  opinions  of  the  men."  (Co- 
NEYBEAEE  and  HowsON,  Vol.  I.  p. 
180.)  This  is  the  first  instance  of  their 
influence  recorded  in  the  narrative  of 
Paul.  They  will  appear  in  connection 
with  Paul's  life  frequently  hereafter. 

(16:14:  17  :*,  12,34;  18  :  2 ;  Phil.  4:  3;  1  Cor.  7  :  16.) 

Raised  persecution  —  stirred  up 
strong  opposition  to  Paul  and  Barnabas, 
who  were  expelled  not  only  from  the 
city,  but  out  of  their  coasts,  their 
borders.  They  could  hardly  have  been 
legally  and  formally  expelled,  for  they 
return  to  Antioch  a  year — more  or  less 
— after.    It  was  rather  a  popular  out- 


Ch.  XIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


219 


51  their  coasts.  >>  But  they  shook  oflf  the  dual    52  "Iconium.    And  the  disciples  ii  were  tilled 
of  their  feet  a),'aiust  them,  and  ca.me  unto         with  joy,  and  with  the  Holy  Spirit. 


b  ch.  18  :  6  ;  Matt.  10  :  14 ;  Mark  G  :  11 ;  Luko  9:5.        o  ch.  14  :  1, 
John  16  :  22  ;  Gal.  6  :  22. 


dch.  2:  46;  Matt.  5:12; 


break,  led  by  the  first  men  of  the  city, 
before  which  these  missionaries  were 
driven  out.  What  violence  they  may 
have  sutfered  we  are  not  told.  Paul 
refers  to  this  persecution  near  the  close 

of  his   life.      (iTim.3:ll.) 

51.  Having  been  rejected  by  the 
Jews  and  the  leading  men  of  Antioch, 
Paul  and  Barnabas  shook  off  the 
dust  of  their  feet  against  them, 

according  to  the  Lord's  command. 
(Luke  9: 5.)  The  Jews  Were  accustomed 
to  shake  off  the  dust  when  they  re- 
turned to  their  own  land  from  a  heathen 
country  as  polluted.  So  by  this  act 
these  missionaries  signified  that  their 
persecutors  were  devoted  to  destruction, 
and  that  the  very  dust  of  their  city  was 

polluted.    (See  18  :  6 ;  Neh.  5  :  13.)    They  also 

signified  that  they  had  done  their  duty, 
and  that  the  blood  of  their  persecutors 
would  be  upon  their  own  heads.  Ico- 
uium  was  a  populous  city,  about  ninety 
miles  southeast  of  the  Pisidiau  Antioch, 
near  the  foot  of  Mount  Taurus,  situated 
on  one  of  the  largest  plains  of  Asia  Minor. 
It  is  generally  regarded  as  belonging 
to  Lycaonia,  and  practically  its  capital ; 
and  was  upon  the  great  line  of  commu- 
nication between  Ephesus  and  Antioch, 
of  Syria  and  the  Euphrates.  It  is  now 
called  Koniyeh,  and  has  a  population 
of  twenty  or  thirty  thousand.  Paul  and 
Barnabas  approached  it  from  the  west 
by  the  military  road  that  crosses  the 
mountain  chain.  For  hours  the  city 
was  in  sight  before  reaching  it.  From 
it  the  lofty  summit  of  mountains  were 
seen  on  every  side,  except  toward  the 
east,  where  a  plain  stretches  beyond  the 
sight.  At  this  time  it  was  under  a  local 
tetrarch.  The  diversity  of  governments 
at  that  time  in  Asia  Minor,  was  an  ad- 
vantage to  Paul  and  Barnabas,  aflford- 
iug  them  opportunity  to  escape  from 
one  jurisdiction  to  another.  They 
obeyed  the  command  of  the  Lord, 
"  When  they  persecute  you  in  this  city, 
flee  into  another."     (Matt,  m :  23.) 

53.  The  disciples — at  Antioch 
who  continued  there  amid  much  oppo- 
sition and  persecution,  (u :  22.)  A  church 


had  been  gathered,  who.se  members, 
notwithstanding  the  disheartening  sur- 
roundings and  the  expulsion  of  their 
beloved  teachers,  were  tilled  Avitli 
joy,  the  comforts,  hopes,  and  blessed 
assurances  of  their  new  faitli.  And 
this  state  of  mind  was  connected  with 
and  arose  from  being  tilled  Avith  the 
Holy  Spirit.  (G:ii. 5:22.)  Thus  they 
had  "  all  joy  and  i)eace  in  believing  and 
all  joy  in  the  Holy  Spirit."  (Rjqi.  u  :  n ; 
15 :  13.)  In  them  was  verified  the  assur- 
ance Oi  the  Lord.  (Man.  5  :  11,  12.  see  Acta 
5  .  41.) 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  Antioch  is  the  mother  of  foreign  mis- 
sions. Every  church  should  be  the  center 
of  missionary  activity.  (Ver.  1-3 ;  Matt. 
28 :  19,  20.) 

2.  Those  who  perform  present  duty  are 
most  likely  to  be  called  to  enlarged  spheres 
of  service.    (Ver.  2 ;  Mark  4  :  25.) 

3.  In  entering  on  ministerial  and  mission- 
ary service  there  should  be:  1.  Conversion  ; 
suitable  mental  talents  ;  an  earnest  desire  to 
glorify  God  .and  save  souls,  and  a  call  by  the 
Holy  Spirit  to  the  work.  2.  The  approval 
and  recognition  of  the  call  by  the  church. 
In  what  is  styled  ordination  this  call  is 
recognized  by  prayer  and  the  laying  on  of 
hands.     (Ver.  2,  3  ;  26  :  16  ;  1  Tim.  1  :  12.) 

4.  The  cause  of  missions  is  of  God.  The 
Holy  Spirit  chooses  fit  agents  for  the  work, 
and  blesses  those  sent  forth.  (Ver.  4  ;  Rom. 
15 :  18, 19.) 

5.  We  should  strive  to  enter  every  door 
opened  before  us  for  doing  good.  Paul  and 
Barnabas  at  once  entered  Cyprus,  and 
wherever  they  found  a  synagogue  they  used 
it  for  announcing  the  g'ad  tidings.  (Ver. 
5;  14:  27;  1  Cor.  1G:S,  ^7.; 

6.  Men  long  for  a  knowledge  of  God.  If 
they  do  not  accept  the  true  religion  they 
will  adopt  a  false  one.     (Ver.  6  ;  Rev.  2 :  20.) 

7.  Sergiu.s  Paulus  is  a  type  of  many  in  the 
heathen  world,  who  are  ready  to  hear  the 
word  of  God.     (Ver.  7  ;  17  :  19,  34  ;  19  :  9,  20.) 

8.  Elymas  is  a  type  of  the  worldly-wise, 
leading  away  from  God  and  opposing  the 
truth      (Ver.  8  ;  1  Cor.  1 :  21  ;  Rev  2  :  14.) 


220 


THE  ACTS. 


LCii.  XITT. 


9.  We  can  safely  rebuke  sin  and  sinners, 
il  lilled  with  the  Spirit.  (Ver.  9;  2  Tim. 
4  :  %) 

10.  We  must  sometimes  speak  with  great 
plainness  of  speech  to  the  pervertera  of  trutli, 
but  it  must  be  done  discreetly  and  with  a 
sanctified  judgment.     (Ver.  10;  Titus  1 :  13.) 

11.  "  Uow  soon  God  can  bring  down  tlie 
pride  of  m.in  and  make  him  helpless  as  an 
infant."  (Barnhs.)   (See  ver.  11 ;  Ps.  18 :  27.) 

12.  The  gospel  is  the  power  of  God  unto 
salvation  to  them  that  believe.  (Ver.  12; 
Kom.  1 :  16  ;  2  Cor.  2  :  16.) 

13.  The  servant  of  the  Lord  should  not 
leave  or  turn  aside  from  his  work  without 
great  thoughtfuluess  and  much  prayer. 
(Ver.  13;  21:12-14.) 

14.  We  should  seek  places  and  opportuni- 
ties of  doing  good.     (Ver.  14;  Gal.  6 :  10.) 

15.  While  we  should  not  intrude  ourselves 
upon  strange  congregations,  we  should  ever 
be  ready  to  give  a  reason  of  the  hope  that  is 
within  us.     (Ver.  15  ;  1  Peter  3 :  15.) 

16.  A  knowledge  of  the  history  of  God's 
people  is  of  great  advantage  to  the  preacher 
of  the  gospel.  (Ver.  16-22  ;  18  :  24  ;  Matt.  24  : 
15,  25.) 

17.  The  history  of  the  Jews  is  among  the 
strongest  arguments  for  Christianity.  (Ver. 
17-22 ;  Luke  24  :  44  ;  Matt.  24  :  15,  25.) 

18.  How  marvellous  the  patience  of  Gud 
toward  his  erring  people,  and  his  long  suf- 
ferings toward  sinners  I  (Ver.  18  ;  1  Peter 
3  :  20;  2  Peter  3  :  9.) 

19.  Nations  are  judged  in  this  world.  (Ver. 
19 ;  Jer.  12 :  17  ;  Gen.  15  :  14.) 

20.  God's  gifts  are  often  mingled  with 
chastisements,  and  the  latter  are  often  in- 
creased by  the  determination  of  his  people  to 
have  their  own  way.  (Ver.  20 ;  Deut.  8:5; 
Ueb.  12 : 5,  6.) 

21.  Obedience  to  God's  word,  the  prompt 
doing  of  his  will  is  especially  pleasing  to 
him.     (Ver.  22  ;  1  Sam.  15  :  22.) 

22.  The  New  Testament  is  hidden  in  the 
Old.  Jesus,  the  Saviour,  is  the  Fulfiller  of 
the  tyjH'S,  shadows,  and  promises  of  the  Old 
Uispensation.    (Ver.  23 ;  Heb.  10  : 1-7,  etc.) 

23.  Jesus  was  John's  Master  and  David's 
Lord.  All  prophets  and  teachers  pointed  to 
Christ.     (Ver.  24,  25  ;  10 :  36.) 

24.  Salvation  was  first  sent  to  the  Jews, 
God's  chosen  people  and  Christ's  nation  after 
the  flesh,  and  through  them  to  the  world. 
lVer.26;  John  4:  23.) 


25.  We  need  the  guidance  of  Christ  and  liis 
Spirit,  lest  the  Bible  be  a  sealed  book  to  us 
as  it  was  to  the  Jens.  (Ver.  27  ;  2  Peter  3  : 
IG  ;  Luke  24  :  45.) 

26.  Paul  was  a  model  in  presenting  the 
truth  in  such  a  manner  as  to  give  no  un- 
necessary oflFence.     (Ver  27-29  ;  17 :  22,  23.) 

27.  We  should  preach  both  the  cross  and 
the  resurrection,  a  dying  ;ind  a  living  Sav- 
iour.    (Ver.  29-31  ;  Rom.  4  :  25.) 

28.  Preachers  of  the  gospel  are  messengers 
of  glad  tidings,  announcing  a  risen  Saviour 
and  the  remission  of  sins.  (Ver.  32-34; 
Luke  24  :  46,  47.) 

29.  The  "  sure  mercies  of  David"  belong 
to  every  believer,  secured  by  an  immutable 
promise  and  a  covenant  ordered  and  sure. 
(Ver.  34;  1  Cor.  3  :  21,  22.) 

30.  He  who  serves  God  the  best  will  best 
serve  his  generation.  (Ver.  36 ;  James  5 : 
10.) 

31.  The  triumph  of  Christ  over  death  and 
the  grave  is  a  jiledge  of  alike  triumph  of  his 
people.     (Ver.  35  ;  John  14  :  19.) 

32.  The  law  was  weak  in  that  it  fixed  a 
penalty,  but  could  not  forgive;  it  condemned, 
but  could  not  justify,  cleanse  the  soul  and 
make  righteous.  (Ver.  38,  39;  Rom.  3:20; 
8:3;  Gal  3  :  19.) 

33.  Christ  has  made  a  full  atonement  for 
sin  and  wrought  out  a  perfect  righteousness, 
and  he  is  thus  the  end  of  the  law  for  right- 
eousness, and  delivers  us  from  its  curse. 
(Ver.  38,  39  ;  Rom.  10:4;  Gal.  3  :  13.) 

34.  Justification  by  faith  in  Christ  and  the 
forgiveness  of  sins  through  faith  in  him  are 
grand  peculiarites  of  the  gospel.  (Ver.  39 ; 
Rom.  8:1;  Eph.  1  :  7.) 

35.  Sinners  may  be  amazed  at  the  works 
of  God  and  yet  perish.     (Ver.  41 ;  8  :  13,  21.) 

.36.  The  greatne.«s  of  the  gospel  otfer  en- 
hances the  guilt  of  those  who  reject  it.  (Ver. 

41  ;  Heb.  2  :  3.) 

37.  Men  may  be  anxious  to  hear  the  truth 
and  not  be  savingly  benefited  by  It.    (Ver. 

42  ;  James  1 :  22.) 

38.  Though  the  blessings  of  the  gospel  are 
all  of  grace  they  are  not  to  be  attained  or 
enjoyed  without  efforts  of  our  own.  (Ver. 
43 ;  Luke  13  :  24.) 

39.  Proud  and  self-righteous  professors  are 
sometimes  annoyed  in  seeing  all  classes 
pressing  into  the  kingdom.  (Ver.  44,  45; 
Luke  15  :  28-30.) 

40.  Pr^udices  against  the  truth  may  be  ao 


Ch.  XIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


221 


Paul  and  Barnabas  at  Tconium,  Lystra, 
and  Lhrbi', ;  their  return  to  Antioch. 

14  AND  it  came  to  pass  in  Inconiuni,  that 
they  went  both  together  into  the  syna- 
gogue of  the  Jews,  and  so  spake,  that  a 


great  multitude  both  of  the  Jews  and  also 

2  of  the  Greeks  believed.  But  the  uu be- 
lieving Jews  stirred  up  the  Gentiles,  and 
made  their  minds  evil  affected  against  the 

3  brethren.    Long   time    therefore   abode 


obstinate  that  even  a  revelation  will  not  re- 
move them.    (Ver.  44,  45;  Luke  16:31.) 

41.  Sinners,  by  their  conduct,  not  only 
condemn  themselves,  but  may  also  show 
thereby  that  there  is  no  propriety  in  further 
offers  of  eternal  life  to  them.  (Ver.  46  ;  Luke 
13 :  34,  35.) 

42.  It  is  the  purpose  of  G«d  that  the  gos- 
pel should  be  carried  to  the  ends  of  the 
earth,  since  its  offers  are  designed  for  all  of 
the  human  race.    (Ver.  47  ;  Luke  24 :  47.) 

43.  "  The  conversion  of  men  is  not  an  ac- 
cident, or  an  uncertainty.  It  is  in  pursuance 
of  God's  eternal  purpose  which  embraced  it 
and  all  the  events  leading  to  it.  To  us  it  is 
disclosed  only  by  their  own  act  of  coming 
to  Christ."    (I.  P.  Warren.)    (Ver.  48.) 

44.  "  By  women  God's  kingdom  is  often 
greatly  advanced  or  retarded."  (Bbngel.) 
(Ver.  50.) 

45.  Ministers  should  so  preach  the  gospel 
as  to  be  able  to  testify  that  they  are  free 
from  the  blood  of  all  men.  (Ver.  51 ;  20  :  26, 
27.) 

46.  The  Christian  religion  is  a  joyful  re- 
ligion, notwithstanding  all  of  the  trials  and 
persecutions  that  may  attend  it.  (Ver.  52; 
Phil.  3  : 1 ;  4  :  4.) 

Ch.  14 :  This  chapter  completes 
the  account  of  Paul'.s  first  missionary 
tour.  After  completins^  their  work  at 
Iconiuni  they  visit  Lystra  and  Derhe ; 
and  from  thence  return  l)y  the  way 
they  came,  and  reaching  Attalia,  a  sea- 
]iort  of  Pami)hylia,  they  sail  to  Antioch 
of  Syria,  where  they  report  their  suc- 
cesses to  the  church. 

1-7.  Experiences  of  Pattl  and 
Barnabas  at  Iconium.  (2Tim.  smo.) 
It  was  probably  in  tlie  summer  of  A.  D. 
4(5.  They  continued  here  "a  long 
time,"  probably  several  months,  (ver.  3.) 

1.  It  came  to  pass.  This  doubt- 
less occurred  soon  after  their  coming  to 
Iconium.  (Seeon  is :  oi.)  They  wcnt, 
or  entered,  both  together  into  the 
synagogues,  which  seems  to  have 
been  not  according  to  their  usual  cus- 
tom. Both  were  led  by  the  Spirit.  So 
spake — with  such  clearness,  force,  and 


unction.  A  great  multitude  both 
of  the  Jews  and  also  of  the 
Greeks  believed.  The  synagogue 
still  contiuued  the  ))lace  for  reaching 
both  Jews  and  Gentiles,  (is  :  u)  There 
appears  no  sufficient  reason  for  restrict- 
ing the  Greeks  to  proselytes.  Paul's 
reputation  would  naturally  attract  Gen- 
tiles of  various  classes.  "  Some  deny 
that  heathen  Greeks  would  frequent 
the  synagogues,  but  such  a  practice  is 
not  only  natural  and  probable,  but  act- 
ually mentioned  in  the  classics,  which 
bear  witness  to  the  interest  felt  in 
Judaism  and  the  practice  of  attending 
its  worship,  even  in  Rome."  (J.  A. 
Alexander.)  The  great  success  of 
the  gospel  here  doubtless  aroused  the 
jealousy  of  the  Jews  and  thus  led  to 
the  banishment  of  Paul  and  Barnabas. 

2.  But  the  unbelieving  Jews — 
those  who  disbelieved,  or  disobeyed,  for 
the  original  suggests  both  ideas — that  is, 
those  who  rejected  the  gospel.  To  dis- 
believe was  to  disobey,  and  to  reject 
included  both.  Stirred  up  the  Gen- 
tiles and  made  their  minds  evil 
affected — made  them  ho,stile  and  ma- 
lignant against  the  brethren,  the 
new  converts,  both  Jews  and  Gentiles. 
Brethren  was  a  favorite  term  by  which 
the  disciples  designated  themselves. 
(9 :  30.)  It  has  been  noted  that  all  but 
two  (16:19;  19:2.3)  of  the  many  persecu- 
tions recorded  in  the  Acts  were  oc- 
casioned by  the  Jews.  How  they  could 
have  thus  influenced  the  Gentiles  is 
not  told.  Very  likely  by  arousing 
their  political  prejudices  against  Paul 
and  Barnalias  as  preachers  of  another 
kingdom  than  that  of  Cfesar.  (is :  I'O,  n.) 
And  their  ministry  against  idolatry 
(i9:2«)  may  have  made  the  heathen 
Gentiles  more  ready  to  be  influenced. 

3.  Therefore— an  inference,  not 
only  of  ver.  1,  but  also  of  ver.  2.  Not 
the  great  success  of  the  gospel  alone, 
but  also  the  obstacles  ])roduced  by  the 
Jews  among  the  Gentiles,  prolonged 
their  stay.  The  first  rendered  con- 
tinued efforts  desirable,  the  second 
made  it  necessary,  so  as  to  counteract 


222 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIV. 


they  speaking  boldly  in  the  Lord,'  which 
gave  testimony  unto  the  word  of  his 
grace,  and  granted  signs  and  wonders  to 
be  done  by  their  hands. 

But  the  multitude  of  the  city  was  di- 
vided :  and  part  held  with  the  Jews,  and 


5  part  with  the  f  apostles.  And  when  there 
was  an  assault  made  both  of  the  Gentiles, 
and  also  of  ;the  Jews,  with  their  rulers, 
e  to  use  Ihem  despitefully,   and   to  stoue 

6  them,  they  were  aware  of  it,  and  •>  fled 
unto  Lystra  and  Derbe,  cities  of  Lycaonia, 


'  Mark  16  :  20 ;  Heb.  2:4.        '  ch.  13  :  2,  3.        8  2  Tim.  15  •.  11.        h  Matt.  10  :  23. 


and  overcome,  if  possible,  the  disafFec- 
tioii.  Long  time  therefore — liter- 
ally, sufficitnt  timr  to  accoiii]>lisli  tlieir 
work  under  such  difficulties.  The 
Greek  word  when  used  of  time  is  in- 
definite, tlie  lengtli  of  time  being  in- 
ferred from  t!ic  context  and  the  circum- 
stances. It  may  be  used  of  a  few  hours 
or  of  many  months.     (See  8 :  u ;  20 :  ii ;  27 : 

9  ;  Luke  W  :  9 ;  8  :  27 ;  -.'3  :  8.)      A    feW    mOUths 

answers  well  the  discription  here. 
Speaking   boldly    in   the   Lord — 

literally,  upon,  in  reliance  upon  the 
Lord.  Their  dependence  u]ion  the 
Lord  Jesus  gave  them  boldness.  >Vho 
gave  testimony,  or  bare  wilness  to 
the  word  of  his  grace,  the  gracious 
proclamation  of  the  gospel.  "A  noble 
definition  of  the  gospel."  (Bexgel.) 
And  granted,  ^l/irf  should  be  omitted 
according  to  the  best  critical  authori- 
ties. The  Lord  attested  their  preach- 
ing by  granting  signs  and  tronders  to 
be  done  by  their  hands.  These  signs 
were  Christ's  approval  of  their  work, 
not  the  means  of  conversion.  A  great 
multitude  was  converted  before ;  how 
great  the  fruit  of  their  preaching  after 
we  are  not  told. 

4.  The  embittered  feelings  take  tang- 
ible shajie  and  organized  form.  The 
multitude  of  the  city — the  Gentiles. 
The  interest  and  consequent  excitcnu'ut 
became  so  great  that  the  populace  take 
sides  throughout  the  city.  Apostles. 
Here  and  in  ver.  14  this  term  is  aj)- 
))lied  to  both  Paul  and  Barnabas.  So 
also  perhaps  to  Timothy  and  Silvanus 
in  connection  with  Paul  in  1  Thess.  2  :  7. 
Some  have  regarded  Rom.  16  :  7  as  a 
similar  a])plicatiou,  but  there  Andron- 
ieus  and  Junias,  or  Junia,  are  spoken 
of  as  jicrsons  "  of  note  among  the  ajios- 
tles,"  that  is,  highly  regarded  by  them. 
It  should  be  noted  that  in  no  instance 
are  these  companions  of  Paul  called 
apostles  when  spoken  of  alone,  but  only 
as  associated  with  him,  in  the  above 
examples.  They  cannot,  therefore,  be  re- 


garded as  apostles  in  the  highest  offi- 
cial sense.  In  a  general  sense  of  the 
word  they  were  missionaries,  or  mes- 
sengers, and  as  eminent  teachers  and  as 
associated  u^ith  Paul  in  aj)ostulie  work 
they  could  lie  brietiy  and  in  a  general 
way  styled  apostles. 

5.  And  when,  or  as,  indicating  tlie 
time  and  tlie  cause  of  the  fliglit  men- 
tioned in  ver.  6.  An  assault.  The 
word  thus  translated  means  any  violent 
movement  onicard  and  is  especially 
api)lied  to  the  be.ginning  or  Jirst  stir 
toward  a  thing.  It  is  found  elsewhere 
in  the  New  Testament  oidy  in  James 
3  :  4,  where  the  Revised  Version  prop- 
erly translates  it  impulse.       But  ivi- 

!  pu/se  seems  hardly  strong  enough  here, 
while  assault  or  onset  seems  too  strong, 

i  "  because,"  as  Dr.    Hackett  remarks, 

"having  become  aAvare  (ver.  e) 
would  then  be  su])erttuous,  and  because 
the  object  of  the  fiightwas  to  escape  an 
attack."  It  is  1)ettcr  to  regard  it  as 
descriptive  of  the  beginning  of  an 
assault, — a  start,  or  a  moveiiieut,  vas 
made  .  .  .  to  abuse  and  stone  them. 
Notice   the   exact    agreement   between 

j  Luke's  account  of  an  attem])t  to  stone 
them  which  was  not  carried  out  and 
Paul's  record  in  2  Cor.  11  :  25,  "  Once 
was  I  stoned,"  which  occurred  at  Lys- 
tra. (Ver.  19.)  "  Truth  is  necessarily 
consistent,  but  it  is  scarcely  possible 
that  independent  accounts,  not  having 
truth  to  guide  them,  should  tints 
advance  to  the  very  brink  of  contradic- 
tion witiiout  falling  into  it."   (Paley.) 

I  Their  rulers — Gentile  magistrates 
and  officers  of  the  synagogue. 

{>.  Continuation  of  the  sentence 
begun  in  tlic  preceding  verse.  They 
were  aware,  or  became  aware  of  it, 
probalily  by  iciwrt  or  information;  as 
of  the  ho.'itile  designs  of  tlie  Jews  at 
Damascus,  wlien  Paul  fled.  (9 : 2«) 
Their  flight  showed,  not  cowardice,  but 

:  ))riidence,  and  was  in  obedience  to  our 

I  Lord's  command,  "  When  they  perse- 


Ch.  XIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


223 


and  unto  the  region  that  lieth   round 

7  alwut :    and    there    they    preached    the 
gospel. 

8  '  And  there  sat  a  certain  man  at  Lystra, 


impotent  in  his   fi-et,   ticing  a   cripple, 

from  his  mother's  wonil),  who  never  had 

9  walked  :  the  same  hoard  I'aul  speak :  who 

k  sieadfestly  beholding  him,  and  '  perceiv- 


ich.  3:2.        k  seech.  3:4.        i  Matt.  8  :  10 ;  9  :  21,  22,  28,  29 ;  21  :  22. 


cute  you  in  one  city,  flee  into  another." 
(Matt.  10:23.)      Lystra    and     Derbe. 

Their  site  is  unknown.  Lystra  was 
between  Iconiumand  Derbe,  and  Derbe 
between  Lystra  and  Oilicia ;  for  when 
Paul  was  on  his  way  from  Cilicia  he 
reached  Derbe  first  (i6:i),  and  ingoing 
from  Derl)e  to  Icouium  lie  passed 
through  Lystra.  Both  towns  were  in- 
ha!)ited  by  a  rough  hardy  people,  wlio 
had  been  but  little  aftected  by  Greek, 
lloman,  or  Jewish  influence.  The  most 
probable  site  of  Lystra  was  the  eastern 
part  of  the  great  plain  of  Lycaonia, 
about  forty  miles  southeast  of  Iconium, 
and  at  tlie  ruins  now  called  Binbir- 
kilesseh,  a  Turkish  town,  Avhere  are  tlie 
remains  of  numerous  churches.  And 
this  accords  with  the  early  Christian 
history  of  this  city,  the  names  of  its 
pastors  api^earing  in  the  records  of  early 
councils.  Derbe  was  probably  about 
twenty  miles  southeast  of  Lystra,  on  or 
near  the  great  road  from  Tarsus  which 
passes  through  the  Taurus  range  by  a 
difficult  pass,  called  the  Cilician  Gates, 
thence  entering  upon  the  great  upland 
plain  of  Lycaonia,  northwest  to  Icon- 
ium. Difierent  sites  in  this  region  have 
been  assigned  to  Derbe.  A  small  vil- 
lage in  a  wild  valley  among  the  mount- 
ains, called  Divle,  is  one  of  these  sites. 
A  ciiurch  was  planted  at  Derbe  (ver2i.) 
and  Gains  was  also  a  native  here,  who 
became  a  friend  and  companion  of 
Paul.  (-'0:4.)  We  may  note  the  accu- 
racy of  Luke,  that  no  persecution  in 
Derbe  is  recorded  in  this  chapter  and 
none  in  2  Tim.  3  :  10,  11,  wliere  Paul 
refers  to  persecutions  suiiered  in  tbis 
journey.  Timothy  prolialily  lived  at 
Lystra,  as  he  knew  of  Paul's  persecu- 
tions, and  was  probably  converted  under 
Paul's  ministry  at  this  time.  (i6:i;i 
Cor.  * :  15, 17.)  Lycaoiiia  was  a  district, 
not  very  carefully  defined,  extending 
from  the  Taurus  mountains  and  Cilicia 
on  the  south  to  Cappadocia  on  the  north. 
It  is  a  desolate  region,  unwatered  l)y 
streams,  but  said  to  be  favorable  to 
sheep  raising.    It  was  inhabited  by  a 


fierce  and  warlike  people,  who  had  a 
language  of  their  own.  (ver.  a.)  The 
region  that   lieth    round    about. 

Paul  and  Barnaijas  did  not  confiue 
their  ministry  to  tliese  two  cities,  but 
extended  it  into  the  country  and  vil- 
lages l)etween  them,  and  in  their 
vicinity. 

7.  Continuation  from  the  preceding 
verse.  There  they  preaehed— 
rather,  were  preachuig,  implying  tliat 
for  some  time  they  were  there  publish- 
ing the  glad  tidings  of  salvation. 

8-18.  Paul's  Miraci.I';  at  Lystra, 
AND  ITS  Effect  upon  the  Peopi.i:. 

(F.xod.  20:  II;  Ps.  U6:C.)        It    WaS    probalilv 

in  the  autumn  of  A.  D.  4(3  that  Paul 
and  Barnal>as  came  to  Lystra,  and  some 
months  must  have  been  occupied  here 
and  in  the  surrounding  country.  (See  on 
yer.  7.)  Compare  tlie  miracle  wrought 
by  Peter,  which  tliis  resembles.     (S:  2  f) 

8.  There  sat  a  certain  nian^ 
prol)ably  in  the  market  i)lace,  or  in 
some  thoroughfare  of  the  city,  wliere 
Paul  was  preaching,  since  there  is  no 
mention  of  any  synagogue  in  Lystra. 
His  friends  may  have  lirought  him 
hither  to  beg  alms,  like  tlie  one  men- 
tioned in  ,3  :  2.  He  was  impotent 
in  his  feet,  unahle  to  use  them,  a 
cripple,  wlio  perhaps  could  cree]) 
about  upon  his  hands  and  knees,  but 
who  never  bad  walked.  As  this 
had  been  his  condition  from  his  birtli, 
his  case  would  be  regarded  as  incura- 
ble and  hopeless.  Notice  liow  miiiutely 
Luke,  the  physician,  describes  the 
malady. 

9.  The  same  heard  Paul  speak- 
hig,  teaching  and  jircacliing  concern- 
ing Jesus.  Paul's  interest  in  the  crip- 
ple is  aroused,  and  steadfastly  be- 
holding him,  probably  to  ascertain 
through  tbe  Spirit's  aid  his  actual  con- 
dition, both  physical  and  spiritual. 
And  perceiving,  from  t'.ic  expression 
of  his  countenance,  wliich  Paul  knew 
to  be  a  true  index  to  his  soul,  that  the 
man  had  faith  to  be  healed — literally, 
to  be  saved.    It  would  seem  that  the 


224 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIV 


10  ing  that  he  had  faith  to  he  heiiltd,  said 
with  a  loud  voice,  "» stand  upright  ou  thy 
feet.    And  he  leaped  and  walked. 


doue,  they  lifted  up  their  voices,  saying 
in  the  speech  of  Lycaonia,  "The  gods  are 
come  down  to  us  in  the  likenet^s  of  n)en. 


11      And  when  thepeoplesawwhatPaulhad    12  And  they  called  Barnabas,  J  uiuter  ;  and 


ch.  3  :  6-8;  Isa.  3.5  :  C.        a  ch.  8  :  10 ;  2ti  :  G. 


cripple  exercised,  not  only  what  had  | 
been  styled  a  faith  of  miracles,  an  as-  I 
snrance  that  he  could  and  -would  be 
healed,  but  also  a  saAing  faith  of  sal-  ' 
vatiou  through  Jesus  Christ,     lie  had 
listened  to    Paul's    preaching  on    the 
death  and  resurrection,  tlie  power  and 
Avorks,  of  Christ,  and  he  showed  by  his 
ajjpearance  that  he  accepted  these  great 
truths  and  facts  as  suited  and  apjdica- 
ble   to   himself.      "While   the   cripple 
liears   the  word,  he  feels  its  power  in 
his  soul."     (Bengel.) 

10.  Said  with  a  loud  voice, 
Stand  upright  on  thy  feet.  He 
never  had  walked  before.  A  few  manu- 
scripts add,  I  say  to  you  in  the  name  of 
the  Lord  Jcnus  Chrigt,  but  most  of  tlie 
old  manuscripts  omit  the  words,  as  an 
interpolation  in  part  from  3  :  6.  Paul 
doubtless  uttered  or  implied  similar 
words.  He  was  at  the  time  speaking 
of  Jesus,  and  if  the  cripple  had  been 
taught  and  had  just  accepted  the  Sav- 
iour, Paul  needed  not  so  much  to  men- 
tion that  name  which  they  i)oth  under- 
stood to  be  the  source  of  salvation. 
Indicative  of  a  soul  full  of  faith,  he 
leaped,  gjjrang  iip  and  valkrd  about. 
Ilis  cure  was  instantaneous  and  com- 
plete. The  i)rincipal  diiferences  be- 
tween this  miracle  and  that  in  chapter 
3  are:  1.  The  lame  man  in  Jerusalem 
desired  and  hoped  to  receive  alms  even 
after  Peter  bade  him  look  on  him. 
But  the  cripple  at  Lystra  had  already 
been  an  attentive  listener  to  Piuil.  2. 
Peter  took  the  lame  man  by  the  liand 
and  lifted  him  up ;  but  the  cripi>le 
sprang  up  without  Paul's  assistance. 
He  was  in  the  audience  which  Paul 
was  addressing,  perhaps  in  the  out- 
skirts, some  little  distance  from  tlie 
apostle. 

11.  The  nide  Lycaonians  at  once 
perceived  in  the  miracle  of  Paul  the 
manifestation  of  supernatural  ])ower. 
(See  Mark  5: 12.)  But  their  exclamations 
and  conduct  showed  that  they  very 
imperfectly  understood  his  preaching. 
They  impulsively  lift  up  their  voices, 


and  very  naturally  in  their  excited 
condition  use  their  native  dialect,  the 
speech  of  Lycaonia,  instead  of 
the  Greek  which  the  missionaries 
had  sijoken,  and  which  was  the  ordi- 
nary language  of  commerce  in  the 
cities  of  Asia  Minor.  Tliis  iij)peais 
to  have  been  a  peculiar  and  stninge 
tongue,  the  cliaracter  of  wliich  cannot 
be  determined.  Some  have  regarded 
it  as  a  corrupt  dialect  of  the  Creek  ; 
others,  that  it  was  allied  to  the  Assy- 
rian. This  affords  tlie  reason,  at  least 
in  part,  for  the  delay  of  the  apostles 
in  refusing  divine  honor  until  they 
heard  the  j)riest  approachiuir  with  the 
victims  and  the  garlands,  (vcr.  i:i.)  But 
much  of  this  was  said  and  done  away 
from  the  apostles,  who  "  rusJi  forth  " 
when  they  heard  of  it.  (ver.  u.)  Xei- 
ther  their  inspiration  nor  their  gift  of 
tongties  appear  to  have  been  called  into 
use  at  this  time,  (i  Cor.  i4 :  is.)  The  gods 
are  come  down  to  us  in  the  like- 
ness of  men — this  language  agrees 
with  the  general  belief  of  the  heathen, 
and  with  the  local  superstitions  and 
traditions  of  this  verj-  country,  related 
in  one  of  the  fables  of  Ovid,  who  also 
relates  the  visit  of  Jupiter  and  Mer- 
cury in  the  form  of  men  to  Philemon 
and  Baucis  in  the  adjacent  jnovince  of 
Phrygia.  Very  likely  this  idea  was  at 
first  suggested  by  some  one,  and  at 
once  accepted  as  a  fact,  and  taken  up 
by  the  multitude. 

12.  They  called  Barnabas, 
Jupiter,  or  Zru.s,  the  Greek  name 
answering  to  Jupiter,  who  was  regarded 
as  the  highest  and  most  powerful  among 
the  heathen  gods.  And  they  called 
Paul  IJrrmrf:,  the  name  in  Greek 
answering  to  Mercury,  the  messenger 
of  the  cods,  the  god  of  eloquence  and 
prudence,  and  an  attendant  of  Jn])iter 
in  his  expeditions.  In  ancient  art 
Jupiter  is  represented  as  large ;  Mer- 
cury as  small.  Besides,  Jupiter  had  a 
temple  in  front  of  the  city  gates.  As 
Paul  was  the  chief  or  leading 
speaker,  they  conclude  that   he    is 


Ch.  XIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


225 


Paul,  Mercurius.becnuse  he  was  the  chief    14   WHch  when  the  apostles,  Barnabas  and 


13  speaker.  Then  the  priesis  of  Jupiter, 
which  was  before  tlieir  city,  brought 
oxeu  and  garlands  unto  the  gates,  "and 
would  have  done  sacritice  with  the  people. 


Paul,  heard  of,  rthey  rent  their  clot)its 
and  ran  in  among  the  people,  crying  out, 
and  saying,  Sirs,  why  do  ye  these  things  I 
1  We  also  are  men  of  like  passions  with 


•  Dan.  2  :  46.        P  Num.  14  :  6.       1  ch.  3  :  12 ;  10  :  26  ;  James  5:17;  Rev.  19  :  10. 


Mercury,  the  attendant  of  Jupiter, 
whom  they  conchi(U'  Haniahas  to  he. 
The  silent,  hirger,  andohler  ajipearance 
of  Barnahas  may  also  have  coutirmed 
them  in  this  impression.  Perhaps  also 
we  may  infer  that  Paul  was  small  of 
stature  from  the  statement  of  his  ene- 
mies that  his  bodily  presence  was  weak 
(2  Cor.  10: 1,  in),  which  must  be  taken 
witli  some  allowance,  as  the  estimate  of 
dislike  and  prejudice.  The  book  of 
the  Acts  gives  many  illustrations  of 
his  power  as  a  speaker. 

13.  The  excited  multitude  at  once 
proceed  to  act  on  their  conclusion  and 
to  oft'er  sacrifice.  The  priest — ^who 
may  have  been  present,  or  tlie  princi- 
pal one,  or  the  most  active  one,  for 
there  must  have  been  a  mimlier  of  them 
at  Lystra.  Of  Jupiter  which— w/jo 
v'Ks  before  the  city,  whose  statue  and 
whose  temple  Avas  there.  Hence  the 
Revised  Version  renders  whose  temple 
was  before  the  cit;/,  near  its  chief  en- 
trance. Brought  oxen,  or  buf/s  (Heh. 
9:ir>;io:4),  the  most  costly  victims, 
wliieh  the  heatlieu  were  accustomed  to 
offer  to  Jupiter,  and  sometimes  to  ^ler- 
cury.  Here  tlie  sacrifice  was  intended 
for  both.  Garlands,  or  crowns,  es- 
pecially for  the  victims.  The  priests 
and  the  altar  were  also  often  thus 
adorned.  Unto  the  gates  of  the  city 
just  spoken  of.  The  word  translated 
gates  is  used  by  Luke  elsewliere,  in  tlie 
singular  number,  with  reference  to 
tlie  door  of  a  house.  (lO:  i7;  12:  i3,  u; 
i.uke  16 :  20.)  Heucc  somc  understand  the 
door  of  tlie  house,  where  Paul  and 
Barnabas  were  lodging ;  but  this  re- 
quires the  supposition  that  they  re- 
turned to  the  house  in  the  meantime. 
Besides,  the  plural  is  used,  expressive 
of  the  parts,  as  being  doul)le,  of  city 
gates.  So  the  plural  is  used  else- 
where in  the  New  Testament.  (Rev.  21 : 
12, 13, 15, 21,25;  22 :  u.)  Would  have  done 
sacrifice — was  just  about  to  offer 
sacrifice  when  Paul  and  Barnai>as 
sprang  in  upon  the  scene   and    pre- 


vented. With  the  people — with  the 
crowd  who  attended  to  witness  and 
approve. 

14.  Which  when — rather,  7?«/ the 
apostles,  as  in  ver.  4.  Notice  that 
Barnabas  is  very  naturally  named 
first,  as  in  the  scene  described,  regank-d 
as  Jupiter,  for  whom  principally  tiie 
■sacrifice  was  intended.  Heard — not 
the  tumult,  but  what  tlie  multitude  was 
proposing  to  do.  How  they  heard  is 
not  told ;  perhaps  one  of  the  converts, 
or  one  of  the  few  Jews  residing  there 
reported  it  to  them.  Preparations  for 
this  act  of  worship  must  have  been 
going  on  for  perhaps  an  hour  or  more ; 
for  they  seemed  to  be  all  comidete 
l)efore  the  missionaries  were  aware  of 
them.  They  rent  their  clothes^ 
from  the  neck  in  front  downward 
toward  the  girdle,  either  tlieir  outer 
garments,  or  perhaps  both  the  inner 
and  outer  garments.  This  was  a  com- 
mon Oriental  method  of  expressing 
grief  and  horror,  or  indignation  and 
abhorrence  of  impiety  or  blasj)hemy. 
(2 .Sam.  1 : 2;  Matt. 26:65.)  And  ran  in, 
etc.  Rather,  according  to  the  most  ap- 
proved Greek  text.  And  rushed  forth 
among  the  multitude — from  the  place 
where  they  were  teaching  or  resting, 
probably  through  the  city  gates  into  the 
midst  of  the  multitude  who  were  gatli- 
ered  for  sacrifice  before  the  temi)le  of 
Jupiter.  Crying  out,  with  a  loud 
voice,  shouting.  The  narrative  is  very 
vivid.  They  plunge  into  the  excited 
crowd  vociferating,  interrujiting,  and 
putting  a  stop  to  tlie  impious  service. 
Compare  Peter's  refusal  to  receive 
homage  of  Cornelius  (10 :  25),  and  con- 
trast Herod  Agrippa's  readiness  to 
accept  divine  honors.     (12 :  22.) 

15.  Getting  the  attention  of  the 
people,  they  utter  their  solemn  protests. 
This  is  generally  regarded  as  Paul's  ad- 
dress, as  he  was  the  chief  soeaker 
(ver.  12),  and  from  the  similarity  in 
thought  with  his  address  at  Athens 
(17 : 2428)  and  with  Rom.  1  :  ly,  20.  But 


226 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIV. 


you,  and  jireacb  unto  you  that  ye  should 
turn  from  'these  vauilies  sunto  the 
living  (jod,  which  made  heaven,  and 
earth,  and  the  sea,  and  all  things  that  are 

16  therein.    «Who  in  times  past  sufl'ered  all 
nations   to    walk    in    their   own    ways. 

17  "  Nevertheless  he  left  not  himself  without 


witnes",  in  that  he  did  good,  and  'gave 
us  rain  from  heaven,  and  Iruitful  seasons, 
filling  our  hearts  with  food  and  gladness. 
18  And  with  these  sayings  scarce  restrained 
they  the  people,  that  they  had  not  done 
sacrifice  unto  them. 


'  Deut.  32  :  21  ;  1  Cor.  8:4.  «  Deut.  5  :  20 ;  Jcr.  10  :  ll-lo  ;  1  Thess.  1:9.  t  ch.  17  : 
30.  «  ch.  17  :  27 ;  Ps.  19  :  1-4 ;  Rom.  1  :  19,  20.  »  Lev.  26  :  4 ;  Deut.  11  :  14  ;  Ps.  147  :  8 
Matt.  5  :  45. 


Barnabas  must  have  earnestly  joined  iu 
tlie  jirotest.  We  have  the  substance  of 
what  they  said.  Compare  13:  16-40, 
aud  notice  how  dift'crent  Paul's  method 
in  reaching  Jews  and  devout  Gentiles. 
Sirs — literally,  Ye  inen.  Why  do  ye 
these  things  ?  A  (juestion  implying 
strong  disapproval  and  expostulation, 
the  reason  for  which  immediately  fol- 
lows. Ye  are  men,  and  so  we  also 
are  men — and  that  too  of  like  pas- 
sions Avith  you,  of  like  feelings, 
affections,  and  sufferings,  similarly  con- 
stituted and  j)artakers  of  like  infirmi- 
ties, aud  consequently  not  divine.  The 
word  of  like  passioiiti  is  emjdiatic  here. 
It  is  only  found  elsewhere  in  the  New 
Testament  iu  James  5:17,  which  com- 
j)are.  So  far  from  being  objects  of 
divine  honors,  we  are  missionaries, 
announcing  to  you  that  ye  should 
turn  from  these  vanities,  such  as 
your  idols  and  your  idol-worship  (prob- 
ably j)ointing  to  the  temple  of  Jupiter 
and  to  their  sacrifices)  to  the  living 
God,  iu  contrast  to  their  lifeless  im- 
ages aud  imaginary  gods.  (i>a-  m :  is--.'6.) 
Tmis  Jehovah  is  designateil  iu  the  Old 

Testament.  (Ocut.  5  :26;  Josh.  3  :  10;  1  Sain. 
17  : 'JS.   Coinpirel  Cor.  8:  4.)      As    SUch     lie    is 

life-giving  (vatt.  16 :  16),  the  Creator  of 
heaven,  and  earth,  and  the  sea, 

tlie  three  divisions  of  the  universe,  to 
eac!i  of  wliicli  tlu'  heathen  assigned  its 
inirticular  god.  The  words  are  quoted 
from  I's.  14ij :  0.  That  tliey  could  turn 
by  rej)eutauco  to  the  living  God  was 
indeed  irlad  tidings. 

IG.  lie  accounts  for  their  ignorance 
of  tlie  true  God.  Mho  in  times  past 
— rather,  who  in  generations  or  ages 
gone  bi/.  The  ages  are  the  spaces  of 
time  of  about  thirty -three  years,  ordi- 
narily occupied  by  each  successive  gen- 
eration. (Col.  1:26.)  Suffered — mildly 
im[)lying  their  responsibility  for  their 
ignorance  aud  idolatry.    (Eom.  i :  20-23.) 


All  nations,  or  all  the  Gentiles,  since 
the  reference  is  to  all  outside  of  Israel. 
To  Avalk  in  their  OAvn  Avays — in 

idolatry  which  they  themselves  began. 
Tlieir  superstitions  and  courses  of  life 
accorded  with  their  own  desires  and 
tastes.  These  Avere  the  ages  of  igno- 
rance, at  which  God  winked,     (i" :  ao.) 

17.  Nevertheless  —  the  heathen 
were  not  guiltless,  since  he  left  not 
himself  without  Avitness  of  his  ex- 
istence, his  power,  aud  his  goodness, 
aud  hence  of  their  dependence  on  and 
oI)ligation  to  him.  This  "lies  at  the 
foundation  of  his  argument  for  proving 
the  accountabilitv  of  the  heathen  in 
Rom.  1:  1ft,  f.""  (Hackett.)  Com- 
pare Rom.  2  :  12-15,  where  Paul  states 
that  God  also  gave  an  internal  moral 
witness  of  himself.  How  God  left  hiin.<;elf 
not  without  witness  is  briefly  outlined : 
In  that  he  did  good,  and  gave 
us  rain  IVom  heaven,  and  fruit- 
ful seasons,  filling  your  hearts 
with  food  and  gladness.  Notice 
tlie  reference  to  rain  in  a  province 
where  water  is  .so  scarce  that  it  is  said 
to  have  been  sometimes  sold  for  money. 
Notice  also  that  it  is  the  hearts  and  not 
the  stomachs  that  are  filled  and  abun- 
dantly satisfied.  The  mind  or  soul  is 
regarded  as  the  scat  of  all  enjoyment. 
Such  blessings,  ])roductive  of  such  joy, 
should  lead  the  lieart  up«  ard  in  grati- 
tude to  God.  Tliis  address  is  worthy  of 
study,  on  account  of  its  adroitness  and 
carefulness  iu  treating  the  idolatry  of 
tlie  people,  being  suited  to  produce  con- 
viction without  irritation.  "  It  is  a 
strong  though  incidental  proof  of  au- 
thenticity, that  when  the  apostles  ad- 
dress heathen  hearers,  unacquainted 
even  with  the  Hebrew  Scriptures,  they 
liegin  with  the  truths  of  natural  theol- 
ogy, and  not  l>y  appealing  to  the 
prophecies  or  proving  the  Messiahship 
of  Jesus,    as   they   did   in    their  ad- 


Cu.  XIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


227 


19  TAnd  there  came  thither  certain  Jews 
from  Autiouh  and  Icouium,  who  per- 
suaded the  people,  '  and,  having  stoned 
Paul,  drew  him  out  of  the  city , » supposing 

20  he  had  been  dead.    Howbeit,  as  the  disci- 


ples stood  around  about  him,  he  rose  up, 
and  came  into  the  city. 
21      Aud  tlie  next  day  he  departed  with 
Barnabas  to   Derbe.     And ;  when    they 
had  preached  the   gospel  to  that  city, 


J  ch.  13  :  45. 


■  2  Cor.  11  :  2"» ;  2  Tim.  3  :  11. 


2  Cor.  11  :  23. 


dresses    to    the    Jews.     (2:i6-36,  etc.)  " 
(Alexander.) 

18.  The  result  attained.  M  itk 
these  sayings  thei/  with  diljiculty 
restrained  the  multitude  from  sucrijic- 
iiKj  to  them.  The  expression  is  a  strong 
and  vivid  one.  It  is  taken  for  granted 
tliat  Paul  and  Barna1>as  claimetl  to 
have  wrouglit  the  miracle  through  the 
power  of  tfieir  risen  Lord. 

iy-28.  Pail  axu  Baknabas  pro- 
ceed TO  Dekbe,  and  then  Retrace 
THEIR  Steps  to  Antioch,  in  Syria. 
Tiie  stoning  of  Paul.  (-'  Cor.  ii :  -25.)  prob- 
al)ly  the  winter  and  summer  of  A.  D.  47. 
19.  Jews  from  Antioch  and 
Iconium,  who  had  been  the  means  of 
driving  the  missionaries  from  their 
cities.  The  news  of  tlieir  preaciiing 
and  of  healing  the  cripj)le  had  spread 
even  to  Antioeh  of  Pisidia,  more  than 
a  hundred  miles  distant.  All  this  took 
time,  and  also  gave  time  for  the  revul- 
sion of  feeling  at  Lystra,  which  is  now 
to  he  described.  This  would  ^irobably 
take  them  into  the  winter  of  A.  D.  47. 
Persuaded  the  people — doubtless 
misrepresenting  what  Paul  and  Barna- 
bas hail  done  at  Antioch  and  Iconium  ; 
telling  how  they  had  been  expelled 
from  those  cities,  and  perhaps  imput- 
ing their  miraculous  power  to  evil 
spirits.  (Matt.  12:2+)  By  such  means 
they  got  the  consent  and  active  co-oi>e 
ration  of  the  i)eople,  the  multitude. 
The  more  exact  translation,  haviivj 
persuaded  the  multitude  atid  hariiig 
stoned  Paul,  gives  more  clearly  the 
meaning.  These  Jews  were  not  only 
theinstigatorsof  an  infuriated  mob,  but 
also  the  leaders  in  the  stoning.  This 
agrees  with  the  fact  that  stoning  was  a 
Jewisli  punishment ;  and  they  had  no 
scruple  in  inflicting  it  in  a  heathen 
city.  Not  so  at  .Jerusalem.  (7:5«)  This 
change  of  feeling  agrees  with  the  repu- 
tation of  the  Lycaonians,  who  are  said 
to  liave  been  proverbially  fickle  and 
faithless.  Paul  refers  to  his  experi- 
ence in  2  Cor.  11  :  25,  "  Once  was  I 


stoned."  The  agreement  of  Paul  with 
the  Acts,  as  well  as  the  Jewish  mode  of 
execution  in  a  hciithen  city,  under  the 
leadership  of  Jews,  go  to  show  the 
accuracy  of  Luke.  Drew  —  rather 
dratjged  him  out  of  the  city,  not  for 
burial,  but  for  exj>osure  As  for  Iturial, 
his  friends  and  disciples  could  attend 
to  that.  Supposing  he  had  been 
dead,  or  that  he  had  died,  although 
he  was  not  actiuilly  ilead. 

20.  Howbeit,"  etc.  But  the  dis- 
ciples haeing  encircled,  or  gathered 
about  him,  after  his  persecutors  had 
left  liim.  They  hail  anxiously  watched 
the  proceedings,  perhaps  had  attended 
tlie  crowd,  or  followed  close  after.  They 
gatiier  sorrowfully  around  Paul,  not  to 
Itury,  but  to  ascertain  his  condition. 
This  shows  that  his  work  had  not  been 
in  vain  in  Lystra.  Among  them  ])os- 
sil)ly  stood  young  Timothy,  who  prob- 
ably witnessed  this  persecution,  (ifi:  i ; 
2Tiin.  3: 11.)  Perhaps  liere  lie  consecrated 
liis  life  to  ministerial  service.  Con- 
trast the  blaster  left  alone  at  Geth- 
semane.  (Ma.kuisn.),  and  Paul  stir- 
rounded  with  sympathizing  discijdcs. 
He  rose  up  and  came  into  the 
city — showing  himself  probal)ly  only 
to  the  converts.  Some  suj)j)0,se  that 
Paul  was  only  stunned,  or  that  he 
swooned  ;  and  that  rising  u]>  and  going 
into  the  city  does  not  necessarily  imply 
his  usual  activity  and  vigor.  Yet  his 
sudden  restoration,  so  as  to  be  able  to 
travel  tlie  next  day  after  such  an  out- 
rage, would  seem  to  be  miraculous. 
With  Barnabas  —  who  a]>pears  to 
have  suffered  no  violence.  Paul  Avas 
more  positive  and  aggressive  against 
heathenism  and  Judaism  ;  he  was 
also  the  chief  speaker,  and  the  one  to 
suffer.     Derbe.     See  on  ver.  6. 

21.  At  Derbe  and  its  vicinity,  Paul 
and  Barnal)as  reachetl  the  extreme 
limit  of  this  missionary  journey.  It  is 
])robably  winter,  and  they  continue 
their  labors  here  till  spring.  When 
they  had  preached  the  gospel  to 


228 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIV. 


band  had  taugbt  many,  they  returned 
again  to  Lyslra^  and  lu  Icouium,  and  Au- 
22  tioch,  "coutiruiiiig  the  souls  of  the  dis- 
ciples, and  4  exhoi-ting  them  to  continue 


in  the  faith,  and  that  •  we  must  through 

much  tribulation  enter  into  the  kingdom 

23  of  God.    And  when  they  had  f  ordained 

them  e  elders  in  every  church,  and  had 


l>  Matt.  28  ;  19.  <=  ch.  18  :  23 ;  Isa.  35  :  3 ;  1  Thoss.  3  :  2-4.  d  ch.  11  :  23  ;  13  :  43 ;  Col. 
1  :  23.  •  Matt.  10  :  21,  22,  3S  ;  Luke  22  :  2S,  29 ;  John  lU  :  1,  2,  33  ;  Eom.  8  :  17 ;  2  Tim.  2  :  11, 
12 ;  3  :  12  ;  1  Peter  4  :  12-l(j.         f  ch.  1  :  22  ;  2  Tim.  2:2;  Titus  1:5.        g  ch.  11  ;  :50. 


that  city.  The  idea  suggested  is, 
that  this  was  tiioroiighly  done.  And 
had  taught  many  —  rather,  made 
uuuieroiis  disciides.  Of  whom  Gains 
was  i)rol)aI)ly  oue.  (20 :i.)  In  each 
of  the  principal  cities  tliey  visit 
they  gatlier  a  congregation  of  be- 
lievers. At  Derbe  they  appear  to 
labor  successfully  and  (jnietly,  spending 
some  time,  but  affording  "  little  liistori- 
cal  material,  according  to  tlie  adage, 
tliat  tlie  be.st  times  to  live  in  are  the 
worst  to  write  abont."  (Alkxaxdkk.) 
Thi-y  returned  as^ain  —  rather, 
tliii/  hinird  liitck  to  Li/.^/ra,  etc.  In- 
stead of  continuing  their  journey  liy 
the  nearest  way  to  Antioch,  in  iSyria, 
through  ("ilicia  and  Tarsus,  they  ])refer 
to  retrace  tlieir  steps,  visiting  the 
churclies  tliey  liad  organize<l,  iiotwitli- 
Htanding  all  the  ])ersecutions  that  liad 
befallen  them.  This  suggests  also,  that 
some  time  liad  elap.sed,  allowing  tlie 
liostility  aroused  against  the  mission- 
ai'ies  to  wear  away,  and  giving  oii])()r- 
tuuity  to  the  churclies  to  gain  exjieri- 
ence  and  develop  character. 

22.  The  reasons  are  given  for  turn- 
ing back  tlirough  the  cities  where  they 
had  l)een  ])crsccuti'(l.  Confirmiii^ 
the  souls  of  the  disciples — egtab- 
lisliiiuj,  or  tit)rnt/fhi')ihi(j,  not  by  any 
outward  rite,  Init  by  their  presence, 
their  iiistrtietion  and  words  of  encoiir- 
iiiremeiit.  The  word  is  found  elsewhere 
in  the  New  Testament.  (i.-.:W,4i;  ]8:2.r) 
How  they  continned  the  .souls  of  tlie 
discij)les  is  brought  into  view.  It  was 
by  exhortini;  (11 : -n)  them  to  con- 
tinue in  the  faitli  of  the  gosi)el, 
wliieh  they  had  recently  embraced,  and 
which  was  both  a  ht/itf  and  a  /ife  of 
faith.  (Col.  1:2:;.)  And  th.-tt  we  must, 
throu§;h  much  tribulation,  or 
tlirough  7110111/  ojffirfions,  enter  into 
the  kingdom  of  God.  A  statement 
of  a  general  fact  in  the  exjierience  of 
Christians.  (2Tira.  :i :  12.)  And  if  these 
afflictions  were  necessary  in  a  wicked 


world  as  inseperably  connected  with 
our  fallen  state,  and  as  a  means  of  dis- 
cipline and  in  accordance  with  God's 
will,  then  these  di.sei])les  should  not  he 
deterred  by  them,  l)ut  should  l)e  ready 
to  cheerfully  endure  them.  (Rom.  5 :  -i-i; 
Hfb.  12:11.)  Thephra.se/Af  kingdom  of 
God  embraces  the  whole  mediatorial 
reign  of  Christ,  sometimes  viewed  in 
its  beginnings  on  earth  (1 :3),  and  some- 
times in  its  consummation,  the  state  of 
future  haiipiness.  The  latter  api)ears 
to  be  the  meaning  here.  Alford  sug- 
gests that  Ave  as  used  here  indicates 
tliat  I^uke  rejoined  the  aj)ostles  at  the 
Pisidian  Antioch,  where  he  remained 
during  the  journey  to  Derbe  and  back. 
There  is  no  evidence,  however,  outside 
of  tliis  that  Luke  was  with  Paul  in  this 
missionary  tour.  Others  regard  the 
]>lirase,  that  'ire  wh.sY,  etc.,  as  a  quota- 
tion of  words  uttered  by  the  i)reacliers. 
Such  a  change  from  the  indirect  to  the 
dii'ect  discourse  is  characteristic  of 
Luke's  style.  That  they  should  have 
said  ire  in.stead  of  i/on  was  especially 
ai)i)io])riate,  since  the  missionaries  had 
l)een  sharers  with  these  disciples  in  af- 
flictions and  i)er.secutions,  and  in  a  gen- 
eral sense  would  continue  to  be  .so.  In 
their  sympathies  witli  the  afflictions  of 
these  converts  they  make  them  one 
with  theinstlves.  "Carry  the  cross 
with  a  willing  heart  and  it  will  guide 
tlu'e  to  the  jdaee  where  thy  sorrows 
will  end,  and  where  tliou  wilt  (find  all 
for  which  tliy  soul  hath  longed." 
(TiroMAs  AQri>''At>-) 

23.  When  they  had  ordained 
them  elders — h<ii-i)i<i  rhrtcd  or  <ip- 
pointtd  for  tlicm  fldcrs.  The  later 
ecclesia.stical  meaning  of  this  A-erb,  to 
ordain  by  the  laijiiuj  on  of  hands,  is 
not  founcl  in  the  New  Testament.  It 
))roperly  nu-aiis  to  vote  by  stretching  out 
the  hand,  as  jiracticed  in  the  Athenian 
assemblies.  It  is  found  elsewhere  in 
the  New  Testament  only  in  2  Cor.  8 : 
19,  iu  which  it  is  said  that  Titus  had 


Ch.  XIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


229 


been  "  chosen  of,  or  appointed  by  the 
churclu'S  to  travel  with  us."  It  is  also 
foiiml  in  tlic  Liter  aiul  si)urious  sub- 
scri[)tioiis  of  2  Tiiu.  4  :  23  and  Titus 
3  :  1"),  meaning  to  appoint.  With  a 
l)re|)osition  prefixed,  it  is  found  in  10  : 
41,  "  chosen,  or  appointed,  before  of 
God."  While  the  nieaniiii,'  of  the  verb 
did  pass  into  any  kind  of  appointment 
without  reL,'ard  to  method,  whetlier  by 
vote,  lot,  or  otlierwise,  there  does  not 
appear  liere  "  any  reason,"  in  the  words 
of  Dr.  Alford,  "  for  departing  from  the 
usual  meaning  of  eleeting  by  show  of 
banils."  So  also  Dr.  Meyer,  who  says, 
"  The  analogy  of  G  :  2-4  requires  tliis 
strict  regard  to  the  purposely  chosen 
word,  wliich,  resting  on  the  old  method 
of  choice  by  lifting  the  hand  .  .  . 
forbids  tlie  general  rendering,  they  ap- 
pointed, or  chose,  so  that  the  appoint- 
ment would  have  taken  j)laee  simply 
by  apostolic  plenary  power,  although 
the  wonl  itself  might  denote  to  choose 
generally  without  that  special  mode. 
Paul  and  Barnabas  chose  by  vote  elders 
for  them,  that  is,  they  conducted  their 
selection  by  vote  in  tiie  churches."  It 
must  remain  uncertain  wlietlier  they 
were  first  selected  by  the  churclies  anil 
then  a])proved  by  tlie  apostles,  or  first 
selected  by  the  apostles  and  then  ap- 
proved by  the  churches,  or  selected  liy 
the  united  action  of  tlie  ciuirclies  and 
apostles.  The  choosing  of  the  seven 
(6  :  i,  «)  favors  the  first,  while  the  send- 
ing out  of  Barnabas  and  Paul  from 
Antioch  favors  the  last.  (i8:  -i.)  Eld- 
ers. (See on  11:30.)  In  evcFy  church 
— used  distributively,  indicating  suc- 
cession, following  one  another,  church 
by  church.  The  phrase  does  not  neces- 
sarily imply  a  plurality  of  elders  in 
each  church,  although  such  may  be  its 
meaning,  and  is  in  harmony  with  the 
fact  that  there  were  several  elders  in 
the  cluirch  at  Ephesus  (20: 17),  and  also 
at  Philijjpi  and  elsewhere.  (Titus  1:5-7; 
Phil.  1  :  1.)  In  churches  extending 
throughout  a  city  and  surrounding 
country,  having  several  private  houses 
as  places  of  religious  meetings,  it  was 
needful  to  have  several  elders,  over- 
seers, or  pastors.  Plurality  of  elders 
was  then  also  necessary,  since  the  lia- 
bility to  persecution  necessitated  the 
disciples  to  meet  in  small  companies 


and  in  different  places.  Each  company 
needed  a  leader.  The  time  that  had 
elap.sed  since  Paul  and  Barnabas  had 
founded  these  cliurches  gave  opportu- 
nity for  the  development  of  gifts  and 
character  among  tiie  membership. 
Botli  the  churches  and  the  missionaries 
were  better  j)repared  than  at  the  first  to 
select  the  proper  men  as  church  otiicers. 
Doubtless  Paul,  as  an  apostle,  had  much 
to  do  in  suggesting  and  directing  the 
choice.  The  churches  would  naturally 
follow  their  advice.  Clement  (ch.  44) 
gives  us  an  apostolic  tradition  of  men 
chosen,  or  appointed  to  the  ministry  by 
apostles,  or  other  eminent  men,  with 
"  the  consent  of  the  whole  cluirch."  It 
may  be  added  that  as  the  seven  were 
set  apart  with  laying  on  of  hands  (6 : 6), 
and  also  Paul  and  Barnabas  to  their 
missionary  work,  so  in  like  manner 
these  elders  were  probably  set  aj)art, 
though  there  is  nothing  in  this  account 
to  indicate  it. 

From  a  comparison  of  other  passages 
of  Scripture  it  is  evident  that  elders 
were  pastm-s  and  teachers  (1  Cor.  vi  -.  2\ 
30;  Kph.  4:  u),  aiid  that  it  was  their  spe- 
cial    work     to     teacll.         (1  Tim.  .i  :  2;  Titus 

1  :'■>■)  They  wei'e  ministers  of  the  word, 
and    tiie   Lord   conferred    ui)on    tiiem 

difierent   gifts    (Rom.  U  -.  ti-s;  1  Oor.  12  :  1,  4-i), 

tiiough  these  gifts  niiglit  meet  in  the 
.same  person.  (2Tim.  4  :  •-■.)  Where  there 
Mas  a  i)lnrality  of  elders  or  pastors, 
tiiese  different  gifts  fitted  them  for  such 
variety  of  work  as  the  various  con- 
ditions found  in  a  large  congregation 
demanded.  (1  Peter  4: 10,  11.)  Such  a 
j)lurality  would  often  meet  the  con- 
ditions of  large  cliurches  at  the  ])resent 
day.  It  seems  also  evident  that  they 
possessed  some  authority  as  proclainiers 
of  the  truth,  and  as  executive  officers,  in 
presiding  over  and  conducting  the 
spiritual  affairs  of  the  church,  (n  :  30 ; 
15:2;  1  Tim. 5: 17.)  The  last  passage  is 
csj)ecially  in  point :  "  Let  the  elders 
that  rule  (or  preside)  well  be  counted 
worthy  of  double  honor  (and  support. 
Dent.  25  :  4),  especially  they  who  labor 
{u'ith  wearisome  effort)  in  word  and 
teaching."  The  meaning  is  not  that 
there  were  ruling  elders  distinguished 
from  teaching  elders,  but  that  those 
who  excel  in  taking  charge  of  church 
affairs,  or  in  teaching,  or  iu  both,  have 


230 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIV 


k  prayed  with  fasting,  they  comiufnded         Perga,   they    went    down    into    Attalia. 
them  to  the  Lord,  on  whom  they  believed.    26  And    thence  [they]    sailed    to  Aiitioch, 

24  And  after  they  had  passed  throughout  '  from   whence  they   had   been  ''  recom- 

25  Pisidia,  they  came  to  Pamphylia.    And         mended  to  the  grace  of  God  for  the  work 
when   they   had  preached   the  word   in  |        which  they  fulhlled. 


»>  ch.  13  : 1-3.        i  ch.  13  : 1,  3.        k  ch.  15  :  40. 


a  (loul)le  claim  to  honor  and  supjiort. 
It  may  l)e  further  said  that  while  Paul 
jirescrihes  the  qualilicatioiis  of  bishops, 
or  elders,  and  deacons  in  the  third  chap- 
ter of  First  Timotliy,  he  nowhere  sj)eaks 
of  the  qnalitieations  of  the  ruling;  elders. 
Moreover,  the  post-apostolic  churches 
liad  no  such  office,  which  seems  unac- 
countahle  if  it  was  appointed  hy  the 
ai>ostles.  Indeed,  it  was  never  known 
until  the  sixteenth  century,  when  Cal- 
vin originated  it. 

A  comparison  of  Scripture  also  shoMS 
that  besides  the  apostles  there  are  only 
two  ordei-s  of  church  officers.  The 
apostles  were  chosen  by  our  Lord  for  a 
special  i)urpose,  and  had  no  successors, 
(seeoni : -ii.)  Besides  these  were  the 
elders,  or  bishops,  or  overseers,  and  tlie 
deacons.  Thus  in  Phil.  1  :  1  Paul  ad- 
dresses the  "  bishops"  or  ovfrsei'rx  "  and 
deacons,"  in  such  a  way  as  to  make  it 
evident  that  these  included  all  the 
church  officers  at  Philippi.  And  in  in- 
structing Timothy  in  regard  to  the 
qualifications  of  church  officers,  he  only 
mentions  bishops  and  deacons.  (iTim. 
:t:iio.)  If  there  had  been  any  other 
church  officers  he  would  naturally  have 
spoken  of  them.  To  the  question  why 
here  and  elsewhere  in  the  Acts  deacons 
are  not  nu'utioned,  except  at  the  ap- 
pointment of  the  seven  (6:2-1),  it  may 
be  answered  :  1.  It  was  an  office  inferior 
to  that  of  elder,  or  bishop.  2.  The 
apostles  in  connection  with  the 
churches  appointed  the  elders,  but  the 
a|)pointment  of  deacons  was  left  to  the 
church  in  connection  with  their  pas- 
tors, or   elders.       (See  on  11  :  :!0  anil  LM)  :  18,  2R. ) 

And  had  prayed  with  fasting, 

rather  the  jdural,  irit/i  fa.itings,  indica- 
ting the  successive  fasts  in  the  several 
churches.  Some  join  this  phrase  with 
the  pi-eceding  verb  appointed,  and 
regard  the  prayer  and  fasting  as  imply- 
ing the  ordinations  of  tlie  elders. 
(1.1 : .?.)  Others,  such  as  Meyer  and 
Hackett,  more  accurately  connect  these 
exercises    with    the    verb    commended 


which  follows.  Commended,  or  com- 
mitted, them  to  the  Lord  for  i)rotec- 
tion  and  safety.  Them — the  believers 
generally,  and  not  merely  the  elders,  as 
is  evident  from  the  words,  on  Avhoni 
they  believed.  Thus  tiie  prayers  and 
fastings  seem  to  have  been  connected 
with  their  farewell  meetings. 

24.  Paul  and  Barnabas  })ass  through 
Pisidia,  taking  Antioch,  the  capital 
of  the  province,  on  their  way.  (see 
13 :  H.)  The  suuimer  of  A.  D.  47  was 
probably  sjient  in  visiting  and  fully 
equipi>ing  the  churches  with  pastors. 
As  autuuin  came  on  they  prol)ably 
descended  to  the  lower  lands  of  the 
province  of  Pamphylia.    (seeon  i3:  n.) 

25.  When  they  had  preaehed — 
rather.  And  having  upoken  the  word 
in  Perga.  (Slcou  i;i:  n.)  This  would 
seem  to  have  been  their  first  preaching 
there.  They  had  previously  landed 
there,  and  had  gone  at  onct'  into  Pisidia 
to  Antioch.  Attalia — a  city  of  Pam- 
phylia at  the  mouth  of  the  river  Catarr- 
hactes,  about  sixteen  miles  from  Perga, 
built  by  Attains  Philadeli»hus,  king  of 
Pergamos,  and  named  after  him.  The 
place  was  of  considerable  imi)ortance 
in  the  days  of  Paul,  and  still  continues 
to  exist  as  a  seajiort  town  by  the  name 
of  Satalia.  It  is  beautifully  situated 
round  a  small  harbor,  and  built  on  the 
ascending  banks.  It  would  seem  that 
Paul  did  not  .stop  t<j  preach  here. 

26.  And  thence  sailed  ««'«y,  im- 
plying a  voyage  of  .some  distance,  to 
Antioch,  the  capital  of  the  Komau 
province  in  Syria,  (see  nu  u  :  is.)  "  They 
may  have  disembarked  at  Seleucia,  as 
the  town  and  its  port  are  one  in  such 

designations.      (DK.  HaCKKTT.)      (See  ..n 

i:i:4.)  Whence  they  had  been 
recommended — better,  commended, 
or  committed  to  the  favor  of  God  in  per- 
forming the  work  vhich  they  had  accom- 
plished. (See on  13: 2, 3.)  It  was  proba- 
bly now  late  in  the  autumn  of  A.  D.  47, 
this  missionary  journey  of  Paul  and 
Barnabas  having  occupied  about  two 


Ch.  XIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


231 


27  Ami  when  they  were  come,  '  and  liad 
gatheied  the  church  together,  they  re- 
hearsed all  that  God  had  doue  with  theiu, 


and   how   he  had   ■»  opened   the  door  of 
28  lailh  unto  the  Gentiles.     And  there  I  hey 
abode  long  time  with  the  disciples. 


»  ch.  15  :  4-6,  12  ;  21  :  19,  22 


1  Cor.  lU  :  9  ;  2  Cor.  2  :  12;  Col.  4  :  3. 


and  a  half  years.  Some  suppose  a 
shorter  period ;  but  if  anything  it  was 
longer  ratlier  than  shorter.  (Comi)ave 
Harmonic  Arranfjeinent  of  the  Actx, 
§27.) 

27.  Assembling  the  church  at  Au- 
tioch,  Paul  and  Barnalias  report  all 
that  God  had  doue  with  them,  dur- 
ing their  two  or  three  years'  missionary 
labors  abroad.  With  them.  Some  talce 
this  to  mean  in  their  behalf,  as  iu  Luke 
1  :  72,  according  to  a  Hebrew  usage. 
But  tliere  seems  to  be  no  necessity  for 
supposing  a  Hebraism  here,  and  it  is 
natural  and  more  simple  to  take  the 
phrase  to  mean,  God  leorking  with 
them.  This  also  accords  with  Paul's 
declaration  iu  1  Cor.  3  :  9,  "  We  are 
workers  together  with  God."  (See2Cor. 
6:1.)  How  he  had  opened  the 
door  of  faith  unto  the  Gentiles— 
a  beautiftd  phrase  signifying  that  the 
Gentiles  liad  been  admitted  to  share  in 
the  hopes  of  the  gospel.  Tiiis  figura- 
tive use  of  door  as  an  avenue  of  access, 
is  a  favorite  one  with  Paul,  as  for  the 
preaching  the  gospel  at  Ephesus  (i  Cor. 
16:9),  at  Troas  (acor.  2;i2),  and  for  gen- 
eral evangelization  (Coi.  i  .-a) ,  and  Luke 
may  have  become  fiimiliar  with  this 
use  of  the  word  from  Jiis  intercourse 
Avith  Paul.  It  was  a  door  of  faith, 
both  because  an  opportunity  had  been 
given  to  the  Gentiles  for  believing,  and 
also  because  tlirough  the  influence  of 
the  Holy  Spirit  a  willingness  to  believe 
the  gospel  had  been  awakened.  (i6  :ii.) 
The  result  of  the  mission  showed  that 
access  to  Christ  was  as  free  to  Gentiles 
as  to  Jews. 

28.  And  they  abode  long  time — 
rather,  tarried  no  little  time,  with  the 
disciples,  which  is  sufficiently  indefi- 
nite and  comprehensive  to  include  a 
period  of  two  or  three  years.  The  so- 
called  Apostolic  Council  at  .Jerusalem 
was  held  iu  A.  D.  50.  According  to  our 
chronology  it  was  now  late  iu  the  year 
A.  D.  47.  Paul  and  Barnabas  could 
find  much  to  do  after  an  absence  of  two 
and  a  half  years  from  the  church  at 
Antioch.     Besides,   there  was  a  large 


field  outside,  in  that  large  city  and  its 
vicinity.  The  name  disciples  here 
used  may  suggest,  as  Dr.  Alexander 
thinks,  that  they  might  still  be  regarded 
iia  lea rjwrs  mid  requiring  teachers,  such 
as  these  two  noted  missionaries,  for  no 
little  time.  They  would  also  foster  a 
mission  spirit  in  the  church. 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  The  preacher  should  give  special  atten- 
tion to  the  manner  of  his  preaching,  as  well 
as  to  the  matter.    (Ver  1 ;  Col.  1  :  28.) 

2.  In  doing  God's  work  we  must  expect 
the  opposition  of  the  wicked.  (Ver.  2 ;  Matt. 
10  :  24,  2.5.) 

3.  Opposition  should  not  discourage,  since 
it  is  often  attended  with  signal  success. 
(Ver.  3 ;  12  :  24.) 

4.  The  gospel  is  the  divider  of  hearts  and 
of  communities.     (Ver.  4  ;  Matt.  10  :  34-36  ) 

5.  It  is  not  the  fault  of  the  gospel  if  it 
arouses  division  and  tumults.  (Ver.  5; 
John  3:  19,20.) 

6.  No  one  in  Christ's  service  should  need- 
lessly expose  himself  to  death.  When  to 
flee  and  when  to  face  persecution  needs  wise 
descretion.     (Ver.  6  ;  John  5  :  16, 17 ;  8  :  59.) 

7.  Hostility  to  the  gospel  often  becomes 
the  means  of  the  increase  of  believers.  (Ver. 
6,  7 ;  8:4.) 

8.  It  was  fitting  that  the  first  messengers 
of  the  gospel  among  the  heathen,  and  the 
truth  they  preached,  should  be  attested  by 
miracles.     (Ver.  8-10  ;  Mark  16  :  17.) 

9.  A  preparation  of  heart  is  needed  for  the 
reception  of  divine  blessings.  (Ver.  9 ; 
Hosea  10  :  12.) 

10.  The  healing  of  the  lame  man  illustrates 
the  power  of  the  go»pel  upon  the  soul.  (Ver. 
10;  Isa.  35  :  6,  10.) 

11.  Miracles  are  not  the  means  for  con- 
verting the  soul.     (Ver.  11  ;  Luke  16  :  31.) 

12.  Paganisn  deified  heroes ;  Christianity 
exalts  the  humble  and  contrite  to  be  sons  of 
God,  and  heirs  of  the  kingdom.  (Ver.  12  ; 
Rom.  8  :  14-17.) 

13.  People  even  in  our  day  and  country 
may  he  converted  to  a  pastor  rather  than  to 
Christ.     The  glorifying  of  the  creature  is 


232 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XV. 


the  essence  of  idolatry.     (Ver.  13;   Rom. 
1  :  25.) 

14.  The  word  of  God  gives  no  countenance  | 
to  the  worship  of  saints.  (Ver.  14,  15 ;  10  :  i 
25,26.)  I 

15.  None  feel  their  infirmities  more  than  | 
faithful  ministers,  who  point  men  to  the  ^ 
living  God.     (Ver.  15  ;  2  Cor.  4  :  5,  7.)  j 

16.  jNIen,  if  left  to  themselves,    tend    to  | 
spiritual  darkness  and  error.    By  the  long 
delay  of  the  gospel  God  showed  how  help- 
less was  the  race  without  the  light  of  his 
word.     (Ver.  16 ;  Eccles.  7  :  20.) 

17.  God  has  left  no  one  without  sufficient 
evidence  of  his  power,  goodness,  and  Prov- 
idence.    (Ver.  17  ;  Ps.  145  :  9,  16.) 

18.  The  strong  adhesion  of  men  to  idolatry 
and  superstition  is  an  evidence  of  the  de-  ' 
pravity  of  the  heart.     (Ver.  18  ;  Rom.  1  :  28.)  : 

19.  How  fickle  the  world !  How  change- 
able the  experiences  of  men !  Paul  con- 
sented to  thestoning  of  Stephen,  and  now  is 
stoned  himself.  (Ver.  19  ;  Matt.  21  :  9  ;  27  : 
22,  23.) 

20.  The  restored  Paul  to  the  new  converts 
was  an  encouragement  and  an  inspiration, 
as  one  from  the  dead.  (Ver.  20 ;  1  Thess.  2  : 
10, 12.) 

21.  There  are  times  when  we  should  not 
count  our  lives  dear  to  us,  if  we  can  only 
reach  men  with  the  gospel.  (Ver.  21 ;  20  : 
24.) 

22.  Tribulations  are  often  necessary  to 
Christians  to  win  them  from  the  world,  to 
keei>  them  in  the  path  of  duty,  and  make 
them  partakers  with  Christ.  (Ver  22 ;  2  Tim. 
2  :  12  ;  .John  16  :  33 ;  Rev.  7  :  14.) 

23.  The  work  of  the  minister  is  to  preach 
the  gospel,  make  disciples,  strengthen  them 
in  the  faith,  and  comfort  them  in  affliction. 
(Ver.  21-23  ;  Col.  1  :  28, 29.) 

24.  Pastors  are  necessary  for  the  full 
eiiuipment  and  well-being  of  churches.  (Ver. 
23 ;  Eph.  4  :  11-13  ;  Ileb.  13  :  17.) 

25.  In  journeying  we  should  recommend 
Christ  to  otliers  as  we  have  opportunity. 
(Ver.  25;  Rom.  15:  18-21.) 

26.  A  rehearsal  of  God's  work  is  fitted  to 
comfort  and  strengthen  God's  people.  (Ver. 
26,  27  ;  Ps.  126.) 

27.  A  church  under  Christ  is  the  highest 
authority  in  his  kingdom  on  earth.  (Ver. 
26,  27 ;  Matt.  18  :  17-20.) 

28.  A  foreign  missionary  may  sometimes 
find  work  at  home.    (Ver.  28.) 


Ch.  15  :  This  chaptor  is  one  of  the 
most  important  in  the  Acts,  trt-atiiit,'  of 
a  qiiestiou  ami  its  results,  w  liich  (.Iccitleil 
that  Christianity  was  intiiuled  equally 
for  all  men,   instead  of   being  a  mere 
sect  of  Judaism,  a  religion  of  a  party, 
or  any  one  nation.     The  ehajjler  opens 
witli  the  occasion   and  origin  of  the 
Conference  or  so-called  council,  at  Jeru- 
salem ;  and  narrates  the  journey  of  the 
delegates  from  Antioch,  and  their  re- 
ception by  the  Jernsalem  church.     The 
Conference  assembles,  and  Peter,  Paul, 
Barnabas,     and     James,    our     Lord's 
brother,  take  special  part,  and  matters 
are   adjusted  in  a  manner  j)leasing  to 
the    apostles,    elders,    and    the    whole 
church.     The  results  are  embodied  in  a 
letter,  sent  to  Antioch  by  Paul,  Barna- 
l)as,  Judas,  Silas,  and  others,  and  are 
higlily  satisfactory  there.     After  a  time 
Paul  and  Barnabiis  j)ro]>ose  to  return  to 
!  their  missionary  work,  which  gives  oc- 
casion  to  a   dissension   between   them 
j  regarding  Mark  (ver.  36-3n),  and   results 
iu  Barnabas  going  to  his  work  in  Cy- 
'  prus,  and  Paul  starting  on  his  second 
missionary    tour    through    Syria    and 
I  Cilicia. 

1-29.  The  Apostolic  Conference 

AT  Jerusalem.  (Cal.  -Z  ■.  I-IO:  Jnmes  l  :  l  ; 
Isa.  45  :  21  ;    Jer.  12  :  15  ;    Amos.  9  :  11,  12)      Tllis 

probably  occurred  in  the  autumn  of 
A.  D.  5(3.  Some  would  put  it  in  the 
sj)ring  of  A.  D.  51.  It  is  generally 
agreed  that  Paul  refers  to  this  same 
visit  to  Jerusalem  in  Gal.  2  :  1-10.  The 
time,  place,  theme  of  controversy,  the 
leaders  of  the  oj)j)osing  sides,  and  the 
peaceful  results  are  the  same  in  both. 
That  in  the  second  chapter  of  Galatians 
could  not  have  been  earlier,  for  then 
there  would  have  been  no  need  of  this 
Conference ;  and  the  results  of  the 
Conference  certainly  preclude  the 
necessity  of  such  a  visit  of  Paul  after- 
ward to  Jerusalem.  The  difterences 
between  the  two  accounts  in  the  Acts 
and  the  Galatian  E])istle  are  easily 
adjusted.  Luke  records  a  controversy 
which  was  threatening  to  make  a  divi- 
sion between  Jewish  and  Gentile  Chris- 
tianity. Paul  relates  a  personal  experi- 
ence touching  his  official  and  doctrinal 
relations  to  the  other  apostles.  But 
both  have  reference  to  circumcision, 
Paul's  attitude  toward  it,  aud  its  rela- 


Ch.  XV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


233 


The  apostolic  Conference,  or  Council  at  Jeni- 

sateiu. 
15  And  "certain  men  which  came  down 


from  Judsea  taught  the  brethren,  and  saUi, 
"Except  ye  be  circumcised  rafter  the 
manner  of  Moses,  i  ye  cannot  be  saved. 


»  Gal.  2    4,  Vi. 


0  Kom.  4  :  8-12;  Gal.  5:1-4;  Phil.  3  :  2,  3;  Col.  2  :  8,  11,  16. 
10;  Lev.  12  :  3.        q  1  Cor.  7  :  18,  19 ;  Gal.  5  :  0 ;  6  :  13-16. 


V  Gen.  17  : 


tion  to  Gentile  converts.  Luke  gives 
an  account  of  the  public  meeting  of  the 
Conference;  Paul  of  a  private  inter- 
view with  tiie  apo.stles.  A  jjublic 
gathering,  if  not  iiu]ilied  by  Paul,  is 
consistent  with  his  account,  and  the 
same  may  be  said  in  regard  to  a  private 
meeting  by  Luke.  Other  ditt'erences 
will  be  noted  below.  (See  fuller  dis- 
cussion iu  Jlunnoiiic  Arrangement  of 
the  Acts,  p.  197,  §  28.) 

This  Conference  has  usually  been 
styled,  The  Ajwstolic  Council.  Yet  it 
differed  from  a  council,  iu  that  it  did 
not  include  delegates  from  the  churches. 
It  does  not  appear  that  there  were  any 
from  the  churches  of  Judea  (Gai.  i :  22), 
or  Cilicia.  (ver  23 )  The  brethren  from 
Antioch  came  to  inquire  into  the  mat- 
ter, and  represent  the  interests  of  the 
Antioch  church  ;  but  it  does  not  appear 
that  they  acted  officially  by  vote  as  a 
part  of  the  Conference.  The  public 
gathering  seems  to  have  been  a  church 
meeting  of  the  Jerusalem  church  in 
connection  with  the  apostles,  pastors, 
and  preachers.  Another  diHerence 
from  modern  councils  was  the  presence 
of  insjjired  men.  (ver  6  28 )  It  seems 
however,  to  have  been  the  germ  and 
partly  the  model  of  councils  afterward. 
It  is  also  highly  suggestive  and  in- 
structive in  reference  to  the  treatment 
of  church  controversies  and  church 
difficulties. 

1.  This  verse  is  closely  connected 
with  the  last  verse  of  the  preceding 
chapter,  and  shows  what  occasioned  the 
Conference  at  Jerusalem.  Certain 
meu — they  are  not  called  disciples,  or 
believers,  or  brethren,  which  is  signifi- 
cant, inasmuch  as  Paul  designates  such 
ones  AS  false  brethren  unawares  brought 
in.  (Gal  2:4.)  Came  down  from 
Judea — probably  from  Jerusalem. 
(11:1  2.  seeoDTer.s.)  They  had  come  on 
their  own  private  responsibility. 
(Ver.  24)  Taught — Were  teaching,  as 
they  had  opportunity  from  time  to  time. 
They  were  teachers,  or  rei)resented 
themselves  as  such.     'J'lte  brethren — 


the  Gentile  believers  who  were  ad- 
dressed. Except  ye  be  circum- 
cised, etc.,  ye  cannot   be   saved. 

This  is  a  brief  summary  of  what  they 
taught.  Circumcision  stands  here  for 
the  whole  law  (ver.  21),  just  as  John's 
baptism  is  sometimes  j)ut  for  his  whole 
ministry.  (1:22.)  Circumcision  was 
ordained  of  God  in  his  covenant  with 
Abraham  (gcd.  n  :  10  r.)  to  be  performed 
on  all  his  male  descendants,  the 
eighth  day  after  birth.  It  was  con- 
firmed by  the  law  of  Moses.  (Lev.  12 : 3; 
Josh  5:2  9.)  When  a  Gentile  submitted 
to  circumcision  it  was  a  sign  of  submis- 
sion to  the  whole  law.  ( Gai.  5:3)  The 
burning  question  among  apostolic 
churches  was  the  condition  upon  which 
Gentiles  were  to  be  received  into  mem- 
bership. This  gave  rise  to  the  first 
famous  controversy  of  Christianity 
regarding  circumcision  and  the  keep- 
ing of  the  law,  which,  in  general  inter- 
est and  important  results,  has  been 
likened  to  the  controversy  concerning 
the  Person  of  Christ  in  the  fourth  cen- 
tury, and  that  concerning  Justification 
by  Faith  in  the  Protestant  Reformation. 
At  first  the  aj)ostles  expected  Gentiles 
to  be  converted  to  Judaism,  and  then 
to  Christianity.  But  Peter  and  the  rest 
Avere  taught  by  the  conversion  of  Cor- 
nelius, that  this  was  not  necessary, 
and  the  church  at  Jerusalem  accepted 

this     lesson.      (Seeou  10:9and  11  :  I8,)        But 

later  as  Gentile  believers  increased,  and 
Antioch  became  the  centre  of  missionary 
elfort  among  the  heathen,  and  Paul 
and  Barnabas  had  large  success  in 
planting  Gentile  churches,  a  Judaizing 
faction,  which  had  never  received  the 
conversion  of  Cornelius  as  final,  became 
very  outspoken.  Being  great  sticklers 
for  the  law  (ver.  5),  questioning  perhaps 
the  case  of  Cornelius,  or  at  least  regard- 
in  it  as  only  excei)tional,they  very  natur- 
ally concluded  that  if  a  Gentile  was  con- 
verted to  God,  he  would  be  obedient  to 
his  law.  Going  still  further,  they  lost 
sight  of  an  inward  change  through  taith, 
and  of  spiritual  service,  and  made  cir- 


234 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XV, 


;2  When  (heiefore  Paul  and  Barnabas  had 
no  small  dissension  and  disputation  with 
them,  they  determined  that  'Paul  and 
Barnabas,  and  certain    other   of   them. 


should  go  up    to    Jerusalem    unto    the 

apostles  and  elders  about  this  question 

3  And  «  being  brought  on  their  way  by  the 

church,   they    passed    through   Phenicc 


•  Gal.  ch.  2. 


I  ch.  21  ;  5;  Rom.  15  :  '24 ;  1  Cor.  IG  ;  C.  11. 


cumcision  and  the  external  observance 
of  the  hiw  conditions  of  salvation.  And 
since  Paul  had  heconie  the  leading  de- 
fender of  uncirc'UUKMsed  heliever.s,  he 
naturally  btcanie  the  object  of  tlieir 
opposition  and  i)rejudice.  Tliey  vio- 
lently opjwsed  his  doctrine  and  his 
apostolic  authority.     (Gai.  2 :  <.  5 ) 

2.  Having  noticed  the  occasion  of 
the  Conference,  this  verse,  in  connec- 
tion with  Gal.  2  :  2,  shows  how  it  orig- 
inated, namely,  from  the  Antioch 
church  and  by  revelation.  No  small 
dissension — implying  a  strong  and 
determined  resistance  by  Paul  and 
Barnabas.  And  disputation— ^we*- 
tionings,  implying  debate  concerning 
the  doctrines  and  authority  of  these 
Judaizers.  Paul  could  speak  from  au- 
thority, having  been  called  to  the  Gen- 
tile work,  and  having  received  the 
gospel  by  revelation.  (Oai.  i :  n.  12.)  It 
seems  that  these  legali.sts  produced  con- 
siderable excitement  at  Antioch,  but 
it  is  not  im]>lied  that  they  formed  a 
party,  or  obtained  any  followers.  They 
would  likely  produce  some  im])re.ssion 
on  the  Jewish  portion  of  the  church 
and  create  iloubt  in  their  minds.  They 
would  naturally  question  the  authority 
of  Paul,  who  was  the  foremost  defender 
of  the  law  of  lil)erty.  They — refer- 
ring generally  and  somewhat  indefi- 
nitely to  the  officers  and  other  mem- 
bers of  the  Antioch  church.  Deter- 
mined —  ordered  that  Paul  and 
Barnabas  .  .  .  should  go.  It 
also  appears  that  Paul  "  went  up  ])y 
revelation."  (Gr>i.2:2.)  Which  pre- 
ceded we  are  not  told.  Paul  may  have 
hesitated  to  submit  his  divinely  re- 
ceived gos])el  to  any  man,  and  hence 
may  have  needed  a  divine  suggestion. 
It  was  revealed  to  him  to  go  to  Jeru- 
salem and  ruake  known  to  the  ajjostles 
the  gospel  he  preached  to  the  Gentiles 
and  to  receive  their  approval  and  right 
hand  of  fellowship.  (Gai.  2:2-10.)  He 
may,  therefore,  have  suggested  the  Con- 
ference, or  at  least  heartily  approved 
of  it,  if  suggested  by  others.    This  two- 


fold origin  of  the  Conference  was  not 
singular  in  the  life  of  Paul.  Thus  the 
brethren  at  Jenisalem  sent  him  to 
Tarsus  (9:  so),  and  the  Lord,  by  vision, 
at  the  same  time,  sent  him  to  the  Gen- 
tiles. (22:21.)  So  Peter  was  sent  for 
and  also  directed  by  the  Spirit  to  go  to 
Cornelius.  (10 :  19  20)  And  certain 
others  of  them — Paul  took  Titus 
with  him  as  a  specimen  of  Gentile 
Christianity  and  as  a  test  case  regard- 
ing circumcision.  (Gai  2 :  .1 )  He  was 
proliably  also  api>ointed  by  the  church 
as  a  delegate.  The  character  of  tlie 
delegates  indicates  that  the  mind  of  the 
Antioch  church  was  on  the  side  of  tlie 
Gentile  believers  and  of  the  law  of  lib- 
erty. To  the  apostles  and  elders 
about  this  question.  Notice  that 
while  great  regard  was  had  for  the 
mother  church  at  Jerusalem,  where 
the  gifts  of  the  Spirit  had  been  largly 
bestowed,  notliing  is  here  said  regarding 
her.  These  delegates  are  sent  to  con- 
sult with  the  apostles,  who  were  in- 
spired men,  and  the  elders,  who  were 
teaehcrs  under  tiiem,  and  doubtless  en- 
joying in  large  measure  the  guidance 
of  the  Holy  Spirit.  Observe  also  that 
nothing  is  said  of  Peter,  who,  accord- 
ing to  the  Roman  Catholic  theory,  was 
the  infallible  guide  of  the  church,  and 
that  Peter  in  Gal.  2  :  8  is  only  regarded 
as  the  apostle  to  the  circumcision,  and 
that  James  took  the  most  prominent 
part  in  the  Conference. 

3.  And  being  brought  on  their 
way  by  the  church — they  were  pub- 
licly escorted  as  a  mark  of  respect  and 
atl'ection  and  of  interest  in  this  import- 
ant journey.  This  is  another  evidence 
that  the  Antioch  church  was  on  the 
side  of  Paul  and  Barnalias.  Probably 
as  many  of  its  meml)ers  as  could  con- 
veniently assemble  accompanied  the 
delegates  a  certain  distance  out  of  the 
city,  and  then  took  leave  of  them  with 
prayers  and  best  wishes.  Such  escort- 
iugs  were  common  among  early  Chris- 
tians.    (20:  38  ;  21  :  5;  .1  John  6.)       Pheuice 

— Phienicia.      (sotonu  :  i».)     Samaria 


Cii.  XV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


235 


ami  Sauiaria,  'declaring  the  coiiversion 
of  the  (ientilcs  :  and  they  caused  great 
4  joy  unto  all  the  brethren.  And  when  they 
were  come  to  Jerusalem,  they  were  re- 
ceived of  the  church,  and  of  the  apostles 
and  elders,  and  "  they  declared  all  things 
that  God  had  done  with  them. 


5  » But  there  rose  up  certain  of  the  sect 
of  the  Pharisees  which  believed,  sayiiif;, 
J  That  it  was  needful  to  circumcise  theiii, 
and  to  command  litem  to  keep  the  law  of 

6  Moses.  And  the  apostles  and  elders  came 
together  for  to  couslder  of  this  matter. 


'cli.  U 


u  ver.  12 ;  ch.  21  :  19.        »  Gal.  2:4.        T  ver.  1. 


— the  cotiutiy  between  Galilee  and 
Jiulea.  "As  Galilee  is  not  mentioned 
they  traveled  i)rot):ihly  along  the  coast 
as  "far  south  as  I'tolfiiiais  (2i:7),  and 
then  crossed  the  jdain  of  Esdraelon 
into  Samaria."  (Di:.  Hackktt.)  De- 
claring, relatintj  fully  (XA-.n)^  the 
conversion  of  the  Gentiles,  to  the 
churches  in  those  regions.  They  could 
give  abundant  proof  that  Gentiles  could 
be  converted  without  circumcision,  not 
oidy  in  Antioeii,  but  also  in  Antiocli 
of  Pisidia,  and  other  places.  They 
were  not  going  to  Jerusalem  to  learn 
that  fact,  but  rather  to  prove  it  and 
have  it  publicly  and  formally  ac- 
knowledged. They  caused  great 
joy  unto  all  the  brethren— 
whether  Jews,  proselytes,  or  Samar- 
itans. The  brethren  in  Samaria  would 
not,  of  course,  sympatliize  with  Jewish 
prejudices,  and  in  Phoenicia  believers 
were  largely  under  Gentile  influences, 
and  their  opinions  doubtless  modified 
thereby. 

4.  They  Avere  received  —  wel- 
comed (Lukes :  40),  according  to  the  read- 
ing of  some  good  manuscripts.  A 
slightly  diftereut  reading,  however,  is 
found  in  the  oldest  manuscripts  and 
preferred  by  many  critics,  meaning 
that  they  were  properly  and  honorably 
received.  This  reception  was  by  the 
church  at  Jerusalem  in  general,  and 
the  apostles  and  elders,  to  whom 
they  were  specially  scut  for  consulta- 
tion, (vnr. 2.)  Tliey  declared  all 
things  —  tlicy  reported  what  great 
thuKjs  God  had  wrought  with  them,  in 
tlie  conversion  of  the  Gentiles.  And 
Titus  was  with  them.  (gu1.2:3.)  This 
may  have  occurred  at  one  of  their  wor- 
shiping assemblies.     (Se^  on  u :  27.) 

5.  Thus  far  there  seems  to  have 
been  no  note  of  disapprobation  from 
the  Jerusalem  churcli.  Nor  could 
there  have  been  consistently  with  their 
former  cordial  assent  and  aj)proval  of 
Gentile    conversions.      (iiris.)      But 


there  rose  up,  etc.  This  belongs  to 
the  narrative  of  Luke,  who  records  that 
at  this  very  first  meeting  with  the 
church  at  Jerusalem  Paul  and  Barna- 
bas met  the  same  opposition  which  they 
had  encountered  at  Antioch.  It  came 
from  some  of  the  sect  of  the  Pharisees 
who  believed,  who,  as  such,  were  still 
sticklers  for  the  law.  They  had  been 
formalists  out  of  the  church  and  they 
were  legalists  within  it.  Some  of  them 
liad  doubtless  known  Paul  as  a  Jewish 
leader  ;ind,  like  him,  had  found  in 
Jesus  the  Messiah,  but  tlieir  conver- 
sion was  not  so  deeji  and  thorough  as 
his.  Pharisees.  (See  ou  5: 34.)  Notice 
Paul's  reference  to  these  persons  in  Gal. 
2:4.  It  is  needful— implying  duty 
and  obligation.  To  circumcise  them 
— the  Gentile  believers.  Thus  it  is 
evident  that  Paul  and  Barnabas  had 
related  the  conversion  of  the  Gentiles 
to  the  congregation,  but  it  is  not  neces- 
sary to  supjwse  that  they  had  referred 
to  the  opposition  they  had  encountered 
at  Antioch.  And  to  command 
them  to  keep  the  law  of  Moses — 
this  would  naturally  follow  the  sub- 
mission of  Gentile  converts  to  circum- 
cision. (See  on  ver.  1.)  Notice  also  the 
difference  in  the  putting  of  the  injunc- 
tion in  ver.  1  and  here.  There  the 
Judaizing  teachers  enjoin  on  the  Gen- 
tile converts  circumcision,  as  necessary 
and  voluntary  on  their  i)art.  Here 
the  Pharisaic  brethren  affirm  that 
Paul  and  other  teachers  must  enjoin 
circumcision  and  the  keeping  of  the 
law  on  their  Gentile  converts.  "  "  If  the 
Pharisaic  party  had  triumphed  the 
Christian  church  had  Ixc  n  buried  in 
the  grave  of  Judaism."  (Abbott.) 
Here  may  have  occurred  the  demand 
for  the  circumcision  of  Titus  indirectly 
mentioned  in  Gal.  2  :  3. 

6.  The  private  interview  of  Paul 
with  the  apostles,  recorded  in  Gal. 
2  :  2-10,  probably  took  place  between 
the   reception  of   the    delegates  from 


236 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XV. 


7  And  when  there  had  been  much  disput- 
ing, Peter  rose  up,  and  said  unto  them, 
^Alen  ami  brethren,  ye  know  how  that  a 
good  while  ago  God  made  choice  among 


ns,  that  the  Gentiles  by  my  mouth  should 

liear  the  word  of  the  gospel,  and  believe 

S  And   God,  "which  knoweth   the  hearts, 

bare   them   witness,   '•giving    them    the 


■  ch.  10  :  20;  11  :  12-18.        •  ch.  1 :  24 ;  see  rets.  1  Sam.  16  :  7.        >>  ch.  10  :  44. 


Antioch  recorded  in  the  two  last 
verses  and  the  i)ublic  Conference  re- 
lated in  this  and  succeeding  verses. 
Paul  fully  niaile  known  to  the  apos- 
tles his  views  of  the  gospel  and  his 
ministry  among  the  Gentiles,  and  gave 
tliem  such  facts  as  would  enable  tliem 
t^>  judge  impartially  regarding  himself 
and  liis  work,  and  the  law  of  Christian 
liberty.  And  the  apostles  and 
elders  came  together — Peter  and 
John  (Oai.  2 :  a),  and  perhaps  others  of 
the  Twelve  were  there ;  James,  tlie 
Lord's  brotlier,  Paul  and  Barnabas, 
Titus  (Qai.i.:  aj, .]  udas,  and  Silas,  (vur.  :,i.) 
The  words,  "  all  the  multitude  "  (ve..  i:i), 
implies  tluit  the  members  of  the  church 
were  generally  jtresent.  Aloreover,  tlie 
statement  "then  pleased  it  tlie  apos- 
tles and  elders  with  the  whole  cfnirch  " 
(ver.  ii)  further  imjdies  that  the  mem- 
bers of  tlie  cliurch  were  ])resent,  not 
only  to  listen,  but  also  to  j>articij)ate  in 
the  linal  actiou.  The  objection  tliat 
there  was  no  place  large  enough  to 
hold  them  is  worthless,  since  we  know 
nothing  of  tlie  jdace  of  their  meeting, 
and  it  is  not  necessary  to  supi)Osc  that 
every  memlier  Mas  ]iresent.  "  The  offr'- 
cidl pre.seitceo/  a//  is  assumed  continu- 
ally in  such  cases,  where  the  assembly 
is  'open  to  nil."  (Alford.)  These 
ehlers  were  not  connected  with  the 
churches  of  .ludca,  for  of  this  we  have 
no  intimation,  I)ut  with  the  church  at 
.Terusalem.  Tliey  were  ministers  of  the 
word,  and  teacliers  (ver.  3'2).  with  tliat 
diversity  of  gifts  needed  by  the  large 
and  (piite  extended  Jerusalem  church. 
(sw  ou  ver.  2.  iiud  14 :  M.)  Thus  this  gather- 
ing was  of  the  nature  of  a  Conference, 
rather  than  of  a  Conucil.  Very  ]iroi)ably 
James  presided  over  it.  (Ver."i:f,  i».)  To 
consider  this  matter — literally, ////,< 
ii'oed  or  doctrine,  with  reference  to 
preaching  the  irospel  to  the  Gentiles. 

7.  Tlie  Conference  began  with  much 
disputing,  with  con.iiilerable  prelimi- 
tutry  (lehole  (ver. 2),  confined  very  jirob- 
ably  to  the  apostles  and  elders,  in 
which  the  whole  relatioii  of  tlie  law  to 


the  gosjiel  came  naturally  under  re- 
view. There  would  seem  to  have  lueii 
some  present  wlioopjjosed  Paul's  meth- 
ods, and  favored  ciieumcision  and  tlie 
keeping  of  the  law  among  Gentile  con- 
verts. At  length  Peter  rose  up  and 
said  unto  them.  Only  those  siieeches 
which  closed  the  debate  are  reported. 
How  vividly  must  Peter  have  re- 
meml)ered  the  time  and  the  scene,  when 
he  himself  was  called  to  an  account  at 
Jerusalem  for  associating  with  and 
eating  with  the  uncircumcised  Corne- 
lius. (11 : 1-^.)  But  this  experience  ena- 
bled him  to  sjjcak  freely  and  with  con- 
fidence on  this  occasion.  Ye  knoAV 
how  a  good  Avhile  ago — frutn. 
ancient  or  early  days.  This  expression 
is  used  comparatively  to  the  whole 
time  in  which  Christianity  had  existed. 
It  was  now  over  twenty  years  since  the 
resurrection  of  Jesus,  and  about  twelve 
years  since  the  conversion  of  Cornelius. 
Those  were  the  days  of  gosjiel  begin- 
nings and  of  old  methods ;  since  then 
there  had  been  a  wide  extension  of  the 
work,  and  new  jdans  and  methods 
adojited.  God  made  choice  among 
us — or  among  you,  according  to  tlie 
oldest  manuscripts.  Thus  it  was  God 
who  was  the  author  of  this  work  among 
the  Gentiles.  Peter  would  not  restrict 
the  work  to  liim.«elf.  God  had  merely 
chosen  him  for  that  sjiecial  occasion. 
This  was  known  to  his  hearers,  and  as 
one  so  honored  of  God  he  could  so  far 
speak  with  authority,  from  revelation, 
from  observation,  and  experience,  that 
Gentiles  did  lioth  hear  the  gospel  and 
believe  in  Jesus  as  the  Messiah,  and 
that  God  did  aj>j)rove  by  the  gift  of  the 
Spirit.  It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that 
this  discnssifui  was  not  to  liring  about 
an  agreement  among  insjiired  men,  but 
rather  to  bring  certain  other  brethren 
to    the    same    conclusion  with  them. 

(Gal.  2:9.) 

8.  ^Moreover,  God  who  knoweth 
the   heart   bare    them   witness — 

Cornelius  and  his  company  who  be- 
lieved.   God    knew  their  hearts  and 


Ch.  XV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


237 


U  Holy  S|tirit,  even  as  lit  did  unto  us  ;  "  and 

put  no  dilJ'erence  between  us  and  them, 

10  ■•  purifying  tbeir  hearts  by  faith.     Now 

therefore  '  why  teiupt  ye  God,  f  to  put  a 

yoke  upon  the  neck  of  the  disciples,  which 


neither  our  fath'  rs  nor  wc  were  able  to 

11  bear?  But !  we  believe  that  through  the 
grace  of  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ  we  shall 
be  saved,  even  as  they. 

12  Then  all   the  multitude  kept  silence, 


Rom.  10  :  n  ;  Oal.  3  :  28.        <>  ch.  10  :  15,  28,  43 ;  1  I'etor  1  :  22.        «  Exod.  17  :  2. 
23  :  4 ;  Gal.  5:1.         s  Horn.  5  :  20.  21  ;  Eph.  2.  8  ;  Titus,  3  :  4,  5. 


t  Matt. 


could  not  be  deceived,  (i  sam  i6 : 7 ) 
Giving  them  the  Holy  Spirit  even 
as  he  did  unto  us.  Thus  God  bare 
witness  by  tlie  niiraculutis  gifts  of  the 
Spirit  (10:  **),  just  as  he  liad  to  Jewish 
believers    on    the    day  of    Pentecost. 

(?  :  .1    4    38.) 

9.  And  put  no  difference  be- 
tween us  and  them — the  middle 
wall  of  partition  between  Jew  and  Gen- 
tile having  been  l)roken  down  by  Christ. 
(Eph2rii)  Purifying  or  cleanshtg 
their  hearts  by  faith — reminding 
lis  of  the  words  to  Peter,  "  What 
God  hath  cleansed,  that  call  not  thou 
common."  (lotis)  God  made  no  dis- 
tinction between  Jew  and  Gentile  after 
tliis  heart-cleansing  had  taken  place. 
These  Gentile  believers  were  not  cir- 
cumcised in  the  flesh,  but  circumcised 
in  heart,  tlie  true  circumcision.     (Coi. 

2  :  11  ;  Rom.  2  :  28,  29;  Jer.  9  :  26.)     By  faith  in 

Christ,  acce])ting  him  personally  as 
a  Saviour.  The  Spirit  employs  the 
truth  as  an  instrument  in  regeneration 

andsanctification.  (James  l  :  18;  John  17:  17.) 

10.  Now,  therefore— Peter  makes 
the  application.  Since  the  heart- 
searching  God  had  admitteil  Gentile 
converts  to  equal  i)rivileges  with  .Jew- 
ish Ijelievers,  granting  tliat  ])urifica- 
tion  of  heart,  of  which  circumcision 
is  but  an  emblem,  Avhy  tempt  ye 
God  ?  Why  put  him  to  proof,  whether 
be  will  maintain  his  manifest  purpose, 
thus  trying  his  forbearance  and  jia- 
tience  by  oj>posing  bis  will  ?     (5:9:  M.-itt. 

4:7;  Cor.  10  ;  9.)  To  put — that    ye  shouUl 

put  a  yoke  upon  the  necks  of  the 
disciples,  which  God  had  pronounced 
needless  by  granting  tlie  Holy  Spirit 
to  the  Gentiles.  By  tlie  yoke  is  meant 
circumcision  and  tlie  ^losaic  laws, 
(oni.  5:1,3)  Which  neither  our 
fathers  nor  we  Avere  able  to  bear. 
Strong  language.  Compare  the  "  heavy 
burdens"  which  Jesus  denounces 
(Matt.  M :  4)  and  the  burden  of  the  law 
on  the  conscience  which  Paul  describes. 


(Rom  7:711)  Contrast  Christ's  easy 
yoke.  (Matt.  11 :  29  )  Peter  is  here  speak- 
ing of  the  law  as  a  means  and  condi- 
tion to  salvation.  Their  fathers  since 
the  time  of  Moses,  and  they  themselves, 
had  found  the  law  unavailing  to  give 
justification  and  peace  of  conscience. 
Its  object  was  not  to  give  salvation,  but 
a  knowledge  of   sin,   and  thus  lead  to 

Christ.       (Rom  3:19  20:  Gal  :l:19-2*.) 

11.  The  question  of  Peter  in  the  pre- 
ceding verse  implied  that  they  nad 
found  the  law  an  unbearable  burden 
and  unavailable  as  a  means  of  salva- 
tion ;  and  that  they  should  not  there- 
fore impose  it  upon  Gentile  believers. 
This  was  one  side  :  Neither  Gentiles 
nor  Jews  could  hope  to  be  saved  by 
the  law.  The  other  side  follows  in  this 
verse.  But,  on  the  other  hand,  in 
contrast  to  the  yoke  of  the  law,  we 
expect  through  grace  to  be  saved  the 
same  as  Gentile  believers.  "Thecom- 
l)lete  equilization  of  both  parties  is 
most  fitly  l)rouglit  out  at  the  close ; 
after  having  been  )>reviously  said,  they 
as  well  as  ice,  it  is  now  said,  we  as 
well  as  they.  Thus  the  equalizing  is 
formally  complete."  (^Ieyer.)  Grace 
is  emj)hatic :  Unt,  through  the  grace 
of  the  Lord  Jesus  ire  beliere  that  we  shall 
be  saved  in  the  same  manner  as  they. 
The  divine  grace  or  favor  in  Chri.st  did 
what  the  law,  which  was  weak  through 
the  flesh,  could  not  do.  (Rom.  8: 3-5.) 
Peter  affirms  salvation  by  grace  briefly; 
it  remained  for  Paul  to  develoji  the 
doctrine  fully.  See  how  Paul  used 
this  same  thought  when  he  rebuked 
Peter  for  his  inconsistency.  (Oai.  2 :  n,  r.) 
This,  which  was  probalily  a  summary 
of  Peter's  speech,  made  his  argument 
complete,  that  circumcision  and  keep- 
ing the  ^losaic  law  should  not  be  im- 
posed on  Gentile  converts. 

12.  This  statement  of  facts  regarding 
the  conversion  of  Cornelius  and  his 
conipanyunder  Peter,  and  his  argument 
thereform,  produced  such  an  iinpressioa 


238 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XV. 


ami  gave  audience  to  Barnabas  and  Paul, 
declaring  what  miracles  and  wonders  God 
had  b  wrought  auioug    tne  Gentiles  by 
tbeui. 
And  after  they  had  held  their  peace 


'  James  answered,  saying,  Men  ain!  breth- 

1-1  ren,  hearken  unto  me;  k Simeon,  'bath 

declared  how  God  at  the  first  did  visit 

the  Gentiles,  ">  to  take  out  of  them  a  pco- 

15  pie  for  his  name.    And  to  this  agree  the 


ich.  12;17.        k  2  Peter  1  :  1,  Gr.        •  rer.  7-9.        »>  ch.  18  :  10;  John  11 :  52. 


tipon  his  hearers,  that  Paul  and  Bama- 
l)as  at  once  follow  with  a  rehearsal  of 
similar  facts  in  connection  with  their 
own  labors  among  the  Gentiles.  The 
order  of  the  words  iu  the  original  is 
significant:  And  silent  bixatne  the  mul- 
titude, and  they  listen  to  JJarnabas  and 
I'aul.  The  multitude  indicates  the  as- 
senihled  church,  (ver.  22.)  The  silence 
shows  that  the  long  dissension  had 
been  pacified  and  arrested  by  Peter's 
address.  So  tliey  are  now  ready  to 
linteu  to  tlie  two  first  missionaries  to 
tlie  heathen,  and  accept  from  them  any 
further  evidence.  It  should  be  noted 
that  Paul,  who  had  ac(juired  the  first 
place  as  an  apostle  of  tlie  Gentiles 
(13 :  13, 46),  here  occupies  the  second 
place,  when  at  Jerusalem  among  the 
brethren  of  the  circumcision.  But 
Barnabas  was  older  and  longer  and 
more  favorably  known  to  the  brethren 
at  Jerusalem,  and  hail  introduced  and 
recommended  Paul  to  them.  (9  :27 :  c.ai. 
1 :  l^  -'♦.)  And  so  Barnabas  would  natu- 
rally s))eak  first.  Besides,  those  who  were 
jealous  for  the  law  would  probably  have 
less  prejudice  against  Barnabas  tlian 
against  Paul.  (21:20,21.)  Moreover,  Paul 
would  lie  the  best  one  to  close.  They  nar- 
rate how  great  miracles,  rather,  signs 
and  wonders  (2:22)  God  had  wrought 
tlirough  them  among  the  Gentiles, 
sliowing  that  their  work  and  ministry 
liad  been  attested  by  the  same  divine 
j'ower  as  that  among  the  Jews.  Such 
si^ns  and  wonders  would  include  the 
miraculous  gifts  of  the  Spirit  as  well  as 
s'.icli  miracles  as  those  at  Paphos  and 
Lystra.  (rs :  ii ;  n  :  3.  s-io.)  It  was  not  a 
iiure  repetition  of  what  they  had  said 
at  a  former  meeting  {^er.  4),  but  a 
rehearsal  of  the  evidences  of  God's 
approbation  u])on  their  ministry.  Tlie 
]iresence  of  Titus  showed  what  kind  of 
fruit    their    ministry    had    produced. 

(Gal.  2:3.) 

13.  After  they  had  held  their 
peace — icere  silent — the  same  verb  as 


in  ver.  12.  James — "  our  Lord's  bro- 
ther." (Gal.  l!l».  Seeon  12:17.)  He  waS  a 
noted  character  in  the  Jerusalem 
church  (Gal  2:9),  and,  on  account  of 
his  strict  observance  of  tlie  law,  appears 
to  have  exerted  great  influence  both 
among  Jews  and  Christians.  He  seems 
to  be  styled  an  apostle  in  Gal.  1  :  19, 
although  not  among  the  Twelve.  In 
later  times  Eusebius,  Jerome,  and 
others  called  Paul  the  thirteenth,  and 
James  the  fourteenth  ajKistle.  The  lat- 
ter was  pastor  of  the  church  at  Jerusa- 
lem, and  probably  presided  over  tliis 
Conference.  He  was  a  fitting  one  to 
close  this  discussion. 

14,  15.  James  first  of  all  sanctions 
what  Peter  ha<l  said.  In  tlie  rei>ort  of 
this  speech,  notice  how  faithful  Luke 
is  to  the  Hebrew  or  rather  Aramaic  in 
which  James  s})oke.  Simeon  or 
Si/meon,  the  Jewisli  form  of  Simon,  the 
original  name  of  Peter  (John  1 :  42),  and 
the  one  familiar  to  the  church  at  Jeru- 
salem. (Liike24:34.)  This  is  the  last 
mention  of  Peter  in  the  Acts.  From 
this  onward,  Paul  rises  in  prominence, 
and  the  extension  of  the  gospel  among 
tlie  Gentiles.  Further  concerning 
Peter,  see  on  12  :  17.  How  God  at 
the  first— rather,  at  first — pointing  not 
only  to  "the  good  while  ago"  (ver.  7), 
but  also  to  Peter  as  the  first  one  to 
]>reach  the  gospel  to  the  Gentiles  as 
such.  Did  visit— or  loo/c  upmi  in 
order  to  htlji.  Hebraistic.  A  people 
for  his  name — to  bear  his  name  as 

his  JieOlde.       ( Ver.  17  ;  Jam<-s  2  :  7.) 

l.'i.  To  this  asree — the  language 

of  Peter  and   the  proj)hets  harmonize. 

j  Peter  had  related  liis  ex])erience.     But 

I  the  Jews  were  disj>osed  to  undervalue 

j  passing  events,  and  pay  superior  rever- 

!  ence  to  the  law  and  prophets.     James 

accordingly  clinches  the  arguments  by 

appealing "  to    the     words    of    the 

prophets,  which  were  many,  one  of 

which     he    j^articularly    proceeds    to 

quote.    Thus  not  only  had  Paul  and 


Ch.  XV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


239 


words  of  the  prophets;  as  it  is  writtPn, 
If)  '  Afior  this  I  will  return,  aud  will  build 

again  tlio  tabernac  e  of  David,  which  is 

(alien  down  :  aud  I  will  build  again  the 
17  ruins  thereof,  and  I  will  set  it  up ;  that 

the  residue  of  men  might  seek  after  the 


Lord,  and  all  the  Gentiles,  upon  whom 
my  name  is  called,  saith  the  Lord,  who 

18  doeth  all  these  things.  '  Known  unio  (Jod 
are  all  his  works  from  the  beginning  of 

19  the  world.    Wherefore    my  sentence  is, 
■>  that  we  trouble  not  them  which  from 


ver.  10,  24,  28. 


Barnabas  done  what  Peter  had  before 
been  divinely  directed  to  do;  but  it 
was  in  accordance  witli  the  divine  plan 
as  foretold  by  the  proi)liets. 

10.  .James  quotes  (Amos a  :  ii,  12),  freely 
from  the  Septuagint,  which  was 
familiar  to  tlie  foreis^n  .Jews  present. 
The  prophet  had  foretold  the  divine 
judgments  against  Israel,  and  now  pre- 
dicts the  restoration  of  the  family  of 
David  in  the  person  and  reign  of  the 
Messiah,  to  whom  his  former  subjects 
and  the  lieathen  shall  render  cheerful 
homage,  and  Israel  shall  be  restored  to 
their  own  land.  The  argument,  as 
tised  l)y  James,  is,  that  God  foretold 
tliat  the  Gentiles  sliould  bear  his  name, 
witltout  any  mention  of  their  circum- 
cision ;  au(l  with  that  agree  the  facts 
now  reported  to  them.  What  is  true  of 
this,  is  true  of  other  projiliecies  con- 
cerning the  entering  of  Gentiles  into 
the  Messianic  fold.  After  this  I  will 
return  and  will  build  again. 
Amos  simply  says, /«  that  day  I  will 
rfbnihl  or  raise  up.  .James  introduces 
this  prophecy  thus  freely,  implying 
past  judgments  on  Israel,  and  future 
restoration  and  prosperity ;  and  uses 
"  I  will  return  "  from  Jer.  12  :  15.  The 
tabernacle,  or  tent,  suggests  the  low 
condition  of  David's  royal  family.  The 
image  is  thai  oi  &  Jallen  tent  ain\.  one 
in  ruins,  broken  aud  torn  into  frag- 
ments, which  was  a  vivid  picture  of 
David's  family  in  relation  to  the  ten 
tribes  of  Israel  in  Amos'  day.  Tlie 
talit'Diac/e  of  David  does  not  mean 
what  is  sometimes  styled  the  .Jewish 
cluxrch.  I  Avill  build  again— the 
royal  family  of  David,  to  wliom  God 
had  promised  that  his  "  throne  should 
be  established  forever."  (2Sani.7 :  lo;  1 
Ktnss  2:4;  Ps.  89 : 3, 4. )  Hencc  the  augcl 
announced  the  birth  of  .Jesus  with  the 
promise,  "The  Lord  shall  give  to  him 
tlie  throne  of  his  father  David,  and  he 
shall  reign  over  the  house  of  Jacob 
forever,    and    of   his    kingdom    there 

shall  be  no  eud,"      (Luke  l .  32,  33,  note.)     It 


was  by  the  risen  and  ascended  Christ 
that  the  tabernacle  of  David  was  to  be 
built,  and  the  Mords  of  the  proitliet 
fulfilled,  by  extending  his  kingdom 
among  the  Gentiles. 

17.  The  principal  variation  from  the 
Hebrew  is  in  this  verse,  which  does  not 
alf'ect  the  essential  idea  of  the  passage, 
or  the  force  of  the  argument.  (aiuo» 
9:12.)  Ilevised  Version  reads  "That 
they  may  possess  the  remnant  of  Edom, 
and  all  the  nations,  which  are  called 
by  my  name,  saith  the  Lord,  that  doeth 
tliis."  The  Edoinites  were  among  the 
bitterest  enemies  of  Israel.  Tlie  Sej>- 
tuagint  in  its  paraphrase  (for  such  it  is 
rather  than  a  translation),  regards 
I'vdoiu  as  a  general  representative  of 
those  who  were  strangers  to  God.  That 
the  residue  of  men  expresses  tlie 
design.  The  conquest  is  to  be  spirit- 
ual,— that  they  might  seek  after  the 
Lord,  even  all  the  ({entiles  ujiou 
whom  my  name  is  called,  as  my 

people.        (Ver.  14  ;  Deut.  2S  ;  M;  Rom.  9  :2.'),  26.) 

The  assurance  that  all  this  would  cer- 
tainly come  to  i«iss  rests  on  the  declar- 
ation of  the  Lord,  who  doeth  all 
these  things. 

18.  KnoAvn  unto  God,  etc.  This 
translation  of  the  common  text  ex- 
presses anew,  that  the  reception  of 
Gentiles  to  gospel  j)rivileges  was  ac- 
cording to  tlie  divine  purpose  from  tlie 
beginning.  The  Mords  are  those  of 
James,  and  not  of  Amos.  According 
to  several  of  the  oldest  manuscrij)ts, 
however,  the  words  unto  God  are 
all  his  works  are  omitted.  The 
reading  preferred  by  the  highest  criti- 
cal authorities,  in  connecting  tlie  pre- 
ceding verse,  is :  Who  ilor/h  all  these 
things,  which  ipere  /cnown  by  him  from 
the  beginning,  (isa. 45:21.)  The  mean- 
ing of  this  shorter  reading  is  substan- 
tially the  same  as  that  of  the  longer 
one  above. 

19.  Wherefore  my  sentence  is 
— I  judge.  It  afterward  became  the 
judgment   of    the   whole    Conference. 


240 


THE  ACTS. 


tCn.  XV. 


among  the  Gentiles  are  turned  to  God  : 
20  but  that  we  write  unto  them,  that  they 


abstain    "from   pollutions   of  idols,  and 
T/rom      fornication,    and     from    things 


'  ver.  29 ;  Ezek.  20  :  30 ;  1  Cor.  8  :  1,  4-13  ;  10  :  2»-22,  28 ;  Kev.  2  :  14,  20. 
Col.  3:5:  1  Peter  4  :  3. 


P  1  Cor.  6  :  9,  18 : 


(Ter.  22.)  The  phrase  was  a  common 
formula,  used  by  members  of  Greek  as- 
seuiblieSjin  giving  tlieir  iiitlividual  opin- 
ions, or  verdicts  after  discussion.  That 
we  trouble  not  them — those  among 
the  Gentih'S  v/io  arc  tumiiiff  to  God, 
l)y  imposing  on  them  burtlensome  rites 
and  ceremonies.  Thus  James  decides 
in  l)eiialf  of  Christian  lilwrty,  and  of 
salvation  through  faith  in  Christ  alone. 
^O.  But — that  we  do  this,  that  vr 
e»Ji)i)iHpon  them  inwritinrj,  that  they 
abstain  from  alwminableand  scanda- 
lous tilings,  common  among  the  CJentiles 
and  also  otiensive  to  Jewish  believers. 
Pollutions  of  idols — the  eating  of 
meat  offered  to  idols,  (ver. ».)  Tlie 
idolatry  of  that  period  was  terribly 
corrui)t,  associated  with  every  form  of 
licentiousness.  Religious  and  idola- 
trous rites  were  schools  of  prostitution 
and  vice.  Portions  of  the  victims 
offered  in  sacrifice  were  reserved  to  be 
eaten  at  feasts,  or  sold  in  the  markets. 
Such  meat  was  an  aliomination  to  the 
Jews,  and  the  eating  of  it  knowingly 
was  considered  a  heinous  offence. 
(Ps.  106:28.)    Paul,  however,  teaches  (Rom. 

14:  S,  U;  1  Cor,  10:  19-33)  that    the    Catillg   of 

such  meat  is  not  sinful  in  itself,  l>ut 
sliouM  be  avoided  on  account  of  the 
weak  consciences.  The  injunction  here 
must  be  regarded  in  like  manner. 
(See Mark  7: 14-23.)  From  fomication. 
This  must  not  be  taken  in  any  figura- 
tive or  restricted  sense,  but  in  its  com- 
mon import.  That  Gentile  believers  ; 
sliould  be  warned  against  sucli  a  posi- 
tive, heinous  sin  is  cxjdained  by  the 
fact,  that  the  heathen  not  only  allowed 
but  encouragcfl  it  in  tlieir  idolatrous 
worshiji,  and  that  philoso])hers  ])rac- 
ticed  it  without  slianie,  and  public 
opinion  treated  it  as  a  thing  of  indiffer- 
ence. Paul  enforces  tlie  command  [ 
(i  Cor.  «:  Ik),  and   iiisists  ui)on  its  moral 

evil      and      guilt.         (Kph.  5:  S;  l  Thesn.  «:  3.) 

From  things  strangled  and  from 
blood — the  eating  of  blood,  and,  by 
implication,  of  strangled  animals, 
whose  blood  was  still  in  them,  was  for- 
bidden to  Noah  (Gen.  8 :  ♦),  and  after- 


ward in  the  law  of  Moses.   (i.ev.  17  :is.  14 ; 
Deut.  12 :  16-24.)     "  It  is  doubtless  true  that 
where   there    is    refinement  of  feeling, 
and  Avhen   the    sensibilities  have  not 
become  blunted,  men  instinctively,  as  it 
were,  avoid  tlie  use  of  animals  for  food, 
which  have  died  without  losing  tlieir 
blood.       The     thought    .    .    .    gathers 
\  strength,   too,   from    the   more   S])ecdy 
corruption  which  takes  place  in  such 
{  bodies.  .  .  .  This  prohibition  [the  use 
of   blood  as  an  article  of   food]   was 
I  probably  made,  not  because  the  use  of 
blood  would  be  in  itself,  and  directly,  a 
I  moral  wrong,  necessarily  defiling  the 
conscience,  but  because  it  would  tend 
I  to    clierish    certain    propensities,    and 
!  traits  of  character,  that  are,  to  say  the 
i  least,    unfavorable    to    morality.    The 
1  use  of  bloofl  for  food  cherishes  cruelty, 
j  revenge,  and  all  the  ferocious  passions, 
I  either  by  some  intluence  on  men's  ani- 
mal nature,  or  by  making  them  famil- 
iar with  thoughts  and  practices  which 
I  tend  to  harden  the  heart."      (Eiri.KY 
\on  tlir  Aria.)     It  should   be  noted  that 
;  all  these  restrictions  were  really  inile- 
pendeiit  of  and  older  than  the  Mosaic 
;  law.     Not  only  the  two  last  dated  liack 
to   Noah,    but  also    idolatry   with    its 
[  pollutions  and  fornication  were  known 
j  to  be  sinful  before   the   law   of  Closes 
was  given.     But  still  these  very  restric- 
1  tions  were  substantially  such  as  were 
demanded  by  the  Jews  from   Gentiles 
who  became  proselytes  to  their  religion, 
without  receiving  the  rite  of  circninci- 
sion,  and  who  then  or  afterwards  were 
styled  prosefi/tes  of  the  f/ate.s.     Perha))s 
James    would     have    it     known     tliat 
Christians  were  as  careful  as  Jews  in 
regard  to  prevailing  enormities  and  un- 
worthy practices.      The  two  first  ctmi- 
mands   of    this    Conference   had    more 
special   reference  to  the  separation  of 
Christians  from  the   license  of   jiagan 
life  ;  the  la.st  two,  to  their  treatment  of 
the  feelings  and  consciences  of  Jewish 
believers. 

21.  For  introduces  the  reason  for 
the  preceding  restrictions.  Moses  of 
old  time — or  Jrom  generations  of  old. 


Ch.  XV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


241 


21  strangled,  i  and /ro»i  blood.  For  Moses 
of  old  time  hath  in  every  city  them  that 
preauii  him,  '  being  read  in  the  syna- 
gogues every  sabbath  day. 

22  Then  pleased  it  the  apostles  and  elders, 
with  the  whole  churcb,  to  send  chosen 
men  of  their  own  company  to  Antioch 


with  Paul  and  Barnabas  ;  namely,  Judas 
surnamed  "Barsabas,  and  's^ilas,  chief 
23  men  among  the  brethren.  And  they 
wrote  tellers  by  them  after  this  manner; 
— The  apostles  and  elders  and  brethren 
send  greeting  unto  the  brethren  which 
are  of  the  Gentiles  in  Autioch  and  Syria 


1  Gen.  9  :  i. 


■  ch.  13  :  15,  27.        «  ch.  1  :  23.        1 1  Thess.  1  :  1 ;  1  Peter  5  :  12. 


Hath  in  every  city  them  that 
preach  him,  announcing  hiiu  as  a 
lawgiver,  and  hi.s  law  a.s  of  sni)reme 
authority.  Tliis  was  .strictly  true  of 
the  Roman  Empire  at  that  time.  In 
all  the  important  cities  were  colonies  of 
the  Jews,  and  synagogties  where  tlie 
law  of  Moses  was  read  every  sab- 
bath day.  All  the  attendants  upon 
these  synagogues  would  be  constantly 
reminded  of  the  prohihitions  of  the 
ceremonial  law.  And  it  was  therefore 
necessary  for  Gentile  Cliristians,  for  the 
sake  of  peace  as  well  as  of  purity  of 
life,  to  regard  tliese  restrictions,  and  not 
oflend  their  Jewish  brethren.  Another, 
but  less  probable  interpretation  of  this 
verse  is :  This  liberty,  with  these  re- 
etrictions  may  well  be  allowed  Gentile 
converts ;  for  there  is  no  danger  that 
the  Jewish  brethren  will  neglect  their 
law  which  is  read  in  the  synagogues 
every  Sabbath. 

22.  The  will  of  God  was  now  so 
clearly  manifest  that  all  opposition  was 
silenced,  and  it  remained  only  to  adopt 
the  pro])osition  of  James.  Then 
pleased  it,  etc.  Tliat  is,  Then  the 
apost/es  and  the  elders  with  the  whole 
church  resolved.  The  verb  here  and  in 
ver.  2.5  and  28  was  tlie  one  used  offi- 
cially in  Greek  for  announcing  the 
decision  of  the  popular  assembly.  This 
was  the  final  decision  of  tiie  question. 
It  had  been  sulnnitted  to  the  apostles 
and  elders  (ver.  2),  and  the  former  were 
inspired  men,  but  they  did  not  ignore 
the  authority  of  the  local  cliurch.  It 
is  evident  that  the  churcli  was  regarded 
as  having  an  established  order,  govern- 
ment and  authority.  To  send 
chosen  men  of  their  own  com- 
pany— rather  huvinri  chosen  men  from 
themselves,  from  their  own  number,  to 
semi  them,  etc.  The  chief  men  were 
probably  from  among  their  elders,  or 
preachers.  Judas  surnamed  Bar- 
sabas — supposed  by  some  to  be  the 
brother  of  Joseph  Barsabas  (1 :  ii),  both 


being  sons  of  one  Sabas  {bar  being  the 
Hebrew  for  son).  Nothing  is  certainly 
known  concerning  him  except  that  both 
he  and  Silas  were  "  pro])hets."  Silas 
— called  Silvanus  in  the  Epistles,  the 
former  name  being  a  contraction  of  the 
latter.  He  was  2jrobal)ly  a  Grecian  or 
foreign  Jew,  and  appears  to  have  been 
a  Roman  citizen.  [}^  ■■  37.)  He  accom- 
panied Paul  on  liis  second  missionary 
journey  througli  Asia  Minor  to  Mace- 
donia (Ter.  40),  tarried  behind  in  Berea 
(17 : 4,  to,  i4)j  but  joined  Raul  again  in 
Corinth,  (is  :  »•)  He  was  probably  the 
one  who  conveyed  the  first  Epistle  of 
Peter  to  Asia  Minor.     (1  Peter  5 :  12.) 

23.  And  they  wrote  letters  by 
them,  to  be  taken  to  Antioch.  After 
this  manner  is  omitted  by  the  oldest 
manuscriiits.  We  doubtless  have  the 
exact  copy  of  the  letters  which  would 
be  written  in  Greek.  The  apostles, 
and  elders,  and  brethren.  Many 
of  the  ancient  Greek  manuscripts  insert 
tlie  article  three  times  so  as  to  translate, 
The  apostles,  and  the  elders,  and  the 
brethren.  Some  of  the  oldest  omit  and 
the  before  brethren,  and  are  followed  by 
Alford,  and  Westcott  and  Hort.  The 
Revised  Version  translates  this  The 
apostles  and  the  elder  brethren.  The 
American  Revisers,  however,  preferred 
The  apostles  and  the  elders,  brethren; 
that  is,  your  brethren,  as  the  Lord's  ser- 
vants and  your  helpers  in  the  Loril's 
work.  But  many  of  the  ancient  manu- 
scripts, and  most  of  the  versions  and 
Fathers  retain  the  words  and  the,  wliicli 
were  regarded  as  geimine  by  Tischen- 
dorf,  and  also  by  Meyer,  who  supposes 
the  omission  was  the  result  of  hierarcli- 
ieal  feeling.  "  It  may  easily  be  con- 
ceived that  the  omission  was  occasioned 
by  a  scruple  respecting  the  co-ojieration 
of  the  congregation  with  the  apostles." 
(Lechler,  in  Lunf/e.)  Send  greet- 
ing— hail,  wish  you  joy.  This  was  the 
usual  formula  of  salutation  in  Greek 
ejnstles.     (s3 ;  :r..)     To  the  brethren 


!-12 


THE  ACT.S. 


24  andCilicia.  Forasmuch  as  we  bare  heard, 
that  "certaiu  which  went  out  fioiu  us 
have  troubled  you  with  words,  subverting 
your  souls,  saying,  i'e  must  be  circuru- 
ciset-l,  and  keep  ihe  law  :  to  whom  we  gave 

25  no  sitch  commandment :  it  seemed  good 


[Ch.  XV. 


unto  us,  being  assembled  with  one  accord, 
to  send  chosen  men  unto  you  with  our 

26  belovef"   Barnabas  and  Paul,  'men  that 
have  hazarded  their  lives  for  the  name  of 

27  our   Lord   Jesus   Christ.     We  have  sent 
therefore  Judas  and  Silas,  who  shall  also 


»  ver.  1;  Gal.  2:4;  5:12; 


2  Tim.  2  :  U ;  Titus  I  :  10,  11. 
30 ;  2  Cor.  11  :  23,  2C. 


»  ch.  13  :  50 ;  14  :  19;  1  Cor.  15  : 


which  are  of  the  Gentiles  in 
Antioch  and  Syria  and    Cilicia, 

implying  Gentile  converts,  unci  proba- 
bl}-  churches  in  all  those  regions.  We 
here  get  a  glimpse  of  some  of  the  unre- 
corded labors  of  the  Apostle  Paul.  Thus 
while  at  Antioch,  both  before  and  after 
his  fir.st  missionary  tour,  Paul  doubtless 
extended  his  lal)ors  and  planted 
churclu's  in  Syria;  and  earlier  than 
this,  he  probabl}-,  on  kis  return  to 
Tarsus  (9:30;  11  ;25j,  made  converts  and 
gathered  churches  in  Cilicia.  See  ver. 
41,  which  implies  the  same  facts. 

24.  The  letter  opens  formally,  as  in 
Luke  1:1,  and  first  gives  a  reason  for 
their  writing  ,  Forasmuch  as  Ave 
have  heard  that  certain  who 
went  out  from  us — in  Jerusalem, 
being  members  of  the  church  there. 
(Ver.  1, 5.)  Subverting  your  souls — 
^(ylsctth'llg  your  minds  by  false  teach- 
ing. Saying,  Ye  must  be  circum- 
cised and  keep  the  laAv.  This  is 
not  found  in  several  of  the  older  manu- 
scri]>ts,  and  omitted  by  most  of  tlie 
highest  authorities.  To  whom  we 
gave  no  such  commandment — 
they  had  come  from  tlie  church  at 
Jerusalem  and  had  taught,  and  had 
probably  claimed  authority  from  the 
mother  church.  They  had  thus 
troubled,  or  disturbed  the  brethren 
at  Antioch  with  their  words,  ?<))*■(/- 
fh'ng  their  souls  with  doubts  regarding 
the  method  and  conditions  of  salvation. 
(Gal.  5 : 2-i.)  But  the  assembled  church 
at  Jerusalem,  Avith  their  leaders,  iu 
Conference  openly  disavow  their  author- 
ity.    Paul  calls  "  them  false  brethren." 

(Gal.  2  :  4.) 

25.  It  seemed  good — it  was  re- 
solved by  us.  (Sceon  ver.  22.)  Being 
assembled  Avith  one   accord,  or 

rather,  having  become  of  one  mind,  im- 
plying some  difference  of  views  and 
discussion.  There  would  be  no  signifi- 
cance iu  the  statement  that  the  church 


had  assembled  together,  but  much  in 
the  fact  that  it  had  reached  a  unani- 
mous conclusion.  See  on  ch.  1  :  14, 
where  the  same  word  in  the  original, 
"with  one  accord,"  is  used.  Our 
beloved  Barnabas  and  Paul — not 
an  unmeaning  compliment,  but  a  strong 
endorsement  of  their  characters  against 
the  maligiiings  of  the  Judaizers.  This 
and  what  follows  is  iu  harmony  with 
the  approval  and  hand  of  fellowship 
given  Paul  l)y  the  apostles  at  Jerusalem. 
(Gal.  2 : 9.)  Notice  that  the  order  of  the 
names  as  in  ver.  12  (on  which  see)  is 
the  same  as  tliat  which  was  used  before 
Paul  became  the  most  prominent  of  the 
two  (u:  30;  13 :2),  aiid  38  they  would 
be  naturally  regarded  at  Jertisalem,  at 
this  time.  In  this  the  accuracy  of 
Luke,  as  a  historian,  is  manifest. 

26.  Ending  the  sentence  commenced 
in  the  preceding  verse.  Men  AVho 
have  hazarded,  literally,  have  given 
up  their  lives.  Compare  Phil.  3:8; 
and  I'aul's  reference  to  Christ  giving 
himself,  in  Gal.  2  :  20.  In  their  conse- 
cration and  their  tril/  they  were  mar- 
tyrs, though  as  yet  they  had  not  laid 
down  their  lives.  They  had,  however, 
given  them  to  be  spent  or  sacrificed  for 
Christ.  The  inference  is,  that  such 
men  deserve  the  confidence  and  honor 
of  their  brethren. 

27.  Me  have  sent  therefore 
Judas  and  Silas,  Avho  shall  also 
tell  you  the  same  things — certify- 
ing to  its  genuineness,  and  to  the 
unanimous  resolve  of  the  church  at 
Jerusalem,  and  giving  all  needed  ex- 
planations, and  answering  all  questions 
concerning  the  Conference  and  its 
action.  Thus  by  these  two  witnesses 
should  every  word  be  established. 

28.  For  introduces  the  reason  for 
the  conclusions  of  the  conference,  about 
which  Judas  and  Silas  would  tell 
them.  It  seemed  good.  ("r.  21,  zs) 
to    the   Holy    Spirit.       They    had 


Ch.  XV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


243 


28  tell  yo'i  the  same  things  by  mouth.  For  it 
seemed  good  to  the  Holy  Spirit,  aud  to 
us,  to  lay  upon  you   no  gifatcr  burden 

29  than  y  these  necessary  things;  'that  ye 
abstain  from  meats  offered  to  idols,  aud 


■from  blood,  and  from  things  strangled, 
aud  from  fornication  :  from  which  if  ye 
keep  yourselves,  ye  shall  do  well.  Fare 
ye  well. 


J  1  Cor.  10  ■.  23.        «  ver.  20 ;  ch.  21  :  25 ;  Rev.  2  :  14,  20.        •  Lov.  17  :  14. 


been  guided  by  the  Spirit  to  an  autho- 
ritative and  unanimous  conclusion. 
The  apostles    were  inspired  men    as 

Jesus   had   promised.      (John  U:26;  16:13.) 

And  to  us — including  the  church. 
To  lay  upon  you  no  greater  or 
further  burden  then  these  neces- 
sary things — under  the  circumstances 
and  in  those  times,  coming  as  they  did 
in  contact  with  the  heathen  world  and 
with  Jewish  society.  It  was  necessary 
that  they  should  be  separate  and  pure 
from  the  one  and  not  give  offence  to 
the  other, 

29.  (See  on  rer.  20 )  The  differences  are, 
that  here  the  first  prohibition  is  fuller 
and  more  definite  ;  and  that  the  order 
of  prohibition  is  so  arranged,  that  those 
relating  to  food  are  put  together,  and 
that  of  fornication  at  the  end.  This, 
Dr.  Alexander  remarks,  "agrees  ex- 
actly with  the  natural  relation  of  our 
oral  proposition  as  originally  uttered, 
to  the  same  idea,  afterward  reduced  to 
writing;  thus  affording  an  unstudied 
but  most  interesting  proof  of  authen- 
ticity and  genuineness  in  the  record." 
From  which  things,  if  ye  keep 
yourselves.  (JohnU:  is)  Compare  the 
similarity  of  James  1  :  27  "  to  keep 
himself  unspotted  from  the  world." 
In  this  expression,  and  in  the  use  of 
the  word  greeting  in  ver.  23  and  James 
1 : 1,  as  well  as  the  practical  nature  of ! 
the  letter,  we  see  indication  tliat  James  ' 
was  the  writer,  or  that  it  was  dictated 
by  him.  Ye  shall  do  well— what 
is  right  or  commendable,  (lo-sn,  3John6) 
Ye  shall  prosper  in  peace  and  liannony 
and  promote  your  best  interests.  Fare 
ye  well — the  usual  formula  in  closing 
a  letter.  Literally,  be  strong.  Besides 
these  public  injunctions  to  the  Gentile 
churches,  was  the  private  charge  to 
Paul  and  Barnabas  to  remember  the 
poor  ^Gai  1 :  10),  those  at  Jerusalem. 
This  they  had  done  (n  •  w  3o),  and  after- 
ward Paul  did  frequently.    (2* :  n  ;  Kom. 

15    26.  27  ;  1   Cor  16:  3,2  Cor,  9:1)      Perhaps 

Judas  and  Silas  bore  gifts  on  their  re- 


turn to  Jerusalem.  (Ver  33.)  One  nega- 
tive result  also  on  the  side  of  Paul  aud 
Barnabas,  was  that  Titus,  a  Gentile  be- 
liever, was  not  compelled  to  be  circum- 
cised. (Gal.  2: 3.)  Anotiier  negative 
result  on  the  side  of  Jewish  Christians 
was  that  they  were  left  just  as  the  Con- 
ference found  them.  Nothing  was 
commanded  and  nothing  forbidden  in 
regard  to  their  relation  to  circumcision 
and  the  ISIosaic  law.  They  were  at 
their  pleasure  to  observe  it  strictly  as 
thousands  of  the  Jewish  believers  did 
(21 ;  20)  or  more  loosely  as  Paul  often 
did. 

But  while  the  question  seemed  now 
to  be  settled,  it  was  not  long  before 
Judaizing  teachers  were  enjoining 
circumcision  on  Gentile  converts. 
Against  these  Paul  had  to  contend  dur- 
ing his  whole  active  missionary  career, 
as  is  evident  from  his  Epistles,  espe- 
cially that  to  the  Galatians.  The  fall 
of  Jerusalem  aud  the  destruction  of  the 
temple  must  have  had  a  weakening 
power  upon  the  Judaizing  party.  The 
church  at  Jerusalem  had  retired  to 
Pella,  but  Eusel)ius  seems  to  imply 
that  some  time  after,  they  for  the  most 
part  returned  to  Jerusalem,  and  the 
Judaizing  party  revived.  But  the 
terrible  overthrow  of  Bar-chocheba, 
"  the  son  of  the  star,"  about  A.  D.  1.3.5, 
crushed  out  Judaism  in  Palestine.  The 
church  at  Jerusalem  now  ceased 
to  be  the  church  of  the  circum- 
cision. The  Judaizing  party  of  the 
church,  however,  continued  down  to 
the  fifth  century,  in  the  two  sects,  the 
Nazarenes  and  the  Ebionites.  The  for- 
mer, a  small  sect  beyond  Jordan  in 
Pella  and  other  neighboring  places, 
were  almost  orthodox  in  belief.  They 
held  themselves  bound  to  the  Mosaic 
Law,  but  did  not  consider  Gentile 
Christians  under  the  same  obligation, 
and  recognized  the  apostolic  authority 
of  Paul.  The  Ebionites,  a  much  larger 
and  widely  disseminated  sect,  held  that 
the  Mosaic  Law  was  alike  binding  oa 


244 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XV. 


30  So  when  they  were  dismissed,  they  came 
to  Antioch  :  and  when  they  had  gathered 
the  multitude  together,  they  delivered  the 

31  epistle:  w/iicfiyfhen  they  had  read,  they 

32  rejoiced  for  the  consolation.  And  Judas 
and   Silas,  beiug  >>  prophets  aiso  them- 


selves, « exhorted  the  brethren  with  many 

33  words,  and  contirnied  t/iem.  And  after 
they  had  tarried  t/iere  a  space,  they  were 
let  J  go  in  peace  from  the  brethren  unto 

34  the  apostles.    Notwithstanding  it  pleased 


b  ch.  11  :  27. 


'  ch.  14  :  22 ;  1  Cor.  14:3;  Heb.  10  :  25. 
16  :  11. 


d  Gen.  26  :  29;  E.\od.  4  :  18  ;  1  Cor. 


all  Christians.  They  rejected  all  the 
Gospels  but  Matthew,  regarded  Christ 
as  merely  a  man,  and  Paul  as  an  a])os- 
tate.  "  If,"  says  Dr.  J.  B.  Lightfoot, 
"  the  Nazarenes  might  have  claimed 
some  affinity  to  the  apostles  of  the 
circumcisiou,  the  Ebionites  were  tlie 
direct  spiritual  descendants  of  those 
false  brethren,  the  Judaizers  of  the 
ai)Ostolic  age,  who  first  disturbed  the 
l)eace  of  the  Autiochene  church,  and 
then  dogged  St.  Paul'  s  footsteps  from 
city  to  city,  everywhere  thwarting  his 
eiJorts  ami  undermining  his  authority." 
(Coiii,Gal.,p  :«■-'.) 

30-39.  Paul  and  Barnabas  Ee- 
TUKN  TO  Antioch.  Their  Separa- 
tion IN  Missionary  Work.  This 
extended  over  a  period  of  some  months 
into  the  year  a.  d.  51. 

30.  So  when  they  were  dis- 
missed—  implying  a  formal  and 
solemn  leave-taking  by  the  Jerusalem 
church,  probably  witli  religious  exer- 
cises. When  they  had  gathered 
the  multitude  of  discijjles,  constitut- 
ing the  church  at  Antioch.  (ver  12; 
U:2T.)  They  delivered  the  epistle 
— to  the  proper  representatives  of  the 
church,  doubtless  to  the  pastor  or 
pastors.  They,  the  subject  of  the  verbs 
in  this  verse,  refers  generally  to  tlie 
company  that  returned  to  Antioch,  but 
specially  to  Judas  and  Silas,  the  mes- 
sengers sent  to  deliver  the  epistle  to 
the  church  at  Antioch. 

31.  Which,  when  they  had  read, 
they ,  the  multitnde,  rejoiced  for  the 
consolation-which  the  contents  of  the 
letter  gave  them.  Their  anxiety  regard- 
ing the  Judaizing  faction  was  appeased. 
They  rejoice  that  the  stand  which  Paul 
and  Barnabas  had  taken  was  approved, 
and  that  their  Christian  liberty  was  re- 
spected and  secured.  Copies  of  tlie 
letter  were  probably  sent  to  other 
churches. 

32.  Judas  and  Silas,  being 
prophets    also    themselves  —  not 


]  only  were  they  leading  men  and  dele- 
I  gates  of  the  Jerusalem  church,  but  also 
1  inspired  teachers  themselves  (see  on  13 : 1  )j 
'  as  well  as  Paul  and  Barnaltas.     Ex- 
j  horted — some  translate  cuvij'ortcd,  so 
:  that  the  verb  may  correspond  with  its 
[  noun,  consolation,    in  ver.  31.     Here, 
•  however,   both   ideas  seem  to  be    in- 
cluded :     They  addressed  the  brethren 
in  words  of  exhortation  and  comfort 
and  confitmeAt  stroigtJiencd  them  in 
I  the  faith.     It  is  within  the  province  of 
[  the    projjhet    to  console,   exhort,  and 
strengthen,     (icor.  U:3.)     This    hapi>y 
effect  was  produced  upon  the  whole 
multitude,  both  the  Gentiles  and  the 
less  numerous  Jews.    One  of  the  reasons 
for  sending  Judas  and  Silas  may  have 
been  the  fact  that  they  had  been  en- 
tirely unconnected  with  the  conversion 
of  Gentiles,  and  thus  above  suspicion 
of  undue  partiality  toward  them.     If 
so,  they  would  have  the  greater  weight 
in  confirming  the  epistle  at  Antioch, 
esjiecially  among  the  Jewish  brethren. 

33.  After  they  had  tarried  there 
a  space — ^^lerhaps  a  few  days.  There 
is  nothing  in  the  expression  to  indicate 
how  long.  They  were  let  go — dis- 
missed, the  same  verb  as  ver  30.  They 
were  dismissed  in  peace,  formally, 
perhaps,  with  religious  exercises  (21 : 
5,  6),  and  with  the  usual  salutations 
and  good  wishes.  Reference  seems  to 
be  had  to  the  usual  Jewish  salutation, 
"Peace    be    with    you,"   or,   "Go    in 

peace."         (Luke?  :50,"  16:.16.)         To      the 

!  apostles^or,  according  to  some  an- 
■  cient  manuscripts,  to  those  nho  htnttrnt 
them  forth,  probably  with  an  oral  or 
I  written  reply  from  the  church  at  An- 
;  tioch.  The  natural  implication  of  this 
!  verse  is  that  both  Judas  and  Silas  re- 
turned to  Jerusalem. 

34.  This  verse  is  wanting  in  the 
best  manuscripts  and  was  probably  in- 
serted in  the  text  as  early  as  the  fifth 
and  sixth  centuries,  to  harmonize  the 
statement  in  ver.  33,  which  implies  that 


Ch.  XV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


245 


35  Silas  to  abide  there  still.  'Paul  also  and 
Barnabas  coiitintioil  iu  Aiitioch,  teaching 
and  preaching  the  word  of  the  Lord,  with 
many  others  also. 


The  seraration  oj  Paul  and  Uanwbas  inrnis- 

sioiiary  iiork 
of)  f  AND  some  days   .iftcr  Paul   said  unto 
Barnabas,  Let  us  go  again  and  visit  our 


'  ch.  13  :  1.        f  Rom.  1  :  11. 


Silas  returned  to  Jerusalem,  with  that 
in  ver.  40,  which  implies  his  presence 
at  Antioch  not  long  after.  But  the 
coniiuuiiication  between  Jerusalem  and 
Antiocli  was  so  frequent  and  easy  that 
there  is  no  difficulty  in  supposing  that 
Silas  went  back  to  Jerusalem  as  his 
commission  required,  and  i-eturned  to 
Antioch  in  time  to  go  with  Paul  on  his 
second     missionary    journey.      (seeoa 

ver.  «).) 

35.  Antioch  continued  to  be  a  large 
and  inviting  field  of  labor.  But  Paul 
and  Barnabas  continued  in  An- 
tioch teaching  and  preaching  the 
word  of  the  Lord.     It  was  not  their 

word,     but     Clirist's     word    (see  on  8:  25), 

which  they  both  taught  and  published. 
They  would  naturally  teach  inquirers 
and  Christian  disciples,  and  announce 
the  glad  tidings  to  those  who  had  not 
heard  it,  but  neither  exclusively. 
With — in  common  with  many  others 
also.  Antioch  abounded  iu  preachers, 
and  all  had  ])lenty  to  do.  (13 : 1.)  Very 
probably  it  was  a  centre,  as  Dr.  Alex- 
ander remarks,  "  from  which  preachers 
were  sent  forth  in  various  directions, 
and  to  whicli  there  was  a  concourse  of 
inquiring  Gentiles  from  the  surround- 
provinces,  if  not  from  distant  coun- 
tries." 

It  is  at  this  time  between  the  Con- 
ference at  Jerusalem  and  the  second 
missionary  journey  of  Paul  (ver.  40)  that 
some  able  commentators  place  Peter's 
visit  to  Antioch  and  Paul's  rebuke,  re- 
corded in  Gal.  2  :  11,  f.  But  it  seems 
incredible  that  Peter,  fresh  from  the 
Jerusalem  Conference,  and  after  the 
part  he  had  there  taken,  and  when  the 
delegates  Judas  and  Silas  had  just  left 
Antioch,  should  act  tlie  part  there 
ascribed  to  him.  Neither  is  it  prob- 
able that  so  soon  after  the  Conference 
any  sliould  have  come  from  James  to 
undo  what  he  had  said  and  written. 
Besides,  it  is  implied  in  ver.  31  and 
16  :  4,  5  that  the  Conference  was  fol- 
lowed by  a  period  of  rest  from  Judaiz- 
ing    questions.      Some     suppose    that 


Peter's  visit  occurred  a  little  before  the 
Conference,  and  that  he  was  there 
when  certain  ones  came  from  Judea, 
spoken  of  in  the  first  verse  of  this 
cha])ter.  But  Paul  speaks  of  it  in  Gal. 
2  :  11,  as  occurring  after  the  Conference. 
At  least  this  is  the  natural  inference 
from  his  language.  It  is  better  with 
many  others  to  place  it  at  Paul's  return 
to  Antioch,  after  his  second  missionary 
journey  (is ;  m),  which  see.  Compare 
Harmonic  Arrangement,  notes  on  §§ 
29,  36. 

36.  And  some  days  after  —  an 
indefinite  note  of  time  which  may  be 
longer  or  shorter  according  to  circum- 
stances. It  was  probably  now  in  the 
early  spring  of  A.  D.  51,  when  the 
weather  and  roads  were  fitting  for  Paul 
to  take  the  journey  proposed.  The 
thought  of  the  churches  he  had  gath- 
ered among  the  Gentiles  made  him 
restless,  and  filled  him  with  longings 
to  see  them  and  help  them  in  the  faith. 
(ver.  41.)  He  therefore  says  to  Barna- 
bas, Let  us  go  again,  etc.  The  ex- 
pression in  the  original  is  emphatic, 
Come,  let  us  return  and  look  after  our 
brethren  in  every  city  Avhere  we 
have  preached  the  Avord  of  the 
Lord,  and  see  how  they  do — 
with  special  reference  to  their  spiritual 
welfare,  yet  not  excluding  their  tem- 
poral condition.  See  14  :  21,  22;  also 
afterwards,  Paul's  daily  care  of  all  the 

churches.        {l  Cor.  U  ;  2,  3,  28;    1  Thess.  3:  5.) 

Paul  desired  not  only  to  see  men  con- 
verted, but  to  aid  in  building  them  up 
in  every  Christian  grace. 

37.  This  verse  gives  the  cause  of 
Paul's  separation  from  Barnabas.  But 
though  we  see  an  exhibition  of  human 
frailty  in  two  eminently  pious  men, 
the  Lord  overruled  it  for  good  in  form- 
ing two  missions  and  doubling  the 
foreign  missionary  force.  And  Bar- 
nabas determined,  or  according  to 
the  majority  of  the  oldest  manuscripts, 
wished,  or  was  minded  to  take  John 
whose  surname  was  Mark,  (see 
ou  12: 12  and  13;  5.)    This  desire  of  Barna- 


246 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XV. 


brethren  ein  every  city  where  we  have    38  was  !Mark.    But  Paul  thought  not  good 

preached  the  word  of  the  IjOrd,  and  see  to  take  him   with  them  '  who  departed 

37  how  they  do.    And  Barnabas  determined  from  them  from  Paiuphylia,  and  went  not 

to  take  with  them  ''John,  whose  surnamt  |  39  with  them  to  the  work.   And  the  conten- 


8  cli.  13  :  4,  13,  14,  51 ;  14  :  1,  6,  24,  25 ;  2  Cor.  11  :  28. 
Tim.  4:  11;  Philem.  24. 


h  ch.  12  :  12,  25 ;  13  :  5;  Col.  4  :  10;  2 
I  ch.  13  :  13. 


lias  doubtless  arose  from  his  kind  and 
generous  disposition,  and  from  his  nat- 
ural afl'ection  for  Mark,  who  was  his 
cousin.  (Col.  4:10.)  Mark  of  course  was 
ready  and  desirous  to  go,  and  Barnal)as 
wished  to  give  him  op}K)rtunity  to 
make  amends  for  past  mistakes. 

38.  But  Paul  naturally  disliking 
fickleness,  decidedly  condemned  Mark 
in  what  probably  appeared  to  him  to 
be  a  shrinking  from  duty  But  Paul 
thought  not  good,  etc.  But  Paul 
deemed  it  not  fitting  to  take  with  them 
this  one  who  "departed  from  them 
from  Pamphylia. 

39.  Barnabas,  however,  did  not 
yield,  but  apparently  sought  to  defend 
ilark  from  what,  perhaps,  seemed  to 
him  undue  severity.  So  when  it  comes 
to  the  test,  he  decides,  rather  than  to 
throw  his  cousin  aside,  to  separate  from 
Paul,  go  on  a  mission  of  his  own,  and 
take  Mark  with  him.  And  the  con- 
tention was  so  sharp  between 
them.  This  is  a  paraphrase  ratlier 
than  a  translation.  More  literally. 
And  there  vas  irritation,  or  a  }Hiro.r- 
ysm,  the  latter  word  being  derived  from 
the  Greek,  which  is  also  used  as  a  med- 
ical term.  It  is  used  in  a  gootl  sense 
in  Heb.  10  :  24,  "  for  incitement  unto 
love  and  good  works."  (Dr.  A.  C. 
Kendrick'S  Com.  on  Ifebreirs.)  The 
word  here  does  not  necessarily  suggest 
an  open  quarrel,  but  such  an  irritation 
and  excitement  of  feeling,  as  to  produce 
a  separation.  Each  considered  bis  own 
reasons  good ;  neither  would  ynld  to 
the  other.  Both  showed  that  tliey  were 
"men  of  like  passions."  (ui.i.)  No 
doubt  unpleasant  feelings  were  aroused, 
and  it  is  possible  that  they  both  felt  it 
the  more  deeply  because  of  their  long 
and  intimat*  association.  The  excite- 
ment,  however,  as  the  word   implies, 

'was  only  transient,  and  there  is  no  in- 
timation that  it  diminished  their 
strong  mutual  regard.  That,  so  that, 
they  departed  asunder  —  not  in 
auger,  but  as  a  necessity  under  the  cir- 


cumstances. Barnabas  insisted ;  Paul 
would  not  yield.  So  they  agreed  to 
part,  not  as  fellow  laborers,  in  the  same 
work,  but  in  different  fields.  No  decis- 
ion is  given  as  to  which  was  right. 
Chrysostom  says,  that  Paul  demanded 
what  was  right;  Barnabas  what  was 
kiud.  And  so  Barnabas  took 
Mark  and  sailed  to  Cyprus,  where 
they  in  connection  with  Paul  had 
labore<l  in  their  former  journey,  (la ; 
*-i2.)  Thus  Paul  and  Barnabas  divide 
their  former  field  of  labor.  Omit  so. 
Barnabas  api)ears  no  more  in  New  Tes- 
tament history ;  1)ut  about  six  years 
lat#r  Paul  speaks  of  him  in  most 
friendly  terms.  (ic«r.  9:6;  o«i.  2  :  n  ) 
Mark  also  so  conducted  himself,  as  to 
merit  Paul's  approval.  During  his  first 
imjuisoument  at  Rome,  Paul  mentions 
Mark  as  a  fellow-worker  tlieie  (Pbiiem. 
■-'«),  and  as  one  who  had  been  a  comfort 
to  him  (Col.  4  :io.  u) ;  and  during  his 
second  imprisonment  he  wrote  to  Tim- 
othy, "  Take  Mark,  and  bring  liim  with 
thee,  for  he  is  useful  to  me  for  miiiistcr- 
intr."  (2Tiui.4:  u.)  As  we  take  leave 
of  Barnabas  and  Mark,  in  the  Acts,  it 
is  jilea.sant  to  think  of  them  as  sailing 
over  tlie  sea,  bearing  to  its  islands  the 
glad  tidings  of  salvation. 

The  Seco.vd  Missionary  Tour  of 
Paiil.  This  journey  extended  through 
the  southeastern  and  central  portions  of 
Asia  Minor,  including  Cilicia  and  all 
tlie  places  where  churches  had  been 
founded  during  the  former  journey, 
and  Phrygia  and  Galatia  ;  thence  by 
way  of  Troas  into  Europe,  where  they 
jircached  in  Philippi,  Thessalonica, 
and  Berea,  cities  of  Macedonia; 
thence  into  Greece  proper,  stopping 
briefiy  at  Athens,  and  making  a  long 
stay  at  Corinth,  where  great  success 
attends  the  preaching  of  the  gospel. 
From  this  point  Paul  returns  by  way 
of  Ephesus,  Csesarea,  and  Jerusalem  to 
Autioch.  (15:40;  i8:M.)  "In  his  first 
journey  Paul  may  be  said  to  have  been 
trying  his  winga ;  for  his  course,  ad- 


Ch.  XV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


347 


♦  ion  was  so  sharp  between  them,  that  they 

40  departed  asunder  one  from  theother.  And 

so  Barnabas  took  Mark,  and  sailed  nnto 

Cyprus.    And  Paul  chose ''Silas,  and  de- 


parted,   'being    recoTumended    by    the 
brethren  unto  the  grace  of  God. 
41       And  he  went  through  Syria  and  Clicia, 
™  confirming  the  churches. 


k  lOor.  9:  6;  ver.  22.        »  eh.  14  :  26.        n  oh.  14  :  22 ;  10  :  5. 


venturous  as  it  was,  only  swept  in  a 
limited  circle  round  his  native  prov- 
ince. In  liis  second  journey  he  per- 
formed a  far  more  distant  and  perilous 
flight.  Indeed,  this  journey  was  not 
only  the  greatest  he  aciiieved,  but  per- 
haps the  most  momentous  recorded  in 
the  annals  of  the  human  race.  In  its 
issues  it  far  outri  vailed  tlie  expedition 
of  Alexander  the  Gi'eat,  when  he  carried 
the  arms  and  civilization  of  Greece  into 
the  heart  of  Asia,  or  that  of  Caesar, 
when  he  landed  on  the  shores  of  Brit- 
ain, or  even  the  voyage  of  Columbus 
when  lie  discovered  the  New  World. 
Yet  when  lie  set  out  on  it,  he  had  no 
idea  of  the  magnitude  wliicli  it  was  to 
assume,  or  even  the  direction  which  it 
was  to  take."  (Stalkkk,  Life  of  Paid, 
p.  85,  f.)  The  time  employed  in  this 
journey  appears  to  have  been  about 
three  years  and  a  half,  from  the  spring 
of  A.  it.  51  to  the  autumn  of  A.  D.  54. 

40,  41.  Paul  Commences  his 
Second  Missionary  Tour.  It  is 
very  probable  that  several  weeks  were 
occupied  in  visiting  the  churches  of 
Syria  and  Cilicia  before  going  north 
into  the  central  regions  of  Asia  Minor. 

40.  And  Paul  chose  Silas— as 
his  companion,  Silas  to  occupy  the 
position  and  relation  which  liad  been 
held  by  Barnabas.  It  thus  appears 
that  Silas,  who  had  gone  back  to  Jeru- 
salem with  Judas  to  report  their  com- 
mission to  Antioch  (ver.  33),  had  either 
returned  thither,  or  else  Paul  now  sent 
for  iiim.  Some  probability  is  given  to 
the  latter  supposition,  by  the  fact  that 
Paul  seems  to  liave  started  on  liis  mis- 
sion after  Barnabas,  although  he  was 
first  to  suggest  it.  This  delay  may  have 
been  occasioned  through  the  sending 
for  Silas.  As  one  of  the  delegates  from 
Jerusalem  to  Antioch  and  also  as  a 
prophet,  he  was  a  fitting  companion  of 
Paul  in  the  work.  He  would  also  tes- 
tify to  the  esteem  in  which  botli  Paul 
and  Barnabas  were  held  by  the  breth- 
ren at  Jerusalem,  (see  oq  ver.  22,  26, 27, 
82,33)     Being  recommended  —  or 


committed  by  the  brethren  of  the 
church  of  Antioch,  to  the  grace  ol 
God,  or  according  to  the  latest  critical 
authorities,  of  the  Lord.  They  were 
committed  to  the  favor  of  the  Lord  by 
prayer,  and  doubtless  by  apjuopriate 
parting  religious  exercises.  It  does  not 
follow  that  like  benedictions  were  re- 
fused Barnabas.  Witiiout  doubt  prayers 
and  good  wisiies  followed  him,  though 
possibly  less  formal  and  less  general. 
Departed — icent  forth,  descriptive  of 
them  as  missionaries.  (Luke  9 : 6 ;  3  joho :. ) 
In  place  of  jNIark,  Paul  soon  after  chose 
Timothy.     (i6:i.) 

41.  lie  went  through  Syria  and 
Cilicia.  He  would  naturally  journey 
from  Antioch,  the  capital,  northward 
through  Syria,  and  then  in  a  westerly 
course  through  Cilicia,  doul)tless  visit- 
ing Tarsus  and  other  places,  where  he 

had    labored.      (see  on  ver.  23.      Compare  Gal. 

1 :  21.)  Thus  as  Barnabas  returns  first 
to  his  native  Cyprus,  so  Paul  goes  to 
his  native  Cilicia.  Confirming— or 
establishing,  the  churches,  in  the 
faith  (ver. 32),  which  he  himself  had 
doubtless  planted.  No  reference  is  had 
to  admitting  candidates  into  the 
churches.  Paul  also  delivered  the 
decrees  of  the  Conference  at  Jerusa- 
lem.     (Ver.  23;  16:  4.) 

The  Relation  of  the  Apostolic 
Churches  to  each  other.  Their 
Co-operation.  It  ai)pears  from  this 
chapter  that  the  churches  were  distinct 
and  independent  bodies.  There  appears 
in  the  narrative  no  evidence  of  a  con- 
federation of  churches  under  one  com- 
mon jurisdiction.  The  church  at  Jeru- 
salem has  no  authority  over  that  of 
Antioch,  nor  the  church  at  Antioch 
over  those  of  Syria  and  Cilicia.  The 
churches  treat  each  other,  not  as  de- 
pendents, but  as  equals.  Whatever 
authority  is  manifested  is  that  of  in- 
spired apostles,  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  and 
of  the  truth.  Yet  mutual  helpfulness 
and  co-operation  is  implied.  Messen- 
gers pass  to  and  from  the  churches, 
resulting  iu  counteracting  false  teach- 


248 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XV. 


in^,  and  in  upbuilding  their  member- 
ship. And  this  accords  with  the  New 
Testament  elsewhere.  The  seven 
churches  of  Asia  were  distinct.  A  com- 
mon ecclesiastical  judicatory  nowhere 
appears  among  the  early  churches,  but 
co-operation.  Jerusalem  helped  Anti- 
och  ;  and  Antioch,  Jerusalem.  (ii:.i2, 
M,  30.)  Apollos  is  commended  from 
Ephesus  to  Corinth.  (i8:-2t.)  The 
churches  of  Asia,  Galatia,  Macedonia, 
and  Achaia  co-operated  in  the  work  of 
benevolence  and  sent  messengers  and 
letters  for  carrying  out  the  work,  (i  Cor. 

16:1-4;  2  Cor.  8  :  1-6, 16-19,  23.) 

Pkactical  Remarks. 

1.  Every  period  of  the  church  has  its  here- 
sies, and  its  controversies.  (Ver.  1 ;  Gal.  1 : 
6;  Jude4;  1  Tim.  4:  1.) 

2.  We  should  contend  earnestly  for  the 
faith.  It  is  better  to  sacrifice  peace  than 
the  truth.    (Ver.  2 ;  Gal.  1  :  8-10  ;  Jude  3.) 

3.  We  might  well  doubt  the  Christianity 
of  any  one  who  cannot  rejoice  in  the  con- 
version of  the  heathen,  whether  of  one 
nation  or  another.  (Ver.  3;  11  :  18 ;  Phil. 
1 :  18.) 

4.  Though  workers  together  with  God,  he 
is  the  leading  party,  and  to  him  we  should 
escribe  the  glory.    (Ver.  4  ;  Ps.  115  :  1.) 

5.  Faith  in  Christ  does  not  at  once  remove 
all  errors  of  education  and  prejudice.  These, 
however,  will  give  way  to  instruction  and 
the  enlightening  influences  of  the  Holy 
Spirit.    (Ver.  5 ;  18  :  25,  26 ;  1  Cor.  3  :  1-3.) 

6.  We  see  perhaps  the  germ  of  the  ecclesi- 
astical Council  in  the  Conference  at  Jerusa- 
lem. The  latter  with  its  inspired  men  and 
under  the  special  influence  of  the  Holy 
Spirit  would  speak  with  authority.  The 
former  is  merely  an  advisory  body,  and  has 
authority  only  so  far  as  its  decrees  are  con- 
firmed by  the  word  of  God.    (Ver.  6, 15.) 

7.  God  is  the  Author  of  missions ;  and 
missionaries  are  his  honored  chosen  messen- 
gers.    (Ver.  7  ;  Eph.  3  :  8.) 

8.  We  should  seek  from  God,  who  knoweth 
our  hearts,  an  assurance  of  our  acceptance 
with  him.  (Ver.  8  ;  Ps.  139  :  23,  24  ;  Rom.  8 : 
14-16.) 

9.  A  heart  purified  by  faith  is  the  essential 
thing  in  true  religion.  This  is  true  circum- 
cision. (Ver.  9;  Gal.  5:6;  1  Peter  1:22; 
Eom.  2 :  29.); 


10.  The  law  is  indeed  a  heavy  yoke,  bring- 
ing bondage  and  condemnation.  By  it  no 
one  can  Vje  justified.  (Ver.  10 ;  Rom.  3  :  20 ; 
7  :  7-10.) 

11.  The  gosjiel  is  the  glad  tidings  of  salva- 
tion through  the  grace  of  Clirist.  None  are 
so  good  as  not  to  need  it,  and  none  so  bad  as 
to  be  beyond  its  reach.  (Ver.  11 ;  1  Tim.  1  : 
12-15.) 

12.  Truth  is  confirmed  by  the  facts  of  ex- 
perience. The  gospel  is  shown  to  be  the 
power  of  God.  Signs  and  wonders  attended 
its  first  proclamation.  (Ver.  12 ;  Mark  16  ; 
20.) 

13.  Aside  from  inspiration  and  perhaps 
apostleship,  James  had  authority  as  pastor 
of  the  church  at  Jerusalem.  The  pastor  has 
authority  as  overseer  and  as  an  ambassador 
of  Christ.  (Ver.  13-19 ;  20  :  28  ;  Titus  1:5; 
2  :  15 ;  Heb.  13  :  17 ;  1  Peter  5  :  2.) 

14.  Peter,  James,  and  Paul,  though  differ- 
ing at  times  in  their  way  of  stating  things, 
were  one  in  doctrine.  (Ver.  14  ;  Eph.  2:8; 
1  Peter  1:5;  James  2  :  5.) 

15.  God's  prophetic  word  is  in  harmony 
with  what  he  does  through  his  Spirit  and 
his  servants.  (Ver.  15  ;  2  Peter  1  :  19 ;  Rev, 
19  :  10.) 

16.  James  gave  an  example  to  churches 
and  councils  in  appealing  to  Scripture  and  in 
being  guided  by  it.  (Ver.  16  ;  Isa.  8  :  20 ;  2 
Tim.  3  :  16.) 

17.  Christ  and  the  gospel  are  for  all  nations, 
and  hence  the  gospel  should  be  preached  to 
every  creature.    (Ver.  17  ;  Mark  16  :  15.) 

18.  The  progress  in  divine  revelation,  and 
the  different  dispensations,  are  in  accordance 
with  the  eternal  purposes  of  God.  (Ver. 
IS ;  Heb.  4  :  3.) 

19.  The  law  of  gospel  liberty  rests  upon 
the  great  doctrine  of  salvation  by  faith 
through  grace.  (Ver.  19;  Rom.  8  :  2, 15,  21 ; 
Gal.  5  :  1.) 

20.  We  must  not  abuse  our  gospel  liberty 
in  wounding  or  tempting  our  less  favored 
brethren.  (Ver.  20  ;  Rom.  14  :  15;  1  Cor.  8  : 
9-13  ;  Gal.  5  :  13,  14.) 

21.  Gospel  liberty  does  not  abrogate  the 
duty  of  avoiding  both  the  reality  and  the 
appearance  of  evil.  (Ver.  20,  21 ;  James  1 : 
25,  27.) 

22.  There  was  no  ecclesiastical  hierarchy 
in  the  Conference  at  Jerusalem.  All  stood 
as  brethren.  Peter  had  no  pre-eminence 
above   James   or   the  other  apostles.    The 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


249 


apostles  and  elders  did  not  act  independently 
of  the  wliolc  churcli,  but  iu  concert  with  it. 
and  obtiiined  its  sanction.  (Ver.  22.  23; 
Matt  2:t  ■.  8-11.) 

2:5.  Tlicappointingof  delegates  by  churches 
rests  on  apostolic  precedent.  (Ver.  2,  22.  23 
27.) 

2-1.  Delegates  should  be  selected  from  such 
brethren  as  are  noted  for  sound  judgment 
piety,  and  good  works     (Ver.  2,  25,  27,  32.) 

2.1.  The  spirit  of  brotherhood  should  pre- 
vail among  all  Christians,  whether  of  one 
nation  or  another.  (Ver.  23;  Matt.  23:8; 
Mark  10  :  42-45.) 

26.  We  may  learn  much  from  this  chapter 
in  regard  to  the  settlement  of  church 
troubles.  While  some  could  be  best  settled 
by  an  ecclesiastical  council ;  others  might  be 
better  arranged  by  submitting  their  cases  to 
the  judgment  of  a  sister  church.  (Ver.  22- 
28.) 

27.  A  spirit  of  conciliation  with  prayerful- 
ness,  without  seltishness,  seeking  to  know 
and  do  the  right  should  prevail  in  ecclesias- 
tical gatherings.    (Ver.  25  ;  Rom.  14  :  19.) 

28.  Arrogant  and  self-constituted  teachers 
have  done  great  mischief.  Thus  at  the  so- 
called  Robber  Council,  (a.  d  449)  the  major- 
ity not  only  brutally  checked  all  dissent, 
but  by  the  soldiery  compelled  assent.  (Ver. 
24.) 

29.  Certain  restraints  in  Christian  living 
are  necessary,  not  only  from  things  that  are 
right  in  themselves,  but  also  from  many 
such  as  may  be  inexpedient.  (Ver.  28,  29 ;  1 
Cor.  10  :  23,  33.) 

30.  Neither  the  apostles  and  elders,  nor 
the  church  at  Jerusalem,  assumed  or  as- 
serted any  jurisdiction  over  the  churches 
of  Antioch,  Syria,  and  Cilicia.  They  sim- 
ply, under  the  guidance  of  the  Spirit,  gave 
their  judgment  regarding  a  specific  case  sub- 
mitted to  them.     (Ver.  22  29.) 

31.  If  a  single  brief  epistle  gave  so  much 
joy  to  the  brethren  at  Antioch,  how  much 
more  should  the  many  longer  ones  which 
we  have  afford  comfort  and  instruction  to 
us.    (Ver.  31 :  2  Tim.  3  :  16.) 

32.  We  should  always  be  ready  to  use  the 
powers  and  gifts  which  we  have  received 
from  God  in  his  service.  (Ver.  32 ;  1  Tim.  4  : 
14-16.) 

33.  How  happily  a  religious  controversy 
may  end,  if  the  parties  fear  God,  seek  his 
guidance,   and    act   kindly    and    honestly 


toward  one  another.  (Ver.  .33  ;  6  :  1,  7;  11  : 
18.) 

34.  Preachers  should  not  forgot  their  call- 
ing and  their  work  wherever  they  may  be. 
(Ver.  3.  12.  :i5.) 

35  It  is  not  enough  to  make  converts  and 
plant  churches  ;  pastoral  oversight  and  pas- 
toral visitation  are  necessary.  (Ver.  30;  1 
Cor.  3  :  6-9.) 

36.  One  of  the  peculiarities  of  the  Bible  is 
its  impartiality  in  recording  the  errors  as 
well  as  the  virtues  of  good  men,  and  this  is 
one  proof  of  its  inspiration.    (Ver.  37-39.) 

37.  Human  weakness  was  shown  in  the 
dissension  between  Paul  and  Barnabas. 
Probably  none  would  have  occured  if  both 
of  them  had  sought  divine  guidance  before- 
hand.  (Ver.  37-39 ;  1  Cor.  11:1;  James  1 : 5.) 

38.  "  This  account  proves  that  there  was  no 
collusion  or  agreement  among  the  apostles  to 
impose  on  mankind.  Had  there  been  such 
an  agreement,  and  had  the  books  of  the  New 
Testament  been  an  imposture,  the  apostles 
would  have  been  represented  as  perfectly 
harmonious,  and  as  united  in  all  their  views 
and  efiforts.  What  impostor  would  have 
thought  of  the  device  of  representing  the 
early  friends  of  the  Christian  religion  as 
divided  and  contending,  and  separated  from 
each  other?  Such  a  statement  has  an 
air  of  candor  and  honesty,  and  at  the 
same  time  is  apparently  so  much  against 
the  truth  of  the  system,  that  no  impostor 
would  have  thought  of  resorting  to  it." 
(Barnes.)    (Ver.  39-41.) 

Ch.  16 :  Continuing  his  second 
missionary  tour,  Paul  revisits  Derbe 
and  Lystra,  where  he  adds  Timothy  to 
his  associates,  and  after  visiting  other 
churches,  he  extends  his  labors  through 
Phrygia  and  Galatia.  Finding  no 
other  open  door  iu  Asia  Minor,  and  be- 
ing joined  by  Luke  at  Troas,  they  pass 
over  to  Maccedonia  and  begin  a  mis- 
sion in  Europe.  Lydia  and  her  house- 
hold are  converted,  a  wonderful  mir- 
acle is  performed,  Paul  and  Silas  are 
beaten  and  imprisoned,  the  jailer  and 
his  house  believe,  and  Paul  and  Silas, 
being  honorably  discharged,  depart 
from  Philippi. 

1-10.  Paui.  AND  Silas  Revisit  the 
Churches  op  Lycaonia,  Extend 
Their  Labors  Into  Phrygia  and 
Come  to  Troas.    (Gai.  *  ■.  is-is,  19,  20;  1 


250 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVI. 


In  his  set-Old  missiunary  journey  Paul  revisils 
the  churches. 

16  THEN  came  he  to  "  Derbe  and  Lystra. 
And,  behold,  a  certain  disc:ple  was  there, 
»  named  Timotheus,  (pthe  son  of  a  certain 


woman,  which  was  a  Jewess,  and  believed; 

2  but  his  father  was  a  Greek  :)  which  i  was 
well  reported  of  by  the  brethren  that 

3  were  at  Lystra  and  Iconium.  Him  would 
Paul  have  to  go  forth  with  him ;  and 


■  ch.  14  :  6.        »  ch.  17  :  14;  20  ;  4 ;  Kom.  16  :  21  ;  1  Cor.  4  :  17  ;  Phil.  2  :  19-22;  Col. 
Thess.  3  :  2 ;  1  Tim.  1 :  2  ;  2  Tim.  1:2.        P  2  Tim.  1:5.        q  ch.  6  :  3. 


1:1;  1 


Cor.  9:20;  1   Tim.   4  :  14;    1    Tim.  1  :  5,  6  ;    3  :15.) 

The  time  embraced  iu  this  section  was 
nearly  a  year,  from  late  spring,  or  early 
summer,  of  A.  D.  51  to  the  early  spring 

of  A.  D.  52,      (See  on  15  :  40,  41.) 

1.  Then — rather,  and,  connecting 
this  verse  closely  with  the  preceding 
chapters.  Paul  and  Silas  had  left  An- 
tioch  and  passed  through  Syria  and 
over  Mount  Amanus,  which  separates 
Syria  from  Cilicia,  by  the  gorge  an- 
ciently called  the  Syrian  Gate,  but  now 
known  as  the  Beilan  Pass.  (i5:4i.) 
Thence  they  would  naturally  pass 
through  the  Cilician  plain  on  the  old 
Roman  road  to  Tarsus.  Having  visited 
the  churches  of  Cilicia,  the  hot  weather 
of  the  summer  approaching,  they  as- 
cend into  the  higher  regions  of  Asia 
Minor,  over  Mount  Taurus,  into  Lyca- 
onia  to  Derbe  and  Lystra.  It  was 
three  or  four  full  days' journey  from 
Tarsus,  through  the  mountain  valley  of 
tlie  Cydnus,  and  through  the  great  fis- 
sure of  Mount  Taurus,  a  gorge  known 
as  the  Cilician  Gates,  extending  from 
north  to  south,  a  distance  of  eighty 
miles.  Instead  of  then  came  he  to 
Derbe  and  Liystra,  the  Revised 
Version,  following  Westcott  and  Hort, 
and  some  of  the  oldest  manuscripts, 
read,  and  he  CMine  a/so  to  Derhe  and  to 
Lystra.  This  implies  more  distinctly 
that  there  were  congregations  of  be- 
lievers in  both  of  these  cities,  and  that 
Timothy  was  at  Lystra.  Notice  that 
in  going  from  east  to  west  Paul  reaches 
Derbe  first.  (SeeouU:6.)  The  excla- 
mation behold  introduces  the  meeting 
of  Timothy  as  a  matter  of  special  in- 
terest and  perhaps  of  surprise,  who  was 
to  i)lay  an  important  part  in  the  future 
history  of  the  apostle.  A  certain  dis- 
ciple was  there — at  Lystra  (see 
al)ove)  named  Timothy".  He  was 
})robably  converted  during  Paul's  pre- 
vious visit  (i  Cor.  4  :  17:  1  Tim  1  :2;  2  Tim.  I  :  2), 
as  well  as  his  mother  Eunice  and  his 
grandmother  Lois.     (2Tim.  i:5.)     From 


childhood  he  had  been  instructed  in 
the  Old  Testament  at  home.  (2  Tim. 
3 :  15)  Alford  infers  from  2  Tim  3  :  10, 
11,  that  he  may  have  been  converted  at 
Antioch  in  Pisidia,  though  Lystra  was 
probably  his  birthplace.  The  son 
of  a  certain  woman  which  was  a 
Jewess,  etc.  Rather,  according  to 
the  most  approved  reading,  the  son  of 
a  believing  Jeivish  woman,  but  of  a 
Greek  father.  His  father  was  certainly 
uncircumcised,  but  whether  he  was  a 
proselyte  of  the  gate  is  uncertain.  Mar- 
riages with  the  heathen  were  forbidden 
by  the  Mosaic  law  (Deut.  7 : 3, 4;  Eir»  9 :  i-s), 
but  Avere  not  uncommon  in  later  pe- 
riods of  Jewish  history,  especially  in 
districts  where  there  were  but  few 
Jews.  (SeeKutiii  :4.)  Timothy  thus 
formed  a  link  between  Jews  and 
Greeks,  which,  in  addition  to  his  nat- 
ural and  spiritual  abilities,  especially 
fitted  him  as  a  helper  to  Paul.  He  at- 
tended Paul  and  Silas  through  the 
greater  part  of  this  second  missionary 
journey.  He  labored  at  Corinth  (1  cor. 
16 :  10),  and  at  Ephesus  (1  Tim.  1 : 3),  and 
was  an  unselfish  attendant  on  Paul  at 
his  first  imprisonment  at  Rome.  (I'hii. 
2:  IS,  19.)  The  two  epistles  of  Paul  ad- 
dressed to  him  are  full  of  personal  de- 
tails and  affectionate  counsel,  and  in- 
dicate that,  though  not  robust  in  health, 
he  was  a  faithful  and  earnest  minister 

of  the  gospel.  (1  Tim.  5:23;  6:  11,  12;  2  Tim. 
1:4;   4:9.) 

2.  Timothy  was  well  reported  of, 
or  well-attested  by  the  brethren  at 
Lystra  and  Iconium,  among  whom 
he  had  doubtless  worked  earnestly  for 
Christ  during  the  four  or  five  years 
since  his  conversion.  This  general  at- 
testation to  his  faithful  work  and  good 
character  was  in  accordance  with 
Paul's  own   rule  in  selecting  men  for 

the  ministry.      (Titus  1  :  7  ;  1  Tim.  5  :  22.)     On 

Iconium,  see  on  14  :  21. 

3.  Paul's  discriminating  eye  soon 
discovered  that  Timothy,  a  youth  prob- 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


251 


'took  and  circumcised  bim,  because  of 
the  Jews  which  were  in  those  quarters: 


for  they  knew  all  that  his  father  was  a 
Greek. 


«  I  Cor.  9  :  20 ;  Gal.  2  ;  3;  see  Gal.  5  :  2. 


ably  of  about  twenty  years,  would  be  a 
suitable  man  to  go  forth  Avith  him 

as  a  missionary  helper  and  take  the 
place  of  Mark .  At  this  time  he  may 
also  have  received  prophetic  assurances 
concerning  him.  (iTim.  i:i8.)  And 
since  he  wished  him  for  this  work  he 
took  aud  circumcised  him.  Paul 
did  this,  not  as  a  matter  of  duty  and 
obligation,  but  because  of  the  Jews 
— that  is,  the  unbelieving  Jews,  in  those 
places,  for  they  knew  all  that  his 
father  was  a  Greek.  It  was  a  matter 
of  prudence  aud  expediency,  conceding 
this  to  Jewish  feelings  and  prejudice 
(1  Cor. 9:20),  thus  avoidlug  olfen.se  to 
the  Jews  by  associating  with  him  in 
his  work  an  uncircumcised  person. 

This  act  of  Paul  has  been  regarded 
by  some  as  inconsistent  with  his  re- 
fusal to  circumcise  Titus  (Gai.  2:3),  and 
his  condemnation  of  those  who  de- 
manded circumcision  of  the  Galatian 
Christians.  (Oai.  5:2,  f.).  Upon  this  gen- 
eral subject  several  things  may  be  said  : 

(1)  The  rite  of  circumcision  did  not 
originate  with  the  law  of  Moses,  but  it 
was  enjoined  upon  Abraham  to  be 
performed  upon  his  descendants.  It 
was  thus  older  than  the  law  and 
broader  than  Israel.  "  Not  that  it  is 
of  Moses,  but  of  the  fathers."  (John  7 :  22.) 
The  abrogation  of  the  Mosaic  ritual 
therefore  did  not  annul  the  obligation 
that  rested  upon  the  descendants  of 
Abraham  ;  but  such  obligation  did  not 
rest  upon  Gentiles,  such  as  Titus  or 
the   Gentiles  of  the   Galatian  church. 

(2)  This  rite  appears  to  have  been  a 
perpetual  institution  for  Abraham  and 
his  seed  "in  all  their  generations" 
(Gen.  17:9);  it  was  God's  covenant  in 
their  flesh  "  for  an  everlasting  cove- 
nant," that  is,  so  long  as  the  flesh  of 
Abraham  should  continue.  (Oen,  i7: 13,  u.) 
It  would  therefore  appear  to  be  still  ob- 
ligatory upon  the  descendants  of  Abra- 
ham, unless  it  has  been  annulled  by 
divine  authority.  (3)  But  it  does  not 
appear  that  Christ  or  the  gospel  an- 
nulled it.  The  decision  of  the  Apostolic 
Conference  had  reference,  not  to  Jews, 


but  to  Gentiles.  While  it  did  not  en- 
join circumcision  upon  Gentiles,  it  took 
for  granted  that  Jews  would  observe 
the  rite.  And  years  after,  at  Paul's 
la.st  visit  to  Jerusalem,  James  evi- 
dently regarded  it  as  untruthful  for 
any  to  affirm  that  Paul  taught  tluit 
Jews  should  not  circumcise  their  chil- 
dren. (21 :  20  25  )  Paul's  rule  was:  "  Is 
any  man  called,  being  circumcised,  let 
him  not  be  uncircumcised  ;  is  any  called 
in  uncircumcisiou,  let  him  not  be  cir- 
cumcised." (1  Cor.  7  18^  He  never  once 
intimates  that  the  Jews  were  to  give 
up  the  rite  ;  but  he  most  earnestly  op- 
poses Gentiles  adopting  it.  He  saw 
nothing  either  in  circumcision  or  iu 
uncircumcisiou  inconsistent  with  the 
faith  or  practices  of  the  gospel.  In  all 
his  controversies  on  the  subject  Paul 
never  intimates  any  difference  of 
opinion  regarding  the  circumcision  of 
Jews.  If  Paul  could  have  said  or 
shown  that  the  gospel  had  done  away 
with  circumcision,  that  would  have 
been  the  end  of  the  argument.  His 
epistle  to  the  Galatians  was  especially 
for  Gentile  Christians  (gm.  4.8),  and  in 
opposing  Judaizers  he  has  nothing  to 
say  against  the  simple  rite  among  Jew- 
ish believers,  while  he  opposes  it  among 
all  as  a  condition  of  justification.  (4) 
Timothy  was  a  half-blood  Jew.  His 
father  was  a  Gentile,  and  as  such  he 
represented  his  family.  The  statement 
that  he  was  a  Greek  is  emphatic.  Tlie 
Jews  would  infer  that  Timothy  was 
therefore  not  circumcised,  or  at  least 
would  inquire  into  the  facts  of  the  case. 
The  law  did  not  determine  whether  the 
son  of  such  a  marriage  should  be  cir- 
cumcised or  not.  According  to  the 
Rabbins  the  mother  had  no  right  to  do 
it  without  the  father's  consent.  Paul 
would  not  regard  it  as  obligatory  iu 
such  a  case,  but  merely  a  matter  of  ex- 
pediency. Timothy,  if  circumcised, 
would  be  more  useful  among  the  Jews. 
That  it  was  not  contrary  to  gospel 
liberty  is  evident  from  the  fact  stated 
in  the  next  verse,  that  immediately 
after  tliis  they  proceed  to  deliver  the 


252 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XYI. 


4  Aud  as  they  went  tbrough  the  cities, 
they  delivered  them  the  decrees  for  to 
keep,  9  that  were  ordained  of  the  apostles 
and    elders  which   were    at    Jerusaleui. 

5  And  'so  were  the  churches  established  in 
the  faith,  and  increased  in  number  daily. 


Paul  and  Silas  visit  Phrygia  and  Galalia, 
and  begin  their  Huropean  labours  at 
Philijipi. 

6  NOVV  when  they  had  gone  throughout 
Phrygia  and  the  region  of  Galalia,  and 
were  "  forbidden  of  the  Holy  Spirit  to 


"  ch.  15  :  23-29.        «  ch.  15  :  41.        o  ch.  10  :  19  ;  13  :  2 ;  Kom.  1  :  13 ;  15  :  22. 


decrees  of  the  Apostolic  Conference  to 
the  churches.  (.5)  That  of  Titus  was  a 
test  case.  As  a  Gentile  he  was  under 
7M»  obligation  to  be  circumcised.  It  was 
also  not  expedient.  It  would  have  been 
an  infrinj^ement  upon  his  own  gospel 
liberty  and  that  of  his  Gentile  brethren, 
binding  on  him  and  them  unnecessary 
burdens.  And  to  have  circumcised  him 
at  that  time  would  have  been  to  ac- 
knowledge circumcision  as  a  condition 
of  salvation. 

It  was  i)robably  after  Timothy  was 
circumcised  that  he  was  set  ajiart  to  the 
ministry  "with  the  laying  on  of  hands 
of  the  eldership  "  (i  Tim.  4:  ii) ;  and  was 
endued  with  special  gifts  (2  Tim  .1.6); 
and  then  especially,  as  well  as  at  his 
baptism,  he  made  a  good  profession 
before  many  witnesses.  (1  Tim.6:i.'.)  In 
Timothy  we  have  an  illustration  of  a 
call  to  the  ministry.  First,  he  was  a 
converted  young  man  of  the  church 
at  Lystra.  Second,  he  li<ad  the  call  of 
the  Spirit.  The  gift  was  in  him. 
(iTini.i  :i8;4:i4.)  Third,  Ilis  Call  was 
perceived  and  approved  by  the  brethren 
of  the  church.  He  was  well  reported 
by  the  brethren  (ver.  2.) ;  thence,  fourth, 
his  endownments  by  nature  and  grace 
fitted  him  for  the  work.  He  had  en- 
joyed the  blessings  of  a  pious  ancestry  ; 
he  had  been  a  student  of  the  scriptures 
from  childhood ;  he  had  an  aptness  for 
Christ's  service.  He  further  enjoyed 
Paul's  companionship  and  instruction. 
Fifth,  as  a  final  act  of  approval,  he  is 
uow,  or  perhai)s  later,  ordained  to  the 

gospel    ministry.       (1  Tim.  4  :  U  ;  2  Tim.  1:6.) 

On  the  one  hand  Christ  calls  by  the 
Spirit ;  and  this  call  becomes  manifest 
to  his  people.  On  the  other  hand,  pas- 
tors and  churches  should  be  looking 
out  for  young  men  who  are  called  to 
this  work. 

4.  And  as  they  went  or  journeyed 
through  the  cities — those  in  which 
Paul  had  preached  the  gospel  before, 
including      Iconium     and      probably 


Antioch  inPisidia.    Delivered  them 

the  decrees,  or  decisions,  which  had 
been  passed  l)y  the  Conference  at  Jeru- 
salem. (15 :  28, 29.)  Copies  of  the  circu- 
lar letter  (15;  2.!-29.)  sent  out  were  prob- 
ably left  witli  the  churches. 

5.  As  a  consequence  of  this  visitation 
the  churches  were  established, 
strengthened  internally  in  the  faith, 
in  their  belief  of  the  gospel  and  trust 
in  Christ ;  and  externally  increased 
in  number  daily — that  is,  of  be- 
lievers added  to  them.  (2 :  47.)  The 
deliverance  of  the  decrees  tended  to 
harmonize  the  Jewish  and  Gentile  con- 
verts, and  prepared  them  to  he  ]nofited 
by  the  preaching  of  Paul  and  of  Silas. 
This  happy  condition  of  tiie  churches 
resulted  in  conversions  and  baptisms. 
Revivals  attended  the  missionaries 
wherever  they  went. 

6.  Paulliad  now  visited  the  churches 
which  he  and  Barnabas  had  planted  in 
tlieir  former  tour.  From  this  point 
he  makes  an  advance  into  Plirygia  and 
Galatia.  Assuming  that  he  started 
from  Antioch  in  Pisidia,  he  would 
naturally  take  the  Roman  roads  and 
travel  in  a  northerly  direction  tlirough 
Phrygia,  to  Pessinus,  a  city  in  western 
Galatia,  and  thence  eastwardly  to  An- 
cyra  (the  modern  Angora),  and  to 
Tavium.  These  were  the  three  great 
cities  of  Galatia,  where  perhaps 
churches  were  planted.  Instead  of 
throughout,  the  most  approved  read- 
ing is  through :  And  haring  gone 
through  the  region  of  Phrygia  and 
Galatia. 

Phrygia  represents  a  somewhat  un- 
defined region  of  country,  commonly 
bounded  on  the  north  by  Bithynia  and 
Galatia,  on  the  east  by  Cappadocia  and 
Lycaonia,  on  the  south  by  Lycia  and 
Pisidia,  and  on  the  west  by  Lydia  and 
Mysia.  At  the  time  of  Paul's  visit  it 
was  not  a  distinct  Roman  ))rovince.  It 
rather  represented  that  region  where 
the    Phrygian   race    mostly  predomi- 


Cn.  XVi.] 


THE  ACTS. 


253 


7  preacb  the  word  in  Asia,  after  they  were 
coiue  to  Mysia,  they  assayed  to  go  into 


Bithynia:  but   the   Spirit  suO'ercd  them 


nated.  With  Galatia  it  occupied  the  I 
groat  central  portion  of  Asia  Minor. 
(See  on  i;  10;  18:23.)  Galatia occupied  a 
country  that  originally  belonged  to  the 
Phrygians,  and  afterward  was  colonized 
by  the  Gauls.  It  took  its  name  from 
those  Celtic  or  Gallic  tribes  that  emi- 
grated eastward  into  Asia  Minor,  H.  C. 
278,  and  after  roaming  around  for  a 
time,  at  length  settled  down  in  the 
above-mentioned  region,  and  intermar- 
ried with  the  Greeks.  From  B.  C.  189, 
though  subject  to  Rome,  it  was  governed 
by  native  chiefs;  but  about  B.C.  25 
the  country  was  formally  reduced  to  a 
Roman  province.  Its  boundaries  can 
not  be  given  with  exactness.  In  gen- 
eral, it  was  bounded  on  the  west  by  the 
province  of  Asia,  which  included  j)or- 
tions  of  Phrygia,  north  by  Bithynia 
an<l  Paphlagonia,  east  by  Pontus  and 
Cappadocia,  south  by  Lycaonia  and 
Phrygia.  With  the  old  Plirygian  na- 
ture worship  the  Greek  settlers  mingled 
their  culture  and  brought  in  their  lan- 
guage. The  Jews  also  migrated  in 
such  numbers,  especially  at  Ancyra, 
the  capital  of  the  Roman  province,  that 
certain  privileges  were  accorded  them 
by  Augustus.  Some  proselytes  had 
doubtless  been  won  by  them  from  hea- 
thenism. Thus  Paul  found  them  Celtic 
in  character,  using  the  Greek  language, 

Eracticing  Phrygian  rites,  with  some 
nowledge  of  Jewish  ceremonies. 
Luke  passes  over  this  part  of  Paul's 
labors  with  great  brevity.  The  omis- 
sion, however,  is  compensated  by  Paul's 
allusions  in  his  Epistles  to  the  churches 
of  Galatia.  From  this  we  learn  that  he 
was  in  Galatia  a  longer  time  than  he 
had  planned,  on  account  of  an  attack  of 
disease,  which  he  styles  an  "infirmity 
of  the  flesh."  (Gai"4:i3.)  This  may 
have  been  the  first  serious  appearance 
of  the  "  thorn  in  the  flesh,  a  messenger 
of  Satan  to  bullet"  him  (2Cor.  12:7), 
which  was  i^erhaps  a  painful  inflamma- 
tion of  the  eyes,  brought  on  by  fatigue 
and  exposure  in  his  travels  and  labors. 
God  overruled  it  for  good.  The  Gala- 
tians  received  him  as  "an  angel  of 
God"  (Gal. 4:u.),  and  counted  it  their 
"hai^piuess"  to  minister  to  his  necessi- 
ties;   and    if  possible,    "would  have 


plucked  out  their  own  eyes  and  given 
them  "to  him.  (oai  i:i5.)  Manywerecon- 
verted  from  idolatry  (Gai.  * :  a),  and  some 
from  the  beggarly  elements  of  J  udaism 
(Gal.  5  : 1.),  and  were  endowed  with  s])ir- 
itual  gifts.  (Gal.  3;  2-5.)  Cliurchcs  Were 
organized  (Cai.  v  :2.),  a  sj>irit  of  benevo- 
lence was  awakened  which  assumed  a 
systematic  form.  (Gai.  6:6-i0;  1  Cor.  I8: 1. 2.) 
For  a  time  they  ran  well  (cai  5  .-  7),  but 
they  exhibited  tlie  impulsiveness  and 
the  fickleness  of  tlie  Gallic  race  in  turn- 
ing back  to  superstitious  forms,  and 
following  Judaizing  teachers.  (Oai.  1 ;  6.) 
Thus  in  Paul's  successes  among  the 
Galatiaus,  the  Lord's  ^race  was  sufli- 
cient  for  him,  and  "  his  strength  was 
made  perfect  in  weakness."  (2  Cor. 
12 ;  9, 10.)  Paul  again  visited  Phrygia 
and    Galatia  on    his   third    journey. 

(18  :  23.) 

Retracing  his  steps  westward  through 
Galatia  and  Phrygia,  Paul  was  per- 
plexed in  regard  to  his  next  field  of 
labor.  He  and  his  companions  refrain 
from  taking  the  road  soutliwest  to 
Sardis  and  Smyrna,  because  they  were 
forbidden  of  the  Holy  Spirit, 
through  some  communication  or  inter- 
nal intimation  similar  to  that  in  13  :  2, 
to  preach  the  word  in  Asia.  By 
Asia  is  meant  the  province  of  Asia, 
bordering  on  the  yEgean  Sea,  of  which 
Ephesus  was  the  capital.  In  this  sen.se 
it  is  always  used  in  the  New  Testament. 

7.  Paul's  judgment  was  much  at 
fault,  at  this  period,  in  regard  to  times 
and  places  and  labor.  He  had  unex- 
pectedly been  delayed  in  Galatia,  re- 
strained from  preacliing  in  Asia ;  and 
noAV  in  his  westward  journey,  coming 
to  the  borders  of  Mysia,  he  attempted 
to  go  northward  into  Bithynia,  but 
the  Spirit  did  not  jiermit  them.  Ac- 
cording to  the  olik'.st  nianu.scrijits  and 
best  authorities,  this  should  read,  The 
Spirit  of  Jesus,  etc.,  the  Holy  Spirit 
which  he  sends.  (SeeRom.  s  :  ».)  The 
time  had  not  yet  come  for  Paul  to 
preach  the  gospel  in  Asia.  It  was  the 
Lord's  will  that  he  should  now  carry 
tlie  gosj)el  into  Europe,  as  is  made  evi- 
dent in  ver.  9  and  10.  3Iysia  is  only 
found  here  in  the  New  Testament,  and 
Bithynia  hem  and  iu  1  Peter  1:1.  The 


•54 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVI. 


8  not.    And  they  passing  by  Mysia  came      9      And  y  a  Tision  appeared  to  Paul  in  the 
^  down  to  Troas.  night ;  i  here  stood  a  '  man  of  Macedonia, 


■  2  Cor.  2  :  12 ;  2  Tim.  4  :  13.       »  ch.  9  :  10-12  ;  2  Cor.  12  :  1-4.     «  ch.  10  :  30 ;  see  Rom.  15:  26 ; 

2  Cor.  8:1;  11  :  9. 


former  occupied  a  region  in  the  north- 
western corner  of  Asia  Minor,  and  is 
sometimes  included  in  the  province  of 
Asia.  Its  name  is  descriptive  of  a  race, 
Avho  occupied  a  region  along  the  frontier 
of  the  provinces  of  Asia  and  Bithynia. 
Bithyuia  was  a  province  on  the  Euxine 
or  Black  Sea,  eiubraeiug  the  northern- 
most portion  of  Asia  Minor.  It  is  some- 
times called  I'ontus  and  Bithynia,  the 
Roman  })rovince  of  Pontus  not  being 
constituted  until  the  reign  of  Nero. 

8.  And  i)assiiig  by  Mysia— not 
staying  to  preach  the  gospel  there,  for 
they  must  pass  through  it  to  reach 
Troas,  on  the  shore  of  the  ^gean  8ea. 
Troas  was  a  seaport  town  about  four 
miles  from  the  site  of  ancient  Troy.  It 
was  built  and  named  after  Alexander 
the  Great — Alexander  Troas  —  now 
called  Eski  Stamboul.  With  its  en- 
virons it  was  raised  by  Augustus  to  a 
colony,  and  like  Philippi  (ver.  n)  was  a 
free  city,  and  was  not  reckoned  as  be- 
longing to  either  Asia  or  Bithynia,  and 
is  here  accurately  represented  as  dis- 
tinct from  Mysia.  Paul  "  was  now 
within  the  charmed  circle  where  for 
ages  civilization  had  liad  its  home  ;  and 
he  could  not  be  entirely  ignorant  of 
those  stories  of  war  and  enterprise 
.  .  .  which  have  made  it  forever  bright 
and  dear  to  tlie  heart  of  mankind.  At 
only  four  miles  distance  lay  the  Plain 
of  Troy,  where  P^urope  and  Asia  en- 
counter each  other  in  the  struggle  cele- 
brated in  Homer's  immortal  song.  Not 
far  ofl"  Xerxes,  sitting  on  a  marble 
throne,  reviewed  the  three  millions  of 
Asiatics  with  which  he  meant  to  bring 
Europe  at  his  feet.  On  the  other  side 
of  that  narrow  strait  lay  Greece  and 
Rome,  the  centres  from  which  issued 
the  learning,  the  commerce,  and  the 
armies  which  governed  the  world. 
Could  his  heart,  so  ambitious  for  the 
glory  of  Christ,  fail  to  be  fired  with  the 
desire  to  cast  himself  ujion  those  strong- 
holds, or  could  he  doubt  that  the  Sjiirit 
was  leading  him  forward  to  this  enter- 
prise ? "  (Stalker,  Life  of  Paul,  p.  90.) 

9>  Paul  now  learned  the  design  of 


the  Spirit  in  turning  him  aside  from 
the  places  where  he  had  thought  of 
laboring.  As  he  reaches  Troas,  the 
limit  of  Asia  Minor,  and  looks  over  the 
jl^^gean  Sea  toward  Macedonia,  doubt- 
less he  earnestly  seeks  divine  direction. 
And  he  is  not  left  long  in  doubt ;  for  the 
will  of  the  Lord  becomes  manifest  in 
a  vision  which  appeared  to  PanS 
in  the  night.  By  visiox  is  meant,  not 
a  dream,  but  a  sight  divinely  given  and 
actually  seen.  (seeon9:io.)  Paul  may 
have  been  in  prayer  and  in  a  spiritually 
elevated  and  ecstatic  state.  A  man 
of  Macedonia.  The  same  Lord  who 
gave  him  the  vision  would  doubtless 
reveal  to  him  the  nationality  of  the 
man.  Besides,  his  appearance,  speech, 
and  dress  would  indicate  that  he  was  a 
JIacedonian.  Prayed — beseech ing him, 
saying,  Come  over  into  Macedo- 
nia and  help  us^"with  the  gospel 
against  Satan  and  against  blindness." 
(Bengkl.)  This  has  been  the  watch- 
word of  missions  in  all  ages,  the  unut- 
t^red  cry  of  heathenism  for  that  help 
wiiich  the  gospel  alone  can  give.  "  On 
this  momentous  vision  hung  the  Chris- 
tianization  of  Europe,  and  all  the  bless- 
ings of  modern  civilization."  (Schafk, 
Apos.  Ch.,\,  p.  308.) 

Macedonia  was  an  important  kingdom 
of  Greece  under  Phil)i>  and  Alexander 
the  Great,  and  aft^rwanl  a  Roman 
province.  It  was  bounded  on  the 
north  by  Illyricum  and  Moesia,  on  the 
east  by  Thrace  and  the  ^gean  Sea,  on 
the  west  by  Epirus  and  the  Adriatic 
Sea  and  on  the  south  by  Achaia,  or 
Greece  projier.  It  consisted  of  undu- 
lating plains,  valleys  and  mountains, 
the  most  noted  of  the  latter  being 
Athos  and  Olympus.  The  ancient 
Macedonians  were  a  hardy  and  war- 
like race,  and  in  the  time  of  Paul  the 
]>o]>ulation  .still  pos.sessed  much  vigor 
an<l  courage,  and  was  less  corrupt  than 
the  more  ]>olished  society  of  Achaia. 
It  was  a  good  country  for  beginning 
Christian  missions  in  Europe.  The 
churches  Paul  gatliered  there  were 
among  the   best,  and  gave  him  more 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


255 


and  prayed  him,  saying,  Come  over  into 
10  Macedouia,  and  help  us.    And  after  he 
had  seen  the  vision,  immediately  we  en- 
deavoured to  go  *into  Macedonia,    as- 


suredly gathering    that    the    Lord  had 
called  us  lor  to  preach  the  gospel  unto 
them. 
11      Therefore  loosing  from  Troas,  we  came 


'  2  Cor.  2  :  13. 


comfort  than  any  he  established  else- 
where. The  account  of  his  work  in 
Macedonia  is  given  in  this  chapter  and 
the  next.  (Seeaisois  :  21;  20;  i-6.)  Com- 
pare Paul's  epistles  to  the  Thessalou- 
ians  and  Philippiaus. 

But  the  influence  did  not  stop  with 
the  work  done  here.  The  Greek  in- 
fluence had  gone  forth  from  Macedonia 
tliroughout  the  world  since  the  days  of 
Alexander  the  Great.  And  so  the  early 
Gentile  churches  were  largely  Greek 
churches,  making  Paul's  assertion  ap- 
posite, that  the  gospel  the  power  of 
God,  "to  the  Jew  first,  and  also  to 
the  Greek."  "  For  some  considerable 
(it  cannot  but  be  indefinable)  part  of 
the  three  first  centuries  of  the  churcli 
of  Rome,  and  most,  if  not  all,  the 
churches  of  the  West,  were,  if  we  may 
so  speak,  Greek  religious  colonies. 
Their  language  was  Greek,  their  organ- 
ization Greek,  their  writers  Greek, 
their  Scriptures  Greek."  (MiLMAN, 
Latin  Christianity,  ch.  1,  p.  32.) 

10.  And  after  he  had  seen  the 
vision,  we  endeavored  to  go- 
seeking  a  ship  to  cross  the  sea.  At  this 
point  the  writer  of  the  Acts  uses  the 
first  person,  from  which  it  is  inferred 
that  Luke  joins  Paul  at  Troas.  It  has 
been  surmised  that  on  account  of  Paul's 
recent  severe  illness  (Oai.  *:  is),  "  Luke, 
the  beloved  physician,"  now  accom- 
panied him  to  watch  over  his  health. 
The  brevity  of  the  account  in  the  first 
eight  verses,  compared  with  the  rest  of 
this  chapter,  indicates  that  the  lat- 
ter was  written  by  an  eye  witness. 
Assuredly  gathering,  or  concluding 
that  the  Lord,  or,  according  to  many 
manuscripts,  t/iat  (kid  had  called  us 
to  preach  the  gospel  unto  them. 
Here  and  in  the  preceeding  verses  we 
see  how  Paul  selected  his  mission  fiehls 
and  arranged  his  journey.  He  exer- 
cised his  judgment,  but  sometimes 
was  overruled  by  providences  like  that 
in  Galatia,  where  he  was  delayed  by 
sickness,  at  other  times  guided  or  re- 
Btrained  by  the  Spirit,  and  occasionally 


directed  by  visions.   (See  13 :  2 ;  14 :  6  ;  15 :  33 ; 

18  :  9,  10 ;  19  :  21  ;  20  :  22  ;  23  :  11.) 

11-40.  Paul,  Silas,  Timothy,  and 
Luke  Arrive  in  Europe.  Their 
Labors    at    Philippi.    (2  cor.  11 :  25 ; 

Phil.  1  :  ffl,  30;    4:2,3;    1  Thess.  2  :  2.)        It    WaS 

probably  in  the  early  spring,  perhaps 
March,  A.  D.  52,  that  Paul  reached 
Philippi,  where  he  doubtless  remained 
several  weeks.  If  the  gospel,  instead 
of  going  westward,  had  gone  eastward 
into  India,  China,  and  Japan,  mission- 
aries might  now  be  coming  from  those 
countries  to  Europe. 

11.  An  opportunity  occurs  at  once 
for  making  the  desired  voyage  to  Mac- 
edonia, about  one  hundred  miles  dis- 
tant from  Troas.  Therefore,  loos- 
ing, setting  sail,  from  Troas  Ave 
came  with  a  straight  course.  The 
wind  must  have  been  from  the  south  to 
overcome  the  current  which  runs  from 
the  Dardenelles,  and,  as  often  in  those 
parts,  it  blew  with  considerable  force, 
for  the  voyage  was  made  in  two  days. 
When  six  years  later  Paul  journeyed  in 
tlie  opposite  direction  the  voyage  took 
five  days.  (20:6.)  Such  specifications 
of  times  accord  with  what  is  now  known 
about  the  navigation  of  those  waters 
and  shows  the  accuracy  of  the  narra- 
tive. Samothracia,  a  mountainous 
island  in  the  ^gean  Sea,  now  the 
Archipelago,  rising  five  thousand  two 
hundred  and  forty  feet  aljove  the  sea, 
midway  between  Troas  and  Neapolis. 
It  has  no  good  harbor,  but  with  a  south 
M'ind  there  would  be  a  safe  anchorage 
along  the  north  shore.  Here  it  would 
appear  they  lay  at  anchor  the  first 
night.  Neapolis,  meaning  New  City, 
is  northwest  from  Samothracia  and, 
with  a  southerly  wind,  could  be 
reached  in  seven  or  eight  hours.  It 
was  a  Thracian  city,  the  modern  Ka- 
villa,  and  the  seaport  town  of  Philippi, 
about  nine  miles  distant.  It  was  an- 
nexed by  Vesi)asian  to  the  Roman  pro- 
vince of  Macedonia.  It  was  on  a  high 
rocky  promontory,  with  a  respectable 
harbor.    The   mountain    back  of  the 


256 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVI. 


with  a  straight   course  to   Samothracia, 

12  and  the  next  lUiy  to  Neapolis  j  and  from 

thence  to  '^  1  hilippi,  which  is  the  chief 

city  of  that  pan  of  Macedonia,  and  a 


colony.  And  we  were  in  that  city  abiding 
certain  days. 
13      And  on  the  sabbath  we  went  out  of  the 
city  by  a  river  side,  where  prayer  was 


town  rises  to  one  thousand  six  hundred  I 
and  seventy  feet  above  the  sea,  and  ' 
there  is  a  defile  in  the  mountain 
through  which  the  road  passes  to  the 
plain  of  Philippi.  Traces  of  military 
roads,  and  ruins  of  a  great  aqueduct, 
with  Latin  inscriptions,  are  still  found. 
It  now  has  several  thousand  inhab- 
itants, and  is  the  seat  of  a  very  active 
commerce. 

12.  And  from  thence,  from 
Neapolis,  to  Philippi,  going  in  a 
northwesterly  direction  over  the  paved 
lloman  road.  (Seeourer.  u.)  Philippi 
was  situated  on  the  sides  of  an  over- 
hanging hill  and  on  the  banks  of  a 
stream  called  Gangas,  now  known  as 
Anghista.  The  city  was  built  by  Philip 
of  Macedon,  and  named  after  himself. 
Extensive  ruins  now  mark  the  locality, 
among  which  are  two  gateways,  be- 
longing to  the  time  of  Claudius. 
Many  interesting  inscriptions  in  Latin 
and  some  in  Greek  are  found. 
Which  is  the,  rather,  a  chief 
city  of  that  part  of  Macedonia,  a 
colony,  or  which  is  a  city  of  Mac- 
edonia, Jirst  of  the  district,  a  colony. 
Some  supj)ose  this  to  mean  that  Phil- 
ippi was  the  first  city  in  Macedonia 
which  Paul  reached,  Neapolis  being  its 
seaport,  but  belonging  to  Thrace.  Mr. 
Hort  suggests  that  possibly  the  j)resent 
text  is  a  primitive  corruption,  and  that 
it  might  originally  have  read,  "a  chief 
city  of  Pierian  Macedonia."  (Wks- 
COTT  and  HoKT,  JV.  T.,  Vol.  11,  p.  97.) 
It  is  better,  however,  to  understand  the 
city  as  first  in  rank  in  that  district  of 
Macedonia,  being  a  Roman  colony- 
town.  It  was  not  the  capital,  for  Thes- 
salonica  was  the  ca))ital  of  the  whole 
province,  and  Ampliipolis  of  the  east- 
ern division,  in  which  Philippi  was 
situated.  Notice  also  that  it  is  said, 
not  the,  but  a  chief,  or  Jirst  city,  that  is 
a  city  of  Jirst  rank.  And  this  accords 
with  the  fact  that  it  was  a  colony,  which 
means  that  it  was  a  city  occupied  by 
Roman  citizens  who  retained  their  full 
privileges  and  were  governed  by  their 


own  senate  and  magistrates.  (Vcr.  20.) 
It  was  thus  a  miniature  of  Rome.  The 
Latin  language  Avas  spoken  and  in- 
scribed upon  their  coins,  and  the 
Roman  law  administered.  The  plain 
of  Philippi  had  been  the  scene  of  the 
great  battle  in  which  Biutus  and  Cas- 
sius  were  defeated  by  Octavian  and 
Antony.  In  commemoration  of  this 
event  Augustus  established  there  a  col- 
ony, a  military  settlement  composed 
principally  of  those  who  had  been 
soldiers  of  Antony.  With  these  facts 
accord  the  present  ruins  and  the  Latin 
inscriptions,  and  with  them  agree 
Luke's  reference  to  7nagistratcs  (rer.  20, 
n.  35,  3S.  3b),  and  sergeants,  (ver.  35. 38.) 
It  Avas  a  Roman  city  in  a  Greek  dis- 
trict. And  we  Avere  in  that  city 
abiding;  certain  days — before  the 
arrival  of  the  Sabbath  spoken  of  in  the 
next  verse. 

13.  This  verse  introduces  the  first 
preaching  of  the  gospel  by  Paul,  possi- 
bly by  any  one,  in  Europe.  The  church 
at  Rome  may,  however,  have  been 
established  before  this  by  some  of  the 
converts  on  the  day  of  Pentecost.  (» ■  <o  1 
For  several  days  Paul  and  his  compan* 
ions  must  have  looked  for  an  opportu- 
nity to  proclaim  their  message.  The 
Sabbath-rfuy  had  generally  afforded 
them  oj)portuuity  in  other  cities  in 
reaching  Jews,  proselytes,  and  devout 
Gentiles  in  the  synagogue,  but  there 
was  no  synagogue  in  Philippi.  Jt  was 
a  military  rather  than  a  conmiercia' 
city,  and  few  Jews  resided  there.  There 
was,  however,  a  place  of  prayer  outside 
the  city,  and  to  tins  the  missionaries 
resort.  We  went  out  ot  the  city, 
etc. — rather,  according  to  the  liighest 
critical  authorities,  out  of  the  gate  by  a 
river.  The  Gangas  is  doubtless  meant. 
Where  prayer  was  wont  to  be 
made,  or  better,  where  7vas  vonl  to  be 
a  place  of  prayer,  a  place  where  Jews 
assembled  in  the  open  air  for  jirayer. 
Such  places  were  generally  outside  of 
those  cities  where  there  was  no  syna- 
gogue.    Sometimes  a  small  house  was 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


25? 


■wont  to  be  made;  and  we  sat  down,  and  ] 
spake  unto  the  women   which  resorted 
14  thither.     And  a  certain  woman  named 


Lydia,  a  seller  of  purple,  of  the  city  of 
o'rhyatira,  which  worshipped  (jod,  heard 
us :  whose  ^  heart  the  Lord  opened,  that 


Rev.  2  :  18.        d  Ps.  110  :  3 ;  119  :  18  ;  Luke  24  :  45  ;  2  Cor.  3  :  12-18 ;  4  :  «  ;  Eph.  1  :  17,  18. 


erected;  at  other  times  a  grove  or  a 
space  under  a  shady  tree  was  thus  em- 
ployed. Sncli  phices  were  chosen  by 
the  seaside,  or  on  the  banks  of  rivers, 
where  washing  of  tlie  liauds  before 
prayer,  and  other  Jewisla  ablutions 
could  be  performed.  Dr.  Ilackett  in 
December,  1858,  visited  the  sites  of 
Neapolis  and  Philippi,  and  found  the 
demands  of  the  narrative  geogeaphi- 
cally  met.  He  saw  the  winter-torrent 
of  the  Gangas,  a  rapid  stream  varying 
in  depth  from  one  and  a  half  to  five 
feet.  Its  course  raji  round  the  south- 
east to  the  southwest  of  Philippi.  And 
three  hundred  and  fifty  feet  from  the 
place  he  crossed  the  stream  he  found  a 
break  in  the  dilapidated  walls,  where 
the  gate  liad  been  on  that  side  of  the 
city.  Through  this  gate  Paul  and  his 
company  probably  first  entered  the 
city,  and  through  it  they  passed  out  to 
the  place  of  prayer.  (See  Bibliotheca 
Sacra,  xvii.,  p.  866  f.)  The  Revised 
Version,  following  Westcott  and  Hort 
and  many  ancient  mauuscrijjts,  trans- 
late, Where  we  supposed  was  a  pla-ce  of 
prayer.  That  is,  they  had  either  heard 
the  Jews  were  accustomed  to  assemble 
in  that  vicinity,  or  rather,  they  saw 
some  women  assembling  by  the  stream, 
and  supposed  it  a  meeting  place  for 
prayer.  We  sat  down — in  the  cus- 
tomary posture  of  teachers,  (is :  u ;  Luke 
*:  20.)  And  spake  unto  the  women 
Avhich  resorted  thither,  who  came 
together.  It  would  seem  that  only 
women  were  there.  "  Probably  the 
number  of  Jewish  men  in  the  city  was 
extremely  small,  and  the  whole  unim- 
portant Jewish  pojnilation  consisted 
chiefly  of  women,  some  of  them  doubt- 
less married  to  Gentiles  (t.t.i)  ;  hence 
there  is  no  mention  of  men  present." 
(Meyer.) 

14.  Doubtless  up  to  this  time  Piiilippi 
had  appeared  as  an  uninviting  field  for 
missionary  labor.  But  now  it  becomes 
evident  to  Paul  why  he  had  been  for- 
bidden l)y  the  Spirit  to  labor  further  in 
Asia  !Minor,  and  why  he  had  been 
called  to  Europe.    God  was  mindful  of 


the  prayers  of  those  womfen  who  had 
l)een  accustomed  to  meet  l)ythe  riverside 
for  prayer,  and  had  provided,  as  in  the 
case  of  Cornelius,  a  preacher  to  make 
known  to  them  the  way  of  salvation. 
A  certain  Avoman  named  Lydia. 
This  name  was  common  among  the 
Greeks  and  Romans,  and  would  natur- 
ally indicate  her  as  a  Gentile.  That 
she  was  in  the  place  of  i^rayei",  ami 
the  statement  that  she  was  one  who 
worshipped  God,  marks  her  as  a 
devout  Gentile,  perhaps  what  was  later 
styled  a  proselyte  of  the  gate,  (lo :  2 ; 
13 : «,  iio ;  18 : 7.)  She  appears  as  a  tempo- 
rary resident  of  Philippi,  as  her  home 
was  nearly  three  hundred  miles  dis- 
tant at  Thyatira,  a  considerable  city 
of  Lydia,  in  Asia  Minor,  which  formed 
a  part  of  the  province  of  Asia.  It  v  as 
celebrated  for  its  purple  dye,  and  in- 
scriptions of  the  craft  of  dyers  have 
been  found  there.  The  purple  color, 
obtained  from  a  shell  fish,  was  highly 
valued  by  the  ancients,  and  included 
many  shades  from  rose-red  to  sea-green 

or  blue.    (LukelS:  19;  Rev.  17:  4;  18  :16.)    This 

accords  with  the  statement  that  Lydia 
was  a  seller  of  purple — or  fabrics 
dyed  ■in  purple.  It  is  possible  that  she 
had  a  dyeing  shop  just  outside  the  city 
gate,  and  may  have  dealt  both  in  the 
dye  itself  and  in  purple  garments. 
Strabo  calls  Thyatira  a  Jfacedonian 
colony,  implying  that  Macedonian  colo- 
nists had  migrated  thither,  and  thus 
Lydia's  relationship  may  have  been  one 
of  the  reasons  of  her  coming  to  Mace- 
donia for  the  purposes  of  trade.  As 
her  name  and  country  are  the  same,  it 
has  been  suggested  by  some  that  possi- 
l>ly  she  was  styled  in  Piiilippi  "the 
Lydian  woman  "  ;  the  name  Lydia  was, 
however,  a  common  female  name  in 
ancient  times.  Heard  us — ratlier, 
nas  listening.  Whose  heart  the 
Lord  opened — awakened  and  dis- 
posed her  understan<ling  and  affections, 
to  receive  the  truth.  Tlie  heart  is 
regarded  as  the  seat  of  the  will, 
understanding,  and  affections,     (see  Matt. 

11 :  25-27  i  1  Cor.  3  ;  6,  7  i  Eiek.  36  :  26,  27.)        That 


258 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVI. 


she  attended  unto  the  things  which  were 
15  spoken  of  Paul.    And  when  she  was  bap-  | 


tized,  and  her  household,  she  besought  vs, 
saying,  If  ye  have  judged  me  to  be  faith- 


she  attended,  to  apply  the  mind,  give 
heed  to  Paul's  instructions,  (see  i  Tim. 
4  :  15 ;  2  Peter  1 :  19. )  Notice  the  Order.  8he 
listened;  the  Lord  opened  her  heart; 
she  attended  to  the  word.  Thus  she 
believed  and  obeyed,  as  is  evident  from 
the  next  verse.  The  things  that 
were  spoken— in  conversational  in- 
struction, for  such  is  the  meaning  of 
the  original.  Jesus  the  Christ,  repent- 
ance, faith,  and  baptism  would  be  the 
natural  topics  of  discourse.  Alford 
well  remarks,  that "  although  forbidden 
to  preach  the  word  in  Asia,  their  first 
convert  is  an  Asiatic."  Thyatira,  her 
home,  had  afterward  an  imjjortant 
Christian  church.  (Rev.  i :  ii ;  2 :  is,  24.) 
A  noticeable  feature  of  the  work  in 
Macedonia  here  came  into  view, — the 
part  taken  in  it  by  women.  (n:i,  12.) 
Amid  the  general  decay  of  religious  at 
this  period,  many  [women  everywhere 
sought  the  purer  teachings  of  the 
synagogue.  These  female  proselytes 
were  more  numerous  in  Macedonia  than 
elsewhere,  perhaps  because  of  its  less 
corrupt  society  and  its  sounder  mor- 
ality. 

15.  And  Avhen  she  Avas  baptized 
— implying  that  she  had  received  in- 
struction "regarding  this  duty;  but 
whether  she  was  baptized  at  this  meet- 
ing or  later,  the  i)hrase  does  not  deter- 
mine. Doubtless  the  ordinance  was  ad- 
ministered in  the  river  Gangas.  (ver.  13 ) 
If  it  was  now  spring,  as  we  have  sup- 
posed, the  river  would  be  full  and  water 
abundant.  And  her  house — Iter 
houscho/d,  consi-sting  doubtless  of  per- 
sons in  her  employ,  very  likely  of 
women  who  assisted  her  in  her  busi- 
ness. Her  family  as  well  as  herself  re- 
ceived the  truth."  "See,"  says  Chrys- 
ostom,  an  ancient  distinguished  Greek 
inter])reter  and  preacher,  "how  slie 
imrsuaded  them  all,"  taking  for  granted 
from  the  circumstances  of  the  case  that 
Lydia's  househould  were  all  of  an  age 
to  receive  instruction.  But  this  and 
other  household  bajitisms  in  the  New 
Testament  are  often  used  as  an  evidence 
of  infant  baptism  in  the  a])Ostolic  age. 
( vcr.  r.t;  10 : 2, 48  J  1  Cor.  1  :  ifi.)  But  tlie  argu- 
ment is  founded  on  the  presumption 
that  there  were  infants  in  these  house- 


holds. Of  this  there  is  no  proof,  but 
rather  to  the  contrary.  For  there  were 
no  infants  in  the  company  of  Cornelius, 
for  they  all  s])ake  with  tongues  and 
believed,  (lo:  46.)  There  were  none  in 
the  family  of  the  jailer,  for  he  rejoiced 
and  believed  with  all  his  house.  (i6:34.) 
Nor  were  there  any  in  the  household  of 
Stephanas,  for  they  "addicted  them- 
selves to  the  ministiy  of  the  saints." 
(i  Cor.  16:  In.)  Siucc  then  there  were  no 
infants  in  tliose  baptized  households  of 
which  we  know  the  facts,  it  is  a  fair 
presumption,  no  evidence  to  the  con- 
trary, that  there  were  none  in  the 
household  of  Lydia.  But  more  than 
this :  there  is  no  evidence  that  Lydia 
was  a  married  woman,  or  that  she  had 
children,  much  less  that  she  had  infant 
children.  She  was  nearly  three  hun- 
dred miles  from  home,  in  a  foreign 
city,  and  for  purpo.ses  of  trade.  As 
nothing  is  said  of  her  husband,  she  was 
more  probably  a  maiden  or  a  widow ; 
unless  possibly  she  had  left  lier  husband 
and  younger  children  at  home  in 
Thyatira.  This  argument  is  strength- 
ened by  the  fact  that  she  invites  Paul 
and  his  coni])any  to  /icr  house  (my 
house),  and  their  reluctance  to  accept 
her  invitation,  so  much  so  that  she 
finds  it  necessary  to  constrain  them, 
suggests  the  idea  that  they  felt  a  deli- 
cacy in  becoming  guests  of  a  woman. 
Household  baptisms  do  not  necessarily 
imply  infant  ba]>tisms.  Thou.sands  of 
families  in  our  own  country  have  been 
baptized,  in  which  there  were  no  infant 
children.  Tlicse  conclu.sions  are  in 
harmony  witli  the  best  l)ibilcal  .scholar- 
ship of  the  age.  "  There  is,"  says 
Olshausen,  "altogetlier  wanting  any 
conclusive  jjroof-passage  for  the  bap- 
tism of  cliildren  in  the  age  of  the  apos- 
tles." "  Tlierefore,"  says  Meyer,  "  the 
baptism  of  the  cliildren  of  Christians, 
of  which  no  trace  is  found  in  the  New 
Testament,  is  not  to  lie  held  as  an 
apostolic  ordinance,  as,  indeed,  it  en- 
countered early  and  long  resistance ; 
but  it  is  an  institution  of  the  church, 
which  gradually  arose  in  post-apostolic 
times  in  connection  with  the  develop- 
ment of  ecclesiastical  life  and  of  doc- 
trinal teaching,  not  certainly  attested 


Cfi.  XVI.]                              THE  ACTS.                                          259 

ful  to  the  Lord,  come  iulo  luy  house,  and 
abide  tkere.    And  "she  constrained  us. 
16      And  it  came  to  p<ass,  as  we  went  'to 

prayer,  a  certain  damsel  s possessed  »ilh 
a   spirit    of   divination    met  us,  which 
brought  her  masters  much  gain  by  sooth- 

e  Luke  24  :  29;  Ileb.  13:2. 

'ver.  13.        i  1  Sam.  28  ;  7. 

before  TertuUian,  and  by  him  still  de- 
cidedly opposed,  and,  altliough  already 
defended  by  Cyprian,  only  !)ecoinini; 
general  after  the  time  of  Augustine  in 
virtue  of  that  connection."  "  To  me," 
says  Abbott,  "  it  api)ears  very  clear 
that  there  is  no  authority  for  the  prac- 
tice of  infant  baptism  in  such  inciden- 
tal historical  references  such  as  this." 
To  like  effect  Neander  and  others. 

She  besought  us — earnestly  in- 
vited us  to  make  her  house  our  home, 
while  tarrying  at  Philippi.  Yet  she 
jints  it  modestly,  If  ye  have  judged 
me  to  be  faithful  to  the  Lord,  in 
tiie  profession  I  have  made  in  baptism, 
and  reganl  me  as  a  true  believer  in  the 
Lord  Jesus  Christ.  Come  into  my 
house,  and  abide,  or  tarry  there  as 
guests.  She  regards  it  as  a  privilege 
to  entertain  them.  She  constrained 
us,  by  her  urgent  importunity.  (Luke 
2*:  29.)  This  is  the  first  instance  of 
Christian  hos])itality  recorded  in  the 
Acts ;  and  indicates  the  s])irit  of  liber- 
ality which  chai'acterized  the  Mace- 
donian churches.  (2Cor.  8:  i-6.)  They 
not  only  sent  gifts  to  meet  Paul's 
necessities  in  other  cities  (2cor.1i: 9; 
Phil.  4 ;  15, 16),  but  gave  from  aimng  them- 
selves persons  to  share  his  toils,  (jo  :  4.) 
And  long  after  when  a  j^risoner  at 
Rome  they  sent  P^paphroditus,  one  of 
tlieir  teachers,  with  similar  gifts,  and 
to  act  as  his  attendant.     (Piiii.  2 :  25, 26,  so ; 

4:  18.) 

IG.  The  closing  sentence  of  the  pre- 
ceding verse  implies  that  Paul  and  his 
companions  accepted  Lydia's  hospital- 
ity. A  church  was  doubtless  organized 
at  her  house,  whi(;h  received  accessions 
to  its  meml»ership  from  week  to  week. 
Luke  now  proceeds  to  relate  an  incident 
which  resulted  in  persecution  and  the 
departure  of  the  missionaries  from  Phil- 
ippi. And  it  came  to  pass,  on  a 
time,  as  we  Avent,  rather,  as  we.  were 
going  to  the  place  of  prayer.  The  nar- 
rative implies  that  it  was  not  on  the 
same  day  of  Lydia's  ba])tism,  but  some 
time  after.  A  certain  damsel — a 
young  female  servant  ox  slave.  Pos- 


sessed Avith  a  spirit  of  divination 

— literallj',  a  spirit,  a  Python.  That  she 
was  pos.ses.sed  witii  an  evil  spirit,  a 
demon,  is  evident  from  tiie  facts,  that 
Paul  ad<lrr.'i.s(</  it,  that  the  sj>irit  left 
tlie  girl,  and  tiiat  her  masters  found  the 
hope  of  their  gain  gone.  (ver.  is,  19.) 
Luke  characterizes  tlie  possession  a 
Python,  tlie  toi'm  popularly  ai)plied  to 
it.  J'ljtho)!  was  in  Greek  mythology 
tlie  name  of  the  serpent  or  dragon  that 
guarded  the  Deljdiic  oracle,  and  was 
slain  by  A])ollo.  The  oracle  was  pos- 
sessed by  the  latter,  and  tlie  name 
Python  sometimes  ap]died  to  him.  He 
was  the  god  of  pro^^hecy  and  the  patron 
of  the  healing  art.  This  maid-servant 
was  sujiposed  to  be  insiiired  by  hini, 
similar  to  a  priestess  of  Ajiollo.  Some 
interpreters  have  noticed  that  the  name 
Python  was  sometimes  applied  to  a 
ventriloquist;  and  in  this  case  the 
demon  may,  among  other  things,  have 
practiced  the  arts  of  ventriloquism. 
Apollo  is  also  regarded  as  the  avertcr 
of  evil,  and  the  title  of  Saviour  was 
sometimes  given  him  by  Greek  writers. 
This  may  have  ailded  significance  to 
the  maiden's  testimony,  "  These  men 
show  unto  us  the  way  of  salvation." 
Who  brought  her  masters  much 
gain  by  soothsaying.  This  .shows 
what  slie  did.  As  a  diviner  she  pro- 
fessed to  tell  future  events,  interpret 
signs  and  tell  fortunes.  The  word 
soothsaying,  .says  Trench  "  has  refer- 
ence to  the  tumult  of  the  mind,  the 
fury,  the  temporary  madness  under 
which  those  were,  who  were  supjwsed 
to  be  jiossessed  by  the  god,  during  the 
time  that  they  delivered  the  oracles; 
this  mantic  fury  disi)layiiig  itself  in 
tile  eyes  rolling,  the  lips  foaming,  the 
hair  Hying,  with  all  other  tokens  of  a 
more  than  natural  agitation."  (N.  T. 
Synonyms,  p.  42,  f.)  In  tliis  poor  girl, 
held  in  slavery  by  men  who  make  gain 
out  of  her  misfortunes,  we  get  a  view 
of  one  side  of  woman's  degradation  in 
Enroj)e  before  the  gospel  reached  it. 

IT.The  same  followed  Paul  and 
us  and  cried — not  only  this  time,  but 


260 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVI. 


17  saying:  the  same  followed  Paul  and  us, 
and  cried,  saying,  •"  These  men  are  the 
servants  of  the   most   h-gh  God,   which 

18  show  unto  us  the  way  of  salvation.  And 
this  did  she  many  days.  But  Paul, 
>  being  grieved,  turned  and  said  to  the 
spirit,  I  command  thee  •■  in  the  name  of 


Jesus  Christ  to  come  out  of  her.    '  And 
he  came  out  the  same  hour. 

19  And  m  when  her  masters  saw  that  the 
hope  of  their  gains  was  gone,  "they 
caught  Paul  and  Silas,  and  "drew  them 
into  the  market-place  unto  tbc  rulers, 

20  and  brought  them  to  the  magistrates,  say- 


h  Luke  4  :  34,  41. 


i  Mark  1  :  25,  34.        k  ch. 
n  2  Cor.  6  :  5. 


3:6.        1  Mark  16  :  17. 
0  Matt.  10  :  18. 


ch.  19  :  24,  27. 


often,  (ver.  18.)  If  she  had  thus  cried 
out  "  in  sarcasm  and  derision  sonie- 
Avhat  as  a  crowd  of  boj-s  might  do  "  it 
■would  have  been  somehow  indicated. 
The  general  form  of  the  narrative 
seems  against  such  a  supposition. 
Home  think  that  she  repeated  expres- 
sions which  she  had  heard  Paul  use 
witliout  knowing  their  meaning.  It  is 
better,  however,  to  regard  these  utter- 
ances as  those  of  the  demon  through 
lier,  similar  to  those  of  the  demoniacs 
wlio  acknowledged  the  supremacy  and 

])OWer    of    Christ.       (Matt.  8  :  29;  Luke4  :  .«.) 

\Vho  show  unto  iis — or,  according  to 
the  oldest  manuscripts,  nuto  you — the 
Avay  of  salvation — of  the  soul, — the 
divine  salvation.  The  understanding 
of  this  language  would  vary  according 
to  the  hearer's  knowledge  of  the  Mes- 
siah and  the  go.sjjcl.  To  the  heatlien 
the  idea  would  be  that  of  deliverance, 
pretterrafion,  or  sofeti/. 

18.  This  she  diii  for  many  days— 
a  considerable  number.  Compare  "  cer- 
tain days,"  ver.  12.  Why  Paul  did 
not  relieve  this  poor  girl  sooner  is  not 
told  us.  If  >the  hatl  felt  her  need  and 
cried  for  help,  doubtless  the  miracle 
would  have  been  performed  at  once. 
But  there  is  no  sign  of  this  sense  of 
need.  So  far  from  this  the  miracle  is 
not  ])erformed  for  her  sake,  but  because 
of  the  terrible  annoyance  the  evil 
spirit  gave  to  Paul.  Being  grieved 
is  too  week  a  translation.  Jieivg 
ind)(jnant,  having  a  holy  indignation, 
is  nearer  the  idea.  Paul  was  pained, 
sore  troubled,  liis  feelings  were  ontraijcd 
by  these  constant  and  reiterating  testi- 
monies of  this  vile  demon.  Some 
worldly  minded  preachers  would  have 
been  glad  to  have  the  attention  of  the 
])eople  aroused  by  the  jtroclaniation  of 
this  girl.  But  Paul  was  like  Cliri.st,  in 
this  respect,  who  charged  demons  to  be 
silent.  (Mark  :12.)  CliHst  aud  Paul 
uecdcd  no  such  endorsement.  The  testi- 


I  fying  of  the  demon  to  the  truth  might 
I  look  like  an  alliance  between  him  and 

the  preacher,  and  miglit  cast  an  evil  re- 

tiectiou  upon  Christ  and  his  messengers. 

In    the    name   of  Jesus    Christ. 

Paul  speaks  as  the  apostle  of  Jesus 
!  Christ,  and  by  his  authority,  as  did 
!  Peter  in  3  :  (i.  He  came  out  the 
j  same  hour — demonstrating  the  power 
I  of  Christ  and  the  authority  of  Paul  as 
'  his  rei)resentative.  (see  Mark  i :  25-2;. )  The 
'  promise  of  Jesus  is  tlius  fulfilled.    (Mark 

I  16  :  17.     See  Luke  'J  ;  1  witli  10  :  17.) 

19.  IVhen  her  masters,  who  were 
joint  owners,  saw  that  the  hope  of 
their  gain  was  gone — for  the  i)res- 
ent  and  future.  This  is  the  fi)'st  purely 
heathen  persecution  recorded  in  tiie 
Acts.  These  men  care  far  less  for  the 
girl  than  for  the  gains  she  brouglit 
them.  Compare  the  Gergesenes  and 
their  feelings  at  their  loss  (Matt. 8:. is.) ; 
also  the  disturbance  at  Ejihesus  because 
the  gains  from  making  the  shrines  of 
Diana  were  in  danger.  (19:25-28.)  Strik- 
ing exeni}>]ifications  of  1  Tim.O  :  9,  10. 
They   caught — laid   hold  o/— Paul 

,  and  SiJas.  The  idea  of  violence  is 
inijilied  by  this  and  what  follows. 
Timothy  and   Luke  are  not  arrested, 

I  being  less  ])rominent,  and  perhajis 
because  they  were  Greeks.  Drew  or 
drarjejed  them  into  the  market- 
place or  forum,  the  i)lace  of  j)ublic 
resort,  where  business  was  transacted, 
and  courts  of  Justice  were  held.  I'nto 
the  rulers,  who  liad  general  charge 
of  tlie  city  government.  Meyer  regatds 
them  as  eilii  judges,  who  referred  llio 
matter  10  tlie  magistrates,  of  the  next 
verse. 

20.  And  brought  them — her  mai-- 
ters /laving  brought  thcnito  the  mag- 
istrates—<Ae  dninnfiri  who  in  colo- 
nial towns  were  fond  of  calling  tiieni- 
selves  prwtors.  The  two  or  more  ])rie- 
tors  administered  justice  and  exerci.s»-d 
fuuctious  iu  colonies  similaj-  to  thode 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


261 


iug.  These  men,  being  Jews,  Pdo  exceed- 

21  ingly  trouble  our  city,  and  teach  customs 

which  are  not  lavful  for  us  to  receive. 


22  neither  to  observe,  being  Romans.  And 
the  multitude  rose  up  together  against 
them  :  and  the  magistrates  rent  otl  their 


p  ch.  17  :  0  ;  1  Kings  18  :  17. 


of  the  consuls  at  Home  in  the  days  of 
the  repiihlic.  (seeon  ver.  12.)  These 
men  being  Jews.  Notice  the  real 
ground  of  coniiilaint  is  sui)pressed. 
To  luive  nuide  prominent  the  fact  that 
Paul  had  ex])elled  the  demon  would 
have  heeu  favorable  to  liini ;  and  that 
tliey  liad  thus  lost  their  hope  of  gain 
through  the  restoration  of  the  damsel 
to  lier  right  mind  would  not  he  specially 
in  their  fa\'or,  eitlier  with  the  magis- 
trates or  the  multitude.  Like  the 
Sanhedrin  with  Jesus  (M:irk  U:64;  Luke 
23  :  2),  they  seek  a  more  pul^lic  pretext. 
They  apjuvil  to  their  natural  and  na- 
tional i>rejud  ices.  Tlie.>5e  men,  being 
Jews,  do  exceeding  trouble  our 
city.  As  .Jews  they  were  so  much  the 
more  iuexcusahle.  The  Jews  and  their 
religion  were  particularly  obnoxious  to 
Romans.  The  decree  of  Claudius, 
banishing  the  Jews  from  Rome  (18:2), 
about  this  time,  would  tend  to  embit- 
ter their  prejudices,  and  stimulate 
Philippi  as  a  colony  to  copy  after  the 
mother  city.  Neither  the  accusers  nor 
the  magistrates  appear  to  distinguish 
between  the  Christians  and  the  Jews. 

21.  Expansion  and  specification  of 
their  accusation,  showing  how  these 
Jews  disturbed  the  city.  And  teach 
customs — announcing  or  promulga- 
ting prescribed  usages  or  institutions. 
The  word  translated  customs  is  used 
of  religious  observances  in  6  :  14 ; 
26  :  3  ;  28  :  17.  Which  are  not  law- 
ful for  us  to  receive,  in  theory, 
neither  to  observe,  in  practice, 
being  Romans.  "  The  accusation 
was  i)artly  true  and  partly  false.  It 
was  quite  false  that  Paul  and  Silas 
were  disturbing  the  colony,  for  nothing 
could  have  been  more  calm  and  orderly 
than  their  worship  and  teaching  at  the 
liouse  of  Lydia,  or  in  the  synagogue  by 
the  water  side.  In  the  other  part  of  the 
indictment  there  was  a  certain  amount 
of  truth.  Tlie  letter  of  the  Roman 
Law,  even  under  the  republic,  was  ap- 
posed to  the  introduction  of  foreign 
religions ;  and  though  exceptions  were 
allowed,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Jews 


themselves,  yet  the  spirit  of  the  law 
entirely  condemned  such  changes  in 
worship  as  were  likely  to  unsettle  the 
minds  of  the  citizens,  or  to  produce  any 
tumultuous  uproar ;  and  tlie  advice 
given  to  Augustus,  which  both  he  and 
his  successors  had  studiously  followed, 
was,  to  check  religious  innovations  as 
promptly  as  possible,  lest  in  tlie  end 
they  should  undermine  tiie  monarchy." 
(Cony,  and  IIowson  Life  of  Paul. 
Vol.  1,  ]).  0O2.)  A  severe  law  was 
enacted  about  this  time,  or  a  little  later, 
against  any  one  not  a  Jew  undergoing 
the  rite  of  circumcision.  Being 
Romans  is  used  in  contrast  to  being 
Jews.  They  prided  tliemselves  in  their 
Roman  citizenship,  in  tlie  Roman  col- 
ony ;  and  that  desj)ised  Jews  should 
impose  their  religious  usages  on  noble 
Romans  was  not  to  be  endured. 

22.  Tlie  i>rejudices  and  resentment 
of  the  multitude,  in  this  proud 
Roman  town  of  Philipj)i,  was  aroused 
by  such  an  accusation,  and  they  rose 
up  togetiier  tumultuously  against 
Paul  and  Silas,  like  tlie  blind  rabble 
who  joined  the  Jewish  leaders  against 
our  Saviour.  And  like  Pilate,  the 
magistrates,  having  like  prejudices, 
are  willingly  borne  on  by  the  excite- 
ment, and,  without  trial,  without  giving 
opportunity  for  defence,  or  even  the 
assertion  of  Roman  citizenship,  hasten 
to  inflict  disgraceful  punishment.  They 
even  ajjpear  to  act  as  leaders  of  the 
ralible  and  with  their  own  hands  rent 
ofl"  the  gannents  of  Paul  and  Silas,  ex- 
posing their  naked  backs  and  shoulders 
ready  for  punishment.  And  com- 
manded to  beat  them  with  rods. 
This  command  was  given  to  the  ser- 
geant (ver.  2;)),  who  inflicted  the  beating. 
Tiie  rods  were  usually  cut  from  birch 
or  elm  trees.  Under  the  Roman  method 
the  crimiiuil  was  stripped,  stretched 
with  cords  or  thongs  on  a  frame,  and 
then  beaten.  Why  Paul  and  Silas  did 
not  declare  their  citizenship  can  only 
be  surmised.  Perhaps  amid  the  haste 
and  noise  they  had  no  opportunity  to 
make    themselves    heard ;     but    more 


262 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVI. 


clothes,  1  and  commanded  to  beat  /hem. 

23  And  when  they  had  laid  ■■  many  stripes 

upon  them,  they  cast  them  into  prison, 

charging  the  jailer  to  keep  them  safely : 


24  who,  having  received  such  a  charge, 
thrust  them  into  the  inner  prison,  and 
m.tde  their  feet  fast  in  the  stocks. 

25  And  at  midnight  Paul  and  Silas  prayed. 


4  ch.  5  :  40 ;  2  Cor.  6:5;  11 :  23,  25  ;  1  Thess.  2  :  2. 


■  2  Cor.  11  :  23,  34. 


probivlilj',  they  were  inwardly  inclined 
by  tiie  S])irit  to  sutter  shame  for  Christ, 
that  botJi  tlie  glory  and  the  cause  of 
Christ  might  be  further  advanced,  in 
the  wonderful  occurrences  wliich  were 
to  follow.  This  beating  with  rods  was 
one  of  the  three  to  which  Paul  alludes 
in  2  Cor.  11  :  25 ;  the  other  two  are  not 
recorded.  lie  also  refers  to  this  dis- 
graceful treatment  in  1  Thess.  2  :  2. 

23.  And  wheu  they  had  laid 
many  stripes  or  bhws  upon  them — 
without  counting  them,  there  being  no 
merciful  limitation  as  among  the  Jews. 

(2  Cor.  11  :  .24  ;  Deut.  25  :  3.)         DoubtlcSS       tilC 

Lord  sustained  liis  servants  who  counted 
it  their  joy  that  they  were  worthy  to 
sufler  shame  for  him.  (  ver.  25 ;  5 :  41.)  Mr. 
Obadiah  Holmes,  who  was  pul)]icly 
whipped  in  Boston  in  1G51,  because  of 
carrying  out  his  religious  convictions, 
declared  that,  "  as  tlie  strokes  fell  ui)on 
me  I  had  such  a  sj)iritual  manifestation 
of  God's  presence  as  the  like  thereof  I 
never  had  nor  felt,  nor  can  with  fleshly 
tongue  express ;  and  the  outward  j)ain 
was  so  removed  from  me  tliat  indeed  1 
am  not  able  to  declare  it  to  you." 
(  Backus  i.  194.  A^ewton.)  (see  on  ver. 33.) 
They,  the  magistrates,  cast  them 
into  prison,  charging  the  jailer 
olHcially,  and  probably  orally,  to  Keep 
them  safely,  as  if  they  were  no  ordi- 
nary criminals.  This  great  strictness 
on  their  part  arose  probably  from  their 
desire  to  satisfy  the  infuriated  feelings 
of  the  populace. 

24.  The  jailer  proceeds  to  obey 
strictly  the  order  which  he  had  re- 
ceived. There  is  no  wantonness  or 
gratuitous  inhumanity  imjdied  on  his 
part.  "  The  slight  but  obvious  sugges- 
tion of  this  extenuating  circumstance 
may  possibly  be  owing  to  the  fact  that, 
when  the  history  was  written,  this 
Philippian  jailer  was  an  eminent  dis- 
ciple." (Alexander.)  Thrust,  «(rf 
them,  not  necessarily  with  violence, 
into  the  inner  prison,  where  there 
would  be  greater  security,  not  only 
from  chances  of  escape,  but  also  from 


the  fury  of  a  mob.  The  Eonian  prison 
usually  was  in  three  parts.  The  tiist 
had  liglit  and  fresli  air ;  the  second  was 
shut  oil  by  strong  iron  gates  witli  bars 
and  lock,  wliicli  was  tJie  inner  prison  ; 
the  third  was  tlie  sul>terraneous  dun- 
geon, in  which  those  condemned  to 
deatli  were  usually  confined.  Often  the 
Koman  ])rison  was  in  three  stories,  the 
lower  one  or  dungeon  being  under 
ground  ;  the  middle  t>n  a  level  with  the 
ground,  but  like  the  ujiper  one,  aj)- 
ju'oached  only  tlirough  the  roof.  Such 
a  prison,  however,  hardly  fits  the  cir- 
cumstances and  descriidioii  at  Philippi. 
Their  feet  last  in  the  stocks — in 
heavy  blocks  of  wood.  Tlie  feet  were 
stretched  apart  and  fastened  into  lioles. 
In  this  case  it  was  used  for  safe  confine- 
ment ;  but  often  also  as  an  instrument  of 
torture  ;  and  the  feet,  hands,  and  neck 
were  often  confined.  Coini)are  Jere- 
miah's treatment,  Jer.  20  :  2  ;  38  :  6. 

25.  We  can  hardly  conceive  the 
miserable  condition  of  Paul  and  Silas 
in  the  inner  }irison,  with  its  filth,  ver- 
min, and  lack  of  air  and  light,  witii 
bleeding  and  lacerated  back,  cliained 
and  painfully  sitting  with  their  feet 
in  the  stocks.  But  in  strong  contrast 
their  souls  were  full  of  joy  and  ))eace. 
But  about  midnight  tliey  prayed 
and  sang  praises.  There  were  two 
acts,  prayer  and  praise,  yet  mingled  to- 
gether, praying  they  naug  hymns  to 
God.  Tliere  was  no  resentment,  no 
bitter  feeling  in  their  hearts,  for  these 
could  not  exist  with  prayer  and  praise. 
They  were  carrying  out  our  Lord's 
command  to  rejoice  in  persecution,  and 
to  pray  for  their  persecutors  (Matt. 5:  lo- 
1-'.  44),  not  forgetful,  however,  of  the 
little  church  at  Lydia's  house.  Ami 
they  sang  p.salms,  perhaps  the  hymns 
which  Pliny  says  the  Christians  sang 
at  their  meetings  before  sunrise.  The 
Holy  Spirit  was  with  them,  and  gave 
them  "  songs  in  the  night."  (Job»:  1  .) 
Some  suppose  they  sang  Psalms  ll.S- 
118.  Stanzas  appropriate  to  their  condi- 
tion are  found  in  Ps.  40  :  1-4  ;  102  :  19, 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


263 


and   »sang  praises  unto  God:   and    the 

26  jirlsoners  beard  theiu.  And  suddenly 
there  was  a  great  earthquake,  so  that  the 
foundations  of  the  prison  were  shaken  : 
and  immediately  «all  the  doors  were 
opened,    and    every    one's    bauds    were 

27  loosed.    And  the  keeper  of  the  prison 


•29 


awaking  out  of  his  sleep,  and  seeing  the 
prison  doors  open,  lie<lrewout  liis sword, 
"  and  would  have  killed  himself,  suppos- 
ing that  the  prisoners  had  been  tied. 
'  hut  i'uul  cried  with  a  loud  voice,  saying, 
Do  th)  self  no  harm  :  for  we  are  all  here. 
Then  he  called  for  alight,  and  sprang  in, 


«ch.  5  :41:  Job35  :  10.        »ch.  5  :  19;  12  :  7,  10.        »  ch.  12  :  19.        »  Lev.  19  ;  18. 


20;  142  :  5-7.    The  prisoners  heard 

them,  rather,  were  /istening  to  them. 
So  earuestly  did  they  throw  their  souls 
aud  their  voices  into  their  prayers  and 
praise  that  the  prisoners  were  awak- 
ened, or  kept  awake.  Strange  sounds, 
which  they  listen  to  with  wonder. 
Doubtless  the  jailer,  and  perhaps  some 
of  the  prisoners,  told  Luke  of  this. 

26.  God  came  to  their  relief  while 
thus  engaged  in  worship  by  a  great 
earthquake,  shaking  the  foundations 
of  the  prison.  Tlie  same  jwwer  (not 
the  earthquake)  at  once  oi)eued  all  the 
doors,  both  of  the  inner  and  outer 
prison,  aud  loosened  the  bonds  of  all 
the  prisoners.  How  God  did  this  we 
do  not  know,  but  the  Creator  of  all 
things  and  the  Author  of  Law  knows 
how  to  work  miraculously  in  harmony 
with  his  own  natural  and  spiritual 
forces.  This  great  exhibition  of  mir- 
aculous power  comes  so  suddenly  and 
fills  all  the  other  prisoners  with  such 
astonishment  and  awe  that  none  at- 
tempt to  escape.  The  religious  atmo- 
shere  pervading  this  place  of  prayer 
and  the  display  of  God's  power  may 
have  quickened  their  consciences. 

27.  The  jailer  seems  not  to  have 
heard  the  singing,  but  being  roused 
out  of  sleep  by  the  earthquake  and 
the  noise  in  the  prison,  and  seeing 
the  prison  doors  open,  naturally 
concluded  that  the  prisoners  had 
escaped.  He  thouglit  that  disgrace 
and  death  awaited  him,  for  under 
Roman  law  he  must  suffer  in  their 
stead.  Therefore,  he  determines  upon 
suicide.  According  to  the  Roman 
code  of  honor  it  was  preferable  for  one 
to  die  by  his  own  hand  than  by  that  of 
an  enemy,  or  an  executioner.  Philippi 
had  been  famous  for  its  suicides.  Here 
Brutus  and  Cassius  put  an  end  to  their 
own  lives.  Self-murder  was  common 
among  the  Romans  and  was  approved 
by  the  Stoic  philosophy.  Drew  out  his 
sword — referring  to  the  sword  which 


he  had  with  him  generally  and  was 
then  wearing.  In  this  military  Roman 
colony,  the  jailer  may  have  been  a 
soldier,  or  perhaps  subject  to  military 
dicipline. 

28.  Paul  cried  with  a  loud 
voice.  We  are  not  told  how  Paul 
knew  the  jailer's  purj)ose.  Lamps  may 
have  been  dimly  burning  and  the 
jailer  in  a  position  where  Paul  could 
see  him;  he  may  have  heard  him  utter 
exclamations  or  jjrayers  |)reparatory  to 
death,  and  drawing  his  sword  from  the 
scabbard  ;  or  it  may  have  been  revealed 
to  him,  which  would  be  in  keeping 
with  the  other  supernatural  wonders. 
Do  thyself  no  harm.  The  gospel 
and  its  messengers  come,  not  to  destroy, 
but  to  save.  We  are  all  here  im- 
plies either  that  the  other  prisoners 
were  with  them  in  the  inner  prison, 
or  near  at  hand  where  he  could  see 
them.  He  may,  however,  have  asserted 
this  as  an  inspired  man.  [h-.-h.-m.) 
Paul  gives  just  the  reason  needed. 
Other  reasons,  such  as  the  sinfulness  of 
suicide,  he  could  defer  to  a  more  fit- 
ting opportunity. 

29.  Then  he  called  to  his  attend- 
ants, and  perhaps  to  the  members  of 
his  family  who  were  all  aroused  (ver.  aii), 
for  a  light  —  lamps  or  torches,  in 
order  to  light  the  whole  prison,  and 
see  its  condition  and  all  its  inmates. 
He  sprang  in  —  rushed  in  imijetu- 
ously.  He  recognizes  a  divine  inter- 
position in  behalf  of  Paul  aud  Silas ; 
he  is  all  excitement  and  terribly  in 
earnest.  And  came  trembling — 
becoming  tremulous  from  fear.  Com- 
j)are  Moses  trembling  in  the  presence 
of  God  in  the  bush  (t  :  3i),  where  the 
same  words  are  used  in  the  original. 
As  the  jailer  approaches  Paul  and  Silas 
a  religious  awe  pervades  his  whole 
being.  Under  a  sense  of  the  divine 
presence  and  impending  judgments,  he 
fell  doAvn,  prostrated  himself  before 
Paul  aud  Silas,  iu  humble  reverence  at 


264 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVI. 


and  came  trembling,  and  fell  down  before 

30  Paul  and  Silas,  and  brought  them  out, 
and   said,  ySirs,  what   must   I  do  to  be 

31  saved  ?    And  they  said,  »  Believe  on  the 


Lord   Jesus   Christ,   and    lln.u  slialt    be 

32  saved,  and  thy  ln.use.     And   Ihey  spake 

unto  him  the  word  of 'he  Lord,  and  lo  all 


J  ch.  2  :  37 ;  Luke  3  :  10. 


'  ch.  2  :  38,  39  ;  13  :  38,  39  ;  John  3  :  10,  36;  6  :  47. 


their  feet.  A  strong  expression.  "  It 
here  expresses,  in  the  strongest  and 
most  vivid  form,  the  terror  and  despair 
of  the  awakened  jailer,  and  tlie  awe 
with  which  Jie  looked  upon  tlie  two 
men  whom  he  had  so  recently  com- 
mitted to  the  closest  and  most  rigorous 
confinement."     (Alexandek,) 

30.  And  brought  or  led  them 
out  from  the  inner  into  the  outer 
prison,  or  perliaps  into  the  courtyard. 
This  was  an  act  of  respect  and  defer- 
ence. Sirs,  Lords — used  as  a  title  of 
honor,  in  addressing  persons  of  distinc- 
tion, implying  respect  and  reverence, 
(johu  vi :  L'l.)  What  shall  I  do  to  be 
saved — tliat  I  may  obtain  salvation, 
for  Paul  and  Silas  so  understood  it  and 
so  answered  it.  (vcr.  :;i.)  During  the 
time  tlicy  had  been  in  Philipi)i  the 
jailer  must  have  heard  of  them  and 
known  something  of  their  preacliing. 
The  possessed  damsel  had  proclaimed 
them  servants  of  God,  who  sliow^  the 
way  of  salvation.  Their  accusers  had 
laid  special  stress  upon  their  religious 
teachings.  Possibly  the  jailer  himself 
had  notonly  seen,  but  also  heard  them 
preach.  And  now  the  wonderful  dis- 
plays of  divine  power  convince  him 
that  what  they  claim  and  teach  is  true. 
The  earthquake,  too,  makes  death, 
judgment,  human  weakness,  and  sin- 
fulness realities.  The  Holy  Spirit,  who 
is  with  Paul  and  Silas,  deepens  the 
truth  in  his  heart,  and  convinces  him 
of  his  lost  condition.  Comjjare  how 
Peter  cried  out  in  viewing  one  of 
Christ's  miracles,  "  I  am  a  sinful  man, 

O  Lord."       (Luke  5:  8.) 

31.  The  answer  of  Paul  and  Silas 
is  brief,  but  comprehensive.  It  is  in 
harmony  with  Peter's  answer  (-iee  on 
2  ::i><)  to  the  same  question  on  tlie  day 
of  Pentecost.  Faith  imj)lies  repent- 
ance ;  the  two  are  inseparable.  Faith  is 
productive  of  obedience  and  thus  would 
be  followed  by  baptism.  Peter  was  ad- 
dressing convicted  .Tews ;  Paul,  an  igno- 
rant but  penitent  heathen.  The  latter 
needed  specially  to  be  pointed  at  ouce 


to  the  only  Saviour ;  then  he  could  be 
more  fully  instructed,  (ver.  32.)  Be- 
lieve on  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ — 

as  the  ground  of  ho])c  and  salvation. 
Trust  i)i  liim ;  let  tliy  heart  and  thy 
affections  rest  upon  him  in  humble 
reliance.  (Rom.  10 :  10.)  The  faith  re- 
quired was  more  than  a  belief  that 

Jesus  existed.       (Heb.  11  ;  6;  James  2  ;  19.)      It 

was  a  lirituj  foitli  (James  2 :  17, 18),  a  hearty 
faith,  hence  "  working  by  love  "  (Gai. 
5:6);  an  efficacious  faith  ))ringing 
cleansing  through  the  sacrifice  and 
blood  of  Jesus.  (15 : 9.)  2s'otice  still 
further:  The  jailer  had  addressed  them 
as  ISirs,  or  lords ;  but  they  jKiiiit  him 
to  the  only,  the  divine  Lord,  the  Son 
of  God ;  to  Jesus,  the  Saviour  (Matt. 
1:21),  the  Son  of  man;  to  C/irist,  the 
Anointed,  the  Pro})liet,  the  High  Priest, 
and  King.  The  jailer  sees  him  at  once 
as  an  Almighty  and  the  only  Saviour. 
The  meaning  of  this  direction  would 
grow  upon  him,  as  he  received  further 
instruction,  and  liad  a  deeper  expci- 
ience.  This  rejdy  brings  to  view  the 
great  doctrine  of  justification  l)y  faith, 
so  prominent  in  Paul's  epistles.  It 
should  be  noted  that  this  rej)ly  is  given 
before  any  of  his  ei)istles  were  written, 
showing  that  tlie  doctrine  was  not  a 
mere  development,  but  a  fundamental 
truth  of  the  gospel  as  he  had  received 
it  from  the  Lord.  (Gai.  i:i2.)  And 
thou  shall  be  saved,  thuu  and  thy 
house — a  strong  concise  expression  : 
Not  thou  alone,  t>ut  tliy  house  also  be- 
lieving shall  be  saved.  The  expression 
"  does  not  mean  that  they  were  to  he 
.saved  by  his  faith,  but  by  faith  in  the 
same  Saviour."  (Alexander.  To 
the  same  effect  Alford,  Meyek,  and 

H.\CKETT.) 

32,  They  instruct  the  jailer  and  lii> 
family  more  fully  in  the  word  of  tlie 
Lord,  respecting  the  way  of  salva- 
tion, and  the  reipiirements  of  faith  in 
Christ.  They  spake  or  talked.  It 
was  probably  a  conversational  dis- 
course. To  or  together  with  all  that 
were  iu  his  huiise.    This  seems  to 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


265 


33  that  were  in  his  house.  And  he  took  them 
the  s.ame  hour  of  the  nijiiht,  and  washed 
</teir  stripes  ;  and  was  bai>tized,  he  and 

3-1  all  his,  straightway.    And  when  he  had 


brought  them  into  his  house,  •  he  set  meat 
before  them,  and  rejoiced,  believing  in 
God  with  all  his  house. 


»  Luke  5  :  29 ;  19  :  6. 


have    occurred    either    in    the  outer 
prison  or  in  the  court  yard.   (Ver.  so. ) 

33.  The  result  of  the  preaching. 
And  he  took  them  with  him,  imply- 
ing a  change  of  place.  "Probably  lie 
led  them  to  a  neighboring  water,  per- 
haps in  tlie  court  of  the  house,  in 
which  his  baptism  and  that  of  his 
household  was  immediately  com- 
pleted. "  (Meyer.)  And  washed 
his  stripes.  Literally,  from  his 
stripes.  Full  of  meaning.  lie  bathed 
and  cleansed  him  from  the  blood  of 
his  stripes.  The  word  here  translate*! 
washed  means  to  wash  the  entire 
body.  Another  verl)  means  washing 
apart  of  it.  See  note  on  John  13  :  10, 
where  both  verbs  are  used.  By  tliis 
deed  of  kindness  the  jailer  shows  his 
faith  and  love.  How  did  those  stripes 
or  woiDids  speak  to  his  heart !  Rev.  J. 
C.  Grimmell,  of  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.  says 
of  Rev.  G.  Burgdorff,  who  was 
scourged  in  Russia,  while  in  the 
Lord's  service :  "  The  dear  man  showed 
me  the  ridges,  like  the  fingers  of  my 
hand,  left  by  the  lash  on  his  back,  be- 
fore retiring  one  night,  when  I  hap- 
jiened  to  share  the  room  with  him.  " 
From  this  and  the  two  other  beatings 
and  the  five  scourgings  (-;  Cor.  u :  24,  m), 
did  Paul  "  bear  a))out  with  him  as  long 
as  life  the  marks  of  Jesus  in  his  body." 
(Gal. 6.17.)  And  was  baptized,  "he 
and  all  his,  immediately.  A  beau- 
tiful exchange  of  temporal  and  spi  ritual 
service.  The  proof  and  fruit  of  the 
faith  of  the  jailer  and  his  house  are 
found  in  their  immediate  obedience. 
There  were  no  infants  here.  They 
were  all  capable  of  being  instructed 
(vcr.  32)  and  of  believing,  (ver.  .3*.)  The 
prison  may  have  been  on  the  bank 
of  the  river  Gangas,  or  the  baptism 
might  have  been  administered  in  a 
tank  or  fountain  in  the  court  yard.  Im- 
mersions have  frequently  been  per- 
formed in  the  prisons  of  the  South. 
J.  T.  Christian,  D.  D.,  of  Mississippi, 
relates  (Immersion  pp,  98-101)  three 
instances  where  the  immersion  was  per- 


formed in  jail,  in  a  bath-tub,  or  a  large 
trough.  Ancient  houses  usually  had 
reservoirs  of  rain  water  ;  and  j)risons 
their  swimming  baths  within  their 
walls.  "This  case  can  present  no  ditfi- 
culty  to  "the  minds  of  any  of  you,  who 
may  have  been  within  the  yard  of  the 
l^rison  of  this  city,  or  are  acquainted 
with  the  fact  that  prison-yards  in  the 
East,  as  well  as  the  yards  and  gardens 
of  private  houses,  are  usually  furnished 
with  tanks  of  water."  (Dk.  A.  J  UUSON, 
Sermon  on  Baptism  in  Calcutta.) 

34.  And  when  he  had  brought, 
etc., — rather,  And  having  brought  them 
up  into  his  house.  The  prison  was 
lower  than  his  house.  (Sci;  ou  12;  4,)  His 
house  may  have  been  over  the  })risou 
or  joined  to  the  prison  on  higher 
ground.  He  had  just  come  up  from  his 
Ijaptism,  which  very  likely  occurred  in 
one  of  the  reservoirs  of  the  prison. 
(seever.33.)  Set  meat  before  them. 
Literally,  He  set  a  table,  a  phrase 
which  here  means.  He  set  food  before 
them,  or  gave  a  repast.  Rejoiced, 
believing  in  God  with  all  his 
house.  He  exulted,  rejoiced  exceed- 
ingly. (2:26.)  "The  voice  of  rejoic- 
ing and  salvation  is  in  the  tabernacles 
of  the  righteous."  (p.^.  us  :  15.)  It  was 
the  joy  of  faith  and  obedience.  (8:39.) 
Faith  is  aftirmed  of  his  whole  house. 
Having  with  all  his  house  believed  in 
God,  and  consequently  in  his  salvation 
through  Christ.  Before  this  he  was  a 
heathen ;  now  he  believes  in  the  true 
God.  "  Thus  the  meaning  will  be.  Re- 
joiced that  he  with  all  his  house  had 
been  led  to  believe  (and  thus  as  a  neces- 
sary consequence  to  believe  in)  God. 
The  expre.s.sion  having  believed  in  God, 
would  only  be  used  of  a  converted 
heathen,  not  of  a  Jew."  (Alford.) 
There  is  no  ground  for  infant  baj)tism 
here.     All  were  old  enough   to  believe. 

It  may  be  added  that  Paul  ever  re- 
tained a  joyful  remembrance  of  the 
Philij)i)ian  church.  From  his  imj)ris- 
onmeiit  in  Rome  he  calls  its  members 
"  his  joy  iuid    his    crown."    (puu.  4:i.) 


266 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVI. 


35  And  when  it  was  day,  the  magistrates 
sent  the  Serjeants,  saying,  Let  those  men 

36  go.     And  the  keeper  of  the  prison   told 
this  saying  to  Paul,  The  magistrates  have 


sent  to  let  you  go :  now  therefore  depart , 

37  and   go  in   peace.     But   Paul  said  unto 

them.  They  have  beaten   us  openly  un- 

coiideuined,  >>  being  Romans,  and  have 


«>  ch.  22  :  25-29. 


He  urges  them  again  and  again  to  "  re- 
joice in  the  Lord. "  (Pbii.  3 .  i ;  4:4.)  The 
very  remembrance  of  them  filled  him 
with  thanksgiving  (Phii.  i :  s)^  and  their 
gifts  and  care  for  his  welfare  tilled  him 
with  great  joy.  (Piiii.  4;  lo  r.)  His  epistle 
to  them  is  one  of  the  most  cheerful  and 
loving  of  all  the  writings  of  the  New 
Testament.  In  it  he  reveals  more  fully 
his  heart  and  his  distinctively  personal 
traits  than  in  any  other  of  his  writings. 

35.  And  when  it  was  day — day 
having  come,  implying  that  it  was 
early  in  the  day.  The  magistrates 
— the  prietors.  (ver.  20.)  The  ser- 
geants— the  iictors,  who  hore  a  bundle 
of  rods  and  otlier  insignia  of  office  be- 
fore the  Iloiuan  magistrates  and  exe- 
cuted their  orders.  Six  Iictors  attended 
the  prietors.  The  names  indicate  the 
colonial  government  and  officers  simi- 
lar to  tiiose  of  Rome.  In  all  these  de- 
tails the  accuracy  of  Luke  is  manifested. 
Let  those  men  go — somewhat  curtly 
and  contemptuously.  Jie/ease  those  fel- 
lows. They  had  been  imprisoned  appa- 
rently that  further  charges  and  pro- 
ceeding might  be  had  against  them. 
(Ver.  24.)  What  caused  this  sudden  change 
can  only  be  surmised.  The  earthquake 
may  have  caused  alarm,  and  aroused 
their  superstitious  fears  on  account  of 
their  rash  and  lawless  treatment.  They 
had  had  time  to  reflect  on  their  injustice 
and  may  have  learned  a  more  accurate 
Btatement  of  facts.  The  clamor  of  the 
mob,  too,  had  ceased,  and  a  feeling  of 
reaction  naturally  came  on.  For  these 
or  other  reasons  they  consider  it  best  to 
have  nothing  more  to  do  with  them, 
but  quietly  get  rid  of  them. 

36.  The  jailer  receives  the  message 
from  the  magistrates  with  joy,  and 
naturally  expects  a  like  reception  by 
the  prisoners.  The  Iictors  do  not  go 
into  the  prison,  but  the  jailer  reports 
their  words  to  Paul.  Anticipating 
their  immediate  acceptance,  but  ignor- 
ant of  their  citizenship,  the  jailer  ad- 
dresses them  aflectiouately,  and  using  a 
form  of  Chiistiau  salutation,  says.  Now 


therefore,    depart,     and     go    in 
peace — go    unmolested  and  prosper. 

(15 -.33.) 

37.  The  jailer,  however,  did  not  con- 
sider the  manner  of  their  release.  To 
be  sent  away  as  if  tliey  had  simply  suf- 
fered ju.st  punishment,  would  natiinilly 
cast  suspicions  on  tliem  wherever  thiy 
went.  Fortunately  the  means  of  avoiu- 
ing  this  was  at  hand.  Paul  said  to 
them — through  the  jailer.  Notice  the 
bi'evity,  fullness,  and  energy  of  this 
rej)ly.  Almost  every  word  is  an  alle- 
gation ;  every  jiarticular  strengthens 
the  complaint.  Heaten,  publicly,  with- 
out trial,  and  they  too  Koman  citizens, 
and  then  ignominiously  cast  into  prison  ! 
And  now  do  they  cast  us  out  jirivately  ? 
Nay  !  Let  them  come  themselves  offici- 
ally, with  due  apology,  and  biingus  out 
honorably.  They  have  beaten  us — a 
diti'erent  verb  from  that  used  in  ver.  22, 
but  expressing  strongly  the  severest 
kind  of  scourging.  Tnis  was  a  dis- 
grace. Openly — publicly  before  the 
people,  which  added  to  the  ignominy. 
Uucondemned — without  even  a  form 
of  trial.  Treated  like  dogs,  for  even 
slaves  had  a  right  of  defense  before 
ininishment.  A  trial  in  due  form  was 
one  of  the  sacred  rights  of  the  citizen. 
And  all  this  indignity  cast  upon  us  men 
that  are  Jionunis.  By  being  Jiovians 
is  meant  that  honorary  citizenship,  by 
which  s})ecial  privileges  were  granted 
to  certain  individuals  and  families,  en- 
titling them  to  certain  immunities  and 
advantages  enjoyed  by  native  Romans. 
The  Poreian  and  Valerian  laws  ex- 
empte<l  all  Roman  citizens  from  strij)es 
and  tortures.  "  It  is  a  crime,"  said 
Cicero,  "to  bind  a  Roman  citizen,  a 
crime  to  scourge  him ;  it  is  almost 
parricide  that  he  should  be  executed." 
To  break  these  laws  exposed  the  mag- 
istrates to  indictment  for  treason,  the 
penalty  being  death  and  confiscation  of 
property.  Paul  was  a  Roman  by  birth. 
(See  ou  22: 28.)  How  Silas  obtained  his 
citizenship  is  not  recorded.  And  have 
cast  us  into  prison— a  still  further 


Ch.  XVI.] 


THE  ACTS, 


267 


cast  us  into  prison  ;  and  now  do  they 
thrust  us  out  privily  ?  Nay  verily  ;  but 
let  them   come  themselves  and  fetch  us 

38  out.  And  the  Serjeants  told  these  words 
unto  the  magistrates.  And  they  feared, 
when  they  heard  that  they  were  Romans  : 

39  and  they  came  and  besought  them,  and 


brought  ihfin  out,  and  =  desired  them  to  de- 
40  part  out  of  the  city.  And  they  went  out  of 
the  prison,  "i  and  entered  into  the  hunse  of 
Ijydia:  and  when  tliey  had  seen  the 
brethren,  they  comforted  them  and  de- 
parted. 


•  Blatt.  8  :  34.        <»  ver.  14. 


indignity  under  the  circumstances. 
Such  close  and  cruel  confinement  did 
not  ))ecouie  a  Roman  citizen  without 
conviction  or  confession  of  crime.  And 
now  do  they  thrust  us  out  privily. 
Having  cast  its  into  prison  publicly  and 
wrongfully,  do  they  now  attempt  to 
shield  their  crime  and,  without  apology 
or  reparation,  cast  us  out  thus  secretly  ? 
Nay  verily — we  will  not  submit  to 
such  a  dismissal.  The  prisoners  now 
had  the  magistrates  in  their  power,  and 
by  complaint  to  tlie  proper  authorities 
might  have  procured  their  punishment. 
They  were  in  a  position  to  dictate  terms. 
Having  obeyed  the  letter  of  Christ's 
command,  "  Eesist  not  evil,"  etc.  (Matt. 
6  :  29) ,  they  now  claim  their  legal 
rights,  as  a  mode  of  asserting  their  in- 
nocence, and  aLso  of  i)rotecting  their 
converts  from  such  mob  violence  as 
they  had  suffered.  As  to  the  reason  of 
their  not  claiming  their  citizenship  be- 
fore, see  on  ver.  22.  Let  them  come 
themselves  instead  of  sending  their 
servants,  and  fetch  us  out — as  a  proof 
of  our  innocence,  and  an  apology  for 
their  injustice.  Thus  they  propose  to 
let  them  off  easily.  They  act  upon  the 
rule  Paul  afterward  enjoined  "Avenge 
not  yourselves,  but  rather  give  place 
to  wrath,"  etc.  (Rom.  12: 19.)  Such  a 
course  also  would  reflect  favorably  upon 
the  church  at  Philippi.  It  would  prove 
partly  a  moral  ami  civil  defense.  The 
church  had  been  founded  not  by  niere 
Jews,  but  by  Roman  citizens.  The 
wrong  done  it  and  its  founders  would 
react  in  its  favor. 

38.  When  the  magistrates  beard 
that  Paul  and  Silas  were  Romans  they 
feared — or  were  frightened,  knowing 
that  they  were  liable  to  severe  punish- 
ment. (See  on  ver.  37.)  Public  officers 
who  could  be  led,  and  would  even  fall 
in  with  a  thoughtless  mob,  would  most 
likely  prove  cowardly,  and  not  only 
fear  punishment,  but  also  the  national 
jealousy  of  their  own  citizens,  which 


had  shown  itself  the  day  before,    (ver. 
20-22.) 

39,  With  due  haste  the  magistrates 
came  and  besought  them,  strove 
to  appease  them  btj  entreaty.  A])ol()- 
gizing  with  fair  words  they  be<jf/ed  not 
to  make  complaint  against  them.  Dr. 
Hackett  quotes  from  Lucian  a  case  of 
false  imprisonment,  in  whicli  a  gov- 
ernor of  a  province  not  only  confessed 
his  error,  but  paid  a  large  sum  to  the 
injured  parties,  to  bribe  them  to  be 
silent.  And  when  they  had  hroug;Iit 
them  out  of  the  j)rison  in  a  most  re- 
spectful manner,  they  desired,  asked 
them  as  a  favor,  that  they  would  de- 
part out  of  the  city,  in  order  to 
insure  their  own  safety  and  the  public 
peace.  Paul  and  Silas  comply  with 
the  request,  but  take  their  own  time. 

(Ver.  40.) 

40.  Without  showing  either  timidity 
or  haste,  Paul  and  Silas  go  from  the 
prison  to  the  house  of  Lydia,  where 
they  had  been  guests,  and  where  the 
church  was  accustomed  to  meet.  And 
seeing  the  brethren,  of  the  churcli, 
together  with  Timothy  and  Luke,  who 
were  probably  assembled  for  tliis  pur- 
pose. They  comforted  —  rather, 
they  exhorted  them,  to  be  firm  in  the  faith 
(11 : 2»),  which  includes  consolation  and 
encouragement.  The  divine  interposi- 
tion in  their  behalf,  and  the  humilia- 
tion of  the  magistrates,  were  reasons  of 
great  encouragement  and  hojie  to  the 
infant  church.  And  departed.  From 
here  to  20  :  6  Luke  continues  the  nar- 
rative in  the  third  person,  from  which 
it  is  inferred  that  he  was  left  l)ehind  to 
watch  over  the  church.  The  comjjara- 
tive  brevity  of  the  account  whicli  fol- 
lows of  the  work  in  Thessalonica  and 
Berea  indicates  that  Luke  was  not  with 
them.  Timothy  also  probably  tarried 
for  a  time.  The  next  notice  of  him  is 
at  Berea  (i7 :  u),  whitiier  he  may  have 
gone  after  further  labors  at  Philippi. 
But  more  probably  he  rejoins  Paul  at 


268 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  x\a. 


Thessalonica,  at  one  of  the  times  when 
sujjplies  were  sent  him  from  Philipi)!. 
(pijU.  4 :  15, 16.)  Paul  joins  the  luinie  of 
Timothy  with  his  own  in  liis  e2>istle  to 
that  church.  (Phii.  i:i.)  The  Philip- 
piau  church  appears  from  its  very  be- 
ginning onward  a  model  church.  (Phii. 
1:3-6;  2 ;  12.)  See  further  in  closing  note 
on  ver.  34 ;  also  the  closing  note  on 
ver.  15. 

Children  AND  THE  Church.  Paul 
and  Silas  spake  the  word  of  the  Lord 
not  only  to  the  jailer,  but  to  all  that 
were  in  his  house.  There  could  not 
have  been  infants  among  them,  for 
all  were  capable  of  being  addressed, 
and  of  understanding.  Yet  children, 
at  an  early  age  can  know  that  they  are 
sinners  and  can  understand  how  Christ 
died  and  mediates  for  tlieni.  They  are 
capable  of  sorrow,  of  trusting  and  lov- 
ing ;  and  so  can  repent  toward  Ciod  and 
believe  in  Jesus  Christ.  It  is  tlie  duty 
of  i)astors  and  churches  to  seek  the 
conversion  of  children,  and  attend  to 
their  training.  This  accords  witli  the 
teaching  of  Christ  and  his  apostles.  (Mark 

10  :  11 ;  Matt.  21  :  1 J.  16  ;  EpU.  C  :  i.) 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  The  mother  makes  the  man.  How  many, 
like  Timothy,  are  the  result  of  maternal 
prayers  and  instructions.  (Ver.  1  ;  2  Tim. 
1  :  5;  3:  15;  1  Sam.  1  :  26-28.) 

2.  We  should  seek  out  young  men  of 
proper  qualifications  for  positions  of  useful- 
ness in  our  churches.   (Ver.  2  ;  Titus  1  :  5  f.) 

3.  There  are  times  when  it  is  proper  to 
accede  to  the  prejudices  of  others,  when  no 
Christian  principle  is  involved.  (Ver.  3  ;  21  : 
23-26;  1  Cor.  9:  21.) 

4.  The  words  and  the  examples  of  the  apos- 
tles, as  inspired  men,  are  to  be  heeded  and 
observed.  (Ver.  4 ;  1  Cor.  11:1;  2  Peter  3  : 
15, 16.) 

5.  Wise  and  conciliatory  measures  gener- 
ally result  in  the  increase  and  strengthen- 
ing of  the  churches.    (Ver.  5  ;  6:7.) 

6.  How  much  unwritten  history  of  Paul's 
life  do  the  Acts  and  the  Epistles  suggest. 
(Ver.  6 ;  Gal.  1  :  2 ;  4  :  13 ;  2  Cor.  11  :  27.) 

7.  We  should  seek  to  know  the  leadings 
and  hindrances  of  the  Spirit,  and  at  the 
same  time  not  confound  them  with  those  of 
Satan.  (Ver.  7,  8  ;  1  Thess.  2  :  18 ;  1  John 
4:1.) 


8.  God  often  keeps  us  from  certain  fields 
of  usefulness,  because  he  has  more  import-  ' 
ant  ones  for  us  to  occupy.    (Ver.  8-10 ;  Kom. 
15  :  22.) 

9.  The  unconscious  needs  of  the  heathen 
world  are  constantly  appealing  to  his  people 
for  sympathy  and  help.     (Ver.  9.) 

10.  When  assured  of  the  divine  will  we 
should  obey  at  once.  (Ver.  10 ;  26  :  19  ;  Gal. 
1  :  16.) 

11.  In  God's  providence  the  wind  and  the 
weaiherofteu  assist  his  servants  to  do  his 
will.     (Ver.  11  ;  Ps.  104  :  3,  4.) 

12.  The  day  of  Paul's  entrance  into 
Europe  and  Philippi  was  one  of  the  most 
important  in  history.     (Ver.  12.) 

lo.  Christianity  is  a  silent  hut  permanent 
force.  It  conquers  hearts  and  changes  the 
lives  of  men.  Compare  Alexander  passing 
from  Europe  and  co^jquering  Asia  (hia 
kingdom  long  sii'ce  having  passed  away), 
and  Paul  with  his  three  companions  enter- 
ing Europe,  and  their  work  still  remaining. 
(Ver.  13;  2  Cor.  10:  4.) 

14.  The  place  of  prayer  should  always 
have  attractions  to  the  people  of  God.  (Ver. 
13,  16  ;  Ps.  42  :  2  ;  Mai.  3  :  16.) 

15.  Divine  and  human  agency  are  united 
in  the  salvation  of  men.     (Ver.  14;  2  :  37,  f.) 

16.  How  happy  tho.se  households  who 
have  accepted  Christ  by  faith  and  professed 
him  in  baptism.     (Ver.  14,  33.) 

17.  It  is  fitting  to  exercise  Christian  hos- 
pitality towards  (iod's  servants.  (Ver.  15  ; 
Kom.  12  :  13 ;  1  Peter  4  :  9.) 

18.  In  Lydia  and  the  soothsaying  damsel 
we  see  the  contrast  in  the  condition  of 
women  under  the  gospel  and  in  heathenism. 
(Ver.  14-16.) 

19.  There  can  be  no  league  nor  truce  be- 
tween the  kingdom  of  Christ  and  the  king- 
dom of  Satan.  (Ver.  17, 18 ;  2  Cor.  0  :  15  ;  1 
John  3:8) 

20.  Much  of  the  opposition  to  the  gospel 
arises  from  the  fact  that  it  opposes  dishon- 
est gain,  and  makes  men  honest  and  con- 
scientious.    (Ver.  19,  20 ;  Titus  2  :  12.) 

21.  Wicked  men  sometimes  become  hypo- 
critically conscientious,  and  supporters  of 
law  and  order,  if  religion  encroaches  on 
their  business.  (Ver.  31;  1  Kings  18:17; 
Amos  7  :  10.)  ; 

22.  They  who  are  faithful  in  opposing 
and  condemning  sin  may  expect  to  sutTer 
from  the  i»iejudices  aud  hatred  of  the  world. 
(Ver.  22  24;  2  Tim.  3:  12.) 


Cn.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


269 


J'tiul  (ind  .Si/as  at  Thcssalunica  anil  Btrea. 
17  Now  when  they  had    passed    through 


Amphipolis    and   Apulloiiia,  they  came 
to  "  Thessalouica,  where  was  a  synagogue 


•  1  and  2  Thcss.  1  :  1. 


23.  It  is  an  honor  to  suffer  with  Christ  and 
for  his  sake.  (Ver.  22-24  ;  5  :  41 ;  1  Teter  4  : 
IG.) 

24.  A  prison  with  its  chains  and  stocks 
can  be  made  a  house  of  God  and  a  gate  to 
heaven  to  the  believing  soul.  (Ver.  25 ;  Ps. 
34 : 1,  7,  18,  20  ;  1  John  5  : 4.) 

2o.  God  will  sooner  or  later  come  to  the 
deliverance  of  his  suffering  people.  (Ver. 
26;  Luke  18:6-8) 

26.  The  law  strikes  terror  to  the  convicted 
soul.     (Ver.  27  ;  Horn.  7  :  9-11.) 

27.  The  gospel  brings  hope  and  life.  (Ver. 
28;  Gal.  3:22-26) 

28.  Sinners  have  reason  to  tremble  on 
account  of  their  sins.  (Ver.  29 ;  Nahum 
1:6.) 

29.  The  jailer  asked  the  supreme  question 
of  every  soul, "  What  must  I  do  to  be  saved." 
(Ver.  30  ;  2  :  37  ;  9  :  22  :  10.) 

30.  The  jailer's  inquiry  implies  fear,  con- 
viction of  sin,  desire,  hope,  and  submission. 
{Ver.  30.) 

31.  Neither  sincerity  nor  works  can  save ; 
but  faith  in  Christ.  The  latter  is  a  living 
faith,  hearty,  sincere,  and  obedient.  (Ver. 
31 ;  26  :  9 ;  Phil.  3  :  4-10  ;  1  Tim.  1  :  12-16.) 

32.  As  jailers  were  generally  selected  from 
the  lower  classes  of  society,  so  here  we  may 
have  an  example  of  the  conversion  of  a  man 
of  a  course  and  brutal  nature.  (Ver.  32,  .33  ; 
Mark  5  :  15.) 

33.  Among  the  evidences  of  conversion 
are  changed  conduct  in  attending  to  the 
truth,  in  ministering  lovingly  to  the  saints, 
and  in  promptly  obeying  Christ's  commands. 
(Ver.  34 ;  John  14  :  21 ;  2  Cor.  5  :  17  ;  1  John 
3  :  14.) 

34.  Regeneration,  which  is  the  work  of  the 
Holy  Spirit,  is  instantaneous.  So  conversion, 
in  which  the  soul  turns  to  God,  may  often 
be  immediately  recognized.    (Ver.  34  ;  2:41.) 

35.  There  is  no  joy  like  that  which  flows 
from  believing  in  Jesus.  (Ver.  .34 ;  1  Peter 
1:8;  John  4  :  14.) 

36.  Wicked  men  often  try  to  palliate  their 
deeds;  but  all  such  attempts  will  prove 
vain.     (Ver.  35,  36  ;  1  Kings  18  :  17,  18.) 

37.  Though  Christians  are  to  exercise 
meekness  under  injuries,  yet  there  are  times, 
especially  when  the  honor  of  religion  is  in- 


volved, when  they  should  insist  on  their 
legal  rights.     (Ver.  37  ;  23  :  3.) 

38.  Christianity  does  not  make  a  man  any 
less  a  citizen,  and  it  is  sometimes  his  duty 
to  appeal  to  civil  authority.  (Ver.  37,38; 
25  :  10-12.) 

39.  If  citizenship  on  earth  is  to  be  highly 
prized,  how  much  more  the  citizenship  in 
heaveu.     (Ver.  37-40;  Phil.  3  :  2u.) 

40.  Satan  and  wicked  men  may  for  a  time 
seem  victorious,  but  they  are  hastening  on 
to  sure  defeat.  Christ  and  his  cause  will  in 
due  time  come  forth  from  the  conflict  victori- 
ous over  every  foe.  (Ver.  38-40 ;  1  Cor.  15  ;  25.) 

Ch.  17:  Paul  continues  his  second 
missionary  journey.  Proceeding  with 
Silas  from  Philipj)!  to  Thessalonica, 
they  preach  with  much  success;  but, 
after  a  time,  are  forced  to  flee  to  Berea. 
Here  they  gain  ujany  converts,  hut 
again  Paul  is  comjielled  to  leave,  and 
going  to  Athens  he  preaches  in  the 
synagogue,  iu  the  market,  and  oa 
Mars"^  Hill. 

1-1.5.  Paul  and  Silas  at  Thessa- 
lonica   AND    Berea.     (pmi.  4:14-i6;  i 

Thess.  1  :  4,  5,9,  10  ;  2:9,  1 1 .  IS  ;  .3:1.  2. 1 1 ;  2  Thess. 

3 : 7,  8.)  If  our  former  estimates  of  time 
are  correct,  tlien  it  was  about  the  first  of 
Maj',  A.  D.  52,  wlien  Paul  arrived  at 
Thessalonica.  He  must  have  remained 
there  at  least  a  mouth,  ])rohal>ly  longer ; 
for  during  his  stay  there  the  Philippian 
bretliren  sent  twice  to  him  donations 
toward  his  sujijiort.     (Phfi.  i :  ir.) 

1.  Now  when  they  had  passed, 
journeyed,  through  Amphipolis 
and  ApoHonia — without  stopping  to 
labor  in  eitlier  place,  because  there 
were  no  Jews,  or  at  least  no  synagogue 
in  either  of  these  cities,  i'auland  Silas 
go  alone,  Luke  and  Timothy  being  left 
beliind.  (See  on  16  ;  40.)  They  travel  on, 
the  great  Koiuan  military  road,  the 
lOgnatian  AVay,  a  continuation  of  the 
Appian  AVay,  'vhich  led  from  the 
Asiatic  provinces  to  Rome.  Amphip- 
olis was  about  tliirty-two  miles  south- 
west of  Philippi,  three  miles  from  the 
sea,  on  the  east  bank  of  the  river 
Strymon,  which  bounded  it  on  three 
sides,  and  gave  it  its  name — Round' 


270 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVII. 


2  of  the  Jews.  And  Paul,  as  his  manner 
was,  f  went  in  unto  them,  and  three  sab- 
bath days  reasoned  with  them  out  of  the 

3  scriptures,  sopening  and  alleging,  i"  that 


Christ  must  needs  have   suffered,    and 

risen  again  from  the  dead  ;  '  and  'hat  this 

Jesui  whom  I  preach  unto  you,  is  Christ. 

4  ^And  some  of  them  believed,  and  cou- 


fch.  9  :  20;  13  :  5,  14;  14  :  1 ;  16  :  13  ;  19  :  8;  Luke 4  :  16.        e  Luke  24:  32.        h  Luke  24  :  26, 
44,  46 ;  Gal.  3:1.        >  ch.  2  :  36.         k  cli.  2S  :  24. 


about-toum.  It  was  the  capital  of  the  j 
first  division  of  Macedonia,  and  an 
iniportaut  military  station.  Its  former 
name  was  T/ic  y^inc  Ways,  the  number 
of  roads  which  met  here.  It  is  not  men- 
tioned elsewhere  in  Scripture.  Apol- 
lunid,  only  mentioned  hei'e  in  the  Bible, 
was  about  thirty-two  miles  westward, 
nil  unimportant  town,  the  exact  site  of 
whicli  is  iinkuown.  A  little  village 
called  Pollona,  with  ruins  just  south  of 
J^ake  licclick,  may  mark  its  site.  Paul 
and  Silas  probably  jiassed  at  least  a 
night  in  each  of  these  jdaces.  They 
came  to  Thessalonica  —  about 
thirty-six  miles  further  on,  making  a 
hundred  miles  from  Philipj)!.  They 
could  perform  this  whole  journey  in 
three  days,  but  ma_v  have  tiiken  a  week, 
or  even  more,  if  weakness  or  soreness 
from  their  scourging  necessitated  it, 
and  if  desirous  of  exploring  the  i)laces 
through  which  they  passed,  as  fields  of 
labor.  Thessalonica  was  an  imi)ortjuit 
commercial  city  on  a  declivity  at  the 
northeast  corner  of  the  ))ay  of  Thernia;. 
Jt  had  been  known  l)y  the  name  of 
Thermae.  It  was  rebuilt  l)y  Cassander, 
one  of  Alexander's  generals,  and  re- 
named after  liis  wife,  Thessalonica, 
sister  to  Alexander  the  Great.  Wlien 
the  Romans  divided  Macedonia  into 
four  governments,  it  was  made  the  ca])i- 
tal  of  the  second.  Afterward,  when  the 
whole  was  consolidated  into  one  prov- 
ince, it  became  the  metropolis,  and 
such  it  was  at  tliis  time.  The  lloman 
government  liad  made  it  a  free  city, 
having  the  right  of  self-government, 
but  not  all  the  privileges  of  a  co/otu/, 
Hive  Philipi)i.  Its  great  commercial 
im])ortance,  rivalling  Corinth  and 
Ephesus,  made  it  a  centre  from  whidi 
the  gospel  was  widely  disseminated. 
(1  ThesB.  1 ;  8.)  Its  modern  name  is  iSa/on- 
ikf.  It  has  a  population  of  about  sev- 
enty thousand,  of  whom  about  twenty 
tliousand  are  Jews.  Mhere  there 
was  a  synagogue  of  the  Jews — 
some  manuscripts  read,  the  synagogue, 


implying  that  it  was  the  only  one  in  all 
that  large  district  of  country  through 
which  Paul  had  passed,  doubtless  the 
first  he  had  reached  in  Maceilonia. 
Tlie  synagogue  was  of  so  great  advan- 
tage to  Paul  in  his  work,  tliat  Luke 
seldom  fails  to  speak  of  it  whenever 
Paul  found  one.     (ver.  lo,  n.) 

2.  Pan]  as  his  custom  Avas.  (.see 
ou  u  :  5.  Compare  16 :  13;  17 :  10 ;  18 : 4.)  Hi.'  imi- 
tated the  custom  of  liis  ^Mastcr.  (Luke  4:  Ifi.) 
And  three  sabbath  days — indi- 
cating that  for  three  weeks  lie  coiitintud 
liis  ministry  in  tlie  synagogue.  Paul 
sought  first  to  convert  the  Jews  wherevir 
lie  went,  and  througli  them  to  reach  de- 
vout and  inquiring  Gentiles  Rea- 
soned with  them — as  in  a  dialogue, 
thus  giving  ojiiiortunity  for  asking  and 
answering  (juestions.  Thus  Jesus  taught 
in  the  synagogue.  (John  6 :  25-69.)  Out 
of  the  Scriptures — the  source  and 
standard  of  appeal  in  all  his  teaching 
to  the  Jews. 

3.  What  Paul  taught  from  the  Script- 
ures. First,  ffiat  the  C'/n-h-t  must  xn^'cr 
(uid  rise  again  from  the  dead,  (s.e 
Luke 24 :  26, 27.)  Sccond,  that  this  Jesus 
whom  I  prochiiin  unto  you  is  tlie 
Christ.  Having  proved  the  first  proj)0- 
sitioii  from  tlie  i)ro])het,s,  it  was  easy  to 
demonstrate  tiie  sccond,  that  Jesus  lia<l 
siittered,  died,  and  risen,  and  exactly 
answered  tlie  demands  of  prophecy. 
(9 :  22.)  Paul's  discourse  at  Antioch  of 
Pisidia  illustrates  the  character  of  his 
jircacliiiig.  (i:i:i7-ii.)  Opening  and 
allegii'g — or  sell iuf/ forth  the  true  in- 
terpretation of  the  Old  Testament 
Scrii)tures. 

During  the  intervening  weeks  Paul 
and  Silas  su]i]ioiti'd  themselves  "  work- 
ing night  and  day  "  (i  Thess.  2:9),  and 
thus  showing  that  they  were  not  gov- 
erned by  selfish  motives.  Timothy, 
too,  may  have  come  with  supplies  from 
Phili))p"i.     (v.r.  10.) 

4.  The  result  of  the  three  Sabbaths' 
labors.  And  some  of  them — of  the 
Jews — believed,   or,    literally,  were 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


271 


sorted  with  Paul  and  'Silas  ;  and  of  the 
devout  Greeks  a  great  multitude,  and  of 
the  chief  women  not  a  few. 
5      But  the  Jews  which  believed  not,  moved 
with  envy,  took  unto  them  certain  lewd 


fellows  of  the  baser  sort,  and  gathered  a 
company,  and  set  all  the  city  on  an  up- 
roar, and  assaulted  the  house  of  m  Jason, 
and  sought  to  bring  them  out  to  the  peo- 
6  pie.    And  when  they   found  them  not, 


1  ch.  15  :  22,  27,  32,  40.        "  Kom.  16  :  21. 


convinced  of  the  truth  that  Jesus  was  the  ] 
Christ.     And    consorted,    literally,  { 

were  allotted,  or  added  to  Paul  and  , 
ISilas  as  the  fruit  of  their  ministry,  and  , 
ill  the  formation  of  a  church,  (.see  2 :  n.)  ' 
They  were   added   by  the  determininj,' 

power  of  God.      (iThess.  -i   :   U;    2  Thess.  2:  ' 

r.;,  u.)     Of    the    devout    Greeks — 

worshiping  Gentiles.  These  were  pros- 
elytes and  other  religious  Greeks  who 
worshiped  in  the  synagogues,  without 
confonuing  to  all  tlie  Jewish  rites 
and  customs.  Of  the  chief  women 
— the  iirst  in  rank  and  influence,  i 
These,  too,  were  devout  Gentiles.  A  i 
great  multitude  .  .  .  not  a  few 
— thus  the  majority  of  the  converts 
were  Gentiles.  Paul  says  of  these  great 
results,  "  Our  gospel  came  to  you  not 
in  word  only,  but  also  in  power  and  in 
the  Holy  Spirit,  and  in  much  assur-  ' 
ance  (i  Tuess.  i  :5),  which  implies  the  or-  '< 
dinary  and  extraordinary  workings  of 
the  Spirit,  and  perhaps  the  work- 
ing of  miracles.  After  these  three 
Sabbaths  Paul  probably  found  it  best 
to  withdraw  from  the  synagogue  as  a 
place  of  preaching.  He  now  began,  if 
not  previously  during  the  week  time, 
his  work  among  the  heathen  with 
great  success,  to  which  Paul  alludes  in 
1  Thess.  1:9,"  How  ye  turned  to  God 
from  idols  to  serve  the  living  and  true 
God."  Luke,  not  being  an  eye  wit- 
ness, reports  briefly  the  beginning  of 
the  church  from  the  synagogues,  and 
then  at  once  passes  over  to  the  perse- 
cution, which  started  from  the  syna- 
gogue, and  drove  Paul  and  Silas  from 
the  city. 

5.  The  work  goes  on  among  the 
beatlien  for  a  time.  The  Jews  are 
moved  with  envy — with  indignant 
jealousy  at  this  success,  especially 
among  Gentiles,  (see  on  i.i  :  45.)  Which 
believed  not — omitted  by  the  best 
authorities.  These  persecuting  Jews 
were,  of  course,  unbelievers.  Took 
unto  them  certain  lewd  fellows 
of  the    baser    sort— better,    Took 


unto  them  certain  vicious  men  of 
the  market-place.  These  were  market 
loungers,  the  ral)i)le  without  regular 
emidoyment,  who  freiiuented  pul)lic 
places'  7'he  market,  or  Afjora,  was  a 
place  in  Greek  cities  for  public  as- 
semljly,  for  traffic  and  the  transaction 
of  i>ublic  business,  (ver.  n.)  "Had  it 
Ijeen  in  the  East,  where  such  people 
loiter  about  the  gates,  the  term  would 
have  been  inapjiropriate.  It  is  instruct- 
ive to  observe  how  true  the  narrative 
is  to  tlie  habits  of  different  nations, 
though  the  scene  changes  so  rapidly 
from  one  laud  to  another."  (Hack- 
ETT.)  But  why  did  the  Jews  seek 
such  helpers?  Because  they  them- 
selves were  foreigners  and  had  but 
little  influence  among  the  people.  To 
effect  their  purjiose  they  must  secure 
tlie  help  of  the  natives.  Gathered  a 
company,  or  a  croml — they  raised 
a  mol>  and  set  the  city  in  an  uproar, 
raising  a  noise  and  causing  confusion. 
And  assaulting — coming  suddenly 
upon — the  house  of  Jason,  im])ly- 
ing  an  actual  attack.  Paul  and  Silas  aji- 
pear  to  have  lodged  at  his  house  during 
their  stay  at  Thessalonica.  (vcr.  7.)  If 
not  a  disciple,  he  a]>pears  as  a  friend 
and  a  host.  Wiiether  Jason  was  the 
same  as  the  one  mentioned  in  Rom, 
16  :  21,  a  kinsman  of  Paul,  is  uncer- 
tain. Perhajis  he  was  a  Grecian  Jew, 
who.se  name  .Jesus,  or  Joshua,  had  been 
changed  into  the  Greek  form  Jason. 
I  (1  Mac.  8  :  17 ;  2  jSIac.  4  :  7,  with  Jose- 
I  phus.  Antifj.  XII,  5,  1.)  The  word 
'  people  does  not  refer  to  the  mob,  but 
I  rather  the  regular  assembly  of  citizens 
in  their  legal  capacity  (The.ssalonica 
!  being  a  free  city),  in  whose  presence 
cases  were  tried  l)efore  the  magistrates. 
i  6.  They  sought,  but  found  them 
\  not — Paul  and  Silas  being  absent 
'  providentially,  or,  ]>erhaps,  hearing  of 
the  tumult,  had  withdrawn  to  some 
I  place  of  temjiorary  safety.  Failing  in 
their  immediate  i)urpose,  they  spent 
'  their  spite  upon  Jason  and  certain 


272 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVII. 


they  drew  Jason  and  certain  brethren 
unto  the  rulers  of  the  city,  crying, "  These 
that  have  turned  the  world  upside  down 
7  are  come  hither  also  ;  whom  Jason  hath 
received :  "  and  these  all  do  contrary  to 
the  decrees  of  Caesar,  p  saying  that  there 


n  ch.  16  :  20 ;  see  Am.  7  :  10. 


8  is  another  king,  ove  Jesus.  And  they 
1  troubled  the  peo[ile  and  the  rulers  of  the 

9  city,  when  they  heiird  these  things.  And 
when  they  had  taken  security  of  Jason, 
and  of  r  the  other,  they  lei  them  go. 

10      And  sthe  brethren   immediately  sent 


9  Matt.  2  :  3. 


«  ch.  16  :  21.         P  Luke  23  :  2 ;  John  19  :  12. 
'  ver.  6.        »  ver.  14 ;  ch.  9  :  25. 


brethren  as  accomplices,  and  dreAV, 
dragged  them  violently  unto  the 
rulers,  or  ^jw/77o>t/(,s  of  "the  city.  In 
a  free  city  like  Thessalonica  these 
j)olitarchs  were  chosen  by  tlie  peo- 
ple, and  they  held  general  juris- 
diction over  all  criminal  matters, 
having  the  power  of  life  and  death. 
It  is  a  curious  fact  that  while  the 
name  politarch  is  unknown  to  class- 
ical literature,  it  is  found  in  an  in- 
scription on  the  ruins  of  an  ancient 
arch  of  The.ssalonica,  which  gives  the 
name  of  seven  politarchs  wlio  governed 
the  city  before  the  visit  of  Paul,  and 
three  of  them  are  the  same  names  as 
three  of  Paul's  companions  :  So])ater, 
of  Berea  (-'0:i);  Gains,  of  JIacedonia 
(19;  29),  and  Secundns,  of  Thessalonica. 
Thus  do  we  have  here  a  striking  con- 
fimation  of  the  accuracy  of  Luke. 
Crying — shouting  vociferously.  Two 
cliarges  are  specified,  each  containing 
some  truth.  These  that  have 
turned  the  Avorld  upside  down — 
who  have  excited  tumults  and  made 
tlui  world  rebellious.  In  tiieir  excite- 
ment they  utter  words  of  exaggeration  ; 
yet  unconsciously  utter  a  great  truth. 
Christianity  is  revolutionary  ;  and 
wherever  Paul  preached,  selfishness, 
idolatry,  and  immorality  had  been 
overthrown,  and  opposition  and  perse- 
cution aroused.  (M.-itt.  lo:  .i*,  ,Ti.)  Are 
come  hither  also — implying  that 
reports  of  Christianity  and  of  gospel 
preachers  had  preceded  the  coming  of 
Paul  and  Silas. 

7.  A  specific  charge  is  made  against 
Jason,  Whom  Jason  hath  received 
into  his  house,  and  under  his  protec- 
tion,       (r.iike  10  ;.W;  111:6.)         NoW      COUICS 

tlie  second  general  charge.  These 
all,  Paul,  Silas,  and  indeed  Chris- 
tians wherever  found,  are  acting  con- 
trary to  the  decrees  of  Ca-sar, 
saying  there  is  another  king, 
Jesus.  The  authority  of  C;esar,  the 
emperor,  extended    over  all    Greece. 


According  to  the  Julian  Laws,  "who- 
ever violated  the  majesty  of  the  state  " 
was  guilty  of  treason.  ,So  general  a 
law  was  of  wide  ai)plication.  The 
charge  was  doubtless  a  .Jewish  slander, 
like  tliat  brought  against  .Jesus.  (iM;itt. 
■a  :  11, 12.)  The  title  Lord,  so  commonly 
applied  by  the  disciples  to  .lesus,  would 
give  color  to  their  cliarge.  Besides, 
the  second  coming  and  reign  of  Clirist 
were  favorite  tojjics  of  Paul's  jireach- 
ing  at  Thessalonica,  as  may  be  gatliered 
from  his  two  Epistles  to  the  clnnch 
tliere.  Comj^are  sucli  statements  as 
tho.se  in  1  Thess.  2  :  12  ;  3  :  13  ;  2  Tliess. 
1  :  5-10  ;  2  :  1-12.  The  accusation  was 
]>erverted  truth.  Another  incidental 
illustration  of  Luke's  exactness  may  be 
noted  in  the  use  of  tlie  word  Icing. 
The  Itouians  never  styled  the  Emjieror 
kivg,  but  Greek  writers  constantly 
a])i)ly  the  term  to  Roman  Emj)erors. 

8.  And  these  accusers  troubled  the 
people  and  rulers, potitarr/is,  of  the 
city — cau.sed  them  anxiety  and  alarm, 
lest  the  presence  of  disloyal  persons, 
and  revolutionary  tumults,  should 
bring  uj)on  them  Poman  vengeance. 

9.  ^>  hen  they  had  taken  secur- 
ity, or  guarantee — supjiosed  to  l)e  a 
I'oman  law-jjhrase  similar  to  taking 
bail.  Ja.son  and  the  brethren  who  had 
l)een  arrested  (ver.  6)  became  resjionsible 
and  perhaps  deposited  a  sum  of  money 
as  a  .surety,  tliat  the  ])eace  of  the  city 
should  be  kept,  and  tliat  no  attempt 
should  lie  made  against  the  majesty 
and  power  of  Rome  by  these  strangers 
who  liad  come  to  them,  or  l)y  their  ad- 
liereuts. 

10.  As  it  was  specially  in  behalf  of 
Paul  and  Silas  mIio  were  not  present 
that  Jason  and  certain  brethren  had 
given  surety  or  liail,  so  in  sending  them 
away  the  end  would  be  best  attained. 
The  mi.ssionaries  would  not  l>e  jjre.sent  to 
arouse  sus])icion  and  opjiosition.  Silas 
a  little  later  remained  a  while  at  Berea 
(ver.  H),  but  from  here,  and  at  this  time, 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


273 


away  Paul  and  Silas  by  night  unto  Berea : 

who  coming  thither  went  into  the  syna- 

11  gogue  of  the  Jews,     These  were  more 


noble  than  those  in  Thessalonica,  in  that 
'they  received  the  word  with  all  readi- 
ness of  mind,  and  "searched  the  Script- 


«  Matt.  13  :  23.        »  Isa.  34  :  16 ;  John  5  :  39. 


it  seemed  best  that  both  should  go. 
Aud  that,  too,  immediately,  proba- 
bly during  the  ensuing  iiiglit.  (see  .i : 
25,30.)  Coming  forth  from  tiieir  cou- 
cealmeut,  they  are  now  sent  away 
secretly  by  night,  to  avoid  danger 
from  the  Jewisli  })ersecutors  and  the 
mob.  But  this  did  not  put  an  end  to 
persecution,  for  the  converts  were  after- 
ward ill-treated.  (iThess.  2 :  u.)  Leav- 
ing them  so  hastily,  Paul  intended  to 
return  to  them  soon  agaiu ;  but  he  was 
hindered  twice ;  whereupon  he  sent 
Timothy  to  them,  (i  TUess.  2 :  n,  18 ;  3 : 2.)  [ 
Since  Paul  received  supplies  from  the 
Philippiau  church  twice  while  here 
(Phil.  4 ;  Id,  is),  it  is  reasonable  to  suppose  j 
that  Timotliy  was  the  bearer  of  one  of  j 
them  ;  and  that  lie  remained  for  a  time 
after  Paul  left.  "  I  believe  Timotliy  to 
have  been  witli  them  at  Thessalonica 
the  first  time,  because  it  does  not  seem 
jirobable  that  Paul  would  have  sent  to 
them  one  to  confirm  and  exhort  them 
concerning  their  faitli  (i  Thesa.  3  : 2)  who 
had  not  known  them  before,  especially 
as  he  then  had  Silas  with  him." 
(Alford.)  Notice  also  that  Timothy's 
name  is  joined  witli  Paul  and  Silas, 
in  both  1  Thess.  1  :  1  aud  2  Thess.  2  :  1. 
From  these  gifts  and  from  worliing  at 
tent  making,  possibly  v/itli  Jason  (ver.5; 
18:4),  Paul  supported  himself  without 
help  from  the  Thessalonians.     (1  Thess. 

2  :9;  2Thess.  3;  8.) 

It  is  interesting  to  compare  the  narra- 
tive of  Phili])]ii  with  that  of  Thessalo- 
nica ;  and  notice  how  Luke  conforms 
his  langTiage  to  the  actual  conditions  of 
each.  One  is  a  colony ;  tlie  other  a 
free  city  ;  tlie  former  a  Roman  city, 
tlie  latter  a  Greek  city.  Roman  citi- 
zenship is  emphasized  in  one ;  Ciesar 
and  his  friends  in  the  other.  Prretor 
and  lictors  apjiear  in  Philippi ;  poli- 
tarchs  and  the  demus,  or  free  lawful  as- 
sembly of  the  people ,  in  Thessalonica. 
Religious  usages  unlawful  to  Romans 
are  specially  dreaded  there ;  disloyalty 
to  Caisar  here. 

From  Thessalonica  Paul  and  Silas 
leave  the  Eguatian^Way  aud  take  a  less 
S 


traversed  road  to  Berea,  now  called 
Vcrria,  about  forty-five  miles  to  the 
soutiiwest.  It  is  on  the  eastern  slo])e 
of  tlie  Olympian  range,  and  witli  an 
abundant  sujjply  of  water,  l)eing  on 
the  Astrreus  river,  a  tributary  of  the 
Ilaliacmon.  It  was  a  city  in  the  east- 
ern district  of  ^iacetlonia ;  and  its 
secluded  situation  doul)tk'SS  was  an 
important  reasou  for  Paul  and  Silas 
seeking  this  retreat.  Its  modern  poi)u- 
lation  number  about  six  tliousand. 
Who  coming  thither  went  airny, 
etc. — having  arrived  at  Berea  and  as 
soon  as  practicable  after  necessary 
arrangements,  they  go  away  to  tlie  syna- 
gogue, whieli  may  iiave  been  out  of 
the  city,  or  some  distance  from  their 
lodging. 

ll.  These  were  more  noble 
than  those  in  Thessalonica — 
literally,  of  better  birth.  But  the  word 
is  also  used  with  reference  to  disposi- 
tion and  character ;  and  tliis  appears 
to  Ije  the  meaning  liere  from  wiiat  fol- 
lows. They  gave  evidence  of  this  dis- 
l)osition,  in  that  they  received  the 
Avord,  they  listened  to  the  preaching 
of  the  gospel,  with  all  readiness. 
They  were  less  narrow  in  tlieir  Jewish 
prejudices  than  their  brethren  at 
Thessalonica.  They  were  oi)en  to  con- 
viction. Hence  they  searched  the 
Scriptures  daily,  as  tlieir  authority 
and  standard  of  appeal,  whether 
these  things  were  so.  This  spirit 
of  liouest  inquiry  showed  their  nobility 
of  soul.  They  were  not  superstitious 
like  the  Lycaonians  (h:ii),  nor  impul- 
sive like  the  Galatiaiis  (Gai.4 :  u,  15),  but 
patient,  impartial,  and  conscientious. 

13.  The  result  of  such  honest  hear- 
ing and  such  earnest  examination  of 
the  Scriptures  by  those  of  the  syna- 
gogue was,  that  many  of  them, 
therefore  believed.  The  best  way 
to  prove  the  claims  of  Jesus  and  the 
truth  of  the  gospel  is  to  thoroughly 
and  honestly  investigate.  An  impar- 
tial and  patient  study  of  the  gospel 
usually  results  in  its  acceptance.  Also 
of  honorable,  etc. — better,  And  0/ 


274 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cii.  XVII. 


ures  daily,  whether  those  things  were  so. 

12  Therefore  many  of  them  believed ;  also  of 
honourable  women  which  were  Greeks, 
and  of  men,  not  a  few. 

13  But  when  the  Jews  of  Thessalonica  had 


knowledge  that  the  word  of  God  was 
preached  of  Paul  at  Berta,  they  came 
thither  also,  and  stirred  up  the  people. 
14  »And  then  immediately  the  brethren 
sent  away  Paul  to  go  as  it  were  to  the  sea : 


»  Matt.  10  :  23. 


honorable  Grecian  women  and  men  not 
a  few.  These  Avere  largely  proselytes 
and  devout  Gentiles,  though  very 
likely,  as  at  Thessalonica,  extending 
into  the  heathen  population.  The 
female  converts  were  prol)aI)ly  more 
numerous  than  the  men.  The  term 
honorable,  the  same  as  in  13  :  50,  refers 
to  their  social  rank,  holding  influential 
positions  in  the  community.  This 
again  brings  to  view  the  great  influ- 
ence of  women  in  the  Macedonian 
churches,  (vcr.  4;  i6:u,  i.j,  40.)  Notice 
that  tlie  Jews  at  Antioch  in  Pisidia, 
use  the  same  rank  of  women  (but 
sujierstitious  and  ignorant)  to  carry  out 
their  plans  of  persecution  against  Paul 
and  Barnabas.  (13:50.)  Tiie  Christian 
women  of  our  day  who  labor  so  ear- 
nestly and  successfully,  both  at  home 
and  abroad,  are  the  true  spiritual  suc- 
cessors of  these  Macedonian  si.sters. 
Rome  has  unwisely  cut  oft"  thousands 
of  women  from  family  relations,  aft'ec- 
tions,  and  duties,  and  witli  solemn  vows 
colonized  them  in  nunneries.  Men  and 
women,  in  God's  work,  should  not 
ignore  their  place  in  tlie  family. 
"  God  made  the  family  ;  mau  nKule  the 
convent.  God's  work!  behold,  it  is 
very  good ;  man's  is  in  this  case  a 
snare."     (Arnot.) 

13.  Paul  and  Silas  must  have  spent 
some  weeks  in  this  quiet  and  somcwliat 
secluded  city.  Paul  speaks  in  1  Thess. 
2  :  18  of  twice  proposing  to  visit  the 
Thessalonian  brethren  ;  but  was  hin- 
dered l)y  vSatan.  Perhaps  he  was  the 
first  time  purposing  such  a  visit  when 
this  persecution  began,  and  frustrated 
his  plans.  But  his  place  of  labor  could 
not  be  hid.  The  Jews  of  Thes- 
salonica, ever  on  the  alert,  hear  that 
the  gospel  is  preached  at  Berea,  and 
show  their  inveterate  hatred  by  follow- 
ing Paul  and  Silas  and  stirring  up  hos- 
tility similar  to  that  in  their  own  city. 
So  in  the  first  missionary  journey  Jews 
in  like  manner  came  to  Lystra,  from 
Antioch  and  Iconiuia,  and  stirred  up 


persecution.     (u:i9.)    Stirred  up,  etc. 

Westcott  and  llort,  according  to  many 
ancient  manuscri])ts  read,  Stirrinrj  up 
and  tronhiiiKj  the  multitudes.  Notice 
how  carefully  Luke  uses  terms.  Here 
it  is  the  multitude,  or  populace;  in 
Thessalonica  it  is  the  demus,  or  orderly 
assembly  (ver. 5);  but  at  Philippi,  he 
says  nothing  of  either,  but  mentions 
the  rulers  and  prators.      (le  :  19, 20.) 

Tlie  narrative  implies  that  the  Jews 
were  quite  numerous  and  influential  at 
Berea.  The  church  tiierc  doubtless 
continued  to  prosi)er.  We  have  uo 
epistle  of  Paul  to  this  cliurch  ;  and  so 
we  have  none  to  the  cliurclics  of  Cilicia 
(15:41),  and  to  some  others  which  he 
founded.  Besides,  he  wrote  many  let- 
ters which  have  not  come  down  to  us. 
(1  Cor. 5:9;  Col.  4 :  16.)  Sopater,  who after- 
ward became  a  companion  of  Paul 
(20:4),  was  probably  converted  at  this 
time. 

14.  And  then  immediately — as 
soon  as  the  disturbance  began.  It  was 
l)est  for  the  church  and  for  Paul  that 
he  should  go;  for  he  was  the  great 
object  of  Jewish  hostility,  and  preju- 
dices and  violence  could  easily  be 
aroused  against  him,  whieli  would  also 
fall  upon  his  comi>anions  and  the 
whole  church.  The  brethren  —  in- 
dicating a  congregation,  or  church.  To 
go  as  it  Avere  to  the  sea — imj)lying 
a  feint,  tliat  Paul  started  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  sea,  but  turned  and  took 
tlie  land  route  to  Athens,  two  hundred 
and  fifty  miles.  That  such  a  journey 
might  be  possilde,  see  20  :  2-4.  But 
the  reading  best  attested  by  manu- 
scripts is :  The  brethren  sent  away 
Paul  to  go  as  far  as  to  the  sea,  which 
implies  that  he  went  by  sea.  The 
probability  is,  that  leaving  Berea  so 
suddenly,  Paul's  plans  were  only  par- 
tially formed,  subject  to  such  modifica- 
tions as  circumstances  might  suggest. 
He  and  his  conductors  start  for  the 
sea,  and  there  they  find  a  vessel  bound 
for  Athens,  in  which  they  embark.  And 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


275 


but  Silas  and  Timotheus  aljode  there  still. 
15  Aud  they  that  conducted  Paul  brought 
him  unto  Athens:  and  x receiving  a  com- 
mandment unto  Silas  aud  Timotheus  for 


to  come  to  him  with  all  speed,  they  de- 
parted. 

Paul  at  Athens. 
i  16      NOW  while  Paul  waited  for  them  at 


7  ch.  18  :  5. 


Silas  and  Timothy  abode,  or  remained  ! 
still  at  Berea.  Silas  apju-ars  to  liave 
been  with  Paul  up  to  this  time ;  but 
Timothy  had  been  left  behind  at  Phil- 
ippi  (16: 1, 10),  and  although  not  men- 
tioned with  Paul  at  Thessalonica,  yet 
he  probably  joined  him  there,     (see  on 

Ter.  10.) 

15.  And  they  that  conducted  or 
escorted  Paul.  A  delegation  of  the 
Berean  brethren  accompanied  Paul 
throughout  the  journey  for  guidance 
and  protection,  and  brought  him 
unto  Athens — the  renowned  capital 
of  ancient  Greece.  Perhaps  Paul's 
infirmities  (i6:6)  may  have  been  such 
as  to  render  it  needful  that  his  move- 
ments should  now  be  guided  by  others. 
From  what  we  know  of  ancient  roads 
from  Berea  to  the  sea,  it  is  probable 
that  Paul  was  conducted  to  Diuin,  a 
Roman  colony  like  Philippi,  about 
sixteen  miles  away,  wliere  they  em- 
barked for  Athens.  With  favorable 
winds,  it  has  been  estimated  that  tliia 
voyage  of  two  hundred  and  fifty  miles 
could  have  been  made  in  about  three 
days.  "The  memorials  of  the  country's 
greatness  rose  arouu<l  him  on  his  jour- 
ney. As  he  quitted  Berea,  he  could 
see  behind  him  the  snowy  peaks  of 
Mount  Olympus,  where  the  deities  of 
Greece  had  been  supposed  to  dwell. 
Soon  he  was  sailing  past  Thermopylse, 
where  tlie  immortal  Three  Hundred 
stood  against  the  barl)arian  myriads ; 
and  as  his  voyage  ncared  its  close,  he 
saw  before  him  the  island  of  Salamis, 
where  .again  the  existence  of  Greece 
was  saved  from  extinction  by  the  valor 
of  her  sons."  (.Stalker,  p'  9.i.)  The 
conductors  of  Paul  appear  to  have  re- 
turned from  Atliens  immediately. 
They  departed,  having  received' a 
charge  to  Silas  and  Timothy  to  come  to 
him  as  soon  as  possible — as  soon  as 
they  could  complete  the  work  for 
which  they  were  left  behind.  If  they 
came  at  once  to  Athens,  then  they  must 
have  returned  to  Macedonia,  for  not 
long  after  this  they  come  from  Mace- 


donia to  Corinth.  (18:5.)  It  is  not  at 
all  unlikely  that  they  reached  Athens 
after  Paul  liad  left,  and  then  followed 
him  to  Corinth.  But  1  Thess.  3  :  1,  2 
is  appealed  to,  as  a  ]>roof  that  Timothy 
came  at  this  time  to  Atliens,  from 
whence  he  was  sent  to  Thessalonica : 
"  Wherefore  when  we  could  no  longer 
forbear,  we  thought  it  good  to  he  left 
alone;  and  sent  Timothy.  .  .  to  establish 
you,"  etc.  But  this  appeal  seems  not 
well  taken  ;  for  Paul  had  now  left  Silas 
and  Timothy  behind,  whereas  in  the 
visit  mentioned  in  1  Thess.  3:1,  Timo- 
thy had  left  Paul  behitul.  In  this 
Paul  is  going  away  from  Thessalonica  ; 
in  that  his  face  is  toward  that  city,  but 
being  hindered  l)y  Satan  the  second 
time,  he  sends  Timothy  in  his  place. 

(l  Thess.  2  :  IS;  3  : 1.)      The    beSt  Solutiou    of 

the  difficulty  is  the  suggestion  that 
Paul  with  Timothy  paid  a  later  and 
second  visit  to  Atliens  when  he  was 
proposing  to  proceed  to  JIacedonia,  but 
was  hindered  from  carrying  out  his 
plans  and  therefore  sent  Timothy  in- 
stead. See  on  l.S  :  .5,  11,  12  ;  and  dis- 
cussion in  Harmonic  Arranaemsnt  of 
the  Acts,  pp.  214-218. 

16-.S4.  Paitl  at  Athens.  His 
Speech  on  Mars'  Hill.  (p». 9:8;  isa. 
12: 5)  If  Paul  arrived  at  Thessalonica 
about  Jtay  1st,  a.  d.  52,  then  he  could 
not  well  have  reached  Athens  before 
July.  His  work  at  Berea  was  probalily 
brief,  being  suddenly  cut  short,  and 
hence  the  necessity  of  Silas  and  Timo- 
thy remaining  to  complete  the  work. 
Neither  did  he  tarry  long  at  Athens, 
for  the  fieltl  was  uninviting.  Wieseler 
suggests  two  weeks. 

10.  Athens  is  said  to  have  been 
founded  by  Cecrops  and  an  Egyptian 
colony,  about  1.5.50  B.  c,  and  was  called 
Cecrojiia,  but  afterwards  was  named 
Athens  in  honor  of  the  he.athen  goddess 
Minerva,  whose  name  in  Greek  was 
Athenai.  It  was  the  capital  of  Attica, 
and  the  chief  seat  of  Grecian  learning 
and  civilization  during  the  golden 
period  of  Greek  history.    It  was  situ- 


276 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVII. 


Athens,  >  his  spirit  was  stirred  in  him, 


when  he  saw  the  city  wholly  given   to 


Ps.  119  :  136  ;  2  Peter  2  :  8. 


ated  on  the  plain  of  Attica,  and  the 
city  proper  was  about  three  miles  from 
the  sea.  It  had  two  seaports,  Pirteus 
its  principal  harbor,  and  Phalerum, 
which  being  nearest  to  Macedonia  may 
have  been  the  one  where  Paul  lauded. 
It  at  length  fell  into  the  hands  of  Rome, 
when  in  B.  c.  40,  with  the  country  of 
Achaia,  it  was  made  a  Roman  province, 
and  received  the  privileges  of  "  a  free 
city."  (ver.  1.)  Its  commerce  was  de- 
stroyed, but  iihilosoj>hy,  literature,  and 
art  continued  to  flourish.  In  the  centre 
of  tl»e  city  was  a  rocky  eminence,  about 
150  feet  high,  called  the  Acropolis,  and 
surmounted  by  many  temples,  cliief 
among  which  was  the  Parthenon,  or 
temple  of  the  virgin  Athene.  A  little 
northwest  of  tiie  Acropolis  was  JILirs' 
Hill,  (ver.-n.)  And  in  the  valley,  west 
of  the  Acropolis  and  south  of  Mars' 
Hill,  was  the  Agora  or  market,  (ver.  is.) 
Other  hills  and  places  of  interest  not 
mentioned  by  Luke  need  not  here  be 
noticed.  The  city  was  a  vast  museum 
of  learning,  sculpture,  and  art.  In 
Paul's  day  four  hundred  years  had 
elapsed  since  its  golden  age ;  and 
although  it  had  experienced  a  sad  de- 
cline, it  was  still  the  intellectual  capital 
of  the  civilized  world,  whither  swarmed 
philosophers  of  ditlerent  schools,  teach- 
ers and  professors  of  all  kinds  of  knowl- 
edge, wealthy  strangers,  and  students 
for  study,  from  all  nations.  Philosopliy, 
however,  had  degenerated  into  sophis- 
try, and  while  the  various  schools  luid 
their  adherents,  they  were  without 
great  leaders. 

While  Paul  waited  for  them  at 
Athens — for  Silas  and  Timothy.  Tiiis 
imjilies  that  Paul  exi)octed  tliem  soon, 
aiid  that  he  was  not  i)ro|)osing  to  make 
Athens  at  tliis  time  a  place  of  special 
or  prolonged  missionary  labor.  It  is 
also  against  the  suitposition  of  some 
(1  Thesj.  3  ;i, -2),  that  on  leaving  Berca 
he  had  sent  Timothy  to  Tliessaloniea  ; 
for  in  such  a  case  he  would  not  be  ex- 
pecting him  so  soon.  Tliat  Timothy 
came  to  Athens,  and  Paul  sent  him 
back  to  Thessalonica,  is  improbable  on 
many  accounts.  So  many  hundred 
miles  of  travel  is  scarcely  probable  at 


this  time.  Besides,  Luke  relates  that 
Silas  and  Timothy  not  long  after  came 
to  Paul  at  Corinth.  The  plain  infer 
ence  from  the  whole  narrative  is  that 
their  coming  was  the  one  thing  Paul  was 
waiting  for  at  Athens;  but  that  for 
some  reason  he  did  not  tarry  long 
enough,  but  preceded  them  to  Corinth, 
where  they  joined  him.  From  1  Thess. 
2  :  18;  3  :  1,  it  appears  that  Paul  had 
been  anxious  to  visit  Thessalonica,  and 
had  been  hindered  twice  from  doing  so. 
A  few  weeks  before  he  iiad  been  com- 
pelled to  flee  from  that  city  by  night ; 
and  it  seems  scarcely  possible  that 
within  that  brief  period  he  had  been 
so  anxious  to  return  that  lie  made  two 
attempts  and  had  been  twice  hindered. 
Paul's  references  in  his  Papistic  demand 
more  time,  and  point  to  a  second  visit 
^  to  Athens  which  Luke  lias  not  recoi'ded. 
Such  a  visit  it  would  be  perfectly  natu- 
1  ral  to  expect,  and  agrees  with  what  he 
'  says  in  1  Thess.  3  :  1.  (see  on  ver.  is.)  In- 
deed, it  would  rather  seem  strange  if 
i  Paul  never  revisited  Athens,  to  look 
after  the  little  band  of  believers  he  left 
there. 

1      His  spirit  was  stirred  in  him — 
'  literally,  was  sharpened.   A  ahorp  edge, 
■  as  it  were,  was  set  on  his  sj)irit.     He 
was  aroKsed  into  such  ardor  and   zeal 
j  against  the  heathen  darkness  and  per- 
;  versity  w  liich  prevailed  at  Athens,  that 
j  he  went  not  only  into  the  Jewish  syna- 
gogue and  into  private  jilaces,  but  even 
into  the  market  jilaces,  and  discoursed 
;  upon  the  princijdes  of  religion.  (Vcr.  n.) 
I  Paul's    soul    was  filled   with    various 
I  emotions.     To   say  that  he  was  angry, 
j  provoked,  or   indignant,  expresses  too 
i  strongly  one  side  of  his  feelings.   There 
was  also  great  pity  and  sorrow,  and  an 
eager  zeal  to  do  something  for  the  sal- 
vation of  the  people.    \^  hen  he  saw 
the  city  wholly  given  to  idolatry 
— rather,  When  he  saw  the  city  full  oj 
idols.    Athens  was  the  center  of  Gre- 
cian   worship,    full    of    teiu])les    and 
altars.     Outward  show  and  ritualistic 
worship  flourished  alongside  of  philo- 
sophical and  scholastic    wisdom    and 
culture.   Pausanias  says,  "  It  had  more 
images  than  all  the  rest  of  Greece ; " 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


277 


17  iilolatry.  Tlicrefure  disputed  lie  in  the 
synagogue  with  ttie  Jews,  and  with  the 
devout  persons,  and  in  the  market  daily 


Petronius,  satirically,  that  "  it  was  eas- 
ier to  tind  a  god  than  a  man  there  ;"  and 
Livy,  that  it  "  was  full  of  images  of 
gods  and  men,  adorned  with  every 
variety  of  material,  and  with  all  the 
skill  of  art." 

17.  Therefore— acting  upon  the  im- 
pulses of  his  spirit  and  in  the  exercise 
of  his  earnest  zeal,  Paul  dispntnl, 
rather,  reasoned  and  discussed,  in  a 
conversational  way  (aeeoa  ver.  2),  in  the 
synagogue  with  the  JeAVS  and  with 
devuut  persons,  the  Gentiles  ivor- 
shiping  in  the  synagogue,  whether  full 
proselytes  or  not.  (Seeon  vcr.  4.)  And 
dejiarting  from  his  custom  of  tirst  ex- 
clusively addressing  Jews  and  devout 
Gentiles,  or  Jews  first,  and  on  being  re- 
jected by  them,  to  turn  to  the  Gentiles, 
he  went  daily  into  the  market 
place,  or  Agora,  which,  in  every 
Greek  city,  was  a  genei'al  place  of 
meeting  and  discussion,  and  reasoned 
with  the  Athenians.  The  market  was 
situated  in  a  valley  between  four  hills, 
the  Acropolis,  Mars  Hill,  the  Pnyx, 
and  the  Museixm.  It  was  a  beautiful 
sqiuvre,  set  with  trees,  surrounded  with 
statues,  altars,  buildings,  porticoes,  or 
colonades,  among  which  were  the 
famous  "  porches,"  where  philosophers, 
poets  and  orators  resorted  and  j^eople 
of  all  ranks  and  classes  met  to  hear 
and  discuss  the  news.  Here  Socrates, 
more  than  four  centuries  before,  car- 
ried on  his  wonderful  conversational 
discussions.  And  now  Paul  adopts  a 
similar  method  of  reaching  the  peojjle  ; 
conversing  on  the  principles  of  natural 
and  revealed  religion  with  any  who 
perclianee  met  with  him  there.  In  this 
hand-to-hand  conflict  with  heathenism, 
he  adapted  himself  to  the  habits  of  the 

Eeoj)le,  illustrating  his  saying,  "  I  have 
ecome  all  things  to  all,  that  I  may  by 
all  means  save  some."     (1  Cor.  9 :  22.) 

18.  Luke  relates  the  contact  of  Paul 
with  two  well-known  classes  of  philoso- 
phers. Why  he  says  nothing  of  the 
more  illustrious  schools,  founded  by 
Plato  and  Aristotle,  has  been  variously 
explained  :  As  having  less  influence  at 
this  time ;  taking  less  interest  in  prac- 
tical discussions  and    less  frequently 


18  with  thcni  that  met  w  ith  him.  Then  cer- 
tain philosophers  of  the  li;i)icureans,  and 
of   the  Stoics,  encountered  him.     And 


met  in  the  market;  and  holding  doc- 
trines in  smaller  contrast  with  those  of 
Christianity.  Paul  doubtless  met  with 
disciples  of  these  schools,  but  Luke  had 
no  special  reason  to  speak  of  them ; 
while  he  had  reason  to  speak  of  the 
Epicureans  and  Stoics  in  connection 
M'ith  Paul's  memorable  address.  Then, 
etc. — rather.  And  certain  also  of  the 
A'picnreaii  and  Stoic  philosophers  ivere 
discussing  with  him.  During  this  dis- 
cussion such  remarks  as  those  that 
follow  were  made  ;  and  as  a  result  Paul 
is  taken  to  ^Mars  Hill  for  an  exposition 
of  his  views.  2'he  Epicureans  owed 
their  name  to  Epicurus,  who  estab- 
lished a  school  of  philosophy  at 
Athens  in  a  garden,  from  which  his 
followers  were  styled  "  philosophers  of 
the  garden."  He  died  B.  C.  270.  He 
held  the  doctrine  that  serene  enjoyment 
or  pleasure  is  the  chief  good.  He  denied 
the  creation  and  providential  govern- 
ment of  the  world.  While  acknowl- 
edging the  existence  of  gods,  he  de- 
scribed them  as  indifferent  to  human 
affairs.  The  soul  he  regarded  as  ma- 
terial, and  with  the  body  dissolving 
after  death.  Epicurus  lived  a  life  of 
great  temperance  and  simplicity,  but  in 
Paul's  time  his  philosophy  had  degen- 
erated into  a  gross  sensualism,  and 
might  be  embodied  in  the  sentence, 
"  Let  us  eat  and  drink,  for  to-morrow 
we  die."  (1  Cm-.  15 :  m.)  The  Stoics  were 
founded  by  Zeno,  who  was  born  in 
Cyprus,  but  established  a  school  at 
Athens,  and  Avas  a  contemporary  of 
Epicurus.  He  taught  in  a  painted 
Stoa,  or  porch,  which  gave  the  name 
Stoic  to  the  sect.  The  Stoics  were  {pan- 
theists, holding  that  God  is  the  soul  of 
the  world,  and  that  matter  and  deity 
are  inseparable.  Their  highest  good 
they  held  to  be  in  insensibility  to  both 
pleasure  and  pain.  They  extolled 
virtue,  aimed  at  a  proud  self-denial,  an 
austere  indifference  to  joy  and  sorrow, 
and  urged  men  to  become  masters  of 
circumstances.  They  condemned  the 
use  of  images  and  temples,  but  in 
practice  justified  the  polytheism  of  the 
age,  considering  the  various  gods  as  de- 
velopments of  the  universal  world-god. 


278 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVII. 


some  said,  What  will  this  babbler  say? 
Other  some,  He  seemeth  to  be  a  setter 
fort  h  of  strange  gods :  because  he  preached 
unto  them  Jesus,  and  the  resurrection. 


19  And  they  took  him,  and  brought  him 
unto  'Arcojiagus,  saying.  May  we  know 
what  this   new   doctrine,   whereof  thou 

20  speakest,  is  *    For  thou  bringest  certain 


They  were  fatalists ;  and  providence 
was  but  an  iron  destiny,  to  which  even 
(jod  was  subject.  The  Ei)icurean  phi- 
losophy was  rather  a  favorite  with  the 
Greeks ;  the  Stoic  with  the  Komaus. 
"  In  Epicureanism  it  was  man's  sensual 
nature  which  arrayed  itself  against  the 
gospel ;  in  Stoicism  it  was  self-right- 
eousness and  pride  of  intellect ;  and  it 
is  difhcult  to  say  whicli  of  the  two  sys- 
tems rendered  its  votaries  tlie  more 
indisposed  to  embrace  the  trutli." 
(Hackett.)  The  ditierence  of  these 
two  schools  perhaps  manifests  itself 
somewhat  in  the  two  estimates  put 
upon  Paul.  The  frivolous  spirit  of  the 
P>picurean  might  lead  him  to  ask, 
M  hat  Avill  this  babbler  say  ?  liter- 
ally, (his  seed-picker  ;  one  who  gathers 
up  and  retails  8eraj)S  of  knowledge 
without  judgment;  hence  this  empty 
talker.  But  some  of  tlie  more  thought- 
ful Stoics  might  think  him  to  he  a 
setter  forth  of  strange  gods — 
divinities  foreign  and  unknown  to 
them.  This  was  the  charge  upon  whicli 
Socrates  was  tried  and  condemned. 
Paul  was  misjudged,  because  he  an- 
nounced the  glad  tidings  of  Jesus  and 
the  resnrfection.  Some  suppose 
they  thought  that  Paul  was  announcing 
the  Ptcsurrection  as  a  god.  But  Paul 
could  hardly  have  been  so  obscure  in 
liis  language  as  to  give  such  an  impres- 
sion to  his  hearers.  He  doubtless  spoke 
of  the  true  God,  and  of  Jesus  as  the  Son 
of  God.  (vor.  54.  SI.)  lu  referring  to  the 
resurrection  of  .Testis  some  of  liis  hearers 
may  have  riglitly  inferred  his  divinity 
from  that  event.  The  true  God  and  his 
Son  Jesus  Christ  were  new  and  strange 
to  them. 

19.  And  they  took  him — taking 
hold  of  him,  not  violently,  Irat  in  a 
friendly  manner,  such  as  taking  him 
by  thehand.  So  Barnabas  took  hold 
of  Saul  of  Tarsus  and  brought  him  to 
the  apostles  ('e«  9:  r),  where  the  same 
verb  is  used.  The  supposition  that  he 
was  arrested  (i« ;  is),  even  in  mockery, 
is  against  the  general  spirit  of  the  nar- 


rative. For  we  have  the  courteous 
wisli  and  the  polite  request  in  this  and 
tlie  next  verse.  Then  ver.  21  indietitis 
that  it  was  curiosity  that  occasiomd 
their  desire  to  hear  Paul.  Moreover, 
Paul's  address  is  not  a  defence,  and 
finally  he  departs  without  molestation, 
or  tlie  least  sign  of  any  judicial  juo- 
cess.  And  brought  him  unto  Are- 
opagus, or  upon  the  top  of  the  Kill 
of  Mars.  The  word  is  the  same  astliat 
translated  Mars'  Hill  in  ver.  22.  (See 
oDTcr.  16.)  This  was  the  name  of  the 
hill  as  well  as  of  the  highest  court  of 
ancient  Athens  which  held  its  sittings 
there.  The  hill  took  its  name  from 
Mars,  the  god  of  war,  who  according 
to  a  tradition  was  brought  to  trial  there 
by  the  gods  for  murder.  It  is  a  ridge 
of  limestone  rock  about  fifty  or  sixty 
feet  above  the  valley  below.  The  meet- 
ings were  held  on  the  southeastern 
summit  of  the  rock.  There  are  stiil 
sixteen  stone  steps,  cut  in  the  rock, 
leading  up  to  the  hilltop,  from  tlie 
valley  of  the  Agora  or  Market  below. 
Immediately  above  the  steps,  on  the 
level  of  the  hill,  are  benches  of  stone, 
forming  three  sides  of  a  quadrangle, 
facing  the  south.  Here  the  Areopagites, 
composed  of  the  most  distinguished 
men  of  Athens,  were  accustomed  to  sit 
as  judges  in  the  open  air.  The  pliilos- 
ophers  who  conducted  Paul  to  this 
famous  sjjot  probably  took  their  seats 
on  tlie  stone  benches  while  the  multi- 
tude stood  upon  the  steps  and  in  tlie 
valley  below.  May  we  know — a  very 
courteous  request,  characteristic  of 
Athenian  politeness.  What  this  new 
doctriue,  or  teaching  is,  of  which  thou 
talkest  in  the  market?  They  wish  to 
know  the  principles,  sentiments,  and 
truths  taught  by  him ;  and  the  word 
teaching  is  used  here  in  this  general 
sense. 

20.  For  thou  bringest  stranga 
— surprising  or  startling  things  to  our 
ears.  This  states  their  reason  for 
asking  the  preceding  question,  and  for 
eipressing  the  wish  that  follows.     We 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


'■strange   things  to  our  cars:  we   would 

know  therefore  what  these  things  mean. 

21  For    all    the    Athenians    and   strangers 

which  were  there  « spent  their  time  in 


nothing  else,  but  either  to  tell,  or  to  hear 
some  new  thing. 
22      Then  Paul  stood  in  the  midst  of  Mars' 
Hill,  and  said.  Ye  men  of  Athens,  I  per- 


•>  Hosea  8  :  12.        «  2  Tim.  2  :  IG,  17. 


would  know  therefore  what  these 
things  mean — tvhat  they  may  be,  as- 
suming that  there  was  something  in 
Paul's  teaching  worthy  to  be  heard 
and  considered  by  them.  (See  2: 12.) 
This  is  not  to  be  taken  as  ironical  in 
tlie  mouths  of  these  self-righteous  and 
self-conceited  philosophers,  but  rather 
as  a  courteous  and  complimentary 
method  of  address. 

21.  Luke  explains  the  readiness  and 
even  eagerness  of  the  Athenians  to 
hear  concerning  this  new  teaching  and 
these  startling  things,  (ver.  19,  jo.)  His 
statement  agrees  with  the  known 
character  of  the  Athenians  at  this 
period  of  their  history.  Now  all 
Athenians  (omitting  the  article). 
The  expression  is  strong,  jtointing  to  a 
universal  characteristic  of  the  Athen- 
ians. And  strangers  which  Avere 
there — sojourning  there.  The  nobility 
and  wealthy  of  Italy  and  of  most  other 
countries  sent  their  sons  to  Athens  for 
purposes  of  education,  and  many  others 
resorted  thither  for  study.  Spent 
their  time,  or  leisure,  in  nothing 
else,  but  either  to  tell  or  to  hear 
some  new  thing — literally,  some- 
thing newer,  the  latest  news.  "  New 
things  were  ever  losing  their  interest ; 
newer  things  were  sought  for."  (Ben- 
gel.)  This  is  in  harmony  with  the 
testimony  of  ancient  writers.  "  Demos- 
thenes rebukes  this  insatiable  crav- 
ing of  the  Athenians  after  news  in  the 
following  terms :  '  Tell  me  whether 
going  up  and  down  the  market  place 
and  asking  each  other,  '  Is  there  any 
news,'  is  the  business  of  your  life.' " 
(HOWSON  AND  SPENCE.) 

23.  The  Address.  In  this  speech 
Paul  shows  his  wonderful  power  as  an 
orator,  in  skillfully  adapting  himself 
to  his  audience.  To  the  heathen  he 
becomes  as  a  heathen.  The  Scriptures, 
the  long-expected  Messiah,  and  the 
true  God  are  unknown  to  them.  Be- 
fore he  can  announce  Jesus  to  them  he 
must  present  a  true  conception  of  God. 
And  tnis  he  does  by  starting  with  facts 


and  truths  which  they  them.selves 
acknowledge.  The  nature  and  attri- 
butes of  God  as  an  all-sufficient  Creator 
of  the  world,  the  Preserver  of  creatures 
and  Governor  of  mankind,  are  incon- 
sistent with  idolatry.  Having  thus  in- 
troduced to  them  the  true  God,  he 
preached  repentance,  the  judgment, 
Jesus  (whom  he  does  not  yet  name), 
and  the  resurrection.  He  is  inter- 
rupted. We  probably  have  but  the 
outlines  of  his  address.  His  adroitness, 
and  his  conciliatory  tone  held  the  ears 
of  the  Athenians  until  he  announced  to 
them  the  gospel,  which  he  was  about 
to  unfold  more  fully.  The  wonder  is 
not  that  he  was  interrupted  so  soon  but, 
as  Dr.  Hackett  remarks,  "that  he 
could  command  their  attention  so  long 
while  he  bore  down  with  such  efl'cct 
on  their  favorite  opinions  and  ]>reju- 
dices,  exposed  their  error,  and  arraigned 
them  as  guilty  of  the  grossest  incon- 
sistency, and  absurdity  of  conduct." 
The  report  of  this  speech  and  of  the 
result  that  followed  was  probably 
written  by  Paul  himself. 

And  Paul  standing  in  the  midst, 
of  Mars'  Hill — in  the  open  air.  (See  on 
ver.  19.)  The  phrase  -in  the  midst,  etc., 
could  mean  either  the  place,  or  the 
court  of  the  Areopagus.  That  he  was 
taken  upon  tlie  hill  seems  evident  from 
ver.  19.  That  some  of  the  Areopagites 
were  present  may  be  inferred  from  ver, 
34.  Here  in  the  midst  of  the  rocky 
platform,  with  his  audience  seated  on 
the  stone  benches  of  the  judges  and 
standing  on  the  steps  and  in  the  vacant 
spaces  around  him,  Paul  stands  the 
representative  and  proclaimer  of  the 
religion  of  the  future.  Here  in  the 
centre  of  Athens,  with  its  statues, 
altars,  and  temples  around  him  he 
could  well  saj',  the  city  was  "  full  of 
idols,"  and  sound  the  knell  of  the 
dying  religions  of  the  ])ast.  Ye  men 
of  Athens,  or  Athenian  men;  a  com- 
mon form  of  honorable  address,  used 
by  Demosthenes  and  other  orators  in 
Athens.     Too   superstitious — liter- 


280 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVII. 


ceive  that  in  all  things  ye  are  *  too  super-  this  inscription,  To  thk  unknowv  God. 

23  stitious.     For  as  I  passed  by,  and  beheld     24  Whotn  therefore  ye  ignoranlly  woisliip. 

your  « devotions,  1  found  an  altar  with  |       hiiu  declare  1  uuto  you.    f  God  that  made 


4  Jor.  50  :  38. 


'  2  Thess.  2  :  4. 


ally,  more  divinity-fearing,  or  demon- 
fearing  than  the  rest  of  the  Greeks. 
The  word  is  used  in  a  good  sense, 
according  to  Paul's  manner  of  begin- 
ning with  gentle  words,  when  he  was 
about  to  blame.  He  would  first  secure 
the  attention  and  good-will  of  his 
audience.  The  word  may  be  fully 
translated,  more  reverential  to  the  gods, 
or  very  religious.  Tlie  Improved  Bible 
Union  version  translates,  that  ye  are 
very  much  given  to  the  worship  of  divin- 
ities. This  accords  with  the  testimony 
of  ancient  writers.  Thus  Josephus 
says  that  the  Athenians  were  the  most 
religious  of  the  Greeks  (Against 
Apion).  Xenophon  relates  that  in 
comparison  with  other  peoples  they 
observed  twice  the  number  of  festivals ; 
and  Sophocles  sj^eaks  of  their  surpass- 
ing all  the  world  in  the  honor  they 
oti'ered  to  the  gods.  Paul  thus  in  an 
incidental  and  masterly  way  notices  a 
distinction  of  whicli  they  were  natur- 
ally proud. 

23.  For  as  I  passed  by,  etc. — 
for  passing  through  your  city  aiid 
closely  observing  (not  your  devotions 
but)  your  objects  of  worship,  such  as 
altars,  statues,  temples,  etc.,  J  found 
an  altar  with  this  inscription,  To 
the  Unknown  God.  Paul  appeals  to 
fact.  It  is  certain  from  this  passage 
that  there  was  at  least  one  such  altar  at 
Athens.  And  there  may  have  been 
more.  Pausanias,  who  wrote  before 
A.  D.  ISO,  and  Philostratus,  who  wrote 
A.  D.  24-1,  both  speak  of  "altars  of 
xinknown  gods "  existing  at  Athens, 
]m)bably  meaning  that  there  were  sev- 
eral altars  inscril)ed  to  an  nnknou'n 
god,  a  natural  use  of  the  plural  when 
applied  to  them  collectively.  And 
Diogenes  Laertius  speaks  of  "altars 
without  name "  in  Athens.  He  ac- 
counts for  them  in  this  way  :  "  When 
the  Athenians,  at  one  time,  were  suffer- 
ing from  pestilence,  Epimenides  puri- 
fied the  city,  and  restrained  the  plague 
thus:  he  took  sheep  of  lilack  and  white 
rieeces,  led  them  to  the  Areo])agus,  and 
allowed  them  to  go  from  it  whitherso- 


ever they  pleased ;  instructing  those 
who  followed  them  to  sacrifice  each 
sheep  wherever  it  lay  down,  to  the 
2)ropergod :  and  thus  the  ])lague  ceased. 
Accordingly,  from  that  time,  and 
to-da)',  it  is  certain  that  altuis  without 
a  name  are  found  throughout  the 
Athenian  districts."  Also  there  were 
in  Phalerum,  one  of  the  harbors  of 
Athens,  "  altars  of  gods  called  unknown 
and  of  heroes."  (Quoted  from  Bengel.) 
The  real  origin  of  such  altars  is  mos< 
naturally  traced  to  tliat  feeling  of  un- 
certainty, that  unsatisfied  desire,  and 
that  conscious  feeling  of  ignorance  of 
divine  realities,  wliich  were  character- 
istic of  heathenism.  The  Athenians, 
that  they  might  neglect  uo  divinity, 
erected  altars,  not  only  to  all  the 
heathen  gods  known  among  them,  but 
also  to  any  one  that  perhaps  miglit  be 
unknown  to  tliem.  » horn  there- 
fore, etc.  Accoiding  to  the  latest 
critical  authorities  this  should  read, 
What  therefore  ye  worship  unknow- 
ingly, that  J  declare  unto  you.  Notice 
how  I'aul  uses  a  word  similar  to  the 
inscription  on  their  altar.  What  ye 
worship,  some  unknown  divine  power, 
thus  not  referring  directly  to  Jehovah. 
It  was  some  abstract  and  undefined 
Being  or  Power  that  they  thus  wor- 
shiped, and  under  this  indefinite  des- 
ignation he  would  make  known  to 
them  the  living  and  true  God.  Jeho- 
vah was  vnl.nown  to  them,  althougli 
their  unknown  was  not  Jehovah.  Yet 
their  altar  was  a  confession  of  their 
ignorance  of  him. 

24.  Paul  at  once  presents  God  as 
tlie  Creator  of  the  universe  and  differ- 
ent from  the  false  gods  of  the  heathen. 
His  audience,  especially  the  Stoics, 
would  admit  tlie  existence  of  a  Supreme 
Being,  and  he  endeavors  to  lead  them 
into  a  proper  concejition  of  him  by  way 
of  contrast.  He  is  unlike  their  gods, 
"  not  dwelling  in  temples  made  with 
hands,"  and  this  he  argues  from  tlie 
fact  that  he  is  Lord  of  heaven  and 
earth.  He  is  an  active,  intelligent 
being,  presiding  over  his  works,  and 


Oh.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


281 


the  world  and  all  things  therein,  seeing 
that  he  is  s  Lord  of  heaven  auil  earth, 
•'.dwellelh  not  in  temples  made  with  hands; 
25  neither  is  worshipped  with  men's  hands, 
'  as  though  he  needed  any   thing,  seeing 


khe  giveth  to  alt  lifp,  and  hreath.and  all 
26  things  ;  and  '  hath  made  of  one  hlood  all 
nations  of  men  for  to  dwell  on  all  the 
fare  of  the  earth, '"  and  hath  determined 
the    times    before    appointed,    and    the 


«  Matt.  11  :  25.        i>  ch.  7  :  48 ;  1  Kings  8  :  27.        i  Job  22  :  2.        k  Num.  16  :  22 ;  Joh  12  :  10 ; 
Isa.  42  :  5 .  Zech.  12  :  1.        »  Gen.  3  :  20;  Mai.  2  :  10.        ■»  Deut.  32  :  7,  8;  Job  14  :  5. 


thus  not  the  idle  being  of  the  Epicu- 
reans in  huiuiin  form,  nor  the  mere 
.soul  of  tlie  world,  as  the  Stoics  taught. 
Notice  how  he  falls  into  the  phrase- 
olo^'y  of  the  Old  Testament.  God  that 
made  the  world,  etc.  (Seeisa. 4>:5.) 
Stier's  remark,  is  pertinent  here :  "  Only 
on  the  firm  foundation  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment doctrine  of  Creation  can  we  rightly 
huild  the  New  Testament  doctrine  of 
E.edemption."  Thus  Paul  rightly  begins 
at  the  foundation  and  first  announces 
the  one  only  God  as  Creator,  before  he 
preaches  Christ  as  the  Redeemer.  In 
the  words  dwelleth  not  in  temples 
made  with  hands  there  seems  to  be 
a  reminiscence  of  Stephen's  words, 
which  Paul  heard  himself.  (7 :  47, 48, 58.) 
God's  spiritttality  is  implied,  but 
brought  out  more  fully  in  ver.  30. 

25.  Paul  further  presents  God  as 
independent  of  all  his  creatures,  self- 
sufficient  and  the  Bestower  of  life  and 
all  things.  Neither  is  worshipped, 
etc. — ratlier.  Neither  is  minitstered  to  by 
men's  hands,  or,  according  to  many 
manuscripts,  bi/  human  hands.  Here 
there  is  another  point  of  contrast.  The 
heatlien  brought  offerings  of  food  and 
drink  to  their  gods,  under  the  super- 
stitious belief  that  they  consumed 
them,  and  other  costly  gifts,  which 
services  they  regarded  as  meritorious 
and  laying  the  gods  under  obligation 
to  tliem.  But  Paul  argues  that  the 
Lord  of  all,  the  Giver  of  life  to  all 
and  of  breath  and  of  all  things 
needed  for  the  support  and  preserva- 
tion of  his  creatures,  cannot  be  depend- 
ent on  them.  Instead  of  our  minister- 
ing to  the  necessities  of  God,  he  min- 
isters to  our  necessities.  The  fact  that 
all  things  come  from  him  makes  it  evi- 
dent that  we  can  really  give  nothing  to 

him.      (l  Chron.  29  :  14.) 

26.  Paul  asserts  the  unity  of  the 
race,  God  the  Maker  of  all  mankind, 
and  his  providential  government  over 
men.      And    hath    made   of  one 


blood  all  nations  of  men— or,  ^>!(Z 

made  of  one  every  iH(lio)i  of  men, 
blood  not  being  found  in  many  of  the 
oldest  manuscripts,  and  omitted  by  tlie 
majority  of  the  latest  critics.  Meyer, 
however,  would  retain  the  word,  believ- 
ing that  it  was  inadvertently  dro])ped 
by  copyists.  The  clause  may  also  be 
rendered.  And  has  caused  every  na- 
tion (sprung)  from  one  blood  to  dwell, 
etc.  The  former,  however,  is  the  more 
general  rendering  and  seems  to  be  much 
preferable,  as  the  more  natural  and 
simpler  construction.  In  the  omission 
of  blood  some  see  a  reference  to  the 
divine  origin  of  men,  being  tlie  ofi- 
spring  of  God  (ver.  28),  but  Paul  had  not 
reached  that  tliought  in  his  discourse. 
The  idea  is  that  the  race  descended 
from  one  parent,  whether  we  read, 
made  of  one  blood,  or  simply,  made  of 
one.  This  ran  counter  to  the  views  of 
heathenism,  and  the  pride  of  the 
Athenians,  who  held  that  the  nations 
had  each  their  own  origin,  and  each 
under  the  protection  of  some  deity. 
They  were  proud  of  their  race,  as  s]?rung 
from  the  soil  of  Attica,  and  different 
from  other  people.  The  belief  that  all 
sprang  from  one  common  parent  would 
tend  to  correct  the  idea  of  many  gods, 
and  aid  in  accepting  the  trutli  of  one 

God.      (Seel  Kings  20:  23,  28.)      To  dwell — 

that  they  should  settle  on  all  the  face 
of  the  earth.  God  has  given  to  the 
different  nations  their  abode,  (dlui.  32 .-  s ; 
Is.  115 :  16.)  And  hath  determined  the 
times  before  appointed,  rather,  ac- 
cording to  the  most  approved  reading, 
And  hath  determined  their  appoint  fed 
times,  or  seaso7is,  and  the  bounds  of 
their  habitation.  The  providential 
government  of  God  is  liere  as.serted. 
God  has  fixed  the  appointed  eras  in  the 
life  of  nations,  both  as  to  their  pros- 
perity and  their  continuance,  and  pre- 
scribed the  extent  of  their  territory. 
The  Athenians  are  thus  reminded  that 
to  God  they  owe  their  favored  abode 


282 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVII. 


27  bouuds  of  their  habitation  ;  »  that  they  28  not  far  from  every  one  of  us.  For  Pin 
should  seek  the  Lord,  if  haply  they  might  him  we  live,  ancl  move,  and  have  our 
feel  after  him,  and  find  him,  "though  he  be  |       being;  las  certain  also  oi  your  own  poets 

»  ch.  15  :  17,        •  ch.  14  :  17 ;  Ps.  139  :  1-13  ;  Jer.  23  :  23,  24.        P  Job  12  :  10 ;  Pa.  36  :  9 ;  G6  :  9  : 
Heb.  1:3.        <i  Titua  1  :  12. 


and  the  glories  of  their  history — a 
warning  to  their  pride  and  an  incentive 
to  their  gratitude.  (iCor.4:7.)  This 
doctrine  of  God's  providence  was  op- 
posed to  Stoic  fate  and  Epicurean 
chance. 

Paul's  reference  to  the  unity  of  the 
race  coincides  with  his  teachings  in 

his  Epistles.      (Rom.  5  :  1215  ;  1  Cor.  15  :  21,  «  ; 

1  Tim.  2: 13.)  This  qucstiou  transcends 
profane  history,  and  aside  from  the 
Scriptures  cannot  be  absolutely  settled. 
But  Comparative  Philology  and  Com- 
parative Physiology  tend  to  confirm 
the  history  and  doctrine  in  the  Sacred 
llecord. 

27.  The  design  of  this  providential 
goodness  of  God  is,  That  they  should 
seek  the  Lord — rather,  seek  God,  ac- 
cording to  the  most  approved  text,   (see 
Horn.  1:4.)     "The  great  thought  of  the 
j)assage  is  simply :     God  the  Author, 
the    Governor   and    the    £nd   of  the 
world's    history,   from    God,   through 
God,  <o  God."  "(Meyer.)    If  haply- 
implying    possibility,    but    not    very 
likely  to  happen.     If  possibly    they 
might  feel  alter  him, thattheymnjrA< 
(/rope  after  him  as  in  the  dark,  seeking 
after  tokens  and   indications  of  God, 
and  thus  actually  find  him,  attaining 
a  knowledge  of  him  and  of  their  obli- 
gation to  him.     We  have  here  a  vivid 
picture  of  the  heathen  world  without 
a  written  revelation,  with  light  enough 
to  point  them  up  to  God,  and  to  render  \ 
them  without  excuse,     (see  ou  io:34,  35;  ' 
Kom.  1 :  is-21.)      Though    indeed    he    is  j 
not  far  from  every  one  of  us — that  1 
is,  he  is  very  near  to  us,  and,  therefore, 
it  should  not  be  hard  to  find  him.     In  j 
not    having  found  him,  the    spiritual  | 
blindness,  darkness,  and  ignorance  of  j 
heathenism  are  strongly  implied.    The  | 
omnipresence  of  God  is  also  brought  to  1 
view. 

28.  This  nearness  of  God  to  us  Paul  j 
further  explains.     It  is  not  merely  ex-  1 
ternal,  but  it  permeates  our  whole  be-  j 
ing,  and  is  connected   with  our  whole 
existence.    For  in  him  we  live  and  | 


move  and  have  our  being,  or  exfs^ 

Our  existence,  our  activities  and  all 
the  powers  in  continuing  to  live,  are 
dependent  on  God,  and  are  to  be 
traced  to  God  as  the  source  and  the 
verj^  atmosphere  of  our  being.  We  are 
surrounded  and  sustained  by  the  Om- 
nipresent God.  (SeeEph.  1  :10;  Col.  1:  17; 
Heb.  1:3.)  It  is  uot  far,  therefore,  to 
seek  and  find  him.  (ver.  27.)  Panthe- 
ism makes  God  all,  and  all  God ;  but 
Paul  presents  God  who  is  over,  above 
and  outside  of  all  his  creatures,  and 
upon  whom  all  are  dependent.  This 
great  truth,  Paul  reminds  his  auditora, 
is  an  acknowledged  one,  and  accords 
with  the  utterances  of  their  own  wiit- 
ei-s:  As  certain  also  of  your  own 
poets  have  said.  For  Ave  are  also 
his  offspring.  Notice  that  while  to 
a  Jewish  audience  Paul  would  quote 
the  Old  Testament  (i3:i6-23),  he  here 
quotes  from  heathen  poets,  an  authority 
which  his  heathen  hearei-s  would  likely 
accept.  The  quotation  is  found  in  two 
poets.  Aratus,  who  lived  about  B.  c. 
270,  a  native  of  i'ilicia,  Paul's  native 
province,  and  perhaps  of  Tarsus,  says 
in  one  of  his  two  poems  that  have  conie 
down  to  us :  "  For  we,  too,  are  his  off- 
spring." Cleanthes,  who  lived  about 
B.  C.  300,  a  native  of  Assos  in  Troas, 
uses  substantially  the  same  words  in  a 
hymn  to  Jupiter.  Philosophers,  like 
Plato  and  Plutarch,  had  also  recognized 
the  same  truth.  Paul  elsewhere  quotes 
from  Menander  (1  cor.  i5:3*),  and  from 
Epimenides.  (Titus  1 :  12.)  Too  much, 
however,  must  not  be  inferred  from 
these  regarding  Paul's  Greek  learning 
and  acquaintance  with  Greek  liter- 
ature. Tliese  quotations  may  have  been 
used  as  proverbial  sayings.  Yet  it 
must  be  remembered  that  Tarsus  ranked 
with  Athens  and  Alexandria  as  centres 
of  Greek  thought  and  knowledge.  It 
was  the  place  of  illustrious  teacher.*;, 
among  whom  the  Stoics  were  promi- 
nent, and  Aratus,  whom  Paul  quotes, 
represented  the  Stoic  school  of  philos- 
ophy.    In  early  life  Paul  was  brought 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


283 


have  said.  For  we  are  also  his  offspring. 

29  Forasmuch  then  as  we  are  the  offspring 

of  God, '  we  ought  not  to  think  that  the 

Godhead  is  like  unto  gold,  or  silver,  or 


stone,  graven  by  art  and  man's  device. 

30  And   '  the  times  of  this  ignorance  God 
winked  at ;  but  '  now  commaudeth  all 

31  men  every  where  to  repent:  because  he 


Ps.  115  :  4-8  ;  Isa.  46  :  5-7  ;  Hab.  2  :  19,  20.        •  ch.  14  :  16  ;  Bom.  3  :  25.        t  Luke  24  ;  47. 


in  contact  with  these  Grecian  influ- 
ences, and  doubtless  at  school  read 
somewhat  from  Greek  books.  After 
his  conversion,  while  residing  a  few 
years  at  Tarsus  (9:30;  u  :25),  looking 
forward  to  more  extended  Gentile  work, 
he  very  likely  gave  attention  to  those 
things  which  he  would  meet  among 
Gentiles,  and  may  have  extended  his 
reading  among  Greek  authors.  Then, 
if  not  before,  he  may  have  read  Aratus, 
who  was  very  popular,  es])ecially  in 
Cilicia. 

29.  Forasmuch  then  as  we  are 
the  ofl'spring  of  God — starting  then 
with  this  truth  which  all  would  ac- 
knowledge, he  turns  his  argument 
against  idolatry.  And  how  skillfully 
he  does  it.  That  he  may  not  repel  his 
hearers  he  classes  himself  among  them, 
using  the  yirs;;  person  plural.  Thus  to 
those  not  under  law  he  became  as  one 
not  under  law.  (i  cor.  9 :  20.)  We  ought 
not  to  think  that  the  Godhead, 
or  the  Deity,  who  is  our  Autlior  and 
Parent,  is  like  unto  gold,  or  silver, 
or  stone,  graven  or  carved  by  art 
and  man's  device,  the  thoughts  and 
ingenuity  of  man.  Man  is  not  like 
gold,  etc. ;  much  less  is  God.  To 
suppose  this  of  God  is  to  degrade  our- 
selves, the  offspring  of  God.  Com- 
pare the  similar  argument  against 
idolatry  in  Ps.  115  :  8  and  Isa.  46  :  5-7. 
The  same  argument  applies  against  the 
Romish  use  of  images  to  bring  God 
near  the  soul  through  the  imagination, 
God  is  a  spirit,  and  his  relationship  to 
us  is  principally  spiritual ;  and  spirit 
cannot  be  pictured  forth  in  matter. 
(John  4: 21-24.)  "  This  is  equally  true  of 
art  representations  of  Christ,  since 
what  IS  adorable  in  him  is  not  the 
Heshly  form  (j  Cor.  5 :  16),  but  the  inward 
impalpable  spirit."     (Abbott.) 

30.  Paul's  address  implied  that  the 
heathen  were  in  a  state  of  spiritual 
ignorance  and  degradation.  He  now 
turns  to  salvation  and  the  claims  of  the 
gospel.  And  the  times  of  this 
ignorance  —  strange  and    bold  lan- 


guage to  a  people  who  prided  them* 
selves  in  wisdom.  Yet  the  Athenians 
had  confessed  it  in  that  inscription  on 
the  altar.  The  world  by  wisdom  knew 
not  God.  (1  Cor.  1 :  21.)  God  winked 
at — an  incorrect  translation  ;  rather, 
God  therefore  having  overlooked.  The 
idea  is  similar  to  that  in  14  :  16,  "  Who 
in  ages  past,  suffered  all  nations  to  walk 
in  their  own  ways."  God  had  fore- 
borne  with  the  lieathen.  While  with- 
holding special  revelations  and  special 
messengers,  as  to  the  Jewish  people,  he 
had  also  withheld  deserved  j)unish- 
ment.  (Rom.  3 :  2j.)  He  left  them  to  the 
light  of  nature  and  the  promptings  of 
their  own  consciences ;  and  with  what 
terrible  results  are  described  in  Rom. 
1  :  24,  25.  While  it  is  true,  as  Alford 
says,  that  in  tlie  word  overlooked,  there 
may  "  lie  treasures  of  mercy  for  those 
who  lived  in  the  times  of  ignorance," 
especially  such  as  Cornelius,  who  were 
devoutly  seeking  after  God  (io:S4, 35), 
yet  the  word  docs  not  mean,  as  Hackett 
remarks,  "  that  God  would  not  judge 
or  punish  the  heathen  for  the  sins  com- 
mitted in  their  state  of  idolatry,"  which 
"  would  be  at  variance  with  Paul's 
theology  on  the  subject  as  he  has  un- 
folded it  in  Rom.  1  :  20;  2  :  11,  f," 
But  now — those  times  of  for1)earance 
are  past,  and  God  by  his  revelations 
and  his  messengers,  of  whom  Paul  him- 
self was  one,  commandeth  all  men 
everyAvhere  to  repent,  to  turn  to 
him  from  their  evil  practices,  with 
change  of  heart  and  reformation  of  life. 
Compare  the  same  truth  less  positively 
stated  in  11  :  IS.  It  is  implied  that 
punishment  will  not  longer  be  with- 
held, and  that  the  violation  of  the  com- 
mand will  not  be  without  its  penalty. 

31.  Inasmuch  as  he  hath  ap- 
pointed a  day  in  the  which  he 
will  judge  the  world  in  righteous- 
ness— a  reas«»  why  all  should  repent, 
Paul's  reference  to  the  judgment  was 
apt  and  solemn  on  Mars'  Hill,  where 
the  Areopagus  held  its  sessions,  and 
judicial    sentences    were    announced. 


284 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVII. 


li:itlia}i])ointc<l  a  day,  in  the  whitli"hewill 
judge  the  world  in  righteousness  by  tkat 
)uan  whom  he  hath  ordained  ;  uherKof  he 
hatli  given  assurance  unto  all  men,  in 
that  ^  he  hath  raised  him  from  the  dead. 
32  And  when  they  heard  of  the  resurrec- 
tion of  the  dead,  some  mocked :  and  others 


said,  We  will  hear  thee  again  of  this 
3.3  inatter.  So  Paul  dei)arled  from  among 
34  them.  Howbcit  certain  men  clave  unto 
hiiu,  and  believed:  among  the  which  uas 
I)ionysiusy  the  Areopagite,  and  a  woman 
named  L>amaris,  and  others  with  them. 


"  ch.  10  :  4'2 ;  Matt.  2j  :  31-4G  ;  John  5  :  22,  23  ;  Uom.  2  :  10 ;  14  •.  10  ;  2  Cor.  5  :  10. 
24;  1  Peter  1  :  3.        J  ver.  19. 


Notice  how  imbued  was  Paul's  mind 
with  God's  word,  in  that  he  uses  the 
hinguage  of  Ps.  9:9,"  Hg  shall  judge 
the  world  in  righteousness."  Eight- 
eousness  will  he,  as  it  were,  the  moral 
tdement  in  wliich  the  judgment  will 
take  place.  By  that  man  whom  he 
hath  ordained — literally,  la  a  man, 
that  is,  in  the  jjcrson  of  the  man  irliuiii 
he  appointed  for  that  purpose,  unknown 
to  them,  but  whom  he  is  about  to  make 
known.  3Iaii  is  made  einphatic  and 
definite  hy  the  clause  that  follows.  Con- 
cerning the  man  ("hrist  Jesus,  as  judge, 
see  on  10:42;  John  5:23-29.  Paul 
says  nothing  of  his  divine  nature,  for 
that  might  have  been  misunderstood  by 
his  Athenian  audience,  who  jnight  con- 
ceive hira  to  be  a  deified  Jewish  hero. 
Whereof  he  hath  given  assurance 
— the  evidence  and  ground  of  faith  to 
all  by  raimnff  him  from  the  dead.  The 
resurrection  is  made  the  proof  of  liis 
divine  office  and  of  his  claims  upon  all 
men.  (SeeR..m.  i:  4.)  All  men  therefore 
should  believe  and  oliey.  This  was  evi- 
dently not  designed  as  the  conclusion 
of  Paul's  address ;  but  his  discourse  is 
here  interru]5ted,  and  abruptly  brought 
to  a  close.  What  further  he  intended 
to  say  can  only  be  a  matter  of  con- 
jecture. Perhaps  he  would  have 
developed  the  doctrine  of  a  general 
resurrection  and  a  general  judgment. 
Probal)ly  he  would  have  introduced 
Jesus  more  fully  to  his  audience,  as  the 
Author  of  eternal  life  and  the  Saviour 
of  men. 

32.  Paul  had  not  mentioned  the 
name  Jesus,  and  had  pushed  off 
toward  the  end  of  his  address  the  idea 
of  a  resurrection,  which  he  knew  would 
be  offensive  to  his  philosophical  hearers. 
So  in  his  address  to  the  Jews  (21 ;  21)  he 
jnishes  the  word  Gentile  toward  the 
clo.se.  The  resurrection.  Paul  had 
spoken  of  the  resurrection  of  Jesus, 
but  his  hearers  naturally  infer  that  he 


held  to  the  doctrine  of  the  resurrection 
of  all  men.  Some  mocked  —  inter- 
rupting him  ^\ith  loud,  deriding,  jest- 
ing wonls.  Tlie  doctrine  of  a  resur- 
rection f'roni  the  dead  was  regarded  by 
the  Greeksas  grossly  absurd.  Others, 
more  jiolite,  and  perhaps  of  a  more 
serious  turn  of  mind,  said,  M'e  will 
hear  thee  coneeming  this  yet  arjain. 
Had  not  Paul  been  interrupted  by  the 
mockers,  they  would  have  listened 
further,  Init  under  the  circumstances 
tlu-y  cuiK'lu<le  to  defer  consideration 
until  another  interview,  which  proh- 
al>ly  never  occurred.  Perhaps  some  ofj 
the  gay  I'>i>icureans  were  the  leaders  of 
the  former,  and  some  of  the  graver 
Stoics  of  tlie  latter.     (See24 :  k.) 

33.  So — tlius  derided  l>y  some  and 
treated  with  indifi'erence  by  others, 
Paul  went  out  from  among  them. 
The  manner  of  Ids  going  forth  indicates 
that  he  was  neither  under  trial,  nor 
under  any  jiersonal  restraint  whatever. 
He  appears  to  have  aroused  neither 
special  opjiosition  nor  special  interest. 

34.  HoAvbeit — rather,  But,  con- 
trasting the  api>arently  fruitless  effort 
on  liars'  Hill  with  the  more  favorable 
results  of  his  ])rief  labors  at  Athens. 
Certain  men  clave  unto  him — 
joined  ihemaelrex  to  him;  becoming 
associated  with  him,  believed  in  the 
doctrine  preached  and  in  Jesus  Christ. 
Tliis  involved  miu'h  sacrifice  amid  the 
mocki'ry,  pride,  and  worldly  wisdom  of 
the  people.  One  of  the  converts  was 
D ion y sins,  an  eminent  citizen  of 
Athens,  since  he  Mas  an  Areopagite, 
one  of  the  judges  of  the  Areopagus,  that 
most  august  tribunal  of  ancient  Greece. 
Paul  would  very  naturally  select  him 
to  look  after  the  little  company  of  be- 
lievers, who  may  also  have  chosen  him 
as  pastor.  There  is  a  tradition  to  that 
effect ;  also  that  he  suffered  martyrdom. 
The  writings  attributed  to  him  are  spu- 
rious, and  of  later  date.  And  a  Avoman 


Ch.  XVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


285 


named  Damaris — nothing  more  is 
known  of  her.  The  fact  that  slie  is 
named  may  indicate  her  as  prominent, 
intinential,  or  well  known.  The  way 
she  is  mentioned  in  the  original  is 
against  the  snpposition  of  some,  that 
she  was  the  wife  of  Diony.sius. 

It  is  common  to  speak  of  Paul's  min- 
istry at  Athens  as  a  failure.  But  was 
it  a  failure  ?  It  is  true  that  he  found 
tields  for  longer  and  more  successful 
labor  in  the  commercial  cities  of  Tlies- 
saloniea  and  C'oriiitli.  l>ut  surely  the 
gathering  of  a  small  company  of  con- 
verts, some  of  them  eminent,  during  his 
brief  tarrying  at  Athens,  was  in  no 
sense  a  failure.  The  little  church  gath- 
eered  there  in  this,  and  perhaps  a  sub- 
sequent visit,  continued,  and  afforded 
in  the  second  and  third  centuries  mar- 
tyrs and  defenders  of  Christianity.  His 
inrtuence  continued,  and  became  ijisep- 
arably  connected  with  Athens.  No  one 
visits  that  city  without  thinking  of 
Paul;  the  influence  of  liis  address  is 
world-wide.  The  accomj)lished  Longi- 
nus,  born  in  the  third  century  at 
Athens,  not  a  Christian,  but  a  teacher 
of  the  Platonic  philosophy,  uses  this 
remarkable  language  in  a  fragment  of 
one  of  his  critical  treatises :  "  The 
crowning  Hower  of  Helenic  genius  and 
eloquence  is  to  be  fouml  in  Demosthenes, 
Lysias,  .Eschines,  Aristides,  Zimarchus, 
Isocrates,  Xenophon — to  these  I  wouhl 
add  Paul  of  Tarsus."  This  would  in- 
dicate that  the  discourse  of  Paul  had 
become  one  of  the  traditions  of  Athe- 
nian eloquence,  and  that  Longinus  re- 
garded him  as  wortliy  to  stand  with  the 
great  masters  of  the  Bema. 

In  the  ancient  world  were  two  dis- 
tinct civilizations,  one  the  result  of 
human  philoso})hy,  the  other  of  a  divine 
revelation  ;  the  former  having  its  chief 
centre  at  Athens,  the  latter  at  .Jerusa- 
lem. This  one,  elevated  above  idolatry, 
jiresented  a  purity  of  morality  une- 
qualed  in  the  ancient  world  ;  that  one, 
debased  in  views  of  God  and  practices 
of  worship,  presented  amid  relinenient 
of  philosophy,  poetry  and  art,  a  beastly 
immorality  in  social  and  private  life. 
The  leaders  at  Jerusalem  prided  them- 
selves in  their  own  righteousness;  the 
leaders  at  Athens  in  their  wisdom. 
Paul  met  them  both,  and  with  little 


success.  The  preacning  of  Christ  to  tlie 
former  was  "  a  stumbliug-l)lock  ;  "  to 
tiie  latter,  "  foolishness."  But  to  mul- 
titudes of  others,  connected  with  the 
JewisJi  and  Gentile  world,  who  heard 
with  attention  and  believed,  "  Christ 
became  tlie  power  of  God  and  the 
wisdom  of  God."     (i  Cor.  i :  •:i--ii.) 

PR.iCTicAL  Remarks. 

1.  Opposition  to  the  truth  in  one  place 
should  not  deter  the  ser-vant  of  God  from 
proclaiming  it  in  other  places.  (Ver.  1, 10, 
15  ;  1  Thess.  2  :  1,  2.) 

2.  The  Scriptures  contain  in  themselves 
the  proofs  of  Christianity.  (Ver.  2 ;  Gen. 
49  :  10 :  Isa.  11  :  1,  10 ;  Dan.  9  :  24-27  ;  Micah 
5:2.) 

3.  The  sufferings  and  resurrection  of  Christ 
are  essential  to  gospel  preaching.  (Ver.  3 ; 
Isa.  53  :  1-12 ;  1  Cor.  15  :  13,  14.) 

4.  "  Grace  does  not  give  the  preference  to 
persons  in  high  stations,  but  neither  does  it 
repel  them."  (Stakkh.)  (Ver.  4 ;  1  Cor. 
1  :  26-28.) 

5.  Hatred  of  the  gospel,  and  envy  at  its 
success,  begets  prejudice,  lawlessness,  and 
vile  opposition.     (Ver.  5,  13  ;  14  :  2-6.) 

6.  The  gospel  is  subversive.  It  turns  the 
world  right  side  up,  because  it  is  upside 
down.  (Ver.  6  ;  Hag.  2:7;  Mai.  4:6;  Luke 
1-17.) 

7.  Christ  is  a  King,  but  his  kingdom  is  not 
of  this  world.  There  should  be  no  friction 
between  him  and  Ciesar.  (Ver.  7;  Matt. 
22  :  21  ;  Rom.  13  :  1,  f.) 

8.  The  gospel  is  a  troubler  of  the  hearts 
and  lives  of  wicked  men.  (Ver.  8 ;  Matt. 
2:3;  John  16  :  8.) 

9.  Wicked  men  often  wish  to  take  pledges 
of  the  go«pel,  but  are  unwilling  to  give 
pledges  to  the  gospel.  (Ver.  9  ;  John  6  :  30  ; 
5  :  40.) 

10.  We  may  change  places  of  Christian 
labor,  but  we  shall  find  conflict  with  evil 
wherever  we  are.     (Ver.  1,  10  ;  20  :  23.) 

11.  To  seek  to  know  the  truth,  whether  it 
accords  with  previous  opinions  or  not,  is  a 
mark  of  true  nobleness  of  mind.  God's  word 
is  the  standard  for  both  preachers  and 
churches.    (Ver  11 ;  Isa.  8  :  20.) 

12.  The  Scriptures,  honestly  investigated, 
lead  to  Christ.  (Ver.  11,  12 ;  John  5  :  39  ; 
Rom.  15  :  4.) 

13.  Women  were  specially  useful  in  the 


286 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVIII. 


JIaccdonian  churches.    (Ver.  4,  12  ;  16  :  40  ; 
Phil.  4  :  2,  3.) 

14.  The  deep  wickedness  of  the  heart  is 
often  manifested,  not  only  in  rejecting 
Christ, but  also  in  preventing  others  from  re- 
ceiving him.    (Ver.  13  ;  Luke  11  :  52.) 

15.  The  perseverance  of  Paul  as  a  preacher 
is  worthy  of  imitation.  (Ver.  14, 15  ;  26  :  20; 
Rom.  15  :  18,  19.) 

16.  Amid  the  vrealth  and  splendor  of  the 
city,  the  large  amount  of  degradation  and 
spiritual  desolation  should  arousa  Christian 
zeal  aud  activity.  (Ver.  16,  17 ;  1  Thess. 
2  :  9-12.) 

17.  In  order  to  the  highest  success  we 
should  bear  the  gospel  to  the  very  homes 
and  marts  of  men.  (Ver.  17  ;  20  :  20  ;  Luke 
14  :  2:j.) 

18.  Culture,  formalism,  and  ritualism  often 
go  together.    (Ver.  16-18  ;  Luke  18  :  11, 12.) 

19.  Human  philosophy  without  true  reli- 
gion is  darkness  and  folly.  (Ver.  18,  32; 
Rom.  1  :  22  ;  1  Tim.  6  :  20.) 

20.  Intellectual  pride  and  self-righteous- 
ness are  ever  opposed  to  Christ  «nd  the 
gospel.    (Ver.  17,  18.) 

21.  If  curiosity  seeks  only  amusement  and 
novelty,  it  is  most  hurtful ;  but  if  it  is 
turned  toward  truth,  instruction,  and  a  new 
h<!art,  it  yields  most  happy  results.  (Ver. 
19-21  ;  Luke  23  :  8  ;  John  12  :  21.) 

22.  While  holding  fast  to  the  truths  of  the 
go.spel,  the  preacher  .should  adapt  himself 
and  his  words  to  his  hearers.  (Ver.  22 ;  Prov. 
11  :  30.) 

23.  Through  forty  cent urios  the  world  by 
its  wisdom  faik-"!  to  discover  the  true  God. 
(Ver.  23  ;  1  Cor.  1  :  21 ;  1  John  5  :  10.) 

24.  God  is  a  supreme  and  omnipresent 
Sovereign.     (Ver.  24 ;  Isa.  4.5  :  18  ;  57  :  1."..) 

2.5.  God  is  independent  and  has  all  suffi- 
ciency in  himself  (Ver,  25;  Ps.  50  :  1, 
7-15.) 

26.  "  The  unity  of  the  human  race  is  a  Gri-i 
truth  both  of  revelation  and  of  the  gospel 
system.  It  accounts  for  their  oneness  of 
character,  for  their  common  need  of  a 
Saviour,  and  their  common  relations  to  him. 
In  it  is  the  foundation  of  society,  and  the 
source  of  all  equal  and  reciprocal  rights  be- 
tween individuals  and  nations."  (I.  P. 
Warren.)    (Ver.  26 ;  Rom.  5  :  12.) 

27.  The  great  object  and  end  of  life  is  to 
seek  and  know  God.  (Ver.  27  ;  John  17  :  3 ; 
Phil.  3  :  8-11.) 


28.  God  alone  is  sell-existent.  All  life  is 
from  him  and  through  him.    (Ver.  28.) 

29.  God  is  spiritual  in  his  essence  and 
nature,  with  which  all  forms  of  idolatry 
are  inconsistent.  (Ver.  29  ;  John  4  :  24;  Isa. 
40  :  25-28.) 

30.  The  coming  of  Christ  was  the  turning 
point  in  the  history  of  our  race.  (Ver.  30  ; 
Gal.  4:4;  Heb.  1:  i,  2.) 

31.  To  know  that  all  men  everywhere  may 
and  can  repent  is  indeed  glad  tidings  to  a 
guilty  world.     (Ver.  30  ;  Mark  1  :  14,  15.) 

32.  The  resurrection  of  Christ  makes  cer- 
tain a  future  judgiiif-nt.  (Ver.  31  ;  2  Cor. 
4:  10;  Rom.  2  :   6-11.) 

33.  Rejecters  of  the  gospel  are  mostly  of 
two  classes,  mockers  and  postponers.  There 
is  a  point  when  the  preacher  can  well  desist 
from  further  effort  for  the  salvation  of  his 
hearers.   (Ver.  32,  33 ;  John  8 :  21 ;  12  :  36-40.) 

34.  God's  word  does  not  return  to  him 
void.  The  preacher  labors  not  in  vain.  (Ver. 
34;  Isa.  55:  11;  1  Cor.  15:58.) 

Ch.  18  :  Continuing  his  second  mis- 
sionary tour,  Paul  leaves  Athens  and 
goes  to  Corinth,  where  he  1  bors  for 
eighteen  months  or  more,  and  then 
returns  to  Antioch  in  Syria,  by  way  of 
Ephesus  and  Jcrusakin.  After  a  brief 
visit  at  Antioch,  Paul  commences  his 
third  missionary  tour  by  revisiting 
Galatia  and  Phrygia. 

1-17.  PaVL  AT  COKINTH.  IIlS  AR- 
RAIGNMKNT  liRFOKK  G.VLl.IO.  (l  Cor.  1  : 
1,  U,  Ifi;  -•  :  2,  3;  4  :  II,  12  ;  2  Cor.  1  :  19  ;  II  :  8,  »; 
1  iThess.  3 :  6,  7  ;  Isa.  4.1 :  .i  ;  Jer.  1:8.)       Paul's 

stay  at  Athens  ai)pears  to  liave  been 
brief,  and  his  arrival  at  Corinth 
occurred  ju'obably  about  the  first  of 
August,  A.  n.  .72.  His  stay  there,  per- 
phaps  including  a  second  visit  to 
Athens  (see  on  ver.  18),  probably  continued 
about  two  years.  (Compare  note  on  ^  34 
ILirmonic  Arnimjemenl  of  the  Acts.) 

1.  After  these  things — related  in 
the  preceding  cliapter.  Paul  should 
be  omitted  according  to  the  best  author- 
ities, showing  a  close  connection  be- 
tween this  and  the  la.'^t  chapter.  Liter- 
ally, lie  behif)  parted  from  Athens, 
having  taken  his  departure  apparently 
witli  some  reluctance,  there  being  per- 
hajjs  no  sjiecial  opportunity  for  present 
labor,  possibly  no  work  to  do  at  hia 
trade  ('e^.  :<),  and  Silas  and  Timothy 


Ch.  XVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


287 


Paxil  at  Corinth ;  and  his  relurn,  by  Ephesus, 

Ccesarea,  and  Jerusalem,  to  Anlioch. 
18  AFTER  these  things  Paul  departed  from 
2  Athens,  aud  came  to  » Corinth.  And  [he] 


found  a  certain  Jew  named  •  Aquila, 
born  in  •>  Pontus,  lately  come  from  Italy 
with  his  wife  Priscilla ;  (because  that 
0  Claudius  had  commandea  all  Jews  to 


»  1  Cor.  1:2.        •  Rom.  16  :  3,  4  ;  1  Cor.  16  :  19  ;  2  Tim.  4  :  19.        •>  ch.  2:9.        •  ch.  11  :  28. 


not  having  come.  (ver.  6.)  To  Cor- 
inth— a  distance  of  about  forty-five 
miles.  The  voyage  by  sea  can  be  made 
by  fair  winds  in  four  or  five  hours. 
Corinth  was  situated  on  the  Isthmus, 
from  three  and  a  half  to  ten  miles 
wide,  which  united  the  peninsula  of 
Peloponnesus  to  the  mainland  of 
Greece.  It  was  built  on  the  north  of  a 
rocky  mount,  which  rose  abruptly  about 
two  thousand  feet  above  the  level  of 
the  sea,  and  served  as  a  citadel,  called 
Acrocorinthus.  From  its  top  the 
hills  about  Athens  and  the  Acropolis 
could  be  seen.  The  city  had  two  har- 
bors: the  eastern  at  Cenchrsea  (ver.  is) 
on  the  Saronic  Gulf,  now  called  the 
Gulf  of  Egina,  where  Paul  landed ; 
the  western  at  Lechseum,  on  the 
Corinthian  Gulf,  now  the  Gulf  of 
Patras  and  Lepanto.  The  city  was 
destroyed  by  the  Romans  under  Lucius 
Mummius,  B.  c.  146,  and  the  place  re- 
mained desolate  for  a  century ;  but  in 
B.  c.  46  it  was  rebuilt  and  made  a  col- 
ony (16:  la)  by  Julius  Csesar.  It  was 
also  made  the  capital  of  the  Roman 
province  of  Achaia,  and  the  residence 
of  the   Proconsul.      It    again   became 

f>rosperous,  wealthy,  and  extremely 
icentious.  It  was  the  commercial 
metropolis  of  Greece,  where  also  the 
arts  and  literature  were  cultivated. 
Vice,  too,  was  displayed  without  shame. 
So  lax  were  the  morals  at  Corinth,  that 
to  Corinthianize  was  synonymous  with 
profligate  indulgence.  The  site  is  now 
only  marked  with  a  few  ruins,  and  a 
small  malarious  town,  called  Gortho. 
Its  advantages  for  trade  had  attracted 
a  large  population  of  Jews.  It  thus 
afforded  a  most  favorable  place  for  the 
planting  and  the  spreading  of  the  gos- 
pel. 

2.  Paul  entered  Corinth  a  stranger, 
and  perhaps  penniless.  He  knew  what 
it  was  to  suffer  "  hunger  and  thirst." 
(s  Cor.  11 :  27.)  But  God  provided  for  him 
lodging  and  the  means  of  livelihood. 
He  found  a  certain  Jew  named 
Aquila.    Some  infer  that  he  was  not 


now  a  Christian,  from  the  way  he  is 
here  mentioned,  as  a  Jew  and  not 
styled  a  disciple.  Others  suppose  that 
he  had  embraced  the  gospel  before 
leaving  Rome,  because  nothing  is  here 
said  of  his  conversion.  If  he  was  not 
a  Christian,  he  soon  became  one  ;  for 
considerable  Christian  growth  is  im- 
plied in  ver.  26.  He  went  with  Paul 
to  Ephesus  (ver.  18, 19,  J6),  and  was  there 
when  Paul  wrote  the  First  Epistle  to 
the  Corinthians  (i  Cor.  i6:  i9),  and  at 
Rome,  when  Paul  wrote  his  Epistle  to 
the  Romans  (Rom.  i6:3),  and  again  at 
Ephesus  during  Paul's  second  impris- 
onment, (a.  Tim.  1:19.)  Bom  in  Pon- 
tus  —  the  northeastern  province  in 
Asia  Minor.  (See  oo  2:9.)  A  coincidence 
has  been  noted  in  that  Aquila  who 
translated  the  Old  Testament  into 
Greek  more  literally  than  the  Septua- 
gint,  living  more  than  a  half  century 
later,  was  a  Jew  also  born  in  Pontus. 
Italy— its  ordinary  application  to  the 
peninsula  between  tlie  Alps  and  the 
Straits  of  Messina.  (27 : 1, 6;  Heb.  1.3 : 21.) 
Claudius — the  fourth  Roman  em- 
peror, from  A.  D.  41-.i4,  a  weak-minded 
and  irresolute  man,  who  could  be  easily 
used  by  designing  and  wicked  men. 
His  weak  and  foolish  reign  was  ended 
through  poisoning  by  his  fourth  wife 
Agrippina,  the  mother  of  Nero.  (11 :  28.) 
Had  commanded  all  Jews  to 
depart  from  Rome — Suetonius  con- 
firms this  statement,  when  he  says 
(Claudius  c.  25),  "  He  expelled  the 
Jews  from  Rome  who  were  constantly 
making  disturbance,  being  instigated 
by  Chrestus."  This  may  refer  to  some 
leader  of  that  name  at  that  time.  But 
as  Christ  lis  was  frequently  pronounced 
Chrestus  by  the  pagans,  it  may  refer  to 
some  tumult  connected  with  the  expec- 
tation of  a  Messiah  ;  or  some  dispute 
about  Christianity,  or  to  some  riot  of 
the  Jews  against  their  Christian  breth- 
ren, as  at  Thessalonica  and  other  places. 
(17:5,13.)  Neander  does  not  believe 
that  this  banishment  of  Jews  from 
Rome  had  any  "  real  connection  with 


288 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVIII. 


depart  froiu  Itome:)  and  caiue  unto  them. 

3  And  because  he  was  of  the  same  craft,  he 
abode  with  them,  ""and  wrought:  for  by 
their  occupation  they  were  tentmakcrs 

4  e  And  he  reasoned  in  the  synagogue  every 


sabbath,  and  persuaded  the  Jews  and  the 
Greelcs. 
5      And  fwhen  Silas  and  Timotheus  were 
come  from  Macedonia,  Paul  was  s  pressed 
in  the  spirit,  and  tesiiticd   to  the  Jews 


«ch.  20  :34;  1  Cor.  4:12;  9  :  6-12;  1  Tliess.  2:9;  2  Thess.  3  :  8,  9.        'oh.  17  :  2,  3.        <ch. 
17  :  14, 15.        J  ch.  4  :  20;  17  :  10  ;  Job  32  :  18 ;  Jer.  20  :  9. 


Christianity."  (Planting  and  Train- 
ing, p.  193.)  Suetouiiis  does  not  state 
the  date  of  this  expulsion.  But  Luke 
implies  that  it  was  lately  or  recently  ; 
and,  with  what  we  know  of  the  reign 
of  Claudius,  it  suits  well  with  A.  D.  52. 
Tacitus  {Annot.  xii.  5'2)  records  the 
expulsion  of  the  astrologers,  which 
occurred  in  A.  D.  52,  who  were  sus- 
pected of  aiding  consjiirators  against 
the  life  of  Claudius  by  their  astrology. 
But  whether  there  was  any  connection 
between  the  two  events  is  uncertain. 
The  dread  of  political  commotions  may 
have  been  at  the  foundation  of  both, 
and  the  two  may  have  been  near  to- 
gether. The  decree,  however,  did  not 
remain  long  in  force  (isris;  Rom.  i6 :3) ; 
not  longer  than  the  reign  of  Claudius, 
who  died  A.  D.  54.  Priscilla— a  di- 
minutive of  Prisca.  (Rom.  16  :  3;  l  Cor. 
16:19.)  In  the  six  times  in  which  she 
and  her  husband  are  mentioned  in  the 
New  Testament,  her  name  stands  first 
four  times  ;  from  whicli  we  may  infer 
that  she  was  the  stronger  character  of 
the  two. 

3.  And  because  he  was  of  the 
same  craft,  or  trade,  he  abode 
Avith  them  and  wrought.  Every 
Jewish  parent  liad  his  son  learn  some 
trade.  The  Jewish  Eabbins  were  no 
exception  to  this  rule.  The  great 
Hillcl  was  a  carpenter.  So  was  Jesus. 
(Mark  6:  3.)  Paul  labored  for  his  own 
sup]iort  not  only  here,  but  at  Thessa- 

lonica     (iThcs!!.  2  To;  3Thess.3:8),    and      at 

Ephesus.  (20 :  34.)  They  were  tent- 
makers.  There  Avas  a  great  demand 
for  j)ortable  tents  ))oth  for  travelers 
and  soldiers.  They  were  made  out  of 
leather,  linen,  and  goat-hair  cloth. 
Paul  probably  used  the  latter,  from  the 
hair  of  the  Cilician  goat,  which  was 
common  in  that  country.  As  he  was  a 
native  of  Cilicia,  this  may  account  for 
his  having  learned  this  trade.  Hu- 
manly speaking,  there  was  small  en- 
couragement to  a  humble  tent-maker 


to  evangelize  a  proud,  wealthy,  and 
vicious  city.  (1  cor.  4 :  12.)  Paul  deeply 
realized  this,  though  exercising  strong 
faith  in  God.  "  I  was  with  you,"  he 
says,  "  in  weakness,  and  in  fear,  and  in 
much  trembling."     (1  cor.  1  -.  3.) 

"  Tent-making  constitutes  an  import- 
ant occupation  in  Western  Asia  at  the 
present  day.  In  all  the  larger  cities, 
and  particularly  at  Constantinojde, 
there  is  a  portion  of  the  bazar,  or 
business  part  of  the  town,  entirely 
devoted  to  this  branch  of  industry. 
Here  may  be  seen  men  engaged  in  ctit- 
ting  and  sewing  canvas,  in  construct- 
ing or  finishing  ofl'  tents  of  various 
forms  and  sizes,  in  mending  and  repair- 
ing those  long  used,  or  packing  them 
uji  for  their  customers."  (Van- 
Lennep,  Bible  Lands,  p.  415.) 

4.  Paul,  as  was  his  custom,  avails 
himself  of  the  synagogue  for  preach- 
ing. (See  on  13: 5.)  Reasoned — or 
argued  with  them.  (i^:')  Per- 
suaded— sought  to  2^frsuade  them  to 
believe.  Greeks — proselytes  and 
other  Gentiles  who  attended  the  syna- 
gogue. 

5.  It  was  while  Paul  was  thus  labor- 
ing in  the  synagogue  that  Silas  and 
Timothy  came  from  Macedonia, 
the  northern  province  of  Greece.  (ib  :  9.) 
This  was  probably  not  long  after  Paul's 
arrival  at  Corinth.  He  had  left  Silas 
and  Timothy  at  Berea,  had  sent  for 
them  from  Alliens  to  come  to  him  as 
soon  as  possible,  and  was  waiting  for 
them  at  Athens.  (i7:H-in.)  The 
natural  impression  from  the  whole 
narrative  is,  that  this  was  the  coming 
whicli  Paul  had  commanded  and  was 
waiting  for ;  and  that  Silas  and  Timo- 
thy came  together,  though  it  is  possible 
to  understand  the  language  to  mean 
that  they  came  one  after  the  other 
about  the  same  time.  (seeon  i7:i6.) 
But  ^x\ven  Silas  and  Timotheus  were 
come,  etc.  There  seems  to  be  some 
connection  between  their  coming  aud 


Ch.  XVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


289 


thtl  Jesus  teas  Christ  [or,  is  the  Christ]. 
6  And  when  they  opposed  themselves,  and 
blasphemed,  ■■  he  shook  his  raiment,  and 
said  unto  them,  '  Vour  blood  be  upon 
your   own  heads ;  ^  I   am    clean :    from 


'henceforth  I  will  go  unto  the  Gentiles. 

7  And  he  departed  thence,  and  entered  into 
a  certain  man's  house,  named  '"  Justus, 
one  that  worshipped  God,   whose  house 

8  joined    hard    to    the  synagogue.    "And 


'  ch.  13  :  51 ;  Neh.  5  :  13. 
3  :  18,  19 ;  33  :  8,  U. 


i  2  Sam.  1  :  10;  Ezek.  18  :  13;  33  :  4. 
1  ch.  13  :  46,  47 ;  28  :  28.        "  Col.  4  :  11. 


k  ch.  20  :  26,  27  ;  Ezek. 
n  1  Cor.  1  :  14. 


the  statement  regarding  Paul  that  fol- 
lows. It  gave  him  a  new  imjjulse. 
Instead  of  the  spirit,  the  most  ap- 
proved reading  is  the  tvord.-.  He  was 
enyrosscd,  closely,  or  completely  occu- 
pied with  the  word.  Not  that  Silas 
and  Timothy  found  Paul  thus,  but  their 
coming  was  followed  by  this  increased 
activity,  and  was  in  some  way  produc- 
tive of  it.  (see2  Cor.  2 :  13;  7 :6.)  Per- 
haps they  brought  gifts  from  the  Mace- 
donian churches  wliich  relieved  Paul 
and  allowed  him  to  give  himself  more 

wholly  to  the  work.       (2  Cor.  U  :  9  ;  1  Xhess. 

3:6.)  Besides,  he  had  their  co-opera- 
tion and  aid  in  preaching  the  gospel. 
(2  Cor.  1:19.)  Testified  to  the  Jcws — 
making  them  the  first  offer  of  salvation 
as  usual.  (Rom.  i;ib.)  That  Jesus 
Avas — or  is,  the  Christ.  Up  to  this 
time  his  discussions  in  the  synagogue 
had  been  in  a  measure  preliminary, 
pointing  toward  Jesus  as  the  Christ, 
such  as  the  office,  nature,  and  work 
of  the  Messiah.  Now  he  proves  from 
the  Scriptures  and  positively  affirms 
that  the  Old  Testament  predictions  are 
fulfilled  in  Jesus  as  the  Christ,  giving 
evidences  of  his  resurrection  and  as- 
cension ;  and  he  presses  home  upon 
their  consciences  their  duty  to  accept 

him.      (See  1  Cor.  2  :  2;  2  Cor.  1  :  19.) 

6.  Paul's  earnestness  aroused  oppo- 
sition. His  experience  was  like  that 
at  Antioch  in  Pisidia.  (13 :  45, 46.)  They 
opposed — thry  themselves  resisting,  ar- 
raying tliemselves  in  concerted  opposi- 
tion. Blasphemed — ridiculed  and 
maliciously  reviled  Paul's  message. 
(1  Thess.  2 :  15, 16.)  He  shook  his  rai- 
ment—the very  dust  from  his  gar- 
ments, as  a  witness  and  a  protest 
against  their  conduct.  (See  on  13 :  51 ;  M.nt. 
10:  u.)  Yoiir  blood  be  upon  your 
own  heads — the  blame  and  conse- 
quences of  your  guilt  rest  upon  you 
personally.  You  alone  will  be  respon- 
sil)le  for  tlie  destruction  that  awaits 
you.  The  expression  was  familiar  to 
T 


the    Jews.      (SeeEzek.  34:  *:  Matt.  27:  25.)      I 

am  clean— guiltless,  having  dis- 
charged my  duty,  and  you  refuse  to  re- 
ceive God's  message  of  salvation.  Some 
punctuate  so  as  to  read,  /  shall  hence- 
forth go  pure,  that  is,  blameless,  with  a 
pure  conscience,  to  the  Gentiles,  (see  «a 
13 :  46.)  Paul  felt  under  obligation  to 
ofler  the  gospel  first  to  the  Jew.  (see 
Rom.  9:1-3;  10: 1.)  But  further  offers  to 
these  blaspheming  Jews  at  Corintli 
would  be    like  casting   pearls  before 

swine.       (Matt.  7:6.) 

7.  Being  opposed  and  interrupted 
by  the  Jews,  so  that  he  could  not  work 
to  advantage,  Paul  departed  thence, 
from  the  synagogue,  and  entered 
into  a  certain  man's  house,  not 
merely  for  this  once,  but  rather  as  a 
permanent  meeting-place.  God  had 
work  for  him  to  do,  and  provided  a 
place  for  him  to  do  it.  It  is  not  im- 
plied that  he  changed  his  lodging. 
Named  Justus.  Some  of  the  oldest 
manuscripts  and  versions  read,  Titius 
Justus.  This  was  not  the  Titus  of  the 
Epistle  and  the  companion  of  Paul, 
who  already  was  a  disciple,  and  two 
years  before  this  had  accompanied 
Paul  from  Antioch  to  Jerusalem  to  the 
Apostolic  Conference.  (Gni,  2:  i;  Acts 
15:2.)  One  Avho  Avorshipped  God 
— not  a  Jew,  nor  yet  a  Christian,  but 
a  devout  Gentile  who  had  embraced 
the  Jewish  faith.  He  doubtless  be- 
came a  disciple.  His  house  seems  to 
have  been  of  sufficient  size  for  Paul's 
congregation.  The  court-yard  could 
have  been  used  for  tliis  pnrpo,se. 
Whose  house  joined  hard — or 
was  adjoining  the  synagogue — here, 
the  building  ;  in  1.3  :  42,  tlie  assembly. 
The  house  was  convenient,  being  close 
to  his  former  meeting-])lace.  It  thus 
served  as  a  protest,  a  reminder,  and  an 
invitation,  to  all  his  former  hearers. 

8.  This  sudden  departure  of  Paul 
from  the  synagogue  brought  mattois  to 
a  crisis.    Crispus,  the  Roman  name 


290 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVllI. 


Crisjms,  the  chief  ruler  of  the  synagogue, 
behfved  on  the  Lord  with  all  his  house. 
And  many  of  the  Corinthians  hearing  be- 
lieved, and  were  baptized. 
9  Then  <•  spake  the  Lord  to  Paul  in  the 
night  by  a  vision,  PBe  not  afraid,  but 
10  speak,  and  hold  not  thy  peace :  i  for  I  am 


no    man    shall  set  on 
'  for  I  have  much  peo- 


with  thee,  and 
thee  to  hurt  thee 
pie  in  this  city. 

And '  he  continued  ihfre  a  year  and  six 
months,  teaching  the  word  of  God  among 
them. 


I  ch.  IC  :  9  ;  23  :  11.        P  Jer.  1  :  17  ;  see  1  Cor.  2:3.        q  Josh.  1  :  5,  9  ;  Jer.  1  :  18,  19  ;  John 
14  :  18-23.      '  Jer.  15  :  20 ;  Luke  21  :  18.      »  ch.  15  :  14 ;  John  10  :  16.      <  see  2  Cor.  12  :  12. 


of  the  ruler  of  the  synagogue  (see  on 
13:15),  believed  on  the  Lord  Jesus. 
Omit  chief.  From  his  office  it  may 
be  inferred  that  he  was  a  man  of  in- 
fluence and  learning.  He  was  one  of 
the  few  whom  Paul  baptized  with  his 
own  hands.  He  also  baptized  there 
Gains  and  the  household  of  Stephanas. 
(1  Cor.  1 :  1416.)  Others  were  baptized 
probably  by  Silas  and  Timothy. 
With  all  his  house.  Another  ex- 
ample of  the  conversion  of  an  entire 
household.  (i6:i5, 3«.)  Paley  notices 
how  the  dift'erences  between  Luke  here 
and  Paul  in  1  Cor.  1  :  14-17  confirm 
the  truthfulness  of  each  other.  If  the 
Epistle  had  been  Avritteu  to  suit  the 
history,  the  names  of  Stephanas  and 
Gaius  would  have  been  omitted,  and 
if  the  history  had  been  framed  to  suit 
the  Epistle  their  names  would  have 
been  added.  Many  of  the  Corinth- 
ians —  Gentiles,  native  Greeks  of 
Corinth,  principally  from  the  middle 
and  lower  classes,     (i  cor.  i :  w.) 

9.  At  this  point  there  appears  to 
have  been  some  respite  in  the  work. 
Jewish  opposition  was  violent,  and 
Paul  j)robai>ly  begins  to  feel  it  l)est  to 
seek  another  field  of  labor,  perhajis  to 
return  toward  Athens  and  thence  into 
Macedonia.  But  the  Lord  speaks  to 
him  in  the  night  by  a  vision — in 
some  .supernatural  ajtjiearance,  or  pos- 
sibly in  a  dream.  (secon9:io.)  Be 
not  afraid,  but  speak,  and 
hold  not  thy  peace.  It  is  a  fair 
infen-iice  that  Paul,  at  this  time, 
needed  special  direction  and  encour- 
ai^ement.  (soe  i  Coi.  2 :  .•!.)  He  may  have 
been  troubled  with  bodily  weakness, 
"the  thorn  in  the  flesh'"' (2  C'"-i2: '), 
and  the  consequent  depression  of  feel- 
incfs.  It  must  have  been  a  comfort  to 
I'aul  that  the  Lord  addrese<i  him,  in 
this  and  the  next  verse,  in  the  words 
spoken  long  before  to  Jeremiah  (1 : 8), 
and  to  ancient  Israel.    (la*. « :  5.) 


10.  No  man  shall  set  on  thee 
to  hurt  thee — which  proved  true  in 
his  experience  for  eighteen  months. 
(ver.  11.)  Some  would  translate,  So  as 
to  hurt  thee.  The  attempt  of  the  Jews 
later  proved  an  ignominious  failure. 
(Ver.  r2 :  17.)  Immediately  after  the  eight- 
een mouths  Paul  may  have  been  ab- 
sent from  Corinth  for  a  time,  (see  on 
Ter.  11.)  For  I  have  much  people 
in  this  city — prospectively.  They 
were  the  true  Israel  who  would  yet  be- 
lieve ;  and  already  his  chosen  ones, 
and  known  to  him  as  such.  (13 :  48 ;  Rom. 
8:29.)  Paul  was  being  prepared  to 
write  his  great  Epistle  to  the  Komans, 
a  few  years  later. 

11.  He  continued  there — liter- 
ally, he  sat  donii  there,  that  is,  he  so- 
journed, or  dwelt  there.  The  same 
verb  is  used  in  Luke  24  :  49  :  "  Tarry 
ye  in  the  city  of  Jeru.salem."  It  here 
suggests  the  restfiil  state  of  Paul's  mind 
after  he  had  received  the  revelation 
from  the  Lord.  He  tarried  in  i)eace 
and  quiet  a  year  and  six  months,  after 
whicli  the  disturbance  occurred  related 
in  the  next  verses.  A  year  and  six 
months.  Either  the  whole  time  of 
his  residence  at  Corinth,  or  the  time 
during  which  he  was  free  from  assault, 
previous  to  the  event  mentioned  in  the 
next  verse.  The  former  is  the  more 
common  view ;  the  latter  is  held  by 
Meyer  and  some  others.  The  latter  is 
preferaVde,  because:  1.  It  more  ex- 
actly fulfills  the  promise  of  the  Lord  in 
ver."  10.  2.  His  teaching  the  word  of 
God  among  them,  that  is,  in  the  city 
of  Corinth  (vrr.  10),  rather  implies  that 
during  this  period  he  gave  attention 
to  this  city  work,  and  hence  that  after 
this    he    labored     in    other    parts    of 

Achaia.         (2Cor.  1:1:    Rom.  16:1.)         3.      It 

seems  also  more  natural  to  regard  the 
"yet  many  days"  of  ver.  18  as  addi- 
tional to  "  the  year  and  six  months  " 
of  ver.  11.    4.  The  year  and  six  months 


Ch.  XVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


291 


12  And  when  Gallio  was  the  deputy  of 
Achaia,  the  Jews  made  insurrection  with 
one  accord  against  Paul,   and  brought 


13  him  to  the  judgment  scat,  saying,  This 
fellow   persuadeth  men   to  worship  God 


may  be  the  entire  time  of  Paul's 
first  visit  to  Corinth,  after  which  he 
goes  to  Achaia  and  revisits  Athens,  in- 
tending to  go  to  Thessalonica,  but  is 
hindered,  and  sends  Timotliy  in  liis 
place.  (lThes3.2  :18;  3:  1.)  Paul  then 
returns  to  Corinth,  making  his  second 
visit  to  that  city.  This  would  make 
his  coming  into  Greece,  recorded  in 
20  :  2,  A,  his  third  visit,  which  accords 
with  2  Cor.  13  :  1 :  "  This  is  the  third 
time  I  am  coming  to  you."  This  affords 
a  beautiful  way  of  harmonizing  several 
passages  regarding  Paul's  intended 
visit  to  Thessalouica,  and  his  third 
visit  to  Corinth.  There  is  much  to 
commend  this  view.  (See  Harmonic 
Arrangement  of  Acts,  ^  34.) 

13.  And — better.  But,  contrasting 
with  the  preceding  quiet  (ver.  ii),  and 
introducing  something  new  and  later. 
It  is  entirely  consistent  with  Luke's 
brief  and  concise  history  to  suppose 
several  weeks,  or  even  two  or  three 
months  to  have  elapsed  between  this 
verse  and  the  last.  This  would  give 
abundant  time  for  Paul's  unfinished 
journey  to  Thessalouica  by  the  way  of 
Athens,  and  his  return  to  Corinth,  per- 
forming missionary  labors  in  various 
places  in  Acliaia.  See  preceding  verse. 
Luke  says  nothing  of  this ;  and  so  he 
says  nothing  of  Paul's  visit  to  Arabia 
soon  after  his  conversion  (9:20-25;  Gai. 
1 :  n),  and  of  many  other  things  men- 
tioned in  the  Epistles.  Such  a  visit  to 
Athens  seems  probable.  It  would  be 
natural  for  Paul  to  desire  to  see  the 
brethren  there,  and  to  carry  forward 
the  work  which   he  had  commenced, 

but     so     soon     had     left.         (See  on  17  ;  3i.) 

When  Gallio  Avas  deputy,  or  pro- 

consnl  of  the  province  of  Achaia. 
Under  the  two  preceding  emjterors, 
Tiberius  and  Caligula,  Achaia  was  an 
imperial  province,  and  its  governor  was 
a  Propra?tor,  but  under  the  Emperor 
Claudius  (Jan.,  A.  D.  41-Oct.,  54)  it 
became  a  senatorial  province,  and  its 
governor  was  a  Proconsul,  (see on  13  : 7.) 
This  is  another  illustration  of  Luke's 
accuracy.  Gallio  was  a  brother  of  the 
celebrated  Stoic  moralist,  Seneca,  who 


I  speaks  of  him  as  having  resided   in 
Achaia,  but  says  nothing  of  liis  official 
])(>sition    there.     But  Pliny    refers    to 
his  consulship,  and  does  not  say  where 
it  was.     He   is  rejjrescnted  as  a  ciilti- 
vatwl   and    polisheil    scholar,    popular 
and  belove-d  as  a  man.     Seneca  writes 
of  him  in  terms  of  highest   ])raise   and 
ali'ectioil :     "  ily  brother  Gallio,  whom 
every  one  loves  too  little,  even  he  who 
I  loves    liim    most."     He   prol3aI)ly   had 
I  not   been    Proconsul  long ;    and  some- 
what later  he  appears  to  have  resigned 
on  account  of  his  health.  He  died  A.  D. 
loo.     The  Koman  jn-uvince  of  Achaia 
included   all  of  Greece  excej)t   Mace- 
donia.    The  JeAvs  made  insurrec- 
tion, etc. — rather,  rose  up  with  one  ac- 
j  cord   against  Paul.     According  to  the 
!  view  suggested   above,   Paul   had    re- 
j  turned    after    several  weeks'   absence, 
and  the  fresh  impetus  he  gives  to  the 
I  work  aroused  the  hostility  of  the  Jews. 
With  preconcerted  and   united  action, 
Sosthenes    being   their     leader,     they 
brought  Paul  as  a  prisoner  before  the 
judgment  seat.    This  was  a  chair, 
or  raised  platform,  movable,  but  some- 
times stationary,   used  as  the  official 
seat  of  a  judge. 

13.  The  charge  against  Paul  is  simi- 
lar to  tluit  at  Philippi  and  Tliessalonica. 
(la :  21 ;  17 : 7.)  In  tliosc  instaiices  it  was 
made  by  Gentiles  in  reference  to  Roman 
law  ;  in  the  present  by  Jews  in  erpiivo- 
cal  terms,  the  real  reference  being  to 
the  Mosaic  law.  This  felloAV — this 
one,  uttered  doulitless  with  contempt. 
To  worship  God — a  phrase  used  in 
reference  to  the  worship  of  Jehovah 
by  Gentiles.  (v.t.  7;  i6:  u.)  Per- 
suadeth —  solicits  and  incites,  and 
really  accomplishes  it.  Men — in  gen- 
eral Jews  and  Gentiles.  Contrary 
to  laAV — purposely  indefinite.  To  pro- 
mulgate a  religion  not  sanctioned  by 
the  government  was  contrary  to  Roman 
law.  (seeoni6:2i.)  The  Jews  also  held 
tliat  Paul  was  a  jicrverter  of  their  own 
law  (21 :  21),  which  the  Romans  allowed 
them  to  o})serve,  but  would  not  enforce. 
Luke  evidently  gives  only  a  summary 
of  the    charge.     Gallio    learns    from 


292 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVIII. 


14  contrary  to  the  law.  Aud  »  when  Paul 
was  now  about  to  open  his  mouth,  Gallic 
said  unto  the  Jews, » If  it  were  a  matter 
of  wrong,  or  wicked  lewdness,  O  ye  Jews, 
reason  would  that  I  should  bear  with  you  : 

15  but  if  it  be  J  a  question  of  words  and 
names,  and  of  your  law,  look  ye  to  it ;  for 


16  I  will  be  no  judge  of  such  matters.  And 
he  drave  them  from  the  judgment  seat. 

17  Then  all  the  Greeks  took  »SostLeues,  the 
chief  ruler  of  the  synagogue,  and  beat 
him  before  the  judgment  seat.  And  Gallio 
cared  for  none  of  those  things. 


»  1  Peter  3  :  14,  15. 


:  ch.  23  :  29  ;  25  :  11 ;  Kom.  13  :  3.       J  ch.  2.i  :  19 ;  2G  ;  3. 


what  they  further  state,  or  by  question- 
ing, that  the  real  trouble  is  iu  regard 
to  the  Jewi.sh  law.  (ver.  i5.)  The  Jews 
may  have  thought  Gallio  inexperienced, 
and  this  may  have  been  their  first  ease 
before  him.  His  kind  disposition,  and 
his  gentle  manner  toward  them,  may 
have  given  them  hope  of  success.  They 
also  may  have  heard  how  Paul  had 
been  driven  away  from  the  cities  of 
Macedonia,  and  perhaps  thought  to 
accomplish  the  same  iu  Greece. 

14.  But  the  Jews  had  to  deal  with  a 
dili'erent  man  from  the  magistrates  and 
rulers  of  Philippi  and  Thessalonica. 
Gallio  yields  neither  to  jiopular  clamor 
nor  prejudice,  but  disposes  of  the  case 
summarily  and  justly.  Paul  Mas  about 
to  speak  in  his  own  defense ;  but  Gallio 
decides  that  this  is  unnecessary,  and 
proceeds  to  dismiss  the  case.  If  it 
were  a  matter  of  wron^— of  injus- 
tice, violating  your  civil  rights,  or  of 
wicked  lewdness,  rusca/iti/,  not  di- 
rectly opposed  to  any  specific  stiitute  ; 
jf  indeed  it  belonged  to  any  cla.ss  of 
oflences  which  should  come  before  a 
Koman  magistrate,  reason  would 
that  I  should  bear  with  you,  and 
give  you  a  patient  hearing.  But  such, 
it  is  implied,  was  not  the  case.  Gallio 
])erceives  that  it  was  not  an  infraction 
of  Roman  law,  nor  of  personal  im- 
morality and  misconduct. 

15.  But  if,  as  appears  to  be  the 
case,  it  be  a  question — the  most  ap- 
proved reading  has  the  jdural,  Jiiit  if 
thfij  are  quest  ions  or  covtroverxirs  about 
a  word  or  doctrine,  and  names  and  your 
otni  lain  Gallio  doubtless  knew  some- 
thing of  Christianity  wliich  was  spread- 
ing throughout  the  empire,  though 
looking  upon  it  as  a  sect  of  Judaism. 
Tlie  discussions  regarding  Jesus  as  the 
Messiah  he  regarded  as  a  matter  of 
doctrine  and  names.  Look  ye  to  it — 
it  is  not  a  matter  for  me  to  decide  ;  it 
pertains  to  your  own  law,  and  you 
must  see  to  it.    Omit  For.    I  will  be 


no  judge,  etc.  I  do  not  wish  to  be  a 
judeje  of  these  things.  It  was  not  in 
the  province  of  his  court.  The  Roman 
law  allowed  the  Jews  to  regulate  their 
own  religious  matters.  Compare  the 
action    of    Lysias    (m:29)    and    Festus 

(25:20);       also"    of      Pilate.        (.Tohn  is  ;.■)!.) 

There  is  also  a  kind  of  contemiituons 
indifierence  implied  toward  these  Jew- 
ish and  Christian  matters,  characteris- 
tic of  such  a  Roman  as  Gallio,  and  in- 
dicative of  the  simple  truthfulness  of 
the  narrative. 

16.  And  he  diave,  or  drove,  them 
from  the  judgment  seat.  lie  dis- 
missed them  in  a  pcreni])tory  manner, 
but  not  necessarily  with  violence. 

17.  So  utter  a  failure  was  this  at- 
temjjt  of  the  .lews  against  Paul  that 
the  leader  was  beaten  by  the  rabble, 
and  the  matter  treated  with  indifference 
by  Gallio.  Then  all  the  Greeks. 
Greeks  should  be  omitted,  according  to 
the  best  critical  authorities.  There  is 
even  less  authority  for  inserting  Jews 
in  place  of  Greeks,  as  in  some  later 
manuscripts.  Simply,  And  they  all, 
the  crowd  of  pagans  who  were  a))out 
the  court,  seeing  the  discomfiture  of  the 
Jews,  took  Sosthenes.  A  very  little 
matter  will  sometimes  arouse  a  mob, 
especially  if  they  are  prejudiced,  as 
were  these  pagans  against  the  Jews. 
Sosthenes  was  the  rnler  of  the  synagogue 
(see on  ver.  8),  Avho  perhajis  had  taken  the 
place  of  Crispus.  As  the  rei)rescnta- 
tive  of  the  Jewish  prosecutors  he  is 
beaten  publiclv  before  the  judg- 
ment seat,  with  tlie  full  knowledge 
of  Gallio,  if  not  in  his  jiresenee.  Paul 
in  his  First  E])istle  to  the  Corinthians 
joins  with  his  own  name  Sosthe7tes 
the  brother,  as  one  well  known  to  them, 
and  then  at  Ephesus.  If  he  is  the  same 
as  the  one  mentioned  here  then  lie  must 
have  been  converted  later,  possibly 
through  the  kindness  of  Paul  and  the 
disciples.  (Rom.  12 :  20. 21.)  But  little 
stress  can  be  laid  on  the  mere  name,  as 


Ctr.  XVIIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


293 


18     And  Paul  after  this  tarried  there  yet  a 


good  while,  and  then  took  his  leave  of  the 


it  was  a  cornmou  oue.  And  Gallio 
cared,  etc.,  or,  Nane  of  these  thinr/s 
concenifd  Gallio.  la  harmony  witli 
his  Stoic  philosophy,  he  treated  the 
disorderly  affair  with  silent  and  placitl  I 
indifference.  In  his  breast  he  very 
likely  favored  the  apostle;  and  he  may 
not  have  been  inilifferent  to  religious 
truth,  lie  was  ri^'ht  in  not  listening 
to  the  complaint  of  the  Jews  against 
Paul ;  but  he  was  wrong  in  not  keep- 
ing the  peace.  He  doubtless  shared  in 
the  general  prejudice  and  contempt  of 
the  Komans  toward  the  Jews ;  and  may 
have  viewed  with  secret  delight  the 
tables  turned  against  tliem ;  and  was 
also  dis[»osed  to  treat  easily  anything 
that  did  not  really  weaken  the  Roman 
authority,  or  seriously  threaten  the 
peace  of  the  city.  The  account  of  the 
whole  transaction  is  in  full  accord  with 
what  historians  rei)ort  of  him  as  a  man 
of  integrity  and  suavity,  of  gentle  and 
easy  manners. 

We  have  now  entered  upon  the  pe- 
riod of  letter-writing  in  the  life  of  Paul. 
His  First  Epistle  to  the  Thessalonians 
was  written  from  Corinth  just  after 
Timothy's  return  from  them,  (irue.s. 
3:6.)  '"he  Second  Epistle  appears  to 
kave  been  written  soon  after  from  the 

same    place.       (l  XUesa.  *  :  le  ;    5  ;  l  ;    2  Thess. 

2 : 1  f.)  This  is  confirmed  by  the  fact 
that  Paul  joins  the  names  of  Timothy 
and  Silas  with  his  own  in  the  beginning 
of  both  Epistles.  Since  Paul  had  been 
lately  at  Athens  (i  Thess.  3 :  i),  and  Silas 
is  not  mentioned  at  any  time  with  Paul 
after  this  visit  at  Corinth,  these  Epistles 
must  have  been  written  about  this  time 
from  tliat  city.  If  Paul  revisited  Athens 
and  made  his  second  visit  to  Corinth 
(••  Cor.  13 : 1),  just  before  this  affair  before 
Gallio,  then  we  may  arrange  dates 
somewhat  as  follows :  Paul  first  arrived 
at  Corinth  about  August  1,  A.  D.  52,  and 
allowing  for  Jewish  modes  of  i-eckon- 
ing  eighteen  months,  he  closes  his 
labors  and  goes  to  Athens  about  De- 
cember 1,  A.  D.  53,  intending  to  go 
into  Macedonia,  but  is  hindered  the 
second  time  (i  Thess.  2 :  18)  by  Satan,  per- 
haps by  a  return  of  his  bodily  infirmity. 
{■>  Cor.  12 : 7.)  He  therefore  sends  Timo- 
thy in  his  place  {i  Thess.  3 : 1, 2jj  and  after 


remaining  a  time  at  Athens,  establish- 
ing the  church,  he  returned  to  Corinth 
after  an  absence  of  a  month  or  so. 
Both  to  and  from  Athens  he  may  have 
gone  by  land,  performing  missionary 
labor  in  places  on  hi.s  way.  This  second 
visit  to  Corinth  was  so  closely  connected 
with  his  first,  being  separated  only  by 
an  interval  of  a  few  weeks,  and  the  first 
being  the  longer  one  and  the  more  im- 
2)ortant,  that  Paul  himself  writes  at 
times  as  if  he  had  been  there  only  once. 
(1  Cor.  2:  1;  3:  1,  2,  6,  10.)  Ill  the  early 
spring  of  A.  D.  54,  Timothy  returns 
from  Thes.salonica,  when  Paul  writes  to 
them  his  First  Epistle ;  and  two  or 
three  months  later  he  sends  the  Second 
Epistle.  It  may  be  objected  to  so  late 
a  date  for  tliese  Epistles,  that  Paul 
speaks  of  being  separated  from  the 
Thessalonians  for  "  a  short  time." 
(i  Thess.  2 :  17.)  But  Paul  savs  this,  not  in 
reference  to  the  time  when  he  was 
writing  the  Epistle,  but  to  the  time 
when  he  was  earnestly  endeavoring  to 
"see  tlieir  face."  Being  driven  from 
Thessalonica  (n :  s-io)  he  felt  "bereaved  " 
(1  Thess.  2 :  17,  Rov.  Vu-.),  and  longed  to  see 
them,  and  endeavored  to  do  so.  Perhaps 
his  first  atteinjjt  to  go  to  them  was  at 
Berea  (n :  u),  or  perhaps  at  Corinth, 
before  the  Lord  appeared  to  him 
in  vision.  (i8:7.)  Either  of  these, 
witliin  a  period  of  one  to  three  months, 
would  have  been  "  a  short  time."  But 
the  words,  "  When  we  could  no  longer 
forbear  "  (i  Thess.  3 :  i)  indicate  a  consid- 
eralily  longer  period,  and  may  embrace 
a  period  of  eighteen  months  or  more, 
between  his  leaving  them  and  his  send- 
ing Timothy  in  his  place,  (i  Thess.  3:2.) 
(See  on  ver.  11;  also  on  17:  15,  16. 
Harmonic  Arrangement  of  Acts,  p.  218.) 
18-22.  Paul  Leaves  Corinth  and 
Returns  to  Antioch  by  Way  of 
i]phesus,  c^sarea,  and  jerusa- 
LEM. Paul  probably  arrived  at  Jeru- 
salem in  September,  A.  D.  54,  in  time 
for    the    Feast   of    the    Tabernacles. 

( Ver.  18.) 

18.  And  Paul  after  this,  etc. 
Rather,  And  Paul  having  tarried  yet 
many  days — that  is,  after  this  assault 
of  the  Jews.  (See  on  ver.  11.)  During  this 
period  he  may  have  extended  his  labors 


294                                           THE  ACTS.                           [Ch.  XVIII. 

brethren,  and  sailed  thence  into  Syria, 
and    with   him    Priscilla    and    Aquila ; 

having  •shorn  hit  head  in  bCenchrea: 

»  ch.  21  :  24;  Num.  6  :  5, 18 ;  1  Cor.  9  :  20.        b  Eom.  16  : 1. 

outside  of  Corinth,  and  gathered  the 
church  at  Cenchrea  (Rom.  i6 :  i) ;  and  also 
have  written  his  Epistles  to  the  TJiessa- 
louians.  (See  last  paragraph  on  ver.  17.) 
A  good  while — or  inaay  days ;  a  note 
of  time,  varying  according  to  circum- 
stances, having,  however,  an  idea  of 
largeness  rather  than  smallness.  It  can 
well  be  applied  here  to  a  period  of  sev- 
eral months.      (See  ou  9  :  23.) 

Then  took  his  leave — or,  having 
bid  them  farewell.  See  an  example  of 
his  leave-taking  in  Acts  20  :  36. 
Sailed)  or  departed  thence  into 
Syria — the  w)iole  journey  is  briefly 
conceived  without  its  interruptions. 
Having  shorn  his  head.  Some, 
among  them  Meyer,  suppose  that  this 
was  said  of  Aquila.  But  the  majority 
of  scholars  ap])ly  it  to  Paul.  For  (1) 
Paul  is  the  subject  of  the  whole  sen- 
tence, and  Priscilla  and  Aquila  are 
only  incidentally  mentioned  as  going 
with  him  to  Ephesus.  "  There  are 
from  ver.  18  to  23  inclusive,  no  less 
tlian  nine  aorist  participles,  eight  of 
which  indisputably  apjdy  to  Paul,  as 
the  subject  of  the  section,  leaving  it 
hardly  open  to  question  that  the  par- 
ticiple, having  shorn,  must  be  referred 
to  him  also."  (Alford.)  (2)  The  facts 
that  Paul  was  going  to  Jei'usalem,  and 
his  haste  at  Ephesus  to  leave  for  that 
city  (ver.  21),  indicate  that  he  had  taken 
the  vow  Avhich  would  be  completed 
according  to  the  Law  with  sacrifices  in 
the  temple.  (3)  The  suppo.sition  that 
Aquila  is  here  meant  seems  to  have  been 
an  after-thought,  a  vow  being  regarded 
as  inconsistent  in  Paul,  who  repudiated 
the  obligations  of  the  ceremonial  law. 
But  Paul  thought  it  sometimes  expedi- 
ent to  regard  ceremonial  observances. 
(21 :  21-24.)  (4)  There  seems  no  reason 
for  the  mention  of  such  a  fact  regarding 
a  person  of  minor  importance  like 
Aquila,  but  much  reason  regarding  the 
leading  personage  of  the  narrative. 
For  he  had  a  voav.  The  nature  of 
this  vow  has  been  mucli  discussed. 
Neander,  who  regards  this  as  a  Nazarite 
vow,  says :  "  There  was  at  that  time 
among  the  Jews  a  religious  custom, 


arising  most  probably  from  a  modifica- 
tion of  the  Nazarite  vow,  for  those  who 
Lad  been  visited  with  sickness  or  any 
other  great  calamity  to  vow,  that  if  they 
were  restored,  they  would  bring  a 
thank-otiering  to  Jehovah  in  the  tem- 
ple, would  abstain  from  wine  for  thirty 
days,  and  would  shave  their  heads." 
(Josephus,  Jew.  War,  ii.  15,  1.)  Paul 
had  probably  resolved,  on  the  occasion 
of  his  deliverance  from  some  danger 
during  his  last  residence  at  Corinth,  or 
on  his  journey  from  that  city,  publicly 
to  express  his  grateful  acknowledgment 
in  the  temj)le  at  Jerusalem.  The  form 
of  his  doing  this  was  in  itself  a  matter 
of  indiflerence ;  and  in  tlie  spirit  of 
Christian  wisdom  he  felt  no  scruple  to 
become  in  respect  of  form,  to  the  Jews 
a  Jew,  or  to  the  Gentiles  a  Gentile." 
{Planting  and  Training  of  the  Chris- 
tian Church,  p.  202.)  The  law  con- 
cerning the  Nazarite  is  found  in  Num- 
bers, ch.  6,  according  to  whicli  the 
cutting  ofi'  of  the  hair  took  place  at  the 
expiration  of  the  vow.  {-n-.-u.)  Abbott 
suggests  that  Paul  trimmed  his  hair  at 
Cenchrea,  preparatory  to  the  vow,  j)ur- 
posing  to  cut  his  hair  again  at  Jerusa- 
lem. But  why  record  such  an  unim- 
jtortant  matter  as  trimming  tlie  liair? 
Besides,  Luke  says  he  had  a  vow,  one 
already  assumed.  Farrar  suggests, 
tliat  "  it  seems  to  have  been  permitted 
to  the  Nazarite  to  cut  his  hair,  i>rovided 
he  kept  the  shorn  locks  until  he  ottered 
the  burnt-oftering,  the  sin-ort'ering,  and 
the  peace-oti'ering  in  the  temple,  at 
which  time  his  head  was  shaved  and  all 
the  hair  burnt  in  the  fire  under  the  sac- 
rifice of  the  peace-otFerings."  (Life  of 
St.  Paul,  p.  352.)  Such  suggestions  as 
the  above  are  possible.  The  original 
institution  may  have  been  modified  so 
as  to  meet  the  circumstances  of  tlie 
dispersed  Jews.  In  view  of  such  difli- 
culties  it  is  perhaps  better  with  Alex- 
ander to  regard  this  as  "  a  personal  or 
private  vow,  such  as  we  read  of  else- 
where, the  outward  formalities  of  which 
would  naturally  be  conformed  to  those 
of  which   the  law   took  cognizance." 

(Gen.  2!i :  20 ;  Lev.  27  :  3  ;  V'nu.  30  :  3  ;  Deut.  23  :  31  j 


Ch.  XVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


295 


19  for  he  had  a  vow.  Aud  he  came  to  Ephe- 
Bus,  aud  left  tliuiii  there:  but  lie  himself 
entereil  into  the  synagogue,  and  reasoned 

20  with  the  Jews.  Wlien  ihey  desired  h.iia 
to  tarry  longer  time  with  them,  he  con- 


21  sented  not :  hut  bade  them  farewell,  say- 
ing, <=  I  must  by  all  means  keep  this  feast 
that  Cometh  in  Jerusalem  :  but  I  will  re- 
turn again  unto  you,  ""if  God  will.  And 
he  sailed  from  Ephesus. 


'  ch.  19  :  21 ;  20  :  16 ;  Dout.  16  :  1.        «  Rom.  15  :  32  ;  1  Cor.  4  :  19  ;  James  4  :  13-15. 


Judg.  11  :  30;  1  Sam.  1  :  11 ;  2  Sam.  15  :  7.)       Ceil-* 

chrea  was  the  eastern  and  most  im- 
portant harljor  of  Corinth,  aliout  nine 
miles  from  that  city,  the  emporium  of 
its  trade  with  the  Asiatic  shores  of  the 
Mediterranean.  (Seeou  ver.  i.)  Its  idola- 
try was  of  tlie  same  licentious  character 
as  that  at  Corinth.  Its  modern  name 
is  Kikries,  where  ruins  mark  its  site. 

19.  And  he  came — rather,  accord- 
ing to  the  oldest  and  most  ajiproved 
text,  they  came;  that  is,  Priscilla  and 
Aquila  with  him.  (vcr.  is.)  He  left 
them  (Priscilla  and  Aquila,  ver.  2(3) 
there,  at  Ephesus.  It  seems  that  Paul 
left  Silas  and  Timothy,  to  continue  the 
work  at  Corinth  and  in  Achaia.  Silas 
is  last  mentioned  in  the  Acts  in  ver.  5. 
That  he  continued  with  Paul  at  Corinth 
is  evident  from  1  Thess.  1  :  1 ;  2  Thess. 
1:1.  He  probahly  returned  to  Jeru- 
salem somewhat  later.  Timothy  is 
again  mentioned  as  one  of  those  who 
administered  to  Paul  at  Ephesus,  three 
years  later.  (19:22.)  Ephesus  was 
the  capital  of  the  province  of  Asia,  (see 
ou  19 : 1.)  It  was  about  two  hundred  and 
fifty  miles  from  Corinth  on  the  opposite 
and  eastern  side  of  the  ^gean  Sea, 
and  was  a  stopping  place  in  voyages 
between  Greece  and  Syria.  Cicero  re- 
lates tliat  he  made  this  voyage  in 
fifteen  days,  and  returned  in  thirteen 
days,  both  long  voyages.  With  favor- 
ing winds  it  could  be  accomplished  in 
four  or  five  days.  But  he  himself 
entered  into  the  synagogue.  Paul 
appears  to  have  passed  a  Sabbath  at 
Ephesus  and,  according  to  his  custom, 
entered  the  synagogue  and  argued  with 
the  Jews  and  proselytes  regarding  the 
Christ.  "  Luke  cannot  well  mean  that 
the  apostle  separated  himself  from 
Priscilla  and  Aquila  and  went  into  the 
synagogue  without  them.  (Meyer.) 
So  unimportant  a  circumstance  would 
not  be  made  so  important.  Nor  is  it 
at  all  probable  that  there  was  op- 
posed in  the  writer's  mind  to  the  syna- 
gogue as  being  out  of  the  city  [A/ford)  ; 


for  in  that  case  some  intimation  like 
without  the  city  («eeifi :  u),  or  at  least 
(joimj  oat,  would  hardly  be  withheld 
from  the  reader."     (IIai^kett.) 

20.  They  desired  him  to  tarry 
longer  time.  A  similar  re((iiest 
was  made  to  Paul  in  Antioch  of  Pi- 
sidia.  (13: 42.)  Thus  Paul  made  a 
favorable  impression  upon  the  Jews  at 
Ephesus.  His  shorn  head  aud  his  vow 
doubtless  commended  him  to  them,  and 
helped  to  disabuse  their  minds  from 
any  prejudices  which  they  might  have 
received  from  reports  concerning  him. 
He  consented  not  —  his  haste  is 
best  explained  by  his  desire  to  reach 
Jerusalem  soon  and  fulfill  his  vow.  I 
must  by  all  means  keep  this 
feast  that  cometh  in  Jerusalem. 
Tischendorf,  Westcott  and  Hort,  and 
some  others  omit  these  words  as  an  in- 
terpolation. But  they  are  retained 
and  defended  by  Olshausen,  Meyer, 
Alford,  and  others.  The  omission  can 
be  more  easily  accounted  for  than  an 
interpolation.  If  a  transcriber  had 
been  minded  to  add  a  note,  it  would 
have  been  rather  about  the  vow  and 
the  offering  than  about  the  feast.  The 
omission  can  be  explained  with  great 
probability  by  supposing  that  some 
old  copyists  "  fell  into  the  natural 
mistake,  still  made  by  many  readers, 
of  believing  that  no  visit  to  Jerusalem 
is  mentioned  in  the  context,  and  there- 
fore thought  it  necessary  to  omit  a 
promise  which  was  not  fulfilled." 
(Alexander.)  What  feast  is  there 
meant,  is  uncertain.  It  could  hardly 
have  been  the  Passover,  for  navigation 
would  not  ordinarily  be  open  a  month 
before.  It  was  therefore  probably  the 
Pentecost,  or  the  Feast  of  Tabernacles. 
According  to  our  arrangement  of  dates 
in  this  and  the  two  preceding  chapters, 
we  prefer  the  latter.  And  tliis  accords 
with  Paul's  brief  \nsit  at  Jerusalem 
and  his  hasty  return  to  Antioch,  in 
order  that  he  might,  before  the  winter, 
commence  his  third  missionary  tour 


296 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XVIII. 


22      And  when  he  had  landed   at  Ctesarea,     Paul  visits  Galalia  and  Phrygia ;  Apollos  at 
<:  and  gone  up,  and  saluted  the  church,  he  Ephesus. 

wend  down  to  Antioch.  |  23      AND  after  he  had  spent  sometime  there. 


>  ch.  25  : 1,  9. 


through  Asia  Minor  toward  Ephesus. 
I  will  return  agaiu  unto  you.    He 

probably  now  determined  to  make 
Ephesus  his  next  field  of  labor  ;  and 
he  made  baste  to  fulfill  his  promise. 
(ver.M;  ia:i.)      If     God    wlll.      Thc 

Christian  Jjroviso.      (James  4  :  15.) 

'Z'i.  Landed  at  Caesarea.     (see on 

8:10)  And  gone  up — descriptive  of 
the  journey  from  the  lowlands  about 
Ctesarea  to  the  highlands  about 
Jerusalem.  The  church — tliat  at 
Jerusalem,  which  was  the  first  and 
mother  church,  and  is  thus  mentioned 
as  a  well  understood  designation,  in 
this  very  concise  and  rapid  narrative. 
This  was  Paul's  fourth  visit  to  Jeru- 
salem after  his  conversion.  Tliat  it 
was  very  brief,  probably  only  two  or 
three  days,  is  suggested  by  the  words, 
He  saluted  the  church,  etc.  After 
meeting  the  brethren  of  the  church, 
and  others  who  had  come  to  the  feast, 
and  presenting  necessary  olt'erings  con- 
nected with  his  vow,  he  leaves  for 
Antioch.  He  went  down  to  Auti- 
och — geographically  nuich  lower  than 
Jerusalem.  Thus  at  Antioch  in  Syria 
Paul  ended  his  second  missionary 
journey.  He  had  been  absent  about 
three  years  and  a  half.  According  to 
the  above  chronology  (ver.  21)  it  was 
October,  A.  D.  54,  probably  early  iu  the 
month. 

The  Third  Missionary  Toi^r  of 
Paul  is  related  from  this  point  to  21  : 
Ifi,  embracing  labors  in  Galatia  and 
Plirygia,  Ephesus,  Troas,  Macedonia, 
and  Greece,  and  his  journey  back  to 
Jerusalem,  the  whole  occupying  about 
three  and  a  half  years.  From  about 
the  last  of  November  of  A.  D.  54  to 
May  A.  D.  58. 

23-2S.  Pafl  Leaves  Antioch, 
AND  Visits  Galatia  and  Phrygia. 
Apollos  at  Ephesus.  (i  c.r.  ic :  1.  ■• ;  o^ii. 
2:11-21.)     The  winter  of  A.  D.  .54,  00. 

23.  And  after  he  had  spent 
some,  or  a  certain,  time  there,  at 
Antioch — an  indefinite  and  apparently 
short  period.  A  month  or  two  would 
meet  the  circumstances   of  the    case. 


Paul  would  not  prol>ably  delay  his  de- 
parture longer  than  the  last  of  Novem- 
ber, on  account  of  the  approaching 
winter.  It  is  probable  that  Paul's  en- 
counter with  Peter  occurred  during 
this  visit  at  Antioch.  (Gai.  2 :  11  r.)  In 
favor  of  this  it  may  be  said  :  (1)  That 
Paul's  Epistle  to  the  Galatians  shows 
that  a  reaction  in  favor  of  Judaizing 
was  manifesting  itself  at  Antioch. 
But  his  former  visit  immediately  after 
the  Apostolic  Conference  at  Jerusalem 
(15:31,35)  was  too  early  for  such  a  re- 
action. The  decrees  were  received  with 
joy,  and  followed  with  peace  and  pros- 
perity generally  among  the  churches. 
(i6:4,"5.)  (2)  Paul  writes  of  it  as  of 
late  occurrence  and  fresh  in  his  mind, 
and  it  fits  well  this  visit,  when  after 
the  terms  of  peace  between  Jewish  and 
Gentile  Christians  had  been  some  time 
observed,  the  repressed  Jewish  oppo- 
sition began  to  show  itself.  Such  is  the 
view  of  Neander,  Hackett,  Olshausen, 
and  many  others.  Barnabas  appears 
to  have  returned  from  his  mission  to  Cy- 
prus. (Gal.  2:13.)  These  circumstances, 
as  well  as  Paul's  promise  to  return  to 
Ephesus  (ver.  21),  may  liave  hastened  his 
departure  from  Antioch. 

He  departed — jjerhaps  never  to 
return  to  Antioch.  The  route  Paul 
took  is  uncertain.  He  probably  passed 
hastily  through  Cilicia  (i5:<i),  thence 
nortliward  to  Derbe  and  Lystra  (16: 1), 
where  Timothy,  who  may  have  visited 
his  home,  rejoined  him.  (See on  ver.  19.) 
Galatia  and  Phrygia — The  large 
interior  regions  of  Asia  Minor.  See  on 
16  :  6,  where  they  are  named  in  re- 
versed order.  Paul  now  prol)ably  goes 
northward  into  Galatia,  and  then 
passes  southwestward  through  Phry- 
gia toward  Ephesus.  In  order— vis- 
iting the  churclies  wliich  lay  on 
his  way  through  these  countries. 
Strengthening  all  the  disciples — 
By  encouragement  and  instruction. 
(14: 22 ;  1  Cor.  16: 1.)  It  should  be  noted 
that  Paul  passed  the  winter  iu  this 
region,  as  he  probably  did  also  in  his 
second  missionary  tour.     During  these 


Ch.  XVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


297 


he  departed,  and  went  over  a//  the  country 
of    fGalatia    and     Phrygia     in     order, 
Bstrengtiieniiig  all  the  disciples. 
24      •>  And  a  ceriaiu   Jew  named  Apollos, 
boru  at  Alexandria,  an  eloquent  man, 


and  '  mighty  in  the  Scriptures,  came  to 
25  Ephesus.  This  man  was  instructed  in 
the  way  of  the  Lord :  and  being  fervent 
in  the  spirit,  he  spake  and  taught  dili- 
gently the  things  of  the  Lord,  ^  knowing 


'Gal.  1  :  2;  4  :  14.         t  ch.  14  :  22  ;  15  :  32,  41.         h  1  Cor.  1  :  12  ;  3  :  5,  6  ;  4  :  6;  Titus  3  ■  13. 
1  Ezra  7:6;  Matt.  13  :  52.        k  ch.  19  :  3,  4 ;  Matt.  ch.  3. 


seasons  he  may  have  suffered  some  of 
the  privations  mentioned  iu  2  Cor.  11  : 
27,  "  in  liunger  and  thirst,  iu  fastings 
often,  in  cold  and  nakedness."  Xeno- 
phon  rehites  the  sufferings  of  tlie  Ten 
Thousand  from  wind  and  cold  and 
snow,  a  few  hundred  miles  east  of  this. 
{Anabasis  IV,  1,  5.)  The  winter  of 
1857  is  said  to  have  been  one  of  great 
severity.  In  Macedonia,  to  the  west- 
ward, the  road  from  Pliilippi  to  Thes- 
salouica  was  covered  with  deep  snow, 
and  became  for  a  time  impassible. 
Shepherds  and  travelers  were  frozen  to 
death,  and  many  flocks  perished.  In 
December,  1858,  the  thermometer  fell 
repeatedly  below  zero.  (Smith's  Dic- 
tionary, Neapoiis.) 

34.  Luke  leaves  Paul  among  the 
disciples  of  Galatia  and  Phrygia,  while 
he  narrates  some  events  at  Ephesus 
preijaratory  to  his  labors  in  that  city. 
A  certain  Jew  named  Apolios — 
He  was  born  and  educated  a  Jew,  be- 
came a  disciple  of  John  the  Baptist, 
and  was  more  fully  instructed  by 
Aquila  and  Priscilla.  Going  to  Cor- 
inth lie  gained  great  influence  by  his 
learning  and  elocpieuce.  (icor.  3:6.) 
Later  he  ajjpears  to  have  been  at  or 
near  Ephesus,  when  Paul  was  there 
(i  Cor.  16: 12),  wlio  years  after  testifies  his 
regard  for  him  in  Titus  .3  :  13.  Luther 
suggested  that  Apollos  wrote  the  Epis- 
tle to  the  Hebrews,  which  view  has 
been  favored  by  many  others.  He  was 
a  native  of  Alexandria,  a  city  in 
Egypt,  named  after  Alexander  the 
Great,  its  founder,  who  had  planted 
there  great  numbers  of  Jews.  It  was 
the  chief  seat  of  Hellenistic  learning 
and  philosophy.  Here  the  celebrated 
Greek  revision  of  the  Old  Testament, 
known  as  the  Septuagint,  was  made  ; 
and  Philo  represented  the  school  of  the 
Platouizing  Jews.  In  tlie  Apostolic 
age  it  had  one  of  the  largest  libraries 
in  the  world,  which  helped  to  make  it 
8u  educational  center,  and  a  rival  of 


Athens  and  Tarsus.  The  birth  and 
residence  of  Apollos  at  Alexandria  are 
an  assurance  that  he  had  come  in  con- 
tact with  the  culture  and  learning  for 
which  that  city  was  noted.  But  it  is 
aflirmed  that  he  was  eloquent,  or 
learned.  The  word  in  the  original 
may  include  both,  that  he  was  skilled 
in  history  and  in  utterance  a  rhetori- 
cian. He  was  especially  learned  in 
the  Old  Testament  Scriptures,  and 
mighty,  or  powerful,  in  the  use  of 
them.  (2T:m.  3 :  16, 17.)  Literally,  Came 
to  Epliesus,  being  mighty,  etc. 
This  power  in  the  use  of  Scriptui'e  is 
placed  last,  because  it  was  the  chief 
and  important  thing  I'egarding  him  at 
Ephesus  and  Corinth.  35.  This  man 
was  instructed,  etc.;  rather,  Tliis 
man  had  been  orally  instructed.  The 
reference  is  to  information,  or  elemen- 
tary instruction  by  word  of  mouth. 
The  word  is  translated  informed,  in 
21  :  21,  24.  He  had  not  seen  any 
written  documents  about  Jesus,  such 
as  the  Gospel  of  Matthew  which  had 
probably  been  written ;  nor  any  of 
those  narratives  to  which  Luke  refers 
in  his  Gospel.  (Luke  i :  1.)  In  the  way 
of  the  Lord — that  is,  Jesus.  He  had 
heard  of  Jesus,  of  his  life,  death,  and 
resurrection,  in  a  somewhat  imperfect 
way.  Being  fervent  in  tlie  spirit. 
OvaMthe.  (See  the  same  jthra.se  in  Rom. 
12  :  11.)  This  refers  to  his  zeal  and  ear- 
nestness, and  not  to  the  gifts  of  the 
Spirit  which  he  had  not  yet  re- 
ceived. He  spoke  and  taught  dili- 
gently, or  accurately,  so  far  as  he 
knew.  Compare  the  use  of  the  adverb 
in  Matt.  2:8;  Luke  1  :  3  ;  1  Thess.  5  : 
2  ;  Eph.  5  :  15.  The  things  of  the 
Lord — rather,  according  to  the  oldest 
manuscripts,  Things  concerning  Jesus, 
as  the  Christ.  So  far  as  he  knew  of 
Christ's  life,  death,  and  resurrection,  he 
taught  correctly,  showing  from  the  Old 
Testament  Scriptures  that  Jesus  had 
fulfilled  prophecy,  and  that  be  was  the 


298 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  xvin. 


26  only  the  baptism  of  John.  And  he  began 
to  speak  boldly  in  the  synagogue :  whom 
when  Aquila  and  Priscilla  had  heard 
they  took  him  unto  ihem,  and  expounded 
unto  him  the  way  of  God  more  perfectly. 


27  And  when  he  was  disposed  to  pass  into 
Achaia, '  the  brethren  wrote,  exhorting 
the  disciples  to  receive  him  :  who,  when 
he  was  come,  ■»  helped  them  much  which 


1 1  Cor.  16  :  3;  2  Cor.  3:1.        mi  Cor.  3  :  6. 


Messiah  who  was  to  come.  Know- 
ing   only  the   baptism   of  John, 

which  demauded  repentance,  faith  in  a 
coming    Messiah,    and    a    godly    life. 

(Matt.  3  :  2,  8,  12  ;  Mark  1:4;  John  1  :  15,  18.)       He 

knew  nothing  of  the  last  commission, 
which  enjoins  baptism  "  in  the  name 
of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  and  of 
the  Holy  Spirit."  (See  on  Matt.  28;  ao.) 
Apollos  had  })robably  been  baptized  by 
John  himself,  in  his  youth,  when  at- 
tending one  of  the  feasts  of  Jerusalem 
during  John's  ministry.  He  ai)]>eais 
to  have  known  that  John  pointed  to 
Jesus  as  the  Christ,  and  the  Lamb  of 
God  that  taketh  away  the  sin  of  the 
world.  He  probably  knew  that  many 
of  Christ's  disciples  had  been  John's 
disciples,  and  that  tlie  disciples  of 
Jesus  baptized  as  John  had  done. 
(John  4: 2.)  In  his  Alexandrian  home 
he  doubtless  heard  also  concerning 
Jesus  from  disciples  of  John  who  had 
come  from  Palestine. 

26.  He  began,  soon  after  coming 
to  Ephesus,  to  speak  boldly,  freely 
and  plainly,  as  it  was  his  ])rivilege  to 
do,  in  the  synagogue,  referring  to 
the  ministry  of  John  as  })rei>aratory  to 
the  coming  of  the  Messiah,  and  ex- 
pressing the  opinion  that  Jesus  was 
the  Messiah.  He  doubtless  enforced 
repentance,  a  change  of  heart,  and 
reformation  of  life.  Kut  lie  only  begun 
tlius  to  teach,  for  Aquila  and  Priscilla 
took  him  to  themselves  and  privately 
e-vponnded,  or  set  forth,  the  way  of 
God,  the  jilan  of  salvation,  ineluding 
the  distinctive  facts  and  doctrines  of 
Christ,  more  perfectly,  or  more  ex- 
actly. This  is  the  corresponding  word 
to  that  translated  diiujenthj,  or  cor- 
rectly, in  the  preceding  verse.  It  is 
found  in  2.3  :  15,  20  ;  24  :  22  ;  2(5  :  5. 
Among  other  things  they  doubtless  set 
forth  the  doctrine  of  Christ  as  the  Son 
of  God,  his  ascension  to  the  right  hand 
of  God,  the  descent  and  gifts  of  the 
Holy  Sjiirit,  the  institution  of  the 
Lord's  Supper,  and  the  last  commission 
(Matt.  28 :  20),  aud  the  gospel  equally  to 


Jew  and  Gentile,  (u  :  n.)  There  is  no 
evidence  that  Apollos  was  rebaptized. 
If  he  had  been  baptized  by  John,  there 
was  no  need  of  its  repetition,     (see  on 

19  :  5.) 

27.  And  when  he  was  minded 

— or  And  he  desiring,  soon  after  being 
more  accurately  instructe<l,  to  pass 
over  the  sea  into  Aehaia  (ver.  12)  to 
Corinth,  the  capital  of  the  province. 
(19:1'.)  Hearing  that  Paul  was  soon 
coming,  he  would  not  wish  to  remain 
and  anticipate  his  laljors.  Acjuila  and 
Priscilla  doubtless  told  him  concerning 
the  disciples,  and  the  oj)portuiiities  for 
labor  in  Achaia,  especially  at  Corinth. 
The  brethren  at  Ephesus,  probably 
gathered  during  the  brief  visit  of  Paul 
(ver.  19),  and  the  subsequent  labors  of 
Aquila  and  Priscilla.  Tliis  seems  to 
have  been  the  beginning  of  the  church 
at  Ephesus.  It  is  hardly  probable  that 
there  was  a  church  there  before  Paul's 
first  visit  (ver.  19),  although  he  nowhere 
claims  to  have  been  its  founder.  Ex- 
horting. The  order  of  words  in  the 
original  is :  Exhorting,  the  brethren 
wrote  thediscip/es.  Hence  some  supj>ly 
him:  Exhorting  or  encouraging  him 
the  brethren  wrote,  etc.  So  the  Ke vised 
Version.  This  is  the  first  reference  to 
letters  of  commendation  among  Chris- 
tians, whicli  afterward  l)ecame  so  com- 
mon and  important  among  the  eliurches. 
Paul,  in  2  Cor.  3  : 1,  refers  to  this  prac- 
tice of  granting  such  letters.  And 
when  he  was  come  —  to  Corinth, 
(19:1.)  The  above  incidents  ajjpear  to 
have  occurred  while  Paul  was  visiting 
the  churches  of  Galatia  and  Phrygia 
(ver.  23),  and  a  little  time  ])efore  his 
arrival  at  Ephesus.  Apollos  probably 
therefore  went  to  Corinth  in  the  early 
spring  of  A.  D.  55,  with  the  opening 
of  navigation.  He  helped  them 
much  who  had  believed — Paul  had 
planted ;  Apollos  watered,  (i  Cor.  3 : 6-10.) 
Through  grace — the  divine  favor, 
through  which  they  had  believed,  is 
recognized.  Some,  however,  would  join 
grace  with  heljted,  and  refer  it  to  the 


Ch.  XVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


299 


28  had  » believed    through    grace:    for   he 
mightily  convinced  the  Jews,  and   that 


publicly,  "  showing  by  the  Scriptures  that 
Jesus  was  Christ. 


a  John  1 :  12, 13 ;  Eph.  2  :  8-10.        »  ch.  9  :  22 ;  17  :  3  ;  John  6  :  46. 


divine  grace  which  sustained  and 
blessed  the  efforts  of  Apollos,  and 
translate,  He  helped  much  through 
grace  them  that  believed.  Both  views 
present  truths,  but  the  first  and  more 
common  view  is  tlie  more  natural  one. 

28.  How  he  helped  them  is  now 
stated.  For  he  mightily  con- 
vinced—  rather,  For  he  powerfully 
confuted  the  Jews  publicly.  Here  we 
catch  a  view  of  the  nervous  eloquence, 
the  powerful  reasoning,  and  the  com- 
plete triumph  of  Apollos  over  the  Jew- 
ish opposition  in  controversy.  This  he 
did  in  public  places,  such  as  the  syna- 
gogue, and  the  house  of  Justus,  (ver. 
«,  7.)  He  was  peculiarly  fitted  to  meet 
the  unbelieving  .Tews  by  his  great 
knowledge  of  the  Scriptures,  as  well 
as  by  his  persuasive  and  reasoning 
powers.  That  Jesus  was,  rather  is, 
the  Christ — proving  this  from  Moses 
and  the  Prophets,  (ver.  5.)  His  labors 
were  attended  with  such  marked  suc- 
cess, that  his  name  afterward  became  a 
watchword  of  a  party,  (icor.  i.  n.)  This 
may  be  the  reason  why  he  declined  to 
return  to  Corinth,  even  when  urged  by 
Paul  himself,  (i  cor.  is :  12.)  There  is 
no  hint  anywhere  that  any  jealousy 
ever  existed  between  him  and  Paul. 

Believers  and  the  Church. 
Apollos  was  working  outside  and  inde- 
pendently of  any  church.  He  probably 
had  never  heard  a  Christian  preacher, 
nor  mingled  among  Christians.  But  as 
soon  as  he  is  instructed,  he  identifies 
himself  with  them  and  labors  in  con- 
nection with  churches.  It  was  the  cus- 
tom in  the  apostolic  age  for  believers 
to  be  baptized  at  once,  become  members 
of  a  church,  and  immediately  engage 
in  Christian  work.  (2 :  4i-i6;  is :  s.)  Such 
cases  as  that  of  Ajjollos  and  the  twelve 
disciples  at  Ephesus  (i9 : 1-7)  only  prove 
the  rule.  They  wrought  outside  igno- 
rantly ;  but  there  is  no  such  excuse  now 
for  ignoring  the  church.  It  is  not 
enough  that  a  believer  is  working  in  a 
Christian  Association  or  in  a  Young 
People's  Society.  His  place  is  in  the 
church  of  Christ,  and  in  connection 
with  it  he  should  xise  the  various  in- 


strumentalities for  doing  good.  Alle- 
giance to  Christ  carries  along  with  it 
allegiance  to  his  church  and  his  cause. 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  However  wicked  a  city,  the  gospel 
should  be  preached  in  it  and  success  ex- 
pected. "The  church  of  God  in  Corinth! 
Joyful  and  wonderful  paradox."  (Bengel.) 
(Ver.  1-4 ;  1  Cor.  6  :  10, 11.) 

2.  It  is  wise  to  gather  churches  in  strategic 
points  and  at  great  centres.  (Ver.  1-4;  13  ; 
14;  16  :  12;  17  :  1,19;  19:  8.) 

3.  The  gospel  laborer  is  worthy  of  his 
hire ;  yet  there  are  times  when  a  preacher 
should  support  himself  in  whole  or  in  part. 
(Ver.  3 ;  Luke  10  :  7  ;  1  Cor.  9  :  9-15  ;  Phil.  4  : 
14-16.) 

4.  Paul's  daily  labor  did  not  prevent  him 
from  faithfully  using  opportunities  for 
preaching  Christ.  (Ver.  3,  4 ;  1  Cor.  2:1-5; 
1  Thess.  2  :  9.) 

5.  We  should  combine  correct  reasoning 
and  tender  persuasion  in  preaching.  (Ver. 
4;  1  Cor.  10:  15;  2  Cor.  5  :  11.) 

6.  The  ministry  of  those  who  are  pressed 
and  engrossed  with  the  word  is  generally 
successful.     (Ver.  5  ;  20  :  20  ;  Phil.  2  :  22.) 

7.  It  is  a  fearful  thing  to  reject  Christ  in 
the  preached  word.  (Ver.  6  ;  Matt.  25  :  41- 
44.) 

8.  Houses  and  places  of  preaching  should 
be  located  where  the  people  are.  (Ver.  7 ; 
19  :  9.) 

9.  The  divine  order :  Hearing,  believing, 
being  baptized.  (Ver.  8 ;  Mark  16  :  15,  16 ; 
Rom.  10  :  8-10.) 

10.  We  should  seek  to  bring  whole  families 
to  Christ.     (Ver.  9  ;  10  :  2  ;  2  John  4.) 

11.  The  lives  of  his  servants  are  in  Christ's 
hands.     (Ver.  9-11 ;   Matt.  10  :  28-30.) 

12.  God's  purpose  to  save  men  is  an  en- 
couragement to  work  for  their  conversion. 
(Ver.  10, 11 ;  John  10  :  16.) 

13.  Gospel  success  very  often  arouses  oppo- 
sition among  the  wicked.  False  accusation 
is  a  very  natural  ally  of  persecution.  (Ver. 
12,  13  ;  17  :  5-8.) 

14.  Civil  otiicers  do  well  to  confine  their 
official  acts  to  civil  affairs.  (Ver.  14, 15 ; 
Rom.  13  ;  1-7.) 


300 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIX. 


Paul  come.i  to  Ephesns.  Cerlain  disciples  of 
John  rebaplized.  Wonderful  miracles ;  great 
success. 

19    AND  it  came  to  pass,  that,  while  p  Apol- 


los  was  at  Corinth,  Paul  having  passed 

through  the  upper  coasts,  came  to  Ephe- 

2  sus.     And  finding  certain  disciples,  he 

said  unto  them,  Have  ye  received  « the 


P  1  Cor.  1:12;  3  :  5,  6.        i  oh.  11 :  15-17. 


15.  Worldly  men  have  too  often  but  small 
conception  of  the  nature  and  magnitude  of 
religious  truth ;  and  it  is  well  when  they 
recognize  the  fact.    (Ver.  15, 16  ;  25  :  20,  26.) 

16.  The  civil  ruler  should  not  be  a  perse- 
cutor, but  he  should  keep  the  peace  and  thus 
prevent  persecution.    (Ver.  17  ;  Rom.  13  :  3.) 

17.  Let  our  vows  be  of  grateful  love  and 
obedience.    (Ver.  18;  Rom.  12  :  1.) 

18.  Every  class  of  Christian  laborers  can 
find  work  suitable  to  do.    (Ver.  19.) 

19.  We  must  keep  our  engagements  with 
the  Lord.     (Ver.  2U,  21 ;  Ps.  50  :  4.) 

20.  All  our  plans  aud  movements  sh"uld 
be  made  dependent  on  the  good  pleasure  of 
God.     (Ver.  21 ;  Matt.  6  :  10.) 

21.  We  should  keep  in  view  the  mission  to 
which  God  has  called  us,  and  hasten  to  our 
work.  (Ver.  22,  23  ;  John  9  :  4  ;  1  Cor.  7  : 
29-31.) 

22.  The  Christian  can  always  find  work  to 
do  among  Christians.    (Ver.  23  ;  Gal.  6  :  10.) 

23.  Much  piety  cannot  make  up  for  de- 
ficiency of  knowledge  and  practice.  (Ver. 
24,25;  Heb.  5  :  11-14.) 

24.  A  right  heart,  a  fervent  spirit,  and  a 
teachable  disposition  are  a  good  preparation 
for  discerning  and  receiving  the  truth.  (Ver. 
25,  26.) 

25.  Men  of  culture  and  ability  may  often 
learn  much  from  Christians  in  humble  life. 
(Ver.  26 ;  4  :  13  ;  1  Cor.  1  :  26  f.) 

26.  Salvation  is  all  of  grace.  (Ver.  27 ; 
Rom.  4  :  16 ;  Eph.  2  :  8.) 

27.  Christian  ministers  should  help  one 
another  to  fields  of  labor  and  places  of  use- 
fulness.    (Ver.  27.) 

28.  Christian  fervor  without  culture  is 
good,  but  with  it,  is  better.    (Ver.  28.) 

Ch.  19  :  Paul  continues  his  tliinl 
mis.sionary  tour  and  reaches  Eplicsus, 
wliere  he  baptizes  twelve  professed  dis- 
ciples of  John,  preaches  three  months 
in  the  synagogue,  and  two  years  in  the 
school  house  of  Tj'rannus.  Great  mir- 
acles are  performed,  ma.ijical  practices 
are  renounced,  and  a  sreat  tumult 
aroused  retrardiug  the  worship  of  the 
goddess  Diana, 


1-20.  Paul  Arrives  at  Ephksus. 
His  Work  Thkrk  for  Two  Ykaes 
and  Three  Months.  During  this 
j)eriod  he  probably  wrote  his  P^jiistle  to 
the  Galatians,  and  also  his  lost  E])istle 
to  the  Corinthians,  1  Cor.  5  :  9.  I'loni 
the  spring  of  A.  D.  55  to  the  spring  of 
A.  D.  57. 

1.  While  Apollos  was  at  Cor- 
inth— the  cajjital  of  Achaia,  whitlier 
he  had  gone.  (i8:27.)  Tluis  Paul  did 
not  arrive  at  E))l)esus  until  after  the 
dejiartnre  of  Apollos.  Having  passsed 
through  the  upper  coasts — l/ic  uj>- 
per  districts,  the  interior  mountainous 
region  of  Asia  Minor,  such  as  Galatia 
and  Phrygia  (i8:i3)  and  parts  of  the 
province  of  Asia,  to  the  lowlands 
around  Ei)hesus.  It  was  during  tliis 
visit  that  Paul  probably  directed  the 
Galatian  churches  regarding  .systematic 
collections  for  the  saints  on  the  first 
day  of  the  week,    (i  Cor.  i6 .- 1,  -i  -.  cm,  2 ;  lo.) 

Came  to  Ephesus — in  fultilhuent 
of  his  promise  made  on  his  way  from 
Corinth  to  Jerusalem,  (is-.-io.n.j  Ejih- 
esus  was  the  ])rincipal  of  the  twelve 
Ionian  cities  of  Asia  Minor,  and  the 
emjiorium  of  the  trade  of  the  East. 
Under  Roman  rule  the  province  of 
Asia  was  formed,  B.  c.  129,  with  Ephe- 
sus as  its  ca])ital.  It  was  situated  on 
the  western  coast  of  Asia  Minor,  near 
the  mouth  of  the  river  Cayster,  partly 
on  the  ])lain  in  the  valley  of  this  river, 
and  partly  on  the  ridges  of  Mount  Co- 
rcssus  and  Mount  Pion.  To  the  north 
of  the  city  lay  a  considerable  lake, 
communicating  witli  the  river,  and 
forming  the  inner  harbor.  The  outer 
harl)or  of  the  city  was  formed  by  the 
river  Cayster,  and  the  bay  into  whicli 
it  em|)tied.  East  of  the  lake  and  out- 
side tlie  city  walls  was  the  great  temjde 
of  Artemis,  or  Diana,  which  was 
called  one  of  the  wonders  of  the  ancient 
world.  Further  concerning  this,  the 
stadium  and  the  theatre,  see  notes 
l)elow.  Asia,  like  Achaia,  was  a 
Roman  senatorial  province,  and  its 
governors  were  styled  Proconsuls,  (ver. 


Ch.  XIX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


301 


Holy  Spirit  since  ye  believed?    And  they 
said  unto  him, '  \Ve  have  not  so  much  as 


heard  whether  there  he  any  Holy  Spirit. 
3  And  he  said  unto  them,  Unto  what  then 


'  1  Sam.  3  :  7. 


38)  who  resided  at  Ephesus.  (Sceonis: 
1-2 )  Ephesus  was  also  a  free  city,  and 
governed  by  its  own  senate,  and  held 
its  courts  and  public  assemblies.  It 
had  a  considerable  Jewish  population 
and  its  social  life  was  colored  by 
Asiatic  and  Greek  influences.  It  was 
sacked  and  laid  waste  by  the  Goths  in 
A.  D.  2G2  ;  and,  although  rebuilt,  it 
never  regained  its  former  glory.  The 
site  is  now  an  utter  desolation.  Piles 
of  rubbish  and  interesting  ruins  cover 
the  ground,  partly  overgrown  with  veg- 
etation. 

And  finding,  on  his  first  arrival, 
or  very  soon  after,  certain  disciples, 
of  Christ,  as  the  word  discip/es  always 
means  in  the  New  Testament  when 
used  alone.  Paul  also  recognized  them 
as  believers  (ver.  2)  in  Jesus  as  the 
(!hrist,  but  very  imperfectly  instructed. 
IIow  crude  their  knowledge  will  ap- 
pear in  the  next  two  verses.  They  had 
very  likely  lately  come  to  Ephesus ; 
or  possibly  in  that  large  city  they  had 
been  isolated  and  unacquainted  with 
Apollos,  Aquila  and  Priscilla,  and 
otber  brethren  who  attended  the  syna- 
gogue. 

'Z.  Having  found  these  disciples, 
Paul  asks.  Have  ye,  or,  rather.  Did 
ye  receive  the  Holy  Spirit  when  ye  be- 
lieved f  that  is,  on  the  Lord  Jesus. 
IIow  Paul  come  to  ask  this  question  is 
a  matter  of  conjecture.  It  doubtless 
came  in  the  course  of  conversation,  in 
which  he  discovered  the  crudeness  of 
their  knowledge  and  lack  of  spiritual 
jHHver,  and  want  of  peace,  joy,  and  the 
gifts  of  the  Spirit.  That  Paul  referred 
to  the  Holy  Spirit,  as  the  author  of 
miraculous  gifts,  is  to  be  inferred  from 
ver.  6.  Besides,  he  would  have  taken 
for  granted  that  they  had  received  the 
Spirit  as  commonly  enjoyed  hj  all  dis- 
ciples.     (See8:n;  10:  «,  45.)        The     ..jrUeS- 

tion  seemed  surprising  to  them,  and 
their  answer  surprising  to  him.  We 
have  not  so  much  as  heard,  etc. 
Rather,  We  did  not  even  hear,  at  the 
time  we  believed,  whether  there  is  a 
Holy  Spirit,  or  whether  the  Holy  Spirit 
was  given.    Either  translation  is  allow- 


able. It  is  hardly  conceivable  that 
these  disciples  were  entirely  ignorant 
of  the  Holy  Sjiirit.  John  had  foretold 
the  baptism  in  tiie  Holy  Spirit  by  the 
Messiah  who  was  already  among  them. 
(John  1 :  :!2.:i4.)  Jews  and  proselytes  were 
also  familiar  with  tlie  Holy  Spirit  from 
the  Old  Testament  Scriptures,  Ps.  51  : 
11 ;  Isa.  63  :  10 ;  Joel  2  :  28.  But  these 
disciples  may  not  have  even  heard  the 
supernatural  power  of  the  Spirit  men- 
tioned when  they  believed,  and  hence 
were  ignorant  of  Pentecost  and  its 
wonders.  Or,  with  almost  the  same 
meaning,  they  may  not  have  heard  that 
the  Spirit  was  present  or  given,  that  he 
had  come  in  the  power  foretold.  Com- 
pare John  7  :  39,  where  it  is  said  The 
Spirit  was  not  yet  given,  he  had  not 
yet  come,  because  Jesus  was  not  yet 
glorified.  With  either  interpretation 
they  were  ignorant  of  the  great  Pente- 
costal outpouring,  and  of  the  gifts  of 
the  Spirit,  and  of  the  privilege  of  be- 
lievers in  partaking  of  his  power. 

3.  The  answer  of  these  disciples  re- 
veals to  Paul  something  wi'ongin  their 
religious  history.  He  therefore  asks. 
Unto  Avhat  then  were  ye  bap- 
tized ? — unto  wliat  name  and  confes- 
sion were  ye  ba])tized,  that  ye  did  not 
hear  of  the  Holy  Spirit  and  of  his  pres- 
ence and  gifts  among  believers?  They 
answer.  Unto  John's  baptism. 
When  or  where  is  unknown.  Some 
suppose  Apollos  had  ba})tized  them. 
But  they  jirobalily  had  come  to  Ephe- 
sus after  he  had  left.  Besides,  if  he 
had  baptized  them,  he  would  doubtless 
have  instructed  them  into  more  correct 
views  of  Christianity. 

The  disciples  of  John  were  numerous 
and  widely  scattered.  They  consisted 
first  of  those  who  became  disciples  of 
Christ ;  second,  a  small  sect  who  held 
that  John  was  the  Messiah  ;  and  third, 
those  who,  removed  from  Palestine, 
held  substantially  what  John  taught. 
These  twelve  did  not  belong  to  the 
second  class,  for  they  professed  to  l)e- 
lieve  in  Jesus,  (ver.  1,2.)  Neither  could 
they  be  fully  included  in  the  first,  for 
they  had  not  really  entered  into  the 


302 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cu.  XIX. 


were  ye  baptized  7  And  they  said, »  Unto 
4  John's  baptism.     Then  said  f'aul, 'John 
verily  baptized  with  the  baptism  of  re- 
pentance, saying  unto  the  people,  that 


they  should  believe  on  him  which  should 

come  after  him,  that  is,  on  Christ  Jesus. 

5  When  they  heard  this,  they  were  baptized 


I  ch.  18  :  25.        t  di.  13  :  24,  2-5  ;  Matt.  3  :  11,  12. 


completed  discipleship  of  Christ.  They 
were  rather  those  of  the  third  class,  i 
who,  accepting  John's  teachings  so  far  ] 
as  they  had  learned  them,  held  some-  ; 
what  imperfectly  that  Jesus  was  the  i 
Messiah.     Their  views  were  very  dim 
and  uncertain,  quite  different  in  this  ; 
respect  from  those  of  Apollos   (18:25)  ; 
from   which   we  infer   that   they   had 
not  been   bajjtized   by   John    himself, 
but  by  some  one  of  his  disciples  outside 
of  Palestine.     For  they  confess  their 
ignorance    of   that    which   John    had 
taught  concerning  Jesus  and  the  Holy 
Spirit.  [ 

4.  Paul  explains  the  nature  of  John's 
baptism.  This  implies  that  they  had 
not  been  proj)erly  taught.  It  was  a 
baptism  of  repentance, _  one  that 
enjoined  and  symbolized  rei)enlance. 
(Se«onLuke3:  .•!.)  Ilis  baptism  and  the 
ministry  which  it  implied  were  pre- 
paratory and  transient.  He  did  not 
intend  that  they  should  form  any  per- 
manent organization  of  their  own  ;  but 
on  the  contrarv  he  exhorted  the  people 
that  they  should  believe  on  him 
who  should  come  after  him.  This 
was  a  feature  and  design  of  his  minis- 
try. It  was  introductorj-  to  Chri.st. 
Paul  enlarges  upon  this  coming  one, 
Bhowing  that  it  is  on  Jesns  they  were 
to  believe  and  with  him  to  be  perma- 
nently united.  He  doubtless  dwelt  upon 
his  sufferings,  death,  resurrection,  and 
ascension,  and  the  consequent  outjwur- 
ing  of  the  Spirit  in  fulfillment  of  the 
fireiliction  of  John.  Some  and  perhaps 
most  of  tliese  tilings  were  new  to  them. 
AVhetber  they  had  saving  faith  before, 
they  have  it  now.  At  the  most  they  had  . 
bifore  enjoyed  but  the  dawn  of  faith,  j 
now  its  full  sunlight. 

5.  Beza  and  some  other  older  com- 
mentators, on  opposing  what  they 
deemed  the  repetition  of  baptism  by 
the  Anabaptists  on  the  one  hand,  and 
the  disparaging  of  .John's  baptism  by 
tlie  Roman  Catliolics  on  the  other, 
"  oddly  enough  suppose  this  verse  to 
belong  still  to  Paul's  discourse,  and  to  1 


mean  And  the  people  when  they  heard 
him  (John)  were  baptized  info  the  tmme 
of  the  Lord  Jesus.  This  oliviously  is 
contrary  to  fact  historically."  (Al- 
FOKD.)  John  never  baptized  in  the 
name  of  Jesus ;  he  baiitized  at  least 
six  months  before  he  knew  Jesus  as  the 
Messiah.  "  This  view  of  the  jiassage 
may  be  said  to  be  obsolete  at  present." 
(Hackett.)  And  when  they  heard 
this — and  to  hear  in  their  ease  was  to 
accept  and  obey — they  were  bap- 
tized. Faith  and  ba])tism  were  closely 
united  in  ajiostolic  days.  That  they 
were  ba})tized  into  the  name  of  the 
Lord  Jesus  implied  their  faith  on 
him  as  their  Lord  and  only  Saviour, 
and  their  former  baptism  in  some  May 
as  irregular  or  defective.  Liike  says 
nothing  of  the  formula  of  bajitism,  for 
that  would  be  taken  for  granted,  but 
briefly  states  their  public  confession  of 
Christ  in  baptism.  Perha])s  Timothy 
bai>tized  them.  (i8:23;  1  Oor.  1 :  n.)  The 
oft-repeated  question  arises,  Why  were 
tliese  disciples  rebaj)tized?  It  was 
not  merely  because  tliey  had  received 
John's  bajitisni.  For  the  twelve  apos- 
tles, and  many  others  of  John's  disei- 
)>les  were  not  rebaj'tized.  It  is  evident 
that  those  who  received  John's  bap- 
tism, wliile  it  had  a  lawful  existence, 
were  admitted  into  the  church  without 
re-baptism.  John  also  wassrw/  to  bap- 
tize; he  was  the  baptizer,  but  only 
temporarily  to  introduce  Christ.  (John 
1  ::'.!.)  AVith  liim  his  office  ceased.  He 
had  no  authority  to  commission  his 
followers  to  continue  his  baptism. 
Baptism  l)y  tlieui  could  not  therefore 
be  accejyted  by  Christians  as  valid 
baptism.  Moreover,  after  the  last  com- 
mission, bajitisni  must  be  performed 
"in  the  name  of  the  Father,  and  of 
the  Son  and  of  the  Holy  S])irit."  These 
disciples  had  not  been  ba]>tized  accord- 
to  this  formula  (ver.;)^  but  prol)ably  by 
some  disciple  of  John  long  after  John's 
death,  and  the  giving  of  the  last  com- 
mission. Apollos  was  not  rebaptized, 
because,  like  the  apostles,  he  was  bap- 


Ch.  XIX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


303 


6  "in  the  name  of  the  Lord  Jesus.  And 
whonjPaul  had  » laid  his  hands  upon  them, 
J  the  Holy  Spirit  cameou  them ;  and  they 

7  spake  with  tongues,  and  prophesied.  And 
all  the  men  were  about  twelve. 

8  •  And  he  went  into  the  synagogue,  and 
spake  boldly  for  the  space  of  three  months, 


disputing  and  'persuading  the  things 
9  >>  concerning  the  kingdom  of  God.  But 
« when  divers  were  hardened,  and  believed 
not,  but  spake  evil  'lof  that  way  before 
the  multitude, «  he  departed  from  them, 
and  separated  the  disciples,  disputing 
daily  in  the  school  of  one  Tyraunus. 


»ch.  8:16.    »ch.6  :  6;8  .-17.      Jch.  10  :  45,46  ;  1  Ci.r.  14  :  22.      «  ch.  17  :  2;  18  :  4.      »  2  Cor. 
5  :  11.      b  ch.  1  :  3  ;  28  :  23.      «  Jer.  7  :  26  ;  Jude  10.      d  ch.  9  :  2 ;  24  :  14.      •  ch.  13  :  46. 


tized  during  the  ministry  of  John  and 
probably  by  John  himself.  No  argu- 
ment can  be  drawn  from  this  passage 
for  repeating  valid  baptism. 

6.  And  when  Paul  had  laid  his 
hands  upon  them,  there  was  tlie 
gift  of  the  Holy  Spirit.  They  spake 
with  tongues  and  prophesied — 
they  spake  in  other  tongues,  and  uttered 
inspired  words  in  their  own.  (see  on 
2:4.)  The  gift  of  tlie  Spirit  is  only 
spoken  of  in  the  Acts,  at  Pentecost,  in 
Samaria,  when  Peter  and  John  were 
sent  from  Jerusalem;  at  Cissarea,  in 
connection  with  Cornelius  and  his 
conii)auy ;  and  here  at  Ejihesus.  It  was 
not  given  to  enable  the  apostles  to 
preach  in  other  languages,  but  as  "a 
si<jn  to  the  unbelieving."  (i  Cor.  u :  2-') 
In  regard  to  speaking  with  tongues 
and  ])rophesying,  see  Paul's  fanjous  ex- 
position, two  years  later,  in  1  Cor.  14: 
1-40.  The  superiority  of  Christianity 
over  all  communities  holding  to  John, 
and  formally  and  crudely  to  Jesus, 
was  demonstrated  by  the  gift  of  the 
Sjiirit.  Christianity  was  also  empliati- 
cally  a  religion  of  the  Spirit ;  so  that 
without  the  Spirit  it  is  not  truly  and 
really  Christianity. 

7.  All  the  men  Avere  about 
tAvelve— which  means  that  there  were 
not  more  than  that  numt)er.  Women 
are  not  mentioned  (♦:  4),  but  the  bless- 
ings of  the  gospel  would  not  likely  be 
limited  to  the  male  portion  of  this 
Johanic  community.  Tliis  was  a  good 
beginning  of  Paul's  work  at  E]^hesus; 
and  may  have  contributed  largely  to 
successful  efibrts  among  similar  classes 
of  persons  there  and  in  the  province  of 
Asia.     (vcr.  10.) 

8.  Having  related  this  incident 
which  occurred  on  Paul's  arrival  at 
Ephesus,  Luke  proceeds  to  narrate  iiis 
residence  and  labors  there.  According 
to  his  usual  custom,  Paul  enters  the 


synagogue  and  preaches,  having  also 
been  previously  invited.  (is:2o.)  He 
spake  boldly— plainly  and  freely. 
(IS:  26.)  For  the  space  of  three 
months,  without  opposition  from  the 
Jewish  connuunity.  This  definite  note 
of  time  does  not,  according  to  Jewish 
reckoning,  necessarily  denote  three  full 
months,  yet  approximately  nearer  three 
than  two.  Disputing— or  reasoning 
and  persuading,  striving  to  produce 
conviction,  acce])tance  and  belief. 
(IS:  4.)  Concerning  the  kingdom 
of  God — the  New  Dispensation,  its 
nature,  its  doctrines,  and  claims,     (see 

on  8  :  12.) 

9.  Tlie  results  were  similar  to  that  in 
other  places,  but  more  gradual.  Some 
were  hardened  and  were  unbeliev- 
ing. They  became  less  and  less  disposed 
to  hear  and  accept  the  teachings  of  Paul, 
until  they  positively  oppose,  speaking 
evil  of  the  way  of  salvation,  the  doc- 
trines and  practices  of  the  religion 
of  Christ  (16:17;  18;  is.)  Before  the 
multitude — the  congregation  in  the 
synagogue.  Tliis  became  so  annoying 
that  further  eiforts  in  the  synagogue 
seemed  impracticable.  (i8:6.)  So  Paul 
departed  from  them  —  formally 
withdrew,  and  separated  the  dis- 
ciples, into  a  congregation  by  them- 
selves. They  certainly  became  a  per- 
manent church  now,  if  they  were  not 
before,  (seeon  is:  27.)  While  they  had 
publicly  worshiped  in  the  synagogue, 
they  must  have  had  their  private  gath- 
erings for  "the  breaking  of  bread 
and  prayers."  (2:4.'.)  Disputing  or 
reasoning  (rer.  8)  daily  in  the  school, 
or  lecture  room,  of  one  Tyrannns. 
Some  have  thought  that  Tyrannns  was 
a  Jew,  but  without  sufficient  evidence. 
Both  his  name — not  a  common  one — 
and  the  school  indicate  him  as  a  Gentile. 
He  was  probably  a  Greek  teacher,  a 
lecturer  on  philosophy,  or  on  medicine, 


304 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIX. 


10      And  'this  continued  by  the  space  of 
two  years  ;  so  that  all  they  which  dwelt  in 


Asia  heard  the  word  of  the  Lord  Jesus, 
both  Jews  and  Greeks. 


'seech.  20:  31. 


as  Plumptre  suggests.  The  name  is  found  : 
in  the  inscrii)tion8  in  the  burial  place  of  j 
the  deceased  members  of  the  emperor's  I 
household,  perha^is  of  a  sou  a  genera- 
tion later,  who  is  styled  a  physician. 
The  preaching  of  Paul  would  come  less 
in  conflict  with  the  instructions  of  a 
medical  teacher  than  of  a  philosopher. 
Plumptre  also  suggests  that  through 
Luke,  "  the  beloved  physician,"  who 
was  still  at  Philippi,  Paul  may  have 
been  introduced  favorably  to  Tyrannus. 
He  seems  not  to  have  been  a  convert  to 
Christianity,  as  he  is  not  styled  a  be- 
liever. It  is  a  probable  supposition 
that  he  became  one.  AVhile  he  taught 
publicly  in  the  schoolhouse  of  Tyran- 
nus, the  disciples  had  their  private 
gatherings    "  from     house  to    house." 

(20:  20.) 

10.  For  the  space  of  two  years 

— in  addition  to  the  three  months  of 
ver.  8.  This,  according  to  Jewish  reck- 
oning represents  two  years  approxi- 
mately ;  that  is,  nearer  two  years  than 
one.  it  probably  terminated  before  the 
events  related  in  ver.  21  and  onward. 
In  20  :  31,  Paul  says  he  labored  three 
years  among  them,  which  would  require 
an  addition  of  several  montlis.  His 
ceaseless  labors  "  night  and  day," 
"  with  tears,"  "  keeping  nothing  back," 
but  declaring  "  the  whole  counsel  of 
God  "  are  brought  to  view  in  20  :  18-35. 
Some  time  during  these  two  years 
Paul  probably  wrote  his  Epistle  to  the 
Galatians.  Upon  this  scholars  are  not 
entirely  agreed.  But  it  is  now  gener- 
ally admitted  to  have  been  after  his 
second  visit  to  Galatia  (if'M),  for  he 
speaks  of  a  first  visit  (oai.  4 :  is)  which 
implies  a  second ;  and  his  language 
seems  to  contain  an  allusion  to  two 
visits,  (r.ni.  ♦:  13-16;  5:3.)  It  was  also 
after  Paul's  rebuke  to  Peter.  (Gai.  2 :  ut 
see  on  18 ;  23.)  It  is  also  generally  believed 
to  have  been  written  some  time  during 
this  third  missionarv  tour,  between 
A.  D.  55  and  58.  Dr.  'Lightfoot  (1865) 
and  some  others  suj>pose  that  it  was 
written  about  the  same  time  as  the 
Epistle  to  the  Romans,  in  the  winter  of 
A.  D.  57-8,  from  its  resemblance  to  that 


Epistle.  But  the  verbal  resemblances 
consist  largely  in  quotations  from  the 
Old  Testament.  The  similarities  in 
doctrines  and  trains  of  thought  are 
such  as  would  be  expected  in  one  taught 
by  revelation.  (Gai.  1:12.)  There  are 
indeed  resemblances  to  his  early  ad- 
dresses. Thus,  in  regard  to  justification 
by  faith  (13:38,39),  and  the  accounta- 
bility of  the  heathen  (h  ■  15:7;  Rom.  1 :  19; 
2 :  15,  etc.)  I  believe  that  no  certain  con- 
clusion can  be  derived  from  those  re- 
semblances. But  Dr.  Ilackett  (1858), 
and  Dr.  Weiss  of  Berlin  (1880),  and 
others,  believe  that  it  niu.st  have  l)een 
written  at  Ephesus  before  the  First 
Epistle  to  the  Corinthians.  Tliis  is  a 
very  natural  inference  from  Paul's  own 
language :  "  I  marvel  that  ye  are  so 
soon  removed  from  him  that  called 
you."  (Gal.  1 :6.)  His  second  visit  was 
in  the  winter  of  a.  d.  54-5;  and  this 
change  had  largely  come  alioiit  since 
tliat  time.  The  so  soon  more  naturally 
applies  to  a  fcAv  months  than  to  a  period 
of  three  years.  The  connmiiiication  be- 
tween Ej)hcsus  and  Galatia  was  easy. 
It  is  therefore  preferable  to  fix  tlic  date 
early  in  the  year  a.  n.  56. 

So  that  all  who  dwelt  in  Asia 
heard  the  word,  etc.  The  i)roviiice 
of  Asia  is  meant,  but  the  term  would  in 
a  general  way  be  apjilied  to  all  the 
western  part  of  Asia  Minor.  P^phesus 
was  a  great  coiiiniercial  center.  Thus 
Paul  had  constant  o]i]iortiiiiity  to 
preach  to  those  wlio  came  thither.  His 
great  success  and  his  wonderful  miracles 
(ver.  n)  would  also  attract  crowds  from 
all  parts  to  hear  liim.  His  Iielpers 
also,  such  as  Tinmtliy,  Epa]iliras,  Titus, 
and  otliers,  doubtless  traveled  and 
founded  churches  in  other  cities. 
(ifi:i9.)  Thus  tlie  seven  churches  of 
Asia  may  have  originated.  (Rv.  i:4. 
See  Col.  4 :  i3.ir>.)  Epaphras  gatberod  tlie 
church  at  Colosse.  (Coi.  1 :  6. 7.)  A  polios 
too,  seems  to  liave  returned,  and  was 
laboring  in  some  portion  of  tliat  district. 
(1  Cor.  ic :  12.)  In  Ephesus  also  believers 
were  multiplied,  so  tliat  several  congre- 
gations were  gathered  at  different 
houses,  as  that  at  the  house  of  Aquila 


Ch.  X1X.J 


THE  ACTS. 


305 


11  And    sGod   wrought  special   miracles 

12  by  tlie  bauds  of  Paul :  >■  so  that  from  his 
body  were  brought  unto  the  sick  haud- 
kerchiefs  or  aprons,  and  the  diseases  de- 


parted from  them,  and  the  evil  spirits 
went  out  of  them. 
13      Then  certain   of  the  vagabond  Jews, 
'exorcists, J took  upon  them  to  call  over 


8  ch.  14  : : 


i>  ch.  5  :  16  ;  2  Kings  i  :  29,  etc. 


'  Matt.  12  :  27.        i  Mark  9  :  38. 


and  Priscilla.  (i  Cor.  le :  i9.)  Hence  the 
necessity  of  a  numher  of  elders  or  pas- 
tors to  look  after  them,  (m  :  n.)  About 
fortj  years  after  tliis  Pliny,  governor  of 
Bithynia,  adjoiniiit;:  tlie  province  of 
Asiaj  in  a  letter  to  tlie  Emperor  Trajan, 
sjieaks  of  the  great  number  of  Christians 
of  all  ranks  and  ages,  of  both  sexes, 
not  only  in  the  cities,  hut  in  the  vil- 
lages and  remoter  districts.  During 
tlie  latter  part  of  these  two  years  Paul 
probably  wrote  his  lost  Epistle  to  tlie 
Corinthians  (i  Cor.  5:9),  in  which  he  en- 
joined the  exclusion  of  all  profligates 
from  the  church. 

11.  God  wrought  special,  extra- 
ordinary, miracles  by  the  hands 
of  Paul.  What  distinguished  these 
miracles  was  that  they  were  wrought 
•without  his  personal  jjresence  and 
agency,  as  related  in  the  next  verse. 
Luke  makes  but  little  account  of  the 

Seneral  miracles  of  Paul,  since  tlie  last 
e  relates  was  the  healing  of  the  pos- 
sessed slave  at  Philippi  five  years  before 
(ift:i8),  and  makes  no  record  of  his 
miracles  at  Corinth,     (i  Cor.  12 :  12.) 

12.  So  that  handkerchiefs  or 
aprons,  which  Paul  used  in  his  daily 
toil  (20:34),  were  curried  away  from 
his  body,  literally,  from  his  skin., 
unto  the  sick.  This  showed  great 
faith,  and  the  great  power  of  God  in 
attesting  his  truth  and  Paul  as  his 
apostle.  Compare  how  God  wrought 
similarly  through  Peter.  (5  :  i.i,  16;  Gai. 
2:8.)  Com[)are  also  the  healing  of  the 
•woman  with  the  issue  of  blood,  and 
other  miracles  by  our  Saviour,  (vatt. 
9 :  31 ;  u :  35, 36.)  Ei^liesus  was  fauious  for 
its  pre-eminence  in  magic;  for  its 
charms  or  amulets,  known  as  Ephesian 
letters,  which  were  superstitiously  be- 
lieved to  insure  a  person's  success  in  all 
his  undertakings,  to  be  a  preservative 
against  evils,  and  a  reliever  of  demoni- 
acal influences.  God  through  Paul 
showed  his  superiority  to  all  such  hea- 
thenish pretensions.  By  exhibitions 
of  his  divine  power  he  meets  supersti-  j 
tion  on  its  own  ground,  and  gives  just  j 

U 


such  evidences  as  would  overwhelm- 
ingly convince  tlie  P^phesians  that  Paul 
was  his  servant,  and  his  teachings  true. 
God  can  work,  and  does  work,  in  any 
way  he  {ileases. 

13.  In  contrast  to  the  miracles  of 
Paul,  Luke  relates  the  futile  attempts 
of  certain  Jews  to  imitate  him.  Vaga- 
bond Jews  —  descriptive  of  their 
mode  of  life,  going  about,  like  jug- 
glers. Exorcists  — those  who  em- 
ployed a  formula  of  conjuration  for 
expelling  demons.  The  Jews  had  a 
wide  reputation  throughout  the  Roman 
world  as  exorcists.  Many  were  living 
on  the  credulity  of  others,  professing 
to  be  magicians.  Such  was  Simon 
Magus  in  Samaria  (« : »),  and  Elymas  in 
Cyprus.  (13:8.)  There  seemed  to  be  a 
national  tendency  toward  these  dark 
arts,  and  the  Old  Testament  contains 
severe  laws  against  them.     (Exod.  22;i8: 

Lev.  20  :  27  ;  Deut.  18  :  10,  11  ;  1  Sam.  28  :  3,  9.)    Eplie- 

sus,  the  centre  of  Oriental  philosophy 
and  witchcraft,  was  a  common  resort  of 
magicians.  It  is  thought  tliat  the  famous 
arch-magician  and  teacher,  Apollo- 
nius  of  Tyana,  had  visited  Ephesus  just 
previous  to  Paul's  arrival,  and  had 
given  a  fresh  impulse  to  tlie  mysterious 
arts.  The  Jewish  exorcists  professed 
to  have  derived  their  art  from  King 
Solomon  ;  and  memliers  of  the  Sanlie- 
driii  were  expected  to  have  a  certain 
knowledge  of  the  art,  in  order  to  be 
able  to  try  those  accused  of  emjiloying 
it.  It  indicates  the  sjnritual  blindness 
and  depravity  of  these  Jews  that  they 
classed  Paul  with  tlieniselves,  and  his 
miracles  with  their  magic,  (see on  8: 9; 
13 : 6 ;  Matt.  12 :  27.)  VVc  adjurc — rather, 
according  to  the  best  critical  authori- 
ties, I  adjure,  I  solemnly  require  yon, 
etc.  Their  use  of  the  name  of  Jesus 
was  an  acknowledgment  of  his  superi- 
ority. 

"  Strange  to  say,  exorcism  became  a 
church  practice.  Tertullian  and  Origen 
speak  of  it.  At  a  later  period  exorcists 
formed  one  of  the  lower  orders  of  the 
clergy,  and  the  clergy  of  the  Roman 


306 


THE  ACTS. 


LCu.  XIX- 


them  which  had  evil  spirits  the  name  of 
the  Lord  Jesus,  saying,  We  adjure  you  by 

14  Jesus  whom  Paul  preaeheth.  And  there 
were  seven  sons  of  one  Sceva,  a  Jew,  and 

15  chief  of  the  priests,  which  did  so.  And 
the  evil  spirit  answered  and  said,  '  Jesus 
1  know,  and  Paul  I  know  :  but  who  are 

16  ye?    And  'the  man  in  whom  the  evil 


18 


spirit  was  leaped  on  them,  and  overcame 
them,  and  prevailed  against  them,  so  that 
they  fled  out  of  that  house  naked  and 
wounded. 

And  this  was  known  to  all  the  Jews 
and  Greeks  also  dwelling  at  Ephesus: 
and  ">  fear  fell  on  them  all ;  and  the  name 
of  the  Lord  Jesus  was  magnified.    And 


k  Mark  1  :  24,  25.        >  Lev.  10  :  3. 


'  oh.  5  :  5, 11;  Ps.  04  :  9;  Luke  1  :  65  ;  7  :  16. 


Catholic  Church  are  still  ordained  ex- 
orcists before  being  ordained  as  priests. 
At  baptism  both  the  Greek  anti  Roman 
Catholic  Cliurches  use  formulas  of  ex- 
orcism. The  Reformed  Churches  at 
tlie  Reformation  renounced  exorcism, 
but  Luther  and  Melaucthon  were  in 
favor  of  its  retention.  The  Prayer 
Book  of  Edward  YL  retained  a  formula 
of  exorcism,  "  I  command  thee,  unclean 
spirit  .  .  .  that  thou  come  out  of  this 
infant,"  etc.   (HowsoN  and  Spenck.) 

14.  Such  were  seven  sons  of 
Sceva.  Nothing  more  is  known  of 
them  except  what  is  related  here.  Sceva 
was  a  Jew  and  a  chief  priest,  iiro]>ably 
connected  in  some  way  with  the  Aaronic 
priesthood.  (See  on  i:  23.)  Possibly  he 
may  have  been  an  apostate  Jew,  and 
one  of  the  priests  of  Diana.  The  Greek 
word  rendered  chief  priest  was  in  gen- 
eral use  among  the  heathen,  and  occurs 
repeatedly  on  coins  and  inscriptions 
relating  to  the  worship  of  Diana  of 
Ephesus.  Who  did  so — were  in  the 
habit  of  doing  this. 

15.  In  one  of  these  attemjitsthe  evil 
spirit  ansAvered  two  of  them.  See 
next  verse.  Jesus  I  know,  and  Paul 
I  know.  Two  Greek  verbs  are  here 
rendered  know.  They  may  be  dis- 
tinguished thus :  Jesus  I  recognize,  ac- 
knowledging his  authority  and  power, 
and  Paul  I  am  well  acquainted  irith, 
as  the  servant  of  God.  (See  le  -.n.)  But 
who  are  ye  ?  Expressions  of  contempt 
and  indignation  at  them  as  powerless 
opponents. 

16.  The  expression  of  contempt  by 
theevil  spirit  is  followed  by  correspond- 
ing acts  by  the  man  himself,  through 
whom  the  demon  exerted  his  power. 
Evil  spirits  are  distinguished  from  the 
possessed,  as  well  as  from  diseases  in  ver. 
12.  Regarding  demoniacal  possession, 
see  on  Matt.  4 :  24.  Leaped  on  them. 
Thus  the  man  under  the  power  of  the 
•lemon  attacked  them  furiously.  Over- 


I  came,  or  mastered,  them — according 
t  to  the  oldest  manuscripts,  mustered  both 
of  them,  which  implies  that  only  two 
of  the  sons  of  Sceva  were  attempting 
to  expel  the  demons  at  this  time.  Pre- 
vailed— literally,  vas  strong,  against 
them,  reminding  us  of  the  great  strength 
of  the  demoniac  of  the  Gerasenes.  (M.irk 
5 : 2-4.)  Naked^partially  stripped  of 
their  clothing,  probably  of  their  outer 
garment.  (John^i:?.)  As  Jesus  over- 
came Satan  and  the  powers  of  darkness 
when  upon  earth,  so  it  was  becoming 
'  that  his  power  should  be  manifested  in 
like  manner  through  the  apostles,  and 
especially  that  the  superiority  of  the 
gospel  over  magic  should  be  demon> 
strated  at  Ephesus,  the  very  seat  of  its 
power. 

17.  This  became  knoAvn  to  all  the 
Jews  and  Greeks  also  dwelling 
at  Ephesus.  "  Nothing  is  more  mor« 
tifying  or  better  calculated  to  provokfl 
the  contempt  of  the  community  than 
the  unexpected  exposure  of  mysterious 
pretensions,  such  as  were  assumed  by 
these  exorcists.  The  [evil]  spirit  was 
enraged  at  their  insulting  pretensions, 
and  doubtless  enjoyed  tlie  joke  of  ex- 
posing them.  .  .  .  They  were  stripped 
and  wounded,  presenting  a  very  ludi. 
crous  aspect  as  they  passed  along  the 
streets.  While  all  Ejmesus  was  laugh- 
ing at  them,  it  was  remembered  tha< 
the  spirit  acknowledged  the  authority 
of  Jesus,  and  of  Paul,  and  that  a  licen- 
tious use  of  the  name  of  Jesus  was  th« 
cause  of  all  their  trouble."  (McGak- 
VEY.)  And  fear,  a  religious  awe, 
fell  on  them  all — on  the  people  gen- 
erally. (5:5,11.)  The  name  of  the 
Lord  Jesus  was  magnified  — 
praised  and  extolled.  (io:46.)  Thus 
the  ignominious  defeat  of  the  exorcists 
brought  honor  upon  the  name  of  Jesus, 
as  a  name  above  every  name.  (Phii.  j  :  »•) 
18.  And  now  followed  a  scene,  one 
of  the  wonders    in    early  missionary 


Cir.  XIX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


307 


ninny  that  believed  came,  and  "  confessed, 
19  and  shewed  their  deeds.  Many  of  them 
also  which  used  carious  arts  brought  their 
books  together,  aud  <>  burned  them  before 
all  J»e» ;  and  they  counted  the  price  of 


them,  and  found  it  fifty  tliousandix'eceiof 
20  silver,   v   o  iiiightly  grew  the  word  of  God 

and  prevailed. 
21      After  these  things  were  ended,  Paul 
1  purposed  in  the  spirit,  when  he  had 


nProv  28-13:  Matt.  3:6.        «  Gen.  35  :  4.       P  oh.  6  :  7  ;  12  :  24;  1  Cor.  16  :  9,       qch.  20:22; 
Rom.  15  :  23-28  ;  1  Cor.  16  :  5-11 ;  2  Cor.  1  :  15-18. 


work:  Confession,  exposure,  and  re- 
nunciation.   Many  that  believed— 

that  is,  many  believers.  They  may 
have  beeu  recent  believers,  yet  con- 
verted before  the  failure  of  the  sons  of 
Sceva.  Confessed  and  shewed — 
or  made  known  their  deeds.  They 
made  a  full  and  frank  confession  of 
their  participation  in  magic  arts.  Their 
heathen  education  anil  superstition  had 
taught  them  to  reverence  such  prac- 
tices, but  now  they  realize  the  impro- 
priety and  wickedness  of  so  doing.  The 
truthfulness  of  Luke  is  illustrated  by 
this  humiliating  record  of  many  of 
Paul's  converts,  who  had  committed 
deeds  so  utterly  inconsistent  with  the 
pure  ami  holy  religion  they  professed. 
They  were  the  dupes  of  the  jugglers 
mentioned  in  the  next  verse.  So 
Hackett. 

19.  Many  of  them,  or  Not  a  few 
of  those  also  who  used,  or  practiced 
curious,  or  magic,  arts — the  jugglers. 
The  word  curious,  is  used  in  the  sense 
of  inqaisitive,  impertinent,  prying  into 
the  secret  things  of  God.  (bcut.  29:29. 
Seeou  ver.  12.)  Brought  their  books 
together,  which  treated  on  astrology, 
necromancy,  and  doubtless  filled  with 
incantations,  recipes  for  charms,  formu- 
las for  casting  out  evil  spirits,  and  the 
like.  Perhaps  some  of  the  books  of 
ApoUonius  were  among  them.  (ver.  is.) 
Among  them  also  may  have  been  books 
of  the  Essenes,  a  Jewish  sect  of  which 
we  know  but  little,  who  liad  certain 
secret  works  on  the  occult  sciences. 
(Dr.  Lightfoot,  Com.  on  Co/ossians, 
pp.  77-79.)  The  books  were  written 
rolls ov scrolls.  B urned,  or  ■icere  burn- 
ing them  before  all ;  one  after  an- 
other flinging  their  books  into  the 
burning  pile.  Fifty  thousand  pieces 
of  silver.  As  Luke  was  writing  espe- 
cially for  Greek  readers,  the  current 
Gieek  coin,  called  the  drachma,  is  prob- 
ably meant,  worth  about  fifteen  cents 
of  our  money.    The  total  amount  may 


be  roughly  put  at  about  eight  thousand 
dollars,  representing,  however,  a  much 
larger  sum,  considering  the  higher 
value  of  money  then  than  now.  Books, 
however,  were  much  more  expensive 
than  now,  especially  of  that  class. 

20.  Luke  briefly  sums  up  the  pro- 
gress of  Christ's  cause  at  Ephesus,  as 
illustrated  by  the  preceding  incidents. 
So  mightily,  etc.  Thus  with  power 
the  word  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  the  gospel, 
grew  in  its  influence  and  in  the  num- 
ber of  its  adherents  («:  t;  i2:  u)  and  e.t- 
tended  its  poicer  in  producing  such 
great  results.  Paul,  in  his  First  Epistle 
to  the  Corinthians,  written  from  Eph- 
esus, alludes  to  these  very'events  when 
he  writes :  "  For  a  great  door  aud  ef- 
fectual is  opened  unto  me,  and  there 
are  many  adversaries."  (iCor.  i6:9.) 
Paul  had  sent  Timothy  to  Corinth  (i  Cor. 
4:17)  by  way  of  Macedonia  (ver.  20, 21), 
who  had  not  5'et  arrived  there  when  he 
wrote  the  Ejjistle.  (i  Cor.  16: 10.)  See  on 
ver.  22,  where  is  noted  the  exact  time 
of  this  Epistle. 

21-41.  Paul  Proposes  to  Leave 
Ephesus  ;  bitt  Tarries  for  a  Time. 
Demetrius  Excites  a  Tumult,  (^•om. 

1:1.1-15;    1    Cor.   4:17-19;    16  :   19;    Eph.  2:19-25.) 

This  extended  into  the  spring  and 
probably  the  summer  of  A.  D.  57 ;  to 
Pentecost  in  May,  or,  more  probably, 
to  about  the  first  of  July,  or  August. 

(See  on  ver.  10  ;  also  on  20  :  1.) 

21.  After  these  things  were 
ended — after  the  events  just  related, 
which  comjdeted  the  two  years  and 
three  months  of  ver.  8  and  10.  Some 
suppose  that  Paul  made  his  second 
visit  to  Corinth,  a  brief  one,  which  is 
implied  in  1  Cor.  1.3  :  1,  just  previous 
to  this  period.  But  it  could  hardly 
have  been  at  this  time  since  Paul,  in 
his  First  Epistle  depends  not  at  all  on 
his  own  observation,  but  on  oral  ac- 
counts   and    written    statements    and 

questions.        (l    Cnr.  l  :  ll  ;    7:1;    H:l;    11.18; 

16 :  17,  18.)    Dr.  Howson  takes  the  affirm- 


308 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIX. 


passed  through  Macedonia  aud  Achala, 
to  go  to  Jerusalem,  saying,  After  I  have 
22  been  there, '  I  must  also  see  Rome.  So  he 
sent  into  MaceJonia  two  of  ^  them  that 
ministered  unto  him,  Timotheus  and 
<  Erastus ;  but  he  himself  stayed  in  Asia 
for  a  season. 


The 


uproar  excited  by   Deinelrius,   n.nd   its 
suppression. 

23  AND  "  the   same  time   there  arose   no 

24  small  stir  about  that  way.  For  a  certain 
inan  named  Demetrius,  a  silversmith, 
which  made    silver   shrines  for  Diana, 


•  ch.  23  ;  11.        6  ch.  13  :  5.        t  i{om.  16  :  23 ;  2  Tim.  4  :  20.        «  2  Cor.  1 :  8.; 


ative  of  this  question  in  Life  and 
Epistles,  Vol.  II,  p.  21  f ;  aud  Dr.  Paley 
the  negative  in  Hora;  Pauliuse,  on  2  Cor. 
13  :  1.  It  seems  better,  however,  to 
l)lace  this  second  visit  earlier.  See  on 
lU  :  11;  also  a  discussion  of  this  sub- 
ject in  Harmonic  Arrangement,  p. 
21(3  ff. 

Paul  purposed  in  the  spirit — 
in  his  mind  under  divine  direction. 
When  he  passed  through  Mace- 
donia and  Achaia — the  two  Eouian 
provinces  of  Greece.  His  object  was 
to  stir  up  and  confirm  the  churches, 
aud  correct  certain  abuses  at  Corinth. 
The  account  of  this  visit  is  found  in 
20:  1-3.  To  go  to  Jerusalem — to 
carry  the  collection  for  the  poor  saints 

there.        {■H-.n;    Bom.  lai-iS;    l    Cor.  16  ;  1-3.) 

This  visit  he  accomplished  a  year  later. 
(21:15.)  I  must  also  see'  Rome. 
This  had  been  a  long  cherished  plan, 
perhaps  from  the  time  he  first  met 
Aquila  and  Priscilla,  who  came  from 
Eome  to  Corinth  (is :  2),  and  told  him 
of  matters  there.  (Rom.  \  -.  v.;  15  :  23-2S.) 
This  purpose  was  carried  out  three 
years  later,  not,  however,  as  he  had 
planned,  but  as  a  prisoner  and  in 
chains.  (28: 16, 20, 21.)  His  purpose  also 
embraced  a  visit  to  Spain.  (Rom.  15 :  28.) 
Perhaps  about  this  time  he  began  tc 
write  his  Epistles  to  the  Romans. 

22.  So  he  sent,  rather,  And  hav- 
infl  sent  into  Macedonia,  to  Thessa- 
loiiica,  Philippi,  and  perhaps  Berea. 
Timothy  was  to  continue  his  journey 
to  Corinth,  making  but  a  short  delay 
in  Macedonia,  (icor.  4:i7.)  Tliis  is 
one  of  the  many  confirmations  of  the 
Acts  by  incidental  allusions  in  Paul's 
Epistles.  Erastus  has  been  quite 
commonly  identified  with  the  city 
treasurer"  of  Corinth,  mentioned  in 
Rom.  16  :  23.  But  the  one  named  here 
!tnd  in  2  Tim.  4  :  20  seems  to  have  been 
J' 11  attendant  of  Paul,  and  could  hardly 
liave  been  long  away  from  his  oflicial 
duties.  It  is  possible  that  he  may  have 


held  the  oflice  a  little  later  than  this 
for  a  brief  period.  JIany  of  the  best 
critics  suppose  that  there  were  two  dis- 
ciples of  this  name,  as  the  name  was 
not  unusual.  But  he  himself 
stayed  in  the  province  of  Asia  fcr 
a  season.  Tliis  probably  emlnaeed 
several  mouths'  labor  at  Ephesus  aud 
vicinity. 

Just  at  this  time  after  sending  away 
Timothy  and  Erastus,  Paul  sent  liis 
First  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians.  It 
could  not  liaVc  been  at  his  first  visit  to 
Ephesus,  for  he  did  not  tarry  there  at 
all.  (18:19,20)  See  note  on  ver.  20.  In 
this  epistle  Paul  makes  evident  allu- 
sions to  tlie  games  and  dramatic  ex- 
hibitions to  which  he  had  become 
familiar  at  Ejihesus.  Thus  he  refers  to 
fighting  with  wild  beasts  (1  Cor.  15 :  32.), 
as  being  made  a  spectacle  and  doomctl 
to  death  (1  Cor.  4:9),  as  running  not  as 
uncertainly,  and  fighting,  not  "  as 
one  that  beateth  the  air"  (1  Cor. 9:26),  ar, 
buffeting  his  body  and  bringing  it  into 
bondage  like  an  athlete.  He  writts 
with  vividness,  as  if  the  scenes  were 
passing  around  him.  Possibly  tlie 
Arteniision  month  of  A.  D.  .57,  corre- 
sponding to  portions  of  our  April  and 
May,  was  just  beginning, — a  montli 
consecrated  by  special  decree  to  the 
goddess  Diana,  and  devoted  to  festivals 
and  processions,  gladiatorial  games  in 
the  theatre,  and  races  of  runners  and 
of  chariots  in  tlie  stadium.  This  cer- 
tainly harmonizes  Avith  liis  jinrpose  to 
remain  at  Ephesus  till  Pentecost, 
which  probably  occurred  soon  after  the 
close  of  this  sacred  month. 

23.  Luke  proceeds  to  record  one  of 
the  greatest  poinilar  excitements  jiro- 
duced  by  Paul's  ministry.  It  is  styhd 
no  small  stir  or  tumult.  About 
that  way — the  way  of  the  Lord,  a 
very  common  designation.  (.Sec  on '.1:2.) 
"  There  is  a  striking  resemblance  be- 
tween the  tumult  at  Ephesus  and  that 
at  Philippi.    They  were  both  distin- 


Ch.  XIX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


309 


25  brought,  I  Ml  siuall  gain  unto  the  crafts- 
men: wliojii  !u'  callod  together  with  the 
workmen  of  lilce  occupation,  and  said, 
8irs,  ye  know  that  l)y  this  craft   we  have 

2S  our  wealth.  Moreover  ye  see  and  hear, 
that  not  alone  at  Ephesus,  but  almost 


throughout  all  Asia,  this  Paul  hath  per- 
suaded and  turned  away  much  people, 
saying  that  J  they  he  no  gods,  which  are 
27  made  with  hands:  so  that  not  only  this 
our  craft  is  in  danger  to  be  set  at  nought ; 
but  also  that  the  temple  of  the  great  god- 


:  ch.  16  :  16, 19.        3  ch.  14  :  15 ;  17  :  29  ;  Ps.  115  :  4 ;  Isa.  44 :  10-20 ;  Jer.  10  :  3,  5. 


guished  from  all  other  persecutions 
mentioned  in  the  Acts,  in  that  they 
were  not  caused  by  the  Jews,  but  by 
Gentiles  ;  both  also  originated  in  inter- 
ested motives,  the  loss  of  gain  ;  both 
were  characterized  by  senseless  rioting 
and  cruel  violence,  and  in  both  the 
actors  were  restrained  from  proceeding 
to  e.x;treme  measures."  (Dr.  Ormis- 
TON,  irt  Meyr.) 

24.  Demetrius,  a  silversmith — 
a  silver-beater,  or  worker  in  silver,  who 
made  silver  shrines  or  temples  of 
Diana,  or  Artemis.  Demetrius  was 
doubtless  a  large  manufacturer  of  small 
silver  models  of  the  temple  and  statue 
of  Diana,  which  people  carried  around 
with  them  in  their  journeys,  as  a  pre- 
ventive of  diseases  and  dangers,  and 
used  in  their  homes  as  objects  of  wor- 
ship. Diana  was  the  Roman  name, 
and  Artemis  the  Greek  name  of  the 
guardian  goddess  of  the  great  temple 
at  Ephesus.  She  seems  to  have  been 
of  an  Oriental  rather  than  of  a  Greek 
type,  and  was  similar  to  Astarte  and 
other  female  divinities  of  the  East. 
She  was  the  goddess  of  the  productive  ' 
and  nutritive  powers  of  nature.  (See  on 
Ter.35.)  Brought  no  small  gain— 
work  or  business  to  the  craftsmen 
or  artisans.  The  models  were  bought 
by  pilgrims  as  memorials  of  their  visit, 
and  were  sent  as  articles  of  traffic  into 
distant  countries. 

25.  With  the  workmen  of  like 
occupation.  The  craftsmen  of  the 
preceding  verse  jsrobably  represented 
the  finer  artisans,  and  the  workmen  of 
this  verse  the  general  laborers  in 
rougher  work.  Demetrius  probably 
had  Imndreds  of  men  in  his  employ  ; 
and  there  were  doubtless  manufactories 
beside  his  own.  And  said.  The  ad- 
dress is  selfish,  hut  candid.  He  appeals 
first  of  all  to  their  fear  of  losing  their 
business  and  tlieir  wealth.  Ye  kuoAV 
that  by  this  craft  we  have  our 
wealth  or  ^rosperi^^.     (ver.  24.) 


26.  This  charge  against  Paul  is 
truthful.  While  he  had  not  made  any 
direct  and  public  assaults  upon  the 
temple  and  goddess  Diana,  he  had 
taught  that  they  be  no  gods, 
which  arc  made  with  hands.  (Sea 
14 :  15;  17 :24-2».)  The  great  success  and 
influence  ascribed  to  Paul  accords  with 
Luke's  statement  in  ver.  lU. 

27.  So  that,  etc.  And  not  only  is 
there  danger  that  our  craft,  rather, 
our  branch  of  business,  come  into  con- 
tempt, and  thus  prove  worthless.  The 
word  translated  craft  is  difterent  from 
that  in  ver.  25,  and  refers  to  that 
lucrative  part  of  their  business  con- 
nected Avith  the  making  of  shrines, 
whicli  was  now  in  special  danger. 
Demetrius  appeals  next  to  their  vener- 
ation of  their  temple,  and  their  rever- 
ence for  their  goddess.  But  also 
that  the  temple  ...  should  be 
despised,  or  be  accounted  nothing, 
aud  thus  be  brought  into  contempt. 
And  her  magnificence  should  be 
destroyed,  she  whom  all  Asia  and 
the  Avorld  worshippeth.  This  is  a 
strong  expression  with  much  truth. 
The  idol  was  widely  venerated  and  the 
temple,  with  that  of  Deliihi,  was  tlie 
most  famous  in  the  world,  and  was  the 
resort  of  people  from  all  countries. 
"  The  sun,  it  was  said,  saw  nothing  in 
his  course  more  magnificent  than 
Diana's  temple."  It  was  built  of  white 
marble.  On  the  night  in  which  Alex- 
ander was  born  (.356  B.  c.)  it  was 
burned  by  a  fanatic  named  Herostra- 
tus;  but  it  was  rebuilt  and  adorned 
more  magnificently  than  before.  Its 
general  appearance  is  shown  on  an 
ancient  Eplicsian  coin,  which  also  ex- 
hibits tlie  head  of  the  Emperor  Nero. 
In  A.  D.  262  it  was  robbed  of  its  treas- 
ures and  defaced  by  the  Goths,  after 
which  it  gradually  fell  into  ruins,  and 
was  so  completely  covered  with  the  sand 
and  mud  of  the  river  that  its  site  was 
a  matter  of  conjecture,  till  the  remark- 


310 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIX. 


dess  Diana  should  be  despised,  and  her 
magnificence  should  he  destroyed,  whom 
all  Asia  and  the  world  worshippeth. 
28  And  when  they  heard  these  saying.t, 
they  were  full  of  wrath,  and  cried  out, 
saying,  Great  is  Diana  of  the  Ephesiaus. 


29  And  the  whole  city  was  filled  with  con- 
fusion :  and  having  caught  ^  Gaius  ai>d 
» Aristarchus,  men  of  Macedonia,  Paul's 
companions  in  travel,  they  rushed  wiih 

30  one  accord  into  the  theatre.  And  when 
Paul  would  have  entered  in  unto  the  peo- 


Itom.  16  :  23  ;  1  Cor.  1  :  14;  3  John  1. 


'  ch.  20  :  4 :  27  :  2  ;  Col.  4  :  10  ;  Philem.  24. 


able  discoveries  of  Mr.  T.  A.  Wood 
(1863-74)  brought  it  to  light.  The 
platform  on  which  the  temple  stood 
was  four  hundred  ami  eighteen  feet 
long,  two  hundred  and  thirty-nine  feet 
wide ;  and  the  temple  itself  was  three 
hundred  and  forty-two  by  one  hundred 
and  sixty-three  feet.  Eight  columns 
stood  in  front,  as  seen  on  coins  and 
medals,  and  the  whole  number  is  esti- 
mated at  one  hundred,  about  fifty -five 
feet  eight  inches  in  height,  and  each 
the  gift  of  a  king  or  of  some  devout 
woi-shiper.  Its  treasury  in  its  palmy 
days  became  a  great  bank  of  deposit, 
and  vast  wealth  was  accumulated. 
Connected  with  its  services  was  a  large 
establishment  of  celibate  priests  and 
virgin  priestesses ;  and  also  teachers 
and  ministering  boys.  Besides  those 
represented  by  Demetrius,  there  were 
the  butchers  who  sold  victims  for  sacri- 
fice, the  surveyors  and  masons  who 
looked  after  tlie  re])airs,  and  others, 
all  of  whom  depended  on  the  temple 
for  their  livelihood.  Paul  frequently 
u-ses  the  imagery  of  a  temple  in  his 
epistles,  and  especially  in  that  to  the 
Ephesians,  in  allusion  perhaps  to  this 

temple.  (Seel  Cor.  3:9n;  Kph.  2:19-22;  1  Tim. 
S  :  15  ;  6  :  19 ;  2  Tim.  i  ;  19,  20.)      See  further  OH 

Upfu'A-its,  ver.  1. 

'2S.  When  they  heard  this.  De- 
metrius probably  made  this  speech  in 
some  large  oi)en  space  near  the  manu- 
factories of  the  shrines ;  and  perhaps 
not  far  from  the  temple,  which  was  out- 
side of  the  city  wall.  They  Avere 
full  of  wrath— again.<;t  "  this  Paul " 
(ver.  26)  and  the  Christians.  And  cried 
ont — ivere  crying  out,  denoting  con- 
tinuous action.  Probably  marching 
and  rushing  through  the  streets,  gather- 
ing crowds  after  them,  with  the  cry, 
Great  is  Diana  of  the  Ephesians. 

(Seeon  ver.  2i,) 

29.  And  the  whole  city — some  of 
the  better  manuscripts  omit  whole — 
w  as  filled  with  confusion,  or  with 


the  disturbances  of  this  frenzied,  riotous 
crowd.  Having  caught — or  seised 
Gaius  and  Aristarchus.    It  was  a 

kind  providence  that  they  did  not  find 
Paul.  This  Gaius  is  not  mentioned 
elsewhere.  He  is  not  the  one  from 
Derbe  (20 : 4),  nor  the  one  from  Corinth 

(Rom.  16  :  23  ;  1  Cor.  1  :  h),  aud   probably  UOt 

the  one  to  whom  John  writes  (3  John  1). 
Aristarchus  was  of  Thessolouica  (20 :  <), 
and  went  with  Paul  to  Rome  (27 : 2),  and 
became  a  voluntary  sharer  of  his  exile 
and  captivity  (Coi.  4  :io),  and  his  fellow- 
worker.  (Philem.  24.)  They  rushed 
with  one  accord  into  the  theatre 
— where  dramatic  exhibitions  were 
held,  gladiators  fought,  and  criminals 
were  sometimes  exposed  to  wild  beasts. 
It  was  a  favorite  meeting  place  of  the 
citizens  for  business,  and  on  public 
occasions.  The  remains  of  the  theatre 
are  still  extant,  exhibiting  the  usual 
semicircular,  or  horse-shoe  shape,  open 
to  the  air,  with  seats  ranged  around  in 
tiers  one  above  another.  Its  seating 
capacity  is  estimated  to  have  been  from 
thirty  to  fifty -seven  thousand.  Accord- 
ing to  the  last  estimate  it  was  the 
largest  in  the  world.  The  temple  of 
Diana  was  in  full  view,  just  across  tlie 
market-jdace.  It  would  seem  that  w  hile 
they  were  rushing  towaril  the  theatre 
they  seized  Gaius  and  Aristarchus, 
either  from  the  house  where  they  were, 
or  from  the  street.  Had  it  not  been  for 
the  timely  interference  of  the  town- 
clerk,  their  lives  may  have  been  taken. 
(Ver.  35.)  Paul,  no  doubt,  had  in  mind 
the  gladiatorial  contests  in  tlie  theatre, 
when  he  so  vividly  describes  the  armor 
of  the  Christian  warrior.  (Epu.  6 ;  lo-is.) 
30.  When  Paul  would  have 
entered.  In  this  we  see  the  l)old  and 
sympathetic  character  of  Paul.  He 
seems  to  have  been  out  of  the  reach  of 
the  mob,  when  they  seized  his  com- 
panions. But  he  was  anxious  for  their 
safety,  and  zealous  for  the  truth.  Tht- 
disciples  suffered  him  not,  among 


Ch.  XIX.] 


THE  ACTS, 


311 


31  pie,  the  disciiiles  •>  suffered  him  not.  And 
certain  of  the  chief  of  Asia,  which  were 
his  friends,  sent  unto  liiiu,  desiring  him 
that  he  would  not  adventure  himselt  into 

32  the  theatre  Some  therefore  cried  one 
thing,  and  some  another :  for  the  assem- 
bly was  confused ;  and  the  more  part 
knew  not  wherefore  they  were  come  to- 


33  gether.  And  they  drew  Alexander  out 
of  the  multitude,  the  Jews  putting  bim 
forward.  And  "  Ahixander  beckoned  with 
the  huud,  and  would  have  made  his  de- 

34  fence  unto  the  people.  But  when  they 
knew  that  be  was  a  Jew,  all  with  one 
voice  about  the  space  of  two  hours  cried 
out,  Great  is  Diana  of  the  Ephesians. 


*  2  Sam.  18  ;  3.        «  1  Tim.  1 :  20;  2  Tim.  4  :  14. 


whom  doubtless  were  Aquila  and  Pris- 
cilla,  who,  at  this  or  some  other  time 
at  Ephesus,  "  laid  down  their  own 
necks"  for  his  life;  also,  brethren,  of 
the  Ephesians,  wlio  knew  the  reverence 
of  their  countrymen  for  their  goddess, 
and  the  deadly  j)eril  to  which  Paul 
would  expose  him.self.  The  people — 
who  were  a  tumultnous  assembly.    (Ver. 

32-40.) 

31.  And  certain  of  the  chief  of 
Asia — the  Asiarchs,  who  were  officers 
having  charge  of  festivals  in  the  Roman 
province  of  Asia.  Thoy  were  ten  iu 
number,  chosen  annually  by  the  cities 
of  Asia,  and  were  required  to  bear  them- 
selves the  expenses  of  the  costly  games, 
which  were  held  iu  the  month  of  May, 
in  honor  of  Diana.  They  were,  conse- 
quently, men  of  wealth ;  and  having 
been  once  chosen  they  retained  the 
title  during  life.  Who  were  his 
friends,  or  friendly  to  him,  without 
implying  that  they  were  Christians. 
Their  duties  at  the  heathenish  games 
were  inconsistent  with  a  Christian  pro- 
fession. Possibly  some  of  them  may 
have  been  secret  believers.  Paul  had 
great  power  in  attracting  honorable 
friends,  such  as  Sergius  Paulas,  Gallio, 
Felix,  and  Festus,  and  the  centurion 
on  the  voyage  to  Rome.  It  was  cer- 
taiuly  remarkable  that  such  leading 
and  prominent  men  in  heatlienish 
sports  should  have  shown  such  a 
friendly  and  solicitous  care  for  Paul ; 
and  as  Akerman  remarks,  it  is  "  an 
assertion  which  no  fabricator  of  a 
forgery  would  have  ventured  upon." 

33.  The  confusion  of  the  assembly  is 
vividly  portrayed.  This  verse  is  a 
continuance  of  the  description  of  ver. 
29.  A  vast  multitude  had  assembled, 
with  a  vague  idea  of  something  wrong 
committed  with  reference  to  the  god- 
dess Diana ;  but  the  greater  part  were 
ignorant  of  its  exact  uatuie. 


33.  And  they  drew  Alexander, 

etc.  Literally,  Out  of  the  croivd  they 
brought  forward  Alexander,  the  Jews 
urging  him  along.  Calvin,  Meyer,  and 
some  others  suppose  him  to  have  been 
a  Christian,  whom  the  Jews  wished  to 
expose  to  the  fury  of  the  mob,  and  so 
turn  away  their  anger  from  the  other 
Jews.  But  it  is  more  natural  with 
Neandcr,  Hackett,  and  others  to  regard 
him  as  a  Jew,  perhaps  an  orator,  who 
would  disclaim  any  participation  of 
the  Jews  in  Paul's  proceedings.  The 
Jews  knew  that  they  were  liable  to  be 
confounded  with  Christians,  and  they 
would  naturally  wish  to  explain  that 
Paul  and  his  companions  were  apos- 
tates from  the  Jewish  faith.  Some  sup- 
pose this  to  have  been  "  Alexander,  the 
coppersmith,"  who  much  later  did  Paul 

much     evil    (iTim.  l:20;2Tiui.l;14),     and 

that  his  trade  led  him  into  certain  re- 
lations with  Demetrius  and  his  crafts- 
men. But  this  is  doubtful,  as  the  name 
was  common.  And  would  have 
made  his  defence — rather,  a  defence 
for  himself  and  his  people. 

34.  When  they  knew^r  per- 
ceived— that  he  was  a  Jew,  from  his 
looks,  and  perhaps  from  words  he  was 
beginning  to  utter,  Gentile  hatred  and 
prejudice  at  once  iniluenced  the  whole 
multitude.  They  recognized  a  Jew  at 
once  as  opposed  to  idol-worship,  and 
probably  did  not  closely  discriminate 
between  Jews  and  Christians.  A  con- 
tinuous cry  for  about  the  space  of 
two  hours  went  up.  Great  is  Diana 
of  the  Ephesians.  This  was  not 
only  an  expression  of  loyalty,  but  an 
act  of  worship,  which  accorded  with 
Oriental  and  heathenish  customs.  (Matt. 
6:7.)  Compare  the  repetitions  of  the 
prophets  of  Baal  in  1  Kings  18  ;  26. 
Mohammedans  and  the  worshipers  of 
Brahma  in  India  often  spend  the  entire 
day  iu  uttering  such  repetitions. 


S12 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIX. 


35  And  when  the  townclcrk  had  appeased 
the  people,  he  said,  Ye  men  of  Ephesus, 
■what  man  is  there  that  knoweth  not  how 
that  the  city  of  the  Ephesians  is  a  wor- 
shipper of  the  great  goddess  Diana,  and  of 
the  image  which  fell  down  from  Jupiter? 

36  Seeing  then  that  these  things  cannot  be 


spoken  against,  ye  ought  to  be  quiet,  and 

37  *to  do  nothing  rashly.  For  ye  have 
brought  hither  these  men,  which  are 
neither    robbers    of    churches,    nor    yet 

38  blasphemers  of  your  goddess.  Wherefore 
if  Demetrius,  and  the  craftsmen  which 
are  with  him,  have  a  matter  against  any 


d  Prov.  25  :  8. 


35.  And  when,  etc.  But  the  town 
clerk  fiat-ing  quieted  the  multitude.  The 
town  clerk,  or  secretary  of  the  city,  kept 
the  records  of  the  j)ublic  assemblages, 
attended  to  letters  addressed  to  the  city, 
and  was  the  guardian  of  its  public  docu- 
ments and  archives.  The  inscriptions 
in  Mr.  "Wood's  Ephesus  make  mention 
of  two  town  clerks,  one  of  the  senate, 
and  one  of  the  popular  assembly. 
(Theatre,  pp.  ItJ,  44.)  The  office  of 
town  clerk  ajjpears  to  have  been  one  of 
great  importance  and  intlucnce.  Some- 
times he  was  invested  with  the  dignity 
of  high  priest  of  the  goddess.  He  was 
ex-officio  president  of  the  assembly. 
He  said — ^his  speech  is  candid  and 
shows  great  tact.  He  appeals  to  them, 
that  such  excitement  is  unbecoming 
the  Ephesians,  who  were  above  all  sus- 
picion in  their  devotion  to  the  goddess 
Diana  (this  verse  and  the  next).  He 
affirms  tliat  nothing  can  be  proved 
against  these  men  (vcr.  37),  that  this  con- 
course and  excitement  was  unnecessary, 
for  the  courts  were  ojien  to  Demetrius 
and  his  craftsmen  (ver.  ss.  39),  and  that 
they  were  liable  to  be  called  to  an  ac- 
count by  the  Roman  authorities.  ( ver. «.) 
The  city  of  the  Ephesians  is  a 
Ai'orshipper,  or  temple-lreper.  Liter- 
ally a  temple-sweeper,  one  who  sweeps 
and  cleanses  the  temple,  and  hence  one 
xvho  keeps  and  adorns  it.  It  became 
an  honorary  title,  a  temple-keeper, 
which  Ej)hesus  was  proud  to  receive 
and  claim,  as  the  guardian  of  the 
temple  and  worship  of  Diana.  Among 
the  inscriptions  of  Mr.  Wood  at  Ephe- 
sus is  one  wliicli  speaks  of  an  assembly 
of  the  temple-keepers.  ( Theatre,  p.  3.) 
The  title  first  apjjcared  on  the  coins  of 
Ephesus  under  the  Emperor  Nero,  who 
entered  upon  his  reign  in  the  autumn 
of  A.  D.  54.  If  these  coins  had  Ix'en 
recently  issued,  the  reference  to  this 
title  would  be  the  more  significant  and 
emphatic.  And  of  the  image  which 


fell   down  from   Jupiter— that  is, 

from-  heaven.  Like  many  other  vener- 
ated idols  of  the  ])agan  world,  it  was 
believed  to  have  fallen  down  from  the 
sky.  Possibly  the  origin  of  such 
legends  may  have  arisen  from  the  fall 
of  meteoric  stones.  The  reference  here 
is  to  the  wooden  image  of  Diana,  which 
was  a  rude,  many-breasted  female 
figure,  entling  below  the  breasts  in  a 
mummy-like  pillar,  curiously  carved 
with  symbols  of  bees,  grain,  and 
flowers. 

3G.  Such  being  the  case,  ye  ought, 
it  is  your  moral  duty,  to  be  quiet, 
exercising  self-control,  and  to  do 
nothing  rashly  or  precipitately. 

37.  For,  implying  that  they  had 
acted  rashly,  and  introducing  the  rea- 
son for  such  an  imi>lication.  Neither 
robbers  of  churches,  rather,  of  tern- 
pies.  They  were  not  spoilers  of  temples, 
and  thus  guilty  of  sacrilege.  Nor  yet 
blasphemers  of  your  goddess — 
or,  according  to  some  old  manuscripts, 
our  goddess.  From  this  we  may  learn 
how  wisely  and  quietly  Paul  had  done 
his  work  at  Ephesus.  He  did  not  deal 
in  ridicule  or  in  violent  denunciations, 
but  taught  the  truth  positively,  and 
thus  imderniined  idolatry.  He  doubt- 
less exercised  a  winning  and  graceful 
courtesy,  and  a  care  for  the  feelings  of 
others. 

38.  Wherefore,  etc.  Accordingly, 
since  these  men  are  neither  blasphemers 
nor  guilty  of  sacrilege,  if  Demetrius 
and  the  otliers  have  a  matter  against 
any  man,  the  law  is  open,  literally, 
the  court-days  are  kept.  Perhaps,  as 
some  suppose,  the  courts  were  in  session. 
Ephesus  was  one  of  those  towns  where 
Roman  officials  held  court.  Being  also 
a  free  city,  it  had  its  local  courts  and 
magistrates.  The  courts  were  held  in 
the  agora,  or  forum,  which  was  near 
the  great  theatre.  And  there  are 
deputies — rather,  proconsuls,  Ephe- 


f^a.  XIX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


313 


man,  the  law  is  open,  and  there  are  depu- 

39  ties:  let  them  implead  one  another.  But 
if  ye  inquire  anything  concerning  other 
matters,  it  shull  be  determined  in  a  law- 

40  ful  assembly.    For  we  are  in  danger  to 


be  called  in  question  for  this  day's  up- 
roar, there  being  no  cause  whereby  we 
may  give  an  account  of  this  concourse. 
41  And  when  he  had  thus  spoken,  he  dis- 
missed the  assembly. 


sus  being  a  senatorial  province.  (See  on 
13 ;  7.)  There  was  usually  but  one  pro- 
consul at  a  time.  Hence,  some  sui)pose 
the  plural  here  includes  the  judges  or 
assistants  appointed  by  him  for  the 
trial  of  cases.  The  term,  however, 
may  lie  used  in  a  general  sense,  referring 
to  t!ie  whole  class.  But  in  the  first  year 
of  Xero,  the  proconsul  Silarius  was 
jioisoiied  by  Celes  and  Heliiis,  who 
held  the  office  together  till  a  successor 
should  be  appointed.  As  Celes  did  not 
return  to  Rome  till  A.  D.  57,  it  has  been 
conjectured  that  they  were  now  exer- 
cising proconsular  authority.  Let  them 
implead  one  another — let  them  ac- 
cuse, bring  a  charge  one  again.st  the 
other,  or  plead  against  one  another. 
Notice  how  prudently  the  town  clerk 
refrains  from  naming  Paul  or  any  of 
his  companions. 

39.  But  if  ye  inquire,  etc.  If  your 
inquiry  has  reference  to  other  matters 
than  those  under  the  jurisdiction  of  the 
court,  it  shall  be  determined  or 
settled  in  the  lawful  or  reijular 
assembly.  This  implies  tluit  the 
present  gathering  was  irregular  and 
unlawful.  The  word  used  for  assembly 
here  and  in  ver.  41  is  the  one  usually 
ti-anslated  church,  (see  on  5 :  u.)  Among 
the  Greeks  the  word  was  applied  to  an 
assembly  of  the  people  convened  for  the 
puri)ose  of  deliberating  on  public  mat- 
ters. This  assembly  held  an  important 
place  at  Ephesus.  It  had  three  stated 
meetings  every  month.  It  could  also  be 
convoked  by  the  magistrate  of  the  city. 
An  inscription,  found  in  this  very  tlie- 
atre,  speaivs  of  the  lawful  or  regular 
assembly.  Private  grievances  could  be 
laid  before  the  courts ;  matters  which 
concern  tiie  public  should  be  brought 
before  the  lawful  or  regular  asseml)ly. 
Thus  there  was  no  justification  for  this 
tumultuous  concourse. 

40.  Finally,  the  town  clerk  reminds 
them  that  they  had  criminally  exposed 
theiuselves  to  punishment  from  the 
Roman  government,  which  did  not  tol- 
erate riotous  assemblages  in  the  prov- 
inces, and  punished  the  rioters  with 


death.  For  Ave  are  in  dan§^er  to 
be  called  in  question,  or  accused, 
for  this  day's  uproar,  or  riot  before 
the  Roman  Senate  and  Roman  officials. 
The  liberties  of  their  free  city  might 
in  consequence  be  forfeited.  There 
being  no  cause ;  and  they  could 
give  no  justifiable  account  of  this 
concourse.  Their  danger  was  not 
merely  in  being  accused,  but  iu  being 
unable  to  defend  themselves. 

41.  When  he  had  thus  spoken — 
adroitly,  firmly,  and  authoritatively — 
he  dismissed  the  assembly — im- 
plying that  the  tumult  was  quelled,  and 
the  people  having  been  brought  to 
proper  calmness  and  consideration, 
were  quietly  dispersed. 

Many  infer  from  the  presence  of  the 
Asiarchs  y^ ver.  si)  at  Ephesus  that  the 
riot  took  place  in  the  Artemesion 
month  (parts  of  April  and  May),  in 
which  the  Ephesian  games  were  cele- 
l)rated  in  honor  of  Diana.  This,  how- 
ever, is  not  a  necessary  inference ;  for 
Asiarchs  would  be  present  at  the  au- 
tumnal election ;  and  doubtless  some 
of  them  who  had  received  the  honor 
and  bore  the  title  resided  at  Ephesus, 
and  thus  had  the  better  opportunity  of 
knowing  Paul,  (vir,  si.)  See  on  ver. 
22,  last  paragra])h. 

Soon  after  this  riot  Paul  leaves  Ephe- 
sus, having  completed  three  years  labor 
there.  (20 : 1, 31.)  In  some  respects  this 
had  been  his  most  successful  mission. 
He  had  gathered  a  strong  church,  made 
up  of  a  membership  of  well-develojied 
Christians.  At  Corinth  the  church  was 
composed  largely  of  those  who  needed 
milk  suited  for  babes,  rather  than  solid 
food  fitted  for  men  of  full  age.  (1  cor. 
s:i.2.)  But  at  Ephesus  he  could  de- 
clare the  whole  counsel  of  God  (ver.  27), 
and  speak  wisdom  among  them,  as 
growing  up  into  the  fullness  of  the 
stature  of  Christian   manhood.     (1  Cor. 

■!:(,:  Eph.  3:  10;  4:1S.)      His    Epistle   tO   the 

Ephesians,  written  nearly  six  years 
htter,  bears  testimony  to  the  same  truth. 
It  is  one  of  the  profoundest  books  ever 
v^ritten ;    yet  the  Ephesians  were  ex- 


314 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XIX. 


pected  to  understaud  it.  This  shows 
the  proficiency  wliich  his  converts  had 
attained  under  his  preaching. 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  He  who  would  save  souls  must  seek 
after  souls.  (Ver.  1 ;  John  1  :  41 ;  Luke 
5 :  10.) 

2.  True  religion  may  be  connected  with  a 
very  imperfect  experience.  There  will, 
however,  be  a  readiness  to  embrace  the 
truth  when  presented.    (Ver.  2  ;  10  :  34,  35.) 

3.  The  baptism  of  John  demanded  repent- 
ance and  faith  in  the  Messiah,  and  thus  it 
was  substantially  the  same  as  that  practiced 
by  the  apostles.  (Ver.  3,  4;  Mark  1:4; 
John  1 :  15.  21-24.) 

4.  There  are  instances  where  baptism 
sbould  be  repeated ;  for  example,  when  it 
has  been  administered  to  an  infant,  or  to 
an  unconverted  person,  or  when  the  di- 
vinely appointed  formula  has  been  omitted. 
(Ver.'4;  Matt.  28:19.) 

5.  The  supernatural  gifts  of  the  Spirit  had 
their  place  and  uses  in  the  beginning  of  the 
Gospel  Dispensation.   (Ver.  5 ;  1  Cor.  14  :  22.) 

6.  The  presence  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  the 
Comforter,  is  the  privilege  of  all  believ- 
ers.   (Ver.  6 ;  Luke  11 :  13  ;  John  14 :  16.) 

7.  We  should  strive  to  produce  conviction 
in  the  minds  of  men  regarding  the  things  of 
the  kingdom.    (Ver.  8 ;  Col.  1 :  28.) 

8.  Religious  di.sputation  is  generally  vain 
and  unprofitable.  (Ver.  8,  9 ;  1  Tim.  6 :  4 ;  2 
Tim.  2  :  23.) 

9.  Churches  should  be  organized  both  for 
holding  forth  the  truth,  and  as  a  protest 
against  error.  (Ver.  9;  1  Tim.  3:15;  Rev. 
2:13.) 

10.  Continued  and  persevering  labor  in 
on  e  place  repays  the  Ch  ristian  worker.  (Ver. 
10;  18:10.) 

11.  Good  men  have  ever  been  ready  to 
refer  all  miraculous  power  which  may  have 
attended  them  to  God.    (Ver.  11 ;  Ps.  62  :  11.) 

12.  The  great  miracles  which  God  wrought 
through  the  handkerchiefs  and  aprons  of 
Paul  do  not  justify  the  worship  of  the  relics 
of  the  saints.    (Ver.  12.) 

13.  It  is  one  of  the  evidences  of  Christian- 
ity that  it  has  its  counterfeits.  (Ver.  13;  2 
Cor.  11 :  13-15. 

14.  They  who  would  do  effective  work  for 
Christ  must  have  a  personal  and  experi- 


mental knowledge  of  him.   (Ver.  14;  2  Peter 
1  :  8,  y.) 

15.  Hypocrites  and  pretenders  in  Christ's 
kingdom  will  sooner  or  later  manifest  their 
real  characters.    (Ver.  15  ;  2  Peter  2  : 1-3.) 

16.  Evil  spirits  are  stronger  than  wicked 
men ;  but  Christ  is  stronger  than  the  Devil 
and  his  hosts.    (Ver.  16 ;  Luke  11 :  20-22.) 

17.  Results  show  that  there  is  a  difference 
between  Christ's  true  servants  and  impos- 
tors.    (Ver.  17  ;  Mai.  3  :  18.) 

18.  One  of  the  evidences  of  a  renewed 
heart  is  the  confessing  and  the  forsaking  of 
sin.    (Ver.  18 ;  Prov.  28 :  13 ;  Rom.  10  :  10.) 

19.  When  one  is  converted,  if  he  has  been 
engaged  in  a  wicked  business,  he  should  re- 
nounce and  forsake  it,  whatever  pecuniary 
sacrifice  it  may  cost.  (Ver.  19 ;  Eph.  5  : 
11.) 

20.  The  advance  of  Christ's  cause  is  seen, 
not  only  in  the  number  of  adherents,  but  in 
the  changes  in  the  heart  and  life  of  his  fol- 
lowers.   (Ver.  20 ;  Eph.  2 : 1-7.) 

21.  We  should  ever  be  purposing  new 
achievements  for  Christ.  (Ver.  21 ;  Rom. 
1 :  13-15.) 

22.  We  should  plan  to  do  good  through 
others  as  well  as  by  our  own  personal  efforts. 
(Ver.  22;  Luke  10  : 1, 16.) 

Zi.  Pure  Christianity  will  cause  a  stir  in 
a  wicked  world.    (Ver.  23 ;  Matt.  10  :  34-37.) 

24.  Demetrius  is  a  type  of  those  religion- 
ists whose  zeal  arises  from  their  love  of 
gain.    (Ver.  24 ;  16 :  20,  21 ;  1  Tim.  6  :  9.) 

25.  A  selfish  religion  is  false  and  will  ruin 
the  soul.    (Ver.  25-27  ;  Matt.  16  :  24-29.) 

26.  Blinded  zeal  and  prejudice  rather  pre- 
fer clamor  to  argument.  (Ver.  27-29 ;  Luke 
28 :  20-23.) 

27.  A  persecuting  spirit  is  an  element  of 
false  religion.    (Ver.  29 ;  1  John  3  :  10-12.) 

28.  Our  zeal  may  sometimes  go  beyond 
prudence.  At  such  times  thoughtful  friends 
are  a  great  aid  and  blessing.    (Ver.  30,  31.) 

29.  God  is  the  author  of  order;  but  sin 
and  sinners  bring  confusion.  (Ver.  32-34 ;  1 
Cor.  14 :  33  ;  James  3 :  16.) 

30.  Prudent  and  courteous  speech  is  more 
effective  than  violence  and  force.  (Ver. 
35-41.) 

31.  The  preacher  should  be  moderate  in 
controversy.  Hard  names  and  offensive 
personalities  do  evil  rather  than  good.  (Ver. 
37  ;  Titus  3  : 1,  2.) 

32.  Governments  have  their  proper  func- 


Ch.  XX.j 


THE  ACTS. 


315 


Again  visits  Macedonia  and  Greece ;  returns 
through  Macedonia  to  Troas  and  Miletus  on 
the  ivay  to  Syria. 

20    AND  after  the  uproar  was  ceased,  Paul 


called  unto  him  the  disciples,  and  em- 
braced them,  and  'departed  for  to  go  into 
Macedonia. 


>  ch.  19  :  21 ;  2  Cor.  2  :  12,  13  ;  1  Tim.  1  :  3. 


tions  and  should  be  used  accordingly.  (Ver. 
38,  39 :  Rom.  13 :  4.) 

33.  Roman  law  aided  the  progress  of  the 
gospel.     (Ver.  38, 39 ;  16 :  38,  39 ;  18 :  14,  15.) 

34.  Thuy  who  raise  tumults  should  be 
held  strictly  accountable  to  law.    (Ver.  40.) 

35  There  was  the  regular  assembly  at 
Ephesus  according  to  law,  and  an  irregular 
one  contrary  to  law  ...  So  there  is  the  reg- 
ular assembly  {church)  of  Christ,  of  which 
he  is  the  Head,  organized  according  to  the 
gospel,  made  up  of  those  who  believe  on 
him,  are  baptized  in  his  name,  and  are 
united  and  covenanted  together  to  do  his 
will.    (Ver.  39,  41.) 

Ch.  20  :  In  this  chapter  Luke  con- 
tinues the  account  of  Paul's  third  mis- 
sionary tour.  Leaving  Ephesus,  Paul 
revisits  northern  and  southern  Greece, 
and  returns  through  Macedonia  to 
Troas  on  his  way  to  Jerusalem.  From 
Troas  he  sails  down  the  JEgesin  Sea  by 
Epliesus,  to  Miletus,  where  he  meets  the 
pastors  of  the  Ephesian  church,  and 
takes  leave  of  them  in  an  impressive 
address  and  with  prayer. 

1-12.  Paul  Revisits  Macedonia 
AND  Greece.     Spends  a  Week  in 

Troas.  (2  Cor.  1  :  is,  is  ;  2  :  12,  13  ;  7  :  5,  B;  12  : 
14;  13:1;  Rom.  15  :  18, 19,  25,  26  ;  16:1,21-23.)  Paul 

leaves  Ephesus  in  the  summer  or  au- 
tumn of  A.  D.  57,  spends  the  autumn 
and  winter  in  Macedonia,  and  Greece, 
leaving  Corinth  and  reaching  Philippi 
just  before  the  Passover  week,  A.  D. 
58. 

1.  After  the  uproar  was  ceased. 
Tliis  note  of  the  time  is  indefinite. 
There  is  no  evidence  that  the  tumult 
hastened  his  departure.  Several  days 
may  have  intervened.  The  narrative 
is  brief  and  passes  over  time  rapidly. 
Called  unto  him  the  disciples,  some 
of  the  oldest  and  best  manuscripts  add, 
exhorted  them.  Embraced  them — 
yai>e  them  a  jmrting  salutation.  And 
departed.  It  has  been  very  com- 
monly supposed  that  this  was  soon  after 
Pentecost  (i  cor.  le :  a),  and  in  the  month 


of  May,  which  was  the  Artemesion 
month.  (See  on  19: 22.)  But  among  the 
great  number  of  craftsmen  and  work- 
men, and  in  the  large  city  of  Ephesus,  a 
tumult  could  be  raised  at  any  time. 
Asiarchs  (i9 :  3i )  would  be  present  at  the 
autumnal  election,  as  well  as  in  May, 
and  some  doubtless  resided  at  Epliesus. 
(See  on  19: 41.)  There  are  several  reasons 
for  believing  that  Paul  continued  at 
Ephesus  longer  tlian  Pentecost.  1. 
After  writing  his  First  Epistle  to  the 
Corinthians  a  great  "  affliction  befell " 
him  (2  Cor.  1:8),  which  appears  to  have 
been  a  severe  illness,  possibly  his 
chronic  malady  or  bodily  infirmity, 
which  threatened  his  life.  (2  Cor.  1 : 9, 10 
11 :  23;  12:7,9.)  Such  a  scvcrc  attack 
would  detain  him  at  Ephesus  longer 
than  he  expected.  2.  Such  detentions 
were  not  uncommon  in  Paul's  ministry. 

(Gal.  4:  13,  11;  1  Thess.  2  :  17  ;  18  ;  3  :  1 ;  Kom.  1:13; 
15  :  22,  23  ;  2  Cor.  1  :  15-17,  23.)         3.     About    thC 

time  of  writing  his  First  Epistle  to  the 
Corinthians,  Paul  sends  Timothy  to 
them  by  way  of  Macedonia,  (i  cor.  4 :  n ; 
16 :  in.)  After  doing  this  he  returned  to 
Philippi.  (2  Cor.  1 : 1.)  This  Avould  rather 
indicate  that  it  was  some  time  after 
Pentecost  when  Paul  found  him  there. 
4.  Titus  is  sent  later  to  Corinth  (2  Cor.  2 : 
12, 13 ;  7 : 5,  fi),  very  likely  after  Paul  had 
received  from  Timothy  news  direct  from 
Corinth,  regarding  the  church.  This 
would  probably  be  as  late  as  Pentecost. 
He  is  sent  and  Paul  delays,  so  that  he 
may  not  come  to  them  "  in  sorrow." 
(2  Cor.  2 : 1.)  5.  The  statement  that  Paul 
"spent  three  months  in  Greece  "  seems 
to  imjily  that  this  was  the  longest  time 
that  he  spent  in  any  one  countr>'^  during 
the  somewhat  rapid  journey  after  leav- 
ing Ephesus.  (Ver.  2-6.)  If  so,  then 
Paul  must  have  been  in  Macedonia 
less  than  three  months.  Now  Paul  left 
Corinth  about  March  1,  A.  D.  58,  in 
order  to  reach  Philippi  at  the  Passover 
of  that  year,  March  27.  (ver.  3. 5,6.) 
Allowing  then  a  month  in  going  from 
Ephesus  to  Philippi,  two  months  in 
Macedonia,  three  months  in  Greece,  a 


316                                             THE  ACTS. 

[Ch.  XX. 

2      And  when  he  had  gone  over  those  parts,      3  he  came  into 
and  had  given  them  much  exhortation,         three  months. 

'Greece,  and  there  abode 

fch.  19  :21. 

month  or  at  most  two  months  for  trav- 
eling to  and  from  Greece,  we  have  seven 
or  eight  months  from  Paul's  departure 
from  Kphesus  to  his  departure  from 
riiilijjpi  for  Jerusalem.  Keekouiug 
backward  from  March  27,  A.  D.  58,  we 
reach  about  August  1,  or  September 
1,  A.  D.  57.  (Seeouver.  31.)  (See  a  fuller 
discussion  in  Harmonic  Arrangement, 
pp.  22G-2;iO.) 

To  go  into  Macedonia.  Luke 
merely  states  the  fact.  Paul  in  his 
Second  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians  gives 
some  particulars.  From  Ephesus  Paul 
went  direct  to  Troas,  whether  by  land 
or  sea,  we  are  not  told.  (2  Cor.  2 ;  12")  Here 
he  found  "  a  door  opened  to  him  in  the 
Lord ; "  but  so  great  was  his  disap- 
pointment iu  not  finding  Titus  with 
news  from  Corinth,  that  he  could  not 
remain  long  to  preach,  but  hastened 
into  Macedonia  to  meet  him.  (2Cor. 
2 :  13.)  Having  come  into  Macedonia, 
he  was  still  in  great  anxiety  and  afflic- 
tion (2  Cor.  - :  5),  but  he  is  soon  after  re- 
lieved and  filled  with  joy,  by  the  long 
expected  arrival  of  Titus  with  good 
news  from  Corinth.  (2  cor.  7 : 7.)  This 
coming  probably  occurred  at  Pliilip})i, 
and  there  Paul  wrote  his  Second  Epistle 
to  the  Corinthians,  in  the  autumn  of 
A.  D.  57.  On  3Tacedoma,  see  on  16  :  9. 
While  iu  JIacedonia  he  probably  visited 
the  churches  at  Philippi,  Thessalonica, 
and  Berea,  and  extended  his  labors 
into  the  western  part  of  Macedonia 
unto  the  boundaries  of  Illyricum.  (Rom. 
15 :  18, 19.)  He  was  probably  accompa- 
nied by  two  Ephesians,  Tychicus  and 
Trophimus.     (Ver. +.) 

2.  When  he  had  gone  over 
those  parts  or  regions — as  just  noted 
in  the  preceding  verse.  This  preaching 
excursion  extending  "  round  about 
even  unto  Illyricum  "  (Rom.  15 :  19)  afibrds 
a  striking  contact  of  the  Acts  and 
Paul's  epistle,  and  is  another  of  the 
many  confirmations  of  the  accuracy  of 
Luke.  Had  given  them — that  is, 
the  diciples  in  all  that  region — much 
exhortation.  He  came  into 
Greece  —  meaning  the  province  of 
Achaia,  to  distinguish  it  from  Mace- 


donia. (See  on  18 :  13.)  He  probably 
preached  the  gospel  on  his  way  to 
Corinth  (2  cor.  10  :  le),  and  made  preach- 
ing excursions  into  the  surrounding 
parts  of  Achaia,  with  his  headiiuarters 
at  Corinth.  The  sentence  should  end 
with  this  verse. 

3.  And  there  abode,  etc.  Rather, 
And  when  he  had  stayed  three  months. 
The  winter  was  thus  spent  in  Achaia, 
probably  most  of  the  time  at  Corinth. 
It  was  during  this  time  that  the  Epistle 
to  the  Eomaus  was  written,  or  com- 
pleted in  its  present  form.  This  epistle, 
the  most  systematic,  and  doctriually 
the  most  complete,  of  all  the  ejiistles, 
was  probably  the  result  of  long  thought. 
As  he  had  long  proposed  to  visit  Eome, 
so  he  may  have  had  this  in  long  pre- 
paration. The  Epistle  to  the  Galatians 
and  the  Second  to  the  Corinthians  in- 
dicate impulsive  and  quick  writing ; 
but  the  Ejnstle  to  the  Romans  bears 
marks  of  deliberation  both  in  structure 
and  composition.  Tertius  acted  as 
amanuensis.  (Rom.  16:22.)  It  was  sent 
by  Phebe,  a  deaconess  of  the  church  at 
Cenchrea,  in  the  spring  of  A.  D.  58, 
about  this  time  when  Paul  was  return- 
ing to  Macedonia.  (Rom.  le :  1.)  On  this 
journey  to  Jerusalem  Paul  takes  with 
him  the  contributions  from  the  Chris- 
tians of  ilacedonia  and  Achaia  to  the 
poor  brethren  of  Judea.      (Rom.  15  .  23-28 ; 

1  Cor.  IG  :  2i  ;  2  Gov.  8  :611 ;  Acts.  24  :  17.)    It  haS 

been  noted  by  Wordsworth  that  no 
mention  is  made  of  this  collection  in 
the  Epistle  to  the  Galatians,  which  is 
an  indication  that  the  latter  was  written 
before  the  two  Epistles  to  the  Corinth- 
ians. The  request  that  he  should  re- 
member the  poor  which  he  was  forward 
to  do  (Gal  2 :  10),  lookcd  backward  to  11 : 
29,  30,  and  doubtless  forward  to  the 
collections  which  he  took  upon  this 
journey.     (2*:  17.) 

The  Jews  laid  wait  for  him,  or 
a  plot  (9:  n)  wa^  laid  for  him  by  the 
Jews,  at  the  end  of  three  months. 
What  this  plot  was  is  unknown.  Per- 
haps   it    was  to  waylay   him   on  his 

way  to  the    ship.        (see  23  :  12  ;  2  Cor.  11  :  32) 

This  led  Paul  to  change  from  the  direct 


Cn.  XX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


517 


And  5  when  the  Jews  lairl  wait  for  him, 
as  he  vras  about  to  sail  into  Syria,  he  pur- 
4  posed  to  return  through  Macedonia.  And 
there  accompanied  him  into  Asia  ''Sopa- 
ter  of  Berea.  And  of  the  Thcssalonians, 
'  Aristarchus  and  Secundus ;  and  ^  Gains 
of  Derbe,  and  'Timotlieus;  and  of  Asia, 


5  ■»  Tychicus  and  "Tropliimus  :  these  going 

6  before  tarried  for  us  at  Troas.  And  we 
sailed  away  from  I'hilippi  afler  "the days 
of  unleavened  bread,  and  came  unto  theiu 
p  to  Troas  in  five  days ;  where  we  abode 
seven  days. 

7  And  upon  i  the  first  day  of  the  week, 


6  oh.  9  :  23  ;  25  :  3  ;  2  Cor.  11  :  20.    h  Koni.  10 

21.    i  ch.  19  :  29  ;  27  :  2  ;  Col.  4  :  10. 

kch.  l'J:29.    ich.  10:1.    m  Eph.  0  :  21 ;  Ool.  4 

7  ;  2  Tim.  4  :  12 ;  Titus  3:12.    ■>  ch. 

21  :  29  ;  2  Tim.  4  :  20.    »  Exud.  12  :  14,  15 ;  23  :  15. 

P  ch.  16  :  S  ;  2  Cor.  2  :  12 ;  2  Tim.  4  :  13. 

q  Rev.  1 :  10. 

route  to  Syria  to  a  circuitous  oue 
througli  Macedonia.  Tliis  also  accounts 
for  the  haste  in  his  journey,     (ver.  le, 

etc-) 

4.  And  there  accompanied  him 

— as  his  associates  and  attendants, 
forming  perhaps  a  kind  of  body-guard. 
Into  Asia  is  omitted  by  many  ancient 
authorities.  Some  may  have  gone  no 
further ;  others  went  with  him  to  Jeru- 
salem. See  below,  Sopater  of  Be- 
rea. The  oldest  and  best  manuscripts 
add,  the  son  of  Pyrrhus,  perhaps  to 
distinguisli  him  from  Sosipater  of  llora. 
16  :  21,  a  diflerent  form  of  the  same 
name.  (On  Berea,  see  17  :  10.) 
Aristarchus — mentioned  in  19:29, 
wliich  see.  Secundus  —  not  men- 
tioned elsewhere  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment. Gaius  of  Derbe.  (.seeoau: 
20.)  He  is  to  be  distinguished  from 
Gaius  of  ^lacedonia  mentioned  in  19  : 
29.  But  was  perhaps  the  one  to  whom 
John  wrote  liis  Third  Epistle.  Tini- 
otheus.  (.SL-eoiiic:i,  2.)  Tychicusis 
mentioned  in  Eph.  6  :  21;  Col.  4:7; 
Titus.  S  :  12 ;  and  2  Tim.  4  :  12,  from 
wliicli  it  appears  tliat  he  was  one  of 
Paul's  most  faithful  companions  and 
fellow-laborers,  and  the  bearer  of  at 
least  two  of  his  epistles.  He  probably 
accompanied  Paul  to  Jerusalem. 
Trophimus  became  tlie  innocent  oc- 
casion of  Paul's  arrest  at  Jerusalem 
(21 :29),  and  much  later  is  mentioned  in 
2  Tim.  4  :  20,  as  liaving  been  left  sick 
at  ililetus.  It  lias  been  thought  tliat 
Tycliicus  and  Trophimus  were  the  two 
brethren  who,  with  Titus,  managed  the 
collection  for  tlie  ]ioor  saints  at  Jeru- 
salem. (2  Cor.  8  :  16-24.)  It  is  Very  prob- 
able that  the  seven  brethren  here 
named  were  representatives  of  Gentile 
churches,  recently  formed  in  Asia  and 
Europe,  and  the  bearers  of  contribu- 
tions,     (l  Cor.  16  :  3,  -1.) 


5.  These  going  before,  or  having 
gone  forward,  tarried  or  were  wait- 
ing for  us  at  Troas.  From  the  use 
of  the  first  person  it  is  evident  that 
Luke  rejoins  Paul  at  Philippi  (^r-s), 
where  he  had  been  left  six  years  before. 
(See  on  )6 :  10, 10.)  During  this  period  Luke 
I^robably  labored  at  Philippi  and  its 
vicinity.  Tiie  seven  brethren  men- 
tioned in  the  preceding  verse  appear  to 
have  gone  forward,  to  Troas  from  Phil- 
ippi. For  at  the  latter  city  Paul  tar- 
ried with  Luke,  (vcr.6.)  This  verse 
implies  that  at  some  point  they  pre- 
ceded him  to  Troas  ;  and  the  mention 
of  sailing  away  from  Philippi  in  the 
next  verse,  naturally  suggests  that  city 
as  the  place  of  Paul's  stojjping,  and 
their  going  forward. 

After  ithe  days  of  unleavened 
bread— the  Pa.ssover  festival  lasting  a 
week.  This  is  used  as  a  chronological 
note  of  time.  It  seems  probal)le  that 
Paul  tarried  at  Philippi  not  merely  for 
the  oljservance  of  the  Passover ;  but 
that  Luke  might  arrange  and  pre]iare 
for  going  with  him.  From  this  point 
to  the  end  of  the  Acts  Luke  appears  as 
a  companion  of  Paul.  The  minuteness 
in  the  narrative  indicates  his  presence 
as  an  eye-witness.  To  Troas  in  five 
days — six  years  before  this  Paul  had 
made  the  voyage  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion in  two  days,  (ifi:  ii.)  Less  favor- 
able winds  doubtless  account  for  th(! 
difference  of  time.  The  Passover  of 
A.  D.  58  began  on  ^Marcli  27.  We 
may  supjwse  that  on  Ajiril  4,  the  day 
following  tlie  eighth  day  of  tlie  feast, 
Paul  sails  from  Phili])pi,  and  in  five 
days,  on  A]>ril  8,  perhaps  late  in  the 
day,  he  arrives  at  Troas.  Here  he  re- 
mains a  week. 

7.  Upon  the  first  day  of  the 
week,  etc.  We  have  here  a  recogni- 
tion of  a  practice  which  began  imme- 


THE  ACTS. 


[Cii.  XX. 


when  the  disciples  came  together  'to 
break  bread,  Paul  preached  unto  them, 
ready  to  depart  on  the  morrow :  and  con- 


8  tinued  his  speech  until  midnight.  And 
there  were  many  lights  "  in  the  upper 
chamber,  where  they  were  gathered  to- 


f  ch.  2  :  42,  46 ;  1  Cor.  10  :  16  ;  11  :  20,  etc.        •  ch.  1 :  13. 


diately  after  the  resurrection,  of  meet- 
ing for  celebrating  the  Lord's  Supper 
and  other  religious  services.  (John  20 :  19, 
26;  Luke  24: 35.)  On  the  day  our  Lord 
rose  from  the  dead  lie  appeared  on  five 
different  occasions.  After  eight  days, 
that  is,  on  the  next  first  day  of  the 
week,  he  again  appeared  to  the  eleven. 
It  thus  became  a  day  of  holy  joy  and 
thanksgiving,  and  memorable  to  the 
disciples.  AVhat  associations  clustered 
around  that  day,  and  how  natural  and 
fitting  that  each  returning  first  day 
sliould  be  hallowed  with  worship  and 
the  breaking  of  bread.  And  now, 
twenty -eight  years  later,  Paul  meets  the 
worshiping  disciples  at  Troas  on  the 
first  day  of  the  week.  The  religious 
services  and  the  breaking  of  bread  at 
that  time  could  not  have  been  acci- 
dental. They  indicate  a  custom  among 
the  disciples.  About  a  year  before  this 
Paul  enjoined  a  practice  of  special  re- 
ligious duties  on  the  first  day  of  the 
week.  (1  Cor.  ic :  1, 2.)  ;N[any  years  later 
John  speaks  of  the  Lord's  Day  (Rev. 
1 :  10),  which  refers  not  to  the  seventh 
day,  for  the  word  Sal)l)ath  was  applied 
to  that  day,  but  most  naturally  to  tiie 
first  day  of  the  week,  as  tlie  one  on 
which  the  liOrd  rose  from  the  <lead. 
Pliny,  in  his  letter  to  Trajan,  says  th.at 
Christians  were  wont  to  meet  on  a  cer- 
tain day  before  daylight  for  divine 
worship.  On  this  occasion  it  .seems 
that  they  met  before  sunset ;  and  a 
religious  service  preceded  the  breaking 
of  bread,  (ver.  u.)  Some  suppose  tliat 
Paul  held  this  service  on  Saturday 
evening,  that  being  the  beginning  of 
the  first  day  of  the  week,  according  to 
the  Jewish  reckoning  of  the  day,  and 
that  he  resumed  his  journey  on  Sun- 
day morning.  It  is  a  matter  of  small 
importance  whether  the  first  day  of  the 
week  commenced  at  sunset  Saturday, 
or  a  few  liours  later  at  midnight.  It  is 
far  more  important  to  note  here  a  trace 
of  the  observance  of  Lord's  Day  among 
disciples  at  that  early  day.  "Since 
the  suffering  of  Christ  ajipeared  as  tlie 
central  point  of  all  religious  experience 


and  life,  since  his  resurrection  was  con- 
sidered as  the  foundation  of  all  Chris- 
tian joy  and  hope,  it  was  natural  that 
the  communion  of  the  church  should 
have  specially  distinguished  the  day 
with  Avhich  the  memory  of  that  event 
had  connected  itself."  (Neander.) 
"As  Luke  had  mingled  so  much  with 
foi-eign  nations  and  was  writing  for 
Gentile  readers,  he  would  be  very  a])t 
to  designate  the  time  in  accordance 
with  their  practice ;  so  that  his  even- 
ing or  night  of  the  Jirst  day  of  (he  week 
would  be  the  end  of  the  Christian  Sab- 
bath, and  the  morning  of  his  departure 
that  of  Monday."  (Dr.  Hackett.) 
The  Papistic  of  BarnaJias,  a  teacher  of 
Alexandria,  who  wrote  in  the  first 
half  of  the  second  century ;  Justin 
Martyr,  about  A.  D.  140 ;  Dionysius, 
A.  D.  170 ;  Irenseus,  A.  D.  180 ;  Clement 
of  Alexandria,  A.  D.  196  ;  Tertullian, 
A.  D.  200  ;  Origen,  A.  D.  230,  and  Cyp- 
rian, A.  D.  250,  all  give  their  testimony 
to  Lord's  Day  observances.  (Sce  on  Mark 
16 : 2.)  The  Lord's  Day  gradually  sup- 
planted the  Jewish  Sabbath,  though, 
for  a  time,  both  were  observed.  The 
zealots  for  the  law  appear  to  have 
demanded  that  Gentile  Christians 
should  observe  the  .Jewish  Sabbath  as 
well  as  other  Jewish  festivals,  against 
which  Paul  gave  his  advice,  (coi. 2;i6. 
seeRom.  i4:.5.)  Ready  to  depart  en 
the  morrow.  As  the  incidents  here 
related  were  occiirri  ng  on  the  first  day  of 
the  week  it  is  most  natural  to  rut'er'the 
vwrrotr  to  Jlonday,  the  second  day  of  the 
week,  A])ril  17.  Instead  of  disciples, 
the  best  nianuscrijits  have  ire. 

8.  There  were  many  lights,  or 
lamps.  The  minute  description  of  this 
verse  indicates  the  language  of  an  eye- 
Avitness.  These  lights  enal>led  the 
audience  to  see  Eutychus  distinctly. 
(Ver.  !i.)  In  the  upper  chamber—  in 
Greek  houses  commonly  u.sed  for  com- 
pany and  feasts,  which,  in  this  case, 
was  "  the  third  loft,"  or  story.  (Ver.  9.) 
Instead  of  thry,  the  best  manuscripts 
:  read,  where  we  were  gathered  to- 
1  gether. 


Ch.  XX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


319 


9  gether.  And  there  sat  in  a  window  a  cer- 
tain young  man  named  Kutyehus,  being 
fallen  into  a  deep  sleep :  and  as  Paul  was 
long  preaching,  he  sunk  down  with  sleeii, 
and  fell   dowii  from  the  third  loft,  and 

10  was  taken  up  dead.  And  Paul  weni.  down, 
and  fell  on  him,  and  embracing  him  said, 
"  rrouble  not  yourselves  ;  for  his  life  is  in 

U  him.    When  he  therefore  was  come  up 


again,  and  had  broken  bread,  and  eaten, 
and  talked  a  long  while,   even  till  break 

12  of  day,  so  he  departed.  And  they  brought 
the  young  man  alive,  and  were  not  a  little 
comforted. 

13  And  we  went  before  to  ship,  and  sailed 
unto  Assos,  there  intending  to  take  in 
Paul:  for  so  had  he  appointed,  minding 


'  Matt.  9  :  24. 


9.  There   sat  in  a  window — on 

the  window  sill,  perhaps  with  svats 
exk'iiiliui;  over  the  street  or  court.  The 
window  was  not  of  glass,  Ijiit  with  a 
wooden  shutter  wliich  would  l)e  open 
on  account  of  heat,  and  to  obtain  fresh 
air.  The  night  was  dark;  for  at  the 
i'assover  the  moon  was  full  (vtr.  6),  and 
now  rose  after  midnight  as  a  faint  cres- 
cent. A  certain  young  man — called 
a  boy  in  ver.  12.  He  was  a  youth,  but 
(iiese  terms  do  not  determine  his  age. 
fleing  fallen,  or  bortie  doicn  with  a 
tU*f  p  sleep,  produced  in  i>art,  doubt- 
less, l)y  the  warmth  of  the  room.  And 
as  Paul  Avas  long  preaching,  or 
discunrscd  yrf  lon<jcr  tiuui  luidnight. 
(Ver.  7.)  He  sunk  down,  or  was  boms 
down  with  sleep— he  became  relaxed, 
lost  his  l)alance,  and,  as  a  con.sequence, 
fell  from  the  third  loft,  or  storj/. 
And  was  taken  up  dead.  Notice 
that  Eut^'chus  is  not  merely  talvcn  up 
for  dead,  l)ut  really  dead,  and  tliis  is 
recorded  by  Luke,  the  pliysician,  wlio 
was  present,  and  knew  all  t!ie  partic- 
ulars.     (See  on  ver.  12.) 

10.  Paul  went  down— by  the 
staircase,  which  was  usually  outside  of 
an  Eastern  house.  Fell  on  him,  em- 
bracing him.  Similar  to  what 
Elijah  (iKiugsi7:2i)  and  Elisha  (2  Kings 
i:u)  did,  and  doul)tless  like  them,  ac- 
coinpauyiug  his  action  with  j^rayer. 
Trouble  not  yourselves.  Be  not 
distressed.  Com])are  our  Lord's  words 
in  thehouseofJairus.  (i."ke8:52, 53.)  For 
his  life  is  in  him.  He  saw  the  signs 
of  life,  and  felt  returning  motions  as 
he  clasped  and  held  him  in  his  arms. 

11.  When  he  therefore  was 
come  up  again — better.  And.  hav- 
ing gone  up,  Paul's  calmness  had 
its  proper  effect  on  tlie  congregation. 
And  had  broken  bread — rather, 
the  bread.  Paul  proceeded  to  admin- 
ister the  Lord's  Supper,   which    had 


Ijeen  delayeil  by  the  fall  of  Eutychus. 
"  It  is  worthy  of  notice  that  whatever 
kind  jof  bread  is  eaten,  whether  the 
large  soft  loaf,  or  the  thin  cake,  it  is 
never  cut  with  a  knife,  but  broken  with 
the  hand.  Hence  the  expression  so  com- 
mon in  the  Scripture,  as  well  as  in  other 
Eastern  writings,  to  '  break  bread,' 
that  is,  to  eat."  (Dk.  H.  Van  Len- 
NEP,  Bible  Lands,  p.  yo.)  And  eaten 
— another  act,  after  the  Lord's  Supper. 
They  partook  of  a  more  substantial  re- 
past, perhaps  of  the  love  feast.  And 
talked  a  long  Avhile  with  them. 
This  was  not  formal  preaching,  l)ut 
social  intercourse,  connected  with  the 
meal  and  afterward.  And  departed 
on  foot  to  Assos,  a  distance  of  twenty 
miles.     (Vir.  13, 11.) 

12.  And  they  brought  the  young 
man  alive,  the  lad  living,  which  im- 
plies that  he  had  been  dead.  (ver.  9.)  It 
would  seem  that  he  was  brought  up 
into  the  congregation  before  it  finally 
broke  up,  and  probably  before  Paul's 
de))arture. 

13-18.  Pat^l  Goes   on   Foot    to 

Assos,   THEN    BY   SEA    TO    MiLETUS, 

Where  he  Gave  a  Parting  Ad- 
dress TO  THE  Elders  of  the  Ephe- 

SIAN  Church.       (Rom.  15  :  30-:«;  1  Cor.  4  :  11, 

12 ;  Ps.  74 : 2.)  Tliis  cmbraces  a  period  of 
about  one  week. 

13.  And— rattier,  But  Ave  went 
before  to  the  ship — describing  what 
Luke  and  the  rest  did  without  Paul. 
They  probably  left  very  early  in  the 
morning,  immediately  after  the  re- 
storing of  Eutychus.  And  sailed 
unto  Assos — rather,  embarked  for 
Assos,  a  town  on  the  coast  of  Mysia, 
twenty  miles  by  land  south  of  Troas, 
Init  about  forty  miles  by  sea.  It  was 
doubtless  necessary  for  the  ship  to  start 
thus  early,  l)ut  Paul  would  take  leave 
of  his  brethren  at  Troas  in  a  less  hur- 
ried manner,  and  perhaps  wished  to  be 


S20 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XX. 


14  himself  to  go  afoot.  And  when  he  met 
with  IIS  at  Assos,  we  took  him  in,  and 

15  cameio  Mitylene.  And  we  sailed  thence, 
and  came  the  next  dut/  over  against  t'hios. 
And  the  next  rfay  we  arrived  at  Samos, 
and  tarried  at  Trogyllium ;  and  the  next 


16  rfd.v  we  came  to' Miletus.  For  Paul  had 
determined  to  sail  by  Ephesus,  because 
he  would  not  spend  the  time  in  Asia:  for 
y  he  hasted,  if  it  were  possil>le  for  him,  lo 
be  at  Jerusalem  ^  the  day  of  Pentecost. 


■  2  Tim.  4  :  20.        J  ch.  18  :  21 ;  19  :  21.        '  1  Cur.  IG  :  : 


alone  in  meditation  and  prayer.  There 
\vas  a  good  Konian  road  from  Troas 
passing  throui^li  Afsos.  The  journey 
could  l)e  ])t'rf()riued  iu  live  hours;  and 
if  i'aul  left  Tioas  at  seven  o'clock,  he 
CDuld  reach  Assos  about  noon. 

14.  They  sailed  around  Cape  Lectum, 
and  when  they  reached  Assos,  Paul  met 
them  and  was  taken  into  the  sliip,  and 
they  sail  to  Mitylene,  the  capital  city 
of  tlie  island  IasIjos,  ahout  thirty  miles 
soutliward.  It  was  famed  for  its  heau- 
tifnl  situation  and  its  magnificent  build- 
ings. Its  modern  luime  is  t'astro.  A 
narrow  strait  separates  the  island 
Lesbos  from  Asia  Minor.  Here  they 
jiass  the  night.  Being  a  coasting  voj"age, 
cai'h  night  was  spent  in  some  harbor. 
The  winds  must  have  been  very  favor- 
able to  have  accomplished  so  long  a 
voyage  in  a  single  day. 

15^  >Ve  came  the  next  or  folloir- 
ing  (lay,  on  Tuesday,  April  IS,  accord- 
ing   to    our     reckoning.      (Seeou  ver.  6,  7.) 

Over  against  Chios,  tlie  modern 
island  8cio,  about  five  miles  distant 
from  the  mainland.  It  was  famous  for 
it,s  ))eauty,  ami  about  forty  miles  south 
of  Mitylene.  The  language  implies  tlutt 
they  did  not  \>\\t  into  the  harbor, 
but  lay  off  at  some  distance,  in  the 
shelter  of  the  roadstead,  and  thus 
jiassed  tlie  niglit.  The  ship  may  have 
t)een  becalnu'(I  in  the  afternoon.  The 
next  day  they  arrived  at  or  touched, 
Samos,  an  island  1)eariug  still  the 
same  name,  about  fifty  miles  south- 
east of  Chios.  It  was  separated  by  a 
narrow  strait  from  the  mainland.  The 
island  had  been  famous  in  Greek  his- 
tory. And  tarried  at  Trogyllium, 
about  a  mile  across  the  channel  on  the 
uuiinland.  They  had  jiassed  the  bay 
below  Ephesu.s,  and  were  now  nearer 
Ej)hesus  than  at  Miletus.  For  some 
unknown  reason  Paul  chooses  the  latter 
l)lace  for  meeting  the  Ejihesian  elders. 
Perhaps  on  account  of  the  better  liarbor, 
and  the  delay  of  the  ship  for  business. 


But  the  words,  And  tarried  at  Trogyl- 
lium, are  not  found  in  the  oldest  manu- 
scripts, and  are  omitted  in  the  Revised 
Version.  And  the  next  day  \ve 
came  to  Miletus,  a  few  miles  south 
of  Trogyllium,  a  city  more  ancient  than 
Ephesus,  but  in  Paul's  day  outstri])]Kd 
in  wealth  and  grandeur  by  the  latter 
city.  It  was  on  the  coast  of  Caria,  and 
about  twenty-eight  miles  south  of 
Ephesus.  It  is  now  a  swamp  with  a 
few  ruins,  some  distance  from  the  sea. 
It  was  some  distance  in  Paul's  time. 
(Ver.  38.)  Here  they  arrive,  according 
to  our  reckoning,  on  Thur.sday,  April 
20,  perhajis  early  in  the  afternoon,  and 
remained  a  few  days. 

16.  This  verse  gives  the  reason  why 
Paul  sailed  })ast  P^j)hesus,  and  dclaye<l 
at  Miletus.     It  si'Cins  evident  that  he 
had  some  control  of  tlie  ship.     Be- 
cause he  Avould  not,  etc. — that  he 
might  not  upend  time  in  the  province  of 
A.sia.     In  the  large  church  jit  Ejthesus 
'  there    would     naturally    ari.se    many 
I  causes   of  delay.      Besides,   he   might 
;  meet  hostility  from  certain  (luarters,  to 
allay  which  would  consume  time.    ( i  Cor. 
'le:**.)     lie    had    determined,    and    7/v'i.' 
j  hastening,  if  possible,  to  be  at  .lerusalem 
I  on    Pentecost.     About   twenty-three  of 
[  the  fifty  days,  between  the  Passover  and 
Pentecost,  had  already  gone   when   he 
I  arrived  at  Miletus.     Many  rea.soiis  may 
i  have  made  him  anxious  to  be  at  Pen- 
tecost. (Scooi.  2 : 1.)  His  presence  would 
I  be  ])leasing  to  Jewish  Christians.  (21 :  '.'o.) 
1  He  would  also  meet  with  n;any  fiu-eign 
■Tews  who  had  come  to  the  great  feast ; 
and  also  tlie  ])resentation  at  this  time 
\  of  the  gifts  from  the  Gentile  churches 
would  give  ijreat  publicity  to  the  inter- 
est of  Gentile  Christians  in  their  Jewish 
biethren.     While  there  is  not  the  least 
evidence  of  the  Christian  oliservanceof 
Pentecost,  at  that  early  day  believers 
would  naturally  feel  an  interest  in  it  as 
the   day   wlieu   the    Holy    Spirit  first 
descended  upon  Christians.     (2 :  i.) 


Cii.  XX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


32l 


Paul's  farewell  address  to  the  elden  of  the 

Ephesiaii  church. 
17      AND  from  Miletus  he  sent  to  Ephesus, 


and   called  »the  elders  of   the  church. 
18  And  when    they  were  come  to  him,  he 
said  anto  them, 


•  1  Tim.  5  :  17 ;  1  Peter  5  :  1. 


17.  And  from  Miletus  he    sent 

to  Ephesus.  He  arrived  probably 
about  Thursday,  April  20.  On  the 
Bauie  day  or  the  day  following  he  could 
send  a  messenger  to  Ephesus,  twenty- 
eight  miles  distant,  for  the  elders  of 
tlie  church.  These  could  arrive  by  or 
before  Saturday  night,  so  that  Sunday, 
April  23,  and  perhaps  a  i)art  of  Satur- 
day could  be  spent  in  social  and  relig- 
ious services,  closing  with  his  farewell 
charge. 

The  elders  of  the  church.  These 
elders  are  called  overseers,  or  bishops,  in 
ver.  28.  They  were  the  pastors  at 
Ephesus.  The  church  was  large,  and 
having  no  house  of  worshi]),  it  had  a 
number  of  meeting  places  for  different 
portions  of  its  members,  and  thus  needed 
a  plurality  of  elders  to  exercise  over- 
sight at  their  religious  services  and  at 
other  times.  It  is  acknowledged  by 
all  that  during  the  life  time  of  Paul, 
and  in  the  early  churches,  elders 
and  bishops  were  the  same.  The  title 
elder  being  essentially  Jewish  was 
the  common  designation  in  Jewish 
churches ;  and  that  of  bishop  or  over- 
seer, from  an  official  title  among  the 
Greeks,   was   common  among  Gentile 

churches.       (l  Tim.  3  :    l  ;  Titus  1  :  7;  1  Peter 2  : 

35; 5: 2.)  Jcrome,  who  died  A.  D.  420, 
says :  "  Among  the  ancients  bishops 
and  presbyters  are  the  same  ;  for  one  is 
a  term  of  dignity,  the  other  of  age." — 
Epist.  LXIX. 

There  is  no  trace  of  a  third  order  of 
the  ministry,  or  of  church  officers,  in 
the  New  Testament.  In  Phil.  1:1, 
written  A.  D.  62, "  bishops  and  deacons  " 
are  mentioned  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
indicate  only  two  classes  of  church 
officers,  and  exclusive  of  a  third  class. 
So  also  1  Tim.  8  :  1-7,  8-15  ;  5  :  17-19, 
and  Titus  1  :  5-7,  unmistakably  point 
to  two  classes  exclusive  of  a  third  class, 
in  A.  D.  66.  "  The  angels  of  the  seven 
churches"  (Rev.  i  :  20)  probably  meant 
the  pastors,  and  in  any  event  did  not 
indicate  a  third  class  of  a  higher  order 
of  bishops.  "  It  is  the  conception  of  a 
late  age  which  represents  Timothy  as 


bishop  of  Ephesus,  and  Titus  as  bishop 
of  Crete."  (Dr.  J.  B.  Ligutfoot, 
Phil.  p.  199.)  Clement,  of  Rome,  who 
wrote  A.  D.  90-100,  makes  no  mention 
of  a  higher  order  of  bishops  in  his 
epistle.  But  he  speaks  of  appointing 
bishops  and  deacons,  and  indicates  that 
bishops  were  the  same  as  jiresbytcrs,  or 
elders.  Polycarp,  of  Smyrna,  who  was 
martyred  at  a  very  advanced  age,  about 
A.  D.  156,  uses  the  word  elder  as  equiva- 
lent to  bishop,  in  his  epistle  to  the 
Philippians,  chap,  v  and  vi.  "  The 
Teaching  of  the  Twelve  Apostles," 
written,  perhaps,  about  A.  D.  120, 
speaks  of  the  "  bishoi>s  and  deacons  " 
(ch.  XV),  as  if  they  were  the  only 
church  officers,  and  gives  no  counte- 
nance to  a  third  class,  or  to  the  least 
modified  form  of  a  church  hierarchy. 
But  intermediate  between  these  two 
latter  and  Clement,  lived  Ignatius  of 
Antioch,  who,  on  his  journey  to  Rome, 
where  he  suffijred  martyrdom,  A.  D. 
116,  is  said  to  have  written  seven  epis- 
tles, in  which  he  speaks  of  bishops, 
elders,  and  deacons,  and  indicates  the  su- 
periority of  bishops  over  the  other  two 
orders.  The  value  of  these  epistles  is 
greatly  lessened  by  their  gross  inter- 
polations and  possible  forgeries.  Dr. 
Lightfoot,  however,  lays  great  stress  on 
them,  and  thinks  that  bishops  of  a  higher 
order  were  recognized  in  Ephesus 
and  Asia  Minor  early  in  the  second 
century.  But  he  admits  that  at  that 
time  bishops  in  this  higher  sense  did 
not  exist  in  Macedonia  and  Greece.  It 
appears  that  early  the  churches,  in 
both  doctrine  and  ])ractice,  licgan  to 
depart  from  the  simplicity  of  the  gospel. 
We  can  rest  safely,  therefore,  only  njwn 
the  teachings  of  the  New  Testament 
and  upon  a])ostolic  authority  and  ex- 
ample. Paul  foretold  that  many  sliould 
fall  away  from  the  faith  (i  Tim.  < :  1),  and 
that  in  the  last  days  ])erilous  times 
should  come.  (2  Tim.  .i :  1  f )  And  .lohn 
affirmed,  "It  is  the  last  time  ;  and  as 
ye  have  heard  that  antichrist  shall 
come,  even  now  are  there  many  anti- 
christs."    (1  John  2  :  18.) 


322 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XX. 


Te  know,  '■from  the   first  day  that  I 

came  iuto  Asia,  after  what  mauner  I  have 

19  been  with  you  at  all  seasons,  serving  the 


Lord  "  with  all  humility  of  mind,  and 
*  with  many  ti  ars,  and  « temptations, 
which  befell  me  by  the  lying  in  wait  of 


i>  2  Cor.  1  :  12 ;  1  Thess.  1 :  6,  6. 


«  1  Cor.  15  :  9,  10;  2  Cor.  12  :  7-10. 
»  2  Cor.  11 :  23-30. 


d  See  Luke  19  :  41. 


f  It  is  very  probable  that  in  some  of 
the  early  churches  oue  of  the  elders 
was  selected  to  act  as  the  leading  pastor, 
like  James  at  Jerusalem.     (i5:i3.) 

If  one  became  distinguished  for  wis- 
dom, or  discourse,  or  age,  he  might  be 
chosen  as  a  temporary  head  of  the  elder- 
ship, and  subsequently  regarded  as  the 
chief  of  the  elders,  and  in  a  succeeding 
generation  be  accorded  an  official  su- 
periority, and  styled  the  bishop,  while 
the  others  would  continue  to  be  known 
as  elders.  Such  a  change  doubtless 
occurred  very  soon  after  the  apostolic 
age.  Neander  rem2Lr]i.s  {Pla)iting  and 
Training,  p.  148)  regarding  apostolic 
churches :"  We  find  among  them  no 
individual  distinguished  above  the 
rest  who  presided  as  o  chief  among 
equals,  though  probablj'  in  the  age  im- 
mediately succeeding  the  apostolic,  of 
which  we  have  unfortunately  so  few 
authentic  memorials,  the  practice  was 
introduced  of  applying  to  such  an  oue 
the  name  of  bishoj)  by  way  of  distinc- 
tion." Such  a  primitive  bishop  was 
strictly  speaking  the  principal  j)astor 
of  a  church,  and  entirely  ditterent  from 
the  diocesan  bishop  that  in  due  time 

followed.       (S<?c  further  on  11  :  30.) 

The  New  Testament  no  where  recog- 
nizes sacerdotal  or  priestly  functions 
in  the  Christian  ministry.  All  be- 
lievers are  a  "  holy  priesthood,  to  offer 
up  spiritual  sacrifices,  acceptable  to 
God  tlirough  Jesus  Christ."  0  pcut 2:5.) 
Clirist  is  our  great  High  Priest,  and  all 
liave  equal  access  by  faith  through 
him.  ( Heh.  1(1 ;  19 -■:3.)  Dr.  Lightfoot  traces 
sacerdotalism  to  heathen  rather  tlian 
Jewish  sources ;  and  states  that  Ter- 
tnllian,who  died  between  A.  i).  220  and 
240,  was  the  first  to  assert  direct  sacer- 
dotal claims  on  behalf  of  the  Christian 
ministry ;  and  that  Cyprian,  who  died 
A.  D.  2.58,  became  the  champion  of  un- 
disguised sacerdotalism.  lie  also  says  : 
"  The  only  priests  designated  as  such 
in  the  New  Testament,  are  the  saints, 
the  members  of  the  Christian  brother- 
hood."    (Phil.  p.  184,  f.) 


18.  He  said  unto  them.  This 
speech  is  remarkable  for  expressions 
and  sentiments  peculiar  to  Paul,  which 
indicates  the  fact  that  Luke  heard  it 
and  reported  it.  Paul  first  of  all  re- 
minds them  of  the  spirit  and  character 
of  bis  ministry  among  them  (vcr.  is-ai) ; 
refers  to  expected  sufterings,  and  ex- 
presses the  conviction  that  he  will  see 
their  face  no  more.  (vcr.'i2-25.)  He  tes- 
tifies to  his  own  ministerial  fidelity, 
and  exhorts  them  to  a  like  faithfulness 
and  watchfulness,  (ver.  26-31.)  Finally  he 
commends  them  to  God,  and  enforces 
generous  and  disinterested  labor  by 
reference  to  his  own  example,  and  a 
memorable  saying  of  the  Lord  Jesus. 

(\er.  32-35.) 

Ye — emphatic.  Ye  yourselves  knoiv. 
Compare  Samuel's  appeal  to  Israel  after 
the  selection  of  Saul  as  king.  (1  sam. 
12 : 2-5.)  Also  Joshua's  farewell  addresses. 
(Josh.  23:2.3;  24 :  15. 22.)  From  the  first 
day  that  I  came  into  Asia.  Not 
only  at  Ephesus,  which  was  the  great 
centre  of  his  Christian  activity  and 
missionary  work,  but  elsewhere  in  the 
province,  whither  he  had  made  preach- 
ing excursions.  After  what  manner 
I  have  been  with  you  the  whole  time. 
Paul  appeals  to  his  conduct  from  first 
to  last.  Compare  Paul's  appeal  to  the 
Thessalonians,  1  Thess.  1  :  o  ;  2:10. 

19.  Serving  the  Lord — with  the 
devotedness  of  a  servant  or  slave,  claim- 
ing not  to  be  his  own,  but  wholly  the 
I.K)rd's.  The  ex]>ressiou  is  almo.st  pecu- 
liar to  Paul.       (Rom.  12:11;  14:1.1;  16:  18 ;  Col. 

3 :  24 ;  1  Tbess.  1 : 9.)  With  all  humility, 
or  lowliness  of  mind.  The  same  ex- 
pression is  found  in  Phil.  2  :  3  and  Col. 
3  :  12.  As  a  servant,  neither  refusing 
to  do  any  kind  of  work  for  the  Lord's 
sake,  however  menial  or  insignificant, 
nor  attempting  to  lord  it  over  God's 
heritage.  (iPeier5:3.)  And  Avilh  many 
tears.  Omit  mani/,  according  to  the 
oldest  authorities.  2<-rt/-s  is  used  twice 
in  this  address  (here  and  in  ver.  31), 
and  illustrated  by  example  in  ver  37. 

(SceJCor.  2:4;  PW1.3:  18.)        The     tears    iu 


Ch.  XX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


323 


20  the  Jews:  and  how  'I  kept  back  nothing 
that  was  profitable  mito  you,  but  have 
showed  you,  and  have  taught  you  pub- 
Si  licly,  and  from  house  to  house,  e  testify- 
ing both  to  the  Jews,  aud  also  to  tue 


Greeks,  •"  repentance   toward  God,    and 
faith  toward  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ. 

22  And  now,  behold, '  1  go  bouud  in  the 
spirit  unto  Jerusalem,  not  knowing  the 

23  things  that  shall  befall  me  there:  save 


t  ver.  27  ;  1  Cor.  15  :  3.        e  ch.  18  :  .J.        h  ch.  2  :  38  ;  Luke  24  :  47. 


ich.  18:5;  19:  21. 


this  verse  are  those  of  pain  and  suffer- 
ing connected  with  temptations,  or 
trials  which  befell  him  by  the  lying 
in  Avait,  or  plotting  of  the  Jews. 
Luke  UTilvcs  no  mention  of  a  plot 
against  Paul's  life  at  Ephesus.  The 
hostility  of  the  Jews  is  alluded  to  in 
19  :  y  ;  aud  their  anxiety,  at  the  tumult 
at  Ephesus,  to  show  that  they  had  no 
eympatliy  with  Paul.  (i9:33.)  Paul, 
Iiowever,  mentions  these  plottings  at 
Ephesus,  doubtless  similar  to  those  at 
Damascus,  The.ssalouica,  Corinth  (ver.  :j), 
aud  other  cities  ;  but  it  did  not  fall  in 
with  Luke's  purpose  to  tell  us  concern- 
ing them.      (See  1  Cor.  15  :;il,3.';  18:9.) 

20.  Paul  still  appeals  to  their  recol- 
lection, how,  negatively,  he  had  exer- 
cised the  utmost  fidelity':  Hoip  I  kept 
back  nothing  that  Avas  profitable, 

that  I  should  not  announce  it  to  you. 
Neither  from  fear,  nor  from  any  other 
cause  had  he  sh  runkfrom  making  known 
what  was  projitable  or  helpful,  to  their 
salvation,  (icor.  io:;«.)  This  .sometimes 
necessitated  rebuke  and  great  plainness 
of  sijeech,  as  well  as  encouragement,  a 
work  not  always  pleasant.  A  nd  teaching 
you  publicly — as  in  tlie  synagogue 
three  months,  and  two  years  in  the 
Bchoolhouse  of  Tyrannus.  (i9:8io.) 
And  from  house  to  house — in  pri- 
vate houses,  in  distinction  from  public 
gatherings.  He  thus  not  only  taught 
those  who  came  to  hear  him,  but  put 
fortli  personal  efforts  among  tiic  people, 
at  their  homes,  talking  to  them  individ- 
ually, and  holding  private  meetings  for 
instruction.  "Observe  the  qualifica- 
tion, profitable  to  yon.  What,  as  yet, 
they  were  unjirepared  for,  he  may  have 
kej)t  back  till  tlie  time  for  preseiiting  it 
should  arrive.  All  Scripture  is  profit- 
able, but  not  to  all  men  at  all  times. 

(Sec John  16:  IJ  ;  1  Cor.  .1 :  1.  2.)"       (ABBOTT.) 

21.  Testifying  the  necessity  of  re- 
pentance and  faith  to  both  Jews  and 
Greeks.  Tliis  was  the  sum  and  sub- 
stance of  what  he  taught  as  necessary 
aoid  profitable.  Repentance  toward 


God— by  which  we  turn  to  God.  (P9. 
51 : 4 ;  Luke  15:  i«.)  Aud  faith  toward 
our  Lord  Jesus  Christ — by  wliicb 
we  look  to  Christ,  trust  and  accept  him 
asaSaviour.  (John,  u;  i;  Acts i6 ::ii.)  Some 
ancient  manuscripts  omit  Christ.  It  is 
afan^'ifVil  interj)retationwhich  supposes 
that  Paul  enforced  repentance  as  espe- 
cially needed  by  Gentiles,  and  faith  by 
Jews.  Both  were  needful.  True  re- 
pentance and  faith  are  inseparable. 
Compare  Peter's  address  to  the  Jews  on 
the  Day  of  Pentecost.  "  Repent,"  etc. 

(2:38.) 

22.  Paul  now  turns  from  the  past  to 
the  future,  and  anticipates  approaciiing 
trial.  I  go  bound  in  the  spirit  to 
Jerusalem — he  refers  to  his  own  spirit 
wliich  impelled  and  constrained  him. 
Bound,  as  a  matter  of  obligation  or 
duty.  He  could  not  free  himself  from 
the  impulse  aud  tiie  conviction  to  go. 
(.See  17 :  iii.)  In  his  own  mind  he  was,  as 
it  were,  a  prisoner,  impelled  on  to  Jeru- 
salem, where  he  was  to  be  seized  and 
imprisoned.  The  Holy  Spirit  is  not  re- 
ferred to  here ;  for  he  is  mentioned  in 
the  next  verse,  and  di.stinguished,  as  it 
seems,  from  Paul's  spirit  here.  Not 
knowing  the  things  that  shall  be- 
fall me  there.  Aside  from  the  Holy 
Spirit  he  knew  notliing  of  the  future; 
neitlier  had  the  Spirit  revealed  any- 
thing in  particular  as  to  what  would 
happen  to  him  at  .lenisalem,  but  only 
in  general  intimations. 

23.  Save  that  the  Holy  Spirit 
witnesseth.  The  oldest  mauu.scripts 
add  to  me.  Either  by  direct  revelation 
to  himself,  or  by  his  pei-sonal  exi)eri- 
onces  and  afilictions  (9 :  -li,  29  -.  13  :  50 ;  u  :  5, 

10;  16:  23;  17  :5,   10,  13;    18:12;   20:3),     or     by 

prophets  v/ho  were  moved  to  warn  liim, 
such  as  the  disciples  at  Tyre  (-'' :  <)  and 
Agabus  at  Ca>sarea.  (2i:ii.)  Probaldy 
tlie  Spirit  had  testified  to  him  regard- 
ing persecution  in  all  these  ways.  In 
every  city^'roiu  city  to  city,  as  he 
pursued  his  labors.  That  bonds 
aud   aiiiictions  await  me — at  Jeru- 


324 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XX. 


that  k  the  Holy  Spirit  witnesseth  in  every 
city,  saying  that  bonds  and  afllictions 
24  abide  me.  But  'none  of  these  UiiiiRs 
move  me,  ■»  neither  count  I  my  life  dear 
unto  myself,  "so  that  I  might  finish  m> 
course    with  joy,   "and    the    ministry, 

kch.  9  :  16  ;  21  :  4, 11.      »  ch.  21  :  13 ;  2  Cor.  4 
2  :  17.      a  2  Tim.  4:7.      •  2  Cor.  4  :  1. 


p  which  I  have  received  of  the  Lord  Jesus, 
to  testify  i  the  gospel  of  the  grace  of  God. 

25  And  now,  behold,  I  know  that  ye  all, 
among  whom  I  have  gone  preaching  the 
kingdom  of  God,  shall  see  my  f.ice  no 

26  more.    Wherefore  I  take  you  to  record 


8,  9,  16-18  ;  -2  Tim.  1 
Pch.  9  :  15;  Gal.  1  :  1 


12.       m  Phil.  1 -.20-23; 
q  Rom.  3  :  24-26. 


salem,  whither  I  am  going.  A  little 
before  this  Paul  had  written  from 
Corinth  to  the  Koman  believers,  ask- 
ing their  prayers  "  that  he  might 
be  delivered  from  them  who  believed 
not  in  Judea,"  thus  indicating  his 
forebodings  of  persecution  at  Jerusa- 
lem. (Kom.  15:20.)  Paley  rightly  regards 
these  two  passages  as  incidentally  and 
undesignedly  confirming  the  truth- 
fulness of  each  other.  Bonds  refers  to 
the  bodily  restraints  and  impri.^on- 
nients ;  and  afflictions,  to  other  addi- 
tional sufferings,  especially  mental, 
(scei'ii'i- 1  :i")  "Supposing  "to  add  af- 
lliction  to  my  bonds,"  that  is,  mental 
suffering  especially  to  bodily  con- 
straint. 

a4.  There  is  some  difference  in  the 
reading  of  this  passage  in  the  original. 
The  oldest  manuscripts  leave  out 
neither  count  I,  and  read.  But  1 
hold  my  life  of  no  account,  as  dear  unto 
VI  yself.  He  was  forgetful  of  himself  in 
bis  devotion  to  Christ.  "  1  take  pleas- 
ure in  infirmities,  in  reproaches,  in 
necessities,  in  persecutions,  in  dis- 
tresses, for  Christ's  sake."  (2  Cnr.  12 :  10.) 
This  devotedness  of  heart  and  life, 
Paul  beautifully  and  strikingly  ex- 
presses in  Phil.  3  :  7-15.  So  that  I 
may  finish  my  course.  Paul  views 
tiie  Christian  life  as  a  race.  The  foot- 
race was  a  common  Grecian  game, 
wliich  Paul  loved  to  use  as  a  figure. 

(13:25;  Phil.  2  :  16,17;  2  Tim.  *  :  7.)    >VithjOy 

is  wanting  in  many  ancient  authorities. 
Joy  would  surely  come,  but  the  ac- 
complishment of  his  work  was  that 
which  was  uppermost  in  the  ajjostle's 
thoughts,  (pjiii.  3:13,  u.)  And  the  min- 
istry which  I  have  received— 
rather,  which  I  received,  at  my  conver- 
sion, from  the  Lord.  (1  Tim.  1 :  12.)  Tins 
ministry  was  his  apostleship.  (Rom.  1 : 1 ; 
Gal.  1 : 1.)  His  work  and  sufferings 
were  both  told  to  Ananias  (9 : 1'i.  is),  and 
made  known  to  Paul  at  the  first  (-'2 :  is,  21 ; 
86:16-18.)     To  testify  the  gospel,  or 


good  news  of  the  grace  of  God — that 
God  can  and  will  be  gracious,  even  to 
the  chief  of  sinners  who  believe  on 
Christ.  Compare  1  Tim.  1  :  12-16,  in 
which  Paul  speaks  of  his  call,  exjieri- 
ence,  and  work  in  the  ministry,  and  of 
the  gospel  as  "  worthy  of  all  accei)ta- 
tion." 

25.  Ye  all,  among  whom,  etc., — 
the  elders  wlioiu  he  was  addressing, 
both  as  individuals  and  as  representa- 
tives of  those,  among  whom  he  had 
gone  preaching  the  kingdom  of 
God.  The  oldest  manuscripts  omit 
of  God.  The  kingdom  was  a  brief  way 
of  designating  the  kingdom  of  Christ, 
or  of  God.  "(See  on  I;  3,8.)  Shall  see 
my  face  no  more.  He  now  expresses 
his  deep  conviction  as  in  ver.  22.  (Ste 
26:27.)  It  is  probablc  that  he  visited 
Ephcsus  again  after  his  first  imprison- 
ment at  Rome.  In  his  Epistle  to  Phi- 
lemon (ver.  22),  toward  the  end  of  that 
imprisonment,  lie  expresses  the  hope 
and  the  intention  of  visiting  Philemon, 
who  was  at  Colosse  ;  and  later  still, 
just  before  his  martyrdom,  lie  writes  of 
leaving  Trojihinuis  sick  at  Miletus. 
We  can  hardly  suppose  tiiat  Paul 
would  visit  these  places  and  not  have 
gone  to  Ephesus.  Some,  tlierefore,  em- 
jihasize  the  word  all  as  though  the 
apostle  only  meant  tbat  he  should 
never  see  tiiem  all  again.  But  such 
an  interpretation  is  very  improbable 
in  the  light  of  verses  o7,"S8.  As  Paul 
was  thinking  of  visiting  Home,  and 
from  thence  going  tar  westward  (Rom. 
15:24),  witb  a  lieart  Inirdciied  with  fore- 
bodings of  evil,  his  deep  conviction  at 
that  moment  was,  that  lie  would  never 
see  them  again.  Peliaps  tliis  presenti- 
ment would  have  become  a  reality  at 
Jerusalem,  or  elsewliere,  had  it  not 
been  for  the  prayers  of  the  Lord's 
people  in  his  l)ehalf.  (Rom.  15 :  20.)  See 
how  Paul  feels  four  years  later.     (m\. 

1  ;  20.  25;  2  :  24.) 

26.  Wherefore— in  view   of  this 


C«.  XX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


325 


this  day,  that  1  am  '\n\rc  from  the  blood  and  to  "all  the  flock,  'over  the  which  the 

27  of  all  ?«f /i.     For  J   bavo  not  shunned  to        Holy  Spirit  hath  made  you  r  overseers, '  lo 
declare  unto  you  all  "the  counsel  of  God.  feed  the  church  of  God,  "which  he  hath 

28  'Take   heed    therefore  unto  yourselves,  |  29  purchased  with   his  own   blood.    For    I 


'ch.  IS  :  C;  Ezek.  33  :  5,  9. 
2,  3.  »  1  Cor.  12  :  8-11,  28-30. 
19  ;  Eev.  5  ;  9. 


'  Luke  7  :  30.       '1  Cor.  9  :  27  ;  1  Tim.  4  :  lU.       »  1  Peter  5  ; 
7  1  Peter  2  ;  25,  Gr.        «  Matt.  2  :  C,  Or.        »  1  Peter  1  :  18  ; 


final  parti nc;,  and  close  of  his  ministry 
amons  tluui.     I  take  you  to  record 

• — /  tetitifi/  to  i/on,  declare  solemnly  as 
a  witness  before  Ciod.  (seeEph.  4  :  n.) 
This  day — a  strung  exi)ression,  This 
very  dai/,  the  last  we  meet  on  earth. 
I  am  pure — witii  a  clear  couscience 
(23: 1),  guiltless  of  the  destruction  of 
all,    among    whom    I    have    labored 

among  you.      ( I'lek.  S  :  is.     see  on  18  ;  6.) 

'Z7.  For  I  have  uot  shunned  to 
declare  —  liowever  disagreeable  the 
message,  he  concealed,  he  dissembled 
nothing.  All  the  counsel,  or  wiV^, 
of  God,  respecting  the  salvation  of 
men,  his  offers  of  grace  and  mercy,  and 
especially  regarding  the  nature,  neces- 
sity and  duty  of  repentance  and  faith, 
(ver.  -n.)  God's  purpose  of  mercy  to  the 
Gentiles  would  also  be  included,  (see 
Erh.3:?-ii.)  This  verse  implies  much 
in  regard  to  the  ability  of  his  Ephesian 
brethren  to  understand  and  receive  the 
gospel  in  its  fullness. 

28.  Take  heed  therefore  unto 
yourselves — that  ye  be  faithful.  He 
gives  them  prophetic  exhortation  and 
warning.    And  to  all  the  flock — the 

discipleship    ( Luke  12  :  32  ;  1  Peter  5  :  2),   that 

they  be  kept  and  preserved  from  error. 
Paul  had  faithfully  discharged  his 
duty,  and  now  he  enforces  the  respon- 
sibility on  them.  Over  Avhich — 
rather,  in  which,  as  being  themselves  a 
part  of  the  flock  and  members  of  the 
church,  among  whom  they  were  to 
labor.  The  Holy  Spirit  hath  made 
or  set  you  as  overseers ;  including  doubt- 
less the  inward  call,  and  perhaps  di- 
recting in  the  choice  of  them  as  over- 
seers. (6:5;  13: 2.)  It  is  implied  that 
they  had  been  appointed  and  set  apart 
to  their  office.  Notice  that  these  men 
are  here  styled  overseers  or  bishops, 
who  are  called  elders  in  ver.  17 ;  on 
which  see.    They  were  pastors  or  su- 

Eerintendents.  The  church  at  Ephesus 
ad  a  plurality  of  i>astors.  We  have 
no  account  in  apostolic  days  of  a 
bishop  of  a  province,  or  a  bishop  hav- 


ing a  plurality  of  churches  with  theii* 
pastors  under  him.  To  fe«d  —  to 
shepherd — like  a  shepherd  who  not 
only  feeds,  Init  tends,  directs,  and  pro- 
tects    his    flock.       (John  21  :  15,  17  ;  1  Peter  5  : 

2-4.) 

The   church   of   God,  or  of  the 

Lord — at  Ejjhesus,  in  which  they  were 
set  as  overseers.  Of  course,  these  elders 
could  not  feed  the  so-called  church 
universal,  nor  the  collective  disciple- 
ship throughout  the  world.  In  regard 
to  the  reading  in  the  original,  the  evi- 
dences are  divided  between  God  and 
Lord.  The  internal  evidence  favors 
the  reading,  God.  Paul  is  the  only 
writer  in  the  New  Testament  who  uses 
the  expression.  The  church  of  God. 
He  uses  it  eiglit  times  outside  of  this 

passage.  (iCor.  1:2;  10:32;  11:22;  15  :9; 
2  Cor.  2:1;    Gal.  1:13;    1  Tim.  3  :  5,  IS.)      Three 

times  he  uses  the  expression  churches 

of  God.       (1  Cor.  U  :  16  ;    1  Tlie.i«.  2  :  U  ;  2  Thcsa. 

1:  <•)  The  expression  churches  of  Christ 
occurs  only  once  in  his  epistles  (Rom. 
16: 16) ;  and  ch^irch  of  the  Lord,  ov  chiDxh 
of  Christ,  does  not  occur  once.  So  that 
church  of  God  is  the  usual  expression 
with  Paul,  and  the  one  which  he  would 
naturally  use  in  extemporaneous  ad- 
dress. Among  the  critics,  Tischendorf, 
Meyer,  Tregelles,  Ezra  Abbott,  and 
others  decide  for  Lord  ;  and  Scrivener, 
Alford,  Westcott  and  Hort,  and  others 
decide  for  God.  Which  he  hath 
purchased  —  rather,  ichich  he  jntv 
chased,  as  paid  once  for  all.  The  verb 
found  here  and  in  1  Tim.  ,3  :  13,  is  not  the 
one  commonlj'  used  for  buying,  and 
means  to  gain  or  acquire  for  one's  self, 
and  thus  that  which  is  thus  gotten  is 
peculiarly  one's  own.  With  his  own 
blood — the  price  of  redemption,  the 
sacrifice  of  suffering  and  death,     (see 

Rom.  3  :  25  ;  1  Cor.  6  :  20  ;  Eph.  1  :  7,  U  ;  I  Peter  1  :.I8, 
19;  2:  14,.) 

29.  For  I  know  this.  The  oldest 
manuscriiits  have  simply,  /  knov\ 
After  my  departinsc.  Paul  does  not 
refer  specially  to  his  deatli,  but  to  his 


?26 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XX. 


know  this,  that  after  my  departing  i>  shall 
grievous  wolves  enter  in  among  you,  not 
30  sparing  the  flock.  Also  «of  your  own 
selves  shall  men  arise,  speaking  perverse 
things,    to    draw    away    disciples    after 


31  them.  Therefore  watch,  and  remember, 
that  d  by  the  space  of  three  years  I  ceased 
not  «to  warn  every  one  night  and  day 
with  tears. 


i>  Matt.  7  :  15 ;  2  Peter  2  :  1-3. 


c  2  Tim.  2  :  17, 18 ;  4  :  3,  4  ;  1  John  2  :  18,  19. 
'Ezek.  3  :  17-20;  Col.  1  :  28. 


■i  ch.  19  ;  10. 


leaving  them,  with  the  conviction  that 
they  would  see  his  face  no  more. 
(ver.  25.)  Shall  grievous,  cruel 
wolves — tliese  represent,  not  persecu- 
tors, but  false  teachers.  Jesus  calls 
false  prophets  "  ravening  wolves."  (Matt. 
7 :  15.)  These  enter  in  among  them 
from  without,  not  sparing  the  flock, 
the  congregation  of  baptized  believers 
at  Ephesus.  They  were  exposed  to 
Judaizers  and  Gnostics.  In  the  second 
and  tliird  chajiters  of  Revelation  we 
learn  the  terrible  work  of  such  false 
teachers  at  Ephesus,  and  in  other 
churches  in  the  ])rovince  of  Asia. 
There  were  the  "  Nicolaitans"  "who 
say  they  are  Jews  and  are  not,  but  are 
a  synagogue  of  Satan  "  (Rev.  2 : 6, 9 ;  3  : 9) ; 
"some  who  holil  the  teaching  of 
Balaam  "  (Rev.  2 :  u) ;  "  tlie  woman  Jeze- 
bel who  calleth  herself  a  ]iroi)hetess," 
teaching  and  .seducing  by  pernicious 
and  destructive  doctrines.     (Rev.  2 :  20.) 

30.  False  teachers  should  also  arise 
from  among  the^nselves,  that  is,  not 
from  the  elders  especially,  but  from  the 
flock  including  the  elders.  They  would 
speak  perverse  things,  corrupt,  and 
distorted  doctrines.  To  draw  away, 
or  so  as  to  draw  away  the  disciples 
after  them.  Having  departed  from 
the  truth  and  embraced  false  doctrines, 
they  would  use  their  utmost  efforts  to 
drag  others  after  them.  Thus  they 
would  divide  believers  into  parties  and 
factions,  and  lead  into  apostasy  from 
the  truth.  About  eight  years  after  this 
Paul  speaks  of  his  own  experience, 
"that  all  those  in  Asia  turned  away 
from  me,  of  whom  are  Phygellus  and 
Hermogenes."  (2  Tim.  1 :  15.)  He  also 
refers  to  Hymenteus  and  Philetus," 
"  who  erred  concerning  the  trutli.  (2  Tim. 
2 :  iJ.)  In  his  First  Epistle  to  Timothy 
(1 ;  20)  he  speaks  of  having  delivered 
unto  Satan,  Hynienteus  and  Alexander. 
(See  2  Tim.  4: 14.)  Much  later  John,  who 
lived  at  Ephesus,  speaks  of  "  Piotre- 
phes,  who  loves  to  have  the  pre-emi- 


nence." (3  John  9.)  And  from  Eev.  2  : 
2-4,  we  learn  tliat  there  were  some  at 
Ephesus  who  laid  claim  to  apostolic 
authority,  and  that  the  clunch  there, 
as  a  church,  had  left  their  first  love. 
Ephesus  became  noted  afterward  as  the 
.seat  of  the  Gnostic  heresy.  Eusebius 
relates  that  the  ajjostle  John  met  with 
Ceiiiitluis,  the  early  teacher  of  Chris- 
tian Gnosticism  (i/.  />'.  iv.  14.)  "  Ephe- 
sus was  aboveall  others  the  place  where 
Oriental  views  were  in  various  ways 
comliined  with  the  mythology  and 
philosoj)hy  of  Greece ;  in  truth,  this 
city  was  a  complete  storehouse  of 
magical  arts  and  deceptions."  (Creu- 
ZER.)  Such  influences  produced  dis- 
astrous results  on  Christians  of  that 
city  and  the  churches  of  Asia.  See 
Col.  2  :  8,  20-23,  where  we  learn  of 
teachers  of  a  false  philosophy  who 
combined  Oriental  mysticism  with 
Jewish  ritualism.  See  on  ver.  38,  last 
paragraiih. 

31.  Therefore  watch — even  as  I 
have  done,  with  unsleeping  alertness. 
And  remember — and  imitate  my  ex- 
ample. By  the  space  of  three 
years.  This  precise  and  definite  note 
of  time  must  explain  the  various  notes 
of  time  given  and  implied  in  chapter 
19.  Thus  he  preached  three  mouths  in 
the  synagogue  (i»:8),  and  two  years  in 
the  school  of  Tyrannus  (i9:io),  and 
some  months  afterward.  (i9 :  21, 22.)  The 
"  three  years  "  may  be  taken  as  a  prox- 
imate expression  of  nearly  three  years. 
How  faithfully  these  Ephesian  pastors 
obeyed  this  admonition  may  be  learned 
from  Eev.  2  :  2,  3 :  "I  know  thy  works, 
and  thy  labor  and  patience,  and  how 
thou  can^t  not  bear  them  which  are 
evil,"  etc.  Notice  how  strongly  Paul 
puts  it :  I  ceased  not  to  warn  or  ad- 
motiish.  His  vigilance  was  unremit- 
ting. Every  one — his  work  was  per- 
sonal, overlooking  no  one,  of  the  elders, 
or  of  the  Eyihesian  church.  Night 
and  day — his  industry  was  unc<asiii'>-. 


Ch.  XX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


327 


32  And  now,  brethren,  I  coimuend  you  to 
God,  and  to  the  word  of  his  grace,  which 
is  able  'to  build  you  up,  and  to  give  you 
?  an  inheritance  among  all  them  ^  which 

33  are  sanctitied.    'I  have  coveted  no  man's 

34  silver,  or  gold,  or  apparel.  Yea,  ye  your- 
selves   know,    k  tiiat    these   hands  have 


ministered  unto  my  necessities,  and  to 
35  tliem  that  were  with  me.  I  have  showed 
you  all  things,  'how  that  so  labouring  ye 
ought  to  sui)port  the  weak,  and  to  remem- 
ber the  words  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  how  he 
said,  m  It  is  more  blessed  to  give  than  to 
receive. 


'  Eph.  2  :  20-22.  e  Col.  1  :  12 ;  Ileb.  0  :  15  ;  1  Petor  1  :  4,  5.  ^l  Cor.  1:2;  Heb.  10  : 
14.  i  Num.  16  :  15  ;  1  Sam.  12  :  3 ;  1  Peter  5:2.  k  ch.  18  :  3  ;  2  ThesB.  3:8.  '  Rum.  15  : 
1 ;  Eph.  4  :  28.        m  Dent.  14  :  29 ;  Matt.  10  :  8  ;  Luke  14  :  13,  14. 


With  tears— of  solicitude.  (See2Cor. 
11 :  29.)  His  ministry  had  been  warm, 
tender,  and  art'ectionate. 

32.  This  tender  and  loving  com- 
mendation to  God  is  in  keeping  with 
Paul's  reference  to  "  tears,"  in  the  pre- 
ceding verse.  I  commend,  etc. — I 
leave  you  in  God's  hands,  who  will 
never  leave  you.  Brethren  is  not 
found  in  the  oldest  authorities.  And 
to  the  word  of  his  grace — the 
gracious  words  of  the  gospel,  its  truths, 
doctrines,  and  promises,  such  as  are 
contained  in  John,  chapters  14-17. 
(SeeU:3.)  Which — properly,  7vho,  re- 
ferring to  God.  Can  build  you  up — 
a  favorite  expression  of   Paul.     (Eph. 

J  :  so,  21 ;  4  :  12,  16,  29.  Compare  1  Cor.  3  :  10.)  Sig- 
nificant to  one  familiar  with  the  stately 
architecture  of  Kphesus.  God  through 
the  Holy  Spirit  uses  the  truths  of  the 
gospel  as  an  instrument  in  building  up, 
or  edification.  (John  it  :  n.)  And  to 
give  you  an  inheritance,  rather, 
the  inheritance  of  eternal  life  and  glory 
among  all  them  that  are  sancti- 
fied, and  thus  prejiared  for  it.  (See  26  :  18.) 
This  beautiful  thought  of  the  saint's 
inheritance  is  a  favorite  one  in  Paul's 
Epistle  to  the  Ephesians.  (Eph.  i  ru,  i8; 
5 : 5.)  The  figure  is  taken  from  the  in- 
heritance of  God's  separated  people  in 
the  earthly  Canaan,     (oeut.  :i3 : 3,  ♦.) 

33.  Paul  enforces  generous  and  dis- 
interested labor  by  his  own  example. 
I  have  coveted  no  man's  silver, 
or  gold,  or  apparel.  "  I  seek  not 
yours,  but  you."  (•->  cor.  12 :  u.)  Wealth 
in  Oriental  countries  consisted  largely 
of  raiment  as  well  as  of  precious  metals. 
Compare  Matt.  6  :  19  and  James  5  :  2, 
where  the  destruction  of  earthly  treas- 
ures by  the  moth  is  alluded  to.    (See  nua 

S  Kings  5:5;    Gtn.  24  :  53  ;  45  :  22.)      The  Ephe- 

sians  are  said  to  have  been  noted  for 
their  luxurious  clothing.    Paul's  spirit 


formed  a  striking  contrast  to  that  of 
Demetrius.     (19 :  25, 26.) 

34.  Yea  is  omitted  by  the  oldest 
manuscripts.  These  hands  have 
ministered.  Doubtless  holding  them 
up  to  view.  Thus,  not  only  at  Corinth 
(is ;  3),  but  also  at  Ephesus  tent-making 
had  been  Paul's  dependence  for  sup- 
port. He  probably  worked  with  Aquila 
and  Priscilla  in  both  places.  ( 1  Cor.  le ;  19.) 
Luke  does  not  speak  of  Paul's  working 
at  Ephesus  in  his  narrative,  but  only 
brings  it  out  incidentally  in  this  ad- 
dress. Paul  alludes  to  it  in  1  Cor.  11, 12. 
"  Unto  this  present  hour,  ...  we  toil, 
working  with  our  own  hands."  Such 
undesigned  agreement  is  an  incidental 
proof  of  the  truthfulness  of  the  writings 
of  Luke  and  Paul.  And  to  them 
that  were  with  me— such  as  Timo- 
thy, who  had  "  often  infirmities  "  (1  Tim. 
5 :  23),  and  less  able  to  work  tlian  Paul. 

35.  I  have  shewed  you  all 
things — or.  In  all  things  I  gave  you 
an  example  (Revised  Version).  So 
laboring  ye  ought  to  support, 
rather,  assist  the  weak — that  is,  the 
weak,  in  body,  who  need  such  help. 
This  is  the  most  natural  meaning  of  the 
phrase,  and  is  in  harmony  with  the 
following  words  of  Jesus,  which  have 
reference  to  giving  and  receiving,  (see 
Eph.  4 :  28.)  Paul  had  not  spared  himself 
"labor  and  travail."  (2  cor.  u  :  27.)  And 
to  remember — a  well-known  saying 
of  Jesus  from  that  vast  treasury  which  is 
not  found  in  the  Gospels.  (John  21:25.) 
Yet  this  is  the  only  one  in  the  New 
Testament  not  recorded  by  the  Evan- 
gelists. How  he  said— Emphatic, 
He  h imself  said,  marking  the  quotation 
as  authentic  beyond  all  doubt.  It  is 
more  blessed  to  give  than  to  re- 
ceive. Jesus  used  thesanie  word,  blessed 
or  happy,  as  in  Matt.  .'>  :  3-11.  They 
who    give  are  more   happy,   in  their 


328 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XX. 


3G      And    when    he   had  thus  spoken,  he 
kneeled  down,  and  prayed  with  them  all. 

37  And   they   all  wept  sore,   and    "fell  on 

38  Paul's  neck,  "and  kissed  him,  sorrowing 


most  of  all  for  the  words  p  which  he  spake, 
that  they  should  see  his  face  no  more. 
And  they  accompanied  him  uuto  the 
ship. 


'  Gen.  45  :  14 ;  46  :  29.        o  Rom.  16  :  16.        P  ver.  25. 


present  enjoyments  and  in  their  pros- 
pects of  future  blessedness,  than  they 
who  receive.  This  precept  breathes  the 
spirit  of  our  Lord's  life  ;ind  doctrine; 
azul  he  liimself  is  its  grandest  illustra- 
tion. (-iCor.  8:9;  Phil.  i:9.)  It  is  an  in- 
spiration to  those,  who  need  not  labor 
from  necessity,  to  labor  from  benevo- 
lence. 

36.  The  touching  scene  of  parting  is 
related  with  great  simplicity  ;  evidently 
the  description  of  an  eye-witness.  He 
kneeled  down— a  jwsture  of  special 
solemnity ;  and  seems  to  have  l)een 
customary   with   Paul.     (21 :5;  Eph. s:  u. 

Sec   Luke  22  :  41  ;    Acts  7  :  60  :    9  :  40.)        On      the 

custom  of  standing  in  praver,  see  Luke 
18:  11-13;  Mark  11  :  25.  Prayed 
with  them  all — his  great  heart  would 
not  leave  any  of  them  out.  Luke  rev- 
erently shrinks  from  repeating  his 
prayer.  But  see  Ej)h.  3  :  14-19,  where 
we  may  catch  a  glimpse  of  his  themes 
of  prayer. 

37.  They  all  Avept  sore — with 
sobs  and  cries.  Fell  on  Paul's 
neck — embracing  him.  And  kissed 
him  tenderly  again  and  again,  for  such 
is  the  idea  of  the  verb.  Such  demon- 
strative ex])re.ssions  of  sorrow  and  affec- 
tion are  customary  in  the  East,  (see 
Gen.  45 :  14 :  16 :  29.)  The  brotherly  kiss  was 
practiced  among  early  Christians.  Paul 
frequently  refers  to  the  "holy  kiss" 

(Rom.  16:16;  1  Cor.  16  :  20,  etc.),  and  PctCr  tO 
the  kiss  of  love.       (l  Peter  5:  14.) 

38.  Sorrowing  most  of  all,  or 

distressed  chiefly  for  the  voi'd  he  had 
spoken,  (ver.  25.)  Paul's  deep  convic- 
tion made  it  a  most  solemn  reality  to 
them.  Thei/  should  see,  rather,  be- 
hold  his  face  no  more.  The  verb  is 
different  from  that  in  ver.  25.  This 
denotes  the  earnest,  reverent  and  lov- 
ing gaze,  with  which  they  would  look 
upon  and  contemplate  Paul,  the  apostle, 
and  their  spiritual  parent,  (see  on  ver.  25.) 
And  they  accompanied  him — or, 
they  brought  him  0)i  his  way  («»  is  :  s, 
and  21 : 5)  to  the  Ship.  This  indicates 
that  the  harbor  was  some  distance  from 


the  town.  The  site  of  Miletus  has  con- 
tinued gradually  to  recede  till  now  it 
is  ten  miles  from  the  coast. 

We  now  take  leave  of  the  church  of 
Ephesus  in  the  Acts.  For  some  things 
in  its  early  ecclesiastical  history,  see  on 
ver.  29,  30.  It  became  a  metropolitan 
church,  and  exerted  a  moulding  influ- 
ence on  the  churches  of  the  province 
of  Asia.  In  the  second  century  it  seems 
to  have  become  a  source  of  ecclesias- 
tical and  hierarchical  influences.  Hav- 
ing lost  its  first  love  it  yielded  to 
formality  and  worldliness,  and  after 
a  few  centuries  passes  from  history. 
"  It  is  sad  to  contemplate  the  decline 
of  primitive  piety  here,  and  the  extinc- 
tion of  churches  formed.  So  com- 
pletely has  '  the  candlestick  been  re- 
moved out  of  its  place'  (Rev. 2:5)  that 
not  a  living  soul  resides  in  Ephesus. 
Its  streets  are  ploughed  by  the  Otto- 
man serf,  or  browsed  by  the  sheep  of 
tlie  }ieasant,  and  its  mouidering  arches 
and  dilajiidated  walls,  but  whisper  tlie 
tale  of  its  departed  glory."  (FiSH'S 
Bible  Lands  Illustrated,  p.  745.) 

Pastoks  and  Churches.  In  this 
chapter  pastors  are  clearly  recognized 
as  overseers  or  superintendents  of  local 
churches,  as  well  as  teachers  and  preach- 
ers of  the  word.  They  are  shepherds 
of  the  flock,  and  as  such  they  are  to 
feed  the  church  of  God,  and  guard 
against  f^ilse  doctrine  and  false  teach- 
ers.    (Ver.  28-31.)     With   this   agree  the 

Epistles.       (1  Thess.  5  :  12  ;    Heb.  13  :  17  ;    1  Piter 

5 : 1-4.)  The  pastor  is  the  leader  and 
presiding  officer  of  the  chtirch,  the  di- 
rector and  supervisor  of  its  public  re- 
ligious instruction,  the  administrator 
of  its  ordinances,  and  the  watcher  for 
souls.  His  duties  are  necessarily  both 
public  and  private,  (ver.  20;  coi.i :  28-) 
The  number  of  pastors  to  any  church 
is  nowhere  fixed  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment. This  must  depend  most  naturally 
upon  the  size  and  circumstances  of  the 
cliurch.  A  church  embracing  as  its 
field  the  whole  city  of  Ephesus,  or 
Philippi,  would  need  more  pastors  than 


Ch.  XX.] 


THE  ACTS. 


i29 


the  church  ia  the  house  of  Pliih'iuon. 
(phiiem.  2.)  Kach  of  the  seven  cliiirches 
of  Asia  had  its  aiKjel,  or  virssengcr, 
which  some  regard  as  its  pastor.  (Kev. 
2  :  I,  n  )  There  seems  to  he  not  the  same 
demand  for  a  plurality  of  pastors  now 
as  in  ai)ostolic  days ;  nor  that  there 
should  be  but  one  church  to  a  town,  or 
city. 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  In  Christ's  service  we  should  show 
neither  a  cowardly  nor  a  defiant  spirit,  but 
act  calmly,  meekly,  and  judiciously.  (Ver. 
1 ;  John  10  :  12-14.) 

2.  We  should  exhibit  diligence  in  all  our 
affairs,  especially  in  religion.  (Ver.  2; 
Rom.  12:11.) 

3.  Faithfulness  to  Christ  always  arouses 
opposition  from  a  wicked  world.  (Ver.  3  ; 
John  15 :  20.) 

4.  Blessings  return  to  those  who  give. 
Asia  sends  forth  Paul  into  Europe,  and 
Europe  sends  back  brethren  with  Paul  into 
Asia.    (Ver.  4,  35.) 

5.  Haste  is  consistent  with  faithfulness. 
Paul  wished  to  be  in  Jerusalem  at  Pente- 
cost, but  he  did  not  slight  Philippi  orTroas. 
(Ver.  5,  6, 17.) 

6.  The  first  day  of  the  week  is  pre-emi- 
nently the  Lord's  Day,  and  we  can  point 
back  to  the  apostles  for  its  observance. 
(Ver.  7 ;  John  20  :  19,  2fi.) 

7.  Long  services  and  long  sermons  are  for 
special,  not  ordinary  occasions.    (Ver.  7-9.) 

8.  It  is  best  to  keep  awake  in  the  public 
services  of  God.    (Ver.  9.) 

9.  Preachers  should  minister  to  the  bod- 
ies as  well  as  souls  of  men.  (Ver.  10-12 ; 
10  :  38.) 

10.  We  should  have  our  times  of  medita- 
tion. In  our  walks  we  can  be  alone  with 
God.      (Ver.  13;  Luke  24:  32.) 

11.  We  should  keep  our  appointments, 
and  hasten  in  the  path  of  duty  though  it  be 
one  of  suffering.    (Ver.  14-16.) 

12.  It  was  quite  common  in  early  churches 
to  have  a  plurality  of  pastors.  (Ver.  17 ; 
11 :  30 ;  15  :  4  ;  Titus  1:5;  James  5 :  14.) 

13.  The  preacher  should  be  able  to  appeal 
to  his  hearers  in  proof  of  his  fidelity.  (Ver. 
18 ;  1  Thess.  2  :  10 ;  2  Cor.  6  : 3,  4.) 

14.  A  humble  and  tender  spirit  is  indis- 
pensable to  ministerial  usefulness.  (Ver.  19  ; 
Luke  22  :  25,  26.) 

I 


15.  Public  i)reachiiig  and  private  religious 
couvcrsation  froiiihou.se  to  house  form  two 
important  parts  of  ministerial  labor,  and 
one  cannot  well  take  the  place  of  the  other. 
(Ver.  20  ;  1  Thess.  2  :  11 ;  2  Tim.  4:2.) 

16.  He  who  fails  to  enforce  repentance  and 
faith  upon  his  hearers  fails  in  preaching  the 
gospel.     (Ver.  21  ;  Mark  1  :  15.) 

17.  Inspired  men  were  imperfect  like 
other  men,  and  special  knowledge  was  given 
them  only  as  needed  for  special  objects  of 
revelation.     (Ver.  22  ;  2  Cor.  4  :  7.) 

18.  The  Holy  Spirit  is  a  foreteller  of  trials, 
as  well  as  a  comforter  in  afflictions.  (Ver. 
23;  Rom.  8:  26.) 

19.  Christ's  cause  and  work  is  dearer  to 
the  faithful  minister  than  life  itself.  (Ver. 
24  ;  Heb.  12  : 1-3.) 

20.  The  great  design  of  the  Christian  min- 
istry is  to  bear  witness  to  the  glad  tidings  of 
God's  favor  to  men.     (Ver.  24  ;  26  :  16-18.) 

21.  The  Christian  life  is  a  race,  and  it 
should  be  run  with  unswerving  purpose. 
(Ver.  24.) 

22.  The  minister  should  preach  with 
eternity  in  view,  and  each  time  as  laithfully 
as  if  it  were  his  last.  (Ver.  25  ;  2  Cor.  5  :  10, 
20.) 

23.  The  minister  should  so  labor  to  save 
his  hearers,  that,  if  any  are  lost,  it  shall 
be  through  no  fault  of  his.  (Ver.  26  ;  1  Cor. 
9  :  22.) 

24.  Courage  is  essential  to  a  successful 
ministry,  and  is  needed  for  preaching  all 
the  doctrines  and  practices  of  the  gospel. 
(Ver.  20,  27  ;  4  :  19,  20  ;  2  Cor.  4  :  2;  1  Thess. 
2  :  4.) 

25.  The  apostolic  bishop  was  a  pastor,  or 
overseer,  connected  with  a  single  church. 
(Ver.  28 ;  1  Tim.  3  :  5.) 

20.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  pastor  to  look 
after  the  spiritual  interests  of  the  church, 
and  seek  to  promote  the  spiritual  welfare  of 
every  member.    (Ver.  28 ;  Titus  1 :  7-9.) 

27.  "  It  must  never  be  forgotten  that  the 
Holy  Spirit  makes  men  ministers,  and  the 
churches  are  only  to  recognize  what  the 
Spirit  has  done."  (Dr.  J.  M.  Pendleton.) 
(Ver.  28.) 

28.  A  Scriptur.al  church  consists  of  be- 
lievers, God's  redeemed  people;  and  as  bap- 
tism always  followed  believing  in  apostolic 
times,  a  church  consists  of  baptized  believers. 
(Ver.  28 ;   Matt.  28  :  19,  20  ;    1  Peter  1  :  18-20.) 

29.  It  is  not  strange  that  hierarchical  and 


330 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXI. 


/toM/'s  voyage  to  Syria ;  visit  to  Casarea ;  and 

journey  to  Jerusalem. 
31    AND  it  caiue  to  pass,  that  after  we  were 
gotten  from  them,  and  had  launched,  we  I 


came  with  a  straight  course  unto  Coos; 

and  the  day  following  unto  Khodes;  and 

2  from  thence  unto  Patara.    And  tindinga 

ship  sailing  over  unto  Phenicia,  we  went 


other  errors  may  he  traced  in  their  begin- 
nings to  Ephesus  and  Asia  Minor,  since  it 
was  foretold  that  false  teachers  should  both 
come  in  and  arise  among  them.  (Ver.  29,  30.) 

30.  Pride,  greed,  and  selfishness  are  char- 
acteristic of  false  teachers.  (Ver.  29,  30; 
John  10 :  8,  12 ;  Matt.  23  :  4  f.) 

31.  A  spirit  of  ceaseless  industry  should 
characterize  the  minister.  (Ver.  31 ;  2  Tim. 
4:5.) 

32.  God  builds  up  his  people  through  his 
word,  and  prepares  them  for  his  gift  of  a 
heavenly  inheritance.  (Ver.  32 ;  John  17  :  6- 
9, 17.) 

33.  A  Christian  minister  should  especially 
be  noted  for  his  unselfishness.  (Ver.  33-35; 
1  Thess.  2  :  .5-1 1 ;  2  Thess.  3 :  7-9.) 

34.  If  a  Chistian  minister  is  notsupported 
by  others,  it  is  highly  commendable  if  he 
supports  himself.     (Ver.  34 ;  1  Cor.  9 :  4-G.) 

35.  The  giver  has  a  privilege,  a  joy  and  a 
reward,  of  which  the  receiver  cannot  par- 
take.    (Ver.  35 ;  Jlatt.  25 :  34-36,  40.) 

36.  Paul  has  given  a  model  farewell  ad- 
dress, and  a  pastor's  manual  for  efi'eetive 
labor.     (Ver.  lS-35.) 

37.  What  more  fitting  when  we  part  than 
to  unite  our  souls  by  prayer  to  God  ?  (Ver. 
36-38.) 

38.  Ministers  and  peoi>le  should  exercise 
such  fidelity  with  one  another  that  when 
they  separate  their  parting  may  be  like  that 
of  Paul  and  the  Ephesian  elders.  (Ver. 
36-38.) 

Ch.  21  :  In  this  chapter  Luke 
narrates  Paul's  voyage  from  Miletus, 
his  stopping  a  week  at  Tyre,  one  day 
at  Ptolemais,  and  a  longer  time  at 
Csesarea,  and  his  journey  thence  to 
Jerusalem.  Here  Paul  is  welcomed 
by  the  brethren,  and  at  the  suggestion 
of  James  and  the  elders,  he  endeavored 
to  conciliate  the  Hebrew  Christians  by 
performing  certain  Jewish  ceremonials 
in  the  temple.  He  is  there  seized  by 
an  infuriated  populace,  but  is  rescued 
from  death  by  the  Roman  officer,  who 
permits  him  to  speak  to  the  people, 
parts  of  April  and  May,  A.  D.  58. 

X-IG.  Paul's  Voyage  from  Mile- 


tus  TO   C^sakka.     His   Journey 
Thence  to  Jerusalem. 

1.  That  after  Ave  had  gotten 
from  them — better,  after  we  had  torn 
ourselves  from  them,  a  forcible  descrip- 
tion of  the  painful  and  reluctant  part- 
ing of  Paul  and  the  elders  of  Ephesus 
at  Miletus.  The  most  probable  time, 
according  to  our  computation  was  Mon- 
day morning,  April  24,  a.  D.  58. 
Coos,  or  Cos,  a  small  island  now  called 
Stanchio,  forty  miles  soutli  of  Miletus. 
It  was  noted  for  its  school  of  medicine. 
It  was  the  birtliplace  of  Hippocrates, 
the  physician,  and  celebrated  for  its 
temple  of  ^sciilaj)ius.  It  must  have 
been  of  interest  to  Luke,  the  physician. 
Here  tlie  ship  prolialdy  lay  at  anchor 
over  night.  Going  with  a  straight 
course — im])lying  a  quick  passage. 
(See  16: 11.)  The  day  following — 
probably  Tuesday.  Rhodes  — the 
name  of  a  famous  island  and  its  capital 
city,  about  fifty  miles  to  the  southeast 
of  Cos,  at  the  southwest  corner  of  Asia 
Minor.  It  was  celebrated  for  the  great 
tem)>le  of  the  sun,  and  the  Colossus,  one 
of  the  seven  wonders  of  the  world,  a 
brazen  statue  over  one  hundred  feet 
higli  at  the  head  of  the  harl)or,  but  then 
in  ruins,  having  been  thrown  down  by 
an  eartiiquake.  Herethey  probaldy  lay 
at  aucJior  Tuesday  night.  Patara — 
about  sixty  miles  east  of  Rliodes,  the 
port  of  the  city  Xauthus,  the  capital  of 
Lycia.     It  had  a  good  harbor,  and  was 

J  the    resort    of   coasting    vessels.      He 
reached  here  probably  on  Wednesday. 

2.  Providence  favored  Paul.  Patara 
seems  to  have  been  the  harbor  whither 
his  ship  was  bound  from  Troas.  And 
now  another  ship  of  larger  capacity  is 
ready,  in  which  he  and  his  companions 
enter  as  passengers.  The  language  im- 
plies that  they  embark  at  once,  we 
Avent  aboard  and  put  to  sea,  proba- 
bly early  Tliursday  morning.  They 
crossed  over  a  distance  of  about  three 
hundred  and  forty  miles  to  Phcenicia, 
the  country  on  the  coast,  north  of 
Palestine,  containing  the  cities  of 
Tyre  and  Sidon.  (seeonii :  lo.)  It  is 
said  that  the  voyage,  with  favorable 


Ch.  XXI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


331 


3  aboard,  ami  net  forth.  Now  when  we 
had  discovered  Cyprus,  we  left,  it  on  the 
left  hand,  and  sailed  into  Syria,  and 
landed  at  Tyre :  for  there  the  .ship  was  to 

4  unlade  her  burden.  And  finding  dis- 
ciples, we  t.arried  there  seven  days:  iwho 
said  to  Paul  through  the  Spirit,  that  he 

5  should  not  go  up  to  .lerusaleiu.  And  when 
we  had  accomplished  those  days,  we  de- 


parted and  went  our  way  ;  and  they  all 
brought  us  on  our  way,  with  wives  and 
children,  till  ue  were  out  of  the  city  :  and 
'  we  kneeled  down    on    the  shore,  and 

6  prayed.  And  when  we  had  taken  our 
leave  one  of  another,  we  took  ship,  and 
they  returned  home  again. 

7  And  when  we  had  finished  our  course 
from  Tyre,  we  came  to  Ptolemais,  and 


4  ch.  20  :  23. 


•  ch.  20  :  30. 


winds  takes  about  forty-eight  hours. 
They  probably  arris'e  at  Tyre(Ter.  3) 
some  time  on  Saturday. 

3.  NoAV  wheu  we  had  discov- 
ered Cyprus — ratlier,  having  sighted 
Cyprus,  the  graphic  language  of  an 
eye-witness,  using  the  ])hraseology  of 
seamen.  On  C'l/pras,  see  1  :  ,S() ;  lo  : 
4-12.  Left  it  on  the  left — this  tliey 
would  do  in  going  in  a  direct  course 
from  Patara  to  Tyre.  The  coast  of 
Cyprus  served  them  as  a  guide,  as  the 
mariner's  compass  was  then  unknown. 
Syria — the  Roman  province  consisting 
of  Phoenicia  and  Palestine.  Tyre  was 
one  of  the  chief  ports  of  Phoenicia  and 
a  city  of  great  antiquity.  (Seeoa  12 :20.) 
In  Paul's  day  the  glory  of  Tyre  had 
long  since  waned.  Antioch  and  Ctesarea 
had  proved  successful  commercial 
rivals.  Now  its  ruins  by  the  sea  fulfill 
the  ])rophecy  of  Ezekiel  (24  :u)  as  liter- 
ally "  a  place  for  the  spreading  of  nets." 
For  there  the  ship  Avas  to  unload 
— possibly  this  ship  went  no  further. 

(See  ver.  6.) 

4.  And  finding  disciples — rather, 
according  to  the  most  approved  i-ead- 
iug,  the  disciples,  the  members  of  tiie 
cliurcii  there.  The  gospel  had  been 
preached  there  soon  after  the  martyr- 
dom of  Stephen  (u :  19),  and  a  congrega- 
tion gathered.  (i5:3.)  The  verb  im- 
plies that  they  found  out  the  disciples 
by  searching  or  inquiry.  We  re- 
mained there  seven  days.  Ac- 
cording to  our  reckoning,  Paul  arrived 
at  Tyre  by  or  before  Saturday  night, 
and  was  thus  with  the  disciples  on  the 
first  day  of  the  week,  April  30,  A.  D. 
58.  Who  said  to  Paul  through  the 
Spirit.  As  in  ver.  11,  they  knew  that 
danger  awaited  Paul  at  Jerusalem,  and 
therefore  they  exhorted  him  not  to  go 
there.  The  exhortation  seems  to  have 
been  prompted  by  their  feelings,  not  by 
the  Spirit.  Paul  also  knew  the  same,  but 


he  had  the  deep  conviction  that  he  must 
go.  (M:'i2,  23.)  The  prophetic  warning 
of  his  brethren,  however,  prepared  him 
through  grace  to  encounter  these  perils 
and  coniirmed  his  conviction  that  it 
was  God's  will  that  he  should  sutfer  in 
liis  cause.  That  he  should  not  go 
up  to  Jerusalem — or  not  set  foot  in 
Jerusalem.  lie  might  go  through 
Judea,  and  then  return  to  Antioch,  but 
he  uuist  not  enter  Jerusalem. 

5.  When  he  had  accomplished, 
or  completed  the  days,  the  seven,  (ver.  4.) 
The  idea  is  that  of  filling  out  the  seven 
days.  They  all  brought  us,  or 
escorted  us  (i5:3),  ^vith  wives  and  chil- 
dren, showing  what  a  hold  Paul  and 
his  companions  had  taken  upon  the 
whole  Christian  community.  Out  of, 
outside  the  city,  in  a  somewhat  retired 
place.  Kneeled  down  on  the 
shore  —  literally,  the  beach,  and 
prayed.  The  accuracy  of  Luke  is 
here  seen,  in  speaking  of  the  smooth 
shore  or  beach,  which  extends  for  a 
considerable  distance  on  Ijoth  sides  of 
ancient  Tyre.  This  parting  service 
probably  took  place  on  Sunday  morn- 
ing, May  7th.      (See  on  ver.  4.) 

6.  When  we  had  taken  leave — 

or  bade  one  another  farewell.  We 
took  ship — probably  the  one  which 
brought  them  from  Patara  to  Tyre, 
though  the  Greek  does  not  make  it 
certain  whether  it  was  the  same  ship  or 
not. 

7.  When  we  had  finished  our 
course — completed  the  voyaqe — from 
Tyre,  we  came  down  to  Ptolemais, 
about  thirty  miles  to  the  south,  where 
they  doulitless  arrived  the  same  day, 
perhaps  in  a  few  hours.  This  com- 
pleted the  sea  portion  of  Paul's  journey. 
The  minuteness  of  the  narrative  and 
the  use  of  nautical  terms,  indicate  the 
writer  as  an  eye  witness,  and  his  great 
carefulness  as  a  narrator,     Ptolemais 


332 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXI. 


saluted    the  brethren,  and    abode  with 

8  them  one  day.    And  the  next  day  we 

that  were  of  Paul's  company  departed, 

and  came  unto  Caesarea.  And  we  entered 


into  the  house  of  Philip  the  evangelist, 

5  which  was  one  of  the  seven :  and  abode 

9  with  him.    And  the  same  man  had  four 

daughters,  virgins, '  which  did  prophesy. 


•  ch.  6  :  5  ;  8  :  26,  40.        t  ch.  2  :  17  ;  13  :  1 ;  Joel  2  :  28,  29. 


was  an  important  city  on  that  portion 
of  the  coast,  and  was  called  Accho  in 
the  Old  Testament  (Judg.  i  ;3i),  and  is 
known  in  modern  times  as  Acre.  It  is 
situated  on  the  bay  north  of  Mount 
Carmel,  and  has  a  population  of  about 
ten  thousand.  Saluted  the  brethren 
— from  this  it  is  evident  that  there  was 
a  church  there.  Paul  doubtless  liad 
visited  them  before,  as  he  would  natu- 
rally pass  through  tlie  city,  in  his  pre- 
vious journeys,  on  the  great  coast-road 
which  connected  Antioch  witli  C'lesarea. 

(11:30;    12:25;    15  :  J,  M  ;    IS  :  •;■->.      See  on  15  :  n.) 

Abode  one  day — having  arrived 
early,  this  may  have  been  that  day  and 
the  night  following. 

8.  We  that  were  of  Paul's  com- 
pany— not  found  in  the  best  manu- 
scripts. It  may  have  been  at  first  a 
marginal  comment,  and  afterward  in- 
troduced by  some  copyist  into  the  text. 
CsEsarea,  about  thirty  miles  south  of 
Ptolemais,  to  which  they  appear  to 
have  journeyed  by  land  in  a  single  day, 
arriving  there  on  Monday  or  Tuesday, 
May  8th  or  9th.  (See on  ver.  5.)  Further 
on  Csesai'ea,  see  on  8  :  40.  This  was  the 
third  time  Paul  had  been  there  (9:w; 
18: 2s),  but  the  first  mention  of  his  stop- 
ping there.  Philip  the  evangelist 
.  .  .  one  of  the  seven,  a  historical 
statement  distinguishing  him  from 
Philip  the  apostle.  His  api)ointmeiit 
as  one  of  the  deacons  preceded  his  work 
as  an  evangelist.  He  appears  not  to  J 
have  continued  long  in  the  former  i)Osi- 
tion,  as  he  left  Jerusalem  for  Samaria,  ! 
laboring  as  an  evangelist  tiiere,  anil  I 
from  place  to  jdace  to  Ciesarea  (s:  5, 4o),  ( 
where  over  twenty  years  later  he  is  now  [ 

found.       (See  on  s  :  5.)  i 

The  word  Evangelist  means  an  an-  \ 
nouncer  of  good  tidings,  and  is  found 
three  times    in    the    New   Testament.  { 
Here  it  is  applied  officially  to  Philip,  i 
who  had    gone    from    )dace  to  place 
preaching  the  gospel.     In  2  Tim.  4  :  5 
Paul  exhorts  Timotliy  to  "do  the  work  of 
an  evangelist,"  ])reachingand  exercising 
his  ministry  at  Ephesus  and  in  various  I 


places.  In  Eph.  4  :  11  evangelists  are 
distinguished  from  apostles  and  from 
prophets,  who.se  offices  wei"e  from  their 
nature  temporary,  and  from  pastors  and 
teachers,  who  were  connected  with  local 
churches.  The  apostles  were  insj)ired 
missionaries  and  organizers  of  the 
Christian  church,  and  the  witnesses  of 
our  Lord's  resurrection.  (1:21.22.)  The 
seventy  were  announcers  of  the  glad 
tidings,  and  thus  evangelists,  the  pre- 
l)arers  of  the  way  of  the  Lord.  (Luke  10 : 
1,  9  11.)  So  also  'Philip,  Timothy,  and 
otliers  sought  especially  the  conversion 
of  sinners  and  the  gathering  of  discijdes 
into  churches,  thus  preparing  the  way 
for  the  more  permanent  work  of  pas- 
tors. The  word  evangelist  is  never  ap- 
plied in  the  New  Testament  to  the 
writers  of  the  four  Gospels.  From  this 
it  appears  that  the  office  and  work  of 
evangelists  were  recognized  in  tlie  apos- 
tolic churches,  and  that  they  were 
l)reachers  of  the  gospel,  without  charge 
of  any  particular  church.  They  answer 
to  missionaries,  traveling  preachers,  and 
others  in  the  active  ministry  of  our 
day,  outride  of  the  i>astorate.  There 
were  evangelists  before  there  were  i)as- 
toi-s.  Tlie  one  ]>rej)ared  the  way  for  the 
other.  Eusebiiis,  referring  to  the  state 
of  the  church  in  the  time  of  Tiajan 
(died  A.  D.  117),  sjieaks  of  "  many  dis- 
cijdcs,  .  .  .  traveling  abroad,  per- 
formed the  work  of  evangeli.sts,  lieing 
ambitious  to  preach  Christ.  Having 
laid  the  foundation  of  the  faith  in  for- 
eign nations  .  .  .  they  proceeded  to 
other  countries  and  nations."  (Eccles. 
Hist.  iii.  37.)  In  the  early  churches 
tliere  were  many  evangelists,  such  as 
Timothy,  Titus,  Silas,  and  others.  It 
is  to  lie  regretted  that  the  office  and 
work  of  tlie  evangelist  is  too  limited  in 
its  api>lication  and  too  much  over- 
looked at  tlie  present  day. 

9.  As  a  remarkable  fact,  Luke  men- 
tions that  Philip  had  four  daughters, 
virgins,  Avho  did  prophesy,  having 
the  gift  of  prophecy  (1  Cor.  11 : 4 :  12 :  10 ;  U  : 
1.   See  ou  u :  27.)   Within  their  sphere  they 


Ch.  XXI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


333 


10  Aud  as  we  tarried  there  many  daj^s, 
there  came  down  from  Judiea  a  certain 

11  prophet,  named  "Agabiis.  And  when  he 
was  come  unto  u.s,  *  Tic  took  Paul's  girdle, 
and  bound  his  own  hands  and  feet,  and 
said,  Thus  saith  the  Holy  Spirit,  ^So 
shall  the  Jews  at  Jerusalem  bind  the 
man  that  owneth  this  girdle,  i  aud  shall 
deliver  him  into  the  hands  of  the  Gen- 
tiles. 

12  And   when    we   heard    these    things, 

u  ch.  11 :  28.  »  1  Sam.  15  :  27,  28 ;  Isa.  20  :  3,  4 ;  Jer.  13  :  1-11 ;  John  13  :  12-14 ;  20  :  22. 
«  ch.  20  :  23  ;  24  :  27;  i  ch.  2.S  :  17.  «  sob  ver.  4.  »  oh.  20  :  24.  b  1  Sam.  3  :  18  ;  Matt. 
26  :  42  ;  Luko  22  :  42.        « 1  Sam.  17  :  22. 


both  we,  and  they  of  that  place, '  besought 

13  him  not  to  go  up  to  Jerusalem.  Then 
Paul  answered,  »  What  mean  veto  weep 
and  to  break  mine  heart?  For  I  am  ready 
not  to  be  bound  only,  but  also  to  die  at 
Jerusalem  for  the  name  of  the  Lord  Jesus. 

14  Aud  when  he  would  not  be  persuaded, 
we  ceased,  saying,  ^The  will  of  the  Lord 
be  done. 

15  And  after  those  days  we  took  up  our 
"carriages,  and  went  up  to  Jerusalem. 


were  inspired  publishers  of  the  gospel 
and  foretellers  of  future  events,  {i  ■■  n.) 
They  may  have  also  intimated  the  per- 
secution awaiting  Paul  at  Jerusalem. 
(See  on  ver.  12.)  "  We  find  uo  trace  of  any 
order  of  virgins  in  the  early  church." 
(HowsON  AND  Spexck.)  According 
to  tradition  two  of  them  were  afterward 
married.  It  is  not  necessarily  implied 
that  they  were  public  teachers,     (see  i 

Cor.  13:34.) 

10.  As  we  tarried  there  many 
days.  The  number  is  quite  indefinite. 
As  Pentecost  occurred  in  A.  D.  58,  on 
Thursday,  May  tlie  ISth,  Paul  probably 
remained  at  Cajsarea  five  or  six  days. 
(See  on  ver.  8.)  A  Certain  propliBt 
named  Agabus — probably  the  same 
one  as  mentioned  in  11  :  28,  on  which 
see.   Further  on  prophefs,  see  on  13  :  1. 

11.  Paul's  girdle  —  which  was 
used  to  bind  the  loose  flowing  robes 
about  the  waist.  It  was  made  some- 
times of  leather  (M;itt.  3:4),  sometimes 
of  linen  or  other  material,  and  tied  in 
a  knot  or  fastened  by  a  clasp.  Like 
an  ancient  projihet,  Agabus  speaks 
both  by  symbolism  and  explanatory 
words.  Zedekiah  made  horns  of  iron 
(i  Kings  22 :  11) ;  Isaiah  walked  naked  and 
barefoot  (isa.  20:2, 3) ;  Jeremiah  used 
tlie  marred  linen  girdle  (Jer.  13 : 4-9) :  and 
Ezekiel  the  tile  and  the  iron  pan.  (Ezck. 
4:1-3.)  Thus  saith  the  Holy  Spirit 
— corresponding  to  the  Old  Testament 
formula,  "  Thus  saith  the  Lord."  It 
would  seem  that  Paul  had  laid  aside 
his  girdle,  and  Agabus  performs  the 
symbolic  act  upon  himself.  Tlie 
prophets  before  tliis  had  warned  Paul 
in  general  terms ;  Agabus  now  predicts 
the  exact  danger.  The  fulfillment  is 
related  in  ver.  33.  So  shall  the 
Jews,  etc.    It  was  through  the  Jews, 


and  at  their  instigation,  that  the  Ro- 
mans bound  him  and  made  him  a 
prisoner. 

12.  We,  and  they  of  that  place, 

Paul's  companions,  Luke,  Aristarchus, 
Trophimus,  and  the  Christians  at 
Ca'sarea,  among  whom  doubtless  were 
the  four  daughters  of  Philip.  Be- 
sought him  not  to  expose  himself  to 
impending  danger,  not  knowing  that 
it  was  the  divine  will.  (ver.  i4.)  Com- 
pare Peter's  vain  endeavor  to  dissuade 
his  Lord  from  his  jiath  of  suffering.  (Matt. 

IB  :  22.) 

13.  What  mean  ye  to  weep  and 
to  break  my  heart  ?  You  only  inten- 
sify my  suffering,  without  lessening  my 
danger  or  changing  my  purpose.  It 
was  hard  for  Paul  to  break  away  from 
friends  (20:  .s6-:!8),  and  the  tender  en- 
treaties of  aftection.  Stop  all  this,  for 
I  am  ready.  The  pronoun  J  is  em- 
pliatic  in  the  original,  showing  that 
Paul  had  well  considered  the  matter 
and  had  counted  the  cost.  He  was 
thoroughly  convinced  of  the  Lord's 
will,  and  nothing  could  cause  him  to 
swerve  therefrom.  (20:24.)  He  held 
himself  in  readiness  to  sufler,  and  even 
to  die  at  Jerusalem  for  Christ's  sake. 
These  various  ])redictions  of  Agabus 
and  others  only  confirmed  his  belief, 
that  it  was  God's  will  that  he  should 
sufier  persecution  at  Jerusalem. 

14.  The  brethren  infer  from  the 
words  and  the  acts  of  Paul  tliat  he  is 
guided  by  the  Spirit ;  and  they  ceased, 
saying.  The  will  of  the  Lord  be 
done.  So  the  Lord  had  taught  them, 
to  pray,  "  Thy  will  be  done."  There 
is  no  evidence,  however,  that  this  is 
either  a  quotation  or  an  allusion  to  tlic 
Lord's  Prayer. 

15.  After  those  days— the  several, 


534 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXI. 


16  ri\t!re  went  with  us  also  certain  of  the 
disciples  of  Ciesarea,  aud  brought  with 
Ihcui  one  Jlnasou  of  Cyprus,  an  old  dis- 
ciple, with  whom  we  should  lodge. 

Paul  at  Jerusalem  ;  his  endeavour  to  conciliat' 
the  Hebrew  Christians. 

17  *And  when  we  were  come  to  Jerusalem, 
the  brethren  received  us  gladly. 


18  And  the  d<iy  following  Paul  went  in 
with  us  unto  James ;  '  aud  all  the  elders 

19  were  present.  Aud  when  he  had  saluted 
them,  fhe  declared  particularly  what 
things  God  had  wrought  among  the  Gen- 
tiles bj-  his  ministry. 

20  And  when  they  heard  (7,  they  glorified 
the  Lord:  and  [they]  said  unto  him, 
Thou  seest,  brother,  how  many  thousands 


*  ch.  15  :  4.        •  ch.  15  :  2,  6.        f  ch.  15  :  4,  12  ;  Kom.  15  :  18,  19. 


mentioned  in  ver.  10.  We  took  up 
our  carriages — or,  We  packed  up  our 
baggage.  Possibly  the  alms  from  the 
Geutile  churches  constituted  a  i)art  of 
this.  (21 :  iJ.)  In  old  English,  "  car- 
riages" vrere  things  which  they  car- 
ried. Such  is  its  use  in  1  Sam.  17  :  22 
and  Isa.  10  :  28.  Carriages  in  the 
modern  sense  were  unknown  to  the 
ancients.  Travel  was  mostly  performed 
on  horses  or  camels.  Chariots  and 
rude  carts  were  sometimes  used.  Went 
up  to  Jerusalem— about  sixty-three 
miles.  They  doubtless  took  portions  of 
two  days,  arriving  at  Jerusalem,  ilay 
17,  the  day  before    Pentecost.     (Se-  on 

23:  31.) 

16.  There  went  with  us,  etc. 
The  flisciples  of  Cajsarea  were  evidently 
solicitous  about  the  dangers  threaten- 
ing Paul  at  Jerusalem,  (vcr.  iiu.)  And 
brought  Avith  them  one  Mnason — 
with  them,  is  not  in  the  original.  It  is 
quite  improbable  that  they  brouglit 
Mnason  with  them  from  Cresarea.  It 
is  better  rendered.  Bringing  vs  to 
Mnason,  etc.  So  Bible  Union  Ver., 
Hackett,  Alford,  and  others.  We 
know  nothing  of  Mnason  lieyond  tliis 
verse.  He  was  a  native  of  Cyprus, 
but  now  had  his  home  at  Jerusalem. 
So  it  had  been  with  Barnabas,  and  his 
sister  Mary.  (See«:36, 37, 12:  n.)  An 
old,  ancient  or  earip  disciple ;  prob- 
ably converted  about  the  time  of  Pen- 
t<-cost;  possibly  a  personal  follower  of 
Jesus,  and  one  of  those  from  whom 
Luke  may  have  derived  information  in 
writing  liis  Gospel  and  the  Acts. 
Mnason  is  a  Greek  name,  and  he  Avas 
most  likely  a  foreign  Jew,  or  a  Gentile 
who  had  first  become  a  proselyte,  and 
then  a  Christian.  It  was  fitting  for  tlie 
apostle  to  the  Gentiles  to  enjoy  the 
hospitality  of  such  an  one.  With 
Avhom  we  should  lodge^ndicat- 
ing  Mnason  as  one  of  the  wealthier 


members  of  the  church.  Jerusalem 
was  full  of  people  at  Pentecost,  and  it 
was  a  wise  precaution  to  arrange  be- 
forehand for  lodging  Paul  and  his 
comj)any. 

17-26.  Paul  Assumes  a  Vow  to 
concimate  the  hebrew  chris- 
TIANS. (1  Cor.  9:19-22;  Num.  6:5.)  May, 
A.  D.  58. 

17.  When  Ave  Avere  come  to 
Jerusalem.  Tliis  was  Paul's  fifth, 
and  his  last  recorded  visit  to  .Jerusa- 
lem after  his  conversion.  "With  tliis 
Luke  begins  his  account  of  Paul's 
captivity.  The  brethren  received 
us  gladly — privately  and  informally, 
at  Mnason's  house.  The  public  and 
more  formal  reception  by  the  elders 
occurred  the  next  day  at  the  house  of 
James. 

18.  And  the  day  folloAving — 
probably  the  Day  of  Penteco.st.  James 
— our  i/Oid's    brother,    and  pastor  of 

the   church.       (Seeon  12  :  I7;  Ij  :  13.)      That 

no  apostle  was  present  may  be  inferred 
from  the  fact  that  none  are  mentioned 
All    the     elders     Avcre     present. 

These  were  the  overseers  or  co-pastors 
of  the  church.  The  largeness  of  the 
church  and  the  several  ]iIacesof  hold- 
ing l-eligious  meetings  necessitated  a 
plurality  of  pastors.  (Seeon20:n.)  They 
would  naturally  all  l)e  in  tlie  city  at 
Pentecost,  and  could  be  easily  assem- 
bled at  the  hou.se  of  James.  It  would 
seem  that  this  interview  had  been  spe- 
cially arranged.  This  mention  of 
James  and  the  elders  does  not,  how- 
ever, necessarily  exclude  other  leading 
brethren.  (See  on  15  :  6.  Ti.)  It  is  probable 
that  at  this  meeting  Paul  presented  the 
gifts  of  the  foreign   churches.     (2*:  11. 

Seen  :  30.) 

19.  When  he  had  sainted  them 

— or  embraced  them,  such  being  the 
formal.  Oriental  act,  both  at  parting 
aud  meeting.   So  Paul  had  done  on  the 


Ch.  XXI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


335 


of  Jews  lliere  are  which  believe ;  and  they 
21  are  all  k zealous  of  the  law  :  and  they  are 
itifiiruicd  of  thee,  '■that  thou  teachest  all 
the  Jews  which  are  among  the  Gentiles 
to  forsake  Moses,  saying, '  that  they  ought 


not  to  circumcise  their  children,  neither 

22  to  walk  after  the  customs.  What  is  it 
therefore?  The  multitude  must  needs 
come  together :  for  they   will  hear  that 

23  thou  art  come.    Do  therefore  this  that  we 


i  Rom.  10  :  2  ;  Gal.  1  :  14.        i>  ch.  16  :  1-3  ;  1  Cor.  9  :  19-21. 


i  Gal.  3  :  24,  25  ;  5  :  3. 


preceding  visit.  (18:22.)  He  declared 
particularly,  etc.  He  recounted  one 
by  one  the  things  that  God  had  ivrought, 
etc.  His  speech  must  have  been  long 
and  of  thrilling  interest,  suited  to  a 
Pentecostal  occasion.  James  and  the 
elders  must  have  sympathized  with  him 
in  his  work,  (is :  3, 4, 25, 26.)  By  his 
ministry.    (See  on  20:34.) 

tiO.  Glorified  the  Lord — or,  ac- 
cording to  the  oldest  manuscripts,  glo- 
rified God,  even  as  Paul  had  ascribed 
the  work  to  God.  (Ver.IS.  see  on  ll:  is.) 
They  said  to  him — they  show  at 
once  their  anxiety  regarding  the  burn- 
ing question :  The  relation  of  Jewish 
Christians  to  the  law,  and  the  preach- 
ing of  the  gospel  to  the  Gentiles. 
Thou  seest  or  beholdest — Paul  had 
an  opportunity  at  the  feast  to  see  the 
thousands  of  the  Jews,  not  only  at 
Jerusalem,  but  from  Palestine  and 
other  countries,  that  believe.  They 
had  supplemented  their  Jewish  belief 
and  observances  by  faith  in  Jesus  as  the 
Messiah.  And  they  were  all  zealous 
of  the  laAV,  or  zealots  for  the  law.  The 
word  in  the  original  is  the  same  as  that 
of  the  .sect  of  Zealots,  who  rigorously 
adhered  to  all  the  ceremonies  of  tlie 
Mosaic  law.  It  was  natural  before  the 
destruction  of  Jerusalem  for  Christian 
Jews  to  hold  on  to  the  observances  in 
which  they  had  been  trained  from 
childhood.  A  large  body  subsequently 
withdrew  and  formed  the  sects  known 
as  Nazarenes  and  Ebionites.  They  re- 
jected the  authority  and  writin.gs  of 
Paul,  and  accounted  him  as  an  apostate ; 
they  also  held  false  views  regarding  the 
person  of  Christ. 

31.  And  they  are  informed  of 
thee — their  information  was  preju- 
diced, and  perverted,  and  hence  false. 
Paul  had  taught,  as  he  had  already 
written  to  the  Galatians,  that  justifica- 
tion was  by  faith  and  not  by  the 
works  of  the  law;  that  circumcision 
avails  nothing,  as  a  condition  or  a 
means  of  salvation,    (oai.  j  :  le ;  3 :  a ;  5 ; « ; 


6 :  15.)  But  he  had  not  taught  Jewish 
Christians  to  forsake  Moses,  etc. 
So  far  fi'om  that,  he  had  circumcised 
Timothy  (i6:9),  in  order  that  he  might 
not  be  offensive  to  the  Jews,  and  do  them 
the  more  good.  He  had  taught:  "  Was 
any  man  called,  being  circumcised? 
Let  him  not  become  uncircumcised. 
Hath  any  been  called  in  uncircum- 
cision?  Let  him  not  be  circumcised. 
Circumcision  is  nothing,  and  uiicircum- 
cision  is  nothing,  but  the  keeping  of  Uie 
commandments  of  God."  (1  Cor.  7 ;  is-w.) 
But  such  teaching  could  easily  be  per- 
veited  by  his  prejudiced  opposers,  and 
being  repeated  from  one  to  another, 
come  to  exjiress  exactly  the  opposite  of 
what  he  intended.  He  was  thus  ac- 
cused of  teaching  that  the  Jews  should 
forsake  or  apostatize  from  the  law  of 
Moses,  that  they  should  not  circum- 
cise their  children  nor  walk  after 
the  customs  of  the  ceremonial  law, 
and  this  not  as  a  matter  of  liberty,  but 
of  obligation  imposed  by  the  gospel. 
How  obnoxious  such  teachings  must 
have  seemed  to  the  average  Jew,  may 
be  inferred  from  the  contempt  and 
abomination  in  which  the  very  name 
"  uncircumcised"  was  held.  (1  Sum.  n :  26 ; 

Ezek:28:  10;  32:  29,30.) 

22.  What  is  it,  therefore — what 
is  best  to  be  done  under  these  circum- 
stances? The,  rat'ner,  A  multitude — 
a  promiscuous  assemblage  of  Jewish 
Christians.  Must  needs  come  to- 
gether. The  Revised  and  the  Im- 
proved Bible  Union  Versions  omit 
this,  and  render,  "  What  is  it  therefore  f 
They  ivill  certainly  ht^ax  thai  thou  art 
come."  They  will  be  watching  you 
and  discussing  your  conduct  and 
opinions  with  jirejudice  and  hostility. 

23.  Do  therefore  this.  The  ad- 
vice of  James  and  the  elders,  (ver.  is.) 
We  have  four  men.  The  language 
implies  that  they  were  Jewish  believers. 
A  vow  on  them.  This  appears  to 
have  been  a  Nazarite  vow.  (Num.  6: 1-21. 
Conipsre  18 :  18.)    This  VOW  Involved  the 


336 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXI. 


say  to  thee:  *We  have  four  men  which 
24  have  a  vow  on  them  ;  them  take  •  and 
purify  thyself  with  them,  and  be  at 
charges  with  them,  that  they  may  shave 
their  heads :  and  all  may  know  that  those 
things  whereof  they  were  informed  con- 
cerning thee,  are  nothing ;  but  that  thou 


thyself  also  walkest  orderly,  and  keepest 
25  the  law.  As  touchiug  the  Gentiles  which 
beUeve,  we  have  written  and  concluded 
that  they  observe  no  such  thing,  save 
only  that  they  keep  themselves  from 
things  oflfered  to  idols,  and  from  blood, 
and  from  strangled,  and  from  fornication. 


k  ch.  18  :  18.        1  Num.  6  :  1-21. 


strictest  abstinence  and  purification, 
and  Paul's  participation  in  it  would  be 
a  complete  refutation  of  the  false  charges 
of  the  Jews  against  him.  This  vow  re- 
quired an  ascetic  life  for  a  time,  usually 
thirty  days.  Paul  could  not  go  through 
the  whole  observance ;  but  it  was  per- 
mitted any  one  who  wished,  to  share  in 
the  concluding  ceremonies,  which  con- 
sisted of  certain  offerings  in  the  temple, 
and  which  continued  through  seven 
days.  James  and  his  official  brethren 
very  likely  knew  of  Paul's  previous 
vow  on  his  preceding  visit  (^18 ;  is),  and 
this  fact  may  have  made  them  the  more 
rea<ly  to  suggest  a  similar  observance 
again. 

34.  Them  take  and  purify  thy- 
self with  them.  Make  thyself  one 
of  them ;  observing  the.ordinances  which 
they  observe.  This  is  the  most  natural 
meaning  of  the  language.  Some  sup- 
pose that  Paul  did  not  asssume  the 
Nazarite  vow  with  them,  l)ut  simply 
performed  such  preliminary  rites  of 
purification  as  would  enable  him  to 
take  part  with  them  in  their  conclud- 
ing services.  But  in  such  a  case  the 
words  vnth  them  would  more  natu- 
rally have  been  omitted.  Be  at 
charges  Avith,  rather,  for  them — 
involving  considerable  expense,  such 
as  purchasing  for  each  one  of  them  a 
he-lamb  for  a  burnt  offering,  a  ewe- 
lamb  for  a  sin  offering,  a  ram  for  a 
[)eace  offering,  together  with  un- 
eavened  bread,  cakes  of  fine  flour 
mingled  with  oil,  and  a  drink  offering. 
Tliere  would  also  be  a  fee  to  the  ])riest 
or  Levite  for  shaving  the  head.  (Num. 
6:is-i8.)  Devout  Jews  would  some- 
times bear  the  expenses  for  others. 
Josephus  tells  us  (Antiq.  xix.  6,  1) 
that  Agrippa  1.,  on  arriving  at  Jerusa- 
lem from  Rome,  to  take  possession  of 
his  kingdom,  as  a  means  of  purchasing 
popularity,  paid  the  expenses  of  many 
Nazarites.  That  they  may  shave 
their  heads.    As  one  of  the  require- 


ments of  the  Nazarite  vow  was  long 
hair  (Num.  6 : 5) ,  SO  the  shaving  of  the 
head  was  a  sign  of  its  completion.  (Num. 
6 :  18.)  Nothing  is  said  of  Paul's  own 
hair,  which  may  have  been  short 
already.  Besides,  the  phrase  That  they 
may  shave  their  heads  is  here  used  to 
mean  that  they  may  complete  their 
vow,  and  be  released  from  it ;  and  there 
was  no  necessity  of  speaking  of  Paul's 
head.  When  the  victims  were  offered 
at  the  conclusion  of  the  vow,  the 
shaven  hair  was  burned  under  the 
sacrifice  of  the  peace-ofiering.  (Num. 
6:  iH.)  Are  nothing— that  these  ac- 
cusations are  without  foundation  in 
fact.  All  may  know — rather.  All 
will  knoio.  That  thou  thyself 
Avalkest  orderly,  according  to  rule, 
keeping  the  lata,  and  avoiding  all  oc- 
casion of  giving  offence.  Although 
he  was  the  ajwstle  to  the  Gentiles,  he 
would  show  to  conservative  Jewish 
Christians  that  he  did  not  ignore  Jew- 
ish customs,  and  was  not  disloyal  to 
the  Mosaic  law.  As  there  is  no  conflict 
between  the  law  and  the  gospel,  the 
one  preparatory  to  the  other,  the  latter 
the  fulfiller  and  the  perfecter  of  the 
former;  so  there  was  nothing  incon- 
sistent in  Paul's  acceding  to  their 
request,  so  long  as  he  did  not  make 
these  observances  a  condition  or  means 
of  justification. 

25.  In  suggesting  this  course  of 
action  to  Paul,  James  and  the  elders 
distinctly  intimate,  that  they  would 
not  abridge  the  liberty  of  Gentile  con- 
verts. That  had  been  settled  at  the 
Conference  at  Jerusalem,  (seeouis: 
19.20.)  As  touching,  etc.  Better, 
But  concerning  the  Gentiles,  etc.  This 
was  to  meet  any  objection  in  Paul's 
mind,  arising  from  the  bearing  of  such 
action  on  Gentile  believers.  >Ve  have 
written  —  rather,  u-e  wrote.  (i5:J3.) 
And  concluded — better,  and  decided. 
That  they  observe  no  such'thing, 
save   only.     These    words    are    not 


Ch.  XXI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


337 


26  Then  Paul  took  the  men,  and  tlie  next 
day  purifying  himself  with  theiu  entered 
into  the  temple,  to  signify  the  accomplish- 


ment of  the  days  of  purification,  until 
that  an  otfeiiug  should  be  oflered  for 
every  one  of  them. 


found  in  the  three  oldest  manuscripts, 
and  are  omitted  by  the  Kevised  Version. 
Alford  and  Meyer  retain  them.  They 
may  have  been  dropped  by  copyists, 
because  they  do  not  occur  in  the  par- 
allel passage,     (is :  28-) 

36.  Then  Paul  took  the  men. 
In  consenting  to  the  advice  of  James 
and  the  elders,  Paul  was  carrying  out 
his  own  principles  of  action,  which  he 
had  long  before  adopted  :  "  To  the  Jew 
I  became  as  a  Jew,  tliat  I  might  gain 
the  Jews."  (i  Cor.  9 :  20,  n)  It  was  also  iu 
accord  with  his  previous  performance 
of  a  vow  (18: 18),  and  with  his  attend- 
ance at  the  national  religious  festivals. 
(18 :  20, 21 ;  20  :i6.)  It  was  uot  the  Mosaic 
law  that  Paul  opposed,  but  the  Phari- 
saic and  .ludaizing  abuses  of  the  law. 

(Rom.  3:31.)        ScC     Oil     VCr.      24,    closiug 

note.  "  According  to  Paul's  views  the 
ceremonies  of  the  law  were  matters  of 
indifference.  Christian  love,  wliich 
was  the  grand  moving  principle  of  his 
conduct,  caused  him  to  accommodate 
himself  to  the  views  of  the  Jews,  when 
he  could  do  so  witliout  any  sacrifice  of 
principle  in  order  to  remove  their 
prejudices."  (Gloag.)  Both  James 
ami  Paul  were  in  positions  of  extreme 
difficulty,  in  their  relations  to  the  de- 
mands and  prejudices  of  Jewish  and 
Gentile  converts.  They  understood 
each  other  (uai.  2:7-9),  and  neither  in 
this  case  appears  to  have  regarded  the 
part  here  taken  inconsistent  with  the 
teachings  of  Paul.  Doubtless  the  lat- 
ter felt  tliat  it  M'as  both  lawful  and 
expedient  to  do  as  he  did.  Yet  from 
after  results  it  may  be  doubted  whetlier 
expediency  in  this  case,  though  it  in- 
volved no  sacrifice  of  principle,  was 
tlie  best  and  Avisest.  If  the  outcome 
had  been  foreseen  it  is  probable  that 
neither  James  would  liave  advised  nor 
Paul  assented.  See  last  paragra2)h  on 
this  verse,  below. 

The  next  day — the  third  after  his 
arrival  at  Jerusalem.  Purifying 
himself  with  them  —  he  himself 
undergoing  the  necessary  ablutions, 
(vei.  24.)  To  signify  the  accom- 
plishment— announcing  to  the  jjriests 

W 


in  the  temple  the  completion  of  the 
days  of  purification,  that  at  the 
end  of  seven  days  the  vow  would  be 
completed  and  the  offerings  made. 
The  priests  would  tlius  understand  that 
Paul  was  only  a  sharer  with  the  four 
men,  and  would  not  be  expected  to 
continue  thirty  days.  (seeonver.  2.1.) 
Paul  needed  also  to  notify  tlie  priests  so 
that  the  offerings  might  be  in  readiness 
at  the  proper  time.  Until  that  an 
offering,  etc. — better,  until  the  offer- 
ing, well-known  and  required  on  such 
an  occasion,  ^l'as  brought  for  every  one 
of  them.  Some  suppose  that  Paul  and 
the  four  men  continued  in  the  temple 
precincts,  so  as  to  avoid  all  persons 
and  every  cause  of  ceremonial  defile- 
ment, imtil  the  offerings  were  made. 
But  there  is  nothing  in  the  language 
that  really  implies  this.  Besides,  it  is 
very  improbable  that  Paul  remained 
there  three  or  four  days  until  his  arrest. 
The  question  arises.  How  could  Paul 
accept  these  offerings,  especially  the 
sin-offerings,  when  Christ  had  suffered 
once  for  all,  and  sacrifices  were  done 
away  through  him  ?  To  this  it  may  be 
replied,  that  as  these  sacrifices  from 
the  beginning  had  pointed  toward 
Christ,  so  now  believing  Jews  regarded 
them  as  pointing  back  to  Christ,  and 
typical  of  what  he  had  done.  They  may 
have  come  gradually  to  the  full  knowl- 
edge that  sacrifices  and  ceremonial 
observances  were  done  away  through 
Christ.  The  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews 
may  have  been  necessary  to  teach  them 
this  lesson  thoroughly.  Paul  doulitless 
regarded  them  as  legal  observances,  in- 
nocent in  themselves,  but  not  obliga- 
tory. He  may  not  himself  have  un- 
derstood the  matter  so  tliorouglily  as 
he  did  later,  when  he  wrote  liis  Epistles 
to  the  Ephesians  and  tlie  Colossians, 
and  when  tlie  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews  was 
written.  Perhaps  he  would  liave  done 
differently  at  this  later  period  with  his 
[  fuller  knowledge.  Historically  the 
I  destruction  of  Jerusalem  and  the  tem- 
j  pie  may  have  been  necessary,  in  order 
I  to  put  an  end  to  those  ceremonies  and 
I  sacrifices  which  had  been  superseded. 


338 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXI. 


Paul's  seizure  by  Ihejiopulace,  and  rescue  by 
(he  Roman  officer. 

27  And  when  the  seven  days  were  almost 
ended,  ™  the  Jews  which  were  of  Asia, 
when  they  saw  him  in  the  temple,  stirred 
up  all  the  people,  and  "  laid  hands  on 
him,  crying  out.  Men  of   Israel,  help. 

28  This  is  the  man,  °  that  teacheth  all  men 
every  where  against  the  people,  and  the 
law,  and  this  place ;  and  further  brought 


30 


Greeks  also  into  the  temple,  and  hath 
polluted  this  holy  place.  (For  they  had 
seen  before  with  him  in  the  city  Trophi- 
mus  an  Ephesian,  whom  they  supposed 
that  Paul  had  brought  into  the  temple.) 
And  all  the  city  was  moved,  and  the 
people  ran  together.  And  they  took 
Paul,  and  drew  him  out  of  the  temple: 
and  forthwith  the  doors  were  shut. 


«  ch.  24  :  5,  6. 


27-40.  Paul's  Seizure  by  the 
Jews,  and  his  First  Rescue  by 
the  Roman  Commander.  (23:26,  27; 
24:17,  i».)     About  May  23,  A.  D.  58. 

27.  While  Paul  is  trying  to  concili- 
ate tlie  believing  Jews,  he  arouses  anew 
the  hostility  of  the  unbelieving  Jews. 
>\  hen  the  seven  days  Avere 
almost  ended — about  to  be  com- 
jileted.  Tlie  seven  days  are  si)oken  of 
as  well  known,  and  doubtless  refer  to 
the  days  during  which  Paul  was  sharing 
with  the  four  the  Nazarite  vow.  (See  on 
Ter.23.)  It  was  al)0ut  six  days  since  he 
arrived  at  Jerusalem,  anil  the  fifth  or 
sixth  of  the  seven  days,  eitlier  of  which 
sufficiently  satisfies  the  language,  (ste  on 
24:11.)  The  Jews  frvm  Asia — the 
province  of  Asia.  (Seeoui6:6.)  When 
they  saw — or  observed  him  in  the 
temple.  Paul  Avas  widely  known,  not 
only  in  Ephesus,  but  throughout  the 
province  of  Asia.     (19  :  10.) 

28.  Men  of  Israel,  help— to  ap- 
prehend Paul  and  bring  him  to  pun- 
ishment. By  their  cry  they  would 
intimate  that  a  great  outrage  had  been 
committed.  That  teacheth  .  .  . 
against  the  people,  and  the  laAV, 
and  this  place — compare  the  similar 
charge  against  Stephen.  (6:  is.)  \Vc 
see  the  feeling  of  unbelieving  Jews 
against  Paul.  They  charge  him  with 
turning  against  his  own  nation  and 
religion.  They  arouse  race  prejudice 
and  religious  fanaticism.  Brought 
Cireeksalso  into  the  temple,  etc. 
If  those  Gentiles  had  come  only  into 
the  court  of  the  Gentiles,  there  could 
be  no  objection,  but  the  charge  is  that 
Paul  had  brought  them  into  the  sacred 
precincts  which  they  were  forbidden  to 
enter  on  pain  of  death.  A  stone  in- 
scription, a  tablet  from  the  temple  was 
found  in  1871,  and  is  now  in  the  Im- 
perial    Museum    of     Constantinople, 


which  reads :  "  No  foreigner  may  enter 
within  the  balustrade  and  fence  that 
surrounds  the  temple ;  whoever  is 
taken  in  the  act  will  be  responsible  to 
himself  for  his  death  wliich  will  ensue." 
{Ihcenty-onc  Years'  Work  in  the  Holy 
Land,  pp.  l(57-[t.)  Trojihinnis  (next 
verse)  they  supposed  had  committed 
this  act,  and  had  thus  made  himself 
liable  to  death.  But  they  regard  Paul 
as  even  the  guiltier  jiarty  in  having 
brought  him  into  the  temple ;  and 
therefore  himself  deserving  of  death. 
(See  further  descrijjtiou  of  temple,  on 
Matt.  21  :  12.) 

29.  This  verse  should  not  be  put 
into  a  parenthesis.  It  gives  tlie  reason 
of  the  charge  against  Paul,  on  Avhich 
it  was  founded, — a  very  slender  founda- 
tion indeed.  Before  this  occasion 
they  liad  seen  Trojdiimus  with  Paul 
in  the  city,  and  they  supposed,  a 
mere  inference  which  their  imagina- 
tion and  prejudice  made  a  reality  to 
them,  that  Paul  had  brought  him 
into  the  temple.  Trophimus  an, 
rather,  the  Ephesian,  the  one  men- 
tioned before  (20:4),  who  had  accom- 
panied Paul  to  Jerusalem,  and  was 
well-known  by  sight  to  many  of  the 
Jews  of  Asia.  (ver.  27.)  He  was  doubt- 
less a  Gentile  convert,  who  had  em- 
braced the  gospel  without  first  becom- 
ing a  proselyte. 

30.  And  all  the  city  was 
moved.  A  tumult  arose,  similar  to 
that  at  Ephesus.  (19  :m.)  "The  fre- 
quent insults  whicli  the  Herods  had 
put  upon  the  religious  prejudices  of 
the  Jews  had  develojied  a  spirit  of  ex- 
citability which  was  quickly  roused  on 
the  slightest  pretext."  (HowsoN  AND 
Spenck.)  Drew  him,  imjdying 
violence— (Zra^rjreci  him  out  of  the 
temple,  as  one  defiling  it  and  unwor- 
thy to  be  in  it.     And  forthwith  the 


Ch.  XXI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


339 


31  p  And  as  they  went  about  to  kill  him, 
tidings  came  unto  the  chief  captain  of 
the  band,  that  all  Jerusalem  was  in  an 

32  uproar,  i  Who  immediately  took  soldiers 
aud  centurions,  and  ran  down  unto  them. 
And  when  they  saw  the  chief  captain  and 
the  soldiers,  they  left  beating  of  Paul. 

33  Then  the  chief  captain  came  near,  and 
took  him,  and  rcommauded  him  to  be 


bound  with  two  chains;  and  demanded 
."4  who  he  was,  and  what  he  had  done.  And 
some  cried  one  thing,  and  some  another, 
among  the  multitude.  And  when  he 
could  not  know  the  certainty  for  the 
tumult,  he  commanded  him  to  be  carried 
.35  into  the  castle.  And  when  he  came  upon 
the  stairs,  so  it  was,  that  he  was  borne  of 
the  soldiers  for  the  violence  of  the  people. 


p  John  16  :  2.        q  ch.  23  :  27  :  24  :  7. 


■  ver.  11;  ch.  20  :  23. 


doors — which  separated  the  court  of 
Israel  from  the  court  of  the  Geutiles, 
Avere  shut — by  the  Levites  in  charge. 
Paul  was  pro))ably  in  the  court  of 
Israel  near  the  chambers  where  the 
Nazarites  performed  their  vows.  Had 
they  not  laid  hands  on  him  he  might 
have  fled  to  the  altar  for  safety.     (Exod. 

21  :  13,14;  1  Kings  2:  28.)         NoW    that     he     is 

dragged  forth,  the  doors  are  shut,  to 
prevent  any  profanation  of  the  tem^jle 
by  the  riot. 

31.  And  as  they  went  about, 
rather,  were  seeking,  to  kiSl  him. 
This  was  their  object,  and  that  it  could 
be  unlawfully  accomjalished,  the  kill- 
ing of  Stephen  is  a  proof.  By  beating 
him  promiscously  in  the  crowd,  his 
murder  would  be  laid  to  mol)-violence, 
rather  than  to  any  one  individual. 
Tidings  came  unto — better,  np  to — 
the  chief  captain.  The  Roman  gar- 
rison was  stationed  in  tlie  Tower  of  An- 
tonia  (named  after  Marc  Antony), 
which  was  situated  at  the  northwest 
corner  of  the  temple  area,  with  which 
it  communicated  by  two  flights  of  stairs. 
It  was  about  one  hundred  feet  high  and 
overlooked  the  temple  and  commanded 
a  view  of  what  was  going  on  in  the 
courts  within.  Notice  liow  exactly 
Luke  conforms  his  language  to  its 
higher  local  position.  The  chief 
captain,  or  military  tribune,  was  a 
commander  of  a  thousand  soldiers,  here 
called  the  band  or  cohort,  answering 
to  our  regiment.  (io:i.)  The  Roman 
legion  consisted  of  about  six  thousand 
men  under  six  tribunes  who  commanded 
in  turn.  The  chief  captain  or  tribune 
answered  generally  to  our  colonel,  aud 
often  to  our  brigade  commander.  The 
name  of  this  one  was  Claudius  Lysias. 
(23;  26.)  That  all  Jerusalem  was 
in  an  uproar  —  stirred  up  into  a 
tumult. 

32.  Soldiers    and    centurions. 


(10:1.)  During  the  festivals,  soldiers 
were  constantly  under  arms  ready  to 
suppress  any  popular  disturbance.  The 
chief  captain  took  a  considerable  troop 
as  he  had  more  than  one  centurion, 
each  one  of  whom  commanded  a  hun- 
dred men.  Ran  down  unto — literally, 
upon  them.  Again  Luke's  language 
corresponds  with  the  position  of  the 
castle  above  the  temple.  Such  little 
correspondences  illustrate  his  accuracy. 
As  soon  as  they  saw  the  soldiers  com- 
ing they  left  oft"  beating  Paul.  They 
had  not  been  long  at  this,  for  it  was  but 
a  moment's  work  to  report  the  tumult 
to  the  chief  captain,  who  at  once  could 
descend  to  the  spot  where  the  disturb- 
ance was.  The  mob  was  afraid  to  do 
unlawful  violence  in  presence  of  the 
soldiers ;  they  might  be  called  to  an 
account  for  wrong-doing. 

33.  Then  the  chief  captain  took  or 
laid  hold  of  him,  formally  arrested  him, 
so  that  he  might  not  be  "killed  without 
a  trial.  Supposing  him  to  be  a  desper- 
ate criminal,  perhaps  a  popular  politi- 
cal agitator  (ver.  si),  he  commands  him 
to  be  bound  with  two  chains,  each 
hand  to  a  soldier  for  security.  And 
demanded  —  of  the  people  around 
him.  Who  he  Avas — his  name,  rank, 
and  character ;  Avhat  he  had  done- 
taking  it  for  granted  he  had  committed 
some  crime. 

34.  The  whole  narrative  is  vivid,  as 
related  by  an  eye-witness.  Thus  the 
confusion  and  the  clamor  of  the  people 
are  especially  lifelike.  Into  the 
castle  —  or  bdrracks,  that  portion  of 
the  Tower  of  Antonia  which  was  used 
by  the  soldiers.  To  be  carried — the 
idea  is  not  that  of  being  borne  as  in  the 
next  verse,  but  of  being  led  or  brought 
into  the  castle.  Josephus  speaks  of  the 
tower  of  Antonia  in  Jewish  War,  v.  5,  8. 

35.  The  stairs— leading  from  the 
temple  area  to  the  barracks  in  the  tower 


340 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXI. 


3S  For  the  multitude  of  the  people  followed 
after,  crying, '  Away  with  him. 

Paul's  address  to  the  people ;  pleads  his  cilisen- 
ship. 

37  AND  as  Paul  was  to  be  led  into  the 
castle,  he  said  unto  the  chief  captain, 
May  I  speak  unto  thee?    Who  said,  Canst 

38  thou  speak  Greek?    'Art  not  thou  that 


Egyptian,  which  before  these  days  madest 
an  uproar,  and  leddest  out  into  the 
wilderness  four  thousand  men  that  were 

39  murderers?  But  Paul  said,  "I  am  a  man 
which  am  a  Jew  of  Tarsus,  a  city  in  Cili- 
cia,  '  a  citizen  of  no  mean  city:  and,  I 
beseech  thee,  suffer  me  to  speak  unto  the 

40  people.    And  when  he  had  given  him 


I  ch.  22  :  22  ;  Luke  23  :  18 ;  John  19  :  15.        '  see  ch.  5  : 
2  Cor.  11 :  22 ;  Phil.  3:5.        ' 


36.        u  ch.  9  :  11 ;  22  :  3  ;  Rom.  11  :  1 ; 
ch.  22  :  25-29. 


of  Antonia.  (Seeonver-si.)  He  was 
borne  by  the  soldiers  —  lifted  up 
and  carried  bodily  for,  or  on  account 
of,  the  violence  of  the  people,  who 

were  pressing  upon  them,  eager  that  lie 
should  be  put  to  death,  (ver.  36.)  "A 
vivid  reminiscence  of  the  scene  by 
Luke,  who  well  remembered  seeing  his 
beloved  teacher,  as  the  soldiers  led  him 
up  the  stairs,  comjjletely  lifted  from  his 
feet  by  the  resistless  pressure  of  the 
crowd  behind."    (Alexander.) 

36.  The  pressure  and  violence  of  the 
crowd  is  explained.  For  the  multi- 
tude of  the  people,  the  Jews,  fol- 
lowed, or  was  following.  They  were 
pushing  forward  continuoush',  crying, 
shouting  again  and  again,  here,  tliere, 
and  all  over.  Away  with  him,  from 
the  living!  Airay  with  him,  to  death. 
The  same  cry  that  was  uttered  twenty- 
eight  years  before,  near  tlie  same  s2)ot, 
against  our  Lord.     (Luke  23 :  is.) 

37.  When  the  soldiers  had  brought 
Paul  to  a  place  where  he  could  stand, 
he  desires  to  speak  to  the  i)eople,  before 
he  passes  into  the  tower.  lie  addreses 
the  chief  captain.  May  I  speak, 
or  more  exactly,  say  something  to 
thee  ?  The  chief  captain  appears  to 
have  been  surprised  that  Paul  addresses 
him  in  Greek,  and  exclaims.  Canst 
thou  speak  Greek?  He  begins  to 
suspect  that  Paul  is  not  the  political 
agitator  he  sui)posed. 

38.  Art  thou  not  that  Egyptian? 
rather,  Art  thou-  not  then  the  Egyptian, 
»&  I  supposed  ?  Almost  as  if  he  had 
said.  Thou  art  not  the  Egyptian  then. 
He  seems  to  have  known  that  the 
Egyptian  could  not  speak  Greek. 
Josephus  speaks  of  an  Egyjjtian  as  one 
of  the  many  impostors  of  tlie  time,  and 
gives  two  accounts  of  him  which  differ 
somewhat  from  each  other.  {Je%o.  War, 
ii.  13,  5 ;  Antiq.,  7,  6.)    From  the  three 


accounts  it  appears  that  this  impostor 
claimed  that  he  was  a  prophet  and  led 
out  four  thousand  desperate  characters 
into  the  desert,  between  Jiidea  and 
Egypt  and  returned  with  a  mucli  larger 
force.  These  he  increased  to  about 
thirty  thousand  men,  whom  he  deluded 
into  the  belief  that  he  was  the  Messiah, 
encamping  on  the  Mount  of  Olives  and 
promising  that  the  walls  of  Jerusalem 
should  fall  down  at  his  command. 
Felix,  the  governor,  attacked  and  de- 
feated them,  slaying  four  hundred  and 
taking  two  hundred  prisoners,  the 
Egyptian  and  others  escaping.  This 
may  have  occurred  a  year  before  this, 
or  perliaps  at  the  preceding  Passover. 
That  were  murderers — better,  as- 
sassins, a  kind  of  rob})ers,  described  by 
Josephus  (Jewish  War,  ii.  1.3,  3),  who 
concealed  short  swords  or  daggers  be- 
neath their  garments,  and  mingling 
with  the  people  killed  secretly  and 
treaclieronslj'  any  one  thoy  miglit  wish. 
One  of  their  earliest  victims  was  Jona- 
than the  high  i)riest. 

39.  I  am  a  man,  a  Jew  of  Tar- 
sus in  Cilicia,  a  citizen  of  no 
mean,  710  insignificant  city.  Tarsus, 
the  capital  of  Cilicia,  was  distinguished 
for  its  culture  and  its  schools,  and  on 
its  coins  bore  the  proud  title,  "  Tlie  In- 
dependent Capital  Citj\"  It  was  a 
"  free  city,"  having  its  own  constitu- 
tion, its  senate,  or  court  of  ahU'rinan 
its  common  council  and  its  popular  as- 
sembly.     (See  on  6:  9;  9:  11.)      Suffer    me 

to  speak  to  the  people.  Paul  com- 
posed, and  they  violent  with  excite- 
ment ;  he  to  announce  a  Saviour  and 
the  words  of  life,  and  they  crying  out 
for  his  death.  Compare  a  similar  de- 
sire of  Paul  at  Ephesus.     (19 :  so.) 

40.  When  he  had  given  him 
license,  or  leave,  to  speak.  That  the 
chief  captain  gave  this  permission  to  a 


Ch.  XXI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


341 


licence,   Paul  stood  on   the   stairs,  and 
J  beckoned  with  the  hand  unto  the  peojjle. 


And    when    there   was  made  a  great 
silence,  he  spake  unto  ihem  in  the  Hebrew 


Jch.  12:17;  1  Peter  3  :  15. 


man  whom  he  had  just  takeu  prisoner 
has  seemed  strange.  But  his  surprise 
at  finding  out  his  mistake  regarding 
Paul ;  the  citizenship  of  tlie  latter  in 
such  a  city  as  Tarsus ;  the  Greek  he 
spoke,  and  liis  evident  education  and 
retineinent ;  and  hist,  hut  not  least,  the 
Holy  Spirit  witli  him  exerting  any 
needed  tlivine  influence,  are  all  suffi- 
cient to  ex|)hiin  his  action.  Paul  stands 
on  the  stairs  leading  into  the  tower 
(ver.  35)  and  beckoned  AVith  his 
hand  as  a  signal  that  he  wished  to 
speak  (13:  IB),  tlie  chief  captain  having 
very  likely  released  one  of  his  hands 
from  its  chain.  Paul's  unexpected  ap- 
parance  upon  the  stairs,  his  gesture, 
the  presence  of  the  chief  Roman  officer 
and  the  soldiers,  curiosity  to  know 
what  he  would  say,  and  the  prospect 
of  a  speedy  trial  all  tended  to  produce 
a  great  silence.  The  Hebrew 
tongue — the  Aramiean  dialect  of  Pal- 
estine, which  was  then  spoken  by  the 

Jews.      (Johu  5  :  a  ;  19  :  13,  17,  20.) 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  It  is  fitting  for  Christians  at  parting  to 
commend  one  another  in  prayer  to  God. 
(Ver.  1,5;  20  :  36.) 

2.  Life  is  like  a  voyage  with  its  changes, 
perils  and  sufferings.    (Ver.  1-7 ;  20  :  24.) 

3.  God  uses  the  commerce  of  the  nations 
in  opening  a  way  to  the  gospel.  (Ver.  1-7 ; 
28  :  11-14.) 

4.  Our  duty  is  not  to  be  measured  by 
the  dangers  which  threaten  us,  but  by  God's 
will,  word,  and  providence.  (Ver.  4, 10-14 ; 
Luke  9:  51.) 

5.  Parents  should  take  their  children  with 
them  to  places  of  prayer.    (Ver.  5 ;  Ps.  8  :  2.) 

6.  We  have  here  incidental  evidence  that 
the  early  Christians  prayed  extempora- 
neously.    (Ver.  5  ;  20  :  36  ;  John  4  :  21,  24.) 

7.  We  should  seek  our  first  and  nearest 
companions  from  among  Christians.  (Ver. 
7 ;  2  Cor.  6  :  14.) 

8.  The  office  of  an  evangelist  should  be 
recognized  by  all  our  churches.  (Ver.  8 ;  1 
Tim.  1  :  3.) 

9.  Christian  women  have  a  most  import- 


ant work  and  sphere  in  the  church.    (Ver. 
9;  Rom.  16  :  1 ;  Phil.  4  :  3.) 

10.  It  is  often  well  to  know  the  dangers 
that  await  us,  but  to  evade  them  may  not  be 
the  will  of  God.     (Ver.  10-13  ;  20  :  22-24.) 

11.  The  Christian  is  not  to  make  his  feel- 
ings and  preferences,  or  the  emotions  of  his 
friends  his  criterion  of  duty.  (Ver.  11-13 ; 
John  20  :  17.) 

12.  If  we  know  God's  will,  nothing  should 
make  us  swerve  from  it.  (Ver.  12,  13  ;  Phil. 
3  :  11.) 

13.  We  should  welcome  the  cross,  not  for 
its  own  sake,  but  for  the  Lord's  sake.  (Ver. 
13  ;  2  Vox.  12  :  10  ;  Phil.  1  :  29.) 

14.  Whatever  the  sacrifice,  we  should  yield 
cheerfully  to  God's  will.  (Ver.  14;  Matt. 
6  :  10 ;  26  :  42.) 

15.  Our  aftection  for  friends  should  not 
retard  or  unfit  us  for  duty.  (Ver.  15; 
Luke  9 :  60-62.) 

16.  The  exercise  of  hospitality  among 
Christians  is  beautiful  and  useful.  (Ver.  16 ; 
Heb.  13  :  2 ;  3  John  5-8.) 

17.  Joy  is  becoming  Christians  when  they 
meet.    (Ver.  17 ;  Phil.  2  :  17,  18.) 

18.  Like  Paul,  we  should  commend  our- 
selves by  our  humility  and  evangelical 
labors.    (Ver.  18, 19 ;  20  :  18-21.) 

19.  True  piety  will  rejoice  in  the  spread 
of  the  gospel  anywhere  and  everywhere. 
(Ver.  19,  20 ;  1  Cor.  13  :  6.) 

20.  Though  Christianity  is  as  broad  as 
God's  holiness  and  love,  yet  some  of  its 
possessors  may  be  very  narrow  through  ed- 
ucation and  prejudice.  (Ver.  20;  Gal.  3  : 
1,28) 

21.  Baptism  did  not  take  the  place  of  cir- 
cumcision. It  is  evident  that  neither  Paul 
nor  James  taught  or  believed  it.  (Ver.  21 ; 
15  : 1,  8-10.) 

22.  Detraction  and  opposition  often  come 
to  the  most  earnest  workers  in  Christ's 
cause.    (Ver.  20,  21 ;  2  Tim.  3  :  12.) 

23.  Good  works  and  outward  observances 
have  their  place,  but  as  a  condition  ol  justi- 
fication are  out  of  their  place.  (Ver.  22-25  ; 
Rom.  3  :  20 ;  James  2  :  18.) 

24.  There  are  times  when  we  may  accom- 
modate ourselves  to  the  prejudices  of  others, 
provided  that  we  can  thereby  promote  peace 


342 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXII. 


32  tongue,   saying,    Men,  ^ brethren,    and 

fathers  ,hear  ye  my  defence  which  I  make 

2  now  unto  you.    (And  when  they  heard 

that  he  spake  in  the  Hebrew  tongue  to 


them,  they  kept  the  more  silence.    And 

3  he  saith,)  »  I  am  verily  a  man  which  am  a 

Jew,  born  in  Tarsus,  a  city  in  Cilicia,  yet 

brought  up  in  this  city  I'at  the  feet  of 


»  ch.  7  :  2. 


>  ch.  21  :  39.        b  Deut.  33  :  3  ;  2  Kings  4  :  38. 


without  the    sacrifice   of  princijjle.    (Ver. 
22-26  ;  2  Cor.  13  :  8  ) 

25.  Expediency  is  at  times  allowable,  but 
not  always  lawful,  or  productive  of  the  best 
results.  (Ver.  26,  27  ;  1  Cor.  10  :  23  ;  2  Tim. 
2  :  24.) 

26.  In  matters  not  enjoined  by  Christ  and 
the  apostles  there  may  be  liberty,  but  in 
clearly  revealed  doctrines  and  practices  there 
should  be  no  compromise.  (Ver.  26,  27 ; 
Gal.  1  :  8,  10.) 

27.  The  best  of  intentions  may  be  mis- 
understood and  lead  to  bad  results.  (Ver. 
27,  28.) 

28.  The  servant  may  not  expect  better 
treatment  than  his  master.  (Ver.  28,  36; 
John  15  :  20.) 

29.  The  world  notices  the  company  we 
keep,  and  draws  conclusions  concerning  us. 
(Ver.  29 ;  Luke  7  :  34.) 

30.  The  wickedness  of  the  heart  is  seen  in 
the  ease  with  which  men  engage  in  a  bad 
cause.    (Ver.  30.) 

31.  Ritualism  is  one-sided  and  wrong- 
sided.  The  Jews  must  not  pollute  the 
temple,  but  they  could  shed  innocent  blood. 
(Ver.  31 ;  John  18  :  28  ;  Matt.  23  :  24.) 

32.  God  watches  over  his  children  and 
sufters  nothing  to  defeat  his  purpose  regard- 
ing them.     (Ver  32  ;  Luke  12  :  7,  8.) 

33.  God  often  makes  the  governments  of 
this  world  the  protectors  of  his  servants. 
(Ver.  32,  33 ;  22  :  29.) 

34.  The  wicked  are  not  agreed,  and  are  in- 
consistent, as  to  their  opposition  to  Christ. 
(Ver.  34.) 

35.  Many  teachers  owe  their  notoriety  to 
the  hatred  of  the  world.  (Ver.  3u,  36 ;  6  : 
8-15.) 

30.  We  should  be  eager  to  embrace  every 
opportunity  for  presenting  Jesus  as  a 
Saviour  to  the  world.  (Ver.  37-40 ;  1  Tim. 
1  :  15.) 

37.  The  world  often  entertains  unjust  and 
absurd  views  concerniug  the  people  of  God. 
(Ver.  37,38;  14  :  11  ;  17:  18.) 

38.  "  No  man  has  so  good  a  right  to  be 
calm  in  the  storms  at  sea,  or  in  the  midst  of 
popular  tumults  as  the  Christian."  (Dr.  P. 
ScHAFF.)     (Ver.  39,  40 ;  27  :  22-26,  34,  35.) 


Ch.  22 :  This  chapter  gives  Paul's 
address  before  the  Jewish  mob,  in 
which  he  relates  his  birth,  training, 
zeal  as  a  Jew,  and  his  conversion  to  the 
faith  of  Jesus.  But  the  mention  of  his 
mission  to  tlie  Gentiles  causes  a  fresh 
outburst  of  fanatical  excitement.  The 
chief  captain,  sui)posing  him  guilty  of 
some  great  crime,  proposes  to  extort  a 
confession  by  scourging,  but  Paul 
escapes  the  torture  by  avowing  his 
Roman  citizenship.  The  next  day  he 
is  Ijrought  before  the  Sanhedriu  for  ex- 
amination. May,  A.  D.  58. 

1-21.  Paul's  Address  TO  THE  Peo- 
ple FROM  THE  Stairs  of  the  Tower 
OP  Antonia.  The  second  account  of 
Paul's  conversion,  this  one  by  himself, 
and  naturally  the  most  conciliatory 
before  an  excited  and  prejudiced  Jewish 
audience.  The  other  two  accounts  are 
found  in  9  :  1-22 ;  26  :  4-20.  (see  Gai. 
1 :  1316.)  Compare  preliminary  remarks 
on  ch.  9 : 1-22  and  the  Table  comparing 
the  diflerent  account's  of  Paul's  conver- 
sion. 

1.  Men,  brethren,  fathers — the 
words  used  by  Stejjhen  in  beginning  his 
speech.  (See  on  7:  2.)  The  word /a^/if?'* 
indicates  some  members  of  the  Sanhe- 
driu, or  at  least  prominent  men,  pres- 
ent. Such  a  respectful  beginning  was 
conciliatory. 

2.  In  the  Hebrew  tongue,  (sce 
on  21 :  -to.)  It  is  implied  that  the  people 
would  have  understood  Greek,  but  were 
pleased  to  hear  their  native  tongue. 
Paul's  use  of  the  Hebrew  would  suggest 
his  loyalty  as  a  Jew,  and  to  the  law. 
By  the  gesture  of  his  hand  he  had  ob- 
tained sufficient  silence  to  be  heard 
(21 :  40) ;  but  now  they  kept  the  more 
silent,  a  strong  expression,  implying 
a  subdued  quiet,  a  breathless  stillness. 

3.  Paul  first  glances  at  his  early  life, 
and  zeal  in  persecuting  Christians. 
(Ver.  3-5.)  He  .shows  also  his  early  zeal 
for  the  law,  which  would  naturally  sug- 

fest  that  their  recent  outburst  against 
imself  was  similar  to  his  own  former 
feelings  and  conduct.   Verily — omitted 


Cn.  XXII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


343 


"Gamaliel,  and  taught  according  to  the 
perfect  tuauuer  of  tlie  law  of  tlie  fathers, 
and  "iwas  zealous  toward  God,  as  ye  all 

4  are  this  day.  "  Aud  I  persecuted  this 
way  uato  the  death,  binding  and  deliver- 
ing into  prisons  both  men  and  women. 

5  As  also  the  high  priest  doth  bear  me  wit- 
ness, and  all  the  estate  of  the  elders : 
'from  whom  also  I  received  letters  unto 
the  brethren,  and  went  to  Damascus,  to 
bring  them  which  were  there  bound  unto 
Jerusalem,  for  to  be  punished. 

6  And  8  it  came  to  pass,  that,  as  I  made  my 
journey,  and  was  come  nigh  unto  Damas- 
cus about  noon,  suddenly   there  shone 


from  heaven  a  great  light  round  about 

7  me.  And  I  fell  unto  the  ground,  and 
heard   a   voice    saying    unto    me,    Saul, 

8  Saul,  why  perseculest  thou  me?  And  I 
answered.  Who  art  thou,  Lord?  And  he 
said  unto  me,  I  am  Jesus  of  Nazareth, 

9  whom  thou  persecutest.  And  ^  they  that 
were  with  me  saw  indeed  the  light,  aud 
were  afraid  ;  but  they  heard  not  the  voice 

10  of  him  that  spake  to  me.  Aud  I  said. 
What  shall  I  do.  Lord?  And  the  Lord 
said  unto  me,  Arise,  and  go  into  Damas- 
cus ;  and  there  it  shall  be  told  thee  of  all 
things  which  are  appointed  for  thee  to  do. 


0  ch.  5  :  34. 


d  ch.  21 
10, 12. 


20.        •  ch.  7  :  58 ;  8  :  3  ;  2G  :  9-11 ;  1  Tim.  1  ;  13.        '  ch.  9  :  2 ;  20  : 
8  ch.  9  :  3-22 ;  2G  :  12,  13.        i»  ch.  9  :  7 ;  Dan.  10  :  7. 


in  the  oldest  manuscripts.  I  am  .  .  . 
a  Jew.  Tliis  would  correct  the  im- 
pression of  any,  who,  like  the  chief 
captain,  might  think  he  was  one  of 
those  foreign  desijeradoes  at  that  time 
infesting  the  country.  Born  in 
Tarsus,  in  Cilicia.  (see  on  21:39) 
Brought  up  in  this  city — not  indeed 
from  infancy,  but  from  boyhood.  At 
about  the  age  of  thirteen,  when  Jewish 
boys  became  children  of  the  Law — per- 
haps a  little  earlier — Paul  was  sent  to 
Jerusalem  to  be  educated.  At  the 
feet.  Pupils  were  accustomed  to  sit 
around  their  teacher  on  low  benches,  or 

on      the      floor.        (See  Lute  10  :  39,  and  note.) 

Gamaliel,  (see on  6: 34.)  Taught  ac- 
cording to  the  perfect  or  strict 
manner  of  the  law.  See  the  paral- 
lel aud  equivalent  passage,  26  :  5, 
"  according  to  the  strictest  sect  of  our 
religion,  I  lived  a  Pharisee."  See  his  ac- 
count of  his  birth,  education,  and  char- 
acter in  Phil.  3  :  4-6.  See  also  Gal. 
1  :  14,  where  he  speaks  of  his  pre-emi- 
nence among  his  fellow-students,  and 
his  fervent  zeal,  a  zealot  even,  for  the 
traditions  of  the  fathers.  As  ye  all 
are  this  day.  Thus  he  puts  himself 
in  as  acceptable  a  light  as  possible  be- 
fore his  audience.  See  2  Cor.  11  :  22, 
where  Paul  compares  himself  with  cer- 
tain Judaizing  Christians. 

4.  This  way— this  well-known  be- 
lief and  manner  of  life,  the  Christian 
religion,  (see  on  9;  2.)  I  persecuted 
unto  death.  (3e«2C:io.)  Binding 
and  delivering  into  prisons,  etc. 

(See  on  9  :  2.) 

5.  The  high  priest,  Caiaphas,  who 

held  that  office  when  Saul  of  Tarsus  re- 


ceived his  commission,  and  who  appears 
still  to  have  been  living.  (See  on  9  ;i.) 
All  the  estate  of  the  elders — all 
the  eldership,  one  form  of  designating 
the  Sanhedrin.  (See  on  9  :i.)  Unto  the 
brethren — his  Jewish  brethren.  He 
speaks  as  himself  a  Jew.  In  9  :  2 
the  language  is,  "to  the  synagogues." 
Damascus,  (see  on  9  : 2.)  Bouud 
unto   Jerusalem — to    be  tried   and 

punished.      (see  on  9:  2.) 

6.  Paul  proceeds  to  relate  his  vision 
near  Damascus,  which  changed  the 
whole  course  of  his  life.  (ver.  6-16.) 
About  noon,  etc.  "  At  midday." 
(26 :  13.)    See  for  this  verse  note  ou  9  :  3. 

7.  Heard  a  voice,  etc.  —  Paul 
heard  the  words ;  those  that  were  with 
him  heard  a  sound,  but  it  was  not  in- 
telligible to  them.  (Ver.  9.)  On  this 
verse,  see  9  :  4. 

8.  Of  Nazareth — or  the  Nazarene. 
This  title  of  Jesus  is  not  found  in  the 
other  two  accounts  of  his  conversion. 
This  was  fitting  before  the  Jewish  au- 
dience, as  it  would  specify  Jesus,  and  if 
his  followers  were  called  Nazareues,  as 
also  identifying  himself  with  them. 
See  on  9  :  5  for  this  verse. 

9.  And  were  afraid— not  found  in 
the  oldest  manuscripts,  and  omitted  in 
the  Revised  Version.  Some  old  manu- 
scripts have  them.  They  are  retained 
by  Alford  and  Meyer.  Heard  not 
the  voice.  (See  on  ver.  7  ;  also  fuller 
note  of  9  :  7.)  The  Improved  Bible 
Union  Version  translates,  They  did  not 
understand. 

10.  What  shall  I  do.  Lord? 
recognizing  Jesus  as  a  Divine  Master. 
See  ou  9  :  6,  where  the  three  accounts 


344 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXII. 


11  And  when  I  could  not  see  for  the  glory 
of  that  light,  being  led  by  the  hand  of 
them  thatwere  with  me,  1  caiue  in   to 

12  Damascus.  Aud 'one  Ananias,  a  devout 
man  according  to  the  law,  ^  having  a  good 
report  of  all  the  Jews  which  dwell  (here, 

13  came  unto  me,  and  stood,  and  said  unto 
me,  Brother  Saul,  receive  thy  sight.  And 


the  same  hour  I  looked  up  ui)on   him. 

14  And  he  said,  '  The  God  of  our  fathers, 
™hath  chosen  thee,  that  thou  shouldest 
know  his  will,  and  "see  » that  Just  One, 
and   p shouldest    hear   the  voice  of  his 

15  mouth.  <i  For  thou  shalt  be  his  witness 
unto  all  men  of  ^  what  thou  hast  seen  and 

16  heard.    And    now  why    tarriest    thou  ? 


ich.  9:17.       kch.  10:22.       i  ch.  3  :  13;  5  :  30.       ">  ch.  9  :  15;  26  :  16.       ■>  1  Cor.  9  : 1 ;  15  :  8. 
»ch.  3  :  U;  7  :52.       P  1  Cor.  11  :  23 ;  Gal.  1  :  12.       <i  ch.  23  :  11.      '  ch.  4  :  20 ;  26  :  16. 


are  harmonized.     At  this  point  he  sub- 
mits his  will  to  Christ. 

11.  Could  not  see  for  the  glory 
of  that  light.  His  blindness  is  re- 
corded in  9  :  8 ;  but  the  reason  of  his 
blindness  is  only  given  here.  How 
great  and  glorious  the  light  that  out- 
shone the  midday  sun  (ver.  6),  and 
blinded  his  eyes.  Paul  evidently  caught 
a  view  of  Christ;  and  his  glory  over- 
whelmed him.  (See  on  9: 17.  Compare  1  Tim. 
6:15,16;  Heb.  1  :  3  ;  John  1  :  H.)  JcSUS  ap- 
peared to  him  not  so  much  as  the  Son 
of  man  (7 :  56),  but  more  as  the  Son  of 

God.       (2The88.  1:710.) 

12.  One  Ananias.  See  9  :  10-17, 
where  Luke  gives  a  fuller  account  of 
him.  Notice,  however,  that  he  is  there 
spoken  of  as  a  disciple,  but  here  as  a 
devout  man  according  to  the  law, 
having  a  good  report  of  all  the 
JeAVS  living  at  Damascus.  Paul  thus 
describes  him  in  a  way  that  would  be 
conciliatory  and  acceptable  to  his 
Jewish  audience.  What  such  a  man 
said  and  did,  should  be  favorably  re- 
ceived and  candidly  considered. 

13.  And  stood — rather,  slanding 
by,  or  oi^er  me,  as  I  lay,  or  sat  blind 
before  him.  Brother  Saul,  etc.  (See 
on  9 :  17, 18.)  Recelve  thy  sight,  etc — 
more  exactly.  Look  tip,  and  the  same 
hour  I  looked  up  upon  him.  The  verb 
is  the  same  in  both  clauses. 

14.  The  God  of  our  fathers- 
Ananias  speaks  as  a  Jew.  Stephen 
u.sed  almost  the  same  expression  aljout 
twenty-four  years  before.  (7:2,  S2.) 
Tliere  was  no  need  of  a  rupture  with 
true  Judaism,  nor  did  Christians  at 
first  expect  it.  Hath  chosen,  or  ap- 
pointed thee  beforehand,  committed 
this  work  and  mission  to  thy  hands. 
To  see  the  Just  or  Eighteous  One. 
(T :  5J ;  1  John  1 : 1.)  As  Paul  actually 
heard  the  voice  of  Jesus,  so  he  act- 
ually iaw  him.     (sc«»n»:n.)    This  put 


Paul  on  a  level  with  the  twelve  apos- 
tles.     (1  :21,  22;  Gal.  I  :1.    See  on  9:  17.) 

15.  For  thou  shalt  he  his  wit- 
ness, etc.  A  like  commission  Jesus 
had  given  the  eleven  apostles,  (i :  8.) 
Unto  all  men.  All  classes  and  races, 
but  Paul  does  not  yet  utter  the  name, 
"  Gentiles."  See  on  9  :  15,  where  Jesus 
reveals  these  facts  regarding  Paul  to 
Ananias.  Jesus  appears  also  to  have 
made  known  his  commission  to  Paul. 

(26:1619.     See  on  9:  6.) 

16.  Why  tarriest    thou?— Why 

art  thou  just  on  the  jioint  of  doing, 
instead  of  actually  doing?  Since  Jesus 
lias  ajipeared  to  thee  and  chosen  thee, 
etc.  The  language  is  not  of  reproof, 
but  of  encouragement.  For  this  was 
what  Paul  needed,  as  he  felt  himself 
the  very  chief  of  sinners,  (i  Tim.  i : 
12. 16.)  Notice  that  Ananias  had  also 
proclaimed  the  gift  of  the  Holy  Spirit 
to  him.  (9:17.)  This  Paul  appears  to 
have  received  without  the  laying  on  of 
hands.  Arise,  without  delay.  The 
change  of  position  is  in  harmony  with 
the  immersion  that  he  received.  Be 
baptized  and  wash  away  thy 
sins.  The  verbs  in  the  original  are 
in  the  middle  voice,  and  it  is  difficult 
to  express  their  meaning  euidiouiously. 
More  exactly,  Jluve  thyself  baptized, 
and  have  thyself  bathed  away  from  thy 
sins.  It  is  iinjdied.  First,  that  Paul  as 
an  intelligent  agent  had  something  to 
purpose  and  do ;  and.  Second,  that  as 
his  baptism  was  to  be  administered  to 
him  by  another,  doubtless  by  Ananias, 
so  his  sins  were  to  be  washed  away  by 
God.  As  the  word  bathe  away  has  in 
its  literal  sense  a  reference  to  the  bath, 
a  bathing  of  the  whole  body,  so  in  ita 
figurative  sense  it  refers  to  the  forgive- 
ness, or  cleansing  of  the  sins,  of  one's 
whole  being.  Baptism  is  the  outward 
sign  of  repentance  and  faith  (i3:24) 
and  represents  deaduess  to  the  world 


Ctt.  XXII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


345 


Arise,  and  be  baptized,  'and  wash  away 
thy  sins,  'calling  on  the  name  of  the 
Lord. 

17  And  it  came  to  pass,  that,  "  when  I  was 
come  again  to  Jerusalem,  even  while  1 
prayed  in  the  temple,  I  was  in  a  trance  ; 

18  and  «saw  him  saying  unto  me.  Make 
haste,  and  get  thee  quickly  out  of  Jeru- 


salem :  for  they  will  not  receive  thy  testi- 

19  uiony  concerning  me.  And  1  .said.  Lord, 
J  they  know  that  1  iu\prisoned  and  "beat 
in   every   synagogue  them  that  believed 

20  on  thee:  »and  when  the  blood  of  thy 
martyr  Stephen  was  shed,  I  also  was 
standing  by,  and  i> consenting  unto  his 
death,  and  kept  the  raiment  of  them  that 


•  Bom.  6:4:  Heb.  10  :  22. 
9:  1. 


'  Bom.  10 :  13. 
•  Matt.  10  :  17. 


"  Gal.  1 :  18, 19.         »  oh.  9:16.        J  ch.  8  :  3  ; 
»  ch.  7  :  58.         b  ch.  8  :  1. 


and  newness  of  life,  which  implies  the 
forgiveness  and  cleansing  away  of  sins. 
The  suly'ect  is  intelligent  and  active  in 
baptism  ;  hut  forgiveness  is  the  act  and 
gift  of  God,  which  the  believer 
acknowledges  and  publicly  accepts  in 

his      baptism.        (see  on  2  :  38.    Compare  1  Peter 

3:21)  Calling  on  the  name  of  the 
Liord — rather,  according  to  tlie  oldest 
authorities,  ccUling  on  his  mime,  refer- 
ring back  to  "the  Just  One"  (ver.  u), 
recognizing  Christ  in  his  baptism. 
Paul  was  to  profess  his  allegiance,  and 
vow  his  devotion  to  the  Lord  Jesus 
Christ  in  his  baptism.  Christians  were 
known  also  as  those  who  called  on  the 
name  of  the  Lord.  (9:  u;  see  also  i :  24.) 
From  9  :  18  we  learn  that  this  command 
was  immediately  obeyed.  Observe  how 
Paul,  in  his  conciliatory  manner, 
avoids  using  the  name  of  Jesus  in  this 
place. 

17.  Paul  proceeds  to  narrate  his 
mission  among  the  Gentiles,  wliich  was 
entirely  unsought  by  himself,  and  put 
upon  him  by  divine  command.  When 
I  was  come,  rather,  returned  to 
Jerusalem — three  years  after  his 
conversion,  a  part  of  which  time  he 
spent  in  Arabia  (Gai.  1 :  n,  is)^  a  period 
doubtless  of  preparation  for  his  great 
work.  See  also  9  :  18-29  for  other  inci- 
dents passed  over  by  Paul  in  his  ad- 
dress. While  I  prayed  in  the 
temple — another  conciliatory  remark. 
A  Jewish  coloring  pervades  his  whole 
address.  Though  a  Christian,  he  was 
not  forgetful  of  Jerusalem  and  the 
temple.  One  visiting  the  temple  for 
prayer  would  not  likely  be  a  traitor 
to  his  own  peojile,  nor  a  despiser  of 
Jewish  ordinances  and  religious  ob- 
servances. I  was  in  a  trance,  (see 
on  10 :  10.)  This  was  one  of  the  "  visions 
and  revelations  of  the  Lord,"  men- 
tioned by  Paul  in  2  Cor.  12  : 1. 

18.  And  saw  him — that  is,  Christ, 


Make  haste  and  get  thee  quickly 
out  of  Jerusalem.  The  duration 
of  this  visit  was  fifteen  days.  (Cai. 
1 :  18.)  Paul  here  gives  the  supernatural 
cause  of  his  leaving  Jerusalem.  In  9  : 
29,  30,  Luke  gives  the  natural  cause. 
The  two  statements  are  consistent  with 
each  other,  (see on  9: 30.)  Compare  a 
similar  twofold  reason,  15  :  2  and  Gal. 
2  :  2.  They  will  not  receive  thy 
testimony  concerning  me.  In  this 
Paul  implies  that  he  had  come  to  Jeru- 
salem to  preach  the  gospel  to  his  own 
countrymen ;  and  he  gives  the  reason 
why  he  did  not  continue  in  this  work. 
19.  When  the  Lord  commanded  him 
to  leave  Jerusalem,  assuring  him  that 
the  people  would  not  hear  him,  Paul 
remonstrated,  urging  that  he  was 
peculiarly  fitted  for  this  work  among 
the  Jews,  because  he  was  known  to 
them  as  one  who  had  been  a  leading 
persecutor  of  Christians.  The  testi- 
mony of  such  an  one,  he  thought, 
would  have  special  weight.  I  im- 
prisoned and  beat  in  every  syna- 
gogue, where  such  punishments 
were  often  inflicted.     (Matt.  10 :  n ;  Luke  12 : 

11 ;  21  :  12.    See  8  :  3  ;  9  :  1,  2.)    Such  CaSCS  Were 

heard  on  Mondays  and  Thursdays,  and 
corporal  punishment  inflicted  on  the 
spot. 

20.  Thy  martyr,  or  witness, 
Stephen.  It  was  not  till  after  the  age  of 
the  Apostles  that  the  word  martyr  came 
to  be  applied  to  those  Christians  who 
sealed  their  testimony  to  the  truth  by 
their  death.  The  word  here  and 
especially  in  Rev.  17  :  6  appears  to  be 
in  its  transition  to  that  meaning.  Near 
the  close  of  the  second  century  the 
martyrs  of  Lyons  refused  the  title  of 
martyr,  regarding  it  as  only  appro- 
priate to  Christ ;  or  at  least  only  to 
those  who  remained  constant  to  the 
end.  (EuSEBius,  Hist.  Eccles,  v.  2.) 
Consenting— approving   »ud   really 


346 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXII. 


21  slew  hiiu.  And  he  said  unto  me,  Depart : 
'lor  1  will  send  thee  far  hence  unto  the 
Gentiles. 

22  And  they  gave  him  audience  unto  this 
word,  and  then  lifted  up  their  voices,  and 
said,  ii  Away  with  such  a  fellow  from  the 


earth:  for  it  is  not  fit  that  'he  should 

23  live.  And  as  they  cried  out,  'and  cast 
off  their  c'othes,  sand  threw  dust  into  the 

24  air,  the  chief  captain  commanded  him  to 
be  brought  into  the  castle,  and  bade  that 
he  should  be  examined   by  scourging ; 


•ch.  9:15;  13  :  2,46,  47;  18  :  6;  26:17;  Rom.  11 ;  13;  15:  16;  Gal.  2  :  7.  8;Eph.3  :  7,  8;lTim. 
2:7.        d  ch.  21  :  3G.        •  ch.  25  :  24.        '  ch.  7  :  58.        i  2  Sam.  10  :  13. 


taking  pleasure  in  it.  The  oldest 
manuscripts  omit,  unto  his  death 
.  .  .  kept  the  raiment.    (Seeon7:68.) 

21.  But  his  remonstrance  proved  of 
no  avail.  The  Lord's  command  is 
positive  and  peremptory,  Depart — 
giving  no  direct  answer  to  his  plea. 
For  I  will  send  thee — implying 
that  was  his  mission,  and  that  the  Gen- 
tiles would  hear  him.  Thus  Paul 
deferred  the  utterance  of  the  word 
Gentiles  as  long  as  possible.  And 
now  its  utterance  arouses  a  storm  of 
wrath.  Had  he  not  been  interru])ted, 
doubtless  he  would  have  referred,  as 
before  King  Agrippa  (26:  i9-2;i),  to  sub- 
sequent labors,  especially  among  Jews 
and  proselytes ;  to  his  return  to  Jeru- 
salem, bringing  alms  and  ofieriugs ; 
and  to  the  circumstances  of  his  purifi- 
cation in  the  temple  {21 :  it.  is)  ;  not 
omitting  to  present  Jesus  as  the 
Messiah  and  the  hope  of  Israel  (26:6, 
22, 2s) ;  and  perhaps  to  the  blessing  of 
God  upon  his  labors  among  the  Gentile 
nations. 

Note.  Paul  did  not  come  to  a  full 
knowledge  of  his  Gentile  work  at 
once.  At  bis  conversion  he  Avas  com- 
missioned, as  a  minister  and  witness,  to 
Jews  as  well  as  Gentiles.  (26 :  10,  n ;  Gai. 
1:16.)  During  the  three  years  in 
Damascus  and  Aral)ia  his  conceptions 
of  the  truth  were  much  like  those  of 
the  martyr  Stephen.  He  probably 
labored  largely  among  foreign  Jews 
and  proselytes,  as  he  afterwards  did  at 
Jerusalem  (7: 2a),  where  they  attempted 
to  kill  him,  and  he  received  a  renewed 
commission,  "  I  will  send  thee  far 
hence  to  the  Gentiles."  (22:21.)  He 
now  doubtless  obtained  enlarged  views 
of  liis  work  and  his  mission  among  the 
Gentiles.  In  Tarsus,  in  Cilicia,  and  at 
Antioch,  we  believe  he  extended  his 
work  among  not  only  proselytes,  but 
also  among  uncircumcised,  though 
devout.  Gentiles.  Another  advance 
was  made  iu  his  work  and  in  his  con- 


ception of  his  Gentile  mission,  when 
the  Spirit  called  for  the  separation  of 
Paul  and  Barnabas  for  missionary 
labors  among  tlie  heathen,  (is:  3.)  His 
new  experiences  must  have  added 
largely    to    his    practical    knowledge. 

(13:  12,46;  U:27.) 

22-30.  Paitl  Pleads  his  Roman 
Citizenship,  and  Escapes  Scourg- 
ing.    May,  A.  D.  58. 

22.  Unto  this  word — or  declara- 
tion, that  he  was  sent  by  divine  com- 
mand to  the  heathen.    AAvay  with 

such  a  fellOAV.        (Seeon21  :36.)        It    iS 

not  fit,  rather,  according  to  the  oldest 
manuscripts.  It  was  not  fit  that  he 
should  live,  when  he  was  rescued  from 
us  by  the  chief  captain  (21:33,34) ;  im- 
plying that  he  ought  to  have  been  put 
to  death  long  ago.  The  doctrine  that 
the  Messiah  was  not  exclusively  for 
the  Jews,  and  any  suggestion  that  the 
latter  might  be  rejected  and  preference 
given  to  the  Gentiles,  were  peculiarly 
distasteful  to  the  Jewish  people,  espe- 
cially at  Jerusalem.  (see  LuHe  4 :  26-28  ;  20 : 
15-19;   Acts  7  :  48-54.) 

23.  And  cast  oflf  their  clothes — 

or  throwing  vp  their  outer  garments 
and  casting  dust  into  the  air,  indicating 
vehement  rage  and  intense  excitement. 
Such  demonstrations  would  tend  to 
inflame  the  minds  of  the  populace,  who 
were  still  gathering,  and  crowding  into 
the  temple  area.  Such  expressions  of 
auger  and  scorn  are  not  uncommon 
among  Orientals.  Compaie  the  act 
of  Shimei  in  casting  stones  and  dust  at 
David  (2Sam.  16: 13),  and  of  the  friends 
of  Job  as  an  expression  of  grief.     (Job 

2  :  12.) 

24.  As  Paul  had  spoken  in  Hebrew, 
the  chief  captain  was  probably  ignor- 
ant of  the  substance  of  his  address, 
and  inferred  that  there  was  some  serious 
charge  against  him,  and  that  he  was 
a  peculiarly  dangerous  and  turbulent 
fellow.  He  therefore  determines  that 
Paul  shall  be  examined,  judicially 


Ch.  XXII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


34" 


that  he  might  know  wherefore  they  cried 

25  so  against  him.  And  as  they  bound  hiiu 
with  thongs,  Paul  said  unto  the  centurion 
that  stood  by,  i'  Is  it  hiwfiil  lor  you  to 
Boourge  a  man  that  is  a  Roman,  and  un- 

26  condemned?  When  the  centurion  heard 
that,  he  went  and  told  the  chief  captain, 
saying,  Tak»'  heed  what  thou  doest :  for 

27  this  man  is  a  Roman.  Then  the  cl-ief 
captain  came,  and  said  unto  him.  Tell 


me,  art  thou  a  Roman  ?    He  said.  Yea. 

28  And  ihe  chief  captain  answered,  With  a 

29  great  sum  obtained  I  this  freedom.  And 
Paul  said.  But  I  was  free  born.  Then 
straightway  they  departed  from  him 
which  should  have  examined  him.  And 
the  chief  captain  also  was  afraid, 'after 
he  knew  that  he  was  a  Roman,  and  be- 
cause be  had  bound  him. 


h  ch.  25  :  16. 


i  ch.  23  :  27. 


by  scourging — a  cruel  method  for 
supplying  the  want  of  proof  or  infor- 
matiou,  by  compelling  a  person  to 
make  a  confession,  or  to  accuse  him- 
self Cried  so  against  him.  Thus 
the  people  "shouted"  in  the  praise  of 
Herod  (12 :  22) ;  and  uttered  an  infuri- 
ated cry  against  Jesus.  (Luke «:  21.) 
"  Their  shouting  and  crying  was  a  hos- 
tile reply  to  him."     (Meyer.) 

25.  As  they  bound  him — as  they 
stretched  him  forward,  bent  him  over 
to  the  post,  preparatory  to  receiving 
the  scourge  on  his  bare  back.  Some 
translate,  Stretched  htm  out  for  the 
whips,  the  thougs  being  the  leather 
st}-aps  of  the  scourge,  which  is  not  a 
very  common  use  of  the  word.  Be- 
sides, it  appears  from  ver.  29,  that  they 
were  now  binding  Paul  preparatory  to 
the  scourging.  Paul  said  unto  the 
centurion  who  stood  by — super- 
intending the  binding.  A  centurion 
had  charge  of  our  Saviour's  cruci- 
fixion.     (Luke  23:  47.)      Is    it   laAVfui    tO 

scourge,  etc.  See  on  16  :  37,  Paul 
pleading  his  Roman  citizenship  at 
Philippi. 

26.  The  centurion  at  once  warns 
the  chief  captain.  Take  heed. 
Omitted  by  the  highest  critical  authori- 
ties. Translate,  What  art  thou  about 
to  do  f  for  this  man  is  a  Roman. 

27.  Art  thou  a  Roman?  The  pro- 
noun is  emphatic,  showing  the  surprise 
of  the  chief  captain  at  hearing  that  the 
accused  Jew  before  him  was  a  Roman 
citizen.  He  said,  Yea.  This  simple 
affirmation  was  sufficient,  and  it  was  at 
once  allowed.  The  claim,  if  false,  was 
punishable  with  death.  Besides,  in 
this  case,  Paul  may  have  had  papers, 
and  probably  could  give  references  in 
the  city  in  proof  of  his  citizenship. 

28.  Still  surprised,  the  chief  captain 
continues,   With   a  great  sum  ob- 


tained I  this  freedom,  this  right  of 
citizenship.  "  The  tribune,  to  whom  it 
was  known  that  a  native  of  Tarsus  had 
not,  as  such,  the  right  of  citizenship, 
thinks  that  Paul  must  probably  have 
come  to  it  by  purchase,  and  yet  for 
this  the  arrested  Cilician  appears  to 
him  too  poor."  The  power  of  grant- 
ing citizenship  rested  solely  with  the 
emperor.  Under  the  first  Ctesars  it 
was  obtained  with  great  difficulty,  and 
at  great  cost.  But  under  Claudius, 
about  ten  years  before  this  time,  it  was 
sold  freely  and  cheajjly  by  his  infam- 
ous wife,  Messalina,  who  was  put  to 
death,  A.  d.  48.  With  calm  dignity 
Paul  replies.  But  I  was  free  born, 
a  Roman  by  birth.  It  was  not  a  local, 
but  a  family  distinction,  which  Paul 
enjoyed.  Tarsus  was  a  free  city,  but 
that  did  not  constitute  its  inhabitants 
Roman  citizens.  It  is  probal)le  that 
Paul's  father  or  grandfather  had  ob- 
tained this  distinction  for  meritorious 
service,  or  through  purchase,  and  hence 
Paul  was  born  a  citizen. 

29.  The  soldiers  who  were  about  to 
exam.ine  Paul  (a  mild  way  of  express- 
ing a  judicial  investigation  by  scourg- 
ing) withdrew,  without  further  orders, 
as  soon  as  they  heard  that  he  was  a 
Roman.  The  chief  captain  was  also 
afraid,  showing  the  power  of  that 
simple  declaration,  "  I  am  a  Roman." 
Because  he  had  bound  him — for 
the  purpose  of  torture.  The  binding 
here  does  not  refer  to  his  having  been 
bound  with  chains  as  a  prisoner,  for 
this  was  permitted  in  the  case  of 
Romans.  The  next  verse  shows  that 
after  Paul  was  unloosed  from  the  whip- 
ping post,  he  was  still  kept  bound  as  a 
prisoner.  So  do  also  26  :  29 ;  28  :  20 ; 
Phil.  1  :  7,  13-16  ;  Col.  4  :  18 ;  Philem. 
10,  13. 

30,  The  chief  captain  was  disposed 


348 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIII 


Paul's  defence  before  the  Sanhedrin;  and 
second  rescue  by  the  Roman  soldiers. 

30  On  the  morrow,  because  he  would  have 
known  the  certainty  wherefore  he  was 
accused  of  the  Jews,  he  loosed  him  from 


his  bands,  and  commanded  the  chief 
priests  and  all  their  council  to  appear ; 
and  brought  Paul  down,  and  set  him 
before  them. 


to  do  his  duty,  but  was  greatly  per- 
plexed. He  could  not  learn  the  charges 
against  Paul,  either  from  the  mob,  or 
from  his  address.  It  was  unlawful  to 
extort  a  confession  from  a  Roman.  He 
determines  to  make  another  effort  by 
bringing  him  before  the  Sanhedrin  for 
examination,  not  only  that  justice  may 
be  done,  but  also  that  he  may  be  able 
to  state  the  case  to  Felix.  (23:26-30.) 
From  liis  bands  is  not  found  in 
the  oldest  manuscripts.  Simply,  he 
loosed,  or  released  him.  He  com- 
niHiided  ...  all  their  council,  or 
Sanhedrin,  to  appear,  rather,  to  come 
together,  (see on  4: 5.)  He  may  have 
learned  that  the  charges  against  Paul 
had  reference  to  the  religion  of  the 
Jews,  and  so  he  summons  their  highest 
ecclesiastical  court.  Brought  Paul 
down — from  the  tower  of  Antonia 
(21 :  23)  to  the  chamber,  wliere  the  San- 
hedrin held  its  meeting,  which  had 
formerly  been  held  in  the  temple,  but 
now  appers  to  have  been  held  in  a  hall 
on  Mount  Zion,  near  the  foot  of  the 
bridge  leading  over  the  ravine  from  the 
western  cloister  of  the  temple.  (See  on 
23 :  15.)  It  appears  also  that  the  chief 
captain  left  Paul  in  charge  of  the  San- 
hedrin (23: 10),  but  was  near  enough  to 
watch  proceedings  and  protect  Paul 
from  violence.  (See  Lewiu  2,  149.) 
The  authority  of  Roman  power  ap- 
pears in  the  command  of  the  chief  cap- 
tain, and  in  the  whole  narrative. 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  Christian  experience  is  the  best  argu- 
ment against  unbelief.     (Ver.  1-16  ;  11  :  4  f.) 

2.  The  Christian  should  meet  opposition 
with  tact  and  a  conciliatory  spirit.  (Ver.  2, 
3,12,13;  2  Cor.  12:  14-18.) 

3.  The  true  penitent  is  anxious  to  know 
and  do  the  will  of  the  Lord.  (Ver.  10 ;  Matt. 
3  :  6-9.) 

4.  We  are  not  prepared  in  our  natural 
Btate  to  behold  the  glory  of  Christ.  (Ver. 
Jl ;  7  :  55,  56.) 

6.  As  soon  as  we  accept  of  Jesus  we  enter 
the  Christian  brotherhood,  and  become  joint- 


heirs  with  Christ.     (Ver.  13;  Rom.  5  :  1,  2; 
8  :  14, 15.) 

6.  Ministers  of  the  gospel  may  not  always 
choose  their  fields  of  labor.  God  may  over- 
rule their  preference,  and  send  them  where 
he  knows  it  is  best  for  them  to  go.  (Ver. 
18-21 ;  16  :  6-10 ;  John  3  :  2.) 

7.  For  further  practical  thoughts  on  ver. 
1-21,  see  chapter  9,  Practical  Remarks,  2,  3, 
4,  6,  10,  12,  14,  15,  18,  19,  20.) 

8.  Sin  and  prejudice  will  shut  the  heart 
against  tlie  most  powerful  presentations  of 
truth.     (Ver.  22 ;  John  2:11;  Luke  16  :  31.) 

9.  Spiritual  delusions  and  religious  fanati- 
cism make  men  like  fierce  brutes.  (Ver.  23, 
Jude  10.) 

10.  How  often  does  the  world  condemn  the 
godly  and  spiritual  matters,  blindly  and 
without  investigation.     (Ver.  24 ;  3  :  15,  17.) 

11.  A  person  in  becoming  a  Christian  does 
not  forfeit  his  rights  as  a  citizen.  (Ver.  25  ; 
Matt.  22  :  21 ;  Rom.  13  : 1-4.) 

12.  Yet  the  Christian  has  a  higher  citizen- 
ship in  heaven.  (Ver.  25-28  ;  Eph.  2  :  19  ; 
Phil.  3  :  20.) 

13.  If  it  was  an  offence  against  the  dignity 
of  Rome  to  inflict  ignominy  upon  one  of  its 
citizens,  how  much  greater  the  offense 
against  Christ  to  injure  one  of  the  citizens 
of  his  heavenly  kingdom  ?  (Ver.  28 ;  Matt. 
25  :  45.) 

14.  A  good  man  will  investigate,  and  wel- 
come honest  investigation.    (Ver.  30 ;  25 : 1 1.) 

Ch.  23.  This  chapter  contains  the 
account  of  Paul  before  the  Sanhedrin, 
the  plot  to  assassinate  him,  and  his 
hasty  but  safe  conduct  as  a  prisoner  to 
Felix  the  governor,  at  Csesarea.  Thus 
in  the  providence  of  God  it  would  ap- 
pear that  Paul,  as  the  apostle  to  the 
Gentiles,  was  to  make  his  last  appeal 
to  Israel  before  he  was  transferred  to 
the  metropolis  of  the  heathen  world. 
He  is  rejected  by  the  people  (last  chap- 
ter), and  by  the  Sanhedrin,  and  the 
Jewish  leaders ;  and  is  delivered  over 
to  the  Roman  authorities,  both  for  safe- 
keeping and  for  trial. 

1-10.  Paul's  Defense  before  the 
Sanhedrin.     His  Second  Resciik 


Ch.  XXllI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


349 


23    And    Paul,    earnestly    beholding    the 
council,  said.  Men  and  brethren,  ^  I  have 


2  unlil    this    day.    And    the  high    priest 
Ananias  commanded  them  that  btood  by 


lived  in  all  good  conscience  before  God      3  him  '  to  smite  him  on  the  mouth.    Then 


k  ch.  24  :  16  ;  2  Cor.  1  :  12 ;  4  :  2 ,  Heb.  13  :  18 ;  1  John  3  :  21. 
Jer.  20:  2;  John  18  :  22. 


1 1  Kings  22  :  24 ;  Eccles.  3  :  16  ; 


FROM  THE  Jews  by  Roman  Sol- 
diers. (Rom.  13  :  1,  G,  7  ;  Exod.  22  : 
28.)  May,  a.  d.  58.  This  section  begins 
properly  with  the  last  verse  of  the  pre- 
ceding chapter. 

1.  Paul  earnestly  beholding 
the  council.  The  same  verb  is  used  to 
describe  the  steadfast  gaze  of  the  dis- 
ciples at  Jesus  ascending  (i :  lo) ;  the 
intent  look  of  Stephen  into  heaven 
(7 :  57) ;  and  the  fixed  look  of  Peter  upon 
the  lame  man.  (3 :  *•)  It  is  one  of  the 
peculiarities  of  Luke  to  record  the  look 
or  gesture  of  the  persons  who  speak. 
(21 : «.)  Paul  scrutinizes  the  council 
or  Sanhedrin,  reminding  him  of  former 
days,  when  he  was  a  member  (-6 :  10),  or 
at  least  a  confidential  and  trusted  agent. 
Probably  he  saw  some  whom  he  had 
known  over  twenty  years  before.  Notice 
he  does  not  address  them  as  fathers 
(-'2 : 1),  but  simply,  Men,  brethren,  as  an 
equal,  and  with  tiie  consciousness  tliat 
he  had  in  no  wise  forfeited  liis  religious 
cliaracter,  and  position  in  the  theocracy. 
Paul's  defense  is  concentrated  into  a 
single  sentence.  Knowing  that  the 
Jewish  leaders  regarded  him  as  an 
apostate  from  the  Mosaic  law,  and  a 
subverter  of  Jewish  customs,  he  says, 
I  have  lived,  conducted  myself  unto 
God,  in  his  service  and  for  his  glory, 
in  all  good  conscience,  with  a  full 
consciousness  of  rectitude,  faithfuluess, 
and  sincerity,  until  this  day.  The 
Jews  had  so  regarded  him  up  to  the 
time  of  his  conversion  to  Christianity  ; 
but  he  affirms  that  his  conduct  had  been 
such  up  to  that  very  day.  The  verb 
translated  litied  means  to  behave  as  a 
citizen,  here,  of  Israel,  or  more  freely, 
to  live  according  to  the  laws  of  God. 
Before  his  conversion  he  acted  sincerely 
(m  :  9),  though  ignorantly  through  un- 
belief, and,  as  he  thought,  for  the  glory 

of  God.       (1  Tim.  1:  5,  18;  2  Tim.  1:3.)       After 

his  conversion  he  had  "a  conscience 
void  of  oftence "  (24 :  is),  whose  testi- 
mony he  enjoyed  "in  simplicity  and 

godly  sincerity."  (2  Cor.  1  ;  12.  Compftre 
Beb.  13 :  12 ;  1  Peter  3  :  15,  16.) 


2  Ananias — the  son  of  Nebedaeus, 
appointed  high-priest,  in  A.  D.  48.  In 
A.  D.  52  he  was  sent  to  Rome  on  a  charge 
of  oppression  brought  against  him  by 
the  Samaritans,  but  was  acquitted.  He 
appears  to  have  resumed  his  office,  but 
was  deposed  in  A.  D.  59,  shortly  before 
P^elix  quitted  his  government,  and  was 
assassinated  by  the  Sicarii,  or  robbers, 
at  the  beginning  of  the  last  Jewish  war. 
(Josephus  Ant.,  xx.  2,  1;6,  2;  9,  2.) 
He  was  a  very  bad  specimen  of  a 
worldly  Sadducee.  "  The  Talmud  adds 
to  our  picture  of  him  that  he  was  a 
rapacious  tyrant,  who  in  his  gluttony 
and  greed,  reduced  the  inferior  priests 
almost  to  starvation  by  defrauding  them 
of  their  tithes."  (Farrar,  Life  of  St. 
Paul,  p.  539.)  His  lawless  conduct 
toward  Paul  was  in  harmony  with  his 
cliaracter.  To  smite  him  on  the 
mouth — ^an  Oriental  mode  of  silencing 
a  speaker,  imjilying  that  what  he  had 
said  was  false  and  presumptuous.  The 
same  mode  is  practiced  at  the  present 
day  in  ICastern  courts.  Compare  a  simi- 
lar insult  offijred  to  Jesus,  while  stand- 
ing Ijefore  the  Sanhedrin.  (John  is :  22; 
also  1  KiDgs  22 ;  24.)  Paul's  calling  the  Jew- 
ish rulers  "  brethren,"  and  especially 
his  assertion  of  having  lived  according 
to  the  laws  of  God,  appears  to  have  en- 
raged the  high  priest. 

3.  Paul  showed  much  spirit,  which 
has  been  contrasted  with  the  mild  and 
patient  conduct  of  Jesus  under  similar 
circumstances.  God  shall  smite 
thee,  thou  whited  Avail,  thou  hyp- 
ocrite, pretending  to  act  as  an  officer  of 
justice  witli  a  spirit  of  lawless  injus- 
tice ;  fair  outside,  but  filthy  within, 
like  the  whitened  walls  of  a  sepulchre. 
(See  on  Matt.  23 :  27.)  Thesc  werc  words  of 
righteous  indignation.  So  Jesus  on 
several  occasions  uttered  scathing  woes 
upon  hypocrites,  and  also  drove  the 
money  changers  from  the  temple.  (M.-itt. 

2:!:13-:W;  Jolm2:14-16.)       Paul's    WOrds    alsO 

were  prophetic.  God  is  about  to  smite 
thee.  In  less  than  two  years  AuaHias 
was  deposed,  and  at  length  came  to  a 


350 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIII. 


said  Paul  unto  him,  God  shall  smite  thee, 

4  thou  whited  wall  !  For  sittest  thou  to 
judge  me  after  the  law,  and  ™  commandest 
me  to  t>e   smitten   contrary  to  the  law? 

5  And  they  that  stood  by  said,  Revilest 
thou  God's  high  priest  7    Then  said  Paul, 


I  wist  not,  brethren,  that  he  was  the  high 
priest :  for  it  is  written,  n '  Thou  shalt  not 
speak  evil  of  the  ruler  of  thy  people.' 
6  But  when  Paul  perceived  that  the  one 
part  wereSadducees,  and  the  other  Phari- 
sees, he  cried  out  in  the  council,  Men  and 


Deut.  25  :  1,  2 ;  John  7  :  51.        n  Exod.  22  :  28  ;  Eccles.  10  :  20. 


violent  death,  (see  on  ver.  2.)  (Josephiis, 
irars  II,  17,  9.)  For  sittest  thou, 
etc.  Better,  And  dost  thou  sit,  being 
such  an  one,  accouutal)le  to  God  and 
who.se  judgment  upon  thee  is  assured, 
jud(jing  mc  according  to  the  law,  etc. 
Contrary  to  the  law,  or  lawlessly. 
The  high  priest  was  uottlie  only  judge  ; 
all  the  members  of  the  Sanhedrin  were 
judges.  He  had  taken  the  case  in  his 
own  hands,  and  illegally  decided  the 
case  before  Paul  had  been  heard.  (John 
1 :  51.)  Tlie  Mosaic  law  req^uired  careful 
investigation  before  punishment,  and 
permitted  the  accused  the  right  to  be 
heard  in  his  own  defence.     (Lev.  19  :  35; 

Deut.  19:15,  17, 1»;  25:  1.) 

4.  God's  high  priest— as  God's 
representative  in  administering  justice. 
(Deut.  17 :  13.)  His  officc  was  also  sacred, 
appointed  by  God.     (Lev.  8  :  i,  r.) 

5.  I  wist  not — /  knew  not,  etc. 
Several  explanations  of  this  language 
have  been  given.  Some  supjio.se  that 
from  defective  sight  he  could  not 
distinguisli  jk  rsons  at  a  little  distance. 
Great  stress  is  hiid  upon  such  passages 
as  9  :  8;  Gal.  4  :  15;  6:11;  2  Cor. 
12  :  7.  Others,  that  he  spoke  ironically, 
which  is  not  in  kei'])ing  with  tlie  quo- 
tation of  Scrij)ture  that  follows.  Others 
still  sup])ose  that  Paul,  on  account  of 
the  tronltlous  times,  did  not  know  who 
was  high  priest;  or,  that  at  that  mo- 
ment, he  did  not  regard  him  so  much 
as  the  higli  priest  as  the  civil  judge, 
the  idea  of  the  high  j)riest  being  ab- 
sorbed in  that  of  the  Jfu/jrc.  It  is  best 
to  take  the  language  iu  its  natural 
meaning.  For  some  reason  Paul  did 
not  know  that  the  person  commanding 
him  to  be  smitten  on  the  mouth  was 
high  priest.  There  had  been  several 
changes  since  the  time  when  Paul  was 
familiar  with  the  Sanhedrin.  The 
high  priest  may  not  have  been  in  his 
official  robes,  or  not  in  his  usual  seat. 
At  his  age,  al)0ut  fifty-six,  his  siglit 
might  have  begun  to  fail   from  natural 


causes.  Besides,  such  a  lawless  com- 
mand surprised  him,  and  would  not 
suggest  that  the  high  priest  was  the 
author  of  it.  His  apology  is  calm, 
frank,  and  Christlike,  even  "if  his  j>re- 
vious  conduct  had  been  too  impulsive. 
But  notice, he  apologizes,  not  to  the  man, 
but  to  the  office ;  not  to  the  judge  even, 
but  to  the  high  priest.  He  retracts 
nothing,  except  impliedly,  that  he 
would  not  have  addressed  knowingly 
the  high  priest  as  a  "  whited  wall,"  or 
hypocrite.  Thus  the  prophetic  utter- 
ance, "  God  shall  smite  thee,"  remains. 
And  to  show  his  sincere  desire  to  act, 
according  to  the  law  he  quotes  from 
Exod.  22 :  28,  Thon  shalt  not  speak 
evil  of  the  ruler  of  thy  people. 
The  quotation  is  from  the  Septuagint 
and  gives  the  substantial  meaning  of  the 
Hebrew. 

6.  But  when  Paul  perceived, 
rather,  knew  that  one  part  were 
Sadducees  and  the  other  Phari- 
sees. These  were  the  two  great  relig- 
ious jjarties,  or  sects  of  the  Jews ;  the 
former  sceptical,  the  latterorthodox.  (See 
on  4  : 1 ;  5 :  17,  34.)  They  wcie  bitterly  op- 
posed to  each  other.  The  two  iiarties 
may  have  been  in  separate  groujis,  the 
majority  being  Pharisees.  Seeing  that 
there  was  no  prospect  of  a  calm  and 
fair  hearing,  Paul  resorts  to  a  legit- 
imate means  of  dividing  their  forces, 
and  turning  their  attention  to  a  funda- 
mental truth  in  which  he  and  the 
Pharisees  agreed.  I  am  a  Pharisee, 
the  son  of  a  Pharisee,  or,  accord- 
ing to  the  best  authorities,  a  son  of 
Phansers ;  not  only  by  birth,  but  his 
family  had,  for  generations,  belonged 
to  that  party.  So  far  as  he  believed 
in  the  doctrine  of  the  resurrection,  in 
the  coming  and  kingdom  of  the  Mes- 
siah, in  angels  and  spirits,  and  in  tlie 
wliole  Old  Testament  Scriptures,  he 
\\as  a  Pharisee.  "As  touching  the  law 
a  Pharisee."  (Piiii.  3:6.)  He  indeed 
went  bivond  the   Pharisees  in  under- 


Ch.  XXIIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


361 


brethren,  »!  am  a  Pharisee,  the  son  of  a 
Pharisee  :  of  p  the  hope  and  resurrection 
of  the  dead  I  am  called  in  question. 

7  And  when  he  had  so  said,  there  arose  a 
dissension  between  the  Pharisees  and  the 
Sadducees :   and  the  multitude  was   di- 

8  vided.  i  For  the  Sadducees  say  that  there 
is   no   resurrection,  neither  angel,   nor 

9  spirit :  but  the  Pharisees  confess  both.  And 
there  arose  a  great  cry ;  and  the  scribes 
that  were  of  the  Pharisees'  part  arose,  and 


strove,  saying,  'We  find  no  evil  in  this 
man:  but  if  a  spirit  or  an  angel  hath 
10  spoken  to  him,  •  let  us  not  light  against 
God.  And  when  there  arose  a  great 
dissension,  the  chief  captain,  fearing 
lest  Paul  should  have  been  pulled  in 
pieces  of  them,  commanded  the  soldiers 
to  go  down,  and  take  him  by  force  from 
among  tb  to  bring  him  into  the 

castle. 


'ch.  2C  :5;  Phil.  3:5. 


p  ch.  24  :  ir.,  21 ;  26  :  C-8 ;  28  :  20. 
'  ch.  25  :  25  ;  2G  :  31.        »  ch.  5  :  39. 


1  ch.  4  : 1,  2  ;  Mark  12  :  18. 


standing  the  Scriptures,  and  applying 
them  to  Jesus,  as  the  Chri.st.  Of  the 
hope  and  resurrection  of  the 
dead — of  the  hope  of  a  Messiah, 
whose  salvation  culminates  in  a  resur- 
rection from  the  dead.  (24:  i5.)  Or, 
perhaps  preferable,  by  a  figure  of 
speech,  Of  the  hope,  namely,  of  the 
resurrection.  So  the  Improved  Bible 
Union  Version,  concerning  the  hope 
and  the  resurrection  of  the  dead  I  am 
now  judged,  or  called  in  question,  (see 
1  Cor.  15  :  12-19.)  Paul  showed  great  skill 
in  this  utterance.     It  was  also  an  ap- 

Eeal  to  the  Pharisees  who  agreed  with 
im  so  far,  to  listen  further ;  and  to 
call  forth  their  sympathy  and  defence. 
He  had  no  hopes  of  leniency  from  the 
Sadducees,  his  most  violent  and  con- 
temptuous opposers ;  but  he  could  hope 
for  some  sympathy  from  the  Pharisees, 
who  were  sincere  in  unbelief,  but 
who  held  many  doctrines  in  common 
with  himself.  His  professions  as  a 
Pharisee  implied  thtit  he  was  not  a  sub- 
verter  of  the  Mosaic  law  and  customs. 

7.  There  arose  a  dissension — 
an  actual  strife,  in  regard  to  Paul. 
The  Pliarisees  saw  that  Paul  was  with 
them  in  their  leading  doctrinal  views, 
and  they  hesitate  to  join  the  Sadducees 
to  put  him  to  death.  And  the  mul- 
titude, of  those  assembled,  Avere 
divided,  taking  opposite  sides. 

8.  Luke  explains  the  effect  of  Paul's 
appeal  by  stating  the  fundamental  dif- 
ference between  these  parties.  His 
description  agrees  with  that  of  Jos- 
ephus,  who  says,  "  The  Sadducees  re- 
ject the  existence  of  the  soul  after 
death,  and  the  rewards  and  punish- 
ments of  the  invisible  world."  And 
again,  "The  Sadducees  hold  that  the 
Bouls  of  men  perish  with  their  bodies," 


Also,  that  the  Pharisees  hold  that "  Tho 
souls  of  men  have  an  immortal  strength, 
and  are  destined  to  be  rewarded  or 
jmnished  in  another  state  according  to 
the  life  here,  as  it  has  been  one  of  vir- 
tue or  vice."  (Jewish  Tlar,  II,  8,  14; 
Antiq.  XVIII,  1,  3,  4.)  The  Sadducees 
accepted  the  Pentateuch  which  often 
speaks  of  angels,but  they  appear  to  have 
explained  such  appearances  as  some 
manifestation  of  the  divine  glory.  Po- 
litically, they  rather  sided  with  Rome, 
and  sometimes  Avere  found  uniting 
with  the  Herodians.  The  Pharisees 
confess  both — the  resurrection  and 
the  existence  of  spiritual  beings,  angel 
and  spirit  being  included  in  one  idea. 

9.  There  arose  a  great  cry,  or 
clamor,  as  of  an  excited  mob.  And 
the  scribes,  or  according  to  some  of 
the  best  manuscripts,  Some  of  the 
scribes  of  the  Pharisees'  part,  or 
parti/,  espoused  the  side  of  Paul.  It 
was  fitting  that  their  learned  men  and 
guardians  of  the  law  (4:5)  should  take 
a  leading  jjart.  Let  us  not  fight 
against  God.  These  words  are 
wanting  in  the  oldest  manuscripts  and 
versions,  leaving  the  sentence  as  an 
unfinished  exclamation.  Luke  has  other 
instances  of  incomplete  sentences.  (Luke 

13  :  9;  19:  «;  22:42.)        Hut     if     a     Spirit, 

etc.,  or  But  tvhat  if  a  spirit  spoke  to 
him,  or  an  angel !  Referring  to  Paul's 
statement  in  22  :  17,  18.  As  the  Sad- 
ducees did  not  believe  in  spirits  or 
angels,  the  Pharisees  pause  in  their 
argument,  and  with  gestures  imnly, 
that  believing  as  they  did,  the  matter 
in  tliat  case  was  significant,  and  re- 
quired caution, 

10.  A  scene  of  wild  excitement,  a 
great  dissension  ensues.  The  pre- 
vious excited  feelings  regarding  Paul 


S52 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIII. 


11  And  'the  night  following  the  Lord 
stood  by  hiui,  and  said, "  Be  of  good  cheer, 
Paul :  I  for  as  thou  Iw3t  testified  of  me 
in  Jerusalem,  so  must  thou  bear  witness 
also  at  Bome. 

Conspiracy  to  s'ay  Paul;  hs  is  sent  to  Felix  at 
Ciesarea. 

12  AND  when  it  was  day,  t  certain  of  the 
Jews  banded  together,  and  bound  them- 
selves under  a  curse,  saying,  ^  that  they 


would  neither  eat  or  drink  till  they  had 

13  killed  Paul.  And  they  were  more  than 
forty  which  bad   made  this  conspiracy. 

14  And  they  came  to  the  chief  priests  and 
elders,  and  said,  We  have  bound  our- 
selves under  a  great  curse,  that  we  will 
eat  nothing  until   we  have  slain    Paul. 

15  Now  therefore  ye  with  the  council  signify 
to  the  chief  captain  » that  he  bring  him 
down  unto  you  to-morrow,  as  though  he 
would  inquire  something  more  perfectly 


«  ch.  27  :  23,  24. 


»Isa.  41  :10;  Jer.  15  :  21. 
'  2  Cor.  11  :  26. 


*  ch.  22  :  18. 
»  ch.  25  :  3. 


y  ver.  21  :30;  ch.  25:  3. 


prepared  the  way ;  and  party  feelings 
and  prejudices  combined  to  make  the 
tumult  more  intense,  especially  on  the 
part  of  the  Sadducces,  who  were  jealous 
of  the  Pharisees,  as  well  as  violent  in 
their  hatred  of  Christians.  (< :  is.)  Lest 
Paul  should  have  been  pulled  or 
torn  in  pieces.  Both  parties  seize 
liim,  some  to  protect,  others  to  vent 
their  wrath.  But  the  chief  captain 
quickly  comes  with  his  soldiers  to  his 
rescue.  Doubtless  they  were  in  readi- 
ness, while  he  himself  with  an  officer 
was  present  to  learn  the  result  of  the 
investigation.  We  can  not  8ui)pose 
tliat  he  presided  at  the  meeting  of  the 
Sanhedrin. 

11-22.  A  CoxspiKACY  TO  Slay 
Paul.  Its  Disclosfke  to  the 
Chief  Captain.    May  a.  d.  58. 

11.  After  the  terrible  ordeal  of  the 
past  two  days,  Paul  needed  tlie  divine 
encouragement,  Be  of  good  cheer. 
The  liOrd  Jesus  stood  by  him — 
descriptive  of  an  actual  appearance, 
but  whetlier  in  a  dream  or  a  waking 
vision  is  not  told  us ;  probably  the 
latter.  Compare  his  visions  at  Troas 
(16:9,  in),  and  at  Corinth.  (i8:9,  lo.)  Thou 
hast  testified  of  me  in  Jerusalem 
— as  he  liad  wished,  but  had  been  rejected 
according  to  the  word  of  the  Lord. 
(22:19  21.)  So  must  thou  bear  wit- 
ness at  Rome — so  he  should  escape 
from  the  Jews  at  Jerusalem.  Ilow 
must  this  promise  have  cheered  him 
through  all  the  changes  that  befell 
him,  during  his  imprisonment  at 
Csesarea,  and  his  voyage  to  Rome  !  So. 
May  there  not  ])e  a  suggestion  that  he 
should  testify  in  bonds  at  Rome  as  he 
had  at  Jerusalem.  It  had  been  his 
long  desire  and  purpose  to  labor  at 
Rome.     (19 :  21.)     A  few  months  before 


this  he  had  written  to  the  Roman 
Christians  of  his  "  longing  to  see  them  " 
and  of  his  intentions  to  visit  them.  (Rom. 

1  :  11-13;  15  :  28.) 

13.  While  Paul  is  thus  comforted 
some  of  the  Jews  are  plotting  his  de- 
struction. The  highest  critical  author- 
ities omit  Certain  of.  The  men  who 
thus  banded  themselves  together, 
were  doubtless  Sadducees,  with  some 
bitter  opponents  from  Asia  Minor,  and 
zealots  whose  fanaticism  is  recorded 
by  Josephus.  Bound  themselves 
under  a  curse — under  an  anathema 
(see  Gal.  1 :  8,  9),  which  they  invoked  on 
themselves  in  the  event  of  violating, 
or  not  carrying  out,  their  vow. 

13.  More  than  forty — indicating 
a  great  and  widespread  popular  excite- 
ment against  Paul. 

14.  They  came  to  the  chief 
priests  and  elders — naturally  to 
the  Sadducean  portion  of  tlie  Sanhe- 
drin— Ananias  and  his  friends,  (ver.2.) 
We  have  bound,  etc.  Literally,  We 
have  cursed  ourselves  with  a  cuise — a 
strong  expression,  showing  how  sol- 
emnly and  deliberately  they  engaged 
in  the  task,  as  a  service  oiiered  to  God. 
(John  16: 2.)     Will  eat  nothing — even 

will    taste     nothing.         (See  l  Sam.  U:21.) 

Josephus  tells  of  a  similar  plot  to  kill 
Herod.     {Antiq.  xv.  8  :  3,  4.) 

15.  Now,  therefore,  ye  with  the 
council.  Tbe  chief  j)riests  and  elders 
(ver.  u)  are  still  to  be  regarded  as  the 
prime  movers  in  tliis  nefarious  plot. 
They  were  to  influence  the  Sanhedrin 
to  ask  for  Paul ;  but  not  necessarily  to 
divulge  all  their  plans.  This  would 
hardly  be  safe,  especially  in  the  hear- 
ing of  some  of  the  Pharisees  who  had 
lately  espoused  the  side  of  Paul.  (ver.  s.) 
Such  proceedings  against  apostates  ac- 


Ch.  XXIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


355 


concerning  him  :  and  we,  or  ever  he  come 
near,  are  ready  to  kill  him. 

16  •>  And  when  Paul's  sister's  son  heard  of 
their  lying  in  wait,  lie  went  and  entered 

17  into  the  castle,  and  told  Paul.  Then  Paul 
called  one  of  the  centurions  unto  him, 
and  said.  Bring  this  young  man  unto  the 
chief  captain  :  for  he  hath  a  certain  thing 

18  to  tell  him.  So  he  took  him,  and  brought 
him  to  the  chief  captain,  and  said,  Paul 
the  prisoner  called  me  unto  him,  and 
prayed  me  to  bring  this  young  man  unto 
thee,  who  hath  something  to  say  unto 

19  thee.    Then  the  chief  captain  took  him 


by  the  hand,  and  went  with  him  aside 
privately,  and  asked  him,  What  is  that 

20  thou  hast  to  tell  me?  And  he  said,  'The 
Jews  have  agreed  to  desire  thee  that  thou 
wouldest  bring  down  Paul  to-morrow 
into  the  council,  as  though  they  would 
inquire  somewhat  of  him  more  perfectly. 

21  But  do  not  thou  yield  unto  them :  for 
there  lie  in  wait  for  him  of  them  more 
than  forty  men,  which  have  bound  them- 
selves with  an  oath,  that  they  will  neither 
eat  or  drink  till  they  have  killed  him : 
and  now  are  they  ready,  looking  for  a 


b  Job  5  :  13  ;  Prov.  21  :  30 ;  Lam.  3  :  37.        «  ver.  12 ;  Ps.  12  :  2. 


corded  with  Jewish  opinions  and  pro- 
ceedings. Dr.  Hackett  quotes  from 
Philo,  the  noted  Alexandian  Jew,  who 
wrote  in  this  age  :  "  It  is  highly  proper 
tliat  all  who  have  a  zeal  for  virtue 
should  have  a  right  to  punish  with 
tlieir  own  hands,  without  delay  those 
who  are  guilty  of  this  crime  (that  is, 
forsaking  what  they  regarded  tlie  true 
worship  of  God) ;  not  carrying  them 
before  .  .  .  any  magistrate,  but  they 
should  indulge  the  abhorrence  of  evil, 
tiie  love  of  God  they  entertain,  by  in- 
flicting immediate  punishment  on  such 
impious  apostates,  regarding  them- 
selves for  the  time  as  everything — 
senators,  judges,  pnetors,  sergeants, 
accusers,  witnesses,  the  laws  of  the 
jieople ;  so  that  hindered  by  nothing, 
they  may  without  fear  aud  with  all 
promptitude  espouse  the  cause  of 
piety."  And  we,  or  ever  he  come 
iiiear^better.  And  we  before  he  comes 
near — showing  that  the  usual  meeting- 
place  of  the  Sanhedrin,  was  farther 
than  the  area  of  the  temple.      (See  on 

22:30.) 

16.  It  is  not  strange  that  a  conspir- 
acy involving  so  many  persons,  against 
one  about  whom  the  whole  community 
was  intensely  excited,  should  have  be- 
come known  to  some  outside  of  those 
immediately  concerned.  Nothing  more 
is  known  of  Paul's  sister's  son. 
He  may  have  been  studying  at  Jeru- 
salem, like  Paul  years  before,  and  thus 
in  a  position  to  hear  tlie  secrets  of  the 
Jewish  leaders.  This  incident  shows 
tliat  all  of  Paul's  family  were  not 
alienated  from  him.  Some  of  Paul's 
kinsmen  were  Christians.  (Rom.  i6:7.) 
Had  this  one  been,  doubtless  Luke 
would   have  mentioned  it.     We  may 


hope  that  he  learned  ft-om  his  uncle 
the  truth  as  it  is  in  Christ.  In  this 
case  God  used  natural  affection  for 
Paul's  safety. 

17.  Then  Paul  called,  etc.  As 
he  was  under  military  guard  he  would 
have  no  trouble  in  sending  a  message 
by  a  soldier.  A  certain  thing — better, 
something  to  tell  him.  The  divine 
promise  (ver.  ii)  led  him  to  use  every 
means  of  safety  with  hopefulness.  He 
shows  considerable  wisdom  and  execu- 
tive ability. 

18.  Paul  the  prisoner— <Ae  one 
bound,  indicating  that  he  may  have 
been  bound  to  a  soldier,  and  could  thus 
easily  send  the  message  to  the  centurion. 
Paul  often  applied  this  term  to  himself. 

(F.ph.  3  :  1  ;  4  :  1  ;  2  Tim.  1:8;  Philem.  1,  9,  1.^.) 

19.  Everything  in  connection  with 
this  incident  moves  on  with  soldier-like 
order,  i)romptness,  and  obedience.  As 
well  as  being  a  Roman  citizen,  Paul 
was  gaining  a  certain  influence  by  per- 
sonal power  and  character.  Took  him 
by  the  hand— kindly  to  lead  him 
aside.  "To  encourage  the  youth." 
(Bengel.) 

20.  The  Jews  have  agreed,  etc. 
(See  ver.  12-15.)  Paul's  uephew  speaks  in 
a  popular  way  as  he  understood  it. 
As  though  they  would  inquire — 
as  if  the  Sanhedrin  would  more 
thoroughly  investigate  the  matter.  Tbe 
Revised  Version  translates,  As  though 
thou  7oouldst  inquire;  as  in  the  former 
meeting.     (22:30.) 

21.  For  there  lie  in  wait  .  .  . 
lookiiijg  for  a  promise  from  thee 
— an  assent  to  their  pro])osal.  The  cou- 
spiracy  was  so  completely  arranged  and 
assured,  that  Paul's  ne})hew  speaks  of 
its  details  as  a  matter  of  fact.     What 


354 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIIl. 


22  promise  from  thee.  So  the  chief  captain 
the.ii  let  the  young  man  depart,  and 
charged  him.  See  thou  tell  no  man  that 
thou  hast  showed  these  things  to  me. 

23  And  he  called  unto  hint  two  centurions, 
saying,  Make  ready  two  hundred  soldiers 
to  go  to  Csesarea,  and  horsemen  three- 


score and  ten, and  spearmen  twoihundred, 

24  at  the  third  hour  of  the  night ;  and  pro- 
vide them  beasts,  that  they  may  set  Paul 
on,  and  bring  him  safe  unto  Felix  the 
governor. 

25  And  ne  wrote  a  letter  after  this  man- 

26  ner:  Claudius  Lysias   unto  the  most  ex. 


was  about  to  take  place  the  next  morn- 
ing is  present  to  his  mind. 
2'Z.  See  thon  tell  no  man.    The 

chief  captain  enjoins  secrecy,  because 
he  would  at  once  send  Paul  away  ;  and 
he  would  not  have  the  Jews  know  the 
real  cause  of  the  step  taken,  nor  excite 
their  prejudices  against  himself,  or 
against  tlie  young  man. 

23-35.  Paul  is  sent  to  Felix  at 
Ctesarea.  The  Letter  of  Lysias, 
THE  Roman  Commander.  May,  a.  d. 
58.  The  prompt  action  of  Lysias  sliows 
his  honesty  of  purpose.  Had  he  been 
disposed  to  please  the  Jews,  he  could 
have  allowed  Paul  to  become  a  victim 
to  their  malice  ;  or  he  would  have  sent 
Paul  to  the  Sanhedrin  under  a  strong 
guard  and  thus  displayed  his  own 
power. 

23,  The  chief  captain  felt  that  an 
exigency  had  come.  He  must  act  vig- 
orously and  at  once.  He  called  unto 
him  two  centurions — more  exactly, 
some  two  centurions,  meaning  about 
two,  but  not  less  than  two,  equivalent 
to  two  or  three.  Tavo  hundred  sol- 
diers— the  common  foot  soldiers.  The 
seventy  horsemen  were  tlie  ordinary 
Roman  cavalry.  The  two  hundred 
spearmen  are  not  so  easily  identified. 
The  word  is  rare  in  the  Greek,  and 
means  literally  those  who  f/nisp  the 
weapon  wit/i  the  right  hand,  such  as 
spearmen  or  lancers  or  casters  of  the 
javelin.  They  were  probably  liglit 
armed  troops,  distinguished  from  heavy 
infantry  and  cavalry.  The  number  of 
the  troops,  four  hundred  and  seventy, 
indicates  the  danger  arising  from  the 
popuhir  excitement  and  the  fanaticism 
of  tlie  .Tews,  as  well  as  ft-om  the  assassins 
or  rol)l)ers  who  infested  the  country. 
The  chief  captain's  order  is  urgent: 
3Iake  ready,  etc.,  Forthwith  make 
ready  to  march,  etc.  The  third  hour  of 
the  night;  nine  o'clock.  The  days, 
about  May  26,  were  near  the  longest. 
Paul's  nephew  probably  brought  his 
message    in    the   afternoon,    perhaps 


late  in  the  day.  There  was  no  time  to 
lose,  in  order  to  avoid  violence  and 
complication  with  the  Jews. 

24.  And  provide  them  beasts — 

several  being  needed  to  relieve  one 
another  in  a  hurried  march,  and  per- 
haps in  carrying  baggage.  Felix,  the 
governor,  or  procurator  of  Juden,  ap- 
pointed in  tlie  autumn  of  A.  D.  52,  and 
recalled  to  Rome  in  the  summer  of  A.  D, 
60.  (24 ;  27.)  He  and  his  brother  Pallas 
were  originallj'  slaves,  and  afterward 
freemen  in  the  house  of  the  mother  of 
the  Emperor  Claudius.  Pallas  became 
a  favorite  of  the  emperor,  and  through 
his  influence  Felix  was  appointed  pro- 
curator of  Judea,  and  retained  his  po- 
sition seveial  years  under  Nero  after 
the  death  of  Claudius.  Felix  was  con- 
nected with  the  Herodian  family  by  his 
marriage  to  Drusilla,  the  daughter  of 
Herod  Agrijipa  I.  (a  ■■':*.)  He  was  a 
man  of  great  energy,  but  avaricious, 
cruel,  and  licentious.  Tacitus  savs 
of  him  (Hist.  V.  9) :  "  He  used  the 
power  of  a  king  with  the  t«mper  of  a 
slave,  with  every  kind  of  cruelty  and 
licentiousness."  With  this  agrees  the 
narrative  of  Joseplnis,  who  represents 
his  administration  as  attended  with 
troubles  and  seditions  on  the  one  hand, 
and  cruelty,  corrui^tiou,  and  profligacy 
on  tlie  other. 

25.  He  wrote  a  letter  after 
this  manner,  or  haring  this  form. 
Whether  the  letter  was  written  in  Latin 
or  Greek  cannot  be  jiositively  known  ; 
but  it  is  implied  that  its  meaning  is 
faithfully  given.  It  was  a  judicial 
document  which  Felix  would  naturally 
preserve  for  reference.  Luke  was  with 
Paul  more  or  less  during  his  two  years' 
imprisonment  at  Ctcsarea,  and  as  he 
was  searching  diligently  into  the  be- 
ginnings of  Christianity  (i.uke  i :  1-4),  we 
maj'  well  believe  that  he  in  some  way 
saw  and  copied  it,  or  obtained  its  pur- 
port. Paul  himself  very  likely  learned 
its  contents  from  Felix  in  his  frequent 
conversations  with  him.     (2* :  26.)    The 


Ch.  XXIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


355 


cellent    governor    Felix    send-eth    greet- 

27  iug.  dxhis  luan  was  taken  of  the  Jews, 
and  should  have  beeu  killed  of  them : 
then  came  I  with  an  army,  and  rescued 
him,   having   understood  that   he  was  a 

28  Roman.  "And  when  I  would  have  known 
the  cause  wherefore  they  accused  him,  I 
brought   him   forth   into   their   council : 

29  whom  I  perceived  to  be  accused  'of  ques- 


tions of  their  law,  e  but  to  have  nothing 
laid  to  his  charge  worthy  of  death  or  of 

30  bonds.  And  ••  when  it  was  told  me  how 
that  the  Jews  laid  wait  for  the  man,  I 
sent  straightway  to  thee,  and  'gave  com- 
mandment to  his  accusers  also  to  say 
before  thee  what  Ihift/  had  against  him. 
Farewell. 

31  'Ihen  the  soldiers,  as  it  was  commanded 


«  ch.  21  :  33 ;  24  :  7.         «  ch.  22  :  30. 


f  ch.  18  :  15  ;  25  :  19. 
i  ch.  2  :  8. 


8  ch.  20  :  31. 


>>  ver.  20. 


letter  was  in  accordance  with  the  Roman 
law,  whicii  required  a  subordinate  offi- 
cer, in  sending  a  prisoner  to  the  higlier 
autliority  for  trial,  to  send  a  written 
statement  of  the  case.  On  this  case  it 
is  ratiier  in  favor  of  Paul,  than  against 
him. 

2G.  Claudius  was  probably  the 
Latin  name  which  the  cliief  captain 
assumed  in  purchasing  his  riglit  to 
citizenship  (2.i :  28) ;  and  Lysias  may 
have  been  his  original  Greek  name. 
We  know  nothing  of  liim  beyond  what 
is  recorded  in  the  Acts.  Most  excel- 
lent—an  appellation  addressed  to  men 
of  conspicuous  rank  or  office,  and  a  title 
usually  given    to  a  governor,     (2* ;  3 ; 

26:?5.     See  Luke  1  :  4.) 

27.  This  man,  the  more  respectful 
word  for  man  is  used  in  the  original, 
doubtless  l)ecause  he  was  about  to 
speak  of  Paul  as  a  Eomau  citizen. 
The  same  distijiction  exists  in  the  Latin 
words  for  man.  Having  under- 
stood that  he  was  a  Roman. 
This  Lysias  gives  as  the  reason  for 
rescuing  him,  whereas  he  knew  noth- 
ing of  the  fact  till  he  had  seized  Paul 
and  was  prepared  to  scourge  him. 
Military  officers  commonly  love  to 
make  as  favorable  reports  of  their 
achievements  as  possilde  to  their 
superiors,  and  so  Lysias  claims  credit 
for  rescuing  a  Roman  citizen.  The  claim 
was  false  in  the  first  instance  (21  -si,  32: 
J2 :  j.i),  but  true  in  the  second,  when 
Paul  was  amid  the  exciting  fury  of  the 
Sauhedrin.  (ver.  10.)  But  as  Paul  jcas 
taken  or  seized  by  the  Jews  in  the  first 
instance,  the  most  favorable  construc- 
tion that  can  be  put  upon  Lysias' 
language  is,  that  he  speaks  loosely  and 
with  equivocation.  He  evidently 
wished  to  throw  a  veil  over  his  first 
grave  mistake  and  its  subsequent  cor- 
rection.    In  this  deviation  from  the 


truth  we  see  an  evidence  of  the 
genuineness  of  the  letter. 

28.  When  I  Avould  have  known, 

etc. — better,  And  tvishing  to  know 
the  crime,  which  the  Jews  claimed 
to  be  worthy  of  deatli.  (-n-.ti.)  Lysias 
had  j)roposed  to  learn  this  by  scourging 
(•22:24),  but  he  passes  this  in  silence, 
and  refers  to  his  attempt  through  the 
Sauliedrin.     (22:30.) 

29.  Whom  I  perceivcd^rather. 
Whom  I  found  accused  of  crimes, 
relating  to  questions,  or  discussions,  of 
their  law.  Tliese  seemed  of  small  im- 
portance to  tlie  Roman  commander,  as 
they  had  previously  to  Gallio  at  Cor- 
inth (18:15);  and  he  affirms  that  they 
were  worthy  neither  of  death,  the 
highest  i^enalty  of  the  law,  nor  of 
bonds,  the  lowest. 

30.  That  the  Jews — omitted  by 
the  highest  critical  authorities.  Trans- 
late, And  it  being  shown  me  that  there 
was  about  to  be  a  plot  against  the  man, 
though  regarding  liim  innocent,  /  sent 
him  to  thee  forthwith,  as  a  means  of 
safety,  and  because  tliou  art  a  fitter 
person  than  myself  to  deal  with  such 
a  case.  To  say  before  thee,  etc. 
Or,  according  to  mauy  ancient  authori- 
ties, to  speak  against  him  before  thee. 
Farewell— tlie  usual  ending  of  a 
Greek  ei>istle.  (see  on  13 :  29.)  The  word 
is  omitted  in  some  ancient  manuscripts, 
but  found  in  others. 

31.  The  soldiers  would  promptly 
obey  the  order,  and  brought  Paul  by 
night  to  Antipatris,  having  made  a 
rapid  march  of  about  thirty-eight 
miles,  northwest  from  Jerusalem,  ar- 
riving probably  about  6  A.  M.  Jose- 
phus  says  tliat  the  old  name  was 
Caphar  8aba  (town  of  Saba),  and  that 
wlien  Herod  the  Great  rebuilt  the  citj^, 
he  changed  the  name  to  Antipatris  in 
honor  of  his  father  Antipater.    {Antiq. 


856 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIII. 


them,  took  Paul,  and  brought  him  by 

32  night  to  Antipatris.  On  the  morrow  they 
left  the  horsemen  to  go  with  him,  and  re- 

33  turned  to  the  castle;  who,  when  they 
came  to  Caesarea,  and  delivered  the  epis- 
tle to  the  governor,  presented  Paul  also 

34  before  him.    And  when  the  governor  had 


read  the  letter,  he  asked  of  what  province 
he  was.  And  when  he  understood  that 
35  he  Wits  of  k  Cilicia ; '  I  will  hear  thee,  said 
he,  when  thine  accusers  are  also  come. 
And  he  commanded  him  to  be  kept  in 
■"  Herod's  judgment  hall. 


kch.  21:39.         '  ch.  24  ;  1,  10;  25  :  16. 


Matt.  27  :  27. 


xvi.  5:2.)  The  soldiers  would  proba- 
bly take  the  shortest  and  most  direct 
route  by  Gophna,  over  the  paved 
Roman  road.  The  modern  Kefr  Saba 
has  been  regarded  as  the  site  of  Anti- 
patris,upou  a  slight  eminence  on  the  last 
line  of  liills  which  overlook  the  plain 
of  Sharon.  Captain  Condor  puts  it  a 
few  miles  further  south,  at  the  ruined 
site  of  Has  el  Ain  in  the  plain  of 
Sliaron,  where  the  river  Avian  gushes 
fortli  a  full-sized  stream.  {Twenty-one 
Years'  Work  in  the  Holy  Land,  pp. 
86,  .S7.) 

32.  On  the  morrow — after  resting 
a  few  hours  the  footmen  and  lancers 
return  doubtless  more  leisurely  to  the 
castle,  where  they  might  be  needed 
if  any  tumult  arose.  Tlie  seventy 
horsemen  were  a  sufficient  guard  for 
the  rest  of  the  journey,  as  Paul  was 
now  out  of  reach  of  i)ursuit. 

33.  Who — the  horsemen.  Came, 
or  entered  into  Casarea,  having  proba- 
bly passed  over  the  twenty-six  miles 
from  Antipatris  in  four  or  five  hours. 
Cirsarea  was  the  headquaitei-s  of  the 
Roman  Governor.     (SceonS:  40.) 

34.  And  Avhen  the  governor 
had  read  the  letter.  According  to 
the  oldest  manuscripts,  simply,  Aitd 
having  read  it  he  asked.  His  first 
question  would  naturally  be.  Of  what 
province  he  was,  so  as  to  decide 
whether  to  send  him  to  some  other 
procurator,  or  to  a  proconsul.  So 
Pilat«  learned  that  Jesus  was  a  Gali- 
lean, and  sent  him  to  Herod.  (Luke  23: 
6.7.)  And  Avhen  he  understood — 
having  learned  from  the  centurions,  or 
from  Paul  himself,  that  he  was  of 
Cilicia.  (seeons :».)  At  one  time 
Cilicia  was  attached  to  the  jirovince  of 
Syria,  and  possibly  may  have  been  at 
this  time,  and  this  perhaps  may  explain 
why  Felix  without  further  question 
decided  to  hear  the  case. 

35.  I  will  hear  thee  fully. 
According  to  Roman  law  a  case  thus 


sent  up  from  a  lower  to  a  higher  court 
must  be  fully  heard  anew.  If 
Cilicia  was  a  separate  province  at  that 
time,  Felix  doubtlesss  inferred  from 
the  letter  of  Lysias,  that  Paul's  case 
was  not  of  sufficient  importance  to  send 
him  thither.  (See  preceding  verse.) 
In  Herod's  judgment  hall — 
literally,  the  pra:torium  of  Herod; 
that  is,  the  palace  built  by  Herod  the 
Great,  and  now  occupied  as  the  resi- 
dence of  the  governor.  It  would  seem 
that  some  apartment  of  the  edifice, 
within  its  precincts,  was  set  apart  for 
the  imprisonment  of  state  prisoners. 
From  this  verse  and  from  24  :  23,  24,  it 
appears  that  Paul  was  not  treated  as  a 
common  prisoner,  and  that  he  was  near 
at  hand.  He  was  "  a  Roman  and 
uncondemned,"  and  must  not  be  treated 
with  needless  severity. 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  A  good  conscience  is  a  precious  boon,  a 
director,  a  comfort,  and  a  defence,  but  not 
always  an  infallible  guide.  (Ver.  1 ;  24  :  IG; 
Rom.  2:  15;  1  Tim.  4  :  3.) 

2.  How  often,  like  Paul,  are  Christians 
made  partakers  of  the  sufferings  of  Christ, 
by  insults  from  a  wicked  world.  (Ver.  2 ;  5 : 
28 ;  John  18  :  22  ;  1  Tim.  6  :  13.) 

3.  There  is  enough  in  Paul's  example  to 
follow,  without  claiming  for  him  absolute 
perfection,  or  imitating  his  impetuosity  of 
temper.    (Ver.  3  ;  1  Cor.  11  :  X.) 

4.  We  should  revere  a  divinely  appointed 
office.  The  claims  of  too  many,  however, 
are  not  sustained  by  God's  word.  (Ver.  4, 
5  ;  3  John  5-8 ;  2  Tim.  4  :  3.) 

5.  The  Christian  may  at  times  act  from 
policy  and  prudence.  Paul  thus  divided 
his  foes,  and  showed  his  innocence  to  the 
chief  captain.     (Ver.  6-9  ;  2  Cor.  12  :  16.) 

6.  When  we  find  truth  mixed  with  erro- 
neous doctrines  and  practices,  we  can  often 
utilize  it  to  advantage.  (Ver.  6 ;  John  4  . 
20,  21.) 

7.  The  contention  of  sects  sometimes  gives 


Cii.  XXIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


357 


PauPi  trial  before  FeMx;  and  imprisonment 

for  two  years  at  Cwsarrea. 
24    AND  after  five  days  ■>  Ananias  the  high 


priest  descended  with  the  elders,  and  with. 
a  certain  orator  named  Tertullus,  who  in- 
formed the  governor  against  Paul. 


n  oh.  23  :  2,  30,  35  ;  25  :  2. 


opportunity  for  the  presentation  and  growth 
of  truth.    (Ver.  6-9.) 

8.  The  opposers  of  Christ  are  actuated  by 
a  coninioii  hsitred  to  truth,  but  their  motives 
are  selli.sh,  and  they  have  no  permanent  bond 
of  union.     (Ver.  10 ;  Luke  23  :  12.) 

9.  The  Lord  gives  blessing,  grace,  and 
promises  to  his  afflicted  people,  as  they  need 
them.     (Ver.  11 ;  2  Cor.  12  :  9.) 

10.  To  what  lengths  religious  fanaticism 
leads !  to  infuriated  malice,  wicked  oaths, 
and  deliberately  planned  murder.  (Ver.  12, 
13 ;  Matt.  27  :  2.5.) 

11.  Too  often  have  the  professed  leaders 
of  God's  people  joined  in  with  Christ's 
enemies  as  persecutors.    (Ver.  14;  9:1,  2.) 

12.  Righteousness  and  justice  have  indeed 
fallen  when  God's  people  can  resort  to  de- 
ception and  conspiracies.  (Ver.  15;  Ps. 
37  :  12.) 

13  The  Lord's  promise  to  be  with  his  ser- 
vants is  a  pledge  of  all  necessary  providen- 
tial deliverances.    (Ver.  11,  16;  18  :  9, 10.) 

14.  The  promises  of  God  do  not  exempt  us 
from  the  use  of  ordinary  means  in  attaining 
the  object.    (Ver.  16-21 ;  27  :  25,  43,  44.) 

16.  The  Lord  often,  in  an  unexpected  way, 
exposes  the  devices  of  the  enemy,  and  raises 
up  friends  and  protectors  for  his  children. 
(Ver  16-21 ;  Ps.  7  :  14-16.) 

16.  We  are  in  God's  hands,  by  night  as  well 
as  by  day,  among  strangers  and  enemies,  as 
well  as  among  friends.  (Ver.  22-24;  Ps. 
34  :  7.) 

17.  The  Lord  often  uses  human  govern- 
ments, as  well  as  his  angels  and  the  elements 
of  nature,  in  behalf  of  his  servants.  (Ver. 
22-24;  2Thes8.  2:7.) 

18.  Though  the  wicked  prefer  the  night  for 
their  deeds  of  darkness,  it  often  affords  the 
best  time  for  acts  of  justice  and  mercy.  (Ver. 
23  ;  17  :  10.) 

19.  "  How  justly  God  brought  the  Jewish 
people  under  the  Roman  yoke,  when  such  a 
part  of  the  Roman  army  was  necessary  to 
restrain  them  from  the  most  execrable  vil- 
lainies."  (Ver.  23,  24.)   (Matthew  Henry.) 

20.  The  Christian  carries  with  him  a  per- 
sonal spiritual  influence,  and  is  an  epistle 
read  and  known  of  all.    A  letter  accompa- 


nied Paul,  the  prisoner,  but  he  himself  was 
a  living  letter  to  Felix.  (Ver.  25-30  ;  24 :  25 ; 
2  Cor.  2  :  3.) 

21.  Questions  of  religious  truth  are  little 
regarded  by  worldly  men.  (Ver.  29  ;  John 
18  :  38.) 

22.  Pagans  have  often  been  more  lenient 
to  the  truth  than  bigoted  and  hypocritical 
professors  of  religion.  (Ver.  30 ;  John  19  : 
12.) 

23.  Paul  rides,  accompanied  with  guards 
of  soldiers,  like  a  prisoner  of  state.  The  Lord 
provided  and  directed  the  journey.  (Ver. 
31-33.) 

24.  The  Lord  prepared  a  resting  place  for 
Paul  at  Ctesarea,  with  present  work,  and 
preparation  for  future  missions.  Here  Luke 
found  time  for  his  researches.  Had  Paul 
not  been  a  prisoner  at  Cssarea,  we  might  not 
have  had  Luke's  Gospel  and  the  Acts.  (Ver. 
31-35.) 

Ch.  24  :  In  this  chapter  Luke  nar- 
rates concerning  Paul  and  Felix.  We 
have  Paul's  third  defense,  and  his  mild 
treatment  by  the  governor ;  and  after- 
ward, his  reasoning  concerning  the 
Christian  faith,  which  arouses  the  gov- 
ernor's conscience.  During  two  years 
Felix  often  talks  with  him,  with  the 
hope  of  obtaining  a  bribe  for  his  release, 
but  failing  in  tliis,  to  gratify  the  Jews, 
he  leaves  Paul  a  prisoner  at  the  close  of 
his  administration. 

1-23.  Paul's  Trial  BEFORE  Felix. 

TERTULLU.S'     ACCFSATION ;       PaUL'S 

Defense  ;  Felix  Defers  the  Mat- 
ter.     (Rom.  15:  25,  26;    1   Cor.  16  :  3,  4  ;   2   Cor. 

8 : 1-4;  9 : 1. 2.)     About  May  30,  A.  D.  58. 

1.  After  five  days — from  Paul's 
departure  from  Jerusalem  and  arrival 
at  Cffisarea,  for  both  occurred  on  the 
same  day ;  according  to  the  Jewish 
mode  of  reckoning,  the  day  beginning 
at  sunset.  (23 :  31-33.)  The  jive  days  are 
probably  to  be  taken  Judaically,  mean- 
ing the  fifth  day.  (Matt.  27 :  63,  64.) 
Ananias,  still  feeling  Paul's  rebuke 
(23 : 3) ;  the  elders,  or  with  the  oldest 
manuscripts,  certain  or  sotne  elders, 
especially  those  of  the  sect  of  the  Sad- 


358 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIV. 


2  And  when  he  was  called  forth,  Tertul- 
lus  began  to  accuse  kirn,  saying,  "Seeing 
that  by  thee  we  enjoy  great  quietness, 
and  that  very  worthy  deeds  are  done 

3  unto  this  nation  by  thy  providence,  we 
accept  it  always,  and  in  all  places,  most 

4  noble  Felix,  with  all  thankfulness.   Not- 


withstanding, that  I  be  not  further 
tedious  unto  thee,  I  pray  thee  that  thou 
wouldest  hear  us  of  thy  clemency  a  lew 
words.  pFor  we  have  found  this  man 
a  pestilent  fellow,  and  a  mover  of  sedition 
among  all  the  Jews  throughout  the  world, 
and  a  ringleader  of  the  sect  of  the  Naza- 


'  Ps.  12  :  2,  3  ;  Trov.  26  :  2S  ;  29 


p  ch.  6  :  13  ;  17  :  G  ;  21  ;  28  ;  Matt.  2  :  23  ;  Luke  23  :  2. 


ducees.  The  elders  of  the  Pharisees 
would  uot  likely  go  down.  (23:9.)  A 
certain  orator,  Tertullus  —  the 
name  is  a  modification  of  the  Latin 
Tertius.  He  was  probably  a  Roman, 
and  was  an  orator  or  speaker.  He  was 
doubtless  chosen  as  an  advocate,  because 
of  his  knowledge  of  Roman  law,  and 
his  ability  to  represent  Paul  as  a  dan- 
gerous and  turbulent  fellow.  Who, 
referring  to  Tertullus  and  the  whole 
deputation.  Informed  the  governor 
— made  known  the  charges  against 
Paul.  The  verb  is  used  in  25  :  2,  15, 
of  laying  formal  information  or  com- 
plaint before  a  judge. 

2.  When  he,  Paul,  was  called, 
cited  to  appear  by  the  crier  of  the 
court,  according  to  Roman  law,  which 
gave  an  opportunity  of  a  hearing  and  of 
self-defense.  (25 :  le.)  Tertullus  began 
to  accuse  him.  We  have  but  the 
beginning  and  an  abstract  of  his  speech. 
Some  suppose  it  was  uttered  in  Latin, 
but  not  necessarily;  for  at  that  time 
trials  were  permitted  in  Greek.  This 
and  the  next  two  verses  are  occupied 
with  com})liments  to  the  judge.  Seeing 
that  by  thee  Ave  enjoy  great  qui- 
etness, or  much  peace.  There  was 
some  truth  in  this.  By  severe  measures 
Felix  had  put  down  riots  at  Jerusalem 
and  Ciesarea,  and  waged  war  against 
false  Messiahs  and  wandering  bands 
that  infested  the  country.  "  As  to  the 
number  of  robbers  whom  he  caused  to 
be  crucified,  and  of  those  who  were 
caught  among  them,  and  whom  he 
brought  to  punishment,  they  were  a 
multitude  not  to  be  enumerated." 
(JOSEPHUS,  Jewish  War,  II.  13,  2.) 
Felix  was  to  be  praised  for  putting 
down  .sedition.  And  that  very  worthy 
deeds,  wholesome  puldic  measures, 
are  done  for  this  nation  by  thy  provi- 
dence, through  thy  forethouglit,  thy 
})rudent  administration.  This  was  ex- 
aggeration. His  severity  bore  evil  fruit, 
and  a  s^J'iel    ambition  showed  itself. 


Within  two  years  of  this  he  was  accused 
by  the  Jews  of  bad  government,  and  was 
recalled  to  Rome.     (Se»  on  24 :  27.) 

3.  We  accept,  and  acknoivled<je  it 
always  and  everywhere  .  .  .  Avith  all 
thankfulness.  This  was  gross  flattery. 
He  was  denounced  among  the  Jews  for 
his  cruelty  and  greed,     (see  ou  23 :  24.) 

4.  Notwithstanding  .  .  .  uot 
further  tedious — but  that  1  may  not 
hinder  or  detain  thee  longer  than 
proper,  not  so  much  by  the  preamble  as 
by  the  few  words  about  to  be  ad- 
vanced. Tertullus  would  inii)ly  that 
Felix's  j)ublic  duties  were  onerous  and 
his  time  precious :  hence  he  must  be 
brief.  Thy  clemency — thy  conde- 
scending »7ii'W«f6-s  ox  fairness,  im])lying 
a  reasonableness  and  a  freedom  from 
extremes.  But  Felix  was  far  from  being 
noted  for  the  trait  of  character  here  ap- 
plied to  him,  as  well-known.  Thus 
Tertullus,  in  following  tlie  rules  of 
rhetoricians  in  making  his  introduc- 
tion conciliatory,  fell  into  gross  flattery 
and  exaggeration. 

5.  Tertullus  now  proceeds  to  make 
charges  against  Paul.  They  were  three  : 
sedition,  heresy,  and  profanation  of  the 
temjjle.  Me  have  found  this  man 
a  pestilent  fellow — better,  a  pest,  a 
mischievous,  dangerous  i)er.son.  A 
mover  of  sedition,  or  insurrections. 
Tlie  plural  is  to  be  preferred.  This  first 
charge  was  the  best  .'<uited  to  arouse  the 
hostility  of  Felix.  Death  was  the  pen- 
alty of  this  crime.  Throughout  the 
world — that  is,  the  Roman  world. 
Jeru.«aleiB  was  full  of  strangers  who 
had  come  to  the  feast.  Very  likely  the 
Jews  had  gathered  reports  against  Paul 
from  his  enemies  in  Asia  Minor,  Mace- 
donia, and  Greece,  rejiresenting  his 
seditious  conduct.  At  Thessalonica  lie 
and  his  companions  had  been  accused 
of   turning    the   world    upside   down. 

(17:6.7.) 

A  ringleader.  The  Greek  word  is 
a  military  term,  meaning  a  front-rank 


Ch.  XXIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


359 


6  renes  ;  i  who  also  hat.li  gone  a'oout  to  pro- 
fane the  temple:  whom  we  took,  and 
would  '  have  judged  according  to  our  law. 

7  'liut  the  chief  captain  Lysias  ca,mo  upon 
us,  and  with    great  violence   took  him 

8  away  out  of  our  hands,  'commanding  his 


accusers  to  coiue  unto  thee:  by  examin- 
ing of  whom  thyself  mayesl  take  knowl- 
edge of  all  these  things,  whereof  we 
accuse  him. 
9  "And  the  Jews  also  assented,  saying, 
That  these  things  were  so. 


1  ch.  21  :  27-29. 


•  John  18  :  31. 


'  ch.  21  :  33.        t  ch.  23  :  30.        »  Isa.  .59  :  4. 


man  in  an  army.     Of  the  sect.    In 

addition  to  bi.s  being  an  insurrectionist, 
he  is  charged  with  being  a  foremost 
leader  of  a  dangerous  and  heretical  re- 
ligious organization.  This  to  the  Jewish 
mind  was  his  greatest  crime.  Of  the 
Nazarenes — a  name  of  reproach 
which  the  Jews  gave  to  Christians. 
(See  Johu  1 :  46.)  The  name  is  still  applied 
by  Jews  and  Mohammedans.  This  is 
the  only  passage  in  the  New  Testament 
where  it  is  applied  to  the  followers  of 
Jesus.  They  would  not  call  his  follow- 
ers Christians,  for  the  word  Ch  rist,  mean- 
ing Messiah,  was  too  sacred,  and  to  give 
them  such  a  name  would  be  yielding 
too  much  to  the  claims  of  Jesus  and  his 
disciples. 

7.  Who  also  hath  gone  about, 
rather,  wAo  also  attempted  to  profane 
the  temple.  Notice  that  the  original 
charge,  made  amid  popular  excitement 
of  profaning  the  temple  (21 :  28)  is  modi- 
fied to  an  attempt  at  profanation.  This 
was  against  Roman  as  well  as  Jewish 
law,  since  the  former  protected  Jews  in 
the  exercise  of  their  worship,  and  en- 
gaged to  keep  the  temple  sacred. 
Whom  we  took,  or  arrested  as  a 
grave  offender.  Throughout,  Tertullus 
speaks  in  the  first  person  as  the  mouth- 
piece of  the  Jews. 

The  words  that  follow,  including 
ver.  7  and  the  first  clause  of  ver.  8, 
from  and  would  have  judged  to 
come  unto  thee  inclusive,  are 
omitted  in  most  of  the  oldest  manu- 
scripts and  by  the  critical  Greek  Testa- 
ments, while  the  Greek  text  in  those 
manuscripts  where  it  is  found  exhibit 
various  readings.  If  the  words  were 
originally  in  the  text,  we  can  see  no 
reason  why  they  were  omitted.  The 
address  seems  too  l)rief  without  them  ; 
the  pause  in  the  thought  at  whom  we 
took,  seems  too  abrupt,  and  the  words 
which  are  omitted  are  such  as  might  be 
expected  from  an  advocate  who  would 
make  a  most  favorable  showing  for  the 
Jews.    While  the  external  evidence  is 


against  the  passage,  thougli  conflicting, 
the  internal  evidence  is  for  it.  Alford 
has  retained  it  in  brackets  as  doubtful. 
So  the  Bible  Union  Version.  The  Re- 
vised Version  puts  it  in  the  margin. 
Both  the  Syriac  and  Vulgate  Versions 
have  the  passage. 

7.  But  the  chief  captain  Lysias 
.  .  .  with  great  violence.  This 
astute  lawyer  would  represent  the  arrest 
of  Paul  by  the  Jews  as  legal,  and  the 
acts  of  the  chief  captain  as  violent  and 
despotic.  Perhaps  his  object  was  to 
obtain  the  surrender  of  Paul  to  the 
Jewish  authorities  for  trial.  His  mis- 
statements are  obvious.  The  Jews  were 
seeking  to  kill  Paul,  beating  him,  when 
Lysias  took  him  without  violence. 
(2i:3i-.s3.)  Possibly  such  a  perversion 
of  facts  by  Tertullus  may  have  led  some 
early  copyists  to  omit  them. 

8.  By  examining  of  whom. 
Wiom  in  the  Greek  is  in  the  singular 
number  and  refers  to  Lysias,  if  the  sup- 
posed interpolation  is  retained.  And 
this  agrees  well  with  ver.  22,  "  When 
Lysias  the  chief  captain  shall  come 
down,  I  will  fully  inqitire  into  your 
matters."  Felix  could  thus  learn  from 
him  what  had  really  taken  place.  But 
if  the  passage  be  rejected,  then  the  pro- 
noun whom  must  refer  to  Paul.  Of 
course,  Felix  would  not  condemn  Paul 
without  examining  him.  Perhaps  Ter- 
tullus thought  that  Paul  would  evi- 
dently appear  in  the  eyes  of  Felix  to 
be  a  mover  of  seditions  and  a  leader  of 
a  new  religion.  Yet  it  was  strange  for 
this  lawyer  to  refer  to  the  prisoner  as 
the  principal  witness.  It  would  indi- 
cate tlie  weakness  of  his  case.  Exam- 
ining has  no  reference  to  torture,  which 
is  not  suggested  by  the  context.  As 
Roman  citizens,  both  Lysias  and  Paul 
were  exempt  from  it.  It  refers  to  a 
judicial  investigation.  (See  12  :  19 ;  28: 
18,  where  the  same  word  is  used,  and 
compare  2.5  :  26.) 

9.  And  the  Jews  —  Ananias  and 
the  elders  (ver.  1),  who  doubtless  had  in- 


360 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIV. 


10  Then  Paul,  after  that  the  gorernor  had 
beckoned  unto  him  to  speak,  answered, 
Forasmuch  as  I  know  that  thou  hast  been 
of  uiany  years  a  judge  unto  this  nation,  I 
do  the  more  cheerfully  answer  for  myself: 

11  because    that   thou  mayest   understand, 

that  there  are  yet  but  twelve  days  since 
j[l  went  up  to  Jerusalem  »  for  to  worship. 


TAnd  they  neither  found  me  in  the 
temple  disputing  with  any  man,  neither 
raising  up  the  peopl»>,  neiiher  in  the  syn- 
agogue, nor  in  the  city  :  neither  can  they 
prove  tne  things  whereof  they  now  accuse 
me.  But  this  '  I  confess  unto  thee,  that 
after  the  way  which  they  call  heresy,  so 
worship  I  the  God  of  my  fathers,  believ- 


■•  ch.  21  :  2C.        7  ch.  25  :  8 ;  28  :  17.        «  Ps.  119  :  46  ;  Matt.  10  :  32. 


structed   their   advocate.      Also   as-  | 
sented — rather,  jointly  set  upon  him,  '. 
unitedly  a&sailed  him,  by  formally  and 
solemnly  alleging  that  the  charges  were 
true. 

10.  Then  Paul,  after  that  the 
governor  had  beckoned,  or  nodded 
to  him,  answered.  Paul's  first  de- 
fense had  been  before  a  vast  crowd  of 
Jews  (ch.  2i) ;  his  second  before  the  8an- 
hedriu  (23 ;  1-9) ;  this,  the  third,  before  '. 
the  Koman  governor  in  the  presence  of 
the  leaders  of  the  Sanhedrin.  Paul 
here  shows  great  frankness,  manliness, 
and  truthfulness,  in  contrast  to  the  flat- 
teries and  perversions  of  TertuUus ; 
and  meets  each  of  the  charges  brought 
against  him.  (Soeonver.  5.)  He  begins, 
like  Tertullus,  with  a  conciliatory  intro-  1 
duction,  ascribing  to  Felix  an  import- 
ant qualification,  that  he  had  been 
of  many  years  a  judge  of  this 
nation,  and  therefore  enjoyed  abun- 
dant opportunity  of  knowing  the  Jews 
and  the  character  of  their  leaders,  and 
something  too  of  Christians.  It  was 
now  A.  D.  58,  and  he  had  been  six  years 
procurator,  which  was  longer  than  most 
of  the  governors  served.  Tacitus  also 
states  that  he  before  had  been  governor 
of  Samaria,  when  Cumanus  was  gover- 
nor of  Judtea.  The  more  cheer- 
fully— or  simply,  cheerfully,  accord- 
ing to  the  oldest  manuscripts.  He 
could  make  his  defense  with  good  cour- 
in/f  before  one  who  knew  well  Jewish 
manners  and  customs. 

11.  Paul  meets  the  first  charge  of 
exciting  sedition.  This  he  denies,  and 
demands  the  proof.  Because  thou 
mayest  understand,  etc.  Better, 
Since  thou  mayent  ascertain  that  if  is 
not  more  than  twelve  days,  etc.  Felix 
could  readily  learn  that  he  had  been 
only  six  or  seven  days  at  Jerusalem, 
and  what  he  had  been  doing  in  that 
short  a  time  —  too  short  indeed  for 
stirring  up  seditious,  So  far  from  that, 


the  object  of  his  visit  was  to  worship, 

indicating  a  humble  and  reverent  state 
of  mind,  entirely  inconsistent  with  ex- 
citing seditions  and  profaning  the 
temple.  The  twelve  days  may  be  reck- 
oned thus :  Commencing  the  evening 
of  Paul's  arrival  at  Jerusalem,  first 
day,  being  Pentecost,  he  met  with  James 
(21 :  i5-.'5) ;  second  day,  he  undertakes 
the  Na/.arite  vow  in  the  temple ;  third 
to  sixth  day,  continues  the  Nazarites' 
ceremonies  and  was  arrested  (-inii-n:)) ; 
seventh  day,  arraigned  before  the  San- 
hedrin; eighth  day,  the  Jewish  con- 
spiracy ;  ninth  day,  beginning  with  the 
evening,  Paul  is  taken  by  night  to  An- 
tipatris  and  thence  to  Ca'sarea  by  day  ; 
tenth  to  twelfth  day,  confined  in  Herod's 
palace  ;  thirteenth  day,  appeared  l)efore 
Felix,  after  five  days.  (21 : 1.)  This 
allows  twelve  full  days  since  Paul's 
arrival  at  Jerusalem,  which  best  accords 
with  that  accuracy  which  Paul  would 
naturally  use  before  a  civil  tribunal. 
(Compare  Harmonic  Arrangement,  ^ 
40.) 

12.  Paul  emphatically  denies   the 
I  charge.    The  Jews  had  not  found  him 

even  disputing,  much  less  causing  a 
tumult  uf  the  people  either  in  the  tern- 
!  pie,  or  the  synagogues,  or  in  the  streets 
of  the  city.  They  themselves  had 
stirred  up  the  crowd. 

13.  Neither  could  they  prove  their 
charges.    They  could  make  assertions 

i  (ver.9),  but  they  could  give  no  formal 

I  evidence,  such  as  the  law  required. 
This  was  Paul's  right  and  their  duty. 

j  14.  Paul  proceeds  to  meet  the  second 
charge,  that  of  heresy,  (ver.  5.)  He 
frankly  confesses  that  he  belongs  to 
what  they  call  a  sect,  but  declares  that 
he  believes  all  of  the  law  and  the 
prophets,  holds  to  a  resurrection,  and 
constantly  strives  to  lead  a  moral  and 

:  religious  life.  The  Avay  of  worshiping 
God  (^  :2)  which  they  call  heresy, 

''  rather,  a  sect,  the  same  as  that  traaa- 


Ch.  XXIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


361 


ing  all  things  which  are  written  in  »the    16  just.    And  ^  herein  do  I  exercise  myself, 
15  Law  and   in   the  Pro})hets :   and  ^  have  to  have    always    a   conscience   void    of 

hope  toward  (iod,  which  they  tlieniselves  otfence  toward    God,  and   toward    men. 

also  allow  "that  there  shall  he  a  resurrec-    17  Mow  after  many  years'!  came  to  bring 
tiou  of  the  dead,  both  of  the  just  and  uu-  | 

»  ch.  26  :  22  ;  28  :  23  ;  John  1  :  45.  •>  ch.  23  :  6 ;  26  :  6,  7.  «  Job  19  :  25,  26 ;  Dan.  12  :  2 ; 
John  5  :  28,  29  ;  I'hil.  3  :  21.  d  ch.  23  : 1  ;  1  Tim.  3  :  9 ;  1  Peter  3:16.  °  ch.  11 :  29,  30 ; 
Gal.  2  :  10. 


lated  sect  in  ver.  5.  The  idea  is  that  of 
a  religious  parti/  with  a  shade  of  re- 
proach. Tertullus  had  used  the  word 
iu  a  bad  seuse.  (ver.  i.)  The  term  is 
applied  to  the  Pharisees  aud  Saddu- 
cees  in  15  :  5;  5  :  17.  So  worship  or 
serve  I  the  God  of  my  fathers, 
which  Paul  regards  as  iu  accordance 
with  the  highest  development  of  the 
religion  of  Israel.  As  one  of  the  sects 
of  the  Jews,  Paul  could  claim  the 
same  toleration  from  the  Romans  for 
the  Nazarenes  as  for  the  others.  The 
worship  is  that  of  ol)ligation.  Paul 
had  not  cast  off  any  of  his  allegiance 
to  God.  Believing  all  things  which 
are  written  in  the  law  and  in  the 
prophets.  He  accepted  and  held  to 
all  the  Jewish  Scriptures ;  for  so  they 

are  often  termed.       (Luka  16:  16;  John  l  :  45.) 

15.  Having  hope  .  .  .  which 
they  themselves  also  alloAV  — 
namely,  of  a  resurrection.  This 
hope  grew  out  of  his  belief  in  the  law 
and  the  prophets.  The  resurrection 
was  held  by  the  Jewish  nation  as  a 
whole,  and  especially  by  the  Pharisees, 
the  Sadducees  wlio  denied  the  doctrine 
being  a  comparatively  small  party. 
The  words  of  the  dead  are  wanting 
in  the  oldest  manuscripts.  Of  the 
just  and  unjust.  The  resurrection 
of  both  the  righteous  and  the  wicked 

is    clearly    taught.        (Dan.   12:  2;-l   Cor.  5: 

10, 11.)  In  thus  addressing  Felix,  Paul 
explains  as  intelligently  as  he  possibly 
could  to  one  who  was  not  a  Jew,  the 
true  relation  of  Christianity  to  the 
religion  of  Israel.  So  far  from  apos- 
tatizing from  his  religion,  or  from  even 
being  a  sectarian,  he  worshiped  the 
same  God,  believed  the  same  Scriptures, 
and  entertained  the  same  hope  of  the 
future. 

16.  And,  moreover,  the  aim  and 
conduct  of  his  life  was  conscientious- 
ly to  do  his  duty,  according  to  God's 
word,  both  to  God  and  men.  Herein 
— in  thii  hope  and  in  expectation  of 


that  day  —  (ver.  15)  —  do   I   exercise 

myself^jetter,  do  I  also  myself,  as 
well  as  they^  strive.  This  verb  was 
applied  to  athletic  strife  and  train- 
ing, and  then  to  severe  moral  disci- 
pline. About  five  years  later,  Paul 
says,  "  I  press  toward  the  mark  for  the 
prize."  (Phil.  3:14.)  To  have  always 
a  conscience  void  of  offence, 
etc. — a  blameless  or  unojf'ended  con- 
science, not  troubled  and  distressed  by 
a  consciousness  of  sin.  Compare  sim- 
ilar words  before  Ananias,  which  these 
serve  to  explain.  (^3:1.)  The  refer- 
ence to  the  resurrection,  and  to  his 
careful  conscientious  life  iu  view  of  it, 
was  fitted  to  touch  the  conscience  of 
Felix.  Toward  God  and  man. 
Illustrated  partly  by  what  follows, 
alms  to  men  and  offerings  to  God. 
(Ver.  17.)  Such  a  man  was  not  likely  to 
be  a  profaner  of  the  temple,  or  a  mover 
of  seditions. 

17.  Paul  meets  the  third  charge, 
that  of  profaning  the  temijle.  (ver.  6.) 
After  many,  some  years.  His  last 
visit  to  Jeru.salem  was  iu  A.  D.  54 
(i« :  22) ;  it  was  now  A.  D.  58.  To  bring 
alms  to  my  nation  —  which  Paul 
and  his  companions  had  collected  in 
the  churches  of  Macedonia  and  Achaia 
for  the  relief  of  believers  at  Jerusa- 
lem, which  are  often  alluded  to  in  his 

epistles.        (Rom.  15  :  25,  26  ;  1  Cor.  16  :  1-4  ;  2  Cor. 

8:1-4;  9  :i,  2.)  This  Is  the  Only  place  in 
the  Acts  where  these  contributions  are 
mentioned.  In  this  incidental,  un- 
designed and  natural  way,  in  which 
the  Acts  coincides  with  the  epistles 
(written  within  the  preceding  year) 
and  the  epistles  make  u]i  the  deficiency 
of  the  Acts,  we  see,  as  Paley  has  shown, 
unmistakable  evidences  of  the  credi- 
bility of  the  writings  of  both  Paul  and 
Luke.  And  offerings — also,  or  even 
offerings.  The  noun,  as  Dr.  Hackett 
remarks,  depends  loosely  on  the  verb 
to  bring.  It  seems  to  have  been  added 
almost  as  an  after  thought,  of  the  saC' 


362 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIV. 


18  alms  to  my  nation,  and  oflferings.  'Where- 
upon certain  Jews  from  Asia  found  me 
purified  in  tlie  temple,  neither  with  mul- 

19  titude,  nor  with  tumult.  eWho  ought  to 
have  been  here  before  thee,  and  object, 

20  if  they  had  aught  against  me.  Or  else 
let  these  same  here  say,  if  they  have  found 
any  evil  doing  in  me,  while  1  stood  before 


21  the  council,  except  it  be  for  this  one 
voice,  that  1  critd  standing  among  them, 
i"  Touching  the  resurrection  of  the  dead  I 
am  called  in  question  by  you  this  d»y. 

22  And  when  Felix  heard  these  things, 
having  more  perfect  knowledge  of  that 
way,  he  deferred  them,  and  said.  When 
Lysias  the  chief  captain  shall  come  down, 


'ch.  21  :  '26-30 ;  2G  :  21.        e  ch.  23  :  30;  25  :  16.        «>  ch.  23  :  6 ;  28  :  20. 


rifices  he  was  making,  or  would  have 
made  in  connection  with  the  Nazarites. 
(21 :  26.)  Alexander  thus  paraphrases 
it :  "  ilow  could  I  come  up  to  defile 
the  temple  and  divide  the  people,  when 
I  brought  relief  to  many  poor  among 
them ;  yes,  and  while  there  actually 
ofiered  sacrifices  at  the  very  sanctuary 
which  I  am  accused  of  trying  to  pro- 
fane." 

18.  Whereupon — rather,  inichich, 
amid  such  business  of  aiding  the  poor 
and  performing  sacrifice.  The  oldest 
manuscripts  have  which  in  a  gender 
which  makes  it  refer  more  particularly 
to  offerings:  While  engaged  in  these 
offerings  they  found  me  purijied  in  the 
temple,  according  to  the  Nazarite  vow. 
(21 :  26.)  Neither  with  multitude  or 
crowd,  nor  with  tumult,  peaceably, 
neither  disturbing  others,  nor  exciting 
riots.  Just  the  oi)posite  of  what  Ter- 
tullus  had  suggested,  (ver.  5.)  All  au- 
thorities place  certain  Jews  from 
Asia  in  the  hitter  clause  of  the  verse, 
and  the  best  manuscripts  precede  it  by 
Jhit,  introducing  an  unfinished  clause, 
which  may  be  thus  supplied,  JBitt  cer- 
tain Jeivs'/rom  Asia  were  there  gatlier- 
ing  the  crowd  and  causing  the  tumult. 
Of  these  Asiatic  Jews,  perhaps  from 
Ephesus  (■-'' •■'■'T),  Paul  seems  about  to 
speak  further,  but  he  refrains,  simply 
adding  that  they  ought  to  have  been 
present  (next  verse). 

19.  Who  ought  to  have  been 
here  .  .  .  and  object,  rather,  and 
make  accusation.  These  Asiatic  Jews 
had  first  raised  the  cry  against  him 
(21:27.28),  and  very  likely  TertuUus 
had  founded  his  argument  on  their  in- 
formation. They  should  have  been 
there  to  saj^,  if  they  had  aught 
against  him,  for  it  was  not  the  Ro- 
man custom  to  judge  a  prisoner  unless 
his  accusers  were  present.  But  they 
were  now  probably   returning  home, 


though  they  were  the  only  proper  wit- 
nesses against  him. 

20.  Or  else,  let  these  themselves 
say,  etc.  His  accusers  present  could 
only  si)eak  of  what  i)assed  before  tbem, 
as  he  stood  before  the  Sanhedrin. 
(23:110.)  If  they  found  any  evil 
doing  in  me — ratlier,  what,  misdeed 
they  found.  Tlie  oldest  manuscripts 
omit  in  vie.  Up  to  that  time  the  tu- 
mult had  been  caused  by  others.  Of 
the  division  which  he  caused  in  the 
Sauhedrin  he  proceeds  to  speak. 

21.  Except  it  be  for  this  one 
voice — this  one  exclamation.  From 
23  :  6  we  learn  that  Paul  raised  his 
voice,  when  he  spoke  of  the  resurrec- 
tion. Touching  the  resurrection, 
etc.  (See  on  23 : 6.)  The  quotation  of  his 
own  words  are  as  near  like  those  re- 
corded by  Luke  as  might  be  expected. 
He  omits  hope  before  resurrection,  and 
adds,  this  day  by,  or  before  you.  I  am 
called  in  question — or,  put  on 
trial,  that  I  may  be  examined,  and 
judgment  passed  upon  me  regarding  it. 
This  was  the  only  thing  that  really 
came  under  the  notice  of  tlie  Sauhe- 
drin. Paul  thus  frankly  admits  that 
he  did  cause  strife  in  the  Sauhedrin  ; 
but  to  this  declaration  of  liis  faith  they 
could  not  reasonably  object,  and  he 
evidently  supposes  that  Felix  knew 
how  the  peojile  were  divided  on  the 
doctrine  of  the  resurrection,  and  that 
the  Sadducees  present  would  be  op- 
posed to  Paul  on  that  account.  It  is  to 
be  noted  that  he  makes  no  reference  to 
his  rebuke  of  the  high  priest,  (n  ■  s.) 
As  a  prediction  of  God's  judgment,  he 
need  not  refer  to  it. 

22.  Paul's  defense,  though  without 
witnesses,  had  its  effect  on  Felix. 
And  Avhen  Felix,  etc. — according 
to  the  oldest  and  best  manuscripts, 
And  Felix  put  them  off,  having 
more    accurate  knowledge    concerning 


Ch.  XXIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


363 


I  will  know  the iitteiiuost  of  your  matter. 

23  And  he  commanded  a  centurion  tu  keep 

I'aul,  aud  to  let  him  have  liberty,  and 


•  that  he  should  forbid  none  of   his  ac- 
quaintance to  minister  or  come  unto  him. 
24      And  after  certain    days,  when  Felix 


I  ch.  27  :  3 ;  28  :  16. 


the  Way,  the  Christian  religion. 
Felix  obtained  a  clearer  view  from 
Paul's  defense  as  to  the  relation 
of  Christianity  to  Judaism.  He  saw 
that  tlie  Jews  had  no  case  atjainst 
Paul ;  that  he  had  committed  no  otFence 
against  the  Iloman  government.  Yet 
Felix,  like  Pilate  before  him,  wished 
to  conciliate  the  Jews.  He  was  not 
bound  to  fix  a  set  time  for  the  trial, 
and  could  hold  the  j^risoner  indefinitely. 
When  Lysias  .  .  .  shall  come 
down.  Doubtless  he  came  often 
down  to  Ciesarea,  the  residence  of  the 
governor;  yet  this,  on  the  part  of 
Felix,  was  evidently  a  courteous,  but 
meaningless  excuse.  This  verse  gives 
support  to  the  genuineness  of  ver.  7 
(on  which  see),  in  which  case  he 
adopts  the  suggestion  of  Tertullus.  I 
Avill  knoAV  the  uttermost  of  your 
matter — I  will  fully  know  by  inquiry, 
and  so  determine  your  matter. 

'Z3,  The  kind  treatment  and  the 
liberty  given  Paul  show  further  the 
good  impression  made  by  his  defense 
on  Felix.  He  commanded  a,  rather, 
the  centurion — the  one  present,  and 
who  had  conducted  Paul  into  the  pres- 
ence of  Felix,  to  keep  Paul,  rather, 
that  he  should  be  guarded  and  have 
liberty,  or  indulgence.  The  idea  is 
that  he  should  be  kept  safely,  but  not 
closely  and  severely  imprisoned.  There 
were  three  kinds  of  custody  among  the 
Komans :  1.  In  the  common  jail,  of 
which  the  imprisonment  of  Paul  and 
Silas  at  Philippi  is  an  instance.  2. 
Military  custody,  in  which  the  ]>risoner 
was  in  charge  of  soldiers,  often  chained 
to  one.  8.  Free  custody,  in  which  the 
accused  was  released  on  bail,  or  en- 
trusted to  the  charge  of  a  magistrate, 
who  became  responsible  for  his  appear- 
ance on  the  day  of  the  trial.  It  was  to 
the  military  custody  that  Paul  was  now 
committed,  but  with  an  indulgence  or 
the  relaxing  of  prison  rules.  And  for- 
bid none  of  his  acquaintance,  or 
friends,  to  minister,  or  wait  on  him, 
supplying  any  needed  want,  and  com- 
municating   with     the     outer   world. 


Among  the  friends  were  doubtless 
Philip  the  Evangelist,  and  other  be- 
lievers at  Ciesarea  ('n  ■  8),  Trophimus 
(.ii:2i»),  Aristarchus  (27:2),  and  Luke, 
the  author  of  this  narrative,  (iiria; 
27:1)  Or  come — omitted  by  the 
highest  critical  authorities.  Perhaps 
Felix  may  have  hoped  that  througli 
these  friends  money  would  be  given 
him  for  Paul's  release,     (ver.ie.) 

24-27.  Paul  Befork  Felix  and 
Dri'silla.  Imprisonment  for  two 
Years  at  C.esarea.    a.  d.  58-60. 

34.  Not  long  after  the  trial,  after 
certain  days,  probably  some  time  in 
the  month  of  June,  A.  D.  .58,  Felix, 
having  been  away  for  a  time,  came 
back  with  his  wife  Drusilla,  etc. 
She  was  the  daughter  of  Agrippa  I. 
(12 : 1),  and  sister  of  Agrippa  II.,  and  of 
Bernice  (25  :-'■•),  being  a  Jewess  by 
birth  and  profession,  though  not  a  very 
strict  one.  Josephus  says  that  Agrippa 
"  gave  his  sister  Drusilla  in  marriage 
to  Azizus,  king  of  Emesa,  upon  litis 
consent  to  be  circumcised.  .  .  .  But 
not  long  after,  the  marriage  of  Drusilla 
and  Azizus  was  dissolved  as  follows. 
While  Felix  was  procurator  of  Judea, 
he  saw  Drusilla  and  fell  in  love  with 
her,  for  she  did  exceed  all  other  women 
in  beauty,  and  he  sent  to  her  one  of  his 
friends,  a  Jew  of  Cyprus,  a  magician, 
to  persuade  her  to  forsake  her  j^rcsent 
husliand  and  marry  him.  .  .  .  Ac- 
cordingly she  acted  ill,  and  being  de- 
sii'ous  of  avoiding  her  sister's  envy, 
who  ill-treated  her  on  account  of  her 
beauty,  she  was  induced  to  transgress 
the  laws  of  her  forefathers  and  marry 
Felix  ;  and  when  he  had  a  son  by  her, 
he  named  him  Agrippa."  {Antiq.  XX, 
7, 1,  2.)  Both  mother  and  son  perished 
at  an  eruption  of  Mount  Vesuvius, 
A.  D.  79.  According  to  Tacitus  it  ap- 
pears that  Felix  also  had  been  pre- 
viously married.  Suetonius  says  that 
Felix  was  the  husband  of  three  queens, 
jirobably  meaning  three  wives  of  royal 
lineage.  He  sent  for  Paul,  f'or 
two  reasons  probably:  1.  The  new 
knowledge    obtained    concerning    the 


364 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXIV. 


came  with  his  wife  Drusilla,  which  waa  a 
Jewess,  he  sent  for  Paul,  and  heard  him 
25  coucerning  the  faith  in  Christ.  And  as 
he  reasoned  of  '  righteousness,  '  temper- 
ance, and  ™  judgment  to  come,  "Felix 
trembled,  and  answered.  Go  thy  way  for 


this  time;  "when  I  have  a  convenient 
26  season,  I  will  call  for  thee.  He  hoped 
also  that  p  money  should  have  been  given 
him  of  Paul,  that  he  might  loose  him; 
wherefore  he  sent  for  him  the  of  tener,  and 
communed  with  him. 


k  2  Sam.  23  :  3  ;  Ps.  82  :  1-4  ;  Prov.  16  :  12.        »  Exod.   20  :  14 ;  Prov.  31  :  3-5  ;  Eccl.  10  : 
16,  17.         ■»  Eccl.  3  :  17  ;  12  :  14 ;  2  Cur.  5  :  10.  "  Jer.  23  :  29 ;  Heb.  4  :  12.  »  Prov.  V  : 

24-32 ;  27  :  1 ;  Eccl.  9  :  10  ;  Luke  17  :  26-29 ;  Heb.  3  :  7,  13.        P  Exod.  23  :  8 ;  Prov.  19  :  6. 


Christian  Way  at  the  trial  excited  a 
wish  to  know  more.  His  conscience, 
too,  may  have  been  touched  by  the  ref- 
erence to  the  resurrection  of  the  just 
and  unjust.  2.  Drusilla,  in  her  girl- 
hood, fourteen  years  before,  doubtless 
heard  of  the  tieath  of  James,  the 
brother  of  John,  and  the  delivery  of 
Peter  from  prison,  and  may  have  con- 
nected the  tragic  end  of  her  father  in 
some  way  with  his  ])ersecuting  Chris- 
tians. This,  with  what  she  had  heard 
of  Paul  and  of  Christians,  may  liave 
made  lier  desirous  of  liearing  him 
concerning  the  faith  in  Christ 
Jesus. 

25.  Felix  and  Drusilla  wished  to 
hear  about  Christ  Jesus  and  the  new 
religion  ;  but  Paul  with  boldness  and 
fidelity  made  religion  a  personal  mat- 
ter, and  adapted  his  discourse  to  his 
hearers,  by  presenting  the  truth  suited 
to  their  case.  Hence  he  reasoned, 
or  discoursed  of  risrhteousness, 
rectitude  of  conduct  and  character, 
right  feeling,  thinking,  and  acting  ac- 
cording to  the  htw  of  God.  The  faith 
in  Christ  required  holiness,  purity  of 
heart  and  life  (Rom.  6 :  12, 13. 19, 22),  and  so 
Paul  discoursed  not  only  u])on  right- 
eousness in  general,  Imt  also  upon 
temperance,  or  sf//-co>i/TO/.  He  en- 
forces the  duty  of  mastering  one's 
desires  and  jiassions,  es])ecially  liis 
sensual  appetites.  Both  righteousness 
and  self-control  had  been  grossly  out- 
raged l>y  Felix  and  Drusilla.  Tacitus 
speaks  of  Felix  as  reckless  and  licen- 
tious, and  acting  with  a  tyranny  and 
cruelty,  as  though  he  had  license  to 
commit  every  crime  with  impunity. 
{Aim.  xii.  54,  Hist.  v.  9.)  And 
judgment  to  come — wliicli  all,  in- 
cluding his  hearers,  must  face,  and 
Christ  Jesus  himself  would  be  judge. 
(Rom.  i;  16.)  Witliout  spccial  pcr.sonal 
application,  Paul  presented  the  truths 
of  the  gospel,  which  commend  them- 


selves to  every  man's  conscience  in  the 
sight  of  God.  (2  Cor.  4:2.)  Fclix 
trembled — a  strong  expression  ;  he 
was  alarmed,  filled  with  fear  and  fore- 
bodings, and  abruptly  closed  the  inter- 
view. Answered,  to  this  unexpected 
and  terrible  discourse,  and  to  what  he 
felt  to  be  his  duty:  Go  thy  way — 
depart  for  this  time.  "  Fear  sent  away 
not  the  sin,  but  the  preacher."  (Ab- 
bott.) »hen  I  have  a  convenient 
season  I  will  call  for  thee.  His 
opjiortunity  for  learning  and  attending 
to  tliis  matter  frequently  came  after- 
ward, for  he  often  communed  with 
Paul  (ver.  26)  ;  but  nevcr  afterwai-d  does 
he  ajipear  to  have  been  thus  convicted, 
and  never  did  there  come  a  time,  so 
far  as  we  know,  which  seemed  to  him 
opportune  for  attending  to  these  mat- 
ters. (See  Mark  6: 29.)  Noticc  that  noth- 
ing is  said  of  Drusilla. 

2G.  He  hoped  also  that  money 
should  have  been  given  him  of 
Paul — better.  At  the  same  time  when 
giving  this  answer,  he  hoped,  etc.  Such 
bribery  had  become  so  common  among 
Ilonum  officials,  that  a  law  was  enacted, 
forbidding  a  judge  to  receive  bribes  in 
any  form  for  arresting,  acijuittiug,  or 
condemning  any  one.  But  he  knew 
that  Paul  had  many  friends  at  Cicsarea, 
tluit  lie  brought  money  to  the  jioor  at 
Jerusalem  (ver.  17),  and  he  lioj)ed  to  get 
pay  for  doing  ju.stice  to  his  prisoner. 
Wherefore  he  sent  for  him  the 
oftener  and  communed  Avith 
him,  held  friendly  intercourse,  not 
beeau.se  he  wished  to  know  more  of  the 
gospel,  but  from  a  mercenary  motive. 
This  would  seem,  according  to  Tacitus, 
to  have  been  characteristic  of  Felix. 
While  Cumanus  governed  Galilee 
Felix  ruled  Samaria ;  and  these  two 
wily  and  base  procurators  encouraged 
the  enmity  and  passions  between  the 
Jews  and  Samaritans,  and  thus  enriched 
themselves  by  booty,  as  if  it  had  been 


Ch.  XXIV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


365 


27      But   after  two    years  Porcius  Festus 
came  into  Felix'  room :  and  Felix,  i  will- 


ing to  show  the  Jews  a  pleasure,  left  Paul 
bound. 


q  ch.  12  :  3 ;  25  :  9,  14  ;  Mark  15  :  15. 


the  spoils  of  war.  (See  on  Felix,  23  : 
24.)  Felix  hardens  his  heart;  and  his 
hoj)e  of  gain  is  so  great  that  he  is  will- 
ing to  liear  the  unpleasant  exhortations 
of  Paul,  if  he  can  only  secure  money 
for  Paul's  release.  Doubtless  Felix 
suggested  it  indirectly  to  Paul  and  to 
liis  friends.  But  while  Felix  neglected 
the  great  opportunity  to  do  right,  Paul 
found  no  time  when  he  could  do 
wrong. 

27.  But  after  two  years,  or  t>ro 
years  having  been  fulfilled,  or  com- 
pleted, showing  that  Luke  is  not  reck- 
oning according  to  the  Jewish  method 
of  counting  a  part  of  a  year  for  the 
whole,  but  that  he  means  two  full 
years.  Porcius  Festus  came  into 
Felix'  room.  Felix  was  recalled 
to  Rome,  and  was  followed  by  charges 
of  cruelty  and  injustice  by  the  Jews  at 
Cajsarea  before  Nero,  and  would  have 
been  punished  had  it  not  been  for  his 
brother  Pallas.  Regarding  his  after 
life  we  know  nothing.  Festus  was 
sent  as  governor,  probably  in  the  sum- 
mer of  A.  D.  60.  For  the  chronologi- 
cal discussion  of  this  date,  see  Har- 
monic  Arrangement  of  the  Acts,  on  §  50. 
Further  on  Festus,  see  on  25  :  1.  And 
Felix  Avillii^  to  shew  the  Jews  a 
pleasure — more  exactly,  And  desir- 
ing to  lay  up  furors  for  himself  with 
the  Jews,  that  is,  wishing  to  win 
their  fiivor.  Left  Paul  bound — his 
favors  to  them  would  naturally  liring 
him  favors  in  return.  And  especially  he 
hoped  to  soften  the  anger  of  Jcavs  and 
lessen  their  charges  against  him  at 
Rome,  and  place  them  under  some  obli- 
gation to  him.  But  in  this  he  failed  ; 
for  immediately  upon  his  recall,  tlie 
Jews  of  Cajsarea  sent  complaints 
against  him.  Bound — in  military 
custody  (ver. 23),  and  very  probably  in 
chains,  for  such  is  a  common  mean- 
ing of  the  word,  thus  giving  liis 
successor  the  impression  that  he  was 
deserving  punisliment. 

It  would  be  interesting  to  know  whjit 
Paul  did  during  these  two  3'eais.  But 
God  has  wisely  cast  a  veil  over  them. 
After   twenty  years  of  active    labor, 


attended  with  persecutions,  sufferings, 
and  hardships,  Paul  is  providentially 
given  leisure  for  reflection  and  rest. 
His  spiritual  growtli,  during  the  years 
of  his  imprisonment  at  CiBsarea  and 
Rome,  is  seen  in  the  profounder  views 
of  his  later  P^pistles.  While  at  Caesarea 
he  doubtless  taught  and  counseled  the 
friends  wlio  came  to  him,  and  directed 
those  helpers  who  were  with  him. 
Luke  probably  prepared  his  Gospel  at 
that  time  under  his  direction,  and  gath- 
ered materials  for  the  Acts.  We  may  well 
suppose  that  Paul  also  had  some  com- 
munication with  many  of  the  cliurches 
he  had  gathered  in  Asia  Jlinor  and 
Greece.  Doul)tless  brethren  from  some 
of  these  churches  called  on  him,  who 
had  come  to  Judea,  during  these  two 
years,  and  bore  back  oral  or  brief 
written  messages  to  the  churches. 
While  Paul  was  comparatively  quiet, 
we  cannot  suppose  that  he  was  inactive, 
or  that  he  failed  to  do  good  as  he  had 

opportunity.       (Gal.  6:10.) 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  "  No  cause  is  so  bad  that  it  cannot  find 
an  advocate."     (Starke.)     (Ver.  1 ;  13  :  8, 

9.) 

2.  "  Eloquence  is  the  gift  of  God,  but  the 
eloquence  of  a  bad  man  is  like  poison  in  a 
golden  cup."      ("Ver.  2 ;   Exod.  4:11;  Rom. 

3  :  13 ;  James  3  :  5-10.) 

3.  Flattery  is  deceitful  and  is  used  for 
selfish  ends.  The  good  do  not  need  it ;  the 
bad  are  better  without  it.  (Ver.  2-4;  Prov. 
26  :  28;  1  Thess.  2:5.) 

4.  Artfulness  and  cunning  especially 
characterize  wicked  and  worldly  men.  (Ver. 

4  ;  Jer.  5  :  27.) 

5.  The  character  and  services  of  God's 
servants  are  distorted  by  the  world.  (Ver. 
5,  6;  2  Cor.  6  :  8.) 

6.  Contemptuous  words  too  often  take  the 
place  of  argument,  and  indicate  a  weak 
cause.     (Ver.  5-8 ;  1  Sam.  20  :  30-33.) 

7.  It  is  easy  to  find  those  wlio  will  consent 
to  and  confirm  a  lie.     (Ver.  9  ;  Jer.  9  :  3-G.) 

8.  Conciliatory  language  and  complin 
mentary  words,  if    true,  often  reach   the 


5G6 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXV. 


Puul's  trial    be/ore  Feslus ;    his    appeal    to 

Cmsar. 
25    NOW  wheu  Festus  was  come  into  the 


province,  after  three  days  he  ascended 

2  from  Casarea  to  Jerusalem.    'Then  the 

high  priest  and  the  chief  of  the  Je  vs, 


heart  when  mere  argument  might  fail.  (Ver. 
10 ;  26  :  2,  3,  24-26.) 

9.  A  simple  statement  of  facts  is  often 
the  best  offset  to  falsehood.  (Ver.  11-15 ; 
Prov.  12  :  17-19.) 

10.  Let  our  lives  and  deeds  be  such  as  can, 
at  all  times,  challenge  investigation.  (Ver. 
lo  ;  John  8  :  46.) 

11.  Let  us  ever  be  ready  to  confess  Christ 
l>oth  befoie  friends  and  foes.  (Ver.  14;  1 
Tim.  6:  13,14;  1  Peter  3  :  1.5.) 

12.  Christianity  is  not  a  sect  of  Judaism 
or  of  any  other  religion,  but  the  Way  of  true 
worship,  the  end  and  fultiller  of  the  law, 
involving  all  the  great  eternal  truths  of  the 
Old  Dispensation.  (Ver.  14,  15 ;  2  Tim.  1 : 
3;  Rom.  3  :  31 ;  10:  4.) 

13.  The  doctrine  of  the  resurrection  is 
fundamental  in  revealed  religion,  brought 
clearly  to  view  in  the  gospel.  (Ver.  15,  21 ; 
Isa.  26  :  19 ;  Dan.  12  :  2 ;  2  Tim.  1  :  10.) 

14.  If  we  would  have  a  conscience  void  of 
offense  toward  (lod  and  man,  we  must,  like 
Paul,  make  it  our  earnest  effort  and  aim. 
(Ver.  16 ;  PhU.  3  :  13, 14.) 

15.  True  religion  takes  hold  of  the  con- 
science, and  a  truly  enlightened  con.science 
exercises  itself  in  regard  to  the  whole  circle 
of  moral  duty.     (Ver.  16 ;  1  Tim.  1  :  5,  19.) 

16.  Paul  givea  us  an  example  in  his  de- 
fence of  simplicity  and  couraga  (Ver.  17, 
19.) 

17.  The  best  of  motives  may  he  misunder- 
stood, and  deeds  of  mercy  are  often  mis- 
represented.   (Ver.  17-19.) 

18.  Instigators  of  trouble  are  often  want- 
ing when  their  presence  is  needed.    (Ver.  19.) 

19.  We  should  strive  to  live  so  that  our 
most  vulnerable  points  can  be  safely  exposed 
to  the  keenest  scrutiny.  (Ver.  20,  21 ;  1 
Thess.  2  :  10 ;  2  Cor.  6  :  3-10.) 

20.  Felix,  to  a  certain  extent  a  second 
Pilate,  acted  worse  than  his  knowledge. 
(Ver.  22,  26,  27.) 

21.  A  presentation  of  the  gospel  not  only 
enlightens,  but  produces  conviction.  (Ver. 
22,25;  2  Cor.  4:  2.) 

22.  It  is  impossible  to  treat  Christ  and  his 
servants  impartially,  while  trying  to  please 
the  world.    (Ver.  23  ;  Matt.  12  :  30.) 


23.  Whatever  the  object  of  hearers  in 
listening  to  the  gospel,  the  object  of  the 
preacher  should  be  to  save  them.  (Ver.  24, 
25.) 

24.  The  preacher  should  discuss  topics 
appropriate  to  his  hearers.  (Ver.  25;  Col. 
2  :  28  ) 

25.  The  gospel,  faithfully  proclaimed,  will 
make  its  own  application  to  the  hearts  of 
men.     (Ver.  25 ;  1  Cor.  2  :  3,  4.) 

20.  The  present  moment  is  convenient  to 
him  who  wishes  to  repent,  but  no  moment 
to  him  who  wishes  to  delay.    (Ver.  25.) 

27.  If  conviction  of  sin  lead  not  to  re- 
pentance, it  tends  to  harden  the  heart.  (Ver. 
27  ;  2  Cor.  2  :  16  ) 

28.  Mercenary  motives  for  attending  upon 
the  means  of  grace  will^irevent  the  receiv- 
ing of  all  spiritual  profit.  (Ver.  27  ;  8  :  20- 
22.) 

29.  One  sin  prepares  the  way  for  another. 
Trying  to  please  the  world  puts  one  into 
the  power  of  the  world.  (Ver.  27 ;  2  Peter 
2 :  15.) 

Ch.  25 :  This  chapter  and  the 
next  give  an  accotint  of  Paul  under 
Festus.  Tlie  Jews  lay  a  fresh  plot 
atrainst  Paul's  life  ;  an<l  after  a  second 
trial  at  Ca?sarea,  would  lutve  induced 
Festus  to  .';cnd  him  to  Jerusalem,  in- 
tendinij  to  kill  him  on  the  way,  had  he 
not  ai>])ealed  to  Ciosar.  I5ut  as  Festus 
lia<l  no  definite  cluirt^e  against  Paul  to 
lay  l)efore  the  emperor,  he  seeks  the 
aid  of  King  As;rip])a,  who  is  present, 
on  a  yisit,  before  whom  Paul  is  sum- 
moned for  examination. 

1-12.  Paul's  Tkial  axd  Defence 
Before  Festus.    Hi.s    Appeal  to 

C^ESAK.       (.S.ever.  U-21.)      A.  D.  60. 

1.  Festus  exhibits  frankness  and 
honesty  in  contrast  to  Felix.  Josephus 
does  uot  speak  of  him  with  any  disap- 
probation. He  found  Judea  in  a  yery 
troubled  state,  and  altliough  he  made 
strenuous  etfoils  to  restore  order,  and 
with  some  apparent  success,  the  Zea- 
lots and  others  so  retained  their  hold 
upon  the  masses  that  wheu  Festus  died, 
in  the  summer  of  A.  D.  62,  disorder  and 


Ch.  XXV.]  THE  ACTS. 


367 


informed  hiiu  against  Paul, and  besought 

3  him,  and  desired  favour  against  him,  that 
he  would  send  for  him  to  Jerusalum,  •  lay- 

4  iugwaitintheway  tokillhim.  ButKestus 
answered,  that  Paul  should  be  kept  at 
Ciesarea,  and  that  he  himself  would  de- 

5  part  shortly  thitlier.  Let  them  therefore, 
said  he,  which  among  you  are  able,  go 


down  with  me,  and  accuse  this  man,  if 
there  be  any  wickedness  in  him. 

6  And  when  he  had  tarried  among  them 
more  then  ten  days,  he  went  down  unto 
C«sarea  ;  and  the  next  day  sitting  on  the 
judgment  seat  commanded    Paul  to  be 

7  brought.  And  when  he  was  come,  the 
Jews  which  came  down  from  Jerusalem 


•  ch.  23  :  12-15. 


confusion  prevailed  more  than  ever 
before.  He  was  succeeded  by  Abanus. 
(Joscplius,  Antiq.  XX,  8,  10,  11.) 

When  Festiis  was  come  into  the 
province — into  Judea,  which  was  a 
province  of  a  second  rank,  or  append- 
a;j;e  to  the  Roman  province  of  Sj^ria. 
He  came  to  Cwsarea,  the  military  liead- 
quarters  of  the  Roman  governor,  (see 
oil  8 :  40.)  After  three  days— the  third 
day  after  his  arrival,  taking  a  day  or 
two  for  rest  at  Ctesarea.  He  thus  showed 
great  promptness  and  a  mind  for  busi- 
ness. 

'i.  Then  the  high  priest— ac- 
cording to  the  best  manuscripts,  And 
the  chief  priests,  perhaps  including 
Ananias,  wuo  had  been  succeeded  by 
Ismael  as  high  priest.  (See on 4:  23.) 
The  chief,  or  first  of  the  Jews. 
The  Sadducees  were  the  leading  men 
of  wealth.  Informed  him  —  laid 
charges  against  Paul.  (See  on  24 : 1.) 
Two  years  had  not  cooled  tlieir  hatred. 

3.  Desired  favor  for  themselves 
against  him.  Tlie  special  favor  here 
meant  is  that  he  would  send  for 
him  to  come  to  Jerusalem.  From 
ver.  15,  16  it  appears  that  they  also  re- 
quested that  Paul  might  at  once  be 
condemned,  which  was  denied  by  Fes- 
tus.  Doubtless  as  leading  men  of  the 
nation  they  hoped  to  influence  the  new 
governor.  Paul  was  but  one  private 
individual ;  they  were  many.  It  would 
be  far  more  convenient  for  him  to  come 
up  to  Jerusalem  than  for  them  to  go 
down  to  Ciesarea.  Laying  wait,  al- 
ready faying  a  plot.  They  seem  to  liave 
thought  that  the  new  governor,  wish- 
ing to  ingratiate  himself,  would  grant 
the  favor,  and  had  already  laid  their 
plans.  Very  likely  some  of  those  forty 
men  who  had  previously  bound  them- 
selves with  a  vow  (23 ;  12)  were  now  ar- 
ranging an  ambush.  Josephus  informs 
us  that  the  laud  was  full  of  assassins, 


who  were  hired  by  various  parties  for 
such  purposes. 

4.  But  Festus  answered  them 
wisely  and  firmly,  showing  that  he 
wished  justice  done.  That  Paul 
should  be  kept — rather,  was  kept, 
safely  guarded  at  Ciesarea.  The 
answer  is  a  refusal,  but  in  conciliatory 
language.  That  he  himself  should 
soon  go  thither.  Paul's  removal  to  Je- 
rusalem was  therefore  unnecessary,  and 
also  inconvenient,  as  Festus,  being  a 
new  governor,  must  move  on  actively, 
and  quickly  return  to  Ca^sarea. 

5.  Let  them  therefore  .  .  , 
which  among  you  are  able,  etc. 
Let  therefore  the  powerful,  or  infi.uen- 
tial  among  you  go  down  with  me. 
Festus  does  not  refer  to  their  ability  to 
go  down,  but  to  the  characters  of  the 
persons,  as  proper  representatives  of 
the  Jewish  leaders,  men  of  rank 
and  wealth.  He  assumes  that  Felix 
had  good  reasons  for  keeping  Paul  in 
custody  at  Ciesarea,  an<l  he  will  not 
change  the  arrangement.  If  there 
be  any  wickedness — literally,  any- 
thing out  of  place,  or  amiss,  in  him. 
(Luke  23 :  41.)  There  must  be  a  fair  trial, 
and  that  could  be  held  without  delay 
just  as  well  at  Ciesarea  as  at  Jerusalem. 

6.  When  he  had  tarried  .  .  . 
more  then  ten  days— rather,  ac- 
cording to  the  most  approved  manu- 
scripts, vot  more  than  eight,  or  ten 
days,  showing  that  he  disj)atched  his 
business  without  dehiy.  The  Jewish 
leaders  also  appear  to  have  accepted 
the  governor's  proposition,  to  go  down 
with  him,  for  the  ne.vt  day  after  his 
arrival  at  Ciesarea,  he  sat  on  the  judg- 
ment seat,  and  commanded  Paul 

to  be  brought.       (see  John  19  :  13.)     ThuS 

Festus  continues  to  show  himself 
prompt  and  active,  and  a  man  of  his 
word. 

7.  TbeU)  the  Jews  which  had 


m 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXV. 


stood  round  about,  'and  laid  many  and 
grierous  complaints  against  Paul,  which 
8  they  could  not  prove.  While  he  an- 
swered for  himself^  "  Neither  against  the 
law  of  the  Juws,  neither  against  the 
temple,  nor  yet  against  Ctesar,  have  I 
offended  anything  at  all. 


9  But  Festus,  »  willing  to  do  the  Jews  a 
pleasure,  answered  Paul,  and  said,  Wilt 
thou  go  up  to  Jerusalem,  and  there  be 

10  judged  of  these  things  before  me  ?  Then 
said  Paul,  I  stand  at  Cit-sar's  judgment 
seat,  where  I  ought  to  be  judged:  to  the 
Jews  have  I  done  no  wrong,  as  thou  very 


t  ch.  24  :  5,  13  ;  Mark  lo  :  3  ;  Luke  23  :  2,  10.      «  eh.  24  :  12 ;  28  :  17 ;  Jer.  37  :  18.      »  ch.  24  :  27. 


come  doAvii  from  Jerusalem  stood  | 
round  about  him.  A  life-like  pic- 
ture, and  suggestive  of  the  eagerness 
with  whicli  they  comi)assed  on  every 
side  their  long-lost  victim.  And  laid 
many  and  grievous  complaints, 
or  charges.  What  these  Avere  may  be 
iufen-ed  from  the  former  accusations 
before  Felix  (24 : 6,  6),  and  Paul's  reply 
in  the  next  verse.  VVhichthey  could 
not  prove — consisting  of  rumors,  re- 
])0rt3  and  their  own  declarations.  As  in 
the  former  trial,  they  Avere  without 
witnesses,  and  without  evidence. 

8.  Paul  answered  for  himself— 
or  said  in  defence,  doul)tless  very  much 
as  in  his  trial  before  Felix.  (24:  io--'i.) 
A  mere  summary  is  here  given.  The 
three  charges  of  *he  former  trial  are 
referred  to,  modifaed,  or  strengthened 
by  certain  new  phases  of  the  case. 
Tims  during  the  two  years  the  Jews 
may  have  learned  more  definitely  i*e- 
garding  Paul's  teaching  concerning 
circumcision,  as  not  essential  to  Chris- 
tianity (G»i.6  :  15),  and  they  may  have 
nuule  more  definite  charges  of  offences 
against  the  law  of  the  Jews.  So 
also  they  doubtless  laid  greater  stress 
on  his  otfences  against  Caesar, 
eciuivalent  to  emperor,  representing 
the  Roman  power.  (See  on  17 : 7.)  If 
they  could  make  him  out  a  political 
offender  they  felt  sure  of  the  condem- 
nation of  Festus. 

9.  But  Festus  willing  to  do  the 
Jews  a  pleasure,  rather,  tcishing  to 
gain  favor  with  the  Jews.  Compare 
almost  the  same  phrase  in  24  :  27.  It 
was  natural  for  the  new  governor  to 
desire  in  all  j)roper  ways  to  ingratiate 
himself  among  his  subjects,  and  be 
popular  with  the  leading  men  of  his 
province.  He  had  not  consented  to 
their  request  to  have  the  trial  at  Jeru- 
salem (ver.  3),  but  he  now  throws  the 
responsibility  of  deciding  on  Paul  him- 
self. Wilt  thou  go  up  to  Jerusalem 
aud  be  judged?     That  is,  by  the 


Sanhedrin,  but  in  his  presence,  before 
me,  he  having  the  power  to  confirm 
or  veto  the  sentence.  By  tliis  proposal, 
Festus  virtually  aquits  Paul  of  any 
offences  against  the  Iloman  govern- 
ment, or  against  Roman  law.  (ver.  is.) 
In  regard  to  the  charges  against  the 
Jewish  law  Festus  felt  liiniself  incom- 
petent to  judge.  (Ver.  19,  JO.)  DoubtleSS 
he  had  something  of  Gallio's  feeling. 
(18:15.)  But  he  had  no  right  to  trans- 
fer Paul  from  the  Roman  to  the  Jewish 
court  without  his  consent.  (Vcr.  10, 11.) 
And  so  very  likely  Festns  anticipated 
what  Paul's  reply  would  be.  By  his 
question  Festus  appears  to  wish  to  do 
no  injustice  to  Paul,  l)ut  at  tlie  same 
time  avoid  giving  oflence  to  the  Jews, 
and  so  far  as  possil)le  under  the  cir- 
cumstances to  gain  their  favor. 

10.  Paul's  answer  is  j)rompt  and 
decisive,  as  one  who  unilerstood  the 
law  and  his  own  rights,  and  the  pur- 
poses of  the  Jews  against  him.  lie 
saw  that  his  only  safety  was  in  frustra- 
ting their  designs.  I  stand  at 
Caesar's  judgment  seat — at  the 
tribunal  of  the  emperor.  Syria,  of 
which  Judea  was  a  sub-division,  was 
an  imperial  Roman  province,  under 
the  direct  rule  of  the  emperor.  Festus 
was  the  representative  of  Ciesar. 
Paul  had  for  two  years  been  under 
Roman  imi)eiial  authority,  and  he 
refuses  to  change  to  another  tribunal. 
Both  on  this  account  and  as  a  Roman 
citizen  he  could  say,  where  I  ought 
to  be  judged — as  a  matter  of  riglit. 
How  much  more  so  when  he  could  con- 
fidently assert.  To  the  Jews  have 
I  done  no  Avrong,  as  thou  very 
well  knoAvest,  literally,  as  thoit 
also  knowest  better,  that  is,  better  than 
by  thy  question  thou  seemest  to  know, 
or  better  tlian  thou  art  willing  to 
appear  to  know.  How  carefully  and 
wisely  does  Paul  put  this.  The  Jews, 
under  these  circumstances,  could  have 
no  judicial  claim  on  him ;  aud  before 


Oil.  XXV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


369 


11  well  knowest.  y  For  if  I  be  an  offender, 
or  have  committed  anything  worthy  of 
death, '  I  refuse  not  to  die :  but  if  tliere  be 
none  of  these  things  whereof  these  accuse 
me,  no  man  may  deliver  me  unto  them. 
•I  appeal  unto  Caesar. 

12  Then  Festus,  when  he  had  conferred 


with  the  council,  answered,  Hast  thou 
appealed  unto  Ciesar?  Unto  Ocsar  shall 
thou  go. 

Festus    confers    with    King  Agrippa ;   Paul 

brought  before  them. 
13      AND  after  certain  days  king  Agrippa 


ych.  23:29;  2G  :  31.        «  Prov.  28  :  1.        »  ch.  !26  :  32 ;  28  :  19. 


the  Jewish  tribunal  his  accusers  would 
largely  be  his  judges. 

11.  For  should  be  omitted  according 
to  the  highest  critical  authorities.  If 
I  be  an  otfeuder,  or  have  com- 
mitted any  thing  worthy  of 
death,  according  to  Roman  law,  I 
refuse  not  to  die.  I  am  under  the 
jurisdiction  of  Rome,  and  I  do  not  ask 
for  exemption  from  punishment,  if  I 
deserve  it.  But  if  there  be  none 
of  these  things  whereof  these 
accuse  me,  if  their  charges  are 
groundless,  as  evidently  they  are,  no 
man  can  deliver  me  unto  them. 
"  Jlodestly  said ;  that  is,  thou  canst 
not."  (Bengel.)  More  fully  ex- 
pressed :  No  one  can  give  me  up  as  a 
favor  to  them  for  condemnation  and 
punishment.  Paul  claims  his  rights 
and  the  protection  of  law.  I  ap- 
peal unto  Caesar.  This  was  a  right 
of  a  Roman  citizen.  A  hearing  before 
the  emjieror  was  the  final  tribunal,  and 
was  regarded  as  a  safeguard  against 
any  prejudice  and  tyranny  of  the  pro- 
vincial magistrates.  Pliny  wrote  some 
years  later  to  Trajan,  that  he  would 
send  to  Rome  those  Bithyniau  Chris- 
tians who  possessed  the  right  of  Roman 
citizens.  Various  motives  probably 
influenced  Paul  to  appeal  to  Cajsar.  (1) 
He  saw  no  prospect  of  speedy  justice, 
and  desired  to  avoid  any  i)ossibility  of 
being  delivered  to  the  Jews.  (s8:i9.) 
(2)  To  relieve  Festus  of  any  unpleas- 
ant dilemma  in  his  case.  (3)  His  de- 
sire to  go  to  Rome  {i9 :  'n)  ;  and  perhaps 
he  began  to  see  liow  the  Lord  would 
fulfill  his  promise,  that  he  must  bear 
witness  at  Rome.     (23 :  u.) 

12.  When  he  had  conferred 
Avith  the  council — the  advisers  who 
sat  with  him.  Governors  and  procura- 
tors of  provinces  had  a  board  of  asses- 
sors or  advisers,  with  whom  they  con- 
sulted before  rendering  judgment. 
{Thayer's  iV.    T.  Greek  Lex.)     Sueto- 


nius and  Josephus  both  speak  of  such 
oflicials.  {See  Jewish  War,  II.  16,  1.) 
Hast  thou  appealed  unto  Ca-sar? 

This  is  not  a  question,  but  a  formal  and 
solemn  declaration.  Unto  C^sar 
shalt  thou  go — your  ap])eal  is  granted 
and  shall  be  carried  out.  Nero  was  em- 
peror at  this  time.  Thus  Festus  and  his 
advisers  concluded  that  there  was 
nothing  in  the  way  of  granting  the 
appeal  at  once.  "  Some  offences  were 
held  to  be  so  enormous  as  to  exclude  the 
exercise  of  this  right,  and  when  the 
crime  was  not  of  this  character,  the 
evidence  of  guilt  might  be  so  palpable 
as  to  demand  an  immediate  and  final 
decision."  (Hackett.)  The  Julian 
law,  however,  forbade  any  unnecessary 
impediment  being  put  in  the  way  of  any 
who  had  thus  appealed. 

13-27.  Festus  Confers  with 
Agrippa  concerning  Paul.  Paul 
BROUGHT  before  Agrippa.  The 
summer  of  a.  d.  60. 

13.  After  certain  days — probably 
a  week  or  two.  Agrii)pa  would  not 
delay  long  before  coming  to  salute 
Festus,  offering  him  his  congratula- 
tions and  welcome.  King  Agrippa 
and  Bernice.  This  was  Herod 
Agrippa  II.,  the  son  of  Herod  Agripjja 
I.,  whose  terrible  death  is  related  in 
ch.  12,  and  great  grandson  of  Herod 
the  Great.  He  was  brother  of  Bernice 
and  Drusilla.  At  his  father's  death  he 
was  but  seventeen  years  old,  and  on 
account  of  his  youth  he  was  not  ap- 
pointed to  succeed  him,  whose  kingdom 
included  all  that  of  Herod  the  Great. 
Some  time  after  the  Emperor  Claudius 
gave  Agrippa  the  kingdom  of  Chalcis, 
the  presidency  of  the  temi)le  at  Jerusa- 
lem and  its  treasures,  and  tlie  i)0wer  to 
appoint  the  high  priest;  and  in  A.  D. 
53,  he  added  the  former  tetrarchy  of 
Philip  and  Lysanias  (Luken :  1)  with  the 
title  of  king.  Nero  afterward  added 
the  city  of  Tiberias  and  a  part  of  Galilee 


370 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXV. 


and  Bernice  came  unto  Ca?sarea  to  salute 

14  Festus.  And  when  they  had  been  there 
many  days,  Festus  declared  Paul  s  cause 
unto  the  king,  saying, '•There  is  a  certain 

15  man  left  in  bonds  by  Felix, '  about  whom, 
when  I  was  at  Jerusalem,  the  chief  priests 
and  the  elders  of  the  Jews  informed  me, 
desiring  to  have  judgment  against  him. 

16  *To   wnonj    I    answered,  It  is  not  the 


manner  of  the  Romans  to  deliver  any 
man  to  die,  before  that  he  which  is 
accused  have  the  accusers  face  to  face 
and  have  license  to  answer  for  himself 
concerning  the  crime  laid  against  him, 
Therefore,  when  they  were  come  hither, 
e  without  any  delay  on  the  morrow  1  sat 
on  the  judgment  seat,  and  commanded 


l>  ch.  24  :  27. 


<  ver.  2,  3.        d  ver.  4,  5  ;  John  7  :  51. 


to  his  dominion.  Agrippa  displeased 
the  Jews  by  building  a  room  in  his 
pahxee  at  Jerusalem  so  as  to  overlook 
the  temple,  by  lavishing  favors  upon 
the  city  of    Berytus,  and    by  his  ca- 

fricious  changes  in  the  high  priesthood. 
n  the  war  against  Jerusalem  he  sided 
with  the  Romans.  He  died  about  A.  D. 
100,  at  Rome,  aged  about  seventy,  and 
was  the  last  prince  of  the  house  of  the 
Herods.  Bernice  was  beautiful,  but 
dissolute ;  married  early  to  her  uncle 
Herod,  kingof  Chalcis,  and  early  left  a 
widow,  was  now  living  Mith  her  brother, 
Agrippa,  in  unlawful  intimacy.  To 
escape  the  scandal  she  afterward  mar- 
ried Polemon,  king  of  Cilicia,  but  soon 
deserted  him  to  return  to  her  brother 
at  Rome.  She  afterward  became  mis- 
tress of  Vespasian  and  of  his  son  Titus. 
The  references  to  her  in  the  Acts  are 
true  to  her  history.  "  We  mark  not 
only  the  pomp  and  parade  with  which 
she  and  Agrijjpa  came  with  Festus  into 
the  audience  chamber  to  hear  the  pris- 
oner Paul,  l)ut  also  the  fact  that  when 
this  brilliant  company  swept  out  of  the 
chamber,  Bernice  is  again  named,  as 
though  she  was  the  most  notewortliy  of 
all  tho.se  present.  If  from  this  we  look 
into  contemporary  history,  it  is  startling 
to  observe  how  she  appears  there.  It 
was  an  age  of  profligate  women ;  and 
among  such  the  Herodian  Bernice  was 
notorious  through  the  emi)ire.  .  .  .  We 
find  this  pa.ssage  of  the  Acts  in  har- 
mony with  what  we  learn  ftom  histori- 
ans and  satirists,  even  to  the  jewelry 
which  Agrippa  gave  to  this  shameless 
woman."  (Dr.  Howson,  Acts  nf  the 
Apostles,  p.  148.) 

14.  And  Avhen,  etc. — ichile  they 
were  spending  several  dai/s,  perhaps  a 
week.  Festus  decjared  Paul's 
cause  to  the  king.  He  laid  the  case 
before  him  in  a  conversational  way. 
It  was  quite  natural  that  the  new  gov- 


ernor, being  a  Gentile,  should  seek 
light  from  King  Agrippa  on  matters 
concerning  which  the  latter  would  be 
familiar,  since  he  was  a  Jew  by  birth. 

15.  The  chief  priests  (ver.  2)  .  .  , 
informed  me^made  cmnplaiiitagniust 
Paul,  as  in  ver.  2.  Desiring  judg- 
ment— rather,  sentence  against  him, 
according  to  the  oldest  manuscriiits. 
This  request  is  dilTerent  from  that  in 
ver.  3,  that  Paul  might  be  brought  to 
Jerusalem.  The  former  evidently  pre- 
ceded the  latter.  After  Festus  had 
courteously  refused  their  first  request 
(next  verse),  then  they  make  the  second 
request,  not  because  they  hoped  for  the 
condemnation  of  Paul  from  such  a  trial, 
but  because  they  would  have  opportu- 
nity to  waylay  and  kill  him.  The  two 
proposals,  as  Dr.  Hackett  suggests, 
could  have  been  made  at  diflerent 
times. 

16.  Festus  courteously  refuses  their 
request.  It  was  contrary  to  Roman 
custom  ;  it  would  be  unlawful  and  not 
right  for  him  to  do  it.  His  reply  illus- 
trates the  love  of  justice  by  virtuous 
Romans.  The  manner,  or  custom, 
among  the  Romans,  in  such  matters. 
To  "deliver  any  man  to  die. 
Omit,  to  die.  Simply  To  give  tip  any 
man,  as  a  gift  or  favor.  Paul  uses  the 
same  expression  in  ver.  11.  Reference 
seems  to  be  had  to  tlie  Jews'  request  for 
a  favor,  (ver.  3.)  It  indicates  a  degen- 
eracy of  the  Jewish  conscience.  They 
thought  their  influence  would  be  suffi- 
cient to  corrupt  Festus.  Have  license 
— have  opportunity  to  make  his  de- 
fense. This  answer,  and  the  whole 
conversation  are  in  perfect  accord  with 
what  we  know  of  Roman  usages  and 
law. 

17.  When  they  we  re  come  hither 
— or  ivere  come  together  here,  at  Cjesarea, 
according  to  his  order,  (vei.  5.)  With- 
out any  delay — the  promjjtness  mani- 


Cii.  XXV.j 


THE  ACTS. 


371 


18  the  man  to  be  brought  forth.  Against 
whom,  when  the  accusers  stood  up,  they 
brought  none  accusation  of  such  things 

19  as  I  supposed:  'but  had  certain  questions 
against  him  of  their  own  superstition, 
and  of  one  Jesus,  which  was  dead,  whom 

20  Taul  affirmed  to  be  alive,  And  because 
1  dou'ited  of  such  manner  of  questions,  I 
asked  him  whether  he  would  go  to  Jeru- 


salem,   and   there   be  judged    of  these 

21  matters.  But  when  Paul  had  appealed 
to  be  reserved  unto  the  hearing  of 
8  Augustus,  I  commanded  him  to  be  kept 
till  1  might  send  him  to  Ca-sar. 

22  Then  ^  Agrippa  said  unto  Festus,  I 
would  also  hear  the  man  myself.  To- 
morrow, said  he,  thou  shalt  hear  him. 

23  And  on  the  morrow,  when  Agrippa  was 


'  ch.  18  ;  15  ;  23  :  29.        b  Luke  2  ;  1.        ^  ch.  9  :  1.5. 


fested  in  ver.  4 ;  a  contrast  too  with  the 
pi'ocrastiuating  course  of  Felix. 

18.  Against  Avhom.  The  Revised 
Version  translates  Concerning  whom. 
Better,  Standing  np  around  him.  So 
Bible  Union  Version,  Hackett,  Meyer, 
Winer,  etc.  A  vivid  description  of 
Paul's  accusers  gathering  around  him 
at  his  trial,  (ver.  7.)  Of  such  things, 
transgressions  of  the  law.  As  I  sup- 
posed, suspected.  Compare  Gallio's 
speech.  (w:i4.)  Festus'  ideas  had 
been  confused,  but  from  the  represen- 
tations of  the  Jews  he  had  supposed 
Paul  a  notable  criminal  against  Ctesar 
and  Roman  autliority.     (ver.  s.) 

19.  Instead  of  crimes  Festus  found 
that  the  Jews  had  certain  questions 
against  him,  or  certain  controversies 
with  him  concerning  their  own 
superstition.  The  word  translated 
superstition  is  a  kindred  word  to  that 
used  by  Paul  in  addressing  the  Athe- 
nians. (17:22.)  It  may  be  used  in  a 
bad  sense  of  superstition  or  dcinon-nwr- 
ship,  or  in  a  good  sense  of  divinity- 
worship,  or  religion.  Fe-stus  knew  that 
Agrippa  was  a  Jew,  and  he  would  not 
have  spoken  oiiensively  of  his  fiiith. 
But  at  the  same  time  he  himself  was  a 
Gentile  and  accustomed  to  the  worship 
of  deified  dead  men  among  the  Greeks 
and  Romans,  and  he  may  have  asso- 
ciated Jesus  with  such.  He  would 
naturally  use  the  word  iu  a  good  though 
somewhat  middle  sense,  their  own 
divinity  worship.  He  could  thus  speak 
generally  without  any  oft'ence  to 
Agrippa.  And  of  one,  or  k  certain, 
Jesus.  Thus  he  speaks  indifferently 
of  Jesus,  and  of  his  resurrection,  as 
only  Paul's  assertion. 

20.  And  because  I  doubted  of 
such  manner  of  questions^ir/,;*/ 
perple.ted  in  regard  to  the  in<juiry  about 
these  things,  about  Jesus,  his  resurrec- 
tion, and  his  religion.    Doubtless  this 


was  a  reason  which  would  commend 
itself  to  Agrippa,  and  gain  his  sympa- 
thy and  help  ;  but  the  principal  reason 
is  given  in  ver.  9,  the  desire  of  Festus 
to  please  and  gain  favor  with  tlie  Jews. 
'Z\.  When  Paul  had  appealed  to 
be  reserved.  He  preferred  to  be  ke])t 
under  Pv,oman  authority  to  going  up  to 
Jerusalem  to  be  tried.  This  was  con- 
trary to  Festus'  suggestion,  and  doubt- 
less seemed  strange  to  him.  Unto  the 
hearing — of  A  ugustns,for  the  decision, 
the  discriminating  opinion  or  judgment 
of  the  emperor,  implying  a  thorough 
examination.  Augustus,  meaning 
venerable,  reverend,  a  title  of  honor 
given  by  tlie  Roman  Senate  and  people 
to  the  fir.st  Emperor  Octavian,  and 
afterward  conferred  on  his  successors, 
and  became  the  usual  designation  of 
the  emperor.  The  i)resent  Augustus 
was  Nero.  Till  I  might  send,  etc. — 
till  he  had  an  opportunity  of  sending 
him  to  Italy  by  a  sailing  vessel.    (-'7 :  i.) 

22.  Then  Agrippa  said,  I  Avould 
also  hear  the  man.  Literally,  /  was 
wishing  also  myself,  if  it  were  proper 
and  thou  wouldst  permit  it,  to  hear  this 
m,(in.  Agrip])a  had  often  heard  of  Paul, 
his  fame  and  elorpience,  and  doubtless 
from  curiosity  had  desired  before  this 
to  see  and  hear  him.  The  expression 
here  refers  to  a  wish  still  existing: 
While  Festus  was  sjieakiug,  up  to  the 
very  moment  of  his  utterance,  Agrippa 
)vas  nu'shing.  It  was  a  courteous  way 
of  expressing  liis  desire  to  hear  Paul, 
and  help  Festus  in  regard  to  this  trou- 
blesome case.      (Ver.2fi  ) 

23.  Agrijjpa  and  Bernice  are  again 
mentioned  as  well-known,  and  without 
any  reference  to  her  relation  to  him. 
The  scandal  regarding  them,  and  the 
fact  that  both  were  living  with  great 
influence,  when  this  was  written,  doubt- 
less accounts  for  tlie  omission.  With 
great  pomp  and  disijlay— true  to  their 


372 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXV. 


come,  and  Bernice,  with  great  pomp,  and 
was  entered  into  the  place  of  hearing, 
with  the  chief  captains,  and  principal 
men  of  the  city  at  Festus'  command- 
ment Paul  was  brought  forth. 
24  And  Festus  said,  King  Agrippa,  and 
all  men  which  are  here  present  with  us, 
ye  see  this  man,  about  whom  all  the  mul- 
titude of  the  Jews  have  dealt  with  me, 
both  at  Jerusalem,  and  also  here,  crying 


that  he  ought  'not  to  live  any  longer. 

25  But  when  I  found  that  'he  had  commit- 
ted nothing  worthy  of  death,  i  and  that 
he  himself  hath  appealed  to  Augustus,  I 

26  have  determined  to  send  him.  Of  wliom 
I  have  no  certain  thing  to  write  unto  ray 
lord.  Wherefore  I  have  brought  hiiu 
forth  before  you,  and  specially  before 
thee,  O  king  Agrippa,  that  after  exami- 


•  ch.  21 :  36 ;  22  :  22.        k  ch.  26  :  31 ;  28  :  18.        »  ver.  11, 12. 


history  aud  that  of  their  family.  Six- 
teen years  before,  their  father  sat  on  his 
throne  in  royal  ajiparel  in  this  same 
city  of  Csesarea.  (12 :  21.)  (See  on  ver. 
13  of  this  chapter.)  The  place  of 
hearing — the  auditorium,  or  audience- 
room,  which  seems  to  have  been  con- 
nected with  the  governor's  palace, 
whether  as  a  lecture  room,  or  for  the 
trying  of  cases  is  not  certain.  Chief 
captains — the  commanders  of  a  thou- 
sand men,  that  is,  of  Roman  cohorts. 
(See  on  21 :  31.)  According  to  Josephus 
five  of  these  cohorts  were  stationed  at 
CiEsarea,  the  political  capital  of  the 
province.  Principal  men  —  promi- 
nent or  leading  men  of  the  city.  Paul 
Avas  brought  forth — a  fulfillment  of 
our  Lord's  prediction  (Matt.  io:i8),  "  Be- 
fore governors  also  and  kings  will  ye 
be  brought  for  my  sake,  for  a  testimony 
to  them  and  to  the  Gentiles." 

24.  Festus  explains  the  reason  and 
design  of  this  gathering.  This  verse 
states  the  po]>ular  feelings  of  the  Jews, 
all  the  multitude,  etc.  (21:27.)  Have 
dealt  with  me  —  besought  or  peti- 
tioned me  against  him.  And  here — 
at  Caesarea,  referring  especially  to  the 
deputation  from  Jerusalem.  (Ver.  7.) 
Very  probably  also  the  latter  had 
aroused  the  prejudices  of  the  leading 
Jews  at  C;esarea.  Crying  or  shouting 
out,  indicating  their  excited  and  in- 
tense feeling,  when  they  affirmed  that 
Paul  was  not  worthy  longer  to  live. 

25.  Festus  tells  the  result  of  his  own 
examination,  directly  opposite  to  the 
demand  of  the  Jews.  And  that  he 
himself,  etc.  Better,  .Hi?  himself  hav- 
ing appealed.  Festus  does  not  state 
why  he  appealed,  because  instead  of 
acquitting  Paul  he  proposed  his  going 
tip  to  Jerusalem  for  trial,  (ver.  9, 10,) 
Had  Festus  acted  promptly  on  his  con- 


victions, Paul  would  have  had  no  oc- 
casion to  apjieal.  Thus  Festus  had  put 
himself  in  an  embarrassing  position  by 
his  time-serving  policy.  To  Augus- 
tus.     (Seeonrer.  21.) 

26.  Paul  had  appealed  to  Csesarand 
Festus  had  granted  the  appeal,  yet  he 
had  no  certain  thing  to  write,  no 

definite  statement  to  make.  It  was 
customary  to  send  to  the  emjieror  a 
written  statement  of  the  oft'ence  and 
])roceedings  against  the  prisoner.  If 
the  case  should  appear  trivial  it  might 
exjtose  him  to  criticism,  perhaps  to 
censure.  Unto  my  lord.  The  accu- 
racy of  Luke  is  illu.strated  by  this  ap- 
pellation of  lord  to  the  emperor.  Both 
Augustus  and  Tiberius  would  not  allow 
the  corresponding  Latin  word  dominus 
applied  to  themselves,  because  it  im- 
jdied  the  relation  of  master  and  slave. 
But  early  in  the  empire  the  custom 
grew  of  thus  styling  the  euii)eror,  and 
itl>ecamea  part  of  establislied  ctiijuette. 
JIany  Greek  inscri])tions  have  been 
found  in  Asia  Minor  and  Egypt  with 
this  title,  some  of  tlicm  inscribed  to 
Nero.  Caligula  seems  to  have  been 
the  first  to  jjcrmit  it.  And  a  generation 
later  Pliny,  in  his  letters  to  Trajan,  calls 
him  lord  more  than  seventy  times. 
Festus  as  a  Eoman  official  would  very 
likely  use  this  title.  As  Luke  soon 
after  sailed  with  Paul,  he  juolmbly 
heard  him.  The  word  lord  liad  a  wide 
meaning,  implying  possession  of  au- 
thority or  power,  applicable  to  politi- 
cal or  social  life,  to  men  or  to  gods. 
See  a  discussion  of  the  word  in  Biblio- 
theca  Sacra,  for  July,  18(il,  pp.  595-608. 
Examination — as  a  law  term  among 
the  Greeks  this  word  was  used  of  a 
preliminary  investigation,  for  gather- 
ing evidence  for  the  information  of  the 
judges. 


Ch.  XXV.] 


THE  ACTS. 


373 


nation  had,  I  might  have  somewhat  to 
27  write.  For  it  seeincth  to  uie  uiirea8onal)le 


to  send  a  prisoner,  and  not  withal  to 
signify  the  crimes  laid  against  him. 


17.  For  it  seeineth  to  me  uu- 
reasonable^  etc.  Ami  he  could 
have  added,  unlawful.  Festus  hoi)ed 
to  get  a  clearer  view  of  the  case,  and 
fresh  facts,  so  as  to  write  more  defi- 
nitely. From  this  account  of  Luke,  lie 
apj)ears  to  have  heen  a  just  and  reason- 
able man,  which  accords  with  the 
character  given  him  by  Josephus. 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  Rulers  and  judges  and  laws  may  change, 
but  tlie  Supreme  Judge,  Jesus  Christ,  ever 
lives  and  is  ever  the  same.  (Ver.  1 ;  Heb. 
13  :  8.) 

2.  Promptness  and  business-like  traits  are 
especially  commendable  in  public  officials. 
(Ver.  1-4.) 

3.  The  Jews  in  their  proceedings  against 
Paul  illustrate  the  hatred  and  persecution 
of  wicked  men  against  Christianity.  (Ver. 
2,  3  ;  Bom.  8  :  7.) 

4.  God  often  protects  his  servants  through 
worldly  men,  as  he  did  Paul  through  the 
firmness  of  Festus.    (Ver.  4,  5  ;  Neh.  6  : 1  f ) 

5.  God  had  promised  Paul  that  he  should 
Bee  Rome.  (23 :  11.)  How  was  his  faith 
tested  to  be  so  often  called  to  trial  to  no 
purpose.    (Ver.  6  ;  Rom.  1  :  13.) 

6.  It  has  been  common  for  persecutors  of 
Christians  to  bring  charges  that  could  not  be 
sustained.    (Ver.  7  ;  6  :  13 ;  Mark  14  :  56,  57.) 

7.  A  person  in  the  right  can  generally 
make  a  simple  and  direct  defense.  (Ver.  8 ; 
John  18  :  20,  21.) 

8.  A  love  of  popularity  too  often  leads 
even  honest  men  to  deviate  somewhat  from 
the  riglit  path.    (Ver.  9 ;  Ps.  118  :  8,  9.) 

9.  Religious  bigots  are  often  more  to  be 
dreaded  than  the  most  absolute  civil  despots. 
(Ver.  10, 11.) 

10.  Civil  government  is  of  divine  author- 
ity, and  the  Christian  as  a  citizen  or  suhject 
has  a  right  to  avail  himself  of  its  protection. 
(Ver.  10, 11 :  Rom.  13  :  1.) 

11.  God  often  answers  the  prayers  of 
Christians  in  a  way  they  little  expect.  Thus 
was  Paul's  prayers  granted  in  going  to 
Rome.    (Ver.  12 ;  Rom.  1 :  9, 10.) 

12.  In  Agrippa  we  have  an  example  of 
those  who  from  curiosity  desire  to  hear  the 
gospel.  (Ver.  13,  22.)  Some  prove  to  be  way- 
side hearers  (Matt.  13  :  19),  and  others  like 


Zaccheus  are  led  to  embrace  the  Saviour. 
(Luke  19  :  4-10.) 

13.  It  is  of  the  nature  of  human  infirm- 
ity to  justify  ourselves,  and  set  forth  our 
own  merits.     (Ver.  13-21 ;  23  :  27.) 

14.  The  heathen  Romans  were  more  ra- 
tional and  just  than  the  highly  privileged 
Jews.     (Ver.  15,  1(5 ;  Luke  11  :  31,  32.) 

15.  To  condemn  a  man  unlieard  is  the 
very  essence  of  tyranny,  and  should  be 
practiced  neither  in  church  nor  state.  (Ver. 
16.) 

16.  Civil  magistrates  are  often  wholly  in- 
competent to  judge  in  regard  to  spiritual 
matters.    (Ver.  17-20.) 

17.  In  Festus  we  have  an  example  of  a  class 
of  worldly  men,  who  regard  Christianity  as 
a  matter  of  indifference,  to  whom  Christ  is 
merely  a  "  one  Jesus."  (Ver.  17-20 ;  18  :  14- 
17.) 

18.  The  person  of  Christ,  his  life,  death, 
and  resurrection,  are  the  great  central 
themes  of  Christianity  in  all  ages  ;  and  they 
have  determined  the  whole  system  of  theol- 
ogy, both  in  theory  and  practice.     (Ver.  19.) 

19.  Paul  did  not  fear  death  ;  but  he  would 
not  recklessly  throw  away  his  life.  Martyr- 
dom is  not  to  be  sought,  but  rather  avoided. 
(Ver.  20,  21.) 

20.  Agrippa's  curious  desire  resulted  in 
Paul's  wonderful  defence,  and  if  not  in  his 
own  good,  in  the  good  of  all  ages.  (Ver.  22 ; 
ch.  26.) 

21.  Outward  pomp  often  covers  poverty  of 
mind  and  character.    (Ver  23.) 

22.  Beauty,  show,  and  princely  grandeur 
pass  away,  but  God's  word  endures  forever. 
(Ver.  23-26  ;  1  Peter  1  :  24.) 

23.  Paul  was  every  inch  a  man  and  a 
Christian,  willing  to  stake  his  life  for  Christ 
and  the  truth,  and  ready  to  ])roclaim  the 
gospel  before  all  classes  of  men.  (Ver.  24 ; 
20  :  24  ;  Rom.  15  :  19.) 

24.  As  Christ  was  sent  by  Pilate  to  Herod, 
so  Paul  is  placed  before  Agrippa.  (Ver.  25, 
26 ;  Luke  23  :  7.) 

25.  In  every  age  God's  children  have  need 
to  pray  to  be  delivered  from  unreasonable 
men.    (Ver.  27  ;  1  Thess.  3  :  5.) 

26.  The  great  tribunal  is  our  last  appeal. 
We  may  fail  to  get  justice  here,  but  we  shall 
obtain  full  justice  at  the  bar  of  God.  (Ver. 
24-27  ;  2  Cor,  5  :  10.) 


374 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVI. 


PauVs  address  before  King  Agrippa. 
ae    THEN  Agrippa  saidunto  Paul, i° Thou 
art  permitted  to  speak  for  thyself. 

Then  Paul  stretched  forth   the  hand, 
and  answered  for  hinii^elf : 

2  I  think  myself  happy,  king  Agrippa,  he- 
cause  I  shall  answer  for  myself  this  day 
before    thee   touching    all    the    things 

3  whereof  I  am  accused  of  the  Jews :  espe- 


cially because  I  know  thee  to  be  expert  in 
all  customs  and  questions  which  are 
among  the  Jews:  wherefore  I  beeseech 
thee  to  hear  me  patiently. 

4  My  manner  of  life  from  my  youth, 
"which  was  at  the  first  among  mine  own 
nation  at  Jerusalem,  know  all  the  Jews; 

5  which  knew  me  from  the  beginning,  » if 
they  would  testify,  that  after  p  the  most 


'  ch.  25  :  16.        "  ch.  22  :  3.        «  ch.  22  :  5.        P  ch.  23  :  6  ;  Phil.  3  :  5. 


Ch.  26  :  1-32.  Paxil's  Defence 
Befoee  King  Agrippa.  (Rom.  is :  is,  19. 
SeeonS:  1-30;  22:1-21)  Regarding  the  three 
accounts  of  Paul's  conversion,  see  in- 
troductory remarks  to  9  :  1-22.  This 
defense  occured  probably  about  the 
middle  of  August,  A.  T>.  60. 

1.  Festus  having  stated  the  case 
(25:24-27),  and  the  company  being  in 
waiting,  King  Agrippa  assumes  the 
presidency  of  the  assembly.  With  his 
u.sual  courtesy  (25:22),  he  says,  not  "  I 
l)ermit  thee,"'but  Thou  art  permit- 
ted to  speak,  in  deference  to  Festus, 
tlie  governor.  For  thyself — vet, 
rather,  for  Jesus,  the  Christ,  who  had 
called  hiiu  into  his  kingdom  and  made 
him  his  minister  and  apostle.  Then 
I'aul  stretched  forth  his  hand— 
the  usual  gesture  in  addressing  a  pub- 
lic assembly  ;  now  especially  impress- 
ive by  the  chain  which  hung  from  it. 
(ver.  iM.)  Similar,  though  not  exactly 
the  same,  as  the  beckoning,  or  shaking 
the  hand  to  .secure  attention  in  13  :  16 ; 
19  :  33.  Answered  for  himself-— 
or  made  his  defence,  not  so  much  to 
jirove  his  innocence,  for  he  was  not  now 
on  trial,  as  to  exjjlain  the  reason  of  his 
becoming  a  Christian  and  preaching 
the  gospel.  It  is  one  of  the  most  won- 
derful addresses  recorded  in  history. 
It  consists _/!rs<,  of  a  few  courteous  intro- 
ductory words  (vpr.  2. 3) ;  second,  a  glance 
at  his  early  life  and  at  Israel's  hojie, 
for  which  he  stands  accused  of  the 
Jews  (»er.  1-7) ;  third,  relates  his  conver- 
sion as  an  evidence  of  the  Messiahship 
and  resurrection  of  Jesus  (»er.  sia); 
fourth,  his  ajipointment  as  a  minister 
and  apostle  (ver.  le  18) ;  and  Jifth,  his 
obedience  to  the  heavenly  vision,  in 
preaching  the  gospel  to  both  Jews  and 
Gentiles,     (ver.  "19-24.) 

2.  I  think  myself  happy,  etc. — 
after  so  many  attempts  to  make  him- 
self understood    before  such  men   as 


Lysias,  Felix,  and  Festus,  Paul  could 
congratulate  himself  in  now  address- 
ing one  who  could  understand  and  ap- 
preciate his  case.  His  compliment  to 
Agrippa  was  a  courteous  acknowledg- 
ment of  his  acquaintance  with  Jewish 
hopes,  customs,  and  controversies. 

3.  Especially  because  I  know 
thee  to  be  expert,  etc. — rather, 
Especially  since  thou  art  an  expert  in 
all  customs,  civil  and  religious, 
whether  established  by  law  or  usage, 
and  questions,  subjects  of  disputes 
among  Jews,  both  among  themselves 
and  between  the  sects.  Agrippa  was 
professedly  a  Jew,  and  had  had  great 
opportunities  for  knowing  these  mat- 
ters ;  and  as  a  crowned  vassal  of  the 
Roman  Empire  he  also  had  thorough 
knowledge  of  Roman  affairs  among  the 
Jews.  The  Rabbinic  writers  speak  of 
him  as  excelling  in  his  knowledge  of 
the  law  and  traditions.  "And  as  the 
traditions  which  they  follow  could  not 
have  flowed  from  this  passage,  it  con- 
firms the  representations  here  by  an 
unexpected  agreement."     (Hackett.) 

4.  In  this  and  the  next  verse  Paul 
speaks  of  his  early  training,  belief  and 
conduct.  At  the  first — better,  from 
the  begimting.  Though  born  at  Tar- 
sus, he  always  dwelt  among  his  own 
people.  At  Jerusalem,  or,  accord- 
ing to  the  oldest  manuscripts.  And  at 
Jerusalem.  He  came  early  to  Jerusa- 
lem for  his  education.  (22:'3.)  Know 
all  the  Jews  —  he  was  generally 
known  by  his  attainments,  his  promi- 
nence among  them,  and  as  a  leader  in 
the    persecution    against     Christians. 

(9:1,2.) 

5.  Paul  says  from  my  youth  in  the 
preceding  verse;  herefrom  the  be- 
ginning, or  from  the  first,  implying 
knowledge  of  him  from  his  very  child- 
hood. If  they  would,  or  ivere  will- 
ing to   testify.      There    were    those 


Ch.  XXVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


375 


Btaitest   sect  of  our  religion  I  lived  a 

6  Pharisee.  lAnd  now  I  stand  and  am 
judged  for  the  hope  of  ■•  the  promise  made 

7  of  God  uulo  our  lathers:  unto  which 
promise  sour  twelve  tribes,  instantly 
serving  God  'day  and  night,  "hope  to 


come.     For   -which    hope's    sake,   king 

8  Agrippa,  I  am  accused  of  the. lews.  'Why 
should  it  be  thought  a  thing  incredi- 
ble with  you'  that  Uod  should  raise  the 
dead? 

9  J I  verily  thought  with  myself,  that  I 


qch.  23  :6.  »  ch.  13:  .■52-,37  ;  Gen.  12  :  3;  22  :  18;  26  :  4;  28  :  14;  49  :  10;  Dent.  18;  15; 
2  Sam.  7  :  12 ;  Ps.  132  :  11 ;  Isa.  9  :  6,  7  ;  Jer.  23  :  5  ;  33  :  14-16 ;  Ezek.  34  :  23 ;  Dan.  9  :  24  ;  Rom. 
15  :  8 ;  Titus  2:13.  "  James  1:1.  t  Luke  2:3.  "  see  Luke  2  :  25,  38.  »  Gen.  18  :  14 ; 
Matt.  22  :  29-32;  1  Cor.  15  :  12-20.        r  John  16  :  2  ;  1  Tim.  1  :  13. 


among  his  accusers  who  knew  him 
from  his  early  years,  and  his  strict 
manner  of  life.  Compare  his  appeal  to 
the  mob  in  his  address  from  the  tower 
steps.  (2s:5.)  The  most  straitest — 
rather,  the  strictest  sect,  or  party.  (See 
on  24:  u.)  In  the  epistles  the  word  only 
occurs  in  the  plural  and  used  in  a  bad 
sense, meaning  "heresies"  or  "factions." 

(l  Cor.  11  :  18  ;  Gal.  5  :  20  ;  2  Peter  2:1.)     Of  OUf 

religion — of  our  religious  discipline, 
having  special  reference  to  the  external 
observances  and  ceremonies  of  Juda- 
ism. I  lived  a  Pharisee.  The 
Pharisees  were  divided  into  two  classes : 
The  followers  of  Hillel,  the  more  lib- 
eral,embracing  such  men  as  Nicodemus, 
Joseph  of  Arimathea,  and  Gamaliel ; 
and  the  followers  of  Shammai,  the 
more  rigid  in  spirit,  to  which  Paul  had 
attached  himself,  not  merely  profes- 
sedly, but  practically  and  heartily,  he 
lived  it.  Compare  his  description  of 
himself  in  Phil.  3  :  4-6. 

6.  And  now,  at  this  time,  in 
contrast  with  what  I  was  in  the 
past,  I  stand  here  on  trial  for 
the  hope  of  the  promise  made 
of  God  unto  our  fathers.  (Gen.  12 ;  3.) 
This  promise  was  of  the  Messiah 
and  his  kingdom,  (see  13 :  32,33.)  This 
bi"ief  reference  was  all  that  was  neces- 
sary for  Agrippa.  A  fuller  descrip- 
tion might  be  misunderstood  by  Fes- 
tus.  The  Jews  expected  that  the  Mes- 
siah would  establish  a  universal  king- 
dom ;  Paul  saw  the  spiritual  nature  of 
this  kingdom,  of  which  Jesus  Christ 
was  the  Head  and  Lord.  (28  :  28-31 ;  1  Cor. 
15 :  J3-28.)  In  this  he  implies  that  so  far 
from  leaving  his  old  religion,  he  was 
faithfully  adhering  to  it. 

7.  Unto  Avhich — promise,  is  under- 
stood, and  is  supplied  in  both  the  Com- 
mon and  Revised  Versions.  The 
twelve  tribes — one  word  in  the  origi- 
nal,   used    collectively  of    the   whole 


Israelitish  people,  as  at  first  composed 
of  twelve  tribes,  and  as  now  represent- 
ing them.  Some  of  the  ten  tribes  re- 
turned from  Babylon  with  Judah  and 
Benjamin,  and  the  priests  and  Levites. 

(Ezra  1  :  5-11  ;  6  :  IT  ;  8  :  35.)      Anna    (Luke  2  :  36) 

was  of  the  tribe  of  Asher,  and  Paul  of 
the  tribe  of  Benjamin.  James  ad- 
dresses his  Epistle  (1 : 1)  "  to  the  twelve 
tribes  that  are  scattered  abroad." 
Instantly,  rather,  earnestly  serving 
God  day  and  night — special  refer- 
ence to  habitual  worship  in  rites  and 
ceremonies,    in    fasting    and    prayers. 

(Luke  2:  37  ;  1  Tim.  5 -5.)        Hope  tO  COme 

— to  attain  unto  the  fulfillment  of  this 
promise,  and  enjoy  its  blessings.  For 
which  hope's  sake— the  hope  of 
the  suffering  and  risen  Christ,  who  in 
consummating  his  kingdom  will  prove 
himself  to  be  a  King  of  kings  and  Lord 
of  lords.  But  strange  to  say,  for  this 
very  hope  practically  believed  and 
held,  I  am  accused  of  the  Jcavs. 
Emphatic  words,  marking  the  incon- 
sistency of  the  Jews. 

8.  The  words  just  uttered  would 
remind  Agrippa  that  Paul  jireached 
the  resurrection  of  Jesus.  It  was  the 
central  fact  of  Christianity,  the  great 
subject  of  discussion  between  Christians 
and  Jews,  and  had  been  referred  to  by 
Festus  to  Agrippa.  (25:19.)  In  view 
of  this,  uppermost  in  his  mind,  and 
prominent  in  the  mind  of  Agrippa, 
Paul  exclaims.  Why  should  it  be 
thought,  etc.  Rather,  Why  is  it 
judged  incredible  with  you,  including 
all  present,   also  the  Jews  of  whom 

you,   king  Agrippa,   form    a  part,  if  .  U 

God  raises  the  dead  f     With  you  is  in  hJ^ 

the  plural.    Is  it  strange  in  view  of  the  .       .' 

past  history  of  our  race  ?     (1  Kings  n  :  n-  5    tf 

23;  2  Kings  ♦:  18-37;  13:21.)         If       not,     whv    -^ 

should  I  be  accused  of  crime  for  hold- 
ing it  ? 

9.  Paul  proceeds  to  state  that    he 


S76 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVI.- 


ought  to  do  many  things  contrary  to  the  ing  received  authority  "from   the  chief 

10  name    of   Jesus  of    Nazaieth.      ^  Which  priests :  and  when  they  were  put  to  death, 

thing  I  also  did  in  Jerusalem  :  and  many     11  I  gave  my  voice  against  litem.    'And  I 

of  the  saints  did  I  shut  up  in  prison,  hav-  j       punished  them  oft  in  every  synagogue, 

'ch.  7  :58;  8:1,  3.        •  ch.  9  :  14,  21 ;  22  :  5.        «>  ch.  22  :  19.  ■'-  I 


was  once  in  a  like  state  of  incredulity 
regarding  the  resurrection  of  Jesus, 
and  to  relate  how  he  was  convinced  of 
the  fact.  I  verily — I  indeed,  in  a  like 
spirit  of  incredulity,  there/ore  thought 
with  myself,  exercising  my  independ- 
ent judgment  in  the  spirit  of  Phari- 
saic self-reliance,  that  I  ought  to  do 
many  things.  He  acted  sincerely 
and  conscientiously,  (mm.)  Con- 
trary to  the  nanie  of  Jesus — who 
was  represented  l)y  his  disciples  and 
his  cause.  Names  often  express  per- 
sonality and  character.     (Geu.  si-.  28;Num. 

13  :  16  :  1  Sam.  4  :  21.)      JVame  WaS  oftCll  USCd 

of  God  in  the  Old  Testament  in  reference 
to  his  perfections  and  Godhead.     (Exod. 

S:  13,14;  33  :  19 ;  5.7;  Ps.  S9  :  2  ;  34:3;  61  :  5. )   The 

name  of  Jesus  frequently  occurs  in  the 
Acts,  denoting  all  that  it  implies,  the 
Saviour,  the  Messiah,  the  Lord, 
Prophet,  Priest,  and  King.  On  it  men 
were  to  believe  (-t :  le) ;  in  it  to  be  bap- 
tized (2:38);  through  it  miracles  were 
performed  (3:6);  and  men  alone  could 
be  saved  (* :  12) ;  and  for  it  the  early 
preachers  hazarded  their  lives,  (is :  20.) 
10.  In  this  verse  Paul  tells  what  he 
did  in  Jerusalem.  First  receiving 
the  garments  at  Stephen's  martyrdom. 
(7:58.)  Many  of  the  saints  1  shut 
up  in  prison,  rather,  prisons,  accord- 
ing to  the  best  reading.  Entering 
house  after  house,  he  laid  hold  of  both 
men  and  women.  (Sceou8:3.)  Notice 
he  uses  the  word  saints  here,  wliich 
occurs  neither  in  Luke's  account  of 
Paul's  conversion,  nor  in  Paul's  speech 
before  the  Jewish  mob.  (n :  1, 2;  22 : 4, 5.) 
Here  Paul  enjoys  great  freedom,  and 
speaks  freely  (ver.  3),  and  applies  to  the 
disciples  an  honorable  title,  which 
Agri]>i)a  would  understand,  and  yet 
which  would  not  be  specially  offensive 
to  him  and  his  hearers  present,  and  at 
the  same  time  would  indicate  the  great- 
ness of  his  own  guilt.  When  they 
were  put  to  death — Stephen  and 
others.  (22:4.)  In  these  accounts  we 
get  but  a  glimi>se  of  his  "  breathing 
out  threatening  and  slaughter."    (» :  1.) 


I  gave  my  voice — literally,  7  cast 
my  pebble,  that  is,  my  vote,  against 
them.  In  ancient  courts  the  accused 
was  condemned  by  black  pebbles,  and 
acquitted  by  white  ones.  Such  a 
phrase  was  sometimes  used  in  the  sense 
of  giving  assent,  approving.  Hence 
some  suppose  that  Saul  was  a  member 
of  the  Sanhedrin,  while  others  regard 
it  as  improbable  on  account  of  various 
reasons,  and  explain  the  phrase  of  his 
moral  assent  and  approval.  The 
words  naturally  imply  that  he  was  a 
meml)er  of  some  tribunal  before  which 
Christians  were  brouglit ;  and  as  Jew- 
ish law  allowed  the  infliction  of  the 
death  penalty  only  to  the  Sanhedrin, 
it  has  been  thought  he  was  a  member 
of  tliat  body.  In  that  case,  according 
to  the  Rabbins,  he  must  have  been  at 
least  thirty  years  old.  The  later 
Rabbins  say  that  a  necessary  qualifica- 
tion of  membership  was  to  be  married 
and  have  children.  That  Paul  was 
married,  and  afterward  a  widower,  has 
been  advocated  by  Ewald  and  Fanar. 
(Life  of  St.  Paul,  pp.  45,  95.)  The 
Jews  held  the  marriage  relation  in 
high  esteem,  and  persons  were  married 
early.  In  1  Cor.  9  :  5  Paul  claimed 
the  right  to  a  married  life,  but  re- 
garded the  unmarried  state  as  better 
fitted  for  his  work.  1  Cor.  7  :  8  may 
not  be  decisive,  but  its  implication  is 
stronger  on  the  side  that  he  never  Mas 
married,  than  that  he  was  a  widower. 
This  question,  as  well  as  that  of  his 
membership  of  the  Sanhedrin,  cannot  be 
positively  settled. 

J 1 .  In  this  verse  Paul  tells  how  he 
carried  on  his  persecution.  I  pun- 
ished them  oft  in  every,  better,  in 
all  the  synagogues,  at  Jerusalem,  and 
the  places  in  Judea,  whither  he  went. 
Scourging  was  the  customaiy  form  of 
punishment  inflicted  in  the  synagogues. 
(See  Matt.  10: 17.)  Compelled  them — 
by  threats  and  by  torture  to  blas- 
pheme, to  rail  at  Christ  and  the 
gospel,  that  is,  to  renounce  their  faith. 

(13  :  45 ;  James  2:7.)      The      language      doe8 


Ch.  XXVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


377 


and  coin).clkd  thrm  to  blaspheme:  and 
being  exceeiiingly  uiad  againt  t.hcin,  I 
persecuted  thr.m  even  uiilo  strange  cities. 

12  =  VVhereupdii  as  1  went  to  l)ania.seus 
with  authority  and  commission  from  the 

13  chief  priests,  at  mid-day,  O  king,  I  saw 
in  the  way  a  light  from  heaven,  above 
the  brightness  of  the  sun,  shining  round 
about    me   and   them   which   journeyed 

14  with  me.  And  when  we  were  all  fallen 
to  the  earth,  I  heard  a  voice  speaking 
unto   me,  and   saying   in    the    Hebrew 


tongue,  Saul,  Saul,  why  persecutest  thou 
me?    /rii- hard  for  thee  to  kick  against 

15  the  pricks.     And  I  said,  Who  art,  thou, 

16  Lord?  And  he  said,  1  am  Jesus  whom 
thou  persecutest.  Hut  rise,  and  stand 
upon  thy  feet :  for  1  have  appeared  unto 
thee  for  this  purpose,  ^  to  make  thee  a 
minister  and  a  witness  both  of  those 
things  which  thou  h;ist  seen,  and  of  those 
things  in  the  which  « I  will  appear  unto 

17  thee:  delivering  thee  from  the  people, 
and/ro?«  the  Gentiles,  f  unto  whom  now  I 


I  ch.  9  :  2-22 ;  22  :  6.        *  ch.  22  :  15.        «  ch.  18  :  9  ;  22  :  18  ;  23  :  11  ;  2  Cor.  12  :  1 ;  Gal.  1  :  12; 
Eph.  3:3.        f  ch.  22  :  21. 


not  necessarily  mean  that  any  did  thus 
actually  blaspheme ;  and  hence  the 
Ke vised  Version  renders,  "  I  strove  to 
make  them  blaspheme."  That  some 
weak  ones  temporarily  denied  Christ, 
like  Peter,  and  some  ontward  disciples 
apostatized  is  probaljle.  ('iTim.  i:i5;  4:io.) 
Being  exceeding  mad,  against 
them — though  conscientious,  lie  was 
iu  a  paroxysm  of  excitement,  tlirough 
pride,  prejudice,  and  hatred — I  per- 
secuted them  even  unto  strange, 
that  is,  foreign  cities. 

12.  Whereupon — while  thus  em- 
ployed as  I  went  to  Damascus.  Here 
he  gives  an  account  of  his  conversion. 
On  this  verse,  see  on  9  :  1,  2. 

13  At  midday — it  was  no  nocturnal 
vision.  (i2 : 6.)  In  addition  to  the  pre- 
vious accounts,  Paul  describes  the 
light,  as  above  the  brightness  of 
the  sun.  There  could  therefore  be  no 
doubt  that  this  was  a  supernatural  light. 

(See  on  9  ;  3.) 

14.  That  the  voice  spoke  in  the 
Hebrew,  is  recorded  only  here.  (See 
on  9 : 4.)  It  is  hard  for  thee  to  kick 
against  the  pricks,  the  goads.  These 
words  are  only  found  here,  according 
to  the  oldest  and  best  manuscripts. 
(See  on  9 : 5.)  A  wcll-kuown  proverb.  The 
figure  is  from  the  driven  ox.  The 
driver  using  a  goad  instead  of  a  whip 
pricks  him,  who,  ignorantly  kicking 
back,  receives  another  wound.  So  it  is 
imjilied,  it  had  been  with  Saul.  God 
had  been  dealing  with  him,  ever  since 
he  had  met  with  Stephen,  when  he  was 
baffled  by  him  in  argument.  (6 :  i9.) 
His  conscience  had  been  touched,  and 
his  heart  troubled.  But  he  recoiled 
from  the  true  light.  (Joim  3 :  20.)  In  ig- 
norance and  prejudice  he  rushes  madly 
on,  and  tries  to  crush  any  promptings  of 


the  Spirit,  and  any  misgivings  or  dis- 
quietude of  soul.      (Rom.  7  :  711.) 

15.  Who  art  thou,  Lord?      On 

this  verse  see  on  ch.  9  :  5. 

16.  Passing  over  the  Lord's  com- 
mand to  go  into  Damascus,  as  only  in- 
cidental to  the  purj)Ose  of  ids  address, 
Paul  relates  how  the  Lord  at  once  com- 
missioned him  as  a  missionary  and  an 
apostle  to  the  Gentiles.  (See  near  tlie 
end  of  the  note  on  9  :  6.)  For  I  have 
appeared  unto  thee.  In  after  days 
Paul  declares   that  he  had  seen    the 

Lord.       (1  Cor.  9:1;  15:  8.    See  on  9  :  3.)        TO 

make  thee,  better,  to  appoint  thee  a 
minister — the  same  as  iu  22  :  14 ;  de- 
noting that  he  was  deliberately  selected 
and  appointed.  And  a  witness  both 
of  the  things  which  thou  hast 
seen,  etc.  Some  ancient  manuscrij)ts 
read,  of  the  things  wherein  tlio^t  hast 
seen  me,  which  is  adopted  by  the  Re- 
vised Version.  But  the  common  read- 
ing is  well  sustained.  The  meaning  is 
essentially  the  same  with  either  read- 
ing. To  have  seen  the  Lord  was  a 
necessary  qualification  to  being  an  apos- 
tle. (1:21,22)  And  of  those  things 
in  the  which  I  will  appear  unto 
thee.  Paul  appears  to  have  been 
favored  above  the  rest  of  the  apostles 
in  visions  and  revelations,    (is :  9;  22 :  is; 

23  :  II  ;  27  :  23;  2  Cor.  12  :  1-7') 

17.  Delivering  thee  from  the 
people,  the  Jews,  and  from  the 
Gentiles,  the  heathen.  How  often 
must  this  promise  have  cheered  him  all 
through  his  troubled  and  checkered 
ministerial  life,  which  he  so  graph- 
ically and  touchingly  describes  in  2 
Cor.  6  :  4-10 ;  11  :  23-27.  Unto  whom 
now  I  send  thee.  Now  should  be 
omitted,  according  to  the  best  text.  / 
is  emphatic.    Send  is  the  verb  from 


378 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVI. 


18  send  thee,  sto  open  their  eyes,  and^  to 
turn  them  from  darkness  to  light,  and 
from,  the  power  of  f^atan  unto  God,  that 
they  may  receive  forgiveness  of  sins,  and 
'  inherilauce  among  them  which  are 
''  sanctified  by  faith  that  is  in  me. 

19  Whereupon,0  king  Agrippa, '  I  was  not 
disobedient    unto  the   heavenly  vision : 


but  ™  showed  first  unto  them  of  Damas- 
cus, and  at  Jerusalem,  and  throughout 
all  the  coasts  of  Judaa,  and  t/ien  to  the 
Gentiles,  that  they  should  repent  and 
turn  to  God,  and  do  "  works  meet  for 
repentance. 
21  For  these  causes  "the  Jews  caught  me 
in   the  temple,  and  went  about  to  kill 


e  Isa.  35  :  5  ;  42  :  7;  Luke  1  :  79.  h  Eph.  5:8;  Col.  1  :  13  ;  1  reter2  :  9.  i  Kom.  8  :  17; 
Gal.  3  :  29  ;  Col.  1  :  12.  k  ch.  20  :  32.  l  Gal.  1  :  16.  "»  ch.  9  :  20,  22,  Z9  ;  11  :  26 ;  ch.  13  to 
ch.  21 ;  Rom.  15  ;  19.         »  Matt.  3:8.        »  ch.  21  :  30,  31. 


which  the  noun  "  apostle  "  comes ;  and 
thus  may  iuclude  the  idea  of  his  apos- 
tleship.  It  is  in  the  present  tense,  im- 
plying that  his  ministry  is  to  begin  at 
once.  It  seems  that  Paul  knew  of  his 
mission  to  the  Gentiles  from  the  very 
first.  (Gal.  1 :  16.)  Compare  the  Scriptural 
phraseology,  Jer.  1  :  7. 

18.  The  object  and  success  of  his 
ministry  is  presented,  which  was  full 
of  encouragement.  The  olyect:  To 
open  their  eyes.  If  the  eyes  of  Jews 
and  Gentiles  were  opened,  then  they 
would  turn,  which  accords  with  the 
more  correct  translation  :  To  open  their 
eyes  that  they  may  turn  from  darkness 
to  light.  Old  Testament  phraseology. 
(Isa. « :  7, 16.)  Christ  is  the  light  of  the 
world,   and   his    gospel    brings    light. 

(Luke  2  :  32;  1  Peter  2  :  9j    Col. a  :  13.)  From 

the   power  of   Satan,  who  is  the 

prince,   and    the    god  of  this  world. 

( Johu  12  :  31 ;  2  Cor.  4  :  4  ;  1  John  5  :  19.)        UutO 

God— the  rightful  Lord,  in  whom  is 
light,  and  who  through  Christ  will 
destroy  the  works  of  the  devil.  (iJohn 
5:8;  3:8.)  That  they  may  receive 
the  forgiveness  of  sins,  etc.— tlie 
immediate  result  ofturningto  God.  And 
inheritance  among  them  that  are 
sanctified — made  heirs  of  God  and 
joint  heirs  with  Christ.  (See on  20 :  32.) 
Here  "sanctified,"  as  well  as  "saint" 
in  Paul's  Epistles,  is  applied  to  those 
wlio  are  in  the  way  of  salvation,  and 
not  to  those  wlio  are  perfect  in  holiness. 
The  last  clause  should  simply  be,  By 
faith  in  me.  It  is  through  "faith  in 
Christ  that  they  are  to  receive  the  re- 
mission of  sins,  and  all  that  follows. 

19.  From  these  facts  Paul  proceeds 
to  justify  his  change  of  position,  and 
his  subsequent  ministry.  M'here- 
upon  ...  I  was  not  disobedient 
— more  exactly,  did  not  become  disobe- 


dient, as  selfish  interests  might  have  in- 
clined me,  in  view  of  tlie  trials  and 
hardships  connected  with  a  life  of 
active  and  positive  service  for  Christ. 
He  did  not  confer  with  tiesh  and  blood. 
(Gal.  1 :  16.)  The  heavenly  vision,  of 
Jesus  and  of  his  will,  was  plainly  a 
suflicient  cause  and  reason  for  the  great 
change  in  his  life  and  work. 

20.  But  shewed — announced  and 
ke])t  on  announcing.  This  in  the 
original  is  joined  to  repent  and  turn, 
etc.  Paul  in  his  preaching,  wherever 
he  went,  was  accustomed  to  enforce 
three  things:  repentance,  including  a 
change  of  purjwse,  a  sorrow  for  and  a 
forsaking  of  sin — turning  to  God,  im- 
plying faith  and  including  a  desire  and 
a  striving  to  do  his  will ;  and  works 
^vorthy  of  repentance,  a  life  of 
practical  godliness,  as  the  fruits  and 
evidence   of  repentance.     (i7:30;U:i5; 

20  :  21 ;    Col.  1  :  28.      Compare  Isa.   55  :  6,  7  ;    Luke 

3 : 8-u.)  The  places  here  named  where 
he  preached  were  first  at  Damascus, 
where  he  was  converted  (» :  2-) ;  also  at 
Jerusalem,  where  he  disputed  with 
the  Grecian  Jews  (9 :  28,  iu),  and  through- 
out all  the  coasts,  the  region  of 
Judea  (11 :  30;  12  •  24, 25;  15 : 3, 4) ;  and  also 

to     the      Gentiles.       (9  :  .30 ;  22  :  21 ;  11  :  25,  26.) 

Paul  ai)pears  here  specially  to  describe 
his  earlier  ministry  before  beginning 
the  first  of  the  three  great  missionary 
tours;  but  by  the  last  clause,  to  the 
Gentiles,  he  glances  through  his  later 
labors. 

21.  For  these  causes — onaccoitnt 
of  these  things,  just  stated:  preaching 
the  gospel,  especially  to  the  Gentiles. 
The  Tatter  was  his  great  and  unpardon- 
able oflFence  in  the  eyes  of  the  Jews. 
(22 :  21.)  The  Jews  caught,  seized  me 
with  violence.  Went  about — better, 
attempted  to  kill  me,  in   the  riot  in  the 


Ch.  XXVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


379 


22  me.  Having  therefore  Pobtained  help  of 
God,  I  coiitiiiuo  unto  this  day,  t  wit- 
uossing  lK)th  to  small  and  great,  saying 
none  other  things  than  those  'which  the 
prophets    and  "Moses    did    say    should 

23  come:  'that  Christ  should  suffer,  and 
o  that  he  should  be  the  first  that  snould 


'rise  from  the  dead,  and  'should  show 
light  unto  the  people,  and  to  the  Gentiles. 
24  And  as  he  thus  spake  for  himself, 
Festus  said  with  a  loud  voice,  Paul,  J  thou 
art  beside  thyself;  much  learning  doth 
make  thee  mad. 


P  2  Cor.  1 

8-10 

;6 

10; 

2  Tim.  4 

:17 

18 

ich 

20  : 

20-27 

'oh 

24 

14 

;28 

:  23 

Kom. 

3 

:21. 

»  John  5  : 

46. 

t 

Luke  24 

26, 

27, 

40. 

u 

1  (kn 

.ir> 

20-23 ; 

Col. 

1  : 

18; 

Rev 

.1:5. 

z 

[iuke  2 

32. 

J 

2  Kings 

9  :  11 ;  Mark  3 

■n 

,  Joh 

u  10 

20; 

1  Cor.  2 

:13 

14 

,  4 

10; 

2  Cor. 

6 

:13. 

temple,  and  afterward  by  their  plots. 
(21 :  n  ;  23 :  12.)  Compare  this  fuller  state- 
meut  with  the  briefer  one  in  ver.  (3. 

'Z2.  Having  therefore  obtained 
help  of  God  —  having  experienced 
succor  that  is  from  God,  referring  to 
the  many  deliverances  during  the  wliole 
course  of  his  ministry.  (18:9.)  There- 
fore, emphasizes  the  divine  help,  which 
had  enabled  him  to  continue  or  stand, 
unto  this  day,  notwithstanding  the 
many  persecutions  which  he  had  en- 
dured.     (2Cor.  4;7-12;  11  :23-27.)       Thushe 

liad  stood  his  ground,  witnessing  or 
testifyinfj  both  to  small  and  great 
—  to  persons  of  both  low  and  high 
rank ;  for  example,  to  the  women  at 
Philippi,  and  now  to  this  most  august 
assembly  in  Palestine.  Saying  none 
other  things  than  those  which  the 
prophets  and  Moses  did  say 
should  come.  He  was  in  perfect 
agreement  with  the  prophets,  and  in 
his  teachings  has  not  gone  beyond  what 
they  had  foretold.  And  he  adds,  as  if 
it  were  an  after-thought,  a/wZ  Moses, 
whose  law  they  charged  him  with 
brealcing,  whose  teaching  with  pervert- 
ing.     (21  :  21.) 

^3.  Paul  states  the  three  great  ques- 
tions of  discussion  between  Christians 
and  Jews,  first,  regarding  a  suffering 
Messiah ;  second,  his  resurrection ; 
third,  his  mission,  alike  to  Jews  and 
Gentiles.  That  Christ  should  suf- 
fer— better.  Whether  the  Christ  should 
suffer.  "  The  apostle,  as  I  understand, 
approaches  the  question  on  the  Jewish 
side  of  it,  not  on  the  Christian ;  and 
that  was,  whether  the  Messiah,  being 
such  as  many  of  the  Jews  expected, 
could  suffer,  not  whether  he  must  suffer, 
in  order  to  fulfill  the  Scriptures." 
(Hackett.)  Of  course  in  these  dis- 
cussions, he  testified  (ver.  22)  to  the  ful- 
fillment of  prophecy  in  the  sufferings 


of  Jesus  as  the  Christ.  That  he 
should  be  the  first,  etc. ;  Whether 
the  first  that  should  rise  from  the  dead 
should  proclaim  light,  etc.  In  this  dis- 
cussion Paul  affirmed  that  Christ  should 
be  the  first-begotten  from  the  dead,  the 
second  Adam.  (1  Cor.  15:20-2:1.)  His  resur- 
rection was  an  earnest  of  the  general 
resurrection.  In  thus  holding  to  the 
resurrection  of  Jesus,  he  could  say  be- 
fore the  Sanhedrin,  "  For  the  hope  of 
the  resurrection  of  the  dead  I  am  called 
in  question."  (23:6.)  And  so  Christ 
brought  life  and  immortality  to  light. 
(2  Tim.  1 :  10.)  If  Paul  provcd  to  his  op- 
ponents that  Christ  should  suffer  and 
die,  it  would  be  easy  to  show  that  then 
he  must  rise  from  the  dead.  (2 :  24-31  ,- 
13 :  32-37.)  The  risen  Christ  was  to  be  a 
Herald  of  light,  of  truth.  But  to  whom  ? 
Was  he  to  be  both  to  the  people, 
that  is  the  Jews,  and  to  the  Gen- 
tiles ?  Paul  took  the  afiirmative,  and 
showed  that  this  was  the  teachings  of 
Moses  and  the  prophets,  from  such  pas- 
sages as  Isa.  42  :  6  ;  49  :  6 ;    60  :  1-3 ; 

Gen.  15  :  18.      (Compare  Luke  2  :  32.) 

34.  Such  a  defense  including  such  a 
gospel  discourse  sounded  strange  to 
Festus'  ears.  While  Christ  crucified 
was  a  stumbling-block  to  the  Jew,  it 
was  foolishness  to  the  Gentile.  (1  cor. 
1 :  28.)  To  the  cool  and  skeptical  Roman 
Paul's  enthusiasm  regarding  the  resur- 
rection of  Jesus,  and  his  gospel  for  the 
whole  world,  seemed  like  the  frenzy  of 
a  fanatic.  Festus  seems  to  forget  wliere 
he  is  and  the  decorum  of  the  occasion, 
and  deeply  absorbed  in  listening  and 
thinking,  cries  out  with  aloud  voice, 
indicating  surprise  and  earnestness, 
Paul,  thou  art  beside  thyself,  or 
mad.  "  Festus  saw  that  nature  was  not 
working  in  Paul ;  grace  he  did  not  see ; 
therefore  thought  it  a  Jewish  frenzy." 
(Bexgel.)  Much  learning,  literally 


380 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVI. 


25  But  he  taid,  ^I  am  not  mad,  'most 
noble    Kestus ;    but    si)eak    forth    •'the 

26  words  of  truth  and  soberness.  For  the 
king  knoweth  of  these  things,  before 
whom  also  1  speak  freely :  for  I  am  per- 
suaded that  none  of   these  things    are 


hidden  from  him ;  for  =  this  thing  was  not 

27  done  in  a  corner.  King  Agrippa,  be- 
lievest  thou  the  prophets  ?  1  know  that 
thou  believest. 

28  Then  Agrippa  said  unto  Paul,  ^  Almost 


;  John  8  :  49. 


•  Prov.  15  : 1 ;  Col.  4:6.        >>  Titus  2  ;  7,  8.        «  ch.  2  : 1-12  ;  4  :  16-22  ;  Luke 
24  :  19.        ■i  Mark  6  :  20  ;  10  :  17-22 ;  James  1  :  23,  24. 


many  fetters,  which  may  refer  either  to 
the  many  writings  Paul  had  read,  or 
to  the  knowledge  he  had  obtained  from 
them,  his  reputed  attainments.  Festus 
liad  doubtless  heard  of  Paul,  as  dis- 
tinguished among  the  Jews  for  his 
scholarship ;  and  it  was  natural  for  a 
Roman,  and  a  lieathen,to  imagine  that 
much  Jewish  learning,  es2)ecially  in 
the  Scripture,  would  make  one  mad. 
More  exactly,  Tur-ns  thee  to  madness. 
A  little  less  literally,  Alford  well  ren- 
ders, Is  turning  thy  brain.  He  evi- 
dently spoke  seriously,  not  jestingly, 
as  the  answer  of  Paul  naturally  im- 
plies. 

25.  I  am  not  mad.  A  calm  and 
courteous  reply,  a  model  to  all  under 
trying  circumstances.  Most  noble, 
better,  excellent  Festus.  So  Felix 
was  addressed  (23 :  26),  on  which  see. 
Words  of  truth — facts,  and  not  the 
imaginations  of  a  disordered  brain. 
Soberness  or  saneness,  as  opposed  to 
madness. 

26.  He  could  not  hope  to  convince 
a  heathen  who  thought  his  words  were 
like  the  ravings  of  a  mad  man.  He 
therefore  appeals  to  Agrippa  whose 
education  fitted  him  to  appreciate  his 
arguments,  and  to  see  in  his  great  sacri- 
fices for  his  conscientious  convictions  a 
heroism  like  that  of  the  old  prophets. 
None  of  these  things  are  hidden 
from  him  —  concerning  the  life  and 
works,  the  death  and  resurrection,  of 
Jesus,  and  the  subsequent  preaching 
and  spread  of  the  gospel.  The  king 
was  familiar  with  these  facts  and  there- 
fore Paul  could  speak  before  him  freely 
or  boldly.  For  this  thing,  this  whole 
aSair,  has  not  beenAowe  in  a  corner. 
Christianity  was  not  born,  nor  was  it 
reared  in  secret.  Jesus  had  spoken  and 
wrought  0})enly ;  and  the  Pharisees  ex- 
claimed, "  The  world  is  gone  after  him." 
(johuii:  19.)  And  he  was  crucified  at 
Jerusalem,  and  during  the  passover. 
The  apostles  aroused  the  nation  (s :  28) ; 


and  in  foreign  lands  the  cry  went  up 

against  them,  "  These  that  have  turned 
the  world  upside  down  are  come  hither 

also."       (17:6.) 

27.  Perceiving  the  power  he  was  ex- 
erting over  Agripjm,  Paul  determines 
to  push  his  appeal,  and  turn  the  king's 
convictions  to  his  own  advantage.  Be- 
lievest thou  the  prophets?  who 
foretold  those  things  which  correspond 
so  closely  to  the  history  of  Jesus.  As 
a  Jew  Agrippa  professed  to  believe 
them.  Yet  Paul  awaits  not  an  answer  ; 
but  answers  it  himself,  being  assured  of 
what  it  would  be.  I  know  that  thou 
believest — not  merely  from  political 
and  selfish  motives,  arising  from  his 
fiimily  and  Jewish  connections ;  but 
from  conviction.  So  assured  is  he  that 
Agrippa  believed  in  the  prophets  aa 
inspired  men,  that  he  exclaims,  I  know. 
It  would  be  very  tame  to  suppose  that 
he  only  meant,  "  I  think  "  or  "  con- 
jecture that  you  believe." 

28.  Expositors  difier  much  regard- 
ing the  exact  meaning  of  the  original 
here,  and  the  corresponding  phrase, 
"  almost  and  altogether,"  of  the  next 
verse.  It  is  generally  agreed  that  the 
rendering  of  the  Common  Version, 
Almost,  etc.,  held  by  Chrysostom, 
Luther,  and  others,  is  incorrect.  The 
(jreek  is.  In  little  thou  persuadest  me 
to  become  a  Christian,  and  in  the  next 
verse,  both  in  little  and  much,  or  both 
in  little  and  great.  Some  with  Hack- 
ett,  Neander,  and  others,  refer  this  to 
time.  In  a  little  time,  etc.  But  to  this 
it  is  objected,  that  the  Greek  reading 
for  much  or  great,  in  tlie  next  verse, 
now  approved  by  the  highest  author- 
ities, must  be  used  not  in  a  temporal 
but  a  quantitative  sense,  in  a  great 
amount.  Hence  Meyer  and  others  pre- 
fer to  translate.  With  little  effort,  or 
With  a  little  utterance,  that  is.  With  a 

few  words,  as  the  phrase  is  rendered  in 
Eph.  3  :  3.  Accordingly  the  Bible 
Union  Version  reads,  With  little  pains 


Ch.  XXVI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


3S1 


thou   persnadrst   me  to  be   a  Christian. 

29  And  Paul  said,  '  1  would  to  God,  that  not 

only  thou,  but  also  all  that  hear  lue  this 


day,  were  both   almost,  and  altogether 
such  as  I  am,  except  these  bonds. 
30      And  when  he  had  thus  spoken,  the  king 


0  Koni.  9  :  1-3 ;  10  :  1. 


thou,  persuadest  me  to  be  a  Christian. 
The  Revised  Version  paraphrases  thus, 
With  but  little  persuasion  thuu  wuuhlst 
fain  make  me  a  Christian.  Both  ver- 
sions give  the  alternate  reading  iu  the 
margin,  In  little  time.  And  both  ren- 
der the  phrase  in  the  next  verse,  with 
little  or  much.  An  objection  to  these 
views  is  that  they  involve  Paul's  reply 
in  a  peculiar  phraseology,  and  foi-ce  the 
and  into  the  sense  of  or,  which  is  not 
authorized  in  Greek. 

The  most  natural  and  the  simplest 
view,  and  the  one  most  free  from 
objection,  is  to  take  the  words  just  as 
they  stand,  in  the  sense  of  degree  or 
measure,  In  a  little  degree  thou  per- 
suadest me  to  be  a  Christian;  thus 
courteously  acknowledging  some  force 
to  his  arguments.  This  is  substantially 
that  of  Tyndale  and  Cramner,  Somewhat 
thou  persuadest  me,  etc.,  and  adopted 
by  Alexander.  It  presents  also  a  pres- 
ent fact,  indicated  by  the  present  tense, 
Thou  persuaded.  It  also  gives  the 
phrase  iu  the  next  verse  a  natural  and 
grammatically  correct  rendering,  / 
could  ]}ray  God,  that  both  in  a  little 
degree  and  in  a  great  degree,  not  only 
thou,  etc.  So  also  the  Improved  Bible 
Union  Version,  following  the  reading 
of  some  of  the  oldest  manuscripts, 
translates  "  Thou  somewhat  persuadest 
me  to  make  me  a  Christian."  Another 
question  much  discussed  is  regarding 
the  spirit  in  which  Agrippa  spoke. 
Those  who  would  supjjly  the  idea  of 
time  or  effort  after  little,  generally  as- 
sume that  Agrippa  spoke  sarcastically  or 
in  irony.  But  of  this  there  is  no  in- 
intimation  in  the  whole  passage,  and  at 
least  is  not  in  close  harmony  with 
Paul's  reply.  It  has  been  said  that 
Agrippa  would  not  have  used  the  word 
Christian,  which  was  one  of  ill-repute, 
in  any  other  way  than  in  irony  or  sar- 
casm. But  ChHstian  was  becoming 
a  common  name,  apjilied  to  believers 
generally  by  those  from  without.  It 
was  doubtless  the  easiest  and  most 
natural  way  for  Agrippa  to  designate 
a  disciple,  (see  on  u  :  26.)   It  seems  there- 


fore better  to  regard  his  answer  as  a 
courtly  and  comj)limentary  apprecia- 
tion of  Paul's  eloquence,  acknowledging 
some  force  to  the  facts  and  the  trutlis 
Paul  had  uttered  regarding  Jesus 
Christ  and  the  prophets.  This  accords 
also  with  Agrippa's  courtesy  exempli- 
fied elsewhere,  (m  :2:j;  26:  i.)  If  this 
be  correct,  it  then  confirms  the  view 
advocated  in  these  notes,  that  Paul  did 
produce  some  impression  on  Agrippa, 
which  he  courteously  and  perhaps 
evasively  admitted.  That  he  was  im- 
pressed favorably  with  what  Paul  said 
is  evident  from  his  subsequent  words. 

(Ver.  32.) 

39.  I  would  to  God—/  could 
wilUnglj  pray  God  were  I  guided  by 
the  wish  of  my  heart ;  I  could  give 
vent  even  now  to  audible  supplication, 
if  it  would  not  offend,  even  though  it 
might  be  unavailing.  Yet  his  words 
were  a  prayer,  not  only  for  Agrippa, 
but  also  for  Festus  and  the  whole  com- 
pany. Were  both  almost,  etc.— 
ratlier,  that  both  in  a  little  degree, 
aiod  in  a  great  degree,  not  only  thou, 
but  also  all  that  hear  me  this 
day,  may  become  such  as  I  am.  (See 
ou  ver.  28.)  Paul  intimates  that  he  would 
have  the  degree  sufiiciently  great  to 
secure  proper  results.  Except  these 
boiids---douhtless  holding  up  the  hand 
from  which  the  chain  was  sus])ended. 
That  they  might  have  his  joys  and  his 
hopes,  without  the  persecution,  was  the 
best  prayer  he  could  ofier  for  them. 
There  is  a  beautiful  courtesy  and  ten- 
derness in  his  language.  With  a  nice 
delicacy  he  refrains  from  using  the 
name  Christian,  lest  his  wish  miglit  in 
any  way  suggest  or  savor  of  reproach. 
Truly  Paul  was  helped  by  God  (ver.  22) 
through  the  Holy  Si)irit.  (Mark  10 :  19. 20 ) 

30.  The  words  When  he  had 
thus  spoken  are  not  found  in  the 
oldest  and  best  manuscripts.  The 
king  rose  up,  etc — and  thus  the  spell 
produced  by  Paul's  eloiiuence  was 
broken.  Notice  Bernice  is  again 
mentioned,  as  if  a  principal  figure  in 
the  gathering.   They  that  sat  Avith 


382 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVL 


rose  up,  and  the  governor,  and  Bernice, 

31  and  tbey  that  sat  with  them :  and  when 

they  were  gone  aside,  they  talked  between 

themselves,   saying,   'This   man    doeth 


nothing  worthy  of  death  or  of  bonds. 
32  Then  said  Agrippa  unto  Festus,  This  man 
might  have  been  set  at  liberty,  t  if  he  had 
not  appealed  unto  Csesar. 


'  ch.  23  :  9,  29  ;  25  :  25.        s  ch.  25  :  11. 


them  — the  chief  captains  and  princi- 
pal men  of  Csesarea.  (25:23.)  Such 
details  evidently  came  from  an  eye- 
witness. 

31.  Having  gone  aside  for  consulta- 
tion, (hei/  talked  toyrtlter,  saying,  This 
man  doeth  nothing  worthy  of 
death  or  of  bonds — a  full  acknowl- 
edgment of  Paul's  innocence.  And  so 
all  along  it  had  been  admitted.    (Ch.  23; 

24  :  22;  25  :  IS,  19,  2o.) 

32.  This  man  might  have  been 
set  at  liberty,  etc.— Agrippa's  ver- 
dict, looking  both  from  a  Roman  and 
Jewish  standpoint.  In  his  Words  of 
the  Apostle,  Stier  calls  attention  to  tlie 
fact,  that  at  the  outbreak  of  the  great 
Jewish  war,  some  eiglit  years  after  this 
scene,  Agrippa  protected  the  Chris- 
tians, receiving  them  kindly  into  his 
territory.  But  thougli  Paul  was  inno- 
cent, yet  through  Festus'  course,  he 
had  been  compelled  to  appeal  to  Ca?sar. 
And  this  put  it  out  of  tlie  power  of  a 
lower  court  either  to  condemn  or  to 
acquit.  But  God  was  overruling,  so 
that  Paul  might  go  to  Rome  and  labor 
there,  (oeu.  .=iO:-.'o.)  Festus  probably 
commended  Paul  to  the  clemency  of 
Csesar.    (28 :  le.) 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  We  should  always  be  in  readine-'s  to 
give  a  reason  of  the  faith  that  is  in  us. 
(Ver.  1 ;  1  Peter  3  :  15.) 

2.  We  should  set  an  example  in  our 
speech,  speaking  the  truth  in  courtesy. 
(Ver.  2 ;  2  Tim.  2  :  24 ;  Titus  3:2.) 

3.  Christianity  can  well  demand  a  patient 
hearing  before  intelligent  men.  (Ver.  3; 
Luke  1 : 1-4.) 

4.  Strict  religious  training  in  early  life  is 
often  one  of  the  preparations  of  great  preach- 
ers.   (Ver.  4,  5;  1  Tim.  1 :  5,6.) 

5.  The  law  and  the  gospel  are  not  antag- 
onistic. The  hopes  of  the  former  are  real- 
ized through  the  latter.  (Ver.  6,  7;  Bom. 
8 : 3,  5.) 

6.  The  Messiah  of  the  Old  Testament  is 
Jesus  Christ  of  the  New.  (Ver.  7;  Luke 
24 :  27.) 


7.  The  resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ  is  a 
well  attested  and  fundamental  fact  of  Chris- 
tianity.    (Ver.  7  :  8  ;  1  Cor.  15  :  1-16.) 

8.  In  view  of  God,  as  Almighty,  as  the 
Creator,  the  Author  of  life,  and  the  Pre- 
server of  our  being,  the  doctrine  of  the  res- 
urrection is  perfectly  reasonable.  (Ver.  8 ; 
17  :  24-31.) 

9.  .Sincerity  is  not  religion.  Conscience 
may  be  wrongly  trained,  or  perverted  by 
passion  or  prejudice.    (Ver.  9  ;  John  16:2.) 

10.  Men  are  responsible  for  their  convic- 
tions as  well  as  for  their  conduct.  (Ver.  9, 
10;  Luke  19:  22,23.) 

11.  Further  on  ver.  10-15,  see  Practical  Re- 
marks, 2,  3,  4,  5,  and  8  upon  ch.  9. 

12.  Every  Christian  is  called  into  Christ's 
kingdom  for  some  purpose  and  work.  (Ver. 
16  ;  1  Cor.  7  :  20-24.) 

13.  Preachers  are  called  to  be  servants  and 
witnesses  of  Christ.  (Ver.  16 ;  Mark  10  :  44, 
45  ;  Ileb.  5  :  4.) 

14.  No  man  is  qualified  for  the  ministry 
without  experimental  knowledge  of  Jesus 
Christ,  so  as  to  testify  of  him.  (Ver.  16 ; 
Rom.  10:14,15.) 

15.  Whoever  is  called  into  the  ministry 
has  the  promise  of  the  divine  protection  and 
care.    (Ver.  17  ;  Matt.  25 :  20.) 

16.  The  ministry  is  intended  for  the  in- 
struction and  conversion  of  men,  and  for 
perfecting  the  saints  in  the  divine  life. 
(Ver.  18;  Eph.  4: 11-13.) 

17.  Forgiveness  of  sins  and  a  title  to 
heaven  is  only  assured  through  faith  in 
Christ.    (Ver.  18  ;  Rom.  8  : 1.) 

18.  We  are  not  mere  machines  in  God's 
.service,  but  we  must  exercise  our  reason, 
judgment  and  will  in  obeying  Gk)d.  (Ver. 
19;  Gal.  1  :  16.) 

19.  True  repentance  is  evidenced  by  a  life 
of  godliness  and  obedience  to  the  commands 
of  God.     (Ver.  20 ;  Matt.  3 :  8, 9.) 

20.  The  jilace  for  the  young  convert  to  be- 
gin work  for  Christ  is  where  he  is,  and 
where  he  is  known.     (Ver.  20 ;  Mark  5  :  19.) 

21.  It  is  only  through  help  from  God  that 
Christians  and  ministers  continue  in  his 
service.    (Ver.  22 ;  1  Sam.  7  :  12.) 

22.  Christian  ministers  should  not  go  be< 


Ch.  XXVil.] 


THE  ACTS. 


383 


yond  the  word  of  God  in  their  preacliing. 
(Ver.  22 ;  Isa.  8  :  20.) 

23.  Jesus  should  be  preached  both  as  a 
suffering  and  a  risen  Christ,  and  as  a  Sav- 
iour suited  for  all  people.  (Ver.  23 ;  Matt. 
28  :  19.) 

24.  The  world  often  thinks  the  earnest- 
ness, devotion,  and  sacrifices  of  Christians 
fanaticism  or  madness.  (Ver.  24;  Mark 
3  :  21 ;  2  Cor.  5  :  13.) 

25.  The  only  truly  sober  people  in  the 
world  are  the  servants  of  Christ.  (Ver.  25; 
Luke  15 :  17.) 

26.  Christians  can  appeal  to  facts  and  to 
the  consciences  of  men  in  proof  of  Chris- 
tianity.   (Ver.  26 ;  2  Cor.  4 :  2.) 

27.  Many  give  an  intellectual  reception  to 
the  truth,  but  believe  not  from  the  heart. 
(Ver.  27  ;  Rom.  10 :  9,  10.) 

28.  Pride,  worldly  station,  and  their  imme- 
diate surroundings  often  keep  persons  from 
giving  anything  but  a  slight  assent  to  the 
claims  of  the  Christian  religion.  (Ver.  28 ; 
Luke  13  :  24.) 

29.  We  should  earnestly  pray  that  faint 
impressions  may  become  deep  ones,  and  that 
small  beginnings  may  result  in  the  salva- 
tion of  the  soul.     (Ver.  29  ;  Phil.  1  :  1-6.) 

30.  Chains  of  iron  with  a  hope  in  Christ 
are  better  than  royalty  with  en  unrenewed 
heart.     (Ver.  29.) 

31.  The  most  faithful  appeals  of  the  gos- 
pel, if  respectful  and  courteous,  may  be  made 
without  offence,  and  result  in  good.  (Ver. 
80-32.) 

Ch.  27 :  In  this  chapter  Luke  gives 
an  account  of  Paul's  last  recorded  voy- 
age from  CEesarea,  and  his  shipwreck 
on  the  island  of  ^lalta.  It  is  the  most 
remarkable  document  of  antiquity  re- 
garding the  ships  and  navigation  of 
the  ancients.  Its  exactness  of  details 
in  its  geographical  references,  and  its 
use  of  nautical  terms,  are  strong  evi- 
dences of  the  trustworthiness  of  the 
book.  The  style  though  accurate  is 
unprofessional.  "  No  sailor  would 
have  written  in  a  style  so  little  like  a 
sailor  ;  no  man  not  a  sailor  would  have 
written  a  narrative  of  a  sea  voyage  so 
consistent  in  all  its  parts,  unless  from 
actual  observation.  This  peculiarity 
of  style  is  to  me,  in  itself,  a  demonstra- 
tion that  the  narrative  of  the  voyage  is 
an  account  written  bv  an  eye-witness. 


A  similar  remark  may  be  made  on  the 
geographical  details.  They  must  have 
been  taken  from  actual  observation, 
for  the  geographical  knowledge  of  the 
age  was  not  such  as  to  enable  a  writer 
to  be  so  minutely  accurate  in  any  other 
way."  (James  Smith,  Esq.,  Voyage 
and  Shipwreck  of  St.  Paid,  Fourth 
Edition,  1880,  p.  xlvi.)  To  this  stand- 
ard work  I  am  largely  indebted  in 
this  chapter. 

Ships  of  the  ancients.  Some  knowl- 
edge of  these  is  necessary  for  the  cor- 
rect understanding  of  this  chapter. 
Below  the  upper  works  of  the  ancient 
shijj  the  prow  and  stern  Avere  alike. 
There  was  commonly  one  mast  in  the 
centre  with  its  large  square  main  sail. 
Triangular  top  sails  seem  to  have  been 
known  among  the  Romans.  A  fore 
sail  was  used  at  the  prow.  The  hinged 
rudder  at  the  stern  was  then  unknown, 
the  ships  being  steered  with  two  paddle 
rudders,  one  on  each  side  of  the  stern. 
The  prow  was  generally  ornamented 
with  figures,  commonly  an  eye,  on  each 
side.  The  stern  was  variously  adorned, 
especially  with  an  image  of  the  guar- 
dian deity  of  the  vessel.  The  merchant 
ships  of  the  Mediterranean  were  of 
large  size,  some  of  tliem  quite  equal- 
ing the  dimensions  of  the  largest  ones 
of  "the  present  day.  (ver.  31.)  The  great 
sliip  of  Ptolemy  Philadelphus,  the  Isis, 
described  by  Lucian  in  one  of  his  dia- 
logues, was  one  hundred  and  eighty 
feet  long,  forty-five  feet  wide,  and 
forty-five  and  one-half  feet  from  the 
top  of  the  deck  to  the  bottom  of  the 
hold.  It  has  been  estimated  to  have 
been  of  over  one  thousand  tons  burden. 
In  speed  ancient  merchant  vessels  com- 
pared quite  favorably  with  those  of 
modern  times.  At  one  time  Cato  held 
up  a  fresh  fig  in  the  Roman  Senate,  ex- 
claiming, "  This  fruit  was  gathered 
fresh  at  Carthage  three  days  ago."  With 
a  fair  wind  a  vessel  could  probably  sail 
seven  knots  or  miles  an  hour,  (soeis: 
n ;  20 : 7 1.1.)  A  question  of  special  im- 
portance is  that  of  the  capability  of  an 
ancient  ship  in  sailing  near  the  wind. 
It  is  known  that  fair  jirogress  could  be 
made  when  the  course  of  the  ship  was 
less  than  a  right  angle  with  the  direc- 
tion of  the  wind.  Taking  the  usual 
divisions  of   the  compass  into  thirty- 


384 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVII. 


Voyage  from  dcsarea  to  Italy;  shipwreck  at 

Melila. 
2T    AND  when  ^  it  was  determined  that  we 
should  sail  into  Italy,  they  delivered  Paul 


and    ccrtnin    other    prisoners    unto  one 

named  Julius,  a  centurion  of  Augustus' 

2  band.    And  entering  into  a  ship  of  Adra- 

myttiuiu,  we  launched,  meaning  to  sail 


b  ch.  25  :  12,  25. 


two  points,  a  modern  vessel    can  in  j 
average  circumstances  sail  within  six  I 
points  of  the  wind ;    and  Mr.  Smith  | 
estimates  that  an  ancient  vessel  could 
sail  withiu  seven  points.     It  must  also 
be  borne  in  mind  that  the  ancients  were 
Avithout    the    compass,    and    without 
exact   chronometers.     Instruments  for 
observations  were  imperfect,  and  charts 
were  almost  unknown.      Hence  they 
were  careful  in  venturing  out  of  sight 
of  land.     They  were  dependent  on  ob- 
serving the  sun  by  day  and  the  stars  by 
night,  and  were  especially  careful  and 
solicitous  in  cloudy  weather. 

Chronology.  A  definite  note  of 
time  is  given  in  27  :  9,  the  fast,  which 
in  A.  D.  bO  occurred  on  September  23, 
from  which  we  can  reckon  both  forward 
and  backward.  Now  the  voyage  from 
Ctesarea  to  Sidon  occupied  over  a  day 
(ver.  3)  ;  a  Week  may  be  allowed  for  the 
circuitous  voyage  to  ^lyra  (ver.  5),  ten  or 
twelve  days  for  sailing  "  slowly  many 
days"  to  Cnidus  (ver.  ?),  and  five  days 
till  they  reach  Fair  Havens  (ver.  8, 9), 
making  at  least  twenty-five  days. 
Thus  they  could  not  have  sailed  from 
Caesarea  earlier  than  September  1. 
Now  if  we  allow  about  ten  days  for 
the  time  between  Paul's  defence  before 
Agrippa  and  his  sailing  away  as  pris- 
oner; six  or  eight  days  for  "the  some 
days  "  of  25  :  14 ;  and  twelve  days  for 
"the  certain  days"  of  25:13;  and 
seventeen  days  intervening  between  the 
arrival  of  Festus  and  trial  of  Paul 
(25: 1-6)  ;  making  in  all  about  a  month 
and  a  lialf,  then  Festus  entered  upon 
the  duties  of  his  office  as  procurator  of 
Judea  about  the  middle  of  July,  A.  D. 
60. 

1-8.  Paul's  Voyage  as  far  as 
Fair  Havens.  From  about  Septem- 
ber 1  to  October  1,  a.  d.  60.  (See 
chronological  note  above.) 

1.  And  when  it  was  deter- 
mined, etc. — Festus  liaving  decided 
that  Paul  should  be  sent  to  Ctesar  at 
the  first  opportunity.  (25: 12. 21 ;  26:32.) 
That    we — Luke    and    Aristarchus. 


(Compare  later  Col.  4  :  14 ;  Philem. 
24.)  Sail — literally,  sail  from,  a 
nautical  term,  used  by  Luke  alone  of 
the  sacred  writers  (is :  4;  u:  26;  20 :  15) 
either  in  simple,  or  as  here  in  its  com- 
pound form.  They  delivered  Paul 
— the  soldiers  who  had  charge  of  him 
by  order  of  Festus,  Certain  other 
prisoners — "A  motley  crowd.  Like 
his  Lord,  Paul  was  numbered  among 
the  transgressors."  (Abbott.)  Jose- 
phus  speaks  of  prisoners  being  sent 
bound  to  Rome,  showing  that  it  was 
not  uncommon.  A  centurion — a 
commander  of  a  hundred  men,  the  offi- 
cer generally  ajjpointed  to  such  a 
charge.  (21:32:24:23.)  Julius,  like 
Cornelius,  was  an  illustrious  name  at 
Rome.  Tacitus  writes  of  Julius  Pris- 
cus,  a  centurion,  antl  afterward  prefect 
of  the  Pra?torians,  who  possibly  might 
be  the  same  as  this  one.  Of  Au- 
gustus' band,  or  cohort,  (lo;  1.)  An 
honorable  and  common  title  in  the 
Roman  military  service ;  and  hence 
difficult  to  identify  here.  Josephus 
(  War,  ii.  12  :  5)  speaks  of  "  the  troops 
of  Sabaste,"  or  Augustan,  at  CiEsarea, 
about  A.  D.  51.  The  Augustan  band 
may  have  succeeded  the  Italian  band 
(10:1),  or  possibly  was  identical  with 
it,  being  composed  of  Italian  troops. 
Some  suppose  that  this  band  was  a  part 
of  the  Imperial  guard,  amounting  at 
that  time  to  ten  thousand  men.  Julius 
perhaps  was  returning  from  some 
special  mission  to  Palestine,  and  the 
prisoners  perhaps  were  entrusted  to 
him. 

2.  A  ship  of  Adramyttium — 
probably  a  coasting  vessel  returning  to 
Adramyttium,  a  seaport  town  of  Mysia, 
in  the  northeastern  part  of  Asia  Minor. 
As  the  vessel  was  to  sail  by  the 
coasts — rather,  nnto  the  places  along 
the  coast  of  Asia,  it  was  expected  that 
it  would  fall  in  with  some  shij)  bound 
for  Rome.  By  Asia  is  meant  the  prov- 
ince of  Asia,  of  which  Ephesus  was 
the  cajutal,  including,  according  to 
Cicero,  Caria  and  Lycia.     The  use  of 


Ch.  xxvil] 


THE  ACTS. 


385 


by  the  coasts  of  Asia ;  one  >  Aristarchus,  a 
Macedonian  of  Thessalonica,  being  with 

3  us.  And  the  next  <lai/  we  toudied  at 
yidon.  And  Julius  *  courteously  en- 
treated Paul,  and  gave  /lim.  liberty  to  go 

4  unto  his  friends  to  refresh  himself.    And 


when  we  had  launched  from  thence,  we 
sailed  under  Cyprus  because  the  winds 
5  were  contrary.  And  whtn  we  had  saiU-d 
over  the  sea  of  Cilicia  and  Pamjihylia, 
we  came  to  Myra,  a  city  of  Lycia. 


Ool.  4:  10.        kch.  24  :23;  28:10. 


merchant  ships  for  travel  and  trans- 
])ortatiou  of  prisoners  was  common  in 
those  days.  Josephus  (  War,  vii.  2  :  1) 
relates  that  the  Emperor  Vespasian, 
during  tlie  siege  of  .Jerusalem,  sailed 
from  Alexandria  to  Rhodes  in  a  mer- 
chant sliip  with  three  hanks  of  oars, 
and  thence  pursued  his  journey  through 
Greece  to  the  Adriatic  Sea,  and  thence 
sailing  to  Italy,  he  went  to  Rome  by 
land.  Aristarchus  was  a  well- 
known  companion  of  Paul,  (see  on 
w :  29.)  Perhai>s  he  as  well  as  Luke 
had  been  more  or  less  witli  Paul  dur- 
ing his  imprisonment  at  Cicsarea. 

3.  And  the  next  day  Ave 
touched,  or  landed  at  Sidon — the 
well-known  seaport  on  the  coast  of 
Phoenicia,  about  seYenty  miles  north- 
east of  Cfflsarea.  It  had  one  of  the 
finest  harbors  of  the  East.  They 
probably  stopped  for  the  purposes  of 
trade.  "  From  the  distance  accom- 
plished ...  we  must  infer  that  they 
had  a  fair,  or  at  least  a  leading  wind, 
probably  westerly,  which  is  the  wind 
which  prev^ails  in  this  part  of  tlie  Med- 
iterranean." (Smith's  Voyage  of  Paul, 
p.  64.)  And  Julius  courteously, 
or  humanely  treated  Paul — he  prob- 
ably had  learned  at  Cassarea  something 
about  Paul's  character,  imprisonment, 
and  his  appeal  to  Caesar.  Possibly  he 
heard  his  defence  before  Agrippa. 
And  gave  him  \\beriy— permitted 
him  to  go  to  his  friends,  probably 
his  Christian  brethren,  some  of  whom 
may  have  been  old  acquaintances.  The 
gospel  had  been  preached  all  along  that 
coast,  (u  :  19.)  Paul  and  Barnabas  had 
traveled  through  that  region  on  their 
way  from  Antioch  to  the  Conference  at 
Jerusalem.  Of  course,  Paul  had  a 
military  escort.  (i5:3)  To  refresh 
himself — or  I)etter,  to  receive  their 
care,  their  liospitality  and  such  .atten- 
tion as  his  circumstances  and  bodily 
health  required.  The  expression  is 
one  which  a  medical  writer,  and  Luke 
as  a  physician,  would  naturally  use  in 


regard  to  care  needed  in  delicate 
health.  Alford  supposes  that  Paul  ob- 
tained here  some  necessary  outfit  for 
his  voyage. 

4.  When  Ave  had  launched— 
another  nautical  term  characteristic  of 
Luke,  for  which  we  have  no  precisely 
corresponding  word  in  Englisli.  it 
means  to  get  under  way  or  put  to  sea. 
The  expression  also  Ave  sailed 
iinder  Cyprus  is  a  nautical  phrase, 
meaning  accoi'ding  to  the  best  author- 
ities, under  the  lee  of  Cyprus,  that  is, 
protected  by  that  island  against  the 
wind,  the  island  being  between  them 
and  the  wind.  This  is  evident  from 
the  reason  given,  Because  the 
Avinds  Avere  contrary,  from  the 
west,  opposing  their  direct  course  1)y 
tlie  south  of  Cyprus,  to  tlie  coast  of 
the  province  of  Asia.  So  they  pro- 
ceed northward  to  tlie  east  and  north 
of  Cyprus.  This  is  confirmed  by  the 
next  verse,  where  it  is  said  they  sailed 
through  the  sea  of  Cilicia  and  Pam- 
phylia,  which  was  north  of  Cyprus. 
The  west  wind  is  the  prevailing  one  in 
tliis  part  of  the  Mediterranean  during 
the  summer  and  autumn.  "  In  pursu- 
ing this  route  they  acted  precisely  as 
the  most  accomplished  seaman  in  the 
present  day  would  have  done  under 
similar  circumstances  ;  by  standing  to 
the  north  till  they  readied  the  coast  of 
Cilicia  they  might  expect  when  they 
did  so  to  l>e  favored  by  the  land  wind, 
which  prevails  there  during  tlie  sum- 
mer months,  as  well  as  liy  the  current, 
which  constantly  runs  to  tlie  westward, 
along  the  south  coast  of  Asia  Minor." 
(Smith's  Voyage,  p.  (JS.)  ^[y.  Smith 
mentions  a  French  navigator  who  took 
this  very  route  for  the  same  reason  as 
here  given.    On  Cyprus,  see  on  11  :  1!». 

5.  And  Avhen  Ave  had  sailed 
over  the  sea,  etc. — more  exactly, 
And  having  sailed  through  the  sea 
along  the  coasts  of  Cilicia  and  Pain- 
phylia.  These  two  countries  were  iiortli 
of  Cyprus,  and  not  included  in  ancient 


386 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVII. 


6  And  there  the  reiitrurion  found  a  ship 
of  Alexandria  sailing  into  Italy  ;  and  he 

7  put  us  therein.    And  when  we  had  sailed 


slowly  many  days,  and  scarce  were  come 
over  against  i  "nidus,  the  wind  not  suffer- 
ing us,  we  sailed  under  Crete,  over  against 


Asia.  (2  :io.)  The  course  of  the  vessel 
appears  to  have  been  northward 
U)ward  the  coast  of  Cilicia,  where  fall- 
ing in  with  the  current  which  flows 
Westward  along  the  southern  shore  of 
Asia  Minor,  as  far  as  the  Archipelago, 
it  could  make  fair  progress  even  with 
unfavorable  winds.  It  now  began  to 
reach  its  destination,  stopping  at 
iTIyra,  the  first  of  "  the  places  along 
the  coasts  of  Asia."  (ver. ;.)  Lycia 
was  a  southwestern  district  of  Asia 
Minor,  and  Myra  about  three  miles 
from  the  sea,  upon  rising  ground,  at 
the  foot  of  which  flowed  the  Andraicus, 
a  navigable  river,  with  an  excellent 
harbor  at  its  mouth.  It  still  exists 
with  its  ancient  name,  and  is  reraark- 
aV>le  for  its  fine  ruins.  The  sliip  had 
come  not  far  from  four  hundred  miles 
from  Sidon. 

6.  Here  the  centurion  found  a  ship 
of  Alexandria  bound  for  Italy,  into 
which  lie  transferred  his  prisoners  and 
jiassengers.  This  ship  appears  to  have 
been  a  large  merchant  vessel  carrying 
wheat,  Egypt  being  at  that  time  one  of 
the  granaries  of  Rome,  with  two  hun- 
dred and  seventy-six  persons  also  on 
board.  It  was  probably  over  five  hun- 
dred tons  burden.  See  introductory 
note  on  ships.  On  Alexandria,  see 
18  :  24,  Myra  was  north  of  Alex- 
andria, and  not  on  the  direct  route  for 
Italy,  but  the  west  or  northwest  wind 
would  naturally  decide  tlie  course  of 
the  vessel  northward,  till  it  reached 
tlie  coast  of  Asia  Minor,  which  "  is 
bold  and  safe,  and  the  elevation  of  the 
mountains  makes  it  visilile  at  a  great 
distance.  It  abounds  in  harbors,  and 
the  sinuosities  of  the  shores  and  the 
westerly  current  would  enable  them,  if 
the  wind  was  at  all  oft"  the  land,  to 
work  to  windward,  at  least  as  far  as 
Cniihis,  where  tliese  advantages 
ceased."     (Smith's  Vor/af/e,  ]).  72.) 

7.  The  distance  from  Myra  to  C  ni- 
dus, a  famous  seaport  town,  on  the 
southwest  point  of  Asia  Jlinor,  was 
one  hundred  and  thirty  miles,  which, 
with  favorable  winds,  a  sailing  vessel 
could  accomplish  in  a  single  day.  But 
biuce    they    sailed    slowly   many 


days,  they  must  have  been  retarded 
by  contrary  winds.  And  scarce — and 

having  come  with  difficulty  over  against 
Cnidus.  Cnidus  marked  the  entrance 
of  the  yEgean  Sea.  Cicero  uses  similar 
language  in  one  of  his  epistles,  "  Hav- 
ing met  with  contrary  winds  and  sailed 
slowly  and  with  difliculty."  The  wind 
not  sufl'ering — this  appears  to  be  a 
nautical  expression,  used  only  by 
Luke,  and  may  mean  either,  not  suffer- 
ing i(s  to  put  in  at  Cnidus  as  they  did 
at  Myra,  or  not  suffering  us  to  proceed 
further  on  their  direct  course  westward 
toward  Italy.  But  the  wind  which 
would  not  permit  them  to  take  shelter 
in  the  harbor  would  prevent  them 
from  taking  this  direct  course.  "  The 
wind,  therefore,  would  in  common  lan- 
guage have  been  termed  northwest. 
Now  this  is  precisely  the  wind  which 
might  have  been  expected  in  those  seas 
toward  the  end  of  summer.  We  learn 
from  the  sailing  directions  for  the  Med- 
iterranean, that  throughout  the  whole 
of  the  Mediterranean,  but  mostly  in  the 
eastern  half,  including  the  Adriatic 
and  Archipelago,  the  northwest  winds 
prevail  in  the  summer  months,  which 
agrees  with  Aristotle's  account  of  these 
winds.  According  to  Pliny,  they  be- 
gan in  August  and  blew  forty  days 
.  .  .  At  Cnidus  .  ,  .  unless  [the 
vessel]  had  put  into  that  harbor,  and 
waited  for  a  fair  wind,  her  only  course 
was  to  run  under  the  lee  of  Crete,  in 
the  direction  of  Salmone,  which  is  the 
eastern  extremity  of  that  island." 
(Smith's  Voyage,  p.  76.)  Crete,  now 
called  Candia,  is  a  large,  mountainous, 
but  fruitful  island,  bounding  the  Greek 
Archipelago  on  the  south.  It  is  one 
hundred  and  forty  miles  long,  but  com- 
paratively narrow.  (See2:ll;  Titus  l: 
5,12.)  The  eastern  promontory  is  still 
called  Salmone,  about  one  hundred 
miles,  a  little  west  of  south  of  Cnidus. 
Bounding  this  cape,  they  sailed 
under,  that  is,  on  the  south  of  Crete, 
the  island  being  between  them  and  the 
wind,  and  thus  sheltering  them,     (see 

ver.  *.) 

8.  And   hardly  passing   it — an- 
other nautical  phrase,  meaning  And 


Ch.  XXVIL] 


THE  ACTS. 


387 


8  Salmoiie ;  and  hardl}^  passing  it,  came 
unto  a  place  which  is  called  The  Fair 
Havens  ;  nigh  whereuuto  was  the  city  0/ 
Lasiea. 

9  Now  when  much  time  was  spent,  and 


when  sailing  was  now  dangerous,  because 
the  fast  was  now  already  past,  Paul  ad- 
10  moiijshed  them,  and  suid  unto  them.  Sirs, 
1 1  perceive  that  this  voyage  will  be  with 
hurt  and  much  damage,  not  only  of  the 


I  Dan.  2:  30;  Amos  3  :  7. 


with  difficulty  coasting  along  it,  that  is, 
along  the  southeru  shore  of  Crete, 
where  the  same  conditious  woiilil 
largely  prevail  as  along  the  southern 
shore  "of  Asia  Minor,  (ver. 5,7.)  The 
northwest  wind  prevented  them  from 
sailing  along  tlie  nortliern  coast  of 
Crete,  where  there  were  two  excellent 
harbors,  Souda  and  Spina  Longer. 
But  with  the  same  wind  they  could 
sail  slowly  in  a  zig-zag  course  along 
the  southern  coast,  aliout  one-half  the 
length  of  the  island,  to  Fair  Havens, 
the  last  harbor  before  reaching  Cape 
Matala,  where  the  land  turns  suddenly 
to  the  north,  beyond  which  an  ancient 
ship  could  not  go  along  the  coast  with 
northwest  winds.  Fair  Havens  was 
discovered  bj'  Pococke  in  the  seven- 
teenth century,  and  is  about  five  miles 
east  of  Cape  Matala,  the  most  conspic- 
uous headland  on  the  southern  coast  of 
Crete.  It  is  not  mentioned  anywhere 
in  ancient  literatui-e,  but  it  still  bears 
the  same  name.  The  plural  Havens, 
or  Harbors,  accords  with  tiie  double 
harbor,  there  contiguous  to  each  other. 
It  affords  a  safe  shelter  from  tiie  north- 
west wind.  It  was  probal)ly  tlie  port 
of  Lasea.  The  latter  place  was  dis- 
covered by  Rev.  George  Brown  in 
1856,  about  five  miles  cast  of  Fair 
Havens  and  close  to  Cape  Leon<la.  He 
says  :  "  We  found  the  ruins  of  two 
temples.  The  ste))s  which  led  up  to 
the  one  remain,  tliough  in  a  sliattered 
state.  Many  shafts,  and  a  few  capitals 
of  Grecian  pillars,  all  of  marble,  lie 
scattered  about  .  .  .  Some  peasants 
came  down  to  see  us  from  the  hills 
al)ove,  and  I  asked  them  the  name  of 
the  place.  They  said  at  once, '  Lasea.'  " 
(Smith's  Voyage,  p.  2ti8,  4th  Ed.) 
This  illustrates  the  mijiute  accuracy  of 
Luke's  reference  to  places. 

9-26.  The  Voy.\ge  Contixukd  ; 
THE  Ship  Caught  by  a  Violent 
Stokm,  and  Drifts  Many  Days. 
From  the  latter  part  of  September  till 
about  November  1,  A.  D.  60. 


9.  When  much  time  was  spent 

— at  the  anchorage  of  Fair  Havens.  It 
was  probal)ly  getting  to  be  about  the 
middle  of  October.  But  some  refer 
mach  time  to  the  whole  voyage  tlms 
far.  Sailing,  or  the  voyage  was  now 
dangerous — because  of  the  lateness 
of  tlie  season.  Navigation  was  closed 
among  tiie  Romans  from  about  the  first 
of  November  until  about  the  middle  of 
March.  They  had  hoped  to  reach  Italy 
that  autumn,  but  unfavorable  winds  and 
the  approach  of  tlie  stormy  season  was 
now  changing  their  purpose,  and  they 
are  debating  as  to  the  harbor  in  which 
to  pass  the  winter.  Ancient  navigators, 
in  favorable  weather,  would  risk  the 
open  sea.  For  example,  Paul  sailed 
from  Patara  througli  the  open  sea  to 
Tyre,  on  his  return  from  his  third  mis- 
sionary journey.  (21 :  i-s.)  But  this 
season  had  been  attended  with  very  ad- 
verse winds.  Clouds  and  storms  might 
be  expected,  which  were  especially 
dreaded  by  mariners,  (ver. 20.)  The 
ship  already  might  have  been  strained. 
(ver.  17.)  Because  the  fast  Av^as  al- 
ready past — the  Jewish  fast  is  here 
used  as  a  note  of  time,  and  was  on  the 
great  Day  of  Atonement,  the  lOtli  day 
of  the  seventh  month,  answering  to 
parts  of  our  September  and  October. 
In  A.  D.  60  it  occurred  on  the  23d  of 
September.  Admonished — advised 
them,  not  to  continue  their  voyage 
farther,  but  winter  there.  Paul  could 
sjieak  from  experience.  He  had  trav- 
eled much,  both  by  land  and  sea. 
Tiirce  times  he  had  suifered  shipwreck. 
(2  Cor.  11 : 25.)  He  could  also  speak  as 
one  under  divine  guidance,  and  it  was 
to  his  advantage  that  he  could  after- 
ward refer  to  this  advice,     (ver.  21.) 

10.  I  perceive — indicating  careful 
consideration,  and  a  well-formed  judg- 
ment, not  ignoring,  however,  the  gen- 
eral divine  guidance  which  he  enjoyed. 
Paul,  however,  does  not  claim  the 
authority  of  revelation  as  in  ver.  23, 
and  we  should  not  claim  it  for  him. 


38$ 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVII. 


lading   and   ship,  but   al.io  of  our  lives. 

11  Nevertheless  the  centurion  believed  the 
master  and  the  owner  of  the  ship  more 
than  those   things    which   were    spoken 

12  by  Paul.  And  because  the  haven  was 
not  commodious  to  winter  in,  the  more 


part  advised  to  depart  thence  also,  if 
by  any  means  they  might  attain  to 
Phenice,  and  there  to  winter;  which  is  an 
haven  of  Crete,  and  lieth  toward  the 
south-west  and  north-west. 


With  hurt — the  noun  in  the  Greek 
properly  denotes  insolence,  with  special 
reference  to  mental  injury;  but  liere  it 
has  reference  to  the  insolent  lu'olence  of 
the  winds  and  waves,  resulting  in  in- 
^"«ry  to  the  ship  and  their  persons.  Much 
damage,  or  loss,  growing  out  of  the 
insolence  and  violence  of  the  dreaded 
tempests  (see  ver.  21),  where  Paul  uses  the 
same  words,  and  this  meaning  is  re- 
quired. The  result  vindicated  Paul's 
a<lvice.  It  was  better  to  remain  in  a 
poorer  harbor  than  to  run  the  risk  of 
gales  and  stormy  weathers  for  a  better 
one. 

11.  Paul  had  evidently  gained  much 
influence  and  freedom.  But  it  was 
natural  that  the  centurion,  who  seems 
to  have  had  control  of  the  matter,  to 
give  preference  to  the  master,  the 
steersman  or  sailing-master,  corre- 
sponding very  nearly  with  our  captain, 
and  to  the  owner  of  the  ship,  both 
of  whom  would  be  well  qualified  to 
judge.  But  Paul  too  liad  had  long  ex- 
perience in  the  "perils  of  the  sea." 
(j  Cor.  11 :  26.)  From  this  verse  and  the 
next  it  appears  that  the  matter  Avas 
quite  thoroughly  discussed.  It  has  been 
ascertained  by  late  surveys  that  Fair 
Havens  is  quite  well  protected  by 
islands,  and  is  a  fair  winter  harbor ; 
that  considering  the  suddenness,  the 
frequency,  and  the  violence  of  nortli- 
erly  winds  which  would  prevent  them 
reaching  Phenice,  and  drive  the  ship 
off  to  sea,  the  wisdom  of  Paul's  advice 
would  probably  be  sustained  even  on 
nautical  grounds.  (Smith,  Voi/ur/e,  85.) 

12.  Not  commodious,  not  well 
situated  for  passinri  the  winter,  which 
they  were  now  thinking  to  do  some- 
where. Fair  Havens  aiibrds  a  protec- 
tion from  north  and  westerly  winds, 
but  is  more  exposed  from  other  direc- 
tions. The  supply  of  provisions  would 
also  be  taken  into  account.  The 
more  part  advised — which  indicates 
a  general  consultation.  To  depart, 
etc. — a  nautical  expression,  to  put  to 
sea  from  thence  also,  as  they  had  from 


other  places,  if  by  any  means  they 
might  reach  Pha'nice.  This  shows  that 
they  regarded  the  voyage  as  perilous, 
but  the  reaching  of  an"  excellent  harbor 
worthy  of  a  hazardous  eftbrt.  Ptolemy 
mentions  a  town  liy  the  name  ofFhoniice 
and  also  a  port,  and  Strabo  mentions  a 
harbor  of  this  name  on  the  south  of 
Crete  at  the  narrowest  part  of  the 
island.  With  this  agrees  well  the 
harbor  of  Lutro  about  forty  miles  west 
of  Fair  Havens;  and  also  a  Avide  bay 
just  west  of  Lutro  and  adjoining  it, 
which  is  still  known  bj'  the  name  of 
Phenika.  The  latter  opens  somewhat 
westward  and  accords  quite  well  with 
the  description,  lieth  toward,  rather, 
looking  toward  or  facing  the  southwest 
and  north  icest.  This  would  be  also  a  safe 
harbor  from  the  northerly  and  easterly 
winds,  and  especially  the  northeast 
wind,  which  proved  so  disastrous  to 
their  ship.  (ver.  u.)  This  is  substan- 
tially the  view  of  Dr.  Hackett,  Ilum- 
plirey,  Wordswortli,  and  Gloag.  But 
Mr.  Smitli  preferred  Lutro  as  the  har- 
bor intended,  because  it  is  the  best 
harbor  on  the  soutliern  coast  of  Crete, 
having  an  island  in  front  whicli  shelters 
it,  and  two  entrances,  one  looking  to 
the  nortlieast  and  the  other  to  the 
southeast.  But  this  is  exactly  opposite 
of  the  deseri})tion  here,  looking  toward 
the  son th west  and  north urst.  Various 
explanations  have  been  proposed.  Jlr. 
Smith  understands  it  of  the  direction 
toward  wliiclt  the  wind  lilows,  the 
sonthvest  wind  blowing  toward  the 
northeast,  etc.  Alford  agrees  with  this, 
looking  down,  the  -nniid.  Dr.  Ilowson 
supposes  that  the  point  of  view  is  from 
the  sea,  sailors  speaking  from  their  own 
point  of  view,  and  thus  the  liarbor, 
viewed  from  tlie  water  on  approaching, 
looks  toward  the  land  which  encloses  it 
in  the  direction  of  "  .southwest  and 
northwest."  Others  sup]iose  that  as  the 
ship  did  not  reach  the  liarbor,  Luke  may 
only  state  the  common  o])inioii  or  report 
in  regard  to  Phenice.  Doubtless  one  of 
ttiese  harbors,   Phenika  or  Lutro,  is 


Ch.  XXVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


389 


13  And  when  the  south  wind  blew  softly, 
supposing  that  they  had  obtained  their 
purpose,  KK'siug //t««ce,  they  sailed  close 

14  by  Crete,    ilut  not  long  after  there  arose 


against  it  a   tempestuous    wind,  called 

15  Euroclydon.      And  when    the   ship  was 
caught,  and  could  not  bear  up  into  the 

16  wind,   we  let  Iter  drive.    And   running 


uieaut.  Oil  ])lulological  grouuils  Plie- 
nika  answers  best  to  the  descriptions. 
The  town  also  may  have  had  two  ports. 
Moreover,  upheavals  and  submergences 
have  been  frequent  in  Crete,  and  thus 
changes  may  have  occurred  in  the  coast 
lines  of  both  of  these  harbors. 

13.  A  change  at  length  occurs,  a 
south  wind  blowing  gently,  and  think- 
ing that  they  had  obtained  their  purpose 
of  removing  to  Phenice,  loosing, 
rather,  they  iveighed  anchor,  that  is, 
raised  up  the  anchors  from  the  bottom 
of  the  sea.  Although  the  south  wind 
was  often  treacherous,  yet  the  voyage 
couhl  l)e  accomplished  in  three  or  four 
hours,  and  their  earnest  desire  to  do  it 
helped  their  thought.  As  it  was  only 
about  four  miles  a  little  south  of  west 
to  Cape  Matala,  and  about  thirty-four 
miles  northwest  thence  to  Port  Phenice, 
it  were  easy  for  them  to  think  that  they 
had  attained  their  purpose.  Mr.  Smith 
observes  that  a  ship  which  could  not 
lie  nearer  to  the  wind  than  seven  points 
would  just  weather  Cape  Matala,  and 
that  this  shows  the  force  and  projn'iety 
of  the  expression,  They  sailed  close, 
or  closer  by  Crete,  than  usual,  or  than 
they  had  done  before.  As  a  matter  of 
special  precaution  they  may  have 
coasted  closely  along  Crete  after  passing 
around  the  cape;  yet  with  no  special 
anxiety,  for  the  boat  was  towing  behind. 

(Ver.  16.) 

14.  But  their  hopes  are  soon  and 
suddenly  blasted.    Not  long  after. 

How  long  we  know  not ;  but  probably 
soon  after  rounding  Cape  Matala.  Vio- 
lent northerly  gales  after  gentle  south- 
erly winds  are  not  unfrequent  on  that 
coast.  Captain  Spratt  writes :  "  After 
starting  from  Fair  Havens  for  Messara 
Bay,  we  left  iriih  a  light  southerly  wind 
and  a  clear  sky  .  .  .  until  we  rounded 
the  cape  (Matala)  to  haul  up  for  the 
head  of  the  bay.  Then  we  saw  Mount 
Ida  covered  in  a  dense  cloud,  and  met 
a  strong  northerly  breeze — one  of  those 
summer  gales  so  frequent  in  the  Levant, 
but  which  in  general  are  accompanied 
by  terrific  gusts  from  those  high  mount- 
ains, the  wind    blowing    direct  from 


Mount    Ida."      Messrs.   Tennent    and 
Brown  speak  of  their  vessel  near  Port 
Phenice  being  becalmed  with  light  airs 
from  the  south  and  southeast,  and  of  a 
heavy  squall  blowing  suddenly  upon  it. 
And  Captain  J.  Stewart  in  his  remarks 
on  the  Archipelago  says  of  southerly 
j  winds,  "  they  almost    invariably  shift 
I  to  a  violent  northerly  wind."     (Smith, 
Voyage,  pj).  100, 102.)     There  arose, 
I  rather.   There  beat  down  against  it, 
:  not  the  island,  but  the  shijJ,  which  was 
large  and  prominent  in  l^uke's  mind. 
1  (ver.  41.)   That  the  wind  was  not  against 
Crete,  but  from  its  mountains,  is  evi- 
,  dent  from  the  fact  that  the  ship  was 
i  driven  away  from  Crete  toward  Clauda. 
I  (ver.  16.)     Or  it  may  be  translated  as  a 
nautical  phrase,  according  to  the  Re- 
vised Version,  There  beat  down  from  it, 
from  Crete,  the  wind  that  bore  them 
seaward.    A  tempestuous  wind — 
literally,  a  typhonic  wind,  an  expres- 
sion used  of  terrific  and  whirling  blasts, 
and  applied  to  luirrlcanes  and  whirl- 
winds.    This   wind   Luke  specifies  as 
the  Euroclydon,  rather,  according  to 
the    highest    critical    authorities    tlie 
I  Euracylon,  which,  popularly  speaking, 
;  is  the  northeast,  or  more    strictly,  the 
[  east-northeast  wind.     Mr.   Smith    has 
shown  that  this  is  just  the  wind  that 
would  have  driven  the  ship  to  Clauda 
(ver.  16),  and  from  thence  into  the  quick- 
sands of  the  African  Syrtis.  (ver.  n.)  The 
narrative  that  follows  shows  that  the 
same  wind  continued  till  they  reached 
Malta.  (Smith,  Foyaprg,  pp.  ioO-3,  272.) 

15.  The  ship  was  caught — being 
seized  by  force,  whirled  from  its  course, 
and  carried  away.  A  strong  expres- 
sion. Could  not  bear  up,  etc. — could 
not  face  the  wind,  a  nautical  expres- 
sion, derived  perhaps  from  painting 
eyes  on  each  side  of  the  prow  of  a  ship. 
VVe  let  her  drive — rather,  giving  up 
to  it,  that  is,  to  the  wind.  In  the  lan- 
guage of  seamen,  they  were  forced  to 
scud  before  the  wind  toward  the  south- 
west.    See  preceding  verse. 

16.  And  running  under  a  cer- 
tain s»ia/Z  island — under  the  lee  of  it, 
so  as  to  be  sheltered  by  it  from  the  wind. 


390 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVII. 


under  a  certain  island  which  is  called 

Clauda,  we  had  much  work  to  come  by 

17  the  boat :  which  when  they  had  taken  up, 


they  used  helps,  undergirdiug  the  ship  ; 
and,  fearing  lest  they  should  tall  into  the 
quicksands,   strake   sail,    and    so    were 


Luke  shows  here  and  elsewhere  a  nice 
discrimiuation  in  the  use  of  sea  phrases. 
In  this  cha])terheuses  no  less  than  nine 
diil't-rent  verhs,  marking  in  some  way 
the  pjogression  of  tlie  ship,  but  each 
one  indicating  some  distinguishing  cir- 
cumstance counected  with  the  ship  at 
the  time.  Thus:  "Sailing"  toward 
(Tur.  3) ;  or  with  (ver.  ■it) ;  "  to  sail  away  " 
or  "  set  sail  "  (Ter.  i) ;  "  to  sail  under  " 
to  the  leeward  of  (ver.  i,  7) ;    "to  sail 

across  "  (ver,  S)  ;  "  sailing  slowly  "  (ver.  7) ; 

"coasting  along"  (ver. 8,  la);  "borne" 
or  "  driven  along"  (ver.  15) ;  "running 
under,"  past,  and  to  the  leeward  of 
(ver.  ic) ;  "driven  through,"  to  and  fro. 
(Ver.  27.)  Such  Careful  use  of  words 
shows  that  Luke  was  au  eye  and  ear- 
witness.  Clauda,  or  Cauda;  the 
modern  Gozzo,  about  twenty-three  miles 
southwest  of  that  part  of  Crete, 
where  the  wind  caught  the  ship.  (See 
on  ver.  14.)  When  caught  it  wassailing 
northwestward  with  lier  right  side 
toward  the  land.  So  the  wind  came 
upon  her  side,  and  so  she  was  driven. 
She  must  have  passed  the  east  end  of 
Clauda,  for  there  are  rocks  and  a  dan- 
gerous reef  to  the  northwest  of  it.  Pass- 
ing to  the  south  of  the  island,  she  came 
into  more  quiet  Avaters,  where  prepara- 
tions would  l)e  made  for  riding  out 
the  gale.  lu  all  this  we  see  a  singular 
and  guiding  Providence.  "Leaving 
Alexandria  in  January,  1859,  I  made  a 
remark  to  the  captain  upon  the  smiling 
character  of  the  weather.  '  The  south 
wind  blew  softly,'  the  sky  was  blue,  the 
sea  like  glass.  '  Yes '  replied  the  cap-  1 
tain,  '  very  pleasant  a*'  long  as  it  lasts.' 
It  did  not  last  long ;  when  we  sighted  [ 
Crete,  Euraqualo  was  blowing  rather 
stiffly.  As  we  neared  Crete  the  sea  be- 
came somewhat  rolling  and  rough.  It 
was  getting  dark  and  I  went  below. 
While  reading  I  perceived  that  we  were 
suddenly  in  smooth  water.  Going  i 
upon  deck  I  found  the  captain,  who, 
pointing  to  the  starboard  (right  hand)  j 
side  of  the  ship,  said,  '  There  is  that  { 
island.'  We  were  in  the  position  of  j 
Paul,  when  '  ruiuiing  under  a  certain 
island  which  is  called  Clauda,  they  had  j 
much  work  to  come  by  the  boat.'    Had  J 


our  machinery  broken  down,  or  the 
shijj  become  disabled,  we  should  have 
drifted  toward  Malta,  as  did  the  ship 
which  carried  Paul."  (H.  Carlisle 
in  iSmith's  Voyage,  p.  16.)  We  had 
much  work  to  come  by  the  boat — 
rather,  we  were  able  with  diffieulty  to 
become  masters  of  the  boat,  to  get  jjos- 
sessiou  of  it  and  secure  it.  The  row 
boat  had  been  towed  behind  the  shijj. 
There  was  danger  that  it  would  be 
washed  away.  It  was  im})ortant  to 
liaul  it  on  deck,  as  it  might  be  of  use 
in  case  of  shii>wreck.  The  difficulty 
experienced  in  securing  it  probably 
arose,  partly  from  tlie  waters  being 
somewhat  agitated,  but  largely  from 
the  boat  being  nearly  tilled  w  ith  water. 
17.  Which  Avhen  they  had  taken 
up — that  is,  they  raised  the  boat  on 
deck.  In  ancient  ships  the  boats  were 
not  fastened  round  about  the  vessel,  but 
taken  along  in  tow  in  pleasant  weather, 
and  on  deck  iu  stormy  weather.  Tliey 
used  helps.  The  imperfection  of  tlie 
build  and  the  peculiarities  of  the  rig 
of  ancient  ships  rendered  them  more 
liable  than  modern  vessels  to  leakage 
and  fouuderiug.  Hence  they  took  with 
them  apjdiances,  which  they  called 
helps,  such  as  ropes  and  chains  which 
they  used  in  undergirdiug  the  ship, 
passing  them  under  and  around  the  sliip 
at  right  angles  to  its  length,  and  thus 
bound  tight  round  the  middle.  By  this 
means  they  would  prevent  the  timbers 
from  starting,  and  strengthen  the  ship 
against  the  force  of  the  tempest.  Ptol- 
emy's great  ship  carried  twelve  of  these 
undergirders.  Several  allusions  to  this 
practice  are  found  in  classical  writers. 
It  is  sometimes  resorted  to  in  modern 
times,  and  is  called  frapping.  Fearing 
lest  they  should  fall,  or  be  cast  away 
upon  the  quicksands — or  the Syrtis, 
the  name  of  two  parts  of  the  sea  ou 
the  African  coast,  full  of  shallows  and 
sandbanks,  and  hence  destructive  to 
ships.  The  eastern  one  was  called 
Syrtis  Minor;  the  western,  Syrtis 
itajor,  now  the  gulf  of  Sidva.  They 
were  the  terror  of  ancient  mariners. 
Into  the  latter  the  northwest  wind 
would    have   driveu    the    ship    from 


Ch.  XXYII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


391 


18  driven.     And    we    being   ■» exceedingly 
tossed  with  a  teiujiost,  tUe  next  daij  lliey 

19  lightened  the  ship ;  and  tlic  I  bird  day  "  wc 
cast  out  with  our  own  bauds  the  tackling 


20  of  the  ship.  And  when  neither  sun  nor 
stars  in  many  days  appeared,  and  no  small 
tempest  lay  on  us,  all  hope  tuat  we  should 
be  saved  was  then  tal^en  away. 


»  Ps.  107  :  27.        n  Jonah  1  :  5. 


Clauda,  had  not  the  sails,  the  rudders, 
aud  the  ship  been  arranged  for  drifting 
westward.  They  strake  sail  — 
rather,  they  lowered  the  sail  or  the  gear. 
The  noun  is  a  very  general  one,  and 
seems  to  have  been  applied  by  seamen 
to  the  rigging  aud  apparatus  of  a  ship. 
They  lowered  the  top-sails,  the  large 
square  sail,  and  other  tackle  used  in  fair 
weather,  and  whatever  could  be  dis- 
pensed with.  "  In  a  storm  with  a  con- 
trary wind  or  on  a  lee-shore,  a  ship  is 
obliged  to  lie  to  under  a  very  low  sail ; 
some  sail  is  absolutely  necessary  to 
keep  the  ship  steady,  otherwise  she 
would  pitch  about  like  a  cork,  and  roll 
so  deep  as  to  strain  and  work  herself  to 
pieces."  (Encyc.  Brit.  Art.  Seaman- 
ship. Smith,  Voyage,  p.  114.)  Mr.  Smith 
has  shown  that  to  avoid  the  Syrtis  the 
sailors  must  have  had  the  ship  headed 
to  the  north  with  the  riglit  side  to  the 
wind,  the  storm-sail  and  rudders  ar- 
ranged, and  the  head  of  the  vessel  kept 
as  near  the  wind  as  possible.  (Smith, 
Voyage,  p.  114.)  And  so  were  driven 
— hoping  to  outride  the  gale.  Expe- 
rienced navigators  say  that  under  such 
circumstances  a  ship  would  drift  west 
by  north,  at  the  rate  of  thirty-six  miles 
in  twenty-four  hours.  Thirteen  days 
and  a  fraction  of  such  drifting  would 
bring  the  shijj  to  that  part  of  ilalta, 
where  tradition  marks  the  scene  of  the 
shipwreck.  Thus  remarkably  do  the 
most  careful  calculations  tally  with  the 
Scripture  narrative. 

18.  And  we  being  exceedingly, 
or  violently,  tossed  with  a  tempest — the 
storm  continuing  and  increasing.  The 
next  day  —  after  undergirdiug  the 
ship,  getting  her  ready  for  the  storm, 
they  lightened  the  ship  —  they 
made  a  throunng  overboard,  a  nautical 
phrase  diiferent  from  that  in  ver.  38, 
whereby  sailors  lighten  a  ship  in  a 
storm  to  prevent  her  from  sinking. 
Perhaps  the  ship  had  sprung  a  leak, 
and  the  water  was  gaining  in  the  hold. 
Compare  a  similar  scene  in  Jonah  1 :  5. 
What  they  cast  forth  is  not  told.  Prob- 


ably the  least  valuable,  the  most  bulky, 
and  the  most  accessible  portions  of 
their  cargo.  The  bulk  of  their  mer- 
chandise appears  to  have  been  of  wheat, 
and  this  they  kept  to  the  last.     (vcr.  js.) 

19.  The  danger  becomes  more  and 
more  imminent ;  and  they  are  obliged 
to  lighten  the  ship  still  more.  This 
confirms  the  supposition  that  the  ship 
was  suffering  serious  injury  from  the 
storm.  The  loss  of  ancient  ships  was 
principally  from  leaks.  Josephus 
(Life  3)  relates  that  on  his  voyage  to 
Italy  the  ship  sank  in  the  Adriatic 
Sea,  in  consequence  of  damage  sus- 
tained during  a  storm.  Paul  seems  to 
have  suflered  before  this  from  a  like 
cause  when  he  was  "  a  day  and  a  night 
in  the  deep,"  doubtless  floating  on  frag- 
ments of  the  wreck.  We  cast  out 
with  our  own  hands — or,  with  four 
of  the  oldest  manuscripts,  They  cast 
out  with  their  own  hands.  That  would 
be  rather  the  work  of  the  sailors,  un- 
less the  case  was  exceedingly  urgent, 
or  that  which  was  cast  over  very  large. 
The  tackling— a  word  near  akin  to 
that  in  ver.  17  rendered  "sail"  or 
"gear,"  and  means  apparatus,  equi- 
page, furniture.  Some  apply  it  to  tables, 
beds,  chests,  etc.  Nautical  interpreters 
understand  it  of  heavy  portions  of  the 
rigging,  such  as  the  mainyard.  "  I 
suppose  the  mainvard  is  meant;  an 
immense  spar,  profcably  as  long  as  the 
ship,  which  would  require  the  united 
elForts  of  passengers  and  crew  to  launch 
it  overbo".rd.  The  relief  which  a  ship 
would  experience  by  this,  would  be  of 
tlie  same  kind  as  in  a  modern  ship 
when  the  guns  are  thrown  overboard." 
(Smith's  Voyage,  p.  116.) 

20.  Fear  is  followed  by  despair  of 
saving  the  ship  and  their  lives.  Many 
days—several — how  many  is  not  told. 
Probably  a  week  and  more  since  leav- 
ing Clauda.  As  they  did  not  have  the 
compass,  they  were  dependent  upon  the 
sun  and  the  position  and  the  rising  and 
setting  of  diSerent  stars  to  guide  their 
course.    But  these  not  appearing,  they 


392 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVII. 


21  But  after  long  ab.stinence  Paul  stood 
forth  In  the  midst  of  thuiu,  and  said,  Sirs, 
ye  should  have  liearkened  unto  nie,  and 
not  have  loosed  from  Crete,  and  to  have 

22  gained  this  harm  and  loss.  And  now  I 
exhort  you  to  be  of  good  cheer :  »  for  there 
shall  be  no  loss  of  any  man's  life  among 


23  you,  but  of  the  ship,  p  For  there  stood 
l)y    me    this    night   the   angel   of    God, 

24  whose  1  am,  and  'i  whom  I  serve,  saying, 
'l<'ear  not,  Paul:  »thou  must  be 
brought  before  Cu'sar  :  and.lo,  'God hath 
given  thee  all  them  that  sail  with  thee. 


»ver.  44.        P  ch.  23  :  11 ;  Heb.  1  :  14.        <i  Ban.  6  :  16;  Kom.  1  :  9;  2  Tim.  1  :  3.        '  Isa.  44 
21.        «  ch.  23  :  11.        «  Gen.  19  :  21,  29. 


could  not  know  whither  they  were 
going  or  what  dangers  tliey  were  ap- 
proaching. No  small  tempest  lay 
on  us — that  is,  a  great  one.  Luke 
often  thus  speaks,  (u -.  le ;  n -.  2 -,  la -.  n.) 
All  hope — of  being  saved  from  ship- 
Mrock  and  death  was  entirely  taken 
aAvay.  it  is  evident  that  the  condition 
of  the  shi])  was  becoming  more  critical. 
They  could  not  tell  which  way  lay  the 
nearest  laud,  in  order  to  run  her  ashore. 
Hence  it  appears  that  they  must  soon 
founder  at  sea  and  be  lost. 

21.  But  after  long  or  much 
abstinence — not  entire,  but  a  high 
degree  and  long  continued.  This  was 
owing,  not  to  a  religious  fast,  nor  to  a 
scarcity  of  provisions  (ver.  38),  but  to 
the  impossibility  of  cooking  and  hav- 
ing regular  meals,  to  the  constant  de- 
mands made  upon  them  for  labor,  and 
to  the  anxiety  and  excitements  which 
took  away  their  appetite,  or  made  it 
imjiossible  to  eat.  It  was  at  this  time 
of  great  extremity  and  of  human  de- 
spair, that  Paul  stood  forth  in  the 
midst  of  them  with  divine  encour- 
agement. They  were  now  prepared  to 
hear  from  him,  first  words  of  reminder 
and  of  gentle  censure,  and  then  words 
of  exliortation  and  encouragement. 
And  to  have  gained  this  harm 
and  loss — better,  And  have  escaped 
this  violence  and  loss  to  their  persons 
and  property,  (see  on  ver.  10.)  Paul's 
object  in  recalling  his  former  advice 
was  not  to  reproach  them,  but  rather 
to  inspire  confidence  in  what  he  was 
about  to  say. 

22.  And,  though  you  did  not  take 
my  advice  then,  now  I  exhort  you 
to  be  of  good  cheer — my  apprehen- 
sions of  danger  and  loss,  and  your  ex- 
pectation of  certain  destruction  will 
not  be  realized ;  for  there  shall  be 
no  loss  of  any  man's  life  among 
you,  but  only  of  the  ship.  Notice 
that  in  the  former  advice  (Ter.  10)  Paul 


utters  his  Avell-formed  judgment  and 
convictions  ;  in  tliis  he  speaks  with  the 
confidence  and  authority  of  a  revela- 
tion. 

23.  The  reason  of  his  cheering  ex- 
hortation and  confident  prediction. 
For  there  stood  by  me,  not  in  a 
dream  or  a  vision  (le :  7),  but  actually 
near  me  and  seen  by  me.  (1 :  10.)  This 
night— just  passed,  as  the  words  were 
probably  uttered  in  the  moi'ning.  The 
angel,  etc. — rather,  an  angel  of  the 
God.  The  ministry  of  angels  is  made 
prominent  in  the  Acts.  (i:io;io:3; 
12 : 7.)  In  speaking  to  heathen  who  had 
their  own  gods,  Paul  would  naturally 
specify  the  God  to  whom  he  referred. 
But  he  sustained  a  diti'erent  relation  to 
his  God  from  that  which  they  would 
acknowledge  toward  theirs  :  M'hose  I 
am,  to  whom  I  belong,  and  Avhom  I 
serve,  or  to  whom  also  lofferivorship. 
Worship  refers  especially  to  external 
acts,  but  in  Paul's  case  included  also 
the  internal  homage  of  the  heart.  It 
also  indicates  his  habitual  state  of 
mind.  (24:14.)  The  expression  is  char- 
acteristic of  Paul.      (Rom.  1:9;  2  Tim.  1  :  3) 

It  here  implies  that  they  had  seen  him 
at  worship,  and  knew  him  as  a  wor- 
shijier  of  God.  Doubtless,  too,  this 
revelation  had  come  in  answer  to 
prayer. 

24.  Fear  not,  Paul ;  thou  must 
be  brought  before  Csesar  —  it  is 
implied  that  Paul  had  experienced  fear 
and  anxiety,  (ver.  10,22.  see  is :  9.)  His 
faith  was  tested ;  for  the  Lord  had 
promised  that  he  should  see  Rome. 
(23:11.)  Doubtless  he  believed  the 
promise,  though  the  ship  and  the  rest 
should  perish.  And  lo,  God  hath 
given,  or  granted,  thee  all  them 
that  sail  Avith  thee  —  they  were 
graciously  preserved  for  his  sake.  It 
would  seem  tliat  Paul  had  prayed  for 
himself,  pleading  the  Lord's  promise 
(33 :  11),  and  for  all  that  were  with  him. 


Ch.  XXVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


395 


2.)  Wherefore,  sirs,  be  of  goc)d  cheer:  "for  I 
l)clieve  God,  that  it  shall  ho  even  as  it  was 

'lii  told  me.  Howheit  »  we  imisi,  1m;  v.mt  upou 
a  certain  ishmd. 

27      But   when   the  fourteenth   uight  was 


come,  as  we  were  driven  up  and  down  in 
Adria,  about  midnight,  the  shipmen 
deemed  tliat  they  drew  near  to  some 
28  country;  and  sounded,  and  found  it 
twenty  fathoms  :  and  when  they  had  gone 


»  Num.  :i3  :  19  ;  Luke  1  :  45 ;  llom.  4  :  20,  21 ;  2  Tim.  1 :  12.       »  ch.  28;:  1. 


Compare  Philem.  22  and  Abraham's 
intercessory  prayer  for  8odom,  Gen. 
18  :  23-32.  "  Many  bad  men  are  i)re- 
served  with  a  few  godly  men,  more 
easily,  than  one  godly  man  perishes 
with  many  guilty.  The  world  is  like 
the  ship."     (Bengel.) 

25.  Wherefore,  sirs,  be  of  good 
cheer:  For  I  believe  God — I  have 
this  sure  ground  of  contidence. 

26.  Paul  tells  them  how  they  should 
be  saved.  We  sliall  all  indeed  escape, 
bat  we  must  be  cast  upou  a  cer- 
tain island.  The  name  of  the  island 
had  not  been  revealed  to  Paul.  (28 :  i.) 

27-44.  The  Discovery  of  Land 
AND  THE  Shipwreck.  About  Novem- 
ber 1,  A.  D.  60. 

27.  When  the  fourteenth  day 
was  come — -from  the  time  of  their 
leaving  Fair  Havens.  As  Ave  were 
driven  up  and  down,  literally, 
through  Adria,  about  to  and  fro.  A 
gale  of  such  length  is  by  no  means  un- 
known iu  those  seas.  "Aristides  (the 
orator)  encounters  a  gale  iu  the  ^gean 
Sea,  and  is  driven  through  it  for  four- 
teen days  and  nights.  Professor  New- 
man met  with  a  continuous  easterly 
gale  on  the  coast  of  Cyprus  iu  Decem- 
ber, 1S30."  He  was  bound  for  Syria, 
but  was  kept  "  wind  liound  for  days" 
in  the  port  of  the  ancient  Salamis  ; 
and  "  it  was  finally  the  first  of  Janu- 
ary when  he  reached  the  Syrian  coast." 
(Smith,  Voyage,  p.  149.)"  In  Adria 
means  the  Sea  of  Adria,  which  denoted 
much  more  than  the  present  Gulf  of 
Venice,  embracing  the  central  basin  of 
the  Mediterranean  betwen  Sicily  and 
Greece,  and  by  some  extended  as  far  as 
the  coast  of  Africa.  To  this  effect  is 
the  testimony  of  Ptolemy,  Pausauias, 
and  tlie  later  Greek  and  Roman 
writers.  (SMITH,  Voyage,  pp.  283-4.) 
The  Sea  of  Adria  appears  here  to  be 
spoken  of  as  extending  as  far  south  as 
Malta  and  its  vicinity. 

About    midnight  the   shipmen 
deemed— or  supposed  that  some  coun- 


try ioas  nearing  them.     Luke  uses  the 
graphic  language  of  seamen,  to  whom 
the  ship  is  the  ])rincii)al  oljject,  while 
the  land  rises  and  sinks,  nears  and  re- 
cedes.     But  why   did  thuy  suppose? 
Not  by  the  sense  of  smell,  as  some  in- 
terpreters have  suggested,  for  the  wind 
was  blowing  not  from  the  land,  but 
toward  the  land.     Their  knowledge  of 
the  sea  would  enable  them  to  judge 
from  a  change  of  currents  or  from  the 
sound  and  dashing  of  waves  against 
the  beach.    Assuming  that  St.  Paul's 
Bay  on  the  north  side  of  Malta  is  the 
actual    scene  of   the    shipwreck,   Mr. 
Smith  says  (p.  121) :  "  No  ship  can  en- 
ter it  from  the  east  without  passing 
within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  of  the  point 
of  Koura ;  but  before  reaching  it  the 
land  is  too  low  and  too  fiir  from  the 
track  of  the  ship  driven  from  the  east- 
ward,  to  be  seen    in    a  dark    night. 
When  she  does  come  within  this  dis- 
tance, it  is  impossible  to  avoid  observ- 
ing   the    breakers;     for    with    north- 
easterly gales  the  sea  breaks  upon  it 
with     such     violence     that    Admiral 
Smyth,  iu  his  view  of  the  headland, 
has  made  the  breakers  its  distinctive 
character."      Mr.     Smith     personally 
visited  the  point  of  Koura  and  verified 
these  facts.     He  also  learned  of   the 
shipwreck  of  the   frigate  "  Livelv  "  on 
the  night  of  August  10,  1810,  at  this 
very  spot.    The  quartermaster  saw  '  the 
curl  of  the  sea '  upon  the  rocks  at  the 
jjoint  of  Koura,  about  a  quarter  of  a 
mile  off.     Tlie  man  at  the  lead  sounded 
and  found  twenty-five  fathoms  of  water. 
(See    next  verse.)     By    some    mishap 
they  failed  to  manage  the  vessel,  and 
falling  broadside  upon  the  rocks,  and  a 
gale  coming  on,  she  went  to  pieces. 
(Smith,  Voyage,  p.  123.)      This,   too, 
was  just  the  place  whither  the  ship 
would  drift    in    about    thirteen   days 
from  Clauda.     (See  note  at  end  of  ver. 
17.) 

28.  Sounded — threw  out  the  lead 
and  line  iu  order  to  ascertain  the  deptU 


394 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVII. 


a  little  further,  they  sounded  again,  and 
29  found  it  fifteen  fathoms.  Then  fearing 
lest  they  should  have  fallen  upon  rocks, 
they  cast  four  anchors  out  of  the  stern, 
and  wished  for  the  day. 


.30  And  as  the  shipmen  were  about  to  flee 
out  of  the  ship,  when  they  had  let  down 
the  boat  into  the  sea,  under  colour  as 
though  they  would  have  cast  anchors 
out    of  the  foreship,  Paul    said  to   the 


of  water.     Twenty  fathoms.    The 

ancient  fathom  was  about  the  same  as 
the  modern,  six  feet.  Soon  after  they 
sounded  again  and  found  fifteen 
fathoms— showing  that  tliey  were 
nearing  the  shore.  Their  only  safety 
in  the  dark  was  to  anchor  (next  verse). 
These  soundings  correspond  with  those 
in  St.  Paul's  Bay,  supposing  the  ship 
to  be  drifting  in  a  westerly  direction. 
At  the  supi)Osed  rate  of  the  ship's 
movement  (a  mile  and  a  half  an  hour) 
it  would  have  taken  about  a  half  hour 
between  the  twenty  and  the  fifteen- 
fathom  depth,  which  would  give  time 
to  prepare  for  anchoring.  (Smith, 
Voyage,  p.  131.) 

29.  Then  fearing  lest  we 
should  have  fallen  upon  rocky 
places:  which  perhaps  they  could 
dimly  see.  "The  fifteen-fathom  depth 
is  as  nearly  as  possible  a  quarter  of  a 
mile  from  the  shore,  which  is  here  girt 
with  mural  precipices,  and  upon  which 
the  sea  must  have  been  breaKing  with 
great  violence."  (Smith,  Voyage,  p. 
132.)  A  few  minutes  more  and  they 
are  wrecked.  Hence  the  necessity  of 
anchoring  at  once ;  and  of  a  hard  bot- 
tom, where  the  anchors  will  hold. 
Now  Mr.  Smith  quotes  from  the  sail- 
ing directions  regarding  the  anchorage 
in  St.  Paul's  Bay  :  "  It  is,  notwithstand- 
ing, safe  for  small  ships,  the  ground 
being  very  good  ;  and  while  the  cables 
hold  there  is  no  danger,  as  the  anchors 
will  never  start."  They  cast  four 
anchors — and  they  had  others,  per- 
haps as  many  more,  (ver.  30.)  Ancient 
ships  had  smaller,  but  more  anchors 
than  modern  vessels.  Csesar  speaks  of 
one  having  four.  Athemeus  mentions 
one  of  eight.  The  anchors  seen  on  an- 
cient coins  were  similar  in  form  to  those 
of  modern  times.  Out  of  the  stern — 
the  ancients,  like  the  moderns,  gener- 
ally anchored  from  the  bow,  but  often 
from  the  stern,  by  pas.sing  the  cable  of 
the  anchors  through  the  rudder  holes. 
In  order  to  do  this  the  two  rudders 
were  raised  out  of  the  water  and  fas-  j 
tened.     Mr.  Smith  has  given  a  copy  of j 


a  stern  of  a  ship,  illustrating  this,  from 
a  sculpture  from  Herculaneum,  con- 
temporary with  the  Apostle  Paul. 
Occasionally  this  has  been  done  in 
modern  times.  Thus  Lord  Nelson 
anchored  by  the  stern  at  the  battle  of 
Copenhagen  in  1801,  and  Lord  Ex- 
mouth  at  the  battle  of  Algiers  in  181(3. 
The  reasons  for  thus  anchoring  Paul's 
ship  were  :  To  stop  its  progress  as  soon 
as  possible.  Had  they  anchored  from 
the  l)ow,  the  sliip  might  have  swung 
around  upon  shoals  or  rocks.  Besides, 
the  head  of  the  vessel  being  toward  the 
laud,  when  the  morning  came,  they 
would  be  prepared  to  run  her  ashore, 
if  possible.  By  simply  cutting  away 
the  anchors,  lowering  the  rudders  and 
raising  the  foresail,  which  could  be 
done  at  once,  the  vessel  would  be  in 
readiness  to  run  into  any  part  of  the 
shore  which  afibrded  them  any  pros- 
pect of  safety.  Wished  for  the 
day — anxious  lest  the  ship,  being  in 
a  precarious  state,  might  go  down  at 
her  anchors,  or  the  morning  coming  the 
coast  might  afibrd  no  beach  upon 
which  they  could  land  in  safety. 

30.  This  anxiety  about  their  situa- 
tion and  prosj)ects  led  the  shipmen, 
or  sailors  very  naturally,  but  selfishly, 
to  attempt  to  save  their  own  lives  by 
lowering  the  row  boat,  which  had 
been  hoisted  on  deck  soon  after  the 
storm  began,  (ver.  i6).  Were  about 
— or,  ivere  seeking,  to  flee.  Under 
colour,  as  though,  etc.  They  act  as 
if  about  to  cast  anchors,  from  the 
foreship  as  well  as  from  the  stern. 
This  must  appear  plausible  to  landsmen, 
but  not  to  seamen.  Hence  Mr.  Smith 
supposes  that  the  officers  of  the  ship 
were  parties  to  this  unworthy  attempt. 
This  accords  with  the  statement  in  the 
next  verse  that  the  centurion  and 
soldiers  arrested  it. 

31.  Paul  exhibits  keen  perception 
in  detecting  their  design  and  tact  in 
saying  nothing  to  the  sailors,  but  ad- 
dressing the  centurion.  Except  these 
abide  in  the  ship  ye  cannot  l:e 
saved.    God  had  promised  Paul  the 


Ch.  XXVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


395 


31  ceuturioa  and  to  the  holdiers,  J  Except 
these   abide    in  the  sliip,  ye  cannot  be 

32  saved.  Then  the  soldiers  cut  off  the  ropes 
of  the  boat,  and  let  her  fall  off. 

33  And  while  the  day  was  coming  on,  Paul 
besought  ihein  all  to  take  meat,  saying, 
This  day  is  the  fourteenth  day  that  ye 
have    tarried    and     continued    fasting, 

34  having  taken  nothing.  Wherefore  I 
pray  you  to  take  some:  meat :  for  this  is 


for  your  health :  for  there  shall  not  au 
hair  fall  from  the  head  of  any  of  you. 

35  And  when  he  had  thus  spoken,  he  took 
bread,  and  »gave  thanks  to  God  in  pres- 
ence of  them  all :  and  when  he  had  broken 

36  it  he  began  to  eat.  'Then  were  they  all 
of  good  cheer,  and  they  also  took  tonm 

37  meat.  And  we  were  in  all  in  the  ship  two 
hundred  threescore  and  sixteen   souls. 


3  ver.  22-24. 


«  Matt.  15  :  30  ;  JIark  8:6;  John  6  :  11;  1  Cor. 
»  2  Oor.  1  :  4. 


10  :  30,  31 ;  1  Tim.  4:3,  4. 


safety  of  all,  yet  every  human  eflfort 
was  to  be  made.  The  skill  of  the  sail- 
ors, iu  guiding  the  ship  ashore,  and  in 
reaching  the  land,  was  needed  to  carry 
out  the  will  of  God.  The  ignorance 
and  unskillfuluess  of  the  soldiers  and 
passengers  might  result  disastrously. 

32.  With  military  promptness  the 
soldiers  cut  ott"  the  ropes  of  the 
boat  by  which  it  was  fastened  to  the 
ship  and  let  her  fall  oflf  into  the  sea, 
where  she  drifts  into  the  darkness  and 
to  destruction.  Their  willingness  to 
sacrifice  the  boat  shows  that  Paul  had 
gained  a  wonderful  power  over  them. 

33.  While  the  day  was  coining 
on.  The  meaning  is,  During  the  in- 
terval till  the  break  of  day,  when  it 
would  be  light  enough  to  see  what  is 
best  to  be  done.  For  the  fourth  time 
Paul  appears  as  the  wise  counsellor  of 
the  ship.  He  sees  that  they  must  be 
prepared  in  strength  and  spirits  for  the 
work  of  escaping  from  the  ship ;  and 
he  beseeches  them  all  to  take  food. 
On  the  fourteenth  day,  see  on 
ver.  27.  Having  taken  nothing — 
no  regular  food ;  as  it  were  nothing. 
The  language  is  popular  and  strong, 
but  natural,  and  would  be  understood 
by  those  whom  he  addressed,    (see  on 

Ter.  21.) 

34.  Wherefore,  in  view  of  your 
long  fasting  and  your  consequent  weak- 
ness and  exliaustion,  /  entreat  you  to 
take  food.  A  positive  reason  is  added,  for 
this  is  for  your  health,  rather, /or 
your  safety.  In  the  dangers  and  work 
before  them  nourishment  would  enable 
them  to  do  more  toward  their  own 
preservation.  An  encouraging  assur- 
ance of  ultimate  escape  is  also  given. 
There  shall  not  a  hair  fall  from 
the  head  of  any  of  you.  A  strong 
proverbial  expression,   denoting   com- 


plete deliverance,    (i  Sam.  u : « ;  i  Kingi 

I  :52;  Lake  ai:  18.) 

35.  Gave  thanks  to  God.  Some 
entertain  tlie  fanciful  idea  that  this  was 
regarded  by  the  Christians  present  as  a 
love  feast,  or  even  the  commemoration 
of  the  Lord's  Supper.  But  of  this  there 
is  not  the  slightest  hint,  nor  the  least 
evidence.  Paul  was  simjily  acting  as 
a  Christian,  returning  tlmuks  accord- 
ing to  his  custom.    (Eom.  14:  6;  1  Cor.  10:  SO; 

14 :  17 ;  1  Thess.  5 :  18.)  Such  language  was 
used  of  ordinary  meals.  (Luke 24:  so; 
johQ6:u,23.)  In  presence  of  them 
all  —  acknowledging  God  whom  he 
served  (ver.  23)  before  all  the  heathen 
soldiei-3  and  mariners.  In  breaking 
the  bread  and  eating  he  began  a  reg- 
ular meal,  whether  confined  to  bread 
alone,  or  not,  in  contrast  with  their 
previous  scanty  fare.     (vcr.  21.) 

36.  Then  were  they  all  of  good 
cheer — inspired  by  his  example  and 
his  devout  trustfulness  and  thankful- 
ness. They  also  took  some  meat 
— rather,  took  food,  partook  of  a  regu- 
lar meal.  "  When  we  reflect  who  were 
included  in  these  all — the  soldiers  and 
their  centurions,  the  sailors  and  pas- 
sengers of  various  nations  and  disposi- 
tions, it  shows  remarkably  the  influ- 
ence aco[uired  by  Paul  over  all  who 
sailed  with  him."    (Alford.) 

37.  Two  hundred  three  score 
and  sixteen  souls.  The  number, 
two  hundred  and  seventy-six,  was 
large,   but    a  vessel    wliicli   had  four 

j  anchors  was  also  large,  (ver. 29.)  The 
I  number  on  board  at  this  time  was  not 
i  unusual  for  an  Alexandrian  merchant 
sliip  of  good  size.  Josephus,  about 
this  time,  was  wrecked  in  the  Adriatic 
with  a  shipload  of  six  hundred. 
(Josephus,  Life,  ^  3.)  How  many 
were  prisoners,  soldiers,  passengers,  we 


396 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVII. 


38  And  when  they  had  eaten  enough,  ^  they 
lightened  the  ship,  and  cast  out  the  wheat 
into  the  sea. 

89  Aud  when  it  was  day,  they  knew  not 
the  land :  but  they  discovered  a  certain 
creek  with  a  shore,  into  the  which  they 


were  minded,  if  it  were  possible,  to  thrust 
40  in  the  ship.  And  when  they  had  taken 
up  the  anchors,  they  committed  f/ifin- 
ie/i'f.«  unto  the  sea,  and  loosed  the  rudder 
bands,  aud  hoisted  up  the  maiusail  to  the 


'  ver.  is,  19. 


have  not  the  means  of  ascertaining. 
The  reason  for  numbering  was,  that  in 
coming  ashore  the  caj)tain  might  know 
of  the  crew  and  passengers,  and  the 
centurion  of  the  ])risoner8  and  soldiers, 
that  none  were  lost  or  missing.  It  was 
very  natural  to  state  the  number  at 
this  point  of  the  narrative. 

38.  They  lightened  the  ship — 
so  as  the  more  easily  to  approach  the 
shore.  Besides,  having  been  for  many 
days  drifting  sideways  (see  on  ver.  n),  it 
is  jirobable  that  the  wlieat  had  shifted 
largely  to  the  left  side  ;  and  it  was 
necessary  to  cast  it  out  and  right  the 
ship  again  so  as  to  steer  her  accurately 
to  the  shore.  Cast  out  the  wheat — 
the  princii)al  cargo,  and  reserved  to 
the  last,  ilerchant  vessels  were  ac- 
customed to  carry  wheat  from  Egypt 
to  Italy,  and  the  mere  mention  of  this 
vessel's  cargo  at  tliis  point  affords  one 
of  many  undesigned  coiucideucea  iu 
tlie  book  of  the  Acts. 

39.  They  knew  not,  did  not  re- 
cognize, the  land  ])ef<)re  them.  Yet 
Melita  was  a  well-known  island,  and 
its  excellent  harbor  at  Yaletta  was 
familiar  to  seamen.  But  thev  had  al- 
ready passed  beyond  that  harbor  iu  the 
night  and  were  several  miles  north  of 
it.  They  were  in  a  less  familiar  ]iart 
of  the  coast,  which  had  no  uuirkcd 
features  a!)out  it,  while  the  driving 
rain  and  mists  would  somewhat  ob- 
struct their  view.  But  they  discov- 
ered a  certain  creeli,  in/et,  or  bay 
with  a  shore,  literally,  vith  a  beach, 
a  smooth,  sandy  shore  suited  for  land- 
ing, or  for  running  the  sliip  aground. 
St.  Paul's  Bay  is  on  the  northeast  part 
of  the  island,  and  is  formed  l^y  the 
main  land  on  the  south  and  the  little 
island  of  Salmonetta  on  the  north,  and 
opens  toward  the  east.  It  is  two  miles 
long  from  east  to  west,  and  one  mile 
broad  at  the  entrance.  The  shore  is 
skirted  with  rocks  and  precipices  except 
in  two  places  where  there  are  inlets, 
find  one  of  which,  the  Mestara  Valley, 


has  a  beach.  Mr.  Smith,  however,  is 
inclined  to  choose  the  other  inlet, 
which  no  longer  has  a  beach,  but 
which  geologists  know  must  have  had 
one,  from  tlie  dip  of  the  beds  and  the 
form  of  the  land.  His  chief  reason  for 
preferring  this  inlet  is  its  proximity  to 
what  Luke  calls  "  a  ])lace  of  two  seas," 
or  "  where  two  seas  met."  (ver.  «.  See 
onvcr.  27.)  (Smith's  Voyarje,  p.  140-3.) 
All  tliis  agrees  strikingly  with  Luke's 
account.  Into  the  Avhich  —  upon 
arliivh  beach  they  were  minded, 
were  determinnJ,  if  they  could,  to  drive 
the  ship.  A  few  ancient  authorities 
read,  If  they  could  bring  the  ship  safe 
to  shore. 

40.  They  proceed  at  once  to  carry 
out  their  determination.  And  when 
tliey  had  taken  up  the  anchors. 
llather,  Culling  off  the  anchors — that 
is,  cutting  the  ro2)es  that  connected  them 
witli  the  shiji.  They  committed 
themselves  unto  the  sea — rather, 
they  left  them,  tlie  anchors,  to  the  sea. 
Tliey  were  no  longer  needed,  and  would 
only  add  weight  to  the  ship.  And 
loo.sed  the  rudder  bands.  See 
])rcfatory  note  on  "  Shi]is."  The  two 
rudders  liad  been  raiseil  out  of  the 
water  M'hen  the  anchors  had  been  cast 
out  from  the  stern,  (ver.  as.)  The  rud- 
dt-rs  were  now  needed  to  steer  the  ship 
toward  the  beach ;  the  anchor  ro])es 
niiglii  have  been  an  imj)edimeut  to 
their  free  use  ;  and  hence  their  cutting 
away  was  quite  uecessarv.  Hoisted 
the  mainsail— rather, /o/r5ai7.  This 
noun  is  found  only  here  among  ancient 
Greek  writers,  and  has  been  aj)plied  t^ 
almo.st  every  sail  wliich  a  vessel  carries, 
Mr.  Smith,  however,  has  shown  pretty 
clearly  that  tlie  foresail  is  meant.  K 
was  the  best  ]>ossil)le  sail  to  be  iise(^ 
under  the  circumstances,  and  just  what 
a  sailor  would  have  hoisted  to  the 
wind  in  order  to  ma/:e  tovard  the 
beach.  In  a  gale  iu  Crimea,  in  Novem- 
ber, 1854,  the  captain  of  the  ship,  the 
l,ord  liuylan,  beached  her;  the  foresail 


Ch.  XXVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


397 


41  wind,  and  inmle  toward  shore.     And  fall- 
ing into  a  place  where  two  seas  met,  <=  they 


ran  the  ship  aground;  and  the  forepart 
stuck  fast,  and  remained  unmovable,  but 


■  2  Cor.  11  :  25. 


only  was  used,  aiul  proved  of  great  ad- 
vantage.   (Smith,  ro,ya//e,  p.  141.) 

41.  And — rather,  jjut,  introducing 
some  circumstances  that  defeated  the  in- 
tention of  the  sailors.  Bat  falling  into 
a  place  where  two  seas  met — 
where  opjiosite  currents  met,  and  spent 
their  force  upon  the  stern  of  the  vessel. 
Or,  according  to  Mr.  Smith,  this  phrase 


tinuous ;  but  as  they  approach  the  beach, 
they  could  see  the  strait,  and  soon  after 
the  current,  between  the  mainland  and 
the  island.  This  current  meets  the 
opposing  sea,  where,  by  its  deposits,  a 
shoal  and  a  bank  of  clay  and  sand  have 
been  formed.  Into  this  bank  tlie  ship 
might  very  likely  be  driven,  and  just 
at  this  point  where  the  current  was 


^:- -  .  MAP  OF        -- 
SI  PAUL'S    BAY. 

in  the  Island  of 


MELITA, 

(MALTA). 


kv:>>^  /     IHuslrating  Paul's  shipwreck 


may  be  referred  to  the  channel,  not 
more  than  a  hundred  yards  wide  be- 
tween tlie  small  island  Saluionetta 
and  Malta,  which  would  appear  to  the 
sailors  nearing  the  beach  as  connecting 
the  sea  inside  the  bay  and  the  sea  out- 
side. He  su]iposes  the  shipwreck  to 
have  occurrecl  near  this  channel,  and  a 
little  north  of  the  traditional  site.  (See 
oBver.  39.)  The  features  of  the  locality 
harmonize  with  either  view.  To  tlie 
sailors,  from  the  supposed  position  of 
the  ship,  when  at  anchor,  the  island 
Salmonetta  and  the  Maltese  coast  ap- 
peared as  though  the  land  were  all  con- 


broken  by  the  opposing  sea.  So  they 
reach  not  the  beach  as  tliey  hoped,  but 
are  compelled  to  swim  for  tlieir  lives. 
Or,  see  quotation  from  ^Ir.  Smith  below. 
The  forepart — or  forrship  (ver. so) 
struck,  striking  fast — remained  un- 
movable. "  This  is  a  remarkable  cir- 
cumstance, which  but  for  the  peculiar 
nature  of  the  bottom  of  St.  Paul's  Bay, 
it  would  be  difficult  to  account  for. 
The  rocks  of  Malta  disintegrate  into 
extremely  minute  particles  oif  sand  and 
clay,  which,  when  acted  upon  by  the 
currents,  or  by  the  surface  agitation, 
form  a  deposit  of  tenacious  clay ;  whilst 


398 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIl. 


the  hinder  part  was  broken    with    the 

42  violence  of  the  waves.  And  the  soldiers' 
counsel  was  to  kill  the  prisoners,  lest  any 
of  them  should  swim  out,  and  escape. 

43  But  the  centurion,  *  willing  to  save  Paul, 
kept  them  from  their  purpose ;  and  com- 


manded that  they  which  could  ."iwim 
should  cast  ihemselvcs  first  in/o  the  tea,  and 
44  get  to  land :  and  the  rest,  some  on  boards, 
and  some  on  broken  pieces  of  the  ship. 
And  so  it  came  to  pass,  'that  they  es- 
caped all  safe  to  laud. 


4  Prov.  16  :  7. 


'  Tcr.  22,  24. 


in  still  water,  where  these  currents  do  I 
not  act,  mud  is  found ;  but  it  is  only  in 
the  creeks  where  there  are  no  currents, 
and  at  such  a  dej^th  as  to  be  undis- 
turbed by  the  waves,  that  the  mud 
occurs.  In  Admiral  Smj-th's  chart  of 
the  bay,  the  nearest  soundings  of  the 
mud  inilicate  a  depth  of  about  three 
fathoms,  which  is  about  wliat  a  large 
ship  will  draw.  A  shii>,  therefore,  im- 
pelled by  the  force  of  a  gale  into  a  creek 
with  such  a  bottom  would  strike  into 
mud,  graduating  into  tenacious  clay 
into  which  the  forepart  would  fix  itself, 
and  be  held  fast,  whilst  the  stern  was 
exposed  to  the  force  of  the  waves." 
(Smith,  Voyage,  p.  143-4.)  But  the 
hinder  part  was  broken,  more  ex- 
actly, was  breaking  to  pieces  by  the 
violence  of  the  waves.  Some 
ancient  authorities  omit  of  the  tea  res, 
but  the  meaning  is  the  same.  The  ship 
was  Avithout  doubt  badly  strained, 
leaky,  and  much  damaged  by  the  gale, 
(ver. is.)  The  driving  wind  would  in- 
crease the  violence  of  the  currents. 
John  Kitto,  who  was  at  ilalta  for  a 
time,  savs  of  the  small  island  Salmon- 
etta  :  "  The  currents  and  shoals  around 
wliich  are  particularly  dangerous  in 
stormy  weather."  (Alexander's  Kitto's 
Encyclopedia.) 

42.  And  the  soldier's  counsel, 
or  plan  was  to  kill  the  prisoners. 
Bv  the  Roman  law  they  were  responsi- 
ble with  their  own  lives  for  the  pris- 
oners under  their  charge.  AYe  get  a 
glimpse  of  the  stern  fidelity  and  the 
cruelty  of  the  Roman  military  system. 
We  also  have  illustrations  of  it  in 
12  :  11»:  Ifi  :  27-29. 

43.  But  the  centurion  willing, 
rather,  wishing  to  save  Paul— had  it 
not  been  for  Paul,  the  other  prisoners 
would  probably  have  been  killed.  Thus 
three  times  is  he  the  means  of  preserv- 
inirlife.  (ver.  24,  .'u. «.)  Commanded 
that  they  which  could  swim,  etc.— 
these  getting  first  to  laud  would  ea- 


courage,  help,  and  succor  others  who 
were  floating  on  planks  and  spars. 
Paul,  who  had  been  thrice  shipwrecked 
(2  Cor.  11 :  25),  was  doubtlcss  one  of  the 
swimmers  and  efficient  helpers. 

44.  And  the  rest,  who  could  not 

swim,  some  on  boards,  or  planks, 

and  -iome  on  broken  pieces,  or  pai-ts 

of  the  ship.    The  loose  articles  and 

furniture  of  the  vessel  had  probably 

i  been  thrown  overboard  before  this.    So 

that    pieces  of    the    stranded    vessel, 

i  broken  ofl"  by  the  waves  or  by  hand,  are 

I  doubtless  meant.     In  this  description 

'  we    see    that    perfect   discipline  was 

maintained  on  l)oard ;    which  was  all 

important,  l>oth  to  prevent  confusion 

i  and  to  encourage  the  fearful.     They 

escaped  all — more  exactly.  They  all 

I  got  through   safe  to   the  land.     There 

i  seems  to  be  an  allusion  to  the  promise 

I  in  ver.  24,  2.5,  which  was  thus  remark- 

j  ably  fulfilled. 

Pr.\ctical  Remarks. 

j      1.  This  chapter  presents  strong  historic 

I  evidence  of  the  truth  of  Christianity.    The 

!  extreme  accuracy  of  Luke  proves  hi.s  trust- 

I  worthiness  as  a  writer  of  both  the  Acts  and 

his  Gospel ;  and  hence  of  the  things  therein 

contained.     (Ver.  4,  5,  8, 12, 14-16  ;  Luke  1 : 

1-4.) 

2.  It  would  seem  to  have  been  God's  will 
that  this  remarkable  chapter  should  have 
been  penned  for  such  times  as  ours,  to  meet 
the  evidential  demands  of  criticism,  and 
the  tests  of  skepticism.  (.lohn  20:31;  Es'.h. 
4  :  14.) 

3.  This  chapter  affords  a  striking  illustra- 
tion of  the  power  and  value  of  Christian 
trustfulness.     (Ver.  2'J-25  ;  34-36  ;  Ps.  91.) 

4.  This  chapter  illustrates  the  influence 
and  salutary  effect  of  a  truly  consecrated 
Christian  man.  (Ver.  10,  21,  31,  33,  43  ;  Prov. 
16  :  7.) 

5.  This  chapter  exhibits  God's  providential 
care  over  his  people.  (Ver.  1,  3,  6, 21-25, 32 ; 
Gen.  50 :  19,  20.) 


Ch.  XXVII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


399 


6.  The  Christian's  path  is  often  determined 
by  wicked  men,  who  thus  fultill  the  pur- 
poses of  God.  Thus  Paul's  long  journey  to 
Jlouie,  and  his  residence  there  as  a  preacher, 
were  provided  for  without  expense  to  him. 
(Ver.  1 ;  3 :  17, 18 ;  Ps.  37  :  2.S,  24.) 

7.  God  overrules  the  hearts  of  men  for  the 
good  of  his  cause  and  his  children.  (Ver. 
3,  43 ;  Ezek.  21 :  27.) 

8.  "  Even  when  the  route  is  circuitous  and 
the  winds  unfavorable,  God  conducts  his 
servants  to  the  desired  port."  (Ver.  4,  5 ; 
Ps.  107  :  7.) 

9.  In  giving  advice  without  intruding  and 
in  patiently  bearing  its  rejection,  Paul  pre- 
sents an  example  of  the  dignity  becoming  a 
Christian.    (Ver.  9-11 ;  1  Cor.  16: 13.) 

10.  The  voice  of  the  people  is  not  the  voice 
of  God.  Majorities  are  often  on  the  wrong 
side.    (Ver.  12  ;  Exod.  23  :  2.) 

11.  We  must  beware  how  we  trust  to  ap- 
pearances, or  depend  on  the  temporal.  (Ver. 
13,14;  Prov.  27:1.) 

12.  What  will  not  a  man  give  for  his  life? 
Yet  the  perishing  sonl  often  gathers  more 
and  more  of  that  which  is  already  sinking 
him.    (Ver.  18, 19 ;  Job.  2:4;  Luke  12  :  19-21.) 

13.  Happy  he  who  on  the  voyage  of  life  is 
ready  to  give  up  everything  to  reach  the 
heavenly  land.  (Ver.  18,  19,  38,  44 ;  Matt. 
19 :  29.) 

14.  Paul  was  a  remarkable  example  of  be- 
coming all  things  to  all  men.  Among  sea- 
men he  showed  himself  not  a  bad  seaman. 
(Ver.  10,  21 ;  1  Cor.  9 :  20-23.) 

15.  Men  need  to  be  taught  their  own  help- 
lessness, and  their  entire  dependence  on 
God ;  and  then  will  they  be  ready  to  hear, 
and  accept  his  help.  (Ver.  20,  21 ;  Ps.  107  : 
23-32.) 

16.  The  servant  of  God  can  well  be  of  good 
cheer,  resting  on  the  promise  of  God,  and 
knowing  his  revealed  will.  (Ver.  22  ;  28 :  11 : 
Heb.  13  :  5,  6.) 

17.  We  should  recognize  and  acknowledge 
Grod's  ownership  in  us,  by  our  consecration 
to  him,  and  by  openly  confessing  him.  (Ver. 
23 ;  1  Cor.  6 :  20 ;  7  :  23.) 

18.  The  ungodly  little  know  how  much 
they  owe  to  the  prayers  of  God's  people. 
(Ver.  24  ;  Isa.  1  •  9.) 

19.  The  lives  of  impenitent  men  are  often 
spared  because  God  interposes  in  behalf  of 
his  children.    (Ver.  24 ;  Gen.  19  :  19-22.) 

20.  God's  promises  and  purposes  concern- 
ing men  are  often  conditioned.     "  But  we 


must  be  cast  on  a  certain  island,"  suggests 
the  use  of  means.    (Ver.  2H.) 

21.  Ix>ng  waiting  and  great  trials  do  not 
invalidate  the  promises  of  God,  nor  prevent 
their  fulfillment.    (Ver.  27  ;  2  Peter  3  :  9.) 

22.  In  carrying  out  his  gracious  plans  con- 
cerning us,  God  expects  us  to  use  the  means 
at  hand.  He  dops  not  do  that  which  we  can 
do  ourselves.     (Ver.  2S,  29  ;  John  21 :  6.) 

23.  They  who  desert  in  times  of  peril  and 
need  are  selfish  and  cowardly,  and  show  a 
bad  heart.    (Ver.  .30 ;  John  6 :  66-69.) 

24.  The  purposes  of  God  concerning  future 
events  include  the  means  as  well  as  the  end. 
.Seed-time  and  harvest  are  promised,  yet  the 
farmer  will  not  reap  except  he  sow,  God's 
people  are  chosen  unto  salvation  ;  yet  none 
will  be  saved  without  repentance,  faith,  and 
a  life  becoming  godliness.  (Ver.  31 ;  1  Peter 
1:2,14;  Heb.  12:14,  15.) 

25.  Faith  in  God  is  the  root  of  true  cour- 
age and;  productive  of  cheerfulness  in  the 
midst  of  adversity.  (Ver.  33-36 ;  Heb.  11 : 
32-34.) 

26.  "  Cut  off  the  ropes  from  every  boat  in 
which  thou  trustest  besides  God.  Then  shalt 
thou  behold  the  morning  light  and  enjoy 
his  salvation."    (Ver.  32.) 

27.  It  is  fitting  to  acknowledge  God's  good- 
ness in  partaking  of  food.  In  this  we  have 
the  example  of  both  Paul  and  Christ.  (Ver. 
35;  John  6: 11.) 

28.  The  gospel  and  those  who  truly  exem- 
plify it,  tend  to  inspire  men  with  cheerful- 
ness and  courage.  (Ver.  36;  Neh.  8-10; 
Prov.  25  :  11.) 

29.  War  and  bloodshed  tend  to  blunt  the 
sensibilities  of  men,  and  to  undermine  the 
sacredness  of  human  life.    (Ver.  42.) 

30.  It  was  Paul's  religion  which  gave  him 
favor  with  God  and  men.  The  Christian  is 
the  salt  of  the  earth  and  the  light  of  the 
world.     (Ver.  43  ;  Matt.  5  :  13,  14.) 

31.  All  of  the  two  hundred  and  seventy- 
six  were  saved,  though  some  with  difficulty ; 
so  will  all  of  God's  people,  though  some  as  by 
fire.    (Ver.  44 ;  1  Cor.  3:15;  1  Peter  4 :  18.) 

32.  God's  people  are  everywhere  safe  in 
his  keeping,  on  the  ocean  as  well  as  on  the 
land;  and  there  shall  not  fail  them  any- 
thing that  he  has  promised.  (Ver.  43,  44 ; 
Deut.  31  :  6.) 

33.  May  we  not  believe  that  many  of  those 
saved  from  the  shipwreck  were  led  by  Paul 
to  a  higher  salvation  through  faith  in 
Christ?    (Ver.  24,44.) 


400 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIIt. 


They  pass  the  winter  at  Media ;  journey  to 

Rome. 
28    AND  when  they  were  escaped,  then  they 


knew  that  the  island  was  culled  Melita. 

2  And  the  'barbarous  people  showed  us  no 

little  kindness :  for  they  kindled  a  fire 


t  Rom.  1 :  14 ;  Col.  3  :  H. 


Ch.  28  :  In  this  chapter  the  narra- 
tive of  Paul's  journey  to  Rome  is  con- 
tinued. For  three  months  the  ship- 
wrecked comi)auy  remain  in  Melita, 
after  whicli  tlieysail  to  Puteoli,  whence 
they  travel  by  land, — two  deputations 
from  the  church  at  Home  meeting  Paul 
by  the  way.  At  Rome  Paul  is  treated 
with  great  indulgence  as  a  prisoner. 
First  to  the  Jews  he  exjjounds  from  the 
Scriptures  concerning  Jesus,  as  the 
Messiah ;  after  which  he  turns  chietiy 
to  the  Gentiles,  continuing  his  labors 
for  two  years. 

1-10.    Paul's   Stay   at   Melita. 

(Mark  16:  18;  Luke  10:  19.)      Winter   of  A.    D. 

60,  61,  from  about  November  1  to  Feb- 
ruary 1. 

1.  And  Avheu  they  were  es- 
caped— or,  according  to  the  oldest 
manuscripts,  And  having  escaped,  we 
knew,  we  came  to  know,  that  the  island 
is  called  Melita.  This  language  rather 
implies  that  they  learned  it  from  the 
people  who  had  come  down  to  view  the 
wreck.  From  Citta  Vecchia,  the  an- 
cient capital  of  Malta,  about  five  miles 
distant,  the  peojile  in  the  morning 
could  see  the  ship  aground,  and  so 
could  have  been  on  the  spot,  to  receive 
the  escaping  company,  and  tell  them 
where  they  were.  (Alexander's  Kitto.) 
This  is  another  incidental  evidence 
that  Melita  is  the  modern  Malta,  an 
island  seventeen  miles  long  and  nine 
broad,  about  fifty-six  miles  south  of 
Sicily,  and  aljout  two  hundred  miles 
from  Cape  Bon  on  the  African  coast. 
But  some  writers,  and  especially  since 
the  early  part  of  last  century,  liave 
held  that  Melita  was  the  Austrian 
island,  Meleda,  in  the  Adriatic  Sea,  or 
Gulf  of  Venice,  nineteen  miles  north- 
west of  Ragusa.  But  this  is  improba- 
ble ;  for  such  a  view  supposes  that  Fair 
Havens  was  on  the  north  side  of  Crete 
(27:1*),  that  the  P^uroclydon  was  hot 
sirocco,  blowing  from  the  coast  of 
Africa  instead  of  toward  the  (juick- 
sands  or  Syrtis  (25: 1*.  n),  which  is  cer- 
tainly inconsistent  with  "the  present 
rain"  and  "cold."    (ver. 2.)    Besides, 


to  have  reached  that  island  from 
Clauda,  and  in  fourteen  days,  and  with- 
out seeing  land,  would  have  been 
almost  miraculous.  "  To  have  been 
driven  up  the  Adriatic  to  the  island  of 
Meleda  in  the  requisite  curve,  and  to 
have  passed  so  many  small  islands  and 
other  dangers  in  the  route.  Mould, 
humanly  speaking,  liave  been  im- 
possible. The  distance  from  Clauda 
to  this  Meleda  is  not  less  tliau 
seven  hundred  and  twenty  geographi- 
cal miles,  and  tlie  wind  must  liave 
been  long  from  the  south  to  make 
this  vovage  in  fourteen  days."  (Ad- 
miral Penrose,  in  Conybeare  and 
Hoirson,  Life,  etc.,  /SY.  Pitul,  vol.  ii.  p. 
347.)  Moreover,  an  Alexandrian  ship 
would  not  naturally  winterthere  (ver.ii), 
nor  would  it  likely  continue  its  voyage 
afterward  to  Puteoli,  nor  go  to  Syracuse 
before  it  went  to  Rhegiuni.  (ver.  12, 13.) 
Hence  this  opinion  is  now  rejected  by 
all  the  best  scholars.  That  Malta  is 
the  Melita  of  Paul  there  can  be  no 
doubt.  (1)  It  is  the  traditionary  scene 
of  the  shipwreck.  These  traditions 
are  numerous  among  the  Maltese  and  go 
into  tlie  remote  jiast.  (2)  It  is  on  the 
track  of  Alexandrian  ships,  which 
often  winter  there,  (ver.  11.)  (.3)  It  is 
situated  whither  a  shiji  would  drift 
under  the  circumstances  described  in 
about  thirteen  days,  (see  ou  27 :  n.)  Mr. 
Smith  and  Admiral  Penrose  made  esti- 
mates of  the  proljable  direction  and 
speed  of  the  ship,  independently  of 
each  other,  and  substantiallv  agreed. 
(4)  St.  Paul's  Bay,  with  its  W-ky 
shore,  its  soundings,  its  inlet  and  its 
beach,  and  its  i)lace  where  two  seas 
meet,  exactly  corresponds  with  Luke's 
narrative.  Even  to  see  it  amounts 
to  a  demonstration.  Mr.  Hermann 
Merivale  says,  in  his  account  of  a 
visit  to  ilalta:  "Under  such  guid- 
ance as  his  (that  of  Sir  William  Reiil), 
the   absolute   and  unmistakable   iden- 

I  tity  of  the  spot  with  that  described 
in  the  Acts  flashed  irresistilily  upon 
the  mind.  .  .  .  Under  his  description, 

j  every  incident  of  the  tale  seemed  as  if 


Ch.  XXVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


401 


and  received  us  every  one,  because  of  the 
present  rain,  and  because  of  the  cold. 
3      And  when  Paul  had  gathered  a  bundle 


of  sticks,  and  laid  them  on  the  fire,  there 

came  a  viper  out  of  the  heat,  and  fastened 

4  on  his  hand.    And  when  the  barbarians 


enacted  before  the  eye."  (Dean  IIow- 
SON,  Bohkn  Lectures,  1880,  p.  154.) 
(5)  The  subsequent  voyage  to  Puteoli 
is  such  as  would  be  naturally  taken. 
The  objections  to  this  view  have  been 
often  answered.  The  principal  one, 
that  ^lalta  was  not  in  the  Adriatic  Sea, 
overlooks  the'fact  that  this  geosjraphical 
term  was  applied  to  a  much  larger  area 
formerly  than  now.  (Seeoii27  :'27.)  The 
other  objections  derived  from  the  sail- 
ors not  knowing  the  land  (27 :  39),  from 
the  Maltese  being  called  "barbarians" 
(ver. '2),  from  the  fact  that  there  are  no 
vipers  now  in  Malta  (ver.  3),  and  from 
the  false  opinion  that  dysentery  is  un- 
known there  (ver.  8),  are  really  of  no 
weight,  and  are  incidentally  answered 
in  the  notes. 

3.  The  barbarous  people — hav- 
ing reference  not  to  their  civilization, 
but  to  their  language.  (Rom.  1 :  u.)  The 
Greeks  and  Romans  were  accustomed 
to  call  all  barbarians  who  did  not  use 
their  language.  The  Maltese  were  of 
Phcenician  origin,  and  probably  spoke 
a  Phoenician  dialect  of  the  Hebrew.  It 
came  under  Roman  rule  in  tlie  second 
Punic  war,  about  218,  B.  c.  The  mod- 
ern Maltese  speak  a  dialect  of  tlie 
Arabic,  introduced  at  the  Mohamme- 
dan conquest,  intermingled  with  Euro- 
pean languages.  Shewed  us  no  lit- 
tle— or  no  common  kindness — that 
is,  special  kindness.  (i9:ii.)  Re- 
ceived us  every  one — ns  all,  under 
their  care  and  to  their  hospitality,  now 
exhibited  by  kindling  a  large  fire,  and 
afterward  by  receiving  them  into  their 
houses,  or  into  places  prepared  for 
them.  Because  of  the  present 
rain — on  account  of  the  rain  having 
come  tipon  us.  These  voyagers  had 
been  exposed  to  the  tempest,  and  had 
])assed  through  the  waves  to  the  land. 
(27 :  4*.)  An  additional  reason  is  given  : 
Because  of  the  cold,  showing  that 
the  Euraquilon  (s7 :  u)  was  continuing 
to  blow.  It  could  not  have  been 
the  hot  Sirocco,  the  southeast  wind, 
which  indeed  continues  only  two  or 
three  days. 

3.  Paul  exhibits  his  active  spirit  and 
his  interest  in  everything  that  pertained 

2a 


to  their  comfort,  by  keeping  up  the  fire, 
which  incidently  afforded  an  occasion 
for  another  proof  of  God's  watch-care 
over  him  as  his  servant.  A  bundle 
of  sticks — literally,  having  twisted  or 
rolled  together  into  a  bundle  a  great 
number  of  dried  sticks  or  twigs,  brush- 
wood and  furze ;  which  is  said  to  be 
the  only  wood  growing  near  St.  Paul's 
Bay.  There  came  a  viper  out  of 
the  heat,  or  on  account  of  the  heat. 
The  serpent  benumbed  by  the  cold, 
stiff',  and  torpid,  had  been  hastily  gath- 
ered up  with  the  twigs  and  brush  ;  but 
now  feeling  the  sudden  warmth,  was  so 
aroused,  that  it  sprang  forth  and  with 
a  single  bound  fastened  on  Paul's 
hand.  Dr.  Hackett,  acknowledging 
indebtedness  to  Professor  Agassiz,  says, 
"  Vipers,  too,  lurk  in  rocky  places,  and 
that  is  the  character  of  the  region  where 
the  incident  occurred.  They  are  accus- 
tomed also  to  dart  at  their  enemies, 
sometimes  several  feet  at  a  bound  ;  and 
hence  the  one  mentioned  here  could 
have  reached  the  hand  of  Paul  as  he 
stood  in  the  vicinity  of  the  fire."  It  is 
said  that  there  are  no  poisonous  ser- 
pents now  in  Malta.  They  have  dis- 
appeared with  the  increase  of  popula- 
tion and  the  clearing  away  of  the  wood. 
Mr.  Smith  refers  to  the  gradual  disap- 
pearance of  the  viper  from  the  island 
of  Arran.  {Voyage,  p.  151.)  But  Mr. 
Lewin  states  that  he  saw  a  snake  on  the 
island  of  Malta  which  looked  like  a 
viper.  "  We  scarcely  needed  to  excite 
our  imaginations,  the  singular  experi- 
ence of  a  friend  of  mine  at  this  spot 
(St.  Paul's  Bay),  where  a  serpent 
dropped  from  a  fagot  of  brushwood, 
which  he  had  casually  taken  up." 
(Mr.  Hermann  Merivale,  in  Bean 
Hoivson'  s  Bohlen  Lectii^res,  1880,  p.  155.) 
4.  Venomous — not  in  the  Greek. 
Beast  or  ivild  beast  (ii:6);  there  is 
notliing  in  this  Avord  expressing  veno- 
mous, but  the  idea  is  included  in  the 
word  viper  (ver.  3),  and  is  implied  in  the 
exclamation  and  the  astonishment  of 
the  natives.  That  it  really  bit  the 
apostle  must  be  inferred  from  the  ex- 
pressions, "  fastened  on  his  hand  "  and 
"  hung  on,"  better  from,  his  hand, 


402 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIII. 


saw  the  venomous  beast  hang  on  his  hand, 
they  said  among  themselves,  s No  doubt 
this  man  is  a  murderer,  whom,  though  he 
hath  escaped  the  sea,  yet  Vengeance  suf- 

5  fereth  not  to  live.    And  he  shook  otf  the 
beast  into  the  fire,  and  •"  felt  no  harm. 

6  Howbeit   they    looked  when  he  should 
have  swollen,  or  fallen  down  dead  sud- 


denly :  but  after  they  had  looked  a  great 
while,  and  saw  no  harm  come  to  him, 
they  changed  their  minds,  and  '  said  that 
he  was  a  god. 

7  In  the  same  quarters  were  possessions 
of  the  chief  man  of  the  island,  whose  name 
was  Publius ;  who  received  us,  and  lodged 

8  us  three  days  courteously.    And  it  came 


g  Luke  13  :  2,  4  ;  John  9  :  1,  2.        h  Mark  16  :  18 ;  Luke  10  :  19.        i  ch.  14  :  11. 


and  the  belief  of  the  natives.     They  i 
could  easily  examine  Paul's  hand  to  see  j 
whether  he  was  bitten  or  not.      No  i 
doubt  this  man  is  a  murderer —  j 
they  doubtless  knew  that  Paul  was  a  j 
prisoner,  from  certain  indications,  as  his  j 
chain,  or  being  bound  to  a  soldier.    So, 
reasoning  backward  from  death  as  a 
punishment  to  the    crime,  they  con- 
clude that  he  is  a  murderer.   Yet  ven- 
geance—jHs<(ce,  the  avenging  justice 
of  the  Deity.   Whether  they  personified 
justice,  or  referred  to  the  heathen  god- 
dess of  justice,  is  uncertain.   It  at  least 
expressed  their  moral  sense  of  retribu- 
tive justice.   Suffereth,  more  exactly, 
suffered  not  to  live— his  doom  being 
looked   upon   as    already    fixed   and 
certain. 

5.  But  Paul  is  calm,  and  shows  no 
alarm.  And  he,  etc. — ITe,  however, 
shaking  off'  the  beast  into  the  fire,  suf- 
fered no  evil.  Thus  was  fulfilled  the 
promise  of  our  Lord,  "  They  shall  take 
up  serpents ; "  "  I  have  given  you  power 
to  tread  on  serpents  .  .  .  and  nothing 

shall  hurt  you."      (Mark  16  :  is  ;  Luke  10  :  19.) 

The  divine  protection  or  power  was  ex- 
ercised in  preventing  the  imparting  of 
the  poison,  or  in  neutralizing  or  coun- 
teracting it.  Very  likely  the  first.    (Dau. 

6:  J2.) 

6.  Howbeit  they  looked,  etc. 
Better,  But  they  were  expecting  that  he 
would  become  inflamed,  and  as  a  result 
swollen.  This  was  the  usual  and 
almost  immediate  effect  of  the  adder's 
bite.  Or  fall  down  dead  suddenly 
— such  a  result  is  recorded  of  the  Afri- 
can seqients.  Saw  no  harm  come 
to  him.  They  changed  their 
minds,  or  opinion.  And  said  that 
he  Avas  a  god — in  human  form,  or  a 
divine  person.  "  Observe  the  insta- 
bility of  human  reasoning.  He  is 
either  a  murderer  or  a  god.  .  .  .  There 
is  a  third  supposition:  he  is  a  man  of 
God.    Kespectiug  no  class  do  natural 


men  err  more  than  concerning  the 
saints."  (Bengel.)  The  scene  was 
the  reverse  of  that  at  Lystra.  There 
the  people  took  him  first  to  be  a  god, 
and  afterward  stoned  him.  (u:  11,19.) 
7.  In  the  same  quarters,  etc.; 
better.  Now  around  that  place  were  the 
lands  belonging  to  the  chief  man  of  the 
island.  His  residence,  according  to 
tradition,  was  at  Medina,  the  modern 
Citta  Vecchia,  an  inland  city  and  the 
ancient  capital,  about  five  miles  dis- 
tant. His  lands  may  have  extended 
down  near  to  St.  Paul's  Bay.  In  that 
city  have  been  found  two  inscrip- 
tions, one  in  Greek  and  the  other 
in  Latin,  on  which  is  this  same 
title,  chief  of  the  Melitans,  which 
appeal's  to  refer  to  the  chief  magistrate 
or  governor  of  Melita.  The  island  be- 
longed to  the  province  of  Sicily,  ruled 
by  a  Prtetor,  and  Publius  may  have 
been  his  deputy  at  this  place.  President 
Woolsey  (quoted  by  Dr.  Hackett) 
speaks  of  an  earlier  Greek  inscription, 
in  which  two  persons  are  mentioned 
as  holding  the  ofiice  of  magistrate  in 
the  island.  Also  a  later  inscription, 
from  which  it  api)ears  that  a  person 
might  be  called  the  chief  man,  although 
his  magistracy  had  expired.  However 
this  may  be,  the  accuracy  of  Luke  is 
maintained,  in  the  proper  application 
of  a  Roman  title.  Who  received  us, 
and  lodged  us  three  days  court- 
eously—until arrangements  could  be 
made  for  settled  quai-t€rs.  It  was 
natural  for  Publius  to  pay  sjiecial 
attention  to  Julius,  a  Roman  officer,  and 
his  party.  The  remaikakle  promi- 
nence to  which  Paul  had  attained  in 
the  shipwreck,  and  his  miraculous 
preservation  from  the  bit€  of  the  viper, 
would  give  him  notoriety,  and  commend 
him  to  Publius.  Most  expositors  limit 
us,  the  recipients  of  this  hospitality,  to 
Paul,  Luke,  and  Aristarchus,  with 
probably  the  noble-hearted  Julius,  and 


Ch.  XXVUI.] 


THE  ACTS. 


403 


to  pasB,  that  the  father  of  Publius  lay  sick 
of  a  fever  and  of  a  bloody  flux:  to  whom 
Paul  entered  in,  and  Sprayed,  and  'laid 
9  his  hands  on  him,  and  healed  him.  So 
when  this  was  done,  others  also,  which 


had  diseases  in  the  island,  came  and  were 
10  healed.  Who  also  honoured  us  with  many 
honours ;  and  when  we  departed,  they 
'aded  us  with  such  things  as  were  neces- 
sary. 


k  James  5  :  14, 15.        » ch.  19  :  11,  12 ;  Mark  6  :  5  ;  7  :  32  ;  Luke  4  :  40. 


possibly  the  officers,  or  the  soldiers  un- 
der him.  The  narrative  gathers  prin- 
cipally around  Paul,     (seeouver.  lo.) 

8.  The  kindness  of  Publius  is  repaid. 
No  one  loses  by  such  hospitality  to  a 
servant  of  God.  (Heb.  i:i:2.)  In  the 
miraculous  cure  of  the  father  of 
Publius,  Luke  mentions  the  disease  in 
accurate  and  professional  language, 
characteristic  of  his  writings  (Luke* :  38; 
3:43),  and  as  a  physician  naturally 
would.  Lay  sick  of  a  fever  and  of 
a  bloody  flux — ordysentery.  The  ori- 
ginal for  the  word  fever  is  in  the  plural 
fevers,  probably  with  reference  to  the 
paroxysms  of  an  intermittent  fever. 
''  Here  also  we  have  the  testimony  of 
Hippocrates,  who  uses  fevers  in  the 
plural."  (Epid.  iii.)  (Smith,  Voyage, 
pp.  3,  155.)  It  has  been  objected  to 
Melita  being  Malta,  because  in  that 
dry,  rocky,  and  healthy  island,  it  has 
been  contended  that  dysentery  never 
occurs.  But  this  is  a  mistake.  Mr. 
Smith  says,  "  Dr.  Galland,  of  Valetta, 
informs  me  that  the  disease  is  by  no 
means  uncommon  in  Malta."  ( Voyage,  p. 
172.)  "  It  happens  that  the  writer  of  the 
present  note  has  been  beside  the  bedside 
of  a  friend  suffering  from  dysentery  in 
Malta."  (HowsONANU  SpExN'ce.)  The 
cure  wasefFected  by  Paul  through  prayer 
and  the  laying  on  of  hands,  doubt- 
less in  the  name  of  Jesus.    (3  :  is ;  james 

5:  U,  15.) 

9.  The  healing  of  the  father  of 
Publius  is  but  the  beginning  of  a  large 
number  of  cures  during  the  stay  of 
Paul  at  Malta.  Others  also — more 
exactly,  And  the  rest  who  had  dis- 
eases came  to  him  and  were  cured. 
Tlie  island  not  being  very  large,  nor 
the  number  of  inhabitants  very  great, 
the  report  of  Paul's  miracle  couhl 
be  easily  noised  throughout.  Since 
Paul  was  a  prisoner,  he  could  not  go  to 
those  suffering  from  infirmities,  but 
they  must  be  brought  to  him.  The 
language  is  popular  and  general,  but 


it  is  not  at  all  incredible  that  the  rest 
includes  all  the  sick  who  were  able  to 
come  to  him,  or  to  be  brought  to  him. 
There  was  at  least  a  general  coming 
from  all  parts  of  the  island.  No  doubt 
that  Paul  improved  his  opportunity, 
as  on  another  occasion  (Gai.  3:  i3,  u),  of 
proclaiming  Jesus,  the  great  Physician, 
and  his  gospel.  It  is  reasonable  to  be- 
lieve that  Christianity  was  introduced 
into  the  island  at  this  time.  Accord- 
ing to  a  tradition  Publius  was  the  first 
pastor  in  the  island. 

10.  This  verse  is  closely  connected 
with  the  last  verse.  Who  also — not 
merelj'  came  and  were  healed,  but  also 
in  gratitude  honored  us,  Paul  and 
his  company,  with  many  marks  of 
honor.  They  extended  to  them  a  gen- 
erous hospitality,  including  doubtless 
such  things  as  would  be  needed  by 
travelers  who  had  lost  everything  by 
shipwreck.  Some  would  limit  honors 
to  gifts  and  pecuniaiy  fees,  such  as  a 
physician  might  receive.  But  this  is 
too  contracted  a  meaning  here,  and  it 
was  contrary  to  Christ's  command  to 
receive  reward  for  such  miraculous 
deeds.  (Matt.  io:8.)  Besides,  these  marks 
of  honor  were  during  their  stay  on  the 
island,  and  are  distinguished  from  the 
presents  made  at  their  departure.  No- 
tice that  the  whole  ship's  company  is 
designated  us  all  in  verse  2,  while 
simply  ^^,s  is  used  in  this  verse,  and  is 
more  naturally  restricted  to  Paul  and 
his  company.  And  when  we  de- 
parted— better,  And  ivhen  we  put  to 
sea.  (27:2,4.)  They  laded  us,  etc. 
They  piU  on  board  sitch  things  as  were 
needed,  provisions  and  other  necessaries 
for  the  voyage,  and  perhaps  money. 
The  idea  in  the  original  is  that  of  large 
and  numerous  gifts.  While  the  marks 
of  honor  had  been  specially  bestowed 
on  Paul  and  his  company,  because  of 
the  miracles  performed,  the  numerous 
gifts  were  probably  extended  also  to 
others   at   their   departure.     Publius 


404 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIII. 


11  And  after  three  months  we  departed  in 
a  ship  of  Alexandria,  which  had  wintered 
in  the  isle,  whose  sign  was  Castor  and 

12  Pollux.    And  landing  at    Syracuse,    we 


13  tarried  there  three  days.  And  from  thence 
we  fetched  a  compass,  and  came  to  Khe- 
gium :  and  after  one  day  the  south  wind 
blew,  and  we  came  the  next  day  to  Pu- 


would  doubtless  set  the  example,  and 
the  others  who  had  been  largely  bene- 
fited would  not  be  slow  to  follow. 

11-16.  JOTIKNEY  FROM  MeLITA  TO 
Rome.  (pwi.  i :  uu.)  The  month  of 
February,  A.  D.  61.  Luke  still  nar- 
rates as  an  eye-witness. 

11.  And  after  three  months — the 
season  of  sailing  had  again  come. 
They  would  naturally  embrace  the 
earliest  opportunity.  It  was  probably 
early  in  February.  We  departed — 
we  put  to  sea,  as  in  ver.  10.  It  was 
doubtless  in  the  harbor  of  Valetta, 
which  then,  as  now,  was  the  harbor  of 
the  island,  on  its  northeast  side,  where 
the  ship  had  wintered,  and  from  whence 
they  set  sail.  (ver.  39.)  A  ship  of 
Alexandria,  as  was  also  that  in 
which  they  had  been  shipwrecked. 
(21:6.)  This  seems  to  have  been  a 
merchant  grain  ship,  which  had  been 
compelled  to  winter  at  Malta,  prob- 
ably by  the  same  wind  which  had 
wrecked  the  other  vessel.  Malta,  on 
the  line  between  Alexandria  and  Italy, 
was  a  convenient  place  to  winter,  if  de- 
layed by  storm.  Whose  sign  was 
Castor  and  Pollux — marked  with 
the  image  or  figure  of  the  tivin  brothers, 
whose  names  were  Castor  and  Pollux. 
These,  in  heathen  mythology,  were  the 
sons  of  Jupiter  and  Leda,  and  were  re- 
garded as  the  guardian  gods  of  sailors. 
They  were  said  also  to  have  been  trans- 
lated to  the  sky  and  placed  among  the 
stars  as  the  constellation  of  the  Gemini. 
They  were  specially  honored  in  the  dis- 
tricts about  Alexandria.  They  were 
sometimes  represented  as  stars,  but 
more  frequently  as  young  men  on 
horseback,  or  their  heads  simply  given. 
The  Alexandrians  usually  ornamented 
each  side  of  the  prow  of  ships  with 
figures ;  in  this  case,  Castor  was  prob- 
ably painted  on  one  side  and  Pollux  on 
the  other.  The  ship  must  have  been 
large  to  have  accommodated  so  many 
beside  its  own. 

12.  The  vessel  takes  the  regular  route 
from  Valetta  in  a  northerly  direction 
about  eighty  miles,  which,  in  favorable 
weather,  could  be  accomplished  in  a 


day,  to  Syracuse,  the  famous  capital  of 
Sicily,  on  its  southeastern  coast.  Here 
they  landed,  or  touched  (27:3),  and 
tarried  three  days,  either  for  pur- 
poses of  trade,  or  for  favorable  winds. 
13.  We  fetched  a  compass — 
rather,  making  a  circuit.  I'roljably 
the  favorable  wind  did  not  come,  and 
they  therefore  follow  the  windings  of 
the  coast,  or  take  a  zig-zag  movement, 
known  among  sailors  as  tacking ;  or, 
the  wind  being  westerly,  tliey  .'^tood 
out  to  sea,  and  so  came  circuitously  to 
Rhegium.  "I  am  inclined  to  siqijxjse 
that  the  Avind  was  northwest,  and  tliat 
they  worked  windward,  availing  them- 
selves of  the  sinuosities  of  the  coast ; 
but  with  this  wind  they  could  not  pro- 
ceed through  the  Straits  of  Messina. 
.  .  .  They  were,  therefore,  obliged  to 
put  into  Rhegium  at  the  entrance  of 
the  strait."  (Smith  Voyage,  p.  156.) 
Rhegium,  the  modern  Jieggio,  near 
the  southern  point  of  Italy,  opposite 
Messina,  and  about  seventy  miles  north 
of  Syracuse.  As  they  made  a  circuit- 
ous route  they  probably  took  more  than 
one  day.  And  after  one  day,  wait- 
ing at  Rhegium, «  south  Avind  blew, 
or  arose,  the  most  favorable  wind  both 
for  passing  through  the  strait  and  for 
a  speedy  passage  northwanl  to  Putooli. 
In  this  strait  was  the  famous  passage  of 
Scylla  and  Charybdis,  considered  dan- 
gerous even  at  the  present  day.  Puteoli 
lay  about  one  hundred  and  eighty 
miles  from  Rhegium,  and  as  they  ar- 
rived there  the  next  day,  they  oc- 
cupied more  than  one  day,  and  less 
than  two,  in  the  voyage.  This  accords 
with  the  speed  of  ancient  vessels  which, 
with  a  favorable  wind,  could  go  from 
six  to  seven  miles  an  hour.  From  the 
Straits  of  Messina  they  could  see 
Mount  -(Etna,  and  from  Puteoli,  Vesu- 
vius. Puteoli,  the  modern  Pozzuoli, 
"  was  then,  as  now,  the  most  sheltered 
part  of  the  Bay  of  Nai)les,"  about 
seven  miles  northwest  of  the  city 
oftliatname.  "It  was  the  principal 
port  of  Southern  Italy,  and  in  particu- 
lar it  was  the  great  emporium  of  the 
Alexandrian  wheat-ships.    Seneca,  in 


Ch.  XXVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


405 


14  teoli :  where  we  found  brethren,  and  were 


one  of  his  epistles,  gives  an  interest- 
in<^  and  grapliic  account  of  the  arrival 
of  the  Alexandrian  fleet.  All  ships  en- 
tering the  hay  were  obliged  to  strilie 
their  topsails,  except  wheat-ships, 
which  were  allowed  to  carry  theirs." 
(Smith  Voyage,  p.  157.)  Thus  it  has 
been  said  that  we  know  the  very  man- 


desired  to  tarry  with  them  seven  days; 


14.  Where  we  found  brethren. 

Here  a  Cliristian  cliurcli  existed,  who 
doubtless  had  heard  of  Paul,  and  of 
his  proposed  visit  to  Home,  mentioned 
in  his  Epistle  to  the  Romans  four  years 
before.  It  is  the  only  notice  in  the 
New  Testament  of  a  Christian  congre- 
gation in  Italy  outside  of  Home,    (see 


ner  in  which  the  vessel  bearing  Paul 
entered  into  port.  It  was  the  custom- 
ary harbor  of  the  imperial  city  for 
ships  from  the  East,  tliouijh  Rome  was 
one  hundred  and  seventy  miles  distant, 
and  passengers  and  freight  were  trans- 
ported thither.  Thirteen  piers  of  the 
mole  still  remain  in  the  harbor  where 
Paul  landed.  Indeed,  many  other  re- 
mains exist  in  the  city  which,  in  Paul's 
day,  stood  in  all  their  splendor. 


Heb.  13 :  24.)  Christianity  had  probably 
been  carried  into  Italy  soon  after  the 
Pentecostal  outi»ouring.  Believers  also 
probably  came  thither  from  Alexan- 
dria. Josei)lius  speaks  of  Jews  at 
Dicearchia,  the  original  name  of  Pute- 
oli.  (Antiq.  xvii.  12,  3.)  And  Avere 
desired,  rather,  were  entreated  to  re- 
main with  them  seven  days.  The 
request  appears  to  have  been  granted. 
Thus  news  of  Paul's  arrival  would  be 


406 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIIL 


15  and  so  we  went  toward  Rome.    And  from 
thence,  when  the  brethren  heard  ol'  us,  | 


they  came  to  meet  us  as  far  aa  Appii 
Forum,  and  the  Three  Taverns:  whom 


sent  to  the  brethren  at  Rome.     (ver.  is.)  | 
The  believers  could  also  be  assembled  ' 
for  hearing  Paul  and  the  breaking  of  ] 
bread  on  the  Lord's  Day,  as  at  Troas  ; 
(•10 : 6, 7)  and  at  Tyre.     (21 ;  *.)    The  kind  i 
and  grateful  centurion  was  under  too  1 
great  obligation  to  Paul  to  refuse  any 
reasonable  request.      There  may  also  | 
have  been  other  reasons  why  Julius  1 
might    willingly    remain  at   Puteoli.  | 
And  so — after  this  delay,  we  went 
toward  Rome,  or  more  exactly,  we 
came  into  Rome,  without  any  farther  j 
delay.   The  statement  of  the  completed  : 
journey  is  here  briefly  made ;  and  in 
the  next  verse,   some  details    of   the 
journey  from  Puteoli  to  Rome  on  foot 
are  given.     But  Dr.  Hackett  i)refers  to  ' 
render  they  went  unto  Home  with  the  ; 
idea  of  toward,  a  phrase  similar  to  that 
in  27  : 1,  "  That  we  should  sail  to  Italy,"  j 
and  to  John  20  :  3,  "  They  went  to,"  or 
"  toward  the  sepulchre."     ileyer  and 
Alford  prefer  the  former. 

15.  Some  incidents  on  the  way  to 
Rome.  From  Puteoli  they  probably 
went  to  Capua,  the  nearest  point  on  the 
Appian  Way,  the  great  road  to  Rome. 
Mr.  S.  Russell  Forbes,  who  has  resided  1 
at  Rome  for  over  twenty  years,  gives 
an  interesting  account  of  this  journey 
in  his  Footsteps  of  St.  Paul  at  Home. 
In  the  matter  of  distances  and  in  some 
other  things  he  dilfers  from  the  general 
authorities.  He  says  (p.  6) :  "  Too 
soon  tlie  week  passed  away,  and  then 
commenced  the  long  march  to  Rome, 
one  hundred  and  seventy  miles  distant, 
leaving  Puteoli  by  the  Consular  Way 
to  Capua,  where  they  struck  into  the 
Via  Appia,  one  hundred  and  fifty-one 
miles  from  Rome.  Resting  here  for 
one  night,  they  proceeded  along  the 
'Queen  of  long  roads,'  and  by  easy 
stages  toward  Rome.  From  the  time 
of  leaving  the  coast  till  their  arrival  in 
the  Eternal  City  only  two  small  places 
are  mentioned  ;  but  of  course  many  of 
interest  were  passed.  Two  days  after 
leaving  Capua,  they  would  arrive  at 
Terracina,  seventy-five  miles  from 
Rome;  and  the  next  morning,  con- 
tinuing their  way,  in  two  and  a  half 
miles  they    would    cross    the    stream 


which    flows    from    the    Fountain    of 
Feronia.  .  .  .    The  Grove  of  Feronia 
was  on  the  edge  of  the  Pontine  ^Marshes, 
aud  in  St.  Paul's  day  no  road  existed 
tlirough  them,  the  road  being  made 
1  afterwards  by  Trajan.    Trathc  was  con- 
ducted through  the  marshes  by  means 
1  of  a  canal,  which  still  exists ;  and  pas- 
I  sengers  coming  to  Rome  embarked  at 
I  tlie  Grove  of  Feronia,  and  were  towed 
in  barges  through  the  marshes  .  .  After 
'  a  long,  slow  journey   they  landed  at 
!  Appii  Forum,  forty-three  miles  from  the 
:  imperial  city  .  .  .  Forum  Appii  was 
a  town  of  the  Volsci,  and  name<l  the 
Forum  of  Appius  from  Appius  Clau- 
dius, wlio  founded   here  a  market  for 
'  the  convenience  of  the  country  people 
;  when  he  made  the  Appian  Way,  B.  c. 
312.     It  is  mentioned  by  Pliny  {iii.  9) 
j  in  the  list  of  colonies.  .  .  .   Horace  left 
Apjiii    Forum    in     the    evening    and 
reached  Feronia  at  ten  A.  i[.,  doing  the 
distance  of    the  canal    (twenty-seven 
miles)   in    sixteen    hours.      Suetonius 
('  Tiljerius'  ii.)  says,  '  Claudius  Drusus 
erected  a  statue  of  himself  at  Appii 
Forum.'  .  .  .    Horace  describes  it  as 
j  '  stufted  with  sailors  and  surly  land- 
lords.'    Some  fragments  of  ruins  and 
the  forty-third  milestone   are   all  that 
i  remain  of  Appii  Forum." 

\Vhen  the  brethren  heard  of  us. 
During  the  week  spent  at  Puteoli  there 
had  ])ten  abundant  opportunity  and 
'  time  for  them  to  hear  of  Paul's  arrival 
in  Italy,  aud  when  he  would  start  for 
{  Rome.  These  brethren  who  came  to 
meet  Paul  included  probably  some  of 
those  who  are  mentioned  in  Rom.  16  : 
j  1-10.  Two  companies  set  out  to  meet 
I  liim :  one  starting  earlier  than  the 
otlier.  The  first  one,  those  perliaps 
better  able  to  perform  the  journey  go 
forth  as  far  as  Appii  Forum,  or  t/ie 
Market  of  Appius  (see  note  above); 
the  other  company  meet  him  at  the 
Three  Taverns.  Thus  tliey  welcome 
Paul  with  attentions  so  often  paid  to 
beloved  guests  at  parting.  (15 :  3;  20 :  38 
21:5)  The  Three  Taverns  or  sAojos, 
was  one  of  the  halting  places  on  the 
Appian  Way.  The  site  is  perhaps  un- 
certain, aud  has  been  usually  placed  at 


Ch.  XXVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


407 


when  Paul  saw,  "he  thanked  God,  and 
took  courage. 
16      And  when  we  came  to  Rome,  the  cen- 
turion delivered  the  prisoners  to  the  cap- 


tain of  the  guard :  but  »  Paul  was  suffered 
to  dwell  by  himself  with  a  soldier  that 
kept  him. 


">  Ilom.  1  :  7-10 ;  15  :  Zi,  32.        "  ch.  24  :  23 ;  27  :  3. 


thirty -three  miles  from  Rome,  and  ten 
miles  nearer  than  Appii  Forum.  Mr. 
Forbes  places  it,  however,  at  nine 
miles  from  Rome,  the  last  halting 
place  before  reaching  the  city,  and 
says,  "  The  site  is  well  identified,  not 
only  by  tradition,  but  by  classical  au- 
thority." Also,  "Aurelius  Victor  re- 
cords that  Gallienus  had  a  villa  here, 
and  that  his  tomb  was  at  the  nintii 
mile."  Also  regarding  Cicero's  letter 
from  The  Three  Taverns  to  Atticus,  on 
April  3,  59  B.  c,  he  says,  "  Cicero  had 
left  his  villa  at  Antium,  and  the  road 
from  thence  runs  into  the  Appiau  Way 
at  the  eleventh  mile  from  Rome,  as  we 
have  seen,  so  that  the  Tliree  Taverns 
would  be  the  first  halting  place  on  the 
Appian  Way  for  Cicero,  where  he  could 
and  did  write  to  Appion  whilst  the 
horses  were  being  changed."  {Foot- 
steps, etc.,  pp.  11,  12.)  Mr.  Forbes 
mentions  the  Cliapel  of  St.  Paul  there 
now  used  as  a  stable.  Hliom  seeing, 
the  brethren  who  had  come  to  help  him 
on  his  journey,  and  doubtless  to 
present  to  him  the  salutations  of  the 
church.  Paul  thanked  God,  for 
their  sympathy,  and  for  the  answer  to 
his  prayers  that  he  might  visit  Rome 
and  the  brethren,  of  which  this  was  a 
foretaste.  (Rom.  i  :  8-ii.)  And  took 
courage — his  own  jaded  spirits  were 
revived  in  seeing  the  evidences  of  the 
end  of  so  long  and  perilous  a  journey ; 
inspired  by  the  presence  of  Christian 
brethren;  and  encouraged  in  God,  at 
the  evidences  and  prospects  of  the 
cause  of  Christ  at  Rome  (Rom.  i :  13-15), 
and  because  his  assured  hopes  of  being 
a  blessing  there  were  about  to  be  ful- 
filled.    (15:29.) 

16.  And  when  we  came  to 
Rome — probably  on  the  sixth  day 
after  leaving  Puteoli.  They  had  passed 
many  objects  of  interest,  grand  sights, 
splendid  scenery,  monuments,  temples, 
and  noted  buildings  on  this  "  the  most 
celebrated  of  Italian  roads ; "  but  Luke 
makes  no  reference  to  these,  since  they 
were  foreign  to  the  objects  of  his  nar- 


rative, and  did  not  relate  to  the  spread 
of  the  gospel  throughout  the  world. 

(1:8.) 

The  centurion  delivered  the 
prisoners  to  the  captain  of  the 
guard— n/  the  pnttorian  camp,  where 
was  quartered  tlie  body-guard  of  the 
emperor.  (Phii.  i:i3.)  The  captain  was 
probably  the  Pnetorian  Prefect,  who 
had  charge  of  those  jjersons  from  the 
provinces  wliose  cases  were  to  be  brought 
before  Ca?sar.  There  were  generally 
two  of  these ;  but  at  this  time  under 
Nero  tliere  was  but  one,  named  Burrus, 
who  was  put  to  deatli  in  March,  A.  D. 
62.  There  is  here  an  exact  coincidence, 
in  that  captain  is  in  the  singular,  and 
not  in  the  plural.  (See  Harmonic 
Arrancjement,  p.  243.)  These  words, 
however,  are  not  found  in  the  oldest 
manuscripts,  and  are  omitted  in  the 
Revised  Version,  and  by  Westcott  and 
Ilort,  and  others.  They  do  not,  how- 
ever, have  the  character  of  most  inter- 
polations, being  entirely  independent 
of  anything  either  in  the  Acts  or  in 
Paul's  Epistles  :  and  it  is  difficult  to  see 
why  they  should  have  been  added. 
But  a  reason  for  their  omission  can  be 
seen  in  the  similarity  of  words  in  the 
original,  and  thus  the  eye  of  an  early 
scribe  might  have  passed  over  and 
omitted  them.  For  such  reasons  both 
Meyer  and  Alford  retained  them.  But 
aside  from  the  question  of  the  genuine- 
ness of  this  passage,  Paul  was  doutitless 
committed  to  this  officer,  and  carried  to 
the  Prsetorian  camp.  Arriving  by  the 
Appian  Way  he  must  have  entered  the 
city  on  the  south  by  the  Capena  Gate, 
and  proceeded  across  the  city  to  the 
northeast  corner  of  the  present  wall 
"  to  the  Prffitorian  Camp,  situated  on 
the  neck  of  Viminal  Hill."  With  this 
ended  the  centurion  Julius'  care  of 
Paul. 

But  Paul  was  suffered,  by  the 
prefect,  to  dwell  alone  by  himself, 
separated  from  tlie  other  prisoners  in- 
stead of  being  confined  with  them  iu 
the  prison  near  the  Praetorian  camp, 


408 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIII. 


Paul's  interview  with  the  Jews  at  Rome.  His 
condition  during  his  captivity. 

17  AND  it  came  to  pass  that  after  three 
days  Paul  called  the  chief  of  the  Jews  to- 
gether: and  when  they  were  come  to- 
gether,  he   said   unto    them,  Men   and 


brethren,  <> though  I  have  committed 
nothing  against  the  people,  or  customs 
of  our  fathers,  yet  p  was  I  delivered 
prisoner  from  Jerusalem  into  the  hauds 
18  of  the  Komans.  Who,  iwhen  they  had 
examined  me,  would  have  let  me  go,  be- 


>  ch.  23  :  1 ;  24  :  12, 13  ;  25  :  8,  10.        P  ch.  21 :  33.        l  ch.  22  :  24 ;  2J  :  8,  25  ;  26  :  31,  32. 


The  lenity  shown  him  was  probably- 
due  in  part  to  the  commendation  and 
intiuence  of  the  centurion  Julius,  who 
owed  so  much  to  Paul's  presence  and 
advice  in  the  journey  thither.  Yet  this 
privilege  was  also  accorded  him  be- 
cause he  was  a  Eonian;  "for  it  was 
against  the  law  to  put  a  Roman  into 
prison  without  trial."  We  have  many 
instances  of  this  in  iloman  history ;  and 
"  so  Junius  Gallio,  brother  of  Seneca, 
was  kept  under  a  guard  in  the  house  of 
a  magistrate."  (Tacitus,  Annals,  YI. 
3.  Forbes'  Footsteps,  etc.,  p.  19.)  Paul 
was  not  entirely  alone,  but  was  with 
a  soldier  who  kept  him.  (se«oni2:6.) 
It  was  the  custom  to  chain  one  hand  of 
the  prisoner  to  the  soldier  while  on 
guard ;  and  it  would  seem,  from  ver. 
29,  that  this  was  the  case  with  Paul. 
But  some  think  that  he  was  merely 
accompanied  and  guarded  by  the 
soldier.  The  frequent  change  of  this 
guard  gave  Paul  the  opportunity  of  pre- 
senting the  message  of  the  gospel  to  the 
soldiers  throughout  the  camp,  and  thus 
his  captivity  resulted  in  the  furtherance 
of  the  gospel.     (Ph'i- « :  im*.) 

17-31.  Paul  at  Rome.  Two  inter- 
views with  the  Jews :  his  condition 
during  his  captivity.     (John  12 :  39, 40 ;  Eph. 

6  :  18-20;  Phllem.  8.  9.  22;  Isa.  6  :  9,  10.)  Paul  en- 
tered Rome  about  March  1,  A.  D.  61, 
and  this  last  section  of  tlie  Acts  takes 
us  two  years  to  the  spring  of  A.  D.  ti3. 

17.  From  this  point  to  the  end  of  the 
book,  no  reference  is  made  to  the 
Christians  already  at  Rome ;  I)ut  to 
Paul's  work  among  unbelievers.  He 
would  not  build  on  another  man's 
foundation.  (Rom.  15 :  20.)  From  ver.  14, 
15  we  learn  that  Christianity  had  taken 
root  both  at  Puteoli  and  Rome ;  and 
from  the  names  at  Rome  to  whom  Paul 
sent  salutations  in  Rom.  16  :  1-15,  we 
infer  that  there  were  three  congrega- 
tions of  believers,  one  at  least  among 
the  Jews  (Rom.  i6:5),  aud  perhaps  two 
among  the  Gentiles.     (Rom.  is :  u,  is.) 


After  three  days — a  sufficient  time 
for  rest  and  for  receiving  calls  from  his 
Christian  brethren,  and  learning  about 
the  Christian  congregations  at  Rome, 
and  arranging  his  lodgings  mentioned 
in  ver.  23.  Paul  called  the  chief 
of  the  Jews  together  to  him.  These 
were  probably  the  heads  of  leading 
families,  and  the  rulers  and  elders  of 
the  synagagues.  The  Jews  were  nu- 
merous at  Rome.  The  edict  by  Claudius, 
banishing  the  Jews  (18:2)  had  been 
either  tacitly  or  openly  annulled ;  and 
under  the  mild  government  of  Nero, 
during  the  first  five  years  of  his  reign, 
they  had  returned  in  large  numbers,  as 
in  the  case  of  Aquila  and  Priscilla. 
(Rom.  16:3.)  The  marriage  of  Nero  to 
Pappiea,  a  proselyte  to  Judaism,  was 
also  somewhat  favorable  to  them.  They 
dwelt  in  the  quarter  of  the  city  beyond 
the  river  Tiber,  on  its  west  side.  As 
was  his  custom,  Paul  gave  liis  first 
attention  to  the  Jews.  (Rom.  1 :  16.)  He 
thus  gave  practical  proof  of  his  deep 
anxietv  for  them,  expressed  in  Rom. 
9  :  1-3 ;  10  :  1.  This  full  account  of 
Paul's  last  recorded  appeal  to  his 
countrymen  reminds  us  of  our  Lord's 
last  words  to  the  unbelieving  Jews 
(John  11 :  36  f.)  Though  I  havc  Com- 
mitted nothing  against  the  peo- 
ple, etc.  He  had  sought  their  salva- 
tion by  oifering  the  gospel  first  to  them. 
He  did  not  regard  the  gospel  as  antag- 
onistic to  the  law.  Compare  his  answers 
before  Felix  (24 :  u :  le),  and  before 
Agrippa  (26 : 6, 7, 22,  23).  He  had  not  for- 
bidden circumcision  to  his  own  country- 
men, only  insisting  that  Gentile  converts 
should  not  be  required  to  submit  to  it 
and  to  the  Mosaic  ceremonials.  De- 
livered prisoner  .  .  .  into  the 
hands  of  the  Romans — to  Felix 
and  Festus,  as  is  evident  from  the  next 
verse.  He  states  in  brief  without  giving 
the  steps  narrated  in  ch.  21-23. 

18.  Who,  when  they  had  ex- 
amined me,  would,  rather,  wished, 


Cn.  XXVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


409 


cause  there  was  no  cause  of  death  iu  me. 

19  But  when  tlie  Jews  spake  against  it,  ■■  I 
was  constrained  to  appeal  uulo  ('a.-sar  ;  not 
that  I  had  auglit  to  accuse  my  nation  of. 

20  For  this  cause  therefore  liave  I  called  for 
you,  to  see  2/0",  and  to  speak  with  yoii : 
because  that » for  the  hope  of  Israel  1  am 
bound  with  'this  chain. 


21  And  they  said  unto  him.  We  neither 
received  letters  out  of  Juda-a  concerning 
thee,  neither  any  of  the  brethren  that 
came  showed  or  spake  any  harm  of  thee. 

22  But  we  desire  to  hear  of  thee  what  thou 
thinkest:  for  as  concerning  this  sect,  we 
know  that  every  where  "it  is  spoken 
against. 


'  ch.  25  :  10-12. 


•  ch.  2G  :  G,  7.       «  ch.  26  :  29 ;  Eph.  3:1;  Phil.  1 :  13  ;  2  Tim.  1  :  16 :  Philem. 
10  :  l:}.        "  ch.  24  :  5, 14 ;  Luke  2  :  34 ;  1  Peter  2  :  12. 


to  let  me  go,  etc.  This  expresses 
their  own  honest  convictions  and  desire. 
They  were  convinced  of  his  innocence. 
Felix  wished  to  release  him,  but 
hoped  for  money.  (2* :  26.)  Festus  had 
no  charges  to  write  (25 ;  26) ;  and  Agrip- 
pa  adjudged  him  innocent.     (26:31,32.) 

19.  I  was  constrained  to  ap- 
peal to  CiBsar.  As  his  Jewish  per- 
secutors were  determined  on  his  death, 
and  as  Festus  was  not  sulHciently  reso- 
lute to  release  and  protect  him,  he  was 
compelled  to  do  this  to  get  justice,  and 
for  his  own  safety.  Not  that  I  have 
aught  to  accuse  my  nation  of— 
before  this  tribunal.  He  was  a  patriotic 
Jew ;  his  act  in  appealing  to  Csesar 
was  purely  defensive,  and  not  one  hos- 
tile to  his  nation.  He  had  no  design 
nor  desire  to  do  anything  to  bring  any 
more  trouble  to  his  fellow  countrymen, 
whether  they  were  his  accusers  in 
Judea,  or  his  brethren  at  Rome. 

20.  For  this  cause  therefore — 
as  involved  in  the  preceding  statement : 
innocent  and  compelled  to  do  that 
which  he  would  rather  not  have  done, 
in  his  own  defence  and  without  any 
hostile  intent  toward  any  of  his  nation. 
I  have  called  for  you,  to  see  and 
speak  with  you.  This  is  to  be  pre- 
ferred to  the  rendering,  Did  I  entreat 
you  to  see  and  speak  with  me.  The 
supplying  of  me  as  the  object  of  to  see 
is  arbitrary  and  destroys  the  unity  of 
the  sentence.  So  Hackett  and  Meyer. 
Because  that  for  the  hope  of 
Israel — the  Messiah.  (See  on  26: 6, 7.)  I 
am  bound  with  this  chain,  hang- 
ing upon  his  arm,  and  perhaps  fastened 
to  the  soldier  who  guarded  him.  He 
refers  to  his  "  bonds "  in  his  epistles 
during  his  imprisonment.  (F,ph.6:20; 
Phil.  1 : 7;  Col.  4 :  18.)  Mr.  Forbcs  thiuks 
that  Paul  was  not  chained  to,  but  ac- 
companied by,  a  soldier,  and  that 
"  when  the  apostle  speaks  of  '  these  my 


chains,  these  bonds,'  it  is  simply  a 
figure  of  speech  used  to  show  that  he 
had  not  his  full  liberty."  {Footsteps, 
etc.,  p.  24.) 

31.  Their  answer  appears  to  be 
candid,  and  probably  referred  to  official 
communications  received,  and  informa- 
tion concerning  the  charges  which  the 
Jews  brought  against  him,  of  which 
Paul  declared  his  innocence.  We 
neither  received  letters,  etc.  This  is 
not  strange ;  for  the  Jews  at  Jerusalem 
were  not  expecting  his  ajjpeal  to  Ciesar, 
but  were  hoping  to  accomplisli  his 
death.  After  his  apjteal  they  had  not 
had  time.  A  statement  of  tlie  case 
must  be  jirepared  and  persons  selected 
and  sent,  and  these  would  follow,  not 
precede  Paul.  Neither  any  of  the 
brethren  that  came,  etc.  —  more 
exactly.  Nor  did  any  of  the  brethren 
coming  report  or  speak  any  evil  con- 
cerning thee.  The  reference  seems  to 
be  not  to  brethren  coming  at  any 
time,  but  to  messengers  connected  with 
this  trial  and  appeal ;  and  the  implica- 
tion in  the  original  is,  that  no  one  had 
thus  come.  Thus  far  the  Jewish  leaders 
speak  with  reference  to  what  Paul  had 
said  in  ver.  17-20. 

22.  But  having  received  no  com- 
plaint and  having  no  charge  to  make, 
ive  think  it  proper  to  hear  of  thee 
Avhat  thou  thinkest— to  hear  thy 
opinion  and  feelings  regarding  the 
Messiah,  "  the  hope  of  Israel."  (ver.  20. 
See  ver.  23.)  Under  the  circumstances, 
and  before  a  prisoner  who  was  receiv- 
ing such  kind  treatment  from  Roman 
officials,  they  could  not  well  do  other- 
wise than  profess  themselves  open  to 
conviction.  Concerning  this  sect 
— they  knew  that  Paul  was  a  Christian. 
It  is  intimated  in  ver.  20,  and  probably 
Paul  had  told  them  plainly.  We 
knoAv  that  everywhere  it  is 
spoken  against— both  among  Jews 


410 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXYIII. 


23  And  when  they  had  appointed  him  a 
day,  there  came  many  to  him  into  his 
lodging ;  '  to  whom  he  ex])ounded  and 
testified  the  Icingdom  of  God,  persuading 
them  concerning  Jesus,  J  both  out  of  the 
Law  of  Moses,  and  ovi  of  the  Prophets, 

24  from  morning  till  evening.    And  '  some 


believed  the  things  which  were  spoken, 
and  some  believed  not. 

25  And  when  they  had  agreed  not  among 
themselves,  they  departed,  after  that  Paul 
had  spoken  one  word,  »Well  spake  the 
Holy  Spirit  by  Esaias  the  prophet  unto 

26  our  fathers,  saying,  t" '  Go  unto  this  peo- 


*ch.  17  :3;Luke24  :27.      J  ch.  26:  6, 22.      «  ch.  14  :  4;  17  :  4.      »  Matt.  15  :  7 ;  2  Peter  1  :  21. 
i>  Jer.  5  :  21 ;  Ezek.  12  :  2;  Mark  4  :  12  ;  Kom.  11  :  8. 


and  Gentiles,  (le :  20, 21 ;  n :  6 ;  2* :  5.)  Taci- 
tus, the  Roman  historian  who  wrote  in 
the  days  of  the  Emperor  Nero,  speaks 
of  the  Christian  religion  as  "  a  detest- 
able superstition ; "  and  Suetonius, 
writing  in  the  same  reign,  describes 
Christians  as  "  a  race  of  men  holding  a 
novel  and  criminal  superstition." 
Christians  at  that  time  at  Rome,  as 
elsewhere,  were  spoken  against.  Their 
desire  to  hear  Paul  does  not  necessarily 
imply  that  they  were  ignorant  of 
Christians  and  their  doctrines.  It  was 
natural  that  they  should  wish  to  hear 
what  so  distinguished  a  leader  would 
say.  There  were  doubtless  reasons  for 
the  reserve  manifested  in  this  whole 
reply.  As  Paul's  case  was  to  come  be- 
fore the  highest  tribunal,  they  would 
not  prejudge  it ;  nor  would  they  now 
appear  to  put  themselves  in  hostility 
to  him,  or  to  the  Christian  community. 
The  fact  that  they  ignore  it  implies  a 
certain  contempt ;  and  their  reserve  as 
to  their  knowledge  of  Christians  may 
have  arisen  from  prudential  considera- 
tions, and  from  a  desire  to  give  Paul  the 
greatest  freedom  in  expressing  his 
views.  Besides  it  was  proper  to  hear 
before  expressing  a  positive  opinion. 
23.  The  result  of  the  first  interview 
was  the  appointment  for  a  second.  But 
a  few  days  probably  intervened  be- 
tween the  two.  At  the  second  inter- 
view many,  literally,  7nore,  that  is,  a 
greater  number,  came  to  him  unto 
his  lodging,  to  the  place  where  he 
was  entertained  as  a  guest ;  for  so  does 
the  word  lodging  here  imply.  Although 
a  prisoner,  he  was  permitted  to  be  a 
guest,  under  bonds  and  a  guard,  with 
brethren.  Perhaps  with  Aquila,  with 
whom  he  had  lived  at  Corinth ;  or 
with  some  of  his  kinsmen.  (Rom. is- s, 
10,  i:i.)  It  was  natural  that  he  should 
first  have  temporary  logingsas  a  guest ; 
and  after  a  little  make  permanent  ar- 


rangement for  his  own  hired  house. 
(vcr.  30.)  Expounded— explained  the 
matter  regarding  the  kingdom  of  God. 
Testified — bearing  witness  to  the 
kingdom  of  God  as  now  manifested  in 
the  reign  of  the  Messiah  Jesus,  under 
the  New  Dispensation.  (See  on  i:  3.) 
Persuading  them  concerning 
Jesus — that  he  was  the  Messiah  and 
that  they  should  believe  on  him.  (See 
24 :  14 ;  26  22.)  Ftom  moming— //WH 
early  morning — till  evening.  We  may 
conceive  the  great  earnestness  of  Paul 
on  the  one  hand,  and  much  interest 
and  many  inquiries  of  the  people  on 
the  other.  Paul's  discourse  must  have 
been  largely  conversational. 

24.  Tlie  result  was  the  same  as  in 
other  places.  Some  believed  . . .  and 
some  believed  not,  or  disbelieved. 

(13:43-45;  14  :  1,  2  ;  18  :  6,  8.)      From  what  fol- 

lows  it  would  seem  that  the  majority  of 
the  hearers  would  not  be  persuaded, 
but  continued  in  positive  unbelief. 

25.  They  agreed  not  among 
themselves  —  there  being  a  general 
expression  of  difierent  views,  and  dis- 
cussion. They  departed — not  ab- 
ruptly, but  were  dismissed,  in  an  orderly 
manner  (19 :  41) ;  after  that  Paul  had 
spoken  one  final  word,  closing  their 
lengthy  interview,  containing  solemn 
admonition  and  reflection,  and  pro- 
phetic of  their  doomed  condition.  Well 
spake — the  description  being  appro- 
priate and  exact.  The  Holy  Spirit 
through  Isaiah — teaching  his  inspira- 
tion, (s  Peter  1 :  21.)  Uuto  ouF — or  ac- 
cording to  several  of  the  oldest  manu- 
scripts, yoiir  fathers.  Thus  like 
fathers,  like  sons. 

2G.  The  passage  quoted  is  from  Isa. 
6  :  9,  10,  given  almost  exactly  in  the 
language  of  the  Septuagint.  It  is 
quoted  more  frequently  than  a>*y  other 
passage  in  the  New  Testament.    (Matt. 

13  :  14  ;  Mark  4:12;  Luke  8  :  10  ;    Joho  12  :  40.     Set 


Ch.  XXVIII.] 


THE  ACTS. 


411 


pie,  and  say,  Hearing  ye  shall  hear,  and 

shall    not    understand ;   and    seeing    ye 

27  shall  see,  and  not  ]ierceive:  for  the  heart 

of  this  peoj)le  is  waxed  gross,  and  their 

ears  are  dull  of  hearing,  and  their  eyes 

have  they  closed ;  lest  they  should  see 

with  ifieir  eyes,  and  hear  with  l/ieir  ears, 

^    and   understand  with  their   heart,  and 

•i,  should  be  converted,  and  I  should  heal 


28  them  '  [Isa.  vi.  9, 10]  Be  it  known  there- 
fore unto  you,  'that  ''the  salvation  of 
God  is  sent  unto  the  Gentiles,  and  thul 
they  will  hear  it. 

29  And  when  he  had  said  these  words,  the 
Jews  departed,  and  had  great  reasoning 
among  themselves. 

30  And  Paul  dwelt  two  whole  years  in  his 
own  hired  house,  and  received  all  that 


«  ch.  11 :  18  ;  14  :  27  ;  2G  :  17, 18  ;  Isa.  49  :  6 ;  Matt.  21  :  41,  43  ;  Eom.  11  :  11. 

Luke  3  :  6. 


4  Isa.  52  :  10  : 


Bom.  11 :  25.)  Hearing  ye  shall  hear, 
etc.  Ye  hear  aud  see  outwardly,  with 
your  senses,  but  do  not  apprehend  the 
truth  in   its  spiritual  import.     (See  on 

Matt.  13  :  14.) 

27.  For  the  heart  of  this  people 
is  waxed  gross,  etc. — descriptive  of 
spiritual  insensibility.  Their  eyes 
have  they  closed  —  voluntary  on 
their  part.  Lest  they  should  see, 
etc. — it  was  God's  purpose  also  on  ac- 
count of  their  wickedness  and  hardness 
of  heart.  Should  be  converted,  or 
should  turn  again  with  true  repentance, 
and  I  should  heal  them — forgive 
and  save  them.  (Mark*:  12.)  Willful 
blindness  is  a  crime,  and  judicial  blind- 
ness is  its  punishment.  (SeeoaMatt.  13: 
15.    Compare2  Cor.4:3,  4.)       "In   this   fearful 

process  there  are  three  distinguishable 
agencies  expressly  or  implicitly  de- 
scribed,— the  ministerial  agency  of  the 
Prophet,  the  judicial  agency  of  God, 
and  the  suicidal  agency  of  the  people 
themselves  The  original  passage  makes 
the  first  of  these  prominent.  (Fatten  the 
hearts  of  this  people,  dull  their  ears, 
shut  their  eyes,  etc.)  The  quotation  in 
John  12  :  40  calls  attention  to  the 
second.  (He  hath  blinded  their  eyes 
and  hardened  their  heart.)  That  in 
Matt.  13  :  15,  like  the  one  before  us, 
dwells  upon  the  third,  and  represents 
the  people  as  destroyed  by  their  own 
insensibility  and  unbeliefl^  We  have 
thus  a  striking  and  instructive  instance 
of  the  way  in  which  the  same  essential 
truth  may  be  exhibited  in  different 
parts  of  Scripture,  under  several  dis- 
tinct aspects  or  successive  phases." 
(Alexander.) 

28.  Be  it  known  therefore  — 
because  ye  are  so  hardened  and  irre- 
coverable. This  formula  introduces  a 
Bolemu  and  authoritative  declaration. 
(J:i4;  4:10;  i3;3s.)     The,  or  according 


to  the  oldest  manuscripts,  this  salva- 
tion, this  message  of  salvation  con- 
taining God's  only  method  of  saving 
men.  Is  sent,  literally,  ivas  sent  unto 
the  Gentiles — implying  that  this  was 
not  a  new  procedure.  It  had  been  an- 
nounced before  at  Antioch  in  Pisidia 
(13 :  46),  and  at  Corinth,  (is  :6.)  In  this 
instance  this  salvation  was  sent  by  God 
to  the  Gentiles,  by  the  coming  of  the 
Apostle  of  the  Gentiles  to  Rome,  the 
metropolis  of  the  world.  And  that 
they  will  hear  it— rather.  They,  also, 
will  hear,  will  heed,  accept,  and  obey. 
Compare  the  words  of  our  Lord  to  the 
chief  priests  and  Pharisees.  (Matt.  21 :43.) 
How  prophetic  Paul's  words !  How  re- 
markable that  Gospel  history  should 
close  with  the  same  quotation  as  that 
used  by  John  in  regard  to  the  closing 
of  our  Lord's  ministry  among  the  Jews. 

(John  12  :40.) 

29.  This  verse  is  not  found  in  the 
oldest  and  best  manuscripts,  and  is 
omitted  by  the  highest  critical  authori- 
ties. It  is  supposed  to  have  been  added 
by  some  copyist  as  a  fitting  conclusion. 
But  the  facts  contained  in  it  are  in- 
cluded substantially  in  ver.  25.  Yet 
even  possibly,  as  Alford  suggests,  "  It 
may,  perhaps,  after  all,  have  been 
omitted  as  appearing  suiierfluous  after 
ver.  25." 

30.  Two  Avhole  years.  That 
Paul's  trial  was  so  long  delayed  accords 
with  what  we  know  regarding  trials 
from  distant  provinces.  The  presence 
of  the  prosecutor  was  required  by 
Roman  law.  The  Jews  appear  to  have 
been  slow  in  sending  deputations  to 
Rome.  Josephus  writes  of  some  Jew- 
ish prisoners  sent  by  Felix  to  Rome, 
who  were  detained  three  years  and  then 
released  by  Josephus'  influence.  Not 
until  later  did  the  law  provide  that  the 
failure  of   the  prosecutor  for  a  year 


412 


THE  ACTS. 


[Ch.  XXVIII. 


should  be  regarded  as  au  abandonment 
of  the  case.  In  addition  to  what  is 
here  recorded  concerning  Paul,  we  may 
gather  certain  facts  from  his  four  Epis- 
tles, written  from  Rome  during  the 
time,  to  the  Ephesians,  the  Philippiaus, 
the  Colossians,  and  Philemon.  From 
those  we  learn  that  Luke  continued 
with  liim  (Col.  4 :  u),  and  doubtless  at 
this  time  wrote  this  book.  Aristarchus 
appears  also  as  fellow  laborer  and  a 

fellow      prisoner.  (Col.  4:  lO;  Philem.  24.) 

T ychicus  too  Mas  with  him  for  a  time, 
who  was  the  bearer  of  his  letter  to  the 
Ephesians  (Eph.6:2i) ;  and  Timothy  (pmi. 

1:1;   Col.  1:1;   Philem.  1)  ;      EpaphroditUS 

brought  contributions  from  the  church 
at  Philippi  (Phii  4:  is) ,  Mark  and  Jesus, 
called  Justus,  both  Jews,  were  fellow- 
workers  and  a  comfort  to  him(  coi.  < :  lo) ; 
Epaphras  had  come  to  him  from  Colosse 
(Col.  1: 7;  4:12) ;  Onesimus,  a  runaway 
slave  and  a  convert  of  Paul  at  Rome, 
became  very  useful  to  him,  but  was 
sent  back  by  him  to  his  master.  (Phiiem. 
10-16.)  Demas  was  also  with  the  apostle, 
and  a  fellow  laborer  (Coi.  t-.u.  Phiiem.  24) ; 
though  later  he  left  him  through  love 
of  the  present  world.  (2  Tim.  4 :  10.)  In 
his  own  hired  house — at  his  own 
expense.doubtless  through  the  liberality 
of  friends  at  Rome  and  in  the  ])rov- 
inces.  (Pbii.4: 1014.)  This  was  arranged 
after  the  first  days  when  he  lodged  as  a 
guest,  (ver.  23.)  Wlicrc  this  hired  liouse 
was  we  are  not  told.  It  has  been  in- 
ferred that  it  was  near  the  Pretorian 
camp,  for  the  convenience  of  the  soldiers 
who  guarded  him.  Others,  however,  be- 
lieve that  it  was  in  the  Jewish  quarter 
of  the  city.  So  Mr.  Forbes,  who  says : 
"  St.  Paul,  because  he  was  a  Roman,  was 
allowed  to  live  in  his  own  house  till  he 
was  called  upon  to  plead.  They  could 
not  put  him  in  prison  unheard  ;  and  as 
jirohably  he  could  not  find  a  surety,  a 
soldier  was  answerable  for  him.  We 
know  from  Cicero  {against  Venrs)  that 
it  was  '  a  crime  to  scourge  a  Roman,  a 
sin  to  ])uthim  in  prison,  uncondemned, 
and  fratricide  to  put  him  to  death.' 
Living  in  his  own  house  he  could  do 
pretty  much  as  he  liked.  .  .  On  the 
borders  of  the  modern  Ghetto  there  is 
a  house  which  Jewish  tradition  has 
handed  down,  as  being  the  hired  house 
of  St.  Paul  while  at  Rome.    The  house 


is  of  ancient  Roman  construction.  .  .  . 
We  know  that  St.  Paul  was  a  Jew,  and 
had  business  among  the  Jews  at  Rome, 
and  it  is  natural  to  suppose  that  he 
would  dwell  near  them.  The  Ghetto 
has  been  the  Jewish  quarter  from  the 
time  of  Pompey  to  this  day.  .  .  .  The 
Jewish  tradition  is  strengthened  by  a 
tradition  of  the  Roman  church,  which 
says  St.  Paul  had  a  school  on  the  site 
of  the  church  St.  Paoloalla  Regola, 
which  is  within  one  hundred  yards  of 
tlie  reputed  house.  Thus  we  have  two 
traditions  handed  down  by  two  antago- 
nistic faiths  meeting  close  together  near 
the  Jewish  quarter,  one  pointing  out  a 
school  and  the  other  a  house  of  the 
great  apostle."  (Footsteps  of  St.  Paul, 
p.  23,  f.) 

Received  all  that  came  in  unto 
him — he  icelcomed  them,  received 
them  with  joy,  so  great  was  liis  pleas- 
ure in  preaching  the  kingdom  of  God. 
(See  15: 4.)  So  Hackett.  That  they 
came  to  him  implies  that  he  was,  dur- 
ing all  this  time,  waiting  for  his  trial, 
as  a  prisoner,  for  nothing  is  said  of  his 
preaching  elsewhere.  And  this  agrees 
with  his  references  to  himself  in  his 
epistles,  (seeou  ver.  20.)  This  versc  also 
implies  that  at  the  end  of  two  years 
there  was  a  change  in  his  condition. 
It  has  been  commonly  held  that  Paul 
was  chained  to  one  soldier  by  day,  and 
to  two  by  night.  Mr.  Forbes  holds 
that  he  was  only  under  the  guard  of 
a  soldier,  that  he  had  to  present  him- 
self at  stated  times  to  the  authorities, 
and  that  he  could  go  around  the  city, 
accomj)anied  by  a  soldier,  but  not  be- 
yond    its     bounds.      (see  on  ver.  20.)       But 

this  verse  implies  that  he  was  in  cus- 
tody in  his  own  hired  house.  Perhaps 
not  chained  there — to  his  guard,  but 
only  when  he  went  out.  Dr.  Hackett 
refers  to  the  imprisonment  of  Agrippa  I. 
in  his  early  life,  recorded  by  Josephus 
{Antiq.  xviii,  5  f),  as  confirmatory 
and  illustrative  of  Luke's  account  of 
Paul  as  a  prisoner.  Agrippa  was  first 
committed  after  arrest,  to  the  prefect, 
and  confined  in  the  Pretorian  camp, 
under  a  guard  of  soldiers,  to  one  of 
whom  he  was  chained.  He  was  first 
treated  with  great  severity,  but  after- 
ward, under  a  guard  of  a  milder  dispo- 
sition, his  condition  was  improved,  and 


Ch.  XXVIII.]                         THE 

AC 

TS.                                                         413 

31  came  in  uuto  him,  •  preaching  the  king- 
dom of  God,  and  f teaching  those  things 
which  concern  the  Lord  Jesus   Christ, 

with  all   confidence,  no  man  forbidding 
him. 

•  ch.  8  ;  12  ;  Matt.  4 

:23 

'ch.  23:11. 

friends  Avere  permitted  to  visit  him  and 
supply  his  necessary  wants.  (See  24 :  23.) 
On  the  death  of  Tiberias  his  condition 
was  again  improved.  Caligula  ordered 
him  to  be  removed  from  the  Pretorian 
camp  to  the  house  wliere  he  had  lived 
before  lie  was  arrested.  Here  he  was 
still  guarded  as  a  prisoner,  but  his  con- 
dition was  one  of  comparative  liberty. 
It  was  doubtless  very  much  lilie  that  of 
Paul  "  in  his  own  hired  house." 

31.  Here,  as  elsewhere  in  the  Acts, 
Luke  distinguislies  between  preach- 
ing and  teaching.  Paul  announced 
the  glad  tiding  of  the  Messianic  king- 
dom (vcr. 23)  to  those  who  had  not  ac- 
cepted it,  and  especially  to  the  new 
comers,  and  explained  the  facts  and 
doctrines  concerning  Jesus  the  Messiah 
to  the  brethren  and  iucjuirers.  This  he 
did  with  all  confidence— with  all 
freedom  and  boldness.  No  man  for- 
bidding him — without  hindrance,  or 
obstruction  by  the  authorities  of  the 
Roman  government.  An  abrupt  close 
in  regard  to  Paul's  labors ;  but  a  fitting 
close  of  such  a  book.  Luke  had  traced 
the  beginnings  and  the  early  progress 
of  Christian  churches,  both  among 
Jews  and  Gentiles,  at  the  same  time 
illustrating  how  the  apostles  and  tlie 
evangelists  were  witnesses  of  Christ, 
from  Jerusalem,  the  capital  of  Juda- 
ism, to  Rome,  the  capital  of  heathenism, 
"  in  Jerusalem  and  in  all  Judea,  in 
Samaria,  and  unto  the  uttermost  part 
of  the  earth."  (i:8.)  Thus  was  com- 
pleted the  first  chapter  of  Christian 
history,  an  inspired  object  lesson  of 
missionary  labor  for  all  ages. 

That  great  success  attended  these 
missionary  labors  of  Paul  at  Rome  may 
be  inferred  from  his  epistles  (Ptii-  1  :  12- 
u,  etc.),  and  from  the  multitude  of 
Christians  who  were  put  to  death  in 
the  terrible  persecution  under  Nero, 
A.  D.  64.  Mr.  Forbes  believes  that  two 
churches  still  exist,  which  date  before 
the  close  of  the  first  century,  and  were 
established  during  Paul's  captivity. 
"  We  allude  to  the  church  of  Pudens, 
brought  to  notice  by  Mr.  J.  H.  Parker, 


of  Oxford;  and  to  the  church  and 
house  of  Clement,  discovered  by  the 
late  Rev.  Father  MuUooney,  head  of 
the  Irish  Dominicans  in  Rome." 
{Footsteps,  etc.,  p.  27.)     (2  Tim.  4:21.) 

Some  hold  that  Paul  suffered  mar- 
tyrdom under  Nero,  A.  d.  64.  But  it 
has  been  the  general  belief  in  all  ages 
that  Paul  was  tried,  acquitted  and  lib- 
erated soon  after  the  close  of  his  two 
years'  imprisonment  at  Rome,  and  that 
after  some  years  of  labor  he  was  again 
arrested,  and  brought  a  prisoner  to 
Rome,  and  there  sutfered  martyrdom. 
As  noted  above,  ver.  .30  implies  a 
change  in  tlie  a))Ostle's  condition.  If, 
at  the  end  of  the  two  years,  he  had 
been  put  to  deatli,  it  would  likely  have 
been  noted.  It  ai)pears  from  Phil.  1  : 
25 ;  2  :  23,  24 ;  Philem.  22,  that  he  ex- 
pected  to  be  released  from  confinement. 
The  Epistles  to  Titus  and  Timothy  in- 
dicate a  later  condition  of  the  churches, 
and  bring  forward  facts  which  point  to 
a  second  imprisonment  of  Paul.  The 
Epistle  of  Clement  of  Rome  (phi.  i-.  3) 
to  the  Corinthians,  written  about  A.  D. 
95,  says  of  Paul :  "  Having  gone  to 
the  utmost  bounds  of  the  West,  he  at 
last  suffered  martyrdom."  In  a  Roman 
writer,  "  the  utmost  bounds  of  the 
West"  refers  naturally  to  Spain  or 
Britain.  (See  Rom.  15 :  21.)  A  fragment- 
ary passage  in  the  Muratorian  Canon, 
aljout  A.  D.  ISO,  refers  to  "the  journey 
of  Paul  to  Spain."  Eusebius,  the 
church  historian,  speaks  of  Paul  com- 
ing to  Rome  a  second  time,  and  then 
suffered  martyrdom.  And  Jerome  (died 
A.  D. 419)  relates  "that  Paul  was  dis- 
missed by  Nero  that  he  might  preach 
tlie  gospel  in  the  West."  No  contrary 
tradition  has  come  down  to  us.  We 
therefore  conclude  tliat  Paul  was  lib- 
erated A.  D.  63  and  probably  went  to 
Spain.  Returning  from  the  far  West 
in  A.  D.  65,  he  visited  the  Greek  and 
Asiatic  chu relics.  It  was  probably  at 
Nicopolis  iu  Epirus  (thusS:  12)  that  he 
was  arrested  the  second  time,  A.  D.  66, 
and  sent  to  Rome  for  trial.  Here  he 
wrote  his  second  letter  to  Timothy,  and 


414 


THE  ACTS. 


/Ch.  XXVIII. 


was  beheaded  A.  D.  67.  See  a  fuller 
discussion  iu  Harmonic  Arrangement 
of  the  Acts,  'i  no,  pp.  260-2. 

A  tradition  relates  that  Peter  suffered 
martyrdom  by  crucifixion  at  the  same 
time  Paul  was  beheaded.  The  tradi- 
tion is  at  least  doubtful.  Peter  appears 
to  have  been  in  Babylon  of  Chaldea, 
about  A.  D.  66,  where  he  wrote  liis  first 
epistle.  As  John,  in  the  Revelation, 
refers  to  Piome  under  the  symbolic 
name  of  Babylon,  the  Babj^lon  of  Peter 
has  been  supposed,  especially  by  Ro- 
man Catholic  expositors,  to  mean 
Rome.  "  In  the  third  century  the 
story  began  to  gain  ground  that  Peter 
wrote  from  Rome  itself,  till  in  the 
fourth  it  is  mentioned  in  the  works  of 
the  Fathers,  who  do  not  agree  with 
each  other  either  as  to  the  time  of  his 
coming  or  to  the  length  of  his  stay. 
The  Roman  church  has  mixed  uj)  a  St. 
Peter  and  a  St.  Paul  who  were  put  to 
death  imder  Gallienus,  a.  d.  260,  whose 
feast  is  Oct.  3,  and  this  has  led  to  the 
idea  that  both  of  the  apostles  were  to- 
gether in  Rome  and  suffered  on  the 
same  day."  (Mr.  Forbes,  Footsteps, 
etc.) 

Practical  Remarks. 

1.  Paul  and  his  companions  were  saved, 
though  the  .ship  was  lost.  Amid  the  dark- 
ness and  revolutions  of  past  centuries  the 
churches  of  Christ  still  live.  (V'er.  1 ;  Matt. 
16  :  18.) 

2.  The  kindness  of  the  heathen  Maltese 
may  well  put  to  shame  those  wreckers  on 
nominal  Christian  shores  whose  object  has 
been  to  lure,  destroy,  and  plunder.  The 
life-saving  service  on  our  coasts  partakes  of 
the  kind  spirit  of  these  ancient  islanders. 
(Ver.  2 ;  Eph.  4  :  32.) 

3.  Amid  doing  good  lurks  many  a  tempta- 
tion, and  often  a  bite  like  that  of  a  serpent. 
(Ver.  3 ;  1  Peter  4  :  12-16.) 

4.  It  accords  with  the  dictates  of  reason 
and  conscience  that  sin  should  be  punished 
and  the  murderer  suffer  death.  (Ver.  4; 
Gen.  4  :  10,  14.) 

.5  "  Oh,  that  we  could  deal  with  sin,  that 
old  serpent,  which,  with  God's  permission, 
BO  often  fastens  even  on  believers,  as  Paul 
dealt  with  the  viper."  (vStahkk.)  (Ver.  5 ; 
1  Cor.  10  :  13  ;  1  Peter  4  :  12-16. 

6.  Every  calamity  is  not  a  judgment  for 


some  particular  sin.     (Ver.  4-6 ;   John  9  • 
1-3.) 

7.  Kindness  shown  to  God's  people  will 
not  faU  to  receive  its  reward.  (Ver.  7,  8 ; 
Matt.  10  :  41,  42.) 

8.  The  presence  of  a  religious  man  is  a  great 
blessing  to  any  community.  He  may  not, 
like  Paul,  heal  diseases,  but  he  may  do  the 
greater  work  of  leading  souls  to  Christ. 
(Ver.  8,  9  ;  James  5  :  20.) 

9.  In  Paul  we  see  a  noble,  self-possessed 
Christian  man,  who  was  calm  in  honor  and 
dishonor,  and  ever  diligent  in  doing  good. 
(Ver.  4-9  ;  2  •  or.  6  :  7-10.) 

10  God  will  protect  his  children,  and 
bring  them  all  necessary  blessings  and 
honor.    (Ver.  5,  10 ;  Ps.  91  :  10,  11, 14-16.) 

11.  It  was  not  Castor  and  Pollox,  but  the 
Lord  Christ  who  presided  over  Paul  and  the 
ship.     (Ver.  11 ;  23  :  11  ;  27  :  23,  24.) 

12.  The  wind  and  waves  are  in  the  hands 
of  the  Lord  in  behalf  of  his  children.  (Ver. 
12, 13  ;  Ps.  104  :  3  ;  107  :  23-32.) 

13.  Christian  fellowship  acts  like  a  restor- 
ing medicine  on  both  body  and  soul.  (Ver. 
14  ;  1  John  1  :  3,  4  ;  Ps.  133.) 

14.  The  presence  and  sympathy  of  Chris- 
tian brethren  should  excite  gratitude  to 
God,  and  courage  in  his  work.  (Ver.  15 ;  3 
John  8 ;  1  Kings  19  :  18  ) 

15.  The  Lord  is  able  to  make  the  chains 
of  his  persecuted  followers  advance  his 
cause  and  redound  to  his  glory.  (Ver.  16; 
Prov.  16  : 7.) 

16.  Paul,  in  preaching  first  to  his  country- 
men who  so  persistently  opposed  him,  gave 
us  an  example  of  overcoming  evil  with  good. 
(Ver.  17-19  ;  Rom.  12  :  20,  21.) 

17.  We  should  use  holy  tact  in  striving  to 
possess  centres  of  influence  for  Christ.  (Ver. 
17-19;  17  :4,12.) 

18.  The  gospel  comes,  not  to  condemn,  but 
to  save.    (Ver.  18, 19  ;  John  3  :  17.) 

19.  How  often  have  chains  and  the  Hope 
of  Israel  been  brought  into  close  relations. 
(Ver.  20 :  16  :  24,  25.) 

20.  In  the  great  success  of  Christianity, 
which  was  so  unpopular  in  its  first  stages 
we  see  evidences  of  its  divine  origin  and 
guidance.     (Ver.  21,  22  ;  Luke  2  :  34.) 

21.  The  preacher  should  faithfully  do  his 
duty, whether  men  will  hear  or  forbear.  (Ver. 
23 ;  Ezek.  33  :  7-9. 

22.  We  are  to  sow  the  gospel  seed  though 
it  fall  on  all  kinds  of  ground,  and  some  be- 


Oh.  XX  Vm.] 


THE  ACTS. 


415 


lieve  and   some  are   hardened.      (Ver.  24 ; 
Matt.  13  :  3-9  ;  1  Cor.  2  :  16.) 

23.  Such  is  the  evil  existing  in  the 
human  heart  that  the  (gospel  of  peace 
makes  divisions  among  men.  (Ver..24;  Matt. 
10  :  34  f.) 

24.  Sinners  are  not  lost  without  a  final 
warning     (Ver.  25, 26 ;  Prov.  1  :  21-33.) 

2.5.  The  Holy  Spirit  is  divine,  who  spake 
through  prophets,  and  who  now  is  the 
Guide  and  Comforter  of  believers.  (Ver.  26 ; 
1:16;  2:33.) 

26.  Sinners  are  guilty  of  willful  unbelief. 
(Ver.  26, 27  ;  John  5  :  40 ;  7  :  17.) 

27.  Paul  was  a  missionary,  and  he  recog- 
nized the  gospel  as  sent  unto  the  nations. 
(Ver.  28 ;  Matt.  28 :  19, 20.) 

28.  In  whatever  station  we  are,  we  should 


remember  our  duties  to  Christ  and  our  fel- 
low men.    (Ver.  30 ;  1  Cor.  7 :  20-24.) 

29.  If  the  Lord  opens  a  door  for  his  word, 
let  us  enter  with  all  boldness.  (Ver.  31 ; 
Col.  4 :.■?.) 

30.  The  record  of  one's  life  is  more  im- 
portant than  the  time  and  manner  of  one's 
death.  Luke  records  not  the  death  of  either 
Paul  or  Peter.    (Ver.  31.) 

31.  The  book  of  the  Acts  is  an  inspired 
manual  for  both  churches  and  individual  be- 
lievers. It  presents  the  Holy  Spirit  working 
through  believers  in  revivals,  in  missions, 
and  in  charities.  It  records  the  origin  and 
organization  of  churches  ;  their  officers,  and 
their  government ;  their  relations  to  the 
State  and  to  one  another,  and  the  principles 
which  should  control  their  extension. 


ROME. 


Rome  is  situated  on  the  river  Tiber,  seventeen  miles  from  the  sea.  Ancient  Rome  stood 
mostly  on  the  eastern  bank,  and  in  a.  d.  61  it  contained  a  population  of  over  two  millions. 
About  one-half  of  these  were  free  citizens,  the  rest  were  slaves  and  foreigners.  Of  the  free 
citizens  the  senators  were  few;  the  knights,  who  filled  most  of  the  offices,  numbered  per- 
haps ten  thousand,  and  the  troops  may  be  reckoned  at  fifteen  thousand.  Most  of  the  free 
citizens  were  poor,  indolent,  and  many  of  them  paupers,  priding  themselves  on  their  citi- 
zenship and  caring  for  little  beyond  their  daily  bread  and  the  games  at  the  circus.  The 
Jewish  residents  are  believed  to  have  numbered  about  sixty  thousand.  Every  nationality 
and  religion  were  found  there.  Most  of  the  activities  of  life  were  in  the  hands  of  foreigners 
and  slaves,  some  of  the  latter  being  physicians,  some  teachers,  and  others  in  other  profes- 
sions. The  successful  tradesmen  and  the  skilled  artisans  were  mostly  Greek.  It  was  in 
this  large  lower  and  middle  class  among  whom  Paul  had  his  jirincipal  success.  Christians 
at  Rome  for  two  centuries  were  largely  Greek. 

Nero,  in  a.  d.  61,  was  in  the  seventh  year  of  his  reign,  and  twenty-three  years  of  age. 
His  true  character  began  to  show  itself  in  the  murder  of  his  mother  and  other  deeds  of 
violence  and  shame.  Burrus,  the  honest  soldier,  and  Seneca,  the  calm  and  moderate 
philosopher,  were  still  at  the  head  of  atTairs,  but  their  power  was  waning.  Burrus  died 
in  A.  D.  62,  and  not  long  after  Seneca  fell  into  disgrace,  and  at  the  command  of  Nero,  a.  t>. 
65,  committed  suicide.  Burrus  was  succeeded  by  Rufus,  a  man  of  feeble  and  benevolent 
disposition,  and  Tgellinus,  one  of  the  worst  characters  of  his  age.  In  .July,  64,  occurred 
the  great  conflagration  at  Rome,  suspected  to  have  been  the  work  of  Nero  himself,  but 
which  he  charged  upon  the  Christians,  against  whom  he  instigated  a  terrible  persecution. 
What  a  contrast  between  Paul  the  prisoner,  ever  devoted  to  the  good  of  others,  with  a  con- 
science void  of  offense,  and  his  judge,  Nero,  selfish,  vain,  indolent,  vile,  steeped  in  degra- 
dation and  crime  1 


REFERENCES  TO  THE  NOTES. 


Agrippal 188,  I97f 

Agrippa  II  [and  Bernice] 369f 

Alexandrian  grain  ships 384,  404 

"  Almost  persuaded" 380f 

Ananias,  his  severe  punishment 70f 

Angels,  doctrine  of. 112,193 

Antioch  in  Syria 181 

Antioch  in  Pisidia 208 

Apollos,  at  first  outside  the  church 298f 

Appeal  to  Ciesar 3G9,  3S2 

Aquila  mentioned  after  Priscilla 288 

Ascension,  scene  of. 21 

Areopagus,  Paul's  speech  there 279 

Asia,  what  meant  by 31,  301 

Asiarchs 311 

Athens  revisited  by  Paul 291 

Baptism  of  the  Holy  .'Spirit 19,  27 

Baptismofthe  three  thousand, 40 

Baptism  of  Ijydia  and  her  household 258 

Baptism  in  prisons 265 

Baptism  of  about  twelve  at  Ephesus 302 

Baptismal  formula 125,  302 

Barnabas,  disagreement  with  Paul 246 

Blood,  the  eating  of 240 

Body  with  which  Jesus  rose 20 

Call  to  the  ministry 252 

Canal  through  the  Pontine  marshes 406 

Chief  priests 56,64 

Christians,  how  the  name  began 184 

Christ  the  source  of  all  truth 170 

Church,  use  of  the  word 72 

Churches,  relation  to  one  another 247 

Community  of  goods 42 

Confirmation,  is  the  rite  Scriptural 126 

Corinth,  to  Coriuthianize 2.s7 

Cornelius,  experience  of 159f 

Beacons,  or  alms-distributors 87 

Demons,  in  the  Gospels  and  in  the  Acts..  121 

Diana  or  Artemis 309 

Ephesian  letters  and  exorcists 305 

Epicureans 277 

Epistles  of  Paul 293,308,316,412 

Euroclydou 389 

Fair  Havens 387 

Felix  and  Drusilla 354,303 

Fellowship,  what? 41 

Galatia,  its  inhabitants 2.53 

Gallio,  proconsul 291-3 

God's  sovereignty  and  man's  free  agency,  218 

Grecians  or  Hellenists 86 

Gospel,  its  universal  design lll,'170f 

Greek  believers  at  Antioch 181 

Hebron  or  Sychem  by  Stephen 100 

Holy  Spirit  prominent  in  the  Acts 19,  28 

Humiliation  of  Christ 131f 


PAGE 

Invocation  of  punishment 349 

James,  pastor  at  Jerusalem 194,  238 

Jews,  di.spersion  of. 29 

John's  Baptism  298,  301f 

Josephus,  wrecked  in  the  Adriatic 391 

Judas  Iscariot,  death  of 2L'f 

Macedonia  for  missionary  work 2.5Jf  , 

Malta 4U0 

Matthias,  an  apostle 25 

Messiah,  Jewish  conceptions  of. 52 

Nazarite,  vow  of 294 

Ordination 88 

Pharisees 80 

Paul's  knowledge  of  his  Gentile  work 346 

Paul  a  member  of  the  Sanhedrin 376 

Paul's  conversion 136 

Kecognized  as  a  foreign  missionary 202 

His  name  changed 205 

Paul's  first  missionary  tour 200,  230 

Paul's  contention  with  Barnabas  246 

Paul's  second  mission 24<)f 

Paul  scourged  at  Philippi 262-5 

Paul's  third  mission 296 

Paul  conciliating  Jewish  believers 337 

Paul  oflering  sacrifices 337 

Paul's  speeches  and  epistles 215,  325f 

Paul's  familiarity  with  (ireek 282 

Peter's  speeches  and  epistles 40,  55,  63 

Was  he  ever  at  Rome 195,  414 

Philippi,  its  port ;  a  colony 256f 

Philippians,  epistle  to 365f,  412 

Phenice  in  Crete 388 

Preaching  and  teaching 83,413 

Provinces,  imperial  and  senatorial 204 

Refreshing,  times  of 52 

Repentance,  how  a  divine  gift 79 

Restitution  of  all  things 53 

Romans,  Epistle  to 316 

Rome,  city  of 415 

Sadducees 57 

Ships,  ancient 383 

Shipwreck,  sceneof  Paul's 397,  400 

Speech  of  disciples  at  Pentecost 28 

Stephen's  speech 94 

Synagogue  and  the  gosjiel 203 

Temple  frequented  by  believers    42 

The  three  taverns 406f 

Unity  of  the  race 281f 

Unknown  God,  altar  to 280 

Visions,  dreams,  trance 144, 163 

Vow  of  Paul  or  Aquila 294 

Women,  aroused  against  Paul 218 

Women  in  Macedonian  churches 274 

Worms,  eaten  of. 197f 

Zealots 21 


See  Topics  discussed  in  Introduction,  and  the  List  of  Topics  on  page  16. 
416 


Date  Due 

F  ?'^'38 

^f,r  oy.  Mn 

ilp  25  'ifll 

^"^^^'^ii. 

—      '      "'^ 

■iitTfiiiiwiiiim, 

» 

^"••"W"*"*^ 

.^tfBMWi 

> 

m 

ll«2  0^99|» 

* 

• 

